73
leg æn!
ses
s
+:
sem
»&
gå
ER
t;
i.
4
VA
HERE S Pe
$37 s
Mare 1
dg i uf
BTN AN 1033915
Midtre WH Al
tt Mtal
eN fg
| LÆST)
my
md eler g
FEE
Aok
I if
VS
LH
53
Å
; i
LAA LN
ADR ANER
MY! Hal gt
155434:
i
i?
flg
UNGER
SNE Hal: 3
Ginger
ér d
i
år) ag
Flade:
Fe rare NER
y
JN
fg RER
in 2009 with und Bom:
LAN
”.
University of Toronto
http:/ Ywww.archive. org/details/videnskabeligeme72d
S
SØ
Videnskabelige Meddelelser
fra
Dansk naturhistorisk Forening i København
111
Bind 72.
Udgivne af Selskabets Bestyrelse.
Med 7 Tavler samt 32 Figurer og 1 Kort i Teksten.
Ottende Aartis anden Aargang.
Odense
Andelsbogtrykkeriet i Odense
1921.
Redaktionen af dette Bind er besørget af Professor, Dr. Ad. S j
=
f 5 SAT Yz Qi
É
Wir” 61392
SY SER
FAR EN FE
Indhold.
FISKES Side
Oversigt over de videnskabelige Møder i Dansk naturhistorisk Forening
fra ADEL OZO EIN SFS IEOM arts DT 33 SER ERR oe are estere V
De i Aaret 1920 af Foreningen foretagne Ekskursioner.............…. VII
leselelelserom den;Scehibbyesker brændere ss SE hela SEERE XI
Gaver fil-Dansk- Nafurhisforiskr Forening 33 se ESTER ns ES Mee her XI
Dansk Naturhistorisk Forenings Medlemmer og dens Bestyrelse....... XIX
- Aug. Brinckmann : Canidenstudien. (Hertil Tavle I—III og 6 Figurer i
RER SFEM)ER 25. > SERENE] HET SR SEEST AD Sa RSS SER ar ED: E
Th. Mortensen: Notes on some Scandinavian Echinoderms, with descrip-
tions of two new Ophiurids. (Med 6 Figurer i Teksten)........... 45
Prosper Bovien: Remarks on Molgula litkeniana Traustedt. (Med 3 Fi-
SHrer. i Teksten) SE SS NS Fa SE ELAN FRØS Ca TERRE ST SR 81
Hj. Broch: The development of the calcareous skeleton in Mitella (Pol-
helnes) andsthegoremeor the Cirripeds| SALE SEEREN SER 83
Ad. S. Jensen: Smaa Bidrag til dansk Faunistik. (Med 2 Figurer i Teksten) 87
Eric uMSPoulsen' Findes Muldvarpen paa Møen SS SSBs eelere 97
J. P. Kryger : Lucilia sylvarum Meig. som Snylter paa Bufo vulgaris. (Med
RE euirsksNe KS ten) Free 53 5 SE ARNESEN EN RE horn SEES BET re 99
Hj. Ussing: Om Slægten Dictyopteryx Pict. paa Gudenaa. (Med 3 Figu-
KERENELE KS tEN) ESSEN SERENE KEE SEERE EN an ET RER ERE TERN: 115
Ingvald Lieberkind: On a star-fish (Asterias groenlandica), which hatches
iistyoung nfits"stomach= (Med"4- Figurer i-Teksten). SLS RS Doe s 121
P. Esben-Petersen: Description of a new genus and species of Myrme-
feonidaesfrom Japans (Med 1 Figur Teksten) IS SSR ERA 127
Will. Lundbeck: New species of Phoridae from Denmark together with
remarks on Aphiochaeta groenlandica Lundbk. (Med 1 Figur i Teksten) 129
C. O. Jensen : Om Glandula thyreoidea”s Forhold ved Metamorfoseuregel-
mæssigheder hos Padderne. (Hertil Tavle IV—VII og 4 Figurer i
Heksen SEERE ane EAN De TØRRE 2 ONES se SS SER 145
C. O. Jensen: Partiel Metamorfose hos Amblystoma mexicanum. (Med 1
Bretmsrekeksten ns se De jaa are fade ENS RRS ae ENE RAE RETS SVN STER 175
R. Hørring : Fuglene ved de danske Fyr i 1919. 37te Aarsberetning om
tasker Ene ISS EET EN HERSKERE ER ROS ere Seer 181
R. Spårck og I. Lieberkind: Om Udbredelsen og Individantallet af Bund-
dyrene Løgstør Bredning" (MedS HK Kortti Teksten) ISS ESS 221
P. Freuchen: Om hvalrossens forekomst og vandringer ved Grønlands
VESERDS EEN E sky RE BEES RRRERRR RS SE SES Re re al derere eee e Nee je rRaE eler 237
Den 16.
Den 28.
Den 29.
Denr2.:
Oversigt
over
de videnskabelige Møder
i
Dansk naturhistorisk Forening
fra 1. April 1920 til 31. Marts 1921.
April 1920. Prof. C. 0. Jensen holdt et af Lysbilleder ledsaget
Foredrag om Glandula thyreoidea's Forhold ved Metamorfoseuregel-
mæssigheder hos Padderne. (Se dette Bind, S. 145).
Dr. phil. A. C. Johansen gav en Meddelelse om Fiskebestanden
i Nordsøen før og efter Krigen.
April 1920. Stud. mag. E. Deichmann fremsatte nogle Bemærk-
ninger om ÅActinopyga parvula og dens Synonymer.
Diskussion: Mag. Spårck, Dr. Th. Mortensen.
Stud. mag. I. Lieberkind gav en Meddelelse om en Søstjerne,
der udvikler sine Unger i Maven. (Se dette Bind, S. 121).
Diskussion: Dr. Th. Mortensen, Mag. Spårck, Prof. Ad. Jensen.
Dr. Th. Mortensen foreviste nogle subfossile Echinodermer fra
hævede Lag ved Trondhjemsfjorden.
Diskussion: Prof. Ad. Jensen.
Prof. Ad. Jensen meddelte et Tilfælde. af Hypoderma som ,,Larva
migrans".
Diskussion: Mag. Spårck.
Oktober 1920. Mag. scient. R. Spårck gav en Meddelelse om
nogle Forandringer i Limfjordens Fauna.
Diskussion: Prof. Ad. Jensen, Prof. Kolderup Rosenvinge, Dr.
Th. Mortensen, Cand. mag. Blegvad.
Cand. mag. K. Stephensen talte om de zoologiske Museer i Dan-
mark. I. Perioden det 17. og 18. Aarhundrede.
Diskussion: Ingeniør Clément.
November 1920. Mag. scient. K. Henriksen meddelte det første
danske Fund af Protura.
Diskussion: Mag. Lakjer.
Cand. mag. K. Stephensen fortsatte sit Foredrag om de zoolo-
giske Museer i Danmark. II. Perioden 1790—1870. (Begge Fore-
drag trykt i ,,Naturens Verden”, Januar, Februar og Marts 1921).
Diskussion: Inspector Lundbeck, Mag. Spårck.
Den 26.
DienEk0!
VI
November 1921. Stud. mag. Erik M. Poulsen gav følgende Med-
delelse: Findes Muldvarpen paa Møen? (Se dette Bind, S. 97).
Diskussion: Seminarielærer Hauch.
Mag. scient. R. Spårck gav følgende Meddelelse: Den repræsen-
tative Værdi af de af Biologisk Station tagne Bundprøver, belyst
ved 1500 Bundprøver fra Livø Bredning.
Stud. mag. I. Lieberkind og Mag. scient. R. Spårck gav en Med-
delelse om Bunddyrenes Mængde og Udbredelse i Livø Bredning.
(Se dette Bind, S. 221).
Diskussion: Dr. Th. Mortensen, Mag. Lakjer, Prof. Ostenfeld.
December 1920. Forevisnings- og Referataften. Prof.
C. 0. Jensen foreviste levende Xenopus og Ålytes samt en til Hol-
stens Kyst indvandret Aktinie (Sagartia Luciæ).
Diskussion: Dr. Th. Mortensen, Cand. mag. Blegvad, Stud. mag.
Buchwald, Prof. Ad. Jensen.
Dr. med. Vilh. Jensen refererede nogle pathogene Ikters Udvik-
lingshistorie.
Mag. scient. Tage Lakjer refererede Steinachs Undersøgelser over
Homoseksualisme og Foryngelse.
Diskussion: Lektor M. Thomsen.
Den 14. Januar 1921. Direktør, Dr. C. G. Joh. Petersen meddelte Planer
om yderligere at forbedre Limfjordens Østersbestand.
Diskussion: Mag. Spårck, Kommandør Drechsel, Prof. Ad. Jensn.
Mag. scient. R. Spårck gav en Meddelelse om Forandringen af
Limfjordens Fauna efter Gennembruddet, paa Grundlag af Dr. Hen-
rik Becks Papirer.
Diskussion: Dr. C. G. Joh. Petersen, Mag. Kramp, Mag. C. V.
Otterstrøm, Prof. Ad. Jensen.
Den 28. Januar 1921. Mag. scient. K. Henriksen foreviste danske Coc-
Den En
cider. (Se Entomologiske Meddelelser Bd. 13, Hefte 7, 1921.)
Diskussion: Dr. Th. Mortensen.
Mag. scient. P. Jespersen talte om temporale Variationer hos nogle
marine Copepoder. (Se Medd. fra Kommiss. f. Havundersøgelser,
Serie: Plankton. Bind II. Nr. 1. 1920).
Diskussion: Mag. Koefoed, Cand. mag. K. Stephensen, Prof.
Ostenfeld, Mag. Spårck, Prof. Ad. Jensen.
Februar 1921. Dr. Th. Mortensen foreviste nogle mærkelige
Holothurier.
Dr. phil. A. C. Johansen refererede T. Regans Afhandling: ,,The
geographical distribution of Salmon and Troutf og meddelte der-
efter nogle Bemærkninger om Gællegitterstavene hos Laks og Ør-
red samt nogle biologiske og faunistiske Oplysninger om Hydrobia
Jenkinsi.
Diskussion: Forstander A. Otterstrøm, Mag. sc. C. V. Otterstrøm,
Prof. Ad. Jensen.
VII
Mag. scient. P. Kramp gav en Meddelelse om en ny Hydroide,
epizoisk paa en Vingesnegl. (Vil blive trykt i Bind 74 af dette Tids-
skrift).
Den 25. Februar 1921. Dyrlæge H. 0. Schmit-Jensen meddelte Bidrag
til Tænia crassicolli?' og dens Cysticercs Biologi. (Se Den Kgl.
Veterinær- og Landbohøjskole, Aarsskrift 1921).
Mag. scient. Å. V. Tåning meddelte Bidrag til Sugefiskenes Ud-
vikling og Biologi.
Diskussion: Prof. Ad. Jensen, Lektor M. Thomsen.
Beretning om de i Aaret 1920 af Dansk naturhistorisk Forening
foretagne Ekskursioner,
Den 30. April1920. Ekskursion til Østskov ogSelsø vedRos-
kilde Fjord under Ledelse af Vekselerer E. Lehn-Schisler.
Ved Havnen i Roskilde samledes 27 Deltagere, der i to Motorbaade
sejlede til Østskov; et planlagt Besøg paa Eskildø maatte opgives paa Grund
af Vejret, der var stormende med Byger. I Østskov besaas en Hejrekoloni;
den bestaar i Øjeblikket af ca. 30 beboede Reder; efter Lyden at dømme var
der Unger i de fleste Reder. I Skoven hørtes og saas desuden Taarnfalk,
Munk, Løvsanger, Rødkjelk, Gulspurv, Stillids; ogsaa Blaamejser, Musvit,
Bogfinke, Stær og Krage saas, sidstnævnte i stort Tal. Ved Kysten var Hætte-
tærne og Strandskade at se, og overalt svævede Hættemaager. Paa Vejen fra
Østskov til Selsø saas Lærke, Engpiber, Kornlærke, Vibe, Allike og i en lille
Mose rødhalset Lappedykker, Blishøne og Graaand (43 &).
For Iagttagelse af Fuglelivet i Selsø Sø var Vejret særdeles uheldigt, men
det lykkedes dog i det urolige Vand at opdage — foruden Hættemaager, der
i særdeles stort Tal var tilstede —- Krikand, Atling, Skeand, Graaand, Trold-
and, Taffeland, rødhalset og øret Lappedykker, mange Blishøns, en enkelt Rød-
ben og nogle faa Forstue- og Digesvaler, Derimod lod Graagaasen, af hvilken
nogle Par yngler i Søen, sig ikke se. Ved Selsø Anløbsbro saas hvid Vip-
stjert paa et Hustag og over en lille Gruppe Fyrretræer svævede Taarnfalk.
ERESS!
Den 30. Maj 1920. Entomologisk Ekskursion til den sydlige
Del af Gribskov. Ledere: I. P. Kryger og K. Henriksen. Del-
tagernes Antal var 13.
Afrejsen skete fra København med Toget 8!" til Hillerød. Herfra spad-
serede man gennem den sydlige Del af Gribskov op til Fønstrupdammene
og derfra igen tilbage til Hillerød, hvorfra man med Toget 5”" vendte tilbage
til København.
Af Insekter saas følgende: Cicindela campestris, Carabus glabratus,
Carabus-Larver, Gyrinus sp., Hyphydrus ovatus, Silpha atrata, S. obscura,
VIII
S. thoracica, Cardiophorus ruficollis, Elater crocatus, Athous niger, Ectinus
aterrimus, Smelder-Larver, Clerus formicarius, Hister fimetarius, Ips 4-pu-
stulatus, Cetonia aenea-Larver i Myretuer, Cionus scrophulariæ, Hylobius
abietis, Tetropium luridum, Toxotus cursor, Molorchus minor, Rhagium mor-
dax, Clythra, Cassida, Phyllobrotica, Eumolpus, Donacia spp., samt diverse
Coccinellider, Staphylinider og Tomicider. — Dolerus, Strøngylogaster, Pom-
pilus fuscus, Formica rufa, F. pratensis, F. fusca, Lasius niger, L. flavus,
Myrmica rubra, Leptothorax acervorum, Trichogramma evanescens. Neuro-
lerus baccarum-Galler. — Leptis scolopacea. Simulium-Larver og Pupper.
Tipula spp. — Dolycorys baccarum. Nepa cinerea. — Aurora, Gonepteryx
rhamni. Nemophora. Cataclysta lemnata. Hadena. — Sialis lutaria med
Ægmasser. — Chrysopa. Panorpa. Rhyacophila-Larver. Sericostoma- Larver.
— Nemura og Leuctra samt deres Larver. Baetis tenax læggende Æg under
Vand. — Brachytron pratense. Libellula 4-maculata. Pyrrhosoma nymphula.
Orthetrum. Agrion hastulatum. A. pulchellum. — Drassus lapidicola. Pros-
tesima petrensis. Trochosa ruricola. Dolomedes fimbriatus. Ocyale mirabilis.
Xysticus bifasciatus. Epeira alpica. E. cucurbitina.
Endelig maa Fundet af 2 Eksemplarer af Ammocoetes i Fønstrup-Afløbet
noteres sammen med Synet af en stor Flok (37 Eks.) Musvaager over Slots-
pavillonen. K.H:
Dens: =30 [ul 1920 EkskursiontilEimtjondenseeederes
Prof. 0. B. Bøggild og mag. scient. R. Spårck. Deltagernes Antal: 16.
Deltagerne samledes d. 28de om Formiddagen paa Bendix Hotel i Ny-
købing, Mors; efter Frokosten spadseredes til Ørodde, hvor Østerskom-
pagniets Anlæg besaas. Vandet omkring Ørodde var netop den Dag helt
»tomatsuppefarvet" af Noctiluca miliaris. Derefter forevistes i Akvarier de
for Zostera-Omraadet i Limfjorden karakteristiske Dyr (Rissoa membranacea,
inconspicua og violacea, Trochus cinerarius 0. s. v.); særlig maa dog frem-
hæves den her i Landet kun ved Nykøbing fundne krybende Vandmand Cla-
donema radiatum. Kl. 3 sejlede Deltagerne med Motorbaad til Fur; paa
Vejen toges med Bundhenter 4 Bundprøver fra Kanten af Zosteraen ud til
den bløde Bund for at vise Faunaens Forandring; i den inderste Prøve fand-
tes Acmæa testudinalis og Trochus cinerarius, i næste Prøve var Åricia
armiger og Echinocyamus pusillus hyppige, og endelig i de to yderste Prøver
fandtes de for Abra-Samfundet karakteristiske Dyr, navnlig Corbula gibba
(ca. 70 Individer pr. Prøve) samt endvidere Cultellus pellucidus, Abra alba,
Nephthys coeca, Diastylis Rathkei, Philine aperta, Ophiura texturata (in-
ficeret med Coccomyxa) 0. s. v. Senere toges en Prøve paa en Grund i Fur-
sund, hvor der bl. a. fandtes levende Tapes pullastra. Gik derpaa i Land paa
Fur og spadserede over Øen til Rødsten og Stolle-Klint. Paa Nordkysten
fandtes opskyllet paa Stranden et Eksemplar af Codium mucronatum. Vendte
derefter tilbage til Nykøbing, hvortil man ankom Kl. 9 Aften.
Den næste Morgen sejledes til Livø Bredning, hvor der skrabedes under
Nordkysten af Fur; Faunaen var her den sædvanlige Østers- og Mytilus-
Paafauna med Saxicara rugosa, Asterias rubens, Metridium dianthus; des-
IX
uden fandtes Codium. Senere skrabedes udfor Hesselbjærghøj paa Livø,
. dels længere ude paa Modiola-Paafauna, dels inde i Zosteraen, hvor der bl. a.
fandtes Caprella, Membranipora og Aarsyngel af Mytilus. Efter at have
skrabet N. f. Langegrund paa Mytilus-Paafauna med mange Ascidier (Ciona in-
testinalis, Clavellina lepadiformis, Styela rustica, Molgula sp.) Landgang i
j Feggesund S.; derefter sejledes til Gullerup i Thisted Bredning; paa Vejen
skrabedes Østers ved Skærbæk. Fra Gullerup spadserede Deltagerne til Han-
klit. Fra Gullerup sejlede man til Thisted efter at have skrabet midt ude i
Bredningen; der har her i de senere Aar udviklet sig en saa stærk Paafauna
af Mytilus, at Østersfiskeri her har maattet opgives. Ankomst til Thisted
K187:
Den 30te om Morgenen sejledes til Silstrup, hvor der skrabedes under
Molerklinterne; der fandtes her et stort Antal Henricia sanguinolenta, des-
uden den sædv. Østerspaafauna, samt talrige Stenorhynchus rostratus og
Sten borede af Pholas. Derfra videre Vest om Mors til Rovvig, i hvis Mun-
ding der skrabedes paa et typisk Dødtangsomraade. Derefter skrabedes Østers
ved Revelkjær Hage; her fik man endvidere et Eksemplar af Homarus vul-
garis (stor S% med Rogn). Efter at have anløbet Næssund sejledes til Skib-
sted Fjord, hvor der skrabedes i Mundingen (dybere Zostera-Omraade), hvor
man fik Trochus cinerarius, Lacuna divaricata, Doris sp, Botryllus sp.,
Cyclopterus-Unger 0. s. v. Videre Syd om Mors gennem Kaas Bredning og
Oddesund til Nissum Bredning, hvor der først skrabedes under Toftum Bak-
ker; her fandtes foruden de sædvanlige Former tillige Ophiura albida og Al-
cyonium digitatum. Efter at have skrabet paa den bløde Bund (kun Cor-
bula gibba og Ophiurer) skrabedes paa Grundkanten ved Nørre Nissum;
her fik man bl. a. Hydractinia echinata, Vioa (levende) og uhyre Masser af
Ascidiella aspersa. Endelig skrabedes paa Indersiden af Lemvig Røn, hvor
der fandtes støre Mængder af Echinocardium cordatum. Ankom Kl. 5-2 til
Lemvig, hvor Ekskursionen sluttede. Nogle af Deltagerne tog den næste
Dag med Baaden tilbage til Nykøbing. Paa Vejen skrabedes paa Modiola-Paa-
faunaen ved Mullerne R. S.
Den 29. August 1920. Ekskursion til.Øresund. Leder:… Mag.
scient. P. L. Kramp. 19 Deltagere.
Kl. 10/2 Fm. forlod Deltagerne Helsingør Havn i en af Færgevæsenets
store Motorbaade; det var straalende Solskinsvejr med frisk Nordenvind.
Der skrabedes først paa ,,Diskenf, en Sandgrund Syd for Helsingør; her
fandtes Cardium edule, Mya arenaria, Tellina baltica og Nephthys coeca.
Øst for Grunden, endnu paa Sandbund, fandtes Corymorpha nutans, der
ikke tidligere var fundet i Øresund. Paa dybt Vand mellem Helsingborg og
Hven skrabedes paa blød Lerbund, tildels med store Modiola; der fandtes
følgende Dyr: mange store Cyprina islandica (med Malacobdella grossa) og
Modiola modiolus ; Leda pernula og minuta, Cardium echinatum, Turritella
terebra, Chenopus pes pelecani, Buccinum undatum, Philine, Dentalium,
Chiton; en stor Mængde Orme: Eumenia crassa, Maldanider, Terebellides
stroemi, Amphitrite sp., Glycera sp., Sabella pavonia, Pectinaria sp., Åphro-
X
dite aculeata, Harmothoé sp. m. fl. Af Echinodermer fandtes: Echinocar-
dium cordatum, Amphiura filiformis, Ophiura albida, Ophiopholis aculeata,
Psolus phantapus, Phyllophorus pellucidus; endvidere Pycnogonum, Rør af
Haploops, Virgularia mirabilis og Aktinierne Chondractinia digitata og
Stomphia coccinea. Øst for Hven fandtes Psammechinus miliaris, Ophiura
texturata, Asterias rubens, Astarte banksii samt en Del Dyr, der ogsaa var
set i de foregaaende Træk.
En Skrabning paa lerblandet Sandbund Syd for Hven viste en Fauna
af en ganske anden Karakter, bestaaende af Mytilus edulis, Littorina litto-
rea, Nassa reticulata, Tectura testudinalis og Tellina baltica.
Nogle paatænkte Skrabninger i Laminaria- og Zosteraomraader maatte
opgives, da Nordenvinden nu var blevet til Storm. Baaden huggede sig gen-
nem en oprørt Sø tilbage til Helsingør, hvor Ekskursionen sluttede med en
velkommen Kop Kaffe paa Jernbanehotellet. PK
D'en"26. September 1920: EkskursionttilkGribeskovæhonveds
sagelig foratstudere Edderkoppespind. Ledere"FStud?
mag. Frøken E. Deichmann og Kommunelærer E. Nielsen. 10 Del-
tagere.
Deltagerne tog med Banen til Grib Sø. Først afsøgtes Egnen omkring
Søen, hvorefter der spistes Frokost ved Pavillonen. Dagens anden Halvdel
tilbragtes i den overordentlig smukke Vandmose, der ligger kun faa Minut-
ters Vej fra Stationen. Paa Grund af den daarlige Togforbindelse var det
nødvendigt, at Deltagerne gik tilbage tii Hillerød for at tage med Toget hjem.
Følgende 35 Arter (de fleste med Spind) iagttoges: Epeira diademata,
E. umbratica, E. Redii, E. dromedaria, E. quadrata, E. acalypha, E. pyra-
midata, E. cucurbitina, Meta segmentata, M. Merianæ, Zilla atrica, Cyrto-
phora conica, Tetragnata sp., Hyptiotes paradoxus, Amaurobius fenestralis,
Dictyna arundinacea, Theridium sisyphium, T. varians, T. formosum, T. line-
atum, Steatoda bipunctata, Linyphia triangularis, L. pusilla, L. phrygiana,
Drapetisca socialis, Erigone sp., Phyllonetis sp., Leptyphantes, Ero thora-
cica, Diæa dorsata, Dolomedes fimbriatus, Ocyale mirabilis, Clubione sp.,
Anyphæna accentuata, Segestria senoculata.
Takket være Hr. E. Nielsen's indgaaende Kendskab til Arternes Livs-
forhold blev Turen af et sjældent rigt Indhold for Deltagerne, og det var
yderst beklageligt, at ikke flere af Foreningens Medlemmer, navnlig blandt
de studerende, var Deltagere i Turen. Som noget af det lærerigeste fra Ud-
flugten skal nævnes, at man fik Lejlighed til at iagttage Korsedderkoppens
Parringsleg, og at E. Nielsen foran et Spind af Hyptiotes paradoxus for-
klarede, hvorledes denne Art fremstiller sit mærkelige Spind.
Deltagerne fik ogsaa Lejlighed til at iagttage forskellige Insektformer.
Forinden Deltagerne skiltes i København, udtalte Formanden sin og Del-
tagernes Tak til Lederne for den sjælden interessante Tur. TEERKE
XI
Den Schibbye”ske Præmie.
Præmien for Aaret 1920 tildeltes Professor, Dr. phil. C. Ferdinandsen for
hans Afhandling: Undersøgelser over Ukrudtsformationer paa Mineraljorder-
Gaver til Dansk Naturhistorisk Forening.
Vekselerer H. Hessel har i Finansaaret 1919—20 skænket 250 Kr. til
Afholdelse af Udgifterne ved Foreningens populære Foredrag og i Finans-
aaret 1920—21 500 Kr. dels til samme Formaal, dels til Udgivelsen af For-
eningens videnskabelige Meddelelser.
æ i
ba st
-—
==
JU ERR DRS STR Dr
IK BAGEN
y
—-
i
”-
ar i
za=
.
=
”
.
=="
"2
»
Medlemsliste
EFApril 1921.
Indtraadt i
Foreningen
Andersen, Edm. A., Lektor, Cand. mag., Nordre Frihavnsg. 14”, Ø. 1896.
Andersens ]JPYXStudtmagss-Suensonsetis KS ERE Rene 1921.
Anker, Jan., Underbibliothekar, Cand. mag., Borchs Collegium, St.
Kannikes tr KASSERES PRES KEN oe feed ra RE ONE NER Re see ENE 1916.
Amtinon«E;"Erk. "Helsolandser OBE SR sst eee eee Fee ele es 1907.
BanserttceyGKontorche£--RÆDME Gersonsvej,-55; Hellerup" 25. 1975:
Bårdarson G:; Bonde; Bær; "Erttafjordr, Islands Hd Slids sette 1909.
Bardenfleth kssSsAdunktMagsC5y Rungsted ror mee ser tekeke 1905.
Barnet hotline GST:"Mapsse:Urandavssl OS VET ES else LEE are pr etee 1869.
BARONEN CCandsmag EF Uraniavs KO VAST S FLER rørte renee aret anale 1913.
BersÆKSStud-mag:;"Hassagers Collegiumy Bredegade 13: FRR 2 TEE 1918.
Blegvad, H., Dr. phil., Ass. v. d. biol. Station, Willemoesg. 6. Ø..... 1907.
BorehæJsSSASDisfriktslæ ge Allinge REE anser en 1870.
Bornemann, A., Generallæge, Dr. med., K.. DM., Toldbodg. 18”. K. 1909.
Boer Cand phil HED SEKT corsa here fe estere ets lee øers 1918.
BovrentPSE: Mae: SEES ENE IEEE ES ES Ea re oe 1913.
Brinkmann, A., Prof., Dr. phil, Museumsbestyrer, Bergen ........ 1899.
Brændegaard, J. R. J., Kommunelærer, Ø.-Søg. 30 St. K. .….....….. 1915.
Brøndsted" HS"Adjunkt; Mag-scSøvej, Birkerød ASS SE er 1911.
Bøssildk OBS Profsvs Univ MVSE Østervold EK RESENS 1890.
BøjdorldkoOFESKSFAdjunktE Cand mar Kolding SEEREN 1912.
Børgesen, C. F. E., Bibliotekar, Dr. phil., Rosenvængets Hovedv.
HSV VARERNE SET KS AGES ERE ENES SR SEERE ES SEERE EEN ES MEE ENES 1887.
Bøving, A., Dr. phil., Smithsonian Institution, Washington, U.S. A.. 1902.
Bøvins-Petersen, J: OS Lektor, Mag sc GI Kongev. IS7ÆSV. SS 1 93:
Christensen, E., Frk., Pindehuggergaarden, Paradisskoven, Holte.. 1916.
Christensens G:; Erk; Villa Kamma Kolding SSR SERBERE 1916.
Christiani, A., Ingeniør; Bølling” Søs Engesvang ss sele anse eg eee 1906.
GhrrstransensG:,;Erk:;-Nørmevoldes MK FR Sera ker 1916.
Christiansen, M., Dyrlæge, Laborator, Dr. Abildsgaards Allé 14", V. 1921.
Ghiursistoffersen. GI ErkyKildebøjvej Birkerød se rt ere er 1920.
GlsmentAds Ingeniør Cereskejs 2 VE near Tees seeder 1907.
Dahl, S., Biblioteksinspektør,, Cand. mag., Fjords Allé 22, V........ 1906.
XIV
Indtraadt i
Foreningen
Degerbøl, M., Stud. mag., Borchs Collegium, St. Kannikestr. K. ... 1915.
Deichmann, E., Frk., Stud. mag., Bot. Laboratorium, Gothersg. 140. K. 1915.
Didrichsen, A., Mag. sc., Ass. v. Dansk Frøkontrol, Biilowsv. 30", V. 1893.
Ditlevsen AS MagsscsNorasvej il Charlotte nlan dt eee 1897.
Ditlevsen, Hj., Museumsamanuensis, Mag. sc., Annasv. 14. Hellerup 1902.
Drechs'elresEsskommandørsKEDMEEN yards keen 1919.
Dreyer nWweDinektør RS ZO Ol DIS KE ave RE SERENE ERR 1911.
EgeEG Frue; Under-Elmene FISCHER RRS ENES SERSES RR 1917.
Ege; FaVSR:,Mag: ses >HostrupsvejsS VÆRSTE SEES E TRE SE SEERE SRRER 1915.
Eve Rich Driphils Under BImene ISG SEN ERE SEES SEERNES 1914.
Elberling, C., Bibliotekar, Mag. sc., R. DM., Forchhammersv. 6. V.. 1854.
Elbing etT;-Mag:sce:;Mariendalsye rar FS BERNER AE RRS EEENEREN: 1913.
Esbens Peters'en Ps Lærer" Silke Bono RESEN SEN SEKS SEEREN 1906.
Ferdinand B3ErueHerlufsholmÆNæs tyve ds see 1918.
Ferdinand, Johs, Adjunkt, Cand. mag., Herlufsholm, Næstved..... 1907.
EløystrupnASkProrkDrsmedsERSESTockh ol ms EEG SEE 1905.
FogshiGAKkaptajn, HC Ørsteds oe RC MR NERE 1921.
Eranekmic: VER Mag:'sc:;;. Kochsvejr313M SE FE as ESS SNERRE 1917.
FranickaS Viceskoledirektør;"Falkoneralle IB NE eee 1919.
ErankeJjsKommunelærer Dosseringen SN SE EEN 1916.
Freuchen, P., Adr.: Nyeboe & Nissen, Raadhuspl. 37. B. 1 NEN 1919.
Gandrup, Johs., Mag. sc., Besoeki Proofitation, Djember, Java ..... 1915.
Gemzøe, K.J., Lektor, Cand. mag., M. f. D. R., Jomfrustien 7, Sønderborg 1902.
CGilløde TE StudsmasDronninggaards FANEN Holte eee een 1921.
Gormsen, C. C., Skoleinspektør, Cand. mag., Kapelvejens Skole. N. 1909.
Gram, E., Cand. mag., Statens plantepatologiske Forsøg, Lyngby..... 1915.
Grams JSBilleAPBrofessortiNørre søs RE sees SEER NESRRDER 1905.
Gram ki TAS MazsscrtErederiktstes Vej Bl ØE ERR NEER 19178
GroothorfFAS VS KammerherenkeED MESS Orø see RENSE 1918.
Grove Rasmussen DØ Er ormemannsst ARS reen 1920.
GruelundsGiLSKommunelærer Nyelandsys 7 7AS SE NEREeReR 1917.
Grundtvig MSSErK SNE Earima gs 2372 30 KAR SEES SE ER ERE SES SSANER 1916.
Grøntved, J., Museumsamanuensis, Mag. sc., Falkonérallé 31". F. .. 1914.
Gudman tEMOyverretssagfører Nørre Ken ERR 1920
Gædeken, P., Fuldmægtig, Cand. jur. & polit., Herluf Trollesg. 7”, K. 1919.
Hallar, S., Underbibliotekar, Dr. phil., Universitetsbiblioteket, Fiol-
stede REE SEE EEN TEE TEE TE EEEE 1918.
Hansen; EMErksesoheromGentoftes 16 Gento fe rer 1912.
Hansen MSSErkESS uds mas Annas ve 0 RET EN er up Rees 1919.
Hansen Søren; PolitilægesSølvor2 0 KERES ESSENSEN 1878.
Hansen Vi'Sekreter CandijurYk Willemoes ors Rø eee 1917.
Hauch" Chry"Seminarielærer kJ onstrupitB aller ip nE 1918.
Her retR Frk Studs mapsESkoysaardset 28 Ø NERE RR 1920.
Herse;sA.DErk., GL Konge valle VEN REESE SERENE AES ERE SEERE 1905.
Helms VASE Frk Studs mar Østerbrog.8 5 Ø ENE RRERSRER 1920-
Helms, O., Overlæge, Nakkebølle Sanatorium, Pejrup ............. 1892.
XV .
Indtraadt i
Foreningen
Henriksen, K. L., Museumsamanuensis, Mag. sc., Under Elmene
SEN SEER ES EEN ENE SER Fee ER Eee V rs 1907.
Ele'sis'e ll HrVekselerer=GI.-Kongew2968. AVT AS SES SS RES ahr 1913.
Hintzremve Museumsinspektør, Valby Langes 730 Valby mere 1890.
Hjorte Gjunkk Cand: mag "Akademiet; "Sorø ELISE SELEN 1916.
ERROR] oERKBroOS EDR PINS Kristian SEERE REESE an le rene 1917.
Holten RA Skovriders-Maarumlund;UMaarumi ss SISSI SEE ate vr 1905.
Hornnes SophFabrikant; Frederiksborgg: AS KEE RSSE SS sa ane 1907.
ElørrinstOrE bærer Hatchsy; 203 VASE SSR Snede. 1914.
Hørring, R., Museumsamanuensis, Mag. sc., Rahbeks Allé 32 St. V... 1896.
EkøvertSsErkr Rathsacksv OVE Se er eee rer TE 1912.
Sane KEDE NNE SERNEE stele e tssere RD ere reen ere ORSA EDR SEE 1915.
NAG ED Sen FA Stad marsE Grønningen ZU KE SITESST SRRTS ne 1920.
adobe SAS SA dunk cand theol &mag-Rønder ESSENS 1918.
lenslen, FAd:"S Prof. væ Univ., Dr: phil: «RS Sortedams: Dossering
SENSE IN EEN SN ERE REE EKS TE are Sys 1887.
Nems ert FAssistente Marsrethevi25;e Eleller up SES SEER 1912.
Jensen Aas sudsmars Regensen købmageres KEE ENES 1919.
fensenkesTApoteker Nørrebro ZEN: see RRS PE SR Om 1880.
Jensen, C. Chr. Hall, Padang Meiha Rubber Cp., Padang Serai P. O.,
Somthekedane Malay Benns Ul en REESE ne 1921.
UensenicSOS Prof rDrsmedsEMVSÆRSBulowsvr TVER 1883.
Jensen, K. T. A., Laboratorieforstander, Cand. polyt., Roarsv. 21". F... 1912.
Jensen Vilh Eektorsy Univ: "Dr med: ”Juliane-Mariesv. 22 ØS: 51905:
Jespersen, P., Mag. sc., Dronning Dagmars Allé 227 Valby....... 1910.
ke s:sensARE SF Statsgeolop Cand polyt "Halls FANE MOS VER 1893.
Johannsen, W., Prof., Dr. med. & bot. & zool., MVS., K., Gothersg.
MED FS ER ae Er EEN es SEERE REN RES Sene 1881.
JjolransenvASsstud:mag Rosenvængets "Alle 160% ØS SS STS SER 1917.
joransen FAT JF Dr phil Duntzfeldts FANE 10: Hellerup. SIS 1894.
Johansen, Fr., Cand. phil., Depart. of The Narval Service, Ottawa,
(Sanader ERE ER ES eee re RER Ed 1927:
Jørgensen, Aa. H., Kommunelærer, Norgesg. 31%. Esbjerg......... 1918.
Nørsen sent NIRSEDrEphilse Direktør Peder" Skramsv TEK RSS 1912.
NHønsensens vs, Erks Classens s MØN Radar eres 1919.
Klåcker, Å., Laboratorieforstander, Miinstersv. 19”, V.............. 1909.
KSolsebeæle Mac. sc;"Mamendalsys sa Er SS Dogs sneen 1914.
KodfosdtEs Es Magssc3Berrene es NSSS ar ele tun er 1897.
Krabbes bhEN SF Lære SGejsers FAE PAS ES Sne sr 1881.
Kram p, P. L., Museumsamanuensis, Mag. sc., Sommerv. 5. Charlottenlund 1904.
KrarutpæMsSerkssKommunelærerinde Solvej: 2 St EL SES SEE 1917.
Krarup, P., Adjunkt, Cand. mag, Dalgas? Avenue 27. Aarhus ...... 1903.
Kristiansen, O. R., Vekselerer, Strandvej 413, Klampenborg...... 1906.
KrojsbRESGSEKommunelærerindekGunløgsss 43 BI GE ES 1920.
Krom issSSAFPPBros Dr phiÆMVSSE Nys Vester: 112:"B os meter 1894.
Krogh, V. L., Kommunelærer, Bryggervangens Skole. Str. .......... 1920.
XVI
Indtraadt i
Foreningen
Kryger-Jensen, J. P., Lærer, Rosénv. 14. Gentofte... ...........…. 1908.
SakjersT-æMag: ses; KSØlygrsors KESSLERS SETE SE SEERE 1914.
Larsen, C.'S., Grosserer, Forstkandidat, Faaborg ..sss0ss0rsesnnere 1918.
Larsen, Fr., Stud. mag., Valkendorfs Collegium, St. Pederstr. 14. K.. 1919.
Laustsen,.J. Ps, Statistiker, Frederiksg: 34." Middetfårt FSS SETS 1920.
Lieberkind Stud. magst Nørrebro” 1523 HE NREN ERE FE REER 1916.
Lindhard, J., Prof: v. Univ.; Dr-med- "FM Boyesgr BE VIE EEE 1917.
and JN Erk LØsterfarimagse, FIRE SEES AP NERE SS SEES SENE 1912.
Lund, M. M., Cand. phil., Assistent, Nøjsomhedsv. 13. Ø............ 1893.
Lundbeck, W., Museumsinspector, Nyvej 8A?, V.s...s.sererevene 1891.
Lynge, H., Antikvarboghandler, R., Rathsacksv. 32. V.......s22224… 1881.
Løfting, Chr., Fiskeriinspektør, Mag. sc., Lykkesholms Allé 3 A?. V. . 1893.
Lonnberg, E:, Prof., Dr: phil, "Riksmuseet; Stockholm SS 1904.
Madsen, C., Ingeniør, Konsulent, Harsdorffsv. 13". V. ...... ,.....… 1912.
Madsen"Pz bærer Landet" Svendborg SS STS FEST SEEGER SÆNSE 1914.
Madsen; V., Statsgeolog,; Dr phils "RS "Kastaniev- TOM VIS Serene 1890.
Manniche,, A. L. V., Gonservator,- Nyelandsv. 69 F.E 1910.
Mathiasen; AA, Frk. Hesseløer3s Str ses Se ERR 1916.
Mathiesen, F. J., Cand. pharm., Mag. sc., Åss. v. pharm. Læreanst.,
Dosseringen 20 Nr hs sb SR kata TRES Se RER de ste NG 1916.
Menzinger,; A:. Pater; Stenosg ASIEN ree EREE 1920.
Mortensen H/Chr: Cy fhv-Overlærer,” Viborg 337 sa VS NREN 1879.
Mortensen, -R./C:; Skoleinspektør; Enghaveplis2 Bu seen 1910.
Mortensen, O. Th. J., Museumsinspector, Dr. phil, Kratholmsv. Holte 1891.
Miller, P, E.… Kammerh., Hofjægerm., Dr. phil., MVS., K. DM., Vester-
voldg. 1098) Br saas esserne er SEN ER Re SSR SNERRE 1857.
Muller, P.; Kommunelærer, Gand. phil; "Norgesg 567 S3 47 SEE 1915.
MNøklerJEs Erks Cærerinder Falkonérallet 381 Eee RRS 1921.
Møller, J. M; Lektor; Mag. se, Pontoppidansz., Aarhus. ene 1890.
Møller, N.C: Cand pharm Kastanievej BOV RE eee 1919.
Møller; VR. Eekfor,"Nyborgg:= 6 3 Aarhist ser en Nee 1920.
Naturhistoriske Mars em; SATS Er ESS EEN RE SES PETERS 1921.
Nielsen, E., Kommunelærers Sorte dams SEN ene 1920.
Nielsen, E.T./"Gymmasiast, "Chr. Winthersu: 1 Ve ne 1920.
Nielsen, K. Brinnich, Overlæge, Dr. phil, Amagerbrog. 129”. S. ... 1909
Nielsen, N., Adjunkt, Cand. mag., Ehlers Collegium, St. Kannikestr. K. 1916-
Nelson; P5"Bibliotekar; "Silkeborgs eee ER ANNES ES SEERE 1917
Nordmann, V. J. H., Statsgeolog, Dr. phil., Melchiorspl. 5%. Ø......: 1898.
Nørregaard, E. M., Docent, Cand. mag., Holmens Kanal 22%, K. ... 1899.
Nørregaard; KS Læge Nørrevolde 201 KE Sea ER 1907.
OTsen, ”C.; Mag: se: Nørrebros SSB EN eee re ENE 1914.
OTsen, ;E., Kommunalrevisor; Nørresøgr 2378 Re eee 1909.
Ostenfeld, C. Hansen, Prof., Dr. phil., MVS., Sortedamsdoss.
63, AT Øe Ea EET ERE Eee 1896
Otterstrøm, A., Højskoleforst., Cand. mag., Snoghøj, Fredericia ... 1902.
Oftérstrøm, Ci: V., Magisc., Frederiksdal Lyngbye see 1902.
XVII
Indtraadt
Foreningen
Panlsen Oos Proff DrphilsFEoraarsvk2s MG harlotfenlundt ERE 1916.
Pedersen, H., Frk., Seminarielærerinde, Lindeallé, Aabyhøj....... 1915.
Pedersen, L., Adjunkt, Cand. mag., St. Annag. 38 B?. Helsingør.... 1910.
Petersen, Chr., Skoleinsp., Mag. sc., Reventlowsg. 24". B.......... 1915.
Petersen, C.G. Joh., Direkt. f. Dansk biol. Stat., Dr. phil. & jur., R.,
DMÆMVSSEStran dager Eee ER SE SEER RER SEES 1880.
Petersen EJ Magisce Holsteins ØE TS Nee eres 1916.
Begersens HAVES Lektor "DrphileBlytsvsbR SETE SE SETS SEDAN 1899.
Petersen, J. Boye, Museumsamanuensis, Cand. mag., Ved Linden
[VO SFERERSØRERRE ENE] MERE ES SR TEDE RL ESSRESØE TEN SANSER ae SEE SS RS BADEN, 1919.
Petersen, S. Kierulf, Cand. pharm., Calvinsv. 9, Fredericia ...:.. 1921.
Petersen, Sophie;"Frky Lektor "Cand: mag FØstervolde 73 KS 1998,
Peterson, Vagn, Adjunkt, Cand: mag., Ibsg. 16, Viborg .…............ 1907
BikafERJER Studs mag ohannev TIESAVEE SER He ENE rer MESSIAS ad 1919.
Porsild, M. P., Mag. sc., Dansk arktisk Station, Disco, Grønland ... 1907.
Bnrsilde-Th: "Stud mast Balderser 22SNE EEN synge Eee er Sr 1920.
Bonmksen Cc Studsmas st Maltegaardsy GEGEN to He SE RE 1918.
Bonlsen DE: MSEsttdsmass Borgere AO RE re 1919.
Ramnklærkces Cs ProsvaunivæMVSEGotherse1 40 KEE eee 1882.
Ravn, J. P. J., Docent, Museumsinspektør, Brandes Allé 11". V...... 1900.
Riise Erm Candy philkeR Hollænder dyb et SES Eee 1882.
Rioldskjærn"ES Erks"Faglærerinde, Mørchs Skole, "Hillerøds Fie 1919.
Rostembers ECS Bogtrykker" Citys MONK SENE SES So SER 1907.
Rosenvinge, L. Kolderup, Prof. v. Univ., Dr. phil., R., MVS., Odenseg.
KIER ØS ENE FH SERRENE SE Me Een ENN KE Se NRA LEE SO NSE DE 1876.
Rørdam, K.,. Professor," Dr. .phil., R.. Hambros Allé 7, Hellerup .... 1888.
Salomonsen Cy] ”HProffemersfDrÆmed"&scients "M VS KSDME
Østen Dr OS] 3 OMØ SEE SEES Er en KEN gs ME SP rustet les ah ra FORE SSER 1865.
Saxtorph, S. M., Reservelæge, Nakkebølle Sanatorium, Pejrup ..... 1916.
SelmtølermERtelnsiVvekselerert Uraniavs 14-16 Varese 1904.
Schmidt, Johs., Laboratoriedirektør, Dr. phil., R., MVS., Carlsbergv.
OLESEN SYS SEE SER Se HE SE sne ERE KSER ELSE SEN SEERNES TESSINS RT SÆN Ses De tg å 1909.
Schmitlen'sensEiNOSDyrlæger "Amagerbrog" 243 Green 1912.
Sschwaåarter Ad; CandSmag- St Paulse 27245 K; ondere ele 1920.
SohnakkerEWS Ingeniør FA blmanns FANE MS Hellerup ses 1904.
SERIES FAssistentEBlegdamsvl2 GALE ØRE DSN NES SION ER 1920.
Skmmonsene ks Eektor ss Cands mag tSOrØr ST ET SE Rn Re SG 1919.
Skak er BR Seminarist Dosseringen SÆRINTERESSER 1920.
SkpoNdKESE Studs mar Rør olmse 20 KE REE EN SE SEE NE RSSR 19752
Spårck, H. R. G., Museumsamanuensis, Mag. sc., Frølichsv. 38. Char-
lotfenlum ders KE RSS ESSEN SS SEER SE ERE USDISE
SpathyJ. v, Fuldmægtig, Cand: phil. Gl. Kongev. 125% V. ss. 000: 1912.
Stamm, R. H., Docent, Mag. sc., Hovmarksv. 26, Charlottenlund... 1896.
Steenberg CM tMasssesEPetersborgy 0 ØL SENSE SEER 1902.
Skeenberee AN EretBetersb ore VO ØS re eee er 1915.
Skbephensentt Eru Holstens rss ØE 1920.
XVIII
Indtraadt i
Foreningen
Stephensen, K. H., Museumsamanuensis, Cand. mag., Holsteinsg.
ET FESTE VE SRESSEEE POSE TERE SOREL ST SEES ES DS. ged mo 1903.
Stockmarr, Å., Lektor, Cand. mag, Norasv. 4. Charlottenlund. ..... 1920.
Strand" G"Gymnasiast Vesterbrog 204 VE ERE SEERE SEERE 1920.
Strubberg, A. C., Fuldmægtig, Cand. mag., Havneg. 49". K.-....... 1900. .
Sæmundsson"BsUAdJunktrGandymag Reykjavik eee ERR 1892.
Sørensen Ar Adjunkt "Cand" magi Bredg 198 Roskilde Een 1917.
Sørensen] MR kærerinde; Nørrebro grl SEIN FREE ES SER SENERE 1920.
PBaning CA Vs uMag. SC Aller. ASA Es one SALE ER SKE 1914.
Teilmann-Friis, A. C., Apoteker, Onsgaardsv. 27, Hellerup ...:... 1879.
Thomsen MS Lektor Magsseyt] EN Onlsensg HO MØNS 1916.
Thoroddsen, Th., Prof., Dr. phil., R., MVS., Frederiksberg Allé 50". V. 1899.
Thuesen Ss-StmdmagMadvigs FA] GEA VS SE SEEREN ERESEER 1917:
I oen Don Ms Erk Bibliotekar Jens Ej nelse 20 KØERNE ERE 1919.
TroemsesaardeNSDampuiøller;Jacobys FANE PERVERSE RER RER 1911.
Bryde EC "Cekton Rømer ES SEE ER EDER 1893.
USstng Urmager "Randers ESS ES R Se DEERE 1902.
Va ml ENES P rov Univ Dep Brandes FANER S EVER ES ERE 1897.
Wanders sko verlæge EN ørne 728 KER SR SEER 1906.
Warming, E. B., Prof. emer., Dr. phil., MVS., K. DM., Bjerregaardsv.
SERVE NY gø Eee SUSE SE APS BENENE AES TERRE SE EEG Re gr de 1859.
Vedel, A.K. A., Lektor, Cand. mag., Stengaards Allé 13. Hellerup ... 1899.
Væentes old INS Candfjur Sekretær sønderd ore EEN 1920.
Wesenberg-Lund, E., Frk., Stud. mag., Lykkesholms Allé 16?. V. 1919.
Wrers'gaardeMSSErkER Marstrands SENG SØ ERE ERROR SE SEES 1921.
WresSERASTEkspeditionssekretærsSolbakkev RE ol te seeren 1914.
ViæestersaardePektagerekspedient Villashaubers Varde seere rese 192C:
White, E., Frue, Pindehuggergaarden, Paradisskoven, Holte ........ 1916.
Wrinstedt-KSEorfatter) "Operasanger; "Paludan Mullersy "SV ÆREEONG
Vinge "AHS Viceinspector EMVSIELemehesy 2 Hellerup re 1874.
WirhmcetlæsemCGandkmass Ek Erederiks borge 25 KER EER NERE 1899.
W ulff, J., Konsulent, R., Hyldegaardsv. 34, Charlottenlund ,........ 1892.
Loologisk klaver København si E Sebbe ERE PR NE NSE SS EERREENRSE 1911.
Ialt 231 Medlemmer.
Rettelser og Forandring af Bopæl bedes indtrængende meddelte til Kas-
sereren, Mag. sc. R. Hørring, Zoologisk Museum, Krystalg. K.
XIX
Dansk naturhistorisk Forenings Bestyrelse.
Prof., Dr. phil. Ad. S. Jensen, Formand.
Mag. scient. R. Hørring, Kasserer.
Statsgeolog, Dr. phil. V. Nordmann; besørger de populære Forelæsninger.
Prof., Dr. phil. C. H. Ostenfeld.
Mag. scient. R. Spårck, Sekretær.
Cand. mag. K. Stephensen; besørger de litterære Bytteforbindelser.
Lektor, Mag. scient. M. Thomsen; varetager Ekskursionerne.
Kommunalrevisor Emil Olsen.
ReyRorer: | Mag. scient. Chr. Løfting.
Delegerede til Udvalget for Naturfredning.
Kammerherre, Dr. phil. P. E. Miller.
Viceinspector H. Winge.
Docent R. H. Stamm.
i.
Canidenstudien
von
August Brinkmann,
(Prof., Dr., Direktor d. zool. Abt. d. Museums zu Bergen),
mit 3 Tafeln (I—III) und 6 Figuren im Texte.
VORWORT.
Winrend die pråhistorischen Hunderassen besonders in der
Schweiz und in Deutschland Gegenstand eingehenden Spezialstu-
diums gewesen sind, und wåhrend wir deshalb -— vor allem durch
die grundlegenden Untersuchungen Studers und Hilzheimers
— diese Rassen relativ gut kennen, so wissen wir nur recht wenig
von den Hunderassen, die in vorgeschichtlicher Zeit Skandinavien
bewohnt haben, und zwar ist es kein Materialmangel, -der Schuld
daran ist — im Gegenteil, in den nordischen Museen finden sich
reiche Funde. Besonders reich sind diese in dem zoologischen
Museum der Universitåt Kopenhagens und sie werden auf das in-
teressanteste von einzelnen sehr gut erhaltenen Skeletten sup-
pliert, die in dem dånischen Nationalmuseum aufbewahrt werden.
Das dånische Material ist alles zur Bestimmung durch die Hånde
Herluf Winge's gegangen, und dieser vorzigliche Kenner der
Osteologie der Såugetiere hat gelegentlich auch in seinen Arbeiten
die Tiere erwåhnt; besonders gilt dies die Hunde der Steinzeit
Dånemarks, weniger eingehend sind die Hunde des Eisenalters
behandelt worden, die Rassenfragen lagen offenbar in der Peri-
pherie der Aufgabe, die sich Winge gestellt hat — und es hat
wahrscheinlich auch eine Rolle gespielt, dass zu der Zeit wo Winge
seine Untersuchungen publizierte, die grundlegenden Studien Stu-
der's der pråhistorischen Hunderassen noch nicht erschienen waren ;
erst diese Untersuchungen haben ja die Rassenfragen wirklich zu-
gånglich gemacht durch das grosse Material von Vergleichmessungen
und Photographien rezenter Rassen, womit die Literatur durch die-
sen Forscher bereichert wurde.
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 72. 1
2
Durch meine Studien iiber norwegische, pråhistorische Hunde-
rassen veranlasst, habe ich auch die dånischen Funde studiert, die
mir in der liberalsten Weise zur Verfigung gestellt wurden. Gleich-
zeitig habe ich auch ein grosses Vergleichsmaterial moderner Ras-
sen in der anatomischen Sammlung der Kgl. Landwirtschaftlichen
und Tierårztlichen Hochschule zu Kopenhagen studiert, und durch
das freundliche Entgegenkommen der Direktoren des britischen
Museums, der tierårztlichen Hochschule zu Edinburgh und des Uni-
versitåtsmuseums Kristianias habe ich auch Gelegenheit bekommen
mehrere in dieser Arbeit behandelte wichtige Canidentypen zu
untersuchen, wodurch das fir meine Canidenstudien verwertete
Material sehr gross geworden ist; ich habe alles in allem gegen
250 Canidenschådel untersucht.
Est ist mir eine Freude hier den Herren, die meine Arbeit in
dieser Weise unterstitzt, ja iuberhaupt måglich gemacht haben,
herzlich zu danken; ganz besonders richte ich meinen Dank an
die Direktoren des dånischen Nationalmuseums, des britischen
Museums und des Universitåtsmuseums Kristianias die Herren Dr.
Sophus Muller DrrESTESHArm er undt dhnerankdie
Herren Professoren Dr. S. Paulli, Dr.I.E.V.Boas in Kopenhagen
und Charnock Bradley, Edinburgh, und schliesslich aber nicht
am wenigsten bitte ich den Viceinspektor des Kopenhagener Mu-
seums, Herrn Herluf Winge, fir bereitwillige Hilfe und anregen-
des Interesse meinen Untersuchungen gegeniber meinen besten
Dank anzunehmen.
Die hier vorliegenden Studien iiber Caniden sind die ersten
Glieder einer Reihe von Untersuchungen, die jetzt fast vollendet
sind und hoffentlich bald alle erscheinen werden, sie behandeln
einige wichtige Typen des dånischen pråhistorischen Materials und
Fragen, die sich an die mutmassliche Abstammung einer der be-
handelten Rassen kniipfen.
I.
Einige Hunderassen der dånischen ,,Vikingerzeit".
Der ,,Errindlevhund«.
In einem Grabe der Vikingerzeit bei Errindlev, Maribo Amt
(Nationalmuseum: e8302—8321) wurde ausser Resten eines månn-
3
lichen Skelettes nebst dazu gehårenden Kulturgegenstånden auch
das Skelet eines Pferdes und eines Hundes gefunden — einer der
interessantesten Hundefunde, die in dånischen Sammlungen vor-
kommen.
Der Hund is von Winge teils mit anderen Hunden der Eisen-
zeit, teils allein besprochen worden: ,,de store Hunde, der kendes
fra flere Fund fra vor Jernalders Grave og Bopladser og fra vore
Moser, .... synes at være væsentlig af samme Race som Canis
familiaris matris optimae Jeitteles" (24, Pag. 131)') und: ,I
Jernalderen var den almindeligste Race stor; den synes i Form nær-
mest at have været som senere Tiders ,,Store Danske Hund". ,En
stor tam Hund fra Jernalderen, funden i en Grav fra Vikingetiden,
ved Errindlev paa Laaland, nedlagt i Graven sammen med sin Herre
og hans Hest, har Hovedskallens Længde 209 mm, men øvre Rov-
tandfer kun 20 mm lang, nedre "22,5 mm" (25, Pag. 123—24).7)
Ausser diesen kurzen Bemerkungen finde ich in der Literatur
nichts iber das Tier.
Der Aufbewahrungszustand des Skelettes war aussergewohnlich
gut, nur waren die Schulterblitter sowie die Oberarmknochen zer-
quetscht und ich fand auch eine kleine Dislokation des einen Ober-
kiefers, die aber die Untersuchung nicht beeintrågt.
Wir werden uns zuerst den Schådel ansehen.
Diet EjsnrenkbEsmorneIlkder stafet Ibis zelgenkunsiden
Schådel von oben, unten und von der Seite gesehen sowie einen
Unterkieferast; ausserdem habe ich — um weniger geibten den
Eindruck der Schådelform zu erleichtern — in den Textfiguren 1
u. 2 den Schådel von oben und unten gesehen rekonstruiert, in-
dem die dislozierte Seite wieder in seine natirliche Lage einge-
zeichnet ist.
7) Uebersetzung der Zitate. ,,Die grossen Hunde, die aus mehreren Funden
in Gråbern und Wohnplåtzen der Eisenzeit sowie in unseren Mooren be-
kannt sind, .... sind scheinbar wesentlich derselben Rasse wie Canis
matris optimae Jeittelesf". ,,In der Eisenzeit war die gew&hnlichste
Rasse gross, sie scheint in der Form am nåchsten mit dem ,,Grand
Danois" spåterer Zeiten iibereinzustimmen.” ,,Ein grosser, zahmer Hund
aus der Eisenzeit in einem Grabe der Vikingerzeit bei Errindlev auf
Laaland gefunden ..... zeigt eine Schådellånge von 209 mm, aber der
obere Reisszahn misst nur 20 mm, der untere 22,5 mm.”
1=
»Errindlevhund« (restauriert), Schådel von oben und unten gesehen.
Was zuerst die Formverhåltnisse des Schådels betrifft, so sind
diese recht eigentiimlich. Von oben gesehen wirkt der Schådel auf-
fållig schlank, sowoh! Gehirn- als Gesichtsteil ist verlångert. Der
Hirnschådel ist nur schwach gewålbt, er ist mit einem recht nie-
drigen Crista sagiltalis versehen und das Planum occipitale ist
stark nach hinten geneigt. Die Schlåfeneinengung ist stark ausge-
sprochen, die Stirn relativ schmal und flach. Die Jochbogen sind
schwach und in dem vordersten Teil ihrer Bogen sehr flach. Die
Schnauze ist schmal und hinten recht hoch mit fast senkrecht
stehenden Seitenwånden.
Was am eigentimlichsten wirkt, ist doch die Profillinie des
Schådels; von der flach erscheinenden Stirn: senkt sich die Profil-
linie allmåhlich nach vorn und nach hinten, eine Einsenkung des
5
Gesjehtesyor der” Stirnfehlt das" Proflfist "hier "fast ”ganz-øe-
rade und der Schådel bekommt hierdurch ein fuchsåhnliches Aus-
sehen. Dies ist aber nicht eine aus fehlenden Stirnhåhlen, wie
bei den Fichsen, entstandene Eigentimlichkeit; diese sind hier
ganZz gut entwickelt, was die nach unten gebogenen Processus supra-
orbitales zeigen, sondern die Ursache liegt darin, dass das vor der
Stirn liegende Partie des Gesichtes aufgetrieben ist — eine Eigen-
tumlichkeit, die man bei den russischen Windhunden, die ,Bar-
zZoifs stark entwickelt findet. ;
Von der Unterseite betrachtet zeigt der Schådel einen Gaumen-
teil, der schmal und stark gestreckt ist, besonders ist er in der
Strecke vor den Foramina infraorbitalia verlångert. Die Schnauze
spitzt sich mach vorn ganz schwach zu (Fig. 1). Die Zåhne sind
recht schwach und die Pråmolaren stehen mit weiten Zwischen-
råumen in dem Kiefer. Ebenso ist auch der Raum zwischen den
Eckzåhnen und den Incisiven verlångert. Die Eckzåhne wie die
Incisiven sind stark nach vorn gerichtet. Die Ventralseite des
Schådels zeigt ferner, dass die Bullae osseae sehr aufgeblasen sind,
ohne die bei den meisten Haushunden vorkommende Abflachung
und Kielbildung zu zeigen. Der Unterkiefer ist lang und grazil,
der Teil, worin die Pråmolaren stecken, ist unten fast gerade.
- Kurz kann man den Schådel als langgestreckt, grazil und spitz-
schnauzig karakterisieren.
Wir werden jetzt unseren Errindlevhund mit anderen Rassen
vergleichen. Die basale Långe des Schådels ist 198 mm,) die
Totallinge 223 mm, er gehårt also zweifelsohne einem Hunde an,
der als ,grossf bezeichnet werden muss. Wenn wir deshalb das
Tier mit anderen Rassen vergleichen wollen um iber die Rassen-
angehårigkeit ins Klare zu kommen, dann sind es.nur wenige, die
in Betracht kommen kånnen — eine Durchsicht der Studerschen
Monographie der pråhistorischen Hunde und spåterer Arbeiten zeigt
uns erstens, dass eine åhnliche, pråhistorische Rasse bis jetzt nicht
beschrieben wurde und zweitens, dass beim Vergleich nur grosse
Individuen der Canis fam. inostranzewi-Gruppe — besonders leicht
gebaute Doggen, ferner Formen, die der Canis fam. leineri-Gruppe
1) Ich habe die Weise, worin ich gemessen habe, in der Einleitung zu den
Messtabellen nåher erklårt.
Indextabelle I.
Nummer im Verzeichniss Pag. 36.…..
Hirnschådellånge (= 100) - Gesichteschådellånge
Stinnlagein der En EEN ne Ser
Basallånge (=100) - Schnauzenlånge...........
H SGanmenlangekEeenN RER
5 =Joclhbogenbrete eres
SINDE SEE SEERE
Jochbogenbreite(=100) - Basicranialachse......
Gaumenlånge (=100) - Grésste Gaumenbreite. .
Gaumenlånge (=100) - Kleinste Gaumenbreite.
Gaumenlånge (=100) - Långe d. horiz. Teils d.
Gan mesh en era
Errindlev
Næstved
»Grand danois«
84.6
111.9112:3 1108:5
462| 48.6| 45.7
55.5 | 54.1| 54.7
634! 61,6! 60.8
32,4! 34.71 35.3
36.9| 37.5) 41,4
431 45.1)! 48.2
68.91727 1 661
37.11 4217) 35:4
38.6| — 38 6
"v
ewi-Gruppe scheiden natiirlich alle
mastiffartigen Formen gleich aus, und nur leichte, langschnauzige
is fam. inostran
aANits
Ny
4
gehåren und schliesslich grosse Windhunde herangezogen zu wer-
In der (
den brauchen — alle diese Gruppen im Studerschen Sinne ge-
nommen.
Ti
Doggen kommen in Betracht. Ich habe hier fir den Vergleich 8
Doggen verwendet, die als ,,Grand Danois" ") bezeichnet sind;
funf davon sind Schådel von Dånemark aus den Jahren 1844 bis
1912, sie repråsentieren also verschiedene- Stadien der Zucht; das-
selbe gilt die drei letzten, die ich nach Hilzheimer (4,Pag.515)
zitiere, sie sind alle Tiere aus der Mitte des vorigen Jahrhunderts;
wie Hilzheimer sagt wichtige Schådel in der Geschichte der
Rasse — einer von den Schådeln ist ganz besonders schmal und
leicht gebaut.”)
Alle Individuen sind grosse, aber dem Schådel nach leicht ge-
baute Tiere, die fast alle auch relativ langschnauzig sind, sie stehen
in der Form — unter Doggen — zweifelsohne unserem Errindlev-
hund am nåchsten, wie aber ein Vergleich der Schådel sowie
die Messungen zeigen, kann von einer nåheren Verwandtschaft der
zwei Rassen keine Rede sein, dies zeigen auch die in der oben-
stehenden Indextabelle I aufgeftihrten Indices — alle Tiere sind
relativ zu kurzschnauzig, selbst die schlanksten haben ein viel
breiteres Gesicht und die Stirnlage?) ist eine ganz andere.
Die Indices zeigen deutlich genug, dass die Wingesche Deu-
tung der grossen Hunde der dånischen Eisenzeit als Doggen, den
»Grand Danois" nahestehend, jedenfalls nicht fir den Errindlev-
hund zutreffend ist.
Fir den Vergleich unseres Tieres mit Formen der Canis fam.
leineri-Gruppe kommt nur der schottische Hirschhund, ,,Scottish
deerhound" im Betracht; der irische Wolfhund ist, wie der prå-
historische Canis fam. leineri Studer (20, 23), viel zu gross und
viel massiver gebaut.
Als Vergleichsmaterial habe ich hier folgendes verwenden kån-
nen: Zwei besonders rassenreine Tiere, dem britischen Museum
angehårend und nach meiner Anweisung freundlichst von Mr. Knud
Andersen gemessen, und ich zitiere ferner nach Studer (21,
1) Die Bezeichnung ,,Grand Danois”, ,,Grand Dane”, ,,Store danske Hund"
und ,,Ulmer Doggef deckt ganz den Namen ,,Deutsche Doggef, und ist
— weil bedeutend ålter als Rassenbezeichnung — entschieden vorzu-
ziehen.
7) Im Verzeichnis Pag. 36 findet man nåtige Daten iber die Tiere, die in
den Messtabellen nur mit Nummern versehen sind.
3) Uber die Berechnung der Stirnlageindex siehe Pag. 42.
8
Pag. 82) drei von ihm gemessene Individuen. Um die Form ver-
gleichen zu kånnen habe ich in den Figuren 4, 8, 14 u. 16 der
Tafel I—III Bilder der Nr. 13 gegeben, die mir freundlichst von
dem Direktor des britischen Museums, Dr. Harmer, iberlassen
wurden.
Wie die Bilder und Messtabelle zeigen, sind die Tiere gråsser
und kråftiger als der Errindlevhund, vor allem gilt dies die zwei
englischen Individuen, die aber auch als der Gipfel von dem bis
Indextabelle IL.
Qt RO 0
| | SYÅÆRS |
co sI 00 00 C0
>
o se
Er Z »Scottish deerhound"
R g
mo z
Nummer im Verzeichnis Pag. 36. . 1 2 12 13 14 | 15
Hirnschådellånge (=100) - Gesichtsschådellånge || 97.5| 100! 99.2! 97.6/105.9/103.3! 100
Stnnlageinder ses LS SE NEN RS SN EDER 140.4 | 120.2|130.11131.8| — —
Basallånge (<100) - Schnauzenlånge .......... 50.8 SUE STA ED ES | -= =
ig SGanmenlange renser 56.1 | "544 |" 54Æ) 57110) F5ÆO SER
É =Hjochbogendre tere 55.5 GÆR RAB SEES IE 5 0FO RES
En SStirnbrelte enes ere ev Ee 26:31 30:61) 279 ESS POS 29
Basifacialachse (=100) - Basicranialachse ..... 36:73 SUSE 37.913857
Jochbogenbreite (100) - Basicranialachse .... || 49.1)! 41.9! 62.71 —- 483 USA
Gaumenlånge (=100) - Gråsste Gaumenbreite . || 62.2| 67.7| 50.8! 54.81 — —
Gaumenlånge (=100) - Kleinste Gaumenbreite. || 28.8| 37.1| 27.5| 268
jetzt durch Zucht Erreichten angesehen werden miissen. In der
Ausformung des Schådels zeigt sich der Unterschied erstens in
den viel stårkeren Crista sagittalis des schottischen Hirschhundes,
ferner ist die Stirn relativ breiter, die Schnauze relativ linger und
die Gesichtskontur ist ausgesprochen konkav. Im Grossen und
Ganzen stehen wir doch hier einer Hundeform gegeniiber, die sich
unserem Errindlevhund viel mehr nåhert als den Doggen; dies
zeigt die Indextabelle II. Die bemerkenswertesten Unterschiede
finden ihren Ausdruck in der im Verhåltnis zur Gaumenlånge beim
Deerhound bedeutend schmaleren Gaumenbreite, in der im Verhålt-
niss zur Basifacialachse gråsseren Basicranialachse und in dem klei-
neren Stirnlageindex, in diesem letzteren nåhert sich aber die Deer-
hounds. unserem Errindlevhund mehr als den Doggen.
9
Die Tabelle zeigt in mehreren Hinsichten bedeutende Unter-
schiede zwischen den zwei" hochgezichteten, englischen Individuen,
(12, 13) und den Tieren Studers (14—16), die ersteren sind be-
deutend långer und schmaler als die letzteren, besonders auffållig
zeigt sich dies in der Långe der Basicranialachse im Verhåltnis
zur Jochbogenbreite, wo Nr. 12 eine weit långere Basicranialachse
zeigt als der Errindlevhund, wåhrend sich die drei Studerschen
Individuen diesem Tiere in dieser Beziehung stark nåhern, ja wo
Nr. 14 gar eine relativ kirzere Basicranialachse Zeigt.
Zwischen dem schottischen Hirschhund und unserem Errindlev-
hund ist eine Verwandtschaft sehr wahrscheinlich, sie gehåren aber
derselben Rasse nicht an, ich glaube die Verwandtschaft. ist so zu
erklåren, dass in den Deerhounds Windhundeblut fliesst.
Ubrig steht nur ein Vergleich mit den Windhunden.
Von dieser Rassengruppe kommen der Gråsse halber nur zwei
Rassen in Betracht — die langhaarigen, russischen ,Barzois" und
die -europåischen, glatthaarigen Windhunde, die in den englischen
»Greyhounds" besonders rein repråsentiert sind. In der Index-
tabelle III findet man die Indices fir 6 ,Barzois", 4 ,Greyhoundsf
und zwei andere glatthaarige, europåische Windhunde zusammen-
gestellt. Nimmt man die Rassengruppe als eine Einheit, so ist die
Ubereinstimmung zwischen der Gruppe und dem Errindlevhund
sehr auffållig, nur in einem Verhåltnis ist eine Abweichung zu
notieren, die relative ,gråsste Gaumenbreite" ist etwas kleiner bei
den Windhunden. Ganz besonders hebe ich hervor, dass der Stirn-
lageindex bei den Windhunden so hoch ist, dass der Errindlevhund
auch in dieser Beziehung innerhalb der Variationsbreite dieser
Rassengruppe fållt.
Der Schådellinge nach ist es nicht måglich den Errindlevhund
innerhalb einer der zwei Hauptrassen zu plazieren, er kann ent-
weder als ein grosses Individuum der glatthaarigen oder als ein
kleines der langhaarigen aufgefasst werden — vergleichen wir
aber unter Zuhilfenahme der Indices auf der Tabelle III, so sehen
wir, dass der Errindlevhund sich von den glatthaarigen- Windhunden
in folgenden Merkmalen trennt: die relative Stirnbreite ist kleiner;
die Basicranialachse ist kirzer im Verhåltnis zur Basifacialachse,
die gråsste Gaumenbreite dagegen gråsser im Verhåltnis zur Gau-
menlånge, die relative Långe des horizontalen Teils der Gaumen-
10
Indextabelle II.
EET EET]? ER TEE EO TEE I ' "[[[ "["[—[—[—----————-
,
= i: BArrOr Glatthaarige Windhunde
å = i »English grey hound smile
Er SE ER SE Ra ER KEE RE eder
Nummer im Verzeichnis Pag. 36… 1 2 17 lø 18 19 20 21 | 22 | 23 24 25 20 27 28
Hirnschådellånge (100) - Gesichtsschådellånge | 975| 100/112.8/102.6 (1077 100! 88.41103.7 97/102.9|105.5| 100-1104.5| 99.1
Stimladenderee eee ENES Se 140.5 |120:2 | 135,5 | 130.4 | 143.5 |135.7| 135|140.4|129.3|131.1 | 1344 | 136.6 | 133.3 | 129.6
Basallånge (100) - Schnauzenlånge..........- 50.8 AU LG) 50 BROT ESS SAD FOT AOA ES ES ES OZ EE5SOS
53 ="Gaumenlånge 7..:.1.2. 56 54 566) ES SI6) ES 63 RS 65 55 | 57.6| 54.31 54.4) 56.34 56.81 56.31 55.8
ks =Frochbozenbreite eee 55.51 64.2! 46.9! 50:7| 47.4 51! — 52.9! 57.5| 53.3| 55.2! 54.6! 527) 55.8
ke SS finnbrelte eee reen POST MES 0!G! FRØS R20TS SKUE STEG OST BOSE DO ED EES ES 07 2 SM 282) 28:99
Basifacialachse (=100) - Basicranialachse...... SET BESTAE ES ONS ESS SON ES ERA BES TD KEB STOR ES 72 SE RATES ES ZONERS 72 37:24 1150: 1
Jochbogenbreite (=100) - Basicranialachse 49.1| 41.9| 60.9| 548| 54.9) 52.6 SN BASED 85 52 50085051 514 5505
Gaumenlånge (=100) - Grésste Gaumenbreite. . GAP GES SET OD 571 56.9 55 | 60.6) 58.2 50 1550/6557 564
ZR Frk leinste Ganmenbreite | 288 1371 1277 955 9870 257303] 252 2988 29.6! — 30! 29:51) 29.2
2 - Långe d. horiz. Teils d.
Garman eN SEE STS SÆT ES SD ESS ESS FESTE ESS RE SEE SE By] HEE — 3927 33
ifl
beine kleiner, und endlich ist der Stirnlageindex bedeutend gråsser.
Ein Vergleich mit den ,,Barzoisf zeigt viel gråssere Ubereinstim-
mungen, abweichend ist hier nur die beim Errindlevhund gråssere
relative Jochbogenbreite, und der relativ etwas breitere Gaumen.
Als besonders wichtig erachte ich, dass hier der Stirnlageindex
innerhalb der Variationsbreite der , Barzois" fållt.
Auch in einem Verhåltnis, das sich nicht gut in Zahlen aus-
driicken låsst, schliesst sich der Errindlevhund den ,Barzoifs an;
bei beiden ist die Gesichtskontur dank der Aufblåhung der Kno-
chen vor der Stirn ganz gerade, ja zeigt gar eine Andeutung von
Konvexitåt. Dies ist eine Eigentiimlichkeit, die ich bei den vielen
Hunden, die ich untersucht habe, nur hier so ausgesprochen ge-
funden habe.
Wie wir jetzt gesehen haben, sind die Hauptunterschiede zwi-
schen unserem Tiere und den Barzois etwas weitere Jochbogen
und breitere Gaumen, beides sind aber Eigentiimlichkeiten, die
gegen eine Zusammengehårigkeit der Tiere durchaus nicht sprechen
— im Gegenteil; die relativ bedeutende Gråsse der gråssten Gau-
menbreite entsteht durch die relative Kirze des Gaumens, und
das stårkere Auseinanderweichen der Jochbogen ist einer stårkeren
Kaumuskulatur zu verdanken; beide Eigentimlichkeiten miissen
wir eben erwarten bei einer ålteren Form der Rasse. Die erste
zeigt, dass die Ziichtung der extremen Schnauzenlånge damals ihre
jetzige Gråsse nicht erreicht hatte, die zweite zeigt die mit der
zunehmenden Domestication fortschreitende Schwåchung der Kau-
muskulatur bei der modernen Rasse — es ist ein Verhalten, wozu
es auch in der Entwickelung anderer Hunderassen Parallele giebt,
genau dasselbe hat Studer in der Entwickelung des schottischen
Hirschhundes aus den pråhistorischen Canis fam. leineri nachge-
wiesenk (2 Pag 82):
Im Gegensatz zu dem Schådel bieten die Unterkieferproportionen
oft sehr wenig fir eine Rassenbestimmung Geeignetes was ganz
besonders den mittelgrossen Rassen gilt. In diesem Falle wo es
sich um grosse Rassen handelt steht die Sache etwas besser; die
untenstehende Indextabelle IV zeigt uns, dass es zwischen den Dog-
gen und den leichteren Hunden, Windhunden und Deerhounds, zabl-
måssig feststellbare Unterschiede giebt — im Verhåltnis zur Unter-
kieferlånge ist der Kiefer bedeutend håher und dicker bei den
"ru soul 924Q2H
"+ BYDIT 9JBWIxBW
(001 =) snjåpuo sap MW 'p "A o8ug 7
) snJÅpuoD sap aWIW "pA o9gugT
"S291pPU119/[914497U/]
"sd on ad uayosiImz oyu0H
001 =) snjÅpuo) sap 2M1W "p'A 28ueT
N
"og "eq siuyqoieZzioA WII JowwnN
(001
f
12
erstgenannten Tieren als bei den
letztgenannten. Was den Errind-
levhund betrifft, so beståtigen
die hierfir berechneten Indices
deutlich, dass das Tier zu der.
letzten Gruppe gehårt, und die
Primitivitåt tritt auch deutlich
zu Tage in der etwas gråsseren
Dicke des Kiefers. Es låsst sich
nicht tun durch die Relativ-
zahlen die Deerhounds von den
Windhunden zu trennen, in mei-
end nem Material aber wohl durch
"AT 21I2qe)xopu]
I
Errindlev die absoluten Gråssen, und auch
hier fållt der Errindlevhund in-
nerhalb der Variationsgrenze der
Windhunde.
»punoy
-1997
618 ETC TT SPT
LIP TIG GTC OTIT TIT GE GIF CT
>
Diem 'Sehådernacehrakmr
terllentist der ter rindkerv=
hund also zweifelsohne als
ein ursprunglicehertRepras
sentant der $Barzoisslypie
anzusehen. Wir wollen jetzt
sehen ob das Extremitåtenskelett
»IOzaeg«
(GTC TIT GITTE
LIG STIG STIG PTI6 CT/6 GTO FT|8 GT]6 ET 6 GTET
-
&
des Tieres mit dieser Auffassung
in Ubereinstimmung zu bringen
ist.
Ein paar einleitende Worte
uber Extremitåtenmessungen bei
Caniden sind hier am Platze.
Es liegen nur wenige Versuche
vor, Relationen ausfindig zu ma-
chen — teils zwischen den Lån-
apunyupUrm
osreeyney
Næstved gen der einzelnen Extremitåten-
6'ET!S FT/3 OT GT] IT
STIG LTEZTF
-
IG
'8I
8 61/81
(S:
knochen, teils zwischen den To-
talliangen der Extremitåten, die
zu einer Identifizierung der Ca-
nidenarten und Rassen dienen
»SIOUET
pugig«
13
kånnen. In dieser Beziehung ist eigentlich nur die Untersuchung
Schlegels (18) zu erwåhnen, deren Resultate aber nicht ermu-
tigend wirken, indem sie fir weitere Untersuchungen sehr wenig
versprechend sind. Es scheint nach Schlegel eigentlich kaum
måglich die Arten der Gattung Canis den Extremitåtenknochen
nach auseinanderhalten zu kånnen, geschweige denn die Rassen
des domestizierten Hundes. Leider ist es auch unmåglich das sehr
umfangreiche Material Schlegels als Basis fir weitere Forschung
zu verwenden, weil der Verfasser in total missverstandener Riick-
sicht auf seine Leser die absoluten Zahlen seiner Messungen nicht
veråffentlicht hat, wir finden wesentlich nur einige relative Zahlen
mitgeteilt.
Um trotzdem einen Versuch zu machen, das Extremitåtenskelett
fir die Rassenbestimmung zu verwerten habe ich eine Reihe von
Vergleichmessungen ausgefihrt; mein Material ist zwar klein, aber
ich teille es dennoch mit, weil es doch so viel zu zeigen scheint,
dass weitere auf ein gråsseres Material basierte Untersuchungen
von Nutzen sein kånnen — wie man aber bald sehen wird, miis-
sen die Untersuchungen in anderer Richtung als die Schlegel-
schen gehen. Ausserdem dass ich mein Material in der Schle-
gelschen Weise behandelt habe, wurde es versucht ob es nicht
måglich sein sollte, Rasseneigentiimlichkeiten nachweisen zu kån-
nen, wenn man die Schådel — und Extremitåtenlånge zu einan-
der in Beziehung stellt.
Fir die vorliegende Rassenfrage handelt es sich erstens darum,
ob man zeigen kann, dass die Windhunde in ihren Extremitåten-
relationen sich anders verhalten als andere Hunderassen; zweitens
ob unser Errindlevhund mit den Windhunden ibereinstimmt.
Auf der Indextabelle V (Pag. 14) sehen wir zuerst eine Reihe
von Relativzahlen"), die in der Schlegelschen Weise berechnet
sind.”) Aufgestellt sind Windhunde, Repråsentanten der Canis fam.
inostranzewi-Gruppe (Doggen, Bulldog, Boxer, norwegischer, grauer
Elchhund), einige Repråsentanten der Canis fam. intermedius-
Gruppe (Norwegischer Bracke, Hasenhund, Laweracksetter, Gordon-
setter) und endlich einige Wolfe.
7”) Die absoluten Zahlen stehen auf der Messtabelle III. Arm- wie Bein-
långe sind in der Schlegelschen Weise berechnet — also Arm —=
Humerus + Radius. Bein = Femur + Tibia.
14
Indextabelle V.
>
É £ Canis f; ; t ri Canis fam. Cani
E neg kende É Janis ne ranzcewi PE Bages Canis lupus
5 g
VA
Eee FE Eee
Indices der
Extremitåtenknochen.
Humerus(= 100) - Radius. . — ||100.9/102.4/102 3/105 4 98.9/101 2/100.8! 99.5! 100! 99.3/101.9! 94.7/101.8/102.6! 103! 106 |100.5! 99.1! 96.2
Femur(=100) - Tibia ..... || 99 1//101.9/100.4| 100/102.3! 97.9! 98.9) 96.4! 102! 95.4/102.4! 97! 936)! 978) 99.5/105 4! 103 || 906! 100! 99.1
Humerus (=100) - Femur — |1111.7|112.7/108.71108.4/108 3/112.4/112.5/109.9/111.7|106.4/109.7| 104/110.9/109.9/102 5| 109 || 112/103.2/105.2
Radius (=100) Eb er 108.3/112.9/110.5/106.3/105.1/107.2/109.8/107.6/112.6/106.5/109.8|104 5/103.5/108.9/106 7/104.9' — (100 9/104.2/108.3
Arm(=100)= Bens — |1112.3/111.5/107.5/106.7/107.8/111.1/110.1|111.2/109.1/108 1/107.1//103.8|108.7|108.3/103.7| 108 |106.4/103.7|106.7
Basall. d. Schådels (= 100)
mn - Humerus — || 106/109 5/110.1/105.8| 93.9] — !106.5/1032! 102/106.8| 93 9! 89.3! 94.8! 98 9/104.8 — || 95.2/101.9| 99.1
z - Radius.. 104/106.9/111.1/112.6/112 1! 92.2] — |107.3/102.7! 102/106.9| 95.7! 83.9! 96.5/101.5/107.9) — || 95.6/100.0! 95.3
i, - Femur.. |113.6/118.3/122.2/119.6/113.7) 101! — |119.9|/113 4/113.9/113.8| 103| 92.8/105.2/108.8/107.4) — |/106.6/105.2/104 2
z - Tibia ... (112.6120 6/122.8|119.6|117.8 98.9] —-- |1155/115 71108 6/116.6| 100! 86.9|102.8/108.3/113.2" — || 96.5/105.2/103.2
3 Arms — |1212.8|219 6/222 6/218.4/185.5] — 1213.8| 206| 204/212.4|189.6/173.2|/191.3/195.3/212.7| — 1190 8/202.8/194.4
ER - Bein ... |/226.3| 239! 245/239.2/233.2| 200! — |/235.3/229.1/222 5/230.3! 203//179.7/202 2/217.1/220.7' — 1203.1/210.4/207.4
| ||
Basicranialachse (= 100) | |
Es - Humerus — || 385/405 9!405.6/379 2/346.1 — |3632/371.7/342.2/322.9/334.8] 300/326 7/341.1' — | — 1344 4/372.4/367.2
5 - Radius . |/381.5/888 3/411.7|414.8|401.9/842 3! — |366.2! 370!342.2/320 8/341.3| 282/342.9%1 350! — | — 346| 369/353.4
& - Femur .. |416.7| 430/452.9/440.8|407.5| 375) — |408.8|408.3/382 2/343.8|367.4| 312/373.5| 375! — | — 1385 7/384 5/386.2
2 =liblarer 413 438.3|454.9/440.7|422 6/367.3| — /394.1/416 7364 4/352.1/356.5' 292/365.3/373.2| — | — |349.2/384.5/382.7
al SAT — |1773.8/813.7/820.4| 783/688.5| — |729 1/741.7|684.4/647.9|676.1 582!679 6/691.1!) — | — 11690.5/741.4/720.7
- Bein. 829.6/1868.3/907.8/881 5/835 97423] — 1802.9| 825/746 7/6959/723 9! 604/738.8/748.2| — | — |/734.9| 769| 769
IS
Die relative Radiuslånge (Humerus = 100) schwankt bei den
Windhunden zwischen 100,9 und 105,4; innerhalb diesen Grenzen
kånnen wir, wie man sieht, auch Repråsentanten der anderen Ras-
sengruppen der Hunde finden, dies gilt auch die relativen Lången
des Tibias, Femurs, sowie die Relationen zwischen Arm und Bein
— eine oder mehrere der Rassengruppen fallen teilweise mit den
Windhunden zusammen. Auch mein Material zeigt also, dass mit
den Schlegelschen Indices nichts anzufangen ist.
Ich habe nun in der Tabelle V versucht, die Basallånge des
Schådels gleich 100 zu setzen und hieraufhin die relativen Lången
des Armes, Beines sowie der einzelnen Extremitåtenknochen zu
berechnen. Die Tabelle zeigt nun etwas ganz anderes. Jetzt sind
die Windhunde durch die relative Tibialånge von den ibrigen Ras-
sen zu trennen, und die relative Långe des Radius, Armes und
Beines wird nur von einem Individuum der angefihrten Hunde,
einem ,Grand Danois", erreicht.
Es låsst sich aber tun einen Index zu finden, wo die Wind-
hunde noch isolierter stehen, einen Index, der iibrigens auch einen
hoåheren Wert besitzt als der vorige, weil die so stark variierende
Gesichtslånge, die in der Basallånge des Schådels eine Rolle spielt,
hier eliminiert wird. Diese Indicesgruppe ist in der Tabelle V auf-
gefuihrt; ich habe dort die Extremitåtenlången in Relation zu der
innerhalb jeder Rasse wenig variierenden Basicranialachse (—< 100)
gestellt. Wenn die Femurlånge ausgenommen wird, stehen die
Windhunde ganz isoliert, die Doggen nåhern sich am meisten, die
anderen Rassen stehen weit dahinter.
Soweit mein kleines Material es zeigt (und ich bin mir sehr
wohl bewusst, dass diese Sparsamkeit des Materials eine Achilles-
ferse ist, konnte es aber nicht gråsser bekommen) låsst es sich
also tun, die Windhunde als solche durch die Relationen zwischen
ihren Schådel- und Extremitåtenlången zu karakterisieren; wie stellt
es sich nun mit der anderen Frage, die Angehårigkeit des Errind-
levhundes zu den Windhunden.
Da der Humerus zerbrochen ist, kånnen nur die Relationen des
Radius, Femurs, Tibias und Beines festgestellt werden; im Verhålt-
nis zur Basicranialachse steht die Långe des Beines, des Radius
und — mit einer Ausnahme (, Grand Danois" Nr. 7) — des Tibias
unseres Tieres, zwar nicht innerhalb der Variationsbreite der Wind-
16
hunde, aber doch diesen Tieren nåher als allen anderen Hunden,
die relative Femurlånge gar innerhalb der Variationsbreite der Wind-
hunde. Auch in den Extremitåtenknochen finden wir also Stiitz-
punkte fir die an dem Schådel erlangte Auffassung, der Hund
ist ein primitiver Windhund, er ist etwas kurzbeiniger und etwas
dicker im Knochenbau als die Windhunde heut zu Tage, was man
eben von einer primitiveren Rasse erwarten sollte — die Wind-
hunde sind ja seit lange auf Langbeinigkeit geziichtet worden und
man weiss, dass es bei den modernen Rassen dieser Hunde eben
schwierig ist, die Gråsse aufrecht zu erhalten.”) Es ist hiermit der
ålteste wirkliche Windhund aus pråhistorischer Zeit. in Europa nach-
gewiesen worden; was fruher vorliegt war teils schlanke Individuen
von Canis matris optimae, teils Tiere, die spåter erwåhnt werden
sollen (Pag. 26), de — so weit es sich beurteilen låsst — als
Vorfahren der Windhunde anzusehen sind.
Der ,Næstvedhund".
Der zweite hier zu behandelnde Hund gehårt auch dem National-
museum Dånemarks an, er wurde in einem Grabe der Vikinger-
zeit bei Næstved gefunden (Nationalmuseum C. 113, 42, Grav I.).
Dieser Hund war noch besser erhalten als der Errindlevhund; am
Schådel fehlt nur der linke Jochbogen sowie ein paar der Schneide-
zåhne. Von den Extremitåtenknochen waren nur die Schulterblåtter
beschådigt.
Das Skelett gehårt einem erwachsenen Hund an — den Zåh-
nen und Schådelsuturen nach zu urteilen ist der Hund aber noch
jung, ungefåhr zwischen 2 und 2'/2 Jahr alt.
Ein Vergleich der zwei Schådel zeigt uns gleich, dass wir hier
eine ganz andere Rasse als der Errindlevhund vor uns haben, zwar
ist der Schådel von ungefåhr derselben Gråsse (Basallånge N: 193
mm, E: 198 mm), die Form ist aber, wie ein Vergleich der Fi-
guren 3, 74 105und 13 mit 1, 5,79 undetider Tale Sr ereR
total verschieden. Der Schådel ist grober, massiver und erscheint
viel kurzschnauziger. Von oben gesehen ist der Hirnschådel gestreckt
und gut gewdlbt, der Crista sagittalis ist recht schwach ent-
") ,,Die meiste Schwierigkeit in der Zucht war immer die Gråsse festzu-
haltenf, Strebel (19, Pag. 309).
lg
wickelt, was aber wahrscheinlich mit der Jugend des Tieres in
Verbindung gesetzt werden muss; die Stirn ist breit, etwas- einge-
senkt und der Gesichtsteil ist recht kurz und breit. Die Seiten-
ansicht (Fig. 3) zeigt uns einen viel kråftigeren Jochbogen als beim
Errindlevhunde, und dass die Gesichtskontur deutlich konkav ist,
ohne doch einen Stirnabsatz zu bilden. Die Ventralansicht (Fig.13)
wird durch das sehr gut entwickelte Gebiss karakterisiert; zwar
stehen die Pråmolaren auch hier nicht in geschlossener Reihe, die
Zwischenråume sind aber kleiner als beim Errindlevhund. Der
Eckzahn ist sehr kråftig und wenig stark nach vorn gerichtet. Der
Gaumen ist breit und die Einengung vor den Foramina infraor-
bitalia schwach und entsteht ganz allmåhlig.
Der Basallånge nach haben wir einen gråsseren Hund vor uns.
Ausser den Rassen, die wir schon bei der Untersuchung des Er-
rindlevhundes fir den Vergleich verwendet haben, kånnen, der
kiirzeren Schnauze wegen, auch grøssere Individuen von Hunden
der Canis fam. intermedius-Gruppe fir den Vergleich in Betracht
kommen. Ein einfacher Vergleich mit Schådeln dieser Tiere, zeigt
aber so grosse Formunterschiede, dass sie gleich ausgeschaltet
werden kånnen. Ein Vergleich mit den Windhunden und den
»Deerhounds" fållt auch aus, dies zeigt schon die totale Uniiber-
einstimmung in Form mit dem Errindlevhunde, und man sieht es
auch deutlich an den Indices auf den Tabellen II, IM u. IV.
Der Form nach gehårt der Schådel zweifelsohne einem kleine-
ren im Schådelbau grazilen Doggentypus an, und zeigt bedeutende
Ubereinstimmungen mit den kleineren Individuen der ,Grand Da-
nois"; was dieses Tier betrifft, hat also Winge ganz richtig
gesehen, wenn er von Åhnlichkeiten zwischen den Hunden des
Ejsenalterskund "dem "Grand Danois= spricht "(s:1Pag:73) Be
trachten wir die Indextabelle I (Pag. 6), so bemerken wir auch
gleich,, dass der Næstvedhund in einem so wichtigen Index wie
der der Stirnlage innerhalb der Variationsbreite dieser Tiere fållt;
dasselbe gilt auch Indices wie die relative Jochbogenbreite und
Stirnbreite, es gilt das Verhåltnis von der Basicranialachse zur
Basifacialachse, grosste und kleinste Gaumenbreite zur Gaumenlånge.
Bemerkenswert ist die abweichende relative Schnauzenlånge, die sich
dem Index der Windhunde nåhert — ein Bastard zwischen Dogge
und Windhund ist das Tier aber sicher nicht, dagegen spricht nicht
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 72. 2
18
nur die Form des Schådels und die relativ sehr grosse Jochbogen-
breite,. sondern auch die Dimensionen der Extremitåtenknochen
— das Tier ist kurzbeiniger gewesen als die jetzigen Doggen
und fållt ganz aus dem Ramen der Windhunde, Tab. V, Pag. 14.
Der Unterkiefer des Hundes beståtigt, wie die Indextabelle
IV, Pag. 12 es zeigt, vollståndig den Doggenkarakter des Tieres.
Der Næstvedhund war eine kleine, langschnauzige
Dogge, relativ und absolut kurzbeiniger als die jetzt
lebendenkdiektohewarmnesefåhrdierernessettersmes
war'ein mittelsrosser, kråftig gebauter Hund, scherin
barjohnessrossere Scehnelfiskeit.
Unser Fund ist dadurch von Interesse, dass er uns einen bis
jetzt unbekannten pråhistorischen Doggentypus zeigt; die pråhisto-
rischen Doggen, die wir durch die Untersuchungen Studers (23)
und Nehrings (12) kennen gelernt haben, gehåren alle einem be-
deutend gråsseren Typus an -— aller Wahrscheinlichkeit nach haben
wir hier vor uns die Rasse, woraus der ,,Grand Danois" hervor-
ging, die kollossale Gråsse dieses Tieres ist — jedenfalls in Dåne-
mark — erst in relativ neuer Zeit entstanden.
Die zwei hier behandelten Rassen haben zweifelsohne die Grund-
lage der in dem Mittelalter fir die Jagd so viel verwendeten
Blendlinge gebildet, und ich werde a. a. Orte nachweisen, dass
solche Rassenkreuzungen schon in der Vikingerzeit Norwegens statt-
gefunden haben.
Es scheint als ob dieser Doggentypus zu den gewåhnlicheren
des dånischen Eisenalters gehårt. In den Kulturschichten einer
Ansiedelung des Eisenalters bei Vejleby auf Lolland sind zwei
Schådel gefunden worden, die in den Sammlungen des zoologischen
Museums Kopenhagens aufbewahrt sind; beide Schådel sind stark
zertrummert und nur fragmentarisch vorhanden, sie gehåren zwei-
felsohne den Resten nach derselben mittelgrossen kråftigen Rasse
an, aber nur der eine låsst sich nåher studieren um die Rassen-
gehårigkeit festzustellen. Die Stirn ist hoch und wenig eingesenkt,
ganz wie bei den Doggen; die Gesichtskontur konkav und die Joch-
bogen sind ausserordentlich stark und weit ausstehend; vor dem Fora-
men infraorbitale ist das Gesicht stark eingeengt. Es deuten alle
diese Merkmale auf eine recht kurzschnauzige, kråftige Rasse hin.
Die wenigen absoluten Messungen, die gemacht werden konnten,
19
stehen unter Nr. 3 auf der Messtabelle.- Schon die absoluten Zah-
len zeigen, dass nur die Doggen eine so bedeutende Jochbogen-
breite und Breite des Hinterhauptdreiecks besitzen, und benutzt
man die Basicranialachse als Vergleichsbasis (- 100), dann ist die
Zugehårigkeit zu dieser Rasse auch deutlich erkennbar, die Rassen,
die in Betracht kommen konnten, weichen wie die untenstehenden
Ee så > ØE | Engl.
Basicranialachse = 100 |! kg SKER fa | HESS | ed 99) | Fe
Breite d. Hinterhauptdrei- |
beks 05, ES FEE RENEE 1 135.71'129:5—142:3 (1) 115.6| TF A=1333) 7117-7296
HEhbogenbreite 2... | 221.4 | 207.3—232.3 | 159.4-—206.9 | 164 2—196.1 | 181.1—207.3
Zahlen es zeigen so deutlich — besonders in der relativen Joch-
bogenbreite — von einander ab, dass die Karakterisierung der
Fragmente aus Vejleby als den Doggen angehårend sicher ist.
Die starke Einengung der Schnauze vor dem Foramen infraorbi-
tale konnte auf eine besonders kurzschnauzige Form deuten, und
da ja in dieser Zeit schon Bulldoggen von Påtting (17) nach-
gewiesen wurden, habe ich sicherheitshalber die Reste hieraufhin
geprift; die Vergleichsindices die ich berechnet habe, zeigen doch
gleich, dass es sich um keine Bulldogge handelt, und hierauf deu-
tet auch, dass die obere p3 gerade steht und keine Kulissenstel-
lung einnimmt, wie es bei den Bulldoggen gewåohnlich der Fall ist.
IL.
Die Abstammung der Windhunde.
Der Nachweis eines zweifellosen Windhundes aus der Vikinger-
zeit, der ,,Errindlevhund”", eines Windhundes, der im Bau eine
gråssere Urspriinglichkeit als die jetzigen Windhunde zeigt, hat
mir die Veranlassung gegeben, .verschiedene komparative Unter-
.suchungen anzustellen, um måglicherweise einen Beitrag zur Ab-
stammungsgeschichte dieser eigenartigen Hundegruppe liefern zu
kånnen.
Wie charakteristisch ein rassenreiner Windhundschådel auch ist
— Hilzheimer (2, Pag. 91) bemerkt ganz richtig, dass man
einen solchen Kopf immer kennen kann — ist doch die Frage von
der Abstammung dieser Rassengruppe noch nicht gelåst, ja scheint,
DE
20
der Literatur nach, noch weit von seiner Låsung zu sein, trotzdem
eine Reihe von Forschern sich damit beschåftigt haben.
Ich werde ganz kurz die wichtigsten Anschauungen wieder-
geben. Der eigentiimlich langgestreckte und schmale Schådel der
Windhunde, veranlasste schon Geoffroy St.-Hilaire (siene
Studer 22, Pag. 39) und spåter Pelzeln (16) dazu, ihre wilde
Stammform in dem sogenannten abyssinischen Wolf, Canis simen-
sis Rippell zu sehen. Spåter wurde diese Auffassung von Kel-
ler (8) befirwortet, scheinbar ohne dass es diesem Forscher be-
kannt war, dass Nehring (14) schon fruher die Unhaltbarkeit
dieser Auffassung gezeigt hatte, und Studer hat 1903 (22) end-
gultig nachgewiesen, dass Canis simensis als Stammvater der Wind-
hunde nicht in Betracht kommen kann, ja iuberhaupt nicht zu den
Hunden in Beziehung steht, sondern sich vielmehr den Fiichsen
nåhert, die nach iibereinstimmender Auffassung aller Forscher nie
Ausgangspunkt fir Hunderassen gewesen sein kånnen.
Nehring (14) hat schon 1888 seine Auffassung der Ab-
stammung der Windhunde folgenderweise pråzisiert. Er meint be-
obachtet zu haben, dass Wålfe und Schakale in Steppengegenden
eine auffallende Schlankheit der Schådelform zeigen; hierauf fus-
send nimmt er an, dass in solchen Gegenden Tendenz zur Bildung
schlanker Schådel bei den Caniden vorhanden ist, und dass die
Windhunde hier aus anderen urspringlich dickkåpfigen Hunden
hervorgegangen sind. Die grossen Windhunde mit sehr langer,
schmaler Schnauze, wie man sie namentlich in England zichtet,
stellen eine reine Kulturrasse dar. Die windhundåhnlichen Rassen
der Vorzeit stellen nur eine etwas schlankere Modifikation der gleich-
zeitig lebemden Jagd — resp. Hirtenhunde dar, und es ist nicht
unwahrscheinlich, dass sie aus diesen durch Zuchtwahl oder son-
stige Einflisse hervorgegangen sind.
Spåter hat sich Studer (21) die Entstehung der Windhunde
in ganz anderer Weise vorgestellt. Er nimmt an, sie seien durch
Auswahl von schlanken Pariahunden entstanden, wo die Domesti-
kation zu der fir die Windhunde so charakteristische Verlångerung
des Gesichtsteils des Schådels gefiihrt hat, so dass dieser Teil lån-
ger als der Gehirnteil wird.
Beide Erklårungsversuche sind ohne allgemeineren Anschluss
seitens anderer Forscher geblieben; Nehrings Auffassung ent-
21
behrt noch jeden Beweis — und låsst sich wohl iberhaupt kaum
beweisen. Studers Ansicht ist mit Messungen von Pariahs und
Dingos unterbaut aber auch diese ist nicht iberzeugend — ohne
auf mein Messmaterial in Detail hineinzukommen, werde ich nur
darauf aufmerksam machen, dass meine Messungen von finf un-
gemischten Dingos so viele Verschiedenheiten zeigen, dass ich
mir eine nåhere Verwandtschaft nicht denken kann. U.a. ist der
Stirnlageindex total verschieden. å
Im Gegensatz zu den besprochenen Auffassungen ist Hilz-
heimer geneigt anzunehmen, dass die gråsseren Windhunde in
leichten Wålfen ihren Ursprung haben, er hat diese Auffassung
in einem kleinen populåren Buch iber die Haustiere ausgesprochen
(3); nach ihm sind die Windhunde nicht derselben Wurzel ent-
sprossen, die kleineren stammen aus Ågypten und Canis lupaster
ist zweifelsohne ihr Stammvater, er åhnelt dem alten Pharaonen-
windhund so stark, dass es ausserordentlich schwierig ist, die zwei
Formen auseinander zu halten. Diese Form lebt vielleicht noch
in der Gestalt der Whippet. ,,Von diesen kleineren Windhunden
sind die grossen trotz aller åusseren Åhnlichkeit, dem Schådel,
besonders der Bezahnung nach verschieden ..... Ich måchte sie
auf Grund meiner allerdings noch nicht veråffentlichten Unter-
suchungen iiber die Wolfe auf einen Wolf zurickfihren, der im
Nordwesten des Schwarzen Meeres wohnt. Ihr bekanntester Ver-
treter ist der langhaarige, russische Windhund, der Barzoi, und
der englische Greyhound ...."
Leider liegen noch nicht die Wolfuntersuchungen Hilzheimers
vor, die Messungen, worauf er seine Auffassung basiert, sind nicht
zugånglich und es ist deshalb schwierig sich uber die Richtigkeit
seiner Auffassung ein Urteil zu bilden — mich hat es aber vor-
låufig etwas skeptisch gemacht, dass diese Deutung des Verfassers
und andere Aussprechungen, in der Richtung einer Teilung der
Wolfe in so viele konstante Rassen gehen, dass sie kaum aufrecht
zu erhalten sind, wenn man ein genigend grosses Material von
Wolfschådeln untersucht. In demselben kleinen Buch wird be-
hauptet, dass die Mastiffs einem , måchtigen, dickkåpfigen und
kurzschnauzigen Wolf mit starkem Stirnabsatz", der im mittleren
Schweden zu Hause ist, entsprossen sind (3, Pag. 23), und der
Stammvater der Schåferhunde (Canis fam. matris optimae) sollye
22
seinen Ursprung aus einem kleinen Wolfe genommen haben, der
das sidliche Schweden und die gegeniiberliegenden Kistenlånder
Russlands bewohnt hat (3, Pag. 33). So viel ich die skandinavi-
schen Wålfe kenne, und ich habe eine nicht geringe Anzahl so-
wohl norwegische wie schwedische und (moorgefundene) dånische
Wålfe untersucht, kånnen solche Rassen, wie die obengenannten
kaum fixiert werden; wenn vielleicht eine in Finmarken vorkom-
mende flachstirnige Form, deren Zåhne relativ schwach sind, åus-
genommen wird, findet man kleine und grosse, grazile und grobe,
lang- und kurzschnauzige Formen unter einander in den drei Lån-
dern gemischt. Es wird jedenfalis ein enormes Material zusammen-
gebracht werden miissen, ehe man wirklich iiber Wolfrassen inner-
halb dieser Lånder sprechen, und solche auch genigend sicher
karakterisieren kann, und es sollte sich nach Hilzheimer gar
um solche handeln, die Anlass zu so verschiedenen Hunderassen
wie die Schåferhunde und die Mastiffs es sind, gegeben haben
kånnen.
Ich måchte mich aus den obenstehenden Grinden zu den
Hilzheimerschen Auffassungen abwartend stellen, um so mehr
als ich meine, dass man nicht neue Wolfrassen aufzustellen braucht
um die Abstammung der Windhunde festzulegen.
Dass die grossen Windhunde zweifelsohne von Wolfen abzuleiten
sind — die Hilzheimersche Auffassung — kann ich nur zu-
stimmen, und ich meine ferner nachweisen zu kånnen, dass die
Tiere von Canis pallipes Sykes abzuleiten sind, indem dieses
Tier sich eben in den Charakteren, wodurch es sich von den
Wålfen der alten Welt trennt, der ålteren Form des Windhundes
stark nåhert. Wenn wir sehen, mit welcher Kraft die Windhunde
ihre Bastardnachkommen prågen, ist es sehr wahrscheinlich, dass
sie einer Form entsproøssen sind, die mehr wie eine lokale geo-
graphische Råsse ist, und als mehr kånnen doch sicher die Hilz-
heimerschen Formen nicht betrachtet werden, und in Canis pal-
lives haben wir wirklich eine solche. ,gute Art", wie ich in der
folgenden Studie dieser Arbeit genigend deutlich hoffe gezeigt zu
haben.
Wir werden jetzt sehen, wie sich Canis pallipes zu den Wind-
hunden verhålt, ob das Tier Eigentiimlichkeiten zeigt, die eine
zwanglose Ableitung der Windhunde von ihm erlaubt.
23
Rs
3:
Textfigg. 3 u. 4; Umrisszeichnungen : »Errindlevhund« (ganz aufgezogen),
Canis pallipes (punktiert). Nåheres siehe den Text Pag. 23.
Vergleichen wir unseren Errindlevhund mit Canis pallipes, dann .
finden wir in der Tat mehrere Eigentimlichkeiten, die beiden Tie-
ren gemeinsam sind — um die Beurteilung zu erleichtern habe
ich ausser den auf den Tafeln wiedergegebenen Photographien
(2, 6, 12 u. 15) auch die Textfiguren 3 u. 4 gezeichnet. In diesen
Figuren habe ich (in ganz aufgezogener Linie) die Konturen des
Errindlevhundschådels abgebildet und hierin die Konturen eines
Canis pallipes so eingezeichnet, dass beide Tiere mit ibereinstim-
mender Basallånge dargestellt sind. (Beide sind ibrigens fast gleich
gross: Basallånge respektive 198 u. 193 mm).
Die Figuren zeigen die auffållige Ubereinstimmung in dem
Sehen wir uns zuerst die Dorsalseite an, so Zzeigt
die Gehirnregion dieselben Formverhåltnisse, und dasselbe gilt im
hohen Grade die lateralen Teile der Gesichtskontur — als Unter-
ganzen Habitus.
Indextabelle VI.
Die Stirn-
>
E Canis pallipes
5
S2 eå P ? P ;
Nummer im Verzeichnis der benutzten Wålfe Pag. 37 1 1 2 3 4 5 Tl
Indices. |
Hirnschådellånge (<100) - Gesichtsschådellånge || 97.5|101.9/106.7| 91519311) 97.5
Sturnlareinde rest NE SE ENNA are sk erne 1404 |138.9)138.8 | 135.6 | 132 | 144,5
Basallånge (<100) - Schnauzenlånge.......... 50.8| 3081 49.5) — —
> A ==Gaumenlan ge eee SOL BESZKON ES ÆG ESSEN ESPE RES SÅ
D =jochborenbreite meeen FE ES BISN FOSS MODES GAA SONG ER G2ES
Sj Ofinnbrelte ss SSG AGES REASON ES ON ED SKE 2057 ES 2
Basifacialachse (=100) - Basicranialachse ..... BOR HESTE GT BES 7S7E ES GESE ES ORD 38.8
Jochbogenbreite —=100) - Basicranialachse..... 491! 473| 44.3! 415 45.2 45
Gaumenlånge (=100) - Gråsste Gaumenbreite . || 62.2| 582! 66.3| 63.5! 63! 64,2
ka - Kleinste Gaumenbreite. ASLE EBERT SL SENE SPA ETS]
mg - Långe d. horiz. Teils d.
Gaumenbemen re na ERE NR 31.5| 33.6| 34.6| — = —
schiede sind nur zu verzeichnen, dass bei der Wildform (C. pal-
lipes) die Jochbogen etwas mehr auseinanderweichen, und die
Schnauze ein wenig breiter iber den Eckzåhnen ist.
25
breite ist ungefåhr dieselbe und die Lage des Stirndreieckes fast
identisch, was um so schwerwiegender ist als dies bei den Hun-
den und Wolfen eben nur diesen zwei Formen eigen ist.
Das Bild der Gaumenflåche ist auch fast identisch, Gaumen-
långe und Gaumenbreite sind gleich gross, und man findet nur
einen kleinen Unterschied in der Streckung der einzelnen Kom-
ponenten der Gaumenbildung. Der Reisszahn sitzt bei dem Canis
pallipes ein wenig weiter nach vorn, was natirlich seine Erklårung
darin hat, dass bei diesem Tiere Platz fir den etwas gråsseren
Molaren geschaffen werden muss. Die Lage der Proc. postglenoi-
dales ist dieselbe, was wiederum bedeutet, dass die Gelenkflåchen
fur den Unterkiefer iibereinstimmend liegen und dass damit die
mechanischen Verhåltnisse beim Kauen dieselben sind.
Die Proflbilder (Fis ku 25 Fafel zeigen uns; dass” die
Wildform einen stårkeren Crista sagittalis hat und dass sie —
trotzdem dass die Stirn flach ist — eine deutlich konkave Ge-
sichtskontur besitzt.
Die Messungen der Individuen von Canis pallipes, woriber
ich verfigen konnte, sind auf der Messtabelle II aufgefihrt, ich
werde hier ferner in einer Reihe von Indices (Pag. 24) zeigen,
dass die von mir hervorgehobenen Åhnlichkeiten nicht zufållige
Ubereinstimmungen zwischen zwei Individuen sind, sondern wirk-
lich Charaktere, die der ganzen Gruppe eigen sind.
Obenstehende Indices zeigen die Åhnlichkeiten — ich mache
vor allem auf den Stirnlageindex aufmerksam. Bei keinem anderen
Wolf noch gråsserer Hunderasse ist der Index so hoch.
Wo der Errindlevhund in einem Index ausserhalb der Varia-
tionsbreite des Canis pallipes fållt, da sind es stehts Verhåltnisse,
die derart sind, dass die domestizierte Form abweichen musste,
falls sie von der betreffenden Wildform abstammen sollte. Wenn
wir uns einen domestizierten Hund aus einer Wildform entstanden
denken sollen, dann miissen wir — in Ubereinstimmung mit dem,
was wir von den Ånderungen wissen, denen Wolfe in der Gefan-
genschaft unterliegen (siehe Wolfgram 26 und Nehring 12)
erwarten, dass die Zåhne schwåcher werden, wennauch nicht viel
— eine Schwåchung, die ganz natirlich von einem Schwund der
Kaumuskulatur begleitet wird, was wieder in eine weniger ent-
wickelte Crista sagittalis und. eine Abflachung der jJochbogen
26
resultiert. Dass eine Schwåchung der Kaumuskulatur diese Ab-
flachung der Jochbogen bei dem Hunde verursacht, hat Anthony
und Pietkiewicz (1) experimentell nachgewiesen. Es findet sich
nur ein Verhalten, wo die Uniibereinstimmungen sich nicht ein-
fach durch Domestikation erklåren lassen. Beim Errindlevhund ist
die Gesichtshåhe kleiner und die Konkavitåt der Stirn-Nasenbein-
kontur fehlt. Man darf aber hierbei nicht vergessen, dass ich
unseren Errindlevhund als eine Primitivform der russischen Barzois
deute, einen Windhundetypus, der nicht als der urspriinglichste an-
gesehen werden darf; die hier auftretende Aufblåhung der Kno-
. chen in dem hintersten Teil der Gesichtsregion ist sekundår ent-
standen, und wir miisssen uns die beiden Hauptrassen der grossen
Windhunde als eine in dieser Beziehung den Greyhounds nåher
stehende Form entsprossen denken, denn in dieser Beziehung sind
die letztgenannten Tierée primitiver als die Barzois; Konkavitåt der
Kontur ist ja immer, wenn auch schwach, bei den wilden Formen
vorhanden.
Ich meine iibrigens, dass man diese Ursprungsform auch kennt,
wenn sie auch nur schlecht erhalten gefunden wurde. Noack hat
aus dem Neolithicum Deutschlands eine solche Form besehrieben
(15, Pag. 86), die er einfach Canis pallipes domesticus bezeichnet.
Leider fehlt der gråsste Teil des Gesichtes an den drei gefunde-
nen Schådeln, aber mittelst des Unterkiefers wurde die Schådellånge
geniigend genau festgestellt, und sowohl durch das Bild des Ver-
fassers wie durch seine Messungen wird man von der Uberein-
stimmung der zwei Formen iiberzeugt. Was von diesen Schådeln
noch ibrig ist, zeigt genau dieselbe Form des Gehirnschådels, die-
selbe Entwickelung der Stirnhéhlen und eine schwache Gesichts-
konkavitåt. Die Stiicke repråsentieren meiner Anschauung nach
ohne Zweifel eine Entwicklungsstufe in der Domestikation des
Windhundes.
Schwieriger wird es die Canis pallipes domesticus Hilzhei-
mers (2) in das Bild einzupassen; die Tiere stammen aus Ågypten
und werden mit dem ,,Chien levrierf von Lortet und Gaillard
(9) identifiziert. Was hier am befremdendsten wirkt ist die grosse
Breite der Stirn und dass diese scheinbar viel mehr nach vorn liegt
als bei den Windhunden und bei Canis pallipes.
27
Kurz pråzisiert ist also meine Anschauung iber die Abstam-
mung der Windhunde die folgende:
Die grossen Windhunde!) sind von Canis pallipes ab-
zuleiten — es entstand zuerst durch Domestikation
eine Form, die wir wahrscheinlich in den Hunden ken-
nen, die Noack (15) als Canis pallipes domesticus beschrie-
henkhagkermetormidietzuerstinursehr wenigtvonder
Wildform'srechtentfernt amsidieser Eorm oder viel
lerjenmanskernerkvonkdieserthervorges angenen må her
kannkdiesevorlamtemnientebestimmt werden sinddann
meen trassenkderWindhundeetrdieBarzorsund
die Greyhounds entstanden, in derSchådelform nåhert
sich fast in allen Zigen der Barzoi den Canis pallipes
am meisten, und die Unterschiede werden von einer
Kasseknberbruckerdie wir her talsidensErrindlevhunde
kenmensselernthabeneindemtdresertingvielensBez ie
Hum enketnetMnttElSs telnet inn mm EEN ar nerne
MVerhaltniskhabenidretengslischen Windhunde sichipri-
uiskuerterhaltenkdlskdietBarzoisttsie besitzenknoeh
des urspronoslienenkonkaverGesichtskonturitberden
Barzors' ist dagegen fruh'eine Aufblåhung. des hinte-
ren Gesichtsteiles entstanden, die zu dem konveksen
Gesichtsprofilksefunrt hat
Die vermittelnde Stellung des Errindlevhundes zwischen C. pal-
lipes und den jetzt lebenden Windhunden wird auch sehr instruktiv
aus den Textfiguren. 5 u. 6 veranschaulicht. Ich habe hier den
Errindlevhund in ganz aufgezogener Linie gezeichnet und den
Schådel eines modernen Windhundes mit derselben Basallinge des
Schådels hierauf projiziert, man bemerkt hier deutlich die geringere
Jochbogenbreite sowie die etwas gråssere Streckung des vorderen
Teiles des Gaumens des letzteren; gross sind -—— wie man sieht —
in diesem Falle die Unterschiede nicht; vergleiche iibrigens hier-
mitidiertexthourentskund rt bags 23:
1) Die kleineren Rassen der Windhunde werden hier nicht besprochen,
hierfir fehlt es mich an Vergleichsmaterial um mich ein selbstståndiges
Bild der Entwickelung bilden zu kånnen, den AÅuseinandersetzungen
Hilzheimers nach (2, 3) ist aber eine Abstammung von Canis lup-
aster sehr wahrscheinlich.
al 6.
Tekstfigg. 5 u. 6. Umrisszeichnung des Schådels von dem »Errindlevhunde« (ganz
aufgezogene Linie) und von einem modernen Windhund (punktiert).
Nåheres siehe den Text Pag. 27.
TIT.
Canis pallipes Sykes.
Der indische Wolf, Canis pallipes, hat in der Diskussion iiber
die Herleitung des Haushundes schon frih eine Rolle gespielt.
Jeitteles (6) glaubte in dem Tiere den Stammvater des Bronze-
alterhundes, Canis familiaris matris optimae, zu sehen und wie
schon erwåhnt (Pag. 26) ist das Tier von Hilzheimer und von
Noack in domestizierter Form als C. pallipes domesticus beschrie-
ben worden, ohne dass doch die von den zwei Forschern beschrie-
benen Tiere mit einander etwas zu tun haben, und verglichen
worden sind.
29
Die Abstammungstheorie Jeitteles's wird von Studer be-
stritten (22); dieser Forscher stitzt sich hierbei auf Messungen,
die er an indischen Wålfen, dem britischen Museum angehårend,
vorgenommen hat — die vollståndigsten Messungen der Tiere, die
ich in der Literatur gefunden habe.
Wåhrend meiner Untersuchungen iber den Errindlevhund, wurde
es fir mich von Interesse die Studerschen Messungen an Canis
pallipes mit mehreren neuen Maszen zu ergånzen, und der Direk-
tor des britischen Museums, Dr. Harmer, hatte gleich die grosse
Liebenswiirdigkeit solche von Herrn Dr. Hinton vornehmen zu
lassen. Es stellte sich bei dieser Gelegenheit aus, dass dem ge-
wissenhaften Forscher, Prof. Studer, mit seinen Messungen von
Canis pallipes ein Unglick passiert ist, indem sie in irgend einer
Weise mit anderen Messungen vertauscht worden sind.”) Nachdem
es sich herausgestellt hatte, dass die Studerschen Messungen
leider nicht zu verwenden waren, wurde es wieder aktuell, ein
Material von indischen Wålfen gemessen zu bekommen um aufs
neue die Konstanz der Form und ihre eventuelle Artberechtigung
zu prifen; Dr. Hinton hat bereitwillig diese Messungen ausge-
fihrt, und ich verdanke ferner der Liebenswiirdigkeit des Dr. Har-
mer zwei Schådel selbst untersuchen zu kånnen — ein erwach-
senes Weibchen und Månnchen.
Ehe ich zu den Resultaten meiner Untersuchung ibergehe,
werde ich kurz die in der Literatur vorhandenen Angaben iber
Canis pallipes erwåhnen.
Die Auffassung von der Artsberechtigung des Canis pallipes
ist bei den Untersuchern sehr verschieden. Huxley (5, Pag. 278)
ist der Meinung, dass das Tier nur als eine Lokalvarietåt des
Canis lupus betrachtet werden kann — andererseits sagt er, dass
1) Ich hatte an das britische Museum die Bitte gestellt, supplierende Mes-
sungen von den Tieren, die Studer in seiner Arbeit iiber die pråhisto-
rischen Hunde (21) auf der Tabelle Pag. 16 als Nummer 11, 12 u. 13
angefiihrt hatte, zu bekommen. In seinem Briefe teilt mir Dr. Hinton
folgendes mit:
»Studer gives the basal length of these 3 skulls as POT PISSE
208 mm, respectively. There are two serious errors in this statement
since the basal lengths of the three skulls are really 174, 191, & 207
mm, respectively. It is evident, that Studer's notes have become con-
fused in some way."
30
Canis pallipes ,more nearly approaches the Jackals than any other
Old-World Wolf I have seen”. -
Miwart schliesst sich in seiner Monographie der Caniden (11)
Huxley an; aus den biologischen Mitteilungen iber das Tier
zitiere ich folgendes: ,As to the habits of the indian Wolf, Mr.
Blandford informs us it does not associate in large packs ....
It is very rarely that its voice is heard, and, it does not howl like
iheEnropeanl Wok emree The Indian Wolf is remarkable both for
its speed and its power of endurance.f" Aus weiteren Auseinander-
setzungen geht es hervor, dass das Tier im Stande ist eine Schnel-
ligkeit wie die der Windhunde zu entwickeln.
Nehring trennt jedenfalls in einer Arbeit uiber den Wolf von
Nippon (13) Canis pallipes von Canis lupus, indem er die auf-
fållig schwache Bezahnung hervorhebt.
Auch Hilzheimer scheint diese Auffassung zu haben; ich
finde allerdings keine Diskussion der Frage in seinen Arbeiten,
schliesse mich aber zu seinem Standpunkt wegen seiner Beschrei-
bung eines Canis pallipes domesticus.
Winge (24, Pag. 187) bezeichnet C. pallipes als Art; er cha-
rakterisiert das Tier als ,;meget nær ved at være Mellemform mel-
lem Ulv og Sjakalf.
Am bestimmtesten und ausfihrlichsten åussert sich Noack (15);
erfschreibt (bas S7)ER DeErtindische Wolffist nicht wie N emne
glaubte eine Abart von Canis lupus, sondern eine sehr gute Art.
Er ist erheblich kleiner als Canis lupus .... Er heult nicht, son-
dern bellt zuweilen. Der schlanke Schådel unterscheidet sich,.
ausser der etwas stårkeren Erhåhung iber den Augen von dem
des Canis lupus besonders durch den Bau der Schådelkapsel ....
Bei Canis pallipes ist die vordere Einschnirung kirzer und die Breite
in der Mitte und besonders nach hinten viel erheblicher [als bei
C. lupus], ganz åhnlich wie bei Chakalen und den meisten Haus-
hunden. Folglich ist auch die Schådelkapazitåt und die Gehirn-
masse beim indischen Wolfe relativ gråsser als beim europåischen.
In der neuesten Zeit hat sich der bedeutende Såugetierkenner,
Lydekker (10, Pag. 138) iiber Canis pallipes geåussert; seiner
Anschauung nach ist das Tier eine gute Art — seinen Mitteilungen
entnehme ich folgendes: ,,Among the members of the dog tribe,
the European Wolf (Canis lupus) just enters the [indian] area,...
31
but is elsewhere replaced by the indian Wolf (C. pallipes). India
from the Himalaja to the south, especially the open plain country,
forms the principal habitat of this animal, which is rare in hilly
and wooded parts .... In some respects it approaches the jackal,
being smaller than the European Wolf without wooly under fur,
andewiti the hair "generally "shorter 31%. it is a silent animal,
which only now and then barks like a paria dog, and seldom or
hardly ever howls... The young are born blind, with pendent ears.
They are easily tamed, when they behave like domesticated dogs;
and it is possible that the pariah dogs of India are partly descended
from the present species, which appears to sometimes breed with
village-dogs. It is probable that the Indian Wolf is the ancestor of
some of the European breeds of domesticated dogs."
Was man in der Literatur von kraniologischen Angaben findet,
ist sparsam, und die Angaben widersprechen teilweise einander.
Nach Noack (15) ist die Stirn håher als bei Canis lupus, nach
Stunder (21 Pag. 9) ist der "Schådel durch flache- Stirn "und -efne
gerade Profillinie ausgezeichnet, wogegen Nehring (13, Pag. 3)
die Stirn als gewålbt und breit beschreibt.
Studer (21) charakterisiert ferner die Schådelkapsel als schon
gewdlbt; die Jochbogen sind stark, die Schnauze erscheint etwas
spitzer und niedriger als bei europåischen Wolfen. ,,Doch kommen
"unter diesen Schådel vor, welche sich durch sehr gerade Profil-
linie, breite Stirn und Parietalgegend auszeichnen."
Um mir ein geniigend genaues Bild des Schådels des indischen
Wolfes im Verhåltnis zu Canis lupus verschaffen zu kånnen, habe ich
zum Vergleich 39 Schådel des,Wolfes untersucht") und habe neben-
bei die Messungen Studers (21) Hilzheimers (2) und Kau-
derns (7) in den Vergleich mit hinein bezogen.
Zuerst werden wir uns die Formenverhåltnisse des Schådels
des indischen Wolfes an den Figuren eines erwachsenen Weibchens
ansehene(Eis82 0 Tafel 5 6/Tafel II; 1251515" Tafel MD:
Der Gehirnschådel ist entschieden gestreckt und grazil, und
die Seiten sind — wie es Studer hervorhebt — stark gewdlbt
im Gegensatz zu den gewohnlichen Wolfen, wo die Seiten gewohn-
1") 30 von diesen stehen in der Messtabelle II, 9 sind Exemplare von C.
lupus occidentalis, Polarwolf, mit einer Basallånge von: 198, 211, 207,
205, 225, 209, 224, 219 u. 207 mm.
32
lich recht flach abfallen. Die Schådelenge liegt weit nach hinten
und ist im Verhåltnis zur Hirnschådellånge wenig tiefgehend. Der
Gesichtsschådel ist gleichfalls gestreckt und — besonders hier beim
Weibchen — schmal. Die Stirn ist nicht relativ schmaler als beim
Wolfe. Die von Studer hervorgehobene gerade Profillinie finde
ich weder hier noch an einem månnlichen Schådel — es ist aber
durchaus keine Sattelbildung vor der Stirn entwickelt. Die Stirn
ist niedrig, Stirnhåhlen sind aber deutlich entwickelt. Die Ventral-
ansicht des Schådels (Fig. 12, Tafel III) zeigt uns den langen ge-
streckten Gaumen, das relativ schwach entwickelte Gebiss und die
stark aufgeblåhten Buliae.
Auch der Unterkiefer ist sehr schlank und gestreckt im Baue.
Die Eigentiimlichkeiten des Schådels im Vergleich mit Canis lupus
treten auch in den Messungen (Messtabelle II) deutlich hervor.
Wie von allen friiheren Autoren hervorgehoben wurde, ist der
Schådel des indischen Wolfes ungewåhnlich kleinmn — die Basal-
långe ist kleiner als bei fast allen bekannten Wolfschådeln, und
selbst wenn man — wie es Studer gelungen ist — Wolfschådel
nachweisen kann, die ebenso kiein sind, so zeigt doch die unten
Basallånge mm ||175!180|185!190!195/2001205/2101215! 220 ! 225 |230!235| 240 | 245
| |
CSnallipes SR 1 SÅREDE KEØ | 1
ClupusDRÆr 1 ES ES | HI ÆRE ES
angefihrten Tabellen und Berechnungen, dass es sich um zwei
Typen mit ganz verschiedener Variationsbreite handelt.
Auf die Schwåche des Gebisses bei Canis pallipes hat schon
7) Angefiihrt sind die in meiner Liste, Pag. 37, verzeichneten Individuen
und ferner ein von Nehring (13) gemessenes Individuum mit einer
Basallånge von 181 mm. Die Reihe ist klein, aber, da die Tiere aus
sehr verschiedenen Lokalitåten stammen, sehr repråsentativ.
Angefihrt sind die in der Liste Pag. 37 gemessenen Individuen, die in
der Anm. Pag. 31 erwåhnten 9 Polarwålfe, und dazu sind noch fur die
Berechnung hinzugezogen: Studer (21) Nr. 1—10, Hilzheimer (2)
Tabelle 2, Wolfe, und Kaudern (7) Tabelle Pag. 479. Um die Tabelle
Ubersichtlicher zu machen, sind die Tiere in Gruppen eingeteilt worden
— in der Gruppe 200 mm z. Bsp. sind alle Tiere mit einer Basallånge
des Schådels von 197.5—202.5 gesammelt u. s. w.
[54
E=T
33
Nehring (13) aufmerksam gemacht, es stehen hier die Pråmo-
laren mit viel weiteren Zwischenråumen in dem Kiefer als bei
Canis lupus; bei den zwei Individuen, die ich untersuchen konnte,
ist auch keine Rede von selbst Andeutungen einer Querstellung
des dritten Pråmolars, wie man es so håufig — und besonders bei
kleinen Individuen des Canis lupus — findet.
Der obere Reisszahn ist bemerkenswert klein, was deutlich aus
der untenstehenden Tabelle hervorgeht, in der Tat ja so klein,
dass er in den meisten Fållen in Gråsse ganz innerhalb des Va-
riationsgebietes der grossen Hunde fållt.
Tabelle der Reisszahnlånge.?”)
Millimeter...
21 22 FØ2S PÆNE 2S
|
no
1 3
Carisspallipes: 275 3 SR |
(Cornus UD SEERE
2
1
1
SE mekl2
Der Reisszahn des Canis pallipes ist auch bei allen von mir
gemessenen oder zitierten Individuen kleiner oder håchstens ebenso
lang wie die Gesammtlånge der beiden Molaren; bei Canis lupus
ist er dagegen gewohnlich gråsser als beide Molaren.
Den zwei Paaren von Variationsreihen: Schådellånge und Reiss-
zahnlånge, die von einander in so fern unabhångig sind, dass man
oft kleine Individuen mit grossen Zåhnen und umgekehrt finden
kann, habe ich eine statistische Behandlung unterzogen. Fir die
Basallånge des Schådels giebt diese Behandlung folgendes Re-
sultat:
Mittelwert der Basallånge des Schådels von Canis lupus 217.2
mr 155. mm.
Mittelwert der Basallinge des Schådels von Canis pallipes
10247 13.45 mm.
!) Ich habe hier dieselben Tiere wie in der Tabelle der Schådellånge ver-
wendet, mit Ausnahme der Studerschen Tiere; dieser Author findet
nåmlich an allen seinen Individuen eine Reisszahnlånge, die grøsser
oder gleich gross mit der Långe der beiden Molaren ist, und da ich von
dieser Regel eine nicht geringe Anzahl von Ausnahmen gefunden habe,
ist es måglich, dass wir nicht in derselben Weise messen, daher sind
die Tiere lieber nicht mittgenommen worden.
Vidensk" Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd, 72. 3
34
Es låsst sich hieraus den mittieren Fehler (M) einer Differenz
zwischen den zwei Reihen durch die Formel M = V mme
berechnen, wo mi und m2 der mittlere Fehler jeder der zwei
Reihen ist.… Wir finden M — 3,348.
Die Statistiker rechnen, dass zwischen zwei Variationsreihen
ein reeller Unterschied besteht, falls die Differenz zwischen ihren
Mittelwerten (D) gråsser als 3 M ist (M = mittleren Fehler der
Differenz zwischen den zwei Reihen).
Unterwerfen wir unseren Reihen diese Prifung, dann finden
wind ==57 EM
Das andere Paar von Variationsreihen, das die Långe des
oberen Reisszahnes betrifft, giebt in derselben Weise behandelt
folgendes Resultat.
Mittelwert der Långe des oberen Reisszahnes bei Canis lupus
PSR 0.2.
Mittelwert der Långe des oberen Reisszahnes bei C. pallipes
ØRER OLA
Mittlerer Fehler der Differenz zwischen den zwei Reihen M
== OS
Die Differenz zwischen den Mittelwerten der zwei Reihen (D)
es BE SE Mb
Die Behandlung beider Reihenpaare zeigt also unzweideutig,
dass reelle Unterschiede bestehen, trotzdem sie etwas iberein-
ander greifen; die statistische Berechnung beståtigt vållig den Ein-
druck der Formverhåltnisse und der direkten Messungen.
Ferner måchte ich auf den total verschiedenen Stirnlageindex
aufmerksam machen. Bei Canis pallipes (6 Individuen) schwankt
dieser zwischen 132 und 147.1; bei Canis lupus (30 Individuen)
zwischen 120.99 und 135.7 und dieser obere Wert wird nur von
einem Tiere erreicht — sonst liegt der Index stehts unterhalb der
Minimumsgrenze fir Canis pallipes.
In einer ganzen Reihe von Indices lassen sich auch andere
Variationsreihen feststellen, die nur teilweise tibereinandergreifen ;
sie beståtigen deutlich den Eindruck der Selbstståndigkeit der zwei
Formen.
Eine Erwåhnung verdienen auch die Extremitåtenknochen. Mein
Materiel ist allerdings sehr klein; ich besitze Messungen von
einem Individuum des britischen Museums und finde in der Li-
35
teratur Angaben bei Schlegel (18). Die absoluten Zahlen ste-
hen auf der Messtabelle III neben Messungen von drei Wålfen, die
vergleichshalber vorgenommen wurden. Die hieraus berechneten
Indices findet man auf der Indextabelle V. Es geht aus diesen
hervor, dass bei Canis pallipes die distalen Extremitåtenknochen
im Vergleich mit Canis lupus verlångert sind — Radius im Ver-
håltnis zu Humerus, Tibia zu Femur — ganz wie wir es bei
einem schnellen Låufer erwarten sollten, bekanntlich fihrt ja eine
Steigung der Schnelligkeit bei den Såugetieren immer zu einer
Verlångung der distalen Extremitåtenknochen.
Berechnet man die Långe der Knochen im Verhåltnis zur
Schådellinge (Indextabelle V), so sieht man auch, dass die Indices
beim indischen Wolfe bedeutend die des Canis lupus ibersteigen
und sich in derselben Weise åndern wie wir es bei den Wind-
hunden gesehen haben. Wahrscheinlich werden sich hier auch bei
Messungen eines gråsseren Materials trennende Charaktere kund-
geben.
Durch die Untersuchung des Skelettes wird die Speciesberech-
tigung des Canis pallipes dem Canis lupus gegeniber meiner An-
schauung nach bewiesen, und die oben zitierten biologischen Eigen-
timlichkeiten des indischen Wolfes stiitzeri diese Auffassung. Gegen
eine Charakterisierung des Canis pallipes nur als eine geogra-
phische Rasse des Canis lupus spricht auch stark die von Ly-
dekker mitgeteilten Einzelnheiten in der Verbreitung der zwei
Formen. Lydekker schreibt: ,It (Canis pallipes) occurs on the
right bank of the Indus, but on the left is replaced by the Euro-
pean Wolf, which is widely distributed over Asia, though not found
east of the Bay of Bengal" (10, Pag. 138). Dass eine solche Ver-
breitung von zwei sehr umherstreifenden und beweglichen Formen,
nur mit einem Fluss als Grenze, nur måglich ist, wenn es sich
um zwei Arten handelt, finde ich iiberzeugend ; geographische Ras-
sen, Lokalformen, fordern zweifelsohne um entstehen zu kånnen
ein in jeder Beziehung viel verschiedenartigeres Millieux als es
hier der Fall ist.
Das Resultat dieser Studie ist also, dass Canis pal-
lipes Sykes als eine selbståndige Art aufgefasst wer-
den muss — die deutlich von Canis lupus und seinen
Kassen zuttrennen ist.
38
36
Liste der untersuchten oder in der Messtabelle zitierten Hunde.
—å
”
Hund. Errindlev, Maribo Amt, Dånemark, Nationalmuseum, Vikingerzeit.
2. Hund. Næstved, Dånemark, Nationalmuseum, Grabplatz Grab Nr. I,
Vikingerzeit.
3. Hund. Vejleby, Laaland. Dånemark. Aus Kulturschichten des Eisen-
alters. Zool. Museum. Kopenhagen.
»Grand Danois” ? >/1, 1902. Tierårzliche Hochschule, Kopenhagen.
»Grand Danois" ? 1/2, 1902. ES 3 >
»Grand Danois" do Zoologisches Museum, Kopenhagen, Nr. 1013.
»Grand Danois" dg Bendz 1844. Tierårzliche Hochschule, Kopenhagen.
,»Grand Danois $ "1, 1912. E: så &
.—11. ,,Grand Danois”, Landwi-tschaftliche Hochschule, Berlin. (Zitiert
nach Hilzheimer, Die Steinauer Knochenfunde, Pag. 515).
I1a. ,,Grand Danois”, Zool. Museum, Kopenhagen (/3. 1904).
12. Scottish Deerhound'& ,,Marquis of Lornef, British Museum,
ceonNsgn
NråD$Si
13. ,Scottish Deerhoundf J ,,Ch. Rufford Bend” Or", British Museum,
Nr. D. 48.
Nummer 12 und 13 von Mr. Knud Andersen, British Museum, ge-
messen.
14... 15, 16. ,,Scottish Deerhoundf nach Studer, Die pråhistorischen Hunde-
rassen, Pag. 82.
17. ,Barzoi" ? altes Tier, "/4, 1898. Tierårzliche Hochschule, Kopenhagen.
DE sner Se RT E å å
19. ,Barzoi" & 1/2, 1901. ig z. i
20. ,,Barzoi" ? voll erwachsen, ”/s, 1908. ,, 55 an
MER Barzois ke 35 RE O0 ONES g å
PME Barzol ES RS . Anatomisches Institut a. d. Universitåt Chri-
stiania.
22a. ,Barzoi”, altes Tier, ”/s, 1910. Tierårzliche Hochschule, Kopenhagen.
23. ,,Greyhoundf P Nr. 134. Tierårzliche Hochschule, Edinburgh.
24. ,Greyhound" gg? Nr. 88. E % ig.
25. ,,Greyhound"f & ,,Fullertonf”. British Museum, London. Mk.99.7. 19.1.
GERE Greyhonndik PERON E da irye Ek 2 $ ;—DISS:
Die Nummer 25 und 26 sind von Mr. Knud Andersen, British Mu-
seum, gemessen.
27. ,,Glatthaariger Windhundf. Tierårzliche Hochschule, Kopenhagen.
28. ,,Glatthaariger Windhund"f & Museum Bergen Nr. 3031.
29. Bulldog 2 Museum, Bergen (2689).
30. Boxer Cd Ng SEERE (2ST7S)
31. Norw. Hasenhund (Bracke) & Museum, Bergen (2832).
32. Laweracksetter % Museum Bergen (2813).
33. Gordonsetter d 65 » — (2860).
34. Grauer Elchhund dd , »— (2934).
N ==
37,
Liste der untersuchten oder in der Messtabelle zietierten Wolfe.
Canis pallipes.
2 British Museum Mk. 4444 O. A. S. Hazaribagh, Indien.
Øg 52)
2
g %”
2
: ”
P
S 7
celler
”
bol
»”
bl
»
%”
sag O. S. A. Hazaribagh, Indien.
85. 8. 1. 52. (Von Studer 21 Pag.16 als Nr.11 der
Messtabelle aufgefuhrt) Sambhar, Rajputana,
Indien. V. Studer unrichtig als aus Kanda-
har angefthrt.
98 3.3.1. (Von Studer 21 Pag. 16 als Nr. 12
der Messtabelle aufgefuthrt) Sind, Indien.
56. 5. 6.42. (Von Studer 21 Pag. 16 als Nr. 13
der Messtabelle angefuhrt) Salt Range, Indien.
2696 C, Kathiawar, Indien.
1—2 von mir; 3—6 von Mr. Hinton, British Museum gemessen.
Zitiert nach Noack 15.
åd Zitiert nach Nehring 13.
Canis lupus.
? Museum, Kopenhagen, Mk. 720. Ardennen.
OUR VK KOUELDKOKORORUEOED
QG Q4 +0
”
”
»”
21 /ÆScChWwWeden!
»… 218. Schweden.
712. Dorpat.
216. Schlesien.
P22ÆSChlesien:
Museum, Christiania, Mk. 5174. Ringebu, Norwegen 1873.
5172: ER B
Se å bå
»… 2480. Norwegen 1854.
5851. Komagfjord, Norwegen 1879.
»… 3741. Norwegen.
» 4127. Norwegen 1864.
»… 4020. Norwegen 1863.
»… 3965. Norwegen.
Ostsibirien (Ørjan Olsen).
”
Museum, Kopenhagen, Mk. 1846. Hørmested, Dånemark (in einem
Moor gefunden).
1862. Knabstrup, Dånemark (in einem
Moor gefunden).
”
? Museum, Bergen, Mk. 2698. Karasjok, Norwegen.
b>j
”
»”
»”
2631. Norwegen.
2925. Kautokeino, Norwegen, 1917.
2926. sø &: ø
2955. Karasjok, Norwegen, 1917.
2933. 5 PA 1915.
2851. S Pa 1916.
34.
35.
36.
37:
38.
39:
18.
38
g É 2 »… 2850. in 5 g
d FÅ a » 2929. Kautokeino, , 1917.
R %” % ” 2924. ” ” b2l
ef Ø 3 »… 2600. Norwegen.
? » SEES E2268: ag
Tierårzliche Hochschule, Kopenhagen (Zool. Sammlung), ÅArdennen, 1873.
Literaturverzeichnis.
Anthony,R.etPietkiewicz, W.B. Nouvelles expériences sur le råle
du muscle crotaphyte (temporal) dans la constitution morpho-
logique du cråne de la face. Comptes rendus de Académie
des Sciences. Vol. 149, 1909.
Hilzheimer, M. Beitråge zur Kenntniss der nordafrikanischen Scha-
kale. Zoologica Vol. XX, 1908.
= Die Haustiere in Abstammung und Entwicklung. 1909.
== Die Knochenfunde der Steinauer Håhle. Abhdlg. d. Senckenberg.
naturf. Gesellsch. Vol. XXXI, 1913.
Huxley, T. H. On the cranial and dental characters of the Cinie
Proceed. zool. soc. I.ondon 1880.
Jeitteles. Die Stammvåter unserer Hunderassen. Wien 1877.
Kaudern, W. Der Polarwolf. Zool. Jahrb. Vol. XXI, 1905.
Keller, C. Ueber den Bildungsherd der sudlichen Hunderassen.
Globus. Vol. LXXV. 1900.
Lortet et Gaillard, C. La faune momifiée de Pancienne Égypte.
Archives du Mus. d'hist. nat. Lyon. Vol. 8, 1903.
Lydekker, R. Wild life of the world. London 1916.
Miwart, G. Monograph of the Canidae. London 1890.
Nehring, A. Ueber eine grosse wolfsåhnliche Hunderasse der Vor-
zeit, und iiber ihre Åbstammung. Sitzber. naturf. Freunde. Ber-
lin, 1884.
=— Ueber den Wolf von Nippon. Zool. Garten 1885.
— Zur Abstammung der Hunderassen. Zool. Jahrbucher. Abth. f.
Systematik. Vol. III, 1888.
Noack, Th. Ueber die Schådel vorgeschichtlicher Haushunde im Ro-
mermuseum zu Hildesheim. Zool. Anz. Vol. XLVI, 1915.
Pelzeln, A.v. Eine Studie uber die Abstammung der Hunderassen.
Zool. Jahrbucher. Vol. I. 1886.
Potting, B. Untersuchungen uber die Entstehung und die historische
Entwickelung der Bulldogge und des Mopses. Diss. Braun-
schweig, 1909.
Schlegel, F. R.. Die Extremitåten der Caniden, ihre Beziehungen
39
zur Korpersymmetri und die Verhåltnisse ihrer relativen Pro-
portionen. Archiv f. Naturgeschichte, 1912.
19. Strebel, R. Die deutschen Hunde und ihre Abstammung. Frankfurt
am Maim.
20. Studer, Th. Zwei grosse Hunderassen aus der Steinzeit der Pfahl-
bauten. Mitth. d. naturf. Gesellsch. Bern, 1893.
2l: = Die pråhistorischen Hunde in ihrer Beziehung zu den gegen-
wårtigen lebenden Rassen. Åbhdlg. d. schweizer. palåontol. Ge-
sellch. Vol. XXVIII, 1901.
22: —- Ueber den deutschen Schåferhund und einige kynologische Fra-
gen. Mitth. d. naturf. Gesellsch. Bern, 1903 (1904).
23: — Schådel eines Hundes aus einer pråhistorischen Wohnståtte der
Hallstattzeit bei Karlstein. Mitth. d. naturf. Gesellsch. Bern.
1907 (1908).
24. Winge, H. Bestemmelse af Dyrerester i ,,Affaldsdynger fra Stenalde-
ren. i Danmark", København 1900.
25. == Pattedyr. Danmarks Fauna Nr. 5. Kbhvn, 1908.
26. Wolfgram, A. Die Einwirkung der Gefangenschaft auf die Gestaltung
des Wolfschådels. Zool. Jahrb. Abt. f. System. Vol. VII.
Vorwort zu den Messtabellen.
Es war mit besonderen Schwierigkeiten verbunden dariber klar
zu werden, wie die verschiedenen Autoren Ihre Messungen ge-
nommen hatten, denn bei weitem nicht alle teilen dies mit. Es
ist — wie Hilzheimer betont — ein Messkanon fir den Haus-
tieren dringend nåtig, wodurch man — wie die Anthropologen —
auf feste, sichere Basis kommt.”) Ich habe nach Untersuchungen
an Zzahlreichen Tieren, die eine Reihe von Jahren gedauert haben,
mich fir die unten erklårten Messungen entschlossen — anfangs
sind ungefåhr 70 Messungen an jedem Schådel vorgenommen worden.
1. Totallånge: Von dem Hinterrande des Crista occipitalis bis an den
Vorderrand der i: Alveole.
2. Basallånge: Von dem Vorderrande des Foramen magnum bis an den
Vorderrand der i1 Alveole.
3. Basicranialachse: Vom dem Vorderrande des For. magnum bis an
die Sutur zwischen d. Basi- und Pråsphenoid.
4. Basifacialachse: Von d. Sphenoidsutur bis an den Vorderrand der
ii Alveole.
1) Brieflich haben Prof. Studer und Dr. Hilzheimer die Freundlichkeit
gehabt, mich iber ihre Messungen Erklårungen zu geben.
10.
IE
40
Hirnschådellånge: Von dem Hinterrande des For. magn. bis an
d. Hinterrand der Nasalia.
Gesichtsschådellånge: V. d. Hinterrande d. Gaumens bis a. d.
Vorderrand d. i1 Alveole.
Schnauzenlånge: V. d. Vorderrande d. Orbitae bis an d. Vorder-
rand d. i1 Alveole.
Långe der Nasalia: Gråsste Långe.
Gaumenlånge: V. d. Hinterrande d. Gaumens bis a. d. Vorderrand
d. i1 Alveole.
Långe des horizontalen Teils der Gaumenbeine.
ÅAbstand zwischen d. Hinterrande d. For. magnum und d.
Stirnmitte. Als Stirnmitte bezeichne ich den Punkt wo eine die
Spitzen der Proc. supraorbitales verbindende Linie die Stirnbeinnat
schneidet.
Abstand zwischen'd Stirnmitte und d, Vorderrandedsid
Alveole.
Schådelh6he: V. d. Grenze zwischen d. Prå- u. Basisphenoid senk-
recht bis zur Pfeilnat.
Gesichtshé&he: V.d. Hinterrande d. Gaumens senkrecht gemessen.
Håhe iber For. infraorbitale: Schnauzenhåhe v. d. Gaumen senkrecht
gemessen, im Niveau m. d. Hinterrande d. For. infraorbitale.
Breite des Hinterhauptdreiecks: Gråsste Breite.
Breite uber die Gehoråffaungen: Gråsste Breite uber Meat.
acustic. externus gemessen.
Schådelbreite: Gråsste Breite in der Ohrregion.
Schådelenge: Kleinste Breite hinter den Proc. supraorbitales.
Stirnbreite: Gråsste Breite uber den Proc. supraorbitales.
Kleinste Breite zwischen den Orbitae: Am Orbitalrande ge-
messen.
Jochbogenbreite.
Gråsste Gaumenbreite: A.d. åusseren Alveolenrande gemessen.
Kleinste Gaumenbreite: Hinter den Eckzåhnen.
Breite iber den Eckzåhnen: Am Alveolenrande gemessen.
Långe der Backenzahnreihe: Kronenmass.
Långe der Molaren: In Situ im Kiefer.
Fanserdertbramolaren:es re
Reisszahnlånge: A. d. Aussenseite gemessen.
Breite d. Reisszahnes: Ohne inneren Vorsprung.
1. Molar. Långe.
2.Molar. Långe.
Eckzahnhohe: A. d. Aussenseite v. d. Grenze zwischen Krone und
Wurzel gemessen.
Unterkiefer:
Totallånge v. Proc. angularis: Bis a. d. Vorderrand einer i1 Alveole.
Långe v.d. Mitte des Condylus: ;
Håhe des vertikalen Astes. V.d. Unterseite d. Proc. angularis.
b>l bl % 3%
41
4. Håhe des horizontalen ÅAstes hinter mi.
Si É 3 E FS zyischenplutps:
6. Långe der Backenzahnreihe: Kronenmass.
VÆRIsancelder Pram olaren: S
smbangerder Molen: A
9. Långe des Reisszahnes: An der AÅussenseite gemessen.
10. Långe von m2> + ms. Kronenmass.
HE Earse von p4:
IPS Waximale Dickerde's Kiefere
Reduktionstabellen im gråsseren Massstabe wird man in meiner
Untersuchung nicht finden, dagegen habe ich in besonderen Ta-
bellen gewisse Indices verwendet, die meiner Anschauung nach
die Formverhåltnisse am besten zum Ausdruck bringen. Vor allem,
meine ich, muss man ein nicht geringes Gewicht auf meinen Stirn-
lageindex legen, der — so viel ich es bis jetzt kontrollieren
konnte — eine nicht geringe Bedeutung bei den gråsseren Rassen
als rassencharakterisierendes Merkmal hat. Dieser Index ist aus-
gearbeitet worden um so gut wie måglich das Verhåltnis zwischen
den Lången des Gehirn- und Gesichtsteils des Schådels auszu-
driicken. Dass dieses Verhåltnis von Wichtigkeit ist, hat schon
lange Studer hervorgehoben, aber die Messpunkte, die dieser For-
scher und nach ihm mehrere Untersucher verwendet haben um die
Komponenten des Index festzustellen, sind meiner Anschauung nach
unbrauchbar — erstens ist die Grenze zwischen den zwei Schådel-
abschnitten, der Hinterrand der Nasalia, bei den meisten ålteren
Tieren nicht festzustellen, weil die Sutur verstreicht, zweitens 3treckt
sich das rechte und linke Nasale nicht selten verschieden weit
nach hinten, und drittens verschieben sich diese Knochen wåhrend
des Wachstums nach hinten; jiingere Tiere derselben Rasse kån-
nen deshalb oft ganz verschiedene Gråssen der Komponenten auf-
weisen — alles Schwierigkeiten, worauf schon Hilzheimer (2)
aufmerksam gemacht hat.
Wie grundfalsch eine Beurteilung eines Schådels nach dieser
Messungsweise werden kann, zeigt unser Errindlevhund und Næst-
vedhund. Vergleicht man z. Bsp. die Figuren der Tafel I—III, so
wird kein Mensch dariiber in Zweifel sein, dass der Errindlevhund
den am meisten gestreckten Schådel hat, die Indices der zwei
Tiere zwischen Gehirn- und Gesichtsschådellånge in der Studer-
schen Weise berechnet zeigen uns aber Zahlen (Errindlevhund
42
97.5, Næstvedhund 100), die den Errindlevschådel als mit relativ
kiirzeren Gesichtsteil karakterisiert. Und um ein anderes Beispiel
meiner Messtabellen zu wåhlen, so finden wir fir Nr. 21 der rus-
sischen Windhunde, also fiir ein Tier, dessen Schådel ad maximum
unter Caniden gestreckt ist, einen Index von 88.4, also einen Ge-
sichtsteil, der relativ so kurz nur bei einer meiner Doggen ge-
funden wird.
Diese Schwierigkeiten glaube ich in meinem Stirnlageindex
uiberwunden zu haben, wo ich als Grenze zwischen den zwei Schå-
delabschnitten die Stirnmitte (den Punkt, wo eine Linie zwischen
den åussersten Spitzen der Proc. supraorbitales die Sutur zwischen
den Stirnbeinen kreuzt) gewåhlt habe.
Auf die zwei oben genannten Hunde verwendet, erhalten wir
fur den Errindlevhund mit dem gestreckten Schådel einen Index
von 140.4, ;wåhrend der Næstvedhund mit seinem weniger gestreck-
ten Schådel einen Index von nur 120.2 zeigt. Unser Barzoi Nr.
21 hat einen Index von 140.4, wird also — wie er es ist — auch
durch den Index als gestreckt charakterisiert.
Stellen wir die hier behandelten Hunderassen in einer Reihe
der Schlankheit des Schådels nach auf, wie ich es unten getan
habe, und schreiben wir unter den Rassen ihren Stirnlageindex,
so stimmen — wie man sieht — die Indices mit dem subjektiven
Eindruck der zunehmenden Schlankheit des Schådels sehr schon
uberein.
Glatthaarige Langhaarige
Doggen Deerhounds Windhunde Windhunde
Stirnlageindex 108.5 130.1 129.3 130.4
bis bis bis bis
124,8 131.8 136.6 143.5
Indices, welche die relative Schådelbreite ausdriicken, habe ich
wenig verwendbar gefunden;, ich finde nåmlich, dass -kein bis jetzt
vorgeschlagenes Mass der Schådelbreite wirklich gut ist. Was zu-
erst die Schådelbreite, wie sie Studer misst, betrifft, also die
gråsste Breite in der Temporalnat, so variieren die Schuppenbeine
dermassen, dass das Mass bei identisch aussehenden Schådeln ganz
verschieden ausfallen kann, und bei ålteren Tieren verstreichen
die Nåte. Eine Maximalbreite der Gehirndecke låsst sich auch
nicht immer einwandfrei feststellen; handelt es sich um gut ge-
wolbte Schådel, dann geht es schon; aber wo die Seiten des Hirn-
43
schådels schråg und flach abfallen, ist es unmåglich feste Mess-
punkte zu bekommen. Etwas besser ist die. Breite des Hinter-
hauptdreiecks, hier kann man sicher messen, aber es klebt diesem
Mass der Fehler an, dass die Endpunkte bei Tieren verschiedenen
Alters sehr verschieden stark entwickelt sind; in noch håherem
Grade ist dies der Fall mit den Punkten, die die Breite iiber die
Gehåoråffnungen bestimmen, der Meatus acusticus externus schwankt
. ganz ungemein in Entwickelung. Die letzten zwei Masse habe
ich doch traditionstreu in der Messtabelle aufgefihrt, falls jemand
sie verwenden will. Dagegen habe ich die Håhe des Hinterhaupt-
dreiecks nicht mitgenommen, weil die Messpunkte hier oft iiber-
haupt nicht sicher festzustellen sind, und zu sehr nach dem Alter
und Geschlecht des Tieres schwanken. Dem Gedanken folgend,
man muss fir die Messungen Punkte wåhlen, die unzweideutig
und sicher festzustellen sind, habe ich auch statt der bei den Au-
toren so sehr variierenden Messungsweise der Gaumenbreite stehts
nur die gråsste und kleinste Gaumenbreite (hinter den Eckzåhnen)
gemessen, die Messungen sind an dem åusseren Alveolarrand zu
nehmen, wodurch stehts leicht und einfach genaue Messungen zu
bekommen sind. Andere Messungen, wie z. Bsp. Långe und Breite
der Bullae, Håhe und Breite des Foramen magnum u. s. w. sind
auch wegen schwer fixierbarer Messpunkte nicht verwendet worden.
Alle Messungen sind zwei Mal genommen worden, mit wenig-
stens zwei Tage Zwischenraum; wo sich dann Unibereinstimmungen
herausstellten, sind die Messungen das dritte Mal vorgenommen
worden. In dieser Weise haben sich ganz besonders deutlich un-
sichere Messungen entlarvt.
Tafelerklårung.
Fig. 1, Tafel I, 5 u. 9, Tafel II und 11, Tafel II. ,,Errindlevhundf.
2 FENG Kafe EP und IS Tafel IE Canis pallipes ?. British
Museum Nr. 1, 1914.
» Tafel I, 7 u. 10, Tafel II und 13, Tafel III. ,,Næstvedhundf.
» 4, Tafel I, 8, Taffel II, 14 und 16, Tafel III. ,,Deerhoundf Rufford Bend
Or. British Museum.
QW
1751920:
Ni: de Ek FS
|! i LE"
ht
"
id
i
N
'
i
|
F
3
b
Rg
k
.-
= i
re
is i
'
nm i
y
'
»
m
Gom0mIONRWN
mk kk mdk md (amml — —
OG 0 WWW (49) —
ma
=]
WDRVD DN NINE 0=
mB OW DN ma CD (0 00
WWW NI DDD
WN=- OCT
comdg & RwWwnN=
Die Nummer der Tiere beziehen
sich auf dem Verzeichnis Pag. 36
BE SEES ERE SEE EN eee
SRofallange SEE NENS
Bas allin rer Nes ger
sBasicranialaehse se
MBasilacialachsesere BEER KEE
NEirnnschadellange FERNESEEE
Gesichtsschådellånge ......
Schnauremang er Rene
«BanrederiNasallar er
AGaumenlange see RESSE
. Långe d. horiz. Teil d. Gau-
MEND SINE EPP
. Hinterrand For. magn.-Stirn-
EET SEE DEN SEES RENSEDE
. Stirnmitte-Vorderrand i1 alve-
OS DSE SENSE NESS SERENE:
ÆSehadeln oner KERES
SS Gesiehtsho her eee
. Hohe uber For. infraorbitale
. Breite des Hinterhauptsdrei-
BER RE ERE ES ge
. Breite uber den Gehoroff-
munens See ses
mSchadelbree rs Ene NEESE
Senate nere e eres EEN
Sen Dreier SEE ENE
. Geringste Breite zwischen
STOP YE REESE RER TE BE
SJ oshbopgenbreite FREE
. Gråsste Gaumenbreite ....
. Kleinste Gaumenbreite ....
. Breite uber den Eckzåhnen
. Långe der Backenzahnreihe
sanser der Molarensekssere
. Långe der Pråmolaren ....
BRerszzabmekange eres
E Bretern SS SELDE
Erste Molar Lange Free
mzwelte Molarmi baner Ree
SEckzaknstloneee essere
Unterkiefer.
. Totallånge v. Proc. angularis
. Långe v. d. Mitte d. Condylus "|
Håhe des vertikalen Åstes.
Håhe des horizontalen Astes
hint mi RER ERNE
Håhe des horizontalen AÅstes
ZVIS CD ENEDES REE
Långe der Backenzahnreihe
Långe der Pråmolaren.....
mlbansen deri Ol ARENSE
mltanserdesREelsZannes Eee
mEanger von nn ss
RANE VO DA RR Rape
. Maximale Dicke des Kiefers
Errindlev
»Grand Danois«
Nach
Hilzheimer
— ————
ma
d
718 1 OT MONE
En 0)
e
239 |
212
359
153
127
120
100
92
121
45
113
BED I I I
122 | 129)"
137| 140| — | — | —
DT EGSS RS RES —
501 45 | — —
SN ESS ==
77.5! 74) 78 07 Æ 76 RSD
5) 26). 23 AES REE RES
3.51 55) 61). Fee
5) 23) 25 ENS ES RRS
Ol. <= 1 Ene ER ne
183 |; 1977-85
elle I.
»Scottish deerhound« Glatthaariger Windhund
»Barzois«
Nach Studer
(21, Pag. 82) k: »English Greyhound«
— -< ] EN
FEE IGF | 312] 57 4] 5] | 7]
Fe 58 60 | 58" 6010557 | 50) 511; 54] 51) 48) 53) 55) 51| 54) 53
63 7453] 155| 150) 152449) 143| 140) 145| 142) 127) 129|.145| 137) 145| 13
32 | 126! 118| 123| 119| 117| 114| 109) 112/ 121/ 109] 99|105| 110| 107| 110! 110
31 | 123 125| 127) 119| 1321171 111) 112| 107] 113| 96| 108| 116| 107| 115| 109
18 (145 | —) — | 109) 102) 100| 99|100|100| 85| 89|102| 96| 100! 96
| 89| 83
— | — | — | — | — | 37| 33) 34) -34| 42) 33) 321 34| — | — 40! 35
161110! — | — | — | 107) 1021. 92! 98! 100! 94 | 875890 HE 99 HE 93 HERO ERD8
51 (45 —— 145! 133) 1321 133) 135| 132 /112.5| 118 | 133) 127 132 | 127
BSN ESS NOS VEGA EGO HESS FESD 55 DSO AG KT AÆ NAS STESO SR 0
så (57) — | — 6ONDE5SS 755 556 SÆS 47) 43 45 SÆT SÆT 757 47
SES GE BE 1 TS SÆ 34 30 3231 STU SSI er ON] SE z2yl | 33 | 29
ARR ES SE 73169 66 68] 715) 66] 58] 62 68 64 70 566
SENER RGS 70 KEY FEGGET6T 655] 63.5] 165 1 56 6064 763] 6762
GE HEGS HE GO FESTE 65 625] 64] 665] 62 58:55:59 5] 66] 164 169 62
SÅRE 6) BES EPE 40) FE S37 1 37.5] 41.51 325] 37) 35) 36) 421 361 43405
PESIERGS EG EGO EGO FSI FO FTAS 60] 471 54) 50:51 51] 61 52] 756 55
AD EPE KRÆ 40 ÆT 42 | AT 32 395 33] 36 | SÆT 33) 42] 356 133:5] 1735
CO MT25 1201 111] 114) 98 5) 104) 91) 97) — | 100! 99.5) 96)! 110! 1011 1051) 105
CA NGSS NT ET 671 611 61) 611 621 601 571 571 66) 62:51 641595
BE ESS SE ES 5 33 28 31 27.51 33) 27:57 28 1 29 - MISES SNEEST
Eee 37 33 37 SÅN 37] 32 V 305] "32 --NT HES6ES
84| 83| 83| 80| 78! — EET ET TA MEE ETS EA ET TA NEED STE ASE
HE ES BED OI REDIESS OD FEDT RDS FED SID TEDE SIND VETO FPP 27 22 23
OS Er —E 5857] 59) 581 57) 5151 58 52 58 NS
PJ RED? HED 20 TO DO AE SND TONE BON HOT 16] 16 19 175 20 ES
ENERET TE] 10 9 So ESS SIGES ESI RT === 8 8
SEES BE ESS ESS SÅ ETÆN HAN STA N13 5) 12 1215 5 135] ÆS B
8 z| == == SYES SEES ES 8 8 T. TINES:SN ESS 8/0
PE RE RE ER NO FED O NE HEDD NU OD EDT 5 46) 181 25] 2 23 22
SO EEES DE eee 69) 467 (451 160159 1155) 140145 | 16311541 1657 153
3.5/181.5| — | — | — |172.5| 166| 155! 158| 160! 157| 140| 147| 166| 155! 165! 157
63| 645) — | — | — | 58| 58.5) 53| 52| 54| 53| 48| 51) 56.51 53) 58) 537
BEES ES SE DTS BO] 22 22 NV 23) 19.5) 1924 235 23 ELÆS
BE ED ET re HON HAS EPO TS 481 17.5] 17165] 21 1 20 RE
OSS KEE] 1865) 851 "87.5) — |" 831) 721 76) SÆ! —80'" 87. 79
DE ES re 59 FAgS SE 4815 47548 | 40 425 48) 457 8405 45
EEN REE HE 40 EAD 40 36] 33). SÆL 138 135 39 35
ES 7 RO) 53] DE NÆS FOD 93 ET 95 520 PAS HOED EGEDES REDE
8.51 15| —.| — | — | — | 16! 17| 15.5'ca.18| 14 135 TÆ TSS ÆSKER ES
BED ES 43 405 144.57" 33 FM 1 AN 13105 13 ET
95| 12| — | — | —-| 9 MOSER 9 SEES EROS EKO
Messtabelle III.
Humerus| Radius | Femur Tibia så a|s
D & G SIE ERE ES RS
Messungen der 5 | ES HEE EET ED] MRESE NESE ESS sa Ass es
Extremitåtenknochen SBB Sta ES MRS ESS ES KOS Ar rr sa
BES NSKSR NSESE RS ES BADE NE SES RSD ra HESS BESES STR HEDDE es
(ESS EKS KO FSS ESS SA KOT DS) KS KE SSR EØS SEES SEES
ER HD ES] NES 5 E- 38 KESE RESEN ESE SEDs tr Fee SE
SI EGSA) BEES RRS SER KURESED KS SESE Kcal Es
på (<a æ å må
FErmindlevhund. 3. X | — | 15206 | 16.5 225 16.5 "223)15.5 | — "4481198 | 54
BEN æstvedhund 2122 s 11801145./178| 15./195/1451191! 141358|3861)193 t 52
BER Bar ole Sr TS rele (231 11655233] 1611258 11751263 | 181464 1521 1218160
22: re En (OD FEAR DTS BET ÆSD STE RESIS DSI FE TAN DO AG SETS EST
2 Glatthaariger Windhund :. 1219" 15/223115:51238| 16)/238 | 15) 4421476 1199 154
28. E Z DOT EDT ET ÆL DTG EA FPIS SST 43990 ES
REM Grand Danois. ser PAL KREDS PAA BEDT UDEN EDI FAGET RED ORDNES REED
res REESE 124715 231249) 231278 "22.5. 2681225 49615461 232 168
| Keam |.ca.
7 g MER Er SEE 1223 221222! 211245! 191250!.201445149512161 60
PORT dose SEER LAN | 1541 15 1154 SULTE SIGES BOS ESS ORESTES
BUR Boxers END ne eve (155) 141154/14.5/165)! 131169! 13/30913341145! 48
Se Norw:EHasenhund . . 150% 1311411 151156) 141146) 141291130211681t 50
SN Eaweracksetter men TES HSG HESSEN REESE ON HREESERSSEE IS OPSI RAD
BSk Gordonsetter sus (1911 161196)16.5/210114.512091'14.513871419/1931 56
BAM GranertElchhunds 55. USA ETS EST ET EGO SES GA FSA EST 3330 46
Canis lupus. |
i Sehve dens 233 121617 12141 1712231 171223 161430 1446 212 ESS
FSESENlesrens EAR K. ST HR 2058 HEST KODA ET GIS KEE AT SAG DNS ESS
ca.
SORBAR ENN ENE 5 cs 217 EG IBIS ETS DAS NET EN P2O 85435463 228 063
Canis pallipes.
Sa SENE ae een LOE FETS RO | 203 | TÆS PIA 13] AT TS EEE
1) Diese Messungen sind fast iberall identisch -m. d. Breitendurchmesser d. Knochenmitte.
SE
-
0]
Ni
4
-
å
= ARKETE un
Notes on some Scandinavian Echinoderms,
with descriptions of two new Ophiurids.
By
Dr. Th. Mortensen.
The preparation of the volume on the Echinoderms for the
work , Danmarks Fauna" has made it a necessity for me to enter
on several questions, systematic or nomenclatorial, concerning some
of the Echinoderms of our seas. The said work being of a more
popular character and in the same time written in the Danish
language I deem it my duty to publish in a separate paper, partly
the description of a pair of new species of Echinoderms from the
Scandinavian seas, partly a few critical notes on some of these
species, relating now to their specific characters, now to nomen-
clatorial questions connected with them.
The notes here given have mainly reference to the Ophiurids.
That no Holothurian is mentioned in this paper needs not mean
that I have nothing to say regarding that group. It is in the first
line due to the fact that I have not yet had the opportunity of
working up the Holothurians for the said work. But, in any case,
I have thought it proper to publish these notes without any further
delay.
1.…. Ophioscolex purpureus Diiben & Koren (Fig. 1).
Recently Grieg has come to the result that this species can-
not really be distinguished from O. glacialis M. & Tr. but that it is
nothing but a smaller boreal variety (or racial form — ,,Avæn-
dring" — of the more robust arctic species O. glacialis"). The result
1) See especially: James A. Grieg. Bidrag til kundskapen om Hardan-
gerfjordens fauna. Bergens Museums Årbok 1913, 1, p. 125—30. (Also
the same authors: Sognefjordens Echinodermer. Arch. f. Math. & Natur-
vid XXXII, Nr:.11,. 1912, p: 8.
46
of my examination of quite an extensive material of the two named
forms is absolutely at variance with the result arrived at by Grieg,
whereas I must, upon the whole, confirm the statements of M.
Sars (Norges Echinodermer, p. 8—12). I hope the following notes
will convince also Grieg that there cannot be the slightest doubt
that O. purpureus is a very well distinguished species, which —
Fig. a, c, d. Ophioscolex purpureus; b, e. O. glacialis. a, b. ventral side, d, e. dorsal
side, showing radial shields and base of arm. c. side view of arm, outer part. 6/1.
on a closer examination — is always easily distinguishable from
O. glacialis.
The mouth papillæ do not afford any very reliable distinction
between the two species; but, upon the whole, they are somewhat
more numerous in purpureus than in glacialis, as mentioned by
Sars; they are generally 6—10 in purpureus, distributed along
the whole mouth edge, the two outer ones being as a rule larger
than the rest; in glacialis there are 3—6 papillæ, situated at the
. inner part of the mouth angle, in larger specimens sometimes with
an irregular bunch of papillæ at the point. The mouth shields and
adoral plates afford more reliable distinguishing characters, espec-
ially the latter. In g/acialis the mouth shields are small, triangular,
and"the adoral plates carry a. spine, sometimiesitwos
47
over the second tubefoot; in purpureus the mouth shields
are considerably broader and there is no spine on the adoral plates.
(Fie ab):
While the ventral plates are about of the same shape in the
two species, the dorsal plates look very different. In glacialis they
are so little developed as to be observable only on a microscopical ex-
amination; what is seen in dried specimens is not the dorsal plates,
as Sars believed, but only the vertebræ (Fig. 1, e). In purpu-
reus they are well developed, covering the whole dorsal side of
the arm, so that in dried specimens the vertebræ are not seen;
in the inner part of the arm they are irregular in shape, farther
out there are two of them for each joint, as correctly described
by Sars (Fig. 1, d). — A microscopical examination of the skin
covering the dorsal side of the arm shows, however, that the only
real difference in the dorsal plates of the two species is this, that
they are much more delicate in glacialis than in purpureus; the
shape is in reality the same, and also in glacialis they are divided
in two parts exactly as in purpureus.
A very good, and perfectly constant, distinguishing character
is afforded by the armspines. In O. purpureus the two upper
SIE SEITE he omtrent part For thelarmfarertrans formed
imtoRnookskwhichsrsønever thecasetinglacalis (Fig Ac).
This feature was noticed by Sars (p. 9), who also gave a good
figure to illustrate it (Pl. I, fig. 10); only he makes the wrong
statement that it is the two lower spines which are thus trans-
formed, while in fact it is really the two upper, contrary to what
is otherwise the rule in Ophiurids, where spines are transformed
into hooks. — It is, indeed, curious that Grieg has overlooked
this fact; had he noticed these transformed spines, he would cert-
ainly never have come to the result that O. purpureus should be
nothing but a variety of glacialis. The difference in the general
character of the armspines — thick and smooth in purpureus,
thin and slender, covered with a thick coat of skin in glacialis,
is well pointed out by Sars and is seen also in the figures.
To these characters must be added the absence of footpapillæ
in glacialis and the presence of one, slender footpapilla in pur-
pureus — though perhaps not constantly present at all the pores,
as maintained by Grieg; these papillæ are very slender and in-
48
conspicuous, especially when standing erect; in specimens not dried
they are seen to support a small triangular flap of skin covering
the base of the tentacle at its proximal side. Further the disk
of O. purpureus is set with scattered, small spines, while
in glacialis it is entirely smooth. In alcoholic specimens these
spines are hard to see, but I have found them quite constantly in
dried specimens, though in varying numbers. Also the radial shields
are longer and more developed in purpureus than in glacialis
(Figs. 1, d, e). — In the internal anatomy there seems to be no
essential difference between the two species. |
O. glacialis grows to a much larger size than purpureus; the
largest specimens of the -former species at my disposal measure
ca. 35 mm in diameter of disk, while the largest specimens of
purpureus that I have seen, measure only ca. 15 mm in diameter
of disk. |
The presence of spines on the disk of O. purpureus approaches
this species to the genus Ophiobyrsa and makes it doubtful,
whether the latter can really be maintained as a separate genus.
This, of course, sounds rather paradoxical, since Ophiobyrsa is
regarded in modern classification of Ophiurids (Matsumoto) as the
type of a separate subfamily, Ophiobyrsinæ, of the family Ophio-
myxidæ, the difference between the two subfamilies even being
regarded as ,very sharp". Nevertheless, I think I am right, and
the supposed differences between the two subfamilies appear to
me rather unessential and confluent. At present, I cannot, how-
ever, enter on a detailed discussion of the question, — also for
the reason that the material of Ophiobyrsa and related genera
available is rather unsatisfactory.
2... Ophiomitrella clavigera (Ljungman) (Fig. 2).
The species described by Ljungman under the name of
Ophiactis clavigera was shown by Liuitken") to have nothing
to do with the genus Ophiactis, its true affinities being with the
genus Ophiacantha. Thinking that this species might possibly be
identical with O. Fr. Muller's ,,Astertas tricolor", he then named
it Ophiacantha tricolor (Abgd.). The latter identification, however,
") Luitken. Additamenta ad hist. Ophiuridarum. III. p. 32 (50).
49
is beyond doubt a mistake, the ,,Asterias tricolor" being evidently
an Ophiothrix (perhaps O. Læitkeni). — But in any case Liit-
ken saw correctly the affinity of this Ophiurid with the Ophia-
canthids. Lyman (,Challengerf Oph. p. 201) removed the species
to his new genus Ophiolebes, and since then it has been left there
by the few authors who have mentioned it, thus by myself in
Conspectus Faunæ Groenlandicæ, Echinodermer") and by H. L.
Clark in his Catalogue of Recent Ophiurans.”) Doubtless it is
also possible to find among the species referred to Ophiolebes such
as bear a considerable resemblance to O. claviger. Nevertheless,
if we compare it with the type species, O. scorteus Lym., with its
thick investing skin, covering disk and arms and concealing even
the armplates, it is evident that it is by no means nearly related
to that species and that it can hardly belong to the same genus.
And then it proves -to fit so well to the diagnosis of the genus
Ophiomitrella Verrill that I cannot hesitate in referring it to that
genus. Farran, in his paper on the deep-water Asteroidea, Ophiu-
roidea and Echinoidea of the West Coast of Ireland (Fisheries Ire-
land, Sci. Invest. 1912. VI. (1913), p. 44), also suggested that the
species ought to be removed from the genus Ophiolebes and ,,placed
with that group of species which includes Ophiacantha normani
Lyman, Ophiacantha cataleimmoida H. L. Clark, Ophiacantha
oididisca H. L. Clark, Ophiomitra globulifera Koehler, Ophio-
mitra relicta Koehler and Ophiomitrella cordifera Koehlerf. This
is, on the other hand, a ,groupf no less unnatural than that from
which Farran suggests to remove the species in question; and,
moreover, he still leaves the species in the genus Ophiolebes. (I
shall not enter on a discussion of the other species referred to
Ophiolebes, but I have no doubt that they do not rightly belong
there all of them).
In the ,,Échinodermes provenant d. campagnes du yacht Prin-
cesse Alice") Koehler describes and figures (Pl. XXIX, 1—2) a
species, Ophiomitrella cordifera, which is evidently very closely
related to, perhaps even identical with O. clavigera. The disting-
uishing characters are, judging from Koehler's description and
”) Medd. om Grønland. XXIII. 1913. p. 361.
”) Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. Vol. XXV. 1915. p. 193.
?”) Res. Camp. Scientif. Monaco Fasc: XXXIV. 1909. p. 192.
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 72. 4
50
figures, the somewhat more globular shape of the stumps on the
disk in cordifera and the different form of the oral shield and the
dorsal plates. The latter, however, are rather variable in clavigera,
£) in some specimens (notably in
one of Ljungman's cotypes
from the Skagerrak) very dis-
tinctly rhombic, in others with
the outer border more rounded.
The oral shield I have never
seen exactly of the shape given
by Koehler for cordifera, but
it is also rather variable in shape,
often quite irregular. Also the
length of the spines varies to no
small extent, thus in the cotype
mentioned they are distinctly short-
er and thicker than in the spec-
imen figured here (from Green-
land). The stumps on the disk
I have never seen so globular
as Koehler figures them, but I would not be inclined to think
that character alone a valid specific difference. I am therefore very
much inclined to think that O. cordifera will prove to be identical
with clavigera. — I would suggest also the possibility that Ophio-
lebes acanellæ Verrill is identical with O. clavigera. From the de-
scription given by Verrill it is impossible to see how it is to be
distinguished from that species; but as no figures have, so far as
I know, been published of O. acanellæ, nothing can be said defin-
itely about the question.
As I have shown in my paper on ,Hermaphroditism in vivipar-
ous Ophiurids" ") this species is viviparous and, besides, a proter-
andric hermaphrodite. Moreover, it is interesting in being the host
of a very remarkable (as yet undescribed) parasitic Crustacean,
probably a Copepod, with 4 egg sacs. The specimens infested by
the parasite are totally castrated by it.
Fig. 2. Ophiomitrella clavigera.
a. ventral side. b. dorsal side. ?/.
3... Ophiocomina nigra (0. F. Miller).
It was pointed out by Lyman (Challenger-Ophiuroidea. p. 168)
that this ,species, hitherto named Ophiocoma nigra, differs from
7) Acta Zoologica. I. 1920.
51
the other species of the genus Ophiocoma in having hollow arm-
spines as also in having a large and thick peristomial plate, this
plate being narrow, linear, divided in two pieces in the other
species. — Although stating that the character of the hollow spines
draws this species towards the genus Ophioconis, Lyman leaves
it im the genus Ophiocoma, to which it was referred by the pre-
ulouskauthorstt(For bes Muller &eTroschel Litken), "and
there it has remained until now H. L. Clark in his Catalogue of
Recent Ophiurids p. 205 has taken the rather startling step of re-
moving it to the genus Ophiacantha, and moreover of changing
the old species name nigra (O.F. M.) into sphærulata Pennant,
designating it thus Ophiacantha sphærulata (Penn.). Before giving
up the old, well known name of this.common Scandinavian Ophiu-
rid, however, a careful examination of the questions involved is
needed. It is evident, that only the most cogent reasons can induce
us to follow Clark in adopting that totally unfamiliar name instead
of the name Ophiocoma nigra, familiar not only to all the natur-
alists of Scandinavia and Northern Europe, but, it may well be
said, to Zoologists in general.
There are two main questions here: 1) to which genus it should
really be referred, 2) the identification with Pennant's ,,Asterias
sphærulata".
The differences between O. nigra and the other species of
Ophiocoma pointed out by Lyman are real enough; especially
the character of the spines is a noteworthy difference. To this I
would add another. conspicuous difference. In all the tropical spec-
ies of Ophiocoma the teeth are provided with a very conspicuous
point of an enamel-like structure (also found in Ophiomastix); in
ØO. nigra the teeth are devoid of this structure. (Lyman, Chall.
Oph. p. 168, mentions this point in the anatomy of Ophiocoma,
stating that the teeth have ,a quasi-enamelled grinding end" and
gives a figure therof, Pl. XLII, Fig. 13, which does, however, hardly
convey a very good impression of this striking feature; he does
not notice that it is not found in O. nigra). — It seems to me
that these points of difference are really of sufficient weight for
removing our North Atlantic species from the genus Ophiocoma.
— Most probably also the larvæ will prove to differ essentially ;
howewer, this point is not yet sufficiently established.
42
52
As pointed out bv Lyman O. nigra recalls to some extent
the genus Ophioconis. However, this resemblance is evidently a
more superficial character. Ophioconis (with its subdivisions) is
referred by Matsumoto — and correctly I do not doubt — to
the' family of Ophiodermatidæ; its appressed arm-spines alone afford
a very prominent difference from O. nigra; there is no necessity
for a detailed discussion of the relations between these forms;
surely nobody would maintain in earnest that O. nigra could be-
long to that genus.
But then Ophiacantha! In view of the fact that the Ophiacanth-
idæ and the Ophiocomidæ are referred by-Matsumoto to two
different orders, the former to the Læmophiurida, the latter to the
Chilophiurida, one should expect that Clark had produced very strong
reasons for removing O. nigra to Ophiacantha. This he has not at
all done. Without entering on a discussion of Matsumoto's orders,
which I do not think quite acceptable — especially the order Læm-
ophiurida, conprising the Ophiacanthidæ and the Hemieuryalidæ,
is, in my opinion, quite unnatural — I must state that I find the
referring of O. nigra to the genus Ophiacantha quite unjustifiable.
In regard to the inner anatomy it is about intermediate between
Ophiacantha and the typical Ophiocomd's, though somewhat nearer
to the latter. The wings of the first vertebræ are .decidedly larger
than in Ophiacantha, though not nearly so large as in Ophiocoma.
(— Apparently the strong development of the wings in Ophiocoma
has some connection with the peculiar mouth armature; the power-
ful muscles attached to these wings must enable it to very active
movements with its jaws, and the enamel point of the teeth in the
same time bear witness of an exceptional masticating power —-).
In regard to the peristomial plates and the articulation between
the genital plate and the radial shield it is much more like Ophio-
coma than Ophiacantha. Thus there is no support for its affinity
to Ophiacantha to be found in its inner anatomy. And then there
is a very essential difference, which Clark appears to have com-
pletely disregarded, viz. the presence of tooth papillæ in O. nigra,
which character is not found in Ophiacantha. And — in spite of
all efforts, especially by Matsumoto, to find characters of greater
systematic value — it is hardly possible to point out such struct-
ures of greater value than the mouth armature. But this character
53
decidedly assigns to O. nigra a place among the Ophiocomidæ, not
among the Ophiacanthidæ. It is also worth mentioning that the
black color' of O. nigra would make it absolutely unique among
the Ophiacantha's, while it is the usual coloration among the
Ophiocoma's.
After all I cannot doubt that the natural place of 0. nigra is
among the Ophiocomidæ, but that it must form a separate genus
within that family.
Having been informed by my friend, Prof. R. Koehler, Lyon,
that he has come to the same result and, in a memoir now in
press, has proposed the name Ophiocomina for the new genus
established for this species, I can only accept that name.
Regarding the second point, the identification with Pennant's
»Åsterias sphærulata”, I cannot agree with Clark either. Pen-
nant's figure of this species (British Zoology, Vol. IV, 1777, Tab.
XXXII, fig. 63) is so poor that it is really impossible to identify
it with any degree of certainty; that it is one of those species
with not appressed spines, is certain, but it may be said equally
well — or badly — to represent any of the three common Brit-
ish Ophiurids to which this character applies, viz. Ophiopholis
aculeata, Ophiothrix fragilis and Ophiocoma nigra. (Amphiura
is out of question). The text (Op. cit. p. 63) does not mention a
single feature which could give the definite proof that the species
meant is O. nigra. It runs thus: ,,Ast. with a pentagonal body,
smooth above the aperture; below five-pointed; between the base
of each ray a small globular bead; the rays slender, jointed, taper;
hirsute on their sides.” It is a model of å bad description. To
change the commonly used and familiar specific name nigra on
account of this description and figure into sphærulata seems to
me quite unpardonable. If it were a thing greatly to be desired
to make this change it might perhaps be done on this account,
since there is a possibility that Pennant really meant O. nigra
with his Ast. sphærulata; but since it would undeniably be a most
undesirable change, there is really not the slightest reason to do
so, even for those who want to carry out the priority rule liter-
ally, without regard to the unhappy consequences of that fatal rule.
The name of this species must then be: Ophiocomina nigra
(Abildgård).
54
The form described by Sars") as Ophiocoma Raschi cannot be
maintained as a species separate from O. nigra. All the characters
pointed out by Sars as specific differences from 'O. nigra (the
shape of the ventral plates, the shape of the mouth shields, the
number of mouth papillæ) are so variable that they cannot afford
any reliable distinguishing character. Also the number of armspines
can be 7 on the proximal armjoints in the typical O. nigra,.as it
is in O. Raschi. — After having examined the type specimens of
O. Raschi, which were kindly lent me for examination by Dr. E.
Arnesen of the Kristiania Museum, I cannot have the slightest
hesitation in declaring that Ophiocoma Raschi Sars is nothing than
a more robust deep water variety of O. nigra. I am informed by
Prof. Koehler that he has: come to the same” result <= From
another point of view it would be more natural to regard the large
form occurring in the Atlantic from the Azores to Norway as the
typical form and the smaller form occurring in the Kattegat and
the Norwegian fjords — partly in very shallow water, on Lami-
nariæ — as a minor, somewhat dwarfed variety. Since, however,
the latter is the form described by Abildgård, there can, from
a litterary point of view, be no question that this must range as
the typical form of the species.
4—5.. Amphiura borealis (G. O. Sars) and
Amphiura securigera (Dib. & Kor.).
(Fig. 3, a—f).
These two species appear to be, upon the whole, comparatively
rare, being mentioned rather seldom in literature, and the material
preserved in the museums is quite scarce. The discovery by the
late Miss Elisabet Petersson of the Gothenburg Museum that
Amph. borealis is viviparous induced me to undertake a more
close examination of this species, which led to the further discovery
that the species is also a proterandric hermaphrodite.”) The material
of the species preserved in the Copenhagen Museum being insuf-
ficient for the anatomical research I applied to the Bergen Mu-
') G O.Sars. Bidrag til Kundskaben om Dyrelivet på vore Havbanker.
Forh. i Vidensk. Selsk. Christiania. År 1872. (1873). p. 109.
”) See the authors paper ,,Hermaphroditism in viviparous Ophiurids". Acta
Zoologica. I. 1920.
99
seum for some more material, which was very kindly sent me,
together with a few specimens of Amph. securigera, which latter
species I wanted likewise to study. On receiving this material I
was surprised in finding, partly that a confusion of the two species
A. borealis and securigera had taken place, partly that among the
specimens sent there was one råbresenting a third species of Am-
phiura mot only new to the Scandinavian fauna, but also new to
science, viz. that described below as Amphiura Griegi n. sp.
The reason why these species have been confounded,") evidently,
is this, that no quite satisfactory figures have been given of A.
securigera (— although it must be conceded. that the figures given
by Diben & Koren”) show most of the specific characters quite
distinctly —), while no figures at all have been given of A. bore-
alis. I have therefore thought it desirable to point out more pre-
cisely the characters distinguishing the said species, giving in the
same time figures of both.
The main distinguishing character of the species borealis and
securigera is found in the shape of the radial shields and in the
scaling of the disk (Figs. 3, b, e). The radial shields are narrow,
linear and parallel in securigera, while in borealis they join at
their outer end but are diverging inwardly. In AÅ. securigera the
”disk is entirely naked, with merely a trace of scales at the inner
end of the radial shields; in borealis the disk is distinctly scaled,
the scales being very well developed round the radial shields,
while in the middle of the disk they are more sparse, lying not
quite close together and not overlapping. In the interradii the scales
gradually disappear, so that the disk is naked towards the margin.
— The statement of Sars (Norges Echinodermer, p. 14) that on
drying the specimens of A. securigera very thin, imbricating micro-
scopical scales appear distinctly, is in disagreement herewith. I can
hardly doubt that in this case Sars must have mistaken specimens of
borealis for securigera. In all the specimens of securigera that I
have seen the skin is perfectly naked; on clearing the skin in
1) I have also seen another case (not published), where Å. borealis was
identified as 4. securigera, and probably such confusion will prove to
be only too common.
?”) Diben & Koren. Ofversigt åfver Skandinaviens Echinodermer. K.
Vet. Akad. Handl. 1844. Tab. VI. 3—6.
56
Canada balsam it is seen that there is really not a trace of scales
in the middle of the disk, while only a very few, small scales are
found covering the inner end of the radial shields.
Another character, the length of the arms, which is, according
to Sars, 6—7 times the diameter of disk in borealis, while in
securigera it is as much as 12—15 times the diameter of disk,
Fig. 3. a—c. Amphiura borealis; d—f. ÅA. securigera.
a. and d. ventral side, b. and e. dorsal side, c. and f. part of arm from the dorsal
side, showing the widened armspines. "/1.
gives also a good distinguishing character — when well preserved
specimens are dealt with; unfortunately, these species appear to
be very fragile, the arms very easily breaking, so that this char-
acter is practically of very little use. One small tentacle scale may
occur fairly regularly farther out on the arms of securigera; in
borealis I have never seen a trace thereof. In the oral parts and
ventral plates (Figs. 3, a, d) no distinct difference exists between
the two species, whereas the dorsal plates afford a good disting-
uishing character, being more rounded in borealis than in securi-
gera, and also contiguous in borealis, while they are distinctly
separated from one another in securigera. Finally the development
of the axeshape of the second armspine is much stronger in secu-
rigera than in borealis (Figs. 3, c, f).
57
To these differences come the important characters from the
inner anatomy, borealis being viviparous and hermaphroditic (pro-
terandric), with only one single interradial gonod at each bursa,
while A. securigera is not viviparous and has 3—4 gonads at the
interradial side of the bursæ and — sometimes, at least, — one
at the adradial side (observed only in a male specimen).
The two species are thus in reality so distinct that, on a care-
ful examination, the identification can never be doubtful, but it
may sometimes be necessary to dry the specimens in order to see
the characters distinctly.
It might seem superfluous thus to discuss the differences be-
tween these two species; since according to the recent classific-
ation of Ophiurids they are referred to different genera, viz. secu-
rigera to the genus Amphiodia Verrill, while borealis is retained
in the genus Amphiura s. str. It is, however, by no means super-
fluous to discuss their distinguishing characters, partly in view of
the fact that they have really been confounded, partly because the
difference between the two said genera is so very slight, consisting
in fact only in a little difference in the mouth papillæ, Amphiodia
having two outer mouthpapillæ, while Amphiura s. str. has only
one. I find, moreover, that this character is by no means constant
in securigera, and also in borealis there are sometimes two outer
mouth papillæ. To refer these two species to different genera for
this sole reason seems to me quite unreasonable, the two species
being otherwise so closely alike that there can be no doubt, they
are really nearly related. In fact, I think Sars is quite right in re-
garding them as related to Amphiura filiformis — which has the
same peculiar axeshaped armspine, though not so strongly devel-
oped. In case these species should be separated from Amphiura
s, str. the old name Ophiopeltis Dib. Kor. would have to be used
for them, not the name Amphiodia Verril. But I do not think
there is sufficient reason for a generic distinction.
It is funny to see that Bell in his Catalogue of British Echi-
noderms (p. 121) declares Å. securigera ,allied to Å. squamata,.
perhaps only a variety of it'. Even if he has not seen a spec-
imen of securigera, the merest glance at the figures given by
Diben & Koren (which he quotes) ought to have shown him
that these forms have nothing with one another to do.
58
I may mention in this connection that I have got a specimen
of A. securigera from the Eddystone grounds off Plymouth during
a stay at the Biological Station at Plymouth in the summer of
1913. The species accordingly is found off the South Coast of
England and evidently is distributed round the British Coasts (though
perhaps not at the North Sea Coasts), but must have been over-
looked. — On the other hand I may assert that jt is an error
when Clark in his Catalogue of Recent Ophiurans (p. 250) gives
the Baltic Sea as the locality of A. securigera. Not a single Echi-
noderm occurs in the greater part of the Baltic; in the Western
part a few Echinoderms occur, but among them only a single spec-
ies of Ophiurids, Ophiura albida. It may be gathered from this
fact that also the statement of A. H. Clark!) that Antedon pe-
tasus occurs in the Baltic is based only on an error of labels.
6.. Amphiura Griegi n. sp.
(Fig. 4, a—d).
Disk 5.5, mm in diameter; arms five. Middle of disk covered
by very small imbricating scales, among which no primaries can
be distinguished; towards the edge of the interradii they disappear
completely, the outer part of the disk thus remaining naked. The
scales surrounding the radial shields are somewhat larger and, in
the single, dried, specimen, these scales make a very conspicuous
border round the radial shields, contrasting notably against the other
scales of the disk. There are about 8 scales in a transverse line
in the narrowest part between each two neighbouring radial shields.
The radial shields are rather large, more than half the radius of
the disk; they are pear-seed shaped, separated throughout by a
wedge of narrow, slightly elongated scales. The dorsal plates are
distinctly wider than long, with the outer edge nearly straight, the
whole inner edge making a regular halfcircle; at the base of the
arm they are somewhat narrower, the inner edge not so distinctly
rounded. The oral shields are almost rhomboidal, with the outer
"end truncated; adoral plates rather broad. Two oral papillæ, the
outer one cylindrical, spinelike. The papilla of the first oral tent-
1) Notes sur les Crinoides actuels du Muséum dPhist. naturelle de Paris.
Bull. Mus. d”hist. Nat. 1911, p. 256. (,,Mer Baltique, un bel exemplaire').
59
acle distinct, spiniform, inwards directed. Disk on the under side
totally naked, except for a few scales, which may be seen at the edge
of the genital slits at their inner end. First ventral plate small,
hexagonal. The following vent-
ral plates with truncated inner
edge and very slightly concave
outer edge; the sides are near-
ly straight. In the inner part
of the arm they are slightly
longer than broad, farther out
as broad as long. Two tent-
acle scales, the abradial slight-
ly larger than the adradial.
6 armspines, the lower one a
little longer than the rest,
which are about equal to the
armjoint in length. The four
middle spines generally have
an indication of a. widening
at the point.
Fig. 4. Amphiura Griegi.
a. ventral side; b. dorsal side; c. part of
Only one specimen, in very arm, dorsal view; d. armspines. 14/1.
poor condition, with all the
arms broken a little distance beyond the disk. — The two figures
must partly be regarded as restaurations. The specimen was taken
by J. Grieg at Jondal, Hardanger, Norway, in 70—100 meters.
This species is evidently closely related to A. arcystata H. L.
Clark!) with which it agrees in all main features. On account
of the great variability of the latter species it is not easy to in-
dicate quite reliable specific differences between the two species,
especially since only one specimen is available of the new species.
But a careful comparison between this specimen and the figures
of arcystata given. by Clark appears to me to leave no .doubt
that they are specifically different. Moreover, I have sent the fig-
ures of my specimen to H. L. Clark, who after having compared
them with his youngest specimen of arcystata (6 mm) declares
that they are really different; AA. Griegi has a coarser scaling,
1!) H. Lyman Clark. North Pacific Ophiurans in the collection of the
United States National Museum. Bull. U.S. Nat. Museuin. 75. 1911. p. 145.
60
longer radial shields, different upper arm plates and more pent-
agonal oral shields; also the tentacle scale of the side arm plate
is bigger. Further the number of armspines is different; the young
specimen of 6 mm of arcystata (which is somewhat larger than
the type of A. Griegi) ,rarely has 6 armspines, and usually there
are but 4; these are more slender, more diverging and longer than
in the specimen of A. Griegi".
Judging from the single specimen of A. Griegi in hand there
can thus be no doubt that it is really a distinct species, though
nearly related to arcystata. The latter species being known only
from off the Californian coast and from the Japanese Seas it is,
of”course, not very probable either that the Scandinavian form
should be identical with it.
7... Ophiactis nidarosiensis n. sp. (Fig. 5).
Diameter of disk ca. 2.5, mm; arms 12—15 mm long. "Disk
covered with rather coarse scales, sparsely set with short spines.
Primary plates not distinct. Radial shields about half the length of
radius of the disk, separated thrcughout by a linear series of 2—3
scales. The ventral side of the disk covered with a more delicate
scaling, generally without spines. Arms 6, sometimes 5, very rarely
7; the dorsal plates are rather
broadly in contact in the inner
part of the arm, with a trunc-
ate inner end and the outer
edge forming a high arch;
they are sligthly longer than
broad. Ventral armplates dis-
tinctly longer than broad, with
a narrow, truncated inner apex;
the first ventral plate is com-
paratively, large, longer than
broad, the second is about as
broad as long. One rounded
tentacle scale. The sideplates
are rather prominent, carrying
four, farther out three spines.
Fig. 5. Ophiactis nidarosiensis
a. ventral side. b. dorsal side. 18/4. On fullgrown arms the upper
61
spine, near the base of the arm, may be distinctly longer, thinner
and more smooth than the other, but this is no constant character.
The three lower spines are equal sized, about the length of the
arm joint. They are finely serrate and slightly bihamulate. Mouth-
papillæ two, sometimes only one, on each side of mouth angle,
the outer one the larger; they are generally erect. Adoral plates
large, mouth shield almost rhomboidal, as long as broad, with rounded-
truncate outer angle. — There is sometimes a trace of redbrown
color at the base of the spines in fullgrown arms.
The species is selfdividing; all stages of reproduction of half
the disk with its three arms are met with. The fact that three
and three arms are of the same size means that, in case self-
division takes place more than once, the division line remains the
same. One exception. from the rule was seen, however, a recently
divided specimen having three arms of different length, one of
them belonging distinctly to the reproduced, not yet fully grown
half; in this case accordingly this second division took place after
another line than the first.
Several specimens were found by the author in the Trondhjem-
fjord, in the following localities: Skarnsund, ca. 200 meters,- off
Kantate 200" mand off "Rødberg, "ca. 300 m, in July 1911:
Further, some specimens from Hellefjord, 200 fms, taken by the
Norwegian North Atlantic Expedition 1876 —78, wrongly identified
as O. abyssicola, are really this species. Doubtless the species will
be found to be widely distributed over the North Atlantic.
Evidently this species is related to Ophiactis hirta Lyman.
(,Challengerf Oph., p. 118, Pl. XX, Figs. 4—6). It differs -from
that species, besides in the number of arms (7 in O. hirta, 6 in
nidarosiensis), in the shape of the ventral plates, which are shorter
in O. hirta, only as long as broad; also the mouth shield appears
to be somewhat different in shape, and the mouth papillæ are
smaller in O. hirta than in nidarosiensis. Finally the size of O.
hirta was 4.2 mm in diameter of disk or nearly twice the size of
the largest specimens of the present species.
Judging from these differences there can hardly be any doubt
- that this species is not identical with O. hirta, as one would also
beforehand be inclined to expect in view of the fact that O. hirta
62
was found off N.S. Wales. The importance of this latter fact is,
however, considerably lessened through Koehler's identification of a
specimen from off the Azores as O. hirta.”) There is, however, a pos-
sibility that it was really the present species, which Koehler had be-
fore him. It is especially noticeable that the specimen from the
Azores had only six arms, while the type of O. hirta has seven. Un-
fortunately the question cannot be settled at present, because the
specimen has been lost. I sent a copy of my figures to Prof.
Koehler asking him to compare his specimen therewith. The
specimen being then sent to him from the Museum in Monaco it .
was lost on the way. The occurrence of O. hirta in the. Atlantic
must then remain problematic, until new material is available, since
it cannot be denied that there is much more reason to suppose
that the specimen in question really belonged to Q. nidarosiensis,
which will doubtless prove to occur over a great part of the North
Atlantic, than to O. hirta known otherwise only from off Australia.
H. L. Clark?) suggests that Koehler's specimen was only a
young O. abyssicola. I would not think it possible that Koehler
could make such a mistake, O. abyssicola being already in its
quite young stages (I have examined specimens less than 2 mm
diameter of disk) quite easily recognizable. Clark's 'suggestion,
however, leads to the question of the relation of the present spec-
ies to O. abyssicola. The fact that abyssicola has five arms,
would seem beforehand to make it certain that these species have
nothing with one another to do. This is, however, not a char-
acter sufficiently constant for distinguishing the two species thereby
alone; specimens of O. nidarosiensis with only 5 arms, and, very
rarely, even with 7 arms occur; on the othér hand, also O. abys-
sicola may exceptionally have 6 or even 7 arms. But the two
species are otherwise so sharply distinguished that there can, by
.a careful examination, not be the slightest possibility for mistaking
one species for the other. Especially the dorsal plates afford an
excellent distinguishing character, triangular, with an acute inner
point, well separated, and with a nearly straight outer edge in abys-
sicola, contiguous, with a truncated inner angle and the outer edge
1) Res. d. Campagnes scientif. Monaco. Fasc. XXXIV. 1909. p. 171.
?) H. L. Clark. Brittle-Stars, new and old. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. LXII.
1918. p. 310.
63
very highly arched in nidarosiensis. Also the mouth shields are
quite different in shape, distinctly broader than long in abyssicola,
as long as broad in nidarosiensis. The ventral plates are also
” broader. in abyssicola than in nidarosiensis. Then I have. never
seen an indication of selfdivision in any of the numerous specim-
ens of abyssicola, that I have examined, while nearly every spec-
imen of nidarosiensis shows selfdivision to have taken place more
or less recently. — It may not be superfluous to state that these
differences hold good also for small specimens of abyssicola, not
larger than those of nidarosiensis.
8... Amphilepis norvegica Ljungman.
E. v. Marenzeller in his memoir of the 'Echinoderms of the
Eastern Mediterranean ") gave reasons for regarding Forbes” Am-
phiura florifera”) as the same species as Amphilepis norvegica
Ljungman. This result has not met with a general acceptance.
Grieg has accepted it in his paper on ,,Bukkenfjordens Echino-
dermer og Mollusker".”) but in his later papers he always uses
the name norvegica, and especially Koehler and H. L. Clark
retain the name norvegica, the latter author, in his ,,Catalogue of
Recent Ophiurans" (p. 224) taking A. florifera Forbes as a syno-
nym of Amphiura Chiajei.
The question needs reexamination. First, it is certain that Amph.
norvegica does occur in the Eastern Mediterranean; that was shown
definitely by Marenzeller; having myself got a pair of spec-
imens from the Mediterranean, dredged by the ,Thorf at St. 134.
HOT 0 (87937 N 77077777 E) I "can only conirm Maren-
zeller's statement; the Mediterranean form cannot be disting-
uished from the Scandinavian, not even as a variety. Herewith,
however, is not given the proof that Forbes” florifera was really
this species. Is it then only a young specimen of Chiajei, as main-
inedeby ta dvre Lyman and Clark? The" fact sfated ex-
pressly by Forbes, that it has only 3 armspines would seem to
") Berichte d Commission f. Tiefsee-Forschungen XVI. Zoolog. Ergebnisse
V. Echinodermen, gesammelt 1893—1894. Denkschr. d. Ak. d. Wiss. Wien.
BX ET S95 pp: 17.
?”) E. Forbes. On the Radiata of the Eastern Mediterranean. I. Ophiuridæ.
Trans. Linn. Soc. XIX. 1843. p. 150.
3) Stavanger Mus. Årsberetn. 1896. p. 38.
64
exclude the possibility of a confusion with AÅ. chiajei which has
already at a size corresponding to that of A. florifera 4—5 arm-
spines, a "difference which Forbes could secarcely be supposed to
have overlooked. Also the fig. 10 of Forbes' paper, giving the
underside of the arm of florifera, in all its imperfectness seems
to show that it could not be a young specimen of A. Chiajei. I
cannot, therefore, agree with the authors who make A. florifera
simply a synonym of A. Chiajei.
On the other hand, I do not see that Marenzeller has given
an undisputable proof that Forbes' Amph. florifera is identical
with Ljungman's ÅA. norvegice. I would point out two facts, which
åre at variance with such identification. First, the primary plates
of the disk are by no means so conspicuous in norvegica and do
not lie so close together as shown by Forbes; they are very
distinctly separated from the central plate by several small scales.
It is also hardly conceivable that Forbes could have represented
the characteristic rhombic figure of the radial shields of norvegica
so poorly (Fig. 13). More weight I would, however, ascribe to the
mouth shield (the ,,ovarianf or ,genitalf plate, as it is designated
by Forbes). He states that to be trilobed in florifera and shows
that in his fig. 12. This does not at all agree with A. norvegica.
The fact being thus that there are such specially noted characters
of florifera which do not agree with norvegica, it must be re-
garded as doubtful that florifera is really identical with norvegica,
and there is then really no necessity for taking the undesirable
step of changing the commonly used name of the species so well
described by Ljungman.
It may be mentioned here that I have found on some spec-
imens from the Trondhjemsfjord a small organism attached to the
underside of the disk and arms, which appears to be a Loxosoma.
I have observed it later on also on some specimens from Manger-
fjord, near Bergen, received from Prof. Brinkmann, dredged in
March 1920.
9. Ophiura texturata Lamarck.
The fact that H. L. Clark in his ,,Catalogue of Recent Ophi-
urans" (p. 323) has identified this species with the ,, Asterias ophi-
ura'" of Linnæus, naming it Ophiura ophiura (Linn.) makes it
65
necessary to take up the question about the name with which this
species should be designated, the more so as there is a general
disagreement among recent authors about this matter. The species
is named Ophiura texturata (Lmk.) Forbes by Litken and, in
some of. his works, by Koehler, while more recently the latter
author adopts the name Oph. lacertosa (Linck.). Lyman (,Chal-
lengerf Oph. p. 76) names it Ophioglypha ciliata Ljn. (should be
Retzius). In Bell's ,,Catalogue of the British Echinoderms" it is
named Ophiura ciliaris (Linné) and the same name is used by
Grieg. — I shall discuss these names in chronological order.
That the ,, Stella lacertosa" of Linck") is really the species under-
stood by Oph. texturata Lmk. is very probable; it is especially a
noteworthy fact that the fig. 4, Taf. 2 of Linck's work apparently
shows the pores along the midline of the ventral side of the arms,
a feature so eminently characteristic of this species. But then
Linck is pre-Linnean and not strictly binomial, and according to
the rules cannot therefore come into consideration.?”)
The Asterias ophiura of Linnæus (Syst. Naturæ, Ed. X, 1758,
p. 662) evidently comprises all the true Ophiurids then known by
him, as is evident from the literary references under the species.
The diagnosis ,,A. radiata radiis quinque, corpore orbiculato quinque-
lobof does, of course, not give the slightest hint at any definite spec-
ies. In the Museum of Upsala are preserved two specimens labelled
Asterias ophiura Linn., from the Museum Gust. Adolphi. It is
quite possible that they represent the type of Linnæus' ÅAsterias
ophiura, but it is not certain, and the original labels have been
destroyed. But whether they are the types or not, they are not
identical with our Oph. texturata; they belong to the genus Ophio-
derma (both specimens apparently the same species). If it were
certain that these specimens are the types of Asterias ophiura
Linn., there might be reason for changing the name Ophioderma
into Ophiura (as Lyman did, though for other reasons). Since,
)) De Stellis marinis liber singularis. 1733. p. 47. Taf. 2. fig. 4.
”) Another thing is that, in cases where it would be very desirable to
preserve a pre-linnean name, I would not omit doing so on account of
the rule. But it cannot be said to be especially desirable to keep the
name lacertosa Linck for this species, the more so as the name lacer-
tosa was used by Lamarck in quite another sense.
(21!
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 72.
66
however, there is no certainty for their being really the type spec-
imens, such change would be quite unjustified That there is not
the slightest foundation for changing the name Oph. texturata into
Ophiura ophiura is so evident, that one cannot help wondering
that Clark has ventured to do so.)
In the XII. edition of ,,Syst. naturæ" (1766, p. 1101) Linnæus
establishes a species Asterias ciliaris. Ilt is evident that, if this
species can be recognized with certainty to be the same as our
O. texturata, this name must be adopted. The diagnosis is not
much better than that of A. ophiura, running thus: ȁ. radiata
imbricata, radiis utrinque ciliatis". Bell, in ,Some Notes on Brit-
ish Ophiurids" ?) comes to the result that the A. ciliaris is really
identical with O. texturata, concluding from Linnæus' reference
to the figures of Barrelier; ,an inspection of the figures of Bar-
relier shews that what we have called O. ciliata is taken to be
meant". . Looking up the figures in Barrelier's work”) I was
really astonished. These figures are so primitive that it is quite
impossible to say which species can be meant — all that can be
said is, that they represent an Ophiurid, the curved arms indicat-
ing that it is not an Ophiura, more probably an Ophiothriæx that
is meant. To take these figures as a proof that the Asterias cilia-
ris of Linnæus is our O. texturata is simply absurd. Neither is
there in the text a single word that could prove it to be O. teæx-
turata. — That Linnæus states of A. ciliaris: ,,habitat in Oceano
australiori et indico" is, of course, also a fact decidedly against
identifying this species with the European O. teæturata.
We then come to the name Åsterias ciliata Retzius.”) It is not
impossible that it can really be the same as our Ophiura texturata,
although there is nothing in the description to show it definitely.
But, anyhow, this name cannot come into consideration, since the
name was preoccupied by O. Fr. Miller,?) as Bell has correctly
pointed out. The diagnosis of Ast. ciliata given by Miller: ,radiata,
") I am indebted to my friend T. Gislén for the information of the spec-
imens of ,,4sterias ophiura".
”) Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 1891. 6. Ser. VIII. p. 341.
. ”) Jac. Barrelier. Plantæ per Galliam, Hispaniam et Italiam observatæ.
Pals UI STAD MI 2OS RE
') A.Retzius. Dissertatio sistens species cognitas Asteriarum. 1805. p:29!
”j Zoologiæ Danicæ Prodromus, 1776. BD) 2995;
67
spinis asperis latitudine radii longioribus”" shows cleary that it
could not be any of the species of the recent genus Ophiura;
most probably it is Ophiothrix fragilis.
Finally, we come then to Lamarck's Ophiura texturata. The
type specimen does not exist any more, as Prof. Joubin kindly
informs me. The diagnosis given by Lamarck (Animaux sans
vertébres. 1816. II. p. 542) does mot give the definite proof that
it is really the present species which is meant, but in any case
there is nothing in it that does not suit to it. But then he refers to
the Stella lacertosa of Linck, Tab. 2, fig. 4, which is, as stated
above, almost beyond doubt this species. Also his statement that
»SES rayons vus en dessous présentent aspect de cinq petites
tresses" (plaits) is indeed very appropriate. — On the other hand,
the figures in the Encyclopédie Méthodique, Pl. 123, figs. 2, 3, to
which reference is also made under O. texturata, certainly do not
represent our species; possibly it is O. albida, but it is much too
inaccurate to allow determining with certainty which species it
really represents. However, this is less important, since the species
figured by Linck is the first referred to.
After all it seems then the only possible course to adopt the
name Ophiura texturata Lamarck for this species.
10... Ophiura albida Forbes.
Regarding this species I would only record some observations
on parasites found to infest it.
ÅA number of specimens, which I received recently from the
Swedish Zoological Station, Kristineberg, dredged off Lysekil, were
found to be infested with a rather large Trematod, lying free in
the stomach. Ås many as 6—7 specimens of the parasite were
found in a single Ophiuran, generally only 2—4; out of 9 spec-
imens of the Ophiurid only one was devoid of the Trematod. I am
informed by my friend Prof. Th. Odhner, Stockholm, that this
Trematod is the young stage of Fellodistomum fellis (Olsson), which
is found very commonly and in great numbers in the gallbladder
of Anarrhichas lupus, which fish is known to feed on Echino-
derms. No other Trematods being known from Echinoderms this
case is quite noteworthy. (Cuénot!) has found a Cercaria in Oph.
1) L. Cuénot. Commensaux et Parasites des Échinodermes (II. Note).
Rev. Biol. Lille. Année 5. 1892.
58
68
albida and Ophiothrix fragilis; he describes it under the name
of Cercaria capriciosa). — (I may mention in this connection that
I have found a Trematod occurring quite usually in the gonads
of the sea-urchin Mespilia globulus at Misaki, Japan).
It is worth pointing out that the occurrence of this parasite in
Oph. albida appears to be rather local. I have opened many spec-
imens of this species from different localities in the Danish Seas,
but never observed the parasite in it. Doubtless this has a direct
relation to the distribution of the host of the mature Trematod, so
that the young stage of the Trematod will probably be found to occur
in the Ophiurid only in such places where the Anarrhichas occurs.
… In a few specimens of the same Ophiurid from off Skagen I
have found a pair of Nematods lying in the body cavity. They are
young and unidentifiable; they will doubtless prove to belong to
a species living in some fish that feeds on this Ophiurid.
11... Henricia sanguinolenta (O. F. Miller).
In Miller & Troschel's .,,System der Asteridenf, p. 127, is
mentioned a starfish from Bohuslåin, preserved in the Museum of
Stockholm, ,von dem wir es zweifelhaft lassen missen, ob es zum
Genus Solaster oder Chætaster gehårt", During a visit to Stock-
holm in the fall of 1919 Prof. Th. Odhner called my attention to
this specimen, which he thought must be identical with Henricia
sanguinolenta. I could only confirm his view; it is really only a
large specimen of this species, as would also have to be expected
on account of the locality from which the specimen came.
On examining some living specimens I noticed that the small
spine placed in the ambulacral furrow, below the ambulacral spines,
is tipped with a skincap considerably larger than the spine itself,
so that it is seen protrude between the tubefeet. Most probably
some sensory function is attached to it.
12... Echinocyamus pusillus (0. F. Miller).
H. L. Clark in his Memoir on the Clypeastridæ”) has changed
this commonly used name into Echinocyamus minutus, maintaining
") Hawaiian and other Pacific Echini. The Clypeastridæ, AÅrachnoididæ, La-
ganidæ, Fibulariidæ and Scutellidæ. Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. Vol. XLVI.
ALE DE Rg JE
69
that ,when Pallas” description of his Echinus minutus is carefully
examined in connection with his fig. 25, pl. 1, and due consider-
ation is given to his remarks about habitat and occurrence, it is
almost impossible to doubt that his name was given to the fibulariid
which O. F. Miller two years later called Spatagus pusillus". It
is therefore necessary to change the name pusillus into minutus.
On examining Pallas” description of this ,,Echinus minutus"
it is, however, easily seen that he does not name any Echi-
nus minutus at all. He writes”): ,In Tabula I hujus fasciculi sub
figura 24 & 25 Echinos minutos adjeci, de quibus hic verbiculus",
which means ,I have added some small sea-urchinsf". Nowhere
does he name a species ,Echinus minutus"; if that were the
case he would not have omitted a reference to it in the index at
the end of the fascicle, where all the species described are very
carefully named; but.it is not found there. It is thus beyond any
doubt that the name pusillus has the priority, even after the strict-
est interpretation of the priority rule, being published in 1776.
The fact that Gmelin”) in 1788 and Blainville?) in 1834
made the same mistake as Clark now has made again in 1914
does not alter the fact that there is no ,,Echinus minutus Pallas".
Furthermore it is beyond doubt that, even if Pallas had really
meant to give the scientific name Echinus minutus to these small
sea-urchins, that name could not rightly have been used for Echi-
nocyamus pusillus. It is true, there is no doubt that his figure
25 really represents this species, which becomes quite evident from
his statement ,,Abundat hic autem inter minuta testacea arenæ
Belgicæ"; there is no other Echinoid occurring at the Belgian
coasts with which it could be confounded, and I have myself a
number of specimens collected at the sandy beach near Ostende.
But Pallas refers to two different forms with his , Echinos mi-
nutos” ; the first of them, fig. 24, ,priore icone expressus subglo-
bosus ex Orientali India crebro adfertur" ; this species is beyond
doubt a Fibularia, and if there had really been an ,,Echinus mi-
nutus Pallas" the name would then have to be applied to this
ly P.S. Pallas. Spicilegia Zoologica. Fasc. X. 1784. (p. 34".
?) Linnæus. Systema naturæ. Ed. XIII. cura Gmelin 1788. p. 3194.
3) H.de Blainville. Manuel d”Actinologie. 1834. p. 214.
70
East Indian form, not to the second form referred to by Pallas,
that from the Belgian coast.
The priority rule has, indeed, done harm enough in a number
of cases, where change of names could not be avoided. It is not
unreasonable to ask that at least no change of old generally used
names should be made without the most careful consideration of
all the questions connected with each case.
13... Antedon petasus (Diib. & Kor.).
(Fig. 6, a—h.).
The observations on the embryology of this species recorded
in the author's paper ,Notes on the development and the larval
forms of some Scandinavian Echinoderms" ”) have revealed the fact
that quite noteworthy differences exist between Antedon pelasus
and the allied species A. adriatica, mediterranea and bifida in
regard to their development. Thus, while in the three latter spec-
ies the eggs remain attached to the pinnules until the embryo is
hatched as a fully formed larva with its ciliated bands etc., in Å.
petasus the eggs”) are free, probably pelagic and the embryo is
hatched before the appearance of the ciliated bands. Also in the
embryological processes, especially as regards the enterocoel ves-
icles and the entoderm, very remarkable differences appear to exist
between the said species.
These facts naturally lead to the question, whether then A.
petasus can really belong to the same genus as the other species
named; the question was hinted at in the paper quoted, but the
discussion thereof was left for the present occasion.
In the revision of the genus Antedon s. str. given recently by
A.H. Clark?) the species referred to the genus are divided in
two groups, one, comprising A. mediterranea Lmk. and adriatica
A. H. Clark, being characterized by the long, approximately uni-
”) Vid. Medd. Vol. 71. 1920. p. 150.
7”) I regret having omitted to state in the paper quoted that the eggs of A.
petasus show most distinctly the same peculiar structure of the follicular
membrane as is found in Ant. mediterranea. (Comp. Ludwig. Die Bil-
dung der Eihiillle bei Antedon rosaceus. Zool. Anzeiger. III. 1880. p. 470).
7”) Beitråge zur Kenntniss d. Meeresfauna Westafrikas, herausgeg. v. W.
Michaelsen. Hamburg. Lief. 2. 1914. Echinoderma II. Crinoidea. p.313-318.
dal
form cirri composed of 18—30 segments, of which the distal are
little, if any, shorter than the proximal and not compressed later-
ally, and by the long arms composed of long segments, the other,
comprising A. petasus (Diben & Kor.), bifida (Pennant), moroc-
cana A. H. Clark, diibeni Bålsche and Hupferi Hartlaub, being
characterized by the short cirri, with generally only 10—15 seg-
ments, of which the distal are laterally compressed and, in lateral
view, broader and shorter than the proximal, and by the short and
comparatively stout arms, composed of short segments.
A considerable part of the material of Crinoids possessed by
the Copenhagen Museum being at the present time in the hands
of A. H. Clark in Washington, I have no opportunity of examin-
ing all the species mentioned above, but must in the main confine
myself to a comparative study of the species bifida, mediterranea
and petasus.
In case Å. petasus should rightly be referred to another genus
than those species which differ from it in their embryological devel-
opment (A. adriatica, mediterranea and bifida — and also Å. mo-
roccana, judging from a statement in a letter from A. H. Clark
that this is the species studied by Perrier) one should expect to find
it differing from the other species, at least, in some marked external
features that could justify a generic distinction. However I fail to
find any such special feature. It would really seem more natural
to distinguish as separate genera or subgenera the two groups
established by Clark!) than to make A. petasus a separate genus,
distinet from another genus comprising mediterranea and bifida
and the other species named. A. petasus decidedly agrees with the
bifida-group in the important charracters of the cirri and arms.
On the other hand it differs quite markedly from bifida in the
.character of its oral pinnules, these being much more thorny in the
latter. But to ascribe so great importance to this single feature as to
7) The character mentioned by Clark as distinguishing the two groups
that in the mediterranea-group the distal segments of the cirri are not
compressed laterally, which they are in the bifida-group does not seem
to me to hold good; they are or (at least) may be just as much com-
pressed in mediterranea also. On the other hand I would add another
conspicuous difference between the two groups, namely that in the me-
diterranea-group the first genital pinnule is the fourth, while in the
other. group (at least in the species I have examined) it is the third.
ne
make it a generic character seems to me unjustified. A.H. Clark
has suggested in a letter to me that the rudimentary side and
covering plates of the pinnules -might afford a characteristic differ-
ence, being comparatively well developed in petasus, while they
appear to be lacking in the other species. This does, however, not
hold good. It is true, they may be lacking in bifida, but this is
no constant feature. J. Grieg") has given a figure showing them
just as well developed in bifida as in petasus, and I find them
quite similarly developed in some specimens of bifida, although
they appear to be lacking in the majority of the specimens. Also
in medilerranea I find them almast as well developed as in pelasus.
The necessary conclusion is then that there is no reason for a
generic distinction of A. petasus from the other species of Antedon
s. str., in spite of the remarkable differences in their embryology.
We have simply to accept the fact that closely related forms may
show surprisingly great differences in regard to their development.
— Å parallel case is that of the Echinoids T'oæocidaris (or Helio-
cidaris) tuberculata and erythrogramma, the former having a
typical pelagic larva, the latter direct development without any in-
dication of a pluteus-stage”); another similar case is afforded by
Amphiura filiformis and borealis, the former having small eggs
and a typical Ophiopluteus larva while the latter is viviparous,
having large, yolky eggs, the embryos doubtless developing directly.
In both these cases the species undoubtedly are closely related
and must be referred to the same genus.
I may take the opportunity of mentioning here that I have ob-
served on specimens of A. petasus from the Swedish Zoological
Station, Kristineberg, a small Loxosoma attached to the pinnules,
generally between the tentacles, where it is by no means easy to
see. I have not examined it more closely, so that I cannot say,
") James A. Grieg. Echinodermen von dem norwegischen Fischerei-
dampfer ,,Michael Sars" in den Jahren 1900—1903 gesammelt. II. Cri-
noidea. Bergens Mus. Aarbog 1903. Nr. 5. p. 33.
Th. Mortensen. Preliminary note øn the remarkable shortened devel-
opment of an Australian sea-urchin, Toxocidaris erythrogrammus. Proc.
Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales. Vol. XL. 1912. p. 203.
Th. Mortensen. On the development of some Japanese Echinoderms.
Preliminary Notice. Annot. Zooiogicæ Japonenses. VIII. 1914. p: SÅS:
ts
=—…-
73
whether it is possibly identical with any known species; but it is
certain that it is not identical with Loæxosomella antedonis, the
species that I found attached to the cirri of Hathromethra pro-
la)
During a visit to the Swedish Biological Station, Kristineberg,
in the summer of 1918, with the object of studying the develop-
ment of Antedon petasus (and other Echinoderms) I found one
day on examining a lot of this Crinoid -a most curious abnormal
specimen having some of its oral pinnules developed into true
arms. Realizing, of course, at once the unusual interest afforded
by this specimen, I was anxious to have it preserved with the ut-
most care in order that it might be possible to give a good photo-
graphic figure of it. Through some unfortunate circumstances, which
need not be specified, it happened, however, that this special care
resulted in the specimen breaking several of the arms, curving up
the rest. It is therefore out of question to give a photographic
figure of it that would be of any use, and I must content myself
with giving some detail figures of the peculiar armstructures to
illustrate the following description.
The anterior and the left anterior arms are quite normal. On
the right anterior radius the anterior arm has the first oral pinnule
on both sides transformed (Fig. 6, f.); the pinnule of the inner
side has only two side branches near the point — it can hardly
be said that they represent true pinnules, it has much more the
character of a simple branching —; the pinnule on the outer side
has developed into a true arm, almost as large as the main arm.
The four inner joints retain the character of pinnule joints; on the
fifth is developed a pinnule, and from here the joints take on the
character of true armjoints, carrying pinnules in the normal way.
Only the inner part is preserved, the part from the 6th pinnule being
lost. There are no syzygies on the preserved part. The two lower
1) Th. Mortensen. Å new species of Entoprocta, Loxosomella antedonis,
from North-East Greenland. Danmark-Exped. til Grønlands Nordøstkyst
1906—1998. Bd. V. 8. (Medd. om Grønland. XLV. 1911).
This species has recently been found to occur also on Heliometra
glacialis (R. C. Osburn. Bryozoa of the Crocker Land Expedition. Bull:
Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. XLI. 1919. p. 606.)
Co
Ser n
NER ==88
NER Sen
Nee
SQ —
i |
INGE É
(NNIN DÆGØG
i VR Wea 4 Fa
i
(NE S/E bo
I (fl
(Å
(EN
| NÅ
MAN K
NNE?
QE=
)
FN
(
il
Fig. 6. Antedon petasus.
a. showing a case of ps developing into an arm. b. inner px of left posterior radius,
posterior arm, developed into an arm. c. dichotomously branched pi1 of right anterior
radius. d. outer pi of left posterior radius, posterior arm, transformed into a small
arm. e. another case of ps developing into an arm. f. right anterior radius, anterior
arm, with inner p1 slightly branched,. outer pi transformed into an arm. g. longi-
tudinally divided epizygal joint. h. irregular armdivision,
All the figures 9/1,
TE
pinnules have the character of oral pinnules; from the third tent-
acles are developed, but none of pinnules preserved carry genital
organs. — The posterior arm of the same radius has also both
the first pinnules transformed. That on the outer side has devel-
oped into a small, but true arm, the pinnules beginning on the 8th
joint. The point is broken; the part left carries three pinnules on
each side, the second of them having the tentacles developed. The
first pinnule of the inner side of the arm has developed into a
true arm, larger than that of the outer pinnule, but distinetly more
slender than the main arm. The pinnules begin on the 4th joint.
The point is broken; the preserved part carries 5 pinnules on each
side, the lower ones of which are developed as oral pinnules.
É In the right posterior radius the oral pinnules of the anterior
arm are normal, while the first pinnule on the inner side of the
posterior arm is developed into a small arm, the first pinnule being
found on the 8th joint. The point is broken; the preserved part
carries four pinnules on each side, the first of them being devel-
oped as an oral pinnule.
In the left posterior radius both arms have both their first pin-
nules transformed into arms. On the posterior arm the first pin-
nule of the outer side forms a small, slender arm (Fig. 6, d.), the
first pinnule being found on the B8th joint; after this follow two
joints without pinnule, then four joints carrying pinnules placed
regularly alternating, again a joint without a pinnule and then a
joint carrying a pinnule, the arm finally ending in a pinnule-like
point provided with tentacles as the other pinnules. The first pin-
nule on the inner side of this arm has developed into a large
arm, very nearly as strong as the main arm (Fig. 6, b.). The five
proximal joints have the character of true pinnule joints; the 6th
carries a pinnule on the distal side, then follows a joint without
a pinnule and the 8th.joint again carries a pinnule on the distal
side. From here the joints have the character of true armjoints,
even forming syzygies (the 9—10th, the 16—17th joint and then
every third joint), and carrying pinnules in the normal way. The
point is broken, the preserved part carrying eight pinnules on each
side, not counting that on the 6th joint. The lower one on each
side has the character of an oral pinnule, although not very pro-
nounced. None of the pinnules' carry genital organs
76
On the anterior arm of the same radius the first pinnule of
the outer side has very much the same character as that of the
outer side in Fig. 6, f., having only four branches or pinnules at
the point, the first occurring on the Yth joint; the first pinnule of
the inner side of the arm has developed into a small arm, the
pinnules beginning to appear with the 5th joint. It presents the
unusual feature that the three lower pinnules are all on the same,
proximal side; after the third pinnule follow four joints without pin-
nules then one with a pinnule on the distal side, whereafter the
little arm ends in a pinnule-like point, carrying tentacles as the
usual pinnules; also the first pinaule on this arm carries tentacles
and has thus not the character of an oral pinnule.
Having found this remarkable specimen, I was, of course, on
the look out after other similar abnormalities, and I succeeded in
finding, among several hundreds of specimens of this Crinoid five
more showing interesting abnormalities, although none of them ap-
proaches the first specimen in regard to excessive development of
the pinnules. I shall describe briefly also these specimens.
One of them has the first pinnule on the outer side of the
anterior arm of left posterior radius developed into a small arm
almost like that shown in Fig. 6, d. The three lower pinnules are
found on the distal side, the first of them on the 6th joint; then
follows one pinnule on the proximal side, and a pinnule-like ter-
mination of the whole. structure. The ambulacral furrow is well
developed. in the whole length of this oral pinnule. The other arms
present no anomalous structures.
A third specimen has the first pinnule on the outer side of
both arms of right anterior radius dichotomously branched (Fig. 6, c.).
The one of the anterior arm divides at the 4th, that of the post-
erior arm at the Sth joint. Both branches are equally developed
and retain their characteristic structure throughout. This case then
represents a simple dichotomy and is of no special interest. — Three
other specimens show simple dichotomy of one of the arms, the
division occurring in two of the cases immediately above a syzygy.
One of them (Fig. 6, g.) shows the interesting feature that the
epizygal joint is divided after a longitudinal line. In the other
case one of the branches begins with a syzygy. The third specimen
> syet
ed,
(Fig. 6, h.) has the joint below the division split up somewhat ir-
regularly, and the branches have the two lower joints coalesced.
— These cases of dichotomy, although worth mentioning, do not
afford any special interest.
Considerably more interest attaches to two specimens having
each one pinnule developed into a true arm. In one of them
it is the third pinnule on the outer side of the posterior arm, left
anterior radius, which is developed as shown in Fig. 6, a. The
proximal part has the character of a true genital pinnule, but from
the 8th joint pinnules are developed regularly alternating as in a
true arm, the joints of the main pinnule assuming a much more robust
character than the normal pinnule joints, although not so robust
as normal armjoints. The 15—16th joints form a syzygy and the
third joint thereafter again is a syzygy.. There are 6 pinnules to
each side, all except the last one on the distal side having the
genital organs strongly developed. After the 6th pinnule the main
axis continues and ends as a usual pinnule.
In the other specimen it is the third pinnule on the outer side
of the anterior arm of the right anterior radius, which has devel-
oped into an arm (Fig. 6, e). The four proximal joints have the char-
acter of true pinnule joints, only somewhat more robust than usual.
From the fifth joint pinnules are developed, alternating regularly, and
the joints of the main axis assume the character of true armjoints,
the 10—11th forming a syzygy. The point of the arm is broken,
the preserved rest carrying four pinnules on each side, all of which
have the character of genital pinnules. The basal part of the main
pinnule does not carry a genital organ, which was the case in the
former instance.
No other abnormalities occur in the two last mentioned specimens.
It is a very noteworthy facet that in the arms developed from
the oral pinnules no genital organs are found, while in those devel-
oping from the genital pinnules all the pinnules, also the lower-
most of them, have well developed genital organs. This is, -of
course, in accordance with the structural difference between oral
and genital pinnules, the genital rhachis not sending a branch into
the former, while the water vessel is found there normally, so that
the pinnules on the arms developing from the oral pinnules can
have the water vascular apparatus completely developed.
78
The interest attached to these curious specimens is much more
than that of curiosity, this remarkable development of pinnules into
arms having a very distinct bearing on the question of the mor-
phological value of pinnules.
A. H. Clark, in his ,Monograph of existing Crinoidsf has
pronounced some very startling ideas as to the morphological value
of pinnules, ideas which are directly connected with his theory that
the ancestors of Crinoids are — the barnacles.
The alleged derivation of Crinoids (and Echinoderms upon the
whole) from Arthropods, of course, makes it necessary to seek some
structure that might be regarded as the homologon of the Arthropod
appendages. Clark finds such structures in the pinnules and the
cirri, stating (Op. cit., p. 274) that ,it is probable that the pin-
nules and the cirri represent the original type of Crinoid append-
age, and these appendages were arranged in five pairs, the two
components of each pair being, so to speak, back to back; but
both the pinnules and the cirri have become enormously redupl-
icated, while in addition the former have come to lie along either
side of long body processes of subsequent development". Also the
elongate marginal cirri of some Comatulids, like Heliometra, Pro-
machocrinus etc. are regarded as a kind of tactile organs ,dis-
tantly suggesting the antennæ of arthropods".
This interpretation of pinnules and cirri as the homologon of
Arthropod appendages has further led to the assertion that ,,pin-
nules beyond the second segment are merely elongated tentacular
processes in which a skeleton is formed as needed", as are also
the cirri ,a long tentacular structure with no phylogenetic history"
(Oper spre 72)
The development of pinnules into arms of exactly the same
structure as the normal arms in the specimens of Antedon petasus
here described, decisively proves that the pinnule joints — also
those beyond the second — have the same fundamental value as
the brachials and necessarily leads to the conclusion that the pin-
nules morphologically represent arms; they are on physiological
grounds reduced to organs specially adapted for generative, nutrit-
ive and respiratory functions, but retain a latent, potential power
7) Bull. U.S. National Museum. 8.2 I. 1915.
79
of developing in the same way as normal arms. No support for
the barnacle theory can be derived from the structure and morpho-
logy of the pinnules, or from the cirri, which are structures of quite
another morphological value than that of the pinnules.!)
") A further discussion of these problems is given in the authors , Studies
in the development of Crinoidsf; Papers from the Department of Mar-
ine Biology of the Carnegie Institution of Washington. Vol. XVI. 1920.
PRS0= 82:
S0—20
"Remarks on Molgula lutkeniana Traustedt.
By
Prosper Bovien.
In his paper , Vestindiske Ascidiæ simplices" (Vidensk. Medd.
Naturh. Forening, København, 1882) Traustedt establishes a new
species of Molgula, M. liitkeniana, but mentions it only quite pas-
singly in an analytical table of species, giving these characters for
Fig. 1. Lamina dorsalis. Fig. 2. Part of the branchial sac.
From an original drawing From an original drawing
by Traustedt. by Traustedt.
it: The branchial sac has six folds on each side; the dorsal tub-
ercle is horseshoe-shaped, with the aperture turning backwards ;
the dorsal lamina is toothed; the anal opening has a plain border.
No further description was ever published by Traustedt, and
apparently the species has never been found or examined by other
investigators, so that our knowledge of the species rests alone on
the short notice in the paper quoted.
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 72. 6
82
Recently Mrs. Traustedt presented to the Zoological Museum
of Copenhagen the M. S. notes and drawings left by her late hus-
band. Among the drawings were found two relating to Molgula
liitkeniana, showing the structure of the branchial sac and of the
dorsal lamina. I have then thought it my duty to take this op-
portunity of supplying the lacking detailed description of this spec-
ies, the type of which is preserved in the collection of the Copen-
hagen Museum, honouring also thereby the memory of the late
excellent Danish Ascidiologist. i
Two specimens of this species are found in the Copenhagen
collections, both of them dredged by Luitken in Middelfart Sound
(Little Belt) in 1861. Both specimens are
in a bad condition. Strangely enough no more
specimens have come to hand, although ZOO-
logical investigations have often been made
in that place, which is, evidently, a great
place for Molgulids, the species M. citrina,
tubifera and occulta being likewise known
from there.
To the characters given by Traustedt
— from which it is easily seen" that the
species belongs to the manhattensis-group
of Hartmeyer — I can add the following from the examination
of the type. The intestinal loop is, as usually in this group,
strongly bent, the two branches lying close to each other, except-
ing at the bending point. The renal sac is short, broad and only
slightly curved, its upper edge being nearly straight. It is placed
close beneath the gonad. The folds of the branchial sac have each
three internal longitudinal vessels.
To the two original drawings by Traustedt I have added a
sketch of the better of the two specimens, which I may then de-
signate as the type specimen. It is 8 mm long; the other spec-
imen is slightly larger.
Fig. 3. Molgula liitkeniana
Trstdt. Type specimen.
23—9— 1920.
7 RAE
.
a
-
c
i
É:
The development of the calcareous skeleton in
Mitella (Pollicipes), and the origin of the Cirripeds.
(Preliminary report)
by
Hjalmar Broch.
Some years ago I published an account of the development
of the calcareous plates in Scalpellum"). The investigations re-
vealed the fact that in Scalpellum the ,,primordial valves"f (i. e.
Carina, Terga, and Scuta) make their appearance before the other
plates of the capitulum, and before the scales of the stalk; they
are first observed in the pupa-stage as five small, chitinous plates
of porous structure. This seems to indicate, as I have pointed out
in the paper referred to, that the ancestors of Scalpellum must be
sought among Cirripeds with a capitulum-skeleton consisting of only
five plates, and I was inclined to share the opinion of Darwin>)
that Scalpellum descends from Oxynaspis-like predecessors, and
»blends through S. villosum into Pollicipes". This view is in
strict opposition to the opinions maintained by Hoeky) and Gru-
vel?) who consider Mitella (Pollicipes) to be the older genus, from
which Scalpellum is derived; in their opinion Mitella among all
the recent Cirripeds stands next to the ancestral type.
The only way to get a little more light into the question seems
to be the detailed study of the development of the calcareous
1) Die Plattenentwickelung bei Scalpellum Strømii M. Sars. (Det kgl. norske
Vid. Selsk. Sk. 1912). Trondhjem.
?) A monograph on the Sub-Class Cirripedia. The Lepadidae or Peduncul-
ated Cirripedes. (Roy. Soc.) London 1851.
”) The Cirripedia of the Siboga-Expedition. A Cirripedia pedunculata. Si-
boga-Exped. Monogr. XXXI a. Leiden 1907.
1») Monographie des Cirrhipédes ou Thécostracés. Paris 1905.
6?
84
skeleton of Mitella. I am therefore greatly indebted to my friend
Dr. Th. Mortensen, curator of the Zoological Museum at Copen-
hagen, who gathered a most valuable material of Mitella (Polli-
cipes) polymerus (Sowerby) Pilsbry at La Jolla, California, in 1915,
and kindly placed it at my disposal for study. In a forthcoming
paper dealing with his rich collections of Cirripeds from different
parts of the Pacific Ocean I shall give the details of my studies.
Here I intend to give only some few preliminary remarks serving
to point out some principal lines of general interest concerning
the phylogeny of the barnacles, and the theories cited above.
As was the case in Scalpellum, the first plates which appear
ere also in Mitella the five ,primordial valves". They are devel-
oped in the pupa-stage as five chitinous plates of porous structure
soon after the pupa has fixed itself, and surround that part of the
body which constitutes the capitulum of the young Cirriped. Very
soon the calcification of the plates commences, and almost at the
same time the Rostrum is seen, immediately followed by the de-
veloping Latus superius. Then the upper row of Latera makes its
appearance, and not till now do the first small scales of the stalk
develop.
The growth of the animal, especially that of the stalk, is al-
most entirely restricted to the transition from capitulum to stalk,
and only in this narrow zone of growth new plates or scales arise.
Through the growth of the animal therefore, the scales of the stalk
are soon removed from the transition-zone, and then almost com-
pletely stop growing. The main growth of the plates of the capi-
tulum takes place along the part of the plates facing the stalk.
In its general features the development of the calcareous skel-
eton in Mitella thus corresponds with Scalpellum. This, indeed,
must be taken as contradictory to the theory that Mitella should
be the ancestral type, and lends support to Darwins opinion,
that the ancestors of both genera have had a skeleton consisting
only of five capitulum-plates. Nevertheless we must take some
reservation. We must look after the ancestors neither among recent
genera nor among genera at present known from palæontological
finds. In all probability the ancestral form of the stalked Cirri-
peds (and thus of all the Thoracica) was a Cirriped with only five
thickened parts of the mantle, or valves, viz. Carina, Terga, and
ASO
Scuta, i. e. a form with the five ,,primordial valvesf in accordance
with Darwins nomenclature. We are moreover justified in sup-
posing that the skeleton of the ancestors was chitinous, and that
the calcification in its present shape is a later acquisition.
From this primitive form the pedunculated Cirripeds seem to
” have developed after two lines. One of these lines leads to the
extinct genera Archaeolepas and Loricula, and to the recent genera
Mitella (possibly the starting point of the sessile acorn-shells) and
Scalpellum. The other line has given rise to the other genera of
stalked Cirripeds, which have kept only the five primordial valves,
or even reduced their number; in the last case further investig-
ations will have to tell us, whether all the primordial valves are
also here indicated in the pupa.
Kristiania 10— 8—1920.
Smaa Bidrag til dansk Faunistik.
Af
Ad. S. Jensen.
l.
Dværgmus (Mus minutus Pall.) paa Sjælland.
I Betragtning af, at Dværgmusen er saa lille et Dyr — næst
Dværgspidsmusen vort mindste Pattedyr — og at den først blev
videnskabelig kendt (fra Volgas Bredder) i 1776, maa den siges
forholdsvis tidligt at være paavist i Danmark.
Vel nævner H.S. Holten (1800)”) ikke Dværgmusen, og H.
B. Melchior (1834)”) kendte den kun fra ,det Schlesvigske" og
Ditmarsken,”) men i 1838—39 kunde Ilapetus Steenstrup op-
lyse,”) at den findes i Jylland.
Steenstrup traf Dværgmus —- eller ,,Havremuus”, som han
kalder dem — ,paa en Havremark ved Skelum Præstegaard, ”/2 Miil
Vest for Mariagerfjorden”.%) Han saa ogsaa flere Reder (med Unger
i) og gav en fortræffelig Skildring af disse kunstige, om smaa
Fuglereder mindende Sommerboliger.
Om andre Iagttagelser fra ældre Tid af Dværgmus i Jylland
foreligger i Litteraturen — mig bekendt — kun en Notits af Ar-
thur Feddersen, som i 1865, i en lille Afhandling om Viborg-
egnens Hvirveldyr,?) skriver, at han oftere har set Reden om Efter-
aaret.
") Danmarks og Norges Fauna, I, Pattedyr. Kjbhvn. 1800.
?”) Den danske Stats og Norges Pattedyr (p. 103—04). Kjbhvn. 1834.
3) Jfr. ogsaa F. Bøoie, som allerede i 1823 skriver om Mus minutus: ,In
Schleswig und Holstein ist sie eine der am håufigsten vorkommenden
Arten." Beytråge zur Naturgeschichte der Såugethiere. Isis von Oken.
Janrg. 1823, 2. Bd. (p. 969—70).
1) Optegnelser om danske Dyrs Forekomst og Levemaade. 10. Mus minu-
tus Pall. Naturhist. Tidsskrift udg. af Krøyer, 2. Bind (p. 546—47). 1838—39.
5) Iap. Steenstrup opholdt sig, iflg. Meddelelse til mig fra Prof. Joh. Steen-
strup, i Skelum eller Skelund (c. 5 km N. f. Mariager Fjord) i Sommeren
1836 og 1837, saa at Iagttagelsen maa have fundet Sted i disse Aar.
6) Viborg Kathedralskoles Program for 1865 (p. 16).
88
I 1862 og 1863 modtog Zoologisk Museum de første danske
Dværgmus, idet daværende Adjunkt A. G. Juel indsendte ikke
mindre end 20 Eksemplarer, fangne i Omegnen af Aalborg.
Sidenhen er Dværgmus indsendt til Zoologisk Museum fra en
Del Lokaliteter i Jylland, nemlig: Lustrupdal ved Ribe; Klelund
ved Holsted; Follerupgaard ved Fredericia; Faarupgaard ved Vejle;
Tirsbæk ved Vejle; Uldum S. V. for Horsens; Holing ved Herning;
Bølling Sø V. for Silkeborg; Aarhus; Staby, Ulfborg; Aalborg.
Desuden er den af H. Winge!) funden i Uglegylp fra følgende
Lokaliteter: Vonsild Sønderskov; Dyrehavegaard Skov og Bram-
drup Skov N. for Kolding; Skanderborg Dyrehave; Skovsgaard Ø.
for Viborg; N. for Asmild Kloster ved Viborg; Krabbesholm Skov
N. for Skive. Og af O. Helms”) i Uglegylp fra: Vamdrup; Kol-
ding; Komarksbusk ved Kolding; Seest S. V. for Kolding; Sejr-
skov V. for Kolding; Starup N. for Kolding; Grimstrup Ø. for Varde;
Højen S. for Vejle; Hatting V. for Horsens; Ørsted Ø. for Ran-
ders; Sønderholm Ø. for Nibe.
Af disse Fund kan man slutte, at Dværgmusen er almindelig
i Jylland, fra Grænsen mod Slesvig op til Limfjorden.?)
Som forekommende paa Fyen nævnes Dværgmusen første Gang
1875 af Fr. Meinert”), der opgiver at have sin Viden herom fra
Cand. Sahlertz; nærmere Oplysning gives ikke, men formodent-
lig ligger der en mundtlig Meddelelse til Grund — jeg har i alt
Fald ikke kunnet finde, at Sahlertz har publiceret noget derom.
Fra Fyen nævnes Dværgmusen næste Gang 1878 af P. Tau-
ber%): ,,Dværgmusen [er] almindelig i Jylland og Fyen, hvorimod
den ellers ikke er kjendt fra andre Egne." Den omtales ogsaa af
) Om nogle Smaapattedyr i Danmark. Vidensk. Meddel. Naturhist. Foren.
for Aaret 1882 (n. 76—87).
Om nogle danske Uglers Gylp. Vidensk. Meddel. Naturhist. Foren. for
Aaret 1901 (p. 55—65).
”) Der foreligger intet om Fund af Dværgmus fra Vendsyssel eller Thy,
men det kan skyldes Tilfældigheder og behøver ikke at tydes, som om
Dværgmusen mangler Nord for Limfjorden.
Ugeskrift for Landmænd, 1875 (p. 661).
En forsvindende Pattedyrverden i Kjøbenhavn. Geogr. Tidsskrift, Extra-
hefte, 1878.
89
Jul Wulff i 1881): ,Havremusen (Mus minutus Pallas) kaldes
ogsaa Dværgmus ... Denne lille Mus er hos os kun funden paa
Fyn og i Jylland."
Det synes derfor underligt, at Winge i 18827) skriver om
Dværgmusen: ,den skal være funden paa Fyen". Iflg. mundtlig
Meddelelse fra Winge hænger det saaledes sammen: Tauber har i
sin Tid meddelt Winge, at det eneste Grundlag for Angivelsen af
Fyen som Hjemsted for Dværgmus var, at Zoologen Georg Win-
ther havde fortalt Tauber, at han (Winther) havde fundet Reder
af Dværgmus paa Fyen — men dette ansaa Winge for ufyldest-
gørende, da Dværgmusens Reder kan ligne forskellige Sangfugles.
Hertil sigter ogsaa Winges Udtalelse i samme Afhandling (p. 87):
»dens Forekomst paa Fyn er vel næppe endnu aldeles sikker, men
er dog meget sandsynlig (Hr. Tauber har velvillig givet mig nær-
mere Oplysning)".?)
Afgørende Sikkerhed for Dværgmusens Forekomst paa Fyen
har man i en Afhandling af Winge fra 1899, hvori han skriver?):
»Om Dværgmusens Forekomst paa Fyn haves nu sikker Under-
retning; to Reder, den ene fæstet mellem Havrestraa, begge tagne
i Syd-Fyn, har Lektor Rostrup i 1886 givet til Museet. Ogsaa
" paa Langeland er Arten funden; den er indsendt til Museet fra
Apotheker Bauer, der har faaet den ved Søvertorp, S. O. f. Rud-
kjøbing, i 1883.”
Fra Fyen har Zool. Museum senere faaet den fra Horne ved
Faaborg (1 Ekspl., givet i 1895 af R. Hørring)?) og fra Kjerte-
minde (2 Ekspl., givne i 1909 af Kunstmaler Johannes Larsen).
Som det vil fremgaa af det foregaaende, er Forfatterne enige
om, at Dværgmusen ikke findes udenfor Jylland-Fyen, og dette
bekræftes af Winge, som i den nyeste Sammenstilling af vore
”) Danmarks Pattedyr (p. 49), Kjbhvn. 1881.
?”) Om nogle Smaapattedyr i Danmark. Vidensk. Meddel. Naturhist. Foren.
for Aaret 1882 (p. 84).
32) Den ovenfor citerede Meddelelse af Meinert bar Winge øjensynlig ikke kendt.
+) Om nogle Pattedyr i Danmark. Vidensk. Meddel. Naturhist. Foren. for Aaret
1899 (p. 294).
5) Magister Hørring har meddelt mig, at han (23—8—1895) fangede ad-
skillige Stykker under Havreneg, da disse blev læsset paa Høstvogn; de
fleste var haarklædte Unger, rystede ud af Rederne, hvis Rester fandtes.
90
Pattedyrs Udbredelse skriver"): ,,Dvergmus (Mus minutus Pall.) …
Almindelig udbredt over Jylland, kjendes ogsaa fra Fyn og Lange-
land, ikke fra de andre af vore Øer.” ”)
Sjælland. Det var derfor et Fund af usædvanlig Interesse, som
blev gjort d. 6. December 1913, da Premierløjtnant, Kunstmaler
P.Skovgaard fangede en Dværgmus, der løb paa Jorden ved Skyde-
banerne paa Amager. Hr. Skovgaard var selv klar over, at det var
en Dværgmus, og han viste Zoologisk Museum den store Velvilje
at overlade det Dyret.
Det var nu at vente, at Dværgmusen vilde brede sig, men 5
Aar skulde gaa, inden det næste Fund blev gjort.
I Juli 1918 fandt Gartner H. Kjær, iflg. en Meddelelse af Forst-
kandidat H. Weis,?) en Dværgmusrede med Unger i i Toppen af
højt Græs.paa en Eng ved Furesø. Øg samme Aar modtog Zoo-
logisk Museum, gennem Forstkand. Weis, en Dværgmusrede, som
hans Fader, Entomologen, fhv. Proprietær Weis i November havde
»nedbanket" fra en Brombærbusk ved Frederiksdal ved Lyngby.
Den 11. August 1919 fandtes ved Birkerød i en Hindbærbusk,
3/4 Meter over Jorden, en Rede med 6 Dværgmusunger, der skæn-
kedes til Zoologisk Museum af Stud. mag. D. Miller. I.Septem-
ber samme Aar fandtes i Tibirke Mose talrige Dværgmusreder i
Toppen af højt Græs; 3 gaves til Museet af Sparekassedirektør O.
Jacobsen. Endvidere fandt Hr. Kay Olsen d. 18. Januar 1920
en Dværgmusrede ved Prinsessestien ved Lyngby og foreviste den
forb sAWErntee:
") Danmarks Fauna, Pattedyr, Kbhvn. 1908 (p. 90—91).
7) Foruden at Mennesker ikke havde fundet Dværgmus paa Sjælland, Lol-
land eller Falster, kunde ogsaa henvises til, at heller ikke Uglerne havde
fundet dem dér, hvilket fremgaar af Listerne over Indholdet (ca. 8000
Ekspir. af Smaapattedyr) af de Uglegylp, som Winge og Helms havde
undersøgt. Dette blev forøvrigt allerede peget paa af Winge (1. c. 1882,
p. 84) i hans Afhandling om Uglegylp. — Jeg ser med Vilje bort fra en
Beretning hes Steenstrup (l. c.) om, at Prof. Reinhardt sen. havde
meddelt S., at han for mange Aar siden i Maven af en paa Sjælland
skudt Ugle havde fundet et Kranie af en Mus, som han (Reinhardt)
maatte anse for at tilhøre Mus minutus — jeg føler mig nemlig aldeles
overbevist om, at en Fejlbestemmelse ligger til Grund for denne An-
givelse.
3) Flora og Fauna, 1919 (p. 21).
rr
91
Ogsaa i 1920 var der, iflg. Meddelelse fra Lærer J. P. Kryger,
talrige Dværgmusreder i Tibirke Mose, dels ved Jorden, dels i
Toppen af Star. Og i Oktober 1920 fandt samme Meddeler en
Dværgmusrede i en Lyngbusk paa Overdrevet udenfor Sandkroen
FRISERE S Vilde Hern) Endelig skænkede "Hr/Kryger "Museet en i
Toppen af højt Græs anbragt Dværgmusrede, fundet d. 24. Oktober
1920 ved Ørholm, i Kanten af en Havremark.
Det er altsaa en Kendsgerning, at Dværgmusen har indfundet
sig paa Sjælland. I 1913 er den funden paa Amager og i 1918,
1919 og 1920 forskellige Steder i Nordsjælland, nemlig Egnen
mellem Lyngby og Furesø, Ørholm N. f. Lyngby, Birkerød, Sand-
kroen og Tibirke ved Tisvilde Hegn.
Den Omstændighed, at Dværgmusen først fandtes paa det af
Hæren benyttede Areal af Amager, kunde tyde paa, at den er ført
hertil med Hø, Halm eller Fourage fra Jylland eller Fyen, og at
den herfra har bredt sig til Nordsjælland; da der holdes Hær-
øvelser baade i Egnen ved Lyngby og S. f. Tisvilde, var det
ogsaa tænkeligt, at Dværgmusen kunde være bragt til disse Egne
med militære Transporter.
2:
Lichia glauca (L.)")
fanget ved Korsør og ved Hals.
Den 9. September 1918 blev der i Bundgarn i 4 Meters Dybde
ved Korsør, udfor det sydlige Hjørne af Korsør Skov, fanget en
ukendt Fisk, som blev erhvervet af Korsør Kommunes Mellem-
og Realskole og af Læreren i Naturhistorie, Cand. phil. E. Rend-
torff indsendt til Zoologisk Museum for at udstoppes.
Denne Fisk viste sig at være et ganske friskt og fuldkommen
ubeskadiget Eksemplar af Lichia glauca, og da Hr. Rendtorff fik
at vide, at det var Museet meget magtpaaliggende at komme i Be-
siddelse af Fisken, gik han beredvilligt ind paa at afgive den til
Museet, hvorfor dette er ham megen Tak skyldig.
!) — Trachynotus glaucus Regan. Angaaende Regan”s Grunde til at
foretrække Slægtsnavnet Trachynotus se Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 7. Ser.,
vol, XII, 1903, p. 348 — M. H. til Synonymien iøvrigt se Day: The
Fishes of Great Britain and Ireland, Vol. I, 1880—84, p. 132.
92
Denne, til Familien Carangidæ hørende Fisk har et aflangt, sammen-
trykt Legeme, beklædt med smaa, glatte Skæl. Hovedets Længde gaar Cc.
4'/» Gang og Legemets største Højde c. 3/8 Gang op i Legemets Længde,
regnet til Midten af Halefinnens Indskæring. Øjets Længdediameter gaar 4
Gange op i Hovedets Længde. Underkæben rager lidt frem foran Snu-
den, og Overkæben naar bagtil lidt forbi en Højdelinie gennem Øjets forre-
ste Rand. Mundspalten skraat opstigende; smaa Tænder i Kæberne, paa
Ganeben, Vomer og Tunge. Rygfinnens forreste Del dannet af korte, frie
Fig.1. Lichia glauca L. Et Eksemplar fanget ved Korsør d. 9.9.1918 CÆ118;
Pigstraaler, hvoraf den forreste er rettet fremad; den længere, bagre Del er
blødstraalet og lav, men hæver sig noget fortil. Foran Gatfinnen to frie Pig-
straaler, derefter en. lang, blødstraalet Del, der ligner anden Rygfinne og kun
er lidt kortere. Brystfinnerne temm. korte, af Længde med Afstanden mellem
Pupillens Forrand og Gællelaagets Bagrand. Bugfinnerne meget smaa, kun lidt
længere end Snudens Længde; de kan optages i en Fordybning paa Bugkanten.
Halefinnen meget dybt indskaaren. Sidelinien danner en svag Bue over Bryst-
finnerne, stiger derpaa nedefter, indtil den omtrent i Højde med 2. Rygfinnes
Forkant gaar omtrent ret ud til Midten af Halefinnens Basis. Farven er mørk
paa Ryggen, sølvglinsende paa Sider og Bug; nogle faa mørke Striber tværs over
den forreste Del af Sidelinien og en sort Plet fortil paa Toppen af den blød-
straalede Ryg- og Gatfinne; Halefinnens Over- og Underrand mørktfarvede.
Det foreliggende Eksemplar, der er 300 mm langt (fra Snudespidsen til
Midten af en Linie, der forbinder Halefinnens Spidser), har følgende Antal
Straaler i Emnerne DN ESS STA Pe PAVE
Lichia glauca forekommer i Middelhavet og ved Afrikas Vest-
kyst, ned iil det Gode Haabs Forbjerg, langt ude i det atlantiske
Ocean (Azorerne,/) Madeira, Teneriffa, St. Helena og Ascension)”)
og ved Brasiliens Kyst.”) Ved Frankrigs Vestkyst er den yderst
") Regan, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., VII. Ser., Vol. XII, 1903, p. 344.
?”) Cuvier & Valenciennes: Histoire Naturelle des Poissons, T. 8, 1831, p. 358.
93
sjælden,") og ved England er den — mig bekendt — kun taget 2
Gange, nemlig i Oktober 1857 og d. 28. August 1878; begge Eks-
emplarer fangedes i Mounts Bay paa den sydvestlige Spids af Corn-
wall.”)
Fangsten af denne oceaniske Varmtvandsfisk helt inde i Store
Belt er ret overraskende.
Efterat ovenstaaende forlængst var nedskrevet, fik jeg fra Real-
skolelærer J. Gregersen i Hals sendt til Bestemmelse en Fisk,
der var fanget d. 19. August 1920 i Bundgarn ved Hals, ved
Indsejlingen til Limfjorden.
Det viste sig at være et nyt Eksemplar af Lichia glauca, 305
mm langt, altsaa en Ubetydelighed større end det forrige. Dets
Antal af Straaler er. følgende: D. 7 +, A. 2 ls, P. 17, V. I. Far-
ven paa den friske Fisk beskrives af Hr. Gregersen paa følgende
Maade: ,Smuk grønglinsende paa Ryg og Hoved med 3 mørke
Tværstriber, der naar omtrent ned til Midten af Fisken; bag dem
findes en mørk Plet.”) Bugen smuk sølvglinsende. Ved Grunden
af Brystfinnen findes et stort, grønt Skæl.”
Takket være Hr. Gregersens Imødekommenhed lykkedes det
Zoologisk Museum at erhverve ogsaa dette Eksemplar.
3:
Centrolophus niger (Gmelin)1)
taget ved Blokhus.
Et aldeles friskt og meget smukt bevaret Eksemplar af denne
Fisk indsendtes i April 1919 til Zoologisk Museum af Fisker Jo-
han Sørensen i Blokhus pr. Pandrup. Paa Forespørgsel med-
”)Y Moreau: Histoire Naturelle des Poissons de la France, T. II, 1881, p. 457.
SDI Daylde p:133:
2) Hos Eksemplaret fra Korsør findes kun 2 (tydelige) mørke Striber tværs-
over Sideliniens forreste Del.
= Centrolophus pompilus Cuv. & Val. (non Linné). Ang. den ret ind-
viklede Synonymi se Jordan & Evermann: Fishes of North Ame-
rica, I, 1896, p. 963 og Regan, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 7. Ser., X, 1902,
p:195.
4
94
delte Hr. S. følgende nærmere Oplysninger: ,,Fisken, jeg sendte,
er fanget i Havstokken Syd for Blokhus uden Redskab; jeg gik
langs Stranden, saa den og fangede den med mine Hænder. . . .
Fisken er fanget d. 24. April [1919]."
Denne, til Familien Stromateidæ hørende Fisk har et langstrakt, noget
sammentrykt Legeme, beklædt med meget smaa Skæl. Hovedets Længde gaar
c. 4%/, Gang og Legemets største Højde c. 4 Gange op i Legemets Længde,
regnet til Midten af Halefinnens Indskæring. Snuden 1;/s Gang saa lang som
Fig. 2. Centrolophus niger (Gme!'.). Et Eksemplar taget ved Blokhus d. 24.4.1919. C.1/4.
Øjet, hvis Diameter gaar c. 6 Gange op i Hovedets Længde; Afstanden imellem
Øjnene indeholdes 3!/s Gang i Hovedets Længde. Overkæben naar bagtil
lidt forbi en Højdelinie gennem Øjets forreste Rand; Mundspalten er næsten
vandret; Tænderne er smaa og findes kun paa Kæberne. En enkelt, lang
Rygfinne; den begynder over en Højdelinie gennem Brystfinnernes forreste
Trediedel, og dens Længde langs Roden udgør omtrent Halvdelen af Fiskens
Totallængde; den er dækket af en tyk, skællet Hud, der helt skjuler de for-
reste Straaler, og af de andre ses kun Spidsen tydeligt ovenfor denne Skede.”)
Gatfinnen ligner Rygfinnen, men er kun lidt over halv saa lang. Brystfin-
nerne er temmelig korte; deres længste Straaler er godt halvt saa lange som
Hovedet. Bugfinnerne er atter lidt kortere end Brystfinnerne. Halefinnen
er noget indskaaret. Sidelinien danner en langstrakt Bue i den forreste Del,
men bliver ret oven over Begyndelsen af Gatfinnen.. Farven (i Alkohol) er
mørkebrun.
Forekomsten af Centrolophus niger ved dansk Kyst er mærke-
lig, naar man ser hen til, hvad man ellers véd om dens Ud-
bredelse.
Denne Fisk har længe været kendt fra Middelhavet og blev
") Hos daarligt konserverede Eksemplarer synes Skeden mindre tyk og fast.
95
allerede beskrevet og afbildet 1554 af Rondelet, under Navnet
Pompilus; den er almindelig udfor Nizza, men siges ellers at være
gennemgaaende sjelden.
I Atlanterhavet er et Eksemplar fanget (i 1888) udfor Mas-
sachusetts. Hyppigere er den iagttaget i Atlanterhavets østlige Del,
mod Syd indtil Madeira, mod Nord indtil England, hvor den hyp-
pigst fanges udfor Indgangen til den engelske Kanal samt Syd og
Vest for Irland; den vides undertiden at strejfe ind i den vestlige
Nordsø, saa højt op som til Aberdeen. For første Gang er den
nu altsaa truffet i den østlige Del af Nordsøen, ved Blok-
hus i det nordlige Jylland (omtrent paa samme Breddegrad
som Aberdeen).
Centrolophus niger siges at være pelagisk i sin Levevis, og
hermed stemmer, at den ved Syd-England jevnlig fanges af Fiskere,
som ligger paa Makrelfangst udenfor Kysten, dels paa Kroge, som
slæbes i Overfladen efter Baadene, dels i Drivgarn; den er ogsaa
taget i Drivgarn efter Laks. Iøvrigt menes den at følge efter større
Højsøfiske og er flere Gange iagttaget at følge store Hajer, ligesom
Lodsfisken (Naucrates) gør det, eller Skibe og Vraggods og paa
denne Maade at komme ind til Kysten.”)
Det foreliggende, danske Eksemplar, der er 400 mm langt (fra
Snudespids til en Højdelinie mellem Halefinnens Spidser), har ikke
været vanskeligt at bestemme, thi det stemmer godt overens med
Beskrivelserne hos engelske Ichthyologer, som Day (l. c.), Regan
(ROD) EEFOlFESEByrnen (le)
Af Slægten Centrolophus er beskrevet 3 Arter, nemlig foruden
C. niger (s. pompilus): C. maoricus Ogilby (fra New Zealand) og
C. britannicus Giinther.
C. britannicus beskreves af Giinther”) efter et i British Mu-
seum opbevaret, udstoppet Eksemplar fra Cornwall. De Forff., som
sidenhen har beskæftiget sig med denne Art, er enige om, at Eks-
emplaret er daarligt udstoppet, saa at det f. Eks. ikke er muligt at
tage nøjagtige Maal paa det, men at det iøvrigt meget ligner en
C. niger. Alligevel opretholdes Arten (omend for Holt & Byrne's
!) Jfr. Day: The Fishes of Great Britain and Ireland, I, 1880—84; p. 111;
Holt & Byrne: Rep. Sea and Inland Fisheries of Ireland for the year
1901, Part II, App., No. V.
”) Catal. of Fishes, Il, 1860, p. 402.
96
Vedkommende med Forbehold), idet man navnlig henviser til, at de
uparrede Finners Antal af Straaler er saa forskelligt, nemlig hos:
C. niger") C. britannicus
Ryes s7-4] 45
Gatinne eee 2 S 25 30
Nylig mener den islandske Zoolog B. Sæmundsson at have
genfundet C. britannicus, idet han henfører et ved Syd-Island
(Grindavik) i. 1905 inddrevet Eksemplar til denne Art. Sæmunds-
son giver en udførlig, af Afbildning ledsaget Beskrivelse af dette
Eksemplar,?”) som han siger stemmer godt overens med C. britan-
nicus, uden at dog C. niger nævnes. Dog bemærker S. udtrykke-
ligt, at Antallet af Straaler i Gatfinnen er betydelig lavere hos det
islandske Eksemplar, nemlig kun 25, medens samtidig Rygfinnen
har det høje Tal af 46 Straaler. Da saaledes den eneste reelle
Forskel, man hidtil har kunnet henvise til, nemlig det høje Antal
Straaler i begge uparrede Finner hos C. britannicus, nu er af
Vejen, saasom det islandske Eksemplar har højt Antal i den ene
Finne og lavt i den anden, tager jeg ikke i Betænkning at ind-
drage C. britannicus Gthr. som Synonym under C. niger Gmel.
") Hos det danske Eksemplar er Straaletallét: D. 39, A. 25 (den sidste Straale
i begge Finner er dobbelt, men er regnet for 1), P. 21, V. 6; hos 3 Eks-
emplarer fra Middelhavet har jeg talt: D. 41. 40, 37; A. 24, 25, 23.
”) Vidensk. Meddel. Dansk Naturhist. Foren., Bd. 65, 1913, p. 9, Tavle I.
1—10—1920.
Findes Muldvarpen paa Møen?
Af
stud. mag. Erik M. Poulsen.
I den zoologiske Litteratur stemmer Angivelserne om Muld-
varpens Forekomst paa Møen ikke overens.
Hos Melchior: Den danske Stats og Norges Pattedyr, 1834,
S. 62, findes angivet at Muldvarpen ikke findes paa Møen.
Hun WinL Er skriver "(Danmarks Pattedyr lS8 LES IST) Den
(Muldvarpen) er almindelig i Danmark undtagen Bornholm, den
østlige Del af Møen og Amager."
Tauber angiver ligeledes i Zoologia Danica, Pattedyr, 1878-—
92, S. 27, at Muldvarpen er almindelig over hele Landet med Und-
tagelse af Høje Møen.
I Herluf Winge: Pattedyr, 1908, S. 19 nævnes Møen ikke
blandt de Egne af Landet, om hvilke Forfatteren opgiver, at Muld-
varpen mangler (Bornholm, Mors, det meste af Thy).
For at bringe Rede i disse Uoverensstemmelser skrev jeg til
forskellige Personer fra forskellige Egne af Møen og anmodede
dem om at oplyse, hvorvidt Muldvarpen fandtes paa deres Egn
ellertejnejestnktfølsenderf Svar:
Skolebestyrer Hyllemose, Magleby: Muldvarpen findes ikke
paa Møen. Jeg har denne Viden dels fra egne Undersøgelser og
dels fra Forespørgsler rettede til forskellige større Landbrug.
Førstelærer Hyllekvist, Borre: Jeg har levet 30 Aar paa
Møen, men har aldrig set et Muldvarpeskud. Paa Østmøen tror
jeg at kunne indestaa for, at den ikke findes.
Pastor Jensen, Keldby: Muldvarpen findes ikke paa nogen
Del af Møen.
Lærer Fr. H. Hellum, Raabylille: Jeg har aldrig noget Sted
paa Øen set Muldvarpeskud eller Muldvarpe; jeg har ofte overfor
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 72. ÅL
98
"Folk paa forskellige Dele af Øen forespurgt om Sagen og altid
med det Resultat, at der ikke findes Muldvarpe paa Møen.
Lærer:En'gelbrecht, Stege: Efter at have søgt Oplysninger
hos forskellige og påa forskellige Steder af Øen maa jeg svare:
Nej, der findes ingen Muldvarpe paa Møen.
Gaardejer P. Hansen, Lind: I Følge mit store Kendskab til
Øen og Befolkningen tør jeg sikkert udtale, at Muldvarpen ikke
findes paa Møen.
Overskovfoged P. Petersen, Marienborg: Her paa Møen findes
absolut ikke Muldvarpe.
Førstelærer Kr. Sleth Harsen, Damsholte: Jeg har været
10 Aar her paa Møen men har aldrig set Muldvarpen her, og
Folk siger, at den ikke findes her paa Øen.
Paa Grundlag af disse Oplysninger fra Folk fra de forskelligste
Egne af Øen maa det med Bestemthed kunne fastslaas, at Muld-
varpen ikke findes paa Møen. Forholdene er saaledes den
Dag i Dag, som det angives hos Paludan, der i 1824, i sin
» Forsøg til en antiqvarisk, histørisk, geographisk og statistisk Be-
skrivelse over Møen", skriver (2. Deel, S. 63): ,,Det er mærkeligt,
at Muldvarpen ikke findes paa Møen, skjøndt den er i stor Mængde
i den tilgrændsende Deel af Sjelland, paa Falster og Bogøe."
23—10—1920.
RTE
Lucilia sylvarum Meig. som Snylter paa
Bufo vulgaris.
Af
J. P. Kryger.
Om dette Emne er der i de sidste 60 Aar skrevet adskillige
Afhandlinger, uden at det kan siges, at Sagen er opklaret i alle
sine Faser. Navnlig hersker der megen Uoverensstemmelse mel-
lem de forskellige Forfattere med Hensyn til, hvad det er for en
Art Lucilia, der snylter paa Tudser, men ogsaa Spørgsmaalet om,
hvorvidt denne Lucilia-Art alene er henvist til Tudser, er ganske
uoplyst. Nærværende lille Artikel skulde foruden at bringe Med-
delelse om Iagttagelser over et Tilfælde af Lucilia paa Bufo ogsaa
forsøge at klare, hvad der med Sikkerhed vides om Sagen i Øje-
blikket, idet der gives et kort Referat af tidligere Iagttagelser.
Den første, der omtaler Forholdet, er Boie (1), der giver Meddelelse
om Skruptudser fundne ved Eismar i Holsten, paa hvilke Fluelarver havde
ødelagt hele Partiet omkring Næsen. Det lykkedes ikke at klække Fluen.
I 1876 kom man et Skridt videre, idet Moniez (2) i dette Aar beskriver
et Tilfælde, som ret- nøje falder sammen med adskillige af de senere iagt-
tagne, men her lykkedes Klækningen af Fluen. Moniez, som troede, at Arten
var ubeskreven, kaldte den Lucilia bufonivora, idet Slægten viste sig at være
den velkendte Lucilia.
1 1876 gav C. Borre Meddelelse om Fluelarver paa Padder (3) og Gi-
rard en lignende Meddelelse (4).
I 1877 fremkom to Arbejder om Sagen; det ene af V. Collinde Plancy
(5), det andet af Taton (6). I begge Artikler drøftes indgaaende Spørgs-
maalet om, hvorvidt det er en egen Art Flue, der angriber Tudsen, samt om
man kan antage, at Fluen er det primære, eller om den ikke hidlokkes af
Saar, som Tudsen i Forvejen har paa Huden. Begge Forfattere mener, at
Fluen under ingen Omstændigheder angriber raske Tudser. Til Støtte for
denne Paastand anfører Plancy bl.a. en Bemærkning af Alphonse de
a Fontaine i Faune du pays du Luxembourg, Reptiles, 1870,…p. 37, hvori
7e
100
det hedder, at den almindelige Tudse i Luxembourg lider stærkt under An-
greb af en Slags Kræft, der begynder ved Næseborene.
Hos Brauer (10) findes kun en kort Litteraturangivelse om Lucilia
bufonivora.
I Entomologiske Meddelelser giver Fr. Meinert(11) Meddelelse om Fund
af Lucilia-Larver i Øjet paa en levende Tudse. Meinert fik fra Fortunen i
Dyrehaven ved København en Tudse med 7 Fluelarver i Øjet. Tudsen. var
uheldigvis blevet dræbt i kogende Vand, kort efter at den var fanget. Finderen
meddelte Fr. M., at der paa Tudsens Hoved og Ryg sad fastklæbet nogle
Insektæg, af hvilke han antog, at Larverne var fremkomne. Endvidere kunde
han fortælle, at han ca.10 Aar før havde fundet en 3 cm lang Tudse, hvis
Kinder for største Delen var fortæret af Larver. Meinerts Undersøgelse gav
nu til Resultat, at der paa Tudsens Overside fra Nakken til midt paa Ryggen
sad fastklæbet 60—70 Æg. Æggene var alle tomme og sammenfaldne ; Læng-
den af dem var 1,4: mm; Længden af Larverne 4—5 mm. Åt det var Muscide-
larver, kunde der ikke være Tvivl om, og at det var Lucilia-Larver, mente M.
at kunne fastslaa. Meinert tegner og beskriver Larven og dens Spirakler,
uden at han tør henføre den til nogen bestemt Art.
I 1892 gav R. C. Mortensen (14) Beretning om et lignende Flueangreb
paa en Tudse. ”/s 1889 fandt han i Jonstrup Vang N.V. for København en
Tudse, som tildrog sig hans Opmærksomhed ved sin løjerlige Opførsel. Den
sad sammenkrøben og flyttede sig kun trevent, da han rørte ved den. .En
nøjere Undersøgelse viste, at Tudsens Næsehule var fyldt af Fluelarver, som
havde ødelagt Skillevæggen mellem Næseborene. 2 af Larverne var synlige
udvendigt fra. Mortensen tog Tudsen med hjem og satte den i et Glas med
Jord. Den bevægede sig kun lidt, søgte aabenbart bare at blive fri for Lar-
verne, men naaede kun at fylde Næsen med Jord. ””/s var Larverne van-
drede ned i Tudsens Svælg; om Eftermiddagen døde den. ”/s var Larverne
gaaet bort fra Svælget og fandtes under Nøglebenet. ””/s var en Del af dem
vandrede ind i Hjernen og Brysthulen. ”/8—/s forlod Larverne Aadslet og
gravede sig ned i Jorden, hvor de overvintrede. Endnu den 8. September
viste de sig at være Larver. Fra "”/4—/s 1890 fremkom Fluerne. Tudsen
havde været hjemsøgt af ialt 27 Larver, som alle klækkedes. Dr. H. J. Han-
sen bestemte Arten at være Lucilia sylvarum Meig. Mortensen omtaler
endelig, at han ikke ved noget om, at den her omtalte Tudse var syg ved
Angrebets Begyndelse, men tror det ikke. I en Samtale med mig i Efter-
aaret 1919 har han hævdet, at han er sikker paa, at det ikke er ydre Syg-
domstegn eller Saar, der har hidlokket Snylteren, men at denne virkelig er
det primære. I Afhandlingen nævner Mortensen sluttelig, at han ?”/s 1891
fandt en død Tudse ikke langt fra det Sted, hvor han fandt den første. Den
døde Tudse var ogsaa angrebet af Fluelarver i Næsen. Næseborene var
stærkt udvidede, den indre Skillevæg mellem dem var borte. Larverne for=
lod Tudsen Yo, men Klækning lykkedes ikke; Pupperne døde i Løbet af
Vinteren. De af Mortensen klækkede Fluer med tilhørende Puparier blev
af ham foræret til Zoologisk Museums 3. Afdeling. Et omhyggeligt Eftersyn
der i Januar 1920 har imidlertid vist, at dette Materiale ikke mere eller ikke
101
for Tiden er at finde; det maa altsaa være bortkommet paa en eller anden
Maade, der nu neppe lader sig opklare, idet alle de i 1890 paa 3. Afdeling
ansatte jo nu er døde. — Det er meget kedeligt, at disse klækkede Fluer
nu ikke mere kan skaffes til Stede; de vilde utvivlsomt kunne have bidraget
meget til at klare det omstridte Artsspørgsmaal. Det er dobbelt kedeligt,
fordi en af de senere Forfattere (efter min Mening med Rette) aabenbart
grunder sin Bestemmelse af Fluen paa Dr. Hansens Afgørelse.
Den næste, der beskæftiger sig med Lucilia paa Bufo, er G. Duncker
(12). Midt i Juli 1891 fandt Duncker en Tudse, som laa og rodede med
Hovedet stukket ned i Jord og nedfaldne Blade. Næseborene var opfyldt af
Fluelarver. 777 fandtes atter en Tudse. Lokaliteten var stærkt solbeskinnet.
Næseborene var kun svagt udvidede, men en Undersøgelse ved Hjæip af
Lupen viste tydeligt, at der var Larver i dem. Tudsen blev bragt hjem og
sat i et Glas med Mos og Jord. Den sad mest stille hen med Næsen mod
Glasset; den blev derfor dækket med Mos. >%/1 var det meste af den for-
tæret, kun de større Knogler var tilbage. "/s var Larverne forvandlede til
Pupper. ”/s begyndte Fluerne at komme frem; der klækkedes ialt 50 Stk.
Fr. Dahl i Kiel bestemte dem som hørende til Lucilia sylvarum Meig. Da
Klækningen var begyndt, blev der sat en voksen Tudse ned i Glasset. Flu-
erne parrede sig imidlertid ikke, hvorfor der naturligvis heller ingen Æglæg-
ning fandt Sted. Tudsen viste ikke Spor af instinktiv Frygt for Fluerne, som
den tværtimod aad. Ialt fik den Lov at æde 40 Stk., inden Forsøget af-
sluttedes.
Langt den største Afhandling om Lucilia bufonivora foreligger imidlertid
paa Russisk af Portschinsky (15). Afhandlingen er som sagt skrevet paa
Russisk og er altsaa lidet tilgængelig for os Vesteuropæere. Imidlertid fore-
ligger af Recker et Referat paa Tysk af Arbejdet (16). Det russiske År-
bejde har været mig tilgængeligt, men det har ikke været mig muligt at faa
fat i Reckers Referat, og jeg maa derfor indskrænke mig til at anføre, hvad
Klunzinger (18) (se senere) citerer efter Recker. Portchinsky skriver, at
Rana temporaria i Omegnen af St. Petersburg bliver saa stærkt hjemsøgt af
Lucilia bufonivora, at man kan sige, at den der næsten er uddød. Ogsaa
her drejer det sig om Angreb gennem Næsebor eller Øjenhule; navnlig var
som oftest Næseborene opfyldte af Fluelarverne. Infektionen sker ved, at
Fluen lægger Æg et eller andet Sted paa Frøens Legeme, og derfra naar
Larverne da til Hovedet. Men hyppigst sker efter Portschinsky Infektionen
rigtignok gennem Maven gennem nedslugte modne Fluehunner. I sidste Til-
fælde bliver Frøens Øjne stedse ufortærede. Den russiske Forfatter opgiver,
at han har fundet 70—87 Larver i Frøens Næsehule.
C.B. Klunzinger (18) giver Meddelelse om nye Tilfælde. I Juli 1892
fandt han ved Stuttgart en voksen Tudse, som havde en Svulst, der fra venstre
Næsebor strakte sig hen om venstre Øje. Dyret blev dræbt, hvorefter Svul-
sten aabnedes. Den indeholdt 17 Fluelaver. I September 1899 fandt han
ligeledes ved Stuttgart en syg Tudse, der opførte sig, som var den halvblind-
Ligesom den første havde ogsaa denne Tudse en Svulst, men den udgik fra
højre Næsebor. Ganen var gennembrudt, højre Øje ødelagt osv. Dyret døde
102
paa Fangenskabets 4. Dag. En Undersøgelse viste, at Hjernen var urørt;
Dødsaarsagen maa efter Klunzingers Mening have været enten Udmattelse
eller Blodforgiftning fremkaldt ved Fluelarvernes Angreb. Ved Undersøgelse
af Tudsens Indvolde fandtes macererede Fluelarver. Disse Rester stammede
fra Larver, som var udkrøbne af Tudsens Næse og øjeblikkeligt var blevne
ædte af Tudsen, hvad Klunzinger selv flere Gange saa. Dette er altsaa lige
det modsatte af, hvad jeg iagttog, idet min Tudse slet ikke vilde spise. Klun-
zinger beskriver og tegner Larven, ialt 10 Detailfigurer. Det lykkedes ham
ikke at klække Fluen, men da han anfører Beskrivelsen af Imago efter Mo-
niez, er der altsaa ingen Tvivl om, at han er overbevist om, at han har haft
Larven til Lucilia bufonivora for sig. ;
Sidst har E. Hesse (19—20) offentliggjort et Par Afhandlinger, hvori
omtales flere Tilfælde af Lucilia hos Bufo. Tudserne stammer alle fra Tysk-
land, de fleste fra Omegnen af Leipzig. I den første Afhandling omtales 3
Tilfælde. — ””/6 fangedes en Bufo vulgaris, som paa højre Parotiskirtelsvulst
bar en halv Snes Flueæg. Æggene sad ret fast, lod sig i hvert Fald ikke
fjerne ved Berøring med Fingrene. %/6 skiftede Tudsen Hud, og med Huden
befriede den sig for Æggene. Tudser spiser ofte deres afskudte Hud; det
gjorde denne Tudse ogsaa. Æggene naaede altsaa ned i dens Mave, men
det foraarsagede ikke Tudsen Besværligheder af nogen Art; den var i 1906
efter et 3-aarigt Fangenskab fuldstændig rask. — ”/6 fangedes en Tudse, som
paa begge Sider af Ansigtet mellem. Næsebor og Øje havde Huller frembragt
af Fluelarver. Hullet paa venstre Side stod i direkte Forbindelse med Næse-
boret. Fluelarverne fortsatte deres Ødelæggelsesværk indtil %/1. Mellem
1 og "/1 gik alle Larver i Jorden, men først "/1 døde Tudsen. Fra ”/:
til "”/7 klækkedes ialt 10 Fiuer. E. Girschner bestemte dem at være
Lucilia splendida Zett. Meig. — ”/6 fangedes atter en Tudse med begge
Næsebor angrebne. Tilfældet forløb ganske som det af mig iagttagne. ?/6
var Tudsen død. %/1 var næsten alle Larver gaaet i Jorden og det meste af
Tudsen forsvundet. ""/+ til "77 klækkedes ialt 29 Fluer. Hesse angiver ikke
Arten hverken ved denne eller ved de i hans 2. Afhandling nævnte Klæk-
ninger; han maa altsaa føle sig overbevist om, at alle de klækkede Fluer
hører til Arten Luciliu splendida%). — Hesses anden Afhandling omtaler
yderligere fem Tilfælde. %/o fandtes en død, men fuldstændig frisk Tudse,
hvis Næse var fyldt af halvvoksne Fluelarver.. Klækning lykkedes ikke. —
1/6 fandtes en Tudse med halvvoksne Fluelarver i Næsen. ?%6 Tudsen død.
””/e Tudsen omtrent helt forsvundet. %%6 alle Larver i Jorden. 45 Fluer
klækkedes. — "8 fandtes en Tudse med kun 2 smaa Fluelarver i venstre
Næsebor. "Ys havde Tudsen paa en eller anden Maade befriet sig for Lar-
verne, der laa halvdøde i den Skaal med Vand, som var anbragt hos Tudsen.
Denne var ret medtaget, saa længe Angrebet stod paa, men den kvikkedes
hurtigt op, og Saaret heledes, saa at det var ganske lukket ””/e. — ””/s fand-
tes en Tudse med 81 Flueæg paa Huden ovenover højre Forben og 19 foran
") Den Tavle, der ledsager Hesses Arbejder, giver kun Tegninger af Pad-
derne, derimod ikke af Fluen eller dens Larve.
103
venstre Armhule. 7”%6 var alle Larver ude af Æggene, men kun 3 fandtes
paa Tudsen. Resten var faldne af, vistnok fordi Tudsen havde rodet stærkt
om i Buret. ”/6& om Aftenen havde Tudsen skiftet Hud og derved befriet
sig for de 3 Larver. %/s sattes den i Frihed. — ”/6 fangedes flere Tudser,
der alle var angrebne af Fluelarver. Hesse tog 3 Tudser med sig hjem. Alle
Tudser var belagte med Æg, 86, 81 og 72 Æg. ”/s var alle Tudserne om
trent helt opædte. Alle Flueæggene naaede ikke at blive klækkede. Der
fremkom fra ”/1 til 2/7 ialt 139 Fluer
Endnu skal nærmest for Fuldstændighedens Skyld anføres et Par Ar-
bejder. L. G. Guthrie (13) giver Meddelelse om Larver paa Bufo. Brauer
erklærede, at Larverne muligvis tilhørte Calliphora erythrocephala eller vo-
mitoria. — 1901 meddeler A. Hertz (17), at Larven til Lucilia sericata har
ødelagt en Frø. (Referat findes i Allg. Zeit. Ent. VI p 266). Om disse Ar-
bejder bringer noget nyt, ved jeg ikke. Men de bringer i hvert Fald nye
Vanskeligheder ind i Sagen ved at nævne Navne paa nye Arter, hvad der
gør det endnu mere tvivlsomt, hvad det egentlig er for en Art, der optræder
som Snylter hos Tudserne.
Et nyt Arbejde af Hesse (20a), der omhandler fire nye Tilfælde, inde-
holder intet væsentligt nyt. Dog synes Hesses Iagttagelser at bekræfte Mor-
tensens Meddelelse om, at Larverne ligger meget længe i Jorden, inden For-
pupningen finder Sted.
Saavidt mig bekendt er der ikke yderligere publiceret nogen
Afhandling om disse Forhold, og jeg skal derfor nu meddele, hvad
jeg selv har erfaret denne Sag angaaende. Den 7. August 1919
samlede jeg ved Donse Dam. Jeg befandt mig paa den sydlige
Side af Dammen, hvor Bredden ligger i Skygge af høje Graner.
Det var varmt, stille og klart Solskin. Jeg blev da opmærksom
paa en Tudse, der opførte sig paa en højst paafaldende Maade.
Den sad nemlig ca. 3 m fra Land paa Bladene af en svømmende
Vandaks. Disse Planter dannede et saa tæt Dække paa Vand-
fladen, at Tudsen sad helt ovenover Vandet. Jeg kunde tydeligt
se, at Blodet løb ud af Næsen paa den, og da den ikke gjorde
noget Forsøg paa at flygte, da jeg traadte ud i Vandet for at se lidt
nærmere paa den, antog jeg, at den var saaret af en eller anden
Fugl. Jeg tog saa Tudsen op i min Haand, uden at den gjorde
Modstand eller rørte sig, kun klagede den sig stærkt. Saalænge
den fik Lov at sidde paa min Haand, sad den tilsyneladende ganske
- sløvt hen. En hurtig Undersøgelse af de blødende Næsebor viste
imidlertid, hvad Dyret fejlede; begge Næsebor var nemlig opfyldte
af smaa Fluelarver, af hvilke der kunde tælles ca. 10 i hvert Næse-
bor. Næseborene var noget udvidede, hvert af dem maalte 3 mm
104
i Diameter. Et omhyggeligt Eftersyn af Dyrets Hud viste ikke
Spor af Æg eller Levninger af Æggeskaller. Tudsen var é cm
lang. Den: levende Tudse bragte jeg med mig hjem, hvor jeg fore-
tog en nærmere Undersøgelse af den. Fluelarverne sad med Bag-
enden yderst i Næseborene, saaledes at Bagspiraklerne sad i Højde
med Ansigtets Overflade. Larverne arbejdede stærkt og var men
stadig bølgende Bevægelse, saaledes at de snart var dybt inde i
Næsen og snart strakte Bagenden helt ud af Næseborene. Bag-
spiraklerne saas meget tydeligt. Da jeg gjorde Forsøg paa at trække
en Larve ud ved Hjælp af Pincetten, forsvandt alle de i Næse-
boret værende Larver som paa Kommando saa dybt ind i Tudsen,
at jeg ikke kunde faa fat i nogen af dem. Jeg gentog Forsøget
op mod 20 Gange og stadig med samme Resultat; Larverne var
som ét Væsen, alle Bevægelser skete i den Grad samtidigt, at naar
jeg rørte ved én Larve, saa det ud, som om der "for en Prop ned
i Tudsens Næsebor. Kl. 10 om Aftenen fjernedes en enkelt Larve
fra Tudsens venstre Næsebor; den maalte 3 mm i Længden.
Tudsen sattes for Natten i et stort Glas med fugtige Vandplanter.
8/8 1919. En stor levende Flue sattes ned til Tudsen, men
denne gjorde intet Forsøg paa at æde den. Der fandt ikke mere
Blødninger Sted fra Næsen. Tudsen havde nu stærke opkastende
Bevægelser, der af og til var forbundne med Blodbrækninger.
Dyret klagede sig stærkt og vedhoidende ved selv den letteste
Berøring. Det sad mest stille hen med Næsen trykket fast ind
til det kølige Glas. Den smækkede nu og da tydelig med Tungen.
Den indre Skillevæg mellem Næseborene var nu borte, saa man
kunde se fra det ene til det andet. Hvert af Næseborene maalte
om Aftenen 4,5 mm i Diameter. En Larve fjernedes fra højre
Næsebor, den maalte 6 mm i Længden. Om Aftenen krøb 3
Larver rundt i Glasset, de havde forladt Tudsen uden nogen Ind-
griben fra min Side; de var kun halvvoksne og absolut ikke i
Stand til at forpuppe sig. Hvorfor de havde forladt Tudsen, er
mig uklart; jeg kunde tænke mig, at Pladsforholdene i Næsehulen
var blevne saa indskrænkede paa Grund af Larvernes Vækst, at
disse ikke mere kunde. være der, og at Opløsningen i Tudsens
Hoved endnu ikke var saa vidt fremskreden, at de smaa Larver
formaaede at trænge videre frem paa egen Haand. De i Næsen
værende Larver arbejdede i Dagens Løb saa stærkt, at indtil det
105
halve af deres Legeme af og til kunde hænge ned over Tudsens
Mund.
9%, 1919. Kl. 10 om Formiddagen var hele Partiet om Tud-
sens venstre Øje opsvulmet og Huden saa udspændt, at Larverne
tydeligt kunde ses under den. Huden lige under Øjet hængte ned
som en stor Pose, og det var netop i denne Pose, at Larverne
saas tydeligt væltende om mellem hverandre. Tudsen var nu
stærkt afmagret, og der var ikke meget Liv i den. Den udven-
dige Skillevæg mellem Næseborene stod endnu. Tudsen savlede
ustandseligt, Spyttet var rødt af Blod. Kl. 7 om Aftenen var Tud-
sen død, venstre Øje var helt borte, og alle Larverne var for-
svundne dybere ind i dens Hoved. Formodentlig er Larverne
henad Aften naaet ind i Tudsens Hjerne.
10/8 1919. Hele Partiet om Næsen er. nu en stor Hule, i
hvilken Fluelarverne roder omkring mellem hverandre uden at
være fasthæftede til noget bestemt Sted, hvad de sikkert var den
første Dag. Larvernes Længde 10 mm.
11/8 1919... Om Formiddagen var Tudsen udhulet langt ned i
Brystkassen, og den første svage Forraadnelseslugt sporedes nu.
Larverne 12 mm lange.
12/8 1919. Larverne udsugede yderligere Tudsen. Længden
stadig 12 mm.
13/8 1919. Alle Larver forlod Tudsen og gik til Forpupning i
Jorden. Da Tudsen var død, blev den lagt i et Glas med Jord i
Bunden. Larverne voksede ikke i Længde de to sidste Dage;
det indtagne Foder er vel bare medgaaet til at danne deres Fedt-
legeme. Tudsen var stærkt opløst indvendig, men dens ydre For-
mer havde dog holdt sig, alene med Undtagelse af Ansigtet, der
var helt forsvundet. Huden var paa store Strækninger løs.
Der var ikke paa den af mig fangede Tudse noget Spor af
Æg, hvad der imidlertid let lader sig forklare. Tudsen sad som
sagt paa Blade ude i Vandet. Der var mellem Bredden og Vand-
aksene aabent Vand, saa Tudsen maa altsaa være svømmet eller
krøbet derud gennem Vandet; Æggeskallerne vil paa denne Tur
let kunne være vaskede af. Den Mulighed er naturligvis heller
ikke udelukket, at Tudsen kan have skiftet Hud, efter at Larverne
er naaet hen til dens Næse. I saa Fald vil Æggeskallerne selv-
følgelig heller ikke mere være at se paa Dyret.
106
Min Tudse viste ikke Spor af Tegn til Sygdom, og det er min
ganske bestemte Opfattelse, at den heller ikke var syg. Jeg hu-
skede godt Indholdet af Meinerts Arbejde, og, jeg huskede navnlig
ganske tydelig hans Referat af Indholdet af de fremmede Arbejder,
som omtaler Tudsernes mulige Sygdom, specielt La Fontaine's om
Kræft i Ansigtet hos disse Dyr. Min Opmærksomhed var derfor
fra første Øjeblik henvendt paa dette Forhold, og jeg spejdede
ivrigt efter, men jeg kunde intet opdage, der tydede paa Sygdom
og navnlig ingen Saar hverken i Ansigtet eller i Kanten af Næse-
borene. At Tudsen først viste Tegn til Forraadnelse et Par Dage
efter, at den var død, synes mig ogsaa at tyde paa, at den ikke
kan have været syg, da den blev angrebet af Fluen.
Mine Fluepupper henstod hele Vinteren i det solbeskinnede
Vindue i en sydvendt opvarmet Stue. Skønt rigelig Vanding fore-
toges, har dette aabenbart ikke haft den ringeste Indflydelse paa
Klækningen, idet denne først begyndte Foraaret 1920. Fra ?%/4
til 7”/5 klækkedes samtlige de -Pupper — ialt 9 — som fandtes i
Jorden; Resultatet blev 43 g og 59% 2. Hr. Professor Dr. Stein,
Treptow, har haft den Godhed at bestemme Dyrene for mig. Hans
Dom lyder ganske som Dr. Hansen's (se .senere) paa Lucilia
silvarum Meig.
Alt det af mig benyttede Materiale: Tudsen, Larverne m. m.
er af mig foræret til Zool. Mus., 3. Afd., hvor det findes opstillet
sammen med Dr. Meinert's Tudse.
Af alle de i-denne Artikel omtalte Iagttagelser kan der jo dra-
ges adskillige Slutninger, og ved Hjælp af dem kan der gives Svar
påa flere af de Spørgsmaal, som de første Forfattere opkastede
uden at kunne faa dem besvarede.
Det kan da nu anses for givet, at mindst én Art Lucilia snyl-
ter paa den almindelige Tudse. Der foreligger Oplysninger herom
fra Danmark, Tyskland, Rusland, England, Belgien og Frankrig.
Og naar man tager i Betragtning, at der for Eksempel af de fleste
Tachiner bare er foretaget en enkelt eller ganske faa Klækninger,
saa maa her da være Bevis nok. Der kan heller ikke være Tvivl
om, at denne Snylten paa Tudsen er det normale for Fluens Ved-
kommende og ikke noget tilfældigt, som Collin de Plancy (5) for-
modede. Det foreliggende Materiale giver dog for lidt til at af-
gøre, om den eller de Arter, som her kan være Tale om, alene
107
snylter paa Tudser og aldrig lægger deres Æg paa andre Dyr. At
der af og til er fundet en Frø med Larver, og at Portschinsky med-
deler, at det ved St. Petersborg særligt er Rana, det gaar ud over,
tyder paa, at Padder i Almindelighed angribes. Men angribes ogsaa
FEKS. Pattedyr af samme Flueart? Dette Spørgsmaal maa fore-
løbigt lades ubesvaret.
Men hvilken Art er det da, der angriber Tudsen? Paa For-
haand skulde man vel være tilbøjelig til at antage, at Dr. H. J.
Hansen, der bestemte de af Mortensen klækkede Fluer at være
Lucilia sylvarum Meig., havde Ret i denne sin Bestemmelse; han er
sikkert den bedste Fluekender af dem, der indtil da har set de klæk-
kede Imagines. Men da den Mulighed ikke er udelukket, at mere
end én Art Lucilia snylter paa Bufo, kan man ikke uden videre
kassere de andres Bestemmelser. Moniez kalder sin Flue L. bufo-
nivora, Mortensen sin L. sylvarum Meig., Hesse sin L. splendida
Zett. Meig., og fra anden Side foreslaas L. sericata (A. Hertz), ja
endog Calliphora i 2 Arter (Guthrie). Alt dette kan næppe være
rigtigt. Inspektor W. Lundbeck har været saa venlig paa min
Opfordring at sammenligne Moniez's Beskrivelse af L. bufonivora
med de i den danske Samling værende Eksemplarer af Lucilia
sylvarum Meig. Han mener, at det ikke er ganske udelukket, at
de to Arter kan være den samme. Men Spørgsmaalet om disse
Lucilier hænger i høj Grad sammen med Spørgsmaalet om, hvor
mange europæiske Arter af Slægten der findes. Det Par Dyr af
hver Art, der i det herværende Museum er opstillet i den Kasse,
hvor Lucilierne staar, skal ikke bidrage meget til at løse Gaaden.
Det er sikkert nødvendigt at foretage talrige Indsamlinger af Ima-
gines, inden der kan vindes Klarhed over Synonomien. Og.hvad ved
vi egentlig om Arternes Levevis? Altfor lidt til at fælde en ende-
lig Dom. Masser af Klækninger maa ogsaa prøves, og det ind-
samlede og det klækkede Materiale sammenlignes. Jeg skal i denne
Forbindelse henvise til et Fotografi hos Graham-Smith (28).
Fotografiet forestiller et Antal Eksemplarer af Lucilia caesar af
meget forskellig Størrelse. Størrelsen er betinget af tilstrækkelig
eller utilstrækkelig Ernæring af Larven, og Fotografiet kunde tyde
paa, at man kan vente sig artige Overraskelser, naar det klæk-
kede Materiale engang skal sammenlignes med det indsamlede.
Det kan ogsaa fastslaas, at Fluerne angriber sunde Tudser.
108
Baade Collin de Plancy og Taton benægter dette, men allerede
Meinert mente, at Fluen maatte være kommet til Tudsen uden at
være hidlokket af Saar eller Sygdom. Og de senere Iagttagere
(Mortensen, Hesse) har enten ikke set, at Tudsen var syg eller
havde Saar, eller ogsaa siges der ligefrem, at Tudsen utvivlsomt
var rask.
Der er heller ingen Tvivl om, at Fluen er æglæggende. Mei-
nert var den første, der saa de tomme Æggeskaller sidde paa
Tudsen, Hesse saa det flere Gange, og Portschinsky giver ogsaa
Eksempler paa det samme. Moniez mener ganske vist, at hans
Flue var levendefødende, men det kan ikke ses, hvad han støtter
denne Mening paa, udover det, at han mener, at Tudsen let maa
kunne have kradset Æggene bort med Benene fra det Sted, hvor
Larverne sad. Men det er da ikke nødvendigt, at Larverne skal
findes netop paa det Sted, hvor Æggene er afsat, Larverne kan
dog bevæge sig. " Og Æggene har ogsaa i de iagttagne Tilfælde
været anbragte saaledes, at Tudsen umuligt kunde kradse dem af.
At Æggene i nogle Tilfælde har manglet, kunde altsaa hænge
sammen med et Hudskifte hos Tudsen eller et muligt Ophold i
Vandet. Det store Antal Æg, der omtales, 70—80, kunde tyde
paa, at der maa regnes med et stort Spild, for de færreste Iagt-
tagelser gaar ud paa, at et saa stort Antal Larver er til Stede.
Men dette Spild kunde jo netop fremkomme ved, at Larverne er
tvungne til at vandre det lange Stykke ad Tudsens Ryg, inden de
naar Næsen. Det er sikkert ogsaa utvivlsomt, at Larvernes Ind-
trængen i Tudsen sker gennem dens Næsebor. Det kan maaske
nok til Tider være vanskeligt at konstatere, at dette er Tilfældet
(saaledes paa Meinerts Tudse), men jeg ser ingen anden Mulighed.)
Et Forsøg paa at trænge gennem Tudsens Øjne vilde vel bare føre
til, at Larverne blev gnedet bort.
Iagttagerne er ogsaa enige om, at de angrebne Tudser har en
paafaldende Opførsel. De sidder i Solskinnet, eller kravler om
paa en solbeskinnet Vej, eller de sidder sammenkrøbne og vil ikke
flytte sig, naar man vil skræmme dem bort osv.
Hesses lagttagelser viser, at Tudsen ikke altid gaar til Grunde
ved Angrebet. Et Hudskifte vil f. Eks. frelse den. Hvis bare et
') Docent Stamm har gjort mig opmærksom paa dette Forhold.
109
lille Antal Larver naar Næsen, slipper den ogsaa med Livet (Hes-
ses ene Tilfælde), hvis den er heldig nok til at faa dem væk.
Samtlige Iagttagelser stemmer overens i, at Fluelarver har en
kolossal hurtig Udvikling. Fra %/s til /s voksede mine Larver
9 mm i Længden, nemlig fra 3 mm til 12 mm. Ogsaa Puppe-
hvilen varer om Sommeren kun ganske faa Dage, saa der maa
sikkert være adskillige Kuld Fluer i Sommerens Løb. — Larver-
nes hurtige Vækst passer godt til, hvad der fra anden Side vides
om Lucilielarverne. Graham-Smith (28) angiver, at Larven til
Lucilia caesar gennemløber alle Stadier i en Tid af 2'/3—3 Dage.
Sidste Hold Larver om Efteraaret overvintrer rimeligvis som Pup-
per i Jorden. Mortensens og Hesses Iagttagelse af, at Larven lig-
ger længe som Larve om Efteraaret, er mig meget paafaldende,
og denne Side af Sagen trænger til nærmere Belysning.
Hvorledes man skal opfatte Portschinskys Meddelelse om, at
Infektionen sker gennem Frøens Tarmkanal, aner jeg ikke. Det
kunde paa Forhaand synes urimeligt, at Dyr, der som Tudser og
Frøer lever af Fluer, skulde være udsatte for at blive ødelagte af
Larver, der fremkom af de Æg, som muligt nedslugte Fluehunner
var fyldt med. Man kunde dog uden at have nogen altfor livlig
Fantasi tænke sig, at noget saadant vilde have ført til en auto-
matisk Udryddelse af samtlige Jordens Padder. Nu har ogsaa
Klunzinger set, at hans Tudse aad Lucilia-Larver, og Hesse fast-
slaar, at en af hans aad Lucilia-Æg, og der skete i første Tilfælde
det, at Larverne blev opløst i Tudsens Mave, og i andet Tilfælde
tilsyneladende slet intet. Her synes at: være en uløselig Mod-
sætning. Paa denne Side Portschinskys Paastand, at de fleste
Infektioner sker gennem Tarmkanalen, og paa den anden Side
Klunzinger og Hesse med deres Iagttagelser. Her er et Forhold,
som en fremtidig Forsker, der har rigeligt Materiale, maa se at
faa klaret.
Dunckers Beretning om, hvad der passerede med hans klæk-
kede Fluer, er der intet paafaldende ved. Da hans Fluer var klæk-
kede, vilde de ikke parre sig. Det stemmer meget godt med mine
egne Erfaringer fra andre Insektklækninger. Søskende parrer sig
ikke med hinanden i Hvepseklækninger for Eksempel. Da Flu-
erne ikke parrede sig, var der formodentlig heller ingen Anledning
for dem til at lægge Æg, og det var altsaa ikke saa løjerligt, at
110
Tudsen slap fri. At Fluerne blev ædt, er da heller ikke mærke-
ligt, det er nu engang Tudsens Bestilling at spise Fluer. — Noget
mærkeligere synes mig Dunckers Angivelse af, at Tudsen ikke
viste nogen instinktiv Frygt for Fluerne. Men det hænger maa-
ske sammen med, at Parring ikke fandt Sted. For de Fluer, der
tumler forvirrede om i et Glas søgende en Vej ud i det fri, har
sikkert en helt anden Tone i deres Vingeslag end den Hun, der
lynsnart slaar ned paa en Tudse for at lægge Æg paa den.
Ingen af de tidligere nævnte Forfattere kommer ind paa en
nærmere Beskrivelse af Larvernes Munddele og Svælgskelet. Hvis
- det imidlertid skal lykkes at komine til et bestemt Resultat i Spørgs-
maalet, om der er flere end én Art Lucilia, der snylter paa Tud-
ser, er der ikke andet at gøre end at undersøge disse to Ting paa
det nøjeste paa de Fluelarver, som
fremtidige Klækninger vil skaffe For-
" skerne i Hænde. At nøjes med en
almindelig Beskrivelse af de ud-
vendige Karakterer, nytter sikkert
ikke, naar det drejer sig om nær-
staaende Arter.
Medfølgende Tegning viser Svælg-
skelet med Mundkroge (A), Forspi-
rakel (B) og Bagspirakel (C) af de
mindste Larver, som fandtes paa
min Tudsey"denDastjesttoskdenen
D, E og F viser de samme Or-
ganer paa den voksne Larve. Å,
B og C tilhører aabenbart ikke
tredje "Stadium mentomtdetker
første eller andet Stadium, tør jeg ikke afgøre. Dr. I. C. Nielsen
skriver i sin Doktordisputats (29) p. 13, at Muscidelarvernes tre
Stadier kan karakteriseres saaledes: I første Stadium ender Svælg-
skelettet i en Tand, der uden Ledforbindelse gaar over i Svælg-
skelettet. I andet Stadium bærer Svælgskelettet et Led, hvortil
Mundkrogene fæster sig, og i tredje Stadium er Svælgskelettets
forreste og bageste Del adskilte ved ,et Led. Bagspiraklerne har
i andet Stadium 2 Knopper og i tredje 3 Knopper. Min mindste
Larve. har altsaa et Bagspirakel, der skulde være typisk for andet
111
Stadium, men dens Munddele viser hen til tredje Stadium. Dette
kunde tyde paa, at Dr. Nielsens Karakteristik af Muscidelarverne
ikke gælder ubetinget. Docent R. H. Stamm har været saa venlig
at overlade mig nogle smaa Lucilia-Larver, der stammer fra Næsen
paa en Tudse, som blev taget ved Præstø i Juli 1901. Disse
Larver stemmer i Svælgskelettet paa det nøjeste overens med
mine. Nogen Fejltagelse kan der altsaa ikke være Tale om, og
heller ikke nogen Misdannelse hos Larven.
Som Afslutning paa denne Artikel skal der gives Referat af
nogle Oplysninger om Padder, der angribes af andre Fluer end
Lucilier.
I Følge Krefft (21) lever Larven til en australsk Flue Batrachomyia
M. Leay under Huden paa forskellige australske Tudser og Frøer. Larve og
Imago omtales af Gerstaecker (22) og af Brauer (23, 24).
I Centralblatt fur Bakt. und Infekt. meddeler Heinrich Prell (25),
at han i Bughulen hos en Frø (Rana temporaria) har fundet en encysteret
Fluelarve. Han var ved at dissekere en Frø, da han opdagede et ejendom-
dommeligt Fremmedlegeme, der fra Frøens Urinblære hængte ud i Bughulen.
Blæren var meget fortyndet paa det Sted, hvor Cysten havde siddet fast.
Cysten indeholdt en Fluelarve i andet Stadium. Larven, der ikke nærmere
kunde bestemmes, hørte aabenbart til i Tachingruppen. Laboulbeéne (26)
har i en Tudse og en Frø fra Omegnen af Paris fundet talrige encysterede,
men døde Fluelarver i Bugregionen. Disse Larver ligner efter Prell's Ud-
sagn den af ham iagttagne, men de er ikke identiske med den. Prell søger
endelig en Forklaring paa denne Larves mærkelige Opholdssted. At det maa
være rent tilfætdigt, at Larven er kommen ind i Frøen, tvivler han ikke om.
Et saa velkendt Dyr som Rana temporaria kan ikke hjemsøges af en for os
ganske ukendt Snylter. Det ligger da nær at antage, at Larven er sluppet
ind i Frøens Tarmkanal med et eller andet Insekt eller en Insektlarve, hvad
der heller ikke lyder utroligt, eftersom Frøen sluger mangen Sommerfugle-
larve, der er befængt med Tachinlarver. Ad ukendte Veje maatte Larven da
være vandret til sit endelige Opholdssted. Prell henleder særligt Opmærk-
somheden paa den Gruppe af Tachiner (tredje), som lægger Æg paa det
Foder, som Værten til deres Larver skal fortære.
I Zool. Anz., 32. B., p. 98—99, staar en Afhandling af Em. André (27),
der omtaler et Tilfælde, hvor en Oestridelarve fandtes paa en Tudses Urin-
blære. Af 112 undersøgte Tudser var bare den ene befængt med Larven,
der var encysteret.
17:
18.
19.
20.
20a.
PJ
22.
23.
24.
1865.
1876.
1876.
1876.
1877.
1877.
1877.
1878.
1878.
1883.
1890.
1891.
1892.
1892.
1898.
1899.
1901.
1902.
1906.
1908.
1919.
1864.
1964.
1864.
1867.
ir?
Litteraturfortegnelse.
Boie: Dipterologische Notizen. Verh. zool. bot. Gesell. Wien.
pil
Moniez: Un Diptére parasite du crapaud. Bull. sc. hist. et litt.
du Dép. du Nord. Lille, tome 8, p. 25.
Borre: Annal. soc. entom. Belgique, séance 7 octbr. 1876.
Girard: Bull. soc. entom. de France, séance Nov.-Déc. 1876.
Collin de Plancy: Note sur les Insectes Diptéres parasites
de Batraciens. Bull. de Soc. zool. de France.
Taton: Sur des Diptéres parasites de Rana esculenta L. Bull.
de la soc. zool. de France.
Girard: Bull. soc. entom. de France, séance Déc. 1877.
Mégnin: Bull. soc. entom. de France. Jan. 1878.
Moniez: Sur les Lucilies parasites du Batraciens. Bull. sc.
hist. et litt. du Dép. du Nord. Lille, tome 9.
Brauer: Zweifligler III. System. Studien, in Denkschr. Akad.
Wien. p. 73.
Meinert: Larva Luciliae sp. in Orbita Bufonis vulgaris. Entom.
Medd. II. B. p. 89. i
Duncker:- Auffållige Entwickl. von Lucilia sylvarum Meig.
Zool. Anzeiger. Nr. 379. 25 B.
Guthrie: Entom. Mag. 1892. p. 9—12.
Mortensen: Zool. Anzeiger, 26 B. p. 193—195.
Portschinsky: Hor. entom. Rossic. XXXII B. p. 225 (russisk).
Recker: Referat paa Tysk af Portschinskys Arbejde i 27. Jahres-
bericht des westfal. Provinzialvereins fur Wissenschaft u. Kunst,
Minster 1899.
Herz: Zur Biologie von Lucilia sericata Meig. S. B. Berlin ent.
GesF26E VIIEReferatsi FANS Zeit FEntAV PD 266:
Klunzinger: Uber parasitische Fliegenmaden an einer Kråte.
Jahresb. Ver. f. våterl. Naturk. Wirttemberg 1902. p. 371—379.
Hesse, E.: Lucilia in Bufo vulgaris L., schmarotzend. Biol.
Zentralbl. Leipzig. 26 B. p. 633—640.
Hesse, E.: Lucilia als Schmarotzer. Biol. Zentralbl. Leipzig.
ABBED TSS-==758:
Hesse, E.: Lucilia als Schmarotzer. Biol. Zentralblatt. Leipzig.
39. B. p. 401—406.
Krefft: Transact. entom. soc. N.S. Wales. 1864. P. 1. p. 100.
pl. 8. (Batrachomyia).
Gerstaecker: Ber. d. Entom, f. 1863—1864 (1867) (Batrache-
myia).
Brauer: Verh. zool. bot. Gesell. Wien. 1864. p. 894. (Batracho-
myia).
Brauer: Die Zweifligl. d. kaiserl. Mus. p. 73 (Batrachomyia).
29.
1919.
1863.
1898.
1914.
1909.
113
Prell: Zentralblatt fir Bakt. und Infekt. Erste Abt. Band 83
1919. p 541 —549 (ukendt Tachinlarve i en Fr6o).
Laboulbéne: Ann. soc. Entom. de France. 1863. p. 14 (ukendte
Larver [Tachin ?] i Bugregionen af en Tudse og en Frø).
André: Zool. Anz. 32. B. p. 98—99. Myiase de la vessie uri-
naire du Crapaud. (Oestridelarve).
Graham-Smith, G. S.: Flies in relation to disease. -Non-
bloodsucking flies. (Cambridge public health series). Cambridge
University Press.
J. C. Nielsen: Iagttagelser over entoparasitiske Muscidelarver
hos Arthropoder.
1111920:
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 72. 8
Om Slægten Dictyopleryx Pict. paa Gudenaa.
Systematiske og biologiske Studier.
AF
Hj. Ussing.
Den afdøde binmiske Forsker Professor Fr. Klapålek, hvis
udmærkede Arbejder over Plecoptererne er kendte og skattede,
omtaler i sin ,,Revision und Synopsis der europåischen Dictyopte-
rygiden"!) de store Vanskeligheder netop indenfor denne Slægt
med Hensyn til faste og sikre Artskarakterer.
Hvad der især besværliggør det systematiske Arbejde er den
stærke Indskrumpning af de tårrede Eksemplarer, hvorfor jeg ogsaa
altid saa vidt muligt spritlægger noget af Materialet — en Frem-
gangsmaade, som letter Bestemmelsen meget, selv om den æstetisk
set ikke har min Sympathi, da tårrede og velspændte Perlider
alligevel er en stårre Pryd i en Samling end de spritlagte Eksem-
plarer. Endvidere siger Klapålek, at den store Variation hos disse
Insekter rimeligvis har sin Grund i den svage Flyveevne, hvorfor
Individerne bliver bundne til ret begrænsede Omraader og derved
let danner lokale Racer.
INDanmarks Fauna Nr=8, 1910; pag. 117 omtaler P. Esben-
Petersen en lille Perlodes-Han med svagt udviklede Vinger (leg.
Hoppes Bro Gudenaa ”/; 1906 Hj. U). Nogen definitiv Bestem-
melse kunde ikke udføres paa dette eneste Eksemplar, men E. P.
anførte som sandsynligt, at den muligvis tilhørte en ny Art. Eks-
emplaret findes i Petersens Samling. Jeg har ofte tænkt paa denne
mærkelige lille Perlødes og haabet paa et Gensyn, men først nu
i dette Foraar er det lykkedes mig at faa righoldigt Materiale samt
biologiske Iagttagelser, der yderligere kaster Lys over Situationen,
hvorfor jeg nu tillader mig at publicere Resultatet, som sikkert vil
være af Interesse.
1) Bulletin international de ”Academie des Sciences de Bohéme. 1906.
S=
KS
Som allerede bemærket, møder vi de største Vanskeligheder
med at finde gode Artskarakterer indenfor Dictyopteryx-Slægten, og
uagtet Klapålek i sine Tabeller ogsaa benytter Ribbenettet, frem-
gaar det dog — synes jeg — at han selv mener, det er noget
relativt... Ogsaa jeg har fundet store Variationer i Nervaturen og
Cellebygningen hos Individer af samme Art taget paa samme Lo-
kalitet. Saaledes er Cellerne i Forvingen mellem Radius, Sub:
radius og Medianen stærkt varierende indenfor samme Art. Lige-
ledes har jeg fundet Uregelmæssigheder i de Cellers Bygning, som
Fig. 1. Dictyopteryx Fig. 2. Dictyopteryx
microcephala Pict. Ce ele microcephala Pict. GE 1/1:
Jensen fot Jensen fot.
er beliggende mellem Cåsta og Subcosta. Endvidere er Nerva-
turen ikke en Gang ens i samme hanlige Individs Forvinger! Man
vil heraf se, hvor svært det er at stille sikre Diagnoser paa Grund-
lag af Vingernes Nervatur.!)
Foruden mine gamle Eksemplarer af Dictyopteryx samt det ny
indsamlede Materiale fra 1920 har jeg haft Lejlighed til at gennem-
gaa Esben-Petersens righoldige Samling, idet han med sædvanlig
Elskværdighed og Forstaaelse udlaante mig sine Dyr til Revision.
Det har saaledes været mig muligt at sammenligne Dictyopteryx-
Arter fra de forskelligste Lokaliteter nemlig:
Gudenaa-Omraadet (Randers, Aastedbro, Laurberg, Funder),
Bøhmen, Schweiz, Skotland og Norge.
Langs Gudenaaens nordre Bred lidt øst for Nørreaas Udløb ca.
3'/z km fra Randers og videre syd for Nørreaaens Munding i det
store Sving op mod Værumø ligger de gamle Lokaliteter for Dic-
1
Smilg. ,,Danmarks Fauna", Plecoptera, Fig. 90, p. 106.
1817
tyopteryx microcephåla Pict. (Perlodes Banks),!) og alle de Eksem-
plarer, jeg hidtil har taget paa disse Partier af Gudenaa, var Hun-
ner med store, veludviklede Vinger, men med et højst ukonstant
Ribbenet, Fig. 1. De mindre Hanner med kortere, men veludviklede
Vinger, forelaa kun fra Aastedbro og Funder (leg. Esben-Petersen)
samt for nylig fra Laurberg (leg. Findal ”%/5 1920), Fig.2. D. 25. April
1920 lykkedes det mig endelig at faa Hanner paa Randers-Lokali-
teten, men til min største Forbavselse var Vingerne saa smaa, at
de kun kunde betegnes som Rudimenter og derfor
aldeles ubrugelige til Flyvning. løvrigt lignede Dyret Se
fuldstændig den før omtalte lille Perlodes-Han fra
Hoppes-Bro ved Langaa, Fig. 3. Jeg tog den ,,in co-
pula” og fik ialt en lille Række af begge Køn i de
nærmeste Dage.
Esben-Petersen, hvem jeg forærede noget Ma-
teriale,- henledte imidlertid min Opmærksomhed paa
den af Klapålek beskrevne nye Art Dictyopteryx
Mortoni mn. sp. og mente, der kunde være Mulighed
for, at vi havde denne Art her ved Randers og maa- ; ;
ske ogsaa i Laurberg, da netop Mortoni-Hannen er pig.3 Dictyopteryx
brachyptér og omtrent af samme Størrelse som mine in de)
Gudenaa-Hanner. Det blev derfor nødvendigt først jensen-Haarup del.
at foretage en nøje Revision af alle de Hunner, der
forelaa fra Lokaliteterne, og tillige anstille Sammenligning med
Petersens originale Mortoni-Eksemplarer fra Carluke i Skotland
(est ERE Morton):
Ved Studiet af Materialet viste det sig, at vi her fra Gudenaa
ved Randers saavel som ved Laurberg i Bidstrup Skovbæk har
Hun-Former, der stemmer med Klapåleks Beskrivelse af Mortoni
m. H. t. Subgenitalpladens Facon og Størrelse samt Pronotum og
Cerci, men vi har ogsaa tvpiske microcephala-Former fra begge
Lokaliteter.
Subgenitalpladen hos Mortoni beskrives som lige afskaaret i
den yderste eller bageste Rand; hos microcephala er den længere,
1) Hj. Ussing: , Biologiske og faunistiske- Iagttagelser over danske Slør-
vinger". Vid. Medd. naturh. Foren. Kbhvn. 1910.
Jfr. ,Insektlivet i og ved Gudenaaens Delta og Randers Fjord". A.C
Johansen: (Randers Fjords Naturhistorie 1918. Kap. V. F. Hj. Ussing.
118
smallere og forsynet med en mere eller mindré udpræget Indbugt-
ning. Det kunde jo altsaa foreløbig godt se ud til, at vi havde begge
Arter, og at de mødtes paa Gudenaa-Omraadet. Jeg tør imidlertid
ikke opretholde denne Hypothese, hvor fristende den end kunde
være, og dette synes jeg vil fremgaa af følgende Resultater.
De vingede Hanner fra de tre Lokaliteter Aastedbro, Funder
og Laurberg er alie gode microcephala, men det samme mener jeg
ikke kan siges om den brachyptere Han fra Gudenaa, der altsaa
skulde tilhøre Mortoni-Arten. Sammenligner vi den med Mortons
originale Eksemplarer fra Typelokaliteten i Skotland, naas følgende
Diagnoser, som jeg for Nemheds Skyld sammenstiller i denne lille
Tabel.
lysere kun mod Spidsen
Dictyopteryx Mortoni gg | Brachytér gg
Skotland Gudenaa
FEE = = er Sl -
Kroplængde | I2-SISEM Mm | 15=17-mm
Vinger : lyse stærkt røgfarvede
Hoved bredere end Pronotum | samme Bredde som Pronotum
Femura "|| lysebrune || begsorte
rn EERER Mk
Tibia | lysebrune | mørkebrune
|| || å
Cerci |lys oliven fra Roden helt ud | MØTKE DENE eee Ee En
|jeket
Totalindtryk | bredere men kortere || længere men slankere
Selv om de morphologiske Forskelligheder, som klart fremgaar
af Tabellen, maaske kan hidrøre fra lokale Forhold og derved
være mere eller mindre relative, kan det samme ikke indvendes
om de biologiske Iagttagelser, jeg har anstillet paa Gudenaa-Om-
raadet (Randers, Langaa, Laurberg), og den vigtigste af disse var
Konstateringen af den brachyptere Han ,in copula" saavel med
typiske microcephala-Hunner som med de mere Mortoni-lignende
Stykker. Resultatet af Undersøgelserne bliver efter min Mening,
at vi ikke har Mortoni paa Gudenaa-Omraadet, men kun micro-
cephala, hvis Hunner varierer stærkt, og hvis Hanner er dimorfe
(forma brachyptera og macroptera), saaledes at man virkelig kan
tale om lokale Racer.
Hos de danske fuldvingede Hanner dækker Vingerne i Hvile-
119
stilling omtrent hele Bagkroppen, men hos et Par Eksemplarer i
Petersens Samling fra Båhmen og Schweiz dækker de kun to
Trediedele, uden at man dog derfor kan betegne disse som bra-
chyptera. Snarere en Overgang mellem de to Grupper. Dette
tyder jo paa, at der ogsaa i Udlandet forekommer Variation paa
Vingelængden, hvad Klapålek dog ikke omtaler i sin Revision.
Parringen foregik under Opskyl af Rør og Siv nogle faa Meter
fra Vandet. Hunnen er træg i sine Bevægelser og tager nødig til
Vingerne, mens derimod Hannen slanger sig hurtig bort, skuffende
lignende en Staphylin. Jeg tog en Dag én Hun bærende to Han-
ner paa Ryggen i Parringsstilling.
Æggene holdes sammen i en Kugle og bæres ved Roden af
Cerci, og Hunnen flyver ud over Vandet og lader dette afvaske
Æggene. i
Æggenes Form er ikke helt almindelig; de er koniske med en
Indsnøring ved Basis og ligner fuldstændig smaa Spidskugler —
0,, mm lange.
Saasnart vi naar lidt hen i Maj, er Artens Flyvetid forbi, d.v.s.
omtrent paa samme Tid som Sialis begynder at blive talrig.
Det er meget interessant, at den brachyptere Han kun er fun-
det i Partiet Randers—Langaa, altsaa det flodlignende Gebet af
Gudenaa, hvorimod de vingede Hanner synes at foretrække de
mindre og hurtigere rindende Vande.
SIE 1920!
On a star-fish (Asterias grønlandica)
which hatches its young in its stomach.
(Preliminary note.)
E By
Ingvald Lieberkind.
(With 4 text- figures.)
By the courtesy of Dr. Th. Mortensen 1 got some time ago
some specimens of Asterias grønlandica for anatomical investigation.
On opening the first specimen I found the stomach full of very
young star-fishes, which, however, did not seem to have taken any
harm from their curious place of residence.
I thought, of course, at once that it was a "cannibal" star-fish,
which had eaten some of its smaller relations, just before it was
caught and that it was on account of this, that the young ones had
not been attacked by the gastric juice. On opening. the next spec-
imen, I found also here a similar case, only it was this time not
young ones but eggs. This would seem to indicate that the brood
had not come there accidentally. But in order to get full under-
standing of the facts it was necessary to examine a larger number
of specimens.
Dr. Mortensen with great readiness placed the material of
this species in the Zoological Museum in Copenhagen at my dis-
posal. — For this favour as well as for much good advice I may
bring Dr. Mortensen my most respectful and cordial thanks.
I have then opened a great number of specimens of Asterias
grønlandica and the result of these examinations is as follows:
In practically all the mature female specimens which I opened,
the stomach was found full of either eggs or more or less devel-
oped young, while on the contrary this was never the case with
male specimens.
122
Thus there can be no doubt, that here we have a new in-
stance of protection of the young, where the young ones are hatched
in so curious a place as the stomach of the mother specimen.
I shall shortly describe the alimentary canal, to show more
distinctly in what part of the stomach the young are found.
The structure of the alimentary canal does not differ much
from that typical of Asterias.. There is a very short oesophagus,
which leads into the stomach itself. This is divided in two parts,
just as Miller & Troschel state in their "System der Asteridenf
(p. 3) to be the rule in those Asterids that have an anal opening.
The lower part is apparently fhe more thick-walled — although
this may partly be due to contractions and folding on preservation.
The upper part — the so called pyloric sac — is more thin-walled,
nearly quite smooth, only on the area which lies towards the abact-
inal surface there are many folds. From this upper part, which
leads into the rectum with its rectal caeca, the pyloric caeca issue.
The histological structure of the alimentary canal, which will
obviously be of great importance
in this connection, I have hitherto
not had the opportunity of ex-
amining on account of the con-
dition of the material, which was
not preserved with the object of
histological studies.
It should be mentioned, that
the male does not differ from the
female as regards the anatom -
ical structure of the alimentary
canal.
The place in which the eggs
or the young are found is always
the lower part of the stomach.
[i C. It may be very much distended.
Fig. 1. A specimen opened from the dorsal (Fig. I
been cut OF Res hon the eger Ene At times! the som ERE ERE
ps. border of the pyloric sac, where it eggS or the young was so great,
as been ent of. pe. "Pyloric caeca, here that they protruded throngiiile
removed to show the ovaries (ov.) in situ. É
s. stone-canal. 2,5/1. opening between the lower and
123
the upper part of the stomach into the upper part, forming a plug
in the opening (perhaps, however, this may be due to contraction
on preservation).
It may be emphasized that the brood was always found in the
stomach itself, and not in special compartments formed for that
purpose, as in the case of Stichaster nutrix, which was found by
Studer likewise to hatch its young in the stomach.')
Concerning the question, how the eggs get to their peculiar
hatching place, the suggestion lies at hand that the female, when
Fig. 2. Two embryos in different stages. The specimen to the right shows one of
the most advanced stages which was found in the stomach. 25/1,
emptying its eggs from the ovaries may assume a position similar
to that described by M.Sars?”) for Asterias Miilleri (and Henricia
sanguinolenta), with the back raised and the arms forming a hollow
space below the mouth, in which the eggs collect. It is easy to
understand, how the eggs may thus be taken into the stomach.
That the fertilization of the eggs must take place here, before the
eggs are taken into the stomach, can hardly be doubted. —
It is very strange that the eggs and embryos are not digested
when taken into the stomach. Evidently the normal function of the
7) Th. Studer: Die Seesterne Sid-Georgiens. Jahrbuch der wissenschaft
lichen Anstalten zu Hamburg. II. 1885. pag. 156.
?”) M. Sars: Fauna littoralis Norvegiae. 1. Lief. Christiania 1846. pag. 58.
124
stomach must be stopped during the time of the hatching; no rests .
of food were found in the stomach of any specimen containing
young. It may be expected that this can be definitely settled by
a careful histological study of specimens preserved for such pur-
pose.
I cannot enter here on the description of the embryological devel-
opment of this species, but must content myself with giving a pair
of figures of the embryos (Fig. 2), from which appears that their
shape is very similar to that of the embryos of Asterias Miilleri.
Probably they leave the stomach of the mother by the time they
have reached the stage shown in the right figure, no further ad-
vanced stages having been observed.
The eggs are large (ca. 1 mm). It is important to notice that
all the eggs or embryos found in a specimen are of the same
size; accordingly they must be emptied from the ovary all at the
same time, not at different times, as would appear to be the case
in Asterias Mtiilleri.
The complete study of the embryonic development requires a
large specially preserved material. I hope to get an opportunity
of going to Greenland in order to collect such material and, in
the same time, to make observations on the living specimens regard-
ing this very remarkable breeding habit, hitherto recorded in only
one other Echinoderm, namely Stichaster nutrix Studer.
In his paper on the Echinoderms of East Greenland, Dr. Th.
Mortensen!) expresses the opinion that Asterias grønlandica can-
not really be distinguished from Asterias Miilleri Sars, and later
authors have in general agreed with him in this regard. The fact
here discløsed that it hatches its young in its stomach, while -—
according to M. Sars”) — Asterias Miilleri hatches them only in
the cavity made by the raised arms, would seem to show that
Asterias grønlandica must, however, be a distinct species. I shall
not enter on this question at the present occasion. Renewed ob-
servations on the breeding habits of Asterias Miilleri would, how-
ever, also be very desirable.
") Dr. Th. Mortensen: Echinoderms from East Greenland. Meddelelser
fra Grønland. Vol. XXIX. Copenhagen. 1903. pag. 68.
KOPNCIK IPA SSE
I shall add here a few
observations on the gen-
ital organs of Asterias
grønlandica.
The gonads are placed
in the way usual in Aster-
ias. The ovaries attain
generally a length of ca.
1/5 of the arms” length;
they are generally un-
branched — sac-shaped,
sometimes they may
seem a little warted on
account of the eggs,
which distend the wall Fig. 3. Part of an interradius showing the place of
the genital papilla (g. p.). pa. papula. 10/1.
of the gonad.
The testes are, on the contråry, much branched organs and
generally reach the tip of the arm.
In the ovaries eggs in all stages are found, but always so that
many eggs are in the same stage.
The efferent ducts of the gonads present some features of in-
terest.. From the adoral part of the gonad a narrow duct passes
outwards through the body wall, ending on a little papilla, which
is to be found on the side of the arm a short distance from the
interradial line on the oral side (Fig. 3). The duct has ciliated
Fig. 4. A section through the hermaphroditic gonad. 43/1.
126
epithelium on its inside. Generally there is only one papilla, but
sometimes two papillæ may be found to each gonad and some-
times two ducts were found in the same papilla. The genital
papilla is - found both in male and female specimens. This holds
good also for Asterias Miilleri.
One of the specimens of Asterias grønlandica presented the in-
teresting case of an hermaphroditic gonad.
While nine of the gonads were purely female, the tenth was
apparently a purely male gonad. A closer examination, however,
showed it to be hermaphroditic in the tip of the gonad.
In Fig. 4 is represented a section through the hermaphroditic
nart of this gonad, showing the hermaphroditic character very dis-
tinetly, the eggs lying along the wall and the spermatozoa in the
middle.
Ås hermaphroditism appears to be of very rare occurrence in
Asteroids (besides the protandric hermaphrodite Asterina gibbosa,”)
similar cases were found only in Asterias glacialis”) and Asterias
rubens”)) I have thought this case of hermaphroditism in Asterias
grønlandica well worth mentioning.
") Cuénot: L'hermaphroditisme protandrique d'Asterina gibbosa Penn. et
ses variations suivant les localités. Zool. Anzeig. XXI. 1898. pag. 273.
) Cuénot: Op. cit. pag. 273. P. Buchner: Uber hermaphrodite See-
sterne. Zool. Anzeig. XXXVIII. 1911. pag. 315.
”) Retzius: Biol. Untersuchungen. Neue Folge. XVI. 1911. pag 69.
4—11—1920.
is—…..…
Description of a new genus and species of
Myrmeleonidae from Japan.
By
P. Esben-Petersen, Silkeborg.
Thaumatoleon n. g.
Costal crossveins simple; forked in the pterostigmatical and apical
area; in the last mentioned area there is one series of gradate cross-
veins in the forewing and two more or less irregular series in the
hind wing. Rs arises in the forewing further out than the fork of Cu1.
Cu», and IA run separately to the point where Cu2 meets with
the first erossvein from Cu1.. Cuz> somewhat curved; it reaches
thekindemareinattthetlevertkortthekorisintoerRseee 2 AF and "3 7A
coalesce for a distance; 24 forked. In the hindwing Rs arises
close to the base; one crossvein before the origin of Rs. 14
very short. Hindwing longer than the forewing.. No Banksian line.
Tip of wings rounded in a particular manner.
Antennae at least as long as the head and the thorax united.
Prothorax breader than long. Abdomen slender and shorter than
the forewings. Legs slender; tibiae longer than femora. Ist tarsal
joint almost as long as 2nd and 3rd united; 5th as long as 2nd,
ård and 4th together. Spurs tiny, rather straight and as long as
Ist joint.
Genotype: Thaumatoleon splendidus.
It is a very interesting genus which may be looked upon as
a highly specialized one within the Formicaleonini. At first sight
it has somewhat likene$s to one of the genera Dendroleon, Frog-
gattisca and Glenurus.
Thaumatoleon splendidus n. sp.
Face yellowish brown; vertex pale brown, filled up by two
cross-rows of narrow longitudinal furrows. Antennae brownish yel-
128
low, with broad, brown bands dorsally; the club rather narrow and
” pointed towards apex. Thorax pale greyish brown with a narrow,
blackish brown, longitudinal median streak. The underside of thorax
brownish yellow and with a longitudinal, blackish streak below the
wings... Abdomen pale greyish brown. Legs testaceous; more or
less marked with blackish brown spots, especially on the underside
Right fore- and hindwing of Thaumatoleon splendidus.
of intermediate and hind femora and tibiae. Apex of tibiae and
of tarsal joints brownish. Apical joint of tarsus with short blackish
bristles on the underside of its apical half part. Body with short,
paåle brown pubescense; legs with blackish bristles. Venation of
wings yellow or almost whitish, especially in a large area near
the tip of the wings. Where the wings are brownish shaded or
marked, all the veins are brownish. Below the apical part of R
and along M in the forewing some more intensely marked spots
or streaks are found; also the curved streak, arising from the
hind margin where Cu2 ends, is rather heavily marked. In the
apical part of the hindwing a large, strongly marked spot near the
hind margin is found. Pteroøstigma not visible.
Forewing 49 mm; hindwing 53 mm; body 43 mm.
One specimen (Type) in my collection from Horisha, Formosa.
The sex is undeterminable on account of the damaged tip of the
abdomen. >
oo] 920:
Bmg
New species of Phoridae from Denmark
together with remarks on Aphiochaeta groenlandica Lundbk.
By
Will. Lundbeck.
Trupheoneura Malloch.
ERR ms MSP ER
Frons somewhat broader than long, black, not shining, bristles
somewhat strong, the rows straight or the anterior somewhat con-
vex. Antennæ not large, brownish black, arista short-pubescent.
Palpi yellow or dirty yellowish. Thorax black, a little reddish at
the humeri, not or slightly shining. Scutellum with two bristles.
Abdomen black, dull, second and sixth segments a little elongated.
Hypopygium relatively not large; it is reddish or blackish, the
arms of forceps unsymmetrical, the left long, somewhat narrow
and curved, the right a little broader but much shorter; anal tube
short with long hairs; below a large, arched ventral plate is seen,
and on the left side a special triangular prolongation. Legs yellow
or brownish yellow, the hind legs being the darkest; front tibiæ
with a dorsal bristle above the middle, middle tibiæ with a pair
at the upper third and a small anterior bristle at apex, hind tibiæ
with two anterodorsal bristles, one at the upper third and one small
at apex; the upper bristles on middle and hind tibiæ not weak.
Wings a little yellowish or brownish yellow tinged, veins brown
or blackish brown; costa well beyond the middle, thickened from
the uniting with the first vein to the end and increasing in thick-
ness outwards; 1 about equal to 2 + 3 or a little longer; fork
longish, the angle somewhat acute; costal cilia moderately short,
rather midway between short and long; fourth vein issuing at or
near the base of the fork, moderately curved in its first part and
for the rest straight; seventh vein weak, ending about half way
to the margin. Halteres yellow. — Length 1,7 to about 2 mm.
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 72. 9
130
This species is very similar to /uteifemorata Wood and I should
not have hesitated in considering it as that species were it not
that Wood expressly states (Ent. Month. Mag. 2, XXV, 153), that
in luteifemorata the arms of the forceps (flaps) are symmetrical.
I have taken the species in Geel Skov on "/s and "/10 1918,
two males; besides in Denmark the species also occurs in Hol-
land and Germany according to a specimen kindly sent me from
Pater Schmitz.
PREENexcISsaens SPIR ONE
Male. Frons low and broad, more than twice as broad as
long, black, not shining; bristles well developed, the middle row
a little, the anterior distinctly convex. Antennæ black or brownish
black, third joint somewhat large and conspicuously pubescent, arista
pubescent. Palpi black, rather narrow with the bristles short.
Thorax black, a little greyish, very slightly shining or nearly dull.
Scutellum with two bristles. Abdomen black or greyish black,
dull... Hypopygium somewhat large, reddish grey, the left arm of
forceps yellowish; it is unsymmetrical, the tergite has above on
the left side a small triangular prolongation, the left arm of forceps
long, somewhat curved, with a large triangular tooth on the anterior
margin, the right arm is short, broad, pointed and with a small
tooth on the posterior margin; below there is a large yellowish
somewhat furcated ventral plate; anal tube short with longish hairs.
Legs somewhat long and slender, but less than in intempesta, they
are brown, tibiæ and tarsi more brownish yellow; front tibiæ with
a dorsal bristle above the middle, middle tibiæ with a pair at about
the upper third and a small anterior at apex, hind tibiæ with two
anterior bristles, one above the middle and one smaller at apex;
the bristles are rather small, only the upper anterior on middle
tibiæ longer. Wings somewhat large, brown or yellowish brown
tinged; costa reaching beyond the middle (0,57), thickened from the
uniting with the first vein and increasing in thickness outwards;
costal divisions proportionately about as 0 gg (the wing was
not plane so the measurements are partly estimated); fork rather long
and somewhat acute; costal cilia short; third vein a little strong;
fourth vein issuing behind the base of the fork, distinetly s-like
at base and with the curve in its first part somewhat strong;
seventh vein reaching a little more than half way to the margin.
131
Halteres yellow. — Female. Similar to the male; frons a little
higher; antennæ smaller; palpi more greyish and with longer bristles,
especially one long at the end. Clypeus protruding, shining. On
the venter the fourth segment is hairy, the fifth seems to have
hairs only towards the hind margin, the sixth is hairy; the seventh
sternite is elongated, of the same breadth in the whole length and
excised in the hind margin, the corners being drawn out and a
little hook-like, it is hairy below. The wings have first division a
little shorter, the divisions about as 6—5—3. — Length 2—3
mm, the female the larger. i
Of this species I possess only the female, the above description
of the male is drawn from a German specimen kindly sent me
from Pater Schmitz.
I have taken the species in Geel Skov on ”/i0—%/10 in 1918
and 1919, three females in all ; besides in Denmark the species
also occurs in- Holland and Germany according to specimens kindly
sent me from Pater Schmitz.
Aphiochaeta Brues.
Scutellum with four bristles.
lee AR prodromasnsspæde
Frons somewhat but not much broader than long, black, dull;
inner bristle of lower row a little below the outer and nearer to
it than to the upper supraantennal; supraantennals unequal, the lower
about half the size of the upper; upper supraantennals approxim-
ated, nearer together than the inner bristles of the middle row,
the lower close to the upper and direct below them, not nearer
together. Antennæ somewhat large but not as large as in fusci-
nervis, black, arista quite short-pubescent. Palpi brownish. Thorax
black, a little shining. Mesopleura bare. Scutellum with. four nearly
equal bristles. Abdomen black, dull. Hypopygium somewhat small,
greyish black, with numerous conspicuous hairs on the sides be-
low; anal tube of medium length but high, blackish. Legs black,
front legs and middle tibiæ more brownish black, hind femora a
little dilated with long, somewhat strong hairs below the basal
half; bristles on hind tibiæ of medium size. Wings somewhat
Q£
132
brownish ør greyish brown tinged; thin veins rather strong; costa
short, about 0,44 of the wing-length, costal divisions about as 13
—6—4; sangle at fork somewhat acute; costal cilia moderately
long; fourth vein evenly curved in the whole length. Halteres
black. — Length.2 mm.
Holte "/4 1920 (Th. Mortensen), on a fresh stub of a tree, one
male.
Scutellum with two bristles.
Mesopleura bristly, with one long bristle.
Costa long, fringe short.
PSA depllataens spre
Male. Frons low, twice as broad as high at the sides, grey-
ish black, dull; bristles as in rudis, the bristles of lower row like-
wise near to each other but the outer placed lower, in nearly the
same height as the inner and this latter thus less near the margin,
upper supraantennals still more distant. Antennæ blackish, large,
third joint oval, reaching above the centre of the eye, arista short-
pubescent. Palpi yellow, bristles scarcely as long as in rudis.
Thorax black, a little shining. Mesopleura bristly with one long
bristle, but not so long as in rudis. Abdomen dull black. Hypopy-
gium large, knob-shaped, it is black and has hairs below, which
seem to be placed more densely and bunch-like than in rudis, one
of them is a little longer and curved inwards; anal tube yellow,
of medium size; when the subanal body is exposed a very large,
black polished, hook-like piece is seen tapering into a long, band-
shaped, pointed end, it has also at the base another broader piece.
Legs yellowish, the posterior slightly darker, the apical half of hind
femora brownish; front tarsi not stouter than usual; hind femora
with only short hairs below the basal half, but the hairs on the
anteroventral margin of the apical part somewhat long and bristly;
hind tibial cilia distinct but weaker than in rudis. Wings as in
rudis but more colourless, and thin veins rather fine; 1 distinetly
longer than 2 + 3; costal cilia rather midway between short and
long; angle at fork large. Halteres black. — Female. Similar;
antennæ small and the hairs on the apical part of hind femora
much smaller. — Length 1,3—1,7 mm.
133
This species is very similar to rudis but besides by some small
characters as the frontal bristles and the breadth of frons it will be
known by the want of the long hairs below the basal half of hind
femora and the bristly hairs below the apical part; the female may,
I think, likewise be recognised by the frontal bristles and short
hairs below hind femora.
Holte, Geel Skov, Suserup Skov at. Sorø (Th. Mortensen, the
author) on ?”?/7—?3/8 in 1917—1920; seven males and one female.
Mesopleura with uniform bristles.
Costa long, fringe long.
SERRA pilifemuranesper
Frons broader than high, black, dull; inner bristle of lower
row somewhat below the outer and nearer to it than to the upper
supraantennal; supraantennals unequal, the lower somewhat smaller
than the upper; the upper supraantennals approximated, a little
nearer together than the inner bristles of the middle row, the
lower a little more approximated. Antennæ black, arista distinctly
pubescent. Palpi yellow. Thorax black, a little shining. Mesopleura
with uniform bristles. Abdomen black, dull. Hypopygium not large,
greyish black; it is higher than long, on each side there is a nearly
vertical row of about four or five weak bristles or bristly hairs,
the lowermost a little curved; anal tube of medium size, blackish.
Legs black, the front-legs more brownish; front metatarsus thick-
ened, as thick as the end of tibia; hind femoøra with somewhat long
and rather strong hairs below the middle, but at the base the hairs
only short and fine; bristles on hind tibiæ distinct but not large.
Wings somewhat brownish tinged, veins brown; costa rather short,
about 0,46—0,47 of the wing-length, costal divisions about as I1—
6—4; costal cilia moderately long; third vein a little strong, fourth
vein distinctly curved in its first part, for the rest nearly straight.
Halteres black. — Length 1,5 mm.
Lohals on Langeland %/7 and %/7 1920 (the author), two males.
AREA intercostaraa nes peer
Frons broader than high, black and dull, very slightly greyish;
inner bristle of lower row lower than the outer and nearer to it
134
than to the upper supraantennal; supraantennals not quite equal,
the lower a little weaker than the upper; the upper supraanten-
nals approximated, nearer together than the inner bristles of the
middle row and the lower slightly more approximated. Antennæ
small, brownish black, arista somewhat short-pubescent. Palpi yel-
low, not broad, the bristles well developed. Thorax black, a little
shining. Mesopleura with uniform bristles.. Abdomen black, dull,
slightly greyish. Hypopygium small, with numerous hairs, especially
below on the sides; anal tube yellowish, somewhat high. Legs
brownish, front legs more yellow; front tarsi thickened, especially
metatarsus which is as thick au the end of tibia, the other joints
less thickened but the whole tarsus tapering evenly without any
marked contrast between metatarsus and second joint; hind femora
somewhat broad, with sparse long hairs below the basal half;
bristles on hind tibiæ somewhat numerous but distinect and not
exactly small, longest about the middle. Wings brownish, thin veins
a little strong; costa rather short, about 0,45 of the wing-length,
costal divisions about as 14—5—4; costal cilia moderately long;
fourth vein evenly. curved in the whole length. Halteres black. —
Length 1,7 mm. >
This species will easily be distinguished in the group, in which
it must be placed, by the short costa and the proportions of the
costal divisions, and the same characters will, I think, distinguish
the female.
Hejls ”%/: 1919 (the author). one male.
SA exclu sanse
Frons broader than high, black, a little greyish and dull; inner
bristle of lower row somewhat below the outer and a little nearer to
it than to the upper supraantennal; supraantennals somewhat large,
equal, the upper at about the same distance from each other as the
inner bristles of the middle row, the lower well below the upper and
slightly more approximated. Antennæ small, brownish black, arista
distinctly pubescent. Palpi yellow. Thorax black, slightly shining.
Mesopleura with uniform bristles. Abdomen black, dull. Hypopygium
small, in my specimen partly withdrawn but without bristles; anal
tube short but high, yellow. Legs yellow, hind femora slightly
darkened at apex; front tarsi distinctly though not much thickened ;
135
the hairs below basal half of hind femora distinct but not long, at
most sligthly longish; bristles on hind tibiæ small and fine. Wings
brownish tinged, costa 0,47 of the wing-length, costal divisions about
as 5—3—2; costal cilia moderately long, fourth vein evenly and
not much curved. Halteres black. — Length about 1,5 mm.
This species is, on account of its thickened front tarsi, black
halteres and yellow legs, easily placed, and I think that the female
therefore, when it turns up, will be identified without difficulty.
Ørholm ”/6 1918 (the author), one male.
GÆRSA dubiosansspr ge (9).
Frons somewhat broader than high, greyish black, dull; inner
bristle of lower row a little below the outer and much nearer to
it than to the upper supraantennal; supraantennals nearly equal,
the upper about as distant as the inner bristles of the middle row,
the lower a little weaker and nearer together. Antennæ black,
arista short-pubescent. Palpi yellow, with well developed bristles.
Thorax black, a little shining. Mesopleura with small, uniform
bristles. Abdomen black, dull. Hypopygium small, greyish black,
on each side below there are about three small, vertically placed
hairs, and more above on the hind part still a couple of hairs;
anal tube of medium size or small, blackish. Legs brownish or
darker to blackish brown, front legs only slightly paler, hind fem-
ora with sparse, long or longish hairs below the basal half; bristles
on hind tibiæ distinct but small. Wings clear or very slightly tinged,
veins brownish, thin veins paler; costa rather short, about 0,45 of
the wing-length, costal divisions about as 11—6—4 thus 1 about
equal to 2 + 3; costal cilia ordinarily long, fourth vein slightly and
evenly curved in the whole length. Halteres black. — Female. I
possess a female which may belong here; it seems to agree well
with the male, but I am not sure. — Length 1,5 mm.
Holte, Hillerød and Ry in Jutland %/7—7/8 in 1917 and 1918
(Th. Mortensen, the author); the possible female is taken in Erme
lind 72/541919.
This species is not very characteristic; it is one of the rather
numerous species belonging to the group with costa longer than
0,44, long cilia, uniform mesopleural bristles, simple front tarsi and
black halteres. In Wood's table it will run down to nigripes, but
136
it is distinct from this species among others by the hypogygium
and the hairs below hind femora.
NERE ehaetopye an ksp ke
Frons slightly broader than high, black, a little greyish, dull;
inner bristle of lower row in the same or nearly the same height
as the outer and about in the middle between it and the upper
supraantennal; supraantennals unequal, the lower considerably smal-
ler than the upper; upper supraantennals as distant as the inner
bristles of middle row, the lower more approximated. Antennæ
somewhat small, black, arista distinctly pubescent. Palpi not large,
yellow, a little dusky. Thorax black, somewhat shining. Mesopleura
with uniform bristles. Abdomen black, dull, the hairs increasing in
length behind, on fifth segment already a little longish and at the
hind margin of sixth segment they are very long all round, as long
as the segment itself and bristly, also at the sides of fifth and
sixth segments the hairs are somewhat long. Hypopygium not small,
especially somewhat long and the side parts prolonged backwards
below in a little projection; on each side there is an a little oblique
or nearly vertical row of about five bristles and still two bristles
further upwards; there is a small, somewhat spatula-shaped yellow-
ish ventral plate, broadest at the end; anal tube not large, brown-
ish. Legs brown, front legs only slightly paler; the hind femora
have below in the proximal two thirds a fringe of distinct but not
long hairs, they are shortest at the base, longish towards the end;
the bristles on hind tibiæ of about medium size, not numerous.
Wings somewhat yellowish brown, costa not quite reaching the
middle, about 0,48 of the wing-length, costal divisions about as
3—2—1, costal cilia long, fourth vein curved at the origin, for
the rest nearly straight, seventh vein quite straight. Halteres yel-
low — Length 1,6 mm.
Ermelund %/5 1920 (the author), one male.
(SÆERE Ad RES ere ENES PE
Frons broader than high, greyish black, dull; inner bristle of
lower row slightly below the outer or nearly in the same height
and nearer to it than to the upper supraantennal; supraantennals
equal or nearly, the upper as distant as the inner bristles of the
137
middle row, the lower direct below the upper, not or at least very
slightly nearer together. Antennæ black, arista distinctly pubescent.
Palpi yellow. Thorax black, a little greyish and slightly shining.
Mesopleura with uniform bristles. Abdomen somewhat robust, rather
grey, dull. Hypopygium somewhat small, higher than long, greyish,
shining at the base above; the lower hinder corners drawn a little
out; on each side there are some small bristly hairs; anal tube
short, yellow, darker at the base. Legs yellowish or light brownish
yellow, hind femora with the apical part darkened and likewise hind
tibiæ; hind femora somewhat short and broad, only reaching slightly
beyond the end of abdomen, below the basal half there is a con-
spicuous fringe of somewhat short but strong, a little curved hairs,
they are quite short at the base, longer outwards, and the fringe
ends with a couple of finer hairs; bristles on hind tibiæ somewhat
large and not numerous (about 10).… Wings somewhat brownish
tinged and thin veins somewhat strong; costa not quite to the
middle, about 0,48 of the wing-length, costal divisions about as 5
—4—2; costal cilia full long, fourth vein evenly curved in the
whole length, only slightly more at the origin. Halteres yellow. —
Fenstheksemm:
Lohals on Langeland ”/7 1920 (the author), one male.
Mesopleura bare.
Costa long, fringe short.
9. <A. merochaeta n. sp. &.
Frons somewhat broader than high, slightly greyish, dull or
nearly; inner bristle of lower row below the outer and only slightly
nearer to it than to the upper supraantennal; supraantennals un-
equal, the lower about half the size of the upper; upper supra-
antennals nearer together than the inner bristles of the middle
row, the lower only very slightly more approximated. Antennæ
somewhat large, black, arista short-pubescent. Palpi black. Thorax
black, somewhat shining. Mesopleura bare. Abdomen robust, black,
somewhat greyish and dull: at the hind margin of sixth segment
the hairs a little longish and on the ventral side strong and
. bristly. Hypopygium of medium size, black; it is somewhat curious
but on my sole specimen I cannot study it satisfactorily ; it is
138
dull from a dense, nearly microscopical punctuation, along the whole
hinder or lower margin somewhat dense, longish hairs are hanging
downwards, they are in my specimen best developed on the left
side; anal tube somewhat short but stout, black. Legs dark brown
or blackish brown, front legs only slightly paler; hind femora rather
broad, below the basal two thirds are unusually long and strong
bristles, specially long below the middle; under the microscope
these bristles are distinctly spinulose what is else not the case;
bristles on hind tibiæ of good size. Wings søomewhat brownish
tinged; costa somewhat short, about 0,46 of the wing-length, costal
divisions about as 13—7—5; castal cilia short but moderately, on
the border between short and long, they are relatively few in
number, strong and distinctly spinulose; angle at fork not large;
fourth vein evenly curved only slightly more at the base. Halteres
"black. — Length nearly 2 mm.
Ermelund %/; 1919 (the author), one male.
FORKRÆR Ph allidaenes ps
Frons high, about quadratic, yellow; inner bristle of lower row
well "below the outer, about im the middle between it and the
upper supraantennal; supraantennals very unequal, the upper not
large, the lower only very small, nearly microscopical hairs; the
upper supraantennals approximated, nearer together than the inner
bristles of the middle row, the lower hairs more approximated
Antennæ yellow, arista not long, distinctly pubescent. Palpi yellow,
not large. Thorax yellow, dullish. Mesopleura bare. Abdomen yel-
lowish, the segments blackish at the sides and hind margins in
such a way that abdomen may be termed blackish with a series
of semicircular yellow middle spots; venter yellow. Hypopygium
large, yellowish grey with some small but distinct and bristly hairs
at the lower margin, the hindmost being the longest; anal tube
large, reddish yellow. Legs yellow, hind femora brown just at apex,
with sparse long hairs below the basal half; bristles on hind tibiæ
quite small and fine, but distinct on the lower half. Wings a little
yellowish, costa reaching the middle; costal divisions about as 7
—5—2 thus 1 equal to 2 + 3, costal cilia short, angle at fork
large; fourth vein slightly and evenly curved but a little recurved ,
at apex. Halteres yellow — Length 1,2 mm.
139
Holte 776 1917 (Th. Mortensen), one male.
This species will in the group at once be known by its pale
colour, but it is possible that the female will show four scutellar
bristles.
Costa long, fringe long.
Bristles on hind tibiæ distinct.
BEA tarsela ns spg:
Male. Frons considerably broader than high, blackish grey,
dull; inner bristle of lower row slightly below the outer and a
little nearer to it than to the upper suprantennal; supraantennals
unequal, the lower about half the size of the upper; the upper
supraantennals a little less distant than the inner bristles of middle
row, the lower a little more approximated. Antennæ smallish, black-
ish brown, arista long, distinctly pubescent. Palpi yellow. Thorax
black, slightly shining. Mesopleura bare. Abdomen black, slightly
greyish,. dull... Hypopygium of medium size, brownish grey, with
distinect hairs behind and on the sides; anal tube quite short but
high, yellow. Legs yellowish, the posterior more brownish yellow,
hind femora darkest towards the end, with long hairs below the
basal half; front tarsi somewhat stout, especially the three first
joints, metatarsus not longer than the two following joints; bristles
on hind tibiæ distinct, but rather small and numerous, the dorsal
hair-seam curving evenly towards the anterior from above the middle.
Wings a little yellowish tinged, costa reaching to the middle; costal
divisions about as 11—6—3,. thus 1 a little longer than 2 + 3;
costal cilia full long, angle at fork somewhat acute; fourth vein
evenly curved in the whole length only slightly more in the basal
part and slightly s-like at base. Halteres yellow. — Female. Sim-
ilar; front tarsi likewise stoutish -and hind femora with long hairs
below. — Length 1,,2—1,7 mm.
Ry in Jutland ?/7—?8/7 1918 (the author), two males and four
females.
The species will be known in the group especially by the stout
front tarsi and the small size.
12 PA melaena mi spire
Frons not much broader than high, black, dull; inner bristle
of lower row slightly below the outer and slightly nearer to it than
140
to the upper supraantennal; supraantennals unequal, the lower about
half the size of the upper; the upper supraantennals approximated,
nearer together than the inner bristles of the middle row, the
lower a little more approximated. Antennæ a little large, black,
arista short-pubescent. Palpi brownish black. Thorax black, slightly
shining. Mesopleura bare. Abdomen black, dull, slightly greyish.
Hypopygium of medium size, greyish, on the sides at the lower
margin are numerous hairs among which a couple longer and a
little bristly and above on the hind part are some shorter hairs;
anal tube short but high, blackish grey. Legs black, front legs
only slightly paler; hind femora with long hairs below the basal
half; bristles on hind tibiæ distinct and not numerous but some-
what short. Wings somewhat strongly brownish tinged and thin
veins somewhat strong; costa nearly to the middle, costal divisions
about as 14—7—4; angle at fork somewhat acute, costal cilia
moderately long; fourth vein evenly curved. Halteres black. —
Length. 2 to fully 2 mmm.
Geel Skov "?/4 and ”/4 1919 (Th. Mortensen, the author), two
males, one was taken on a fresh stub of Acer.
The species locates itself together with frontalis in one group
and therefore the female will, I think, not be difficult to identify.
Bristles on hind tibiæ small and hair-like.
ISA Smid aem ES PE
Frons broader than high, black, a little greyisk, dull; inner
bristle of lower row slightly below the outer and nearer to it than
to the upper supraantennal; the supraantennals unequal, the lower
about half the size of the upper or somewhat more; upper supra-
antennals approximated, nearer together than the inner bristles of
the middle row, the lower only slightly more approximated. An-
tennæ somewhat small, brownish, arista long, distinctly pubescent.
Palpi yellew, the bristles rather long. Thorax black, very slightly
shining; pleura more or less brownish, anteriorly stretching up on
the humeri. Mesopleura bare. Abdomen black, dull. Hypopygium
large, as long and broad as sixth segment, cylindrical: on the sides
and at the hind margin it is clothed with longish hairs, longest
below, but there are no bristles; anal tube of medium size, yellow,
141
with quite small apical hairs. Legs vellow, hind femora somewhat
darkened towards the tip with the hairs below the basal half some-
what long; bristles on hind tibiæ distinct, but fine and hair-like.
Wings brown, the veins rather strong, costa reaching beyond the
middle; 1 about equal to 2 + 3, costal cilia long, angle at fork
not acute; fourth vein somewhat curved in its first part, for the
rest a little evenly curved. Halteres yellow. — Length 1,6 to nearly
2omm.
Ermelund >, 1919 and "76 1920 (the author), Geel Skov
24/, 1918 (Th. Mortensen), three males.
I think there is a possibility that this species may be the male
to breviterga Lundbk.
HER ål HUDEN TINA GOLE IVES] DE SEE
Frons broader than high, black, very slightly greyish and dul-
lish; inner bristle of lower row about in the same height as the
outer and nearer to it than to the upper supraantennal; supra-
antennals about equal, the lower only slightly weaker than the
upper; upper supraantennals more approximated than inner bristles
of middle row, the lower a little more approximated. Antennæ
brownish black, not large, arista distinctly pubescent. Palpi yellow.
Thorax black, a little shining. Mesopleura bare. Abdomen black,
dull. Legs yellow, the posterior more yellowish brown, hind femora
darkest at apex, with the hairs below not long; hind tibial bristles
small and numerous, hair-like. Wings brown, the thick veins not
strong, vellowish brown, thin veins dark brown; costa reaching
beyond the middle, costal divisions about as 15—10—6, thus 1
about equal to 2 + 3; costal cilia long; the fork extremely long,
so long that the outer branch is as long as the second costal
division, the angle acute; fourth vein issuing behind the base of
the fork below the middle of the outer branch, it is well curved
in its first part, the apical part straight. Halteres yellow. — Length
2 mm.
Lohals "”/7 1920 (the author), one female.
Costa short.
142
ISA pyemaeodes ns spe
Frons a little broader than high, black, a little greyish and
with an indication of being shining; inner bristle of lower row be-
low the outer and about in the middle between it and the upper
supraantennal; supraantennals unequal, the lower considerably smal-
ler than the upper; the upper supraantennals approximated, a little
nearer together than the inner bristles of middle row, the lower a
little more approximated. Antennæ brownish black, arista short-
pubescent. Palpi yellow. Thorax black, very slightly shining. Meso-
pleura bare. Abdomen black, dull. Legs yellowish brown, hind
femora a little dark at apex, with a little longish hairs below the
basal half: bristles on hind tibiæ distinct and of medium size,
not numerous. Wings colourless, veins yellowish; costa about 0,34
of the wing-length, costal divisions about as 11—3—2; third vein
a little strøng; costal cilia moderately short, fourth vein very slightly
and evenly, curved, a little interrupted at the base. Halteres yel-
low — Length 1,5 mm.
Ry in Jutland ””/7 1918 (the author), one female.
This species. evidently belongs to thé pygmaea-group and is very
near pygmaea and brachyneura; from the latter the colour distin-
guishes it and from pygmaea it is distinguished by the normal ab-
dominal tergites; I have described this single female as it is evid-
ently an undescribed species, but how the male will be distin-
guished from pygmaea I cannot say, unless the darkest, clear-
winged forms of pygmaea should prove to belong to the present
species.
A. groenlandica Lundbk.
Lundbk. Vid. Medd. naturh. Foren. København, 1900, 307, Fig. 5 (Phora).
The criginal description of this species is given in common
terms, the immense increase in the number of species in later
years makes it impossible to identify the species after the description,
I shall therefore here give some supplements: The species belongs
to the group with two scutellar bristles, uniform bristles on meso-
pleura, a long and long ciliated costa and dilated front tarsi. As
said in the description the species is black with black antennæ,
143
palpi and halteres and blackish brown legs. Frons somewhat broader
than high, inner bristle of lower row quite near to the outer and
about in the same height; lower supraantennals a little smaller
than the upper. Antennæ with the arista somewhat short. Abdomen
with the hairs at the sides in the apical part: conspicuous.
Hypo-
pygium not small, with a couple of bristly hairs on each side,
among which one longer; anal tube stout, brown. Front
tarsi distinctly dilated, metatarsus of a curious shape; it
is only slightly longer than second joint, at the base it is
not broad but outwards it is dilated towards. the antero-
ventral side so that at the end it reaches the breadth of the
end of tibia, the end margin is oblique and the antero-
" ventral corner drawn out; bristles on hind tibiæ small,
fine and numerous. Wings brownish yellow, costa near to
the middle, about 0,48 of the wing-length (as in the cited
figure of the wing the base is omitted, it may give the
impression that costa is short), 1 longer than 2 + 3, the
divisions about as 6—3—2; costal cilia long; fourth vein
I
Å. groen-
landica.
Front
tarsus.
moderately curved at the base, for the rest straight but curved
slightly downwards just at apex. — Female. Similar to the male,
but with the front tarsi practically not dilated, metatarsus simple
and about twice as long as second joint.
S—12—1920
nn"
—
-
-
.
n
Ådal «seet!
Om Glandula thyreoidea's Forhold ved Metamorfose-
Uregelmæssigheder hos Padderne.
Af
C. 0. Jensen.
Hertil Pl. IV—VIL
With an English Summary.
De seneste Aars eksperimentelle Undersøgelser har godtgjort,
at Metamorfosens Indtræden hos Amphibierne udløses ved Glan-
dula thyreoidea's indresekretoriske Virksomhed. Grundlaget for
denne nye og for Biologien betydningsfulde Erkendelse blev skabt
ved Gudernatsch's bekendte Fodringsforsøg, der viste, at Op-
fodring af Partikler af Thyreoidea-Væv fra Pattedyr hos Haletudser
regelmæssig og næsten øjeblikkelig paafølges af Metamorfosens
Paabegyndelse, ganske uafhængig af Larvernes Størrelse og Ud-
viklingsstadium; den nye Anskuelse er forøvrigt i det væsentlige
opbygget og uddybet gennem Laufberger's og Forfatterens
Paavisning af, at Thyreoidea-Fodringen ikke blot virker forvandlings-
"fremmende, men forvandlingsfremtvingende (Axolotl-Forsøg), gen-
nem Forfatterens Eftervisning af, at den metamorfosefremtvin-
gende Virkning er knyttet til Thyreoidea-Vævets specifike, jodhol-
dige. Stof (Jodothyrinet), og gennem B. M. Allen'sogE. R. & M.
M. Hoskin's Forsøg med Eksstirpation af Gl. thyreoidea hos ganske
unge Frølarver, der har godtgjort, at Glandelens Fjernelse med-
fører Udeblivelse af den naturlige Metamorfose og Dyrets Forbliven
paa Larvestadiet. En Række andre Arbejder har dels bekræftet
disse Undersøgelsers Rigtighed og dels paa forskellig Vis uddybet
vort Kendskab til de herhen hørende Forhold; men som det kunde
ventes, er derigennem en Række andre Spørgsmaal rykket i For-
grunden; jeg skal blot nævne det indbyrdes Forhold mellem Ud-
viklingen og Funktionen af Gl. thyreoidea og af de andre endokrine
Kirtler samt Ernæringens og de ydre Livsbetingelsers Indvirkning
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 72. 10
146
paa Udviklingen af Gl. thyreoidea hos Larverne og derigennem paa
disses Forvandling.
Naar :den normale Metamorfose skyldes en fra Gl. thyreoidea
udgaaende Funktion, ligger det nær at antage, at de forskellige,
jævnligt forekommende Uregelmæssigheder vedrørende Forvandlin-
gens Indtræden og Forløb maa føres tilbage til enten Udviklings-
forstyrrelser eller sygelige Tilstande i dette Organ. Da Under-
søgelser vedrørende Gli. thyreoidea's Strukturforhold hos Axolotl'en
paaviste Forhold, der paa Grundlag af vort Kendskab til Pattedyr-
Skjoldbruskkirtlens Patologi maatte opfattes som pathologiske, fandt
jeg Anledning til at udstrække disse Undersøgelser til ogsaa at
amfatte Thyreoideas histologiske Forhold ved Uregelmæssigheder
hos andre Paddelarver. Som det fremgaar af det efterfølgende,
kan disse Undersøgelser kun kaldes orienterende; men da jeg
fattes Tid. til at gennemføre dem i større Omfang og i Detailler,
har jeg ment at burde offentliggøre en Række Billeder, der viser
de forefundne, til Dels meget interessante Strukturforhold ; mulig-
vis vil dette kunne give Anledning til, at andre optager mere ind-
gaaende Undersøgelser af de herhen hørende Forhold.
Vort Kendskab til Gl. thyreoidea hos Amphibierne er for saa
vidt ret overfladisk, som vi kun ved meget lidt om de Variationer,
som Organet er undergivet med Hensyn til Størrelse og Bygning;
efter vort Kendskab til Organet hos Mennesket og Huspattedyrene
tør vi dog betragte det som utvivlsomt, at der forekommer saavel
individuelle Ejendommeligheder som Forskelligheder, der staar i
Forbindelse med Dyrenes Alderstrin, samt at Organets fysiologiske
Virksomhed og dermed i det mindste delvis dets histologiske For-
hold kan paavirkes i ikke uvæsentlig Grad gennem Ernæringen
og Dyrets øvrige Levevilkaar. Selvfølgelig frembyder derfor en
Undersøgelse som den foreliggende betydelige Vanskeligheder, og
det vil næppe være berettiget at drage videregaaende Slutninger
af Undersøgelse af et ret begrænset Materiale, saa meget mindre,
som man bør være varsom med af Forskelligheder i Organets
mikroskopiske Bygning at drage Slutninger ogsaa om dets fysio-
logiske Ydeevne. Hvor det har været muligt, saaledes for Hale-
tudsernes Vedkommende, er der derfor foretaget Sammenligninger
med Kontroldyr, d. v. s. Dyr, som viste normale Udviklingsforhold
og saa vidt muligt henhørte til samme Kuld som de afvigende
147
Individer, eller som dog befandt sig paa samme Alderstrin som
disse og havde levet under samme naturlige Forhold.
Haletudserne og de smaa Axolotl'er er dræbte og fikserede i
Formol-Alkohol. For de større Axolotl'ers Vedkommende er Gland-
lerne delvis eksstirperede hos det levende Dyr; i alle Tilfælde har
en øjeblikkelig Fiksering i Formol-Alkohol fundet Sted. De til
Undersøgelserne anvendte Amblystomer er dels ved Prof., Dr.
Adolf Jensen's Velvilje stillede til min Raadighed fra Zoologisk
Museum, dels indkøbte i præpareret Tilstand; Materialet har dels
været fikseret i Formol-Alkohol, dels kun været opbevaret i Al-
kohol; i alle Tilfælde har Gl. thyreoidea været saa vel bevaret, at
histologisk Undersøgelse har kunnet finde Sted. For alle Dyrs
Vedkommende er Organet undersøgt i Seriesnit, til Farvning er
som Regel anvendt Hansen's Jærntrioxyhæmatein og Eosin.
I. Glandula thyreoidea hos Axolotl'en (Larven af Amblystoma
mexicanum).
Hos voksne. Axolotl'er varierer Gl. thyreoidea ret betydelig i
Størrelse; hyppigst har jeg for den enkelte Glandel fundet en
Længde af 2—3 .mm og en Tykkelse af c. 1 mm, hos enkelte
Dyr er noteret en Længde af 3—4 mm, hos andre kun 1—2 mm;
ofte er den ene Glandel større end den anden. Hos et enkelt
Dyr forefandtes paa den ene Side 3—4 adskilte, smaa Glandler,
paa den anden Side kun en enkelt. Undersøges Glandlen hos det
levende Dyr ved svag Forstørrelse, ses et større eller mindre Antal
tyndvæggede Smaablærer, fyldte med en klar, lidt tykflydende Væd-
ske; som Følge af det operative Indgreb er Organets Kar ofte
blodfyldte, hvad der i væsentlig Grad letter dets Eftersøgning.
Ved den mikroskopiske Undersøgelse faas et noget forskelligt
Billede for de' enkelte Dyrs Vedkommende. Fælles for alle er dog
en atrofisk Tilstand af Epithelet og Dilatation af Folliklerne. Hos
nogle Dyr viser Gl. thyreoidea det i Pl. IV, Fig. 6, gengivne Ud-
seende: Forstørrelse og delvis Sammensmeltning af Folliklerne, et
flydende Follikelindhold, der har ingen eller kun ringe Affinitet
over for Eosin, og som ved Fikseringen skrumper ret stærkt, samt
en fremskreden Atrofi af Epithelcellerne, der nærmest er hinde-
agtige og fremviser smaa tætte, diffust farvede Kærner. Hos andre
10?
148
Individer (Pl. IV, Fig. 5) er disse Forandringer næppe saa udtalte,
idet Epithelcellerne kun i nogle Follikler har antaget den hinde-
agtige Karakter, men iøvrigt viser sig dels kubiske, dels frem-
bydende alle Grader af Affladningsprocessen; Billedet er iøvrigt
meget variabelt, idet Epithelbeklædningen i den enkelte Follikel
kan fremvise store Forskelligheder og bestaa paa en Strækning af
kubiske Celler, paa en anden af mere eller mindre affladede eller
endog hindeagtige Celler; de sidste forefindes fortrinsvis paa den
Side af Folliklen, der støder op til andre Follikler eller ligger indad
mod Organets Centrum, hvad der tyder paa, at Trykforhold har
været medvirkende ved Tilstandens Udvikling; Billeder, der kan
tydes som Nydannelse af Follikler eller som Epithelproliferation,
ses kun undtagelsesvis. Nogen væsentlig Forskel paa Bygningen
hos yngre, voksne Dyr og hos gamle Individer (indtil en halv Snes
Aar) kunde ikke paavises; og da Forandringerne forefandtes hos
Dyr, der henhørte til 4 Stammer, der ikke kunde antages at staa
i nærmere indbyrdes Slægtskabsforhold (Dyr, der havde været i
Zoologisk Have i mange Aar; Dyr indkøbte forskellige Steder i
Tyskland), kan man betragte det som sikkert, at vi ikke har at
gøre med særlige ,,Degenerationsforholdf indenfor en enkelt Axo-
lotl-Stamme. el
Den saaledes forefundne Bygning af Gl. thyreoidea minder om
visse pathologiske Tilstande og ligeledes om senile Forandringer,
der kan forefindes i Organet hos Pattedyr, og da den optræder alle-
rede hos unge Dyr, er det paa Forhaand lidet sandsynligt, at den
kan betegnes som "normal". Da jeg ved Undersøgelse af Organet
hos voksne Ildsalamandre (Salamandra maculosa) fandt denne An-
skuelse bekræftet, idet Folliklerne var smaa, rundagtige og colloid-
fyldte samt beklædte med kubiske eller lavt cylinderformige Epithel-
celler, søgte jeg til Sammenligning at tilvejebringe Materiale af
Axolot'en mnærstaaende Amblystoma-Arter, der regelmæssig i en
bestemt Alder undergaar Metamorfosen.
Størst Interesse vilde en Sammenligning med Amblystoma tigri-
num frembyde, da A. mexicanum jo staar denne Art meget nær
og af mange blot betragtes som en særlig Varietet. Til min Raa-
dighed har staaet to Eksemplarer af Landformen, opbevarede i Al-
kohol; det ene Dyr maalte c. 15,0, det andet c. 17,5 cm, begge
149
var saaledes omtrent fuldvoksne.”) Gl. thyreoidea viste hos begge
Individer ganske overensstemmende Forhold (se Pl. V, Fig. 7), idet
Folliklerne med enkelte Undtagelser var smaa, rundagtige eller
ovale, colloidfyldte og beklædte med et ganske regelmæssigt kubisk
Epithel.”)
Af A. punctatum's Landform har jeg undersøgt 8 Individer. Det
mindste (halvvoksne) Dyr, der maalte 8 cm, frembød en Thyreoi-
dea, der (bortset fra Mangelen paa Hyperæmi og fra de ved den
mangelfulde Fiksering opstaaede Forskelligheder) nogenlunde stem-
mede overens med de hos A. tigrinum fundne Forhold (se Pl. V,
EisæS)EEDetEnæstmindste "Dyrthavdet en Længde af 145—cm;
dets Thyreoidea er gengivet i Fig. 11 og fremviser en Bygning —
udvidede, delvis sammensmeltede Follikler, fyldte med en eosino-
phil Colloidmasse og beklædte med smaa kubiske, hist og her noget
affladede Epithelceller — der stemmer overens med Dyrets større
Alder. To af Amblystomerne havde en Længde af 17 cm og maatte
altsaa betegnes som fuldvoksne; begge fremviste Forandringer i
den hyperæmiske Glandels Bygning, der utvivlsomt maa opfattes
som senile (se Fig. 12); Folliklerne er store, uregelmæssige, med
et vistnok flydende Indhold, der kun viser meget ringe Affinitet
til Eosin, og er beklædte med ganske flade Epithelceller; paafal-
dende er Epithelforandringens store Regelmæssighed overalt i Or-
sanet”” Hos de øvrige 4 Dyr, der havde en Længde af 15—15%5
cm, var Epithelet mindre affladet, og det mikroskopiske Billede
var en Mellemting mellem de i Fig. 11 og Fig. 12 gengivne.
Jeg skal tilføje, at jeg yderligere har undersøgt Gl. thyreoidea
hos et 8 cm langt (altsaa næppe fuldvoksent) Eksemplar af AÅ. opa-
cum og fundet et histologisk Billede, der ganske svarer til det hos
A. tigrinum (Fig. 7) forefundne, samt Organet hos 3 Individer af
7") Størrelsen af A. tigrinum angives til 14—21,5 cm, for Hunnens Ved-
kommende indtil 23 cm, maalt fra Næsespidsen til Enden af Halen. A.
punctatum skal naa en Længde af 17 cm, 4. opacum af 10 cm. Om
Længden af 4. microstomum har jeg ingen nærmere Angivelser; for-
mentlig opnaar denne Art næppe en betydeligere Størrelse end 15—
18Fcm:
”) Hos begge Dyr fandtes en overordentlig stærk Hyperæmi i Organet (se
Fig. 7); en saadan har jeg oftere fundet hos Urodeler, der er dræbte ved
at anbringes i Alkohol.
150
Arten A. (Chondrotus) microstomum, henholdsvis 10,5 cm, 11 cm
og 18 cm lange; hos de to første af disse frembød Organet lige-
ledes Overensstemmelse med Fig. 7 (smaa, rundagtige, colloid-
fyldte Follikler, beklædte med kubisk eller lavt cylindrisk Epithel),
medens det sidstnævnte, fuldvoksne Dyr viste nøje Overensstem-
melse med Fig. 12.
For saa vidt man kan drage Slutninger af dette noget spar-
somme Materiale, omfattende 8 Individer af 4. punctatum og 6
andre Amblystomer, synes Gl. thyreoidea med Dyrets fremad-
skridende Alder at undergaa en Forandring, der indledes med For-
størrelse og formentlig Sammensmeltning af Follikler, derefter en
fremadskridende Affladning (Atrofi) af Epithelet og en Ændring af
Colloidet. Hvor tidligt denne Ændring begynder, og hvor hurtigt
den forløber, er uvist. Saa vidt jeg har kunnet faa oplyst, vides
intet sikkert om Vækst- og Aldersforholdene hos 4. punctatum efter
Forvandlingen; da Salamandra maculosa ikke i 4-Aars-Alderen har
naaet sin fulde Størrelse, og da ogsaa Landformen af A. mexicanum
vokser langsomt, er det imidlertid sandsynligt, at. 4. punclatum,
der ved Forvandlingen sædvanlig har en Længde af 4—5 cm, er
adskillige Aar om at opnaa den fuldvoksne Tilstand (15—17 cm).
Der vides som nævnt heller intet bestemt om, hvor gamle Am-
blystomer kan blive; i Litteraturen foreligger dog Meddelelser om
Axolotl'er paa 12 Aar, og selv har jeg Dyr, der er mindst 11 Aar,
og som af disse har tilbragt 5 som Landdyr. Det er derfor sand-
synligt, at de undersøgte, fuldvoksne (17 cm lange) Eksemplarer
af A. punctatum har været ret gamle, og at de hos disse iagttagne
Forandringer i Gl. thyreoidea først er indtraadt i en ret høj Alder.
Sammenlignes de hos de største Eksemplarer af A. punctatum
forefundne Bygningsforhold med de hos Axolotl'en paaviste, vil
man finde en ikke ringe Lighed (sammenlign Fig. 6 og Fig. 12),
men der er den store Forskel, åt den fremadskridende atrofiske
Tilstand hos Axolotl'en paabegyndes tidligt og forløber paa en ret
uregelmæssig Maade (Fig. 5), særlig hvad Epithel-Atrofien angaar.
Da der saaledes hos de yngre, men dog voksne Axolotl'er fore-
findes en Afvigelse fra det hos de andre Amblystomer iagttagne
histologiske Thyreoidea-Billede, vil det have ikke ringe Interesse
nærmere at paavise Tidspunktet for denne Afvigelses Begyndelse.
151
Jeg har i den Anledning undersøgt Organet hos Axolotl'larver paa
alle Alderstrin.
Anlægget til Gl. thyreoidea og Organets Bygning hos ganske
unge Individer frembyder intet af særlig Interesse. Hos Larver paa
ceS5kemkEængdelerk Thyreoidealret veludviklet (se PI: IV Fig. 1);
det bestaar af en mindre eller større Samling Follikler, der sæd-
vanligvis ikke ligger tæt op ad hverandre, men derimod adskilte
ved Bindevæv; Epithelet er cylindrisk, Kærnerne store og runde,
Folliklernes Lysning er ringe med sparsomt Colloid, og der fore-
kommer kompakte Cellehobe.
Hos lidt ældre Individer (Længde 6—8 cm) findes Organet til-
taget i Størrelse, Folliklerne liggende nærmere hverandre, deres
Antal noget forøget, Størrelsen ligeledes; Epithelets Udseende er
variabelt, idet det hos nogle Dyr er cylinderformigt, om end lavt,
hos andre kubisk; Kærnen er stor, rund og kromatinrig; Follik-
lerne indeholder Colloid, der har ret ringe Affinitet til Eosin og
undertiden fremviser faa og smaa Vakuoler. I enkelte Follikler
ses Epithelcellerne, oftest kun paa Folliklens ene Side, noget
affladede; hos et enkelt 8,75 cm langt Dyr paavistes Sammen-
smeltning af to Follikler.
Hos Larver paa 9—10 cm Længde forholder Thyreoidea sig
omtrent paa samme Maade; den omtalte Affladning af Epithelet
er dog hyppigere og stærkere fremtrædende (PI. IV, Fig. 2).
Har Dyret naaet en Alder af ”/2—Z/4 Aar, en Længde af 12—-
15 cm, synes der regelmæssig at foregaa en Ændring i Organets
histologiske Forhold. Folliklerne bliver store og uregelmæssige;
Beklædningen er et højt, smalt, ofte næsten søjleformigt Cylinder-
epithel, pletvis et lavere, nærmest kubisk Epithel (se Pl. IV, Fig. 3);
enkelte Steder synes Epithelet lejret i flere Lag (?); Cellehobe
uden Lysning og ganske smaa Follikler ses hist og her. Man faar
Indtryk af, at Epithelet befinder sig i Proliferation. Folliklerne er
fyldte af en Colloidmasse, der kun i ringe Grad binder Eosin.
Hos andre Individer er Billedet et andet (Fig. 4), idet Epithelet
vel delvis er cylinderformet, men paa store Strækninger er stærkt
affladet med smaa, rundagtige eller langstrakte Kærner, der viser
tydeligt Kromatinnet, men formentlig dog maa opfattes som atrofiske.
Denne Affladningstilstand angaar fortrinsvis Epithelet paa den
152
ind mod Organets Midte vendende Del af de enkelte Follikler, og
Tanken ledes herved hen paa Trykvirkning, uden at der dog kan
paavises andet, der taler for denne Forklaring.
I Løbet af de følgende Maaneder ændres Billedet mere og
mere gennem Dilatation og delvis Sammensmeltning af Folliklerne
og ved Affladning af Epithelet, indtil der i ”/4—1Y4 Aars Alderen
regelmæssig forefindes Billeder, som det i Fig. 5 gengivne.
Det er saaledes ret utvivlsomt, at den omtalte Ændring i Gl.
thyreoidea's histologiske Forhold kan føres tilbage til "/>—%/4-Aars-
Alderen, paa hvilket Tidspunkt iøjnefaldende Ændringer i Epithelet
regelmæssigt synes at forekomme; ganske interessant er det, at
det er i denne Periode, at Muligheden for en spontan eller ved
Ændringer i Dyrets Levevis indledet Metamorfose er til Stede;
saa vidt jeg har kunnet overse den foreliggende Litteratur, er en
Metamorfose ikke iagttaget hos Axolotl'er paa senere Alderstrin,
naar undtages den ved Behandling med Thyreoidea-Præparater
fremtvungne Forvandling.
I denne Aldersperiode ændres ogsaa Dyrets Ydre i ikke ringe
Grad; Gællerne formindskes gerne stærkt, for saa vidt Dyret ikke
holdes paa dybt Vand, men mest ejendommelig er det plumpe Ud-
seende, der gradvis udvikler sig som Følge af Hudens Fortykkelse
og noprede Overflade, og som leder Tanken hen paa den hos Men-
nesket kendte Lidelse, Myxødemet, der skyldes en atrofisk Tilstand
i Gl. thyreoidea og en dermed i Forbindelse staaende Formind-
skelse af Organets Funktionsevne, og ved hvilken der foruden
andre sygelige Forandringer udvikler sig en ødemlignende Infiltra-
tion i Hud og Subcutis.
Medens der næppe kan være nogen Tvivl om, at den hos de
halvvoksne og ældre Axolotl'er forekommende Affladningstilstand
hos Epithelcellerne maa opfattes som en vedvarende og fremad-
skridende Atrofi, altsaa en sygelig Tilstand, er det uvist, om dette
ogsaa gælder for de i Organet hos smaa Larver i mindre Omfang
forekommende affladede Celler (se Pl. IV, Fig. 2), idet disses
Tilstand kunde skyldes forbigaaende Tryk- og Sekretionsforhold.
Ved Undersøgelse af Thyreoidea hos Larver af Salamandra macu-
losa i forskellige Alderstrin har jeg ikke forefundet saadanne af-
fladede Epithelceller, .medens jeg derimod har set lignende Bille-
der — om end kun lidet udtalte — hos fuldvoksne Larver af
1/53
Triton cristatus og Triton punctatus. En Undersøgelse af Forholdet
hos Larver af Amblystoma tigrinum vilde derfor have haft stor In-
teresse; det er imidlertid ikke lykkedes mig at komme i Besid-
delse af saadanne. Derimod har jeg undersøgt Thyreoidea hos 5
formol-alkohol-fikserede, 4,5 cm lange Larver af 4. punctatum ;
samtlige Dyr befandt sig, at dømme efter Størrelsen, Farvetegningen,
Gællernes Tilstand og den paabegyndte Forbening af Hovedets
Knogler, umiddelbart ved Metamorfosens Begyndelse. Hos dem
alle var Thyreoidea-Billedet det samme: Et forholdsvis ringe Antal,
smaa, ovale eller rundagtige, colloid-fyldte Follikler, beklædte med
kubiske Epithelceller; ganske enkelte Steder forefandtes dog af-
ladede Geller (PIAVÆRis SO 02 10):
Paa det foreliggende Grundlag er det saaledes næppe muligt
at afgøre, hvilken Betydning der bør tillægges den omtalte For-"
andring i Celleformen hos de mindre Larver.
Sammenlignes Thyreoideas Forhold hos Axolotl'en med de, der
forefindes hos andre Amblystomer, hos Salamandra og Triton, er
Organets tidligt indtrædende , Degeneration" iøjnefaldende; og det
kan efter hele vort Kendskab til Gl. thyreoidea næppe betvivles,
at denne ,,Degenerationstilstand" er ledsaget af Sekretionsændringer
og betinger en Nedsættelse af Organets Funktionsevne. Det ligger
da nær at betragte denne Hypothyreose som Aarsag til Axolotl'ens
neoteniske Tilstand, om det end ikke er paavist, paa hvilket Tids-
punkt den formodede formindskede Funktion indtræder.
Da den tidlige ,, Degenerationstilstand" er forefundet hos Dyr,
henhørende til forskellige Stammer, der ikke staar i nærmere ind-
byrdes Slægtskabsforhold, maa den antages at være en for Arten
ejendommelig arvelig Lidelse, og Axolotl'ens neoteniske Tilstand
vilkdamværekaftansenforten hereditærtEly pothyreose:
II. Glandula thyreoidea's Forhold ved forskellige Udviklings-
Uregelmæssigheder hos Frø- og Tudselarver.
Hos Bufo-Larver (B. vulgaris) sammensættes Thyreoidea af et
forholdsvis ringe Antal Follikler; hos Rana-Larver (R. arvalis og
esculenta) er Folliklernes Antal væsentlig større, ligesom Organet
i sim Helhed er betydeligere i Omfang. Epithelcellerne er hos
begge Slægter kubiske eller lavt cylinderformige.
154
Organets histologiske Forhold under Larvernes Vækst og under
Metamorfosen synes kun lidet undersøgt. Under Metamorfosen har
jeg hos Larver af Rana esculenta i et Antal Tilfælde forefundet
Vakuoledanneélse i Colloidet (se Pl. VII, Fig. 26); da jeg ogsaa har
iagttaget dette hos Larver af Rana arvalis, Bufo vulgaris, Sala-
mandra maculosa, Triton cristatus og Amblystoma punctatum under
Metamorfosens Forløb, men derimod ikke hos yngre Larver af
Rana, Bufo m. fl., synes Vakuolisering (forøget Sekretresorption ?)
at være noget for Forvandlingsperioden ejendommeligt.
Leo Adler har i en omfangsrig Forsøgsrække undersøgt Tem-
peraturens Indflydelse paa Udvik'ingen og Væksten af R. temporaria-
Larver samt paa disses Gl. thyreoidea og fundet interessante og
ejendommelige Forhold. Af Resultaterne skal jeg kort anføre de
vigtigste:
Anbragtes Larver vedvarende ved høj Temperatur (28—31,5 ”),
foregik Væksten langsomt, men da Metamorfosen indtraadte sent,
var de nyligt forvandlede Frøer noget større end Kontroldyrene ;
Thyreoidea anlagdes mindre end sædvanlig, og Organet holdt sig
vedvarende lille, men fremviste iøvrigt tilnærmelsesvis normal
Bygning.
Larver, der indtil de havde naaet en Længde af 22 mm, hold-
tes ved 8—10" og derefter ved 30,5—31,5?, viste ligeledes lang-
som Vækst og forsinket Metamorfose, men de forvandlede Frøer
var mindre end normalt og var undertiden lidet levedygtige Dværg-
former; Thyreoidea undergaar ved denne Behandling af Dyrene
en fremadskridende Atrofi, der kan medføre Organets fuldstændige
Ødelæggelse.
Hos Larver, der, indtil en Længde af 22 mm var naaet, hold-
tes ved høj Temperatur (30—31,57; i en enkelt Forsøgsrække først
ved 187, og derefter ved 31—32) og derefter anbragtes ved 8—109%,
iagttoges ligeledes langsom Vækst og forsinket Metamorfose; de
fremkomne unge Frøer var større end normalt, og i en Forsøgs-
række udeblev Metamorfosen ganske, medens Dyrene opnaaede
» Kæmpestørrelse" ; Thyreoidea holdt sig i den første Periode lille,
men ved Dyrenes Anbringelse i Kulde indtraadte Henflyden af
Colloidet, Proliferation af Epithelvævet og Forstørrelse af Organet,
hos nogle Dyr i et saadant Omfang, at Forf. med god Grund dra-
ger Sammenligning med Menneskets Struma Basedowii.
155
Meget interessant er endvidere Forfatterens Paavisning af, at
Larverne, der fremkom af Æg af Frøer, der i Parring var fangne
dels i en kold Region (Stubaier Alperne), dels i varmt Klima (Øst-
kysten af Adria), frembød Forskelligheder, idet de førstnævnte havde
forholdsvis store Skjoldbruskkirtler med mange, smaa Follikler,
medens de sidstnævnte havde smaa Glandler med færre og store
Follikler; Larver af Frøer, indfangede i Tyskland, stod i saa Hen-
seende midt imellem.
Gl. thyreoidea kan saaledes i meget høj Grad paavirkes ved
ekstreme Temperaturforhold, og der kan efter vort nuværende Kend-
skab ikke være Tvivl om, at de iagttagne Forstyrrelser med Hen-
syn til Larvernes Vækst og Metamorfose delvis har været Følger
af Thyreoideas abnorme Tilstand; paa den anden Side er der
ingen Grund til at udelukke den Mulighed, at den skadelige Tem-
peraturpaavirkning ogsaa kan have haft direkte Indvirkning paa
andre Organers og ogsaa derigennem paa hele Dyrets Udvikling.
Leo Adler's Undersøgelser viser endvidere, at der kan findes
Forskelligheder i Gl. thyreoidea's Størrelse og Struktur hos Dyr af
samme Årt, men hjemmehørende under forskellige klimatiske For-
hold; dette tyder atter paa, at ogsaa mindre Afvigelser i Tempera-
turforhold end de ovenfor omtalte ekstreme (og formentlig ogsaa
andre ydre Paavirkninger og Ernæringsforhold) kan udøve en Ind-
virkning paa dette Organs Udvikling, Bygning og Funktion og der-
igennem paa Dyrets Udvikling og Vækst; Dannelsen af stedlige
Varieteter finder muligvis derigennem delvis sin Forklaring.
Saa vidt jeg ved, foreligger der ingen Meddelelser om Gl. thy-
reoidea's Forhold hos saadanne Frø- og Tudselarver, der under
naturlige Forhold frembyder Uregelmæssigheder med. Hensyn til
Metamorfosens Indtræden og Forløb. I det følgende skal kort frem-
føres Resultatet af de Undersøgelser, jeg har haft Lejlighed til at
foretage.
Frø- og Tudselarver, henhørende til samme Kuld og levende
under samme Forhold, frembyder som bekendt som Regel stor
Overensstemmelse med Hensyn til Vækst og Forvandlingens Ind-
træden. Gl. thyreoidea fremviser hos saadanne Larver ogsaa stor
Overensstemmelse med Hensyn til Organets Størrelse, Folliklernes
Størrelse og Antal, Epithelets Udseende og Colloidets Beskaffen-
hed. Sammenlignes derimod Larver af samme Størrelse og Udvik-
156
lingsgrad, men henhørende til forskellige Kuld og ikke opfødte .
under ganske samme Forhold, kan man iagttage ikke-uvæsentlige
Forskelligheder. Dette Forhold bør tages i Betragtning ved Be-
dømmelsen af de efterfølgende Fund, og jeg har derfor altid sikret
mig ,Kontroldyr" (d. e. Dyr henhørende til samme Kuld som de
afvigende Individer og opfødte under samme Forhold som disse
og sammen med disse), til Dels i større Omfang, til Sammen-
ligning.
A. Usædvanlig tidligt indtrædende Metamorfose.
Ved Bedømmelsen af de førefundne Afvigelser i Thyreoideas
Forhold bør det erindres, at Sammenligningen mellem de ,,abnormt"
tidligt udviklede Individers Glandel med Kontroldyrenes egentlig
burde være foretagen paa det Tidspunkt, da den ,,abnorme" Ud-
vikling begyndte, altsaa c. 14 Dage før den — af nærliggende
Grunde — kunde finde Sted; det er derfor ikke udelukket, at
Forskellighederne paa et tidligere Tidspunkt har været større, end
de forefandtes ved Mikroskopien.
a. Larver af Bufo vulgaris. I en forøvrigt ensartet , Kultur"
paa mange Hundrede Haletudser fandtes 3 Individer, der paa et
Tidspunkt, hvor de andre kun havde ganske smaa Baglemmer,
var i Besiddelse af veludviklede For- og Baglemmer og af en
Kropform, der tydede paa nær forestaaende Metamorfose (se Fig. A).
Kontroldyrene frembød med
Hensyn til Thyreoideas histo-
8 logiske Forhold stor Overens-
, ; stemmelse, og dette var lige-
É : ledes Tilfældet med de 3 ,for
tidligt" udviklede Individer
: indbyrdes. Paa Pl. VI, Fig. 14,
er gengivet Typen paa Kon-
troldyrenes Thyreoidea og i
h Fig TSTOrsanetknosedeRstan
tidligt" udviklede. Som det
'Å vil ses, er Kontroldyrenes Thy-
Fig. A. Larver af Bufo vulgaris. Naturlig ;
Størrelse. Øverste Række Prøve af Kontrol- reoidea stor, men som oven-
dyrene; i nederste Række de tre abnormt for nævnt maa det her tages
tidligt udviklede Individer. De tilsvarende s .
Thyreoidea-Præparater: Pl. VI, Fig. 14 og 13. ; Betragtning, at Glandlens
LS
Vækst hos disse Dyr er fortsat, medens den hos de andre Dyr i
det væsentlige er standset ved Metamorfosens Begyndelse. Frem-
trædende er hos de tidligt udviklede Individer Colloidets stærke
Affinitet til Eosin og Folliklernes fuldstændige Fyldning.
b; Larver af Bufo vulgaris. I et andet Kuld Larver, omtrent
af samme Størrelse som ovennævnte, optraadte i Juni en enkelt
Larve med 4 veludviklede Lemmer paa et Tidspunkt, hvor de
andre Larver endnu ikke fremviste synlige Baglemmer. Hos disse
Kontroldyr var Gl. thyreoidea gennemgaaende meget lille (se Pl.
VI, Fig. 16), medens den hos det tidligt udviklede Dyr var meget
stor og sammensat af store Follikler med kubisk og lavt cylinder-
formigt Epithel og med Indhold af vakuoliseret Colloid (Fig. 15).
c. Larver af Rana arvalis. I et større Kuld Larver fandtes
et mindre Antal Larver, der viste en væsentlig hurtigere Udvik-
ling end de andre. Størrelsen og Udviklingsgraden, henholdsvis af
Kontroldyrene og de tidligt udviklede Individer, som den var d. 9.
Juni, er gengivet i Fig. B's øverste Række, medens nederste Række
anskueliggør Forskellen i Udviklingen en Uge senere. Ogsaa i
dette Tilfælde frembød Thyreoidea hos Kontroøldyrene indbyrdes
Overensstemmelse, og PI.
VI, Fig. 18 gengiver Typen
af Organet, som den d. 16.
Juni fandtes hos disse (alt-
saa hos Larver med om-
trent halvt udviklede Bag-
lemmer, men uden Forlem-
men)ERS Kalder tidligt ud-
viklede Larver (altsaa Lar-
ver med fire veludviklede
Lemmer og med den for
den begyndende Metamor-
fose ejendommelige Krop-
form) dræbtes og fikseredes
d. 16. Juni, og alle viste
en paafaldende stor Thy-
reoidea med store Follik- EEN re vaks ef oa SEE
ler, med sparsom og vaku- Øverste Række fot. %6. Nederste Række fot. 1/6;
; ; ; . Kontroldyr og tidligt udviklede Dyr. — De tilsva-
oliseret Colloid ( Fig. 17 ): rende Thyreoidea-Præparater: Pl. VI, Fig.18 0g17.
158
Undersøgelsen af de 3 Rækker har altsaa ikke givet ensartede
Resultater, idet der hos Dyrene i de 2 Rækker forefandtes en paa-
faldende Størrelse af Thyreoidea og Vakuolisering (Resorption?) af
Colloidet, medens Organet hos de 3 til den ene Række hørende
Larver var ret lille, men fremviste en rigeiig Colloidmasse med usæd-
vanlig stærk Affinitet til Eosin. Det kan derfor ikke udelukkes,
at der i alle Tilfælde har foreligget en forøget Funktion af Thy-
reoidea.
B. Overvintring i Larvestadiet.
Som bekendt er det ikke sjældent, at visse Paddelarver i Ste-
det for at fuldende deres Udvikling paa een Sommer, overvintrer
som Larver (eller gaar til Grunde om Vinteren). Dette Forhold er
særlig kendt for Alytes-, Pelobates- og Rana esculenta-Larvers Ved-
kommende. Rana ridibunda har flere Gange ynglet i Serumlabo-
ratoriets Frøbassin; Larverne har aldrig i Løbet af Sommeren
naaet fuld Udvikling, men
har i Oktober kun haft
Baglemmer; i Akvarier
henstaaende ved lav Stue-
temperatur har saadanne
Earver dels Vinterens
Løb fuldført deres For-
vandling, dels er de for-
blevne uforandrede indtil
Foraaret. Dette sidste har
ogsaa været Tilfældet med
adskillige Larver af R. es-
culenta, som jeg i Okto-
ber har indsat i Akvarier.
I Efteraaret 1919 an-
bragtes 3 Esculenta-Lar-
ver med veludviklede Bag-
a. b. c lemmer, men uden For-
Fig. C. Larver af Rana esculenta. Naturlig Stør- lemmer (Fig. CED)RREer
DElSe: u. SANS KA TUSE NADVER fot. April 1920. b. stort med Planter forsy-
Larve fanget samtidig med a; fot. Okt. 1919. el
Larve i fremadskridende Metamorfose. Tilsva- net Akvarium ; de fodre-
rende Thyreoidea-Præparater: Pl. VI—VI(. Fig. 19,
2025:
des af og til med animalsk
159
Føde og havde rigelig Planteføde; Temperaturen var sædvanlig
6—10? C.. De overvintrede uden at skifte Udseende (Fig. C., a).
I April 1920 dræbtes de til Undersøgelse og Sammenligning med
Larver af samme Oprindelse, Alder og Udviklingstrin, dræbte i
Oktober 1919.
Hos 2 af disse sidstnævnte Kontroldyr forefandtes Thyreoidea
aftdet i PlLVI Fig: 20;"øengivne" Udseende, der ganske svarer til
det Billede, som jeg har fundet hos andre Esculenta-Larver paa
samme Udviklingstrin (se f. Eks. Pl. VII, Fig. 24); de talrige Fol-
likler er opfyldt af en Colloidmasse med ret ringe Affinitet til
Eosin, og Epithelet er mere eller mindre lavt. Hos samtlige de tre
overvintrede Larver forefandtes en iøjnefaldende Ændring i Kirte-
lens Udseende (Fig. 19), idet Folliklerne var stærkt forstørrede og
udspilede af Colloid (Retention?).
C. Abnorm Størrelse (Kæmpevækst) hos Frølarver.
I Litteraturen findes spredte Meddelelser om Forekomsten af
Larver af en for Arten abnorm og undertiden ganske kæmpemæs-
sig Størrelse. Hyppigst synes denne Udviklingsanomali at fore-
komme hos Larver af Pelobates og af Rana esculenta, men den er
ogsaa forefundet hos andre Larver (Bufo viridis, Rana platyrrhinus)y;
den er iagttaget saavel hos Larver, der er opfødte i Akvarier,
som hos Larver, der har levet under naturlige Forhold.
En nøjere anatomisk Undersøgelse af saadanne Larver (R. es-
culenta, opklækkede i Akvarier) er foretaget af A. Hahn, der
foruden Degenerationstilstande i Nyrer og andre Organer forefandt
abnorm tidlig Udvikling af Ovarierne og Hypertrofi af Hypøfysen;
GI. thyreoidea's Forhold omtales ikke.
Eksperimentelt har man været i Stand til hos Haletudser at
hindre Metamorfosens Indtræden og samtidig fremkalde Kæmpe-
vækst. Leo Adler naaede dette ved at fjerne Anlægget til Hy-
pofysen hos smaa Frølarver; de faa Dyr, der overlevede Opera-
tionen, naaede en betydelig Størrelse- uden i Løbet af 8 Maaneder
at vise Tegn til Metamorfosens Paabegyndelse; Kønskirtelanlæg-
gene var rudimentære, Thyreoidea enormt atrofieret. Samme For-
fatter iagttog endvidere som tidligere nævnt abnorm Størrelse hos
Frølarver, der først havde været holdt i Varme (31—32" C) og
160
derefter i Kulde (8—10? C); hos disse Larver, der opnaaede en
betydeligere Størrelse end Kontroldyrene, og som døde uden at
paabegynde Forvandlingen, forefandtes Thyreoidea stærkt forstørret
med talrige og delvis prolifererende Follikler, saaledes at Forfat-
teren med god Grund fremhæver Ligheden med Menneskets Struma;
de øvrige Organers Beskaffenhed omtales ikke. E. R. Hoskins
og M. M. Hoskins har endelig ved at fjerne Thyreoidea-Anlægget
hos ganske smaa Frølarver frembragt Kæmpelarver, hos hvilke
Metamorfosen udeblev; der fandtes hos Larverne Forstyrrelser i
Skelettets og en Række Organers Udvikling; størst Interesse frem-
byder det Forhold, at Hypofysen var hypertrofieret og Kønskirt-
lerne abnormt tidligt udviklede, Testes endog fuldt funktionsdyg-
tige. Lignende Resultater opnaaede B. M. Allen.
Nogen fyldestgørende Forklaring paa den under naturlige For-
hold nu øg.da optrædende Kæmpevækst hos Frølarver giver de
nævnte eksperimentelle Undersøgelser ikke, men de viser, hvilken
Indflydelse Gl. thyreoidea's Funktion har paa Larvens Udvikling,
derunder ogsaa en Række Organers Vækst- og Udviklingsforhold,
og de (saavel som andre foreliggende Undersøgelser) godtgør end-
videre Tilstedeværelsen af en .nøje Vekselvirkning mellem Gl. thy-
reoidea og andre endokrine Kirtler (Hypofysen, Thymus og Køns-
kirtlerne). Man tager derfor næppe Fejl, naar man bringer Kæmpe-
væksten hos Larverne i Forbindelse med Abnormiteter vedrørende
et eller flere af disse Organer; meget muligt er det, at ikke alle
Tilfælde af denne Anomali har samme Genese.
Ved Dr. Wesenberg-Lund's Velvilje er jeg bleven i Stand
til at undersøge nogle meget store Larver af Rana esculenta, om
hvilke han har meddelt mig følgende Oplysninger: I August 1908
bemærkedes i en Dam i Nordsjælland et stort Antal Esculenta-
Larver af meget forskellig Størrelse, en Del var ikke over 30 mm,
det største Antal 70—80 mm, ikke faa over 100 mm; Maksimal-
størrelsen var 115 mm. Ingen af Larverne havde Forlemmer, og
hos ingen var Baglemmerne over 3 mm. Dr. Wesenberg-Lund
besøgte Dammen regelmæssig indtil Midten af Oktober, da Lar-
verne var søgt ud i Dammens Midte; en Del af disse fandtes ved
denne Tid uforvandlede, hos andre, baade smaa og store, var For-
vandlingen mere eller mindre fremskreden; de unge Frøers Stør-
relse varierede fra 25—40 mm.
161
Dr. Wesenberg-Lund har yderligere meddelt mig, at Escu-
lenta-Larver her hjemme som Regel ikke bliver over 60—70 mm
lange, og at de ganske unge Frøers Størrelse kan anslaas til 25
—30 mm. Angivelserne fra andre Lande er noget forskellige;
Bruno Dirigen angiver for veludviklede Larvers Vedkommende
en Længde af mindst 48—50 mm, men anfører, at de ofte naar
en Størrelse af 70—80 mm.
Af det ovennævnte af Dr. Wesenberg-Lund i Oktober 1908
indsamlede Materiale har jeg undersøgt Gl. thyreoidea hos 3 meget
store Individer, der i naturlig Størrelse er gengivet i Fig. D. Som
det vil ses, har den ene Larve (a), der maaler 100 mm"), vel ud-
viklede Baglemmer, men endnu ingen Forlemmer og har i et og
alt bibeholdt Haletudsens Udseende. Hos den anden (b), der har
en Længde af 93 mm, findes ogsaa Forlemmerne vel udviklede,
men Halen er endnu ikke formindsket; hos det tredje Dyr (c) er
Forvandlingen i fuld Udvikling, Halen i Færd med at resorberes.
Endvidere har jeg undersøgt nogle Larver, dels med 2, dels med
4 Lemmer, men af normal Størrelse (50—70 mm), nogle af disse
fangede samtidig med de store og i samme. Dam.
Saavel de nævnte 3 som flere andre af de store Larver frem-
viste paa Røntgen-Fotografier en mindre fremskreden Forbenings-
proces end den, de normale Larver af tilsvarende Udviklingstrin
frembød.
Hos samtlige store Larver forefandtes en betydelig Forstørrelse
af Gl. thyreoidea, væsentligst fremkaldt ved en Proliferation, der
havde medført en stærk Forøgelse af Folliklernes Antal; for alle
tre Dyrs Vedkommende mindede Billedet ganske om det fra Men-
neskets og Husdyrenes Struma velkendte. Iøvrigt fandtes der — i
Overensstemmelse med Dyrenes noget forskellige Udviklingstrin —
nogle Forskelligheder i Thyreoideas histologiske Udseende hos de
tre Individer.
Hos den tobenede Larve (a) sammensættes Organet (Pl. VII,
Fig. 21) af talrige Follikler af meget forskellig Størrelse; der findes
hist og her kompakte Cellehobe og meget smaa Follikler; der ses
større Hulrum, som utvivlsomt delvis skyldes Sammensmeltning af
flere sammenstødende Follikler; Afsnøring af nye Follikler iagt-
1) Maalene er tagne paa de i Formol opbevarede og noget skrumpede Dyr.
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 72. 11
162
tages ikke faa Steder, papillær Proliferation ind i Follikler er der-
imod ikke med Sikkerhed paavist; Epithelet er lavt cylinderformigt;
Folliklernes Indhold har formentligt været flydende, kun i enkelte
kan et colloidlignende Indhold eftervises.
a. i b.
Fig. D. Rana esculenta. Kæmpelarver. Naturlig Størrelse. — De tilsvarende
Thyreoidea-Præparater : Pl. VII, Fig. 21—23.
Et noget lignende Billede (Fig. 22) frembyder Thyreoidea af
den firbenede Larve (b); de talrige Follikler er gennemgaaende
store og uregelmæssige, dog ses ogsaa mindre og ganske smaa
Follikler; Folliklernes Indhold har formentlig. for største Delen
været flydende; Epithelet er nærmest kubisk; imellem Folliklerne
forekommer interstitielle Cellehobe.
Hos det tredje Individ (c), der befinder sig i Metamorfosens
163
Slutstadium, og som uden Hale maaler c. 40 mm, sammensættes
Thyreoidea (Fig. 23) ligeledes af talrige større (til Dels meget store)
og mindre Follikler, mellem hvilke er indlejret talrige interstitielle
Cellehobe; Epithelet er i de store Follikler stærkt affladet, i de
smaa nærmest kubisk; i Folliklerne findes — i Modsætning til,
hvad der er Tilfældet hos Larverne a. og b. — Colloid med nor-
mal Affinitet til Eosin, og i Overensstemmelse med, at Dyret be-
finder sig i Metamorfosen, findes Colloidet stærkt vakuoliseret.
Thyreoideas stærkt afvigende Forhold hos disse tre Dyr ses
bedst, naar de paagældende Mikrofotografier sammenlignes med
Fig. 25 og 26, der ved samme Forstørrelse gengiver Thyreoideas
Udseende henholdsvis hos en Larve af normal Størrelse med For-
og Baglemmer (se Fig. C. c.), i Udvikling ganske svarende til
Kæmpelarve D. b, og hos en ligeledes normal Larve, der befinder
sig i samme Metamorfosestadium som Kæmpedyret D. c.; de to
Dyr af normal Størrelse, hvis Thyreoideae er afbildede i Fig. 25 og
26, er fangne paa samme Aarstid som Kæmpelarverne.
Om Aarsagen til denne hos flere Larver fra samme Lokalitet
optrædende strumøse Udvikling af Gl. thyreoidea kan intet bestemt
formodes. Ad eksperimentel Vej er lignende Abnormiteter frem-
kaldt af Leo Adler; han lod (som tidligere nævnt) Æg af Rana
temporaria udvikle sig ved 18'C, og da Larverne havde naaet en
Længde af 12 mm, ændrede han Vandets Temperatur til 31—32",
ved hvilken Temperatur Dyrene forblev, til de gennemsnitlig havde
naaet en Længde af 22 mm, hvorefter de i 2 Dage vænnedes til
8—10?: de anstillede Forsøgsrækker gav ikke ganske samme Re-
sultat: i den ene Række voksede Larverne langsomt, men stærkt,
saaledes at Forfatteren (dog næppe helt med Rette) betegner dem
som ,Riesenlarven" ; først paa et sent Tidspunkt fremkom hos disse
Larver ganske rudimentære Baglemmer og indtraadte en langsom
Reduktion af Halen; hos samtlige Larver, der døde uden at fuld-
ende Forvandlingen, forefandtes en strumalignende Forstørrelse af
Thyreoidea, og de af Forf. offentliggjorte Mikrofotografier frembyder
stor Lighed med mine Fig.,21—23.
Samme Forfatter har hos Temporaria-Larver, fremkomne af
»overmodne" (Rich. Hertwig) Æg, forefundet en lignende, stru-
møs Forstørrelse af Thyreoidea; nogle af de paagældende Larver
var langt større end Kontroldyrene, men fuldstændigt normalt byg-
11"
164
"gede, andre — fremkomne af Æg, der i noget længere Tid havde
været udsatte for Virkningen af uterin ,Ueberreifungf — var for-
krøblede og fremviste efter Metamorfosen betydelige Misdannelser,
særlig af Baglemmerne.
En endemisk Optræden af Skjoldbruskkirtelhyperplasier fore-
kommer som bekendt i visse Egne saavel hos Mennesker som hos
Husdyr, uden at Aarsagsforholdene er nærmere opklarede; og fra
Nordamerika er kendt en enzootisk Strumalidelse i Ørred-Opdræt-
ningsanstalter, ligeledes uden at nogen bestemt Aarsag hidtil med
Sikkerhed er eftervist.
Om Aarsagen til den hos talrige Larver fra den paagældende
Lokalitet optraadte abnorme Vækst kan heller intet bestemt udtales.
Det er næppe sandsynligt, at denne kan betragtes som en direkte
Følge af den strumalignende Proliferation af Gl. thyreoidea, dels
fordi Abnormiteter i dette Organ hos de varmblodige Hvirveldyr
ikke kendes som direkte Aarsag til lokal eller universel Kæmpe-
vækst, og dels fordi Kæmpevækst hos Frø- og Tudselarver som
tidligere nævnt er konstateret ikke blot i Forbindelse med struma-
lignende Forstørrelse af Skjoldbruskkirtelen, men ogsaa hos Larver,
hos hvilke Organet paa et meget tidligt Tidspunkt var blevet eks-
stirperet, øg hos saadanne, hvor det efter foretagen Hypofyse-
Eksstirpation var undergaaet en meget betydelig Atrofi.
Det er rimeligere at antage, at Thyreoidea-Lidelsen er en Følge
af Paavirkninger, der samtidig har paavirket andre Organer — og
da særlig de endokrine — eller da de fleste af disse Organer
utvivlsomt med Hensyn. til deres Udvikling og Funktion staar i
meget nøje Afhængighedsforhold til hverandre, at Thyreoidea-Lidel-
sen sekundært har medført Abnormiteter i andre Organer og der-
igennem har udløst den abnorme Vækst. Opmærksomheden maa
da nærmest rettes mod Hypofysen, der som bekendt tillægges en
vækstregulerende Funktion. Som allerede nævnt fandt Hahn hos
sine Kæmpelarver Forstørrelse af dette Organ, og ved de af Allen
og af E. R. & M. M. Hoskins foretagne Thyreoidea-Eksstirpationer
hos Frølarver fremkom regelmæssig Forstørrelse af Hypofysen og
abnorm stærk Vækst af hele Dyret. Paa den anden Side fik Leo
Adler ved Eksstirpation af Hypofyse-Anlægget ligeledes abnorm
forøget Vækst (og samtidig Atrofi af Gl. thyreoidea).
Afgørelsen af, om der foreligger en Forstørrelse af Hypofysen
165
er ikke let, dels fordi Organets Størrelse og Form er noget vari-
abel, dels fordi man hos de større Individer tør vente at firide en
større Hypofyse, uden at denne kan gøres ansvarlig for Dyrets ab-
norme Vækst. Undersøgelsen af Hypofysen hos det i Fig. D. c.
afbildede Dyr viste en utvivlsom Forstørrelse, idet Organet maalt
forfra bagtil, i formolhærdet Tilstand, maalte c. 0,88 mm og fra
Side til anden 1,532 mm; hos en anden lidt mindre, firbenet Larve
i Metamorfose (Længde uden Halen 30 mm), var Maalene hen-
holdsvis 1,16 og 1,26 mm, medens de hos en velvoksen, men nor-
mal Larve (Længde med Halen 80 mm) kun var 0,63 og 0,97 mm.
En Undersøgelse af Hypofysen hos flere af de store Larver
har jeg ikke foretaget, væsentligst for at bevare Materialet til even-
tuelt senere Brug. Af samme Grund har jeg ikke udstrakt Under-
søgelserne i større Omfang til de andre endokrine Kirtler; jeg
skal dog bemærke, at Kønskirtlerne hos disse Larver ikke synes
at være paafaldende stærkt og tidligt udviklede.
Litteratur.
1. Leo Adler: Archiv fir Entwicklungsmechanik. Bd. 39. 1914. — Ber-
liner klinische Wochenschrift. 1914.
2. = Untersuchungen iber die Entstehung der Amphibienneotenie.
Frankfurt a. M. 1916.
3: — Archiv f. Entwicklungsmechanik. 43. Bd. 1917.
4. Bennet M. Allen: The Journal of Experimental Zoology. Vol. 24.
1918.
5. J.F. Gudernatsch: Archiv f. Entwicklungsmechanik. 35. Bd. 1912. —
The American Journal of Anatomy. Vol. 15. 1914.
A. Hahn: Archiv f. mikroskopische Anatomie. 80. Bd. 1912.
E.R. Hoskins a. M.M. Hoskins: The Journal of Experimental Zoo-
logy. Vol. 29. 1919.
8. C.O.Jensen: Oversigt over Det kgl. danske Videnskabernes Selskabs
Forhandlinger. 1916.
9. Laufberger: Biologické Listy. 1913.
So
166
Forklaring til Pl. IV—VII.
Samtlige Fig. gengiver Udseendet af Gl. thyreoidea ved c. 58 Ganges For-
størrelse.
Fig. 5, 6, 7, 11 og 12 efter Præparater fra eksstirperede Organer; de øvrige
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig. viser Organet in situ. Samtlige Præparater farvede med Hansen's
Jærntrioxyhæmatein og Eosin. Mikrofotografierne er optagne af Labora-
rator M. Christiansen
Axolotl, 5 cm. Folliklerne adskilte ved Bindevæv; smaa; beklædte
med cylinderformigt Epithel; sparsomt Colloid.
Axolotl, 9—10 cm. De colloidfyldte Follikler beklædte med et ku-
bisk, paa flere Steder med et affladet Epithel.
Axolotl, 13 cm. Organet i stærk Udvikling. Folliklerne store, col-
loidfyldte; Epithelet cylinderformigt, i livlig Proliferation.
Axolotl, 13—14 cm. Som Fig. 3. Den i Teksten omtalte Affladning
af Epithelet paa de mod hinanden vendende Follikelvægge er stærkt
fremtrædende.
Axolotl, c. 20 cm, 3 Aar gl. Det ret store Organ er sammensat af
store, delvis sammensmeltede Follikler, fyldt af en flydende Colloid-
masse med ringe Affinitet til Eosin. Epithelcellerne lave, paa mange
Steder ganske hindeagtige med smaa, tætte, lange Kærner.
Axolotl, c. 20 cm, 3 Aar gl. Det meget lille Organ er sammensat
af faa, store, med flydende Colloidmasse opfyldte Follikler. Epithelet
hindeagtigt.
Amblystoma tigrinum; 15 cm. Gl.thyreoidea sammensat af rundagtige
og ovale Follikler, beklædte med et regelmæssigt kubisk Epithel og
opfyldte med Colloid (noget skrumpet paa Grund af Dyrets Opbe-
varing i Alkohol), der farves stærkt af Eosin. Organets Smaakar
meget stærkt blodfyldte.
Amblystoma punctatum; 8 cm. Gl. thyreoidea sammensat af min-
dre, rundagtige og uregelmæssige, colloidfyldte Follikler, beklædte
med kubiske Epithelceller.
9 og 10. Amblystoma punctatum: 4,5 cm. Fig. gengiver den ganske
enkelte Steder i. Præparaterne forefundne affladede Tilstand af Fol-
liklernes Epithelceller.
Amblystoma punctatum; 14,2 cm. De colloidfyldte, store og uregel-
mæssige Follikler er delvis fremkomne ved Sammensmeltning af
flere Follikler. Colloidet farves ret svagt af Eosin. Epithelcellerne
relativt smaa, dels kubiske, dels lave.
12. Amblystoma punctatum; 17 cm. Gl. thyreoidea blodfyldt. Folliklerne
store, delvis sammensmeltede; Indholdet optager kun i ringe Grad
Eosin og har formentlig været halvflydende. Epithelbeklædningen
sammensættes af lave, til Dels. hindeagtige Celler, med lange, tætte
Kærner.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig:
167
13—14. Bufo vulgaris. (Se Fig. A'Y. Fig. 13: Gl. thyr. som den fandtes
hos Haletudser, der viste abnorm tidlig Udvikling; Folliklerne gan-
ske opfyldt af Colloid, der farves mørkerødt af Eosin. Fig, 14: Or-
ganet som det fandtes hos de langt større Kontroldyr; Folliklerne
store, Epithelet kubisk; Colloidet mindre rigeligt, dets Bindingsevne
over for Eosin mindre stærk.
15—16. Bufo vulgaris. Fig. 15: Gl. thyr. af en meget tidligt udviklet
Haletudse (4 Lemmer); Folliklerne meget store, Colloidet mindre
rigeligt, delvis vakuoliseret Fig. 16 viser Organets ringe Størrelse
hos de tilsvarende Kontroldyr (uden Lemmer).
17—18. Rana arvalis. (Se Fig. B). Gl. thyreoidea”s Udseende henholds-
vis hos de tidligt udviklede Individer og hos Kontroldyrene.
[9208 Rand esenlentan (Se Fig" Cab). Fig: 19: Udseendet af Gl.
thyr. høs 3 Haletudser med Baglemmer, efter Overvintring; Follik-
lerne meget store, udspilede af Colloid (Retention ?/; Epithelet lavt.
Fig. 20: Organets Udseende hos Kontroldyrene om Efteraaret (før
Overvintringen).
21-—23. Rana esculenta. Kæmpelarver. (Se Fig. D. a—c). Organet meget
stort, af strumøs Bygning. Hos den 2- og den 4-benede Larve fin-
des næsten intet Colloid (flydende Indhold ?) i Folliklerne; hos det
tredje Dyr, der befinder sig i Metamorfosen, er Folliklerne opfyldt
af vakuoliseret Colloid (Resorption?), med ringe Bindingsevne over
for Eosin.
24. Rana esculenta. Det sædvanlige Billede af Gl. thyr. hos Haletudser
med veludviklede Baglemmer, i September-Oktober.
25. Rana esculenta. Gl. thyr. af normal 4-benet Larve, der befinder sig
nøjagtig paa samme Udviklingstrin som Kæmpelarven Fig. D. b., hvis
Gl. thvr. er gengivet i Fig. 22.
26. Rana esculenta. Gl. thyr. af normal Haletudse, der befinder sig paa
samme Metamorfosetrin som Kæmpedyret Fig. D. c, hvis Gl. thyr.
er afbildet i Fig. 23. — Colloidet stærkt vakuoliseret (Resorption ?).
The Relation of the Thyroid to Irregularities concern-
k
ing the Metamorphosis in Amphibia.
SUMMARY.
The Condition of the Thyroid in the Axolotl (Amblystoma mexicanum).
The neotenic condition of the axolotl (larva of Amblystoma mex-
icanum) which can be interrupted at any age by feeding with or
injection of thyroid substances, presumably can be traced back to
168
structural changes of the thyroid, setting in at an early period and
being followed by extenuated or abolished function. Consequently
the neotenic condition has to be interpreted as a hypothyreosis.
The earliest stages of development of the organ offer no spec-
ial interest. Individuals measuring 5 cm in lenght show cylindric
epithelium and scarce colloid matter (pl. IV, fig. 1); whereas those
measuring 9—10 cm have follicles distended by colloid matter and
low cubic epithelium often extensively flattened (fig. 2). As a similar
flattening of the cells in spots also — though to a small extent —
may be seen in larvæ of other urodela, in possession of a nor-
mal metamorphosis (Amiblystoma punctatum (fig. 9 & 10), Triton
punctatus, T. cristatus), it may admit of doubt whether this pheno-
menon has to be interpreted as anything else than the result of a
possibly transient pressure. In axolotis aged about ”/2—/, year
— the véry age at which metamorphosis in rare cases sets in
spontaneously and at which v. Chauvin's metamorphosis experi-
ment sometimes may be successful — important changes of the
thyroid take place. The organ will be found somewhat varying
in size. The follicles are rather large and the epithelium being
as a rule tall and cylindric (fig. 3) is subjected to proliferation.
The epithelium rather regularly to a smaller or greater extent is
flattened even to a very high degree (fig. 4), this being especially
the case in the adjoining parts of neighbouring follicles. This flat-
tening process, displaying the character of an atrophy, develops
further with the result that histological features, as given in fig. 5
or 6, are regularly met with in animals aged ”/4—1 year or still
older. In the case of fig. 6 the epithelial layer was but membran-
aceous. Coincident with this progressive epithelial atrophy are
dilatation and partial coalescense of follicles, together with a quali-
tative change of the colloid matter which will become liquid and
less eosinophilic. The above facts concerning the structure of the
thyroid have been demonstrable in specimens originating in four
different strains of axolotls, and so they must be looked upon as
features characteristic of the species.
In larvæ of Amblystoma punctatum approaching the juncture,
fit for the setting in of the metamorphosis (4,5 cm in length), the
thyroid is found to be rather small, composed of a restricted num-
ber of roundish follicles equipped with cubic epithelium and con-
169
taining ample colloid matter (fig. 10). In specimens measuring 8 cm
in length (terrestrial form!) the organ is made up of a consider-
able number of roundish follicles with cubic epithelium and rich,
highly eosinophilic colloid matter (fig. 8). In older individuals of
about 14 cm the follicles are enlarged and partially amalgamated,
the epithelium being lower (fig. 11). Finally in adult animals, aged
several years (17 cm), the large, irregular follicles with highly flat-
tened epithelial cells are filled with a semifluid colloid matter but
slightly receptive of eosin staining (fig. 12).
In some not quite full-grown specimens of Amblystoma tigrinum
(fig. 7), opacum and microstomum conditions have been established
wholly corresponding to those found in Amblystoma punctatum.
The regressive changes of the thyreid in Amblystoma puncta-
tum (and other Amblystoma species) are setting in late so pre-
senting the character of senile changes, whereas in Amblystoma mex-
icanum they initiate at an early age developing in irregular ways.
II. — The Condition of the Thyroid in cases of Irregular Metamor-
phosis in Bufo and Rana.
In Bufo larvæ (pl. VI, fig. 13—16) the thyroid is composed of
a small number of follicles, whereas in Rana larvæ (R. arrvalis (fig.
17—18) and esculenta (pl. VI, fig. 19—20; pl. VII, fig. 21—26))
the organ is larger and the number of follicles greater. The epi-
thelium is cubic or low cylindriform. During the metamorphosis
vacuolation of the colloid matter appears; this change (resorption?),
which also is found in urodela (Triton, Salamandra, Amblystoma),
is not met with at earlier stages of development thus being, as it
seems, connected with the metamorphosis.
A. — Precocious Metamorphoses. The material examined includes
tadpoles of Bufo vulgaris and Rana arvalis.
a. — In a homogeneous culture consisting of several hundreds of
tadpoles (Bufo vulgaris) 3 individuals displaying precocious
metamorphosis were found (fig. A.: lower row; the corre-
sponding control specimens are figured in the upper row).
The thyroids of the control specimens examined looked much
the same (pl. VI, fig. 14), whereas in the three small four-
legged individuals the thyroids were smaller, the follicles
170
being quite distented by a highly eosinophilic colloid matter
(fig. 13).
b. — In another Bufo culture a four-legged tadpole was met with
at a juncture at which all the rest were still without legs.
The type of the thyroid in the control specimens appears
from fig. 16, whereas the structure of the organ in the pre-
cocious larva from fig. 17, displaying a considerably larger
size together with vacuolation of the colloid matter.
c. — In a Rana culture some early developed tadpoles were ob-
served. The upper row of fig. B. represents three of these
larvæ together with as many control specimens; the lower
row exhibits the same animals a week later. As regards the
difference in size and development of the thyroid in the two
groups compare fig. 17 (the early developed larvæ) and 18
(control specimen); in the former cases the follicles are larger
and the colloid matter highly vacuolated.
B. — Wintering Larvæ of Rana esculenta.
In the autumn esculenta larvæ are rather commonly met with
which have not been fully developed; such larvæ often have but
hindlegs. Perhaps larvæ of this kind are hibernating, perhaps they
are perishing during the winter. Kept in aquaria at 8—10? C.
they do winter but, the metamorphosis generally will not set in till
the spring, although the animals are fed. Fig. C. b. gives in natural
size the look of some larvæ gathered in the month of October;
three of them wintering in an aquarium did not change in ap-
pearance until they were killed in April (fig. C. a.). The structures
of their thyroids appear from pl. VI, fig. 19, viz. enlargement of the
organ due to distension of the follicles (retention phenomenon ?)
and diminution of the epithelial cells. The thyroids of the control
specimens, killed in October of the previous year, had the usual
appearance characteristic of the stage of development concerned
(fig. 20, compare fig. 24—25).
C. — Abnormaily Increased Growth ("Giant larvæ") in Rana esculenta.
In Denmark fully developed esculenta larvæ attain the size
of 60—70 mm in length, and the recently metamorphosed frogs
that of 25—30 mm (Wesenberg-Lund). As to Germany Bruno
ll
Dirigen states that the size of the larvæ is lying between 48
and 50 mm, in rare cases between 70 and 80 mm. In 1908
Wesenberg-Lund observed in a Danish pond a great number
of two-legged esculenta larvæ varying in size from 30 to 100 mm,
a few of them measuring even 115 mm. In the course of the
autumn part of them completed their metamorphoses, while at this
juncture the rest remained quite larval. The young frogs, after the
metamorphosis, measured 25—40 mm in length. By roentgenography
it was established that the ossification was less advanced in the
giant larvæ than was the case of thé normal ones at the same
stage of development. The thyroid was examined both in some of
the normally sized larvæ and in three giant larvæ at different
stages (fig. D. a.—c.), measuring respectively 100, 93 and 64 mm.
In all of the giant larvæ a strumiform enlargement of the thyroid
was found, the organ being built of numerous larger and smaller
follicles with interstitial cell herds and other indications of proli-
feration. In two of the larvæ (a. and b.) only traces of colloid matter
were demonstrable, whereas the follicles of the third nearly meta-
morphosed specimen (c.) showed vacuolated colloid matter (fig. 23). .
The thyroids of the normally sized individuals from the same pond
showed nothing in particular. The abnormal condition of the thy-
roid in the three giant larvæ, as compared to that of normal larvæ
at the very same stage of development, is most easily perceptible
by comparing fig. 22 to fig. 25 (originating in tadpole of fig. C. c.)
and fig. 23 to fig. 26. —
The causal relationship of this gigantism was not established
with any degree of certainty. In the larva of fig. D. c. the hypo-
physis was found to be enlarged (0,88 X 1,52 mm), the same
being the case in another somewhat smaller larvæ (1,16 X 1,26
mm); in a good-sized normal larva (80 mm) the hypophysis meas-
ured 0,68 X 0,97 mm. The genital glands of the giant larvæ did
not seem to be either.copiously or prematurely developed to any
degree worth mentioning.
122-192:
Partiel Metamorfose hos Amblystoma mexicanum.
Af
C. 0. Jensen.
With an English Summary.
Åxolotl'en er som bekendt i Besiddelse af en betydelig Evne
til at tilpasse sin ydre Bygning efter de tilstedeværende Livsfor-
høld. Saa længe Larverne er smaa, paavirkes deres Ydre dog ikke
i væsentlig Grad af deres Opholdssteds større eller mindre Vand-
dybde; men allerede hos. Dyr, der er c. 72 Aar gamle, vil en
væsentlig Sænkning af Vandlagets Højde medføre en Formindskelse
af Gællerne med Skrumpning af Sidegrenene, medens omvendt Op-
hold i dybt Vand medfører en stærkere Udvikling af Gællerne;
og hos Larver, hos hvilke en Formindskelse af disse allerede har
fundet Sted, vil Overflytning til dybt Vand have samme Virkning.
Dette er endnu mere iøjnefaldende hos ældre Dyr; Gællerne hos
disse er ofte ret stærkt reducerede til korte, tykke Stammer med
faa og smaa Sidegrene eller uden saadanne; ved længere Tids
Ophold i dybt Vand vokser der regelmæssigt forgrenede Sidegrene
frem, snart kun paa de bageste, snart paa alle Gællestammerne.
Hos de ældre Dyr, der holdes paa lavt Vand, er Hudbræmmerne
paa Halen og særlig paa Ryggen ofte stærkt reducerede; ved Over-
flytning til dybt Vand tiltager ogsaa disse Dannelser i Højde.
En paabegyndt Forvandling kan under visse Omstændigheder,
hvad enten den er indtraadt spontant eller kunstig fremkaldt (f. Eks.
ved Thyreoidea-Fodring), standse, for saa vidt den ikke har naaet
det Stadium, der er kendetegnet ved gentagne universelle Hud-
skifter; de ofte stærkt reducerede Gæller og Hudbræmmer vil da
ret hurtigt vokse frem paany, og Dyret igen ganske antage sit
oprindelige larvale Udseende. Tvinges det halvt forvandlede Dyr
til at leve under særlig ugunstige Forhold, kan Dyret holdes paa
dette Mellemstadium endog i lang Tid; Marie v. Chauvin an-
174
bragte saaledes nogle Axolot'ler, der var vænnede til Lungeaanding,
og hvis Hudbræmmer og Gæller var skrumpede, i fugtige Om-
givelser paa Land, og efter at de var tilpassede til denne Levevis,
blev de skiftevis anbragte paa Land (om Dagen) og i Vand (om
Natten); i Løbet af 3'/6 Aar forblev Dyrene omtrent uforandrede
af Udseende; to af dem blev derefter udelukkende holdt i Vand og
genvandt i Løbet af 4 Maaneder det for Larvestadiet karakteri-
stiske Ydre; af de andre, der nu var henvist til ganske at leve paa
Land, fuldførte den ene Metamorfosen, medens den anden i Løbet
af 3——4 Uger døde uden at være undergaaet nogen Ændring i Ud-
seende. ;
Der findes meddelt en Iagttagelse (Johnson), hvorefter fuldt
udviklede Amblystomer atter skulde kunne faa Gæller og antage
Axolotl-Formen; Meddelelsen, der er bygget paa Erindringen om
en flere Aar tidligere gjort lagttagelse, maa dog vistnok opfattes
med den største Tvivl.
Det er af Marie v. Chauvin paavist, at indtrædende univer-
selt Hudskifte er Tegn til, at Metamorfosen har naaet et saadant
Stadium, at den ikke længere kan standse, men skrider fremad, til
Dyret har antaget Amblystom-Skikkelse.
Det skulde efter disse lagttagelser synes lidet sandsynligt, at
Metamorfosen overhovedet skulde kunne standse paa Halvvejen, og
Dyret varigt bibeholde Karakteren af en Mellemform mellem
Axolotl og Amblystom. Og dog foreligger der en lagttagelse af
Wintrebert om en saadan ,demi-amblystomef.
Blandt nogle Axolotl'er, der ved varigt Ophold i fugtige Om-
givelser paa Land var ,tvungne" til at paabegynde Metamorfosen,
udtoges et Dyr, hos hvilket Forandringerne kun udviklede sig meget
langsomt; efter ca. 4'/> Maaneds Forløb havde Dyret Amblystomens
Ydre (uden Hudbræmmer), dog havde Hovedet endnu i det væsent-
lige bibeholdt Larvekaraktererne; af: Gællerne var Stammerne bi-
beholdt, men formindskede. Dyret anbragtes derefter i Vand; Meta-
morfosen standsede; Hovedet forblev uforandret, Gællestammerne
voksede og forsynedes efterhaanden med Sidegrene; Kroppen bi-
beholdt Amblystom-Formen, og nye Hudbræmmer voksede ikke
frem. Dyret døde tilfældig c. 8 Maaneder efter Anbringelsen i Vand
uden yderligere at være undergaaet Forandringer i Udseendet.
Wintrebert giver en nøje Beskrivelse af Dyrets ydre. og indre
1775
Forhold, af hvilke det fremgaar, at Dyret ved sin ydre Form af
Kroppen, ved Mangelen af Svømmebræmmer mellem Tæerne, af
Ryg- og Halebræmme samt af Hudfolden paa Laarets Bagflade, ved
Tæernes Form, ved Mundspaltens Størrelse, Tilstedeværelsen af
bevægelige Øjelaag, ved Tungens og til Dels ogsaa Tændernes
Forhold samt ved Hudens Beskaffenhed og Farvetegning i. det
væsentlige forholdt sig som en Amblystom, medens Hovedets Form,
Gællebuerne, Gællespalterne, de ydre Gæller samt Hvirvelsøjlen
mere eller mindre viste Overensstemmelse med Axolotl'en.
Ved mine talrige Forsøg med Thyreoidea-Fodring og med In-
jektion af Thyreoidea-Præparater og af forskellige Jod-Æggehvide-
stofforbindelser hos Axolotl'er har Resultatet regelmæssigt været i
Overensstemmelse med de tidligere Iagttagelser vedrørende Meta-
morfosens Forløb. For saa vidt Metamorfosen overhovedet var paa-
begyndt, forløb den enten uforstyrret, indtil Dyret havde antaget
Amblystom- Formen, eller den standsede inden de universelle Hud-
skifters Indtræden, og i saa Tilfælde antog Dyret atter Axolotl'ens
sædvanlige Udseende, idet de skrumpede Gæller og Hudbræmmer
atter voksede, og den oprindelige Hudfarve atter vendte tilbage.
Men i eet Tilfælde har Forløbet været afvigende, idet der er frem-
kommen en Mellemform, en ,demi-amblystomef, der ikke viser
nogen Tilbøjelighed hverken til at fuldføre Metamorfosen eller til
at vende tilbage til Axolot!”-Stadiet.
Det paagældende Dyr var en c. 3 Aar gl. Han, der vejede 75
g. D. 16. Oktober 1919 injiceredes i Abdominalhulen c. 2—3 cg
Jodkasein, opslæmmet i fysiologisk Klornatriumopløsning. Dyret for-
blev tilsyneladende upaavirket, og først .d. 12. November iagttoges
let Hudskifte paa Lemmerne; der indtraadte derefter et hurtigt
Svind af Rygbræmmen samt det sædvanlige, pletvise Pigmentsvind
i Huden paa Halen og paa Kroppens Underflade; den 15. Novem-
ber indtraadte første universelle Hudskifte; medens Rygbræmmen
derefter svandt hurtig og fuldstændig, formindskedes Halebræmmen
kun langsomt og ikke fuldstændig, og det samme var Tilfældet med
Gællerne. Efter Midten af December undergik Dyrets Ydre ingen
yderligere Ændringer, og det fremviste nu det i omstaaende Billeder
(efter Fotografier tagne i Februar 1920) gengivne karakteristiske
Udseende.
Dyret har siden levet i et Vandbassin med skraa Vægge, an-
176
bragt i et stort, beplantet Terrarium (Del af Koldhus); det har
altid opholdt sig i Vandet og har i det første Aar, saa vidt vides,
aldrig gjort Forsøg paa at stige paa Land, og kun sjældent er det
set nærme sig Vandets Overflade.) Midt i November 1920, alt-
saa efter mere end et Aars Forløb, er Dyrets Udseende ganske
uforandret, dog er Halebræmmen svundet lidt, men Halen dog ved-
blivende høj og stærkt sammentrykt, endvidere er Kroppen fyldigere
(god Ernæring), og Hudfarven er bleven mørk paa Kroppens Over-
flade, medens Dyret ved Fotograferingen endnu delvis var i Be-
Mellemform mellem Axolotl og Amblystom. ”/2 nat. St.
siddelse af det under Metamorfosen indtrædende lysplettede Ydre.
Siden Slutningen af December 1920 har Dyret vist Tilbøjelighed
til at forlade Vandet for kortere og længere Tid, og det søger da
Ophold paa fugtige Steder under Sten o. Il. Ved Slutningen af Fe-
bruar 1921 er Dyrets Ydre ikke undergaaet nogen yderligere For-
andring.
Dyrets Skikkelse fremgaar af de vedføjede Billeder, der gen-
") Ved Slutningen af den fuldstændige Forvandling forlader som bekendt
Amblystomen Vandet; Flertallet af Dyrene søger derefter kun undtagelses-
vis uden for Yngletiden tilbage til Vandet. Dyr, der først i en senere
Alder tvinges til Forvandling, er dog tilbøjelige til delvis at opholde sig
i Vandet; et enkelt Individ, der først bragtes til Forvandling i 6—7 Aars
Alderen, opholder sig endog selv nu efter 4 Aars Forløb fortrinsvis paa
Bunden af Vandbassinet og stiger væsentlig kun paa Land for at søge
Foder.
1577
giver det i halv Størrelse, og som kun paa uvæsentlige Punkter
er let retoucherede.
Ved Undersøgelsen af det levende Dyr i November 1920 fandtes
følgende Forhold: Længden er 20 cm. Kroppen er slank og trind;
paa Rygbræmmens Plads findes en svag Længdefure; Halebræm-
men er kun et Par mm høj og c. 1,53 cm lang, Halen dog høj
(ved Grunden 18 mm) og sammentrykt. ,,Séparations interméta-
mériques" tydelige, men mindre fremtrædende end hos den voksne
Axolotl. Hudfolden, der forbinder Bagsiden af Laaret med Kroppen
svagt udviklet. Tæerne paa Grund af tidligere Beskadigelser af
= 2/2 |E88 | E E | E2
SEES KER ESESE RS Sales
40 || va o =&£ || == — — || —
IE IS ses e Re
REISE [aa] E = == Es
Es ø || » rdr 5 mr Hm
BSSTSST ESS SES ESS
SES |æSlaE lse)! sS SEES
me SEE KDE baz SE E2
S SEERE eks eS a <r
SE || tm + 4
aen I ced!| == z
PSO OSSE SEERE LEE se see sekter Bred 5.26 30 1120! 17,5 ISÆ ET OR H9
aDenlsamblystome FNS | 24 BOM BON EITET NET SEER EST OR ES
ANDS EON rn 25 TØR ENO ENGEN SE ER OR 85/85
| |
Lemmerne noget deforme; Svømmehuden mellem Bagfodens Tæer
bibeholdt. Hovedet lidt fladt og bredt, men langtfra saa plumpt som
hos den voksne Axolotl; Overgangen i Halsen er brat; Siderandene
konvergerende fortil, Forenden bueformigt afrundet. Gællerne er
reducerede til korte (1—2 mm lange) Stammer; Gællespalterne,
Gællehulerne og Gællebuerne er i alt væsentligt som hos Axolotl'en.
Øjnene er store, fremstaaende, Øjelaagene bevægelige. Den ringe
Ændring af Hovedets Skeletdele fremgaar af ovenstaaende sam-
menlignende Maal, tagne paa det omtalte Dyr, paa en Axolotl og
paa en fuldt forvandlet Amblystom; til Sammenligning er udvalgt
Dyr af samme Størrelse, og da Halens Længde er noget variabel,
er som Grundlag anvendt Maalet fra Hovedets Spids til den bageste
Flade af Laarenes Udspring, maalt paa Dyrets Bugflade; dette Maal
var for samtlige Dyrs Vedkommende 90 mm.
Mundspalten, Ganetænderne og Tungen forholder sig i det væ-
sentlige som hos Axolotl'en.
Hudens Beskaffenhed svarer til Amblystomers, der en Tid lang
har opholdt sig i Vand; den er fast, glat og glinsende. Farven er
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 72. 112
178
paa Dyrets Overside sort, paa Undersiden med lysere, graalige
Pletter; ogsaa Halens Sideflader er lysere, graa- og brunplettede
som hos Flertallet af Axolotl'er.
Dyret fremtræder saaledes utvivlsomt som en Mellemform. Ved
Kroppens Form, Mangelen paa Hudbræmmer, Tilstedeværelsen af
bevægelige Øjelaag og ved Hudens Beskaffenhed stemmer det
overens med Amblystom-Formen; ved den høje, sammentrykte
Hale, Svømmehinden mellem Bagfodens Tæer, det indre Gælle-
apparats Bibeholdelse, Mundspaltens, Ganetændernes og Tungens
Forhold samt ved Hudens Farvetegning paa Underfladen og paa
Halens Sider minder det derimod om Axolotl'en; og de stærkt rudi-
inentære ydre Gællestammer svarer til, hvad der ses i de seneste
Metamøorfosestadier, naar Gællespalten er i Færd med at lukkes.
Fra Wintrebert's ,demi-amblystome” adskiller Dyret sig i
visse Retninger og særlig da derved, at der trods et Aars Forløb
ikke er indtraadt nogen Nydannelse af Gæller eller blot en Vækst
af de rudimentære Gællestammer.
Blandt de talrige Axolotl'er, som jeg gennem Behandling med
Thyreoidea-Præparater og visse Jod-Æggehvidestoffer har bragt til
Metamorfose, fandtes tre, der paa et vist Tidspunkt frembød be-
tydelig Lighed med den ovenfor omtalte, idet Rygbræmmen resor-
beredes fuldstændig, Halebræmmen kun delvis, og Hovedet antog
den ejendommelig firkantede Form med de skrumpede Gæller;
men i alle tre Tilfælde indtraadte efter en Pavse i Metamorfosen
dennes sidste Stadier.
Det kunde efter disse Iagttagelser se ud til, at den ad kunstig
Vej fremtvungne Metamorfose hos Axolotl'en forløber i to Faser,
der dog — for saa vidt Optagelsen af Thyreoidea-Stoffer eller Jod-
Æggehvide har været tilstrækkelig — uden paaviselige Grænser
gaar over i hinanden, og at der ved Optagelse af et vist Minimum
af disse Stoffer kun indtræder en ved bestemte Forandringer kende-
tegnet, partiel Metamorfose, der kan være varig.
Litteratur.
]. Marie v.Chauvin. Zeitschr. f. wissenschaftl. Zoe 41. Bd. 1885.
2. P. Wintrebert. Compt. rend. hebd. Soc. de Biologie. 1918 t. 2. p. 415
& 549.
3. R.D.O. Johnson. Science. Vol. XXXVI. July—Decbr. 1912.
179
Partial Metamorphosis in Amblystoma mexicanum.
SUMMARY.
When metamorphosis of the axolotl has set in it may either
progress till the animal concerned has assumed the amblystoma
form or — provided a certain stage has not been surpassed —-
stop; in the latter case the animal living in normal conditions will
reassume the original shape of the axolotl on regeneration of gills
and dorso-caudal fins. Wintrebert!) however described a case
in which metamorphosis had stopped half-way and only been fol-
lowed by a partial return to the axolotl-stage; for this reason the
specimen was termed as a "demi-amblystome". — The author has
got possession of a similar, though not quite congruent case.
An axolotl about three years old weighing 75 grammes on Qct.,
16.1919 was subjected to an intraabdominal injection of iodocasein.
Signs of beginning metamorphosis were not observed until Nov.,
15.; thence forward it advanced quickly though displaying certain
irregularities. In the middle of December the metamorphosis stop-
ped altøgether, and the animal has not changed its appearance
from that moment till now. For a whole year afterwards it kept
staying in the water basin, and it was not observed on land until
December 1920.
The demi-amblystoma concerned is, in accordance with the
amblystoma-type as regards the shape of the body, the absence of
dorso-caudal fins, the presence of movable eyelids and the pro-
perties of the skin, In distinction to these points of resemblance
to the amblystoma the following features are like those of the
axolotl, viz. the tall tail compressed from side to side, the webbed
hind feet, the retention of gill clefts and internal gill apparatus, the
shape of the mouth, the palatine teeth and the tongue together with
the colours of the skin covering the abdomen and the lateral super-
ficies of the tail. The highly rudimentary external gills resemble
those characteristic of the latest stages of metamorphosis, when the
gill-cleft is going to coalesce.
In three other cases artificially enforced metamorphosis proved
apt, as it seemed to stop at the same stage (viz. total resorption
1) Compt. Rend. Soc. de Biol. 1908. t. 2. pag. 415 & 549.
180
of the dorsal fin, reduction of the caudal fin, shrinkage of the gills
and change of the form of the head) but in all cases the meta-
morphoses were completed after certain intermissions.
Observations of this kind might suggest that the artificially en-
forced metamorphosis in the axolotl is going on in two phases
which — provided the resorption of the thyroid preparations. (or
other effective iodine compoaunds) has been sufficient — run into
each other without traceable bounds. The resorption of a certain
minimum dose, on the other hand, might initiate a partial meta-
morphosis characterized through certain definite changes which can
be permanent.
3052-1920:
Bialene vedde-danske' Fyr 11919:
37te Aarsberetning om danske Fugle.
Ved
R. Hørring.
I 1919 indsendtes fra 30 af de danske Fyr og Fyrskibe til
Universitetets zoologiske Museum ialt 447 Fugle af 49 Arter faldne
om Natten i Træktiderne. Sikker Efterretning haves om 851 arts-
bestemte Fugle, idet Prøver af disse ere indsendte. Ifølge Fyr-
mestrenes nøjere Oplysninger er yderligere opsamlet c. 200 Fugle,
livorafler 50 "angaves "af "være Lærker,"c. 30 Drosler, 3 Duer,;5
Vadefugle, 3 Ænder, Resten forskellige Smaafugle, mest Rødkælke.
Nøjere Efterretning haves saaledes om c. 1050 Fugles Død ved
Fyrene. Ved Fyrskibene er som sædvanlig faldet endel overbord,
at skønne efter Opgivelserne dog neppe mere end c. 300. I det
hele synes der saaledes mindst at være faldet 13—1400 Fugle,
og efter de modtagne Oplysninger er der ikke særlig Grund til at
antage, at. Fuglefaldet har været synderlig større.
Disse ganske usædvanlig lave Tal, til hvilke man, ialtfald for
de indsendte Fugles Vedkommende, skal helt tilbage til 1895 for
at finde tilsvarende, er naturligvis først og fremmest et Udtryk for,
at Trækfuglene i 1919 ere slupne usædvanlig heldigt gennem Lan-
det, uden at nogen nævneværdig Del af deres Hærskarer er om-
kommen i Fyrstraalerne. En af de vigtigste Grunde hertil var det
usædvanlig vedholdende klare Vejr baade i September og Novem-
ber samt en stor Del af Oktober Maaned, saaledes at blot forholds-
vis faa Dage i denne sidste Maaned vare saa mørke og taagede,
at Fyrene kunde blive skæbnesvangre for Trækfuglene; saaledes
meldes egentlig kun den 25de og navnlig den 26de Oktober om
større Mængder Fugle ved Fyrene, uden at Faldet i disse to Næt-
ter dog naaede op til et Omfang, der staar Maal med, hvad der
182
(1919.)
ellers saa ofte ses i denne Maaned. En meget vigtig Factor var
det dog tillige, at Fyrskibene ved Graadyb, Vyl og Horns Rev, paa
Grund af Faren ved drivende Miner, endnu ikke vare udlagte efter
Krigen; en Tredjedel større havde Fuglefaldet sikkert været, hvis
disse Fyrskibe, der synes at ligge paa et af de stærkest befærdede
Trækstrøg, havde været tændte.
De Fyr, hvorfra Fugle indsendtes vare:
Blaavands Huk Fyr. C. G. Christensen, Fyrmester (24 Fugle
fra 4 Nætter).
Bovbjerg Fyr. A. V. Hansen, Fyrmester (7 fra 3 Nætter).
Lodbjerg Fyr. J. A. Tendal, Fyrmester (2 fra 2 Nætter).
Rubjerg Knude Fyr. J. C. Boysen, Fyrmester (33 fra 3 Nætter).
Hirtshals Fyr. H. Hinrichsen, Fyrmester (1 fra 1 Nat).
Skagen Fyr. E. Brandt Petersen, Fyrassistent (19 fra 4 Nætter).
Nordre Røn Fyr. P.S. Pedersen, Fyrmester (3 fraf2NNættern)!
Læsø Trindel Fyrskib. S. Winther, Fører (25 fra 5 Nætter).
Læsø Rende Fyrskib. A. Jacobsen, Styrmand (22 fra 10 Nætter).
Østre Flak Fyrskib. A. A. Porse, Fører (17 fra 9 Nætter).
ElalsBarren Fyr: TAS Jensen Eyrmester Ore)
Anholt Knob Fyrskib. H.S. Jensen, Fører (14 fra 8 Nætter).
Anholt Fyr. A. Rasmussen, Fyrmester (14 fra 2 Nætter).
Hesselø Fyr. K. A. Jensen, Fyrmester (41 fra 4 Nætter).
Schultz's Grund Fyrskib. K. G. T. Hald, Fører (26 fra 3 Nætter).
Fornæs Fyr, A. Kruse, Fyrmester (1 fra 1 Nat).
EljelmtkyrsbE SAREEN El sent Fyrmester (ra EN AD)
SejrøfFyrJYNSZINK'Els'en, Fyrmester (S0 fra EN ætter)
Vestborg Fyr. H. V. O. Westermann, Fyrmester (10 fra 9 Nætter).
Gilleleje Flak N. Fyrskib. J. S. Ibsen, Fører (10 fra 3 Nætter).
Drogden Fyrskib. Jul. S. Jensen, Fører (1 fra 1 Nat).
Stevns Fyr. I. H.S. Deichmann, Fyrmester (11 fra 6 Nætter).
Sprogø Fyr. H. K. Jensen, Fyrmester (1 fra 1 Nat).
Omø Fyr. L. T. Madsen, Fyrmester (4 fra 1 Nat).
Kjels Nor Fyr. I. C. Ryder, Fyrmester (30 fra 7 Nætter).
Skjoldnæs Fyr. H. Wirtz, Fyrmester (5 fra 2 Nætter).
Christiansø Fyr. H. M. Hansen, Fyrassistent (15 fra 7 "Nætter):
Hammeren Fyr. A. M. Dam, Fyrmester (6 fra 5 Nætter).
Møen Fyr. A.P. Eliassen, Fyrmester (1 fra 1 Nat).
Hyllekrog Fyr. J. N. B. Høeg, Fyrmester (23 fra 2 Nætter).
183
(1919.)
De Fugle, der indkom til Zoologisk Museum som faldne i 1919,
vare:
1. Fuligula cristata (Ray) 1 (3 faldt).
2. Porzana maruetta (Leach) 1.
3. Rallus aquaticus L. 8.
2 Rued atra E33:
5. Vanellus cristatus Wolf & M. 1 (4 faldt).
se Æøralitis hiaticula (LJ).
FEE bimosa Japponiean (L:) I:
or Actitis: hkypoleuca (£.) 1.
9. Totanus calidris (L.) 1.
(0% Tringa alpin 1. V:
11. Tringa subarquata (Gildenst.) 1.
12... Limnocryptes gallinula (L.) 2.
13. Gallinago scolopacina Bp. 2.
iSEScolopaxtrusticula k.12.:
fm Cnculus canorus- ll. 3:
KOS torguilla 3:
17... Columba palumbus L. 1.
ISS orvus: com ES V
19524 /auda arborea E:-2:
20. Alauda arvensis L. 73 (165 faldt).
21. Sturnus vulgaris L. 29 (168 faldt).
22. Troglodytes parvulus Koch 1.
PS Sylvia cinered. Bechst: 2!
Bal VSO 79 RATE Øg dr er0 hl (82) FED)
25. Sylvia hortensis Bechst. 10.
BOER Hypolais- ieterind (Vienl.). 2.
27... Acrocephalus arundinaceus (Lightf.) 1.
28. Acrocephalus phragmitis (Bechst.) 1.
29. Phyllopseustes trochilus (L.) 3.
30. Regulus cristatus Koch 14 (15 faldt).
3!. Anthus pratensis (L.) 1.
S2TRAnthust obscurus(Lath.) 1.
33. Anthus arboreus (Gml.) 2.
34. Motacilla flava L. 2.
35: ” Turdus iliacus L. 99 (247 faldt).
So Fords musicus" E. 30:
184
(1919.)
STENEN SEVISCIDO TUSE MES!
SES EJOUR OLSENS E jo ON SEE) BREVE
Sommurdusktorguatus: ES
40. Turdus merula L. 30 (38 faldt).
ANES axrcola Koen annen (EJERS:
APM Pralcolakrubetrat (EN) 2:
43. Ruticilla phoenicura (L.) 14.
44. Erithacus rubecula (L.) 41 (52 faldt).
45. Muscicapa atricapilla L. 5.
46. Fringilla montifringilla L. 10.
47. Coccothraustes vulgaris (L.) 1.
48. Emberiza schoeniclus L. 8.
49. Emberiza nivalis L. 8.
Af de faldne Arter var der ingen, der ikke tidligere var faldet
ved Fyrene. I det hele er i de sidste 34 Aar faldet 174 Arter.
Fortegnelse over de Fugle der ere indsendte fra Fyrene
| som faldne om Natten.
(Hver Nat henregnes til den følgende Dag.)
1... Fuligula cristata. Troldand.
Oktober: 29de Hirtshals 1 jun. (3 faldt) !).
Porzana maruetta. Rørvagtel.
Oktober: 28de Skagen 19 jun.
3. Rallus aquaticus. Vandrikse.
Oktober: 3dje Stevns 19%jun. 5te Kjels Nor 19. 22de
Nordre Rønner I g. 26de Hals Barre 19 jun.,
Schultz's Grund I gjun. 28de Skagen 1 9 jun.
November: 3dje Sprogø 1.
December: 2den Lodbjerg 1.
4.. Fulica atra. Blishøne.
D
") I Klammer er, efter Fyrmestrenes Oplysninger, vedføjet Tallet. paa de
faldne Fugle, naar dette er et andet end Tallet paa de indsendte; paa
samme Maade anføres efter Fyrmestrenes Oplysninger Stære og Viber,
selv om intet er indsendt.
185
(1919.)
Oktober: 26de Hals Barre 13, Schultz's Grund 1, Hes-
selø 1.
SØE anellas cristatus: " Vibe:
Marts: 2den (Anholt 2). 3dje (Fornæs 1).
April: Yde Stevns 19 ad.
6. Ægialitis hiaticula. Præstekrave.
April: 7de Bovbjerg 1.
7... Limosa lapponica. Kobbersneppe.
Oktober: 19de Kjels Nor i gjun.
8... Actitis hypoleuca. Mudderklire.
August: 6fe Hammeren 1.
9. Totanus calidris. Rødben.
August: 30te Kjels Nor 1.
10. Tringa alpina. Ryle.
August: 30te. Kjels Nor 1.
11… Tringa subarquata. Krumnæbet Ryle.
August: 24de Hammeren 19 ad.
12... Limnocryptes.gallinula. Enkelt Bekkasin.
Januar: 23de Lodbjerg 1 9 jun.
Oktober ks ore kjelseN or Sun
13... Gallinago scolopacina. Horsegøg.
August: 24de Hammeren 189 jun. 26de Østre Flak 1.
14... Scolopax rusticula. Skovsneppe.
April: 7de Skagen 1.
Oktober: 26de Østre Flak 1.
sæk Cuculascanorus" Gøg:
August: 20de Hammeren 1 jun. 30te Vestborg 1 jun.
September: 29de Christiansø 1 2 jun.
16. Iynx torquilla. Vendehals.
Maj: 20de Anholt 1.
Ansust:"3507elKkjels Nor 2 (FEEL Pjur).
17... Columba palumbus. Ringdue.
Marts: 12te Møen 1.
ISER Corvus eornie Krage!
Oktober: 29de Blaavands Huk 1.
19%ATauda arborea.… Hedelærke.
Marts: 12te Christiansø 2 (13, 19 ad.).
BONE lauda arvensis: Lærke:
(1919.)
9)
ræ
RS)
DO
lg
Januar:
Februar:
Marts:
April:
September:
Oktober:
186
29de Læsø Rende 17, Østre Flak I1g'.
2lde Christiansø 14. 25de” Hyllekrog hs Rs
faldt).
4de Bovbjerg 2 $. 6te Hammeren 1 g. &de
Læsø Rende 13. «Ilte Omø 13.7 T2fe Chr
stiansø 29. 13de Hesselø 19 jun.
Ste Stevns 19. &de Skagen 19 jun. Yde Læsø
Rende 19. 30fe Kjels Nor 1 9-ad.
26de Læsø Trindel 19ad. 29de Anholt Knob
Ikon:
2den Schultz's Grund 4 (29ad., 29 jun.). Å4de
Vestborg 19 ad. 6te Skjoldnæs 1 9 ad. 7de Kjels
Nor 12jun. 20de Schultz's Grund 1, Stevns
14. 25de Blaavands Huk 4(23',1 2 ad., 19 jun.),
Fornæs: 1.7 (20 faldt), -Sejrø 97 (60 IRS REDE
Stevns 29. 26de Læsø Trindel 13, Læsø Rende
20 (11 faldt), Østre Flak 2 3 49 EEls
Barre 11 (9-1 Pad: 19 jun) "Hesseløkbn (as
20 un), Schultzs: Grund 23 Old ES te vas
17. 27de Nordre Rønner 13. 29de Blaavands
Huk 27.
Sturnus vulgaris. Stær.
Februar:
Marts:
April:
Oktober:
25de Hyllekrog 17.
3Idje Læsø Rende 13, Østre Flak 13, Hesselø
Se, 19 jun), (Kjels Nor DT(Skjoldnæsmlo)
Åde (Kjels Nor 1). &de Læsø Rende 18. Ilte
(Skjoldnæs 1).
I3dje Blaavands Huk 3 (104 faldt). 5te Bovbjerg
229,Skagen 2(13,19). Læsø Rende 1 9, Hjelm
19, (Nakkehoved 1). 6te Vestborg 1 3, (Omø 3).
ide Skagen 2 (LL, 19 jun) Østre hakker
Anholt Knob 129, (Skjoldnæs 3).
2den (Kjels Nor 2), (Christiansø 1). 25de Stevns
1 2 ad., (Christiansø 1), (Dueodde N. 1). 26de
Læsø Trindel 1 9 jun., Østre Flak 1 gad. (8 faldt),
(Anholt 6), Hesselø 23, Schultz's Grund 1 $ jun.,
Sejrø I g jun. 28de Skagen 12 jun.
Troglodytes parvulus. Gærdesmutte.
É
2
2
i
(1919.)
23)
24.
ØS:
187
Oktober: 4de Hyllekrog 2.
Sylvia cinerea. Tornsanger.
August: 30te Kjels Nor 13, Skjoldnæs 1? ad.
Sylvia curruca. (Gærdesanger.
September: Åde Anholt 1.
Sylvia hortensis. Havesanger.
August: 23de Læsø Rende 29 jun. 26de Østre Flak 19
junk 0 fe KjelsknN or ANES ad EPP um]
September: 4de Læsø Trindel 1. 26de Læsø Trindel 17,
Anholt Knob 199 jun.
Hypolais icterina. Gulbug.
August: 30fe-Kjels "Nor 2 (LØ LPFad.):
Acrocephalus arundinaceus. Rørsanger.
Oktober: 7de Kjels Nor 1.
Acrocephalus phragmitis. Sivsanger.
September: 2den Vestborg 1.
Phyllopseustes trochilus. Løvsanger.
September: 4de Læsø Trindel 1, Anholt 2.
Regulus cristatus. Fuglekonge.
April: Yde Læsø Rende 23. 23de Christiansø 2 9.
Oktober: Iste Drogden 19. Å4Åde Hyllekrog 4 (27, 2%).
6te Læsø Rende 19, Vestborg 13. 26de Læsø
Rende 19 (2 faldt), Schultz's Grund 19. 30fe
Kjels Nor 1.
Anthus pratensis. Engpiber.
September: S&de Anholt Knob 1.
Anthus obscurus. Skærpiber.
April Ste "Bovbjerg LØ.
Anthus arboreus. Træpiber.
April: 24de Hammeren 17.
September: 4de Anholt 1.
Motacilla flava. Gul Vipstjert.
September: Åde Anholt 2g'jun.
Turdus iliacus. Vindrossel.
April: 27de Hesselø 4 (19 ad., 32 jun.).
Oktober: 20de Schultz's Grund I g. 25de Rubjerg Knude
PANSER NS Fun RE ornæsst sg k(SOlFaldt)
26de Læsø Trindel 1 g, Læsø Rende 1 g (6 faldt),
(1919.)
0)
40.
4l.
188
Østre blak 2 (IS ET Suns 1 7 Fald) Ea sbargg
BSU Sad RS Pan ET ESse lo ER SER
Cad., 59jun.; 21 faldt), Schultz's "Grund 6 (2'2
ads 40 un; 48 faldt), ”Sejrø 17 (10 JES Pladser
2 jun.). 28de Skagen 1$2ad. 29de Blaavands
Huk 4. 30te Kjels Nor.4 (33, 197un)
Turdus musicus. Sangdrossel.
Marts: Ilte Omø 1.
April: 13de Vestborg 19. 27de Hesselø 4 (I gad.,72
gjun., 1 2 ad.), Sejrø 1 %. 28de Sejrø 43'. 30te
Kjels Nor 2 (Igad., I gjun.).
Maj: Iste Læsø Trindel 19 ad.
September: 26de Læsø Trindel 1 gjun., Gilleleje Flak N. 1
ad. 29de Gilleleje Flak N. I gjun.
Oktober: 2den Schultz's Grund 1 gad. 4de Hyllekrog 2 9
jun. 6te Skjoldnæs 1 9jun. 25de Rubjerg Knude
(ad: 2 PHun.): 26de Hals "Barre Pade
Schultz's Grund 17, Sejrø 19%ad. 29de Blaa-
vands Huk 2.
Turdus viscivorus. Misteldrossel.
Marts: I3de Hesselø 1.
April:"7de Rubjerg: Knude 2 (13, TYYjun)
Turdus pilaris. Sjagger.
Oktober: I8de Christiansø 13.
Turdus torquatus. Ringdrossel.
September: 26de Gilleleje Flak N. 19 jun.
Turdus merula. Solsort.
Marts: Ilte Omø 2 (17, 19). 13de Hesselø 1gjun.
April: 3dje Blaavands Huk 23 (7 faldt). 6te Anholt
Knob 1. 7de Bovbjerg 19jun. &de Rubjerg
Knude mr Pads "Skagen 2 ON SEE Hams
Rende 729" Østre Flak 13, Anholt Knob
Oktober: 25de Rubjerg Knude 1 gjun., Læsø Rende 1 Z'jun.
(2 faldt). 26de Hals Barre 10 (47 ad., 2 jun,
Pi Pads 29 jun), Schultz's'Grundftt adel
Hesselø I 2 jun. 27de Nordre Rønner 19 ad.
29de Blaavands Huk 19.
Saxicola oenanthe. Stenpikker.
(1919.)
April:
Maj:
August:
September:
189
2dder Sejr AadsersorenikgelsSEN ore PE
Iste Læsø Trindel 19.
19de Vestborg 1. 30te Kjels Nor 1 9 jun., Skjold-
næst lseR
2den Østre Flak 197. 4de Læsø Trindel 2 g,
Anholt 23. Ste Læsø Trindel 17. 26de Læsø
Trindel 2 (1gjun., 1 2 ad.). 29de Christiansø 1.
42. Praticola rubetra. Bynkefugl.
August:
September:
23de Læsø Rende 192 ad.
Åde Anholt 17.
43. Ruticilla phoenicura. Blodstjert.
September:
Oktober:
4de Læsø Trindel 2(1 7,19), Anholt Knob 1,
Anholsm (SSP fer bæsøkmrindeleer
Vestborg 14. 20de Christiansø 19. 23de Chri-
stiansø 17. 26de Læsø Trindel 12 jun., Gille-
leje Flak N. 19 jun.
Idje Stevns-19%ad. 4de Vestborg 1 2 jun.
44. Erithacus rubecula. Rødkælk.
April
Maj:
September:
Oktober
23de Østre Flak 1 jun. 27de Hesselø 1 9 jun.
Ilste Læsø Trindel 29 jun.
26de Læsø Trindel 1 9 jun., Anholt Knob 2 (1
gjun., 1 9 jun.). 28de Anholt Knob 129 jun. 29de
Anholt Knob 3 (1 gjun., 29 jun.), Gilleleje Flak
NÆSE adr um prisfiansø te
2den Gilleleje Flak N.19jun. I3dje Stevns 23
jun... 4de Hyllekrog 6 &gjun., 39 jun.). Ste
Kjels Nor 1%ad. 7de Kjels Nor 1 gjun. 25de
Rubjerg Knude 1 gjun., Sejrø 4 (1gad., 2gjun.,
19jun.). 26de Blaavands Huk 1gjun., Læsø
Trindel 1 gjun., Læsø Rende 2 g'jun., Østre Flak
AS jun (7 faldt) El alsEBarre HISP Fad ES huls
Grund 2 (1 gjun., 1 9jun.; 8 faldt). 28de Ska-
venlÆun:
45... Muscicapa atricapilla. Broget Fluesnapper.
August:
September:
Oktober:
30te Kjels Nor 18.
4de Læsø Trindel 1, Anholt 17. &de Vestborg
gun
6te Skjoldnæs 13.
190
(1919.)
46. Fringilla montifringilla. Kvækerfinke.
April: Yde Læsø Rende 13. 24de Christiansø 1.
27de Hesselø 2 (13, 12); "Sejrø MEP jun:
Oktober: 4de Kjels Nor 19 jun., Hyllekrog 2 (1gjun., 1
2 jun.). 28de Skagen 2 (1 gjun., 1 9 jun.).
47... Coccothraustes vulgaris. Kernebider.
Oktober: I&de Christiansø 1.
48. Emberiza schoeniclus. Rørspurv.
September: 26de Læsø Trindel 17, Anholt Knob 1.
Oktober: 2den Schultz's Grund 2(13,19), Gilleleje Flak
Næ (13719): 4 de Hyllekrog "2 0lad!
49. Emberiza nivalis. Snespurv.
Februar: 25de Hyllekrog 17.
Oktober: 25de Rubjerg Knude 1 2 jun. 26de Schultz's
; Grund 19jun. 28de Skagen 4 (23, I2ad., 1
and)
November: 29de Østre Flak 17.
Oversigt over de Nætter da Fugle ere komne til Fyrene.
Hver Nat henregnes til den følgende Dag. — Tallet efter Vindretningen betegner
Vindstyrken efter Beauforts Skala (0—12), hvor
1 betyder: Let Brise. 7 betyder: Trerebet Merssejlskuling.
2 — ….: Laber Bramsejlskuling. 8 : Klosrebet Merssejlskuling.
3 — : Bramsejlskuling. 9 : Undersejlskuling eller Storm.
4 — : Merssejlsskuling. 10 — … Haard Storm!
5 —… : Rebet Merssejlskuling. 11 - : Orkanagtig Storm.
6 — : Torebet Merssejlskuling. 12 — : Orkan.
steam ar
Omø. -S: S. Ø. 2. Skyet. Dis. 2 Lærker faldt; intet indsendt.
Side andar
Lodbjerg. Ø. 2. Overtr. 1 Enkelt Bekkasin faldt. Helnæs.
SFØNTS Oyvertr Dis "Endel Lærker ved Ruderne:1Faldtl(ikke
indsendt).
24de Januar.
Helnæs. Ø.S.Ø. 3. Overtr. Regn. Dis. Endel Lærker og 1 Ring-
due ved Ruderne.
191
(1919.)
older Januar:
BynovigÆHSESKØNSE Overtrk SfærvedtRuderne!
Jyder Jandar
Læsø Rende. Ø. 3. Overtr. Sne. 1 Lærke faldt.
Østre Flak. Ø.S.Ø. Overtr. Sne. 1 Lærke faldt.
Alauda arvensis. Læsø Rende 1, Østre Flak 1.
rkdeRkebrT mar.
Christiansø. S. 3. Regn. Dis. Omkr. 20 Lærker ved Fyret;
1 faldt.
Alauda arvensis 1.
22de Februar.
Omø. S. S. V. 3. Overtr. Taage. Flere Smaafugle ved Ruderne;
2 Lærker faldt, ikke indsendte. Kjels Nor. S. V.—S. S. Ø. 3.
Overtr. Regn. Dis. 1 Lærke faldt (ikke indsendt).
ASdetFEebDTU ar
Blaavands Huk. Ø.S.Ø. 3. Taage. Regn. Smaafugle om-
kring Fyret. Omø. S.Ø. 3. Regn. Taage. 1 Lærke faldt (ikke
indsendt).
Ander Hebr Uar
Blaavands Huk. S. 1. Taage. Dis. Stære omkring Fyret;
1 Lærke faldt (ikke indsendt). Omø. S. Ø. 2. Overtr. Taage. 2
Lærker faldt (ikke indsendte). Kjels Nor. S. V.—S. Ø. 2. Overtr.
Dis. 4 Lærker faldt (ikke indsendte). Skjoldnæs. Ø. 2. Overtr.
Taage. En halv Snes Stære og nogle Lærker ved Lanternen fra
Kl. 5 Form.; 4 Lærker faldt men ikke indsendte. Hyllekrog.
Vind"0: Taage. 5 Lærker, 1 Stær og 1 Snespurv faldt.
AÅlauda arvensis: Hyllekrog 3 (5 faldt).
Sturnus vulgaris. Hyllekrog 1.
Emberiza nivalis. Hyllekrog 1.
26'de Februar.
Skjøldnæs. Ø.S.Ø. 6. Overtr. Regn. En Solsort ved Lan-
ternen.
2den Marts.
Blaavands Huk. S. 3. Dis. Smaafugle omkring Fyret. Lod-
bjerg. S. 6. Overtr. Dis. 1 Lærke faldt; ikke modtaget. Hanst-
holm. S. 3. Overtr. Enkelte Viber flagrede om Fyret fra Kl. 4
til Daggry. Anholt. S. 8. Diset. Mange Stære og enkelte Lær-
ker om Lanternen; 2 Viber faldt (ikke indsendte). Kjels Nor.
192
(1919.)
S. S. Ø. 3. Overtr. Dis. Endel Stære og Lærker ved Fyret; ingen
faldt.
Vanellus cristatus. (Anholt 2.)
Sdje-Marts:
Blaavands Huk. S.S. V. 3. Dis. Stære og Lærker omkring
Fyret; 2 Lærker faldt (ikke indsendte). Lyngvig. N.V. 3. Overtr.
Regn. Dis. Omkr. 20 Stære ved Ruderne; ingen faldt. Bovbjerg.
Stære saas paa Lanterneruderne. Lodbjerg. S.S.V. 6. Overtr.
Taage. Endel Lærker paa Ruderne. Læsø Rende. S. 7. Overtr.
1 Stær faldt. Østre Flak. S. 6. Overtr. Regn. 2 Viber og enkelte
Smaafugle ved Lanternen; i Stær faldt. Anholt Knob. S. 6.
Overtr. 1 Lærke faldt (ikke modtaget). Hesselø. S. 6. Overtr.
Dis" "37 Stære faldt: .Fornæs: "S: Overtr: 4) 7 FlerekSsræremved
Lanternen; 1 Vibe faldt (ikke indsendt). Gilleleje Flak N. S. Ø.
4. Klart: men meget mørkt. Nogle enkelte Lærker ved Fyret.
Kjels Nor.” S. Ø.—S. S. V. 5. Overtr. " Dis… 5 Lærkererel
Stær faldt (intet indsendt). Æbelø. S.S.V. 5. Dis. "En Stær
ved Lanterneruderne. Skjoldnæs. S.S. V. 4. Overtr. Dis. Omkr.
50 Stære og enkelte Lærker ved Lanternen; 10 Stære faldt (ikke
indsendte).
Vanellus cristatus. (Fornæs 1).
Sturnus vulgaris. Læsø Rende 1, Østre Flak 1, Hesselø 3, (Kjels Nor
1), (Skjoldnæs 10).
4de Marts.
Bovbjerg. Vind 0. Skyet. 2 Lærker faldt. Gilleleje Flak N.
SV 27 Regn. Mange Lærker ved Fyret; endel faldt Vandet
Kjels Nor "VS: V.:—N. V.: 3. Overtr. «Dis: 4 Stærkkealdskkes
indsendt).
Alauda arvensis. Bovbjerg 2.
Sturnus vulgaris. (Kjels Nor 1).
terts:
Hammeren. N.V. 3. Dis. Overtr. 1 Lærke faldt.
Alauda arvensis 1.
8de Marts.
Læsø Rende. S. V. Overtr. Snebyger. 1 Lærke og 1 Stær faldt.
Alauda arvensis 1.
Sturnus vulgaris 1.
KOEN anes:
Stevns: KI '12"Midn.” V. 1. 'Overtr. Taage." KI 420" S RV ERE:
Overtr. Sne og Regn. Endel Stære paa Lanterneruderne fra Kl. 339
193
(1919.)
Formktiskls6;Fingen falde OMØ SKVEÆ2SOyertr: Taager Flere
Smaafugle ved Ruderne om Efterm.; 2 Lærker faldt (ikke ind-
sendte). .Kjels Nor. S. V. 2. Overtr. Regn. 4 Lærker faldt (ikke
indsendte). Helnæs. V. S. V. 3. Overtr. Dis. En Ringdue fløj mod
Ruderne og faldt (ikke indsendt); endel Viber i Fyrets Nærhed.
ile M ars:
Lodbjerg. V.S.V.5. Overtr. Dis. Endel Stære paa Ruderne.
Omø. V.S.V. 2. Overtr. Regn. Dis. 1 Lærke, 1 Sangdrossel og
2 Solsorter faldt.
Alauda arvensis. Omø 1.
Turdus musicus. Omø 1.
Turdus merula. Omø 2
ke rte Marts:
Stevns: Fra: K112 Midn. til Kl. 5. Form. S. V..3-Taage.- Omkr:
i10EFærker ved] Fyret; ingen faldt” "Kjels Nor SAV: "3 0Overtr
Regn. Taage. 2 Lærker faldt (ikke indsendte). Helnæs. Ø. S. Ø. 2.
Overtr. Dis. Enkelte Rødkælke og Lærker omkring -Fyret. Møen.
Vind 0. Regndis. Kl. 5 om Morgenen faldt 1 Ringdue. Christiansø.
S. V. 3. Taage. Regn. Mange Fugle i Fyrstraalerne; 2 Hedelærker
og 2 Sanglærker -faldt: Hammeren. S.V. 8. Let skyet. Dis. 5
Stære paa Ruderne.
Columba palumbus. Møen 1.
Alauda arborea. Christiansø 2.
Alauda arvensis. Christiansø 2.
iksSidetNWarts:
Blaavands Huk. Ø. S. Ø. 1. Regn. Taage. Fugle omkring
Fyret. Hesselø. Ø. 3. Overtr. Regn. 1 Lærke, 1 Misteldrossel
og 1 Solsort faldt. Gilleleje Flak N. Ø. 3. Regn. Enkelte Lær-
ker og Drosler ved Fyret. Christiansø. Ø. N.Ø. 6. Taage. En-
kelte Fugle paa Lanternen; ingen faldt.
Alauda arvensis. Hesselø 1.
Turdus viscivorus. Hesselø 1.
Turdus merula. Hesselø 1. =
28de Marts.
Skjoldnæs. S. 6. Overtr. Enkelte Stære ved Lanternen; ved
2 Tiden hørtes Træk af Regnspover.
30te-Marts.
Omø. S.V. 5. Overtr. Sne. 1 Skovdue faldt (ikke indsendt).
Ste Marts:
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 72. 13
194
(1919.)
Skagen. S. og S.Ø. 2. Let Dis. Omkr. 150 Stære opholdt
sig ved Ruderne; ingen faldt. Skjoldnæs. S.V. 3. Overtr. 1
Stær og 1 Solsort faldt (ikke indsendte).
Sturnus vulgaris (Skjoldnæs 1).
Iste April.
Lodbjerg. S. Ø. 1. Overtr. Endel Stære paa Ruderne. Østre
Flak. S. Ø. 2. Regn. Sne. Endel Smaafugle ved Fyret.
den April
Lodbjerg. N.Ø. 1. Overtr. Regn. Taage. Enkelte Stære og
Solsorter paa Ruderne om Efternatten. Anholt. V. 2. Dis. Mange
Stære og endel Lærker om Lancernen.
3dje April. :
Blaavands Huk. V. 3. Graat. Dis. Mange Stære ved Fyret;
104 Stære og 7 Solsorter faldt,
Sturnus'vulgaris 3 (104 faldt).
Turdus merula 2 (7 faldt).
5te"ApTil.
Blaavands Huk. V. 4. Regn. Dis. En Flok Stære ved Fyret.
Bovbjerg. V. 5. Overskyet. Taage. Mange Stære paa Lanterne-
ruderne; 2 Stære og 1 Skærpiber faldt. Skagen. V. 7. Dis. Sne-
byger. 2 Stære faldt. Læsø Rende. V.S.V. 4. Overtr. Enkelte
Stære og Lærker: ved Fyret om Natten; 1 Stær faldt. Østre Flak.
V. 5. Smaaregn. Endel Smaafugle ved Fyret. Anholt. V. Stiv
Kuling. Mange Stære og enkelte Lærker om Lanternen; endel
Stære faldt (intet indsendt). Hjelm. V. 5. Dis. 1 Stær faldt Kl. 3
Morgen. Nakkehoved. S.V. 5. Overtr. Dis. Flere Stære mod
Lanterneruderne; 1 faldt (ikke indsendt). Stevns. Fra Kl.12 Midn.
til 49" Form. V. S. V. €. Omkring 20 Lærker og Stære ved ”Lan-
terneruderne; 1 Lærke faldt. - Skjoldnæs. V. 5. Overtr. Endel
Stære og Solsorter ved Lanternen.
Alauda arvensis. Stevns 1.
Sturnus vulgaris. Bovbjerg 1, Skagen 2, Læsø Rende 1, Hjelm 1,
(Nakkehoved 1).
Anthus obscurus. Bovbjerg 1.
6te April.
Anholt Knob. V. 3. Regn. Mange Fugle ved Fyret; 1 Sol-
sort faldt. Hjelm. V.N.V. 6. Skyet. Enkelte Stære ved Lan-
terneruderne. Vestborg. V. 8. Overtr. Dis. 1 Stær faldt. Stevns.
Fra Kl. 9 til 12 Midn. V. 6. Fin Regn. Diset. Endel Stære ved
Fyret; ingen faldt. Omø. V. S. V. 3. Overtr. Dis. Mange Smaa-
195
(1919.)
fugle ved Ruderne mellem Kl. 3 og 5 Form.; 5 Solsorter og 3
Stære faldt (ikke indsendte).
Sturnus vulgaris. Vestborg 1, (Omø 3).
Turdus merula. Anholt Knob 1.
fidetTApril
Lyngvig. V.S. V. 5. Overtr. Endel Stære ved Ruderne; ingen
faldt Bovbjerg. S: V.75. Overtr. Dis. 1 Præstekrave og 1 Sol-
sort faldt. Rubjerg Knude. V. 3. Overtr. Regn. Dis. 2 Mistel-
drosler faldt. Skagen. S. V. 4. Dis. Byget. Omkr. 50 Stære og 1
Solsort ved Ruden; 1 Skovsneppe og 2 Stære faldt. Østre Flak.
V.S. V. 3. Overtr. 1 Stær faldt. Anholt Knob. V. S. V. 2. Overtr.
Mange Fugle ved Fyret; 1 Stær faldt. Skjoldnæs. V. SV. 4.
Overtr. Dis. Omkr. 50 Stære og 10 Solsorter ved Lanternen; 3
Stære faldt- (ikke indsendte).
Ægialitis hiaticula. Bovbjerg 1.
Scolopax rusticula. Skagen 1.
Sturnus vulgaris. Skagen 2, Østre Flak 1, Anholt Knob 1, (Skjoldnæs 3).
Turdus viscivorus. Rubjerg Knude 2.
Turdus merula. Bovbjerg 1.
8de April.
Blaavands Huk. S. 1. Taage. Stære ved Fyret. Lyngvig.
S. S. V. 3. Overtr. Nogle faa Stære og et Par Lærker ved Ruderne;
ingen faldt. Hanstholm. S.S. V. 2. Overtr. Nogle Drosler, Stære
og andre Smaafugle ved Ruderne fra Midnat til Daggry. Rubjerg
Knude. S. V. 3. Overtr. Taage. 1 Solsort faldt. Skagen. V.S. V.
3. Dis. Regn. Stære, enkelte Solsorter, Vindrosler, 1 Sneppe og 1
Bekkasin ved Ruderne; 1 Lærke og 2 Solsorter faldt. Læsø Rende.
S. S. V. 2. Overtr. Flere forskellige Fugle ved Fyret; enkelte faldt
i Søen, 2 Solsorter paa Dækket. Østre Flak. S. 2. Overtr. 1
Solsort faldt. Anholt Knob. S.V. 2. Overtr. Mange Fugle ved
Fyret; 1 Solsort faldt. Anholt. Ø.N.Ø. 3. Dis. Mange Stære
om Lanternen, enkelte faldt (ingen indsendt). Nakkehoved. S.V.
1. Overtr. Enkelte Stære ved Lanterneruderne. Stevns. Fra Kl.
12- Midn. til Fyrets Slukning S. S. Ø. og S.Ø. 2. Let diset. Endel
Stære og Lærker samt Rødkælke ved Fyret; ingen faldt. Ham-
meren. S.S.Ø. 1. Let skyet. Dis. Omkr. 50 Fuglekonger paa
Ruderne.
Alauda arvensis. Skagen 1.
Turdus merula. Rubjerg Knude 1, Skagen 2, Læsø Rende 2, Østre Flak
1, Anholt Knob 1. i
13=
196
(1919.)
Side AT
Skagen. " Ø. SØ. "3. "Dis. "Nogle Stære, Solsorter og "Røde
kælke ved Ruderne; ingen faldt. Læsø Rende. N.Ø. 3. Skyet.
Overtr. Enkelte Smaafugle ved Fyret; 1 Lærke, 2 Fuglekonger
og 1 Kvækerfinke faldt. Sejrø. N. Ø. 2. Overtr. Endel Smaa-
fugle om. Lanternen. "Stevns. "Kl. 1219—5 Form: N: ØRE DE
Med begyndende Regn viste mange Fugle sig i Fyrets Straaler,
derimellem Stirandskader, Ryler, Stære, Lærker o. m. a. 1 Vibe
faldt. Hammeren. V.S. V. 5. Overtr. Dis. 10 Stære paa Ruderne.
Vanellus cristatus. Stevns 1.
Alauda arvensis... Læsø Rende 1.
Regulus cristatus. Læsø Rende 2.
Fringilla montifringilla. Læsø Rende 1.
LØS UDEN
Sejrø., S. 3. Overtr. Enkelte Smaafugle om Lanternen; 1 Sol-
sort og 1 Gulspurv faldt (ikke indsendte). Skjoldnæs. V. S. V. 3.
Overtr. Dis. Flere Stære og Solsorter ved Lanternen.
LES SR Dr
Anholt. V.S.V. 1. Regn. Enkelte Fuglekonger om Lanternen;
1 Skovdue faldt (ikke indsendt). Vestborg. S. V. 4. Overtr. Dis
og Taage. 1 Sangdrossel faldt.
Turdus musicus. Vestborg 1.
19%de April.
Christiansø. V.S.V. 3. Taage. Forskellige Smaafugle paa
Lanternen; ingen faldt.
POET
Skjoldnæs. N.V. 3. Overtr. Dis. Mange Smaafugle i Straa-
lernekfratkyret:
PSileRAlpril
Læsø Trindel. V.S.V. 4. Overtr. Fugle ved Fyret fra Kl.
12 INS ER orm Østre Flak "VS Oyvertr. Endelssmaalngle
ved Fyret; 1 Rødkælk faldt. Stevns. Fra Kl. 8—12 Midn. S.V.
til V.S.V. 2—3. Regn. Dis. Strandskader, Ryler og Regnspover
hørtes; ingen faldt.
Erithacus rubecula. Østre Flak 1.
24de April.
Stevns. Fra Kl. 12/2—1!5 Form, V, S. V. 3. Regndis. Stor og
Lille Regnspove, desuden Ryler, Strandskader o. fl. a. hørtes og
saas i stort Antal i Fyrets Straaler; ingen faldt: Hammeren.
197
(1919.)
VÆESAVÆEM EST ræpiber falder Christiansø VS EVER 2 ER E2 DN:
Meget stærkt Træk af forskellige Smaafugle, særlig Vipstjerte, Regn-
spover, Skovduer m. fl.; 1 Kvækerfinke faldt.
Anthus arboreus. Hammeren 1.
Fringilla montifringilla. Christiansø 1
ande APET
Læsø Trindel. S. Ø. 3. Regn. Fugle ved Fyret fra Kl. 11%"
Elrenm til Es Forms EA nholr "ØRSKØFSE Ren Vindrosler Ring:
drosler og Brogede Fluesnappere paa Ruden. Hesselø. S. Ø. 3.
Overtr. Regn. 4 Vindrosler, 4. Sangdrosler, 1 Rødkælk og 2 Kvæ-
kerfinker faldt. Hjelm. ”S. S. Ø. 2. Dis. Enkelte Vindrosler og
Rødkælke paa Lanterneruderne. Sejrø. S.S. Ø. 3. Regn. Endel
Smaafugle om Lanternen; 1 Sangdrossel og 1 Kvækerfinke faldt.
Stevns. Fra Kl. 12—1?' Form. S. V. 3. Regndis. Hørtes og saas
i Fyrets Straaler Flokke af Stor og Lille Regnspove; Ryle, Rødben
og Fløjteand hørtes; mange Smaafugle ved Ruderne, særlig Rød-
stjerte; ingen faldt. Kjels Nor. S. 2. Overtr. Regn. 1 Rødkælk
og 1 Drossel faldt (intet indsendt). Æbelø. S. 1. Regndis. Enkelte
Smaafugle ved Lanterneruderne; ingen faldt. Skjoldnæs. Vind 0.
Overtr. Regn. Store Træk af Regnspover hele Natten.
Turdus iliacus. Hesselø 4.
Turdus musicus. Hesselø 4, Sejrø 1.
Erithacus rubecula. Hesselø 1.
Fringilla montifringilla, Hesselø 2, Sejrø 1.
28de April.
Sejrø. VEN: V.4. Regn. Endel Smaafugle om Lanternen; 4
Sangdrosler og 1 Stenpikker faldt.
Turdus musicus 4.
Saxicola oenanthe 1.
SODE
Blaavands Huk. N.V. Regn. Dis. Smaafugle og Ænder ved
Fyret SER jels: Nor... V.—V. S. V. 2: ”Overtr: Regn.… 1"Lærke, 2
Sangdrosler og 1 Stenpikker faldt. Skjoldnæs. S. 3. Overtr. Regn.
Træk af Rødben og Regnspover; flere Smaafugle ved Lanternerne.
Alauda arvensis. Kjels Nor 1.
Turdus musicus. Kjels Nor 2.
Saxicola oenanthe. Kjels Nor 1.
lse Ma fj:
Hanstholm. Ø.S.Ø. 2. Overtr. Nogle Regnspover flagrede
om Fyret fra Kl. 2 til Daggry. Læsø Trindel. S. 4. Skyet. Fugle
198
(1919.)
ved Fyret fra Kl. 12320—330 Form.; 1 Sangdrossel, 1.'Stenpikker
og 2 Rødkælke faldt.
Turdus musicus. Læsø Trindel 1.
Saxicola oenanthe. Læsø Trindel 1.
Erithacus rubecula. Læsø Trindel 2
den May:
Lyngvig. V. 2. Overtr. Regn. Endel forskellige Smaafugle
hørtes om Fyret uden at komme saa nær, at de kunde iagttages.
SidgeRMagt
Anholt Knob. S.V. 3. Overtr. 1 Drossel faldt (ikke indsendt).
Stepvnse Fra 10-—12Midn" SS "ØN 3) Taage: Senere SVÆR:
Taage. Fra Kl. 12 Midn. til 15" hørtes Stor og Lille Regnspove,
desuden Ryle, Rødben og Fløjteand. Paa Fyrets Ruder flere Sang-
fugle; 5 Vindrosler og 2 Snepper faldt; intet indsendt. Skjoldnæs.
V. N.V. 4. Overtr. Klart. Kl. 12% hørtes Træk af Regnspover og
Strandskader.
Stem Malt
Omø. Ø. 2. Overtr. 1 Vindrossel faldt (ikke indsendt)
182 teR Man
Skjoldnæs. N.V. 2. Overtr. Taage. Smaafugle ved Fyret fra
Klee EB herme
20de Mag
Anholt. 1 Vendehals faldt.
Iynx torquilla 1.
Søge nn
Hammeren. V.N. V. 2. Overtr. En Mængde Smaafugle svæ-
vede om Lanternen.
Ædle ul
Stevns. Fra Kl. 7 til 12 Midnat N. V. 2. Regn. Endel Stære
og Lærker ved Fyret; ingen faldt.
Iste August.
Stevns. Kl. 12 Midn. V. N.V. 5. Diset. Regnspover hørtes i
Fyrets Nærhed fra Kl. 7—12 Midn.; ingen faldt.
3ådje August.
Stevns. Fra Kl. 7 til 12 Midn. V. 5. Enkelte Lærker! ved
Fyret; ingen faldt.
4de August.
Lappegrunden. V.N.V. 5. Regnbyger; en Flok Smaafugle
vedkEynet
199
(1919.)
6te August.
Hammeren. V. 4. Klart. 1 Mudderklire faldt.
Actitis hypoleuca 1.
19de August.
Stevns. Kl. 12 Midn. V. N.V. 2. Dis. Endel Smaafugle paa
Fyrets Ruder fra Kl. 10—12 Midnat; endel Regnspover i Fyrets
Straaler; ingen faldt. Vestborg. S. V. 3. Overtr. Dis. 1 Sten-
pikker faldt.
Saxicola oenanthe. Vestborg 1.
20de August.
Lodbjerg. S. V. 1. Overtr. Regn. Dis. Enkelte Smaafugle
omkring Fyret... Hammeren. V.N.V. 1. Overskyet. Klart. 1
Gøg faldt.
Cuculus canorus. Hammeren 1.
lide "Ausust:
Læsø Trindel. V.S. V. 2. Regn. Fugle ved Fyret fra Kl. 12!"
—35% Form.
Adds Fans use
Lodbjerg. S. 1. Overtr. Dis. En Mursvale paa Ruderne.
Læsø Trindel. V.S.V. 3. Regn. Fugle ved Fyret fra Kl. 10
Efterm. til 4 Form: Læsø Rende. S.V. 3. Overtr. Regn. 2 Have-
sangere og 1 Bynkefugl faldt.
Sylvia hortensis. Læsø Rende 2.
Praticola rubetra. Læsø Rende 1.
24de August.
Lappegrunden. V. N. V. 4. Skyet. Nogle Smaafugle ved
Fyret Hammeren. V. 6. Skyet. Dis. 1 Krumnæbet Ryle og 1
Horsegøg faldt.
Tringa subarquata. Hammeren 1.
Gallinago scolopacina. Hammeren 1.
bide Amsust
Østre Flak. V.2. Skyet. 1 Havesanger faldt.
Sylvia hortensis 1.
28de August.
Lodbjerg. S.S. V. 4. Overtr. Regn. Dis. Enkelte Smaafugle
omkring Taarnet.
29de August.
Sejrø. Vind 0. Klart. Regndis. Enkelte Smaafugle om Lan-
ternen. Stevns. Kl. 12 Midn. Vind 0. Dis og Regnbyger. Mange
Trækfugle i Fyrets Straaler fra Kl. 10—12 Midnat; ingen faldt.
(1919.)
SO KER TS Sit
Blaavands Huk. S.Ø. 1. Regn. Smaafugle ved Fyret. Lyng=
vig. Ø. 3. Overtr. Regn. Nogle faa Smaafugle om Fyret. Vest-=
borg. Vind 0. Overtr. Dis. 1 Gøg faldt. Nakkehoved. S. S. Ø.
I. Overtr. Regn. Flere Smaafugle omkring Lanternen. Stevns.
KI. 4% Form. S. Ø. 2. Dis. Regnbyger. Mange Trækfugle i Fyrets
Straaler fra Kl. 12—4%9 Form.; ingen faldt. Kjels Nor. N.V.
—S. Ø.—S. V. 2. Overtr. Regn. Lyn og Torden. 1 Rødben, 1
Ryle, 2 Vendehalse, 1 Tornsanger, 4 Havesangere, 2 Gulbuge, 1
Stenpikker og 1 Broget Fluesnanper faldt. Skjoldnæs. S. Ø. 2.
Overtr. Regn. Stærkt Træk af Smaafugle; 1 Tornsanger og 1 Sten-
pixker faldt.
Totanus calidris. Kjels Nor 1.
Tringa alpina. Kjels Nor 1.
Cuculus, canorus. Vestborg 1.
Ilynx torquilla. Kjels Nor 2.
Sylvia cinerea. Kjels Nor 1, Skjoldnæs 1.
Sylvia hortensis. Kjels Nor 4.
Hypolais icterina. Kjels Nor 2.
Saxicola oenanthe. Kjels Nor 1, Skjoldnæs 1.
Muscicapa atricapilla. Kjels Nor 1.
BdenRsSenkenmbler
Østre Flak. V. N. V. 2. Skyet. Smaafugle ved Fyret; 1 Sten-
pikkerf faldt" estborg…”S. S..V. 2/1 Sivsanger faldt" lo ne
grunden. S. 3. Letskyet. Smaafugle ved Fyret.
Acrocephalus phragmitis. Vestborg 1.
Saxicola oenanthe. Østre Flak 1.
Sidens pe mm bier
Østre Flak. S.Ø. 2. Overtr. Smaafugle ved Fyret; 12 faldt,
men intet indsendt. Lappegrunden. S.S: Ø. 2. Skyet. En' Flok
Smaafugle ved Fyret. Stevns. Ø.S.Ø. 4. Dis. Mange Smaafugle
ved Fyret fra Kl. 10—12 Midn.; ingen faldt.
dens enten der
Skagen. S.S.V. 2. Dis. Endel Rødkælke og Bogfinker ved
Ruderne ; intet faldt. Læsø Trindel. S. Ø. 4. Overtr. Fugle ved
Fyret hele Natten; 1 Havesanger, 1 Løvsanger, 2 Stenpikkere, 2
Rødstjerte og 1 Broget Fluesnapper faldt. Anholt Knob. S.S. Ø.
4. Skyet. 1 Rødstjert faldt. Anholt. S. Ø. 3. Dis. Omkring 100
Smaafugle faldt; kun 1 Gærdesanger, 2 Løvsangere, 2 Gule Vip-
201
(1919.)
stjerte, 1 Træpiber, 2 Stenpikkere, 1 Bynkefugl, 3 Rødstjerte og
1 Broget Fluesnapper indsendtes, uden nøjere Talangivelser.
Sylvia curruca. Anholt 1.
Sylvia hortensis. Læsø Trindel 1.
Phyllopseustes trochilus. Læsø Trindel 1, Anholt 2.
Anthus arboreus. Anholt !.
Motacilla flava. Anholt 2.
Suxicola oenanthe. Læsø Trindel 2, Anholt 2.
Praticola rubetra. Anholt 1.
Ruticilla phoenicura. Læsø Trindel 2, Anholt Knob 1, Anholt 3.
Muscicapa atricapilla. Læsø Trindel 1, Anholt 1.
SKER September
Lodbjerg. S. 3. Overtr. Dis. En Masse Smaafugle omkring
Fyret... Hanstholm. S. 2. Skyet. En Mængde Smaafugle omkring
Fyret og mod Ruderne fra Kl. 1—4%; 7 faldt (intet indsendt).
Nordre Rønner. S. 2. Overtr. Dis. Nogle Rødstjerte ved Lan-
ternentelter Midnat:" æsø Trindel. "S; 3."Skyet:… Nogle" Fugle
paa Ruderne først paa Natten; 1 Stenpikker og 1 Rødstjert faldt.
Vestborg. Vind 0. Letskyet. Dis. 1 Rødstjert faldt.
Saxicola oenanthe. Læsø Trindel 1.
Ruticilla phoenicura. Læsø Trindel 1, Vestborg 1.
Ssdersjep term ber
Anholt Knob. V.N.V. 7. Skyet. 1 Engpiber faldt. Vest-
borsHRUSSS Overtr Dis 1 Broget" Eluesnapper” faldt:
Anthus pratensis. Anholt Knob 1.
Muscicapa atricapilla. Vestborg 1.
kodes eprfemder:
Lodbjerg. S.V. 4. Regn. Dis. En Hjejle faldt (ikke indsendt).
Hanstholm. V.S.V. 3. Overtr. Regn. Endel Terner, Viber og
enkelte Regnspover omkring Fyret fra Kl. 1 til Daggry. Stevns.
S. V. 1. Dis. Strandskader, Klyder og Rødben hørtes i Fyrets Nær-
hed fra Kl. 9—12; 1 Brokfugl faldt (ikke indsendt).
A0dersenfem ber:
Læsø Trindel. S. S. V. 2. Regn. Enkelte Smaafugle ved Fyret.
Christiansø. S.V. 6. Skyet. 4 Rødstjerte paa Ruderne; 1 faldt.
Ruticilla phoenicura. Christiansø 1.
eder septem ber
Christiansø. S. V. 3. Regn. En Flok Vipstjerte paa Ruderne ;
ingen faldt.
Addet septem ber
202
(1919.)
Østre Flak. S.S.V. 4. Overtr. Smaafugle ved Fyret; 1 faldt,
men ikke. indsendt. — Christiansø. N. V.' 4. "Klart: Forskellige
Smaafugle paa Ruderne; 2 Fuglekonger og 1 Rødstjert faldt.
Regulus cristatus 2.
Ruticilla phoenicura 1.
2 side September.
Lodbjerg. V. S. V. 5. Overtr. Dis. 4 Stære paa Ruderne; endel
Smaafugle omkring Taarnet. Læsø Rende: S. V. 7. Overtr. Regn.
Nogle Rødkælke omkring Fyret. Anholt. S.V. 4. Dis. Endel
Smaafugle i Straalerne.
GER SE KE Tb
Hanstholm. V.S. V. 3. Overtr. Regn. Nogle Ringdrosler, Vin-
drosler 0. a. Smaafugle omkring Fyret fra Midn. til omkr. Kl. 3.
Nordre Rønner. S.V. 5. Overtr. Dis. 3. Rødstjerte ved Lan-
ternenf fra Kl. 1 "til l4 Form. Læsø. Trindel/A AVESMVÆSRO Ent
Regn. Fugle ved Fyret; 1 Lærke, 1 Havesanger, 1 Sangdrossel,
2 Stenpikkere, 1 Rødstjert, 1 Rødkælk og 1 Rørspurv faldt. Østre"
Flak. V.S.V. 3. Overtr. Dis. Smaafugle ved Fyret; 3 Drosler
og 12 Rødkælke faldt, men intet indsendt. Anholt Knob. V. 5.
Skyet. 1 Havesanger, 2 Rødkælke og 1 Rørspurv faldt. Hjelm.
VESÆVæFsS NDS Elere store og "smaa" TrækfugletvedtPanterne-
ruderne. Gilleleje Flak N. V.S.V. 4. Dis. Mange Smaafugle
ved Fyret, endel faldt i Vandet; 1 Sangdrossel, 1 Ringdrossel og 1
Rødstjert faldt paa Dækket.
Alauda arvensis. Læsø Trindel 1.
Sylvia hortensis. Læsø Trindel 1, Anholt Knob 1.
Turdus musicus. Læsø Trindel 1, Gilleleje Flak N. 1.
Turdus torquatus. Gilleleje Flak N. 1.
Saxicola oenanthe. Læsø Trindel 2.
Erithacus rubecula. Læsø Trindel 1, Anholt Knob 2.
Ruticilla phoenicura. Læsø Trindel 1, Gilleleje Flak N. 1.
Emberiza schoeniclus. Læsø Trindel 1, Anholt Knob 1.
emesen temM ber: :
Nordre Rønner. V. S. V. 6. Skyet. 1 Vindrossel ved Ruderne
efter Midnat.
Sense tember
Anholt Knob. V. 5. Skyet. 1 Rødkælk faldt.
Erithacus rubecula 1.
209de September.
Anholt Knob. N.V. 3. Skyet. 1 Lærke og 3 Rødkælke faldt.
203
(1919.)
Gilleleje Flak N. N.V. 2. Regnbyger. Endel Smaafugle ved
Hyret;ELESangdrossel "og 3" Rødkælke" falde "Omø "VNV. 3:
Skyet. 1 Vindrossel faldt, ikke indsendt. Christiansø. N.V. 3.
Regn. Forskellige Smaafugle paa Ruderne; 1 Gøg, 1 Stenpikker
og 1 Rødkælk faldt. Hammeren. V.N. V. 4. Skyet. Klart. Om-
kring 50 Fuglekonger, Vipstjerte og Rødkælke paa Ruderne.
Cuculus canorus. Christiansø 1.
Alauda arvensis. Anholt Knob 1.
Turdus musicus. Gilleleje Flak N. 1.
Saxicola oenanthe. Christiansø 1.
Erithacus rubecula. Anholt Knob 3, Gilleleje Flak N. 3, Christiansø 1.
lister Okt Ober
Blaavands Huk. S. Ø. 10. Regn. Smaafugle ved Fyret. Drog-
den. S. V. 3. Letskyet. 1 Fuglekonge faldt.
Regulus cristatus. Drogden 1.
Aden Oktober
Lyngvig. S.Ø. 4. Overtr. Regn. Dis. Lærker og Drosler ved
Fyret; 12 Lærker og 2 Drosler faldt, men intet indsendt. Schultz's
Grund. S.Ø. 3. Taaget. Endel Lærker ved Fyret; mange Fugle
faldt i Vandet; 4 Lærker, 1 Sangdrossel og 2 Rørspurve faldt paa
Dækket. Sejrø. 2. Overtr. Regndis. Taage. Endel Stære, Sol-
sorter og andre. Smaafugle om Lanternen; 1 Fuglekonge faldt, men
ikke indsendt. Gilleleje Flak N. S. Ø. 2. Dis. Endel Smaa-
fugle ved Fyret; 1 Rødkælk og 2 Rørspurve faldt. Stevns. S. Ø.
2. Taagebyger. Mange Trækfugle i Fyrets Straaler og ved Ru-
derne fra Kl. 2% til 5 Form., mest Vindrosler og Blodstjerte; ingen
faldksesktelsENormEsSsøØør SF Overtr Regn Dis MangerSmaa-
fugle, Drosler og Stære ved Lanterneruderne; i Straalerne saas
Bekkasiner; 1 Fuglekonge og 2 Stære faldt, ikke indsendte.
Alauda arvensis. Schultz's Grund 4.
Sturnus vulgaris. (Kjels Nor 2).
Turdus musicus. Schultz?s Grund 1.
Erithacus rubecula. Gilleleje Flak N. 1.
Emberiza schoeniclus. Schultz's Grund 2, Gilleleje Flak N. 2.
SdjleRO:ktob'er:
Srernse eks 5 Form "N=VÆ3 Dis Mange Frækfusles ved Ey
rets Straaler og ved Ruderne; 1 Vandrikse, 1 Rødstjært og 2 Rød-
kælke faldt fra KI 1 411 5 Form?
Rallus aquaticus 1.
Ruticilla phoenicura 1.
204
(1919.)
Erithacus rubecula 2.
Ade OK RO! DIerr!
Westborg. "N:Ø.3.: "Skyet: Dis. "1 Lærke og 1 Rødstjent
fald. Stevns. N.N.Ø. 2. Regndis. Mange Trækfugle ved Ru-
derne og i Fyrets Straaler; ingen faldt. Omø. N.N. Ø. 3.
Skyet. Mange Smaafugle ved Ruderne om Efternatten; 1 Ryle og
1 Vindrossel faldt; ikke indsendte. Kjels Nor. N.N.Ø. 3—4.
Overtr.. 1 Kvækerfinke faldt. Hyllekrog... N. 2. "Regndis:ml62
Smaafugle faldt, derimellem 2 Gærdesmutter, 4 Fuglekonger, 2
Sangdrosler, 6 Rødkælke, 2 Kvækerfinker og 2 Rørspurve.
Alauda arvensis. Vestborg 1.
Troglodytes parvulus. Hyllekrog 2.
Regulus cristatus. Hyllekrog 4.
Turdus musicus. Hyllekrog 2.
Erithacus rubecula. Hyllekrog 6.
Ruticillt phoenicura. Vestborg 1.
Fringilla montifringilla. Kjels Nor 1, Hyllekrog 2.
Emberiza schoeniclus. Hyllekrog 2.
Steno ktober:
Nakkehoved. Vind 0. Taage. 1 lille Fugl faldt, ikke indsendt.
Omø. Ø. 2. Dis. Taage. Flere Kongefugle ved Ruderne. Kjels
Nor. Ø. 2. Overtr. Taage. Dis. 1 Skovdue mod Lanterneruderne;
IEVandrikse Tog "1 "Rødkælk. faldt." Skjoldnæs NØ TRRSkyer
Omkr. 30 Smaafugle ved Ruderne, derimellem Fuglekonger, Rød-
kælke og Rødstjerte.
Rallus aquaticus. Kjels Nor 1.
Erithacus rubecula. Kjels Nor 1.
teo kFober
Blaavands Huk. Vind 0. Dis. Smaafugle ved Fyret. Lod-
bjerg. S. 1. Overtr. Dis. Endel Smaafugle. omkring Taarnet.
Hanstholm. S. 2. Overtr. Endel Smaafugle og enkelte Vindrosler
omkring Fyret fra Kl. 4 til Dag. Nordre Rønner. S. V. 2. Overtr.
Dis. 1 Fugiekonge ved Ruderne efter Midnat. Læsø Trindel.
S. V. 2. Skyet.…Fugle ved Fyret fra Kl. 3!) til 62) Form "Læsø
Rende. S. S. V. Regn. Overtr. 1 Fuglekonge faldt. Hjelm. Vind
0. Taage. Nogle Rødkælke ved Ruderne efter Midnat. Vestborg.
Ssvø 1. Overtr: Taage:" 1 Fuglekonge faldt.… Omø STØR?
Overtr. Taage. 1 Graaand og 1 Lærke faldt; ikke indsendte.
Skjoldnæs. Ø.S. Ø.—S. Ø. 1—2. Flere Smaafugle ved Lanterne-
ruderne; 1 Lærke, 1 Sangdrossel og 1 Broget Fluesnapper faidt.
(1919.)
Alauda arvensis. Skjoldnæs 1.
Regulus cristatus. Læsø Rende 1, Vestborg 1.
Turdus musicus. Skjoldnæs 1.
Muscicapa atricapilla. Skjoldnæs 1.
midte Okt Ober:
Omø. V.N.V. 3. Skyet. 1 Vindrossel faldt, ikke indsendt.
IKrelsEN or SNØNSMOyertr: Taager senere V-ÆN SVENS RO Vvertr:
Dis. 1 Lærke, 1, Rørsanger og 1 Rødkælk faldt.
ÅAÅlauda arvensis. Kjels Nor I.
Acrocephalus arundinaceus. Kjels Nor 1.
Erithacus rubecula. Kjels Nor 1.
SER OKT Oder
Christiansø. N.V. 1. Overtr. Endel Smaafugle paa Ruderne;
1 Sjagger og 1 Kernebider faldt.
Turdus pilaris 1.
Coccothraustes vulgaris 1.
MdESKO KTO ber:
Kjels Nor. S. V.—V.'3. Overtr. Dis. Enkelte Stære og Dros-
ler ved Lanternen; 1 Kobbersneppe faldt.
Limosa lapponica 1.
AO dertOktoner
Schultz'"s Grund. N.V. 3. Taaget. Endel Smaafugle ved
hyiersietærke os HMAVindrossel” faldt SET elm NEVE SEK Dis!
Enkelte Rødkælke og Kongefugle ved Ruderne. Stevns. Kl. 4
Forms SAVÆLrFSkyet Dis” "Tadge til KN SP Form Endels Vin
drosler og Lærker ved Ruderne; 1 Lærke faldt Kl. 4 Form.
Alauda arvensis. Schultz's Grund 1, Stevns 1.
Turdus iliacus. Schultz's Grund 1.
BØ UEROK HO Der:
Blaavands Huk. S. 1. Dis. Enkelte Stære ved Fyret. Nordre
Rønner. S.V. 3. Dis. Overtr. 1 Vandrikse faldt før Midnat; 1
"Stær ved Taarnet om Morgenen.
Rallus aquaticus. Nordre Rønner 1.
PidideROktober:
Kubjere Knude SAV 3 KOvertr Reom Dis FEndelsSmaas
fugle om Fyret. Christiansø. S. 2. Skyet. Endel Smaafugle paa
Ruderne; 1 Stær faldt (ikke indsendt). Hammeren. S.S.Ø. 2.
Let skyet. Dis. Omkr. 50 Stære, 20 Fuglekonger og 6 Rødkælke
paa Ruderne. Dueodde N. S.S.Ø. 2. Skyet. Endel Stære paa
Ruderne.
206
(1919.)
Sturnus vulgaris. (Christiansø 1).
det OK HO bier:
Blaavands Huk. S. 1. Dis. Stære og Lærker omkring Fy-
ret. Lyngvig. S.S.Ø. 3. Overtr. Taage. Et mindre Antal. Stære
om Fyret; ingen faldt. Lodbjerg. S.3.': Overtr. Taage. Endel
Stære paa Ruderne. Østre Flak. S.S. V. 3. Overtr. Nogle Smaa-
fugle ved Fyret; ingen faldt. Stevns. Kl. 12 Midn. V. N.V. 2.
Regndis. Endel Smaafugle ved Lanterneruderne fra Kl. 10 til 12
Midn. Skjoldnæs. S.Ø. 2. Overtr. Endel Vindrosler ved Lan-
terneruderne. Christiansø. Vind 0. Overtr. Endel Smaafugle paa
Ruderne; ingen faldt.
ASER O kt ober
Blaavands Huk. Ø.S.Ø. 1. Dis. Lærker og Stære”vedlFy-
ret;k4t Lærker faldt HL ynsvig: "ØJSTØR SKO veri EDisEREnde]
Stære og nogle faa Lærker om Fyret; ingen faldt. Lodbjerg.
V.N. V-2: Overtr. 8 Lærker og 11 Stære paa Ruderne-ltBærke
faldt, ikke indsendt. Hanstholm. V. 2. Overtr.. Regn. 'Endel
Vindrosler og Stære samt flere forskellige Smaafugle ved Ruderne
frafKINS til KIF 2STRubjerg Knude. SAV: 2 Oyertr Disk Mange
Fugle ved Fyret; 24 Vindrosler, 3 Sangdrosler, 1 Solsort, 1 Rød-
kælk og 1 Snespurv faldt. Skagen. N.V. 1. Regn. Dis. Vin-
drosler, Solsorter 0. a. Smaafugle ved Ruderne; ingen faldt. Læsø
Trindel. S.Ø. 2. Overtr. Fugle ved Fyret hele Natten. Læsø
Rende. S.Ø. 2. Overtr. 2 Solsorter faldt. Fornæs. V. 2. Regn.
Flere Hundrede Drosler og Lærker kredsede om Lanternen; 20
Lærker og 80 Vindrosler faldt. Hjelm. N.N. V. 2. Regndis. En-
kelte Rødkælke og flere Sangdrosler ved Ruderne før Midnat;
flere faldt, men ingen indsendte. Sejrø. Vind 0. Overtr. Mange
Smaafugle om Lanternen; 9 Lærker og 4 Rødkælke faldt. Stevns.
Kl. 4 Form. Ø. N. Ø. 3. Overskyet. Endel Smaafugle, Lærker og
Vindrosler ved Lanterneruderne; 2 Lærker og 1 Stær faldt. Hel-
næs. Ø. 2. Overtr. Dis. Enkelte Vindrosler ved Lanterneruderne;
ingen faldt. Skjoldnæs. N. 2. Overtr. Flere Rødkælke og Lærker
ved Ruderne; 1 Lærke faldt, ikke indsendt. Christiansø. N.Ø.
3. Overtr. Mange Smaafugle paa Ruderne; 1 Stær og 1 Lærke
faldt, ikke indsendte. Hammeren. N. Ø. 3. Dis. Stære, Drosler
og Fuglekonger paa Lanterneruderne. Dueodde N. N. Ø. 1.
Taage. Mange Fuglekonger og enkelte Lærker paa Ruderne; 2 Lær-
ker, 1 Stær og 1 Fuglekonge faldt, men intet indsendt.
207
(1919.)
Alauda arvensis. Blaavands Huk 4, Fornæs 1 (20 faldt), Sejrø 9, Stevns 2.
Sturnus vulgaris. Stevns 1, (Christiansø 1), (Dueodde N. 1).
Turdus iliacus. Rubjerg Knude 24, Fornæs 1 (80 faldt).
Turdus musicus. Rubjerg Knude 3.
Turdus merula. Rubjerg Knude 1, Læsø Rende 1 (2 faldt).
Erithacus rubecula. Rubjerg Knude 1, Sejrø 4.
Emberiza nivalis. Rubjerg Knude 1.
26de Oktober.
Blaavands Huk. N.N. V. 2. Dis. Lærker ved Fyret; 1 Rød-
kælk faldt. Lodbjerg. V. N.V. 2. Overtr. 14 Stære, 10 Lærker
og 2 Rødkælke paa Ruderne. Læsø Trindel. S. Ø. 2. Overtr.
Fugle ved Fyret hele Natten; 1 Lærke, 1 Stær, 1 Vindrossel og
1 Rødkælk faldt. Læsø Rende. S. V. 2. Overtr. Regnbyger. Store
Flokke Fugle ved Fyret, flere faldt udenbords; 11 Lærker, 2 Fugle-
konger, 6 Vindrosler, 5 Solsorter og 2 Rødkælke faldt; kun 6 Fugle
indsendtes. Østre Flak. N. V. 2. Overtr. Fin Regn. Mange Fugle
ved Fyret; mange faldt i Vandet, 1 Skovsneppe, 1 Horsegøg, 49
Lærker, 8 Stære, 17 Vindrosler og 7 Rødkælke faldt paa Dækket.
Hals Barre. V. 1. Overtr. Dis. 1 Blishøne, 1 Vandrikse, 11 Lær-
ker, 23 Vindrosler, 2 Sangdrosler, 10 Solsorter og 1 Rødkælk faldt.
Anholt. N. 1. Regn. Mange Stære, endel Rødkælke og Fugle-
"konger om Lanternen; 5 Stære faldt, ikke indsendte. Hesselø.
N. V. 2. Overtr. Regn. Mange Fugle omkring Fyret; 1 Blishøne,
6 Lærker, 2 Stære, 21 Vindrosler og 1 Solsort faldt. Schultz's
Grund. N. V. 3. Overtr. Fin Regn. Fugle ved Fyret hele Natten;
flere Hundrede Fugle faldt i Vandet; 1 Blishøne, 1 Vandrikse, 17
Lærker, 1 Stær, 1 Fuglekonge, 48 Vindrosler, 1 Sangdrossel, 3
Solsorter, 8 Rødkælke og 1 Snespurv faldt paa Dækket. Sejrø.
N. V. 2. Regndis. Mange Smaafugle om Lanternen; 1 Stær, 17
Vindrosler og 1 Sangdrossel faldt. Stevns. Fra Kl. 1 til 5 Form.
N. V. 2. Dis. Endel Smaafugle ved Lanterneruderne, særlig Lær-
ker, Stære og Rødkælke; 1 Lærke faldt. Kjels Nor. N.N. V. 1.
Overtr. Mange Smaafugle, Rødkælke, Gærdesmutter, Stære 0. a.
” ved Ruderne; 1 Drossel og 6 Rødkælke faldt; ikke indsendte.
Fulica atra. Hals Barre 1, Hesselø 1, Schultz?s Grund 1.
Rallus aguaticus. Hals Barre 1, Schultz's Grund 1.
Gallinago scolopacina. Østre Flak 1.
Scolopax rusticula. Østre Flak 1.
Alauda arvensis. Læsø Trindel 1, Læsø Rende 2 (11 faldt), Østre Flak
2 (49 faldt), Hals Barre 11, Hesselø 6, Schultz?s Grund 2 (17 faldt),
Stevns 1.
208
(1919.)
Sturnus vulgaris. Læsø Trindel 1, Østre Flak 1 (8 faldt), (Anholt 5),
Hesselø 2, Schultz's Grund 1, Sejrø 1.
Regulus cristatus.. Læsø Rende 1 (2 faldt), Schultz's Grund 1.
Turdus iliacus.. Læsø Trindel 1, Læsø Rende 1 (6 faldt), Østre Flak 2
(17 faldt), Hals Barre 23, Hesselø 14 (21 faldt), Schultz?”s Grund 6
(48 faldt), Sejrø 17.
Turdus musicus. Hals Barre 2, Schultz's Grund 1, Sejrø 1.
Turdus merula. Hals Barre 10, Hesselø 1, Schultz”s Grund 1 (3 faldt).
Erithacus rubecula. Blaavands Huk 1, Læsø Trindel 1, Læsø Rende 2,
Østre Flak 2 (7 faldt), Hals Barre 1, Schultz”s Grund 2 (8 faldt).
Emberiza nivalis. Schultz's Grund 1.
ride Oktober
Nordre Rønner. N. V.—V.S. V. 2. Overtr. Flere Stære ved
Ruderne hele Natten; 1 Lærke og 1 Solsort faldt.
Alauda arvensis 1.
Turdus merula 1. .
asde Oktober:
Blaavands Huk. Ø.N.Ø. 2. Taage. Lærker og Stære ved
Fyret; 1 Lærke faldt, ikke indsendt. Skagen. V. N.V. 2. Regn-
dis. Vindrosler, Solsorter og andre Smaafugle ved Ruderne; 1 Vand-
rikse, 1 Rørvagtel, 1 Stær, 1 Vindrossel, 1 Rødkælk, 2 Kvæker-
finker og 4 Snespurve faldt.
Rallus aquaticus. Skagen 1.
Porzana maruetta. Skagen 1.
Sturnus vulgaris. Skagen 1.
Turdus iliacus. Skagen 1.
Erithacus rubecula. Skagen 1.
Fringilla montifringilla. Skagen 2.
Emberiza nivalis. Skagen 4.
AO deRO kt Ober:
Blaavands Huk. Ø. 4. Regn. Dis. Vindrosler ved Fyret; 1
Krage; 2 "Lærken 4" Vindrosler, 2" Sangdrosler "og FI ESOlsorlde
Hirtshals. Ø. 6. Overtr. 1 Skovsneppe (ikke indsendt) og 3 Trold-
ænder faldt. Omø. Ø. 6. Overtir. Regn. Dis. 1 Lærke faldt (ikke
indsendt). Skjoldnæs. Ø. 2. Overtr. Regn. Flere Stære og Lær-
ker ved Lanterneruderne.
Fuligula cristata. Hirtshals 1 (3 faldt).
Corvus cornix. Blaavands Huk 1.
Alauda arvensis. Blaavands Huk 2.
Turdus iliacus. Blaavands Huk 4.
Turdus musicus. Blaavands Huk 2.
Turdus merula. Blaavands Huk 1.
(1919.)
Sker Oktober
Kjels Nor. Omløb. Vind. 1—6. Overtr. Regn. 1 Enkelt Bek-
kasin, 1 Fuglekonge og 4 Vindrosler faldt.
Limnocryptes gallinula 1.
Regulus cristatus 1.
Turdus iliacus 4.
3dje November.
Sprogø. 1 Vandrikse faldt.
Rallus aquaticus 1.
Stern NI ove mm ber
Dueodde N. N.Ø. 2. Overtr. Regn. Dis. Endel Fuglekonger
paa Ruderne.
JæSideRN 'olv em ber '
Dueodde N. S. 1. Overtr. Sne. Enkelte Lærker og Bogfinker
paa Ruderne.
24de November.
Omø. V.S.-V. 6. Overskyet. 2 Blishøns og 1 Lærke faldt:
ikke indsendte.
AbILERN ovem ber
Omø. V. 2. Overtr. 1 And faldt, men indsendtes ikke.
28de November.
Nakkehoved. Vind 0. Taage. 1 Lærke faldt; ikke indsendt.
BERN ovember:
Østre Flak. V. 2. Overtr. Dis. Enkelte Smaafugle ved Fyret;
1 Snespurv faldt.
Emberiza. nivalis 1.
Aden mIber:
Lodbjerg. S.V. 3. Overtr. Dis. 1 Vandrikse faldt.
Rallus aquaticus 1.
Siden ecember:
Skjoldnæs. S. V. 4. Overtr. Dis. En udvoksen Han-Ederfugl
paa Platformen under Lanternen; fangedes, men ikke indsendt.
Forskellige Iagttagelser fra Fyrene.
Sædenstrand Fyr. Intet Fuglefald. — September:.I16de
saas flere Flokke Knortegæs paa Flakket. — P. Larsen.
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 72. 14
210
(1919.)
Blaavands Huk Fyr. August: 6te fløj 30 Regnspover lang-
somt mod N., flyvende lavt over Etablissementet. — Oktober:
15de N.Ø. 1. Letskyet. Omkring 100 Skovskader trak rundt om
Fyret"K1 "8" Form! "C.G. Christensen.
Lyngviet Fyre Februar: 23de saas tendels Viber Ok
tober: 2den fløj c. 30 Vildgæs forbi Fyret mod S. Ø. — C. A.
Hansen.
Bovbjerg Fyr. Januar: I13de saas en Mængde Stære paa
Markerne. 30te saas 2 Viber flyvende fra V. ind over Land. —
Marts: 4Åde saas 2 Lærker. 10de hørtes Strandskader. 13de
saas flere Viber. 15de saas Hættemaager og Præstekraver.': 20de
saas mange Stære. — April: 7/de fløj 8 Regnspover fra S. V. til
N. Ø. 10de hørtes en Flok Regnspover. — Maj: 12fte hørtes
Gøgen; store Flokke Vildgæs fløj fra S. til N. — A. Hansen.
Thyborøn Fyr... Marts: Idje .trak en …Flok- Viber moden!
Ste trak en Flok Ederfugle mod N. I1Å4de trak en Flok Viber
mod Ø. 17de var en Flok Stære ved Fyret. — April: Yde
trak en Flok Krager mod N.. — Maj: 28de trak flere Flokke
Knortegæs mod N. —— September: 2den trak flere Flokke Knorte-
gæs ind i Fjorden. 7de trak en Flok Knortegæs mod S. — Ok-
tober: 2den trak flere Flokke Knortegæs ind i Fjorden. — S.
Ngelser
Fløjen"Fyr: —— Intet Fuglefald. — "A, T. Friis!
Skagen Fyr. November: 30te iagttoges flere Svanetræk.
FESBrandtebetersen:
Skagens Rev Fyrskib. Marts: 3dje vare enkelte Lærker ved
Fyrskibet; 5 Viber fløj mod Ø. 4de vare mange Lærker ved Fyr-
skibet; en Krage fløj i vestlig Retning. 12te saas mange Lærker.
Ilte fløj endel Krager mod Ø. — April: 6fte fløj store Flokke
Krager mod Ø. 7de fløj store Flokke Krager mod V. &de fløj
enkelte Flokke Krager imod N. Ø. —- September: 7de vare
flere Vipstjerter og Lærker ved Skibet. — A. Pedersen.
Nordre Rønner Fyr. Januar: 3dje kom 3 Svaner, der op-
holdt sig her til d. 17de Febr. — Februar: 15de fløj 11 Svaner
fra Ø. til V. 21de opholdt en Lærke sig i Haven. 28de opholdt
3 Svaner sig i Fyrets Nærhed. — Marts: 3dje opholdt en Flok
Regnspover sig i Nærheden af Fyret. 4de vare 1 Strandskade og
I Vibe i Nærheden af Fyret. 17de observeredes Præstekraven.
+ br et 4
s
ly
-
£
e
k
ist
(1919).
29de saas Hættemaagen og Ternen. 30te saas Bogfinker. —
April: 2den opholdt 1 Stær og 1 Sangdrossel sig i Haven. Ste
var en Solsort i Haven. &de var Rødkælken i Haven. Ode vare
Ringdroslen og Vipstjerten i Haven. .30te saas Ringdroslen i Ha-
ven. — September: 23de saas 1 Vipstjert og 1 Rødkælk ved
Fyret. 24de saas 1 Fuglekonge, 1 Skovkrage og 1 Rødstjert i
Fyrets Nærhed. — Oktober: 15de opholdt 2 Skovskader sig
ved Fyret. . I6de saas nogle Knortegæs i Fyrets Nærhed. 26de
saas Fuglekonger og Rødkælke ved Fyret. — November: I3de
fløj 2 Svaner fra N. til S. Kl. 5 Efterm. 14de vare 5 Svaner i
Dammen stra "Kl: 10 "Form. til KEMSEfterm. == YPYSyPedersen.
Læsø Rende Fyskib. Oktober: Ide fløj store Flokke Kra-
ger i Løbet af Dagen mod V. — A. Jacobsen.
Østre Flak Fyrskib. April: 28de fløj c. 50 Vildgæs i Flok
fra V. mod N. Ø. — Juni: 7de var en Strandskade ved Skibet.
— August: &de fløj en Flok Regnspover fra S.V. mod N.N.Ø.
— September: 28de var en Høg ved Skibet hele Dagen. —
Oktober: 15de fløj 6 Vildgæs fra V. mod Ø. — December:
løde fløj en stor Flok Graagæs fra S. V. mod N.Ø. — A. A.
Forsie:
Anholt Knøb Fyrskib. April: Fra Yde til 15de opholdt
mange Lærker, Bogfinker, Gærdesmutter, Solsorter, Stære o. fl. a.
sig ved Skibet. Maj: IOde fløj en Flok Krager mod Ø. -— H. S.
Kenan
Anholt Fyr. Januar: 7de trak endel Lærker og Stære mod
S. Ø. 12te saas Viben. — Marts: 5te saas Strandskaden paa
Stranden. — April: 3dje stort Kragetræk mod Ø. Ilådde viste
endel Høge sig paa Øen. — Havmaager, Stormmaager, Ederfugle,
Strandskader, Skalleslugere og Gravænder yngle paa Øen. — Juli:
26de kom en Hejre fra V. om Efterm. — September: 26de vare
3 Graagæs ved Fyret. 3Ote vare endel Bogfinker ved Fyret. 1I5de
stort Kragetræk mod V. — A. Rasmussen.
Hesselø Fyr. Februar: 23de saas Stær og Vibe. — Marts:
Ste saas Strandskaden. &de saas Gravanden. — Maj: &S&de saas
Svalen. — K. A. Jensen.
Spodsbjerg Fyr. — Intet Fuglefald. -——- P. Christensen.
Schultz's Grund Fyrskib. Februar: 16de var en Ugle ved
Skibet og hvilede i ”/> Time; fløj da bort mod S. — Maj: IIte
VE sg
PAZ
(1919.)
trak 14 store Flokke Knortegæs i Dagens Løb mod N.Ø. I1åIde
hørtes Regnspover. — December: Iste opholdt en Hornugle sig
ved Skibet. — K. G. T. Hald.
Fornæs Fyr. Marts: 28de trak mange Flokke Ederfugle mod
S. —- April: 4de trak mange Flokke Ederfugle mod S. 7de
trak en Hejre fra S. mod N. Ø. — Maj: Ifte fløj 1 Vildgaas fra
S. i N.Ø. Øde saas den første Svale. — Juli: Idje trak 5
Regnspover (smaa) fra N. Ø. mod S. V. 13de fløj 6 Hejrer fra
N. Ø. mod S. V. 22de trak 3 Regnspover (store) fra N. Ø. mod
S. V. 29de trak 50 Regnspover (store) fra N. Ø. mod S. V. —
August: 9de trak 1 Regnspove (stor) fra N. Ø. mod S. V. 28de
ligeledes. — Oktober: Åde trak en Hejre fra N. mod S. 29de
vare mange, store Flokke Ederfugle paa Træk fra N. mod S. 30fe
ligeledes; 2 Skarve og 8 Svaner fløj fra N. mød S. — A: Kruse.
Hjelm Fyr. Februar: 20de saas den første Stær. 22de
hørtes Lærken synge. — Marts: I12te saas Maager og Strand-
skader i større Flokke ved Øen. Sidste Uge i Marts kom Maa-
gerne parvis og i stort Antal til Øens Lavland, ligesom flere Viber
og Strandskader saas sammesteds. — April: 4de saas en Vip-
stjert paa Marken. Fra 6te til iOde saas flere store Flokke Stære.
23de fløj en Stork over Øen, kommende fra S. — Maj: Iste
fandtes det første Maageæg paa Øen. I første Uge af Maj saas
et stort Antal Gulspurve paa Øen. &de saas de første Svaler. —
HSAWÆNKElSENn:
Sletterhage Fyr. — Intet Fuglefald. — December: 23de
trak 6 Svaner mod V. — E. Holm Hansen.
Sejrø Fyr. I sidste Halvdel af Oktober opholdt en Masse
Ederfugle og Ænder sig paa Revet. Fuglene synes nu gennem-
gaaende at holde sig længere til Søs end tidligere, muligvis fordi
defnu jages "mere end" før. — J..ZENTeTsen:
Gilleleje Flak N. Fyrskib. Februar: 12te fløj nogle Lær-
ker syngende omkring Skibet om Formiddagen. — Marts: Ilte
fløj kr aVvViber fraE NØ: til "SV. 12fe fløj 40Viber frå ENSØ SE
til S. V. — Oktober: 6fte opholdt 3 Skovskader sig ombord en
Tid om Efterm. 10de fløj mange Krager mod S. V. I12te lige-
ledes. — Chr. Hansen.
Lappegrundens Fyrskib. Februar: 22de fløj i Taagen en
Flok Smaafugle imod Rigningen; nogle faldt overbord. — Marts:
213
(1919.)
l4de vare flere Flokke Smaafugle ved Skibet; fløj senere bort i
vestlig Retning. — Juli: Yde fløj 20 Svaner imod N. — Ok-
tober: Ste fløj 2 Flokke Vildgæs mod N. Ode fløj en stor Flok
Graagæs mod N. 20de fløj tlere Flokke Graagæs mod N. V.
22de fløj en Flok Ederfugle mod N. 23de fløj flere Flokke Eder-
fugle og Gæs imod N. 25de fløj en stor Flok Graagæs mod N.V.
29de fløj en Flok Svaner mod N. — November: 10de fløj en
Flok Svaner mod S. I3de fløj nogle Krager mod Ø. — Decem-
ber: 16de fløj 2 Flokke Havlitter mod S. — I.C. Jensen.
Middelgrundens Fyr. — Intet Fuglefald. — Saxtorph.
Trekroner Fyr. — Intet Fuglefald. — H. E. Andresen.
Nordre Røse Fyr. — Januar: I Løbet af Maaneden saas
enkelte” Ederfugle -og mindre Flokke Dykænder: -— Februar:
ligeledes, dog blev sidst paa Maaneden Flokkene større, saaledes
at flere hundrede Dykænder laa og dykkede omkring Fyret. — I
Marts såas kun smaa Flokke Dykænder og enkelte Ederfugle
omkring Fyret. — I April viste kun enkelte Dykænder sig. —
Maj: ligeledes. — I Juni og Juli saas ingen Søfugle ved Fyret.
— Resten af Aaret saas kun Maager og Krager paa Vej til og fra
Saltholmen. — H.S. L. Madsen.
Drogden Fyrskib. Januar: I6de fløj 8 Vildgæs fra Ø. mod
V. — Februar: 13de fløj 2 Vildgæs fra V. mod Ø. -- Marts:
25de fløj 7 Vildgæs fra V. mod Ø. — Oktober: Idje fløj flere
store Flokke Smaafugle mod V.; nogle hvide Vipstjerte opholdt sig
paa Skibet og fløj imod S.V. 4Åde vare flere Smaafugle paa Skibet
om Efterm., travlt beskæftigede med at fange Insekter; saaledes
saas Blaamejser, Gærdesmutter og Fuglekonger. dte vare Gærde-
smutter og Mejser paa Dækket hele Dagen. Ofte vare nogle Rød-
kælke og Mejser paa Skibet hele Dagen. 7de vare Rødkælke paa
Skibet. 12te kredsede en Aalekrage om Skibet om Efterm. og
fløj derefter mod V. — Jul. S. Jensen.
Refsnæs Fyr. Januar: Store Flokke Ederfugle, Sortænder,
Havlitter og enkelte Knortegæs paa Revet udfor Fyret. — Fe
bruar: Store Flokke Ederfugle, Lysænder (Fuligula marila) og
Sortænder opholdt sig paa Revet. — Marts: Enkelte Flokke Eder-
fugle fløj mod N. Ø., endel Skovkrager fløj mod Ø. — April:
Fra Midten af Maaneden fløj store Flokke Ederfugle mod N. Ø.
og endel Skovkrager mod Ø. — Maj: Idje fløj en Hejre mod V.
214
(1919.)
— Juli: Enkelte Flokke Ederfugle opholdt sig paa Fjorden. —
Augustiu ligeledes. — September: Enkelte Ederfugle trak fra
N. Ø. mod S. V. — Oktober: Fra Åde til Maanedens Udgang
trak store Flokke Skovkrager mod V. — November: Store Flokke
Sortænder, Ederfugle og Havlitter; enkelte Knortegæs. — De-
cember: 29de vare 4 Svaner ved Stranden. — N. C. Svendsen.
Sprogø: Fyr "Februar: 26de' saas 2" Viber: "27 dekvargen
Stær ved Fyret. — Marts: S&de kom flere Strandskader og Viber.
Ilte saas enkelte Stormmaager. 13de saas stort Kragetræk fra
V. til Ø. — April: 20de fandtes de første Maageæg. — Maj:
S&de saas Svalen. — Juni: I&de saas de første Strandmaageunger.
— "August: 24de havde Maagerne forladt Øen. — September:
6te saas 'store Flokke Stære. 26de saas Svalerne sidste Gang.
—- Oktober: 18de stort Kragetræk fra Ø. til V. Ualmindelig
mange Svømmefugle have hele 'Efteraaret opholdt sig omkring Øen.
SK ensen
Helleholm Fyr. Intet Fuglefald. — Januar: 15de saas Grav-
anden. — Februar: 1&8de saas Viben og Stæren. — Marts: 20de
saas Stormmaagen og Ternen. — Viben, Strandskaden, Stormmaagen,
Ternen, Graaanden, Gravanden og Skalleslugeren have ruget paa
Øen iaar. — P. Larsen.
Vejrø Fyr. Februar: I&de saas Lærken første Gang her
paa Fyrjorden. — April: I2te saas Gravanden ved Stranden. —
Intet Fuglefald. — Graaanden og Skalleslugeren yngle her -paa
Øen. Stormmaagerne yngle her mere og mere Aar efter Aar,
fordi Gaardmændene freder om dem; tidligere tog Fiskerne Æg-
gene; iaar ynglede her flere end nogensinde i de 6 sidste Aar.
— C. Madsen.
Taars Fyr. Intet Fuglefald. — W. Pedersen.
Albuen Fyr. Intet Fuglefald. — H. C. Mogensen.
Kjels Nor Fyr. Februar: 23de saas Vibe- og Lærketræk over
Havet. — Chr. Ryder.
Æbelø Fyr. Maj: I Dagene fra d. 12te til d. 16de trak
store Flokke Gæs fra S. V. mod N. Ø.'— Intet Fuglefald. Fyret
nedsat i Lysstyrke siden September og ingen stadig Vagt. Nogle
faa Ænder, Havlitter og Ederfugle have opholdt sig paa Revet
hele Efteraaret. — G. A. Petersen.
Strib Fyr. Februar: 10de saas Stæren ved Fyret. — Sep-
PAS
(1919.)
tember: 24de trak 2 Flokke Gæs mod S. 26de trak en Flok
Gæs mod S. 29de ligeledes. — Intet Fuglefald. — M. Ungerskov.
'Bosøl Fyr: Intet Fuglefaldf-SSNSHaT sem
Helnæs Fyr. Oktober: 22de saas en. Flok Ederfugle i Far-
vandet udfor Fyret; Kragetræk mod S.V. — 23de ligeledes. 25de
og Dagene derom ses jævnlig store Træk af Blaakrager forbi Fyret
i S. V.-lig Retning; fra denne Dag og Aaret ud holdt store Flokke
Ederfugle til i Farvandet S.V. og V. for Fyret; af og til trækker
Graaænder og Knortegæs forbi baade i nordlig og sydlig Retning.
— S. P. Mortensen.
Skjoldnæs Fyr. Maj: 7de saas Svalen første Gang ved Fyret.
— H. Wirtz.
Christiansø Fyr. Store Flokke Havlitter opholdt sig ved Øen
hele Vinteren. -—— April: Ilte saas Storken første Gang. 23de
fløj 2 store Flokke Svaner mod N. om Eftermiddagen. 30fte træk-
ker - Havlitterne bort mod N. — Maj: Ilte saas Svalen første
Gang. 15de fløj 15 Storke mod N. N.V. — November: Iste
fløj 4 Svaner mod S. V. — Ederfugle, Maager, Terner og Skalle-
slugere ruge som sædvanligt paa Græsholmen. — H. M. Hansen.,
Hammeren Fyr. . April: 16de trak 6 Svaner mod N. Ø.
September: 10de trak en større Flok Svaner mod S. — A. M.
Dam.
Dueodde N. Fyr. Efter at Fyret havde været slukket siden
iste December 1917, blev det først tændt d. 20de Oktober 1919,
hvorfor der i Mellemtiden intet Fuglefald har været. — Liisberg-
Poulsen.
Harbølle Pynt Fyr. Intet Fuglefald. — A. J. Olsen.
Hestehoved Fyr. Intet Fuglefald. — N. Christensen.
Gedser Fyr. Intet Fuglefald. — J. P. Nielsen.
Hyllekrog Fyr. Marts: 3dje saas c. 20 Viber i Flok trække
fra S. mod N. Fra Slutningen af Marts Maaned til Midten af
April ses daglig større og mindre Flokke Knortegæs, kommende
fra V.; de smide sig paa den indvendige Side af Øen, hvor de
opholde sig til midt i Maj. — April: 23de trak adskillige Flokke
Regnspover fra V. mod Ø. forbi Fyret. — I November og De-
cember ses Svaner næsten daglig, trækkende i alle mulige Ret-
ninger, dog mest mod Ø; endel af dem nedskydes af Strandjægerne.
ke NB Hø eg
216
(1919.)
Meddelelser om mindre almindelige danske Fugle.
Anas strepera.
Meddelelsen om den i forrige Aarsberetning S. 223 omtalte
Knarand fra Arnborg har efter Meddelerens Oplysning vist sig at
bero paa en Misforstaaelse; det samme maa da antages at gælde
den sammesteds omtalte Knarand fra Kongsdal.
Mergus albellus.
En Lille Skallesluger, gammel Han, blev skudt ved Velling nær
Ringkøbing d. 29de Januar 1919; en Hun blev skudt ved Næst-
ved d. 5te Februar 1919; begge Fugle sendtes til Conservator H.
PÆan'sen!
Coturnix communis.
En Vagtel, voksen Han, blev skudt ved Kongsdal ved Mørkøv
ale re Ja kro TO Emeddeler Conservator HÆDRE am sene
Procellaria leucorrhoa.
En Stor Stormsvale fangedes paa Schultz's Grund Fyrskib i
September 1918; det udstoppede Skind foræredes til Marstal Skole,
meddeler" Kommunelærer HR: EevinsenEnsklanblevæskudt
d. 12te December 1920 i Lillebelt, meddeler Conservator C. N.
Wimnideballermdertudstoppede "Fuglen? En Huntblevskudtved
Varde d. 25de September 1919, en Hun ved Sønder Boel, Løn-
borg, d. 28de September 1919 og endelig et Individ ved Enges-
vang d. 28de September 1919, meddeler Conservator H.P. Hansen,
der modtog disse 3 Fugle til Udstopning.
Puffinus griseus (P. fuliginosus).
En Sodfarvet Skrofe, en udvoksen Han, fangedes i de første
Dage af November 1920 i det sydlige Kattegat, i Farvandet N. for
Sjælland, c. 10 Sømil V. for Kullen; medens den dykkede, fange-
des den paa Krog, c. 6 m under Vandet; kun dette ene Individ
iagttoges, opholdende sig mellem Maagerne, der flokkedes om Fisker-
baadene…Den levende Fugl sendtes af Hr: Carl! Be'chetiiikoo=
logisk Have, hvor den imidlertid kun levede i kort Tid; den for-
æredes da til Zoologisk Museum, hvor dens Skind findes opstillet.
Arten, der er hjemmehørende i Sydhavet og kendes ynglende paa
Øerne ved New Zealand, f. Eks. paa Chatham Øerne, viser sig
i store Flokke i Stillehavet og ligeledes om Efteraaret ikke helt
ualmindeligt i de nordlige Dele af Atlanterhavet; ses jævnligt ved
PUT
(1919.)
Færøerne i August, September og Oktober og forekommer nu og
da ved de brittiske Øer og i Nordsøen; ogsaa ved Norges Kyst,
paa Helgoland og langs Europas Vestkyster har den vist sig. Arten
er ny for det egentlige Danmark.
Puffinus anglorum.
Skrofer har ret jævnlig været sete i de senere Aar i Lillebelt;
herfra har Conservator C. N. Windeballe haft ikke mindre end
6 Individer til Udstopning.
Fulmarus glacialis.
En Stormfugl, en voksen Hun, fangedes ifølge Meddelelse fra
Seminarielærer Chr. Hauch ved Jonstrup Seminarium, N. V. for
Ballerup, d. 25de Januar 1921, hvor den sad i Græsset og lod sig
skrigende tage med Hænderne; Skindet i Seminariets Samling,
Kropskelettet i Zoologisk Museum. — En udvoksen Hun blev skudt
ved Nørre Nebel d. 25de September 1919, meddeler Conservator
HÆæBsEMAnsen.
Ofiskrarda
En Trappe, voksen Hun, blev skudt d. 12te Marts 1920 paa
Hesselø; den var alene og havde kun opholdt sig faa Timer paa
Øen. Hoved, Ben og endel Fjer indsendtes af Fyrmester K. A. Jen-
sen til Zoologisk Museum.
Larus minutus.
To Dværgmaager, begge unge Hanner, bleve skudte i Lillebelt
d. Ste Oktober og d. 8de November 1920; begges opstillede Skind
kom gennem Conservator C. N. Windeballe til Zoologisk Mu-
seum. En voksen Han blev skudt ved Ansager, N. Ø. for Varde,
d. 2den December 1919; Skindet opstillet i Herning Museum, med-
deler "Conservator H. P. Hansen.
Larus fuscus.
EnkSildemaase/ Hun blev "skudt"i Lillebelt "d:"6te "Oktober
1920, meddeler Conservator C. N. Windeballe.
Larus glaucus.
En Graamaage, en ung Hun, blev skudt d. 18de December
1919 ved Ringkøbing, meddeler Conservator H. P. Hansen; Krop-
længden 68, Vingen 43,5 cm.
Larus leucopterus.
En Hvidvinget Maage, ung Han, blev skudt ved Sønderho d.
23de November 1919, meddeler Conservator H. P. Hansen; Krop-
længden 58,5, Vingen 40,5 cm.
(1919.)
Sterna caspia.
En Rovterne, gammel Fugl, blev desværre skudt paa Hirts-
holmene d. 5te Juli 1919; Fyrmester K. Agerskov indsendte Ho-
vedet til Zooiogisk Museum. Den hørte til et Par, der det Aar
havde ynglet paa Græsholmen og havde 2 Unger; den tilovers-
blevne af Forældrene skal have opfodret Ungerne. Rovterner har
i en længere Aarrække ynglet paa Græsholmen; det maa i høj
Grad beklages, at denne sjeldne Fugl, der nu er udryddet som
Ynglefugl paa Vesterhavsøerne, ikke har faaet Fred paa denne vor
eneste Yngleplads, hvor den atfer havde faaet Fodfæste. Ved Hen-
vendelse til Marineministeriet er Arten nu strengt fredet og under
Opsyn paa Øen, saafremt den atter skulde vise sig der.
Botaurus stellaris.
Rørdrummer synes i de sidste Aar at være blevne mindre
sjeldne end tidligere, bl. a. at regne efter de mange skudte Indi-
vider En "Han”skudt ved Staby v: Ulfsborg "dmi sdendecembEsr
1918, en Hun ved He d. 12te Maj 1919, en Han ved Ringkøbing
du llte"Maj"19197"en" Hun ved Vemb d; 29de "Jul lor omereseke
ved Østerskov ,v. Tryggelev d. 3dje Februar 1919, en Hun ved
Ringkøbing d. Ilte August 1920, et Stk. paa Langeland i Februar
1919 og et ved Lem ved Ringkøbing d. 18de December 1920;
alle disse Fugle modtog Conservator H. P. Hansen til Udstop-
ning. Ved Møgeltønder blev en Rødrum skudt d. 3dje August 1920,
ved Krusaa et Stk. d. 20de- August 1920, ved Ribe et Stk. d. 22de
August 1920 og et andet Stk. sammesteds i Slutningen af August
1920; alle kom til Conservator M. Clausen. Det vilde være i høj
Grad ønskeligt, om man i langt højere Grad, end Tilfældet er, vilde
skaane denne ejendommelige. Fugl.
Phalacrocorax graculus.
En Topskarv, ung Han, blev skudt d. 20de Januar 1919 ved
Ringkøbing; en gammel Han i Yngledragt blev skudt ved Løkken
d. 20de Marts 1920 af Dyrlæge Nissen; begge Fugle modtog
Conservator H. P. Hansen til Udstopning. En Han blev skudt
ved Skjern d. 6te Januar 1920, meddeler Conservator Joh. Larsen;
Kroplængden 72,6, Vingen 26,4 cm.
Sula bassana.
En Sule, gammel Hun, blev skudt d. 4de April 1919 ved ØI-
god v. Varde, meddeler Conservator H.P. Hansen. En udvoksen
219
(1919).
Han blev, efter Meddelelse af Conservator M. Clausen, fanget
d. 18de November 1920 af Gaardejer H. Thomsen, Harreby i
Slesvig, c. 3 Mil fra Kysten; dem kom” flyvende højt oppe- og
dalede ned og satte sig paa en Høstak udenfor hans Gaard; han
satte da en Stige til Stakken og gik op og fangede Fuglen, hvis
Bugparti var tilsmudset med Tjære, saaledes som det ofte er set
og omtalt hos. Søfugle i de sidste Krigsaar. Fra Hr. N. Bloch
modtog Zoologisk Museum to udvoksne Suler, Han og Hun, skudte
ved Nymindegab henholdsvis d. 25de og d. 23de Januar 1921.
Falco vespertinus.
En Rødfodfalk, Hun, fangedes omkring d. Iste August 1920 i
Østersøen c. 1 Mil Ø. for Bornholm; den kom efter Meddelelse
fra Direktør W. Dreyer levende til: Zoologisk Have, hvor den
stadig er at se. — En ung Hun blev skudt d. Ste September 1920
ved Ølgod, S. for Tarm, meddeler Conservator H. P. Hansen;
Skindet i Herning Museum.
Aquila fulva.
En Kongeørn, en ikke udvoksen Han, blev skudt ved Guld-
ager d. 2den Januar 1919; et andet Individ dræbtes ved Juellinge,
Aunede, d.23de Oktober 1919, meddeler Conservator H.P.Hansen.
Haliaetus albicilla.
En Havørn, ung Hun, blev skudt d. 24de Oktober 1919 paa
Thurø, meddeler Conservator Joh. Larsen.
Milvus ictinus.
En Glente blev skudt d. 4de April 1919 ved Lohals paa Lange-
land af Gaardejer G. A. Clausen; det opstillede Skind kom gen-
nem Stud. theol. H Lange til Zoologisk Museum.
Pandion haliaétus.
En Fiskeørn, Han, blev skudt i Selchausdal Skov ved Ruds
Vedby d. I18de August 1919, meddeler Conservator Joh. Larsen.
En Han blev skudt i Klinteskoven ved Ruds Vedby d. 19de August
1920; dens Skind kom til Zoologisk Museum gennem Conservator
H. P. Hansen; samme modtog til Udstopning en Hun skudt ved
Østerby paa Læsø d. 23de September 1919. En Han blev skudt
ved Ribe d. 22de August 1920; dens opstillede Skind kom gennem
Conservator M. Clausen til Zoologisk Museum.
Nyctea nivea.
En Sneugle, Hun, blev skudt d. 14de Maj 1920 ved Brørup,
Ø. for Bramminge, meddeler Conservator C. N. Windeballe.
220
(1919.)
Turtur auritus.
En Turteldue, ung Han, blev skudt ved Sinding v. Herning d.
Ade Oktober 1919; Skindet i Herning Museum. En ung Han
blev skudt ved Nymindegab d. 20de September 1920; begge Fugle
modtog Conservator H. P. Hansen til Udstopning. En Han blev
skudt ved Gørding, Ø. for Bramminge, d. 19de Maj 1920, meddeler
Conservator C. N. Windeballe.
Dendrocopus minor.
En Lille Flagspette, Hun, iagttoges d. 5te Januar 1919 af Stud.
med. K. Hammer paa ganske nært Hold i et Ellekrat ved Fure-
søens Kyst. En Hun blev skudt i Holte d. 7de Januar 1920 og
sendt til Conservator C. N. Windeballe.
Corvus corax. É
En ung hanlig Ravn blev skudt ved Sønderskovgaard v. Vejen d.
Tde Maj 1919 meddeler Conservator H. P. Hansen. En Hun
blev skudt ved Korinth d. 17de August 1919; dens opstillede Skind
kom gennem Conservator Joh. Larsen til Zoologisk Museum.
Motacilla melanope.
En Bjergvipstjert, Han, blev funden død d. Ilte September 1919
ved Aagaard v. Kolding, hvor den formentes dræbt ved at flyve
mod en Telefontraad; det opstillede Skind kom gennem Conservator
C. N. Windeballe til Zoologisk Museum.
Luscinia titys.
En Sort Rødstjert, Hun, blev skudt ved Strib d. 26de Septem-
ber 1920; to andre Individer saas sammesteds. To Sorte Rødstjerte
saas i de første Dage i Oktober 1920 i en Have i Fredericia med-
deler Conservator A. Windeballe.
Luscinia suecica.
En Blaakælk, Han, blev skudt d. 17de Maj 1920 i Sønder Vang
ved Kolding; dens Skind kom gennem Conservator C. N. Winde-
balle til Zoologisk Museum.
Fra Færøerne.
Nolsø og Borun Fyr. Intet Fuglefald. — D. Olsen.
Kalsø Fyr. Intet Fuglefald. — Joen Clementsen.
1FÆTYLE
.
RSS ENE SR re lede he ERE SM SAD
Om Udbredelsen og Individantallet af Bunddyrene
i Løgstør Bredning.
(On the distribution and the number of specimens of the animals
in the bottom of Løgstør Bredning in the Limfiord.
A study in marine æcology.)
Af
R. Spårck og I. Lieberkind.
(Meddelt i Mødet den 26. November 1920.)
With an English summary.
I Sommeren 1919 blev, som et Led i de af Limfjordsøsters-
kompagniet foretagne ,,Sommerarbejder", Løgstør Bredning særdeles
grundigt undersøgt. Formaalet med Undersøgelsen var oprindelig
blot at skaffe Østerskompagniet detaillerede Oplysninger om Bund-
forholdene i Bredningen, for at der paa Grundlag heraf kunde
fremstilles et nøjagtigt Kort over de forskellige Bundarters ind-
byrdes Forhøld og Udbredelse. Dette Kendskab til Bundforholdene
var det Hensigten at opnaa ved over hele Bredningen med 300
m's Mellemrum at tage Bundprøver med Dr. Petersens 6,1 m”'s
Bundhenter. Da der saaledes alligevel skulde tages Bundhenter-
prøver, besluttedes det at lade disse sigte om Bord og senere
lade det frasigtede Materiale sortere i Land for derved, nu da Lej-
lighed gaves, at fremskaffe detaillerede Oplysninger om Bunddyrene
indenfor det undersøgte Omraade. Prøverne toges fra en af Østers-
kompagniets Motorskrabebaade, og der blev som sagt taget en
Prøve for hver 300 m, ialt i Løgstør Bredning 1500 Prøver. Bund-
henterens Indhold blev ganske paa samme Vis som ombord i Bio-
logisk Stations Skib sigtet gennem 3 Sigter; det saaledes frasigtede
Materiale af Dyr, Skaller etc. blev derpaa konserveret i Alkohol
og senere, efter at være bragt i Land, sorteret, hvorefter hver enkelt
Prøves Indhold af levende opførtes i en Protokol. De første 500
Prøver sorteredes af stud. mag. I. Lieberkind, de sidste 1000 af
Klo ra tætig
in
Na
Tee over
&
nv 3 >
CØT JITERER
J6raSam/ )
a od
GcÅAinocya ir
HE-KUYER
Erersteu Ror,
T dangegrund
TT BER de)
jav
1245 am under |
/
228
Styrmand Larsen ved Biologisk Station. Ombord førtes endvidere
en Journal, hvori optegnedes Dybde og Bundart for hver Prøve.
De ved denne Undersøgelse fremskaffede Oplysninger har i
flere Henseender nogen Interesse, for det første den Interesse, der
altid vil knytte sig til et paa saa talrige Prøver baseret Kendskab
til et Omraades Fauna, for det andet, at der herved er skaffet et
Grundlag for en Bedømmelse af den repræsentative Værdi af Bio-
logisk Stations Prøver, idet Stationen indenfor det her behandlede
Omraade tager et ringe Antal Prøver ved sine aarlige Foraars-
og Efteraarsboniteringer. For det tredje var det til Undersøgelsen
anvendte Fartøj saa lidet dybtgaaende, at der har været taget Prø-
ver paa Dybder, paa hvilke Biologisk Station ikke har haft Lej-
lighed dertil, og dette i Forbindelse med det store Antal Prøver
har foraarsaget, at der paa Grundlag af denne Undersøgelse vil
kunne tegnes et ret detailleret og nøjagtigt Kort over Dyresam-
fundene og deres Grænser. Endelig vil der for det fjerde paa
Grundlag af disse Prøver kunne skønnes nogenlunde over det ab-
solute Individantal af de forskellige Arter den paagældende Som-
mer indenfor det undersøgte Omraade.
Først skal vi omtale den nævnte Sammenligning med de af
Biologisk Station tagne Prøver og de Resultater, hvortil en saadan
Sammenligning fører.
Indenfor den Del af Løgstør Bredning, der er berørt af denne
Undersøgelse, tager Biologisk Station ved Foraars- og Efteraars-
boniteringerne 18 Prøver. (Disse er orienterende; ved egentlige
Boniteringer tages 50.) Alle disse 18 Prøver falder ude paa den
dybe Del af Bredningen, hvor Abra-Samfundet er eneherskende.
Ved Sammentfigningen maa man derfor udelukke de af denne Un-
dersøgelses Prøver, som falder udenfor Abra-Samfundet. Antallet
af disse Prøver er 409; af de 1500 Prøver falder altsaa 1091
indenfor Abra-Samfundet. Det er mellem Indholdet af disse 1091
Prøver og Indholdet af Stationens 18 Prøver, at Sammenligning bør
foretages. I nedennævnte Oversigt har vi opført Antallet af de
forskellige Dyrearter pr. m”, dels ifølge Biologisk Stations Foraars-
prøver (5/5 1919), dels fra Stationens Efteraarsprøver (?—%/9 1919)
og dels fra de 1091 Prøver. Undersøgelsen paabegyndtes ”%/6 1919
og afsluttedes "3/3 1919. Det undersøgte Omraade er paa det ved-
føjede Kort skraveret.
10.
36.
46.
COM OR SIOE GUD EEOBRO SE
224
8/5 19 (Biol.)
pr. m?”
(18 Prøver).
NU uld mild ss ERE EUS Re 78
Nephiysseoeea rese SEE 35
Gorbuaseibbas ss SAR 45
Abra, alba Rss BEES EL E 0,6
'Ariciatarmige rer: 16
Been ak or ener 3
ACeraAb aA RR SES ERR 2
Philtretaper ass SSE SS ad lg
CSultellus peer das ER 2
Ophiuraltes tina ENES SSR 6
Nya nunc aars see SE HERRER KERES 1
Bras ty SÆR at ke esse 0
Gam mande NEN l
Cannes pre er as RE 0
Nemmere RR RA JE 2
Myths tedulis ESS ISS SER LSE 27
Cardium faseiatum rer seerne 17
Bolynolde ES ES SDR 2
Are eee RE Ser i
NASSaRp venne de ES SAN SENDELSE 0
Modrolarfassp æn senere he ek 0
Nerersis pi ER Ree SEE l
CGyprnnatislandicea ss SSEr 0
Astenlassrubens sirene svig 0
Nassaære tretal 0
AolUSKpapilosans se ASE eee 0
Echnis mia SES SER 0
Echimocyamustpusillus RE 0
Måacfrastb immun cata er eEreR 0
Montacutanbidentata NSSS 0
OSireatedmlisktere ene nens resten 0
TEENS EEUTGSREND OS en 0
Cerithiumfrefieulatum ere sr re 0)
Kolonier af Clavellina lepadiformis 0
TONE ass pE ASE aeg 0
SANICAVANT SOS AT SEERE Ulver se see 0
Cons De SELER 0
Bucejnum sundt SSI 0
Rissoanmembrangcea Rss 0
Stenorhynchus rostratus........ 0
Ophelia rasen 0
Abram armene ENN ale ene 0
PEctenkvanhsSee EAR al are 0
Gare ussmærnas EEN RESET 0
Bycenocondæe sites hen ER 0
SHOP TE LEE MR SEERE SENERE BES mus 0
Fan esp ask REE nens 0
Sommeren 1919
prime
(1091 Prøver).
28—29/9 19 (Biol.)
p
(18 Prøver).
r.m:
46
CD
SEES
COLE OS OSS SDSTSIO SODE OKOEGESDEDEDROKO KS OECD ES
BØD
Foruden de i denne Liste opførte Arter er der ved denne Un-
dersøgelse fundet adskillige andre Arter af Annelider og af Asci-
dier; da de imidlertid ikke er nøjagtig optalt ved Sorteringen, er
de ikke medtagne ved denne Sammenligning.
Naar man vil sammenligne de ovenfor opførte Tal, maa man
erindre, at de ikke hidrører fra samme Tid. Det kan derfor ikke
ventes, at der skal herske fuldstændig Overensstemmelse. Men
naar dette Forhold er taget i Betragtning, bør en Sammenligning
give en Forestilling om, hvorvidt der ved de 18 Prøver faas et
lignende Billede af Faunaen som ved de 1091. I Listen er Dyre-
arterne opført efter den Hyppighed pr. m”, som vi har fundet paa
Grundlag af de 1091 Prøver. I Henhold til denne Hyppighed fal-
der Dyrene i 3 Grupper, nemlig de 10 første Arter, der kan be-
tegnes som meget hyppige (mere end 10 pr. m”), Nr. 11—20 (10
—I1 pr. m”), der kan betegnes som ret hyppige, og endelig 21—47,
af hvilke der er mindre end 1 pr. m”, og som derfor maa betegnes
som sjældne. Ser man først paa de sidste 27 Arter paa Listen,
altsaa paa de sjældne Former, falder det straks i Øjnene, at næsten
ingen af dem er taget af Biologisk Station, af nogle enkelte er
der et eller to Individer i Stationens Prøver, men ingen er taget
baade ved Foraars- og Efteraarsboniteringen,- og en Sammenligning
med de af Biologisk Station gennem en Aarrække tagne Prøver
viser, at det kun er nu. og da, at et Eksemplar af de paagældende
Arter tages af Stationen. Dette viser da som et første Resultat,
at selv et ringe Antal Prøver indenfor et Omraade, som det her
undersøgte, giver et fuldstændig korrekt Billede af, hvilke Arter
der er sjældne. Betragter man derefter de 10 første Arter paa
Listen, de meget hyppige Arter, vil man se, at ogsaa af disse
Årter har Biologisk Station fundet et betydeligt Antal pr. m”, om-
end ikke Tallene helt er de samme, hvad man som tidligere om-
talt heller ikke kunde vente, idet Prøverne jo ikke er taget paa
ganske samme Tid, hvorfor der kan være sket Forandring i Fau-
naens Sammensætning og Forskydning af de forskellige Arters Hyp-
pighed. For flere Arters Vedkommende er der saaledes i Sommeren
1919 foregaaet en betydelig Opvækst, f. Eks. Abra alba, Cultellus
pellucidus, Acera bullata, Pectinaria Koreni, hvilket en Sammenligning
mellem Tallene fra Biologisk Stations Foraarsprøver og Tallene fra
Sommerundersøgelsen og Efteraarsprøverne viser. Selv om disse
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 72. 15
226
Forhøld tages i Betragtning, er der dog for visse Arters Vedkom-
mende saa stor Forskel mellem den Hyppighed pr. m”, der frem-
gaar af Biol. Stations 18 Prøver, og den, som fremgaar af vore
1091 Prøver, at det vil være berettiget at slutte, at det Billede
af Hyppigheden, der faas af de førstnævnte Prøver, ikkererthelt
korrekt. Det gælder navnlig de 4 smaa Muslingearter, Abra alba,
Corbula gibba, Nucula nitida og Cultellus pellucidus, særlig den
sidstnævnte. Kaster man et Blik paa Listerne over Prøvernes Ind-
hold, vil man se, at alle disse hyppige Arter vel er jævnt udbredte
over det paagældende Dyresamfund, for saavidt som de findes i
saa godt som alle Prøver, og der er altsaa ikke noget større sam-
menhængende Omraade, hvor en eller flere af Arterne mangler.
Men medens der i nogle Prøver er 1—2 Individer, er der i andre
20—40, ja undertiden over 50; og meget ofte ligger der adskil-
lige Prøver med et saadant højt Individantal af en Art ved Siden
af hinanden, medens der ligeledes ofte ligger en Del Prøver med smaa
Individantal samlede. Disse Arter er altsaa udbredt paa den Maade,
at de er fordelt over hele Samfundet, men der er en hel Del Om-
raader, ,Øer', hvor de ligger tættere. Tages der nu et ringe An-
tal Prøver indenfor et saadant Dyresamfund, vil man risikere, at
ingen af Prøverne træffer de Omraader, hvor en Art ligger særlig
tæt, og for denne Arts Vedkommende vil Prøverne da vise for ringe
Hyppighed; hvis omvendt en stor Del af Prøverne træffer de tæt-
befolkede Omraader, vil de for den paagældende Art vise en for
stor Hyppighed. Da de tætbefolkede Omraader synes at dække
det mindste Areal, vil der være størst Sandsynlighed for, at et
ringe Antal Prøver overvejende træffer de tyndt befolkede Om-
raader og derfor for de fleste Arters Vedkommende viser for ringe
Hyppighed. Man skulde derfor paa Forhaand vente, at Biologisk
Stations Prøver gav en for ringe Hyppighned. Og sammenligner
man Antallet pr. m” fra Stationens Prøver og fra vore Prøver,
viser det sig ogsaa, med en enkelt Undtagelse, Cultellus pellucidus,
at Biologisk Stations Tal er de laveste. For Acera bullatas Ved-
kommende maa gøres den Bemærkning, at der i de første 930
Prøver ikke fandtes een eneste, medens den til Gengæld var over-
maade talrig i de resterende 570. De førstnævnte Prøver omfatter
Bredningen øst for en Linie fra Holmtange Hage til Blinde Røn.
I dette Omraade forekom altsaa paa det paagældende Tidspunkt
22
Acera bullata aldeles ikke, medens den var særdeles hyppig vest
for den ovennævnte Linie. Det maa dog bemærkes, at Prøverne
indenfor førstnævnte Omraade blev taget i Juni og Begyndelsen af
Juli, medens de indenfor sidstnævnte Omraade er taget i Slutnin-
gen af Juli og i August. Der kan derfor meget vel have fundet
en betydelig Opvækst Sted, ligesom det jo maa erindres, at Acera
i Modsætning til de andre her omtalte almindelige Dyr kan svømme,
og i Forsommeren maa antages at svømme ind paa Bændeltangs-
omraadet, hvor den lægger Æg. Muligvis er dette Aarsagen til
denne Arts Fravær i den ovennævnte Del af Bredningen.
Endelig er der de Byrearter, hvis Hyppighed ligger imellem de
meget almindelige Arters og de sjældnes. For disses Vedkommende
synes Overensstemmelsen mellem vore Tal og Biologisk Stations
mindre god, navnlig for en Del Arters Vedkommende. Disse For-
mer (Nr. 10—20) er for en Dels Vedkommende (f. Eks. Caprella
og Mytilus edulis) Dyr, der egentlig ikke hører med til den jævne
Havbunds Fauna; de hører til Paafaunaen knyttet til Planter og
Sten. Det kan derfor ikke undre, at et ringe Antal Prøver maa
give et mindre nøjagtigt Billede af deres Hyppighed; thi deres
Udbredelse maa jo selvsagt blive meget pletvis. Det samme gæl-
der ogsaa for en af den jævne Havbunds Former, nemlig Cardium
fasciatum, hvis Udbredelse er særdeles pletvis.
Det ovenstaaende kan da sammenfattes som følger: Et ringe
Antal Bundprøver, som f. Eks. de 18 Prøver Biologisk Station
tager indenfor det her undersøgte Omraade, giver et ganske kor-
rekt Billede af, hvilke Dyr der er sjældne indenfor Omraadet, og
et nogenlunde nøjagtigt Billede af, hvilke der er almindelige. For
de sidstnævnte gælder dog for visse Arter, navnlig de smaa Mus-
linger, at de er jævnt udbredte med tættere befolkede Pletter, og
de faa Prøver vil derfor ikke give et helt nøjagtigt Billede, men
som Regel vise for ringe Hyppighed. For de Arter, hvis Hyppig-
hed ligger imellem de almindeliges og de sjældnes, og som ofte
tilhører en Paafauna eller har en pletvis Udbredelse, vil et ringe
Antal Prøver ofte give et mindre korrekt Billede af Hyppigheden.
Ser vi dernæst paa Spørgsmaalet om Dyresamfundene og disses
Grænser indenfor det undersøgte Omraade, da gør sig jo som tid-
ligere nævnt det Forhold gældende, at det til denne Undersøgelse
anvendte Fartøj var saa lidet dybtgaaende, at vi har faaet Mate-
15?
AE
riale fra langt ringere Dybder end de, hvorfra Biologisk Station
har haft: Materiale. Gennemser man nu Listerne over Prøvernes
Indhold vil det straks falde i Øjnene, at de Prøver, der er taget
paa lavere Vand (som Regel paa mindre end 3 Favne), indeholder en
væsentlig anden Sammensætning af Faunaen end de paa dybere Vand
tagne. Disse sidste indeholder de for det i den vestlige Limfjord almin-
deligt forekommende Abra-Samfund karakteristiske Dyrearter saasom
Cultellus pellucidus, Abra alba, Corbula gibba, Nucula nitida etc., og
som ovenfor omtalt maa de 1091 af de 1500 Prøver siges at falde
indenfor dette Dyresamfund. Indenfor 3 Favne-Kurven, hvor Bund-
arten som Regel er Grus eller Sand, medens den, hvor AÅbra-
Samfundet forekommer, oftest, men ikke altid, er Ler eller Dynd,
findes et ganske andet Dyresamfund fattigt paa Individer, karak-
teriseret . væsentligst ved Caprella sp., Echinocyamus pusillus og
Cerithium reticulatum.. (Grænserne for og Udbredelsen af de to
Samfund ses af Kortet S. 222. Det ses her, at det sidstnævnte
Samfund, Grundkants- eller Echinocyamus-Samfundet, findes over-
alt paa Grundkanten indtil Zosteraen; hvor Grundkanten er meget
jævnt skraanende, som i Bredningens nordøstlige Del, har Sam-
fundet en betydelig Udbredelse, hvor Grundkanten er stejlere, er
Samfundet indskrænket til en smal Bræmme, og f. Eks. i Fegge-
sund, hvor Grundkanten er meget sstejl, synes det helt at mangle.
Vi skal nu give en Oversigt over de paa dette Samfund fore-
kommende Arter og disses Hyppighed til Sammenligning med den
ovenfor givne Oversigt over Åbra-Samfundets Dyr.
Antal Antal
Dyreart pr. mZ? Dyreart pr. m?
IM Ganrellakspie ESS ane 71 | 15. Actinjæ 75 eee 3
PNEATI CIA AT MI GER sr SET. 20 | 16:"Cultellus"pellnerdus rer 2
SIR Gam Na ae een 20117. /Asterias ”Tubens he seere 2,
ABN ED Nys FODE GA SEER s 147118: Myatruncata IEEE 2
BE BALDER TEN yo] Der RENE KERNER 5 14 119 Mytilus edulis FRE 2
6GÆEchinoeyamus, pusillus ”..... 13) 20; Diastylis! Rathkei eee l
Me Certhium reticulatum”. 2... 13 121. Philine "apertas eee l
&KCErdiumfasclatum. 0... 5.118 7] 22: Trochus "cinerarius rr l
EP ME 1018123: Corbula gid ba Ree l
ORNE Sanne 8) 24:"Nemertini FRELSER 1
INSFA Cera ullata EAR ene NG. 25. HI dONERES DE SEER een 1
ØM PEC M ATA Koren ERE ER 6126! Ophelia limaæina EN 0,9
ISæM Odo Rasp NERE HESS 4) 27: Echinus miliaris kerner 0,8
14. Ophiura texturata... ....... 3 | 28. Nassa reticulata .
ad
Antal Antal
Dyreart pr. m= Dyreart pr. m?
29% Mactra; subtruncata. ..…...... 0,4 39. Muntacuta bidentata....... 0,07
HUR GDI ON SPEER Fr] . 0,4 40. Nassa pygmæa...... , 1007
BIERNE elS US PE 0: re dkr, Al Tectura testudinalis 2... 0,07
2. TI US] LIR Ses PERSERNE = 02 A2MModiolasmodiolus”s Ar reE 0,05
33. Kolonier af Clavellina lepa- SIGE SÅ BYDE Fa E FE RRRRS ERE RRRN ED El 0:05
GE OPTI S (37 Sar 0,2 | 44. Æolis papillosa .... : 0 02
Sal acunadivaricafa 3755 0/1 45 Macomat balterne 002
357 Buccinum undatum 2... 0,1 | 46. Tapes pullastra ..... 1002
36. Rissoa membranacea ...... OM KÆR Care ask mær see 002
Sy Saxicava rugOoså Rd. 0,1 AS: SPOnæee e R 0:02
38. Stenorhynchus-rostratus ... 0,07 | 49. Palæmon sp. ... ...... er 0/02
Sammenligner man nu denne Liste med den tilsvarende Liste
fra Abra-Samfundet, vil man se, at den i Henseende til de for-
skellige Årters Hyppighed afviger betydeligt fra hin. Paa Abra-
Samfundet fandtes 10 meget hyppige Arter (d. v. s. med flere end
10 Individer pr. m”), her findes kun 7, og kun en enkelt, Caprella,
viser en lignende stor Hyppighed som de fleste af Abra-Samfundets
Karakterdyr. løvrigt ses det, at de to Lister indeholder omtrent
de samme Arter, men blot i en ganske forskellig Rækkefølge. Det
almindeligste Dyr i Grundkantsomraadet er Caprella med 71 pr:
m”; denne Form hører imidlertid som tidligere nævnt ikke til den
jævne Havbunds Dyr, men til Paafaunaen knyttet til Vegetationen,
og af denne er der jo langt mere paa lavere Vand, hvilket for-
klarer denne Arts store Hyppighed. Den næsthyppigste er Aricia
armiger, der ogsaa var blandt de meget hyppige paa Abra-Sam-
fundet; samme Hyppighed har ogsaa Gammaridæ, medens de paa
AÅAbra-Samfundet først kom som Nr. 13; dernæst kommer atter to af
ÅAbra-Samfundets hyppigste Arter, Nephtys coeca og Abra alba, dog
kun med en Tæthed, der er henholdsvis '/5 og ”/3 af den, hvor-
med de forekommer paa Abra-Samfundet. De to sidste af de meget
hyppige Arter her hører til de meget sjældne paa Abra-Samfundet,
nemlig Echinocyamus pusillus og Cerithium reticulatum. Dernæst
følger en Mængde Former, der er meget almindelige paa Abra-
Samfundet, men som her kun er ret hyppige eller sjældne, medens
en Del andre Former, der paa Abra-Samfundet er sjældne, her paa
Grundkanten falder ind under Kategorien ret hyppig (altsaa 1—10
pr. m”), nemlig Modiolaria sp., Asterias rubens, Trochus cinerarius
og Idothea sp. Det fremgaar af dette, at de Dyr, der befolker
230
dette Omraade, dels er visse Former fra Abra-Samfundet, der gaar
særlig langt ind som Aricia armiger, Nephtys coeca og Abra alba,
dels nogle Former fra Zostera-Omraadet, som gaar særlig langt ud
som f. Eks. Cerithium reticulatum og Trochus cinerarius. Den eneste
Art, der ikke hører til in oget af de tilgrænsende Samfund, er Echi-
nocyamus pusillus, der synes særlig knyttet til Grus- og Sandbund;
skal dette Omraade derfor benævnes efter noget Dyr, maa det
blive efter Echinocyamus. Echinocyamus-Samfundet kan derfor kort
karakteriseres som et til Grunde og til Grundkanten knyttet Over-
gangs-Samfund mellem Abra-Samfundet og Zosteraens Samfund.
Det er befolket ganske overvejende med Udløbere fra disse to
Samfund, men da disse Arter forekommer med langt ringere Hyp-
pighed her end paa de Samfund, hvor de hører hjemme, bliver
Echinocyamus-Samfundet i Forhold til Abra-Samfundet og til Zostera-
Omraadet meget individfattigt. Inden vi forlader Echinocyamus-
Samfundet, maa vi blot oplyse, at ved en Række ,Profilerf, der i
Sommeren 1920 blev taget i Sallingsund, d. v. s. en Række Bund-
prøver i en Linie vinkelret paa Kysten fra Dybet ind til Zosteraen,
fandtes overalt paa Grundkanteén lige udenfor Zosteraen et karak-
teristisk Echinocyamus-Samfund.
Som det fremgaar af ovenstaaende, er de i et Dyresamfund
levende Arter ikke ganske bundne til dette, men sender, i større
eller mindre Udstrækning for de forskellige Arters Vedkommende,
Udløbere ind paa de tilgrænsende Samfund, hvor deres Hyppighed
pr. m” dog altid bliver ringere. Det vil derfor være af nogen Inter-
esse at betragte en Del af Arterne særskilt med Hensyn til deres
Udbredelse. Dette Spørgsmaal er jo iøvrigt i nogen Grad berørt
ovenfor ved Sammenligningen med Biologisk Stations Prøver, hvor
det særlig var de forskellige Formers mere eller mindre jævne
Udbredelse, der var Genstand for Omtale. Af Nucula nitida blev
i samtlige 1500 Prøver taget ialt 9928 Individer, hvoraf 9600 paa
Abra-Samfundet. Paa Abra-Samfundet blev taget 1091 Prøver, alt-
saa bliver der gennemsnitlig 9 Nucula pr. Prøve; er Udbredelsen
meget jævn, skal der altsaa være ca. 8—10 Nucula i hver Prøve.
Af de ovennævnte 1091 Prøver var der imidlertid 137, i hvilke
der slet ingen Nucula nitida var, medens der i 222 var mere end
15 Individer. Udbredelsen er altsaa ikke ganske jævn, hvilket,
som tidligere omtalt, ganske stemmer med det umiddelbare Indtryk
231
ved Gennemlæsningen af Listerne over Prøvernes Indhold. En saa-
dan Gennemlæsning viser som nævnt, at saavel de ovennævnte 137
Prøver uden Nucula saavel som de 222 med mere end 15 Indi-
vider ikke ligger ganske spredt, men at der ofte ligger flere sam-
men, af de sidstnævnte undertiden 8—10 i Række, det vil altsaa
sige, at der rundt om i Bredningen er tættere befolkede Pletter.
Der synes ikke at være noget Forhold mellem Bundart, Dybde o.
lgn. og disse Pletter; snarere synes Konkurrence mellem Arterne
at spille en Rolle, idet de tætbefolkede Pletter for de forskellige
Arter som Regel ikke falder sammen. Saavel for Nucula som de
øvrige Arter med lignende Udbredelse gælder, at de aftager i
Antal hen mod Dyresamfundets Grænser. Med Hensyn til Ud-
bredelsen udenfor Abra-Samfundet ses det, at 328 Individer af Nu-
cula nitida (d. v. s. 3,3 pCt.) fandtes paa Echinocyamus-Samfundet,
medens altsaa 96,7 pCt. fandtes paa Abra-Samfundet; denne Art
er altsaa i ret høj Grad karakteristisk for sidstnævnte. Ser vi der-
næst paa Nephtys coeca, da er der taget 8152 Individer paa Abra-
Samfundet, hvilket bliver 7—8 pr. Prøve; imidlertid var der 33
Prøver uden Nephtys og 76 med flere end 15. Denne Form er
altsaa meget jævnere udbredt end Nucula; den er, som tidligere
nævnt, i mindre Grad knyttet til Abra-Samfundet, idet 7,6 pCt.
fandtes paa Echinocyamus-Samfundet. Af Corbula gibba blev paa
Abra-Samfundet taget 6861 Individer, d. v. s. ca. 6 pr. Prøve; der
var 129 Prøver uden Corbula og 217 med flere end 15, d.v.s. en
ganske lignende Udbredelse som Nucula nitida; det Forhold, at
righoldige Prøver ofte ligger ved Siden af hinanden, gør sig lige-
som for Nuculas Vedkommende ogsaa gældende her. Derimod er
Corbula gibba langt fastere knyttet til Abra-Samfundet, idet 99,3 pCt.
fandtes her, en højere Procent end for nogen anden af de almin-
delige Former. For Abra albas Vedkommende spiller det Forhold
en Rolle, at der har fundet en betydelig Opvækst Sted, medens
Undersøgelsen stod paa. Der er derfor i de første Prøver et langt
ringere Antal end i de sidste. Der er paa Abra-Samfundet taget
ialt 4512 Individer, det er 4—5 pr. Prøve; i adskillige Prøver var
der dog overordentlig mange, i enkelte over 100, over 20 Prøver
havde flere end 35 Individer, altsaa ogsaa denne Art har en lig-
nende Udbredelse som Corbula gibba og Nucula nutida; den gaar
dog i langt højere Grad ind paa Echinocyamus-Samfundet, idet 11,9
2,32
pCt. af Individerne fandtes der. Af Aricia armiger blev paa Åbra-
Samfundet taget 3964, det vil sige 3—4 pr. Prøve; i 220 var der
imidlertid ingen, i 29 flere end 15; Udbredelsen er altsaa ikke
saa jævn som hos Nephtys, men dog jævnere end hos Muslingerne,
idet der ikke findes de mange Prøver med høje. Individantal. For
Sneglenes Vedkommende saavel som for den 3dje meget hyppige
Annelide Pectinaria Koreni og for Ophiura texturata gælder det
samme; der er ingen eller faa Prøver med høje Individantal. Aricia
er den af Abra-Samfundets almindelige Former, der i størst Ud-
strækning findes paa Echinocyamus-Samfundet, nemlig 17,2 pCt.;
for Petinarias Vedkommende er Tallet 7,3 pCt., for Sneglene Phi-
line apertas og Acera bullatas Vedkommende henholdsvis 2,3 pCt.
og 10 pCt. og for Ophiuras Vedkommende 8,4 pCt. Det fremgaar
altsaa af dette, at som tidligere omtalt Muslingernes Udbredelse
er mindre jævn end Sneglenes, Ormenes og Ophiurernes, samt
endvidere at Abra-Samfundets meget hyppige Dyr i forskellig Grad
findes inde paa Echinocyamus-Samfundet. Enkelte Former er i høj
Grad knyttede til Abra-Samfundet, f. Eks. Corbula gibba med 99,3
pCt. af Individerne paa dette Samfund, Nassa pygmæa med 98,4 pCt.,
Philine aperta med 97,3 pCt. For Echinocyamus Samfundet er de
mest karakteristiske Cerithium reticulatum med 98,7 pCt. og Echino-
cyamus pusillus med 97,8 pCt.
Vi skal nu endelig omtale Spørgsmaalet om det absolute Indi-
vidantal af de paagældende Arter indenfor Abra-Samfundet. Da vi
ikke med Sikkerhed kan sige at have naaet Echinocyamus-Sam-
fundets øvre Grænse, og da i det hele dette Samfunds Dyrearter
synes mindre jævnt fordelte, har vi indskrænket vore Beregninger
dette Spørgsmaal vedrørende til alene at gælde Abra-Samfundet.
Ligeledes har vi indskrænket os til kun at tage de meget alminde-
lige Arter med. Der er paa Abra- Samfundet optaget ialt 1091
Prøver med Bundhenteren, det vil sige, at 1091 m?” med de der-
paa værende Dyr er optaget. Hele det undersøgte Abra-Samfund
har et Areal af ca. 139 630000 m”. Multiplicerer man altsaa dette
Tal med det Tal, der paa Grundlag af Prøverne er fundet for en
Årt pr. m”, vil man faa et Tal, der med nogen Tilnærmelse vil vise,
hvormange Individer af den paagældende Art, der findes paa det
undersøgte Abra-Samfund. De Tal vi har fundet er for:
233
Bil- Bil-
lioner lioner
Beni nitidas sa snes 12 KEN ephlysseoeca se NR sorg 10
Bb as sibba ss AT 22 9 ;Abratalba 5745 KER ADR 6
Aurelia armiger issue: ag becinarias Koren eee er 4
Beerabullata.…… 5 2 ERE S Cultellusspelncidas ES 2
Oh rak texas RENSES 2
For Abra-Samfundets 10 meget hyppige Arter bliver det altsaa
ialt ca. 50 Billioner Individer i Løgstør Bredning i Sommeren 1919.
Denne Undersøgelse viser endvidere, at de af Monard (1919)
opstillede, af Thienemann (1920) nøjere underbyggede og kri-
tiserede ,,faunistiske Principerf gælder for marine Dyresamfund,
baade hvad angaar Tendensen hos nærstaaende Arter til at under-
trykke hinanden, og Tendensen hos tilgrænsende Dyresamfund til
at trænge ind i hinandens Omraader. Der kan blot henvises til,
at det er et ringe Antal Arter, af hvilke ingen er nærstaaende,
der helt dominerer indenfor det undersøgte Omraade; af to nær-
staaende Arter som Abra alba og A. nitida har den første en Tæt-
hed af 41 pr. m”, den anden en Tæthed af 0,01 pr. m”; det kan
jo tydes som en Tendens hos førstnævnte til at undertrykke sidst-
nævnte. Og hele Echinocyamus-Samfundet maa vel opfattes som
dannet som en Resultant af Zostera-Dyrenes Forsøg paa at trænge
ud paa Dybet og Abra-Samfundets Forsøg paa at trænge ind paa
lavere Vand.
Summary of contents.
1. In the summer 1919 the fauna of the bottom of one part of
the Limfjord (Løgstør Bredning) was investigated by means of
Dr. Petersens bottom-collector (Petersen & Boysen Jensen,:
1911). There was taken a sample at every 300 m, altogether
1500 samples.
2. It was found that there were two communities of animals,
one, the Abra-community, in the deeper part of the water, where it
has been found before by the Danish Biological Station (Petersen
1913, Boysen Jensen 1919), and another, not before described,
234
the Echinocyamus-community, in more shallow water along the
shore between the Zostera and the Abra community and on the
banks. See the chart p. 222. 1091 of the samples were from the
Abra-community, 409 from the Echinocyamus-community. P. 004
is a list of the different species of the Abra community found in
the summer 1919 with the number of specimens of each pr. m”
(the middle column). P. 228 is a list of the species of the Echino-
cyamus-community also with the number of specimens pr må,
3. On the Abra-community of the Løgstør Bredning the Dan-
ish Biological Station every spring and every autumn takes 18
samples with the bottom-collector. In the list p. 224 the number
of specimens pr. m”, found by means of the 18 samples (the first
and the last column) is noted for a comparison with the results
from the 1091 samples. It is obvious that the results agree in the
case of the unfrequent species (i. e. species with a density smaller
than 1 pr. m?); in the case of the very common species (i. e. more
than 10 pr. m”) the results agree more moderately, but with regard
to the rather common species (i. e. 1—10 pr. m%) the conformity
is still less complete, because these species often belong to the
epifauna or have no uniform distribution (for instance Cardium
fasciatum).
4. The species of the Abra-community are extending to a
certain degree into the Echinocyamus-community and vice versa.
The density of the species of the Abra-community in the Echino-
cyamus-community is however inconsiderable. Some of the species
are still more definitely confined to the Abra community, for instance
Corbula gibba, of which 99,3 %/0 of the specimens, Nassa pygmæa,
of which 98,4 ”/o and Philine aperta, of which 97,3 ”/o were from
the Abra-community. The species the most confined to the Echino-
cyamus-community are Cerithium reticulatum, of which 98,7 %o of
the specimens, and Echinocyamus pusillus, of which 97,8 %o were
from the Echinocyamus-community. It has been proved that the
mussels from the Abra-community are less uniformly distributed
than the gasteropods, annelids and ophiurids of this community.
5. The number of specimens of the very common species in
the Abra-community is calculated approximately. It varies from
2— 712 billions: See p;233.
6. It has been proved that the first and second of Monards
PAS)
»faunistic principles" (Monard 1919, Thienemann 1920) are also
applicable to marine communities of animals. For instance: the
density of Abra alba (41 pr. m”) in contrast to the allied species
Abra nitida (0,01 pr. m”); the small number of very common spec-
ies, which are not allied at all; the penetration of the animals of
the Zostera into the Abra-community and of the animals of the
Abra-community into the Echinocyamus-community.
Litteratur.
1. P. Boysen Jensen: Valuation of the Limfjord I. Copenh. 1919. (Rep.
Danish Biol. Stat. XXVI.)
2. A.Monard: La faune profonde du Lac de Neuchåtel. Neuchåtel 1919.
(Bull. soc. neuchåteloise d. sci. nat. 44).
SERESGI Jo Petersens EBloy sent ensenmvaluationkortherseaelk
Copenh. 1911. (Rep. Danish Biol. Stat. XX.)
JAN CNGSJ one etersen i Valuationkof "theses IE Copenh sl IIS ME (REP!
Danish Biol. Stat. XXI.)
5. Aug. Thienemann: Die Grundlagen der Biocoenotik und Monards
faunistische Prinzipien. Basel 1920. (Festschrift f. Zschokke.)
ISES=21
Om hvalrossens forekomst og vandringer
ved Grønlands vestkyst.
Af
Peter Freuchen.
For nogle aar siden begyndte Den kongelige grønlandske Han-
del at interessere sig for de hvalrosser, der findes indenfor dens
omraader i Vestgrønland. Anledningen var vist en diskussion, der
var rejst om spørgsmaalet i Grønlandsk Selskab. Den fuldstæn-
dige fiasko, fangstforetagendet fik, skyldtes dels ukendskab. til fangst-
metoder hos fangstmændene, dels at dispositionerne for expeditionen
toges med koloniens togtninger for øje, saaledes at fartøjet snart
var fangstskib, snart kolonigalease.
Allerede længe har man været opmærksom paa de store mas-
ser af hvalros, der opholder sig paa og ved øerne Semigutat ved
Nordre Strømfjord. Og bestyrer Hedegaards udførlige og fornøje-
lige skildringer derfra,”) der fra et rent zoologisk standpunkt giver et
godt indblik i forholdene der, lader jo formode, at de her har et
fristed, hvor der i alt fald for tiden gøres dem ringe skade paa
bestanden, selv om der slaas en del ned.
Jeg opholder mig hver sommer fra sidst i juni til august ved
Saunders Ø (76? 30' n. br.) og staar i telt der for hvalrosfangstens
skyld. Isen ligger da næsten til Wolstenholme-Øen og om mod
Kap Parry, og hvalrossen kommer da trækkende op syd fra tæt
langs isranden og stadig længere ind, efter som isen brydes op.
Her bliver flokken altid nogen tid, inden den gaar videre, og
hele sommeren, indtil efteraarets islæg jager den bort, kan man
træffe hvalros her ude. Sagen er den, at her ud for Wolsten-
holme Sund findes den første egentlige foderplads for hvalrossen.
De, der netop kommer op syd fra, har nemlig altid maverne fyldt
med sælrester, d.v.s. skind og spæk og kun lidt kød, knogler har jeg
aldrig fundet i mavesækken, ej heller rester af indvolde. Saa snart
hvalrossen derimod er oppe paa vore ,,østersbanker", begynder den
') Det grønlandske Selskabs Aarsskrift 1913, p. 3.
238
ivrigt at æde muslinger, ,østers" og søpølser foruden andre dyr fra
bunden, som jeg ofte ikke kender. Men hovedmassen er muslinger.
I aaret 1918 den 3lte juli fangede vi ved Saunders Ø en hval-
ros, som havde den ene tand brækket ud. Ved flænsningen fandt
vi i ryggen siddende en harpunspids dybt inde imellem huden
og spækket, og saaret var ganske groet til over det, saaledes at
arret kun lignede et af de mange, der altid findes overalt paa
huden hos hvalrosser. Harpunspidsen mindede om dem, der bruges
i det danske Grønland, men havde dog en noget afvigende form,
saa vi formodede, at den stammede fra Baffin Land. Den grøn-
landske missionær Enok Kristiansen mente dog i sin tid at have
set harpunspidser af lignende konstruktion i Nugssuak, og med en
grønlænders iagttagelsesevne havde han straks mærket sig dem,
skønt han kun havde været der to dage for ca. 10 aar siden.
Ganske rigtigt: Jeg sendte om vinteren harpunspidsen til Dansk
Grønland til fremlysning, og først ved Nugssuak blev den gen-
kendt; jeg fik den tilbage med følgende brev)):
»I aaret 1902 i begyndelsen af maj maaned — ca. 2den
—3dje maj ;-— harpunerede Albert Mathiesen, Nugssuak, fra
kajak en hvalros, som laa paa isen og aad af en sæl. Har-
punen ramte den mellem skuldrene, men da fangeblæren blev
hængende fast i isen, og hvalrossen gentagne gange kom op
paa den anden side af isen for at drage aande, skød han 3
gange efter den og ramte den hver gang lige i skægget; efter
al sandsynlighed er da den ene tand knækket af ved samme
lejlighed. Fangelinen blev ved den stadige gnidning mod isen
slidt over paa det flettede sted, som fører igennem hullerne
paa harpunspidsen, og dyret slap løs med harpunspidsen sid-
dende i sig.
Da der var megen is, forfulgte han den ikke, men maatte
lade den undslippe.
Den forelagte harpunspids genkendte ejeren, Albert Mathie-
sen fra Nugssuak, straks, da han og hans brødre var de eneste
ved Nugssuak, som benyttede saadanne harpunspidser, fordi
de var de skarpeste og sikrest rammende.
i 2 É Ålbe É j SE
(Harpunen findes nu i Nationalmusæet.) bert WE MARE Så
") Oversættelsen er venligst foretaget af Fru Wilhelmine Møller.
239
Vi har altsaa her et bevisligt tilfælde, hvor den samme hval-
ros efter 16 aars forløb kan identificeres; hvor den har været henne,
har vi ganske vist ingen sikkerhed for, men der er dog mange
forhold, der kan tyde i ganske bestemte retninger:
Som før omtalt opholder hvalrossen sig om efteraaret og vin-
teren i stort tal ved Nordre Strømfjords munding, hvor den gaar
paa land, samtidig med at en stor del af dem svømmer rundt i
vandet og ogsaa foretager smaa udflugter derfra baade nord og syd
paa i ret store flokke. Om de opholder sig der af hensyn til par-
ringen, har jeg ikke kunnet faa tilstrækkeligt oplyst, da jeg har
hørt modstridende beretninger derom, men der er dog meget, der
kunde tyde derpaa, da der fanges baade hanner og hunner paa
samme tid, medens de to køn ellers plejer at leve hver for sig.
Fra Egedesminde Distrikt trækker hvalrossen nord over, og det
er muligt at følge dens vej op langs kysten.
Ved Godhavn ses hvalrossen ret sjældent, men ved den lidt
vestligere boplads, Diskofjorden, er den paa visse aarstider meget
almindelig; naar den ikke fanges der mere af grønlænderne, ligger
det i disses ukyndighed i rationel fangst. Kateket Sechmann Ros-
bach, der: i en aarrække har opholdt sig i Kap York Distriktet,
fortæller, at hvis man kendte isfangsten og var i stand til at lave
svært kobberem som det, polareskimoerne benytter under hvalros-
fangsten, maatte fangsten kunne give stort udbytte dernede.
Ved Nordfjord paa Disko, hvor der ikke bor mennesker, skal hval-
rosser være set flere gange af tilfældige rejsende. Det viser sig altsaa,
at trækket gaar nord over langs yderkysten. Hermed stemmer det
godt overens, at før omtalte missionær og fanger Enok Kristiansen,
der tidligere har levet i Jakobshavn, som en meget dygtig fanger,
aldrig der har set eller fanget hvalros. Min gamle rejsekammerat
Tobias Gabrielsen, fanger ved Sarqaq ved Vaigattet, har i sin lange
fangertid der kun fanget een hvalros og fortalte mig, at det er
meget sjældent, at der forvilder sig en enkelt derind.
Ved Nugssuak derimod er hvalrossen hyppig fra tidligt paa for-
aaret og hele sommeren. Det er dog ikke en fast bestand, der holder
til der, de er stadig paa vej nord over, og afløses af nye flokke.
Ved selve bopladsen, eller saa langt kajakkerne gaar ud, fanges ikke
helt faa, men længere til søs gaar den langt større mængde, ligesom
tlfældet er ved Godhavn. I sommeren 1919 laa saaledes en norsk
240
fangstmand deroppe med dampskib; han fik mange hvalrosser, der
laa og hvilede sig paa den drivende is, der nævnes saaledes, at
han en dag paa fire timer fangede 67.
Fra Umanaks Distrikt har jeg ikke andet end det rent' nega-
tive, at det ikke huskes, at der er fanget hvalros inde i fjorden
med dens mange spredt liggende bopladser. Trækket gaar følge-
ligt udenfor Ubekendt Ejland, hvorfor der ofte fra skibene ses hval-
rosser paa vej nord over ret langt til søs udenfor Umanaks Isfjord
og Svartenhuks Landet.
I Uperniviks Distrikt kommer der en del hvalrosser ind til Sdr:
Upernivik, men hovedtrækket holder sig ude langs de yderste
øer. Ved bopladsen Qasut og ved selve kolonien Upernivik er hval-
rossen paa visse tider ret hyppig, men Distriktslæge Bryder har
fortalt mig, at han paa de yderste skær udenfor kolonien har set det
store egentlige træk, der drager mod nord, og herude unddrager
sig menneskenes efterstræbelser.
Ved bopladserne Tussak og Egqgordlek, der relativt Fals læn-
gere ude, er hvalrosfangst derfor ogsaa et erhverv, som virkelig
betyder noget for eskimoernes økonomi, medens de tidligere om- ,
talte steder kun har faaet en ringe og tilfældig part af de store
rigdomme, havet ejer.
Grønlænderne her har heller aldrig set hvalrosser, der gav sig
tid til at blive et par timer paa stedet, højst sagtner de farten for
paa vejen at furagere lidt, men saa afsted igen.
Ind til udstedet Tassiussak kommer hvalrossen ikke, men paa
de nordligste bopladser i distriktet, Kitorsak og Ikamiut (mellem
Nugssuak og Kap Holm) fanges aarlig en del, alle taget ud af
trækket, der gaar nord paa.
Ved Inugssulik ved Ryders Varde har jeg sidst i oktober set
to hvalrosser liggende paa drivis.
Norden for Kap Holm ligger de smaa øer, Ryders Øer. En
gang kom jeg paa slæde kørende nord fra, saa tidligt at sneen
endnu ikke dækkede nyisen; vi saa da her ved disse øer i masse-
vis af tilfrosne aandehuller, der viste, at ret store flokke havde
været her paa den tid, isen endnu var tynd nok til, at hvalrossen
kunde slaa "panden op igennem den nede fra vandet, naar den
skulde blæse; det har været i oktober maaned.
Ved det beboede Kap Seddon i Melvillebugten kommer der,
241
naar der er aabent vand, af og til nogle hvalrosser, for dog snart
igen at rejse videre nord og vest over.
Jeg tror, at de derfor gaar længere til søs, muligt følgende en
hævning i havbunden ud til Mc'Clintocks Isfjeldsbanke, den saa-
kaldte Qorfit; thi ved Kap Melville ses hvalrossen aldrig, derimod
kommer den om sommeren ind til Meteorite Island og fanges i
mængde her; ofte udebliver den dog, antagelig tagende hensyn
til isforholdene, nogen fast foderplads synes der ikke at være.
Ved Kap York trækker hvalrossen ret tæt forbi næsset paa vej
nord over, og hele forsommeren, naar den faste isrand ligger i en
linje udenfor kysterne af Kap York Bugten, en snes kilometer fra
land, ses der mange hvalrosser tæt ved isranden.
Gaar vi videre, naar vi endelig det første sted med muslinger,
ved Connical Rock og det nærmeste vand herom.
Om efteraaret, naar isen lægger sig, kommer store flokke hertil
og opholder: sig, indtil isen fortrænger dem, men om sommeren
med aabent vand er her kun forholdsvis faa.
Først i farvandene mellem Saunders Ø og Wolstenholme Ø er
man altid sikker paa at træffe hvalros, naar blot isforholdene til-
lader dem at komme dertil og være der.
De første kommer i juni, og da de paa den tid ikke har kunnet
komme ind til Connical Rock, er deres længsel efter muslinger og
deres anden yndlingsføde saa stor, at de, der altid møder fra rejsen
med sælrester i maven, bliver her og fylder sig op med lækrere
ting end dette. Jeg tror, at sæljagt altid kun er noget, der gribes
til af mangel paa andet. Dog maa bemærkes, at sælerne forsvinder,
saa snart hvalrossen kommer, saa de maa vide, at der er fare paa
færde. Det er dog kun fjordsælen (Phoca foetida) her er tale om,
sortsiden (Phoca grænlandica) og remmesælen (Phoca barbata)
synes ikke at frygte hvalrossen. De lever i ethvert fald tilsyne-
ladende uhindret mellem hverandre.
Naar de første forløbere er kommen til Saunders Ø, tager de
efterhaanden til i antal; undertiden kommer store flokke paa 50 eller
flere dyr, men ofte er det enkeltvis eller 2—3 tilsammen, at hval-
røossen indfinder sig og lever her. Hvilken rute de forskellige køn
tager, vides ikke bestemt, men her ved Saunders Ø og i nærheden
er ikke 5 pct. af de fangne dyr hunner, dog forekommer disse en
sjælden gang, ja jeg har endog fra Dalrymple Rock sidst i juli set
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 72. 16
242
en fødsel foregaa. Fødselen sker i vandet, og den spæde hvalros
tages. af moderen under forluffen. Vi stod paa klippen og iagttog
hele fødselsakten. Der var to store hvalrosser, men efter "/2» times
forløb forsvandt de ud af vor synsvidde. To dage efter, da vejret
var blevet godt, fangede vi en hunhvalros, og efter at have dræbt
den, opdagede vi en lille bjæffende unge, der fulgte efter kajak-
kerne, der bugserede den dræbte moder. Ved landingsstedet har-
puneredes ungen, der kun kunde opholde sig cirka "/» minut under
vandet ad gangen. Den havde endnu ikke mistet navlestrengen
og havde kun mælk i mavesækken, men et tykt lag spæk dækkede
den ganske.
Naar hvalrosser optræder i store flokke, er de ret vanskelige
uset at komme ind paa, idet de, naar de er oppe for at blæse,
altid holder udkig til alle sider. Derimod vil den enkeltvis gaaende
hvalros, eller om de er nogle faa stykker sammen, stedse holde en
bestemt kurs, ogsaa naar de er oppe i overfladzn. Er der flere,
gaar de i reglen i kølvandslinje, men altid, hvad enten der er
mange eller faa, dykker de samtidig ned og kommer op sam-
men. Deres kammeratskabsfølelse er stor, og. altid ser man, naar -
enkelte er harpunerede ud af en flok, de andre vente paa deres
flugt paa de saarede kammerater, der ikke kan følge med paa
grund af den til fangelinen fastgjorte blære og drivankeret.
Hen paa sommeren tager hvalrosserne til og søger længere op i
Wolstenholmefjord uden dog at naa op til bunden, hvor de mange
isfjælde sikkert pløjer fjordbunden for stærkt op til, at muslinger
kan leve der. Paa denne tid ses mange hvalrosser drivende om
her paa smaa isflager, men efterhaanden som isen lægger sig om
efteraaret, drives hvalrossen udefter; den kan endnu klare sig, naar
isen er 3—4 cm tyk, saaledes at den med lethed bærer en mand
med hunde og slæde; men da hvalrossen i lighed med klapmydsen
og i modsætning til fjordsælen og remmesælen ikke har skarpe
kløer paa forlemmerne, er den ude af stand til at holde aandehuller
aabne i is, der er for tyk til, at den simpelthen nede fra kan
stikke hovedet op igen.
Det maa dog ikke forstaas saaledes, at hvalrossen er stationær
her udfor Wolstenholmefjord, nogle forsvinder, andre kommer til.
Et tydeligt tegn paa, at de er paa rejse, har vi, naar man med
motorbaad eller hvalfangerslup bryder ind i en intet anende flok.
243
Naar den efter den første opskræmmelse har sundet sig, tager den
altid vejen nord over. Nord over, er det stadige løsen for hval-
rossens træk langs disse kyster.
Det næste faste punkt vi har, er ved mundingen af Granville-
fjord. Her ligger en eskimoisk boplads, og ofte kommer hvalrøssen
saa tæt ind under denne, at man kan harpunere fra land ved en
ikke ret høj stejl klippe paa kysten.
Lige nord for Kap Parry ligger bopladsen Narssak; enkelte, men
ikke særlig mange hvalrosser findes her. Derimod er de to øer
Northhumber Ø og Herbert Ø de rette steder for hvalrossen. Her
kommer trækket tæt forbi, og her er en yndet soveplads for den paa
drivende is. Om foraaret er der stor isfangst ved Haklyut Island,
der aldrig bliver fast forbundet med is til de to andre øer. Der
fanges her umaadelige mængder af hvalros, og stadig er der nok,
stadig er det nye dyr, der kommer, men det synes, som om de
ikke længere har det hastværk som før. De er naaet op mod ende-
punktet for deres rejse. Endnu et stykke vej har de dog at drage,
inden de naar til det sted, der er berømtest blandt alle som polar-
eskimoernes hvalrossteder. Det er Pituravik og nærmeste omegn,
hvor havet sommer og vinter kan koge af dyrenes prusten. Naar
havet er roligt, høres deres snøften langt ind i land, og vinter og
foraar hjælper den omstændighed, at isen kun sjældent og kort ad
gangen ligger nær til land, dem til at kunne søge føde paa de
samme steder som om sommeren. Ved hver springtid eller ved
hver storm bryder isen op, og i det aabne vand, der dannes, kom-
mer hvalrossen ind; i løbet af et par dage er isen tyk nok til, at
eskimoen kan vove sig ud paa den, endnu medens hvalrossen op-
holder sig der, og med den beundringsværdige fangsttekniske fær-
dighed, han har, er Pituravik derigennem et lige saa sikkert mad-
sted, som om han havde kødet liggende i sit forraadshus.
Videre nord paa op til Kap Alexander er forholdet det samme.
Ved Kap Alexander lægger isen sig aldrig, men om sommeren i
baad og om vinteren fra bræen har jeg ofte iagttaget store flokke
af hvalrosser her tæt under landet.
Ved Etah, som er en speciel hvalrosfangstplads, er afstanden over
til Ellesmere Land paa den anden side Smith Sund kun en snes
kilometer, og der er her islagt hver vinter, saaledes at der finder
slædefart sted fra den ene side til den anden.
16
244
Udenfor Etah ligger Littleton Øen, og her har vi det eneste
sted paa: kysten (altsaa med undtagelse af Semigutat ved Nordre
Strømfjord), hvor hvalrossen gaar paa land. Den kan ofte ligge i
ret store flokke her, og eskimoerne har let ved at dræbe dem.
Jeg skal i denne forbindelse berette en ret pudsig historie, som
blot viser, hvor højt hvalrossen gaar op i landet: Den amerikanske
rejsende mr. Harry Wittney, der i 1910 var en sommerrejse oppe
i distriktet, var med sit selskab i land paa Littleton Øen for at
drive jagt og saa oppe paa en lille høj nogle dyr, som de antog
for rensdyr. Som følge deraf sneg de sig meget forsigtigt nær-
mere, de saa tydeligt gevirerne, men da de kom nær nok, viste
det sig at være en flok hvalrosser, der laa paa ryggen og solede
sig og viftede sig med baglufferne, saaledes som sælerne gør det,
naar de ligger paa land. Det var baglallerne og stødtænderne, der
stak lige i vejret, som man forvekslede med renshorn, en vistnok
enestaaende fejltagelse; farven i sig selv er jo ikke saa forskellig.
Norden for Etah bøjer kysten mod øst ind mod Humboldt
Bræen; herinde i Peabody Bugten ligger isen næsten hvert aar
uden at bryde op, der er derfor kun spredt og ret sjældent be-
byggelse, men om det har været saaledes altid, synes tvivlsomt,
da der findes ruiner af meget store bopladser. Knud Rasmussen
har saaledes talt 55 husruiner et enkelt sted. — Paa alle steder,
hvor man træffer gamle bopladser, finder man masser af hvalros-
knogler, saa der har nok været en mere isfri tid. Det er ikke ude-
lukket naturligvis, at eskimoerne kan have fragtet kød med benene
i derind fra yderligere beliggende steder, men i alt fald paa den bo-
plads, der ligger længst ude, og som derfor hyppigst er isfri og
beboet, Anorétok hedder den, er der altid med aabent vand mange
hvalrosser. Vi er nu kommen op til de steder, hvor det kun eller
næsten kun er hunhvalrosser, der træffes. Det samme var tilfældet
i det distrikt, som ,,Danmark"-Ekspeditionen besøgte paa Grønlands
østkyst, at hunhvalrossen levede nordligere end hannerne; men om
det er en tilfældighed, eller om det er for at være mere afsides fra
mulige fjender med ungerne, ved jeg ikke. Disse hunner er altid
langt vanskeligere end hannerne at fange paa grund af deres store
voldsomhed til at angribe kajakfangeren, saa fangsten her frem-
byder meget større fare for fangeren end længere syd over, hvor
kun hanner findes.
245
Nordligere end Humboldt Bræen træffes hvalrossen ikke. Isen
ligger med fast rand fra Etah over til Pims Ø, saaledes at man
kører om vinteren langs det aabne vand, der altid er opfyldt af
en isgrød, og en tæt damp staar altid i den stærkeste kulde over
vandet. Her hører og ser man narhvaler, hvidfisk og hvalrosser
paa hele strækningen over til Ellesmere Land i vandet, og det er
sikkert den yderste grænse for hvalrossens vandringer.
Ovre ved Ellesmere Land har jeg selv set en del hvalrosser
ligge paa isen ganske nær ved land udenfor Pims Ø. Det var i
de sidste dage af april paa en dag, da der kun var en snes graders
kulde, men de eskimoer, der ret ofte tager land derovre, fortæller,
at der findes mange hvalrosser ved de nærmeste bopladser, om
sommeren ogsaa nogle faa mil længere mod nord, f. eks. Cocked
Hat, ligesom jeg ved, at Chrocker Land ekspeditionen fangede en
del hvalrosser ved Starvation Camp i sommeren 1914. Her ved den
anden side af Smith Sund lyder alle beretninger paa, at trækket
gaar syd over. Polareskimoerne er ret godt kendt med alle fangstfor-
hold her, da de jo hyppigt overvintrer langs kysten af North Lin-
coln, hvor hvalrosfangst om sommeren er hovederhvervet. Ved
Coburg Island har der i mange aar ikke været boplads, men der
lever dog eskimoer, der har boet der. Disse har fortalt mig, at
der altid er mange remmesæler, der jo lever af det samme som
hvalrossen, og hvalrosser, som næsten altid er til stede, kommer
mest inde fra Jones Sound og drager altid syd over.
Da dr. Cook paa sin meget omtalte ,,nordpolsfærd" drog til-
bage, overvintrede han frivilligt — for at være af vejen en pas-
sende tid — ved Kap Sparbo paa nordsiden af North Devon. Her,
har de to eskimoer fortalt mig, levede man om vinteren foruden
af moskusokser af hvalrosser, som man fangede paa nyis. Dette
synes at tyde paa, at hvalrossen her er nogenlunde stationær, hvad
der bliver muligt derved, at Jones Sound er aabent i hele den
østre halvdel til enhver aarstid, hvad fastis angaar. Hvor disse hval-
rosser kom fra, og hvor de trak hen, havde de to omtalte eski-
moer ikke lejlighed til at finde ud af i den korte tid, de var der.
Umuligt er det jo ikke, at de har forbindelse med de hvalrosser,
der findes længere vest paa, men der er næppe nogen stadig rute
for dem, da de svære ismasser i den vestlige ende af Jones Sound
og vest for dette igen vilde gøre et regelmæssigt træk ret usand-
246
synligt. Langt sandsynligere er det, at de paagældende hvalrosser
fra Jones Sound følges med deres kammerater fra Etah og gaar ned
langs Baffin Lands kyst.
Ved Ponds Bay, som ellers er et hvidfiskested, forekommer
hvalrossen meget hyppig paa træk syd over, og da der ikke fin-
des store foderpladser, drager den altid derfra snart efter at være
ankommen der. Om isfangst er der aldrig tale, men det kan
muligvis være, fordi befolkningen ikke kender til denne. Jeg be-
sidder for faa oplysninger til at kunne udtale mig nøjere om for-
holdene, men tillige spiller her et andet forhold ind, nemlig den
svære vestis, som trækker ned langs landet, en is, som i mæg-
tighed ikke giver storisen noget efter. Ved Home Bay findes en
handelsstation, hvor der aarligt indhandles en del hvalrosskind, men
de nærmere omstændigheder kender jeg ikke.
Om bord paa kaptajn Munns skib, , Albert" traf jeg i fjor
et par eskimoer, der rejste med dette nord over til stationen
ved Ponds Bay. De opgav deres hjemsted at hedde ÅAivilik, d. e.
hvalrosstedet, og det ligger i den østligste del af Baffin Land
mellem Home Bay og Cumberland Sound i nærheden af Kap
Wolsingham. Da jeg hørte dette, spurgte jeg dem ud om hval-
rossens levevis ved deres boplads. De fortalte, at den kom nord
fra, men de vidste ikke bestemt, hvor den blev af, ,,den forsvandt"
bare. Dette synes mig at tyde paa, at den her gaar til søs, og
det passer godt sammen med de store flokke hvalrosser, der ofte
ses i Davis Strædet paa disse bredder, de, der har været genstand
for saa stærk og heldig fangst fra nordmænds side. Den norske
fangstskipper paa ,,Veslekari" fortalte dertil i fjor, at han i huden
paa mange af dyrene havde fundet riffelkugler af bly med nikkel-
kappe af en nærmere angivet størrelse, og kaptajn Munn fortalte
mig paa mit spørgsmaal, at det netop var den slags bøsser, der for-
handledes ved hans stationer ved Cumberland Sound og Ponds
Bay. De omtalte kugler havde siddet i saar, der var ret friske,
sagde nordmændene. p
Naar vi saa følger hvalrossens rute paa kortet, er vi atter ved
Semigutat mellem Egedesminde og Holstensborg, og kredsløbet er
fuldendt.
Hensigten med disse betragtninger, som der næppe kan rejses
berettigede indvendinger imod, har været at søge at vise, at hval-
247
rosserne optræder som Tordenskjolds soldater og gaar igen -— op
langs Grønlands kyst og ned langs Baffin Land. De er alle vegne,
hvor der er mennesker, genstand for efterstræbelser, men saa længe
det er eskimoerne, der er ene om det, er der ikke nogen større
fare for bestanden, selv om de skulde faa rationelle fangstmetoder
i stedet for den tankeløse plaffen løs med bøsser, som er et af
hovedresultaterne af ,civilisationens" indførelse hos dem. Det er
mange remingtonkugler, der findes i de hvalrosser, der kommer op
til Thule, ganske planløst anbragt i dyrene i ryggen, i siderne og
andre steder, hvor det kun kan volde dyret smerte og lidelser,
uden i nogen maade at svare til det tilsigtede: at dræbe dyret.
Men jeg tror at turde paastaa, at det vil være farligt at udruste
eller tillade udrustningen af store ekspeditioner med den hensigt
at slaa hvalrosser ihjel. En følelig formindskelse i bestanden vil
snart vise sig. Dyrene udnyttes jo langtfra helt, det meste vil blive
smidt ned til føde for hajerne og andre fisk, og eskimoerne vil staa
og mangle deres naturlige næring.
Egentlige fjender i dyreriget har hvalrossen vist næppe, i alt
fald frygter den vist ingen i større grad. Medens man ser nar-
hvaler, hvidfisk og alle andre større hvaler i panisk skræk flygte
uden sans og samling, naar spækhuggeren (Orca gladiator) nærmer
sig, ser man hvalrossen tilsyneladende uforstyrret fortsætte sine
neddykninger efter føde, og eskimoerne har fortalt mig, at man
har set dem forsvare sig med stødtænderne mod spækhuggeren,
som efter nogen kamp fik sin snude flænget og flygtede bort. Selv
har jeg engang set en bjørn, som blev funden død med ganske
tydelige saar efter hvalrostænder. Den laa ved en vaage i isen,
og af sporene saa det ud, som om hvalrossen har ligget paa isen
med en unge, og at bjørnen har listet sig ind paa denne, men er
bleven dræbt af moderen.
Men ofte lider vistnok hvalrossen ret stor nød, naar isen lig-
ger fast langt ud fra land, saa der bliver for dybt for den til at
dykke ned efter muslinger, eller saadanne ikke findes; i alt fald
ser man den altid komme ind til kysterne, saasnart storm eller
springtid brækker isen op, og de holder sig der, saa længe det
overhovedet er muligt for dem at komme op og drage aande. Det
hænder da ofte, at enkelte fryser inde. Naar de saa ser sig spær-
ret inde i en altfor lille vaage, og føden de kan naa derfra, er
248
brugt op, er det, at de vandrer afsted over isen for at finde aabent
vand. Som beskrevet af Knud Rasmussen i hans bog ,Foran
Dagens Øje”, drager de afsted i een bestemt retning ; kommer der
en hindring i vejen, kravler de over den. Mange, mange gange
glipper forsøget for dem med at kravle over isskruninger eller smaa
fjælde, men over vil de. Det synes, som om de har den største
frygt for at tabe retningen, og er de ude paa jævn is, ligger deres
vældige spor som en snorret lige landevej frembragt af en sneplov
uden en afvigelse til nogen side. Ofte fanger man hvalrosser om
sommeren, der har svære frostsaar paa for- og baglemmerne; eski-
moerne siger, at det er hvalrosser, der om vinteren har maattet
foretage sig en spadseretur over isen for at naa ud til aabent vand.
Paa disse ture bliver de, der jo ikke er vante eller egnede til
lange marscher, tit trætte og lægger sig til at sove og lider vist
i det hele meget af kulde paa disse ture, hvor tillige sulten maa
pine dem. De, jeg selv har set af saadanne hvalrosser, har ikke
haft noget som helst i maven, og Knud Rasmussen har meddelt
mig, at det altid er tilfældet, ligesom han mener, at de først be-
giver sig paa rejsen, naar de er yderst udsultede i den vaage, de
har været indespærret i. De samme vandringer over isen, pangu-
liaq som de kaldes af eskimoerne, foretages iøvrigt ogsaa af klap-
mydser, der heller ikke er i stand til at holde aandehuller aabne.
Dog har jeg ogsaa set et tilfælde, hvor en hvalros havde søgt til-
flugt ved et isfjæld, der stod paa grund, og hvor saaledes høj- og
lavvandet holdt isen brudt om det, saa der blev plads til at aande,
og jeg har hørt, at det ikke skal være sjældent, at dette sker. En
anden gang var der en hvalros, der levede ved tidevandsrevnen ved
Kap Athol; den havde været der det meste af vinteren, inden den
blev dræbt, og den opdagedes ved, at den var gaaet op paa. isen
og tværs over sundet mellem Kap Athol og Wolstenholme Øen, hvor
den iigeledes var sluppet ned i tidevandsrevnen, men den havde
jo efterladt sig et tydeligt spor i sneen, som voldte dens død.
De hvalrosser, der om foraaret og først paa sommeren kommer
til Kap York Distriktet, er ret magre, men i løbet af sommeren
tager de til i fedme og kan om efteraaret og vinteren være ko-
lossalt fede. Dog synker en hvalros altid, naar den dræbes, idet
dens vægtfylde er større end vandets. Det kan dog hænde, at
en hvalros bliver flydende, det er, naar den har ,slugt luft", lige
249
inden det dræbende skud falder, som altsaa maa være absolut øje-
blikkeligt dræbende. Hvalrossen ligger saa i vandet som et druk-
net menneske, der flyder, med ryggen oppe og for- og baglemmer
hængende ned. Men ved at tage fat i en saadan hvalros med
en baadshage, faar man meget let dyret til at kapsejse, saa at
hovedet gaar i vejret, hvorefter man hører en boblen, luften farer
ud, og dyret synker. Dette sker meget let, og naar dertil kommer,
at det er yderst sjældent, man faar skudt og dræbt hvalrossen, der
er meget sejglivet, netop som den er fuld af luft, kan man gaa ud
fra, at over 90 pct. af hvalrosser, der kun jages med bøsse, mistes
til ingen nytte. Det er som følge deraf paakrævet, hvis vi vil lære
grønlænderne i Dansk Grønland humane og samtidig rationelle
fangstmetoder paa hvalrosser, at faa dem væk fra den tankeløse
plaffen løs med bøssen. Der maa sættes fast i hver hvalros, inden
den dræbes. Det er forfærdelige myrderier, der finder sted, dyrene
skydes, saa det ofte tager lang tid for dem at dø, ja, mange maa
vel sulte ihjel, før de faar ende paa deres lidelser.
Først havde grønlænderen sin harpun, og det gik ham og dyrebe-
standen godt, saa fik han forladergeværerne, folk uden lokalkendskab
og følelse med dyrene opponerede paa grønlændernes vegne, i den
tro, at de gavnede dem, og bagladerne blev indført, til liden baade
for mennesker og dyr. Nu er fangsten sløj i det danske Grønland.
Værre og værre bliver den aar for aar, men ikke desto mindre lyder
raabet nu om magasingeværer, og de er allerede nogle steder at
faa i Handelens butikker heroppe. Hvad jeg har vist her for hval-
rossen, gælder næsten alt vildt heroppe: Her er nok, naar det
bruges med fornuft, men der er intet at solde med. De hvalrosser,
der ikke dræbes i aar, vil komme igen, næste gang flokken drager
forbi. Lær folk at se lidt stort paa det og forstaa at holde hus
. med goderne i deres land.
2571925
NRERVEMS BD; 72.
Re FS 4-FFED SER
+ As KEERRK” "FR
BL øge
Less] K—
F3595å ”
TAFEE EJ
Dansk Repr. Anst.
$
DÆNSERVENEB DET 2:
FÅEELSI
1lu
Dansk Repr. Anst,
i NKD Fr i
NM f - ØE
he ere En
sagt ene
end
NOR
i sø -
å
ø
-
-—
we
tu
DÆNSERVÆMEBDENE:
TAFEL NE
Dansk Repr. Anst.
BENE VSM: Bd: 72. PING
Ras
MA EK
>
dj
-SÅ
> Jarggt !
ag >
TS RGS YE 7
Dansk Repr. Anst.
BENSE. V. M. Bd. 72. PESV.
I
SR 2 zÆ: > == >
Fiusanmrn >
ss rå sæ bod gt ve ER , X in,
ÅR £5 gø" . 7
gr (£- i É
ER SE fx 5 å ni gg
=: & vige
ra KÆS
Je: Ask >
É: . se 3% en |
= sa, N :
<ld
ss
=
;
så
Pd
(i
-
É
FJ
va GER
<< NW
ke,
MRS <f
Rn ale
k%>:
7
væ
Z
play
9 10
Dansk Repr. Anst.
bye
SENE VM Bed 72 $
19 20
Dansk Repr. Anst.
PE VA
HSFESV-MBd:; 72
.
Dansk Repr. Anst.
Vi " rav)
Videnskabelige Meddelelser
fra
Dansk naturhistorisk Forening i København
Bind 73.
Udgivne af Selskabets Bestyrelse.
Med 8 Tavler og 1 Tabel samt 246 Figurer og 6 Tabeller i Teksten.
Ottende Aartis tredie Aargang. I.
København
I Kommission hos C. A. Reitzel.
1922.
Redaktionen af dette Bind er besørget af Dr. phil. Th. Mortensen
og Mag. scient. R. Spårck.
Andelsbogtrykkeriet i Odense.
-
res de BE en hes SST ED ESENN LES RENDE Sa NÅ ms se Ddr tes
Indhold.
unde Erefae SR SE AR TE ne e EEs ENE Eee SNE Re vsere ENE ene V
Papers from Dr. Th. Mortensen's Pacific Expedition 1914—16. III—XIII:
II Hjalmar Ditlevsen : Marine freeliving Nematodes from the Auckland
and Campbell Islands. (Hertil Tavle I—III og 21 Figurer i Teksten) 1
IV. Prosper Bovien: Ascidiæ from the Auckland and Campbell Islands.
(Holosomatous forms). (Hertil Tavle IV og 5 Figurer i Teksten).. 33
V. Carl Dons, Trondhjem: Notes sur quelques Protozoaires marins.
(MedESSg Fie urerrorelek ab ele NeksS TED) EN RES SER 49
VI. Ernst Marcus, Berlin: Bryozoen von den Auckland- und Camp-
hell-Inselmst(HertietaveRvæorslISFigurertiteksten) FEER 85
VII. Gustav Stiasny, Leiden: Die Tornarien-Sammlung von Dr. Th.
NMorntensenS (Mede Fjenreriteksten) Er eter ke ener e ere 123
VIIL Th. Mortensen : Echinoderms of New Zealand and the Auckland-
Campbell Islands. I. Echinoidea. (Hertil Tavle VI—VIII og 23
Eredrerstehekste ENE Em ESS SEEST Re or 139
XI. Elisabeth Deichmann : On some cases of multiplication by fission
and of coalescence in Holothurians; with notes on the synonymy
of Actinopyga parvula (Sel.). (Med 10 Figurer i Teksten)........ 199
X. Hjalmar Broch, Kristiania: Studies on Pacific Cirripeds. (Med 77
HfernerkoprÆSN aberne ksten) EET 215
XI. W. Michaelsen, Hamburg: Ascidiae Ptychobranchiae und Diktyo-
branchiae von Neuseeland und den Chatham-Inseln. (Hertil 1
ihabelssamfrsS Elg rernErkeks eN) EEN SSR EN 359
XII. Gustav Stiasny, Leiden: Zur Kenntnis der Entwicklung von Sto-
molophus meleagris L. Agassiz. (Med 8 Figurer i Teksten)...... 499
XIII. Gusiav Stiasny, Leiden: Die Scyphomedusen-Sammlung von Dr.
Th. Mortensen nebst anderen Medusen aus dem zoologischen
Museum der Universitåt in Kopenhagen. (Med 14 Figurer og 1
iabelike ks te EEN ES ENE rs ere ae SEKS ere eler Ene KERNE RER 513
Correction to Papers from Dr. Th. Mortensen's Pacific Expedition 1914
—16. X. Hjalmar Broch: Studies on Pacific Cirripeds......... 559
ERE EET 560
Fortale.
Det foreliggende 73. Bind af
Videnskabelige Meddelelser fra
Dansk Naturhistorisk Forening i
København indeholder udeluk-
kende Afhandlinger, der helt eller
delvis er baseret paa Materiale,
som er indsamlet under Dr. Th.
Mortensens Pacific EKs-
pedition 1914—16, Mate-
riale, som nu for langt den
overvejende Dels Vedkommende
findes i Universitetets Zoologiske
Museum i København. Disse
Afhandlinger, der fremkommer
under Fællestitlen: Papers from
Dr. Th. Mortensen's Pacific Ex-
pedition 1914—16, vil for Frem-
tiden blive offentliggjort i særlige
Bind af Videnskabelige Meddelel-
ser, Bind, der vil fremkomme
ved Siden af og alternerende
med de aarlige, ordinære Bind.
Naar det har været muligt at
offentliggøre Ekspeditionens Re-
sultater paa denne Maade, skyl-
des det, at Regering og Rigs-
dag hertil har bevilget 16,000
Kr. paa Finansloven, for hvilken
Bevilling jeg herved paa Dr.
Preface.
The present volume 73. of
Videnskabelige Meddelelser fra
Dansk Naturhistorisk Forening i
København exclusively contains
papers totally or partly based on
material collected during Th.
Mortensens Pa'ertrcibEse
pedition 1914—16 and for
the main part belonging to the
Zoological Museum of the Uni-
versity of Copenhagen. The pap-
ers which are published under
the common title of: Papers from
DÆTNÆMortenserss te ac
pedition 1914—16 in future will
appear in special volumes of
Videnskabelige Meddelelser to-
gether with and alternating with
the ordinary, yearly volumes.
The publishing of the results of
the Expedition was made pos-
sible by the granting of an
amount of Kr. 16,000 by the
Danish Government and Parlia-
ment, for which I beg to ex-
press my sincerest thanks, on
behalf.of Dr. Mortensen.
The papers contained in the
present volume are the Nos-
Mortensens Vegne udtaler min
bedste Tak.
Det foreliggende Bind inde-
holder Papers Nr. III-—XII, idet
Nr.I. Th. Mortensen: "(Observ-
ations on protective adaptions and
habits, mainly in marine animals"
osENEIME IEEE MOR tensenee«
KFStephnensen Oral
producing parasitic Copepod, in-
festing an Ophiurid" tidligere er
publicerede i dette Tidsskrifts
69. Bind.
Den paa fransk skrevne Af-
handling er oversat af Frøken
KlæstineSoetmanntder lige
ledes har læst sproglig Korrek-
tur paa de engelsk skrevne
Afhandlinger. Redaktionen af
Bindet er for den første Dels
Vedkommende besørget af Dr.
Th. Mortensen, for den sidste
Dels af Undertegnede.
VI
København i
III —XII, as No. I. Th. Mor-
tensen: "Observations on pro-
tective adaptions and habits,
mainly in marine animals" and
No. ILFTAMorten sense
Stephensen: "On a gall-pro-
ducing parasitic Copepod, infest-
ing an Ophiurid" were already
published in Vol. 69. of the pre-
sent Journal.
The paper written in French
has been translated by Miss
Kirstine Soetmann who has
likewise, with a view to the lan-
guage, read the proof-sheets of
the papers written in English.
The editorial management of the
first part of the volume has been
performed by Dr. Th. Morten-
sen, "of" the last part byte
Undersigned.
Maj 1922.
R. SPARCK.
Papers from Dr. Th. Mortensen's Pacific Expedition
1914—16.
II. .
Marine free-living Nematodes
from the Auckland and Campbell Islands.
By
Hjalmar Ditlevsen.
With Plates I—III.
Dr. Th. Mortensen has brought home a considerable number
of bottom-samples from the different stations of his Pacific Expe-
dition 1914—16. Of these samples there was picked out, among
other material, a considerable quantity of free-living Nematodes which
Dr. Mortensen was kind enough to forward to me for the pur-
pose of having them worked out. As our knowledge of free-living
marine Nematodes is very small, especially of the exotic forms of
this group, the material of these animals collected by Dr. Mor-
tensen is of considerable interest.
Though the sorting of the bottom-samples has not yet been
finished, marine free-living Nematodes have been stated from the
following localities; The Auckland- and Campbell Islands, New Zea-
land, New South Wales, The Philippine Islands, Japan, Hawaii, Cali-
fornia and some other, more Northern localities of the Pacific coast
of North America, Panama and the West Indies. It is to be ex-
pected that the study of this material -—— besides enriching science
with a great number of unknown forms — will contrive to throw
light upon the geographical distribution of this group of animals.
In agreement with Dr. Mortensen it was decided to work out
the material according to localities. The first contribution which
is found on the following pages deals with the marine free-living
Nematodes from the Auckland- and Campbell Islands.
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 73. 1
2
The next paper will deal with the New Zealand-Nematodes; it
has been found suitable to put off the zoogeographical remarks till
the issuing of that paper.
Molgolaimus n. g.
Small Anguillulidæ of a rather clumsy shape. The front end
is tapering evenly to the head which is rounded and separated
from the body by an inconspicuous constriction. The cuticle seems
to be smooth, but possibly it is exceedingly finely striated trans-
versally, a feature which I have not been able to ascertain. No
setæ have been observed, not even in the front end. No eyes
or lateral organs. Buccal cavity entirely lacking. As far as can
be observed, the æsophagus is short and thin almost throughout
its whole length; its first two thirds åre, however, very indis-
tinct; at its base it forms a conspicuous, globular bulb with a
rather large cavity in its interior. It was not possible to ascertain
whether another bulb was present in the middle of the æsophagus
as might perhaps be expected. The nerve ring was not observed.
Ventral gland seems to be lacking. The female organs are symme-
trical, the ovaries reflexed. Vulva is situated somewhat cephalad to
the middle. Spicules are exceedingly long and thin; they are fili-
form and highly flexible. No accessory piece is seen. Supplement-
ary organ is lacking. Two tiny preanal papillæ were observed.
Molgolaimus tenuispiculum n. sp.
Pl. I, fig. 13. Pl. II, fig. 11. PI. III, fig. 11.
Locality: Auckland Islands. North-arm of Carnley harbour. Clay.
Length: Female, 0,79 mm. Male, 0,75 mm.
SS SEE yt == 7.
Male er 235 NOE == ORE
Four specimens were captured, three females and one male.
The shape of the body is rather clumsy. In the first third the
front-end tapers rather evenly; about at the level of the middle of
the æsophagus it begins to taper more quickly towards the head
which is separated from the body by an inconspicuous constriction.
The tail is conical in its proximal half; its distal half forms a
digitate prolongation (fig. 2).
3
The cuticle is smooth or possibly provided with exceedingly delicate
. transverse striæ. Under high magnifying power (Apochr. 2 mm) it
seemed to me as if such a striation was perceivable, but it is pos-
sible that this was due to the pigment
granules in the subcuticular layer. With
certainty I was not able to settle this
question. Setæ seem to be entirely lacking,
not only on the body but even on the
head. Nor have I been able to see any
lips or papillæ. Eyes and lateral organs
likewise seem to lack. There is no buc-
cal cavity; the entrance to the mouth is
only like a prick of a needle. Regarding
this feature and the structure of the æso-
phagus I consider it probable that the
animal is feeding excusively upon liquids.
The æsophagus is at its base
provided with a conspicuous | |
bulb of globular shape, the !
interior of which forms a
rather spacious cavity. For
the rest the æsophagus
seems to be rather .thin,
but it is very indistinctin Fi8. 1. FAE VOR EGILHES DIGTE
the distal two thirds so that
it: has been impossible to me to ascertain whether
another bulb is found near the middle or not. No
nerve ring was observed. Ventral gland seems to
be lacking.
The female organs are symmetrical and the ovar-
ies reflexed. Only one shell-egg has been observed
in each of the branches of the uterus. The vulva is
found somewhat cephalad to the middle of the body.
In a female the length of which makes 0,79 mm the
vulva was situated 360 & from the front end. The
Fig.2. Molgolai- — Spicules are exceedingly long and filiform; they are
SSU SPICE EF ro hly flexible-as is seen insfig 1 UPEEÆherefis
lum; tail of ;
female. no accessory piece nor supplementary organ. The length
1?
4
of the spicules makes 163 uw. Cephalad to the anogenital aperture
two tiny masculine papillæ are seen the most caudad of which is .
situated 9 uw from the anus, the other one 12 w more cephalad.
The hind-part of the body of the male is strongly curved; only
the tail itself is almost straight, a feature not common among Ne-
matodes.
Oistolaimus n. g.
Body of a rather short and clumsy shape. The cuticle is finely
striated and set with scarce hairs, spread apparenatly irregularlv over
the surface of the body. Head with one ring of fine hairs, the
position of which is between the low lips which surround the mouth-
opening. Lateral organ spiral-shaped and much like that known in
the genus '”Desmodora; it is situated in the front end, just behind
the lips. The buccal cavity is cup-shaped in its distal half; its
proximal half, which is nearly cylindrical, is occupied by a short
spear or arrow, the stem of which is slightly curved and which is
provided with a barb on one side, much like that of a fish-hook.
The arrow is no doubt protrusile, and strong muscles which evid-
ently act as protractors are attached to its stem. The æsopha-
gus is of equal width in its distal half, but its proximal part forms
a large oval bulb, in the interior of which is found a cavity, but
no valvular apparatus. Tail short and conical. The vulva is found
behind the middle of the body. Å rudiment of the ovary is seen
at some distance behind the vulva. It is to be supposed that the
ovary is single and that the place of this and of the uterus is
caudad to the vulva.
Oistolaimus ferox n. sp.
Pl. I, figs. 2, 10, 11.
Locality: Auckland Islands. North-arm of Carnley harbour. Clay.
Een SER OU EEN SES TS ARE ROER
In the material from the North-arm of Carnley harbour was
found a single female, not fully sexually developed. Though the
specimen was in no good condition I resolved to deal with it on
account of the interesting and easily recognizable construction of
its buccal cavity, and because it represented a genus, hitherto not
described.
5
The shape of the body is rather short and clumsy; it is of
about equal width throughout its whole length, only gradually taper-
ng near the extremities. The tail is conical and of medium length.
In the preserved specimen the body is slightly
curved and tail is bent inwards towards the
ventral side of the abdomen.
The cuticle is very finely striated, but it
has not been possible to see whether rows of
points are present or not. Fine and delicate
hairs are spread, apparently irregularly, over
the surface... Just below the cuticle is seen a
layer of pigment consisting of minute deep-
brown granules; this layer is not covering all
the surface of the animal, but is interrupted
here and there for a space; in the tip of the
tail it is entirely lacking.
The head is truncate and, as far as I have
been able to ascertain, the entrance to the buc-
cal cavity is surrounded by ,eight low lips in
the intervals of which is seen a fine hair of Fig. 3. Oistolaimus
almost the same delicacy and length as those JESS BE,
spread over the body-surface. The lateral organ is found in the front-
end, just behind the lips. It is spiral-shaped and much like the
lateral organs known in the genus Desmodora; it is relatively small
and consists of only one loop and a half; the spiral line of the
outmost loop does not end freely but bends inwards to the fore-
going loop, a feature known, besides in the species of Desmodora,
in some Cyatholaimi too, viz. C. ocellatus de Man and C. microdon
Ditl.; but the most characteristic properties of this organ in the
species under consideration are the paucity of the loops and the
smallness of the whole organ.
The buccal cavity is of a rather peculiar shape. In its distal
half it is cup-shaped, broad and rather shallow. Its proximal part
is cylindrical and contains a short spear or arrow the stem of which
is slightly curved. In the front end this spear is pointed and pro-
vided with a sharp barb much like that of a fish-hook. To the
proximal part of the arrow strong muscles are attached, pointing
obliquely forwards and attached to the inside of the wall of the
6
buccal cavity; no doubt these muscles act as protruders to the
arrow. Just in front of the arrow a ring-shaped chitinous thicken-
ing is seen, serving — in my opinion — to steer the arrow when
protruded. The arrow itself is solid and is by no means to be com:
paåared with the spear known in other freeliving Nematodes viz.
Dorylaimi or Tylenchi.
The æsophagus is of equal width in its distal half; its proxi-
mal part forms a large oval bulb in the interior of which a small
cavity is seen. I am inclined to think that this bulb forms a suck-
ing apparatus which may be able to bring the blood of the prey,
wounded by the arrow, into the intestine of the Nematode. — The
cells of the intestine are large and polygonal; they are filled with
refringing granules.
No ventral gland has been observed. The vulva is found some-
what caudad to the middle of the body. The specimen being a
young female not fully sexually ripe the genital gland is only found
as a rudiment; it is situated just in the middle between the vulva
and the anal opening and consists of a little, nearly egg-shaped
syncytium with a few nuclei. It is to be supposed that the ovary
is single and that the place of the female organ is caudad to the
vulva in mature specimens, a fact not unknown in freeliving Ne-
matodes.
Halichoanolaimus de Man.
Halichoanolaimus ovalis n. sp.
Pl. I, fig. 4. Pl. IL, figs.'3, 7.
Locality: Auckland Islands. North-arm of Carnley harbour. Clay.
Be nothEEsEm me HS REDER 7 RD
Only two specimens were secured, both of them females. The
shape of the body is short and clumsy; it is of about equal width
throughout its whole length. At the level of the base of the æso-
phagus the width begins tapering evenly towards the level of the
bottom of the buccal cavity whence it continues more rapidly. The
front end is truncate as is usually the case in this genus. In the
hind part of the animal the body keeps its width until somewhat
cephalad to the anal aperture, from where it tapers quickly. The
shape of the tail somewhat resembles that of H. robustus Bastian,
Tl
but the filiform part of the tail being rather long it still more
recalls that of H. longicauda Ditl.; from this species it does how-
ever differ in the feature, that the filiform part of the tail is bent
inwards and forms a hook (fig. 4, Pl. I).
As in other species of this genus the cuticle is striated and in
its deeper layer set with minute points. In the front end of the ani-
mal these points are larger and more prominent than in the other
parts of the body; they are arranged in transverse rows, a feature
which holds good in the greater part of the body; only in the
hind-part the arrangement of the points is more irregular and the
single rows more indistinct. Along the lateral fields the punctation
is relatively coarse and grows finer dorsally and ventrally.
No bristles have been observed on the head; a ring of exceed-
ingly tiny and delicate papillæ seems to replace them, but the
number and arrangement of these latter I have not been able to
ascertain. The lateral organ is spiral-shaped, as usual in this genus;
in the species under consideration it forms a rather dense spiral, con-
sisting of about six loops which are cephalo-caudad compressed,
so that the long axis of the spiral is situated vertically on the
longitudinal axis of the body.
The buccal cavity is of the well-known shape usual in this
genus. It is divided in two parts, the foremost of which is more
spacious and nearly funnel-shaped; it grows successively narrower
towards the posterior part which is of about equal width until its
base. The chitinous rods supporting it are rather thick and strongly
chitinized. The æsophagus is of about equal width throughout its
whole length. The nerve ring is indistinct but, as far as I have
been able to ascertain, it is situated somewhat in front of the
middle of the æsophagus. Regarding the roaming habit of the Hali-
Choanolaimi it is of some interest that the entire digestive tube
is coated with a deep brown pigment layer. The intestine is more
strongly pigmented than the æsophagus, especially the antevaginal
part of the intestine. As to the æsophagus this feature is seen
påmlyem fre73;>PI: IL
Excretorial pore was not observed, nor ventral gland; but in
all probability this organ does not lack as it is present in related
forms. The vulva is found somewhat in front of the middle of the
8
body. The female organs occupy a large space in the body cavity.
Vaginal glands, containing a coarsely granulated protoplasm, are
present.
As the other species of this genus, the species under consider-
ation is of a voracious habit. In the hindmost part of the intestine
of one of my specimens is seen the chitinous skeleton of the buc-
cal cavity of an Oncholaimus; the intestine of the other spec-
imen includes the spicular apparatus of a Parasabatieria Mortenseni,
a species described in this paper. Halichoanolaimus ovalis is-evi-
dently closely related to H. robustus Bastian and to H. longicauda
Ditlevsen; the shape of the tail and the structure of the buccal
cavity are mainly the same in these forms.
Aræolaimus de Man.
Åræolaimus spectabilis n. sp.
Pl Are SP IEA gs, 30)
Locality: Auckland Islands. North-arm of Carnley harbour. Clay.
Benstbesitekm mo == 1400 == 8 SYS == R20:
Only one specimen was at my disposal, a female the length of
which makes 1,6 mm. It seems to be rather closely related to the
A. microphthalmus, described by de Man in 1893. Nevertheless I
do not venture to refer it to this species, firstly because the tail
of the species under consideration is considerably shorter than that
of the species of de Man, and secondly on account of differences
in the structure of the æsophagus. My species possesses just the
»Singulier élargissement elliptique" which de Man found in his
A. bioculatus from the Mediterranean but which in A. microphthal-
mus ,fait complétement défaut" (de Man l. c. p. 7). On the other
hand it is not possible to refer the Auckland-species to de Man's
A. bioculatus, the lateral organs being entirely different in structure
in the two species. Possibly it will prove suitable to separate
from the genus Aræolaimus the two Mediterranean species of de
Man on account of the divergent shape of their lateral organs. In
these two species the lateral organ is circular, while in A. biocula-
tus and in A. spectabilis it is loop-shaped. In his paper, dealing
with the Nematodes from "the Barentssea, Steiner called at-
tention to the lateral organs of this genus in as much as he
9
hesitated in referring a species A. Cobbii to it because of the
lateral organ not being spirated as in A. elegans. I shall remark
— here that, if all the species hitherto described as Aræolami really
belong to this genus, we shall
have the phenomenon of a genus
in which four — at least three
— different types of lateral or-
gans occur. Even if we do not
count the 4. Cobbii Steiner we
shall have A. elegans with spiral-
shaped lateral organ, Å. bioculata
and A. mediterranea with cir-
cular lateral organ and Å. micr-
ophthalmus and A. spectabilis
with loop-shaped lateral organ. Fig. 4. ÅAræolaimus spectabilis ;
Without for the present entering SS ged
on a discussion of the relationship of these forms I shall how-
ever only here call attention to the strange feature that an organ,
having, as far as I am aware, hitherto generally been considered
as of generic value among Nematodes, exhibits such an inconstancy
in a single genus.
In the species under consideration the shape is much like that
of A. elegans; the body is rather slender and attains its greatest
width in the neighbourhood of the vulva, where it is somewhat
expanded by the reproductive organs. In the front end it begins
to taper at the level of the base of the æsophagus; then it tapers
evenly to about at the level of the excretory pore where it begins
tapering more quickly. In the region of the ventral gland and at
the level of the ampulla for the excretory duct the body is some-
what expanded (fig. 5).
The cuticle is smooth. The irregularly scattered setæ, often
seen in this genus are very scanty in the species from the Auckland
Isl. and mainly restricted to the front end. On the head four setæ
are seen, arranged in one ring. More caudad, at the level of the
lateral organ, two longer bristles are seen and behind them two
more, subventrally situated. The eyes are of about the same shape
as in 4. microphthalmus de Man; their place is 40 w caudad to
the front. The lateral organ is, as above mentioned, lo0p-shaped
10
and much like that described by de Man in his 4. microphthalmus.
It is situated about 5 w behind the front. ;
The buccal cavity is very narrow, almost tubular. The æso-
phagus, the length of which makes 200 4, has immediately caudad
to the eyes a bulb-like dilatation recalling the wellknown bulb in
the middle of the æsophagus in the Rhabditidæ. It is almost ovoid
in shape and includes a cavity. The nerve ring is very distinct
and situated 120 u from the front end. At its base the æsophagus
narrows strongly, and its proximal end forms a blunt cone pro-
jecting somewhat into the lumen of the intestine. This is spacious,
and its cells are filled with strongly refringing granules.
The ventral gland is in the Auckland species very large and
occupies a considerable space in the body cavity; it forces aside
the intestine and compresses it strongly. In its interior a large
nucleus with a little refringing nucleolus is seen. The excretory
duct opens 24 w from the front end by a fine tube issuing from
a rather large, pear-shaped ampulla.
The vulva is situated somewhat cephalad to the middle of the
body. The ovaries are symmetrical and reflexed.
Parasabatieria de Man.
Parasabatieria Mortenseni n. sp.
Pl zad
Locality: Auckland Islands. North-arm of Carnley harbour. Clay.
Length: Female 2 mm. Male 1,9 mm.
Female lor RAS ENES RO RS REG
Malet rs= AG 5 RE NOT 4] SEEr
A considerable material of this species is at my disposal, in all
16 males and 39 females.
The body is rather slender and of about the same width through-
out the. greater part of its length. The head is — as is the case
too in the genus Sabatieria — separated from the body by a con-
spicuous constriction. In both sexes the tail is rather short; it
tapers evenly from the anal opening and ends in a little dilatation
on the tip of which the duct of the caudal glands opens. In the
region of the genital organs the body of the female is often con-
siderably expanded by these; also the ventral gland, which is of
Hal
mM]
S:
Parasabatieria Mortenseni. Fig. 5. Ventral gland. Fig. 6. Tail of female. Fig. 7. Fe-
male organs. Fig. 8. Hindpart of the body of the male. Fig. 9. Spicular apparatus.
12
considerable size, is able to expand the body locally; this holds good
for both.sexes. Probably the cuticle is most finely striated, but it
has proved impossible to ascertain this, even with immersion lens;
as, however, the closely related forms usually have a striated cu-
ticle, it is reasonable to presume that this is also -the case in this
species.
The head is provided with a single ring of rather long brist-
les sublaterally arranged, four in all; they are inserted at the level
of the front-edge of the large lateral organ just as in the very
closely related European species P. vulgaris, described by de Man
in 1907. On the body I have vainly searched for spread hairs.
In the male are seen three rather stout setæ on the tip of
the tail and one caudad to the ano-genital aperture (Fig. 8). The lateral
organ is spirated; it is of different size in the male and the female,
a feature evidently not uncommon among freeliving Nematodss.
While in the male the diameter of the spiral makes c. 10 w, it
only measures 4—5 w in the females. Moreover it'is very indis-
tinct in the females and often very difficult to observe. For the
same reason my measurements of this organ do not claim to be
fully correct.
The buccal cavity is very small and cup-shaped as in the other
species of this genus; it seems to be devoid of a tooth. The æso-
phagus is of equal width in its distal part; caudad to the nerve
ring it increases slightly, and at its base an inconspicuous dilata-
tion is seen. The nerve ring is situated somewhat behind the
middle of the æsophagus, and a short distance caudad to the nerve
ring the excretory tube is opening; it is issuing from a rather large
ampulla. The ventral gland is situated behind the æsophagus and
is pear-shaped. The duct is very short, and the ampulla not much
smaller than the gland itself (fig. 5). The caudal glands are pre-
sumably cephalad to the anal opening as in some other Nematode
genera e. g. Symplocostoma; in some of the specimens I have in
the body cavity observed three globular cells (?) which I consider
to De the above named glands.
The vulva is situated in about the middle of the body; it is
rather inconspicuous and often difficult to see; it is as a rule to
be found by means of the two coarsely granulated vaginal glands
which are easily perceived. The ovaries are symmetrical, but their
13
ends do not seem to be reflexed, a feature stated for related forms
by de Man and Steiner.
The spicular apparatus is much like that of P. vulgaris, espec-
ially the spicules themselves; but there is a decided difference
between the accessory pieces in the two forms. The accessory
piece in P. vulgaris is almost conical and tapers rather evenly
towards the tip, in P. Mortenseni it is rod-shaped and somewhat
curved in its distal end; in this species a peculiar loop is further-
more seen in its proximal end, formed by a projecting chitinous
list which is entirely lacking in P. vulgaris. The preanal papillæ,
the number of which is six in this species, are arranged in two
groups, one consisting of two, the other of four papillæ. Be-
tween the two groups there is a distance of c. 56 u. The two
papillæ in the hindmost group are separated 24 u from one an-
other, and the most caudad of them is 24 u from the anogenital
aperture. The four papillæ in the second group are arranged more
densely, only being separated 10—12 w from one another.
As remarked above it is beyond doubt that the species in con-
sideration is closely related to the P. vulgaris de Man from Pen-
zance in England, but several facts tend to make me at any rate
provisionally prefer to maintain the Auckland form as specifically
different from the English species. Firstly the difference in size, the
English species attaining about one third more in length. Secondly the
above named differences in the structure of the accessory piece,
and finally the differences concerning the masculine papillæ; de
Man does not name the number of these in P. vulgaris but he
remarks that ,les papilles préanales semblent étre situées å des
distances å peu prés égales", a feature that does not at all hold
good for the Auckland species.
Sabatieria de Rouville.
Sabatieria tenuispiculum n. sp.
Pl. II, figs. 6, 8.
Locality: Auckland Islands. North-arm of Carnley harbour. Clay.
Length: Female 1,;, mm. Male 1,6 mm.
Kemale”c == 44, (f == 10:
Male: or=SPÅ ==)
»A
||
BØ
BØ
FR3SER
TONE
8,7.
nn
14
The species seems to be rather closely related to S. tenuicau-
data Bastian, but it diverges so much in some respects that I do
not venture to refer it to this species. First it is considerably
smaller, the average size being about half that of Bastian's spec-
ies; secondly the æsophagus is somewhat longer and the tail
considerably longer in proportion to the body-length than is the case
n S$. tenuicaudata. Also the supply of setæ in the front end is
rather different in the two species.
The shape of the body is slender and highly resembles that
of Bastian's species. It is of about equal width during the greater
vart of its length. In the foremost half of the body it is taper-
ing slowly towards the front end. In the hindmost half it is taper-
ing in the same way unto the anal aperture. The tail is conical
in its proximal half, then it tapers quickly, and the distal half is
thin and of equal width until the tip, where it is somewhat ex-
panded. The shape of the tail is much like that of S. tenuicaudata,
but in proportion to the body-length the tail of the Auckland-species
is considerably longer.
The cuticle is transversely striated and set with points. As de
Man states, these points are lacking on the head and irregularly
spread behind the lateral organ; for the rest they are arranged
more or less regularly in transverse striæ, except in the anal region
where their arrangement also seems to be quite irregular.
On the head is situated a crown of long and stout setæ, each
accompanied by a somewhat smaller one, inserted immediately be-
hind the large one. Besides these, long, fine hairs are seen spread
over the surface of the body, especially in its foremost part. The
lateral organ is spirated and, as in the foregoing species, it is
larger in the male than in the female.
The buccal cavity is cup-shaped and much like that of P.
tenuicaudata. The æsophagus is somewhat swollen in its posterior
end, but for the rest of about equal width. The nerve ring is rather
indistinct; it is situated somewhat behind the middle, and, imme-
diately behind this, the tube of the excretory gland opens.
As to the ventral gland I shall only remark, that the duet is
short just as in the preceding species, and the ampulla rather
large. I am not able to state with certainty anything about the
l'5
caudal glands, but I suppose that they are situated a considerable
distance cephalad to the anal aperture, and that they open by
means" of long""duects at: the tip of the tail as”is "the case in
some other genera.
The female organs are symmetrical, the ovaries are not re-
flexed; I think that this last-named feature will prove to hold good
for the greater part of the species belonging to the two nearly
Fig. 10. Sabatieria tenuispiculum.
related genera Sabatieria and Parasabatieria. For S. prædatrix de
Man states the same; he writes Il. c. 1907 p. 65, about the said
species: ,,Les tubes génitaux sont symétriques, non repliés", And
Steiner communicates for his S. longiseta 1. c. 1906, p. 595: ,,So0
viel ich unterscheiden konnte, sind die Ovarien einfach ausgestreckt
und nicht zurickgeschlagen". The vulva is situated somewhat be-
hind the middle in the species under consideration. It seems as if
the usual place of the vulva in Sabatieria and Parasabatieria is
somewhat in front of the middle. In S. prædatrix it is ,située juste
au milieu du corps" as states de Man, and in S$. tenuispiculum we
have a species in which it is situated behind the middle. In this
species the part of the body in front of the vulva compared to
16
the part behind the vulva is as 6 to 5. A strongly granulated
gland is' situated in front of and a similar one behind the vulva.
The spicules are long and slender and rather strongly curved
(fig. 10). The length of the spicule from its proximal end to the
distal tip, measured in a straight line, makes 112 m. As far as I
have been able to ascertain there are two accessory pieces, one
of which is embracing the distal part of the spicule and forming
a slide for it. The length of this piece is 27 u. The other piece
is small and situated immediately caudad to the ano-genital aperture. .
Spilophora Bastian.
Spilophora amokuræ n sp.
« Pl. I, fig. 6, Pl. I, figs. 4, 5.
Locality: Auckland Islands. North-arm of Carnley harbour. Clay.
Length: Female 2 mm. Male I5 mm.
Female er == == ROR
Male: OR TED RR SS
Some specimens — males as well as females — are present.
As far as I can see, they cannot be referred to any known species
of the genus Spilophora. The shape of the body is — especially
in the female — rather thick in the middle and tapers towards
both ends. Cephalad to the vulva it tapers rather quickly until
some distance behind the base of the æsophagus; from here it
only tapers inconspicuously till the front end:
The cuticle is thick and coarsely striated; it is set with points
or oval figures, arranged transversely in striæ. The thick cuticle
behaves rather particularly in the front end, where it ends abruptly
at the middle of the head; the striæ and the points cease at the
level of the base of the buccal cavity (PI. II, fig. 4). More caudad
the cuticular points become more lengthened and at the same time
more densely situated than in the front end; in the middle of the
body they seem to suggest longitudinal striæ, interrupted by the
transverse strræ. The entrance to the buccal cavity is surrounded
by a ring of minute papillæ, and a ring of fine setæ are situated
about in the middle of the head, just where the thick cuticle is
ending. The buccal cavity is rather long and narrow, and the dorsal
tooth prominent and acute.
17
The æsophagus is rather thin and of
about equal width throughout the greater part of its length.
its base it forms an oval, muscular bulb.
At
No valvular apparatus
is found in this bulb, as the textfigure 11 seemingly suggests.
The nerve ring is situated somewhat cephalad to the middle of the
==
SES
UN
777
Fig. 11. Spilophora amokuræ.
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren.
Bd. 73.
æsophagus; it is rather
indistinct and is not seen
in the figure.
The vulva is found
somewhat in front of
the middle of the body.
As far as I have been
able to ascertain, some
minute vaginal glands
are present. The ovar-
lies are symmetrical and
reflexed. The spicules
are curved and rather
thick in their proximal
end, where they are pro-
vided with a little knob.
They are tapering rath-
er quickly towards the
middle, and their distal
half is rather thin (PI.
FH) CCESS ORY
pieces present, the num-
ber forkvhichilenave
not been able to ascer-
tain. Their distal part
is forming a sheath;
ventrally two apophyses
with truncate ends are
seen. Dorsally two others
with acute tip and rath-
er long. There are no
preanal papillæ.
no
18
Desmodora de Man.
Desmodora aucklandiæ n. sp.
PL IL figs” 8; 9
Locality: Auckland Island. North-arm of Carnley harbour. Clay.
Benstheiles km mv SS] BED NER SPA -RIS:
Of this species only three females were obtained, none of which
seem to be fully sexually developed. It appears to be a rather
small form, almost of the size of Desmodora scaldensis de Man
to which it is probably closely related, though it differs from this
species in some important respects. Its shape is rather slender;
the body is somewhat expanded in the æso-
phageal region, behind which it tapers. In the
ovarial region it is rather considerably expan-
ded so that it recalls the Chætosomes, a like-
ness which is made the more conspicuous
through the habit of these animals to keep their
bodies more or less bent. Behind the ovarial
region the body tapers again. The tail is some-
what differing in shape from that of Desmo-
dora scaldensis; in this latter it tapers rather
evenly from the anal aperture to the tip, in
D. aucklandiæ it tapers evenly to about three
fourth of its length from the anus, then it be-
gins to taper more quickly unto the tip.
The cuticle is coarsely annulated and the
annulation is the most pronounced in the foremost part of the body,
the intervals between the striæ being larger here.
The head is provided with a ring of scarcely perceptible pa-
pillæ and with two rings of bristles, one of which is found in
front of the papillæ. The number of the bristles in this ring is,
as far as I have been able to ascertain, only four, situated sub-
laterally, and the number of the papillæ is presumably six; of
these latter two are situated laterally and the others subventrally
and subdorsally. The hindmost ring also consists of four bristles
and is found near the hind-edge of the head. Other bristles are
found on the neck somewhat behind the head (fig. 12), but for the
rest the body seems to be devoid of hairs.
The lateral organ is spirated, rather small and of a shape
somewhat different from that of D. scaldensis; the outmost loop
Tor
CSE
|
Mt
|
ll
: [
dltt
==
Fig. 12. Desmodora
aucklandiæ ; head.
19
does not end. free, but bends inwards and touches the next loop
(fe 12).
The buccal cavity is rather narrow and the dorsal tooth is of
a somewhat different shape from that of D. scaldensis; it is rather
longer, more acute and prominent. The æsophagus is rather nar-
row in its foremost part, at its base it forms a distinct bulbus,
cephalad to which is seen the rather indistinct nerve ring.
The vulva is situated at about the middle of the body. The
ovaries are symmetrical and reflexed.
Oncholaimus Bastian.
Oncholaimus carnleyensis n. sp.
Pl. I, figs. 3, 7.
Locality: Auckland Islands. North-arm of Carnley
harbour. Clay.
Bens 255 mr me == 163552" == 6 ry == 10.
Only a single female was found in the material.
The shape is slender, almost filiform; it resembles
somewhat that of O. glaber, described by de Man in
1889, but it is more slender, and a closer examination
proves that the likeness is more superficial, and that the
two forms are rather different in several important re-
spects. While in O. glaber & makes 40—45, it makes
63,5 in the Auckland species.
The front end is in shape a little different from O.
glaber; in this latter the head is nearly truncate and the
mouth is surrounded by six lips each of which bears a
minute papilla. In O. carnleyensis the head is rounded
and there is no trace of lips. The cuticle is smooth,
as usually in this genus. Bristles seem to lack entirely
even on the head, and in this feature the two forms well
agree. The cephalic papillæ, mentioned by the above
named author in O. glaber, I have not been able to
observe in the Auckland form, not even with Apochr.
2 mm; notwithstanding this, it is possible that exceed-
ingly small papillæ may be present. The lateral organ
is not very distinct, but it seems to be of about the
same size and shape as in O. glaber.
Fig. 13. Oncho-
laimus carnley-
ensis; tail of
female.
22
20
The buccal cavity is relatively long and narrow. The teeth are
long and pointed; the subventrally situated tooth on the right side
is the largest. The æsophagus is of about the same width through-
out its length; only in its hindmost part it increases somewhat
towards its base. The nerve ring is found in the middle of the
æsophagus and is very distinct; immediately behind it the excret-
ory pore is found. In the foremost part of the æsophagus, a short
distance behind the buccal cavity, is found a valvular apparatus
described by de Man in all the species belonging to the sub-
genus Viscoria. Whether it is of quite the same structure as in O.
glaber or differing in some respects, I am not able to state.
The vulva is found somewhat in front of the middle; the ante-
vaginal part of the body is in proportion to the postvaginal part
as 14 to 17. The female organs are symmetrical and the ovaries
are reflexed.
? Oncholaimus viridis Bastian.
Pl. I, figs. 1, 5.
Locality: Auckland Islands. North-arm of Carnley harbour. Clay.
FensthEem esse m mo == 6 SS FEE SO
Two female specimens are present. The shape is slender and
filiform; the body is in preserved specimens spirally involute. It
is of about the same width throughout its whole length; at about
the level of the base of the buccal cavity it tapers abruptly to
wards the front. The tail is rather short and conical.
The cuticle is smooth, and bristles are only seen in the fore-
most part of the- animal. On the head is found a crown of six
rather stout setæ, arranged in the usual manner. More caudad two,
submedially situated bristles are seen; I suppose there are four in
all, but I have not been able to ascertain this. Besides the here
mentioned bristles, I have mot observed any such scattered over
the anterior part of the body as Bastian states in O. viridis.
The buccal cavity is rather spacious and its walls are strongly
chitinized. The teeth are rather broad at their base; the left sub-
ventral tooth is the largest one. The æsophagus is rather long and
of about equal width throughout its whole length. Toward its base
it increases somewhat in its proximal half. The nerve ring is found
immediately in front of the middle.
21
The excretory duct opens somewhat cephalad to the base of
the buccal cavity, 30 w from the front end. There is a pear-shaped
ampulla, the greater part of which is protoplasmatic. The chitinous
excretory tube is rather long. The ven-
tral gland is found a considerable dis-
tance caudad to the base of the æso-
phagus; in the larger of the two specimens,
the length of which makes 3,9 mm, it is
situated c. 170 u caudad to it.
The vulva is situated 2,8 mm from
the front end, that is to say a consider-
able distance caudad to the middle of
the body. The female organ is asymme-
trical and found in the body-cavity ce-
phalad to the vulva. In the uterus four
shell-eggs are seen. The distal part of
the ovary is reflexed.
It is with some hesitation that I refer
this species to the O. viridis of Bastian.
With the insufficient material at my dis-
posal and considering the somewhat compendious description of
Bastian, I am not able to settle the question with certainty.
Fig, 14. Oncholaimus viridis?
tail of female.
Thoracostoma Marion.
Excepting some questionable forms, the species belonging to
this genus are well characterized and form a very natural group.
Nevertheless it is possible among the hitherto described species to
pøint out some species which are more closely related to one
another than to the other species of the genus. I shall not enter
more thoroughly on this question here, but only point at the two
species described by de Man in the results of the Belgica-Ex-
pedition, T. setosum v. Linst. and T. antarcticum v. Linst. These
two forms are mutually closely related, and much closer related to
each other than f. inst. to the forms from the Mediterranean de-
seribed by Tiirck and by Marion. Perhaps it would prove to be
justifiable to form a special group, possibly a subgenus for these
two species, and to this group the European species T. figuratum
Bastian, described by de Man, would also have to be referred.
22
In the material from the Auckland- and Campbell Islands are
found three new species, all seeming to belong to the T. figuratum-
group. It is rather interesting that five species, known from the
Southern hemisphere thus are all closely related.!)
Thoracostoma Campbelli n. sp.
Pl. III, figs. 1, 2, 5.
Locality: Campbell! Island. Perseverance harbour. The coast at
ebb-tide; under stones.
Length: Female 16,5 mm. Male 15,2 mm.
Female == TOME ER O=O SE
Male ERE 16 NER GS Ey ARENSE
The shape of the body is slender, almost filiform. In the fore-
most end 'it tapers from about at the level of the base of the æso-
phagus. In the hind-part the body is keeping its width unto the
anal region. The tail is very short and rounded. A characteristic
feature for this species is that a rather considerable constriction
is found in the front end about at the level of the lateral organ,
which recalls the well known constriction in the genus Sabatieria.
The cuticle is smooth and relatively thick.
On the head — in front of the constriction
— a ring of ten short, conical setæ is seen.
It seems as if these ten bristles are found in
most of the known species of this genus, and
arranged in the same way. On each side a
single bristle is found laterally situated, and the
other eight are arranged in four groups of two
bristles each. The two of these groups are si-:
tuated subventrally, the other two subdorsally.
In front of.the setæ is seen a ring of four
rather large papillæ, sublaterally situated.
The cephalic mail is of the usual shape.
In each of the six lobes there are, as a rule,
two locules to be seen, but occasionally there
are found three of them. In fig. 2, Pl. III is seen
Fig. 15. Thoracostoma
that the lobe dorsally to the lateral organ has CADID DEDE fail OL Ferneler
") "Also the T. polare, described by Cobb from the Shackleton Expedition
is to be referred to the T. figuratum-group.
23
three locules, in another specimen it is the lobe, situated ventrally
to the lateral organ, that has three locules; there seems to be no
fixed rule for that. The species is easily recognizable on the band
of minute, polygonal chitinous granules which is found immediately
behind the cephalic mail. The species under consideration has this
feature in common with the T. figuratum, but from this form it is
distinguished by the fact that it has the above named cephalic con-
striction which lacks entirely in T7. figuratum.
In the æsophageal region the cuticle is set with numerous papilli-
form setæ, arranged in longitudinal rows. The lateral row only con-
sists of a few setæ which are not so regularly arranged as those
in the subdorsal and subventral rows.
The two eyes each form a cyathiform pigment spot in which
a lens has had its place. Ås there is no lens to be seen now it
is to be supposed that it has been diluted by the preservation fluid
or has disappeared in some other way. At any rate it is not un-
common that preserved specimens of freeliving Nematodes prove
to be deprived of their eye-lenses. The distance from the front end
to the eyes is in a female of this species measuring 16,5 mm c.
128 u, and in a male, the length of which makes 15,2 mm, c. 120 4.
The lateral organ which is as usual situated immediately caudad
to the single lateral cephalic bristle, is pear-shaped and measures
in longitudinal diameter c. 9 u. The lateral fields are in this species,
as in most species of this genus, characterized by the large glan-
dular cells, already observed and described by several investigators.
In the species under consideration the lateral fields are, in some
specimens, rather strongly pigmented with granules of a deep,
brown colour; this pigment can locally be so dense that it hides
the organs below and impedes the investigation.
The æsophagus is rather long as in related species. It has its
broadest width at the base and tapers evenly towards the front.
The nerve ring is rather distinct; it is situated at the limit of
about the first third of the æsophagus.
The vulva is situated a considerable distance caudad to the
middle. In a female, the length of which makes 13,8 mm, its place
is 10,6 mm from the front end. It forms a large transverse slit.
In some of the female species the surroundings of the vulva are
covered with a layer of a granulated mass, probably the rests of
24
an adhesive fluid which during the copulation serves for fixing the
male bursal region to the body of the female. The feature would
thus — according to my opinion — be analogous to what is known
in certain insects as copulation-markings, vViz.
the Dytisci. The female organs are symmetrical
and the ovaries are reflexed. Only two eggs
are found in each uterus-branch of the females
at my disposal. The hindpart of the male is
bent inwards in this and related forms. In the
mid-line, ventrally, a papilla is situated with
the opening for the gland which Jågerskidld
has named ,accessorische Driise" and which,
according to the same author, serves as an or-
gan of fixation during the copulation. I think
that this organ, in spite of its somewhat dif-
ferent structure, is to be considered as homolog-
ous to what is commonly called the supplement-
ul ary organ in the Enoploids and other genera
SV of freeliving Nematodes. Besides the supple-
mentary organ a subventral row of large mam-
SY ma-shaped papillæ is found in this species on
+45 each side, each row counting five papillæ.
se ri Snare These "bursal papillæ" are found in most of
APPAFALUs: the Thoracostomes belonging to this group;
they are found in T. papillosum also described in this paper,
and de Man states their presence in T. setosum as well as in
T. antarcticum. The spicules are rather short and thick, and on
their ventral edge a rather thin crest is seen. They are provided
with a thickening-list in the middle. From the proximal end to the
distal tip is a length of 200 u. A rather large accessory piece
embraces their distal ends and is provided with a backwards point-
ing, somewhat curved apophyse.
Thoracostoma papillosum n. sp.
Pl. I. fig. 12. Pl. II, figs. 9, 12, Pl. III, figs. 6, 8, 10.
Locality: Campbell Island. Perseverance harbour. The coast
at ebb-tide; under stones.
Length: Female 21,8 mm. Male 18,7 mm.
25
Eemale:-g =455%"f7==- 87.7: 1,130.
Male me rr 6350 == 7 sy == AES:
This is the largest of the Thoracostomes from the Auckland
and Campbell Islands. But though the female attains the consider-
able length of more than two centimeters it does not come up with
other species from the Southern Hemisphere; thus T. setosum, de-
scribed by de Man from the Belgica-Expedition has a length of
almost three centimeters.
The shape of the species under consideration is much like that
of the above described species; the body is, however, not quite so
slender. In the front end the body is tapering somewhat more
strongly; the head is truncate and no constriction is found. The
cephalic setæ are short and conical and are arranged in the usual
way. In front of the bristles, near the front end of the head, there
is a ring consisting of six papillæ two of which are placed later-
ally, the other four respectively subdorsally and subventrally. They
are very small and semiglobular in shape. Whether the correspond-
ing nerve is surrounded by a chitinous sheath, as presumed by de
Man in T. setosum, I have not been able to ascertain. Perhaps I
ought to add that concerning this feature de Man
is not quite convinced; he writes: ,le filet nerveux |
x
- 4 > s | |
de chaque papille est entouré par un petit tube chi- | j ll
tineux, å ce qu'il m'a semblé." edb SN
The cephalic mail resembles somewhat that de-
scribed by de Man in T. antarcticum, but it is not |" rt
possible to confound the two forms, on account of | |
the peculiar sexual armature found in the male of
the Auckland species. The posterior edge of each
lobe is rounded and has a feeble incision in the | Se |
middle, but small anomalies are however common ; DEERE
lobes with two incisions are rather often seen. Also N !L/l
lobes without any incision are found. In each lobe NED,
two, nearly reniform, locules are found.
I ; ; ; Fig. 17. Thoraco-
n the -æsophageal region are found longitudinal 540ma papillosum:
rows of dense, conical setæ, more or less regularly !'e7 of female.
arranged. These setæ are shorter than those on the head and are
perhaps, as de Man remarks concerning related forms, more cor-
rectly to be named papillæ. The eyes are large and form — as
26
in the preceding species of this genus —
cyathiform heeps of pigment and seem to
have contained a lens. They are situated
160 w behind the front end, measured on, a
female of 21,8 mm. In a male of 18,7 mm
the same distance makes 152 u. The lateral
organs are perhaps somewhat more length-
ened than in T. campbelli. The longitudinal
axis makes c. 12 wu,: the transverse axis
makes c 7 u. The æsophagus is rather long;
it is of about equal width in its foremost
half whereafter it increases evenly towards
its base. The nerve ring, which is very dis-
tinct, is situated somewhat more cephalad
than In the T. campbelli, at the level of about the first fourth of
the length of the æsophagus.
The vulva is situated a considerable distance caudad. to the
middle of the body. In a female, the length of which makes 21,8
mm, the place of the vulva is 14,3, mm behind the front end. The
dilatator muscles are highly developed and rather large, piriform
glands, consisting of a single cell each, open into the vulva. Å feat-
ure characteristic of this species is the large number of eggs, seen
in the uterus. In one of the largest females I count no less than
43 shell-eggs, a fertility very seldom seen in freeliving Nematodes.
The hind-part of the body of the male is incurved, as usual in
this genus. In front of the ano-genital aperture the papilliform sup-
plementary organ is seen. The structure of this is seen in fig. 8,
PI. III. There is a chitinized opening for the glandular secretion. I have
not succeeded in observing the gland itself, but according to Jåger-
skidld, it is lying very deep in the tissue, only perceivable on
sections. The distance of this papilla from the ano-genital opening
is c. 112 u. There are only two bursal papillæ on each side in
this species. They are situated a considerable distance cephalad to
the supplementary organ; the hindmost one thus is found c. 224 mw
in front of the ano-genital aperture, and the distance between the two
papillæ makes c. 160 u. Some distance cephalad to these papillæ
a square part of the ventral side of the cuticle is found covered
with very dense papillæ the shape of which is conical and with
Fig. 18. Thoracostoma papil-
losum ; male papillæ.
me emne
2
rounded or acute tips. Under low
power it looks as if this piece of the
cuticle were covered with hairs and
quite shaggy (fig. 6, Pl. II) but seen under
high power it proves to be covered
with papillæ of a rather different shape,
wherefore I find it perhaps misleading
to call them hairs. Some of these are
rounded, nearly globular, others more
lengthened, almost ovoid, some have
an acute tip and the rest are more or
less conical, lengthened and hair-like.
They are most densely crowded in the
ventral midline, where their shape is
also most hair-like. Their iength is
varying considerably; the longest at-
tain 12—15 wu. In my opinion there
can be no doubt that this feature is
inkconneetion with the sexual une 5549 Thkoracostoma papillosum:
ons is only seen in the” males spicular apparatus.
and is quite unique among freeliving Nematodes. It lends a very
curious aspect to the body-part in question, which looks as if it
were covered with a soft fur. The spicules are seen in fig. 19.
They are in shape somewhat differing from those of 7. campbelli,
and the apophyse of the accessory piece is much larger than in
this species.
Thoracostoma aucklandiæ n. sp.
Pl. II, fig. 10. Pl. III, figs. 4, 7.
Locality: Auckland Islands. North-arm of Carnley harbour. Clay.
Length: Female 12,3. Male 8,5 mm.
Bemaleer == 64. 90 6-8. y <=, 110:
Maler 605) 4 6; y == 87.
While both of the above described species of Thoracostomes
were captured in the Campbell Islands, this originates from the
Auckland Islands.
As to the shape of the body this form is rather slender, though
not so slender as T. campbelli. In the front end it is tapering
rather evenly towards the front, and the head is truncate as in T.
28
papillosum. The cephalic setæ are arranged
in the 'manner wellknown in this genus, one
laterally, two subventrally, and two subdorsally
on each side. I am not able to state with cert-
ainty whether papillæ are present or not; at
any rate they must be exceedingly small; even
with immersion lens I am not quite sure that
I have perceived them. But in analogy with
related species there ought to be a ring in
front of the cephalic setæ. The cephalic mail
is easily recognizable, from the fact that no
locules are found in the lobes. The inter-
lobular spaces are of a rather characteristic
form. While in the Thoracostomes these spaces
are commonly more or less circular, in the
species under consideration they are oblongly
ovoid, and each space is provided with a back-
wards directed off-shoot in the lobe on each
side. The
Fig. 20. Thoracostoma
lateral aucklandiæ ; tail of female.
organ is ;
almost pear-shaped and rela-
tively of about the same size
as in the foregoing species.
The "eyes "are klarsekandkol
the. same cyathiform shape as
described above. Caudad to
the cephalic mail small, papil-
liform setæ arranged in longi-
tudinal rows are situated. Ås
stated by de Man these lon-
gitudinal rows are mainly si-
tuated subventrally and sub-
dorsally; only a few bristles
are seen caudad to the lateral
organ. These rows are only
found in the æsophageal region.
Fig. 21, Thoracostoma aucklandiæ : v 5
spicular apparatus. The female pore IS situated
29
— as in all here described Thoracostomes — a considerable dis-
tance behind the middle of the body. In a female of a length of
12,3 mm its place is 8,5 mm caudad to the front end. Vaginal
glands are rather large. This species does not seem to be so pro-
lific as the above described species, only six shell-eggs being found
in one female. The egg is here considerably larger than in T.
papillosum. The hind-part of the body of the male is bent in-
ward just as in the two species described above. The supplement-
ary organ is situated about 65 w cephalad to the genital aperture.
Subventrally on each side a longitudinal fold is found. On each
of these ,,bursal foldsf — as I will name them — a row of strong
setæ is situated (Pl. II, fig. 10). These ,,bursal setæf are conical and
very acute and found in a number of 15—16 on each side. The
bursal folds which reach from immediately cephalad to the ano-
genital aperture have a length of about 320 u. Cephalad to these
folds two bursal papillæ are seen on each side.
The spicules are much like those of the other species described
in this paper. They are slightly curved, of considerable width and
have thickening-lists in the middle. The accessory piece is V-shaped;
seen in profile there are two apophyses, one pointing forwards and
the other pointing backwards; close by the distal tip is seen an
outgrowth of nearly globular shape with its surface rather coarsely
Tifled. (fig. 21).
Thoracostoma elegans n. sp.
AÅ quite young specimen of a Thoracostoma, originating from
the Campbell Island, has proved to be specifically identic with a
species of which a rather great material has been taken by the
investigation steamer ,Thorf in the Skagerrack. This species will
be described together with the material of the Ingolf Expedition
under the name of T. elegans n. sp.
Besides the species dealt with on the foregoing pages there
were present in the material from the Auckland Islands some spec-
imens, not suitable for a closer investigation; they proved to belong
to the following genera: Cyatholaimus, Enoplolaimus and Linhomoeus.
30
Bibliography.)
Bastian, H. C. 1865. Monograph on the Anguillulidæ or free Nematoids
Marine, Land and Freshwater. Trans. Linn. Soc. London XSXVE
Bitschli, O. 1874. Zur Kenntnis der freilebenden Nematoden, insbesondere
der des Kieler Hafens. Abh. Senckenb. naturf. Ges. Frankfurt
a. M. Vol. 9.
Ditlevsen, Hj. 1919. Marine free-living Nematodes from Danish waters.
Vidensk. Medd. Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 70.
Jågerskidld, L. A. 1901. Weitere Beitråge zur Kenntnis der Nematoiden,
Svenska Vetensk. Akad. Handl. Vol. 35.
de Man, J. G. 1876. Contribution å la connaissance des Nématoides marins
du Golfe de Naples. Tijdschr. Nederl. Dierk. Vereen. Deel III.
= 1888. Sur quelques Nématodes libres de la Mer du Nord nou-
veaux ou peu counus. Mém. Soc. zool. France. Vol. I.
— 1889. Espéces et genres nouveaux de Nématodes libres de la
Mer du Nord et de la Manche. ibid. Vol. II.
== 1890. Quatriéme note sur les Nématodes libres de la Mer du
Nord et de la Manche. ibid. Vol. III.
— 1893. Cinquiéme note sur les Nématodes libres de la Mer du
Nord et de la Manche. ibid. Vol. VI.
= 1904. Résultats du Voyage du S. Y. Belgica. Exp. Antarct. Belge.
Zoologie. Nématodes libres. Anvers.
— 1907. Sur quelques espéces nouvelles ou peu connues de Né-
matodes libres habitant les cåtes de la Zélande. Mém. Soc. Zool.
France RVol Se
Marion, A.F. 1870. Recherches zoologiques et anatomiques sur les Néma-
toides libres. Ann. Sc. nat. (5) Zool. Vol. XIII.
— 1870. Additions aux recherches sur les Nématoides libres. ibid.
Vol. XIV.
Southern, R. 1914. Clare Island Survey. Part. 54. Nemathelmia, Kinorhyn-
cha and Chætognatha. London.
Steiner, G. 1916. Freilebende Nematoden aus der Barentsee. Zool. Jahrb.
Abt. Syst. Bd. 39.
Tirk. 1904. Uber einige im Golf von Neapel freilebende Nematoden. Mitt.
Zool. St. Neapel. Vol. 16.
”) Only when this manuscript had gone to press I received from Dr. N. A.
Cobb his paper: ,,Antartic marine free-living Nematødes of the Shackle-
ton Expedition, Baltimore 1914.
31
Explanation of plates.
PS:
Oncholaimus viridis Bastian? Head. Winkel Homog. Imm. 2,2 mm.
Comp. Oc. 4.
Oistolaimus ferox n.g. n. sp. Vulva and ovarium. Winkel Homog.
Imm. 2,2 mm. Comp. Oc. 4.
Oncholaimus carnleyensis n. sp. Zeiss Obj. AA. Oc. 2.
Halichoanolaimus ovalis n. sp. Tail. Zeiss Obj. DD. Oc. 2.
Oncholaimus viridis Bastian? Female Organ. Zeiss Obj. C. Oc. 2
Spilophora Amokuræ n. sp. Spicules. Zeiss Apochr.2 mm. Comp. Oc.4.
Oncholaimus carnleyensis n. sp. Head. Zeiss Apochr. 2 mm. Comp.
Os:
Desmodora aucklandiæ n. sp. Tail. Winkel Homog. Imm. 2,2 mm.
Comp. Oc. 4.
Desmodora aucklandiæ n. sp.
Oistolaimus ferox n.g. n. sp. Front end. Zeiss Apochr. 2 mm. Comp.
0c 4.
Oistolaimus ferox n.g. n. sp. Tail. Zeiss Apochr. 3 mm. Comp. Oc. 4.
Thoracostoma papillosum n. sp.d& Subventral”papilla. Zeiss Apochr.
2 mm. Comp. Of. 4.
Molgolaimus tenuispiculum nm.g. mn. sp. Front end. Zeiss Apochr.
2 mm. Comp. Of. 4.
PINE
AÅræolaimus spectabilis n. sp. Front end. Zeiss Apochr. 2 mm. Comp.
Oc. 4.
Parasabatieria Mortenseni n. sp. Front end. Zeiss Apochr. 2 mm.
Comp. Of. 4.
Halichoanolaimus ovalis n sp. Front end. Zeiss Apochr. 2 mm.
Comp. Oc. 4.
Spilophora Amokuræ n. sp. Head. Zeiss Apochr. 2 mm. Comp. Oc. 4.
— 7 —. & Tail: Zeiss Obj. DD: Oc. 2.
Sabatieria tenuispiculum n. sp. Head. Zeiss Apochr. 2 mm Comp. Oc. 4.
Halichoanolaimus ovalis n. sp. Zeiss Obj. B. Oc. 2.
Sabatieria tenuispiculum n sp. Front end. Zeiss ÅApochr. 3 mm. Comp.
Oc. 4.
Thoracostoma papillosum n. sp. Head. Zeiss Obj. E. Oc. 2.
— aucklandiæ n. sp. & Tail. Zeiss Obj. B. Oc. 2.
Molgolaimus ienuispiculum n.g. n. sp. Ovarium. Zeiss Apochr. 3
mm. Comp. Of. 4.
Thoracostoma papillosum n. sp. Ovarium. Zeiss a”. Oc. 2.
%
%
10.
His
32
PISIIE
Thoracostoma campbelli n. sp. & Tail. Zeiss Obj. C. Oc. 2.
— Head. Winkel Homog. Imm. 2,2 mm.
bl
Comp. Oc. 4.
Aræolaimus spectabilis n. sp. Vulva. Zeiss Apochr. 2 mm. Comp.
Oc:
Thoracostoma aucklandiæ n. sp. & Supplementary organ. Winkel Ho-
mog. Imm. 2,2 mm. Comp. Oc. 4.
Thoracostoma campbelli n. sp. Vulva and surroundings. Zeiss Obj. C.
OcS2:
Thoracostoma papillosum a. sp. &' Tail.
Thoracostoma aucklandiæ a. sp. Winkel Homog. Imm. 2,2 mm. Comp.
Oc. 4.
Thoracostoma papillosum n. sp. Supplementary organ. Winkel Ho-
mog. Imm. 2,2 mm. Comp. Oc. 4.
Åræolaimus spectabilis n. sp. Ventral gland. Winkel Homog. Imm.
2,2 mm. Comp. OQec. 4.
Thoracostoma papillosum n. sp. Vulva.
Molgolaimus tenuispiculum n. g. n. sp.d Tail. Winkel Homog. Imm.
2,2 mm. Comp. Oc. 4.
(55109278
Papers from Dr. Th. Mortensen's Pacific Expedition
1914—16.
IV.
Ascidiæ from the Auckland and Campbell Islands.
"Holosomatous forms).
By
Prosper Bovien.
(With Plate IV).
The material of Ascidians collected by Dr. Th. Mortensen at
the Auckland and Campbell Islands in Nov.—Dec. 1914 contains
in all only 7 species (Didemnids excepted). Considering the fact
that hitherto only one single species, Corella eumyota, had been
reported from those islands, namely by Herdman, in his report on
the Tunicata of the Nat. Antarct. Exp. 1910, while not a single
species had been found (or at least mentioned) by the New Zea-
land Expedition or by the Transit of Venus Exp. (Filhol), this
present collection nevertheless represents a very noteworthy addit-
ion to our knowledge of the marine fauna of those remote islands.
The species collected are the following:
Molgula amokurae n. sp.
Halocynthia carnleyensis nm. sp.
Cnemidocarpa aucklandica n. sp.
Polyzoa reticulata Herdm.
Alloeocarpa affinis n. sp.
Botryllus sp.
Corella eumyota Traust.
(Besides these, some colonies of Didemnidae are present.)
Only two of the above mentioned species I have been able to
refer with certainty to species previously described; the other species
I have thought it necessary to describe as new, in spite of the fact
that they are more or less closely related to species previously
Vidensk. Medd fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 73. 3
34
known. Until full certainty can be obtained as to th2ir identity with
such species, I think it preferable to keep them as separate spec-
ies instead of simply uniting them with forms to which they show
near relation. In this way confusion is less liable to be the result
than if they are simply united with those species without sufficient
guarantee for the correctness of the identifications.
I am especially indebted to Prof. Michaelsen and Prof. Hart-
meyer for sending me material for comparison and for giving me
several informations in letters. I beg to express to both of them
my sincere thanks.
Fam. Molgulidae.
Molgula Forb.
Molgula amokurae n. sp.
(Textfigure 1.)
Locality: Port Ross. ca. !0 Fatkoms.
Of this evidently new form three specimens are at my dis-
posal. They are loosely attached to some Algae. The largest spec-
imen measures 8 mm, the smallest 4 mm. The shape is globular
and the siphons are externally only slightly prominent, which may
be due to the state of preservation.
The test is, when its fine covering of sand has been removed,
rather pellucid and thin. The body-wall has very feeble muscles.
It is a noteworthy feature that the blood-vessels form a brown
network in the body-wall. The same has been observed in other
Molgulids, e. g. Ctenicella natalensis (Michaelsen 1918, p. 4).
The inner siphons are moderately developed and placed at a short
distance from each other.
The branchial sac has on each side seven low folds, the
first of which (near the endostyle) has three internal longitudinal
vessels. The next four have four each, and the last two have five,
as far as I have been able to count.
Transversal vessels of ist and 2nd order and parastigmatic
vessels are found. The stigmata are rather long and only little
curved. In the space between the endostyle and the first fold some
spirals may be seen.
4.)
35
Lamina dorsalis is a plain membrane. The dorsal tub-
ercle is a lying S or it is C-shaped with its narrow aperture
turned to the right. The tentacles are present in a number of
about 16; they are branched, but only branches of Ist order ap-
parently occur.
kbeRalrmentarytceanaliskstronsly curved: The" two"parts
are lying close to each other except near the bending.
Anus has a plain margin.
A gonad is found on each side of the body. On the right
Fig. 1. Molgula amokuræ n. sp. Body, fram the left side, and dorsal tubercle.
side it is situated just above the excretory capsule. The left one
is placed above the intestinal loop. The right gonad has a higher
position than the left.
The gonads are shaped as circular, somewhat concave discs.
Their upper parts, consisting of eggs, are inclosed in the lower
testicular parts, which have a radiating structure. The female aper-
ture may be seen near tne upper edge of the ovarial part. The
male ducts are apparently not yet developed.
The excretory capsule is placed horizontally, and its upper
edge is almost a straight line, which may be characteristic.
Gonads of this structure are known from other Molgulids.
Sluiter (1914) writes about M. enodis: ,les testicules entourant
Povaire en forme de demi-lunef.
The present species appears to be most nearly related to M.
tumulus Q. & G., which has the testes in a similar position: ,,la
partie måle est constituée par des follicules rayonnants — — —".
(Pizon 1898, p. 371). Also in the structure of gill-sac and dorsal
tubercle they have features in common. It is, however, easily dis-
3x
36
tinguished by the number of internal longitudinal bars, their num-
ber being 5—6 in M. tumulus, but 3—5 in M. amokurae. Further
the shape of the intestinal loop and the length of siphons afford
distinguishing characters.
The present form does not fully agree with any other species
hitherto described; accordingly there can be no doubt that it re-
presents a new species.
Halocynthia carnleyensis n. sp.
(Plate IV, figs. 3 & 4; textfigure 2).
Localities: Carnley Harbour, Perseverance Harbour. Upon or
between stones at low tide.
Of this apparently new species a considerable number of spec-
imens were collected. Some of them are solitary, others coalesced
with their tests to such a degree that considerable force must be
used to separate them from one another. The largest specimen
measures ca. 5 cm, but many smaller sizes are represented. The
shape is exceedingly varying, and the specimens have been attached
to the stones in different ways. The colour is brown, but the un-
even and wrinkled surface is more or less overgrown with Bryo-
zoa, Hydroids etc.
The body-apertures, which are situated upon very low
siphons, are often very difficult to see from the outside.
The test is very firm, moderately thick round the siphons,
but coriaceous and strongly developed basally, in some specimens
almost forming a peduncle, while in others it is moderately thick.
On the inner side the test is dark coloured,.a little opalescent.
The body-wall is muscular and without difficulty loosened from
the test. The colour is reddish. On the preserved specimens no
siphons are. visible when the test is removed. In a specimen
whose body was 3 cm long, test not included, the distance be-
tween the body apertures was 1 cm.
The tentacles are present in a number of about 20-——23.
Their branches are rather short. The branches of 2nd order almost
rudimentary. They are all of about the same size, and it was im-
possible to state a regular alternation between smaller and larger
ones. A number of Protozoa, attached to the tentacles, made them
look more ramified than they really were (Pl. IV, fig. 4).
37
The dorsal tubercle is horseshoe-shaped with the aper-
ture directed forwards. In some specimens both horns are turned
inwards, in others outwards, and finally in one case one horn
was turned outwards and the other inwards.
Lamina dorsalis has its origin some dis-
tance from the dorsal tubercle and consists of ca.
35 slender languets.
The branchial-sac has seven folds, the first
of which has ca. 6 internal longitudinal vessels, |!
while the following folds are much stronger and
may have up to 22 vessels.
A rudimentary fold is oiten found be-
tween the endostyle and the first perfect fold, but
only developed in the lower part of the gill-sac
Fig. 2. Halocynthia
(near the mouth). The number of intermediate carnleyensis n. sp.
Diagrammatic sec-
i tion of a specimen
In one specimen the formula for the left side of with test basally
longitudinal vessels is 3—4 in each interspace.
the gill-sac is: hiekened.
ESARIG)ESE (LO) FAR US) (IS) POESI MPV SITES DE
The intermediate longitudinal vessels between the dorsal lamina
and the 7th fold are thick and prominent. Round the mouth the
folds are furnished with some slender prolongations, much alike
the ,dorsal languets". This peculiarity is, however, known to occur
in several species of this genus. Irregularly developed transversal
vessels, as well as parastigmatic vessels are present. 5—6 short
stigmata are found in each mesh.
The alimentary canal forms a wide loop, the stomach is
rather indistinct, the hepatic gland is well developed. Anus has a
plain margin.
Each genital organ consists of 20—25 well separated herm-
aphroditic lobes, the genital apertures, two on each side (gg and
2) are found near the atrial aperture. No spicules or spinules
are found.
This species cannot — as far as I can see — be identified
with any of the described species, and I shall consider it new to
science.
38
Fam. Styelidae.
Cnemidocarpa Huntsman.
Textfigures 3 and 4.
Cnemidocarpa aucklandica n. sp.
Locality: Carnley Harbour, at low tide.
Two specimens were collected. The larger, which has a rounded
shape, measures 40 mm, while the smaller one is 26 mm in length
and 18 mm in breadth. The colour is light yellowish. The surface
is rather even, but some prozesses or warts are present round
ihe siphons, which are very little prominent externally. In the
larger specimen they are placed at a distance of 15 mm from each
other. Some Hydroids etc. are found on the surface of the test.
The test: is rather thin, but tough and only with difficulty loosened
from the body-wall. On the internal side it is whitish. The muscu-
lature is feeble, the strongest muscle-bands are longitudinal. In-
testine and gonads are distinctly seen through the body-wall. The
inner siphons are rather low (6 mm in the larger specimen). SIi-
phonal spinules are present; they are pointed, but short and
with a broad base. The cells, from which they have evidently
been derived, are large and easily seen.
The tentacles are, in the large specimen, present in a number
of about 50, 23 of which are longer, the shorter ones being placed
between them. Some are quite rudimentary. The smaller specimen
has only 30, 15 of which are large. Three sizes can be traced
onfkandetheRforderfistapproximately es me SE
Cloacal tentacles are present. The dorsal tuberele is
in both specimens horseshoe-shaped with the aperture directed for-
wards. In the large specimen both horns are turned in, in the other
one horn is. turned in and the other out.
The dorsal lamina is a plain membrane.
The branchial sac has on each side 4 ridderen strong
folds, each with 7—13 internal longitudinal vessels. 3—4 inter-
mediate longitudinal vessels are present. The large specimen has
the following formula:
E. 4(11)3(13)3(13)3(10) — D. —(10)3(14)3(13)4(11)5 E.
The smaller specimen has on the right side the following numbers:
ES) 2 ET NS) 3 (7) =D: == 47.
39
On both sides of the dorsal membrane is a broad space with-
out longitudinal vessels. The meshes here have a large number
of stigmata. Transversal vessels of Ist—4th order may be disting-
uished. The vessels of Ist order are rather strong, while the fol-
lowing are much like each other. The arrangement is 1, 4, 3, 2,
4, 3, 4, 1, — so that seven vessels are found between two ves-
sels of Ist order. A very few parastigmatic vessels may be detected.
Fig. 3:
Figs. 3—-4. Cnemidocarpa aucklandica n. sp. — 3. Body wall seen from the internal
side. Intestine, endocarp and left gonad in situ. 4. Right gonad in situ.
The most peculiar feature in this species is the development of
the genital organs, which are much more strongly developed
on the right side than on the left side of the body. They consist
of elongate, somewhat branched masses with ovaria and testes
united. Several apertures leading into the atrial cavity are present,
especially on the short branches. The gonads are not equally
formed in my two specimens. In the large specimen the
gonad of the right side is, strange enough, in connection with that
of the left side, so as to form an elongate mass with some short
branches. Besides the large mass a little isolated mass is present.
In this specimen a few testis-follicules are present in the body-
wall around the combined genital glands. The smaller specimen
has a large sausage-shaped gonad on the right side and a little
one on the left; between them, apparently belonging to the right
side, is another little mass with apertures of its own. It is sur-
prising to find the gonad of the right side in connection with that
of the left side, as is the case in the larger specimen. I do, how-
ever, think that it is to be considered only as an individual pecu-
40
liarity, and it must be remembered that Hartmeyer (1912) says
about C..asymmetra: ,Bei dem Typus stossen die beiden Gonaden
mit ihren ventralen Råndern sogar vollståndig zusammen",
The intestine forms a weak, S-shaped loop. The stomach
has internal folds which are seen through the wall. No coecum is
present. Anus has a plain border without lobes or incisions.
Endocarps are found on the left side. Two in the intestinal
loop, one between æsophagus and rectum, two above and a few
beneath the intestine.
It is evident that this species must be placed in the group
which Prof. Hartmeyer calls ,humilis-Gruppef. To this group
C. humilis (Heller), C. cerea (Sluit.), C. gregaria (Kestev.), C. asym-
metra (Hartm.) and C. robinsoni Hartm. belong. Prof. Hartmeyer
considers it a very natural group which, for the present, he has placed
in the genus Cnemidocarpa Huntsm. The three first mentioned spec-
ies are from Australia-N. Zealand, but I do not find them very nearly
related to my species. C. humilis is imperfectly described and C. cerea
has differently shaped gonads; the same appears to be the case in
C. gregaria. With C. asymmetra and C. robinsoni (South Africa and
Juan Fernandez) it is a different thing. The present species is very
closély related to them, if not identical with one of them. The
differences in the development of dorsal tubercle, gonads and
branchial sac are evidently not important characters, as those or-
gans are very variable (Michaelsen 1915, p. 395). I am not
sure, whether C. aucklandica is most nearly related to C. asymmetra
or to C. robinsoni, therefore I think it will be right to describe it
as new, until further material can be produced.
Polyzoa Lesson.
Polyzoa reticulata (Herdm.).
Chorizocormus reticulatus, Herdm, Tunic. Challenger II, p. 346—349.
Polyzoa falclandica var. repens, Michlsn., Holos. Asc. mglh.-siidgeorg.
GebEp ESS]
Polyzoa reticulata, Michlsn., Rev. d. comp. Styel. u. Polyzoinen, p. 65.
Locality: Perseverance Harbour, Campbell Island, ca. 20
Fathoms.
This species is represented by some smaller colonies attached
to shells together with A//oeocarpa. The surface of the colonies is
41
covered with fine sand etc. Only few grown-up persons are pre-
sent, while a perfect network of stolons is found. Owing to the
characteristic shape of the colony and the presence of secondary
transversal vessels, I do not hesitate to refer these specimens to
P. reticulata, Which has its nearest occurrence at the Magelhaen-
strait and South Georgia.
Alloeocarpa Michlsn.
Alloecarpa affinis n. sp.
(Plate IV, figs. 1 and 2).
Locality: Perseverance Harbour, Campbell Island. Ca. 20
Fathoms.
The specimens are attached to shell-fragments. Some of them
are quite isolated, others are adjoining to each other with the
peripheral zone of the test.
Others show stages of budding in such a manner thåt
buds in different stages of development are seen in connection
with the specimen, from which they have their origin. The largest
specimen measures ca. 6 cm in diameter, the. baso-apical distances
are not more than 3—4 mm, often only 1-—2 mm. In shape it is
circular or a little oblong. In the young siphons are not seen,
while the oblong or slit-shaped body-apertures in the older persons
are situated on small eminences.
The young specimens (in a preserved state) are of a dark steel-
blue colour, the older ones are greyish. A striking feature, especially
in the smaller specimens, is the occurrence of numerous mantle-
vessels in the pellucid, peripheral part of the test. They appear
as club-shaped, dark bodies radiating from a centre, apparently
situated in the basal wall of the animal. These formations have
been described by Michaelsen (1900, p. 33), and described and
picturedkbyrselys=bonschamps (19133 p:44—47)).
The tentacles are present in a number of about 20, seven
of which are larger than the rest. Parasitic Protozoa (Suctoria ?)
are found attached to the tentacles.
The dorsal tubercle is a simple slit.
The dorsal lamina is a plain membrane.
The branchial-sac has no folds, but 6 internal longitudinal
vessels on each side. Transversal vessels of Ist and 2nd order as
42
well as parastigmatic vessels are present. The distance from the
endostyle to the first internal longitudinal vessels is considerable;
in one case 12 stigmata were counted in a row. Between the
longitudinal bars 6—8 stigmata are found in a row. In the lower
part of the gill-sac the stigmata may be very irregularly arranged,
forming a network.
The alimentary canal is very strongly curved, the anus
cannot be seen from the left side.
The støomach is short and broad, with 16—18 longitudinal
folds and a club-shaped coecum.
The margin of the anus is two-lipped and a little down-bending.
The genital organs are developed as polycarps, which is charact-
eristic of this group. The 2 -polycarps are found on the right side of
the endostyle in the number of about 6. They contain a few ripe
ova and have a short and broad oviduct. The &g-polycarps are seen
on the left side in a number of 4—6; they are pear-shaped, with
a slender sperm-duct in the narrow end. They are simple and
undivided. The largest testes are about I mm long. A number
of larvae are often found in the atrium.
The present species shows in its external features a consider-
able resemblance to A. intermedia Michlsn. and A. bridgesi Michlsn.,
with which species I have been able to compare it directly, Prof.
Michaelsen having kindly sent me a pair of cotypes. It has
also a great likeness to the variety of 4. incrustans, which was de-
scribed as 4. emilionis by Michaelsen. Only two of the known
species have so few internal vessels: A. bridgesi and ÅA. capensis
Hartm. They have, as the present species, six on each side. A.
bridgesi has differently shaped g'-polycarps of complicated structure;
identity with that species thus is evidently out of question. But
my species comes very close te 4. capensis, and it is not at all
impossible that they may be identical. The main differences are
in the external appearance. Hartmeyer writes of the colony:
»eine basale Masse bildend, aus welcher zwei aufrechte, mehr oder
weniger keulenfårmige Kåpfe herauswachsen; — —." Hartmeyer
does not mention or figure the dark mantle-vessels, so distinctly
seen in A. affinis.
Further the stomach has a somewhat different form, and the
intestinal loop is not so strongly bent in A. capensis as in A. affinis.
43
Hartmeyer (1912) says: ,doch berihrt der ricklåufende Ast des
Mitteldarms den Rand des Magens nicht." Also in that respect A.
affinis is different. The number of tentacles, stomach folds, and
internal longitudinal vessels is the same in both species, and also
the gonads are much alike. A. capensis has fewer 3 polycarps and
they have apparently not quite the same pear-shape as in A. affinis.
It will be evident from the above that the present species is
closely related to A. capensis. It is — as already stated — even
possible that they will ultimately be found to be identical. For the
present, however, it seems to me necessary to maintain the form
from the Campbell Isl. as a separate species, the differences pointed
out being — if constant — evidently too important for simply
uniting it with the African form.
Further material, however, alone can give us information re-
garding the constancy or variability of these characters.
In zoogeographical respect it is interesting to find this genus
at the subantarctic islands of New-Zealand, the nearest occurrence
of the genus being the Magelhaen-strait and Cape. In the Pacific
the Polyzoinae are thus represented by Polyzoa, Chorizocarpa, Met-
androcarpa and Alloeocarpa.
It is of some importance that I am able to ascertain that bud-
ding takes place in this species, as the existence of that form of
reproduction in the genus Al/oeocarpa has been doubted by Selys
Longchamps (,Belgicaf, p. 47—48). This author says of the form,
which he describes as 4. incrustans Herdm.: ,Individus solitaires,
sans indication de la formation future d'une colonie.” He supposes
further: ,qu'il n'y a pas de bourgeonnement chez ces Ascidies,
mais simplement agglomération des jeunes exemplaires autour de
Pindividu, qui les a produits par voie sexuée. —"
I think it would certainly be rather strange, if no budding took
place in this genus as this mode of reproduction is found in other
groups of Polyzoinae, e. g. Metandrocarpa. Huntsman (1906—
1910, p. 141, Pl. XI, fig. 9) figures M. taylori and the budding is
distinetly seen, just as in A. affinis. I shall also point out that
Metandrocarpa taylori and A. affinis are very much alike extern-
ally. The mantle-vessels are developed in the same way in these
two species of different genera.
Su
44
Fam. Botryllidae.
Botryllus Gaertn. (s. lat.).
Botryllus sp.
Textfig. 5.
Locality: Masked Isl., Carnley Harbour, on rocky shore.
Of this form one colony was collected. The dimensions are:
length 6 cm, breadth 2,5 cm, the thickness is at least 5 mm.
LETS The colony, which has grown on .shell frag-
LT ØU ER ments, is formed of flattened fleshy lobes, se-
parated by deep incisions. The test is trans-
lucid and a little greyish, but the Ascidiozooids
are dark (purple or reddish), which lends a
violaceous hue to the colony.
Branching vessels are numerous in the test,
] their terminal bulbs are dark and especially
closely placed in the periphery of the lobes.
The ascidiozooids are arranged vertically
in rows or without any distinct order. Com-
mon cloacal apertures are very inconspicuous.
The Tascidiozoordst aretts=3Emmloner
their diameter being ca. 1 mm.
The branchial aperture is circular, with-
out lobes.
The atrial aperture is large, only slightly
EB, prominent; its largest diameter is transversal:
Fig. 5. Botryllus sp. The upper lip is not prolonged in the roof-
old like manner and does not form an anal tongue.
The mantle is delicate and pellucid, pigment more developed
in some Ascidiozooids than in others.
Sixteen tentacles are present. Three sizes are represented
in the order 1, 3, 2, 3, 1, — —. The tentacles of 3rd order are
very short and not always recognizable.
The dorsal lamina is a narrow membrane.
The branchial sac is long with three internal longitudinal
vessels on each side. Ca. 16 transversal rows of stigmata are pre-
sent. Between the dorsal lamina and the first internal longitudinal
vessel there are ca. 6 stigmata in a row. Between the vessels ca.
45
4, and in the space from the last vessel to the endostyle 4—5
are found. Quite close to the endostyle no stigmata are developed.
iiheRintestineRleskontthenleft"sidefoffthe branehialf'såe. "The
stomach, which is conical, is the thickest at the cardia. Ca. 10
longitudinal folds are developed. A short, rudimentary coecum is
present. Anus has two lips and is placed at a level of ”/s of the
length of the ascidiozooid. Gonads are not seen, but some young
buds are present.
This species must be placed in the genus Botryllus (s. lat.). Its
nearest relations must be expected among the species of the former
genus Sarcobotrylloides (or perhaps Botrylloides). It has, however,
proved impossible to maintain these genera. The present species
does not fully agree with any of the described species. Further
investigation of this group, especially of different stages of devel-
opment, will doubtless prove a very great part of the species to be
identical, as pointed out by several authors. Therefore I shall, for
the present, only call this form Boftryllus sp.
Fam. Rhodosomatidae.
Corella Ald. & Hanc.
Corella eymyota Traust.
Corella novarae Drasche 1884.
C. antarctica Sluiter 1905.
Locality: Carnley Harbour, Amokura Harbour. At low tide,
upon or between stones.
Several specimens of different sizes. The largest specimen mea-
sures 46 mm, which is not much in comparison with the largest
samples of Hartmeyer and Sluiter. Some of the animals are
attached to stones or shells with the larger part of the right side,
in which case the siphons åre turned to the left. The younger spec-
imens have a smooth test, but in the older ones it is often more
or less overgrown with Bryozoa, Hydroids and Didemnids. One
specimen was covered nearly all over with the last mentioned or-
ganisms, only the siphons were free. In this sample, which was
attached with the entire right side of the body, the siphons were
remarkably long, and their direction vertically to the long axis of
46
the body. Some of the specimens at my disposal are connected
laterally " with their tests so as to form a large flattened mass.
Their tests are fragile and easily torn. The internal features are
essentially in accordance with the earlier descriptions. The intestiral
loop is as figured by Traustedt (1881, pl. IV). Its upper edge is
at a level with the atrial siphon and the stomach is almost vertical.
I may call attention to the fact that the siphons have a var-
ying number of lobes. Typical for the genus is, branchial
aperture: 8, atrial aperture: 6, but in some cases I found 5—5
or 6—6. The same was the zase with the ocelli.
This circumnotial species has previously been recorded from
the Auckland Isl. by the Nat. Antarctic Exped. (Herdman).
It is evident that the Tunicate-Fauna of these islands has much
in common with that of the Magelhaen-strait, South Georgia
and Cape. The described species of Alloeocarpa and Cnemidocarpa
have their nearest relations here and Polyzoa reticulata is known
from the Magelhaen-strait. It is a very noticeable fact that only
one of the species is known from New-Zealand, the widely destri-
buted Corella eumyota. It is also of interest to notice that Molgula
amokurae has its nearest relation — M. tumulus — in Australian
waters (Port Jackson). Otherwise there seems to me no reason to
enter on a detailed discussion of the zoogeographical problems
connected with the Tunicates of these regions, especially so long
as the collection of the Tunicates from New Zealand seas has not
yet been worked out.
Literature.
19133TESvanbBeneden et Mi"de”Selys"Longcehamp'sølklbuntererss
Voyage du S. Y. Belgica.
1911. R. Hartmeyer, Tunicata in Bronn Kl. u. Ordn.
1911. — Die geographische Verbreitung der Ascidien. Verh. d.
deutsch. zool. Ges. 1911.
1912. — Die Ascidien d. deutsch. Tiefsee-Exp. Deutsche Tiefsee-Exp.
BX VISEettes:
47
1914. R. Hartmeyer, Diagnosen einiger neuer Molgulidae u.s.w. Sitz.ber.
d. Ges. nat. Fr. Berlin.
1916. = Neue u. alte Styeliden aus der Sammlung des Berliner
Museums. Mitt. aus d. zool. Mus. Berlin. Bd. 8. Heft 2.
1881. W.Herdman, Report on the Tunicata collected during the Voyage
of H. M.S. Challenger. Part I. Ascidiae simplices. Rep.
sci. Res. Voy. Challenger. Zool. Vol. VI.
1886. = Part II. Ascidiae compositae. ibidem Vol. XIV.
1899. = Descriptive Catalogue of the Tunicata in the Australian
Museum, Sidney. Liverpool.
1910. =- National Antarctic Expedition. Vol. 5. Tunicata.
1906—10. A.Huntsman, Holosomatous Ascidians from the western coast
of Canada. Contrib. to Canadian Biology. Ottawa.
1900. W.Michaelsen, Die holos. Asc. des magelh. sidgeorg. Geb. Zoo-
logica Bd. XII, H. 31.
1904. — Revision d. comp. Styeliden oder Polyzoinen. Mitt. aus d.
naturh. Mus. Hamburg. XXI.
1915. — Beitr. zur Kenntnis d. Meeresfauna Westafrikas, Lief. 3.
Tunicata.
1898. Pizon, Étude anatomique et systemat. des Molgulidées appart. aux
collections du Muséum de Paris. Ann. Sci. nat. Sér. 8.
VÆR:
1914. Ph. Sluiter, Deuxiéme expédition Antarctique Frangaise. (Charcot).
Tuniciers.
188!. Traustedt, Vestindiske Ascidiae simplices. Vid. Medd. Nat. Foren.
København.
Explanation of the Plate.
Fig. 1. Alloeocarpa affinis n. sp. Young budding person. Mantle-vessels are
Sens
Alloeocarpa affinis n. sp. Alimentary canal from the left side. "/1.
Halocynthia carnleyensis n. sp. Branchial sac between two folds. 7".
Halocynthia carnleyensis n. sp. Tentacle with attached Protozoa. ”/2.
Rwn
2455 192]E
ge
SÅ
Papers from Dr. Th. Mortensen's Pacific Expedition
KOR E 6
VÅ
Notes sur quelques Protozoaires marins.
par
Car! Dons, Trondhjem.
Dans une assez grande collection de Folliculinides, généreuse-
ment mise å ma disposition par Dr. Mortensen, il m'est arrivé
de trouver de temps å autre quelques Protozoaires d'autres groupes
— å une seule exception prés tous exemplaires de formes fixées.
Cependant, la collection ayant été faite au sujet d'un groupe spé-
cial, il va sans dire que les Protozoaires d'autres groupes ne sont
que bien fragmentairement représentés.
Notre connaissance de la faune du Pacifique de Protozoaires
étant fort imparfaite, la collection toutefois contient beaucoup de
formes d'”importance pour nous. Ce petit traité servira entre autre
å éclaircir la nature cosmopolitaine des Protozoaires fixés.
Il y avait dans la collection un Héliozoaire, Wagnerella bore-
alis, et celui-ci ayant été constaté dans une série d'échantillons,
jai fait un apergu de sa distribution dans tous les océans, tandis
que des autres groupes, ceux des Ciliés et des Suceurs, je m'ai
cité que les localités de 1'expédition.
Les Ciliés mentionnés ici forment 15 espéces dont plusieurs
ont då étre désignées nouvelles. Les Suceurs n'étaient représentés
que par 5 espéces.
La collection de Folliculinides, de laquelle les exemplaires trai-
tés ici ont été tirés, forme cependant un total qui, par conséquent,
sera discuté dans un traité å part.
Quant aux illustrations je ferai observer que plusieurs. des
figures surtout visent å démontrer la relation entre les variations
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 73. 4
50
de chaque population des différentes espéces. Ordinairement le
cytoplasme est indiqué par des points. Les figures "3,4 6 S KERNE
29 et 32 ont été dessinées d'aprés des préparations colorées avec
de I'hæmatoxyline.”)
Trondhjem, novembre 1920.
E
Heliozoa.
Wagnerella borealis Mereschkowsky.
(Fig.1).
Distribution: cosmopolitaine, å la profondeur de 0—300 brasses.
a. De VArctique.
A VEst du Grænland:
+ Stormbugt (PExpéd. de ,,Danmark", St. 66), 20 brasses, sur des Floridées
(Delesseria sp.)
Spitzberg: i
Green Harbour, Aott 1910, environ 10 m, sur Pecten islandicus L.
[Dons].
La Mer Blanche:
1878, parmi des Éponges calcaires [Mereschkowsky].
b. De PAtlantique.
Au Nord de la Norvége:
+ Storfjord å Lyngen; Juillet 1897, 25—35 brasses, sur Calycella plica-
flis ts GROS!
Tromsø, Aott 1911; 10—20 m, sur Lithothamnion sp., aussi Déc. 1916,
environ 15 m, sur Diphasia abietina L. [Donsl.
£ Gibostad dans Gisund, S. O. de Tromsø, ”/s 1912; 40—50 m, sur
Anomia ephippium et sur Pecten islandicus L., aussi ”/s 12, 50—60
m, sur des Hydroides. ;
Bjarkøy dans Vågsfjord, Juillet 1910; 85 m, sur des Bryozoaires [Dons].
Evenskjær dans Tjellsund, N. E. de Lødingen, ”/1 1911; 30 m, sur
des Bryozoaires, aussi "/s 19; 40 m; sur Diphasia abietina L.
Lødingen, å Vintérieur de Vestfjord, %s 1912, environ 50 m; aussi ”/s
13; 40—50 m, sur des Bryozaaires.
PIslande:
+£Vestmannaeyjar, Sept. 1898; 60—70 m, sur des Floridées (Delesseria sp.).
mM
oa
EO
") Pendant la réproduction la plupart des figures ont été diminuées selon
une autre mesure que celle indiquée par moi-méme. Pour faciliter la
comparaison directe j'avais voulu rendre les grossissements aussi uni-
formes que possible et plutéåt en des nombres cent entiers.
£ Nouvelle localité.
51
La Méditerranée:
Naples, 1879 [Mayer], aussi Février-Juillet 1905 et 1906; 1—3 m,
sur des pierres volcaniques [Zuilzer].
Quarnerolo dans la Mer Adriatique, Avril 1910; 110 m, sur des Hy-
roides [Dons].
c. Du Pacifique.
Vancouver:
£ Pylades Channel, ""/7 1915; 30 brasses, sur des Bryozoaires.
<= Departure Bay, ”””6 15, sur des Bryozoaires dans ,,la grotte de Brachio-
podes”,
Panama:
£ Rey, Isl. Perlas, >%/1 16; 10—15 brasses, sur des Bryozoaires.
Japon :
Misaki, ”/4 14, sur Pecten sp.
Sunosaki, ”/6 14; 20—80 brasses, sur des coraux.
Sagami Sea, ”/6 14; 300 brasses, sur des Bryozoaires.
Okinose, Sagami Sea, ”/4 14; 60 brasses, aussi ”/1 14; 200 brasses,
sur des Bryozoaires.
LIndo-Chine:
£ Singapore,
New-Zealand :
=£ Colville Channel, ”/12 14; 35 brasses, sur des Bryozoaires et des
Brachiopodes.
Auckland Islands:
=£ Port Ross, %/11 14, environ 10 brasses, sur Spirorbis sp.
% &
wo sa
"”/12 1906, basse marée, sur des Bryozoaires.
d. De VAntarctique.
Me Murdo-Sound:
Ile Expéd. Antarctique de Shackleton, Juillet 1908; 42—85 m, sur des
Hydroides [Dons].
Il y a peu d'années que Naples et la mer Blanche étaient les
seuls endroits de trouvaille de Wagnerella borealis. Plus tard (1917)
ai pu la constater dans quelques localités nouvelles. Le nombre
des endroits de trouvaille ainsi multiplié est aujourd'hui de 23
localités, å savoir: 3 de la mer Glaciale arctique, 9 de I' Atlantique
(dont 2 de la Méditerranée), 10 de l'océan Pacifique et 1 de la
mer Antarctique.
Pour ce qui concerne tout spécialement les localités de la Nor-
vege du Nord, je ferai observer que j'ai trouvé Wagnerella dans
tous les endroits ou j'ai fait des recherches, å l'exception d'une
seule de mes stations.
Je mai nulle part trouvé Wagnerella en grande quantité, néan-
moins elle parait faire partie constante de la faune de fond. L'ani-
4=
52
mal vivant n'est pas toujours facile å discerner, mais selon mes
recheréæhes en Norvége du Nord, je ne doute pas que I'animal ne
se trouve pour ainsi dire å chaque endroit de notre cote.
Un regard sur la liste des localités et sur la carte nous donne
Vimpression que cette espéce se trouve å d'autres cotes aussi, car
je pense que les données forment la preuve suffisante que Wag-
nerella borealis est une espéæce parfaitement cosmopolitaine pros-
pérant aussi bien dans la mer arctique que dans la mer antartique.
L'animal d'ailleurs ne parait pas étre particuliérement dépendant
de la hauteur de la mer cu de la qualité du fond, car il a été.
observé de la gréve jusqu'å la profondeur de 300 brasses, attaché
å des bases de toute sorte, comme p. ex. des pierres, des algues
calcaires, des algues foliiformes, des coquilles de mollusques, des
brachiopodes, des serpuliens, des bryozoaires, des coraux et des
hydroides.
Comme "animal vivant est assez transparent, il est parfois dif-
ficile å discerner, mais étant fixé, ses aiguilles siliceuses particu-
liéres deviennent visibles å fixation, et alors "'animal est facilement
identifié. Sur un matériel acquis par hasard on ne trouvera le plus
souvent que la coquille de base avec une partie plus ou moins
grande du pédoncule — et la téte seulement par exception.
C'est ce qui a généralement été le cas des échantillons de
Pocéan Pacifique. Une seule fois j'ai pourtant trouvé des individus
complets (de Departure Bay, Fig. 1). A la plupart des endroits il
n'y avait qu'un petit nombre d'individus.
L'intérét principal du matériel est attaché aux dates zoogéo-
graphiques, par lesquelles la nature cosmopolitaine de V'animal de-
vient manifeste.
II y a pourtant une autre question qui se présente, ayant rap-
port å la question de distribution — å savoir: dans les différentes
eaux I'espéce est-elle de la méme apparence, de mémes dimensions,
ou est-ce qw'il y a quelque différence å percevoir dans les séries
des variations, de maniére å rendre possible de distinguer p. ex.
plusieurs ,races" ?
Zuilzer a démontré (1909) que Wagnerella produit des indivi-
dus au pédoncule tantåt mince, tantåt robuste, ces: individus étant
probablement å interpréter comme le résultat d'un échange de
53
générations. Comme I'épaisseur des pédoncules des deux généra-
tions est fort variée, la question devient assez compliquée.
La génération å pédoncule robuste est pourtant trés rare; je
n'ai moi-méme pas trouvé un seul individu rapportable å cette géné-
ration. Aussi les observations que je vais faire
plus tard ont exclusivement rapport å des in-
dividus de la génération å pédoncule mince.
Afin de faire, si possible, une comparaison
entre les différentes localités, j'ai mesuré la
dimension de la base du pédoncule de chaque
individu des populations relativement nombreu-
ses. La mesure trouvée a été arrondie au
nombre pair le plus proche (en w) et Pindividu
signalé par un point sur la table 1 devant ce
chiffre.
De V'Atlantique du Nord j'ai mesuré 5 po-
pulations (4 de la Norvége du Nord et 1 de
”Islande) dont la plus nombreuse comptait 31
individus, la moins nombreuse 18.
De la mer Pacifique seulement 4 popula-
tions étaient propres å paraitre dans un tableau
— et elles sont en vérité si peu nombreuses
(de 4 ou 8 individus) qu'il faut se demander
s'il est justifiable d'en tirer des conclusions.
Si nous faisons une comparaison surtout avec
Pune des populations de la Norvége du Nord
(Gibostad) elles paraissent pourtant avoir quel- E g
que valeur, c'est pourquoi je les ai enregistrées Fig. 1. Wagnerella bore-
ARE Dean alis. Departure Bay. "9/1.
Une réponse définitive å la question de l'existence des espéces
élémentaires ou des races en Wagnerella ne sera probablement ob-
tenue qu'aux moyens d'une culture pure. A mon avis il n'est pas
tout å fait impossible que les populations ,sauvages" puissent four-
nir quelque information.
C'est ce que nous ne gagnerons pas souvent des populations
particuliérement riches en individus, om 2 (ou plusieurs) races sont
mélées, et les limites des races effacées,: parceque les séries des
variations ont réciproquement dépassé leurs limites.
>
FNSDSSE
54
Races des Wagnerella borealis,
basées sur I'épaisseur des pédoncules
W
Du Nord de PAtlantique
Du Pacifique
Tromsø
Déc. 1916
Bjarkøy
Juillet 1910
Lyngen
Juillet 1897
L'Islande
Sept. 1898
Gibostad
Mai 1912
Pylades
Channel
16/7 15
Departure
Bay
10/6 15
Tab. 1.
Rey,
Isl. Perlas
26/1 16
Colville
Channel
21/12 14
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
Race & (environ 22 14)
Race Ø (environ 15 %).
——
16 4
lee
59
Si au contraire une population est uniforme et peu nombreuse,
je pense que nous sommes assez fondés de croire que les indi-
vidus qui vivent dans un espace étroit sont originaires d'un seul
individu, car le plus souvent les individus d'une population peu
nombreuse sont relativement peu différents en dimension les uns
des autres. Il serait donc å supposer qu'ils. appartiennent å une
ligne ,pure"; mais par une petite population on risque toujours
d'avoir une série de variations å dévéloppement trop unilatéral, et
en méme temps les vraies dimensions de la série des variations
ne sont pas non plus définitivement éclaircies. Cela se voit en
pantiettable 1
Sur table 1 l'épaisseur du pédoncule des 4 premiéres popu-
lations de I'Atlantique du Nord varie de 14 å 30 u. L'épaisseur
moyenne de chaque-groupe varie de 20 å 24 uw, c'est-å-dire qu'ils
se rangent autour d'une moyenne commune de 22 Wu.
Si nous continuons par les 5 populations suivantes —- la der-
niére de la Norvége du Nord (Gibostad) et les 4 de la mer Paci-
fique — nous verrons que V'épaisseur de leurs pédoncules varie
de 10 å 20 u. L'épaisseur moyenne de chaque groupe varie de
13 å 17 w, c'est-å-dire qu'ils se rangent autour d'une moyenne
commune d'environ 15 w.
Deux des 4 populations de la mer Pacifique sont d'une moyenne
deRIsSEutttandisik que fleste Fautrestsontide lb al 7 usellesksont
donc å interpréter comme appartenant å de différentes ,,races".
Toutefois ces 4 populations sont assez peu nombreuses, et par con-
séquent il est probable qu'elles soient unilatéralement dévéloppées.
II semble que cette supposition soit confirmée par une comparaison
avec les individus de Gibostad. Cette derniére population est rela-
tivement riche en individus qui se rangent autour d'une épaisseur
moyenne de 15 wu, V'épaisseur de tous les individus sans exception
variant de 12 å 18 u. La population ci-dessus mentionnée fait
ainsi la transition entre les différents groupes du Pacifique.
Comme la table 1 le montre nous avons en tous cas å faire
åa 2 séries de variations, ce qui me fait supposer que Wagnerella
borealis se divise au moins en 2 races. L'une d'elles que je nom-
merai provisoirement la race & est donc caractérisée par V'épais-
seur moyenne du pédoncule d'environ 22 4, la seconde, la race £,
par Pépaisseur moyenne d'environ i5 w.
56
Fig. 1 montre un des plus grands individus de la race £, la
plupart de ces individus ont le pédoncule plus mince que celui
defor
II est impossible d'ignorer cette circonstance qui saute au yeux,
å savoir: qu'å une seule exception prés (les individus de Gibostad)
tous les individus de VAtlantique sont de la race &, tandis que
ceux du Pacifique sont de la race 2. Gibostad se trouve entre
Bjarkøy et Tromsø, ce qui porte å croire que la situation géogra-
phique n'a pas d'influence sur Vextérieur de V'espéce.”)
Il est donc å supposer que ies différences de races sont dues
å”des facultés hériditaires, mais pour faire constater avec certitude
ce fait, il faut absolument de pures cultures.
HL
Ciliata.
Vorticella Mortenseni, n. sp.
(Figs. 2—3).
Port" Ross. Auckland. Isl., 5/4 71914environ 10Fbrasses rele
individus sur des Floridées.
La cloche a la forme d'un céne tronqué (forme de pouding).
La surface est presque unie, quelquefois fournie de toutes petites
inégalités irréguliéres. La longueur de animal est environ de 40
åa 43 uw, au-dessus du bord du péristome la largeur est environ de
40 u. Le bord du péristome est épais, mais seulement peu saillant,
le péristome vrai au contraire fort bombé. Les cils sont d'environ
12 w de longueur. Le noyau est extraordinairement long, plus ou
moins réguliérement en forme de tire-bouchon, d'épaisseur un peu
inégale 4-—6 w, il a au moins 80 —100 u de longueur. Le pédon-
culerar4ude large et environ 100 ude longtilknenpeutkere
complétement étiré.
De cette Vorticella caractéristique il y a un groupe de 11 indi-
vidus dont un couple exceptionellement a été fixé en état com-
plétement étiré.
") Zilzer annonce (1909; qwå Naples VP”épaisseur du pédoncule est le
plus souvent entre 12 et 22 14, il n'existe toutefois pas de statistique sur
ces individus, mais il parait plus probable que les individus de la Mé-
diterranée appartiennenr å la race Å.
SM
L'animal est caractérisé par sa forme de céne tronqué et par
son noyau de longueur extraordinaire en forme de tire-bouchon au
lieu de celle de fer å cheval, qui est la forme ordinaire de ce
genre.
2
IJ.
Figs. 2—3. Vorticella Mortenseni n. sp. Port Ross, Auckland Isl. 2. "9%, 5. 2/1.
Sur le matériel fixé il n'est pas possible de faire une distinc-
tion entre 1'ectoplasme et V'endoplasme; il n'y a pas non plus de
vacuoles å discerner. Le plasme a Vair de consister en une sub-
stance relativement uniforme.
Vorticella robusta n. sp.
(Fig. 4).
Departure Bay ”/$ 1915, 2 individus ,dans une grotte dans
le roc avec un grand nombre de Brachiopodes".
La forme de la cloche en état étiré n'est pas connue — elle
est ronde comme une boule en état contracté. La surface est nette-
ment cannelée surtout aux parties supérieure et inférieure, tandis
qu'å la partie mitoyenne elle est unie.- En état contracté elle a 60 uw
de long et de large. II y a une démarcation distincte entre I'ectoplasme
et ”'endoplasme, ce dernier absorbant le plus de couleur. A la péri-
phérie de Yendoplasme il y a un corps plus foncé, réfractif et ovale,
Fig.4. Vorticella robusta
n.sp. Departure Bay,
Vancouver Isl. 225/4,
58
6 å 7 w de long. Le noyau est trés court'et
robuste, un peu courbé, d'environ 30 wu de
longueur et de 8 uw d'épaisseur. Le pédoncule
a 6 w d'épaisseur et 200—300 u de lon-
gueur.
Cette espéce-ci a seulement été trouvée
une fois comme la précédente. C'est une espéce
relativement grande et robuste, caractérisée
par une cuticule grossiérement cannelée, un
noyau Cvcurt et épais et par la présence d'un
petit corps singulier et périphére qui n'est
guére accessoire, mais sur la fonction duquel
je n'ose exprimer d'opinion fixe. II est possible
que ce corps lenticulaire soit p. ex. le produit
d'une mutation de la matiére, mais je n'ai rien
trouvé de semblable chez d'autres Vorticel-
lides.
Vorticella tenuinucleata nm. sp.
(Figs. 5 & 6).
Aburatsubo, Misaki, Japon, ””/4 1914, basse marée, beaucoup
d'individus sur un Bryozoaire.
Figs. 5—6. Vorticella tenuinucleata n. sp. Fig.5. Aburatsubo, Misaki, Japon. 1415/41,
Fig. 6. Singapore. 580/1,
59
Singapore, ””/12 1906, basse marée, divers individus sur un
Bryozoaaire.
La forme de la cloche en état étiré n'est pas connue, mais
elle est large et un peu inégalement pyriforme en état contracté.
La surface est finement rayée. La longueur est de 30—38 uw, la
largeur de 25—36 w (en état contracté). Il.n'y a pas de limite
visible entre V'ectoplasme et l'endoplasme. Le noyau est é&troit et
en forme de fer å cheval, parfois courbé å faire un noeud, de 45
—60 u de longueur et de 2—3 w d'épaisseur. Le pédoncule est
de 80—110 u de longueur et de 4—5 uw d'épaisseur, il ne peut
étre complétement étiré.
II m'a également été impossible d'identifier cette espéce avec
quelque Vorticella connue; elle est caractérisée par son noyau re-
lativement long et étroit et par sa cuticule finement rayée.
? Zoothamnium arbuscula Ehrenberg.
(Figs. 7 & 8).
Facts du ksudes ede PAustralie 37 KOS ES ETS OF OSPRER
30/8, 1914, 30—50 brasses, un petit nombre de colonies sur des
Hydroides.
Au sud-ouest de la pointe méridionale de Rey, Isl. Perlas, %/,
1916. 10-—15 brasses, une seule colonie sur un Bryozoaoaire.
Ruxton passage (Vancouver Isl.), une seu!e colonie sur les cirres
d'un Crinoide (Florometra serratissima A. H. Clark).
Dodds Narrows, Nanaimo, 75/6 1915, basse marée, un petit
nombre de colonies sur un Bryozoaire.
Une espéce de Zoothamnium d'aprés un matériel fixé et en
outre peu nombreux sera toujours difficile å déterminer avec cer-
titude. Cependant quelques colonies (fig. 7) sont d'une apparence
qui nous fait penser å Z. arbuscula, le trone principal étant plu-
sieurs fois plus large en haut qu'en bas, tandis qu'å Z. niveum,
espéce autrement ordinaire, il est d'une épaisseur å peu prés égale
dans toute sa longueur. Sur un matériel fixé ''arrangement des
branches ne sera que bien rarement å distinguer.
Sur fig. 8 un macrogaméte, individu primaire d'une nouvelle
colonie, est représenté; la premiére division du noyau est terminée
ici, la division étant inéquale; d'ailleurs Vindividu lui-méme n'est
pas encore divisé, et le tronc pas non plus achevé.
60
Z. arbuscula a été trouvé dans plusieurs endroits d'Europe.
Selon Schrøder (1907) il se trouve probablement aussi dans la
partie chaude de I'Atlantique (1'Expédition allemande antarctique).
Daday (1910) Pannonce en eau douce du sud-est de I'Afrique.
Fig. 7—8. (?) Zoothamnium arbuscula Ehrb. Fig. 7. Nanaimo. 15/1. Fig. 8. Macroga-
méte en division. S. Est d'Australie. 5280/71,
Je n'ai moi-méme jamais trouvé cette espéce pendant mes re-
cherches en Norvéæge du Nord; nous sommes donc fondés de croire
qu'elle appartient aux zones temperées et chaudes, et qu'elle est
distribuée dans 1'eau salée comme dans |'eau douce.
Cothurnia crystallina (Ehrenberg).
Syn. 1838. Vaginicola crystallina Ehrenberg.
1884. Cothurnia crystallina Entz. en partie (Tab. 25, figs. 26 & 27).
1911. C. ingenita Hamb. & Budd. en partie (fig. du texte 7—8).
(Figs. 9 & 10).
Departure Bay, ””/6 1915, plusieurs individus sur des Bryozo-
aires dans la ,grotte de Brachiopodes".
Dodds Narrows, Nanaimo, ”$/6 1915, basse marée, quelques
individus sur des Bryozoaires.
61
Nous ne pouvons certifier aucune description de cette espéce
x
antérieure å celle d'Ehrenberg (1838) qui, lui-méme doutant de
Figs. 9—10. Cothurnia crystallina. 9. Departure Bay; 10. Dodds Narrows, Vancouver
Isl… 30/4.
son résultat, a cherché de la référer å la Trichoda ingenita de O.
F. Mueller qui a décrit et figuré cet animal dans son æuvre
62
(1786). Lamarck (1816) a profité de cette description pour établir
le genre de Vaginicola.
Non seulement Ehrenberg s'est en vain efforcé d'identifier
avec certitude V'espéce de Mueller avec V. crystallina, décrite par
lui-méme, mais encore Ostenfeld a plus tard (1916) également
en vain essayé d'identifier ces deux espéces, et il a fini par dé-
clarer la Trichoda ingenita de Mueller indéfinissable. Cette dé-
claration est probablement correcte, et par conséquent il faut s'en
tenir å 'espéce d'Ehrenberg comme la premiére sårement re-
connaissable — opinion déjå adoptée par la plupart des auteurs.
Parmi les auteurs ultérieurs Hamburger & Buddenbrock
(1911) ont essayé de soutenir le nom de Mueller, ce qui ne se
laisse pourtant pas admettre sur les prémisses présentes.
Le nom de Vaginicola proposé par Lamarck ne peut non
plus servir å signaler aucune espéce, comme il a été créé pour
une espéce qui ne se laisse pas identifier.”)
Kent (1882) a p. ex. essayé de diviser le genre de Cothurnia
en plusieurs genres, mais Entz (1884) a prouvé ce classement
de Kent impraticable. Lors méme que la maniére dont quelques
espæéces du genre de Cothurnia attachent leurs coques å la base —
å savoir: sans pédoncule propre — fåt interprétée comme un ca-
ractére générique, il y aurait toutefois beaucoup de difficulté å
grouper plusieurs espéæces. Il me parait donc plus pratique de gar-
der les différentes espéces sous le nom générique de Cothurnia.
Parmi les individus reproduits ici je crois avoir pu identifier
avecelcertitudemkespecendEnnenblerne
Je n'ai mentionné ici que deux ou trois synonymes. Dans la
littérature beaucoup d'espéces ont été signalées par le nom de C.
crystallina, bien qu'en vérité elles se référent å d'autres espéces.
Il va sans dire qu'il ne pourra pas étre question d'éclaircir la
synonymie de ces espéces qu'en tant qu'elles ont été décrites et
reproduites d'une facon satisfaisante. En effet, quelques auteurs
ultérieurs ont attribué å V'espéce d'Ehrenberg beaucoup plus de
variabilité qu'elle ne posséde en vérité; d'autres auteurs ont sans
doute remarqué ce fait, mais leurs espéces ont plus tard été sup-
primées — parfois å tort.
") Pour de renseignements plus détaillés voir la discussion de Platycola
dilatata.
63
La forme des individus appartenant au genre de Cothurnia
étant trés uniforme nous sommes principalement renvoyés å étudier
leur construction de coques. Comme celles ci varient parfois beau-
coup, il est nécessaire, pour pouvoir se faire une image authentique
du type des différentes espéces, non seulement d'observer les dif-
férentes coques, mais aussi les populations en total, c'est-å-dire
leurs séries de variations. On verra alors que les variations se
rangent autour d'un type déterminé.
La coque de C. crystallina est attachée par presque toute sa
base, quelquefois il y a indice d'un pédoncule. La longueur de la
coque est d'å peu prés trois fois sa largeur, la partie la plus large est
a sa base; en outre elle est distinctement courbée (toutefois å tous
points de vue l'incurvation n'est pas visible). La bouche est ronde
et vaguement recourbée, sans pourtant former de vraie collerette.
Pour ce qui concerne les individus reproduits ici (figs. 9—10)
la longueur de la coque généralement varie de 95 å 105 4, (les
extrémes les plus petits ont seulement 75 w); la largeur atteint
en majorité 30—38 4, en minorité 20—27 w; Vorifice a 24—36 u.
Les deux populations reproduites ici — provenant toutes deux
x
de T'eau environnant Vancouver Isl. — sont å peu préæs identiques.
Cothurnia grandis (Perty).
1
Syn. ") 1852. Vaginicola grandis Perty.
P 1864. Cothurnia gigantea D”Udekem.
1911. C. ingenita Hamb. & Budd. en partie.
(Fig. 11).
STESXdAustralie 73797057 S -
5005 ES 520 91914 30:50
brasses, 1 exemplaire défectueux. ===>
Figure-8-Isl., Carnley Harbour,
Auckland Isl., ”/2 1914, basse
marée, quelques individus sur
des algues.
Dodds Narrows, Nanaimo, "3/6
1915, basse marée, un seul in-
dividu sur un Bryozoaire. £ VG
Departure Bay, 7?/6 1915, un :
Hak iedividu sur un Bryozoaire: WE VW Cothurnia grandis- Auckland
ID BELLE
”) Seulement les synonymes principaux sont nommés ici.
64
Cette espéce est d'apparence assez variable, mais elle est re-
connaissable å sa collerette passablement grande et recourbée. Elle
a été référée å C. crystallina, cependant il n'y a aucun doute qu'elle i
ne soit une espéce particuliére; p. ex. C. crystallina d'Ehrenberg
n'a pas de collerette.
La coque est lisse ou bien rarement fournie de quelques
aspérités. Elle mesure 120—180 w et est attachée sans pédoncule ;
sa plus grande largeur est å 1'extrémité inférieure (50—60 4), la
moindre largeur directement au-dessous de la collerette (35—42 u).
Le diamttre de la collerette est 55—60 u.
Les individus d'Auckland Isl. (fig. 11) ont presque la méme
dimension et la méme apparence que p. ex. ceux de la Norvége
du Nord. Au reste la distribution de cette espéce est peu connue,
ce qui est då en partie å sa confusion avec. les deux espéces
suivantes. II n'est pas improbable que cette espéce est aussi cos-
mopolitaine.
Cothurnia valvata (Wright).
1858. Vaginicola valvata Wright.
1864. Cothurnia valvata D'Udekem.
1876. Planicola folliculata Fromentel.
1880. Cothurnia operculata Gruber.
1882. Thuricola valvata + folliculata "Y + operculata Kent.
1884. Cothurnia crystallina Entz en partie. i
1911. C. ingenita Hamb. & Budd. en partie.
(Figs. 12—14).
Departure Bay, "”/6 1915, quelques individus sur des Bryozo-
aires dans ,la grotte de Brachiopodes". i
Sur cette espéce les auteurs ont été d'opinions fort différentes,
x
et depuis quelque temps elle est référée å C. crystallina. C'est un
erreur å mon avis.
L'appareil de fermeture ordinairement sécrété par V'animal est
fort caractéristique chez cette espéce, et méme si cet appareil n'est
pas toujours présent, il ne sera pas justifiable de lui refuser toute
importance systématique (nous trouverons des traits analogues chez
p. ex. les Folliculinides).
En outre la forme de la coque est parfois assez variable, mais
toutefois caractéristique. Tandis que C. grandis et C. crystallina le
”) Nec. = Vorticella folliculata O.F. Mueller.
65
plus souvent ont une coque réguliérement construite, celle de C.
valvata est fournie de parois irréguliérement ondulées qui ne for-
ment que rarement des dilatations annulaires, nettement séparées.
La coque est en forme de colonne irréguliére dont 1'extrémité
inférieure est un peu plus large que l'extrémité supérieure. L'ap-
pareil de fermeture est attaché au tiers supérieur de la coque, out
il a souvent un rétrécissement ou parfois une assez petite dilata-
tion (figs. 12—14) conforme å ce quw'on trouve p. ex. chez Para-
Figs. 12—14. Cothurnia valvata, Departure Bay. %0/;,
12. Des coques å ouverture étroite. 13. å ouverture large. 14. Des coques irreguliéres.
folliculina violacea (Giard). Ainsi 1'extrémité supérieure de la coque
prend la forme d'un goulot dont les bords de Vorifice indiquent
vaguement une collerette.
Or, la coque est d'un type qui différe absolument de celui de
C. grandis de Tun cåté et de C. erystallina de Vautre cåté.
La coque mesure 150—170 w de longueur sur 43—58 4 de
plus grande largeur; le goulot mesure 30—40 w de large (dans
un cas extréme seulement 25 4), les bords de VForifice, la colle-
rette, mesure 40—50 u.
Je n'ai pas encore trouvé C. valvata en Norvége, il est donc
probable qu'elle appartient aux eaux plus tempérés.
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 73. 5
66
Cothurnia compressa Claparéde & Lachmann.
Forma zypica.
(Fig. 15).
Misaki, Japon, ”/4 1914, 1 individu sur Pecten sp.
Forma orata n. f.
(Fig. 16).
Figure-8-Isl., Carnley Harbour, Auckland Isl. 2/18 1914, basse
marée, plusieurs individus sur des algues.
Cette espæce différe de la plupart des espéæéces du genre de
Cothurnia par la forme de la coque; cependant elle varie beaucoup
d'apparence. Forma typica a Vouverture longue et étroite en forme
de semelle, sa longueur atteint toutefois la plus grande largeur de
la coque. Cette forme est commune dans les eaux européennes
Figs. 15—16. Cothurnia compressa. 15. Forma typica, vue d'en haut. %%, 16. Forma
ovata n. f.: å droite un individu vu d'en haut. Auckland Isl. %/1.
depuis la mer Blanche (Mereschk.) jusqu'å la Méditerrannée
(Entz). Dans le matériel du Pacifique je n'ai trouvé qu'un indi-
vidu (fig. 15) des cåtes de Japon.
Forma ovata différe de f. typica par son ouverture ovale, qui
n'atteint pas du tout la largeur de la coque et qui est toujours
tournée en haut. Généralement la coque est plus courte et plus
oblique que celle de f. typica; la longueur est d'environ 80 w, et
la plus grande largeur de 43—48 u. L'ouverture mesuré environ
23 XX 135 4, tandis que chez f."typica "elle Tmesure FenvikoneseR
ISK 14620.
Forma ovata (fig. 16) a seulement été constatée å Auckland
Isl.; la population paraissait homogéne; toutefois, aprés examen
d'un matériel plus riche, il sera sans doute manifeste que les
67
variations de cette espéce peuvent étre aussi grandes que celles
de la forme principale. Dans la Norvége du Nord p. ex. j'ai par-
fois trouvé des variations, approchant de beaucoup de la forme décrite
ici; cependant c'est le gros d'une population et non pas les varia-
tions individuelles qui fait saillir le caractére spécial des formes
particuliéres.
Il est hors de doute que C. compressa comme beaucoup d'autres
espéces du genre de Cothurnia est d'une vaste distribution, peut-
étre cosmopolitaine.
Cothurnia socialis Gruber.
(Fig. 17).
—
Fig. 17. Cothurnia socialis. Departure Bay. %59%/1.
Departure Bay, ””/$ 1915, plusieurs individus sur des Bryozo-
aires dans ,la grotte de Brachiopodes".
Autrefois cette espéce singuliére et élégante n'a été constatée
que dans les eaux européennes; elle ne se retrouve probablement
que sporadiquement; je ne Vai p. ex. pas encore trouvée aux cåtes
de la Norvége. II est donc fort intéressant qu'elle a été constatée
åa Vancouver.
Gruber lui a donné le nom de socialis parceque les nouveaux
individus semblaient avoir une tendance de se fixer sur les coques
Pa
5?
68
des plus agés. Cela n'est pourtant pas toujours le cas — p. ex.
parmi les 'individus mentionnés ici pas un n'était placé sur la
coque d'un autre individu.
C. socialis est une des espæéces, peu nombreuses du genre, qui
paraissent relativement constantes de forme et de dimensions.
Hamburger & Buddenbrock indiquent que la coque mesure
84 w de long. Les individus du Pacifique mesurent entre 65 et
78 uw de long, c'est-å-dire qu'ils sont un peu plus petits, la plus
grande largeur est de 28 å 30 u. Les pédoncules mesurent 105
—115 w de long.
La coque est d'une forme fort caractéristique, en tant qu'elle
est fixée obliquement sur un pédoncule — un peu courbé, parfois
x
en forme dun S — et attachée å celui-ci par un épaississement
en forme de cone, haut de 5 å 6 uw et qui sert en memeltemps
de fixation pour les parois de la coque et de base pour l'animal.
Les parois soønt nettement ondulées et présentent le plus souvent
3 å 4 anneaux.
La coque se termine å Il'extrémité supérieure par une colle-
rette, haute de 6—12 4, conique, tournant en haut et en avant, ob-
liquement placée et nettement séparée de la coque propre. Le dia-
métre de la partie inférieure de la collerette mesure 15—17 u,
la partie supérieure 20—22 vw.
Cothurnia maritima Ehrenberg.
Syn. Cothurnia innata Hamb. & Budd."
Forma typica.
(Fig. 18).
SE dAustralie 37 05 SETS 0 OS FE ES EKO AES 059
brasses, quelques individus sur des Hydroides.
Ruxton Passage, un seul individu sur les cirres d'un Crinoide.
Misaki, Japon, %/4 1914, un seul individu sur Pecten sp.
Sagami Sea, Japon, %>%/6 s914, 300 brasses, un seul individu
sur des Bryozoaires.
') Lidentification. de la Trichoda innata de O.F. Mueller rest pas sou-
tenable; cet animal ne se laisse probablement pas identifier — et comme
Ostenfeld fait remarquer, il pourrait tout aussi bien étre un Tin-
tinnide. [Il faut donc que ce nom soit supprimé.
69
Forma nodosa (Clap. & Lachm.).
(Fig. 19).
Port Ross, Auckland >/4;1 1914, environ 10 brasses, plusieurs
individus sur des algues.
Figs. 18—19. Cothurnia maritima. 18. Forma typica, S.E. d'Australie, 2720/41,
19. Forma nodosa, Port Ross, Auckland Isl. 39%/1,
Cette espéce est également assez variable, surtout de dimen-
sions. La coque de f. typica ordinairement mesure de 50 å 60 u
de long (quelquefois jusqu'å 70 å 75 4), celle de f. nodosa de 70
åa 80 u. Le plus souvent cette derniére forme est munie de parois
plus solides, d'anneaux et d'une coque ondulée.
70
F. typica mesure 23—32 uw de large, tandis que f. nodosa me-
sure 34—40 u. La longueur du pédoncule varie beaucoup dans
les différentes localités; chez f. typica il est généralement tout
court.
L'extrémité inférieure de la coque est plus large, 1'extrémité
supérieure un peu amincie, se terminant sans collerette.
Chaque population particuliére est le plus souvent assez homo-
géne, mais les populations sont parfois fort différentes les unes des
autres. La forma typica (fig. 18) est beaucoup plus petite et møoins
robuste que la f. nodosa (fig. 19); de plus cette derniére forme a
souvent la coque un peu courbée et a été établie par Claparéde
& Lachmann comme une espéce å part; il est certainement plus
correct de la regarder comme une forme de la C. maritima, carac-
téristique des eaux plus froides; ces deux formes se confondent
complétement. Les individus de la f. nodosa d'Auckland Isl. sont
presque de la méme apparence que p. ex. ceux de la Norvége du
Nord, et sont peut-étre å interpréter comme une forme particu-
liére arctique-antarctique d'une espéce cosmopolitaine.
Cothurnia curvula Entz.
(Fig. 20).
Figure-8-Isl., Carnley Harbour, Aucland Isl., ”/12 1914, basse
marée, quelques individus sur des algues.
Eee NEL
z—
EN
Fig 20. Cothurnia curvula. Figure-8-Isl., Auckland Isl. 420/4,
Cette petite espæéce se distingue par sa coque qui est toujours
visiblement courbée — le plus souvent aussi munie d'anneaux;
ces derniers apparaissent le plus nettement quand on regarde la
coque d'en haut.
La coque mesure environ 60 w de long sur 23—26 m de
large å V'extrémité inférieure; elle est un peu amincie å V'extrémité
ml
supérieure qui se termine par une ouverture globuleuse mesurant
16=18 2 de large. s
Sur le dessin (fig. 20) les coques sont placées obliquement sur
la base, mais å cause du recourbement les ouvertures sont å peu
prés horizontales et se présentent par conséquent comme des
cercles.
Dans le matériel du Pacifique je n'ai pas trouvé cette espæce
dans d'autre localité que d'Auckland Isl.
Platycola dilatata (Fromentel).
Syn. 1876. Vaginicola dilatata + truncata +- striata + tincta") Fro-
mentel
1882. Platycola dilatata + striata S. Kent.
(Figs. 21 & 22).
Figure-8-Isl., Carnley Harbour, Auckland Isl., ”/12 1914, basse
marée, un grand nombre d'individus sur des algues.
Le genre de Platycola se classe au genre de la Cothurnia pour
ce qui concerne [apparence de Wanimal en particulier; p. ex. le
noyau est long et en forme de bande (fig. 21). Mais les espéces de
la Platycola différent de celles de la Cothurnia par la coque horizon-
tale qui est fixée dans toute sa longueur; comme chez les Folli-
culinides elle parait étre ,,colléef par une matiére toute transpa-
rente qui se présente — au moins chez quelques espéces parti-
culiéres — comme une large corniche entourant la coque.
Le nom de Vaginicola fut introduit par Lamarck pour la Tri-
choda ingenita de O.F. Mueller qui ne se laisse pas identifier,
, comme nous I'avons déjå remarqué (comparez Ostenfeld, 1916).
Le nom de Vaginicola ne pouvant plus étre appliqué il faut qu'iil
soit supprimé. Depuis Ehrenberg il a été appliqué de diffé-
rentes fagcons par plusieurs auteurs, p. ex. par Fromentel (1876).
Plus tard (1882) Kent — qui se sert du reste en d”autre
sens du nom de Vaginicola — a introduit le nom de Platycola pour
ces espæces; voilå pourquoi ce nom doit étre gardé comme nom
générique des espéces qui resemblent aux Cothurnia ayant la coque
hørizontale et plane et ouverture seulement recourbée en haut.
Fromentel (1876) a décrit 9 espéces de ce genre. La pre-
miére de celles-ci a été signalée comme la ztincta d'Ehrenberg;
7”) Nec = V. tincta Ehrenberg.
72
il est absolument sår que celle-ci n'a pu étre identique avec I'e-
spæéce d'Ehrenberg, car il n'y a aucune analogie entre leurs figures.
Cette espæéce de Fromentel est pourtant identique avec sa dila-
tata qui devient par conséquent le nom de l'espéce.
La truncata et la striata de Fromentel doivent également
étre considérées comme des synonymes de la Platycola dilatata.
Figs. 21—22. Platycola dilatata. Figure-8-Isl , Auckland Isl. Fig. 21. %%5/1.. Fig. 22. 265/1,
L'ampulla et la regularis de Fromentel doivent étre considérées
comme des synonymes de la Platycola decumbens (Ehrenberg).
La mollis et la gracilis de Fromentel sont au contraire probable-
ment des espéces particuliéres.
La Platycola dilatata a la coque fort variable. La logett2z que
P”animal se forme est relativement grande et spacieuse, et ordi-
nairement Vindividu fille reste dans la logette — ce qui n'est pas
rare du reste chez le genre de Cothurnia.
La coque mesure 85—105 w de long sur 55—75 w de large;
elle est le plus souvent ovale, mais ses contours sont parfois assez
inégaux (fig. 22).
De face il y a une ouverture circulaire (sur la projection ovale)
qui mesure 33—34 uw de large; elle termine la logette; parfois
elle fait aussi la transition d'une collerette. Généralement cette
collerette est træs étroite, mais en des cas extrémes elle peut me-
73
surer jusqu'å 63 w de diamétre (fig. 22 en bas, å gauche). La 1lo-
gette souvent est prolongée comme un goulot, mais de forme pas
toujours réguliére (fig. 21).
Il n'est pas rare de trouver des individus ayant la coque
plus ou moins striée (fig. 22, en bas); cependant il ne faut pas
attacher tant d'importance systématique å ce caractére qu'il pourra
servir d'autorisation pour le maintien d'une espéce particuliére.
C'est qu'il y a dans la population toutes sortes de formes transi-
toires entre la coque striée et la non-striée.
Autant que j'ai pu constater, la Platycola dilatata jusqu'ici n”a
été trouvée que par Fromentel dans eau douce, probablement
å Paris. Il est donc fort remarquable qu'elle se retrouve aussi
dans la mer, dans des localités qui sont pour ainsi dire ”antipode
de Paris.
Une chose semblable a déjå été constatée pour ce qui concerne
quelques autres Protozoaires; Cest la preuve d'une faculté d'ajuste-
ment presque incroyable. Généralement de telles espéces sont véri-
tablement cosmopolitaines. II est donc å présumer que la Platycola
dilatata se retrouve aussi dans beaucoup d'autres localités; mais
comme elle est le plus souvent incolore (rarement légérement jau-
nåtre) elle n'est pas facile å discerner.
Micropoculum n. gen.
(Fig. 23—24).
La coque est grande, mince, en forme de coupe, transparente
ou: légérement teintée de jaune. Elle consiste en deux parties nette-
ment séparées, une cavité basale et un vestibule.
La cavité basale est ovale ou excavée et attachée par un pivot
arrondi. Elle n'a pas de structure.
Le vestibule est allongé et en forme de cornet étroit, il a 4—6
fois la longueur de la cavité basale avec laquelle il est en commu-
nication par un goulot trés étroit.
La plus grande épaisseur des parois se trouve dans la moitié
inférieure de la coque, surtout dans le goulot. La paroi du vesti-
bule est lisse ou munie d'un plus ou moins grand nombre d'an-
neaux. Il se termine å l'extrémité supérieure par une collerette
étroite et complétement recourbée — quelquefois par plusieurs
collerettes, c'est-å-dire quand la coque a été reconstruite.
74
Micropoculum Bacchi n. sp,
(Fig. 23).
A 6 lieues N. N.E. de Sacol, Mindanao, &/s 1914, environ 35
brasses, 5 individus sur des Bryozoaires.
La cavité basale est ovale, de 65—80 uw de long sur environ.
50 w de large. Le pivot de base a 20 uw de haut.
Fig. 23. Micropoculum Bacchi. Sacol, Mindanao.
La longueur totale de toute la coque est de 400—460 w; å
Pouverture la largeur est de 30—50 u. L'ouverture est lisse. La
collerette a 50—60 u. Le goulot occupe presque la moitié de la
longueur du vestibule avec lequel il se fond graduellement, å lå
partie la plus étroite il mesure 10-—17 w.
fi En deux des coques il ne restait de 'animal propre que des
fragments mal fixés. II est donc douteux ou il faut placer ce genre
dans le systéme.
TO
Dans un cas singulier (fig. 23, Pindividu å droite) une cuticule
relativement épaisse, irréguliérement coniforme, a été sécrétée au-
dessus de Vouverture comme un capuchon ou un ,toitf, avec au
sommet une petite concavité.
Cela a Vair d'un moulage de V'extrémité antérieure d'un individu
ressemblant å ceux du genre de Cothurnia allant replier Panneau
ciliaire. Je crois donc pouvoir interpréter cette formation comme
une cuticule ayant été formée pour servir comme une sorte de toit
å la coque, probablement en vue d'un inkystement.….
Autant que je sais, rien de semblable n'a jusqu'ici été con-
staté chez aucun Cilié muni de coque; toutefois, il n'est probable-
ment pas exclus que de telles capsules ressemblant å des cystes
peuvent se former pendant que l'animal reste encore dans sa coque
originale. Å juger par la forme de ce ,toitf — qui a Vair d'avoir
été sécrété quand I'animal était étiré au-dessus de V'ouverture — je
présume que le genre de Micropoculum doit Éétre classé avec le
groupe des Cothurnia.
Micropoculum maenadium n. sp.
(Fig. 24).
Å 6 lieues N. N. E. de Sa-
col, Mindanao, ”/3 1914, en-
viron 35 brasses, 3 individus
sur des Bryozaoaires (avec I'es-
péce au-dessus nommée).
La cavité basale est pres-
que ronde, de 45—50 u de
long sur 40—48 w de large.
Le pivot basilaire est tout
court, en partie caché.
La longueur totale est de
290—340 w, la largeur å I'ou-
verture de 35—40 u. On la
collerette commence, |'ouver-
"ture est finement dentelée.
Le diamétre de la collerette
est de 45—56 w.
Le goulot est trés court, de
Fig. 24. Micropoculum maenadium, Sacol,
Mindanao. 200/4,
76
sorte que les deux espaces ne sont séparées que d'un canal tout-
a-fait court et étroit; le goulot a 12—15 w d'épaisseur et forme
un subit rétrécissement de la coque.
II n'y a pas de formes transitoires entre les deux formes dé-
crites ici qui ont été trouvées attachées au méme Bryozoaire. Par
conséquent elles doivent étre considérées comme des espéces par-
ticuliéres.
A mon avis les deux espéces du genre de Micropoculum form-
ent avec leurs coques grandes et élégantes un accroissement assez
intéressant du groupe des Cotnurnides.
Codonella morchella Cleve.
(Fig. 25).
Fig.-8-Isl., Carnley Harbour, Auckland Isl., ”/12
1914, basse marée, un individu parmi des algues.
Jai mentionné cette forme ici quoiqu'elle soit
un infusoire libre, un tintinnide.
Le dessin (fig. 25) a été soumis å la détermi-
nation du Professeur adjoint E. Jørgensen, Ber-
gen, qui Va identifié avec la Codonella morchella;
c'est toutefois un individu au goulot extraordi-
Fig. 25 Codonella
morchella, Auckland É
Isl. 70074, nalirement court.
Du Pacifique V'espéce a déjå été signalée.
NE
Suctoria.
Acineta compressa Claparéde & Lachmann.
Syn. 1858—59. Acineta compressa Clap. & Lachmann.
1860—61. 4. cuculus Clap. & Lachm.
1888. <A. papillifera Keppen.
1899—1901. 4. papillifera + compressa + tuberosa var. cucullus
Sand.
1912. A. papillifera + tuberosa var. cucullus Collin.
(Fig. 26).
Departure Bay, ""/6 1915, deux individus sur des Bryozoaires
dans ,la grotte de Brachiopodes".
Acineta compressa varie beaucoup de forme et de dimension.
La compressa et la cucullus de Claparéde & Lachmann sont en réa-
lité deux variations extrémes de la méme espæce; Collin (1912)
TIT
a aussi indiqué cette supposition; néanmoins
il est d'accord avec Sand en désignant la cu-
cullus comme une simple ,variéte£ de VA.
tuberosa. Å mon avis cela n'est pas juste.
Les dessins de Claparéde & Lachmann
suffisent pour V'identification. D'ailleurs A. com-
pressa est un de nos Suceurs les: plus com-
muns — C'est å la cåte de la Norvége que
ces devx auteurs ont fait leurs études, et dans
mon matériel du Nord de ce pays j'en ai eu
un grand nombre d'individus å comparer.
AÅ. compressa se distingue de A. tuberosa
Fig. 26. Acineta com-
; É É pressa, Departure Bay.
tant par son cytoplasme n attelgnant pas åa la 400/4,
base de la cloche que par le ,næud" formant
une sorte d'articulation entre le pédoncule et la cloche et qui ne
se trouve que chez Å. compressa.
L'espéce est sans doute d'une vaste distribution, peut-étre cos-
mopolitaine.
Paracineta limbata (Maupas).
Forma typica.
(Fig. 27).
SEE dSAustralie 370005 SES 0 2505 E.; 29/9 1914 "3050
brasses, quelques individus sur un Hydroide.
Forma convexa n. f.
(Figs. 28—30).
Port Ross, Auckland Isl., %/,4 1914, environ 10 brasses, divers
individus sur des algues.
On verra probablement que cette espéce aussi est cosmopoli-
taine. Elle est assez variable et se présente sous deux formes.
C'est quw'il y a d'Auckland Isl. une nouvelle forme trés caracté-
ristique, la f. convexa qui doit probablement étre considérée comme
une forme particuliére antarctique. Jusqu'ici je nai pas trouvé de
forme particuliére arctique pareille å celle-lå. La nouvelle forme
se distingue de la forme principale par la construction de la coque.
Tandis que la ,codque" de f. typica (fig. 27) est en forme de
coupe, celle de f. convexa (fig. 29) a le bord élargi et recourbé
comme une collerette, de sorte que toute l'extrémité supérieure
78
devient bombée comme un parapluie; le plus grand diamétre de
cette collerette varie entre 12 et 19 w, il est généralement de 16
—17 uw.
SEENDD
Figs. 27—29, Paracineta limbata. Fig. 27. Forma typica, S.E. d'Australie. 39%/1.
Figs. 28—29. Forma convexa, Port Ross, Auckland Isl. Fig. 28. 25/1. Fig. 29. 1080/4,
Figs. 28 & 30 montrent les variations de la forme de la popu-
Jation ci-dessus mentionnée. La longueur du pédoncule est entre
150 et 350 uw sur 2—3 w d'épaisseur. Le noyau est rond, ovale ou
réniforme, et 10—20 u de diamétre.
Chez quelques individus il ne reste que des fragments défec-
79
tueux de V'enveloppe gélatineuse généralement entourant le cyto-
plasme de cette espéce; le cytoplasme propre était si mal fixé que
quelquefois il n'était pas méme possible de constater le noyau.
30.
Fig. 30. Paracineta limbata. Forma convexa, Port Ross, Auckland
Isl. 395/1,
Fig. 31. Paracineta patula, Departure Bay. 25/1,
31
Fig. 28 représente un individu extréme sur un pédoncule extra-
ordinairement long. La collerette est toutefois petite et peu recour-
bée, de sorte que la coque de cet individu approche de beaucoup
de la forme principale.
Paracineta patula (Claparéde & Lachmann).
(Fig. 31).
Departure Bay, 7/6 1915, quelques individus sur des Bryozo-
aires dans ,la grotte de Brachiopodes".
80
P. patula est aussi .connue de différentes cåtes européennes,
mais elle; parait moins variable d'apparence que l'espéce précé-
dente. La coque est træs délicate et a la forme d'un simple cornet
ou d'un cornet de grammophone; elle a environ 50—55 w de lon-
gueur et å Vouverture 40 w de diamétre. Au contraire la longueur
du pédoncule varie beaucoup — chez les deux individus figurés
icons kentrer2 00 Kes 00
Paracineta crenata (Fraipont).
Forma pachyteca Collin.
(Figs. 32 & 33).
Figs. 32—33. Paracineta crenata, f. pachytheca.
å : gi Fig. 32, S.E. d”Australie. 8585/41.
Era: Figs. 33. a—c. S. E. d'Australie, d. Campbell Isl. 89/4.
SSESd'Australie 379705” Ss150 05 TE EVNER DEER
brasses, plusieurs individus sur le pédoncule d'un Hydroide.
Perseverance Harbour, Campbell Isl., "”/,2 1914, environ 20
brasses, quelques individus sur des Bryozoaires.
Je ne sache pas que cette espéce n'ait pas non plus été sig-
nalée ailleurs qu'aux cåtes européennes; elle varie beaucoup de
81
forme et de grandeur. II est probable que tous les individus figu-
ræs ici appartiennent å la f. pachytheca, quoique je n'aie pas réussi
å constater l'épaisseur des parois de tous les exemplaires. Elle
était le plus visible chez Vindividu figuré sur la fig. 32, dont la
coque est en outre munie de 2 anneaux transverseaux; la coque
de cet individu a enviren 35 w de longueur et 38 w de diamétre
amlonverture;Tautrementice diametrevarie entre 25let 5070 (f2:
33d). Le pédoncule a 70—110 w de longueur. Le noyau est ovale
ou rond, et a jusqu'å 18 uw de longueur. Le matériel était mal
fixé du reste.
Ephelota gemmipara (Hertwig).
Port Ross, Auckland Isl., %/11 1914; environ 10 brasses, quel-
ques individus sur des algues.
Dans le matériel de cette espéce il n'y a que des exemplaires
mal fixés. Mais tandis que le cytoplasme ne fournit que de mauvais
soutiens pour la détermination, les pédoncules ont l'apparence ordi-
nairement typique de 1'E. gemmipara; la longueur du plus long pé-
doncule était de 750 u, Pépaisseur de 27 w en haut et de 8 u
en bas.
Probablement E. gemmipara est une espéce cosmopolitaine; elle
est sans doute celui des Suceurs qui a été observé dans le plus
grand nombre de localités et dans beaucoup d'eaux différentes.
Quelques observations sur des associations de Protozoaires.
Quoique ce petit matériel ne fournisse pas de base suffisante
pour des conclusions de valeur générale, concernant les associa-
tions formées par les Protozoaires attachés, il est pourtant intéres-
sant de noter, comment cette micro-faune a été combinée dans les
localités présentant le plus grand nombre d'espéces.
Comme déjå mentionné le matériel est fort sporadique et ac-
cidentel, et en vérité il n'y a que 4 localités qui peuvent en re-
vendiquer la richesse — non compris les Folliculinides. Ces 4
localités et leur faunes de Protozoaires sont classées comme suit:
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd 73. 6
82
a) STEN d'Australie 37?057"S%" 150 VOSS FEM O TER SODS D
brasses, sur un Hydroide:
Zoothamnium arbuscula,
Cothurnia grandis,
C. maritima f. typica,
Paracineta limbata f. typica,
P. crenata f. pachyteca,
en outre 2 espæéces de Folliculinides.
b) Port Ross, Auckland Isl., %/11 1914, environ 10 brasses sur
des algues:
; Wagnerella borealis,
Vorticella Mortenseni,
Cothurnia maritima f. nodosa,
" Paracineta limbata f. convexa,
Ephelota gemmipara,
en outre 6 espéces de Folliculinides.
c) Figure-8-Island, Carnley Harbour, Auckland Isl. ”/42 1914,
basse marée sur des algues:
Cothurnia grandis,
C. compressa f. ovata,
C. curvula,
Platycola dilatata,
(Codonella morchella),
en outre 2 espéces de Folliculinides.
d) Departure Bay, ""/6 1915, sur des Bryozoaires de ,la grotte
de Brachiopodes" :
Wagnerella borealis,
Vorticella robusta,
Cothurnia grandis,
C. valvata,
CSEspeldIrs;
Acineta compressa,
Paracineta patula,
en outre 2 espéces de Folliculinides.
83
Littérature.
C. Hamburger &v. Buddenbrock (1911): Nordische Ciliata [Nordisches
Plankton, Lief. 15]. Kiel u. Leipzig.
— (1913): Nordische Suctoria [Ibidem, Lief. 161.
O. Bitschli (1889): Protozoa (Bronn's Klassen u. Ord. d. Thier-Reichs,
Bd. I, 3: Infusoria]. Leipzig 1887/89.
G. N. Calkins (1902): Marine Protozoa from Woods Hole [Bull. of the United
States Fish Commission, Vol. XXI, 1901), Washington 1902.
B. Collin (1912): Étude Monographique sur les Acinétiens II, [Archives
de Zoologie expérim., T. 51], Paris.
E.v.Daday(1910): Untersuchungen iber die Sisswasser-Mikrofauna Deutsch-
Ost-Afrikas [Zoologica H. 59 (Bd. 23)] Stuttgart.
C. Dons (1917): Heliozoen Wagnerella borealis [Tromsø Mus. Årshefter, 38
& 39, 1915/16], Tromsø 1917.
Chr. Ehrenberg (1838): Die Infusionstierchen als vollkommene Organis-
men. Leipzig.
G. Entz (1884): Uber Infusorien des Golfes von Neapel. [Mitteil. aus d.
Zool. Stat. zu Neapel, Bd. 5]. Leipzig.
E. de Fromentel (1876): Études sur les Microzoaires. Paris.
=A. Gruber (1880): Neue Infusorien, [Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zoologie, Bd. 33].
— (1884): Die Protozoen des Hafen yon Genua. (Nova Acta d. ksl.
Leop.-Carol. Deutschen Akademie d. Naturforscher. Bd. 46), Halle.
W. Sav. Kent (1882): A Manuel of the Infusoria, Vol. I-III. London 1880/82.
E. Claparéde & K. Lachmann (1859): Études sur les Infusoires et les
Rhizopodes, Vol. I [Mémoires de PInstitut Genévois, Tomes V
& VI], Genéve 1858/59.
— (1861): Études etc., Vol. II (Ibidem, T. VII). Paris & Genéve
1860/61.
=C. Mereschkowsky (1877): Uber die Protozoen d. nårdl. Russlands [Arb.
d. Petersb. naturf. Ges., Bd. 6].
(1879): Studien uber Protozoen des nårdl. Russland. [Archiv f.
mikroskopische Anatomie. Bd. 16]. Bonn.
C. H. Ostenfeld (1916): De danske Farvandes plankton 1898—1901. Il.
Protozoer etc. [Kgl]. d. Vid. Selsk. Skr., Nat. & Math. Afd. 8.R. II].
Kjøbenhavn.
M. Perty (1852): Zur Kenntnis kleinster Lebensformen. Bern.
R. Sand (1901): Étude monographique sur le Groupe des Infusoires Tenta-
culiféres. (Annales de la Soc. Belg. de Microscopie. T. 24, 25
& 26]. Bruxelles 1899—1901.
O. Schrøder (1907): Die Infusorien der deutschen Sidpolar-Expd. 1901-03.
J.d”Udekem (1864): Description des Infusoires de la Belgique. I. Les Vor-
ticelliens. [Mém. Ac. roy. de Belgique, Bd. 34].
f) Je mai pas eu d'accés å ce traité.
67
84
T. Str. Wright (1858): Description of new Protozoa. [Edinburgh New Phi-
losophical Journal. New Series. Vol. VII].
M. Zulzer (1909): Bau und Entwicklung von Wagnerella borealis Mereschk.
[Arch. f. Protistenk. Vol. 17].
6575192
eden Al ne
Papers from Dr. Th. Mortensen's Pacific Expedition
1914—16.
VI
Bryozoen von den Auckland- und Campbell-Inseln.
Von
Ernst Marcus, Berlin.
(Mit Pl. V).
Das im Folgenden behandelte Material, zu dessen interessanter
Bearbeitung die freundliche Aufforderung von Herrn Dr. Th. Morten-
sen den dankenswerten Anlass gab, entstammt einer auf der Pacific
Expedition 1914—16 gesammelten Bryozoenausbeute. Die aus 21
Arten bestehende Collection erhålt besonderen Wert dadurch, dass
ausser Filhol's 15 Arten umfassender, der Beschreibungen und
Abbildungen entbehrender Liste von Campbell-Bryozoen nichts ande-
res bekannt ist. Diese Liste enthålt ibrigens meist in den sid-
australischen Meeren sehr gemeine Formen, deren richtige Be-
stimmung bei dem engen Anschluss an Hutton nicht einmal ge-
wåhrleistet erscheint (Jelly, Syn. Cat. p. IX). Die auf der ,Hine-
moa"-Expedition zusammengebrachten Sammlungen enthalten keine
Bryozoen, weshalb Mortensen's Ausbeute eine Licke in Chil-
ton's ,The Subantarctic Islands of New-Zealand" ausfiillt. In der
dortigen Zusammenfassung der Resultate (v. 2, Art. 33, p. 793—807)
werden die sehr nahen Beziehungen zwischen der Fauna der In-
seln und der neuseelåndischen betont; das beståtigen die Bryozoen
durchaus. Es liegen ja auch die Auckland-Inseln innerhalb der
500 Faden-, Campbell innerhalb der 1000 Fd.-Linie von Neu See-
land, es fehlt also das fir Litoraltiere als Verbreitungsbarriere wirk-
same Hochseeabyssal. Ausserdem lassen die von Chilton dar-
gestellten entomologischen Resultate keinen Zweifel an einer ehe-
mals zwischen Neu Seeland und den Inseln vorhanden gewesenen
86
kontinentalen Verbindung, deren Kiste den Bryozoen einen direkten
Verbreitungsweg geboten haben mag. Als weiteres Ergebnis der
Mortensen'schen Ausbeute stellt sich die Beståtigung circumnotialer
Verbreitung vieler subantarktischer Bryozoenarten dar, insofern das
magelhaensische Gebiet, Siid Georgien, das Cap, die Inseln des
stidlichen Indic, Sid Australien, Neu Seeland und seine subant-
arctischen Inseln zum Teil weitgehende Ubereinstimmung der Bry-
ozoenfauna zeigen. Hartmeyer (Verh. dtsch. zool. Ges. 1911,
p. 103) hatte in der Substrate mit darauf sitzenden Kolonieen trans-
portierenden Westwindtrift die Erklårung fir diese von ihm bei den
Ascidien festgestellte Verbreitungstatsache gesehen; åhnliche Lebens-
bedingungen erlauben, die gleiche Erklårung bei Bryozoen anzu-
nehmen. Vielleicht fuåhren ausserdem die besonders engen Be-
ziehungen' zwischen Neu Seeland samt seinen Siidinseln und dem
magelhaensischen Gebiet bei spåter vermehrtem Material zu einer
Wiederaufnahme der Diskussion iiber die von Ihering und Hut-
ton angenommene pacifische Landbricke.
In der vorliegenden Collection sind 3 Arten der Ctenostomata
vorhanden, von denen Calvet (1909) gemeint hatte, dass sie
auf der Siidhemisphåre wenig vorkåmen. Bevor ich mit einem
so abschliessenden und wohl noch nicht geniigend durch Material
moderner Ausbeuten gestiitzten Urteil iber die Verbreitung einer
ganzen Ordnung anschliesse, glaube ich mit Harmer (1915, p. 2)
annehmen zu dirfen, dass diese oft so zarten und unscheinbaren
Formen beim Sammeln und Sortieren gelegentlich iibersehen wer-
den kånnten und deshalb in mancher Bearbeitung siidlicher Bryo-
zoen fehlen. Das Zuriicktreten der Arten aus den alten Tribus
der Cellularina und Flustrina in Mortensen's Sammlung kann
im Hinblick auf Filhol's Liste, die zur Unterscheidung dieser
Gruppen von den Escharina sicher ausreicht, nur als zufålliges
Sammelergebnis gewertet werden. Der Eindruck kråftiger Entwick-
lung der gesammelten Kolonieen wird unterstitzt durch den vor-
zuglichen Erhaltungszustand des Materials, dessen Substrate, wie
Muscheln, Chitoniden, breite Tangstreifen etc. Beispiele reicher
Bidconosen bieten.
Fir das System der Cheilostomata war mir Levinsen (1909)
massgebend, fir die ibrigen Ordnungen und die Endoprocta, hin-
sichtlich deren Vereinigung in einer faunistischen Arbeit mit den
87
Ectoprocta ich mich auf den in modernen Arbeiten von Waters,
Harmer und Nordgaard befolgten Brauch berufen kann, Har-
mer (1915). Nomenklatorische Ånderungen, auch wo sie durch
die Synonymieangaben erforderlich werden, bleiben gråsseren År-
beiten vorbehalten, ein Verzeichnis der subantarktischen Bryozoen-
literatur erschien bei meiner Bearbeitung der Bryozoen der Schwed.
Juan Fernandez-Expedition 1916—17.
Herrn Prof. Hartmeyer bin ich fir vielfach gewåhrte Unter-
stitzung und Fårderung zu grossem Dank verpflichtet, ebenso Herrn
Dr. Mortensen fir das interessante Material, wie auch fir seine
grosse Freundlichkeit, die es gestattete, dass mit Ricksicht auf den
in der neuseelåndischen Bryozoenliteratur fuihlbaren Mangel an Åb-
bildungen hier alle notwendigen gegeben werden konnten.
Liste der Arten.
Chaperia acanthina (Q. G.).
Caberea darwinii Busk
Menipea aculeata (d'Orb.).
Foraminella lepida (Hincks)
Hippothoa hyalina (L.).
Escharoides praestans (Hincks).
Exochella zelanica Levinsen
Schizoporella vitrea (McG.).
Schizoporella microrhyncha spec. nov.
Microporella ciliata (Pall.) f. personata (Busk).
Microporella malusii (Aud.).
Porella margaritifera (Q. G.).
Smittina cinctipora (Hincks).
Lagenipora costazii (Aud.) var. spatula (McG:).
Lagenipora costata (McG.).
Berenicea sarniensis (Norman).
Alcyonidium polyoum (Hassall).
Triticella periphanta spec. nov.
Valkeria uva L. var. tuberosa (Heller).
Pedicellina cernua (Pall.).
Barentsia discreta (Busk).
88
Ectoprocta.
Cheilostomata.
1.… Chaperia acanthina (Qu. G.).
1824. Flustra acanthina (Quoy und Gaimard in: Voy. ,,Uranief et
NEPhysiciennes Ep GOSS ORKER 2:
1879... Membranipora spinosa (Quoy Gaim.) (Busk in: Kerg. Polyz.,
DElOSSTENOFFES)
1879... Membranipora ciltata (P. MacGil.), (P. H.MacGillivray in:
Prodr. Faun. Vict. dec. 3, p. 30 t. 25 f.73—3'a))
1881. Chaperia australis (Jullien in: Bull. Soc. zool. France v. 6, p.
NSSS)
non 1884. Membranipora spinosa d'Orbigny (Busk in: Chall. Rep., p. 64).
1886... Membranipora ciliata (McG.) (P. H. MacGillivray in: Prodr.
Eannsvictudec ls mpelo ore PT EER6])
non 1886. ,Membranipora spinosa (Quoy & Gaimard) P. H. MacGillivray,
ibid pl or ET 2TRES SE):
1888. Chaperia spinosa (Jullien in: Cap Horn Bryoz., p. 62 t. 5
FASE S ENS ETAS)
1888. Lepralia judex (Kirkpatrick in: Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 6 v. 1,
DM SEtESErÅ)
1898. Chaperia acanthina Qu. & G. (Waters in: I. Linn. Soc. Lon-
don v. 26, p. 656 u. 664).
? 1904. Membranipora spinosa Quoy and Gaimard (Hutton in: Ind.
Faun. Nov. Zealand., p. 295).
1904. Chaperia acanthina Qu. & Gaim. (Calvet in: Hambg. Magalh.
Sammelr., p. 11—12) [dort weitere Synonymieangaben !].
? 1905. Amphiblestrum spinosum Quoy and Gaimard (Maplestone in:
PARSSOCSVictoriatvælmhIlkpys806))
1914. Chaperia acanthina Quoy & Gaimard (Kluge in: Bryoz. BE
Sudp. Exp., p. 675 f. 46 a—c).
Fundnotiz: Auckland Is" Port" Ross SIOE ES EON
1 Seemeile dåstl. der Auckland Isl. auf flottierender Lessonia, %/11
1914. Campbell Isl., Perseverance Harbour 2/12 u. 12 1914.
Die Synonymie dieser Art ist hauptsåchlich durch die von Busk
bei Einfihrung des Namens spinosa falsch und vållig unerklårlicher
Weise beigefiigte Autorenbezeichnung Quoy & Gaimard, Voyage
de V'Astrolabe verwirrt worden. In der ,Voyage de V'Astrolabe"
habe ich uberhaupt keine Bryozoen finden kånnen, und M. spinosa
von den Kerguelen muss den von Studer (1889, p. 157) mit
Recht verwendeten Autornamen Busk tragen. Die noch bei Cal-
vet sich findende, irrige Deutung der ,,Challenger" Form ist durch
die eine unrichtige Synonymieangabe: M. ciliata McG., nicht durch
89
Busk's Diagnose verschuldet worden. Diese selbst und der Hin-
weis auf d,Orbigny, Voy. Amér. Mér., p. 16—17, t. 8. f. 1, zei-
gen deutlich, dass Busk eine echte Membranipora und zwar eine
zu der bei d'Orbigny kurz vorher beschriebenen echinata syno-
nyme Form gemeint hat. Die Verbindung des Artnamens spinosa
oder spinosum mit Q. & G. zieht als weiteren Irrtum die Mac
Gillivray'sche Art in den Synonymiebereich der vorliegenden ;
sie wird zwar auf Busk's Kerguelen-Species bezogen, ist aber,
wie die Abbildung sofort zeigt, wohl eine Chaperia, aber nicht
acanthina. Das hatte bereits Jelly trotz ihrer falschen Schreib-
und Auffassungsweise (ef. Syn. Cat., p. 132 u. p. 167) der Quoy
und Gaimard'schen Art richtig. erkannt, und Waters behandelt
diese Chaperia spinosa McG., die einzige ,,Membranipora" im alten
Sinne, die iberhaupt den Artnamen spinosa zu fihren hat, aus-
fuhrlicher in einer grundlegenden Membraniporiden-Arbeit (Journ.
EinnsSocttondonv 26" p 7613). DassaWa'terskankdieserStelle
»nec Busk, nec Jullien" schreibt, darf nicht etwa in der Richtung
sedentetkwerdenttdasstj ullien”s"Formtnochkwiederkernek von
Busk's abweichende Species sei, wåhrend sie doch tatsåchlich
mit Busk's Kerguelen-Art und damit mit acanthina Q. G. vållig
ubereinstimmt. Bei Maplestone's und Hutton's Listennamen,
ohne Literaturangaben oder Abbildungen kann die Zugehårigkeit
zu Ch. acanthina (Q. G.) lediglich aus der Schreibweise und dem
Vorkommen vermutet werden.
Das" vorliegende, åusserst reiche Material låsst zwei habituell
erheblich von einander abweichende Typen erkennen, wie sie etwa
durch Busk's und Kluge's Abbildungen repråsentiert werden.
Alte Kolonieen mit weit vorgeschrittener Verkalkung entsprechen
den Busk'schen und Jullien'schen Figuren: es ist dann die dis-
tale, das Orificium umgebende Partie verbreitert und massiver ge-
worden, gegeniiber dem von Kluge gezeichneten Jugendstadium,
wo die hyaline, den Polypid auch von der Frontalseite her durch-
schimmern lassende Cryptocyste den schmalen Randpartien gegen-
iber in den Vordergrund tritt. Die Hauptmenge der vorliegenden
Zoarien entspricht dem bei Kluge dargestellten Typus und inkru-
stiert in ausgedehnten, bråunlichgelben Flåchen nur lose das be-
treffende Substrat. MacGillivray's erste Diagnose (1868, Tr.
PÆRSS0e" Vict v"97 p. 131—132) gibt" 47 Dornen an, das vor-
90
liegende Material weist meist 6—7 auf, ebensoviel wie Jullien
und Calvet erwåhnten. Wo die Stacheln fehlen, ist eine gewisse
Åhnlichkeit zu Macropora disjuneta (Manzoni) (Waters in: Qu. J.
Geol. Soc. London v. 43, p. 50 t. 6 f. 8) auffallend, doch måchte
ich auf diese, beziiglich ihres recenten Vorkommens noch unsichere
Species iiber diese hinweisende Notiz hinaus nicht eingehen, zu-
mal ich sie nur aus der Literatur kenne und vielleicht nicht ein-
mal in generischer Hinsicht richtig auffasse. Fur die vorliegende
Art sind ausser den Dornen und der wohlentwickelten Cryptocyste
noch charakteristisch: die distal konvergierende Chitinleisten auf
dem. zusammengesetzten Operculum, sowie das Fehlen der Avicu-
larien und der sonst bei Chaperia freien, hyperstomialen und im
Ekto-Ooecium verkalkten Ovicellen.
Als sichere Fundorte kånnen angegeben werden: AÅrabisches
Meer, zwischen Aden und Bombay, Lat. 15? N. Long. 65? O.
(Hincks). Mit Ricksicht auf den Autor glaube ich diesen etwas
isoliert liegenden Fundort nicht anzweifeln zu durfen; diese Mit-
teilung und sonstige Angaben iber Ch. tropica Waters, Ch. multi-
fida (Busk) u. a. sind geeignet Waters” Meinung, das Gen. Cha-
peria sei auf die Siidhemisphåre beschrånkt, zu berichtigen. Mau-
ritius (Kirkpatrick); Cap d. guten Hoffng. (Jullien); Kergu-
elen, Swain's Bai (Busk); ibid. Observatory Bai (Kluge, Berl.
Mus. Kat. Nr. 1301); Torres Str., Murray I., 15—20 Fd. (Kirk-
patrick); Sid Australien: Queenscliff, Portland, Williamstown
(P. H. MacGillivray); Neuseeland (Hutton, Hamilton); Lord
Elowe-Inss Lat. "31 30 SFEongt 159 TOR FOR (Man hes komedE
Magalhaens Str., Sant Jago Bai, nahe d. Triton Bank, 8 Fd.; Smith
Channel, Puerto Bueno, 8 Fd.; ibid., Long Island, 8 Fd. (Calvet);
Kap Horn (Jullien); Falkland Inseln (Quoy & Gaimard).
2. Caberea darwinii Busk
(PISVE Fig TEA)
?1839;46. Canda patagonica (DOrbigny in: Voy. Amér. mér., p. 9; t. 2
f. 5—9).
1852. Caberea zelanica (Busk in: Voy. Rattlesn., p. 378) [fide Buskl.
non 1852. Caberea zelanica (Busk in: Br. Mus. Cat., t. 16 f. 4, 5).
1852. Caberea boryi Aud. part. (Busk in: Br. Mus. Cat, p. 38-—39).
1852. Caberea patagonica (Busk in: Br. Mus. Cat., t. 38 f. 1—4).
1879. Caberea boryi (Busk in: Kerg. Pol., p. 194).
91
1884 Caberea Darwinii (Busk in: Chall. Rep., p. 29 t. 32 f. 6a—6 f).
1884. Caberea minima (Busk in: Chall. Rep., p. 30 t. 32, f. 5Sa—Sd.
1887. Caberea darwinii(Busk)(P. H. MacGillivray in: Prod. Faun.
Vic deep AFP EEEI STE EMESKLES)
1888... Crisia boryi AÅud. et Sav. (Jullien in: Miss. Cap Horn, p. 75).
1889. Caberea boryi Busk (Studer in Gazelle Ber., p. 269).
1890. Caberea minima Bsk. (Ortmann in: Jap. Bryoz., p.23t. 1f
9a, b.)
1897. Caberea Darwinii, Busk (Waters in: Rapallo Bryoz., p. 10 t 1
kmlSe2 ES 25)
1904. Caberea Boryi (Aud.) (Calvet in Hambg. Sammelr., p. 7).
1905. Caberea boryi, Aud. (Waters in: Br. Cap Horn, p. 282).
1914. Caberea darwinii Busk (Kluge in: Dtsch. Sidp.-Exp,p.618-19).
1918. Caberea darwinii Busk (Yanagi u. Okada in: Ann. Zool. Jap.
v. 9IV, p. 417).
Fundnotiz: Auckland Isl., Carnley Harbour, ca. 45 Fd., &/12
1914.
Zu obiger Synonymieliste ist zu bemerken, dass man vielleicht
spåter zwei Subspecies innerhalb der Siidhemisphåre zu unter-
scheiden haben wird, dauernde Geltung aber muss die Trennung
aller von den Kerguelen, Australien, Siidamerika etc. erwåhnten
Stiicke von C. boryi (Aud.) beanspruchen. Die C. darwinii am besten
charakterisierende Diagnose gibt P. H. MacGillivray; dieser ent-
spricht ausser dem vorliegenden Material eine Menge von Kolo-
nieen der Hamburg. S. W. Austr. Exp. 1905, ein trockenes Zo-
arium von Port Jackson [Berl. Mus. Kat. Nr. 962] und ,,Gazelle'-
Material "[Kat. Nr. 271, 278]. Die: Erorterung der C.-glabra Mac G.
(ibid.), deren glatte Aperturlamelle mit nicht gezåhntem Rand mir
bei jingeren Stiicken von C. darwinii auch aufzutreten scheint,
stelle ich vorlåufig noch zurick. C. patagonica und minima reprå-
sentieren den gewohnlichen Habitus der Art, die im Alter die
Neigung hat, stårker zu verkalken. Solche Zoarien, deren undurch-
sichtige, massive und sehr oft dicht mit Algen bewachsene Zweige
dann nur noch entweder entkalkt oder gegliiht untersucht werden
kånnen, besitzen nicht mehr die im Chall. Rep. abgebildeten, lang
und schlank aussehenden Zooecien, sondern die stårkere Kalkein-
lagerung in und zwischen ihre Wandungen låsst die Zellen breiter
und massiger erscheinen (PI. V, f. 1a). Auf solche Stiicke muss sich
Kluge's Bemerkung beziehen, die Zooecien der Art seien ver-
håltnismåssig kurz, sein antarktisches Material [Berl. Mus. Kat. Nr.
92
1235, 1236] dagegen stimmt vållig mit dem vorliegenden iberein,
das der Abbildung des Chall. Rep. entspricht. Fir diesen zweiten
Typus sind charakteristisch: lange Zooecien, proximal spitz zulau-
fende Apertur, die eine kalkige mehr oder weniger deutlich gra-
nulierte Kalklamelle zum gråssten Teil erfillt, ein breites Fornix-
Blatt und gefiederte Vibracularborsten. Diese sind, auch hinsichtlich
ihrer Fiederung, im Prodrom. Faun. Vict. zu stark gezeichnet, die
in der Nåhe der Dornen des Fornixansatzes gelegenen Median-
avicularien dagegen zutreffend abgebildet. Die Randung der Ekto-
Ooecien kommt jiingeren Stiick?n nicht zu, ihre median gerichtete
Lage låsst sie mehr oder weniger asymmetrisch erscheinen (Pl. V
FEAH SEH incks"(Br. Mar: Polls pr G1SE) hatseinzelnenUgtersehlede
zwischen europåischen und australischen ,,C. boryif-Sticken aus-
einandergesetzt. Diese Darstellung, die Busk's und besonders P. H.
MacGillivray's scheinen mir durch Waters (1897) nicht iber-
holt worden zu sein, vielmehr erlaubt seine dort etwas skizzenhaft
gezeichnete Abbildung von Chall. Material (Nachtigall-Ins.), trotz
der fehlenden Avicularien-Charaktere, auf Grund der grossen Vi-
bracularkammern und der breiten, anscheinend sogar fein granu-
lierten Aperturlamelle in diesem Stick C. darwinii zu erkennen.
Die von Waters friiher (Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 5 v. 20, p. 95— 96)
von Siidaustralien und Neuseeland angefihrten ,,C. boryif-Stiicke
entbehren der Abbildung und Beschreibung, diese Exemplare blei-
ben zweifelhaft. Jullien gibt an, dass er hinsichtlich der Zuge-
horigkeit seines Materials zu C. darwinii nichts habe entscheiden
konnen; die Abbildung der Vibracularmuskulatur ist nicht ausschlag-
gebend, nach dem Fundort aber ist sicher anzunehmen, dass so-
wohl er, als auch Calvet, der keine morphologischen Angaben
macht, C. darwinii vor sich hatte. :
Mit Busk halte ich C. boryi (Aud.) fir eine Form des Mittel-
meers und der ausserpolaren Gebiete des Atlantic, mein Beleg-
stuck dieser Art ist von Kluge bestimmt [Helgoland, Kat. Nr.
208]; C. ellisii Flem. ist circumarktisch und circumboreal (Nord-
gaard 1918, p. 37); C. darwinii ist aus der Antarktis, Subantarktis
und aus den Tropen bekannt. ,,Gazelle"-Material.(nårdl. Neuseeland,
Nåhe d. Kermadec Ins.) gehårt dieser Art zu; Ortmann's Fund-
ort Sagamibai wird von Yanagi und Okada beståtigt; Stiicke
aus dem westl. Indic etc. (C. boryi, Thornely 1912, p. 140—41)
93
bedirfen noch der Nachuntersuchung; das von Busk gleichfalls
der C. boryi zugerechnete Brit. Mus.-Material aus der Algoa Bai
bleibt ebenso zweifelhaft. Obwohl Water's Nachuntersuchung (Ann.
Nat'”EHist: ser: 7 v. 15, p. 6) und. der Fundort Rio Negro Miindg.
den d Orbigny'schen Namen prior erscheinen lassen, diirfte die
heutige Bryozoensystematik diesen keine klare Vorstellung vermitteln-
den Namen fallen, und Busk folgend, den so oft gebrauchten Namen
darwinii unter die nomina conservanda aufnehmen lassen.
3... Menipea aculeata (d'Orb.).
1839; 46. Bicellaria aculeata (D”Orbigny in: Voy. Amér. Mér. p. 8—9;
t. 2 f. 1—4 [dort Tricellaria ac.)).
1884. Menipea aculeata, &Orb. (Busk in: Chall. Rep. p. 20 t. 4 f. 2,
Pan):
1904. Menipea aculeata Busk (Calvet in Brvoz. Magalh. Sammelr.,
påC= 1)
1914. Scrupocellaria bifurcata (Kluge in: Bryoz. Dtsch. Sidp. Exp.,
p. 614—615 f. 3a—c).
Fundnotiz: Campbell Isl., Perseverance Harbour %/72 1914.
In die Synonymie wurde Menipea fuegensis Busk (Br. Mus. Cat,
p. 21 t. 19 f. 1—3) nicht mit aufgenommen, wenngleich von Kir-
chenpauer so determiniertes ,Gazelle"-Material (Studer 1889,
p. 156 u. 288, Berl. Mus. Kat. Nr. 268 u. 282) von den Kerguelen
und von Patagonien .fir die specifische Vereinigung mit der Art
des ,,Challengerf und ,,Gauss" spricht, und ich kaum daran zweifle,
dass weiteres Material die Zusammengehårigkeit restlos erkennen
lassen wird. Dies gilt jedoch nicht fir die meiner Ansicht nach
zu Unrecht als fuegensis Busk bezeichnete Art Jullien's (Bryoz.
Cap. Horn, p. 70), bei der die frontalen Avicularien und die lan-
gen Dornen fehlen, und die ganze Anordnung der Zooecien den
nur bei Ovicellen-tragende fuegensis Busk-Zweigen vorkommenden
Typus aufweist. Fir sicher zusammengehårig måchte ich dagegen
dlekddOrFbrsny sche und"die Busk'schet Species halten/kwiekdas
s. Zt. Busk selbst getan hat. Das Fehlen des hyalinen Fornix,
der kleinen Frontal- und der gråsseren Lateralavicularien låsst nicht
eine besondere Art in der.d'Orbigny's Abbildungen zu Grunde
liegenden Form vermuten, sondern nur annehmen, dass der ÅAutor
trockenes Material ohne Lateralavicularien, die ja håufig fehlen,
vor sich gehabt hat, und Fornix und Frontalavicularien in diesem
94
Zustand mit Hilfe der damaligen Optik nicht erkannt werden konn-
ten. Im Habitus mit den schlanken Zooecien, den langen Dornen
und Haftwurzeln passen seine Figuren sehr gut zur vorliegenden
Art, weshalb die hier vorgenommene, zu einer von Calvet ab-
weichenden Schreibweise fiihrende Vereinigung berechtigt erscheint;
die Nachuntersuchung des dOrbigny'schen Materials ist resul-
tatlos geblieben (cf. Waters 1905, p. 3). Der von Kluge neu
gewåhlte Name wird damit hinfållig, nicht aber seine treffende
Diagnose, auf die an Stelle einer Wiederholung der Beschreibung
hier verwiesen sei. Die Lateraiavicularien fehlen in Busk's Abbil-
dung, ohne dass dadurch etwa ein Artunterschied zwischen dieser
Art und fuegensis begriindet wurde, wie das hier untersuchte Ma-
terial bewies, in welchem zwar unter jeder Area das frontale Avi-
cularium, aber bei weitem nicht an jeden Zooecium ein laterales
Avicularium entwickelt ist. Bald tritt dies, wie bei Waters” /uegen-
sis- Material (Bryoz. Belgica, p. 24), an dem unteren Zooecium eines
Zwischenknotenstickes, bald in mehreren, auf einander folgenden
Internodien iiberhaupt nicht, bald auch wieder regelmåssig an jedem
Zooecium auf. Wenn auch die drei langen Stacheln bei den hier
untersuchten Stiicken iiberwiegen, so fehlt es doch auch nicht an
Zooecien mit vier Stacheln, und in beiden Fållen ist ausser die-
sen, nach aussen weisenden, geschwungenen Stacheln je ein frontal
gerichteter Dorn oberhalb des Fornix-Ansatzes und dieser Stelle
gegenuber auf dem Aussenrande der Apertur ausgebildet. Die Ge-
stalt des Fornix hauptsåchlich war es, die mich, trotz aller dieser
zur Vereinigung mit fuegensis Busk drångenden Charaktere, und
trotzdem Waters mit vollem Recht auf die Variabilitåt auch dieses
Merkmals bei Menipea ternata (Ell. Sol.) hingewiesen hat, veran-
lasste, an der bis in die modernste Literatur hinein (Waters Bryoz.
Zanzibar, p. 474 Anm.) aufrecht erhaltenen Unterscheidung von
fuegensis und aculeata festzuhalten. Es zeigten nåmlich die hier
untersuchten Zooecien niemals das nadelformige, gekriimmte Scutum
der Abbildung des ,,Catalogue", sondern stets den zwei- oder drei-
gabeligen, oft an eine Elchschaufel erinnernden Fornix. Ausserdem
bin ich auch dariiber im Zweifel, ob bei M. fuegensis Busk, so, wie
bei der vorliegenden Species, die sekundåre Cryptocyste als schma-
ler Innenrand die Apertur umsåumt. Es wurde unter diesen Ge-
sichtspunkten und auf die Gefahr hin, dem Fornix-Unterschied zu
95
grosse Bedeutung beigemessen zu haben, solange vermehrtes Ma-
terial nicht die Variabilitåt auch dieses Charakters sicher erweist,
von einer Einbeziehung der fuegensis in die Synonymie der acu-
leata abgesehen und in diesem Sinne die Fundortliste zusammen-
gestellt:
Kerguelen (Kluge) [Berl. Mus. Kat. Nr. 1229]; Chall. Stat. 303:
iBafRÆS ORE ES ER on sy SOFA WÆRchilenKkiste]| FES25NEdS Stat:
SURE at SIDES SEE ons" 65 ESOWÆ zwischen "Patagonien" u.
deb alklandkelns"| TOMMEE Sta teske SE AO ES Eong 75?
507” W. [åstl. Falkland Ins.], 5—12 Fd. (Busk); Falkland Inseln
(dJOrbigny); Siid Feuerland, Uschuaia; Siud-Atl. Ocean, vor Kap
Blanco, Ost-Patagonien, 80 Fd. (Calvet).
4.. Foraminella lepida (Hincks).
(Pl. V, Fig. 2—2b; Textfigur 1, a--b).
1881. Haploporella [p. 136: Monoporella] lepida (Hincks in: Ann.
NafHElistiserESkvrsS ptt PBe E2):
1887. Micropora lepida Hincks (Waters in: Qu. Journ. Geol. Soc. v.
43, p. 51).
1891. Monoporella lepida (Hincks in: Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 6 v. 8, p.
474—476).
1904. Micropora lepida, Hincks (Hutton in: Ind. Faun. Nov. Zeal.,
p. 296).
1905. Monoporella lepida, Hincks (Thornely in: Pearl Oyster Fish.
NÆS 13)
1907... Monoporella lepida, Hincks (Thornely in: Rec. Ind. Mus. v. 1,
p- 188)
1909. Foraminella lepida (Hincks) (Levinsen in: Morph. Syst. Stud.,
PRÆlGSEL SEER Sa)
Hundmotrz-TAucklandEIstk Port Rosskcar OT Ed 2 TOT
Campbell Isl., Perseverance Harbour, 10—20 Fd. ?/12, ca. 20 Fd.
Ole 1914.
Ein åusserst reiches Material dieser schånen Art gestattet, in
einigen Punkten die bisherigen Diagnosen zu ergånzen: Die Zo-
arien bestehen teils aus auffallend regelmåssigen, långlich sechs-
eckigen, teils aus in continuierlichen Reihen angeordneten recht-
eckigen Zooecien. Distal- und Proximalwand sind jeweils die kir-
zesten, umgeben wird jede Zelle von einem quergerillten Rand,
der auch in der orificialen Partie sich markiert, und als verdickte
»Unterlippe" sich iiber die fein gerunzelte Cryptocyste des Front-
96
walles erhebt. Die Zahl der Opesiulae scheint uber fuinf auch bei
den gestrecktesten Zooecien nicht hinauszugehen, ihre Grøåsse und
ihr Abstand von einander variiert, nur das erste Paar hat durch-
gångig die normale Gråsse. Das Operculum (Textfig 1a) ist eine
zarte Hautklappe, die im Weichkorperpråparat
nur durch eine schwache, halbkreisformige Chi-
(RER tinverdickung der distalen Partie und die an
den distalen, von der kurzen rechten und lin-
æt ken und der langen, gebogenen, oberen Seite
gebildeten Ecken ansetzende, geringfigige Mus-
kulatur zu erkennen ist; die Gestalt des Oper-
culums entspricht der des Orificiums, und da
die Breite die Ausdehnung in der Medianlinie
ubertrifft, entsteht der Umriss einer flachen,
halben Ellipse. Das Aussehen der hyalinen
Riickseite (PL V, fig: 2b) Fist durehidleRn hier
deutlich zur Anschauung kommenden Pøren-
kammern charakterisiert: distal und … proximal
sind sie an jedem Zooecium in doppelter Zahl
entwickelt und stellen sich, genau aneinander-
liegend, an den kurzen Seiten der Zellen als
grosse Rechtecke dar, wåhrend die lateralen
i Porenkammern in gråsserer Anzahl als ge-
b. schwungene Languetten die langen Seiten um-
Fig. 1. Foraminella le- såumen. Die Skulptur der Endo-Oøecien ent-
ads der spricht der Granulierung der frontalen Crypto-
mandibel. 185/4. cyste (PI. V, fig. 2a), iiber ihnen sind, als braun-
gelblicher Hautsaum deutlich abgesetzt, die
membranåsen Ekto-Ooecien zu erkennen (Pl. V, fig. 2). Levin-
sen bildet kein Avicularium ab, gibt richtig den Schleier-artigen,
»onychocelloiden" Saum fast an der ganzen Långe der im distalen
Viertel gekriimmten, spitzigen Mandibel an, irrt aber, wenn er das
Avicularium mit den Worten ,Wwithout a cross-bar" charakterisiert.
In Wahrheit ist ein Querbalken in durchaus regelmåssiger Ausbil-
dung vorhanden (Textfig. 15), er fehlt allerdings auch in der zu
Hincks' Originaldiagnose gehårigen Abbildung, der ein Zoarium
zu Grunde lag, bei dem die ganze proximale Partie des Avicula-
riums ausgebrochen oder vielleicht auch durch starkes Ausgliihen
97
zerstårt war. Die bisher festgestellte Verbreitung der Art wird
durch folgende Fundorte charakterisiert:
Golf v. Manaar, nårdl. v. Cheval Paar, 7—10 Fd. (Thornely);
Bates] N"Eons 810 O SMOS Kiste vs Ceylon]; 34
Ed (EBhornely);FBassstrasse, "Curtis kl (Elin ek s):ENete Seeland
(Waters); ibid., Napier, Wanganui (Hamilton, Tr. P. N. Zeal.
Inst. v. 30 (1898), p. 195); Three Kings Inseln Lat. 349 9,9” S.
Fons 42 55 TOME] 647 mm Exp Gazelle |[Berl Mus Kat:
Nr.:2110)].
5... Hippothoa hyalina (L.).
(Pl. V, Fig. 3).
(Fur Synonymie siehe Waters in: J. Linn. Soc. London v. 34, p. 20).
Fundnotiz: Auckland Isl., Port Ross, ca. 10 Fd., 7/11 1914.
Campbell Isl., Perseverance Harbour, ohne Tiefenangabe und 10
—20 Fd., ”/12 1914.
Die eizelnen Formae dieser Art bedirfen keiner gesonderten
Benennung, wie aus Alice Robertson”s Darstellung (1909, p.
278) hervorgeht. Nachdem sie fir die von Levinsen (1909, p.
278) wieder als eigene Art aufgefasste H. cornuta (Busk) und die
f. discreta nachgewiesen hat, dass beide in einander ibergehende
Merkmale besitzen, sind Jullien's Bedenken gegen die weite Auf-
fassung der Art hinfållig geworden (1888, p. 29 ff.): ,,il n'est pas
rationel d'admettre qu'une forme est la variété d'une autre forme,
si elles ne dérivent pas une de Vautre d'une facon positive",
Levinsen wurde vielleicht durch geringes Material zur Trennung
der einzelnen Formae gefihrt. Jullien beschreibt verschiedene
Ancestrulae bei seinen Stiicken, von denen besonders das Vor-
kommen einer nicht wie sonst eingesenkt, sondern hochgewodlbt
zwischen den Stacheln liegenden Kalklamina bemerkenswert ist.
Dieses Vorkommen einer primåren Gymnocyste ist selten, passt
aber zu Levinsen's Deutung des Frontwalles von Hippothoa (1909,
pR20Runds Harmer 1902. 320 MH) FRWie der ganzen Gfø:
fehlen die Avicularien auch allen Formen der vorliegenden Art, in
dieser Hinsicht ist Jullien (p. 33) zu berichtigen. Das vorliegende
Material kann als zu der fir die Subantarktis charakteristischen f.
bougainvillei d'Orb. (1839; 46, p. 12; t. 4 f. 9—12) gehårig be-
zeichnet werden. Es handelt sich bei dieser Form um die Ver-
stårkung der auch bei der form. typ. sich findenden Querskulptur des
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 73. 7
98
Frontwalles. Diese entspricht in den hier untersuchten Zoarien dem
Typus der Busk'schen Kerguelen-Form (1879, p. 197 t. 10 f. 10);
sie tritt also nicht mit dornenartigen Vorspriingen in der Mitte der
Zellen auf, sondern mit flachen Rippen, die den Frontwall in seiner
ganzen Breite reifenartig umspannen. Bei d'Orbigny sind die von
H. hyal.-cornuta und anderen Hippothoa-Spec. her bekannten, jeder-
seits vom Orificium aufsitzenden hohlen Hårner durchgångig aus-
gebildet gezeichnet, wåhrend sie bei der genannten Abbildung von
Busk iiberhaupt nicht und im vorliegenden Material nur selten zu
sehen sind. Die Figur des Challenger Rep. (t. 22 f. 4) weist dornen-
artige Zapfen auf den die Ooecien umgebenden Kenozooecien auf,
wihrend hier die Kenozooecien in der iblichen Weise weitlåufig
punktiert sind und teilweise ausserdem jenen auch von der f. ty-
pica bekannten, central und etwas proximal gelegenen Buckel be-
sitzen. Dies alles beweist, wie das gelegentlich der Bearbeitung
der Schwed. Expedition von Juan Fernandez untersuchte Material,
dass die Charaktere der verschiedenen Formae von H. hyalina (L.),
deren unterscheidende Namen von den Autoren auf Sticke mit
prågnanter Ausbildung der Merkmale gegriindet wurden, in ein-
ander fliessen und so den Wert unterscheidender Bezeichnungen
herabsetzen. Die Neigung der Porenkammern, kurze, hakerartige
Auslåufer zur Verbindung mit dem Nachbarzooecium auszusenden,
ist an einem Teil der Kolonieen auch wieder zu beobachten, wenn
auch nicht in dem Masse, wie in dem abgebildeten Material (PI. V
fig. 3), wodurch gelegentlich eine Kette durch diese Auslåufer um-
grenzter Offnungen in der Trennungslinie der Zooecienreihen ent-
steht.
6. Escharoides praestans (Hincks).
(Pl. V, Fig. 4; Textfig. 2, a—b).
1860. - Lepralia excavata (P. H. MacGillivray in: Tr. Phil. Inst. Vict.
v. 4, p. 166 t. 2 £. 4).
1882. Mucronella praestans (Hincks in: Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 5 v. 10,
PG SRE TER HESTEN
1909. Escharoides praestans Hincks (Levinsen in: Morph. Syst. Stud.,
DRS ANE)
Fundnotiz: Auckland Isl., Masked Isl., Carnley Harbour, 2/12
1914.
Die Identitåt der MacGillivray'schen Art mit praestans geht auf
den Autor selbst zurick (Tr. P. R. R. Soc. South Austr. v. 13 1890,
99
p. 5): Auch ohne dies wåre Jelly”s Annahme, excavata sei. måg-
licherweise der Esch. coccinea (Abildg.) synonym, unhaltbar, da die
grossen Avicularien, die Art der Bedornung, die Ausbildung des Peri-
stoms und die Skulptur die vorliegende Art hinreichend unterschei-
den. Levinsen's Esch. sauroglossa dagegen. scheint der praestans
sehr nahe zu stehen, zumal er selbst Sticke von Port Phillip er-
wåhnt, die weder einen Sinus in der Unterlippe, noch paarige Avi-
cularien oder Lateralzåhnen besitzen, Waters trennte auch sein
wohl zu sauroglossa gehåriges
Material nicht artlich von prae-
stans (Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 6 v. 4,
p. 17). Nicht verståndlich ist mir
dagegen das dort (t. 3 f. 10) ab-
gebildete Operculum geblieben,
denn tatsåchlich handelt es sich
(Textf. 2a) um ein dem sauro-
glossa-Typus sehr åhnliches Oper-
culum, das als zusammengesetz-
fes zu bezeichnen ist, wohl chi-
tinisierte, leistenartig verdickte
Rånder und die Form eines zwei-
zipfeligen Trapezes aufweist; sei-
ne Pråparation wird durch die
tief in das Peristom eingesenkte i) ANER, De heel
EaseRserschwertireffend er | CE LDe fre DS SOE Ge
scheint mir Waters” Vergleich b.
des ” peristomialen Sinus der Art mit dem von Esch. ere (J.
Linn. Soc. v. 28, p. 86). Die Avicularien des vorliegenden Materials
treten gekriimmt und gerade auf, die Mandibeln variieren in ihrer
Gråsse (Textfig. 2 b).
Schon MacGillivray hatte in der Areolation der Lateral-
rånder verbindende Réhren erkannt, und richtig vermutet auch
Levinsen aus dem Vorkommen der in der Hincks'schen Ab-
bildung zu erkennenden Porenkanåle die Existenz einer ,,00ecial
cover" bei den Ooecien. Diese kalkige Uberlagerung stammt wohl
mehr von den Frontalwållen der benachbarten, als vom Peristom
der eigenen Zooecien, ihre Skulptur besteht aus sternfårmig ange-
ordneten Rippen und einem centralen, zipfelartigen Dorn, der bald
aa.
Fig. 2. Escharoides
praestans (Hcks).
a. Operculum ;
7%
100
spitz hervorragt, bald als nur kurzer Zapfen auftritt (Pl. V, f. 4). Das
" håutige Ekto-Ooecium konnte nicht mit wiinschenswerter Deutlich-
lichkeit erkannt werden, weil die sehr massigen Zoarien, von denen
ubrigens auch nur ein kleines Stiick Ovicellen besass, im unge-
gliinten Zustand fir die mikroskopische Betrachtung recht unge-
eignet sind. Das Vorhandensein des Ekto-Ooeciums wurde mir aus
dem Bilde klar, das ein in der Frontalwand aufgebrochenes, ge-
gliihtes Oocoecium bot: innen die glatte Kalkwand des Endo-Ooeci-
ums, daraufliegend, nicht vållig fortgebrannt, sondern als schwarzer,
verkohlter Saum erhalten gebliebten, das membranåse Ekto-Ooecium,
und dies wiederum iberlagert von der ooecialen Deckschicht.
Die Verbreitung charakterisieren folgende Fundoørte: Sidaustra-
lien, Queenscliff (P. H. MacGillivray); Neuseeland (Hincks,
Hutton -— als Lepralia angela Hutt. 1873 Cat. Mar. Moll., p. 96);
ibid., Napier, Wanganui (Hamilton 1898, p. 195), Insel Campbell
(Filhol) Maunganui, Chatham Ins. (Waters 1906, p. 20). Var.
sauroglossa Lev.: Port Jackson (Waters); Port Phillip u. Korea-
strasse N. W. von Nagasaki (Levinsen). Var. tridens Calvet (1909,
p. 30, t. 3 f. 6): Antarktis, Konig Oskar Il.-Land.
7. Exochella zelanica Levinsen.
(Pl. V, Fig. 5—5a, Textfig. 3, a—b).
1882. Mucronella diaphana, Mac Gillivray, forma armata (Hincks in:
AnnNat"Histøsert svor pel 67 SES SA)
1904. Mucronella diaphana var. armata, Hincks (Hutton in: Ind.
Faun. Nov. Zealand, p. 297).
1909. Exochella Zelanica (Levinsen in: Morph. Syst. Stud., p. 322
ELERS)
Fundnotiz: Campbell Isl., Perseverance Harbour, 10—20 Fd.,
9/38; ibid. ca. 20 Fd., 72 1914.
Der zooeciale Bau der Species ist von besonderer Eigenart,
insofern jede Zelle nicht nur oberflåchlich, sondern durchgångig in
der ganzen Tiefe des Zoariums von einem massigen Rand um-
geben wird, der von Poren-Kanålen durchsetzt ist. Die Dorsal-
ansicht Zzeigt, wie dieser Rand die hyalinen Zooecien geriistartig
zusammenhålt (Pl. V, Fig. 5a). Hincks nennt die Skulptur des
Frontwalles glatt, Levinsen dagegen spricht von Poren, was die
Zwischenråume zwischen den Håckern im ungegliihten Pråparat
auch tatsåchlich zu sein scheinen. Wie aber ein gegliihtes Stiick
101
beweist, handelt es sich bei erwachsenen Zooecien um Granulie-
rung; die jungen sind noch glatt. Ein Ausgleich der frontalen
Sxulpturmerkmale kommt einmal durch die zarte Struktur, dann
aber wohl auch durch das Vorhandensein einer deckenden Mem-
bran (Epithek) zu Stande, die allerdings Levinsen nicht erwåhnt,
und die selbst bei so gut erhaltenem Spiritusmaterial, wie es hier
vorliegt, nicht ganz sicher nachzuweisen ist. Die Ausbildung des
peristomialen Medianzapfens ist das fir die Determination wertvoll-
ste Merkmal der habituell einander sehr åhnlichen Exochella-Spe-
Fig. 3. Eæochella zelanica Lev. a. Operculum mit Ansatzstellen der Stacheln ;
b.—c. Avicularmandibeln in verschiedenen Stellungen. a. 1%/1, b.—c. 2%/1,
cies; bei zelanica ist er rechteckig, die Distalecken zuweilen etwas
spitzer ausgezogen, als das Levinsen abbildet, die zentrale Partie
gegen eine randliche Kalkumwallung abgesetzt. Die Areolation der
Zellgrenzen variiert in Form und Gråsse, in Levinsen's Figur ist
sie auffallend klein und rundlich gezeichnet. Oft liegen, besonders
bei ålteren Zoecien, die rund oder auch eckig gestalteten Marginal-
Poren in tiefen Gruben und åhnlich wie bei der vorhergehenden
Art, durch kråftig hervorragende Rippen getrennt. Das Operculum
liegt tief und ist in seiner accessorischen Partie in enger Verbin-
dung mit dem Compensationssack; dieser Teil ist kaum chitinisiert,
wåhrend distal eine chitinige Randverdickung auftritt (Textfig. 3a).
Jullien's Abbildungen der Opercula von E. longirostris zeigen, wie
bei einer gewaltsamen Trennung des Operculums von Compensa-
tionssack die Form modificiert und fir Determinationszwecke un-
geeignet gemacht wird. Dies ist umso nachteiliger, als die Avi-
102
cular-Mandibeln wenig specifische Charaktere enthalten; Levinsen
zeichnet sie zwar' bei zelanica -breiter, als bei /ongirostris, wo sie
iiberdies zufållig alle in eine Richtung weisen, tatsåchlich aber
stimmen sie im vorliegenden Material mit Jullien's Abbildung iiber-
ein (Textfig. 3b). Die Ovicellen bestehen aus kalkigem, in der Art
des Frontwalles skulptiertem Endo-Ooecium und håutigem Ektø-
Ooecium, das bei Spiritusexemplaren als ein teilweise etwas ge-
schrumpfter, hyaliner Saum zu erkennen ist. Die verdickte Mittel-
partie åhnelt als kurzer, buckelartiger Zapfen der Bildung auf den
Kenozooecien der vorhergehenden Art, ist aber, im Vergleich zu
jener, nie mehr als eine schwache Andeutung. Levinsen erwåhnt
den kalkigen, von Hincks beschriebenen schirmartigen Buckel
nicht mehr,, der unter dem Orificium zuweilen auftritt, weshalb hier
auf diese Bildung wiederum hingewiesen sei, zumal dieses Merk-
mal da, wo es auiftritt, den Habitus des Zoariums wesentlich mo-
dikcjertk(BERVÆRR SES)!
Neuseeland (Hincks); ibid., Hawke's Bay, Napier (Hamilton);
ibid., Akaroa Harbour, 6 Fd. (Levinsen) sind die bisher festge-
stellten Fundorte der Art.
8. Schizoporella vitrea (McG.).
(PI. V, Fig. 6—6 a, Textfig. 4).
1879. Lepralia vitrea (P. H. MacGillivray in: Prodr. Faun. Vict. dec.
AS DES RE SS EAD)!
1887.” Schizoporella vitrea MIG. (P. H. MacGillivray in: Cat. Mar:
Polyz. Vict., p. 210 [sep. p. 24]).
Fundnotiz: Campbell Isl., Perseverance Harbour ?/12 1914.
Trotz der unzureichenden, nur drei Zeilen umfassenden Diag-
nose halte ich doch MacGillivray's Figuren fir charakteristisch
genug, um sie in dem vorliegenden Material, dessen ausgedehnte
Zoarien eine Mytilus-Schale inkrustieren, wiederzuerkennen. Die
Zellenanordnung stellt MacGillivray richtig dar: continuierliche
Reihen von nicht gerade weitgehender Regelmåssigkeit, sondern
durch Unterschiede in Gråsse und Umriss der Zooecien wie auch
durch Unebenheiten des Substrats modificiert. Die Einschichtig-
keit des zoarialen Wuchses ist zwar meist, aber nicht ausschliess-
lich entwickelt; in ålteren Teilen der Kolonien legen sich jiingere
Zellenlagen iiber åltere, die dann nur noch durch die glatten Mar-
103
ginalbånder zu erkennen sind. Diese Randlinien sind auch nicht
durchweg vorhanden: im ungeglihten Pråparat werden sie oft un-
kenntlich durch die der gesamten Frontalwand aufliegende Epitheka,
im gegliihten zeigen åltere Zooecien mit stårkerer Kalkablagerung
die Neigung zu verschmelzen und dadurch die Zellgrenzen ver-
schwinden zu lassen. Die erwåhnte Deckmembran hatte MacGil-
livray wohl noch nicht erkannt und daher die Skulptur des Front-
walles als granuliert bezeichnet, wofir man sie, solange die fein
gerunzelte Epitheka vorhanden ist, vielleicht auch halten kånnte.
Tatsåchlich sind, wie das Gliibhpråparat lehrt, einzeln verstreute,
ziemlich grosse Poren vorhanden (Pl. V, Fig. 6a); in Glycerin oder
Canada-Balsam ibergeftihrtes Alkohol-Material ist so glashell, dass
uber die Art der Skulptur leicht Unklarheiten entstehen, und aucn
die zwischen den Poren und auf der ganzen Flåche des Front-
walles befindlichen, bedeutenden Unebenheiten iiber-
sehen werden kånnen. Immer aber finden sich die bei-
den stumpfen, warzenfårmigen Buckel an den Proximal-
ecken des Orificiums, . die fir die Identificierung des
i å Fig.4. Schizo-
vorliegenden Materials ausschlaggebend waren, auch si€ 3 orella vitrea
werden von der frontalen Epithek iiberzogen. Ob an (McG.). Oper-
ihrer Stelle auch ein central gelegener, traubenartiger SR SESE,
Haufen auftritt, und daher Sch. bothryoides (P. H. MacGillivray,
ICE DÆSSEFESS TE 17-70), wie. im Gatal: Polyzaviet= vermufet
wird, mit Sch. vitrea identisch ist, kann ich nicht entscheiden, die
hier untersuchten Zooecien besitzen stets nur die paarigen Buckel an
den Mundecken. Die Form des Orificiums erscheint in weitgehen-
dem Masse variabel, der centrale Sinus ist teils wie auf der Mac-
Gillivray'schen Abbildung gestaltet, teils noch weiter ausgegli-
chen, flach und seicht. Das Operculum ist nur måssig chitinisiert
(Textfig. 4), besonders in der proximalen Partie, wo es eng mit
dem Compensationssack zusammenhångt, rein membrandås. Etwa
sieben einporige Rosettenplatten in der Lateralwand dienen der
intrazoarialen Verbindung. Die Ooecien von denen in dem vor-
liegenden Material nur wenige entwickelt- sind, bestehen aus kal-
kigen Endo- und håutigen Ekto-QOoecien. Die Skulptur der Endo-
Ooecien habe ich nicht mit MacGillivray iibereinstimmend kår-
nig, sondern glatt mit unvollståndiger Verkalkung in der Mitte ge-
funden; dieses central und proximal gelegene Fenster von fast
104
kreisfårmiger, elliptischer oder annåhernd nierenfårmiger Gestalt
ist etwas Ungewéhnliches bei Schizoporelliden (Pl. V, Fig. 6). Die
Dorsalansicht rechtfertigt. mit ihren .glashellen, zarten Rickwånden
der Zooecien besonders gut den Namen der Art, hier treten die
Randlinien scharf hervor und zeigen feine Querstreifung. Im Weich-
kårperpråparat sind die oralen Drisen in deutlicher Ausbildung zu
erkennen; Avicularien besitzt die Species nicht.
Williamstown [bei Melbourne] ist der von MacGillivray mit-
geteilte Fundort.
9. Schizoporella microryncha spec. nov.
(Pl. V, Fig. 7; Textfig. 5, 5a).
Fundnotiz: Auckland Isl., Masked Isl., Carnley Harbour %/42
1914.
Der Art zunåchst stehen Sch. lata und Sch. punctigera (P.H.
MacGillivyray in: Prodr: Faun. Vict."1887"dect [FNpSlÆSEERESS
f. 1 u. 2), die sich jedoch durch die Form des orificialen Sinus
deutlich unterscheiden. Von der Art liegt nur ein an Gråsse ge-
ringes Zoarium vor, das aber voll entwickelt ist. Im zoarialen
Habitus erinnert die Species an Sch. unicornis (Johnst.), insofern
wie bei jener die rechteckigen, oft mehr breiten wie langen Zooe-
cien in regelmåssigen, durch scharf ausgeprågte Randlinien begrenz-
ten Reihen angeordnet sind. Da ein Glihpråparat anzufertigen,
bei dem geringen Material nicht måglich war, kann die Skulptur
des Frontwalles nur so geschildert werden, wie sie sich unter einer
ihr aufliegenden Epithek darstellt; danach ist sie åhnlich, wie bei
der vorhergehenden Årt, nur, dass die Zahl der Poren erheblich
geringer ist, und die Rauhigkeiten schwåcher sind. An dem Vor-
handensein der deckenden Membran ist bei der Species nicht zu
zweifeln, da deren deutliche Runzeln die Durchsichtigkeit in der
frontalen Aufsicht geradezu beeintråchtigen. Die Gestalt des Ori-
ficiums erinnert an Sch. woosteri (P. H. MacG., I. c., dec. 19, p.
311 t. 186 f. 2), eine im ibrigen durch Kårnelung des Frontwal-
les, Gréåsse und Position der Avicularien deutlich unterschiedene
Art. Noch mehr als bei jener ist hier das Orificium ,lepralioid",
denn proximal von der mit den Zåhnchen markierten Einschnirung
stellt die ganze Unterlippe einen einzigen, breitgeschwungenen und
seichten Bogen dar. Den Distalrand des Orificiums umsåumen bis
—
105
zu 5 Stacheln, die bei jugendlichen Kolonieen eine den Allgemein-
habitus modificierende, gråssere Långe haben mågen. Das vor-
liegende Material ist, nach den Embryonen enthaltenden Ovicellen
zu urteilen, erwachsen und zeigt, wie das bei ålteren Zoarien die
Regel ist, diese Dornen bis auf mehr oder weniger kurze Reste
abgebrochen. Das Ooecium besteht aus einem kalkigen Endo-
Ooecium mit zahlreichen gråsseren Poren von nahezu kreisfårmiger
Gestalt und einem membranåsen Ekto-Oecium, dessen zarte Haut,
zwischen den Poren gefaltet, eine strahlige Anordnung der Skulp-
tur zu Stande bringt. Der aussen das Endo-Ooecium umkleidende
und deutlich von ihm abgesetzte Hautsaum des Ekto-Ooeciums
bildet einen glatten Rand der ganzen Ovicelle. Die Dorsalseite
zeigt auch wieder die klaren Recht-
ecke der Zellgrenzen, die Zooecien-
ruckwånde sind milchglasartig und
runzelig, reichlicher Algenbewuchs triibt
das Bild. Die geringe Bedeutung der
Rosettenplatten fir die Systematik der
Schizoporella-Arten stand einer Inan- Er EH
spruchnahme des wenigen Materials Fig. 5. Schizoporella microrhyncha
indieserERichtunskentsezeni Boren- Hk 2 SP-20 FO percu hun mi tide SA ns
5 2 satzstellen der Stacheln; b. Avicu-
Kammern sind jedenfalls nicht vor- EET on
handen. Das Operculum (Textfig. 5 a),
im Weichkårperpråparat distal von den hornigen Ansatzstellen der
Stacheln umsåumt, ist stark chitinisiert und besitzt lateral bis in
die Einschnirung hinein eine Leiste fir den Ansatz der Musku-
latur, Ansatzpunkte (,muscular dots") habe ich nicht gesehen. Die-
ser Charakter wiirde, nach Levinsen eigentlich der generischen
Vereinigung mit den iibrigen Schizoporella-Arten entgegenstehen,
andererseits erscheint die Einreihung der Species in das Gen.
Escharina im Hinblick auf die bedeutenden Unterschiede im Bau
der ÅAvicularien und in der Ooecialskulptur vollends unmåglich.
Levinsen hat zweifellos den Umfang der Gtg. Schizoporella, der
er nur 6 alte Arten zurechnete, viel zu eng angenommen, um der
mit seiner=Diagnose nun allerdings auch noch nicht gebannten
Gefahr einer ,Sammelgattung”" zu entgehen. Das Studium der
zahlreichen, von ihm meist nicht beriicksichtigten, siidaustralischen
Schizoporella-Spec. wird einmal zu einer Vermehrung des Gattungs-
106
inhalts und dann vielleicht auch zu einer sicheren Abgrenzung des
Genus gegen Escharina fihren. Der proximale, accessorische Teil
des Operculums der neuen Art, der den Verschluss des Compen-
sations-Sackes bildet, ist schwåcher chitinisiert, gleichwohl aber deut-
lich in seinen, der Form der Unterlippe entsprechenden Umrissen
zu erkennen. Die Avicularien (Textfig. 5b) liegen auf kalkigen
Sockeln und sind von aussergewohnlicher Kleinheit; die Mandibel
ist breit gerundet, fast halbkreisfåormig, die Muskulatur. kråftig.
Ihre Position zeigt weitgehende Variabilitåt, bald liegen zwei Avi-
cularien symmetrisch neben dem Orificium, bald ricken beide auf
eine Seite, -bald ist nur eins enwickelt und liegt dann lateral oder
auch centrål (Pl. V, Fig. 7). Wie so manche andere Schizoporella-
Art beweist auch die vorliegende, dass in Levinsen's Familien-
diagnose dér zum Unterschied von den Smittiniden angefihrte Pas-
sus, bei Escharelliden kåmen in der Einzahl und in medianer Lage
auftretende Avicularien nicht vor, keine allgemeine Giltigkeit be-
sitzt und in zweifelhaften Fållen fir die Determination keinesfalls
ausschlaggebend sein darf. Die gleichen Avicularien, wie am Ori-
ficium, treten auch, einzeln und doppelt, meist in distalen Partieen
des Ooeciums auf, dort lateral oder central am Rande gelegen, so-
dass einzelne Zooecien im ganzen bis zu 4 Avicularien besitzen.
Orale Driisen habe ich nicht gesehen.
10. Microporella ciliata (Pallas) forma personata (Busk).
1766. Eschara ciliata (Pallas in: Elench. Zooph., p. 38).
1824. Flustra diademata (Quoy u. Gaimard in: Voy. Uran. Phys.,
p. 609—610 t. 89 f. 3—6).
?1839;46. Escharina regularis (D'Orbigny in: Voy. Amér. mér., p. 15; t.
GÆMIS)
1839; 46. Escharina armata (DOrbigny ibid., p. 15—16; t. 7 f. 5—8).
1854. Lepralia personata (Busk in: Br. Mus. Cat., p. 74 t. 90 f. 2—4).
non 1888. Fenestrulina hyadesi (Jullien in: Miss. sc. Cap Horn, p. 44
445579)
1908. Microporella californica [Busk?] (Robertson in: Incr. Bryoz.
Calif., p. 281—82 t. 18 f. 32—34).
Fundnotiz: Auckland Isl., Port Ross, ca. 10 Fd. 25/11 1914,
Die aufgeftihrte Synonymie bezieht. sich auf M. ciliata (Pall.)
als Gesamtart, von der M. hyadesi (Jull.) specifisch verschieden
und bei Jelly zu Unrecht synonym gesetzt ist. Nachdem bereits
107
Hincks (1880, p. 207) in der- auch hier wieder sehr guten Uber-
sicht der Variabilitåt der ciliata auf die Konstanz der Gestalt des
Orificiums hingewiesen hatte, betonte Calvet (1904, p. 21) die
Einkerbungen des unteren Mundrandes bei hyadesi und die Gråssen-
verhåltnisse der Zooecien wie ihrer Poren als unterscheidende
Merkmale (hierzu auch Waters 1905 Bryoz. C. Horn, p. 237 t.
28 f. 1—5). Weniger klar ist die Stellung der Esch. regularis d'Orb.,
die Waters (1. c.) fir wahrscheinlich synonym zur f. californica
hilt. Diese fasst Alice Robertson m. E. zu Unrecht als selbst-
ståndige Art auf, die durch paarweise auftretende Avicularien und
einen nicht mehr halbmondfårmigen, sondern elliptischen Com-
pensations- Porus unterschieden sein soll. Doppelte Avicularien
kommen aber vielfach bei ciliata typ. vor, wie mir das Juan Fer-
nandez-Material dieser Art bewies; im vorliegenden treten gleich-
falls kurze Avicularien und die mit Vibracular-artig verlångerter
Mandibel, auch gelegentlich in einem Zooecium auf. Wenn alte
Kolonieen stårker verkalken, wird auch die Form des Compensa-
tions-Porus mehr ausgeglichen. Die Literatur der f. californica (Qu.
IVES eRvs 4 DE 3105 PAm nn. Nat: "Histyser:" Sv Ep 3444) zerg tam
besten die Variabilitåt dieser Form, die nicht einmal Hincks,
dessen Stiicke durch Ooecienskulptur und die suborificialen Håcker
recht eigenartig sind, von M. ciliata getrennt hat. Derselben An-
seks PS EEE MacGillivray (1889 "Prodriydecslstpz274):
Canu (An: Mus: Nac. Buen. ser. 3 v. 9, p. 281) vereinigt .M. re-
gularis und f. californica Bsk. u. Hcks. mit M. coronata (Savigny,
t. 9 f. 6). Das hat viel fir sich, dann ist aber Robertson's Be-
nennung und Synonymieangabe nicht richtig, ihr Material gehårt
jedenfalls eng zu ciliata. Waters (1909, p. 142) fasst die coro-
nata ebenso auf wie Canu, hålt aber sogar diese Species fir eine
Form, die man als Varietåt von ciliata bezeichnen kånnte. Das gilt
dann aber erst recht von californica Roberts. Wenn mir also die
Einordnung der E. regularis d'Orb. in die Synomie von M. ciliata
fraglich erscheint, so hat das einen «anderen Grund sals den der
Robertson'schen Trennung von ciliata und californica. Von
Kirchenpauer als Lepralia regularis - determiniertes ,,Gazellef-
Material von Dirk Hartog (Studer 1889, p. 184) stimmt mit d'Or-
bigny”s Abbildung auffallend iiberein. Uber dieses bei genau-
erem Studium australischer Formen noch zu erårternde Material
108
sei einstweilen nur gesagt, dass seine runderen und breiteren Avi-
cularien und die einheitliche, den Compensations-Porus verbergende
Punktierung des Frontwalles es als etwas Besonderes erscheinen
lassen.
Die vorliegenden, kråftig entwickelten Zoarien gehåren der wie
die form. typ. cosmopolitischen f. personata an, bei der die Unter-
lippe durch die Kalklamina des Endo-Ooeciums verstårkt wird,
wodurch rings um das Orificium herum ein måchtiges Collare ent-
steht. Der Ascoporus liegt in den untersuchten Kolonieen ausser-
halb dieses Kragens. Die Skulptur der Endo-Ooecien besteht aus-
ser der in regelmåssiger Weise ausgebildeten Granulierung in einer
dichten, ziemlich grossporigen Punktierung ; einzelne Poren treten
auch auf der Frontalwandung auf.
11.… Microporella malusii (Aud.).
(Pl. V, Fig. 8).
1839; 46. Escharina cornuta (D'Orbigny in: Voy.-Amér. mér., p. 13—14;
ÆSKE SET 6)
1904. .Microporella Malusii (Aud.) (Waters in: Bryoz. Belg., p. 42—
43 t. 3 f. 4a—d).
Fundnotiz: Auckland Isl., Port Ross, ca. 10 Fd. 2/1, 1914.
Campbell! Isl., Perseverance Harbour 10—20 Fd. ?/12 1914.
Diagnose und Abbildung bei dOrbigny lassen trotz Waters”
Befund (1905, p. 9) nicht den geringsten Zweifel an der Zugeh&-
rigkeit seines Materials zu M. malusii. Schwierig ist dagegen die
Abgrenzung der Art gegeniber M. parvipora Waters (1. c. p. 43),
die durch kleinere Zooecien, Orificien und Poren, sowie dadurch
unterschieden sein soll, dass bei ihr nicht sternfårmige, sondern
einfache Poren auftreten. Waters (1906, p. 17) erwåhnt M. parvi-
pora von den Chatham Ins. mit Poren, die in kleinen, allerdings
in der Mitte noch nicht zusammenstossenden Zåhnchen den Beginn
der sternformigen Porenstruktur andeuten. Die beigefiigte Abbil-
dung von Ancestrula und jungen Zooecien (Pl. V, Fig. 8) zeigt,
dass die marginalen und suborificialen Poren Bildungen sind, deren
Auftreten vom Alter der Kolonieen abhångt. Wo sie bei jungen
Zooecien iiberhaupt vorkommen, sind vielfach die zur Bildung der
sternformigen Zeichnung fiihrenden Zåhnchen noch nicht entwickelt,
erwachsene Kolonieen beweisen jedoch mit wohlentwickelten Stern-
109
poren die Zugehårigkeit des Materials zu malusii. Da aber Cal-
vet (1909, p. 22) die M. parvipora als eigene Art mitteilt, und M.
malusii aus dem Siidpolargebiet bisher noch nicht bekannt gewor-
den ist, so mag die Entscheidung uber die Beziehungen der beiden
Arten einstweilen noch dahingestellt bleiben; im allgemeinen aber
kann ich Waters nicht zustimmen, wenn er sagt, bei den gemei-
nen Arten M. ciliata und malusii håtten die Autoren zu weitgehend
Varietåten auf Formen gegriindet, deren Unterscheidungsmerkmale
bei anderen Gattungen zur Charakterisierung besonderer Arten fir
ausreichend gehalten worden wåren. Diese weit verbreiteten Arten
sind einer erheblichen Variabilitåt unterworfen, die weder geogra-
phisch noch morphologisch scharf zu umschreiben ist, und bei
denen deshalb der natirliche Zusammenhang systematischer Unter-
ordnung der gleichfårmig trennenden Nebenordnung vorzuziehen
ist. Auch im vorliegenden Material tritt die Linie auf, welche eine
frontale Area abgrenzt, auf der die Poren liegen; ich måchte sie
fir den Umriss des distal herzformig ausgeschnittenen Compensa-
tions-Sackes (Harmer 1902, t. 18 f. 63) halten, der in Jullien's
sonst guten, anatomischen Abbildungen fehlte (1888, t. 15 f. 1—3).
Die Balken-artige Ausbildung des verkalkten Ekto-Ooecienrandes,
das Fehlen von Deckmembran und Avicularien veranlassten die
moderne Trennung der Art vom Gen. Microporella (cf. Nordgaard
FOTSp: 60).
Mit Ausnahme der Antarktis aus allen Meeren mitgeteilt.
12. Porella margaritifera (Q. G.).
(Textfig. 6, a—b).
1824. Flustra margaritifera (Quoy & Gaimard) Voy. Uran. Phys., p. 606
i 925F 7558)
1854. Lepralia margaritifera (Busk in: Br. Mus. Cat., p. 72't. 101 f.
S=—0)
1879. Lepralia margaritifera (Busk in: Kerg. Polyz., p. 195—196.)
1884. Lepralia margaritifera Q. G. (Busk in: Chall. Rep., p. 145).
1888. Lepralia margaritifera Q. G. (Jullien: Miss. Sc. Cap Horn,
p:58—59' f.-9 f. 1).
1889. Lepralia margaritifera Q. G. (Waters in: Suppl. Chall. Rep.,
PpE20 SEES 16)
1889. Lepralia margaritifera Lmx. (Studer in: ,,Gazellef Ber., p. 157).
1909. Porella margaritifera Q. G. (Levinsen in: Morph. Stud. Cheil,
PS37--38 Mt MSF Sa)
DO)
Fundnotiz: Auckland Isl., Port Ross, ca. 10. Fd. %/11 1914;
ibid:, Carnley Harbour, 45 Fd. &/12 1914. Campbell Isl., Perse-
verance Harbour, 10—20 Fd. ”/12 1914.
Fig. 6. Porella margaritifera (Q. G.). a. Avicularmandibel, 1%/1. b. Operculum in
situ: 1. Chitinleiste mit anhaftender Muskulatur ; 0. orale Driisse; cs. Umriss
des Compensationssackes ; t. Tentakelkranz, eingezogen. 7?05/,
In Ergånzung der ausfihrlichen Beschreibung Levinsen's ist
nur auf das sichere Vorhandensein eines membranåsen Ekto-Ooe-
ciums hinzuweisen, das im entkalkten Pråparat in deutlichem Um-
riss kreisrund distal vom Orificium zu erkennen ist; schwerer da-
gegen ist die Darstellung des hyalinen und mit Ausnahme einer
schwachen Marginalleiste gånzlich håutigen, eng an die Offnung
des Compensations-Sackes sich anschliessenden Operculums (Text-
ie 6)
Alle von der Art bekannt gewordenen Fundorte liegen im Ge-
biet der Subantarktis: Kerguelen, Swain's Bay (Busk); Neusee-
land, Foveaux Strasse (Levinsen); Feuerland (Busk); ibid., Hoste
uInsel: "Orange Bai (Jullien): "Chalk Stat FS TS ate ORESE
Long. 57" 50” W. [åstl. Falkland Inseln], 12 Fd, (Busk); Falk-
land Inseln (Quoy & Gaimard).
13... Smittina cinctipora (Hincks).
(Pl. V, Fig. 9a—b, Textfig. 7, 7a).
1883. Schizoporella cinctipora (Hincks in: Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 5 v.
lip 2003703)
1898. Schizoporella cinctipora, Hincks (Hamilton in: Tr. P, New
Zeal. Inst. v. 30, p. 196).
1904. Schizoporella cinctipora, Hincks (Hutton in: Ind. Faun. Nov-
Zeal., p. 298).
111
Fundnotiz: Auckland Isl., Port Ross, ca. 10 Fd., %/11 1914;
ibid., Carnley Harbour, 45 Fd. f/128 1914. Campbell Isl., Perseve-
sancet Harbour: 10720" ea 20 Ed 2 0 0/12 1974.
Nicht ohne Bedenken identificiere ich die in reichem Material
vorliegende Form mit der seit Hincks' Darstellung nur noch ein-
mal in der Literatur besprochenen Art (cf. Waters in: Qu. J.
Geol Soc" v- 43; p:/67 t. 8-£-287 'Sch' 'Cinctip. var. personatd):' Die
Hincks'sche, der Ooecien entbehrende Abbildung liess Uberein-
stimmung in Form des Orificiums, Lage und Gestalt der Avicu-
larien und Frontalskulptur erkennen. Waters bildet (1. c.) Avicu-
larien mit spitzigen Mandibeln ab, die von der Hincks'schen Zeich-
nung, wie von dem vorliegenden Material durchaus abweichen.
Levinsen (Morph. Stud., p. 6) glaubt aus der Originalabbildung
ersehen zu miissen, dass der Frontalwall aus dicht an einander lie-
genden Kalkplatten besteht, in deren Mitte sich je ein Porus be-
findet; nach dem gegliihten Pråparat zu urteilen, kommt die ,,Re-
ticulation" jedoch lediglich durch die aufliegende Epithek zu Stande.
Hincks hat anscheinend nach- getrocknetem Material gezeichnet,
bei welchem, so wie er das beschreibt, tatsåchlich die getrocknete
Epithek Falten bildet, die wie beleuchtetes Glas glånzen. Nach
der Schårfe der Zellgrenzen, die in den centralen Partien der
Frontalansicht viel weniger hervortreten, ist seine Zeichnung ausser-
dem von der Randpartie eines Zoariums genommen. Die Gestalt
des sekundåren Orificiums ist bei alten und jungen Zooecien ziem-
lich konstant und annåhernd rechteckig, meist långer als breit, aber
auch fast quadratisch. Von
dennurbeijungen,am freien & &
Wachstumsrande der Kolo-
nieen befindlichen Zooecien
auftretenden bis zu 5 Sta-
cheln erhalten sich am
långsten 2 kurze Zapfen. a.
Den Unterrand der Miin- Fig. 7. Smittina cinctipora (Hcks.). a. Opercu-
lum mit den Ansatzstellen der Stacheln ; b. Avi-
cularmandibel. + 19/1,
dung umsåumt ein breites,
glattes, an Hippoporina per-
tusa (Esper) erinnerndes Kalkband; diesem liegt in der Mitte die
in proximaler Richtung noch weit hinabreichende Avicularkammer
auf. Wie ein Schloss hångt das runde Avicular unter dem Orifi-
112
cium, Hincks nennt seine Lage seitlich, bildet es aber annåhernd
central gelegen ab. Gegliihte Zooecien (Pl. V, Fig. 9a) åhneln in
der Orificialpartie einer fir die Gtg. Smittina so charakteristischen
Abbildung wie der von Sm. landsborovii f. personata im Chall. Rep.
t. 19 f. 17a. Die Hånge-Zåhne am primåren Orificium, das cen-
tralgelegene Avicular, und die Ooecien-Charaktere wurden als aus-
schlaggebend fir die Einordnung der Art in das Genus Smittina
angesehen, die starke Entwicklung des Peristoms und die einpori-
gen Rosettenplatten unterstitzten als Hilfscharaktere diese syste-
matische Bewertung. Das Operculum (Textfig. 7a) entspricht zwar
als schwach chitinisiert dem meist bei Smittina gefundenen Typus,
weicht aber insofern von diesem ab, als es relativ leicht vom
Compensations-Sack sich låsen låsst. Endo- und Ekto-Ooecium
sind kalkig, die einzelstehenden Poren annåhernd kreisrund und
nach Zahl und Lage variabel. Die Ovicellen sind, wie Hincks
sagt, meist breiter als lang und gelegentlich halb eingesenkt, in-
dem die glatte Kalkumwallung des sekundåren oder superficiellen
Orificiums die lateralen Partieen des Ooeciums iiberdeckt. Eine
derartige Bildung wåre mit der gleichfalls vom Peristom ausge-
henden ooecialen Bedeckung bei Discopora sarsi zu vergleichen (cf.
Levinsen, l.c. p. 64—65 t. 24 f.2a). Die in die Breite gehende Form
der QOoecien mag die Entstehung von Doppelooecien (Pl. V, Fig. 9)
begiinstigen, die in dem einen der hier untersuchten Zoarien sie-
benmal vorkommen. Entsprechend der durch Levinsen bekannt
gewordenen Tatsache, dass die Ooecienwandung vom Frontalwall
des distalen Zooeciums gebildet wird, trennt diese Doppelooecien
jedesmal die Zellgrenze der beiden dariiber liegenden Zellen. Ekto-
und Endo-Ooecium sind beiderseits normal entwickelt, immer aber
kommt nur ein Embryo in einer Ovicelle vor, da er ja von dem
einen, proximal gelegenen Zooecium stammt. Die Riickwand (PI.
V, Fig. 9b) ist runzelig, durchsichtiger als die Vorderwand, und die
Zellgrenzen treten hier nicht nur marginal, sondern durchweg deut-
lich auf. Sie lassen eine reihenformige Anordnung der Zellen' er-
kennen, die allerdings bei der meist irregulåren 6-Ecken angenåh-
erten Gestalt der Zooecien frontal oft stark verwischt ist. Die
oralen Drisen sind deutlich entwickelt.
Als Fundorte sind Neuseeland (Hincks) und ibid., Napier,
Wanganui, Foveaux Str. (Hamilton) angegeben worden.
BES
14. Lagenipora costazii (Aud.) var. spatula (McG.).
(Textiig. 8a—-c).
1885. :Cellepora costazii Audouin (P. H. MacGillivray in: Tr. P.
R: Soc: Victoria v. 21, pxT14"t. 3 F. 3—D)).
1887. Cellepora costazei, var. (Audouin) P. H. MacGillivray in: Prodr.
FatmAvVictdecæls; pils it HAS ES 6:
1909 Lagenipora costazii (Audouin), var. spathulata, MacGillivray
AWaferssinmsefournsbinnssocsvrs ks pÆæLsoy
Fundnotiz: Auckland Isl., Carnley Harbour, ca. 45 Fd. ?/12 1914.
Von der typischen Art ist die in mehreren kugeligen Zoarien
vorliegende Form deutlich verschieden, wie das schon Waters
(Bryoz. Cap Horn, p. 241) fir die MacGillivray'sche Art fest-
gestellt hatte. Im untersuchten Material habe ich die kleinen orifi-
a. b- €:
Fig. 8. Lagenipora costazii (Aud.), var. spatula (McG.). a. Operculum; b. Mandibel
des selbstståndigen Aviculars: c. Mandibel des zooecialen Aviculars.
a—Db. 5/7. —e… 30014,
cialen Avicularien niemals paarweise, sondern immer einzeln und
central gelegen angetroffen. Sie sitzen entweder einem kurzen, zapf-
enartigen Vorsprung auf, oder håufiger auf der Internseite eines
hochgereckten Fortsatzes, an dessen Spitze. Ich verstehe nicht,
wiesolWaters”die"Existenz eines ,Mucro in den MacGilti-
vray'schen Abbildungen bestreitet, Figur 6b zeigt die kurzen,
buckelartigen Erhebungen des Frontalwalles ganz deutlich in ihrer
suborificialen und centralen auch im vorliegenden Material ganz
allgemein zu beobachtenden Lage. Die Chitinteile der Form (Textfig.
8a—c) entsprechen denen der typischen costazii.… Ob Cellepora
agglutinans und ampliata (Hutton in Cat. Mar. Moll. 1873, p.99)
selbstståndige Arten sind, geht aus den Diagnosen nicht hervor; da
die Mundåffnung als fast kreisformig angegeben und ein Sinus nicht
erwåhnt wird, måchte man sie fir Holoporellidae halten.
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 73. 8
114
Port Phillip (MacGillivray) und Sues (Waters) sind die
fir var. spatula angegebenen Fundorte.
15... Lagenipora costata (McG.).
(Textfig. $9a—c).
1868. Cellepora costata (P. H. MacGillivray in: Tr. P. R. Soc. v.9,
DEISORU Sp LÆ N)):
1887. Cellepora costata (P. H. MacGillivray in: Prodr. Faun. Vict.
dec. 15, p. 183—84 t. 148 f. 2, 2a).
1887. Cellepora costata (Waters in: Qu. J. Geol. Soc. v. 43, p. 68 69).
1889. Cellepora costata (Jelly in: Syn. Cat., p 49) [dort weitere Sy-
nonymie].
1889 "Sehismopora costata (PH MacGilliyraytinklree KÆR:
Soc. South Austr. v. 12, p. 29).
1912. Cellepora costata McG. (Thornely in: Trans. Linn. Soc. ser.
DRS 154)
a. b. Cc:
Fig. 9. Lagenipora costata (McG.). a. Operculum; b. Mandibel des selbstståndigen
Aviculars; c. Mandibel des zooecialen Aviculars. a—b. 13591, c. 205/1,
Fundnotiz: Auckland Isl., Port Ross 25/11 1914.
Die Art hat, im Gegensatz zur vorigen, die beiden das Orifi-
cium flankierenden Fortsåtze, sie unterscheidet sich von ihr aus-
serdem durch die Form des Operculums und die allerdings nur
bei einzelnen hochgereckten Zooecien zu beobachtenden Kannelie-
rungen. Die in meiner Bearbeitung der Schwed. Juan Fernandez-Ex-
pedition abgebildete L. rota (McG.) hat gleichfalls ein anderes Oper-
culum und andere Mandibeln der selbstståndigen Avicularien. Durch
dieses letzte Merkmal ist jene sonst der L. costazii sehr nahestehende
Art auch wieder von dieser zu unterscheiden.
Fir die vorliegende Art werden folgende Fundorte angegeben:
Sidaustralien: Port Phillip, Wilson's Vorgebirge, Warrnambool, Port-
115
land (MacG.); Ind. Ocean: Saya de Malha, 125—145 Fd.; Pro-
videncer 50 Fd:; "Amiranten, 35 "Ed: FSeychellenn "34" Fds; "Carga-
dos 29—30 Fd. (Thorn.). Nach Waters, der C. retusa var. cami-
nata (Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 5 v. 3, p. 194—95 t. 13 f. 1) fir identisch
mit der vorliegenden Species hålt, wåre noch ,,Golf v. Neapelf hin-
zuzuftgen, mir erscheint jedoch die Zusammengehårigkeit jener Form
mit L. costata bei dem Fehlen der Abbildung der Chitinteile noch
nicht einwandfrei gesichert.
Cyclostomata.
1.… Berenicea sarniensis (Norman).
(Pl. V, fig. 10).
1915. Berenicea sarniensis Norman (Harmer in: Sibog. Polyz. I, p.
114—15 t. 11 f. 4—5) [Synonymie siehe dort!].
Fundnotiz: Campbell Isl., Perseverance Harbour 10—20 Fd.
18 1914.
Nur mit gewissen Zweifeln stelle ich das eine der drei vor-
liegenden Zoarien zu der bei Harmer ausfihrlich behandelten
Species; die Zugehårigkeit der anderen ist sicher. Die Randpartie
ist sehr schmal, eigentlich iberhaupt kaum gegen die Mitte abge-
setzt, und verschlossene Zooecien habe ich nur wenige gefunden
(in der Abbildung [Pl]. V, Fig. 10] aus allen Kolonien kombiniert!).
Ooecien fehlen durchweg. Der MacGillivray'schen Bemerkung
(Prod. Faun. Vict., dec. 15 p. 181), die frei erhobenen Zooecien stån-
den besonders gegen den Rand hin, muss ich widersprechen. Das.
eine Stomatcpora-artig gewachsene, sehr junge Zoarium zeigt die
Zooecien in weiter Ausdehnung frei, bei dem anderen, etwas ålte-
ren, ragt nur ein Drittel von ihnen hervor, bei diesem ist auch
der Rand etwas breiter.
Die europåisch-subarktischen Kiisten, der Atlantic, das Mittel-
meer, der dstl. Indic bis Japan, Sidaustralien, Neuseeland (Waters,
Hutton, Hamilton) und die Kånigin Charlotte Inseln sind die
bisher festgestellten Fundgebiete der Art.
Ctenostomata.
1.… Alcyonidium polyoum (Hassall).
1915. Alcyonidium polyoum (Hass.) (Harmer in: Sibog. Polyz. I, p. 37
38 t. 3 f. 1) [(Synonymie siehe dort!).
8%
116
Fundnotiz: Campbell Isl., Perseverance Harbour auf Mytilus,
9/18 1914.
Ich glaube nicht, dass Silbermann (Arch. Naturg. v. 721, p. 266)
berechtigt ist, in den vielen Erhebungen der Oberflåche des Zoa-
riums ein die vorliegende Art von 4. mytili spezifisch trennendes
Merkmal zu sehen. Ganz zarte Uberzige aus der Nordsee [Berl.
Mus. Kat. Nr. 154], die von Kirchenpauer als 4. polyoum (Hass.)
determiniert und von Kluge revidiert worden sind, zeigen diese
Erhebungen keineswegs, auch auf Harmer's Abbildung ist nichts
von ihnen zu sehen. Abgesehea von den durchweg ausgebildeten
Urificialpapillen sind auch im vorliegenden Material an freien Wachs-
tumsråndern der Kolonieen keine weiteren Erhebungen entwickelt,
sie finden sich dagegen in den zentralen, ålteren Partien der grosse,
gelblich-grauweisse, filzige Uberzige bildenden Zoarien.
Nimmt man die fir 4. mytili angegebenen Fundorte mit dazu,
so ergibt sich eine Verbreitung in allen Zonen, mit Ausnahme der
Antarktis (s. str.), von der die Art noch fehlt.
2. Triticella periphanta spec. nov.
(Pl. V. Fig. 11, Textfig. 10).
Fundnotiz: Auckland Isl., Nord Arm des Carnley Harbour,
SS Je PYnr IOMN ER
Die Art steht habituell der Tr. pedicellata nahe, sie unterschei-
det sich von ihr durch gråssere und regelmåssigere Zooecien, viel
långere Stiele,. -Tentakel ohne Cilien und die ganz durchsichtige
Beschaffenheit des Cystids, der eine Apertur nur undeutlich er-
kennen låsst. — Der Stolo ist zart, wie bei den ibrigen Arten
der Gtg., auch der Ansatz' der bald seitlich, bald auf ihm ent-
springenden Stiele zeigt nichts Besonderes. Diese Stiele, die aller-
dings auch bei pedicellata gelegentlich långer werden (Nordgaard
1918, p. 15) zeigen hier eine ganz auffallende Långe, im Durch-
schnitt sind sie viermal, werden aber auch sechsmal so lang wie
die Zooecien. Letztere sind, wie sonst in der Gtg., stark lateral
abgeflacht, das Orificium ist halbkreisfårmig, wobei der gerade Rand
der Ventralseite angehårt. Im ibrigen sind Dorsal- und Ventral-
seite bei ausgewachsenen, grossen Zooecien kaum zu unterscheiden:
die Rickenwålbung ist bei ihnen kaum merklich, sodass. die Zelle
einen ganz regelmåssigen Umriss besitzt (PIL. V, Fig. 11). Bei jin-
ins
geren Zooecien sind die Unterschiede stårker ausgeprågt, bei ihnen
tritt die typische, kahnfårmige Gestalt besser hervor. Nur bei die-
sen ist auch die håutige Apertur, die fast die ganze Ventralseite
einnimmt, deutlich zu erkennen, sonst markiert " Fr SR
sie sich infolge der glashell durchsichtigen Be- i
schaffenheit von Ekto- und Endocyste nur durch
einen feinen, gegen die ibrigen Partieen abge-
setzten Streifen. Ein Frenaculum fehlt. Der
Polypid ist bei einer derartigen Durchsichtig-
keit nicht weniger deutlich zu erkennen als
bei der von Beneden ausfihrlich geschilder-
ten Farella repens und stimmt auch mit der
Anatomie dieser Form in allem Wesentlichen,
uberein. So sind Ovarium und Hoden nach
Lage und Aussehen dieselben wie dort, ob
allerdings die befruchteten Eier in gieicher
Weise aus dem Zooecium ausgestossen werden,
kann ich nicht sicher entscheiden. Die wenigen
mir vorliegenden Zooecien mit ausgestiilpter SAR BERIGE FEER
Tentakelscheide waren nicht reif, in Zellen mit sein Substrat gewunden,
eingezogenen Tentakeln deutet allerdings das de NM
Emporriicken der befruchteten Eier an die dis- oeciums mit deutlicher
tale, spåter also proximale Tentakelpartie (cf. SD RER EO RE
vanebleneden tre NA) Feinefentsprechende
Art des Freiwerdens der Eier an. Wie bei jener Form wird auch
hier der Verdauungstraktus nicht bis auf den Boden der Zelle zu-
ruckgezogen, die Anordnung der Muskulatur ist gleichfalls die-
selbe. Im Bereich des zwischen Stiel und Zellbasis befindlichen
Gelenkes tritt Muskulatur, vermutlich die selbstståndige Bewegung
des Zooeciums vermittelnd, vom Stiel in die Zelle ein; das Ge-
lenk selber ist etwas anders als bei von mir fir 77. pedicellata ge-
haltenem Material aus Yokohama [Berl. Mus. Kat. Nr. 956]. Dort
ist ringformig eine knotenartige Verdickung ausgebildet, auch sind
die Zooecien leichter von den Stielen zu trennen als hier, wo
von einer Einschnirung des Stieles kurz vor der Zellbasis abge-
sehen, ein glatter Ubergang stattfindet. Die Tentakel zeigen innen
einen schmalen Kanal und sind nicht mit Cilien versehen, ihre
Zahl betrågt durchschnittlich 12, doch sah ich junge, in Regenera-
118
tion begriffene Polypide mit 8 und vereinzelt ausgewachsene mit 15
Tentakeln. Gegeniber 0,855 mm, die Hincks fir pedicellata angibt,
betrågt die Durchschnittsgråsse der neuen Art 1—1,2 mm., die
Breite 0,4 mm. Die Art bildete dichte Rasen von fleischroter Farbe
auf Muschelschalen und Steinen gemeinsam mit Pedicellina cernua
(Pall ).
2. Valkeria uva (L.) var. tuberosa (Heller).
1915. Valkeria tuberosa Heller (Harmer in: Sibog. Polyz. I, p. 76—
78 t. 6 f. 13—20) [Synonymie siehe dort!).
1920. Valkeria uva (L.) var. tuberosa (Heller) (Marcus in: S. B. Ges.
Freunde Berlin 1920, p. 103).
Fundnotiz: Campbell Isl., Perseverance Harbour ”/12 1914.
Dichter Bewuchs mikroskopischer Algen beeintråchtigt die Deut-
lichkeit der angefertigten Pråparate, gleichwohl sind die typischen
Anhåufungen der kurzen und breiten Zellen sowie von der Unterseite
die Verzweigungen eines solchen Biindels zu erkennen. Weitere
aus Harmer's Diagnose am vorliegenden Material hervortretende
Charaktere sind die chitinige, bråunlichgelbe Verdickung des hier
dicht in die Skulptur einer Mytiliden-Schale geschmiegten Stolo in
ålteren Kolonieteilen und die nicht seltene Ausstiilpung der Ten-
takelscheide (Kamptoderm) gerade in degenerierenden Zooecien.
Verbreitungsangaben finden sich in meiner oben zitierten Ar-
beit, wo auch die hier befolgte Schreibweise motiviert wird, das
Verbreitungsbild bleibt noch unklar.
Entoprocta.
1.… Pedicellina cernua (Pall.).
(Textfig. 11).
(778... Brachionus cernuus (Pallas in: Naturg. merkw. Thiere Sammlg.
FOF HÆSTEHSARESTO)
1880. Pedicellina cernua, Pallas (Hincks in: Brit. Mar. Pol. p:565
OTIS OMMIRSOFE SEES
1887. Pedicellina echinata Sars (Harmer in: Qu. J. micr. Sc. n. ser.
VTR DN ASO 2032] PANTER GO]
1889. Pedecellina cernua, Pallas (Jelly in:-Syn. Cat., p. 202—03).
1890. Pedicellina echinata M. Sars (Ehlers in: Beitr. z. Kenntn. d.
Pedicells pll)
1894. Pedicellina cernua Pall. (Levinsen in: Mosdyr, p. 96 t. 9 f
18-—29).
1900.
1902.
1903.
1912.
1918.
1918.
119
Pedicellina echinata M. Sars (Robertson in: Proc. Calif. Ac. 3.
serv EDER)
Pedicellina cernua (Pallas) (Calvet in: Bryoz. Mar. Rég. Cette,
p. 94).
Pedicellina cernua (Pallas) (Jullien & Calvet in: Bryoz. ,,Hi-
rondellef sp" 25)
Pedicellina cernua (Pallas) (Osburn in: Bull. Bur. Fish. v. 30
MONO) SPSPTSEKET SE FSI ST
Pedicellina cernua (Pallas), Smitt (Waters in: J. Linn. Soc-
London v. 34, p. 43).
Pedicellina cernua Pallas (Nordgaard in: Troms. Mus. Aarsh.
40 (1917) nr. 1, p. 10).
Fundnotiz: Auckland Isl., Nord Arm des Carnley Harbour,
35R Ed 29/1 1914.
Mit
europåischem Material (Fundort:
Helgoland, Berl. Mus. Kat. Nr. 537) vergli-
chen Zzeigte das vorliegende fast vållige Uber-
einstimmung, nur den Stiel fand ich breiter
michtkabertkaueht kurzer wie ibn kirke
patrick von Port Phillip-Stiicken mitteilt
(Ann N ar bEl str serv 2 pE). TOP:
hirsuia (Jullien 1888, p. 13) ist nirgends
abgebildet,') scheint aber einmal durch die
grossere Anzahl der Tentakel und dann durch
kråftigere Bedornung verschieden zu sein
(Waters in: Proc. Zool. Soc. 1914, p. 854
—55); P. spinosa Robertson (1. c. p. 324 t. 16
f. 1—12) ist gleichfalls stårker und ausser-
dem einseitig bedornt, sowohl am Stiel wie
am Kelch. Was die Continuitåt der Stiel-
muskulatur durch das Septum hindurch in J i >
die Ventralseite des Kelches hinein anlangt, Bø
so ist derartiges fir mehr oder minder zahl- FE SEAN
reiche Muskelfasern auch in dem vorlie- Ba > SR
genden Material zu beobachten (Textf. 11),
ich glaube daher nicht, dass die Gtg. Myo- Fig. 11. Pedicellina cernua
soma Roberts. beibehalten werden kann.
(Bal E 50/72
1) Durch die Freundlichkeit von Herrn A.W. Waters, F.L. S., F.G.S.
lernte ich inzwischen seine Beschreibung und Abbildung von P. hirsuta
Jull. kennen und verweise daher auf: Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 9 v. 2, p. 96.
120
Die Verbreitung der Art ist als iber die Arktis, beide Kisten
der atlantischen Subarktis, das westliche und dåstliche Mittelmeer,
die Canaren und Capverden, die trop. Ostkiiste des atlant. Oceans
(Golf v. Guinea, Senegambien), Sidaustralien und die amerikanische
Westkiiste (Kånigin Charlotte-Inseln, Californien) ausgedehnt bisher
mitgeteilt worden.
2... Barentsia discreta (Busk).
1915. Barentsia discreta Busk (Harmer in: Sibog. Polyz. I, p. 29—32
t.2 f. 8—9) [Synonymie siehe dort!].
1918. Barentsia discreta (Busk), Kirkp. (Waters in: J. Linn. Soc. Lon-
v. 34, p. 42).
Fundnotiz: Campbell Isl., Perseverance Harbour, 10—20
Fl 2i3 ru ?/18: 1914 .
Material in typischer Ausbildung; der Stiel ist ungegliedert,
håufig sind dagegen die in Entwicklung begriffenen Knoten (Har-
mer, f. 9). Die von Harmer wohl mit Recht als Reste von Dor- "
nen bezeichneten, trichterformigen und unregelmåssig gruppierten
Poren sind zur Identificierung der Species wertvoll (cf. Osburn
1914, t. 18 f. 5a), dagegen variiert nach Waters (1904, p. 100)
der Modus der Verbindung zwischen Stiel und Kelch. Im vorlie-
genden Material tritt durchweg das spiralig geringelte, bewegliche
Gliedstick der Originaldiagnose (Busk 1886, t. 10 f. 12) auf.
Nach der Harmer'schen Zusammenstellung ist das Vorkommen
der Art im westlichen subarktischen bis tropischen und im siidl.
gemåssigten Atlantischen Ocean, im Indic bis Japan und im magel-
haensischen Gebiet (Jullien, Waters). festgestellt; Einzelheiten
berHwiterst(lmce!
Tafel-Erklårung.
Taf. V.
Fig 1. Caberea darwinii Busk Stiick eines Zoariums des schwach ver-
kalkten ,,Challengerf-Typus. -Vergr. 88/1,
UNE g £ Stark verkalkter , patagonicaf-Typus (Juan Fer-
nandez). Vergr. 88/1.
%
bo]
9a.
9b.
10.
HT:
121
Foraminella lepida (Hcks.). Zoarium, Vorderseite. Vergr. ””/1.
Zooecium mit Endo-Ooecium, gegliiht.
Vergr. &/1.
5 å Rickseite mit den Porenkammern. Ver-
RAD
Hippothoa hyalina (L.). Stick mit starken Fortsåtzen der Poren-
kammern (Haiti, Riks-Mus. Stockh.). Vergr. %%/1.
Escharoides praestans (Hcks.). 2 Zooecien mit QOoecien, gegluht.
% ”
Vergr. 28/1.
Exochella zelanica Lev. Zoarium, Vorderseite. Vergr. %/1.
ER 3 Rickseite mit den geristartigen Zellråndern.
Vereri22/1:
Schizoporella vitrea (McG.). Zoarium, Vorderseite. Vergr /1.
E , Isoliertes Zooecium, gegliht. Vergr. "1.
Schizoporella microrhyncha spec. nov. Zoarium, Vorderseite. Ver-
re
Microporella malusii (Aud.). Ancestrula mit jungen Zooecien. Ver-
gr EGE
Smittina cinctipora (Hcks). Zoarium m. Doppel Ooecium, Vorder-
selterhversre5 re
5 bå Zooecien mit den halb eingesenkten
Ooecien, eins (aufgebrochen) zeigt das
kalkige Ekto- und Endo-Ooecium, ge-
gliiht. Vergr. 8/1.
i; SS Ruckseite. Vergr. %%/1.
Berenicea sarniensis (Norm.). Habitusbild der Vorderseite. Vergr. ”/1.
Triticella periphanta spec. nov. Kelch und distale Stielpartie eines
ausgewachsenen Zooeciums. Vergr. ""/1.
281192]
len mee
Papers from Dr. Th. Mortensen's Pacific Expedition
1914—16.
VII.
Die Tornarien-Sammlung von Dr. Th. Mortensen.
Von
Dr. Gustav Stiasny, Leiden.
(Mit 9 Textfiguren).
Unter diesem Titel måchte ich hier in Kirze iber einige Tor-
narien berichten, die zumeist von Dr. Th. Mortensen auf seinen
grossen Reisen gesammelt und deren Bearbeitung mir iubertragen
wurde. Es handelt sich dabei um finferlei verschiedene Tornarien
von sehr entfernten Fundorten, von denen insgesammt iiber 60
Exemplare in verschiedenen Entwicklungsstadien vorliegen. Davon
erwies sich eine, die ich nach meinem verehrten Freunde benannt
habe, als neu (T. Mortenseni), die iubrigen sind, soweit sie mit
Sicherheit bestimmbar sind, zwar nicht neu, doch sind sie z. T.
interessant wegen ihres Fundortes (T. Tabogae, Grenacheri, Miilleri),
oder weil davon hier bisher noch nicht beschriebene Entwicklungs-
stadien vorliegen (T. Bournei von Plymouth). Bei den folgenden
Besprechungen wurden, wie bei meiner Beschreibung der Tornaria
Sunieri (18), dem Vorgange Spengel's (12) folgend, hauptsåchlich
»die fir die einzelnen Species charakteristischen Merkmale fest-
gelegtf. Auf eingehendere Untersuchung und Beschreibung musste
verzichtet werden, da aus verschiedenen Griinden Schnittpråparate
nicht angefertigt werden konnten. Es konnte daher die innere Or-
ganisation nur, soweit sie an Totalpråparaten erkennbar, untersucht
werden. Die -Abweichungen derselben vom normalen Verhalten
werden bei den einzelnen Formen erwåhnt. — Herrn Dr. Th. Mor-
tensen sage ich auch an dieser Stelle meinen besten Dank fir
die Uberlassung des interessanten Materiales zur Bearbeitung.
124
Die Tornarien-Sammlung Dr. Mortensen's umfasst folgende
Formen:
Tornaria Mortenseni nov. spec. von Misaki (Japan).
Tornaria Bournei (nom. nov.) von Plymouth.
Tornaria Miilleri und Krohnii von Plymouth.
Tornaria Tabogae nov. spec.? von Taboga (Panama).
Dazu kommt noch die von H, Koch gesammelte
Tornaria Grenacheri aus dem Siidatlantic.
1.… Tornaria Mortenseni nov. spec.
(Textfig. 1—5).
5 Exemplare in verschiedenen Entwicklungsstadien. Misaki, ”/1 1914.
Nr. 41. i
Alle finf Stadien dieser tentakellosen Form gehåren der pro-
gressiven Entwicklung (15, 16) an.
Stadium 1. (Textfig. 1, Seitenansicht). Dieses jiingste Sta-
dium von ca. ”/4 mm Hohe. entspricht etwa dem von Heider
(in 3, fig. 13) oder von mir (15, Taf. V, fig. 17) abgebildeten Ent-
wicklungsstadium von Balanoglossus clavigerus. Es ist etwas schlan-
ker, der Kårper mehr walzenfårmig. Longitudinaler und circulårer
Wimperkranz bereits angelegt. Der circulåre Wimperkranz nicht
breiter als der longitudinale, der bereits beginnende Lobenbildung
zeigt. Im Inneren der 3-teillige Darm und der Wassersack mit
Porus. Im Blastocoel noch .zahlreiche kleine Mesenchymzellen ver-
streut. Scheitelplatte und Verhalten der Wimperkrånze wie bei dem
erwåhnten Stadium von Balanoglossus clavigerus. Augen nicht mit
Sicherheit feststelibar. :
Stadium 2. (Textfig. 2, Seitenansicht). Etwas gråsser als
das vorhergehende, nicht ganz I mm hoch, ca. ”/4 mm breit.
Die Larve ist etwas gedrungener. Lobenbildung des longitudinalen
Wimperbandes bereits viel stårker. Der secundåre (anale) Wimper-
kranz bereits angelegt.
Stadium 3. (Texifig. 3, Seitenansicht), 1 mm hoch, ca. '/» mm
breit, zeigt die fir diese Form anscheinend charakteristische
Walzenform des Kårpers recht deutlich. Wieder ist die Loben-
bildung stårker. Hier treten auch schon die bei dem folgenden
Stadium noch deutlicher ausgebildeten tiefen Dorsalloben hervor.
An Stelle,, wo sonst ein Laterallobus zu finden ist, ist hier ein
,
125
kleiner Sattel zu sehen. Oralfeld breit. Ventralsattel nicht hoch.
Von der inneren Organisation sei hier nur der kugelige Mitteldarm
erwåhnt.
Von diesem Stadium liegt noch ein zweites, ganz analoges,
jedoch im Totalpråparat nicht sehr ginstig liegendes Exemplar vor.
Stadium 4. (Textfig. 4, Ventralansicht). . Dies ist das ålteste
Stadium, das etwa einem ålteren Tornaria Miilleri-Stadium des Ea-
lanoglossus clavigerus entspricht. Es ist ca. 1/2» mm hoch, ”/4 mm
breit und zeigt bereits einige Merkmale, durch welche sich diese
Tornaria charakterisieren und erkennen låsst.
Fig. 1—4. - Entwicklungsstadien von Tornaria Mortenseni.
Das Oralfeld ist breit, der Ventralsattel flach, niedrig und zeigt
jederseits der ventralen Mittellinie' einen kleinen flachen Sattel.
An Stelle des sonst meist vorhandenen Laterallobus ist hier ein nie-
driger Sattel zu finden. Das Pråoralfeld ist klein, die oberen ven-
tralen Loben, die bereits gewellt sind, auffallend kurz. Die oberen
Dorsalloben sind tief und mit"2 secundåren flachen Loben besetzt.
Die unteren Dorsalloben sind gleichfalls gut ausgebildet und in
der Mitte ziemlich weit von einander entfernt. Scheitelplatte, Augen,
Verhalten der Wimperkrånze wie gewohnlich. Im Inneren sehen
wir ausser dem Wassersack und dem 3-teiligen Darme, dessen
Mittelteil kugelfårmig ausgebildet ist, bereits die ersten Coelom-
såckchen. Es sind 2 kleine kugelige Gebilde mit kleinem Lumen.
Sie liegen gerade an der Ubergangsstelle zwischen Mitteldarm und
Enddarm.
126
Das in Textfig. 5 dargestellte Schemåa zeigt den Verlauf des
longitudinalen Wimperkranzes, an dem sich die fir Tornaria
Mortenseni charakteristischen Eigentiimlichkeiten leicht feststellen
lassen: breites Oralfeld,
Ventralsattel niedrig
mit 2'SåttelnFanstelle
des Laterallobuskernn
flacher Sattel, obere
ventralerSolblenksete
kurz. Untere Dorsal-
loben tief, in der Mittellinie ziemlich weit von einander entfernt.
Dazu kommt dann noch die geringe Gråsse (1//> mm Håhe),
Walzenform und die dem Darme anliegenden Coelom-
såckchen.
Dieses in Textfig. 5 abgebildete Schema des Verlaufes des lon-
gitudinalen Wimperkranzes der Tornaria Mortenseni ist den analogen
Schemata, die ich bei der Tornaria Krohnii (16, Textfig. C), Tor-
naria Weldoni (17, Textfig. 1), Morgani (17, Textiig. 2) und Sunieri
(18, Textfig. 4) gegeben habe, nicht gleichwertig. In allen diesen
Fållen lag mir nåmlich eine Larve im Håhepunkte der pelagischen
Entwicklung, eine ,fertige"f (Spengel) Tornaria vor, wåhrend dies
hier nicht der Fall ist. Bei der Tornaria Mortenseni, dessen ålte-
stes Stadium der Tornaria Miilleri entspricht, durften sich einzelne
der erwåhnten Merkmale im spåteren Tornaria Krohnii- Stadium
sicher noch veråndern, wie z. B. die auffallend kurzen oberen Ven-
tralloben, die sehr viel kiårzer als die oberen Dorsalloben. sind.
Im Ganzen haben wir es hier also mit Entwicklungsstadien
einer Tornaria zu tun, die den entsprechenden des Balanoglossus
clavigerus sehr åhnlich sind. Nicht unerwåhnt måchte ich lassen,
dass Ritter und Davis bei Tornaria Hubbardi von Sta. Catalina
(Californien) gleichfalls das Vorhandensein eines Lateralsattels an
Stelle des gewéhnlichen Laterallobus beschreiben (8, Plate XVII,
fig. 3 & 4), doch ist derselbe hier viel gråsser, ,long ellipticalf,
mehr fingerfårmig gestaltet, als bei T. Mortenseni. Vergl. diesbezugl.
meine Bemerkung betreffend den Laterallobus bei Morgan's Tor-
naria von den Bahamas (unten S. 136).
Aus den japanischen Gewåssern ist bisher keine Tornaria be-
Fig. 5
127
kannt, doch sind in diesem Faunengebiet 3 Enteropneusten nach-
gewiesen :
Dolichoglossus (Balanoglossus) sulcatus Spengel von der Ost-
kuste der Insel Inoshima bei Yokohama.
Glandiceps (Balanoglossus) hacksi Marion von Yokohama.
Glandiceps eximius Spengel ,Japan".
Es handelt sich in allen drei Fållen um kleine Enteropneusten-
formen.”) Dolichoglossus sulcatus ist nach 3 kleinen Bruchsticken
von Spengel (10) nur sehr unvollkommen beschrieben und seit-
her nicht wiedergefunden. Glandiceps eximius ist nach Spengel
(12, S. 99) måglicherweise als eine Jugendform von Glandiceps
hacksi zu betrachten. Als sichere Form ist daher wohl nur Glan-
diceps hacksi anzusehen, die nåmliche, die von Ikeda massenhaft
schwimmend angetroffen wurde (5, 13). Man wird daher wohl nicht
sehr fehl gehen, wenn man die Tornaria Mortenseni måglicherweise
als Entwicklungsstadium von Glandiceps hacksi betrachtet.
2. Tornaria Bournei nom. nov.
(Textfig. 67.
Ca. 50 Exemplare in verschiedenen Entwicklungsstadien: Plymouth, ”/7 1913.
Die vortreffliche Beschreibung mit Abbildungen, die Bourne
von einigen Entwicklungsstadien einer Tornaria von der Britischen
Kuste (Eddystone Lighthouse und Falmouth) gegeben hat (1), wel-
che von ihm selbst, Weldon und Vallentin gefischt wurden,
stimmt in so weitgehender Weise mit einer grossen Anzahl von
durch Mortensen bei Plymouth gefischten Tornarienstadien uber-
ein, dass ich keinen Anstand nehme, dieselben fur identisch und
demselber adulten Tiere zugehårig zu betrachten. Ich benenne
diese Tornaria, dem bisher getubten Vorgange folgend, nach ihrem
Finder und Bearbeiter ,,T. Bournei".
Inis VIN bildet "Bourne valtvery young lornarias
ab von ca. 0,33 mm Långe, in einem Stadium, das etwas junger
ist, als das von mir in Textfig. 1 abgebildete von T. Mortenseni,
noch ohne circulårem Wimperkranz, in Fig. 4, Taf. VII, ein etwas
ålteres mit bereits stark entwickeltem circulåren Wimperkranz, in
7) Bei Misaki kommt eine sehr grosse Enteropneusten-Art vor. Ich habe
ein Exemplar von ca. 40 cm Långe dort aufgegraben. Th. Mortensen.
128
Fig. 13, Taf. VIII ein drittes, das etwa einer jungen Tornaria Miil-
leri des Balanoglossus clavigerus entspricht, von ca. 1 mm Långe,
ohne Coelom, mit beginnender Bildung der secundåren Loben, also
nicht, wie Bourne meint, ,the perfect Tornaria", wie sie uns
erst im Tornaria Krohnii-Stadium entgegentritt, sondern in einem
weit jiingeren. Das erste Coelomsåckchenpaar entsteht hier in tuber-
einstimmender Weise durch Abschnirung von Enddarme (14, 15,
16). Das Verhalten des Hydrocoels, Scheitelplatte, Augen etc. ganz
wie bei den Tornarien des Ba/anoglossus clavigerus.
Das Material, das Mortensen bei Plymouth fischte, enthålt
nicht das von Bourne beschriebene jungste Stadium (seine Fig. 1,
Taf. VIN), wohl aber die in Fig. 4 und 13. dargestellten;tferner
åltere, die dem Stadium der T. Miilleri, Krohnii und dem einge-
kerbten Stadium Balanoglossus clavigerus entsprechen, also. Ent-
wicklungsstadien der progressiven und regressiven Entwicklung,
wåhrend Bourne nur solche der progressiven besechrieben hat.
Auffallend ist daher, dass Bourne's durchwegs jungere Stadien
im August und September gefischt wurden, wåhrend die ålteren
Mortensen'schen Stadien- aus dem Juli stammen. Doch weist
schon Bourne auf die grossen Schwankungen in der Gråsse der
einzelnen Exemplare hin, was auch bei dem Materiale Mortensen's
zu beobachten ist. Ich gebe hier nur eine Abbildung eines etwas
ålteren Stadiums als das ålteste von Bourne in Fig. 13, Pl. VIII
dargestellt (Fig. 6). Es ist, nach der vorgeschritteneren Ausbildung des
longitudinalen Wimperkranzes etwa einem jingeren Tornaria Krohnii-
Stadium des Balanoglossus clavigerus zu vergleichen. Bei dem abge-
bildeten Exemplar, das eine Gråsse von ca. 1 mm hat, ist jedoch das
Coelom noch gar nicht angelegt, doch konnte ich an anderen etwa
gleichalterigen und ålteren Stadien das erste und zweite Coelom-
såckchenpaar beobachten, die dem Darme dicht anliegen. Das lon-
gitudinale Wimperband ist bereits ziemlich stark gewellt (2—4
Loben); der Laterallobus, der fir diese Form durch sein frihes
Auftreten: und starke Ausbildung charakteristisch ist, ist deutlich
zu sehen. Der Mitteldarm aufgeblasen, kugelig, das Analfeld stark
kegelfårmig vorgewålbt. Die nur wenig gråsseren, etwa dem Tor-
naria-Krohnii-Stadium des B. cl. entsprechenden Exemplare zeigen
den Wimperkranz nur wenig stårker gewellt, am Darme die Coe-
lomsåckchen platt anliegend. Das ålteste Stadium, etwa dem ,ein-
129
gekerbten Stadium" entsprechend, ist durch auffallend starke Aus-
bildung des Darmes und Hydrocoels, geringere Gråsse und Durch-
sichtigkeit kennbar. Der longitudinale Wimperkranz ist. wie gegen
die Scheitelplatte zusammengeschoben,
sitzt dem mittleren Teile mit seinem
breiten Oralfeld wie eine Kappe auf.
Das Analfeld ist sehr stark vorgewdlbt.
2 Paar Coelomsåckchen, dem Darme
eng anliegend, ausgebildet.
Fur Tornaria Bournei ist also im
Mersleichesmitidententsprechen-
den Entwicklungsstadien des B. cl.
charakterrstischer ri) "die serin-
sereGrosse 2) fruheres Auftre-- Fig. 6. Lateralansicht.
fenkdesstateraltkobus (ber Muller:
mochtinichttvorhanden) und das kegelfårmig"sewolbte
Analfeld.
3. Tornaria Mulleri und Tornaria Krohnii
des Balanoglossus clavigerus D. Ch.
Plymouth, %/s 1913.
Zwischen den oben beschriebenen Entwicklungsstadien der Tornaria
Bournei fanden sich auch einige Exemplare einer anderen Tornaria,
die ich fir Entwicklungsstadien des B. cl. zu halten geneigt bin.
Sie fallen unter den viel kleineren Exemplaren der T. Bournei
durch ihre bedeutendere Gråsse auf und stimmen, soweit sich dies
ohne Schnittpråparate beurteilen låsst, mit den von Spengel (10)
und mir (14, 15, 16) beschriebenen Entwicklungsstadien der T. Miil-
leri und Krohnii des B. cl. uberein. Das ålteste vorhandene Sta-
dium bildet einen Ubergang vom T. Krohnii-Stadium zum einge-
kerbten Stadium.
Bourne (1) identifiziert in seiner Mitteilung die von Vallentin
gefischten Exemplare von Falmouth mit der Tornaria Krohnii des
Mittelmeeres, doch zågert er, sie mit Balanoglossus clavigerus in
Beziehung zu bringen, da ihm entgangen zu sein scheint, dass
diese Enteropneustenspecies von Giard 1882 bei Glenans und
spåter an verschiedenen Stellen der Kiste der Bretagne nachge-
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 73. 9
130
wiesen wurde und bringt sie sehr vorsichtig mit B. salmoneus v.
sarniensis von den Canal-Inseln und Roscoff in Verbindung.
Wenn ich bezuiglich der Identificierung der fraglichen Stadien
mit jenen des B. cl. aus dem Mittelmeer eine gewisse Unsicher-
heit nicht verschweigen kann, ist dies auf die ziemlich starken
Schwankungen in der Gråsse der, vorliegenden Exemplare zuritick-
zufihren. Sie sind jedøoch såmmtlich gråsser als die analogen von
Tornaria Bournei, das gråsste misst etwas mehr als 2 mm Hohe.
Leider ist in der Faunen-Liste von Plymouth keinerlei Angabe
uber das Vorkommen eines Erteropneusten bei Plymouth ersicht-
lich (9). Dr. Mortensen, der auf mein Ersuchen diesbezuglich
im Laboratory of the Mar. Biological Association in Plymouth an-
frug, erhielt den Bescheid, dass man dort keinen Balanoglossus
kennt, obgleich die Tornarien dort ziemlich håufig sind.
Caullery und Mesnil (2) fihren aus dem Canal nicht we-
niger als 4 verschiedene Enteropneustenarten an (Balanoglossus
clavigerus D. Ch., Glossobalanus sarniensis Koehler, G. minutus
Koval., und Protobalanus Koehleri Caull. et Mesn.). Es wåre also
sehr gut måglich, dass die erwåhnten Tornarien tatsåchlich auf
Balanoglossus clavigerus zuruckzufuhren sind. Zu welcher adulten
Form die Tornaria Bournei gehårt, ist vorlåufig ebenfalls noch nicht
mit Sicherheit feststellbar.
4. Tornaria Tabogae nov. spec.?
(Textfig. 7).
1 Exemplar: Taboga, Panama, XII 1914, Nr. 43.
Von dieser Tornaria, die sich auf Grund eines einzigen Exem-
plars kaum beschreiben låsst und die ich der Einfachheit halber
vorlåufig nach dem Fundort benenne, ist nur ein einziges Ent-
wicklungsstadium vorhanden, das einem sehr jungen Tornaria Miil-
leri-Stadium des B. cl. entspricht. Diese nicht tentaculate Form zeigt
uns somit noch nicht die ,fertige" Tornaria am Hohepunkte larvaler
Entwicklung, es lassen sich daher fast gar keine charakteristischen
Eigenttumlichkeiten feststellen, da solche ja auch sonst erst spåter,
im Tornaria Krohnii-Stadium, hervortreten. Diese junge Tørnaria
misst ca. ”/4 mm in der Håhe. Der circulåre Wimperkranz ist
nicht breiter als das longitudinale Wimperband. Ein secundårer
Wimperring ist nicht zu sehen. Eigentumlichkeiten zeigtim
131
Grunde nur der pråorale Wimperkranz durch Ausbil-
bildung eigenartiger scharfer Ecken. Oralfeld schmal.
Ventralsattel flach, kein Laterallobus. Scheitelplatte, Augen, Darm,
Hydrocoel wie bei dem entsprechenden Sta-
dium von B. cl. ausgebildet.
An diesem Exemplar ist eigentlich nur der
Fundort interessant. An der pacifischen Kiste
Mittelamerikas sind bisher keine Enteropneu-
sten nachgewiesen.”) Dagegen sind solche von
Sud-Californien (Sta. Catalina) bekannt u. Z.
eine tentaculate (Tornaria Ritteri Spengel) und
eine nicht tentaculate (T. Hubbardi Ritter &
Davis).
Dass die letztere, die durch ihre Glocken-
form, abweichenden Verlauf des longitudinalen Wimperbandes, fruh-
zeitiges Auftreten der Kiemenspalten und flaches Analfeld leicht
erkennbar ist (8, Taf. XVII, Fig. 3 u. 4), mit der Tornaria Tabogae in
Zusammenhang zu bringen ist, scheint mir wenig wahrscheinlich
zu sein, weil Tornaria Tabogae, soweit sich trotz des jugendlichem
Stadiums beurteilen låsst, in Bezug auf Form und Verlauf des
longitudinalen Wimperkranzes ganz das normale Verhalten zu zei-
gen scheint. Die Frage der Zugehårigkeit der T. Tabogae bleibt
daher zur Zeit offen.
Fig. 7. Ventralansicht.
5. Tornaria Grenacheri (p. p. Spengel).
(Textfig. 8 und 9).
SFExemplare SHS Koch 4—8%S; Br. 339 VS 1861. Nr559:
In meiner Arbeit uber westindische Tornarien u. s. w. (17) habe
ich nachgewiesen, dass Spengel unter der Bezeichnung , Tornaria
Grenacherif irrttmlich 3 verschiedene Tornarien zusammengefasst
hat, ferner, dass von der eigentlichen Tornaria Grenacheri nur fol-
gendes bekannt ist (p. 239).
»Sie ist eine tentaculate Form, ist als solche der T. Chierchiar
und T. Morgani åhnlich. Ihre Hohe ist 5—9 mm, sie ist also
die grosste bekannte Tornaria. Sie stammt von St. Vincente. Måg-
licherweise identisch mit T. Morgani von der Bahamas." Die 3
1) Eine grosse Enteropneusten-Art war stellenweise an der Kiste von
Taboga, in der Panama Bucht, gemein. hEMorterns en
9
132
Koch'schen Exemplare, von denen 2 sehr gut erhalten (Textfig.
8 u. 9), das eine stark geschrumpft ist, zeigen diese Merkmale in
iibereinstimmender Weise, weshalb ich sie hier als Tornaria Gre-
nacheri — unter Vorbehalt — bezeichnet habe. Als tentaculate
grosse Formen sehen sie naturlich den ubrigen grossen tentakel-
tragenden Tornarien (vergl. meine Synopsis 17, p. 249) sehr åhn-
lich. Obwohl bei den beiden wohl erhaltenen Exemplaren die
Scheitelplatte sehr stark eingezogen ist, betrågt ihre Håhe uber 5
und 5'/> mm — im nicht contrahierten Zustand sicher viel grås-
ser —, ihre Breite im Niveau des circulåren Wimperkranzes ca.
5!/» mm. Das sind Maasse, wie wir sie doch nur bei den Toørnarien
Grenacher's von St. Vincent finden. Der Fundort der Koch'schen
Dorsalansicht. Fig. 8 und 9. Ventralansicht.
Tornarien liegt zwischen Ascension und St. Helena, also nicht sehr
weit entfernt von demjenigen der Grenacher'schen Tornarien. In
diesem selben Gebiete ist ubrigens durch die Plankton-Expedition
das Vorhandensein von Tornarien bereits bekannt. Hensen schreibt
(4, p. 254) daruber, dass ,mit dem grossen Vertikalnetze eine An-
zahl Balanoglossus-Larven 300 Seemeilen dåstlich von Fernando und
780 Seemeilen westlich von Ascension gefangen wurden". Leider
werden diese Tornarien im Werke der Plankton-Expedition an keiner
Stelle wieder .erwåhnt, was mir von Herrn Prof. Dr. C. Apstein,
Berlin, auf eine diesbezugliche Anfrage beståtigt wurde. Da aus
dem sudatlantischen Ocean eine ganze Anzahl verschiedener En-
teropneusten bekannt ist, wird man wohl gut tun, von einer Iden-
tificierung aller dieser Tornarien abzusehen.
Die beiden gut erhåltenen in Textfig. 8 und 9 dargestellten
skete some
133
Exemplare sind von gedrungener Gestalt. Ein breiter dicker Wulst
umgiebt den Kårper in der Region des circulåren Wimperkranzes,
das Analfeld ragt kegelfårmig vor. An den oberen Dorsal- und
Ventralloben sind ca. 253—30 Tentakel ausgebildet, untere Dorsal-
loben fehlen. Lateralloben tief mit ca. 10-—12 Tentakeln. Der
Ventralsattel ist flach, von Pigment keine Spur. Uber Augen und
Scheitelplatte låsst sich nichts sicheres aussagen, da letztere tief
eingezogen ist, doch scheinen hier ganz åhnliche Verhåltnisse wie
bei der Bahamas Tornaria (Tornaria Morgani) vorzuliegen. Beide
Larven befinden sich in einem Entwicklungsstadium, das etwa dem
von mir (17, Fig. 9, Taf. II) abgebildeten der Tornaria Morgani ent-
spricht, also einem etwas vorgeschrittenen Tornaria Krohnii-Stadium
des Balanoglossus clavigerus. Stellenweise ist das Epithel von der
Oberflåche abgefallen,… so dass die Tornarien fast glashell durch-
sichtig erscheinen. Man erhålt dadurch ganz åhnliche Bilder der
inneren Organisation, wie von mir bei T. Morgani (17, p. 229 ff.)
beschrieben und in Textfig. 3 dargestellt. Kiemenspalten noch nicht
angelegt. Mitteldarm langgestreckt, cylindrisch, Hydrocoel sehr gut
ausgebildet. Die Rumpf-Coelome liegen fern vom Darme am
Wimperring oder Ektoderm und zeigen das analoge Verhalten wie
von mir bei T. Morgani beschrieben, auch hier die peripheren
schlauchartigen Halbringe, die nach innen breit diaphragmaartig
vorspringen.
Uber die. Kragencoelome konnte ich mir jedoch keine Sicher-
heit verschaffen. Sie sind hier nicht so deutlich erkennbar wie bei
T. Morgani. Da ich die beiden Exemplare nicht schneiden konnte,
war mir eine genauere Untersuchung nicht måglich. Unsicher bin
ich auch in der Deutung einiger anatomischen Verhåltnisse in der
Gegend des Hydrocoels, was ich in den skizzenhaft gehaltenen
Textfiguren nur eben angedeutet habe. Ebenso wie bei T. Morgani
konnte ich an 4 Stellen, die åusserlich den Tentakelreihen ent-
sprechen, beobachten, dass von den Coelomen nach der Apikal-
platte zu spangenartige Fortsåtze ausgehen. Die Sporne, ,,Zugel-
sttcke", sind sehr deutlich zu sehen und in ganz analoger Weise
wie von mir bei T. Morgani geschildert und abgebildet (17, p. 231,
Textfig. 3), ausgebildet.
Die Koch'schen Tornarien — hier mit Vorbehalt als Tornaria
Grenacheri bezeichnet — unterscheiden sich also von T. Morgani
134
durch ihre bedeutendere Gråsse, den breiten Wulst in der Region
des circulåren Wimperkranzes, die gråssere Zahl der Tentakel an
den Dorsalloben, das kegelfårmige Analfeld, von 7Tornaria Chier-
chiai durch die Gråsse, den Mangel von unteren Dorsalloben, den
flachen Ventralsattel. ea piglg
Im Anschlusse an diese Besprechung der Tornaria Grenacheri
will ich auf eine kurzlich erschienene Mitteilung MacBride's
(6) zurickkommen, der eine ,, Tornaria Grenacheri" von Three
Kings Islands, N.end of New Zealand, surface, beschreibt. ,Two
Specimens. One specimen was in process of metamorphosis, but
the other was in the height of larval development, although un-
fortunately somewhat mutilated." Leider wird gerade das ,in Me-
tamorphose begriffene" Exemplar, nicht die typische Larve mit
allen Charakteren, in Fig. 10, Plate II dargestellt. ,It will be seen
that the longitudinal ciliated band has almost entirely disappeared,
but that the strong posterior transverse ciliated band has persisted.
From an examination of the longitudinal ciliated band in the mu-
tilated specimen and of the vestiges of it in the metamorphosing
larva, it is clear, that this band was produced into secondary ten-
tacle-like processes.”. Aus diesem Verhalten des Wimperbandes glaubt
also MacBride schliessen zu kånnen, dass das abgebildete Ex-
emplar sich in einem vorgeschrittenen Stadium der Metamorphose
befindet. Ich glaube jedoch, dass MacBride sich in diesem
Punkte irrt.. Nach meiner Meinung ist das dargestellte Exemplar
in einem viel jungeren Entwicklungsstadium der progressiven Ent-
wicklung und entspricht dasselbe etwa einem Tornaria Miilleri-
Stadium. Das nur stellenweise Vorhandensein der Tentakelreihen
glaube ich auf den schlechten Erhaltungszustand des Materials zu-
ruckfuhren zu sollen. Dafir spricht auch der stark geschrumpfte
Darm und jene von MacBride als ,,Notochord" gedeutete, bis-
her bei keiner Tornaria nachgewiesene, mir unverståndliche Bil-
dung
Fur die Altersbestimmung finden wir in MacBride's Abbil-
dung einen Anhaltspunkt. In seiner Fig. 10, Plate II, ist das Coe-
lom eingezeichnet u. z. als halbmondfårmiger Schlauch in der Nåhe
des circulåren Wimperkranzes, genau so wie von Spengel (10),
Morgan (7) und mir (17) beschrieben. Diese Bildung wird jedoch
==
i
135
von MacBride in der Figurenerklårung als ,collar groove of
Tornaria" und ,,beginning of collar-groove" gedeutet. Im Texte be-
findet sich keine Bemerkung dariiber. Auf Grund dieser Ausbildung
des Coeloms, das auch in der Nåhe des ,,dorsalpore" und der Mund-
offnung den ubereinstimmenden Verlauf wie in den erwåhnten Fållen
zeigt, glaube ich mit Sicherheit auf ein viel jungeres Stadium, als
wie von MacBride behauptet, schliessen zu kånnen.
Obwohl dieser Autor von der hypothetischen circumterranen
Verbreitung der Spengel'schen Tornaria Grenacheri (durch mich
widerlegt, 17), behauptet, ,that there is nothing inherently improb-
able in Spengel's theory”, fuhrt er doch einige Unterschiede ge-
genuber der T. Morgani an und kommt zum Ergebnis: ,It appears
more probable therefore, that T. Grenacheri and the Nassau larva
(T. Morgani) belong to two distinct but allied species", womit ich
vollkommen einverstanden bin.
Da das zweite Exemplar der T. Grenacheri Mac Bride's ,un-
fortunately somewhat mutilatedf war, und er deshalb keine weitere
Beschreibung desselben gibt, låsst sich vorderhand auf Grund der
vorliegenden Mitteilung nur das Vorhandensein einer unsicheren
tentaculaten Tornarienform in den Gewåssern von Neuseeland fest-
stellen, die noch genauer zu untersuchen wåre und deren Identitåt
mit Tornaria Grenacheri noch keineswegs feststeht.
Ich måchte hier einige ergånzende und berichtigende Bemer-
kungen zu meiner Arbeit uber westindische Tornarien (17) an-
schliessen. In dieser Mitteilung erwåhnte ich auf S. 238, dass ,,von
keiner einzigen Enteropneustenform, die als typische … Litoraltiere
gelten, Aufenthalt in der Tiefsee nachgewiesen ist”. Dies ist inso-
ferne nicht ganz zutreffend, als von der Challenger-Expedition ein
kleines Bruchstuck eines Enteropneusten aus 2500'Faden Tiefe
(Station 101, 19. Aug. 1873, etwa 250 Seemeilen von Cap Mesu-
rado im Atlantic, unweit der afrikanischen Kuste (citiert nach
Spengel, 10, p. 266) gefischt und von Spengel als Glandiceps
abyssicola nov. sp. sehr unvollkommen beschrieben wurde. Ferner
ist darauf zu verweisen, dass Marion Glandiceps talaboti auf dem
Plateau Marsilli, in einer Tiefe von 300—450 m erbeutet hat (10,
p. 243). Damit sind also doch Enteropneusten auch ausserhalb des
Litorals nachgewiesen.
136
In derselben Arbeit schrieb ich bei der ,,Replik auf einige Be-
merkungen Spengel's" auf S. 252: ,,Ausser Balanoglossus (Pty-
chodera) clavigerus ist von Neapel und Umgebung nur Ptychodera
minuta Kow. bekannt". Dies auf Grund der Faunen-Liste Lo Bi-
anco's. Spengel (10) hat jedoch auch das vereinzelte Vorkommen
von Glandiceps talaboti an mehreren Stellen im Golf von Neapel
(,fuori stazione", ,fuori Mergellinaf, ,fuori gli scogli di Santo
Russo) nachgewiesen (p. 225).
Auf die Unterschiede zwischen der grossen tentakulaten Tor-
naria von Aruba und Saba, die ich (17) als Tornaria Morgani be-
zeichnet habe, von der typischen Tornaria Morgani von den Baha-
mas habe ich auf S. 248 hingewiesen. Nachtråglich bin ich
auf einen weiteren nicht unwichtigen Unterschied beider For-
men aufmerksam geworden, den ich hier nicht unerwåhnt lassen
måchte. Dieser Unterschied betrifft die Ausbildung und Form des
Laterallobus. Ich beschrånke mich auf diesen Hinweis, indem ich
zum Vergleiche auf mein Schema des Verlaufes des longitudinalen
Wimperkranzes der Tornaria Morgani (17, Textfig. 2) und Morgan's
schåne Figur 3, Taf. I, verweise. Es scheint mir somit, wenn man
alle Unterschiede — Gråsse, Tentakelzahl, Form des Ventralsattels,
Analfeld (17, p. 248) und nun auch Laterallobus — in Erwågung
zieht, nicht ausgeschlossen, dass die von mir mit der Bahamas-
Tornaria Morgan's identificierten grossen tentaculaten Tornarien
von Aruba und Saba nicht damit identisch sind, sondern einer
anderen Species angehåren. Sollte sich bei weiterer Untersuchung
dies als richtig erweisen, so wåre die grosse tentaculate Tornaria
von Aruba und Saba als Tornaria Boekei zu bezeichnen.
Leiden, Rijksmuseum, April 1921.
Litteratur-Verzeichnis.
1) 1889—1890. Bourne, Gilbert C., On a Tornaria found in British
Seas. Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc. Plymouth. Vol. I.
2) 1916. Caullery, M. et Mesnil, F., Sur un entéropneuste (Dolicio-
glossus Kovalevskii Ag.) trouvé dans la région de la
Hague et nouveau pour les cåtes de France. Bull. soc.
zool. de France. Paris. Vol. 41.
3) 1908. Heider, K., Zur Entwicklung von Balanoglossus clavigerus delle
Chiaje. Leipzig. Zool. Anz. Bd. XXXIV.
4)
5)
6)
7)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
1911.
1908.
1894,
1904.
1904.
1893.
1901.
1907.
1909.
1913:
1921.
137
Hensen, Victor, Das Leben im Ozean nach Zåhlung seiner
Bewohner. Ergeb. d. Plankton-Exped. Kiel & Leipzig.
BIRVEO:
Ikeda, I., On the swimming habit of a Japanese enteropneust,
Glandiceps hacksii Marion. Annot. Zool. Jap. Tokio. Vol. 6.
No. 4.
Mac Bride, E. W., Echinoderma (Part. II) and Enteropneusta.
Larvae of echinoderma and Enteropneusta. British Ant-
arctic (,, Terra nova") expedition, 1910. Natural History,
Report Zoo Bondone vol IVÆNO0ES
Morgan, T. H., The development of Balanoglossus. Journ. of
Morphol. Boston. Vol. IX.
Ritter, Wm. E. and B.M. Davis, Studies on the ecology,
morphology and speciology of the young of some entero-
pneusta of Western North America. Univ. Calif. Publ.
Berkeley, Vol. 1.
Plymouth Marine Invertebrate Fauna. Being notes of the local
distribution of species ocurring in the neighbourhoud.
Compiled from the records of the laboratory of the mar.
biol. Assoc. Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc. Plymourh. Vol. VII.
Spengel, I. W., Die Enteropneusten des Golfes von Neapel
etc. Fauna & Flora des Golfes von Neapel. 18. Monogr.
Berlin.
—… Die Benennung der Enteropneusten-Gattungen. Zool.
JabrbsSystt Jena Vols:
— … Studien iiber die Enteropneusten der Siboga-Expedition
etc. Leiden. 26. Monogr.
— … Pelagisches Vorkommen von Enteropneusten. Zoolog.
Anz Leipzig. Bd. XXXIV.
Stiasny, Gustav, Studien iber die Entwicklung von Balano-
glossus clavigerus D. Ch (Vorlåufige Mitt.). Zoolog. Anz.
BerpriseBbdEk SSI
— Studien uber die Entwicklung des Balanoglossus clavi-
gerus D. Ch. I. Die Entwicklung der Tornaria. Zeitschr.
f wiss. Zool. Leipzig. Bd. 110.
— Studien iber die Entwicklung des Balanoglossus clavi-
gerus D. Ch. II. Darstellung der weiteren Entwicklung
bis zur Metamorphose. Mitt. Zool. Stat. Neapel. Berlin.
Bdr22:
— Uber westindische Tornarien nebst einer Ubersicht uber
die bisher bekannten tentaculaten Tornarien. Versl. Kon.
Akad. Wetensch. Amsterdam. Afd. Wis- en Naturk., Am-
sterdam. Deel XXIX.
—… Tornaria Sunieri, eine neue Enteropneustenlarve aus dem
ostindischen Archipel. Zoolog. Mededeel. Rijksmus. Nat:
Hist terdenskk De IRVIN OS 2 ME Druek)
SEE
Papers from Dr. Th. Mortensen's Pacific Expedition
1914—16.
VIIL.
Echinoderms of New Zealand and the Auckland-
Campbell Islands.
I. Echinoidea.
By
Dr. Th. Mortensen.
(With Pls. VI—VIII).
In publishing this first part of my report on the Echinoderms
of New Zealand and the Auckland-Campbell Islands it is my
very agreable duty to express my great indebtedness to the New
Zealand Government for the courtesy shown me during my
visit to New Zealand in November 1914— February 1915. The
permit to accompany the G. S. ,,Amokuraf on her trip to the Auck-
land and Campbell Islands and the G. S. ,,Hinemoaf on her trip
round the North Island of New Zealand was of the most eminent
importance to me, enabling me to undertake investigations in those
regions which I should otherwise have been unable to accomplish.
Rather extensive collections were made during these trips, which
will very considerably enrich our knowledge of the marine fauna
of these regions. Of course, I feel myself under special oblig-
ation to have these collections worked out separately and at the
earliest possible opportunity. Some of the reports have already been
published (Freeliving Nematodes, by Hj. Ditlevsen, Ascidia, by
BrÆBolvilentBryozoar by "Ernst Marcus thelmpresenttrepert
being the fourth of the series”) and several more are in prepar-
ation; it may be expected that the material will, in the main, have
"?) These papers have been published in the present volume of this Jour-
nal as respectively No.s III, IV and VI of the ,,Papers from Dr. Th.
Mortensen's Pacific Expedition 1914—16f.
140
been worked out in the course of a few years. I beg the New
Zealand Government and my New Zealand Colleagues to accept
these contributions to the knowledge of the biology of the New
Zealand seas as a tribute for the hospitality shown me.
The history of the Echinoderm fauna of New Zealand is rather
intricate. Old collections in various Museums of Europe and Ame-
rica from the time when the importance of exact indications of
locality had not yet been realized have occasioned many statements
of species, erroneously said to come from New Zealand. This applies
especially to the sea-urchins, whose dried tests are often brought
home by sailors a. 0. people and then, furnished with -unreliable
labels, end in the Museums, where they give rise to wrong zoo-
geographical statements.
Erroneous identifications, partly due to insufficient access to
litterature, have caused several other instances of species being
wrongly reckoned to the New Zealand fauna. AÅA critical examin-
ation of the previous lists of New Zealand Echinoderms therefore
leads to some remarkable results and makes the revised list differ
very conspicuously from the earlier ones. It is, however, only fair
to emphasize that the different aspect of the lists is due partly to ”
necessary nomenclatural changes.
The first list of New Zealand Echinoderms was given by Hut-
ton in his ,Catalogue of the Echinodermata of New Zealand"
1872. He names the following 9 species of Echinoids:
Cidaris (Stephanocidaris) tubaria Lam.
Echinus (Psammechinus) chloroticus A. Ag.
Echinus elevatus n. sp.
Echinus albocinctus nm. sp.
Laganum rostratum Ag.
Årachnoides zelandiæ Gray.
Echinoneus ventricosus Ag. & Des.
Echinobrissus recens M. Edw.
Amphidotus zealandiæ Gray.
141
In 1876") Hutton adds to this list the species Sirongylo-
centrotus tuberculatus Lam., Sphærechinus australiæ A. Ag. and
Echinus angulosus Leske, while Cidaris tubaria of the first list is
stated to be not this species but Goniocidaris geranioides Lmk., Echinus
albocinctus to be Ech. magellanicus Phil., Ech. elevatus to be Ambly-
pneustes formosus Val., Amphidotus zealandiæ to be Echinocardium
australe Gray and Arachnoides zelandiæ to be A.”) placenta L.
Finally Echinoneus ventricosus is stated not to belong to the New
Zealand fauna, and Laganum rostratum very doubtfully so. — In
1878) he further adds Salmacis globator Ag. to the list, while
the former Cidaris tubaria is now corrected into Goniocidaris canal-
iculata Å. Ag. and immediately thereafter, in a note, recognized to
be a new species, which is named Goniocidaris umbraculum.
The next addition to the New Zealand Echinoid Fauna is due
to Studer, who, in his report on the Echinoids of the ,,Gazelle"
(Monatsber. d. Akad. d. Wiss. Berlin. 1880. p. 873) describes a new
species, Amblypneustes grossularia from the Three Kings Isl. Further
Filhol”) states to have found Echinus margaritaceus Lam at the
Campbell Isl. and in the Cooks Strait. — In 1897 H. Farquhar)
adds Strongylocentrotus erythrogrammus Val. and Centrostephanus
Rodgersii Ag. (besides some species from the Kermadec Islands,
which do not concern us here). Finally, in 1898?) he gives a
very complete list of all those species which were then actually
known to occur at New Zealand or stated in litterature to do so
, (especially in Agassiz' ,Revision of the Echinif" and the ,,Chal-
lengerf Echinoidea). To the species already mentioned the fol-
") F, W. Hutton. Corrections and Additions to the Catalogue of New Zea-
land Echinodermata (1872). Trans. N. Z. Inst. IX. p. 362.
?”) By a lapsus he writes Echinarachnius instead of Arachnoides.
?) F. W. Hutton. Notes on some New Zealand Echinodermata, with de-
scriptions of new species. Trans. N. Z. Inst. XI. p. 305—8.
") H. Filhol. Recherches zoologiques, botaniques, faites å Pile Campbell
et en Nouvelle-Zélande. X. Échinodermes. Recueil de mémoires . ..
rélatifs å Pobservation du passage de Vénus sur le Soleil. III. 1885. p.
3123:
5 H.Farquhar. Å contribution to the history of New Zealand Echino-
derms. Journ. Linn. Soc. Zool. XXVI.
$) H. Farquhar. On the Echinoderm Fauna of New Zealand. Proc. Linn.
Soc. N.S. Wales. 1898.
142
lowing are added here: Temnopleurus Reynaudi Ag., Amblypneustes
griseus Blv., Holopneustes inflatus Ltk., Brissopsis luzonica (Gray)
and Metztalia sternalis (Lamk.) (— besides the deep-water forms
taken by the ,Challenger" in the vicinity of New Zealand and
some species from the Kermadecs; these forms are not taken into
consideration at the present occasion —).
In the ,Index Faunæ Novæ Zealandiæ" 1904 Hutton again
eliminates from the list of New Zealand Echinoids the species:
Centrostephanus Rodgersii, Str. erythrogrammus, Sphærech. Australiæ,
Holopneustes inflatus, Echinus margaritaceus, Laganum. rostratum,
and Metalia sternalis, while no new forms are added.
Another addition was again made by Benham, 1909, in his
Record of. the Echinoderma of the N. Z. Government Trawling Ex-
pedition, viz. Porocidaris elegans A. Ag. The same author") also
showed the ,Salmacis globator" of Hutton to be a new species
of the genus Pseudechinus, naming it Ps. Huttoni. F. Jeffr.Bell?)
in 1917 adds two new forms, Astropyga radiata Leske and Laga-
num sp. Finally in the present 'report five new species are added,
viz. Cidaris sp. Pseudechinus variegatus n. sp., Echinocyamus poly-
porus n. sp., Laganum depressum Ag. (?) and Brissopsis zealandiæ
DÆSp!
A revised list of the New Zealand Echinoids then looks as
follows : .
Goniocidaris umbraculum Hutton 2).
Porocidaris elegans A. Ag. — erronegous identification; — Ogmo-
cidaris Benhami n. g. n. sp.
Cidaris sp.
Astropyga radiata Leske — erroneous identification; —— Aræosoma
thetidis (H. L. Clark).
Centrostephanus Rodgersii Ag. — probably not New Zealand.
Temnopleurus Reynaudi Ag. — not New Zealand.
") W. B. Benham: An erroneous Echinodermal identification. Ann. Mag.
Nat. Hist. Ser, 8. Vol. I. 1908. p. 104.
”) F. Jeffr. Bell. British Antarctic (,,Terra Nova") Expedition. Zoology
Vol. IV. 1. Echinoderma.
”) In the ,,Index Faunæ Novæ Zealandiæ" this species-name has been
curiously misprinted into ,,umbulacrumf",
143
Echinus angulosus Leske — erroneous identification; —ZNot-
echinus novæ-zealandiæ n. sp.
— magellanicus Phil. — erroneous identification; — Pseud-
echinus albocinctus (Hutton).
— margaritaceus Lam. — erroneous identification; —= Not-
echinus novæ-zealandiæ and Pseudechinus albocinctus.
Salmacis globator Ag. — erroneous identification; — Pseud-
echinus Huttoni Benham.
Pseudechinus variegatus n. sp.
Amblypneustes grossularia Studer — Pseudechinus grossularia
(Studer).
— formosus Val. — probably = Holopneustes inflatus (Ltk.).
— griseus (Blv.) — probably not New Zealand.
Holopneustes inflatus Ltk.
Evechinus chloroticus (Val.).
Strongylocentrotus tuberculatus (Lamk.) — Heliocidaris tubercu-
lata (Lamk.).
— erythrogrammus Val. — probably not New Zealand.
Sphærechinus australiæ A. Ag. — not New Zealand.
Echinocyamus polyporus n. sp.
Arachnoides placenta (L.) — erroneous identification; — Årach-
noides zelandiæ Gray.
Laganum depressum (Ag.). (?).
— rostratum Ag. — probably not New Zealand.
— sp. — Peronella hinemoæ n. sp.
Echinoneus ventricosus Ag. & Des. — not New Zealand.
Echinobrissus recens (M. Edw.).
Echinocardium austraåle Gray.
Metalia sternalis (Lmk.) — probably not New Zealand.
Brissopsis zealandiæ n. sp.
— luzonica (Gray) — not New Zealand.
The total number of Echinoids till now known with certainty
from the New Zealand seas accordingly amounts to 19, five of
these being here recorded for the first time. Most probably more
thorough investigations, especially in the region off the North end
of the North Island and round the Three Kings Islands will increase
the number quite considerably. 1f the species from the deep-sea
round the islands be included — which may, of course, be quite
144
legitimate — the list is notably augmented; but there is no reason
to enter on the New Zealand deep-sea fauna at the present oc-
casion.
The region of the South Island is not especially rich in Echin-
oids, and future researches can hardly be expected to yield many
new forms from there. Still less are we to expect noteworthy additions
to the littoral or sublittoral Echinoid-fauna of the Auckland-Campbell
Islands, from which only one species, Notechinus novæ-zealandiæ,
is known till now. In the deeper water off these islands we may,
of course, expect to find a good deal more.
The zoogeographical relations of the New Zealand Echinoids
will not be discussed in the present paper; this may be put off,
till the whole of the Echinoderms has been worked out. I would only
already now point out the fact that, excepting Echinocardium australe,
which seems to be identical with Echinocardium cordatum, thus
being almost Cosmopolitan, and Laganum depressum, the identific-
ation of which is not beyond doubt, there is not one species
known with certainty to occur outside the Australian-New Zealand
region. Especially there 1s"notoneetspeciestcommonkko
N'ew Zealand and the Magellanic"or thetantaretsierne
gion.
From a morphological point of view no special interest attaches
to any of the new species here described; in this regard Arach-
noides zelandiæ and Echinobrissus recens range far beyond any of
the new forms. Of no small interest is the observation that the
tubercles of Pseudechinus albocinctus (and Notechinus magellanicus)
show traces of crenulation. But the outstanding point is the
discovery that the young Echincbrissus has a well developed dental
apparatus, which is absorbed before the animal reaches the adult size.
This discovery, together with that made by Westergren in 1909
of the existence of a dental apparatus in the young Echinoneus,))
is of very considerable interest, especially from a phylogenetie
point of view, throwing important light on the relationship of the
Cassidulids. Also from a physiological point of view the absorption
of the perfectly developed and actually funetioning dental apparatus,
) A. Agassiz. On the existence of teeth and of a lantern in the genus
Echinonéus van Phels. Amer. Journ. Sc. XXVIIL.
145
resulting in the transformation of the dentate into an edentate animal,
a transformation which is performed in a very short time, must
claim considerable attention.
1... Goniocidaris umbraculum Hutton.
(Pl. VI. Figs. 1—2).
Cidaris tubaria. Hutton. 1872. Catalogue of the Echinodermata of New
Zealand, p. 10.
Goniocidaris umbraculum. Hutton. 1878. Notes on some New Zealand
Echinoderms, with descriptions of new species.
lrans: NZ: InsXE 2306)
—= =— Farquhar. 1898. On the Echinoderm Fauna of
New Zealand. Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales. p. 316.
— — Th. Mortensen. 1903. ,,Ingolff Echinoidea. I.
pr 24 PE SS Fies FIS 2
— — HSESCFark 1909 Fhert CGidaridæ Bulle Mus:
Comp. Zool. 51. p. 198. Pl. 10. 3—4.
= — W. B. Benham. 1909. Scientific Results of the
New Zealand Government Trawling Expedition.
1907. Echinoderma. Records of the Canterbury
MusAFUNrE 25 p723:
= — H. L. Clark. Report on the Sea-Lilies, Starfishes,
Brittle-Stars and Sea-Urchins obtained by F. I.S.
»Endeavour" on the coasts of Queensland, N.S.
Wales, Tasmania, Victoria, S. Australia and W.
Australia. Biol. Res. of the Fishing Experiments
carried on by F. I. S. ,,Endeavourf 1909—14.
This species has never been adequately described. The char-
acteristic, widened upper radioles were mentioned by Hutton and
Benham, the pedicellariæ were figured by the present author,
while Hutton and Clark give some remarks on the characters
of the test, the latter author giving a pair of figures of a denuded
test. It is not easy to get a good conception of the species from
these scattered remarks and I therefore have thought it my duty
to take this opportunity of supplying the lacking description and
also to give a pair of figures of the species, in order to show its
normal appearance. The material at my disposal consists of 4 spec-
imens, preserved in alcohol, and 4 dried specimens, all apparently
from the Foveaux Strait between New Zealand and Stewart Island ;
I am indebted for this material to Professor Benham, Otago, and
føl Captain "Bolfons;, of the N. Z>G.'S:% Hinemoas Recently "one
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 73. 10
146
more specimen from the Cooks Strait was sent me from the Dominion
Museum of Wellington. I did not myself find any specimens in the
dredgings which I undertook at Stewart Island in 1914. The species
has not been recorded from any other locality. There is no record
of. the depth in which it has been found, but it is evident that
the species belongs to the sublittoral region.
The measurements of one of the largest specimens in hand are
in mm: diameter 26, height 16, peristome 11, apical system 10,5.
Width of interambulacra at the ambitus 8 mm, of ambulacra 3,5
—4 mm. The interambulacral plates number 9—10; there are 6
Fig. 1. Apical system of Goniocidaris umbraculum. a. of a male specimen ; 4/1.
b. of a female specimen. 7,5/1.
ambulacral plates corresponding to each interambulacral plate at
the ambitus, only 4—5 below the ambitus, and close to the peri-
stome only 3. Test somewhat flattened above. There is a rather
broad naked median space in the interambulacra, somewhat sunk;
but it is not deeply grooved at the points where the horizontal
and the vertical sutures join one another; there is no groove at
the outer end of the horizontal sutures. The areoles are confluent
on the oral side, sometimes unto the 6th—Tth. The tubercles sur-
rounding the areoles hardly larger than those of the rest of the
tuberculated part of each piate; they hardly diminish in size to-
wards the naked median part, contrary to what is the case e. g.
in G. geranioides. The ambulacra have a fairly broad, naked, sunken
median part. There is a single small tubercle close inside the pri-
mary tubercle on each plate, at the lower border; at the ambitus
147
the plate opposite the suture between each two interambulacral
plates generally is higher than the rest of them and carries a tub-
ercle, sometimes nearly as large as the primary one, at the outer
edge, above the pores. There is only a very narrow ridge between
the pores of each pair, hardly showing any elevation. Figures of
the naked - test have been given by Clark (The Cidaridæ, Pl. X.
3—4), to which may be referred,
The apical system nearly as large as the peristome. The ocul-
ars are all exsert. The outline of the plates may be seen from
textfig. 1. The genital pores of the females are very large, situ-
ated at the outer corner of the genital plates; in the males they
are much smaller and are situated a good distance from the edge.
In both sexes they are covered by the surrounding spines, which
stand much closer here than on the inner part of the plate. —
The large female genital pores indicate that the eggs are large
and yolky,”) which leads to the suggestion that this species may
perhaps protect its brood as do so many other Cidarids of the ant-
aretic and subantarctic regions. The peristome is almost without
spines in the outer part, the plates being there rather high, and
the ambulacral pores accordingly fairly distant. In the inner part
the plates are very much lower, and the pores stand very close,
the two series of each ambulacrum forming together a distinct arch
at the mouth-edge. These inner plates are closely covered with spines.
The colour of the naked test is distinctly greenish on the aboral
side.
The radioles are rather short, generally only ”/2—/4 of the
diameter of the test; only in one of the specimens in hand they
slightly exceed the diameter of test. The oral radioles are only
little specialized, with slightly serrate edges; those at the ambitus
generally have a pair of coarse blunt thorns at the base; they are
slightly tapering, with somewhate serrate longitudinal ridges. The
upper radioles are quite short, widened at the point into a flat or
slightly concave disk, sometimes only small, sometimes very large
(Pl. VI, Figs. 1—2). Intact radioles, not worn or covered by for-
eign organisms (as they generally are) are found to have, espec-
") I have opened one of the alcoholic specimens and thus can assert
that the eggs are really large and yolky; the exact size cannot be given,
the preservation not being very satisfactory.
10"
148
ially in the lower part, a coat of woolly, calcareous hairs. The radi-
oles are generally slightly pinkish at the base,
The secondary spines are flattened, straight, slightly thickened
at the point; those on the aboral side are of a faint greenish tint.
Figures of "the pedicellariæ were given in my ,Ingolff-Echin-
oidea I, to which may be referred. It is to be noticed that the
large globiferous pedicellariæ, which are rather scarce in number,
are not placed on the naked, sunken part of the interambulacra,
as they are in G. geranioides and tubaria, but at the edge of the
tuberculated part, close to the horizontal sutures. They are rather
unlike the peculiar globose pedicellariæ of the typical Gonicidaris-
species. The stalk is not very short; it has no limb. Tridentate
pedicellariæ have not been observed. — The spieules of the tube-
feet do not afford marked specific characters. One tubefoot was
found to offer the curious anomaly of having a small sidebranch,
ending in a small disk like the main stem of the foot.
In his ,,Endeavour" Echinoderms (p. 104) H. L. Clark suggests
that the Cidarid from Tasmania which he refers to Goniocid. cly-
peata Dåd. may perhaps be identical with G. umbraculum. Dr. Ch.
Anderson, director of the Australian Museum, Sydney, having
kindly sent me two specimens of the Tasmanian species I can
positively assert that it is not identical with G. umbraculum. It is
a much more delicate form, very closely resembling the Japanese
G. clypeata, as stated by Clark. Whether it is really identical with
that species I shall not try to decide here; also I must refrain at
the present occasion from a discussion of the proper limits of the
difficult genus Goniocidaris.
2... Ogmocidaris Benhami n. g-. n. sp.
Pl. VI. Figs. 3—6: PI. VII, Figs. 179,
Porocidaris elegans Agass. W. B. Benham. 1909. Scientif. Res. N.Z.G.
Trawling Exped. 1907. Echinoderma. Rec. Canter-
bury"Musmlt2N pr 25:
This species, which was discovered by the New Zealand Gover-
ment Trawling Expedition (the ,,Nora Niven" Expedition) was re-
ferred by Benham to Porocidaris elegans Agass. Professor Ben-
ham having kindly sent me two specimens of the species, thus
affording me the opportunity of examining it, I must assert that it
149
is not at all identical with "Porocidaris" elegans.”) It represents
not only a hitherto undescribed species but it must even be made
the type of a new genus, though recalling in some important feat-
ures the genus Austrocidaris, which is, apparently, its nearest ally.
No specimens were taken by myself during my cruises in the
New Zealand seas, only some isolated radioles were found off
White Island, 55 fms., undoubtedly belonging to the same spec-
ies. Thus I have to base the description on the two specimens
placed at my disposal by Prof. Benham, to whom I beg to offer
my best thanks. I take the pleasure of dedicating this new spec-
ies to him.
Apical Amhbulacra Interambulacra Longest
Diameter. Height. system. Peristome. Width. Plates. Width. Plates. radioles.
220 11 10 8 2,5 33 95 T=7| =
519 10 95 8 = 657 30
The measurements are in mm. In specimen
a. none of the longer radioles were intact; spec-
imen .b. is preserved as an alcoholic specimen
and exact measurements of the ambulacral and
interambulacral areas therefore cannot be given.
Fhe test (Pl: VI, Figs. 4—6) is flattened
above and below, sligtly incurved at the oral
edge, the peristome being somewhat sunken.
Both ambulacral and interambulacral areas with Fig. 2. Part of ambu-
yde Sen 3 lacrum of Ogmocidaris
a distinct sunken midline. The interambulacral SEES
plates number 6-——7. The areoles are fairly
deep, only the three, small, lower ones confluent. No crenulation,
The scrobicular circle not very prominent, the tubercles of it being
only slightly larger than those outside, which are few, close set; those
towards the median side project irregularly into the sunken median
1) The correct name is Histocidaris elegans (Å. Ag.), in spite of Benham's
rejection of the generic name Histocidaris. He did so, relying on Agas-
siz? declaration that my method — using the microscopic characters of
the pedicellariæ as distinguishing characters of species and genera —
was unscientific. I do not think anybody would venture to maintain
this any more. But there is a.bit of nemesis here. If Benham had
taken the trouble to look at the pedicellariæ, he would at once have
seen that this species could not possibly be identical with f"Porocidaris”
elegans.
150
area which is otherwise sharply limited, fairly broad, with a distinct
corner at each horizontal suture. In the ambulacra (Fig 2) which
are flush with the test, the naked, sunken median area is quite
narrow, but sharply limited; on the oral side it is restricted to a
small, but distinct, groove at each horizontal suture. Each plate
carries a small tubercle at the lower corner inside the primary
one, which latter is not very prominent. The pores are oblique,
separated by an elevated wall.
The apical system (Fig. 3) is half h. d., flat. The oculars are
exsert; however in specimen a. Oc. III, and in specimen b. Oc. IV
3. 4.
Fig. 3. Apical system of Ogmocidaris Benhami. 2/1. — Fig. 4. Oral radioles of
Ogmocidaris Benhami. 8/1,
touches the periproct, while in both Oc. I very nearly reaches it.
The genital plates have a nearly straight outer edge, the outline
of the whole apical system is thus almost circular. The female
genital pores are large, close to the outer edge of the plate. (Both
specimens are females). The periproct is small, consisting of few
plates only. The whole of the apical system closely covered with
tubercles, excepting a fairly broad inner edge of the genital plates,
which remains bare. The peristome is covered only with few plates,
viz. 4—5 sparsely tuberculated ambulacral plates and 2—3 small,
weak interambulacral plates, which are widely excluded from the
mouth edge. The structure of the peristome upon the whole recalls
that of the genus Aporocidaris.
IS1
The radioles are long, ca. 1'/> h. d., slender, slightly tapering.
They are provided with finely serrated ribs, and the surface other-
wise covered with short, simple hairs. The oral radioles (Fig. 4)
are fairly distinctly serrated along the edges and may be slightly
curved; when worn, the serrations may be quite obsolete. The
secondary spines are fairly long, those round the radioles are flat-
tened, the rest of them more or less distinctly cvlindrical.
Only globiferous pedicellariæ are found (on the specimens in
hand, at least). The larger ones (Pl. VIII, Fig. 1) have fairly elong-
ate, narrow valves, with a very irregular, thorny meshwork on the
inner side, below the opening. There is no. endtooth. The stalk is
simple, without a limb. The smaller forms (Pl. VII, Fig. 2) have a
rather distinct endtooth. Possibly the larger forms, found in the
material available, do not in reality represent the large globiferous
pedicellariæ; this cannot be decided at present. But, at any rate,
there are all transitions between the two forms figured. — Spicules
ofmktheRtnbefeetkorktheRusualstype!
Colour of the test slightly greenish on the aboral side; the
radioles with a faint pinkish tint, mainly in their basal part.
The large genital pores indicate that this species has large eggs
and probably protects its brood.
It seems fairly evident that this form is related to the genus
Austrocidaris, with which it agrees in the characters of the sunken
median area of the ambulacra and interambulacra. Also the struct-
ure of the pores and the radioles is the same. On the other hand
it differs so markedly from that genus in the exsert oculars and
the covering of the peristome, as also in the structure of the pedi-
cellariæ, that it seems unjustifiable simply to refer it to that genus.
The character of the peristome recalls the genus Aporocidaris, but
the apical system is not of the character peculiar to that genus,
and also the pedicellariæ are different. I do not see any other
possibility than to establish a separate genus for it, the diagnosis
of which is as follows:
Ogmocidaris') n. g. Test low, height only half h. d. Interam-
bulacral plates 6—7; areoles rather deep. A sharply limited, naked,
P74
HOI IUOGR=Efiirrow:
152
sunk median area in both ambulacra and interambulacra. Ambul-
acra ca. ”/4 the width of the interambulacra.. 7—8 ambulacral
plates corresponding to one interambulacral plate at the ambitus.
Pores oblique, separated by an elevated wall. Apical system half
the h. d., peristome somewhat smaller. Oculars mainly exsert.
Plates of the peristome few, the interambulacral ones not reaching
the mouth edge. Radioles long and slender, ca. 1'/2 h. d. of test.
Larger secondary spines flattened, the ambulacral ones nearly cy-
lindrical. Large globiferous pedicellariæ (?) with elongate, flattened
valves, without an endtooth; the small globiferous pedicellariæ"
with a distinct endtooth. Tridentate pedicellariæ (apparently) wanting.
SR Crd ars ESPE
One more species of Cidarids occurs in the New Zealand seas.
In a dredging 10 miles N. W. of Cape Maria v. Diemen, 50 fms.
(/, 1915) I found a single specimen of a very young
Cidarid which is eåsily seen to be entirely different
from the two other New Zealand Cidarids.
The said specimen is 3 mm in diameter. There are
5—6 plates in the interambulacral series. No naked,
sunk median line. The radioles (Fig. 5) are short, the
upper ones only 2 mm long. They are very sharply and
coarsely thorny along the edges; also on the aboral
side there may be a distinct series of similar thorns,
ur Bet while the adoral side is nearly smooth. Secondary spines
ole of Cida- Very few and small. Some few small globiferous pedi-
rissp. %. cellariæ are found. on the peristome. They have no
endtooth (Pl. VIII, Fig. 3). The colour of test and radi-
oles is white; the apical system is faint greenish.
It is quite impossible to identify this young Cidarid with cert-
ainty, since its specific characters are not yet fully developed. The
character of the radioles would seem to indicate- that it is a new
species (— of course, the radioles described above are fully formed
ones, as is evident from the existence on them of the ostracum-
layer —). It is no use trying to trace out its relations, which could,
at present, be nothing but guess-work; we must wait for more
material. But the characters noted above will suffice for recog-
nizing the species, when more material comes to hand. The rather
153
large number of coronal plates developed already at this young
age (— the genital pores have not yet appeared —) indicates that
it is a form of small size.
4. FARE SEEren thetidis (HE: Clark).
Asthenosoma thetidis H.L. Clark. 1909. Notes on some Australian and
Indo-Pacific Echinoderms. Bull. M. Comp. Zool. LII-
p. 134.
Åræosoma — A.Agassiz & H.L. Clark. 1909. Hawaiian &
other Pacif. Echini. Echinothuridæ. Mem. Mus.
C. Zool. XXXIV. p. 176. P1.66, figs. 6— 17. PI: 68-70.
= — H. L. Clark. 1916. ,,Endeavourf" Echinoderms.
p:107.
Astropyga radiata F. Jeffr. Bell. 1917. British Antartic (,,Terra Nova")
Exped. 1910 Zoology. Vol. IV. 1. Echinoderma. p. 6.
This species was dredged by the "Terra Nova" Expedition 7
miles E. of North Cape, 70 fms. It was not taken in my own
dredgings in the sea to the North of New Zealand; but having had
the opportunity of examining the "Terra Nova" specimens in the
British Museum I can positively assert that the f"identification”
of them by Bell as Astropyga radiata is wrong. The merest glance
at the specimens shows that they are Echinothurids, and on a
closer examination they are easily seen to be identical with the
Australian Aræosoma thetidis (H. L. Clark).
To the description of this species, given in the works quoted, I
may add that in the New Zealand specimens I have found the
<dactylous" (globiferous) pedicellariæ, which Clark did not find
in the Australian specimens. They are three-valved and hardly dis-
tinguishable from those of A. Owstoni Mrtsn.
5. Notechinus novae-zealandiæ n. sp.
Pl. VI. Figs. 7—10; Pl VIII Figs. 4—5, 7—11.
Echinus angulosus Farquhar. 1898. Echinoderm Fauna of New Zea-
land. Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales. p. 319.
= = Benham. 1909. Scient. Res. N. Z. G. Trawling
Exped. 1907. Echinoderma. Rec. Canterbury Mus. I.
pN2S KPISXE Eje 5:
In my Report on the Echinoidea of the Swedish South Polar-
Expedition!) I called attention (p. 40, Note 2) to the fact that the
" 1) Wissensch. Ergebn. d. Schwed. Siidpolar Exp. 1901—3. Bd. VI. 1910.
154
Echinus . angulosus, recorded from New Zealand by Benham (and
Farquhar), has nothing with that species to do but represents a
new species of the genus Notechinus. For want of sufficient material
I did not then characterize and name the species. Having now
partly myself collected some specimens of this species, partly re-
ceived some more specimens from Mr. W. R. B. Oliver and from
Captain Bollons I here give the description of this new form.
Apical Ambulacra Interambulacra Longest
Diameter. Height. system. Peristome. Width. Plates. Width. Plates. spines.
mm mm mm mn mm mm mm
40 27 i 12 9 33—3414 22— 25
32 18 5,5 11,5 8 30-31 ES 20 5
24 15 6 SKE 6 22 8 15 6
117 9 4 T 4 22 Sys ls 4
IS 7 3 fa) SES 45 12 3
The shape of the test is fairly regularly hemispherical, the oral
side being flattened, slightly sunken at tne peristome. The circum-
ference is round; in one specimen the interporiferous area of the
ambulacra slightly prominent.
The primary tubercles of the ambulacra form very regular,
close series; on the oral side they stand so close together that
they must be said to be confluent, being separated only by a quite
narrow ridge, without any room for even the smallest tuberecle; on
the aboral side they are less close, some few miliary tubercles
being found between them, but in the larger specimens they are
generally confluent nearly throughout the whole ambulacrum, so
that only between a few of the uppermost tubercles a series of
miliary grains (carrying pedicellariæ) may be found. In the larger
specimens the boss of the tubercle is not quite round, being dis-
tinctly cut off at the edge turning against the lower pore of the
corresponding plate (Fig. 6). The median area is narrow, closely
covered by secondary and military
tubercles, the former being about
half the size of the primary ones
and forming a pair of distinct long-
itudinal series. Some small second-
ary tubercles are found also among
the pores.
I 3 Fig. 6. Part of Ambulacrum of
n the interambulacra the are- Notechinus novæ zealandiæ. 8/1.
155
oles of the primary tubercles are confluent on the oral side, but
not above the ambitus, even in the larger specimens. The second-
ary tubercles are generally rather large, almost as large as the
primary ones; they form, inside the primary series, one very dis
tinct, nearly complete series, and, at the ambitus, a second se-
ries, shorter or longer, according to the size
of the specimen. Qutside the primary tub-
ercle there are at the ambitus in the larger
specimens one or two transverse series con- ("
sisting each of two larger secondary tub-
ercles, plates with one or two such series
alternating more or less regularly. These
outer secondary tubercles do not form very
regular vertical series. On the plates with
only one series of outer secondary tubercles ABE ER EL SANDER iDø
the primary and secondary tubercles together The periproct slightly re-
form a very distinct horizontal series through- PSSESE Feer. OR
out the whole breadth of the plate; in those
plates which have a double series of outer tubercles the transverse
series is less regular. The interambulacral areas upon the whole
are very closely covered by the tubercles, no naked median space
being left.
The apical system (Fig. 7) is remarkable through its small size,
occupying, in the larger specimens, scarcely more than ”/6 of the
h. d. The genital and ocular plates are generally closely tubercul-
ated; Ocular I is insert. The madreporite is.distinctly elevated.
The periproct is somewhat oblong, the anal opening being excent-
ficalsFsituated «more or. less close fo; the edge, off OC. I; there is a
more or less complete circle of outer, larger plates, the one oppo-
site the anal opening (adjoining Genital IIN), representing the anal
plate, being somewhat larger than the rest. They are all thick and
somewhat elevated, all perfectly naked. Inside the outer circle are
some small, generally somewhat elongated plates, surrounding the
anal opening. In the largest specimen some smaller plates have
appeared outside the circle of larger plates, the anal plate thus
being separated from the edge of the periproct.
156
The colour of the test is of a uniform grey, with a slight
greenish tint;") the pore areas and the tubercles are white.
The spines are very short, rather coarse, forming a dense, uni-
form coat. They are dark green, more or less distinctly white-
tipped, or sometimes with a faint indication of violet at the tip.
The spines at the edge of the peristome not curved. The secondary
spines generally somewhat darker than the primary ones; they are
slightly thickened at the point.
The peristome is entirely naked as in N. magellanicus, hardly
with a single bihamate spicule, while such spicules are found
numerously in the gills. The buccal plates carry numerous ophice-
phalous and triphyllous pedicellariæ but apparently no tridentate
ones.
The tubefeet with only very few bihamate spicules or entirely
without any spicules. å
Pedicellariæ. The globiferous pedicellariæ are of two kinds,
as in N. magellanicus, a larger and a smaller form, both with double
poison glands. The valves of :he larger form (Pl. VII, Figs. 4—5)
are rather short and robust, with 1—2, møre rarely 3, teeth on
each side of the blade. - The small form (Pl. VII, Figs. 7—8) has
only one tooth on each side. The small form is found in great
numbers in the larger specimens, while in the smaller specimens
they "are"very scarce: "The" tridentate pedicellarræt (PFRVI FREIE R0)
are small and inconspicuous; the valve is narrow, with a slightly
widened smaller or larger end part with finely serrate edges. Ophice-
phalous and triphyllous pedicellariæ (Pl. VII, Figs. 10—11) offer no
features of special value as specific characters. The same holds
good of the sphæridiæ.
One of the specimens' (the smallest, 13 mm h. d.) is infested
with a parasitic snail, three specimens of which are found attached
at the border of the peristome.
OF this species I collected one specimen myself in Paterson
Inlet, Stewart Island, at a depth of 10—30 meters. A few more
specimens, dredged in the Foveaux Strait at ca. 40 meters depth,
were given to me by Captain Bollons, as also one from off the
The colour of test and spines is rather similar to that of Parechinus
angulosus, which explains the identification with that species.
157
East coast of the South Island, from a depth of ca. 40—100 meters.
Further two large specimens, taken at Shag Point, Otago, under
stones at low water, were given me by Mr. W. R. B. Oliver (Auck-
land). These localities, together with those given by Farquhar
and Benham, tend to show that in New Zealand this species is
confined to the seas round the South Island, the most northern
locality, from where it is recorded, being Cape Campbell, at the
entrance of the Cooks Strait. While thus it does not appear to occur
to the North of the Cooks Strait, I can give evidence of its being
further distributed in the southern seas of the New Zealand region.
During my trip to the Auckland- and Campbell-Islands I was
very anxiously looking out for Echinoids. Although not one Echin-
oid was found there by the New Zealand Expedition, the occur-
rence of at least one species at the Campbell Island has been
established by Filhol, who records Echinus margaritaceus from
Perseverance Harbour. That this identification was wrong could
hardly be doubted, but the specimens having apparently been lost
(Comp. my Report on the Echinoidea of the Swedish South Polar
Exped. p. 50) it could not be ascertained, which species it really
was that he had found there. To my great disappointment my
dredgings in the Perseverance Harbour did not yield a single spec-
imen of any Echinoid, and neither did I find any at the Auckland
Islands. I was then most agreably surprised in receiving later on
from the (now late) chief engineer of the ,,Amokura", Mr. Pyke,
a specimen of an Echinoid which he had got at the next visit of
the ,,Amokura" to the Campbell Island from the shepherds living
at Perseverance Harbour, and which had been found thrown up
on the beach in the inner part of Perseverance Harbour. It proved
to be a young specimen of Notechinus novæ-zealandiæ. There is
then every reason to suppose that this was the species, which Fi l-
hol mistook for ,,Echinus margaritaceus". It may thus be expected i
that this species will also be found at the Auckland Islands. Further
I can state that it occurs likewise at Macquarie Island. At the
Dominion Museum of Wellington I was told by Mr. Hamilton
that, during his visit there with the Australian Antarctic Expedition
(1911—13) he had found a pair of sea-urchins cast up on the
rocky shores; the specimens, which were kindly submitted to me,
proved to be likewise Notechinus novæ-zealandiæ. — From a zoo-
158
geographical point of view the occurrence of the species at the Camp-
bell and. Macquarie Islands seems very natural.
Among the specimens which I received from Captain Bollons
there is one specimen from off the East Coast of the South Island of
New Zealand, ca. 40——100 meters, which differs rather conspicu-
ously from all the other specimens and cannot simply be ident-
ified with them (PI. VI, Fig. 16). It is distinctly higher than the
other specimens, 19 mm high, by 28 mm h. d. There are 25
ambulacral plates and 17 interambulacral plates in a series. The
”apical system is 6,5 mm, the peristome 9 mm. The arrangement
of the tubercles is as in the typical form,
but they are upon the whole hardly so large
as there. The most "conspicuoustditterence
from the typical form is the colour of the
test which is a uniform reddish-green. Also
the globiferous pedicellariæ differ from those
of the tvpical form in the blade of the larger
form being longer and more slender (PI. VII,
Fig. 6). The tubefeet contain fairly numer-
ous bihamate spicules. — This specimen
Fig. 8. Apical system of shows the remarkable abnormality that Gen-
Slglv Abner sr, ital IV (or Ocular V?). ist "divided mo ERE
plates (Fig. 8).
On account of these differences in the shape and colour of
the test, and in the large globiferous pedicellariæ, it seems to me
unjustifiable simply to unite this form with the typical form. Pos-
sibly it represents a distinct species. On the base of the single,
dried, not very well preserved specimen in hand, I do, however,
not venture to establish it as a separate species but shall prefer,
until more and better material is available, to regard it as a variety
only of N. novæ-zealandiæ.
This new species of the genus Notechinus is easily disting-
uished from N. magellanicus through several characters, especially
the colour of both test and spines, the much smaller size of the
apical system and the, generally, distinctly larger number of plates
(as seen by a comparison of the table, given above, with that of
159
N. magellanicus, given in my report on the Echinoidea of the Swed-
ish South Polar Expedition, p. 37). Also the tuberculation is rather
different in the two species, especially the primary ambulacral
tubercles are much less confluent in N. magellanicus than in the pre-
sent species. Finally the large globiferous pedicellariæ are conspic-
uously different in the two species.
The Var. novæ-amsterdamiæ Doåderlein of N. magellanicus would
appear to stand nearer to the New Zealand species than to the typ-
ical form of N. magellanicus, this variety being distinguished by its
greater number of ambulacral plates and the smaller size of its
apical system. Dåderlein (Echinoideen d. Deutschen Tiefsee-Ex-
peditonkps230) gives” fora "specimen of 22 mm hd E18"nter-
ambulacral and 26 ambulacral plates. In a specimen of 25 mm h.d.
which I have received from Prof. Dåderlein, I find 22 ambul-
acral and 16 interambulacral plates; the apical system is only 5
mm in diameter. It is evident that in these regards this variety is
more in conformity with the New Zealand species than with the
typical N. magellanicus. But then the colour of the test is distinctly
reddish as in magellanicus, although lighter, as stated by Dåder-
lein, and the globiferous pedicellariæ are notably slenderer than
in the New Zealand species. The var. movæ-amsterdamiæ thus oc-
cupies an intermediate - position between the two species, but is
distinctly different from both. I should, indeed, be more inclined to
regard it as a separate species.
The discovery of a new species of this hitherto monotypic ge-
nus is of considerable interest from a classificatory point of view,
giving additional proof that Dåderlein was perfectly right in
establishing a separate genus for the species magellanicus; the oc-
currence of two kinds of globiferous pedicellariæ in this genus is
especially interesting; the fact that both species agree in this feat-
ure shows that it is a character of real value. Also from a zoo-
geographical point of view it is of considerable interest to find
this genus represented by related species in the New Zealand and
the South American seas.
160
6. Pseudechinus albocinctus (Hutton).
Pl. VI: Figs. 11—15; Pl VII. Fig. 24.
Echinus albocinctus. Hutton, 1882. Catalogue Echinod. New Zealand,
: plz:
— magellanicus Hutton, 1876. Trans. N. Z. Inst. IX. p.' 362.
— — Farquhar. 1898. Echinoderm Fauna of N. Zea-
land, p. 320.
Pseudechinus albocinctus. Th. Mortensen, 1903. Ingolf-Echinoidea. I.
p:1041106;178FPISKIEMEi ss EDR 25:
Echinus — P. de Løriol. 1914. Notes pour servir å Pétude des
Echinodermes. 2. Ser. II. p. 18. Pl. TFigss10a=e!
Pseudechinus — Dåderlein. 1906. Echinoiden d. deutschen Tief-
see-Exped:.p:.231, Taf: XXIX TS: KV S FEE VRE:
— — Benham. 1908. An errøneous Echinodermal ident-
ification. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 8. Ser. I.
p- 107.
Echinus — —… 1909. Echinoderma. ”NÆZÆGSM raw
ing "Expedsps27:
Of this fine species, hithertø so poorly represented in the col-
lections of the various Museums, I have been fortunate to secure
a rich material, partly from Stewart Island, partly from Queen
Charlotte Sound, in which latter locality it was very common. I
then take the opportunity of giving some figures of this species,
the only figures existing (Loriol, loc. cit., Då'derlerintloctert)
not being very satisfactory, though especially the latter is by no
means bad. |
It seems unnecessary to give a complete description of the
species, the descriptions found in the works quoted giving suffic-
ient information of its specific characters. Only some measurements
must be given. Also a few remarks are to be made.
se i Apical Ambulacra — Interambulacra
Diameter. Height. System. Periproct. Peristome. Width. Plates. Width. Plates. -
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
37 25 8,5 4 13 8,5 27 — 28 SED ER
35 20 8 3 13 HANNES 13 18
32 19 8 3,5 ie 7 22 13 Fl
31 19 8 3 lse T | 22 13 16
30 16 7,5 3 10,5 ne e20 2] 12 16
30 17,5 7,5 3 11 7 23—24 12 16
15 8,5 45 25 6 — 15—16 — iz
8 4 3 1,5 3,5 — ll STE 11
4 3 2,2 1 2,5 — 9 — 9
161
To the description of the tuberculation should be added that
the areoles of the primary tubercles in both ambulacra and inter-
ambulacra are confluent on the oral side, generally unto the ambitus.
A remarkable feature is observed on the tubercles, viz. a sort
of fine crenulation, produced by a circle of dark coloured
grains along the edge of the ring (or the ,,parapet of the platform"
in the Terminology of Bather ,Triassic
Echinoderms of Bakonv", 1909, p. 61). This
may probably have nothing to do with ge-
nuine crenulation, but, at any rate, it is
well worth noticing. The same feature is to
be observed in Notechinus magellanicus, but
not in N. novæ-zealandiæ.
Dåderlein states that one Ocular is
insert. The single specimen which he has
examined must have been exceptional in Fis. 9. Apical system of
= s Pseudechinus albocinctus.
this regard; in my material I find only very 38/1.
rarely Oc. I just touching the periproct; the
rule is that all Oculars are exsert. As a rule there is only one
primary tubercle at the inner edge of each genital plate, besides some
secondary tubercles. The periproct is small (comp. measurements)
and affords a very characteristic specific mark in the anal plate
carrying one rather large tubercle; only very rarely it is lacking.
Sometimes also a few of the other periproctal plates carry a tub-
ercle(Eig 19).
Regarding the peristome Dåderlein maintains that it is not
quite naked, as stated by Loriol and myself. Here again the spec-
imen studied by Dåderlein must have been exceptional. It is a
rule that the peristome is quite naked, all my specimens are devoid
of plates in the peristome, except of course the buccal plates. One
specimen only presents the interesting abnormality that im one
radius the buccal plates have been reduplicated, a pair of supple-
mentary plates, each carrying a tubefoot, lying outside the primary
pairhonelolfthem close ”to"fhe "latter, thefothertnearertheledgerof
the peristome. Also the primary pair of buccal plates in this radius
is slightly abnormal, the right plate being divided into two and de-
void of a tubefoot. On this plate a sphæridia is found in the usual
dense covering of ophicephalous and triphyllous pedicellariæ.
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd 73. 11
162
Regarding the pedicellariæ a few facts may be stated. The
globiferous pedicellariæ have double glands. I find that valves with
a tooth only on one side and such, having a small one also on
the other side, are found almost equally often. In some cases I
have found globiferous pedicellariæ with smaller head and longer
stalk than the usual ones; but they are otherwise alike, and there
is no such conspicuous difference between them, that one can dis-
tinguish between two different kinds of globiferous pedicellariæ as
in Notechinus.…. Among the ophicephalous pedicellariæ some have
much longer valves (Pl. VIII. Fig. 24) than others. It is evidently
such an elongated form which has been figured by Dåderlein
(Op. cit. Taf. XLVI, Fig. 8.i) under the name of a tridentate ped-
jcellaria. | É
No spicules are found in the tubefeet. The gills contain a fair
number of delicate, fenestrated plates.
The specimens from Stewart Island have, upon the whole, a more
reddish colour on the primary spines, which are also rather shorter
than in the specimens from Queen Charlotte Sound. The differ-
ence is, however, so unimportant that it is hardly necessary to
speak of these forms as local variations. The smallest specimens
in hand, 7—10 mm h. d., have the basal part of the primary spines
more greenish-brown, while in the larger specimens the colour is
purple, which, together with the white tips, makes this species one
of the most beautiful Echinoids. :
The species has not been recorded from farther North than
Wanganui (de Loriol, Op. cit.), and thus appears to be mainly
confined to the region from Cooks Strait to Stewart Island.
H. L. Clark (Hawaiian a. o. Pacific Echini. The Pedinidæ. . .
Echinidæ ..., p. 274)") has come to the result from the study of
some bare tests of albocinctus, that it cannot be distinguished from
Notechinus (or, as he names it, Parechinus) magellanicus; at most,
he will concede to it the rank of a variety of the said species.
In the test he cannot find any differences between the two forms,
and the distinguishing characters, afforded by the globiferous ped-
icellariæ, he disregards. I agree, of course, that when naked tests
of the two species are compared, the general resemblance is strik-
") Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. XXXIV, 1912.
163
ing, especially because the coloration of the test is so very alike.
In the tuberculation there is certainly no very great difference,
though especially the primary interambulacral tubercles on the oral
side are more distinctly confluent (and not separated by miliary
tubercles) in albocinctus than is the case in magellanicus. But
then the apical system affords striking differences, the genital and
ocular plates of magellanicus being covered by numerous tubercles,
while in a/bocinctus they carry only one single larger tubercle and
some few miliaries. Oc. I is insert in magellanicus, exsert in albo-
cinctus; the anal plate is naked in magellanicus, while in albocinc-
tus it Carries one prominent tubercle. Also the size of the apical
system and the periproct is different, being distinctly smaller in
albocinctus as seen from the measurements of albocinctus given here,
compared with those of magellanicus given in my Report on the
Echimoideatof "the: "Swedish South Polar Exped' p:"37:" Then the
colour of the spines is strikinglv different and finally, in spite of
the doubt expressed by Clark as to the constancy of the char-
acters of the pedicellariæ (without his having had the opportunity
of studying them himself), the globiferous pedicellariæ are distinctly
different, both .in the structure of the valves and through the fact
that in magellanicus there are two different kinds of these pedicel-
lariæ, in a/bocinctus only one kind.
There can thus not be the slightest doubt that albocinctus is
quite distinct from magellanicus. Whether it is also correct to place
the two species in different genera, is not so certain. The only es-
sential difference between the two genera, Notechinus and Pseud-
echinus, is, in fact, that of the globiferous pedicellariæ. Since I have
now found, on the rich material now at my disposal, that the oc-
currence "of a tooth on both sides of the blade in albocinctus is
by no means so very exceptional, I agree that the distinction is
not very sharp. However, I think it advisable to retain the two
genera for the present, especially in view of the fact that we know
now at least two distinct species of each of them, which are both
in perfect conformity, as regards the said characters of the pedicel-
lariæ. The final proof of the validity of the two genera must be
afforded by the study of their larvæ. If the larvæ prove to belong
to the same main type I would hardly think the distinction of the
two genera maintainable. In that case Notechinus becomes a syno-
11%
164
nym of Pseudechinus, which latter name is the older and must be
retained. To refer a/bocinctus and magellanicus, with their allied
species, to the genus Parechinus (or Protocentrotus), as is done by
H. L. Clark, is out of question, the plated buccal membrane and
the quite different type of the globiferous pedicellariæ being too
important characters to be disregarded. Perhaps also the fcrenul-
ation" may prove a character of importance. Whether there is in
reality any nearer relation between Parechinus (Protocentrotus) and
Pseudechinus the study of their larval forms may disclose,
7... Pseudechinus Huttoni Benham.
Pl. VI. Figs. 17—19; Pl. VII, Figs. 12—18.
Salmacis globator.') Hutton, 1878 Notes on some New Zealand Echinod.
Trans NSZSInstitutePXREpSS06:
— =— Farquhar, 1898. Echinoderm Fauna of New
Zealand, p. 318.
— = Hutton, 1904. Index Faunæ N. Zealandiæ. p. 288.
Pseudechinus Huttoni. Benham. 19068. An erroneous Echinod. identif.
Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 8. Ser. I. p. 104.
Echinus — = 1909. Echinoderma N. Z. G. Trawling
ExpÆRee! CanterbMus IS 2 DS 27:
To Professor Benham is due the credit of having assigned
this form, so long mistaken for Salmacis globator, to its true pos-
ition,”) within the genus Pseudechinus; the fact that he was later
on scared by the authority of A. Agassiz to disavow himself and
to declare the microscopical characters of no value for distinguish-
ing genera, and therefore put it into that old lumber-room, the
genus" Echinus, does not deprive him of the honour of being
the first to apprehend this interesting species correctly.
To the very careful description, given by Benham, only some
') Studer. Ubersicht iiber die wåhrend d. Reise S. M. S. Corvette Gazelle
um die Erde 1874—76 ges. Echinoidea. Monatsber. Akad. d. Wiss. Berlin,
1880, p. 874) quotes the name wrongly as Arbacia globator.
”) Provided the crenulation of Ps. albocinetus is not genuine, in which
case the present species, in which no such crenulation is to be observed,
could hardly be congeneric with the former. In that case it would re-
present a new genus.
165
few remarks need to be added; but figures and measurements, which
have not hitherto been given, are to be supplied here.
Diameter. Height. system. Periproct. Peristome. Amb. plates. I.amb. plates. Spines.
mm mm mm mm mm mm
56 42 13 6,5 16,5 35 24—25 10
50 36 12 6 13: BOE STEEN T2 02] £z
50 38 12 6 15 TEDE 20 =
49 35 12 6 13 33 26 6
40 30 9 45 3 3031 22 6
39 27 9 45 14 DEDE 21 9
31 21 7 4 12 STEDE 23 ==
Ås seen by these measurements, there is a considerable vari-
ation in shape as well as in the number of plates, as exemplified
to a striking degree by the two specimens of 50 mm h. d. —
When, moreover, the colour is different, one having the character-
istic pink tubercles with a slight greenish and pinkish tint on the
middle of the plates, the other being perfectly white on test, tub-
ercles and spines, one would be inclined to think them to be two
distinct species. But as there are all transitional forms, and espec-
ially the very characteristic arrangement of the tubercles being
the same, it must be conceded that they belong to the same spec-
ies, which is, however, somewhat more than usually variable.
Concerning the tuberculation, attention may be called to the
rather conspicuous feature that on the oral side the confluent are-
oles of the tubercles in the same transverse row produce slightly
elevated, vertical, separating walls. In the ambulacra also such
horizontal walls are found, while in the interambulacra the trans-
verse series of the consecutive plates are far from one another
and separated by miliary tubercles, excepting only two or three of
the lowermost plates. "Crenulationf as that seen in albocinctus
is not observed.
The peristome is rather variable in size: it is perfectly naked,
excepting the buccal plates which are covered with a dense coat
of ophicephalous pedicellariæ with a few triphyllous ones among
them.
The apical system (Fig. 10) is rather naked, sometimes distinctly
elevated; the genital plates generally carry only three larger tub-
ercles, close to the inner edge, and a very few miliary tubercles.
Ocular I is generally broadly insert; in one case, in an otherwise
166
quite typical specimen, it is exsert. The anal area is covered by
numerous small plates, among which the central plate is hardly
distinguishable; it is sometimes provided with a small tubercle.
In.one specimen the very curious anomaly, shown in fig. 11, is ob-
served. In another, large specimen the madreporite occupies both
Gense Fandks?
The spines round the peristome straight or only very slightly
curved. The miliary spines somewhat thickened in the point, often
Figs. 10—11. Apical system of Pseudechinus Huttoni. Fig.11 shows the anomaly of
Genitals 4 and 5 having coalesced so as to push Ocular V entirely out of its normal
place. On the other hand Genital I is divided into two parts.
Fis 10 MEE 6
also slightly swollen below the point (Pl. VIL, Fig. 17). (InPs'
albocinctus they are hardly so much widened at the point.)
The pedicellariæ (Pl. VII, Figs. 12—16, 18) agree very closely
with those of Ps. albocinctus; it is however, to be emphasized that
in the present species the globiferous pedicellariæ appear to have
constantly the lateral tooth developed only on one side. As in albo-
cinctus elongate ophicephalous pedicellariæ are found, which form
a transition to the tridentate type. — Spicules are found only ex-
ceptionally in the tubefeet. The gills contain numerous fine irre-
gularly branched or fenestrated plates.
Regarding the colour, Benham states that, though some spec:
imens have white spines, all have the tubercles pinkish orange. I
find, however, that in some specimens also the test and the tub-
ercles are perfectly white — even so in a specimen which I
have received from Benham himself and which is otherwise
167
quite typical. The exquisite and characteristic pinkish coloration of
spines and tubercles is accordingly no reliable specific character.
Two specimens of this species were dredged in Paterson Inlet,
Stewart Isl., in 10—30 meters ””/x4 1914. Further several spec-
imens were given me by Captain Bollons, who had dredged
them off the East coast of the South Island in depths of ca. 40—
100 meters.
The species appears to be confined to the seas off the South
Island of New Zealand.
lt seems evident that the species described by.H. L. Clark
in his Report on the Echinoderms of the ,,Endeavourf (p.111, Pl.
XLI, Figs. 1—3) under the name of Parechinus notius is very
nearly related to Ps. Huttoni, representing an Australian form of
the genus Pseudechinus. That it has no nearer relation to the ge-
nus Parechinus is evident from the characters of its buccal mem-
brane (perfectly naked, excepting the buccal plates) and the glob-
iferous pedicellariæ (carrying a lateral tooth only on one side of
the blade). That it is distinct from Ps. Huttoni would appear from
the character of the apical system (all oculars excert), the different
colour of the test (pale brown) and the shape of the ophicephalous
pedicellariæ (valves not at all constricted).
It is of considerable interest that this genus, otherwise known
only from the New Zealand seas, thus has a representative also in
the Australian seas (off the S. E. coast).
8. Pseudechinus variegatus n. sp.
Pl. VI. Figs. 20—21 ; Pl. VII. Figs. 19—23.
In some dredgings off the North of New Zealand a few small
Echinoids were taken which, evidently, represent a new species
of the genus Pseudechinus. Unfortunately all the specimens are
immature, so that an adequate description of the species cannot
be given; but the characters shown by the specimens available
will, I think, suffice for recognizing the species, so that I have
thought it justifiable to establish the species, in spite of the insuf-
ficient material.
Apical Anal Number of plates Longest
Diameter. Height. system. area. Peristome. Ambulacra. I.ambulacra. Spines.
mm mm mm mm mm mm
8 45 2,5 1 3,5 lø=12 12 15
6,5 4,5 2,2 1 3 I! 10 2
168
The test is low, as in albocinctus of corresponding sizes (comp.
measurements). The tuberculation is rather coarse; the secondary
tubercles are considerably smaller than the primary ones, but fairly
numerous, leaving no naked median space, while in specimens of
a corresponding size of albocinctus they are as yet few, the median
Figs. 12—13. Interambulacra of Ps. variegatus (12) and of a young Ps. albocinctus,
of 8 mm diameter (13). 15/1. i
Figs. 11—15. Ambulacra of Ps. variegatus (14) and of a young Ps. albocinctus,
8 mm (15). 75/1.
part of both areas remaining bare. The arrangement of the second-
ary tubercles is somewhat irregular and does not convey the im-
pression that the tubercles of the adult specimens will form trans-
verse series. There is a faint indication of the same sort of crenu-
lation as in albocinctus. (Figs. 12 —15).
Each genital plate carries one prominent tubercle at the inner
edge. All the oculars are exsert, but Oc. I reaches fairly near to
the edge of the periproct, which appears to indicate that in the
adult specimens it may be insert. The central plate is large, smooth.
sted]
169
The anal opening is excentric, close to the edge (Fig. 16). In the
specimen of 6,5 mm h. d. the genital openings have just appeared,
in that of 8 mm h. d. they have apparently not yet begun to form.
A darker coloured (green or reddish) spot is found on each genital
plate on the place of the future genital pore (or just outside it).
Otherwise the genital and ocular plates are white, the periproctal
plates green.
The test is somewhat variegated, white with green or greyish-
green spots. The tubercles are white or greyish-green.
The spines are short, only ”/s or "4 of the h. d., hardly taper-
ing towards the point, which has a small central thorn; at the
edge of the peristome they are distinctly widened, almost clubshaped,
slightly curved. They are white, more or less distinctly banded with
redbrown. The secondary spines (Pl. VII, Fig. 20) are conspicuously
widened at the point, sometimes also widened below the point as
invesÆFTuttont:
The peristomial membrane, as well as the tubefeet, contain
some bihamate spicules, the gills are richly provided with delicate,
fenestrated plates and more or less irregular spicules.
khelpedicellariræ (PI VIL” Figs "19 "21-23 ) Fin the ”mainas
those of albocinctus; no samples of globiferous pedicellariæ with a
lateral tooth on each side of the blade were observed, nor have I
found the large form of ophicephalous pedicellariæ.
The species was found at Three Kings Isl., 65 fms. (2 specimens)
and 10 miles N. W. of Cap Maria van Diemen, 50 fms. (1 spec-
imen) %/1 1915. Further two specimens, dredged W. of Cuvier Isl.,
35 fms., were received from Captain Bollons.
One of the specimens from Three Kings Isl. is infested with a
parasitic organism, which may be a Gastropod; but the preserv-
ation does not allow determining with certainty what it really is.
This species evidently is nearest related to Ps. albocinctus, but
it differs so conspicuously from it in the tuberculation, the size
and shape of the spines and in the colour of test and spines that
it is out of question that they could be identical. Also it is note-
worthy that the genital openings have begun to form in a specimen
of 6,5 mm of variegatus, while in albocinctus they have not begun
to form in a specimen of 8 mm h. d. and, apparently, have only
just been formed in a specimen of 15 mm h.d. This would appear
170
to indicate that variegatus is, upon the whole, of smaller size than
albocinctus. — With Ps. Huttoni this species is, evidently, more dis-
tantly related.
9. Pseudechinus grossularia (Studer).
Amblypneustes grossularia. Studer. 1880. Ubersicht d. wåhrend d. Reise
S. M. S. Gazelle 1874—76 ges. Echinoiden. Mo-
natsber. d. Akad. d. Wiss. Berlin: py8753 Takes
— — Th. Mortensen. 1904. The Danish Exped. to
Siam 1899—1900. Echinoidea. I. Kgl. Danske Vid.
Selsk:"Skæ 7. R. 1, p 1055 PIAVI 2183 EEVE
1552:
— — "H.L. Clark: 1912: Hawaiian "andfothersPaerhe
Echini. The-Pedinide VST em noplemnidæR
Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. XXXIV. p. 326.
Through the kindness of Prof. R. Hartmeyer I have been
able to reexamine the type and only known specimen of Studer's
Amblypneustes grossularia which has so long puzzled the Echino-
logists. The cursory examination of it which I have previously had
the opportunity of undertaking in the Berlin Museum (Op. cit.),
disclosed the important fact that it has not four pairs of pores to
each ambulacral plate, as stated by Studer, but only three, and
made me doubt that it could really be an Amblypneustes. The care-
ful examination, which I have now been able to undertake, has
shown that it is, indeed, no Amblypneustes, but belongs to the
genus Pseudechinus, being a close. relation of Pseudechinus Huttoni
— as, indéed, already suggested by Studer himself, who states
(Op. cit. p. 874): ,,Vielleicht ist diese Art identisch mit der von
Hutton angefihrten Arbacia!) globator, von welcher Hutton
genau die gleiche Fårbung angiebt, welche von der der supponier-
ten Art bedeutend abweicht".
To the detailed description given by Studer a few supple-
mentary remarks may be given. First of all it should be pointed
out that there are no sutural pores; indeed, I do not understand,
how Studer has come to state the presence of these pores along
the ambularcal sutures, no more than I understand, how he has
found four pairs of pores to each ambulacral plate. There are 22
ambulacral, 18 interambulacral plates in the type specimen, which
measures 20 mm h.d. 18 mm in height. No crenulation is seen
") A lapsus calami for Salmacis.
Url
on the tubercles. The genital plates carry one larger tubercle
near the inner edge; genital pores only beginning to develop, dis-
tinct only in one of the plates. Ocular pores indiscernible ; Ocular
I is broadly insert. The central plate is smooth, fairly large. Hardly
a single miliary tubercle to be observed on the whole apical system
(Fig. 17). The buccal plates carry a number of ophicephalous ped-
icellariæ (probably also triphyllous; this cannot be ascertained de-
finitely, most of these pedicellariæ having been rubbed off.")
Fig. 16. Apical system of Ps. variegatus. "5/1.
Fig. 17. Apical system of Ps. grossularia. ?/1.
— Regarding the pedicellariæ I may refer to the description and
figures given in the ,,Siam-Echinoidea". No tridentate pedicellariæ
are found in the type specimen. The tubefeet contain fairly numer-
ous bihamate spicules.
It is easily seen that this species is nearly related to Pseud-
echinus Huttoni, with which it agrees especially in the colour of
fest and spines. That it is, however, a distinct species is evident
enough. It differs from Huttoni in its nearly globular shape and
in the scarcer tuberculation; further, the apical system is different,
the genital plates being more bare than in Huttoni. Also the fact
that genital pores have not yet been formed at a size of 20 mm
h. d., while in Huttoni they are developed already in specimens
ofKonly IS mm hd) is a noteworthy "difference: And then "the
faet that -Huttoni is known only from the seas off the South Is-
") This feature also conspicuously distinguishes this form from Ambly-
pneustes, in which (— as also in Holopneustes —) upon the whole
nothing but the buccal tubefeet is found on the buccal plates and on
the peristomial membrane.
172
land is of importance; it is highly improbable that this notable
form could have been entirely overlooked in the Northern Seas, and
there is not the slightest reason why the species should have such
a remarkably disrupted distribution, occurring all round the South
Island to reappear only at the northernmost extremity of the whole
area.
This type of Echinoids, the genus Pseudechinus, which appears
to be confined to the New Zealand seas, thus has been shown to
have undergone a rich special;zation here, being represented by no
less than four different species, two in the Southern, two in the
Northern region of this area. That these species form two distinct
groups, albocinctus and variegatus on one side, Huttoni and gros-
sularia on the other side, is evident. It is, indeed, very well pos-
sible that they should rather form two separate genera.
10... Evechinus chloroticus (Val.).
Echinus (Psammechinus) chloraticus. Hutton. 1872. Catalogue Echin-
nod. New Zealand. p. Il.
Evechinus chloroticus. A. Agassiz, 1872. Rev. of Echini. p. 128, 502.
BIELVAbSEr2S 72
— — H. Farquhar. 1897. A contribution to the history
of New Zealand Echinoderms. Journ. Linn. Soc. Zool-
SAVE PP 1188 PISA ME 90]
— — H. Farquhar. 1894. Notes on New Zealand Echin-
oderms. Trans. N. Zealand Inst. XXVII. p. 194.
— = H.Farquhar. 1898. On the Echinoderm Fauna
of New Zealand. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales. p. 320.
Heliocidaris chloroticus. Th. Mortensen. 1903. Ingolf-Echinoidea. I. p.
KEDLER HED ODENSE ØE 20) SPI
—= — H. L. Clark. 1912. Hawaiian and other Pacific
Echini: "The Pedinide SE RBEchinidæ ME
Mus. Comp. Zool. XXXIV. p. 281.
Evechinus rarituberculatus. F. Jeffr. Bell. 1887. Description of a new
species of Evechinus. Ann. Mag Nat. Hist. 5. Ser.
XX, p- 403. Pl. XVII. 7—8.
For the older literature reference may be given to the works quoted
of Agassiz and Farquhar).
The description and excellent figure given by Agassiz (Op.
cit.), combined with the additional information especially on the
pedicellariæ found in my ,Ingolf"-Echinoidea, make this character-
173
"istic form sufficiently well known. I may notice that I have a spec-
imen of 124 mm diameter of test (from Pegasus Bay, Stewart Is-
land), which may be a record size. Regarding the pedicellariæ a
little additional information may be given — only dried material
having been at my disposal formerly. The globiferous pedicel-
lariæ have a short neck; the glands are double. The tridentate
pedicellariæ in larger specimens grow to a considerable size, nearly
2 mm length of head, and are very coarse, covered by a thick,
dark pigmented skin. Together with this large form a smaller form
may occur, identical with that which I have represented in the ,In-
golf"-Echinoidea, Pl. XIX, fig. 7, as characteristic of Evechinus rari-
tuberculatus Bell. 1, accordingly, agree with H.L.Clark!) and Far-
quhar that this species of Bell cannot be distinguished from
Evech. chloroticus. The small form of tridentate pedicellariæ is the
more common in young specimens, but the large form may also
be found even in quite young specimens of only ca. 10 mm dia-
meter. On the buccal plates are found ophicephalous and triphyl-
lous pedicellariæ, on the plates of the buccal membrane only tri-
phyllous ones. The spicules of the tubefeet are very scarce, simply
bihamate. The figures given by Farquhar (Journ. Linn. Soc.
Zool. Vol. XXVI, Pl. 14, fig. 9) as representing spicules of the tube-
feet of E. chloroticus in reality represent plates from the supporting
ring (the ,psellionf of Lovén) of the sucking disk.
It may still be noticed that the spines of very young spec-
imens are distinctly banded with green and white; in such young
specimens also the poriferous zones are white, the naked test thus
being white with 10 radiating, dark green lines; also the apical
system, excepting the outer part of the genital and ocular plates,
is white. But already from a size of ca. 10 mm diameter the test
has the characteristic uniform green colour. The genital openings
do not begin to form till a rather late stage; I have found the
first indication thereof in specimens of ca. 20 mm. In a specimen
of only 6 mm diameter Oc. I hardly reaches the periproct as yet;
in a specimen of 8 mm already Oc. I is broadly in contact with
and Qc. V just reaching the periproct.
%; Also in regard to the use of the names Evechinus and Heliocidaris I agree
with Clark and Dåderlein.
174
11... Heliocidaris tuberculata (Lamk.).
Strongylocentrotus tuberculatus. A. Agassiz. 1872. Revision of the
Echini. p. 165, 449. PIFV. b. 4-5:
— — H.Farquhar. 1897. Contribution to the
Hist. of N.Z. Echinoderms. Journ. Linn. Soc,
Zool. XXVI. p. 189.
— — H.Farquhar. 1898:On'the ”Echinoderm
Fauna of New Zealand. Proc. Linn. Soc N.
SÆWalesEpæSsike
Toxocidaris — Ti.Mortensen. 1903.,, Ingolff-Echinoidea.
I: pz125, 139: Pl: XIX Figs AES OS:
— — W B.Benham. 1911. Stellerids and Echin-
oids from the Kermadec Islands. Trans. N.
Z--Inst XI Sp 160"
Heliocidaris — H.L. Clark. 1912. Hawaiian and other
i Pacific Echini. Pedinidæ etc. Mem Mus.
Comp. Zool. XXXIV, p. 281, 350.
— — L.Dåderlein. 1914. Die Fauna Siidwest-
Australiens. Bd. IV. Echinoidea. p 477—485.
Non: — tuberculata. Th. Mortensen. 1921. Studies of the devel-
opment and larval forms of Echinoderms,
p. 64.
This -species was not taken by myself, but two specimens taken
at Mokohinau were presented to me by Captain Bollons. This
appears to be the only New Zealand locality, from which it is
known with certainty. (Comp. also Benham, loc. cit.). Evidently
the species is, at any rate, not common at the New Zealand coasts.
It is not known with certainty to occur outside the Australian and
New Zealand seas.!)
") In my , Studies of the development and larval forms of Echinodermsf
I have described the larva of Heliocidaris tuberculata, reared from
specimens found at Misaki, Japan. This is in contradiction with the above
statement of the occurrence of the species in the Southern Seas only,
and needs an explanation. j
During my stay at Misaki I had no access to literature, except to
Tokunaga's work on the Japanese Echinidæ. In this work (in Japan-
ese) the species so common on the shores at Misaki is recorded as
Strongylocentrotus tuberculatus. | adopted this (specific) name, having
got it wrongly into my mind that I had myself (in my ,,Ingolff-Echin-
oidea) shown the Japanese form to be the true tuberculatus -— while,
in fact, I had given the proof that the Japanese form was really quite
different from the true tuberculatus from the South sea and should be
referred to a different genus, Anthocidaris. So completely had that idea got
into my mind that I did not at all think of looking up the matter when.
1575
12... Holopneustes inflatus Ltk.
? Echinus elevatus. Hutton, 1872. Catalog. Echinod. New Zealand. p. 11.
Holopneustes inflatus. A. Agassiz. 1872. Revision of the Echini. p. 483.
— — … Th. Mortensen. 1904. Echinoidea. Danish Exped.
to Siam. Mem. Acad. R. d. Sciences. Copenhague.
TER pE
= — H.Farquhar. 1907. Notes on N. Z. Echinoderms;
with description of <a new species. Trans. N. Z-
Inst. XXXIX. p. 129.
— REESE C ark 912 Hawaranas orkan
The" Pedinidæ 0 5-ete "Mem Mus" Comp"(Z0ol:
XXXIV. p. 333.
No specimens of this species were taken by myself, but I re-
ceived a specimen from Capt. Bollons, which he had found on
then beach of Little Barrier Isl. It is"a naked-test; but-there seems
to be no doubt that it is really H. inflatus, the occurrence of which
species at the coasts of New Zealand would thus appear to be de-
finitely ascertained.
It seems very probable that this is the species which was de-
scribed by Hutton as Echinus elevatus. It is true, Hutton him-
self has informed me that it was the same as Amblypneustes for-
mosus (Ingolf-Echinoidea I, p. 104). Considering, however, the
difficulty of distinguishing at that time the Amblypneustes and
Holopneustes-species there is no certainty at all that this identific-
writing my work on the larvæ, and it was only now on identifying the
New Zealand specimens of H. tuberculata that I became aware of my
mistake.
In my Ingolf-Echinoidea I have stated the Japanese form to belong
to the Toxopneustidæ, not to the Echinometridæ, on account of the struct-
ure of the globiferous pedicellariæ. Its larva being found to be of the
typical Echinometrid form, this would appear to be a hard blow to my
theorv of the larval classification being in correspondance with that of
the adults. In reality there is no contradiction. The single globiferous
pedicellariæ which I had found in the material at my disposal when
working out the Ingolf Echinoidea must have come accidentally on to
the specimen. In reality the globiferous pedicellariæ of the Japanese form
— which appear to be mostly very scarce and found only in young spec-
imens — are of the Echinometrid type, and the species therefore both
from the characters of the adult and of the larva belongs to the Echin-
ometrids. I still think that the Japanese species cannot be referred to
the same genus as tuberculatus and ought to be called Anthocidaris,
probably 4. crassispina (A. Ag.), but this is, of course, not the place for
a discussion of this question.
176
ation by. Hutton was correct. H. inflatus being apparently the
only species of the group, the occurrence of which at New Zealand
has been definitely settled, the suggestion lies at hand that this
was the species mentioned by Hutton. There is nothing in the
description either to disprove this suggestion. But, of course, the
type-specimen should be reexamined in the light of the more recent
researches on the Amblypneustes-Holopneustes group, in order to
have the question definitely settled.
13... Echinocyamus polyporus n. sp.
Pl. VI. Figs. 28—31.
Fibularia australis. Benham 1911. Stellerids and Echinids from the
Kermadec Isl. Trans. N. Z. Inst. XLIII. p. 162.
Nor = Desmoulins.
Length. Breadth. Height. Pairs of pores in the petals
mm mm mm anterior. anterolateral. posterior.
13,5 11,5 5 19 19 18570
13,5 12 5 19 —20 1819 18—19
12 11 4 18—19 16 ko
16 9 4 655 15 ise
8 7 3 14 13 14
Test rather flattened, somewhat arched on the aboral side,
generally distinctly concave on the oral side in the posterior part,
the anterior part being somewhat raised. The peristome is distinetly
sunken. The periproct situated rather exactly in the middle between
the mouth and the posterior edge of the test; it is rounded and
of the same size as the peristome. The apical system is central;
the genital pores considerably larger than ocular pores, apparently
of about the same size in both sexes. The petals are very large,
reaching nearly the edge of the test; the pore-series of each petal
somewhat diverging in the outer part. Pores not conjugated, numb-
ering 16—20 in fullgrown specimens. Tubercles uniform, small.
The internal interambulacral partitions are restricted to the very
edge of the test, not radiating inwards (Pl. VI, Fig. 29).
A few specimens of this interesting new species were given
me by Captain Bollons, who dredged them in the Cooks Strait,
n a depth of ca. 40 meters. Unfortunately all are naked, some-
what worn tests; I cannot, therefore, give any information about
the structural characters of spines and pedicellariæ. The characters
afforded by the test, especially the unusual size of the petals and
the slight development of the internal partitions decidedly disting-
1577
uish this species from all the species hitherto known. In regard to
the character of the internal partitions the Australian species Echino-
cyamus platytatus H. L. Clark resembles it, but otherwise that
species has no likeness at all to the New Zealand species.
That the species from the Kermadec Isl. recorded by Benham
as Fibularia australis, is really identical with the present species I
can assert definitely, having got some specimens of it from Mr.
W. R. B. Oliver in Auckland. That it has nothing with the true
Fibularis australis to do is evident from the facts that the pores
of the petals are not conjugated, as they are in that species, and
that internal partitions are present, which they are not in F.australis,
these two characters being emphasized by Gray, who even thinks
them of sufficient weight for making australis the type of a separate
genus, Mortonia. I am inclined to agree with Gray in this view,
but never having had the opportunity of examining specimens of
the true F. australis, I shall not give any definite statement about
that question at the present occasion. I would only take the op-
portunity of stating that the Hawaiian form regarded by H.L.Clark
as identical with F. australis cannot possibly be so, bécause its
pores are not conjugated as they are in that species. It is true
that both the Hawaiian and the New Zealand form resemble F.
australis rather closely in general shape and in the size of the
petals. But the definite statement of Gray that the pores in aqustralis
are ,united in pairs by a cross groove" (Catal. Ech. p. 37) (which
cannot be done away with, until it has been proved, by a renewed
examination of the type, to be a mistake), shows that these forms
cannot be identical.
That the New Zealand form is not identical with the Hawaiian
form, which it resembles very much in appearance, is proved de-
finitely by its internal structure, the Hawaiian form having no
internal partitions except in the anal interradius.
14... Peronella hinemoæ nm. sp.
Pl. VI. Figs. 22—93; Pl. VIL, Figs. 31—35.
Laganum sp. F. Jeffr. Bell, 1917. British Antarctic (,,Terra Nova"
Expedition 1910. Echinoderma. Zoology. Vol. IV. p. 6.
Test nearly circular, thin and flat, the height being only !/;—
1/6 of the test-length. The edge is not thickened. The oral side is
Vidensk. Medd fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 73. 12
178
distinctly .and regularly concave, the mouth somewhat sunken. The
anal area is situated in the middle between the mouth and the
edge of the test. The periproctal plates naked. The petaloid area
occupies somewhat less than half the length of the test. The petals
are the widest about in the middle. The genital pores are fairly close
together, at some distance from the interradial corners of the apical
system. They are rather late in appearing, having not yet been
found in specimens of 19 mm length. Even
in a specimen of 22,5 mm length (in the Brit-
ish Museum, cf. below) the genital pores have
not yet appeared.
The pedicellariæ (Pl. VII, Figs. 31, 33—34)
are of the three usual types and of the struct-
ure characteristic of the Laganids, as seen in
the figures. Only a small form of tridentate
pedicellariæ has been observed; it is some-
times bi-valved. The spines of the usual type.
The primary spines are very smooth, those of
the aboral side somewhat fusiform (Fig. 18).
It is a noteworthy fact that the miliary spines
are different on the two sides of the test, the
a b. widened ends of the component rods being
Fig. 18. Primary spines smo9th on those of the aboral side, more or less
of Peronella hinemoæ; a.
from the aboral, b. from Coarsely serrate on those of the oral side (PI.
theoral'side. 22%. VJ Fis: 3235) | (This holdsteo0dalsontor
P. pellucida). The colour is slightly reddish; the test not pellucid.
Hauraki Guff, off Hen and Chicken. Isl., 100 m, 2/x 1914:
One large specimen (31 mm) and three small ones.
Colville Channel, 70 m, ”'/x4 14. One large specimen (41 mm)
and one small, both naked tests.
Two miles E. of North Cape, 110 m, ”/4 15. One specimen
(37 mm).
The specimens from off North Cape, 70 fathoms, mentioned by
Bell (Op. cit.) as Laganum sp. (,two young specimens, which it
is impossible to determine with accuracy") evidently also belong
to this species. I have examined the specimens in the British
Museum; there are four of them, not two as Bell states, and one
of them is fullgrown, 29 mm long, another 22,5 mm long, so that
ye
mg
it is very well possible, if one cares to take the trouble, to ident-
ify them with accuracy.
The present species is closely related to the Japanese species
P. pellucida Dåderlein. The main distinguishing characters are these:
In P. pellucida the oral side is not regularly concave; there is a
distinct bulging of the test a little distance from the mouth, espec-
ially distinct in the posterior interradius, between the mouth and
the anal area; the somewhat sunken posterior ambulacra serve to
emphasize the bulging of the anal plastron. Outside the bulging
ihehfestkis quite flat” This» characteristie "shape Foftfhe”oral"side
serves very well to distinguish P. pellucida from P. hinemoæ.
Further the shape of the petals is somewhat different; in pellucida
they are the widest in their inner part, the narrowing beginning rather
abruptly at about the middle; in P. hinemoæ they are the widest about
in the middle, then very gradually narrowing outwards. The gen-
ital pores are closer together in P. hinemoæ than in P. pellucida.
The test, upon the whole, is more coarse in P. hinemoæ than in
the Japanese species. In regard to spines and pedicellariæ the only
notable difference appears to be that the larger form of tridentate
pedicellariæ is not found (at least in the material available) in the
New Zealand species. Finally, the Japanese species is not known
to occur outside the Japanese seas.
15... Laganum depressum Less. (?) !).
Pl. VI, Fig. 32.
Laganum depressum. L. Agassiz. 1841. Monogr. Scutelles. p. 110. Tab.
23: fig: 1—7.
SE — A. Agassiz. 1872. Revision of the Echini. p. 138,
SUS ED. DIGE DTS SELE
= = De Meijere. 1904. Siboga-Echinoidea. p. 114.
Taf VIC Eie 57; eV UP ErS KÆE SS:
—= = H. L. Clark. 1914. Hawaiian a. o. Pacific Echini.
Clypeastridæ etc. Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. XLVI:
påse 24 Fis 2:
”) I have accepted H. L. Clark's distinction of the genera Laganum and
Peronella, the former comprising the species having 5 genital pores, the
latter those with only 4. This may not be in full accordance with the
true interrelations of the different forms, but for the present this dis-
tinction is the most convenient.
12"
180
Through Captain Bollons I received a single specimen, taken
off Hen and Chicken Islands in a depth of 55 meters. Unfortun-
ately, it is only a naked test, so that I have no means of ascert-
aining, whether the New Zealand form agrees with the typical L.
depressum also in the microscopical characters of the spines and
pedicellariæ. The shape of the test agrees very well with the said
species, only the anal area is scarcely so close to the edge of the
test as is usually the case in this species; also the edge of the
test is rather more flat than it is generally the case in L. depres-
sum. The specimen is 38 mm long, 32 mm broad.
It is quite possible that this species, which is new to New
Zealand, will ultimately prove to be different from L. depressum,
but for the present it must be referred to that species. Ås it is
known to occur in Australian seas it is not surprising to find it
also in New Zealand seas.
. It does not seem possible that it could be this species which
has given rise to the statement of Laganum rostratum occurring in
New Zealand seas. (A. Agassiz. Revision of the Echini. p. 523).
Whether rostratum be a good species or not, its very different shape,
and especially the fact that L. rostratum has four genital pores,
the present form five, would seem to preclude the idea that they
could have been confused. Most probably it is only a wrong label
which has caused the said statement.
16... Arachnoides zelandiæ Gray.
Pl. VI. Figs. 24—25; Pl. VII. Figs. 25—30.
Arachnoides zelandiæ. J. Gray. 1855. Catal. Recent Echinida in the
Collfoffthe "Brit Mus pel abs tree:
= — Hutton. 1872. Catal. Echinod. New Zealand, p. 12.
= placenta. ÅA. Agassiz. 1872. Revision of' the Echini; p.
530 PISTER gs EAR
— zelandiæ. S. Lovén. 1875. Études sur les Échinoidées, p.
Så PINE U Frost 251255
— placenta. Farquhar. 1894. Notes on New Zealand Echin-
oderms. Trans. N Z. Inst. XXVII, p. 197,
—… Farquhar. 1898. Echinoderm Fauna of New Zea-
land. Proc: LySoc: NES"Walespr321
—… Benham: 1907. Sci: Res. N. Z"Governmehraw
ing Exped. Echinoderma. Rec. Canterbury Mus. I.
DSB:
Non: Arachnoides placenta (Linn.).
181
InehissF Revision olfthe tEchinisk(loctelt ) AFA sa ssizsfates
to have compared specimens of A. placenta with Gray's type-
specimen of A. zelandiæ and found no difference between them
which could be considered as specific. He therefore makes A. ze-
landiæ simply a synonym of A. placenta and later authors”) have
followed him unhesitatingly in regarding the New Zealand form as
identical with the Australian-Indo-Pacific form, quite overlooking
the careful description and analysis of the two forms given by Éo-
vén, by which it is proved beyond any' doubt that the New Zea-
land species is absolutely distinct from the Australian-Pacific form.
How Ågassiz came to the result that the characters pointed out
by Gray as distinguishing A. zelandiæ from A. placenta were not
valid, is hard to say. Probably he has, by some mistake, compared
specimens only of the New Zealand species. At any rate, the Fig.
3, Pl. XII b. of his ,,Revision of the Echinif. shows conclusively
that the species he has described and figured under the name A.
placenta is really A. zelandiæ. Evidently the authors following
Agassiz in regarding the two species as identical have simply
relied on the authority of Agassiz, without examining the quest-
ion themselves. It is especially curious that H. L. Clark, although
he points out as an unusual zoogeographical fact that A. placenta
occurs both at New Zealand and the Malay Peninsula (Hawaiian
a. 0. Pac. Echini. The Clypeastridæ etc. p. 43), apparently did not
think of reexamining the question of the identity of the two forms.
Although the characters of the two species have been very
carefully set forth by Lovén, it may not be superfluous to point
out here again the differences between them.
The most conspicuous difference is that of the relative width
of the ambulacral and interambulacral areas — the character which
lead Gray to distinguish 4. zelandiæ as a-separate species.”) In
") In my ,, Studies of the development and larval forms of Echinodermsf
1921. p. 96, I have also designated this species as Arachnoides placenta.
I had at that time not had the opportunity of looking into the matter
myself and simply followed the general use, the more confidently so
as the .identity of the New Zealand species was accepted by H. L.
Clark in his great work on the Clypeastroids.
") Grays statement that in 4. placenta ,,the outer ambulacral bands are only
half as wide as the interambulacral ones" evidently is a lapsus calami ;
it is the interambulacra which are much narrower than the ambulacra.
182
A. zelandiæ the interambulacra are, at the edge of the test, on
both the oral and the aboral side, about half as wide as the ambul-
acra, in 4. placenta they are only about "4 as wide. But much
more important is the fact, disclosed by Lovén, that in A. placenta
the second, third and, partly, the fourth ambulacral plates of the
adjoining radii meet in the interradial midline, only one pair of
interambulacral plates being found on the oral side in each inter-
radius at the edge of test. In 4. zelandiæ only the second ambul-
acral plate joins with that of the neighbouring radius, there being
2—-3 pairs of interambulacral plates in each interradius at the edge
of the test (Pl. VI. Figs. 24, 26). In 4. placenta there is a naked
furrow on the oral side in the posterior interradius; this is not
found in A. zelandiæ. The peristome is distinctly larger in A. ze-
landiæ than in placenta and is pentagonal in the former, nearly
circular in the latter. The statement of Lovén that in A. placenta
the apical system is distinctly posterior to the middle of the test,
while in zelandiæ it is distinctly anterior, seems to me less con-
stant. Also the differences in ihe shape of the test and the pos-
ition of the periproct, pointed out by Lovén, appear to be less
constant.
According to Lovén there is still another remarkable differ-
ence between the two species, viz. that in 4. placenta the first
interambulacral plate disappears totally in larger specimens, while
in zelandiæ it remains large and distinct. In the few specimens of
A. placenta, which I have been able to examine, this does not hold
good; I find the primary interambulacral plate still quite distinctly
marked off, even in a specimen of 62 mm length. Upon the whole,
the shape of buccal rosette differs considerably from that shown
in. Lovén's' figures (Comp. Pl. VE Fig. 26 with" PISEEBPEi2R 248
of Lovén; both speeimens are of the same size, 45 mm long).
This fact would seem to indicate that still another species will have
to be separated from A. placenta. I have no material for deciding
this question at present. The specimens at my disposal are from
Cape York, Queensland.
Regarding the shape and structure of the pedicellariæ (Pl. VIL.
Figs. 25, 28) A. zelandiæ does not differ essentially from A. pla-
centa (Comp. H. L. Clark. Hawaiian a. 0. Pac. Ech. The Clype-
astridæ etc. Pl. 125. Figs. 1—3). Only one kind of pedicellariæ
ø stuens denn NE
183
occur; they have as a rule only two valves, but samples with three
valves are met with now and then. They are mainly found on the
oral side in the non-poriferous areas, especially in the adoral part.
They vary very considerably in size; the small ones are perhaps
more rightly to be considered as representing the triphyllous form.
The tubefeet have a thin, calcarous ring, in one piece, as is the
case in A. placenta. The spines are exceedinglv diversified, being
quite different in the poriferous and the non poriferous zones, so
that there are ten radiating stripes both on the oral and aboral
sides. On the oral side the spines of the non-poriferous zones are
considerably longer than those of the poriferous zones, ca. 1,5
mm against 0,,—0,7 mm; they are almost straight, slightly taper-
ing, closely and finely serrate, excepting the point. Those of the
poriferous zones (Pl. VII. Fig. 30) are characteristically bent, slightly
thickened. The spines of the aboral side are of uniform length,
excepting a few longer spines in the interradi near the apical
system. Those of the non-poriferous zones (Pl. VII. Fig. 27) are
extraordinarily thickened at the point, those of the poriferous zones
like those of the oral side, only somewhat shorter. Of the miliary
spines those of the aboral non-poriferous zones are rather long,
straight, with a fairly thick cap of skin at the point (Pl. VII. Fig.
29), the others shorter, curved, with no cap of skin (Pl. VII. Fig.
26). It is a noteworthy fact that those spines, situated along the
furrows on the oral side, form like a roof cover — especially
distinct in A. placenta —. Evidently those furrows have a special
function, perhaps serving for conducting food to the mouth by
means of a ciliary current — or perhaps they have a respiratory
function. —
In regard to the spines there is quite a conspicuous difference
between the present species and the Queensland specimens of A.
placenta; especially the spines of the non-poriferous zones of the
oral side are distinctly shorter and those of the aboral side less
thickened at the point. But I shall not enter upon these details
at the present occasion.
I found this species in great numbers in quite shallow water
on a bottom of a sandy mud in the Inner-Harbour of Napier. A
specimen of 128 mm length, taken in Wellington Harbour was
given me by Captain Bollons. This appears to be a record size.
184
The species is not known to occur outside the New Zealand
seas.
17... Echinobrissus!) (Oligopodia) recens (Mr. Edw.).
Pl. VIII, Figs. 1—14.
Echinobrissus recens. A. Agassiz. 1872. Revision of the Echini.
p: 108; 556. Pl. XIV/a. Figs: 24 XXI DM Fries 2:
SXX VIN Fis 1303
— — Hutton. 1872. Catal. Ech. New Zealand. p 13.
— — Farquhar. 1898. Ech. Fauna New Zealand.
Proc: "Linn: Soc. NY SWEDESE
— — Farquhar. 1907. Notes on New Zealand Echin-
oderms. Trans. N. Z. Inst. Vol. XXXIX. p. 128.
Oligopodia == H.L. Clark. 1917. Hawaiian and o. Pacif. Echini.
The Echinoneidæ, Nucleolitidæ, Spatangidæ. Mem.
Mus. Comp. Zool. XLVI. p. 108. Pl. 144. Figs.8—11.
Some specimens were dredged in Paterson Inlet, Stewart Isl.,
in 10—30 meters, and off Stewart Island in 40 meters, in Novem-
ber 1914. I further succeded in dredging a series of specimens
of various sizes; from quite young to fullgrown, in the entrance of
Wellington Harbour in 10—12 meters depth. (These latter were
partly used for embryological studies; comp. the authors work ,Stu-
dies of the development and larval forms of Echinoderms, 1921.
p. 117). Finally, I have received from Captain Bolloøns some
specimens of various sizes, mainly naked tests, from the Foveaux
Strait and from Cooks Strait (ca. 90 meters). This fairly rich ma-
terial enables me to give some additional information of this very
interesting Echinoid.
The characters of the test are fairly well known. I would only
point out a characteristic feature in the arrangement of the ambu-
lacral pores near the peristome (the ,floscelle"). The three adoral
pores are in a straight line; from the fourth the pores make an
outward curve, the ambulacra being from here about twice as broad
as in the innermost part. At the same time a doubling of the pores
takes place so that an outer, close series and an inner, more open
series are formed, the latter forming a direct continuation of the pore
") I am not inclined to agree with H. L. Clark that the familiar name
Echinobrissus has to be abandoned, because it is pre-Linnean. But I
cannot enter here upon a discussion of this or other nomenclatural
questions.
185
series of the narrow adoral part. There are thus four distinet series
of pores in the adoral part of the ambulacra. The buccal membrane
contains numerous small, irregular spicules (Fig. 19); in young spec-
imens a single larger, fenestrated plate may be found lying off each
ambulacrum, in larger specimens this plate has disappeared. The
plates of the periproct are covered with small spines.
It is a noteworthy fact that the
specimens turn green on preserv- Ene.
ation in alcohol, as is the case also (F-
with the Clypeastrids. The largest se
specimen in hand measures 50 mm
in lenght. g
The pedicellariæ are mentioned ==)
only by H.L.Clark, who has found GE SYG
them to be very scarce and only of
three kinds, viz. tridentate, triphyl- AN NR Ej N
lous and ophicephalous. There is,
.however, great variation as regards Fig. 19%. Plates from the bucal memb-
rane of Echinobrissus recens in their
their numbers; sometimes they are natural posilion… 135/7.
very numerous, especially in young-
er specimens, but also in fullgrown specimens they may be quite
numerous. - Besides the three forms, mentioned by Clark, I find
also globiferous pedicellariæ to occur in this species.
The globiferous pedicellariæ, which are especially numerous in
the younger specimens, have a very peculiar structure (Pl. VIII,
Figs. 6—8). The valves are almost triangular, the comparatively
narrow basal part passing, without any constriction, directly into
the blade, which is broad, open. There is a fairly large tooth at
each outer corner and 3—4 somewhat smaller teeth betweeen
these at the outer edge, which is straight cut, not produced to
carry an end tooth. The glands apparently have not the shape
of distinctly limited sacs but only consist of some glandular tissue,
situated round the outer end of the valves; but this cannot be
ascertained without a careful, histological examination for which my
material is not fit. There is no neck; the stalk is compact, rather
robust, ca. 0,5 mm long. These pedicellariæ, with their large,
generally brownish heads, therefore, are very conspicuous among
the short spines. The tridentate and ophicephalous pedicellariæ
186
need no. detailed description; reference to the figures given here
(Pl. VIII, Figs. 12—13) and to Clark's description will suffice.
The ophicephalous pedicellariæ are generally very long-stalked; the
cross-piece at the tip of the loop of the largest valve may some-
times be well developed, but as a rule it is not developed, as stated
by Clark. The head is sometimes invested in a rather thick pel-
lucid skin. (Preservation may have something to do with this feature).
The triphyllous pedicellariæ are described and figured by Clark
as wide and flat, with the blade simply oval. This is, evidently,
due to a mistake; probably it is a pedicellaria of another Echinoid,
accidentally lying among the spines of Echinobrissus, which Clark
has struck upon; such a thing is by no means a rare occurrence
(comp. above, sub. Heliocidaris tuberculata, p. 175). The triphyllous
pedicellariæ of Echinobrissus are of quite another, rather unique
shape, although easily referable to the usual shape of this type of
pedicellariæ (PI. VIII, Fig. 11).—"The blade makes "af sharpefoldkin
the middle so as to form a distinct keel, reaching almost down to
the apophysis. The edge of the blade is rather coarsely serrate,
the serration continuing along the keel. The sphæridiæ are quite
smooth, the stalk very distinctly set off; they are attached in fairly
deep grooves, but not concealed. In adult specimens they are found
in the number of 5—6, attached close to each tubefoot of the inner
series, thus forming two longitudinal series in each ambulacrum.
The spicules of the tubefeet are peculiar, straight, smooth rods
with rounded ends and a small, rounded median prominence. They
are very regularly arranged, lying obliquely, in two rows, all with
the processes turning outwards. The sucking disk is provided with
a fairly well developed calcareous ring, consisting of 4—5 some-
what irregular parts (Pl. VIII, Figs. 10, 14). The ambucral gills
contain a few spicules of the same kind as those of the other feet;
they even have a trace of a calcareous ring in the point.
The spines are very smooth; the primary ones are simply tapering,
the miliary spines distinctly widened at the point. (Pl. VIII, Fig. 9).
The young specimens in my material afford a most desirable op-
portunity of studying the growth changes of this rare form. In the
Youngest specimens, only 5 mm long, the outline of the test is
already the same as in the adult; but the peristome is in the middle
of the oral side, while in the adult it is distinctly anterior. The
187
outline of the peristome is perfectly round; in specimens of ca. 10
mm length it is distinctly transversely oval, while in the adult
specimens it assumes a more pentagonal shape, the primary plate
of the posterior interambulacrum being somewhat larger than the
Fig 21.
Fig. 20. Apical system and posterior interradius of Echinobrissus recens ;
a. from a specimen 5 mm long, with the periproct still directly in contact
with the apical system ; b. from a specimen 7 mm long; the periproct nearly
separated from the apical system; c. from a specimen 11 mm long; the periproct
widely separated from the apical system. %/.
Fig. 21. Apical systems of Echinobrissus recens. a. from a specimen 50 mm long;
b. from a specimen 40 mm long. $/1.
other primary plates, forming an incipient labrum. In the youngest
specimens the whole underside of the test is flat, the peristome
being perfectly flush with the test. Gradually it then becomes
more and møre sunken, till in the adult it lies quite deep, with
vertical borders, the whole underside being somewhat sunk in the
midline.
188
In the youngest specimens the periproct is still in direct contact
with the apical system and is hardly at all sunken. In a specimen,
7 mm long, it is nearly separated from the apical system, the upper
interambulacral plates nearly joining in the midline above it; at
a length of 8 mm it is separated from the apical system by
two pairs of interambulacral plates. In the youngest specimens
(5—7 mm) the five ocular plates and the four genital plates are
distinct, the madreporite being still, at least in the main, con-
fined to the right anterior genital plate. At a size of 11 mm the
madreporite has occupied also the left anterior genital plate, these
two plates being no longer distinetly limited against one another.
The two posterior genital plates, on the other hand, generally remain
distinct also in the adult, the madreporite not encroaching upon them;
sometimes, however, the madreporite occupies the whole of the
apical system. (Figs. 20—21). The genital pores may appear at
a size of ca. 9 mm; in a specimen 11 mm long they have, how-
ever, not yet been formed.
The petals begin to form rather early; at a size of 8—9 mm
there are 3—4 petaloid pores in each series, at a size of 11 mm
there are 8 of them in the three anterior, 11—12 in the posterior
petals. In the largest specimen the number of the pores is 32 in
the three anterior, 36 in the two posterior petals. The pores are
not very distant, slightly conjugated. The arrangement of the pores
in double series round the peristome has begun already in the
youngest specimens in hand. In the young specimens the ambu-
lacral plates are distinctly seen. to be arranged in triads. In each
compound plate the lowermost primary plate is the largest, the
middle a small, demi-plate, the uppermost a narrow, but complete
plate. The lowermost carries a large, primary tubercle. (Fig. 22 a).
Also each interambulacral plate carries a distinct primary tubercle
in the younger specimens. The secondary tubercles, however, soom
increase greatly in number, and as they reach the same size as
the primary tubercles the series of primary tubercles, which make
a very conspicuous feature in the young, are soon quite indiscernible.
The tubercles are distinctly crenulate and perforate. They are sur-
rounded by fairly deep areoles, being placed excentrically therein,
VIZ. at the lower anterior edge. (This arrangement evidently must
be an adaptation to the habit of burrowing in a coarse, gravelly
189
bottom, the stronger muscles on the posterior side of the spine basis
lending especial force to the backward movement of the spines,
the animal thus being pushed forward through the ground). In
the young specimens the areoles are comparatively large, confluent
and make a very prominent feature. (Fig. 22b). The miliary tubercles
are confined to the narrow lines between the areoles and thus show
a more or less distinct circular arrangement round the primary tub-
ercles. Glassy tubercles are not found.
Fig. 22. Part of ambulacrum (a.) and (right anterior) interambulacrum (b.) of
Echinobrissus recens; from a specimen 11 mm long. The ambulacral pores
open obliquely on the plates, so as to be invisible except in oblique
view ; they lie in the normal place, forming a straight series. %/1.
In the interior anatomy it is noteworthy that fairly large inter-
- radial outgrowths are found on the watervascular ring, corresponding
to the ,,Polian vesicles". The intestinal appendix is conspicuously
folded, in the younger specimens it has, indeed, quite a remarkable
Annelid-like appearance. The content of the digestive organs is
remarkably coarse, consisting — besides smaller unbroken shells,
Foraminifera — of fragments of shells, Bryozoa etc., so large that
it is hardly intelligible how they could possibly pass through the small
mouth. Evidently it must be capable of widening even to the borders
of the peristome.
The outstanding feature in the anatomy of Echinobrissus is, how-
190
ever, this that there is a well developed dental apparatus in the young
specimens. The lantern (Pl. VIII, Figs. 1—2) is conspicuously un-
equally developed, the anterior part being the smaller, the posterior
part the larger. It is much inclined in the lower part, the inter-
pyramidal muscles being large, while in the upper part it is quite
vertical. The surface for the attachment of the interpyramidal muscle
is smooth, not striated. The foramen magnum is fairly deep, not
bridged over by the epiphyses. Styloid processes not visible from
the outside. The epiphysis is a small, compressed plate, fit into
a slight impression on the upper part of the pyramid; it is of a
peculiar shape, high in the outer part, the inner part low, forming
like a small handle (Pl. VIII, Figs. 3—4). No pits in the pyramid
on the attachment. face for the epiphysis. The brace is reduced to
a very small plate (Pl. VIII, Figs. 1,3b) lying at the inner, adoral
end of the furrow between each two adjoining pyramids. This
furrow shows three narrow, parallel, rounded ridges; the two outer
ridges are the epiphyses, the median the compass (Pl. VIII, Fig. 1).
This is divided in two, sometimes three pieces. They differ con-
spicuously in shape from that typical of the compass, being high,
compressed, with the upper edge somewhat thickened, not thin,
cylindrical as usual. This is in correspondance with the fact that
they are fastened between the epiphyses, not lying free above the
pyramids as does usually the compass. The teeth are keeled; the
pulpa small. The protractor muscle is fastened to the first inter-
ambulacral plate, the retractor muscle to the ambulacral auricules,
which are simple, rounded prominences. The intercompass muscle
is very slightly developed and seen only with difficulty; but in good
light it may be seen distinctly and there is no doubt of its existence.
Radial compass muscles, on the other hand, are absent.
It is quite evident that the dental apparatus is larger in a specimen
of 7 mm than in one of 5 mm in length, so that accordingly a growth
has taken place along with the increasing size of the animal. The
more remarkable is the sudden change which then occurs, the whole
apparatus being completely absorbed in the course of rather short
time. In a specimen, 9 mm in length, only some half absorbed rests
of the pyramids are found lying round the mouth (Pl. VIII, Fig. 5).
In a specimen, I1 mm long, some traces of the lantern are still
discernible; in specimens beyond that size the whole dental apparatus
191
has completely disappeared. The auricles were found to be com-
pletely absorbed in the specimen of 11 mm.
The discovery of the young Echinobrissus having a well developed
dental apparatus which disappears completely long before the animal
has reached its full size, is a most interesting parallel to Wester-
gren's discovery of a dental apparatus in the young Echinoneus,")
and leads to the suggestion that a dental apparatus will be found
to exist also in the young of Echinolampas and upon. the whole in
the Cassidulids.
It is a surprising fact that the lantern of Echinoneus and of Echino-
brissus have proved to be of very different structure. (In Echinoneus
the compass is typically developed, bifid, radial compass muscles
being present. The lantern is erect and perfectly regular. The whole
apparatus has disappeared already in specimens, 5 mm long). Ås
pointed out by Jackson (,Phylogeny of the Echinif, p. 189) the
lantern of Echinoneus recalls to a striking degree that of Arbacia,
and, upon the whole, of the Stirodonta, which would tend to show
that the Echinoneids are derived from that group of the regular
Echinoids. The imperforate character of the tubercles is in good
accordance herewith. The dental apparatus of Echinobrissus, on the
other hand, is of a markedly different character, showing no relation
to the Stirodonta; it recalls the Clypeastroid lantern in its main
features, especially it has a surprising likeness to the lantern of Echin-
ocyamus. The Clypeastroid affinity of Echinobrissus is also expressed
by the peculiarity that it turns green on preservation in alcohol, or on
being damaged, a property so highly characteristic of the Clypeastroids.
(I am not aware, whether Echinoneus has the same property). Further
the larva shows Clypeastroid affinities.”) It would thus seem evident
that Echinobrissus, and, consequently, the Cassidulids
mponthefwhole… are not nearly related fo the Echino-
Hells ÆDE these two sroupsiaresof'entirelysdte
”) A. Agassiz. On the existence of teeth and of a lantern in the genus
Echinoneus. Amer. Journ. Sc. 4. Ser. vol. 28. 1909 p. 490—92. Pl. 2.
A. M. Westergren. Echinoneus and Micropetalon, Rep. Sci. Res.
Exped. to the Tropical Pacific, U. S. Fish. Comm. Steamer ,,Albatrossf,
1899—1900. XV. Echini. Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool XXXIX. 1911.
”) Th. Mortensen. Studies of the development and larval forms of Echino
desms= "1927; «p—118:
192
ferent phylogenetic origin. I cannot enter more nearly on
this interesting problem on the present occasion. It may only be
pointed out that the character of the compound ambulacral plates
of Echinobrissus — which have been shown to be of the Echinoid
type — will be of importance for settling the question, where
the ancestral form is to be looked for. Also the structure of the
globiferous pedicellariæ — which recall those of Stomopneustes —
may prove to be of importance in this connection.
The statement that Echinobrissus recens occurs at Madagascar
(,Rev. of Echini", p. 108) doubtless rests on unreliable labelling of
specimens from older collections. It is not known with certainty
to occur, outside the New Zealand waters. If an Echinobrissus
should prove really to occur at Madagascar, it will no doubt turn
out to be another species.
18... Echinocardium australe Gray.
Amphidotus zealandicus Gray. Hutton. 1872. Cat. Echinod. New Zea-
land, p. 14.
Echinocardium australe. Farquhar. 1895. Notes on New Zealand
-Echinoderms Transv. N. Z. Inst. XXVII. p. 196.
= — Farquhar. 1897, A Contribution to the hist.
ofN.Z Echinoderms: Journ. Linn. Soc.Zo0ol.XXVI.
pÆ187
— Farquhar. 1898. On the Echinoderm Fauna
of New Zealand. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales.
PpES22:
= — Th. Mortensen. , Ingolf". Echinoidea Il.
p. 149.
= = Benham. 1909. Echinoderma. Sci. Res. N.Z.
G. Trawling Exp. Rec. Canterbury Mus. I. p. 28.
—= cordatum. HL. Clark 19175 Hawalankastormeaee
EchnrmhetEchinonedæeseeee Spatangidæ.
Mem."Muss CT ZoolXEVIE DR 262:
Numerous specimens, mainly. small ones, were dredged off Tiri
Tiri, Auckland, in a depth of 30 meters. Further I have taken
three specimens in Queen Charlotte Sound, 6—20 meters, and one,
somewhat abnormal, specimen in Paterson Inlet, Stewart Isl., in a
depth of 30 meters.
193
As I have pointed out in my work on the ,Ingolf"f Echinoidea
it seems hardly possible to distinguish the Pacific form from the
European Echinocardium cordatum, and H. L. Clark has taken the
decisive step, declaring that ,he would be a hardy zoologist who
would maintain australe as a species distinct from cordatum". When
I have retained the name australe here I do not mean to state
therewith as my definite opinion that the Australian-New Zealand
form is a distinct species; it is, indeed, only the discontinuous
distribution which makes me still hesitate in definitely accepting it
as identical with the European form. That the New Zealand form
is identical with the Australian seems unquestionable.
In some of the specimens from Tiri Tiri I have found globiferous
pedicellariæ — such had not hitherto been observed in the Au-
stralian-New Zealand form. They prove to be quite similar to those
of the European form. They were mostly found on the labrum,
sometimes, however, on the aboral side in the posterior interradius,
always few in number.
19... Brissopsis Zealandiæ n. sp.
Pl. VI, Figs. 33—34.
Two specimens, middle-sized, dredged off Bare Island, in 75 meters;
mud bottom. 17/x1 1914.
Although it is rather undesirable to augment the number of
species within this perplexing genus, I do not see how to avoid
establishing a new species for these specimens. Referring them simply
to the species with which they appear to be the nearest related,
Br. Oldhami Alcock, would give a zoogeographical result, not war-
ranted by facts. If it should ultimately turn out that the New Zea-
land form cannot really be kept separate from that species, little
harm is done by its having provisionally been named separately,
attention thereby being called to it and further study of it invited.
It is briefly thus characterized:
Petals only slightly sunken, the posterior ones rather diverging,
somewhat shorter than the anterior ones. Frontal ambulacrum slightly
sunken; posterior end of the test rather sloping. Oral side rounded,
the plastron being somewhat raised. Labrum prominent, its posterior
prolongation ending off the middle of the first ambulacral plate. Five
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 73. 13
194
ambulacral plates are included within the subanal fasciole, the first
of them being no. 6.
Pedicellariæ are very scarce in the two specimens, only a few
rostrate and some small tridentate forms being found, the latter
being of the simple, leafshaped type. No characters of specific
value are afforded by these pedicellariæ.
That this species cannot be identified with Br. luzonica, which
is recorded in the , Challenger" Echinoidea as taken off New Zea-
land (St. 168, 40? 28” S. 177? 437 S., 1100 fms)"), is beyondidoubt,
vartly on account of the shape of the petals, partly because the shape
Fig. 23. Peristome, labrum, and adjoining ambulacral plates of Brissopsis
zelandiæ (a) and Br. luzonica (b.). 5,5/1.
of the labrum is different it being distinctly less prominent in /uzonica
and generally somewhat concave at the anterior border (Fig. 23);
also the mouth is rather sunken in the present species, while in /uzo-
nica the mouth-region is almost flush with the test. From Br. Oldhami
it likewise differs in the shape of the petals, and further the number
of plates included within the subanal fasciole is different, 4 in Oldhami,
5 in the present species. Here is, however, a questionable point. In
my ,Ingolff Echinoidea II. p 168 I have stated Br. Oldhami to have
five ambulacral plates reaching within the subanal fasciole, while
Koehler”?) asserts that only four plates are crossed by the fasciole
") These specimens need reexamination in the light of the more recent
researches on the Brissopsis-species. The great depth at which they
were found is not in favour of their being identical with either the true
luzonica (which, according to the researches of Koehler, appears to be
mainly a shallow-water form) or the present species.
R. Koehler. An Account of the Echinoidea. I. Spatangidés. Echino-
deima of the Indian Museum. Part VIII. Calcutta. 1914. p. 226.
195
-—— as is also plainly seen in his Pl. XV, Fig. 12 — remarking that
my statement seems inexplicable. I may take the opportunity of
asserting here that the specimen examined by me has, indeed, five
ambulacral plates reaching within the fasciole. The specimen, which
was sent me under that name by Alcock himself, may, however,
more correctly be referred to Br. bengalensis Koehler (it resembles
very much his Pl. XV. Fig. 1); but this does not do away with the
discrepancy, as also this latter species has only 4 plates reaching
within the fasciole. I do not see how to reconcile these facts; per-
haps my specimen is just an individual variation. Another point to
which I may call attention is the different shape of the petals in
the two specimens of Br. Oldhami figured by Koehler in his work
quoted above, Pl. XIV, Figs. I and 2. I would rather say that the spec-
imen Fig. 1 has divergent posterior petals — in fact, were it not for
the different number of plates included within the subanal fasciole I
would be very much inclined to regard the New Zealand specimens
as identical with the species figured there. An extensive material
will be needed for the solution of these problems; but that must be
reserved for future studies.
Explanation of the Plates.
Plate VI.
Figs. 1—2. Goniocidaris umbraculum Hutton. Showing different degree of
widening of the apical radioles. "1.
= & Ogmocidaris Benhami n.g., n. sp. Y1.
— 4—6. — — denuded test, seen from the aboral (Fig. 4)
and oral side (Fig. 5) and in side view
(Fie GO)
— 7 Noiechinus novæ-zealandiæ n. sp. YA.
— Hg — — denuded test, seen from the aboral (Fig.
8) and the oral side (Fig. 9) and in side
view (Fig. 10). 1.
— 11—12. Pseudechinus albocinctus (Hutton), from the oral (Fig. 11) and
aboral side (Fig. 12). Yi.
== 1393—15: — — denuded test from the aboral side (Fig. 13),
in side view (Fig. 14) and from the oral
sidet (ErealS)e
13"
Fig. 16.
lg
=—H18—19
== HUV=2)!
5 l22—25
=—124—25
== BO]
—"28—31
== 3%
Syd p
196
Notechinus novæ-zealandiæ, Varietas; side view. "1.
Pseudechinus Huttoni Benham, from the aboral side. //1.
= — denuded tests, from the aboral side. 1.
— variegatus n. sp. Two partly denuded specimens,
from the aboral side. 1,5/1.
.. Peronella hinemoæ n. sp.; partly denuded specimen, from the
aboral (Fig. 22) and oral side (Fig 23). "1.
.…. Arachnoides zelandiæ Gray. Denuded test from the oral (Fig.
24) and aboral side (Fig. 25). !/1.
— placenta (L.). Denuded test from the oral (Fig. 26)
and aboral side (Fig. 27). 1.
Echinocyamus polyporus n. sp. Fig. 28 side view; Fig. 29 the
interior of the test, showing the internal
partitions; Fig. 30 the aboral, Fig. 31 the
oral side, 1,5/1.
Laganum depressum (Less.). From the aboral side. !/1.
Brissopsis zealandiæ n. sp. From the oral (Fig. 33) and aboral
side (Fig. 34). Y1.
Plate Vil.
Figs. 1—2. Valves of Globiferous pedicellariæ of Ogmocidaris Benhami. "%,.
—= ér
== LEE)
== = = == Cidaris sp
= == = large form of Notechinus novæ-
zealandiæ, in side view (Fig. 4)
and from the inside (Fig. 5). "%,
— large form of Notechinus novæ-
zealandiæ, Var.; in half side
view. 150/.
= = = small form of Notechinus novæ-
zealandiæ ; from the inside (Fig, 7)
and in side view (Fig. 8). 79/1.
— tridentate =—= of Notechinus novæ-zealandiæ,
half side view. 159,
== ophicephalous — of Notechinus novæ-zealandiæ;
from the inside. ”/,,
= triphyllous — of Notechinus novæ-zealandiæ;
150.
== globiferous — of Pseudechinus Huttoni, in side
view (Fig. 12) and from the inside
(Fie MB) FESTE
FEE tridentate — of Pseudechinus Huttoni. "7,
== triphyllous — - Ek eg] 150/4.
== tridentate — 2 = at: 150/4,
— 17. Point of miliary spine of Pseudechinus Huttoni. 88/1.
— 18. Valve of ophicephalous pedicellaria of Pseudechinus Huttoni. lær
150
Fig.
19
20.
2l:
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
20.
30.
31:
32.
33.
34.
35.
==
197
Valve of globiferous pedicellaria of Pseudechinus variegatus. ”/,.
Miliary spine of Pseudechinus variegatus. %/1.
Valve of ophicephalous pedicellaria of Pseudechinus variegatus. ”"/,,
-— triphyllous —= = —= fe
Tridentate pedicellaria of Pseudechinus variegatus. ”"/1.
Valve of ophicephalous pedicellaria, elongate form, of Pseudechinus
albocinctus. "9/
— bidentate pedicellaria of Arachnoides zelandiæ; from the
inside 7.
Miliary spine from poriferous zone of Arachnoides zelandiæ.
Primary spine from non-poriferous zone of aboral side of Arachnoides
1.
135/
zelandiære 1.
Bidentate pedicellaria of Arachnoides zelandiæ. "1.
Miliary spine from non-poriferous zone of aboral side of ÅArachnoides
zelandiæ. "/1.
Primary spine from poriferous zone of oral side of Arachnoides
zelandiæ. "/1.
Ophicephalous pedicellaria of Peronella hinemoæ. ”/.
Miliary spine from the oral side of Peronella hinemoæ. f1.
Valve of tridentate pedicellaria of == —
= triphyllous — — — Ba
Miliary spine from the aboral side of — — ONE
Plate VIII.
All Figures of Echinobrissus (Oligopodia) recens (M. Edw ).
Lantern of a specimen, 5 mm long, seen from above; b brace;
c. compass; d. tooth; e. epiphysis. The opening in the middle of
the figure is the oesophagus which is seen to have five large folds.
The small oval body indicated adorally to each tooth represents
ike Polian <vesicle£., 2/1,
Lantern of a specimen, 7 mm long, in side view. %/,,
Dental pyramid from a specimen, 7 mm long, seen from the inside.
To the right the brace and compass have been removed, so as to
show the shape of the epiphysis (e), which has remained in situ.
The left side shows the brace (or rotula) (b) and the compass pieces
(c) in situ. The tooth (d) is seen in its place. 32/1,
Half-pyramid, from the adradial side, showing the smooth, non-striated
surface for the attachment of the interpyramidal muscle. The epi-
physis has been removed, a corresponding impression being seen
at the upper end of the pyramid. From a specimen, 7 mm long. ?”/4.
Oral region of a specimen, 9 mm long, from the inside, showing
the half absorbed remnants of the lantern. "”/
Globiferous pedicellaria. %/1.
Valve of globiferous pedicellaria, side view. 1/1,
— — == from the inside. 1”.
1.
. Tridentate pedicellaria. %/1.
. Tubefoot, showing the biserial arrangement of the spicules; the
198
Miliaryspme keg
Spicules from tubefoot.
Valve of triphyllous pedicellaria. ""/1.
Ophicephalous pedicellaria. %/1.
SOVE
i mu cansn M DGERGREE
sucking disk has been turned so as to show the calcareous ring
ingfullkviews 6:
14510192
Papers from Dr. Th. Mortensen's Pacific Expedition
1914--16.
IX.
On some cases of multiplication by fission and of
coalescence in Holothurians; with notes on
the synonymy of Actinopyga parvula
(Sel.).
By
Elisabeth Deichmann.
lg
While reproduction by fission is known normally to occur
rather frequently among Ophiuroids and Asteroids, this mode of
reproduction was hitherto only in two cases stated under normal
conditions among Holothurians.
The observations of Dalyell (1851) and of Chadwick (1891)
were made only on specimens kept in aquaria. It was, however,
to be expected that the same process of autotomy would occur in
the species observed: Cucumaria planci (Brandt),) likewise under
normal conditions, and the proof that this was really the case was
given soon after the publication of Chadwick's note on this mat-
ter. In 1896 Monticelli published a most interesting paper: ,,Sull”
autotomia delle Cucumaria plancif in which are recorded not only
observations on the autotomy of this species in aquaria, but proof
is also given that autotomy occurs in nature. The different experi-
”) Dalyell names his species Holothuria badothriæ, but finds it to be ident-
ical with Forbes” Holothuria ocnus, that is to say with his Ocnus
lacteus, viz. Cucumaria lactea. Since, however, autotomy has not been
recorded by any other author to occur in Cuc. lactea, and as Dalyell's
figures recall very much those given by ChadwickandMonticelli,
it may well be assumed that it was really Cuc. planci on which Dalyell
made his observations.
200
ments carried out by Monticelli are of the greatest interest,
showing this Holothurian to be one of the most wonderful objects
for experimental studies on regeneration. Evidently the paper has
been quite overlooked; I have not found any reference to it in
literature, nor in Morgan's well known book on regeneration,
I am, therefore, glad to take the opportunity here to call attention
to this most interesting paper, undoubtedly the most important one,
hitherto published on this subject.
In 1917 Crozier published an interesting paper on multiplic-
ation by fission in Holothurians in which he gives the proof that
this way of reproduction occurs normally in Holothuria surinamen-
sis (Semper). He also observed H. captiva Ludwig to divide spon-
taneously ,in aquaria in the same way as observed for Cucumaria
planci Brandt, but only one single adult of that species was found
under natural conditions, in which there was evidence of regener-
ation. He there states that ,if H. captiva undergoes division norm-
ally, it can only occur in very young stages". (1917, p. 562).
Multiplication by autotomy is thus known to occur, under normal
conditions, only in the two species Cucumaria planci (Brandt) and
Holothuria surinamensis (Semper).
On the other hand, there are evidences to show that other spec-
ies of Holothurians possess a power of regeneration great enough
to enable them to multiply in this way under casual circumstances.
Thus Monticelli has seen a Cucumaria syracusana Sars, which had
been cut into two pieces, regenerate into two complete specimens.
According to Monticelli, Semper (I have not succeded in find-
ing this passage in Semper's work) has observed a case of auto-
tomy and regeneration of both parts in Cucumaria versicolor Sem-
per. — Torelle (1909) has observed that also Cucumaria Grubei
Marenz., when cut into two equal parts, can regenerate in both
parts, though, as a rule, the posterior part was found to possess the
regenerating power to a much higher degree than the anterior part.
To this must be added Crozier's observations on H. captiva Lud-
wig; further must be mentioned here, although not a direct. case
of autotomy and regeneration of both parts, that Benham (1912)
has observed some specimens of Actinopyga parvula (Sel.) from
the Kermadec Islands, in which ,there is an abrupt transverse
line separating the dark anterior region from a posterior paler
201
region" and he gives good reasons for assuming that this hinder
part has been regenerated. According to Crozier, such cases have
been referred to regeneration after injury from such bottom feed-
ing fishes as small sharks. (I have not myself met with any of
the statements to which Crozier alludes.)
Reproduction by fission being thus hitherto known to occur,
under normal conditions, only in the two said species: H. surina-
mensis (Semper) and Cucumaria planci (Brandt), it is of no small
interest that the material of Holothurians, collected by Dr. Th. Mor-
tensen on his Pacific-Expedition 1914—16, has afforded the proof
that this kind of reproduction occurs normally also in Actinopyga
parvula (Sel.) (syn. H. captiva Ludwig) and Actinopyga difficilis (Sem-
per). The process of division itself could of course not be studied on
the preserved material, none of the specimens preserved being in
the act of division. But a careful study of the material in hand
has revealed some interesting facts regarding the process of rege-
neration so that it would not seem superfluous to give a short
record of my observations, accompanied by some figures.
The specimens of A. parvula (Sel.) were collected by Dr. Th.
Mortensen”on' the coral reef at Buccoo Bay, Tobago, B. WS
where this species occurred in great numbers on the underside of
slabs of old coral at low water mark.
A. difficilis (Semper) was found under stones and coral blocks
in a large rock pond near Hilo on the Island of Hawaii.
Å statistic examination of the collection gave the following result:
A. difficilis :
40 undivided specimens % of regenerated
24 regenerating the anal end | specimens
18 = == opel —=. c502%
AÅ. parvula:
39 undivided specimens
41 regenerating the anal end | cry 65%
43 == == mom ==
In the rich material practically all states of regeneration are
represented, from specimen just having finished division to such
where the regenerating part has reached its full size, although still
distinguishable, on account of its lighter colour, as a newformed
part of the specimen.
202
The mode of regeneration being exactly the same in both spec-
ies there is no reason for treating each species separately in the
following record.
The external signs of regeneration are, as described by Cro-
zier, a thinner skin, more slightly pigmented than that of the
original animal (Fig. 1). The deposits of the skin which are of the
same shape in the new and the old part, are lying less closely in
the regenerating part. One specimen of A. difficilis which had
pr ere SASTLASSSA AFD: mn
"ag
rig 2:
Fig. 1. Actinopyga difficilis (Semper) in regeneration ; to the left a specimen regener-
ating the posterior end, to the right one regenerating the anterior end. 1/2.
Fig. 2. Actinopyga difficilis (Semper); a specimen which has just completed division ;
opened and turned inside out so as to show the closed
posterior end. >/3.
evidently just finished division had part of the intestine hanging
free, in the same way as described by previous authors.
Specimens having just finished division have the end where
division has taken place quite closed, thus being without mouth,
respectively. anal opening (the last case is figured in Fig. 2) —
only a paler spot on the smooth surface marks the place where
the opening will be formed.
The development of the tentacles which could be studied espec-
ially well in 4. parvula proceeds in this way that at first 10 tent-
acles appear contemporaneously, in the shape of unstalked, simply
buttonformed knobs, arranged in five pairs. The following tentacles
appear without definite order till the total number 20 is reached.
This result is somewhat different from that of Crozier, who
found only 9—15 tentacles on the regenerating oral end in H.
203
surinamensis (Semper); he expressly states that ,,they are always
fewer on regenerating buccal ends, than in the normal individual,
where they are twenty in number". It does not appear from this
statement whether these specimens, even when fully regenerated,
do not attain to the full number of tentacles which would however
hardly seem probable. Torelle (1919, p. 19) has found that in Cucu-
maria Grubei Marenz. the full number of tentacles is regenerated.
It is thus evident that the development of the tentacles in the
specimens regenerating the anterior end is different from that of
the normal embryological development, where the rule is that first
5 tentacles appear, the rest following later on, apparently in a
definite order (Edwards 1909). The development in the regen-
erating specimens is accordingly more summary.
During the development of the ten last tentacles, the pedicels
and papillæ make their appearance as small points on the surface of
the skin and gradually assume their normal shape. They appear
in very distinct, longitudinal rows. Åt the same time the tentacle-
collar is formed. — The regeneration of the anal end proceeds in
a way very similar to that of the oral end. In the youngest stage
there is no anal opening, the specimen having a simple end (Fig.
2). Ås regeneration goes on and a new posterior part grows out,
a small anal opening is formed, then pedicels and papillæ appear,
and finally small calcareous anal teeth are developed.
Internally the regeneration is especially remarkable as regards
the longitudinal musclebands, which always look as if they had
been cut in two. The old muscleband is ending in a somewhat
swollen knob, at some distance from the place where the division
has taken place, on account of the contraction due to the muscle-
tonus. The new musclebands are always more slender and delicate
than the old non regenerated ones (Figs. 2—3). In the cases
where the oral end was closed, the intestinal gut was found to end
blindly, hanging free in the dorsal mesentery, and all the organs
surrounding the mouth were absent, even the new musclebands
were not developed. In all the 10 tentacled stages dissection showed
that the mouth was in communication with the old gut, and a calc-
areous ring was formed, very thin and fragile. The ten first tent-
acle ampullæ were present as ten small buds, of equal size and
204
always interradial. A Polian vesicle was also developed and a typ-
ical small madreporic canal, fastened in the dorsal mesentery. It
would be very interesting to follow the development of this organ
during the stages beforethe appearance of the
first ten tentacles; unfortunately the collec-
tion does not contain these very first stages
of the regeneration.
The genital organs seem to develop very
Fig. 3. Anterior end of Acti- late: Mi <specimens where allforganskvere
=nopyga difficilis (Semper), opP- nearly as well developed as in undivided spec-
ened to show the regenat-
if'evmuscle bands. w — imens, "gemttal ”organs' were absentlorkverny
feeble, while an equally sized normal, undi-
vided animal had a one centimeter long tuft.
Long time seems to pass before the intestine comes into func-
tion. In all the young stages the old intestine was filled with sand,
while the new.regenerating part was without any content, pale and
collapsed.
Regarding the age in which division takes place it seems to
be before the animals are fullgrown. In A. difficilis (Semper) division
appears to occur when they have a length of 5—7 centimeters and
in 4. parvula (Sel.) a length of 3 to 4 centimeters. The maximal
length of the first named is 10 cm, of the other one 6 cm, measure-
ments taken on preserved specimens.
Literature.
W. B. Benham: Rep. on Sundry Invertebrates from the Kermadec Islands.
Trans. New Zeal. Inst. Vol. 44. Wellington. 1912. p. 136.
H.C.Chadwick: Notes on Cucumaria planci. Trans. Liverp. Biol. Soc.
V. 1891. p. 81.
W. I. Crozier: Multiplication by fission in Holothurians. Amer. Natural-
ist. 1917. p. 560.
Dalyell: The Powers of the Creator displayed in the creation. I. 1851. på
Ch.L Edwards: The development of Holothuria floridana Pourtalés with
special reference to the ambulacral appendages. Journ. of Morph-
ology XX. 1909. p.-211.
Fr. S. Monticelli: Sul? autotomia delle Cucumaria planci (B). Rendic. Ac-
cad. Lincei. Ser. V. Vol. V,2. 1896. p. 231.
E. Torelle: Regeneration in Holothuria. Zoolog. Anzeiger. 35. 1909. p.15.
205
|U)l-
Among the material of Thyone gibber (Sel.), collected by Dr.
Th. Mortensen at the island of Taboga in the Gulf of Panama,
some specimens were found, which had completely fused together
in different ways (Fig. 4). They could not be separated without in-
juring the skin, and on a histological examination by means of
sections it was found that the skin of the two specimens had com-
pletely coalesced, the former limit between the two specimens hav-
Fig. 4. Thyone gibber (Sel.). Coalesced specimens. Nat. size.
ing absolutely disappeared in the place where they touched one
another.
Dr. Mortensen informs me that he has observed some spec-
imens apparently coalesced to have separated again when kept for
some time in small dishes. In such cases the coalescence could
hardly have been complete. This species is very common in some
places at the shores of Taboga, being found under the stones,
near high water mark. The specimens are often found attached to
the stone so closely that they touch one another, and the pedicels of
two specimens, when extended, must interlace between one an-
other. The pedicels being very numerous this interlacing becomes
s0o to say inextricable, so that they really cannot find out which
pedicels belong to which specimen — just like the men's legs in
the old Danish tale of the Molbos — and ultimately first the ped-
icels and then the skin itself of the two specimens fuse together.
The coalescense, however, is only superficial. The body cavities
of the two specimens remain separate. Neither have I found any
206
proof of'a fusion of the watervascular system of the two spec-
imens which was not to be expected either.
As far as I know, this case has not before been mentioned to
occur among Holothurians in nature. Something similar has been
noted by Monticelli who, in the aquarium, has seen two pieces
of skin from Cucumaria planci (Brandt) fuse together.
The fact that the coalesced specimens are in different positions
to one another, as seen in the figure, is in good accordance with
the way in which the coalescence occurs, the position in which
the specimens attach themselves being, of course, quite accidental.
III.
The species Actinopyga parvula (Sel.) is stated to have a re-
markably wide distribution. Théel (,Challengerf Holothurioidea,
p. 199) gives only the type locality, Florida, but in later works
it is recorded from various places in the Pacific (Fisher, Erwe,
Bedford). At the same time the species Miilleria flavo-castanea
Théel from Madeira is made a synonym of parvula. Théel him-
self is of opinion that perhaps the f/avo-castanea is the adult par-
vula, and later on all authors have taken this as a fact.
Already from a geographical point of view this distribution
seems remarkable enough to arouse suspicion as to the identific-
ations. Of course, such a cosmopolitan distribution cannot beforehand
be denied, we have for instance in Amphipholis squamata (D. Chiaje)
an Echinoderm, which seems 10 be really cosmopolitan; in other cases,
however, — f. i. Diadema setosum Gray, — this worldwide distribution
has proved to rest on wrong identifications. — I have then under-
taken a careful study of the material of Actinopyga parvula at my
disposal. Through the assistance of Dr. Th. Mortensen I have
been able to examine one of the type specimens of Selenka's
Å. parvula, received from Prof. Ehlers, Goåttingen, the ”typefok
M. flavo-castanea Théel, received from Prof. Th. Odhner, Stock-
holm, together with specimens identified by Théel as H. captiva
Ludwig, from Prof. Hartmeyer, Berlin; the specimen from Au-
stralia, identifed by W. Erwe as 4. parvula, was received from
2O7
Prof. Michaelsen, Hamburg, — finally also some specimens of
Bedford's A. parvula, together with a pair of those, identified by
the same author as H. difficilis Semper, were received through the
kindness of "Prof. Stanley Gardiner; Cambridge. —. I beg: to
express my indebtedness to all these gentlemen for their exceed-
ingly valuable assistance which has made it possible for me to
reach a definite result in the rather intricate question about the
synonomy of Actinopyga parvula (Sel.).
As the first result of my researches I must maintain that the
specimens from the Pacific are by no means identical with the
Floridan type. The pacific form, at least that from Hawaii, is a
separate species. According to Erwe, the M. aegyptiana of Helfer
is identical with the Pacific species. — However, the identification
with M. aegyptiana is also wrong as I may assert after having had
the opportunity of studying this species on the authentic material.
Also the examination of the type of M. flavo-castanea has convinced
me that this species is not a synonym of parvula from Florida and
still less of the Pacific species.
Further I was very surprised in finding, through the study
of the type of M. parvula from Florida, that it could not be dis-
tinguished from H. captiva Ludwig, in spite of the fact that they
have been referred to different genera, the former to Actinopyga
(Miilleria) the latter to Holothuria. This, however, is due simply
to the fact that Ludwig and the following authors who mention
this species have overlooked the presence of anal teeth in captiva.
The examination of Bedford's specimens of M. parvula led to the
result that they were not the same as the species from the Pacific,
identified as parvula by Fisher and Erwe. They represent a
species which I shall designate as Actinopyga BEedfordi n. sp.
I shall here shortly point out the differences between these
species, especially between A. parvula and the form from the Pac-
ific, hitherto wrongly designated by that name.
Externally these two forms are differing both in colour and
size. The Atlantic form grows only to half the size of the Ha-
waiian, the former being only 4—5 cm, the latter 8—10 cm. That
the difference in length is real is confirmed by examination of the
generative organs. They are found well developed in the small
Atlantic form at the said sizes 4—5 cm, while the Pacific form is
208
immature at this size, the gonads only being fully developed in
specimens c. 8 mm long.
The Atlantic form is pale yellow in colour, the Hawaiian is
dark chocolate-brown. — From an anatomical point of view these
two species are not differing in many points. This was not likely
either as the Holothurians belonging to these genera are of a very
uniform type. — I have compared specimens of nearly equal size
and have found the tentacleampullae to be larger and darker pig-
mented in the Hawaiian form than in the Atlantic. The number
sof Polian vesicles is in most cases 2 for the Hawaiian, 3 for the
Atlantic species, but this is not quite constant, as I have found
specimens of the latter species with only one, and a specimen from
RG Hawaii with 3 vesicles, the third being very
NU small.
DE A very distinct difference is afforded by the
GE ED Cuvierian organs, which are in the Atlantic
form discharged in the form of long thread-
fine bands, as noted by Crozier; in the” Ha-
waiian form Dr. Mortensen has observed
that when the animals are irritated they dis-
charge the Cuvierian organs in small bits, re-
me calling ,vermicelli soup". The calcareous ring
FU SPA ESENE area affords the best distinguishing character of the
eous ring of Actinopyga two species; in the works of Fisher and
BANDS RE big SR Ludwig pieces of the calcareous ring are
figured, the differences between the two spec-
ies thus being clearly shown. I have figured pieces of the calc-
areous ring from the present material. The ring of the Atlantic
form (Fig. 5 a) is very thin and low. When treated with hypo-
chlorite of sodium the ring is easily isolated without losing its
characteristic form. The ring of the Hawaiian form (Fig. 5 b) is
thick, high and robust. After very short treatment with hypochlor-
ite of sodium the losely united spicules of the ring are set free
and the ring is destroyed, long before the organic substance has
been dissolved. Also by ordinary preparation with a scalpel the
little thin ring of the Atlantic species is far more resistent than
the thick, robust ring of the Hawaiian form.
The deposits in the skin show a well marked difference (Figs. !
209
6—7). Most of the buttons in the Atlantic form are, as Théel
has pointed out, obviously curved, while they are very regular in
the Pacific species and not so slender of shape. The tables in the
first mentioned form are perforated by many small holes, while in
the Hawaiian form there are generally eight holes. — It is quite
evident from this comparison of the Atlantic and the Pacific , Acti-
nopyga parvula" that they cannot be identical, but are really two
well separated species.
Figs. 6—7. Calcareous spicules of Actinopyga parvula (Sel.) (Fig. 6)
and 4. difficilis (Semper) (Fig. 7). 79/1.
A comparison of the type of Actinopyga parvula (Sel.) with the
Holothuria captiva of Ludwig gives the result that there is not a single
character by which they can be distinguished, and there is not
the slightest doubt that H. captiva is only a synonym of 4. parvula.
Unfortunately the type specimen of H. captiva appears to have
been lost. At least I am informed that it is no more in the col-
lection of the Wiirzburg Institute from which it was described; but
still the description given by Ludwig is sufficient to identify it
with certainty as the common, small Westindian species, the multi-
plication by fission of which was mentioned above.
It is very noticeable that the type specimen of 4. parvula is
regenerating its anterior end which fact has escaped the attention
of Selenka. —
The Miilleria flavo-castanea Théel is in colour and size quite dif-
ferent from both the Floridan and the Pacific type. The type spec-
imen is 10 cm in length, the dorsal side is white, spotted with
brown around the papillæ, the ventral side is brown. The tentacle
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd 73. 14
210
ampullae' are short and pale. The calcareous ring thick and robust
and in structure very like that of the Hawaiian form. One long
Polian vesicle and one madreporic canal. — A tuft of gonads on
the left side and well developed Cuvierian organs. All internal
organs are of a very pale colour. The deposits in skin are never to
be mistaken as they are quite different from the above mentioned
species. The tables have many holes in the disk and the margin
is smooth; the buttons are
3—4 times larger than in the
other species (Fig. 8). In his
»Notes on the Holothurioidea
of the Indian kOoceans le
(Spolia Zeylanica IX. 1914.
p. 176) I. Pearson mentions
OS & a specimen of M. (Argiodia)
SIDE KOEN Ree OP flavo-castanea from the Red
SN ) 1009 Sea. In a letter to Dr. Mor-
MD tensen he gives the inform-
ation that on further examin-
Fig. 8. Calcareous spicules of Å. flavo- j
castanea Théel. 10/1. ation he has found the spec-
imen to be not an Actinopyga
(Argiodia) flavo-castanea, but an Argiodia maculata (Brandt).
Actinopyga aegyptiana Helfer is especially characterized by its
tentacles which are very slender (Fig. 9), quite pale and nearly
without disk, while the Hawaiian form has broad, robust, dark-
coloured disks. The specimen I have had the occasion to examine
is 4 cm in length, with well developed genital organs of a pecul-
iar green colour on the left side of the mesentery. The ring is low
and fine and the single pieces are hard. The ampullae are short,
pale in colour. 2 Polian vesicles and 1 madreporic canal are pres-
ent. Also Cuvierian organs. The colour of the animal is pale
whitish with brown spots on the dorsal side. A very prominent,
white tentacle collar is present.
The buttons are very similar to those in the Hawaiian form,
but the tables are much more uneven in the margin (Fig. 10).
I have not succeeded in finding buttons of the form which
Helfer figures, but I have happened to see similar buttons with
toothed margin in a preparation where the isolated spicules were
21
not sufficiently washed and released from crystals of sodium. I
hardly have any doubt that the spicules with serrated edge, figured
by Helfer, really are some such that have not been sufficiently
cleaned.
The specimen of ,,Miilleria parvulaf', recorded by Erwe from
Western Australia appears to be identical with the Hawaiian form,
9: 10.
Fig. 9. Tentacle of Å. -aegyptiana Helfer. "5/1. — Fig. 10. Calcareous spicules
of 4. aegyptiana Helfer. 1/1.
at least I have been unable to find any noteworthy difference be-
tween them.
Whether the Argiodia parvula (Sel.) mentioned by Pearson
(Notes on the Holoth. of the Indian Ocean. II. Spol. Zeylanica.
IX. p. 177) from tne Maldives and the Seychelles is also ident-
ical with the Hawaiian form I cannot decide; I have not seen any
of the specimens and the information given by Pearson in the
said paper and in a letter to Dr. Mortensen does not seem
to me sufficient for deciding which species it really is. But it ap-
pears certain at least, that it is not identical with the West Indian
species; probably it is Actinopyga difficilis (Semper).
That the Miilleria parvula of Bedford from Funafuti could
hardly be the same as either the true Westindian 4. parvula or as
the Pacific form thus designated by Fisher, was fairly evident al-
ready from description and figures, given by Bedford. — An
examination of the specimens received from Cambridge gave the
14"
eN
expected result that this is a separate species, quite distinct from
any of those mentioned above, as also from any other species
hitherto known. Even the size forms a very conspicuous character,
the animal being apparently fullgrown at a length of 2,5 cm.
I shall now give a description of this species naming it Actino-
pyga Bedfordi. Length 2,5 cm. Colour brown. Integument weak.
The animal is nearly transparent. Pedicels ventral, long and few,
in three rows, the median double. Papillæ in the dorsal side few
and small, hardly perceivable. Tentacles 15—16. Anal opening
Surrounded by 5 small, plateformed teeth.
Calcareous ring of ordinary type, very soon destroyed by hypo-
chlorite of sodium. Short tentacle ampullae. 2 Polian vesicles, 1
dorsally embedded madreporic canal. Muscular bands slender. Rete
mirabile present. Respiratory tree short, in length exceeding the
very short Cuvierian organs and the right and left branches are
of equal length.
Deposits in the skin are absent, in most of the specimens only
some small, ellipsoid grains are present. In one specimen deposits,
in all respects exactly like those figured by Bedford, were present.
While thus the , Actinopyga parvula" of Bedford has no-
thing with that species to do, — nor with the false Pacific A. par-
vula, as is evident from the facts here given, the species named
Holothuria difficilis Semper by Bedford appears to be identical
with the Hawaiian species. Bedford gives only a figure of the
animal; about the calcareous bodies he says: they agree with
Semper's short description and figures". Unfortunately nearly all
the spicules in the specimens at my disposal have been quite
dissolved, — perhaps on account of acidity of the alcohol in which
they were preserved (it does not appear from Bedford's paper
that they were preserved in formalin) — but the pieces left seem
to be identical with those in the Hawaiian form. Also the other
characters are perfectly identical with those of the Hawaiian form.
Both specimens possessed well developed anal teeth which could
be seen without hand lens, and one of the specimens was regen-
erating the forepart, which only had 15 tentacles, — so I have
no doubt that they are really identical.
The description, given by Semper of his Holothuria difficilis,
ANS
is very short, and figures are given of the calcareous bodies alone.
i(Elolothuriens p: "92: "Tar GTS 2) Ex cepting the number of
Polian vesicles (1), there is nothing either in the description or in
the figures of the deposits which does not agree with the present
species, and as the type appears to have been lost, (I am informed
that it is not found in the Wirzburg collection) it seems reason-
able to adopt the name Actinopyga difficilis (Semper) for this
species.
The present studies thus have led to the result that among the
forms hitherto confused with Actinopyga parvula (Sel.) the follow-
ing species are to be distinguished.
1.… Åctinopyga parvula (Selenka).
Miilleria parvula. E. Selenka. Beitråge z. Anat. u. Syst. d. Holothurien.
Z: wiss:"Zool." XVII 718675" p7 318 Far XVIDEEi 2:
17-18:
Holothuria captiva. H.Ludwig. Beitråge z. Kenntniss d. Holothurien.
Årb. zool. Inst. Wirzburg. II. 1874. p. 32.
Miilleria parvula. Hj.Théel. ,,Challengerf Holothurioidea. II. 1885.
pr 220:
C. Ph. Sluiter. Westindische Holothurien. Zool.
Jabrbucher Suppl:XI.- 1910: p:333 (In Kuke n-
thal & Hartmeyer. Ergebnisse einer zool.
Forschungsreise nach Westindien.)
Holothuria captiva. W.I. Crozier. Multiplication by fission in Holo-
thurians II. Amer. Naturalist. 1917. p. 560.
Distribution. West Indies. (Florida, Jamaica,
St. Barthélemy, Barbados, Tobago; Bermuda).
2... Actinopyga flavo=castanea Théel.
Miilleria flavo-castanea. Hj.Théel. ,,Challengerf Holothurioidea. II.
1885. p. 198.
Non: Argiodia flavo-castanea (Théel). I. Pearsson. Notes on the Holoth. of
the Indian Ocean. II. The subgenera Årgiodia and
Actinopyga. Spolia Zeylanica. IX. 1914. p 176.
3... Actinopyga difficilis (Semper).
Holothuria difficilis. Semper. Reisen im Archipel d. Philippinen. I.
Holothurien. 1868. p. 92. Taf. XXX, Fig. 21.
— — Théel. ,,Challengerf Holothurioidea. II. 1885. p. 219.
214
Holothuria difficilis. F. P. Bedford. Holothurians coll. by Stanley Gar-
diner at Funafuti & Rotuma. Proc. Zool. Soc. 1898.
p/838 PI ALU SFS:
Actinopyga parvula. W. K. Fisher. The Holothurians of the Hawaiian
Islands. Proc. US: Nat"Musst1907/mpn6IS Er
FXVIIERET es 2-29
— — W.B.Benham. Report on Sundry Invertebrates from
the Kermadec Islands. Trans. New Zealand Inst.
1912. p. 136.
Miilleria — H. Helfer. Uber einige von Dr. R. Hartmeyer
im Golf v. Suez ges. Holothurien. Mitt. Zool. Mus.
Berlin VI: 1912. p5330:
— — W. Erwe. Holothurien. Die Fauna Sidwest-Au-
straiiens, herausgeg. v. Michaelsen & Hartmeyer.
i Bd. IV. Lief.'9. 1913: p-366.
Holothuria difficilis. W. Erwe. Ibid. p. 381. Taf. VII. Fig. 17.
? Argiodia parvula. I. Pearson. Notes on the Holothurioidea of the Indian
Ocean. II. The subgenera Årgiodia and Actinopyga.
Spolia Zeylanica. IX. 1914. p. 177. Pl XXVIII. Fig.4.
Distribution. The Indo-Pacific, from the Red
Sea and Mauritius to Hawaii and the Kermadec Is-
lands; West Australia.
4... Actinopyga Bedfordi n. sp.
Actinopyga parvula. F. P. Bedford. Holothurians .... Funafuti & Ro-
tuma: Proc. Zool. Soc: 18989836" FPISEIREiES:
fad:
Distribution. Funafuti and Rotuma.
5. Åctinopyga aegyptiana (Helfer).
Miillleria aegyptiana. H. Helfer. Uber einige ...... im Golf v. Suez
ges. Holoth. Mitt. zool. Mus. Berlin. VI. 1912 p.330.
Distribution: Gulf of Suez.
In conclusion I wish to express my best thanks to Dr. Th.
Mortensen for giving me the opportunity. to study this excel-
lent material from his Pacific expedition 1914—16, for his valu-
able help, and the interest with which he has alway favoured my
studies.
19—11—1921;
Papers from Dr. Th. Mortensen's Pacific Expedition
1914—16.
X.
Studies on Pacific Cirripeds.
(With 77 figures in the text.)
By
Hjalmar Broch, Kristiania.
INTRODUCTION.
On the following pages I give an account of the Cirriped
collections from Dr. Th. Mortensen's Pacific Expedition in 1914
—16. The extensive collections afford rich contributions to our
knowledge of the Pacific faunistic features and, moreover, contain
a series of interesting new species, and developing series of
several, especially pedunculated, forms; they thus furnish a good
base for phylogenetic and systematic studies, and I am indeed
thankful to my friend, Dr. Th. Mortensen that he entrusted
me with the treatment of his extensive collections.
Since the days of Darwin our knowledge of this group has
been extensively augmented. Nevertheless the systematic arrange-
ment of the group has as yet only undergone few alterations owing
to the elaborate working method, and the well founded system-
atics of Darwin. The large monographs of Hoek have built
farther on the foundation laid by Darwin. Gruvel, it is true,
has tried to introduce a new systematic grouping; but, as also
pointed out by Pilsbry, he has been rather unsuccessful; his
system is based mainly upon the numeric occurrence of skeletal
plates; no heed being paid to the different origin of the plates,
and their phylogenetic value, his system is decidedly a step back-
wards, as compared with Darwin. Modern systematists have
therefore not accepted the systematic lines of Gruvel. — Since
Darwin the first real steps forward are due to Pilsbry and
Annandale, and especially the first named scientist has shown
216
us the future lines of study with the cirriped systematics. In the
following report I, therefore, mainly follow the lines drawn up by
Pilsbry, although with some alteratidns as to the pedunculated
forms. These alterations are mainly based upon studies of devel-
opment series, and on phenomena of growth, which afford a good
base for phylogenetic deductions. An introductory chapter more
specially deals with the results of these studies.
The biological station of the Kristiania university,
26th May 1921.
(With exception of (fig: 2, 'a—c, "fig-'6,"a= cl hig FIS Fa Ce en
fig. 20a, fig. 21, a—b, fig. 44, a—d, fig. 47, and fig. 66a all figures have been
drawn by aid of an Abbé's projecting apparatus at a somewhat larger scale,
and then reduced during reproduction so that the enlargements indicated
have been arrived at.)
Lepadomorpha Pilsbry,
their phylogeny and system.
The offspring of the cirripeds is like their relations to other
crustaceans, wrapped in darkness, and although the pupa-stage oc-
curs with an astonishing uniformity in the whole of the group, it
does not give any hold for a judgment as to the origin of the
cirripeds. If we study the literature, we moreover find opinions
to be rather diverging as to which genus of the recent cirripeds
is the most primitive.
Darwin in his classic monograph (1852), does not give any
detailed discussion of the phylogeny; nevertheless we can deduce
from his remarks that he looked at Oxynaspis, or the type repre-
sented by this genus, as the most primitive cirriped, and that he
thought that the other genera have originated from the named
form. Just the opposite opinion was set forth by Hoek (1883);
he considers Mitella (Pollicipes) as the ancestor of all recent cirri-
peds, and thus comes to the result that all other genera have
arisen through a reductive development, as regards the skeleton-
SG—G—mEÆEREAG rr —
2
His theory entirely foots on paleontology, and mainly on the fact
that Mitella, according to the paleontologic finds, seems to be the
oldest genus among our recent cirripeds, although only little older
than Scalpellum.') Most later authors have followed Hoek, and
Gruvel in his monograph (1905) adopts his theory, ranging among
the ancestors also the extinct genera Turrilepas, and Loricula. The
correctness of this mode of proceeding is not evident from his
statements, and seems problematic also if we take into consider-
ation their occurrence in time. In fact his reasoning seems to
result in another theory, viz. that the more numerous the plates,
the older the genus. —- Neither Pilsbry nor Annandale in their
memoirs have taken up a definite position as to the phylogeny;
on the other hand, Kriger in his recent paper (1920) decidedly
holds to Hoek's theory. I shall return to his reasonings below.
In a previous paper on Scalpellum (1912) I came to the con-
clusion that Darwin's opinions were in better accordance with
the postembryonic development than Hoek's theory, and in my
preliminary note on the development of Mitella (1921) I again
came to the same, although somewhat modified result. Studies of
the details of the skeletal development of several species are put
forth in this paper, and the results of these studies are of such
importance from a phylogenetic point of view that I find it cor-
rect to give a review of their bearing on classification before enter-
ing on the detailed report on the species.
A comparison with other crustaceans shows that the intensive
secretion of lime in many cirripeds cannot be a primitive feature,
and for this reason it may be doubtful, whether the heavily arm-
oured forms are to be ranged among the ,ancestral forms" of the
entire group. On: the other hand, such forms are more likely to
be preserved as fossils than those without calcareous skeleton
or with only a thin one. This fact at once weakens the import-
ance of the evidences of paleontology in this case. Other facts
likewise speak against the large number of plates as a prim-
itive feature. In every case where we have succeeded in studying
the development entirely, the pupa of the pedunculate cirripeds at
") Scalpellum even seems to occur earlier than Mitella (comp. Eastman,
A. M.: Text-Book of Paleontology, Second Ed., Vol. I, London 1913, p.
745); this would deprive Hoek's theory of its last support.
218
first develops five chitinous — in Darwin's nomenclature ,prim-
ordialf — valves, viz. carina, terga, and scuta. In the following
report more instances of this are given, and, what is of import-
ance in this connection, this also holds good in genera with skelet-
ons consisting of several more plates in the adult, such as in f.
inst. Mitella, and Scalpellum. It is curious, how little attention
Hoek and other authors have paid to this fact which is, however,
together with the fact that no other plates are preformed as chit-
inal plates, of great phylogenet'c importance. They prove that these
åve valves have probably been present in the group, before the
cirripeds acquired their capacity of producing calcareous plates,
and further, that the accessive plates of the animal probably are
later acquisitions.
This makes us return to the theory of Darwin, although in
a somewhat modified form. The origin of the cirripeds is to be
sought in a form with only five primordial, chitinal valves in the
mantle, and without calcareous skeleton of the peduncle.
From this point of view we shall have to modify the ideas of rela-
tionship and also more or less the systematic arrangements set forth
by Hoek, Gruvel, Pilsbry, and Annandale. We are forced
to discard the theory of Mitella as being a most ancient cirriped
with which the other genera have originated. I shall in some words,
therefore, discuss the relationships of the pedunculate cirripeds.
We may then, to begin with, also discard the theory of Oxy-
naspis as the primitive genus. On the one hand its special bio-
logy, its symbiosis with Antipatharians contradicts this view, and
moreover we must point out the fact that the genus is herma-
phroditic, with no trace of a male.
Taking the lower crustaceans as a whole, we at once see that
hermaphroditism is by no means a common feature; on the con-
trary, the overwhelming majority has separated sexes, and where
hermaphroditism is present, it is evidently a secondary phenom-
enon, an adaptation to special biological conditions. We are there-
fore forced to consider the hermaphroditism of the cirripeds as a
secondary phenomenon, an adaptation to their fixed mode of living,
and we may take it for granted that the ancestors of the group
had separate sexes, probably of equally high organisation.
Kriger in his recent paper (1920, p. 46) maintains the old
219
postulate that ,,Als urspringliche Geschlechtsform missen wir bei
Tieren die hermaphroditische ansehen.” This statement, of course,
holds great probability;") but it is an error, when it is used as an
axiom concerning every animal group in particular. It is com-
monly presumed that the coelenterates have given rise to all higher
groups, directly or indirectly; nevertheless hermaphroditism is al-
ready here abandoned in most species, and it is not easily seen,
why the ancestral forms of every higher group should have re-
turned to hermaphroditism, as many authors seem to maintain.
Especially in the cirripeds nothing speaks in favour of this theory.
Ås above pointed out, hermaphroditism among other crustaceans can
always be traced back to special biological conditions, as f. inst.
often to parasitism; it is here no doubt a secondary phenomenon.
We cannot think that the cirripeds have originated separately;
their organisation and development give evidence of a close re-
lationship with the other crustaceans, and they have no doubt
originated with some or other of them. We therefore cannot adopt
the postulate for this group.
Kriger arrives at the conclusion that the dwarf males are
a new acquisition, and he arrives at this conclusion from the theory
of Mitella as an ancient form, most primitive among recent cirri-
peds; he here again evidently foots on paleontology. To this we
can say that paleontology has shown, mirabile dictu, that re-
mains of Scalpellum occur at as early periods as of Mitella. Look-
ing at their biology we see how much lesser probability there is
that the former genus may be found in the deposits: its species
are rather scanty in occurrence, and on the whole live in the
deeper parts of the oceans, whereas Mitella lives in great com-
munities on the shores, and is thus more likely to be found in
the deposits; also this makes the paleontological evidences pro-
blematic.
If we now consider the occurrence of males, and compare it
with the phylogenetic lines drawn up by Hoek, Gruvel, and
Kriger, we arrive at rather inexplicable results. In Mitella the
male is absent; in Ca/antica and Smilium a rather highly organised
male of a sudden occurs, to degenerate or even to disappear again
in Scalpellum. In the aberrant genus Ibla a degenerate male again
”) Although ,indifferentf is a better word in this case than hermaphrodite.
220
appears.' How, and why these sporadic dwarf males arise and again
disappear, they cannot say. Kriger therefore must have recourse
to yet another theory in order to get out of the difficulty, and
formulates it as follows: ,Von den heute lebenden Gattungen sind
Mitella und Scalpellum schon seit dem Obersilur bekannt. Es
waren auch damals festsitzende Geschåpfe, eine Lebensweise, die
nach unseren Kenntnissen das Auftreten der Zwittrigkeit begiin-
stigt, so dass sie also schon zu diesen Zeiten wieder hermaphro-
ditisch geworden waren und nun auf den heutigen Tag alle An-
klånge an ihren friiheren (Gonochorismus verloren haben." The
last sentence evinces that also Kriger in reality is of opinion
that the ancestors of the cirripeds had separate sexes. On the
other hand, he has here overlooked the fact that Scalpellum has
males, and in all probability has not acquired them in later times.
I have gone into details in this question, because the occur-
rence of males has hitherto been undervalued in the discussion
of cirriped phylogeny. We must agree with Kriger in maintain-
ing that the primitive cirripeds have had separate sexes, and that
their special biology, their fixed mode of living, makes us under-
stand the disappearance of the male, and the development of her-
maphroditism.”)
If the theory of the gonochoristic ancestors is correct, we shall
have to accept a link between Calantica and Mitella, or rather a
Mitella with male. So old this genus is that the chance of finding
it would seem rather problematic; my surprise therefore was great,
as among the material, brought home by Dr. Mortensen from
New Zealand, a Mitella-like species furnished with dwarf males
really occurs. As it is shown in the table on pag. 226 this genus,
Protomitella, links together the genera with males in a way that
makes helping theories completely superfluous.
Next to the parent form the genera in which the males have
kept a high organisation most probably must be ranged. Among
the recent genera Calantica has the highest developed males; in
the ,;male of. Calantica Mortenseni described below, even some of
the latera are present in the capitulum skeleton. According to
i 3 i ; É i
) Kriger in a letter to the author communicates that his embryologic
studies have later on given results which are in better accordance with
my theories than with Hoek's.
—…
221
this, we may conclude that the reduction of the males at all events
in some genera has set in at a late period, after the skeleton hav-
ing reached a high specialisation in both sexes. — The high de-
velopment of the male, and the variating features of the lower
whorl of plates in the capitulum indicate that Calantica occupies
a low stage in the phylogenetic series. In the nearly related genus
Smilium the male attains an almost equally high organisation as
in Calanlica, or is a little more reduced; on the other hand, one
of the latera -— viz. latus superius — has in the hermaphrodite
(or female) emancipated itself from the lower whorl of latera and
reaches a higher development. In the reduction of its dwarf males
the Euscalpellum-group (by Pilsbry 1908 separated out as a ge-
nus of its own) leads on to Scalpellum where the reduction of the
male is continued, till in some species it is entirely done away with;
moreover the subrostrum and subcarina have disappeared in the
skeleton of the great form. The last step in this line of develop-
ment leads to the new genus Scalpellopsis described below; here
the anterior latera are also reduced so that only the posterior latera
persist.
From Calantica the development has taken another course to
Protomitella. The male is kept here, although it does not seem
to occur abundantly; its organisation is the same as in most spec-
ies of Calantica. In the hermaphrodite the upper row of pedun-
cular scales attain a peculiar, high development and join the capi-
tulum skeleton as a lower row of accessory small latera; the
constant appearance of a subcarina, and the somewhat variating
development of the principal latera known in Calantica give evid-
ences of near relationship. From Protomitella there is but a short
step to Mitella, where the male has entirely disappeared, and where
an upper row of latera is generally, although not invariably, more
developed than the accessory, lower latera, here designated as
emancipated upper scales of the peduncle. Nearly related is also
Lithotrya, in which genus the male is likewise wanting; here it is
obvious that the upper row of stalk scales, although highly devel-
oped, do not in reality belong to the capitulum skeleton.
Finally also another genus naturally belongs to this group, viz.
Ibla, in which calcification has been abandoned, and where, ac-
cordingly, only the primordial plates persist, with exception of the
BØ2
carina. It would be of great interest to study the development of this
peculiar genus in order to see if the carina is not indicated in the
pupa. — The skeleton of the peduncle is in /bla represented by
numerous chitinal spines or hairs, in the adult of one species again
disappearing. In /bla males are present and attain a comparatively
high organisation; the affinity with Protomitella is evident, and no
heed being paid to the secernation of carbonate of lime, there is
no great gap here either.
We shall here have to face the question, whether it is pos-
sible to give a plausible explanation of the absence of a male in
Sealpellopsis, Mitella, and Lithotrya, as compared with the other
genera of this great phylogenetic group. Evidently the biological
conditions give us a key. Calantica, Smilium, and Scalpellum are
in general deeper living forms, and the individuals are only seldom
found living crowded; quite on the contrary, the dredges very
seldom catch more than one or some very few specimens of one
species at a time. A cross fertilization would here be almost pre-
cluded, if no males had been present. Protomitella, and Ibla are
shallow-water genera; Ibla is a rare genus, the individuals of which
always seem to occur almost singly. The biology of Protomitella
demands further study; here the male seems to be about to dis-
appear, or it is more numerous at some time of the year than" at
others; the only species known does not seem to be very abundant.
Turning to the other genera we find that Mitella is an inhab-
itant of shallow water, mostly even of the tidal zone, and its spec-
ies are generally found in great, crowded assemblies, a cross fert-
ilization thus being secured without males. The same seems to hold
good in Lithotrya, although the specimens of this genus, owing to
their more hidden living places, have not been observed in such
great numbers as Mitella. The biology of Scalpellopsis is unknown;
nevertheless the only species known was found in great numbers
on a hydroid colony, and thus seems to live in communities. —
The facts here given show that all the genera hitherto spoken
of are connected by narrow affinities; on the other hand, they are
separated by a rather pronounced gap from the other pedunculated
cirripeds in their skeleton as well as in their finer characters, and
in the occurrence of a male. They naturally form a family. Com-
mon to all of these genera is the skeleton of the peduncle; more- ”
em ene
223
over the carina has its umbo at or near the apex; in some Scal-
pellum-species the umbo is through growth secondarily removed
somewhat down the plate, although never reaching the middle of
the plate. In the scuta the umbo is invariably situated at the
apex.
The family has evidently been limited in the same way by
Pilsbry (1916, p. 14), and there is no reason to change the
name Scalpellidae given by him already in 1907; nor is the gap
between Ibla and the other genera large enough to defend the
proceeding of Annandale (1909) who places this genus in a
family of its own.
The other pedunculated cirripeds show quite different lines of
development. The first difficulty arising here, is the question,
which genus is the most primitive. Taking again into consideration
that the ancestral form of the recent cirripeds has after all had
a skeleton of five primordial valves, we can at once discard a
theory of the genera with reduced number of plates as primitive.
We shall, therefore, have to chose between the genera with five
plates i. e. Oxynaspis, Lepas, Poecilasma, Megalasma, and Octolas-
mis. AS to the last named genus we can at once leave it out of
the discussion; the species give clear evidence of the reduction
by a splitting up of the plates being due to adaptation: the more
specialised ihe biology (as f. inst. the life in the gill chamber of a
crab) the farther the reduction has proceeded; also the special bio-
logy of more of the species designates it as a more specialized
genus. The same applies to Oxynaspis, although this genus by many
authors has been considered a very primitive one; its peculiar com-
mensalism with Anthipatharians, which has resulted in the latter
enveloping the cirriped in its tissues, decidedly evince the well
adapted, i. e. from the parent stock probably more or less differ-
ent genus.
In Megalasma the individual development clearly tells us that
the position of the scutal umbo at the occludent margin above the
basal angle of the plate is a secondary feature, and that the pre-
decessors of the genus have had basal umbo of their scuta. Thus
only two genera are left, viz. Lepas and Poecilasma, and here we
are at a loss. With our present knowledge it is impossible to say
224
whether 'one or the other of these two genera is the more prim-
itive, as neither the biology nor other features yield any foothold
for a reliable conclusion in that respect. Both genera show the
central characters of the group, viz. a naked peduncle, a carina
with a basal umbo, and scuta with their umbones where the basal
and the occludent margins meet. In both genera there is an evid-
ent tendency towards a reduction of the formation of carbonate of
lime in the plates, although this feature is a little more pro-
nounced in Poecilasma than in £epas. The two genera are closely re-
lated, indeed so closely that Darwin (1852) made his excuses,
when he introduced Poecilasma beside Lepas, and with these two
forms the other genera with naked peduncles have originated.
According to the theories of previous authors, the scalpelloid
group starts from Oxynaspis (Darwin), or the forms with naked
peduncles are derived from the scapelloid group (Hoek, Gruvel).
The males of the primitive Scalpellidae contradict the first
theory. The other theory is contradicted by other facts; no trace
can be found in adult or juvenile specimens, or during the post-
embryonic development of a peduncle skeleton in the Lepadid
group, and every trace of accessory capitulum plates is also absent.
Stronger weight must however be ascribed to the fundamentally dif-
ferent position of the carinal, and scutal umbones in the groups. As
long as the capability of lime secretion is mainly bound to the
transition from capitulum to peduncle, the umbones of the five
primary valves are apically situated; the formation of accessive
plates (both plates of the capitulum, and the scales of the peduncle)
is as the investigations have shown, confined to this zone of lime
secretion. If now, as in Lepadidae s. str., the capability of lime
secretion moves away from the transition to the peduncle, and is
confined to the middle part of the capitulum, the umbones of scuta
and carina will become basal, and, moreover, the formation of ac-
cessive lower capitulum plates and peduncular scales will be pre-
cluded. These features indicate that the two groups, or families,
viz. the Scalpellidae, and Lepadidae s. str. have arisen separ-
ately from the ancestral form.
From Lepas the genus Conchoderma has evidently arisen; both
genera agree in their mouth parts, and show a great development
of the filamentary appendages. A further reduction of the skeleton
225
in Conchoderma leads on to Alepas; again the mouth feet, espec-
ially the peculiar, terraced construction of the cutting edge of the
maxilla and the many teeth of the mandible point to a closer re-
lationship with the latter form than with any other genus of the
group. Alepas has also kept the filamentary appendages.
The other genera, on the other hand, seem to have arisen from
Poecilasma. The step from this genus to Megalasma is indeed so
short that we may doubt the correctness of a separation; many of
the species of the latter genus have been ranged with Poecilasma,
till Pilsbry (1907) laid a new foundation for the generic separ-
ation; nevertheless, the question whether these genera were not
more correctly to be merged into one can by no means be re-
garded as settled. — In Megalasma the scuta tend to bring the
basal margin in line with the occludent margin by a rotation round
the umbo; this tendency is also seen in Oxynaspis, although not
so distinctly. Moreover the carinal umbo in this latter genus is mov-
ing upwards along the dorsal line, although never passing by the
middle of the plate; in some Poecilasma — and Lepas — species a
»basal platef is indicated in the carina below the umbo, and this
has now in Oxynaspis attained a rather high development. The
maxilla of Oxynaspis decidedly point to a nearer relationship with
Poecilasma than with Lepas, and the habitat of the genus is also
more in conformity with the deeper living species of Poecilasma.
In Poecilasma as in Lepas some species show a tendency to-
wards a reduction of the calcification, and towards a splitting up
of the outer parts of the plates. This leads from Poecilasma into
Octolasmis, in which genus the biological conditions favour a ske-
letonal reduction. To this generic line — although probably not
directly through Octolasmis — Heteralepas links itself. One might
believe in a closer relationship between this genus and Concho-
derma, when judging by the external appearance. But the mouth
parts of Heteralepas, and especially of the subgenus Heteralepas
s. str. are directly identical with those of Poecilasma and strikingly
in contrast with those of Lepas, and Conchoderma. Qwing to the
great conservatism of these organs in the cirripeds we must ascribe
a great phylogenetic value to them.
According to this, we find in this family two fine examples of
convergence represented by the lines of development of Poecilasma
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 73. 15
226
— Octolasmis — Heteralepas, and of Lepas — Conchoderma — Alepas.
Nothing serves better to elucidate the inadequacy of Gruvel's
(1905) family Anaspidae.”) Nothing speaks in favour of dividing
up the group treated above, it forms a natural group, the family
Fepadidaersenssstr:
I do not here enter into a discussion of the more or less aber-
rant genera Chaetolepas, Microlepas, Anelasma, and Koleolepas. The
Aj
AV
=Sy
Sralnellensss
Heteralenas Alenas
Oectolasmis Conchoderma
0 Ø
Megalasma ALLES RE
Poecilasma Lenas
Calantica
Sag
ancestral form
Fig. 1. Diagram showing the phylogenetic aftinities of Scalpellidae,
and Lepadidae.
first of these genera in some respects seems to occupy a very
primitive position, but it has as yet been studied too little to just-
ify any judgement. The other genera are evidently very much
transformed or reduced by special biological conditions, and re-
newed studies are required to settle different questions concerning
these enigmatic genera and their relationship with the other ped-
unculated cirripeds.
') Quite apart from the fact that this name is preoccupied for a family of
the Cumacea.
227
To give a short review of the results arrived at in the dis-
cussion of the relationship of the pedunculated cirripeds I add a
diagram of their phylogenetic connections, as far as we can con-
struct them with our present knowledge (fig. 1).
Systematic account of.the collections.
Family Scalpellidae Pilsbry.
According to the introductory chapter, this family, as also
evidently maintained by Pilsbry (1916, p. 14), comprises the
Pollicipedidae and Iblidae of Annandale (1909, p. 63).
Ås to the name, there is no reason to change it; Scalpellidae
was already used by Pilsbry in 1907, and the generic name
Pollicipes must be dropped, according to the nomenclatory rules, so
that nothing is gained by the change proposed by Annandale.
The family names introduced by Gruvel (1905) are misleading,
and not in accordance with the nomenclatory rules; they are not
based on generic names, and come into conflict with names in
other groups of animals.”)
Nothing is gained by a division into subfamilies. In fact the
genera of the family are linked together in such a way that it is
difficult, if at all possible, to see where the lines of division should
be drawn. The only genera, which diverge a little, are Lithotrya,
and Ibla, but it is of no use putting them into subfamilies of their
own. .
In the collections only Lithotrya is wanting.
Genus Calantica (Gray) Pilsbry.
Calantica villosa (Leach) Gray.
Halfmoon Bay, Stewart Island. The beach. 19/IX 14. One specimen.
Queen Charlotte Sound, New Zealand, 3—10 fathoms. 19—20/X 14.
One specimen.
") Comp. f.inst. Anaspidae, previously preoccupied for Cumacea, Pen-
tameridae, Tetrameridae as used by students of Coleoptera, etc.
ss
is
228
Calantica Mortenseni n. sp.
10 miles N. W. of Cape Maria v. Diemen, New Zealand. 50 fathoms; hard
bottom. 5/I 15. One specimen.
The species is characterised by its large primary valves, which
make a sharp contrast to the small rostrum and latera. The carina
and scuta are of almost equal length, and only little shorter than
the nailshaped terga.
The carina (Fig. 2) is almost straight, only feebly, but evenly
bowed with the apex between tne edges of the terga. Seen from
behind it is very slenderly triangular with straight sides.
Fig. 2. Calantica Mortenseni. a. rostral, b. lateral, c. carinal aspect; d. skeleton of
the peduncle. [a.—c. X 2, d. X 12).
IhettergatareltheRlarsestkplateskolæthe capitulum, and with
their length of 12 mm almost quite as long as the entire capitu-
lum. The plate is nail-shaped, and not very pointed at the apex;
it has a rather short and straight occludent margin. The carinal
margin is evenly rounded with only a very small part above the
apex of the carina; also the scutal margin is evenly rounded, the
angle between this latter and the occludent margin very blunt.
The scuta are large, triangular, almost twice as high as broad,
with a pointed apex. The length is about the same as that of the
carina, or %/6 of the terga. The tergal margin is feebly concave,
the occludent margin all but straight. i
Rostrum is the most prominent among the lower row of plates,
although its height does not reach 2,5 mm. It is broadly triang-
ular, its apical part recurved.
229
The latera are low, and triangular, with sømewhat recurved
apices; whereas the upper latus is almost symmetrical, the apex
in the rostral latus is situated near the rostrum, and in the
carinal latus oppositely, i. e. at the carinal side. A small, sym-
metrical subcarina has the same shape as the rostrum, but is
much smaller.
The peduncle is a little more than half as long as the ca-
pitulum, broad, and laterally feebly compressed. It is covered with
densely crowded, calcareous scales.
SE ==
FN =S
SER
Wa
b. Cc:
a.
Fig. 3. Calantica Mortenseni. ed a. entire ammal in lateral aspect. b. mandible.
c. maxilla. [a. X 44. b.—c. X 240).
The capitulum is 13 mm long with a width of 11 mm, and a
lateral greater breadth of 5,5 mm. The peduncle is 7 mm long. —
As only one specimen was present in the material, I would not
damage it more than absolutely necessary, and therefore cannot
give details as to the anatomy of the animal.
Two males were present at the usual place, and were visible
to the naked eye in the female (or hermaphrodite). One of them
was sacrificed for closer investigation.
The male in the present species attains a more than usually
high development (Fig. 3) having a capitulum skeleton of carina,
terga, scuta, rostrum, and three pairs of latera above the distinct
peduncle.
The carina is almost triangular, with rather broad base, and
does not quite reach the apex of the capitulum; its umbo is apical,
230
and covered by the chitinal primordial valve. Tergum has a
peculiar shape: its lower, greater part is basally narrowly rounded
or almost pointed; the upper end, which is covered by the prim-
ordial, chitinal plate has its longer axis perpendicular to that of the
calcareous valve; an excavation of the scutal margin just below
the apex gives the entire plate a characteristic, birdlike shape. —
The scuta are slenderly triangular; the tergal margin is concave,
forming an angle in the middle part. The primordial plate is (/-
shaped and placed on the apex of the scutum; the basal margin
ef the valve is convex. Rostrum is large, in length about >”/3 of
the carina, its basal breadth even larger than that of the carina.
The plate is recurved, in ventral aspect broadly triangular. — The
upper latus is quadrangular and rather large, the rostral latus
broadly triangular, about half as large as the upper latus; the
carinal latus is smaller than the rostral latus, but of the same
shape.
The "distinct peduncele" measures "between /elande/ ofte
entire length of the male; it is very broad, and almost cylindrical.
The male has the complete organisation of a fully developed
hermaphrodite. Six well developed pairs of bifurcated cirri are pre-
sent. In cirrus I there are five segments on each ramus, the rami
of cirri Il and III have six, those of cirri IV to VI show seven
segments each. The segments carry the usual armature: on the
posterior side the segment distally has one pair of hairs, on the
anterior side there are three pairs along the median line, the distal
pair being the larger; often a single small hair appears below the
three pairs mentioned near the base of the segment.
Caudal appendages are present; they consist of one broad
segment carrying two long, distal hairs of unequal size. — The
Penis is short, and stout, about half as long as cirrus VI.
The mandible has three teeth, and a broad, pectinate lower
angle; the maxilla has a notch below the upper spines.
Calantica Mortenseni is nearly related to Calantica eos Pilsbry
and Calantica trispinosa (Hoek). In Calantica eos the scutum is
broader and shorter, only being ”/3 of the terga; also the carina
is shorter and more straight in Calantica eos. The outlines of the
capitulum are rounded in Calantica Mortenseni; in Calantica eos
the capitulum is triangular with almost straight sides. To this may
sm
231
be added. that the upper part of the peduncle in Calantica eos is
nude, whereas the peduncular skeleton covers the entire peduncle
in Calantica Mortenseni. A comparison of the males is precluded,
the male of Calantica eos not being described. — Calantica tri-
spinosa has an entirely aberrant shape, the apices of the carina,
terga, and scuta are pointed, prominent, and free, and there is a
great space between the rostrum and the rostral latus. These feat-
ures seem to demonstrate with certainty, that the specimens from
Japan, which Kriger (1911, p. 11) refers to Calantica trispinosa,
are not at all identical with Hoek's species; although Kriger says
that ,von der åusseren Gestalt (Taf. I, Fig. 1) giebt Hoek im Chal-
lenger-Report eine genaue Beschreibung, zu der ich nur wenig
hinzuzufigen habef", his photographs (Taf. I, Fig. 1, 1. c.) show
such differences from Hoek's drawings and descriptions that the
identity is almost entirely out of question with our present know-
ledge. Kriger's specimens are evidently much more related to
Calantica eos or Calantica Mortenseni. His description of the male
shows, that it has a capitulum skeleton of carina, terga, scuta, and
rostrum, but no latera; in these features it differs from Calantica
Mortenseni, so that the identity of the Japanese species remains
doubtful. — Calantica Kempi (Annandale)!) differs from the
present species in the presence of a subrostrum, and in the coarsely
sculptured plates.
Calantica Mortenseni, owing to the remarkable development of
its male, occupies a very interesting position among the Scalpel-
lidae. The most highly developed males hitherto known in the
genera Calantica and Smilium have a capitulum skeleton, consisting
of carina, terga, scuta, and rostrum; in Calantica Mortenseni also
three pairs of latera are present, and among these, curiously enough
the upper latus attains a higher development than the others.
The high development of the male gives evidence that we here
face a rather primitive species; it stands comparatively near to the
ancestors of the entire group, which in all probability have had
separate sexes with equally highly developed males and females.
The complete organisation of the male in Calantica Mortenseni points
”) Scalpellum Kempi Annandale (1911, p. 589), syn. Scalpellum Pilsbryi
Cruvel (1912 p3):
232
to its living its own, independent life in the same way as Kriger
maintains for Smilium Peronii, which he has described in detail
(lor 3)
Calantica affinis n. sp.
25 miles E. to S. of Zamboanga; 200 fathoms, on a siliceous sponge.
3/III 14. Several specimens.
The species is characterised by its rather large latera, which
overlap each other, and by its nude and short peduncle. (Fig. 4).
Fig. 4. Calantica affinis from 25 miles E. to S. of Zamboanga. a—e —, type in rostral,
lateral, and carinal view; d quite young hermaphrodite; e mandible, f maxilla; g
complemental male. (a—c X 2,7;-d X 5,3; e--g X 33).
The carina is long, and evenly bent; in dorsal aspect it is
rather broad, with feebly convex sides; umbo is apical.
Tergum has an arched carinal margin with a stronger bend
in the middle; the occludent, and the scutal margins are straight.
Among the capitulum plates the tergum attains the greater length,
although it does not very much exceed the carina and scuta.
The scutum is triangular with straight occludent, and tergal
margins; only the basal margin is convex, and strongly bent.
Rostrum is short and broad with recurved apex; in ventral
aspect it is almost rhomboidal, and broader than high.
The latera are broad, and triangular; the superior latus with
its distal free portion covers the lower parts of tergum and scutum;
its base is overlapped by the carinal, and partly also by the rostral
latus. A subcarina is present; it has the same triangular shape
as the latera, and partly hides the basal portion of the carinal
latera.
233
The peduncle is short, and broad, covered by a smooth
cuticle which exhibits no trace of scales or hairs of any kind.
The peduncle even may be shorter than in the specimens figured.
The first cirrus is placed at a little distance from the second ;
its rami are unequal, the shorter with 10, the longer ramus with
12 segments. The cirri II— VI are long, and strongly curved, with
equal rami; in the cirrus V each ramus has about 20 segments.
Caudal appendages are present; they are small, consist of one
segment with one great hair at the base, and two or three hairs
at the distal broad end.
The well developed penis attains a length of %/4 of cirrus
VI; it is not annulated, but has some small hairs scattered all
over.
Of the mouth feet the mandible has three larger teeth, and
between the first and second teeth two smaller ones; the lower
angle is rather pointedly rounded and finely pectinate. The inferior
part of the mandible is richly furnished with hairs; at the upper
side a small tuft of hairs is seen.
The maxilla has two. stronger and one smaller spine at the
upper angle; there is a distinct notch between the upper spines and
the group of large spines which occupy the median third of the cut-
ting edge; the lower third of the edge is armed with short and
stiff bristles or hairs. The surface of the maxilla is richly adorned
"with fine hairs.
The outer maxillae are obovate, with rather pointed ends;
the interior margin has large, hairlike spines on its outer part.
Several specimens were found attached to a siliceous sponge
which forms a hard crust. The largest specimens had a capitulum
length of 12 mm; the width of the capitulum is 7, the lateral
axis at the base 4 mm; the peduncle only reaches a length of
2,5 mm.
Complemental males are present. They have a distinct ped-
uncle, and capitulum, the latter with a well developed skeleton,
consisting of carina, terga, scuta, and rostrum; the primary valves
have the primordial, chitinal plates at the apex. The shape of the
terga is peculiar, the primordial valve forming a beak-like process
at the anterior side. Carina and rostrum are triangular with
234
broad base. The peduncle is short and passes rather imperceptibly
into the capitulum.
Calantica affinis conspicuously differs from the other species of
the genus by its nude peduncle; indeed, this character distinguishes
it from all the family, and only the accessory plates of the capi-
tulum show its affinities. The most nearly related species seems
to be Calantica superba (Pilsbry); in the latter species the latera
have rounded apices, and also the scutal apex is bent in over the
tergum, and thus decidedly differs from Calantica affinis.
Genus Smilium (Gray).
Pilsbry (1908), and "after him"Kru ger (lor) EmakeRakdisE
tinction between the genera Smilium and Euscalpellum on base of
their males; in Smilium the males have the same skeleton as in
most of the Calantica-species, with six well developed capitulum
plates, whereas in the genus Euscalpellum, the capitulum skeleton
of the males consists of only three rudimentary plates. Although
this character is of great interest biologically seen, and also second-
arily might serve as a strengthening feature to a generic diagnosis,
we cannot look upon the character as a generic fundamentum divi-
sionis. In this respect we may point to the male of Calantica Mor-
tenseni which logically ought to serve as the base of a new genus,
if we were to follow Pilsbry's reasoning; to this must be added
that the biologically much more essential feature of the existence,
resp. absence of a male in the different species of Scalpellum does
not come on record in the systematics. Although these features are
of great interest and ought to be carefully studied, they must not
be overvalued as systematic characters.
In this paper Smilium comprises both genera of Pilsbry men-
tioned above, i. e. all scalpelloid barnacles with subcarina, and with
an upper latus pushed in between scutum, tergum, and carina.
Smilium acutum (Hoek) Pilsbry.
32” 15? N. 128” 12? E., 90 fathoms ,,Hyaton: Maru 15/V14.77Eour
specimens on a hydroid colony.
Menado Bay: 1” 31” N. 124? 47? E., 250 fathoms. Capt. Christiansen
leg 12/III 13. One specimen on a hydroid.
235
This fine little species was first
described by Hoek (1883) as Scal-
pellum acutum, later by Gruvel (1900)
as Scalpellum longirostrum. Hoek's
figure is not quite characteristic be-
cause the subcarina is almost invisible,
owing to the somewhat oblique pro-
jection; it was his figure which led
Gruvel to consider his specimens as
representatives of another species; also
his drawing is somewhat aberrant in :
the contours of the rostral latus and Fig. 5. Smilium acutum from the
the subcarina, in comparison with my ER RER ostral
specimens, and I, therefore, here give
a camera drawing of the specimen from Menado Bay (Fig. 5); it
evidentiy agrees the best with Hoek's type.
Genus Scalpellum.
In the treatment of this difficult genus, Pilsbry (1907) has
drawn up new lines, which seem to be of great value. The old
classificatory lines drawn up by Hoek, and followed by Gruvel
show their inadequacy, nearly related species often being separated
and put in distant groups only on behalf of the presence or ab-
sence of a rudimentary, often almost invisible rostrum. Rudiment-
ary plates, which always greatly vary in shape and development,
cannot serve as a basis for greater systematic groups. — Indeed,
a total revision of the genus is necessary; but first of all the de-
velopment of the species has to be elucidated; probably many of
the species have been described from young specimens and ulti-
mately will turn out to be synonyms.
Scalpellum Stearnsii Piisbry.
15 miles W.//2 S. of Jolo, 250 fathoms. 27/III 14. Four specimens.
Sagami Bay, 80—120 fathoms. 6—19/VI 14. One specimen.
Sagami Bay, 400 fathoms. 2/VII 14. One specimen.
SPS EN 128217 E 110 fathoms—, Hyatone Maru FI AVET AEK ONE
specimen.
236
The specimens show the following dimensions in mm:
I II III IV V VI VII
Capitulum, length. 45 45 44 38 22 20 18
Peduncle, length .. 80 69 50 80 9 13 15
The specimens vary much in their external features, and com-
pletely bridge the small gap between the typical form described
by Pilsbry (1890), and later by Hoeck (1907) from Sagami,
and the var. robusta Hoek (1907) from the ,,Sibogaf expedition.
There is, indeed, no reason whatever to keep these variants as
separate , varieties".
Fig, 6. Scalpellum Stearnsii. a.-—-d. apical projections of the carina a specimen from
Sagami, b.—d. specimens from Jolo, e. small specimen from 15 miles W. 1/2 S. of Joio.
[a.—d. nat. size, e. X 6,7.
The hornlike projection of the carinal latus exhibits great vari-
ation (Fig. 6 a.—d.); it ean be almost wanting, or it is strongly
developed as in one of the Sagami-specimens (nr. III). A parallel
variation is shown in Hoek's figure of his var. genuina (1907,
pl. VI, fig. 4).
In Scalpellum Stearnsii the varying extent of the calcification
of the valves throws a glaring light on the value of this character
as a base for systematic subdivision of the genus. Also Pilsbry
(1907) has pointed to the invalidity of the character although he
maintains it on behalf of convenience. It would not be surprising
indeed if it were to be demonstrated that several of the imper-
fectly calcified species of Scalpellum in reality are variants of spec-
ies which are normally perfectly calcified. It is in this connection inter-
esting to notice that in Scalpellum Stearnsii as in Scalpellum larvale
(comp. Pilsbry 1907, p. 194, pl. VI, figs. 2—6) — a species with
237
only very imperfectly calcified valves in the adult — the younger
specimens have more extensively calcified plates than the old ones;
indeed the youngest stages known of both species have completely
calcified capitulum plates (Fig. 6e.). The young specimen of Scal-
pellum Stearnsii figured is indeed so different from the adult that
it might be regarded as a representative of another species, were
it not for its occurrence; it was found fixed to the stalk of the
specimen I (from Jolo), which moreover on its right scutum car-
ries another young, but typical specimen (VII of the table).
An interesting hint as to the enemies of the barnacles is af-
forded by the specimen V (from ,Hyaton Maru"); a little below
the middle the carina has a smooth, circular hole like those made
by Lunatia in molluse-valves in Northern waters; the capitulum is
empty, the animal evidently eaten up by the mollusc. This indic-
ates that molluscs at all events may be enemies of the barnacles,
a fact hitherto unknown.
Scalpellum indicum Hoek.
25 miles E. to S. of Zamboanga, 200 fathoms 3/III 14. One specimen
on the nude axis of an anthipatharian.
21 miles W. 7/2 S. of Bonomisaki, 220 fathoms. ,,Hyaton Maruf 13/V 14.
One small specimen on Megalasma striatum.
Menado Bay, 1? 31 N., 124? 47?” E., 250 fathoms. Captain Christiansen
12/III 13. Two specimens fixed to the cirri of a crinoid.
Scalpellum rubrum Hoek.
Sagami Bay, 80—120 fathoms, sandy bottom. 6—19/VI 14. One specimen.
Okinose, Sagami Sea, 100 fathoms. 26/VI 14. One specimen.
In both specimens the capitulum has a length of 9, the ped-
uncle of 5 mm. In the specimen from Sagami Bay the small rost-
rum is almost rectangular.
The species is very nearly related to Scalpellum indicum, and
it might be a question, whether the occurrence of a rudimentary
rostrum, and the colour are indeed reliable as specific characters
in this case. Moreover much seems to speak in the direction of
both species being young Scalpellum Darwini Hoek; this question
demands closer study.
238
Scalpellum gruvelianum Pilsbry.
Departure Bay, Nanaimo, 20 fathoms. 8/VI 15. Several specimens.
Strait of Georgia, about 40 fathoms; mud and sponges. 16/VI 15. Several
specimens.
Strait of Georgia, about 50 fathoms; mud and stones. 7/VII 15. Two
small specimens.
Whereas the latter specimens hold an intermediate position be-
tween the typical form and the subspecies secundum Pilsbry
(1907), the other specimens decidedly belong to the latter sub-
Fig. 7. Scalpellum gruvelianum, f. secundum. Strait of Georgia. 40 fathoms. a. adult
specimen ; b. and c. young specimens; d. mandible, e. maxilla, f. caudal appendages
ofitheradult” [AK AND DERINDE TA FOKGEAM
species, although their inframedian latus seems to be a little more
prominent with a somewhat broader upper margin. The larger of
the specimens attain an entire length of about 1 cm with capitulums
between 6 and 7 mm.
Pilsbry (1907) does not give any details about the body of
the animal, although some of the details are rather characteristic.
The mouth feet are only scantily furnished with hairs. The
mandible (Fig. 7) has three strong, and rather pointed teeth; the
excavation between the first and the second tooth occupies more
than half the cutting edge. The lower (third) tooth has three dent-
icles on its upper edge. The inferior angle is rather square cut,
and densely pectinate, but almost destitute of finer hairs.
The maxilla has an almost straight cutting edge set with
spines all over; only the first two spines are a little more prominent;
239
the others are rather uniformly developed. Some scanty, fine hairs
are seen on the outer part of the maxilla.
In the cirrus I the branches are unequal, the anterior ramus
short, with 6 segments, and twice as broad as the posterior ramus
which has 8 segments; the basal segment of the posterior ramus
is very long, and evidently consists of two or three concrete seg-
ments. Cirrus II to VI have all but the same size; their rami
have about 13 segments each.
The caudal appendages are short, only consisting of the basal
segment (Fig. 7d.); they are rounded, with two or three short,
spinelike hairs along the dorsal side, and four hairs distally.
There is no trace of a penis in the animals dissected.
Small oval males are present in the specimens; they display the
most reduced type without any trace of skeleton.
Among the specimens from the Strait of Georgia three very
small individuals were found; two are represented in fig. 7b. and
c. the third one representing the same stage as the younger of
those figured. A comparison with parallel stages of Scalpellum
Strømii (vide Broch 1912) reveal interesting features of concord-
ance, and of differences.
The youngest stage shows us that in Scalpellum gruvelianum
as in Scalpellum Strømii the superior latus makes its appearance
at a very early stage, and the relative size of the plates indicates
that also here the two lower pairs of peduncular scales appear be-
fore the lower latera. In Scalpellum gruvelianum the carinal latus
is the first of the lower latera, which makes its appearance at the
transition from peduncle to capitulum, immediately followed by the
inframedium, and then also by the rostral latus. In Scalpellum
Strømii, on the contrary, the first plate developed of this row,
is the rostrum. The latter plate is rudimentary or absent in Scal-
pellum gruvelianum; herein my specimens confirm Pilsbry's state-
ments (1907); the rostrum may be indicated as a small nodule
hardly as large as a scale of the peduncle, or it may be totally
absent in the adult. — The other latera are, on the other hand,
parallelly developed in both species.
The somewhat older specimen has a small rostrum. This spec-
imen shows us that the same rule holds good in Scalpellum gru-
240
velianum, which was found in Scalpellum Strémii, mamely that new
peduncle scales are only developed at the transition from capitulum
to peduncle. The position of the primordial valve shows that the
growth of the carina is all but entirely limited to the lower part
of the plate.
The specimen exhibits some features which are rather enigm-
atic. In different parts, especially along the rapidly growing mar-
gins of the five primary plates, the epidermis is furnished with
scanty, large, and thick hairs, and similar, although somewhat smal-
ler hairs also appear below the rostral latera. Moreover, the apex
of the capitulum at the upper end of the occludent margin carries
one pair of rather tentacle-like organs covered all over with short
hairs. The last features recall the tentacular organs in young
Scalpellum Stearnsii described by Hoek (1907), although they
are smaller, and less numerous in the present species. We must
admit with Hoek that nothing can be said as yet about the
physiological function of these organs. In Scalpellum Stearnsii Hoek
observed similar organs in the male; in Scalpellum gruvelianum
no trace of them was found in the males.
It is surprising that neither hairs nor tentacular organs were
found in the smallest specimen, and I shall not venture to give any
explanation of the case. Of course, one might think that two dif-
ferent species were represented. This probability must be charact-
erized as very remote; in the rather great assemblage of spec-
imens gathered, no other Scalpellum species was represented, and
the occurrence of a single, young specimen of another species
would then be rather curious. Judging from the occurrence of other
species, and their young stages, everything speaks against its be-
longing to another species than Scalpellum gruvelianum. I never-
theless wish to point out that we cannot deny the possibility, how-
ever remote it may seem.
Scalpellum californicum Pilsbry.
Off Redondo, California; 30 fathoms. 25/IX 15. Seven specimens.
Pilsbry (1907a) only gives few details as to the animal itself.
The mouth feet are not very hairy. The mandible (Fig. 8)
has three teeth, the second being situated at the middle of the
cutting edge. The lower angle is rather pointed, and finely pectin-
pen hudl
Es ——
241
ate. The lower part of the mandible is covered by small hairs,
placed in groups of two or three. — The maxilla has somewhat
arched cutting edge with long spines, of which only the upper one is
a little more prominent. Only a narrow zone along the edge is hairy.
The rami of the cirrus I are much
alike with globose segments, and only
differ in their numbers of segments,
the anterior having 10 or 11, the post-
erior 11 or 12 segments. There is a
distinet interval between cirrus I and Il;
also in cirrus II the anterior ramus
has somewhat swollen segments. The
number of segments in the rami of
elrmrussIltol VI counts" from 18 4022.
The caudal appendages consist
of a feeble apophysis and a small glob-
ose, distal segment; two larger and
four or five smaller hairs are placed
distally on the appendage.
The penis is about half as long
as the cirrus VI; it is sparsely hairy
all over, and has no special tuft at its Fig 8. Scalpellum californicum, off
å Redondo. a. mandible, b. maxilla.
distal end. [X 441.
Scalpellum aff. salartiæ Gruvel.
15 miles W. "/2 S. of Jolo; 250 fathoms. 27/III 14. One specimen.
Gruvel (1905, 1901) in his description of Scalpellum salartiæ
says ,Rostre quadrangulaire, légérement recouvert par les extré-
mités umbonales des rostro-latéralesf ; this taken together with his
drawings tells us that the rostrum in this species is rudimentary,
and therefore probably variable in size and shape. Moreover, the
small size of Gruvel's specimen — total length 2,5 mm — seems
to indicate that the species has been based on a very young spec-
imen. No weight can therefore be ascribed to the rostrum of the
present, larger specimen being very small, and triangular, and not
directly covered by the edges of the rostral-latera. Aiso the some-
what irregular, and scantier armature with scales of the peduncle
in Gruvel's specimen may be due to its smaller size, as is evident
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 73. 16
242
from the development of other Scalpellum spec-
ies. The present specimen (Fig. 9) has a capi-
tulum length of 5,5 mm with a width of 3,2
mm, and a peduncle length of 3 mm.
More weight might be ascribed to the cut-
icle which, according to Gruvel, is ,mince et
glabre", whereas in the present specimen, espec-
ially on the carinal side, it is covered with fine
and rather long hairs.
Nevertheless I am inclined to refer my spec-
Fig. 9. Scalpellum aff. imen to the same species, and do not introd-
salartiæ; W. 1/2 S. off
Jolo. a. rostrum. [X5,3].. uce a new name for it, the more so, as cert-
ainly too many species have already been described in the present
group, the subgenus Scalpellum Pilsbry (1907).
Scalpellum balanøides Hoek.
25 miles E. to S. of Zamboanga; 160 fathoms. 3/III 14. Several spec-
imens, together with Sc. indicum.
Menado Bay, 1” 37 N., 124? 47” E. 250 fathoms. Captain Christiansen
13/III 13. Several specimens on the cirri of a crinoid, together
with Megalasma minus.
The very characteristic species has been care-
fully described by Hoek (1883). In the present
specimens (Fig. 10) the lines of growth are rather
distinct; as moreover Hoek's drawings of the
habitus are not quite satisfactory, I give a camera
drawing of one of the adult specimens.
Among the specimens brought home by Dr.
Mortensen also some very young ones were
present, the smallest of which is represented in
fig. 10b. It differs interestingly from the outgrown
form in having a comparatively larger inframedian
latus, the apex of which covers the lower, hind
angle of the scutum. Also the carinal latus is
comparatively much larger than in the adult, and
the apex of the carina is free. In the peduncle
the regular arrangement of the scales is only seen
in the upper part. — Intermediate stages of growth
link this specimen to the typical adult form.
Fig. 10. Scalpellum ba-
lanoides. a. adult spec-
imen from MenadoBay,
b. young specimen
from 25 miles E. to S.
of Zamboanga. [X 4).
ERE LO
Em ed Me
243
Genus Scalpellopsis nov.
Capitulum with 9 or 11 plates: rostrum, and rostral latus absent,
inframedian latus rudimentary, carinal latus well developed. Upper
latus interposed between carina, tergum, and scutum. Peduncle
with scales. — Male absent.
It is not without hesitation that I introduce this new genus. It
is closely allied to Scalpellum, and we might feel inclined to con-
sider it a subgenus of the latter. Nevertheless the great number
of species of that genus, and the dissatisfactory systematic group-
ings of it made me prefer, at all events provisionally, to introduce
a new genus for the species described below. The great reductions
in the lower row of latera give it an aspect which differs strik-
ingly from the true Scalpellum.
Scalpellopsis striatociliata n. sp.
Near Jolo; 20 to 30 fathoms, on hydroids. 19/III 14. Several specimens.
Valves of the capitulum eleven, covered by a chitinous mem-
brane. Carina simply bent with apical umbo. Terga triangular, scuta
quadrangular with apical umbones. Upper latus large, quadrangular.
Carinal latus large, triangular, pointed towards the rudimentary
inframedian latus. — Scales of the peduncle large, in four longi-
tudinal rows. Cuticle of the' capitulum with transverse rows of long
hairs. Peduncle with a broad, anterior, longitudinal furrow.
The capitulum (Fig. 11) is broad; its width is about two
thirds of its height. It is covered by a pellucid, hairy, chitinous
membrane, and the transversal rows of hairs lend a peculiar aspect
to the species. The rather long hairs are placed in four or more
transverse rows on the terga, scuta, and carina, two or three on
the carinal latus, but no distinct rows were observed on the upper
latus; at the lower part of this plate, between the plate, the scutum,
and the carinal latus a row of hairs is seen. The interspaces be-
tween the capitulum plates are very narrow, but of a dark brown-
"ish hue.
Scutum is quadrangular with an almost quite straight occlud-
ent margin; the umbo is apical. The apical part slightly overlaps
16"
244
the base 'of the tergum. The base of the scutum is broad; the
plate becomes narrower upwards along the superior latus, so that
its shape somewhat tends towards the triangular form; the tergal
margin is a little excavated.
The tergum is triangular with a somewhat concave occludent
margin; the apex is pointed.
Fig. 11. Scalpellopsis striatociliata, off Jolo. a. rostral, b. lateral, c. carinal view of
adult specimen (in c. the cuticular hairs are omitted); d. mandible, e. maxilla.
[a—c X 17, d—e X 147).
The carina is simply bent with a pointed apex. The plate is
narrow, its basal margin is angularly bent, and footing on the
carinal latera.
The upper latus is quadrangular with a somewhat pointed
apex jutting in between the scutum and tergum. The inframedian
latus is rudimentary, only represented by a small, calcareous nod-
ule at the hind part of the basal scutal margin. The carinallatus
is large, and triangular. Its upper margin extends from the dorsal,
sagittal line past the upper latus and a little beyond the hinder,
basal angie of the scutum. The dorsal margins of the carinal latera
meet in the sagittal, dorsal line of the capitulum.
The peduncle is short, and thick; it merges evenly into the
capitulum. The skeleton of the peduncle consists of four rows of
broad, and low scales, the ends of which overlap a little at the
sides of the peduncle, whereas there is a distinct interspace pres-
ent between the scales along the sagittal lines, a little broader on
the ventral than on the dorsal side. The broad ventral side of the
245
peduncle is somewhat excavated by a broad furrow from the capi-
tulum to the base.
Size: the larger of the specimens attain a total length of 2,5
mm wih a capitulum of 1,5 mm.
hhekmouthtfeetkintthentseneralifeatureskagreeRwithelthe
Scalpellum-type. They are only scantily adorned with hairs.
The mandible has three strong teeth separated by almost
equally great excavations; the lower angle is pointed, almost tooth-
snaped, with a strongly pectinate upper edge.
The maxilla has two large, and one or two smaller spines
at its upper side; below these spines there is a shallow but well
defined excavation; the lower half of the cutting edge is armed
with 6 or 8 strong spines.
The cirrus I is placed beside the mouth, and separated from
the next cirrus by a small interval; it is only slightly stouter than
the other cirri, and has subequal rami. The anterior ramus has
Sme posterior6segments: Cirrus IIS to VE FarefFrathert short
slender, and only little curved. Their rami have 8 to 10 segments.
Caudal appendages are absent.
The penis is short, not reaching half the length of the cirrus
VI. It has some few, small hairs here and there, and a strong
tuft of hairs at the distal end.
More than thirty specimens of this curious little barnacle were
brought home by Dr. Mortensen from the Philippines, all of
them fixed to one hydroid colony (a Grammaria sp.). I was at first
inelined to look upon them as young specimens of some species
omlotherkoltherscalpellidaes"onlytinfthisfcasertheykwouldebe
curiously discordant with all stages of development in the group
hitherto known. A closer study revealed the astonishing fact that
all larger specimens in their mantle cavity had eggs in different
stages of development; the specimens have only 15 to 25 eggs
developing at a time. This proves that the animals are outgrown,
and we are obliged to consider them as representatives of a new
species, which is so aberrant that at present we must even place
it in a genus of its own, no other species being known which can
be said to be nearly related to this one.
Among the specimens also some few quite young ones are
246
present. The youngest of them (Fig. 12a) has already a well devel-
oped skeleton, which is very characteristic, and strikingly contrasts
with the corresponding stages of hitherto investigated Scalpellum
in having only one pair of peduncular scales
developed before the lower latera appear.
On the other hand, these first scales of the
peduncle are much larger in the young than
any plate of the capitulum. In the capitulum
carina, tærga, scuta, and upper latera are
already present in the smallest specimen;
the chitinal, primordial valves are extra-
Fig. 12. Scalpellopsis striato- Ordinarily small. The shape of the young
ciliata, off Jolo. a. younger individual is very characteristic already in
specimen in carinal view ; i &
b. somewhat older specimen this stage, owing tofthetenormouskdeyvelop:
in lateral aspect. [X 52. ment of the dorsally situated first pair of
peduncular scales; in dorsal aspect the basal breadth measures
about one third of the length of the animal. On the ventral side
the characteristic broad furrow of the peduncle is already strongly
indicated. The all but quadrangular shape of the first pair of ped-
uncle scales strikingly differs from the ribbonlike scales of the
adult. But the aspect of the small specimen is already so charact-
eristic that it is easily identified.
Genus Protomitella nov.
Capitulum plates numerous, of two different kinds. Carina,
terga, scuta, and rostrum well developed, often also upper latus,
and a subcarina. The lower latera long and narrow, very numer-
ous. Skeleton of the peduncle small, crowded spines. — Males
with carina, terga, scuta, and rostrum; accessory plates may occur.
This curious genus links together the genera Calantica, Mi-
tella, and Lithotrya. The males attain the same high development
as in Calantica; in one case I even found one latus indicated.
The irregular, and numerous small, lower latera in the- hermaphro-
dite in regularly shaped specimens recall those of some Mitella-
species to confusion, and the possibility cannot be denied that the
species described below may turn out to be synonymous with Pol-
247
licipes Darwini Hutton. This question cannot be settled from liter-
ature. — On the other hand, the reduction of the lower latera to
flat scales would give us a Lithotrya, and at first sight I was in-
clined to refer some of the specimens to this genus.
The occurrence of complementary males in Protomitella is a
primitive feature in comparison with Mitella -— hence the name
—, and strengthens the evidence of the phylogeny of Mitella —
arrived at on basis of the skeletonal development (comp. Broch
1921). The scanty occurrence of males may be due to the time
of the year; but it may also possibly be taken as a proof of the
male being about to disappear in the genus.
Protomitella paradoxa n. sp.
Slipper Island, New Zealand; coast at low tide. 20/XII 14. Three spec-
imens.
Plimmerton, New Zealand; on the coast. 15/I 15. Three specimens.
Carina, terga, scuta, and rostrum well developed, generally also
an upper latus, although this plate is often almost hidden behind
the lower, almost digitiform latera; among these latter a subcarina is
often rather prominent, a subrostrum not. The peduncle is armed
with densely crowded, calcified, chitinous spines. — Males with
carina, terga, scuta, and rostrum; irregularly occurring latera some-
times occur.
The capitulum exhibits a very variable aspect (Fig. 13) owing
to the enormous variation in shape and development of the capi-
tulum plates. It is covered by a dirty, yellowish-brown, thick, and
hairless cuticle which obscures the delineations of the lower parts
of the thick plates, and often almost hides the upper latus.
The carina is straight or feebly arched, with the apical part
free: the plate may be as broad at the apex as at the base, and
is ornated with prominent lines of growth. The carina may be the
largest plate of the capitulum or it only attains two thirds of the
length of the terga.
The tergum is more triangular or quadrangular, the apex
being pointed or square; it is the largest plate of the capitulum,
although it is sometimes surpassed in length by the narrower
carina... The growth lines are also here prominent as in all plates
of the capitulum.
SSR
The sScuta are commonly more pointed, and more constantly
of a triangular shape; their tergal margin covers the basal part
of the tergum. The apex of the scutum is situated at two thirds
OS
/ VW) l
EY
MD |
Fig 13. Protomitella paradoxa. a type specimen from Plimmerton; b small spec-
imen from the same locality; c outlines of a specimen from Slipper Island; d
complementary male of the type specimen; e mandible, f maxilla, g protopodite
of cirrus VI with penis and caudal appendage of the hermaphrodite.
[a—c X 2,7, d X 13,8'e—g XX 33):
the hight of the tergum. The occludent margin is all but straight;
the apical part of the plate is free.
Rostrum is short, and broad, of an irregular shape; its length
varies from !/5 to ”/s of the scuta.
The upper latus is almost hidden in the thick cuticle of the
capitulum; it generally only slightly surpasses the lower latera. The
same applies to the subcarina. Both plates are irregularly shaped.
249
The lower latera constitute a single, or an incipient double
row at the base of the capitulum. They are present in a great
number; in some specimens even more than 60 were counted. Their
shape is fingerlike, upwards, and inwards curved, with external,
distinct, transverse lines of growth.
The peduncle exhibits a curious, almost velveteen appearance,
owing to the crowded, calcified, cuticular, papillæ which cover the
entire surface; each spine is comparatively long and slender.
Dimensions of the specimens in mm:
Plimmerton Slipper Island
I II III IV V VI
É length 8 6,5 45 10,5 10 7
EEN Se EET me Ta 7
Peduncle, length Le 9,5 Så 12 oz 8
£ Lower end of the peduncle damaged.
The dissection of the Plimmerton specimen Il gave the fol-
lowing results as to the animal itself:
kheterrritarefrather"shortand”stout. Cirrus= I is onlys by "a
small space separated from the next cirrus; its rami are of equal
length, buth they differ in number of segments, the anterior hav-
ing 10, the posterior ramus 11 segments. The segments of cirrus I
are only as little more swollen than in the other cirri. Cirrus II
to VI are only a little more slender and large; their rami are of
equal length, but in each cirrus the number of segments in the
rami differ by one: in all cirri the anterior ramus has 12, the
posterior 13 segments. The arrangement of the spines in each seg-
ment is almost the same as in Calantica.
Filamentary appendages are absent.
The caudal appendages are short, and broad (in fig. 13g the
appendage is seen from the narrow side); on the distal end they
have some few, strong, and rather short hairs.
The penis is very short, only as long as the protopodite of
cirrus VI. A few scanty hairs, arranged in pairs, are present in
the outer part, but no tuft is seen at the distal end.
The labrum is not very bullate; its interior edge has an open
row of very fine denticles.
The mandible has three larger teeth, and between the two
250
first two: smaller teeth; the excavation between the lower of these
latter and the second large tooth is armed with two or three di-
minutive spines. The sinus between the lower teeth, and the lower
angle of the mandible are strongiy pectinate; the lower angle is
not very prominent although rather pointed. The sides of the mand-
ible are covered by fine hairs near the cutting edge.
The maxilla has a strong upper spine; there is no notch nor
excavation along the cutting edge; this latter is straight and armed
with spines, shorter and slenderer than the upper spine. The lower
corner is a little prominent and carries a small brush of bristles.
Some few fine hairs are seen on the sides of the maxilla near the
cutting edge.
In the specimen I from Plimmerton two males were found
attached to the inner edge of the scuta at the apex of the rostum.
They are both a little damaged from the preparation, but one of
them (Fig. 13d) gives a good idea of the general features, being
only very little damaged on one side. The male has a capitulum
skeleton consisting of carina, terga, scuta, and rostrum; in the spec-
imen figured an accessive latus is present on one side. The latter
may of course be an exceptional irregularity, but it also may be
regarded as evidence of a tendency to variation. The difference
in shape of the uninjured plates of the two males observed
evince a tendency towards variation in the capitulum plates quite
parallel to that found in the hermaphrodite..
The males have a well developed peduncie.
None of the descriptions hitherto published of the Mitella-
species covers the animals brought home by Dr. Mortensen. In
some respects it seems to come near to Mitella (Pollicipes) Darwini
Hutton; the latter species nevertheless apparently differs in the
more curved carina; also Gruvel speaks of ,écailles pédoncul-
aires" in this species, a designation not likely to cover the spines
of Protomitella paradoxa. Recently Jennings (1915) has more-
over identified Pollicipes Darwini as synonymous of Mitella sertus,
a species which markedly differs from Protomitella paradoxa. —
Of the Slipper Island specimens, the most regular one! (Fis lse)
decidedly recalls the typical Mitella. In this specimen no accessive
251
upper latus is seen; on the other hand a subcarina is broad, and
better developed than in any other of the specimens investigated; in
this specimen (nr. V of the table) there is a pronounced tendency to-
wards a development of two distinct rows of small basal latera, the
plates of the upper row being a little larger. They all have the
typical finger-like shape as in other specimens.
I should probably have regarded the species as a Mitella, in
spite of the finger-like, smaller latera which, indeed, only show
little difference as compared with Mitella mitella (Lin.). But the
occurrence of a complementary male makes it necessary to place
the present species in a genus of its own. The crown of small
latera strongly contrasts with Calantica, with which genus Proto-
mitella is otherwise nearly related.
Genus Mitella.
The find of Prøtomitella, and the development of the Mitzella
species described below not only throw new light on the affinitv
and phylogeny of the genus Mitella itself, but also provides us with
a base from which we may judge of the phylogenetic affinity of
the species within the genus.
The- most primitive group among recent species is the sertus-
group, cCharacterised by a low development of the latera; only the
rostrum has attained a higher development as in the preceding
genus; the latera do not much surpass the peduncle scales in size,
and none of them predominates the others. — The next stage is
found in Mitella mitella where an upper latus is well developed,
and much larger than the other latera, being only a littlle smaller
"than the rostrum. In the pollicipes-group on the other hand, as
here illustrated by Mitella polymerus, also other latera emancipate
themselves from the lower row, and in this way the skeleton of
the capitulum becomes more complicated. We are able to charact-
erize an upper latus, a -carinal, an inframedian, a median, and a
rostral latus; but it is not probable, that these plates really are
homologous with the plates of Scalpellum, referred to by the same
names. Quite on the contrary, the development seems to indicate
that here we face a convergency, which cannot be taken as proof
of a phylogenetic relation.
252
In the following report of the species I commence with Mitella
polymerus as the material gives a most complete picture of this species.
Mitella polymerus (Sowerby) Pilsbry.
La Jolla, California, on the coastal rocks. 21/VII 15. Forma typica, in
great abundance.
Bird Rock, La Jolla, California. 27/VIII 15. Forma echinata, four small
specimens on sea weeds.
San Pedro, California. 27/IX 15. Forma echinata; some few specimens.
The large material of typical Mitella polymerus displays some
variation in the lower rows of latera. Gruvel (1905) in his diag-
nosis gives as characteristic of the genus ,,Sous-rostre et sous-
caréne toujours présents". Nevertheless, we cannot always find a
subrostrum in the present species; quite on the contrary, in most
cases a subrostrum is absent, or at all events so difficult to trace
that its presence is in fact very doubtful; the subcarina, on the
other hand, is always well developed.
In the material a great many very small stages are found at-
tached to the outgrown specimens, and I was able to find the com-
plete series from pupa to adult. This was indeed of great interest
as the informations of the development of the species, which may
be gathered from the literature, are very meagre and dissatis-
factory. Darwin (1852, p. 310) has studied a young Mitella poly-
merus of 0,018 inches; but in this specimen already 22 or 24
plates were found. Nussbaum (1890) has evidently not laid any
stress on the study of the young animals, and his drawings of
them are indeed little precise. The deductions, which Gruvel
(1905, p. 5) has made on basis of these drawings, therefore can-
not hold against critics.
The pupa (Fig. 14a) is very small; it is often seen crawling
among the peduncle scales of outgrown animals, and evidently often
fixes itself to them. As soon as it has chosen its place and fixed the
antennae, five primordial valves appear; as in Scalpellum, and
other cirripeds investigated, the primordial valves — the embryonic
carina, terga, and scuta — are chitinal with no trace of carbonate
of lime, and have the same porous structure. On the interior side
of the primordial valves calcification now at once commences; this
makes the primordial valve appear as a scale, indicating the umbo |
253
of the plate. It is at once evident that the umbones of the five
primary plates are apical, i. e. that calcification is continued only
along the lower sides of the plates.
As soon as the calcareous deposits become evident outside of
the margins of the primordial valves, the next plate, viz. rostrum,
Fig. 14. Mitella polymerus f. typica, development of the skeleton. La Jolla. a pupa
just attached ; b pupa with primordial valves; c pupa cover ihrown off, rostrum de-
veloped; d specimen with upper latus only; e somewhat aberrant specimen with
three upper latera and subrostral latus; f normal specimen with two of the lower
latera developed ; g first peduncular scale appearing below rostrum, subcarina well
developed. [All figures X 331.
makes its appearance (Fig. 14c); it is very soon followed by an
upper latus, below the interval between tergum and scutum. ÅA
little later we can also distinguish a carinal, and a rostral latus;
at this time the first plate of the lower row of latera moreover
makes its appearance below the interval between rostrum and
rostral latus.
Generally the following latera of the lower row appear all but
simultaneously with the last named lower latus, and now also the
subcarina (Fig. 14g) is observed as a rather obvious plate.
Not until the subcarina is developed do the scales of the ped-
uncle commence their development. First those of the ventral
(rostral)-side develop; little by little the lateral scales appear, the
later the nearer the carino-sagittal line. Qwing to the growth of
254
the peduncle, which is evidently almost limited to the zone where
new scales and plates arise, i. e. the transition from capitulum to
peduncle, the peduncular scales thus will form oblique series ascend-
ing from the ventral (rostral) to the dorsal (carinal) side of the
peduncle.
Little by little the lower series of latera now arise, always one
new plate below the intervals in the precedent row. Much livelier
a b
Fig. 15. Mitella polymerus f. typica; La Jolla. a specimen with peduncle scales only
rostrally and laterally ; b somewhat older specimen showing the oblique series of de-
veloping peduncle scales; c rostral, d lateral, e carinal aspect of the capitulum of an
adult specimen. [a—b X 22, c—e nalural size].
nevertheless is the formation of peduncular scales, and though the
growth of the capitulum now becomes ever more slow, and the form-
ation of new capitulum plates soon finishes, the growth of the stalk,
and the development of new peduncle scales just below the capi-
tulum seems to be continued through all the life of the individual,
and always according to the same rule. Thus the oblique serial
arrangement of the scales is kept, although it sometimes is a little
obscured in larger specimens, owing to accidental contractions.
Thus here as in Scalpellum we may put down as a fixed rule,
that new (accessory) plates are always developed at the transition
from capitulum to peduncle. The scales of the peduncle almost
entirely abuse their growth, when they have been removed some
way from their zone of origin. I have never been able to confirm É
255
the statement of previous authors that new scales normally arise
farther down on the peduncle.
The growth of the capitulum plates is due to apposition. New
layers of carbonate of lime are deposited along the inner side of
the plates, and particularly along the margins of the plates facing
the transition from capitulum to peduncle. Umbo of the primary
plate thus becomes apically seated. The lines of growth are ir-
regular, and do not stand in any apparent connection to outer
Fig. 16. Mitella polymerus f. typica; La Jolla. a peduncle scale from the basal part,
b from the middle part of the peduncle, c mandible, d maxilla.
[a—b X 44, c—d X 22.
circumstances; their mumbers therefore also differ in different
plates of the same individual, also in the primary plates, and do
not afford any base for a judgement as to the age of the spec-
imen.
It is evident from the facts here stated that a great likeness
is seen in the skeletonal development of Mitella and Scalpellum
(compikalsofBroch 1912, 1921); the main dilferenceis"seenfin
the appearance of the first scales of the peduncle. The first — i.e.
the dorso-basal — pairs of peduncle scales in Scalpellum appear
already at the same time as the superior latus. In Miztella, on the
other hand, the first peduncle scales are not developed till the sub-
carinal row of latera have appeared, and the first peduncle scales,
which then appear, are the ventro-basal ones.
256
In his monograph Gruvel (1905, p. 19) says: ,Écailles des
rangées supérieures aplaties, de couleur gris sombre, petites, en
séries circulaires serrées et réguliéres; sur tout le reste du pédon-
cule, les écailles prennent la forme d'épines irréguliérement dis-
posées". In spite of the great number of adult animals of the
typical Mitella polymerus from La Jolla, it has been impossible to
confirm these statements. A closer study without exception reveals
the regularly alternating arrangement of the scales all over the
peduncle, and no trace of ,,spinesf was found. In typical specimens
…the scales (Fig. 16) are always broad and rounded, viewed from the
Fig. 17. Mitella polymerus f. echinata from San Pedro, Calif. Capitulum of adult
specimen in a lateral, b rostral, and c carinal aspect. [X 2].
flat side. Nevertheless the animal itself in every detail coincides
with the descriptions given by previous authors. I have, therefore,
given the name of forma typica to the common La Jolla specimens.
The material also contains some specimens of a Mitella which
at first sight might be considered as another species (Fig. 17). The
plates of the capitulum are more slender, and pointed; the inter-
vals, especially between the upper latera, therefore become more
conspicuous, and the regular serial arrangement of the plates is
less obvious. In smaller specimens these differences from the forma
typica are very pronounced; in a larger specimen, on the other
hand, the differences are somewhat less obvious. Most different is
the armature of the peduncle. In the specimens here referred to,
the scales of the peduncle (Fig. 18c) are slender, and jut out from
257
the surface like small spines, somewhat recalling the appearance
of the sertus-group.
Nevertheless it is not possible to maintain the individual groups,
here referred to, as representatives of a separate species besides
Fig. 18.
Figs. 18 and 19. Mitella polymerus f. echinata from San Pedro, Calif.
Fig. 18. a mandible, b maxilla, c scale from the middle part of the peduncle. [X 33).
Fig 19. a. small specimen with only the three upper, principal latera developed,
b. somewhat older specimen where the peduncle scales are
about to appear. [X 44).
Mitella polymerus. The features of the animal, its mouth feet
(Fig. 18), cirri, and appendages entirely agree with the forma typica.
Owing to the external differences they must nevertheless be re-
garded as a special variant group, which I have given the name
of forma echinata, owing to its spring appearance. Later investig-
ators shall have to find out the special conditions, under which
this form develops. Some few specimens from Bird Rock near
La Jolla give evidence that both forms occur near the biological
station.
To the peduncle of the greater specimen from San Pedro some
small specimens were attached; the youngest two are depicted in
fig. 19. Although they do not exhibit principal differences from the
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 73. 17
258
developing stages of the forma typica, some difference in shape is
evident. Thus f. inst. carina and rostrum of these young individuals
of forma echinata are a little more diverging than in forma typica,
and the slender, pointed shape of the plates is already distinct. —
It is possible that the differences between Gruvel's statements
and the present results, spoken of under forma typica (pag. 256)
are due to a confusion of the two forms here described. My
material of forma echinata is too small to furnish a base for studies
of its variations. A study of Nussbaum's paper (1890) seems to
reveal that he has had at least both forms before him. Although
his drawings of the young specimens are inexact, we can see that
fig. 6 of his pl. I is of a young forma echinata; we thus at pre-
sent are "able to state its occurrence at San Francisco, at La Jolla,
and at San Pedro, California.
Mitella mitella (Linné) Pilsbry.
South of Vitalis Point, Mindanao. Coastal rocks. 7/III 14. Some few
specimens.
Curiously enough, Gruvel (1905) has not emphasized the most
characteristic feature of this elegant Mitella, viz. the enormous dev-
elopment of the upper latus, as compared with the other latera
(Fig. 20). This feature indeed so strongly contrasts with the other
species of the genus that we may say that Mitella mitella is char-
acterized by this feature alone. Because of this character the spec-
ies moreover holds an intermediate position between the pollicipes-
group [Mitella pollicipes (Gmelin), Mitella elegans (Lesson), and
Mitella polymerus (Sowerby)|, and the sertus-group [Mitella spinosus
(Quoy et Gaimard), Mitella Darwini (Hutton), and Mitella sertus
(Darwin)]; the pollicipes-group is characterized by the higher dev-
elopment of at least upper, carinal, inframedian, and rostral latera;
in the sertus-group all the latera are uniformly developed, and
spine-like. — Besides the extraordinary development of an upper
latus Mitella mitella presents a rich sculpture of the capitulum
plates.
I am not able to agree with Gruvel who states the scales of
the peduncle to be more irregularly arranged in Mitella mitella
than in Mitella elegans. All specimens which I have had the op-
portunity of examining, exhibit an absolutely regular arrangement .
20 nede ne
i
259
of the scales in rings, each scale above or below the interval be-
tween two scales of the preceding or the following row, so that
regular, transverse, and oblique series are evident, if the arrange-
ment has not become a little obscured by irregular contractions
of some part or other of the peduncle.
Also in its mouth feet (Fig. 20c—d) Mitella mitella strikingly
differs from the other species of the genus. The mandible has
Fig. 20. Mitella mitella ; South of Vitalis Point, Mindanao. a adult specimen, b capi-
tulum and fragment of peduncle of a quite small specimen; c mandible, d maxilla.
[a natural size, b X 22, c—d X 33).
four main teeth, the second being situated in the middle of the
cutting edge; in the large excavation between the first and the
second tooth, and a little beside the cutting edge, an accessory
small tooth is developed. The lower edge of the mandible is armed
with a tuft of rather long spines. — The maxilla has an extra-
ordinarily stout and large upper spine; below this a pronounced
excavation is found, and halfway down the cutting edge yet an-
other, shallower excavation; the cutting edge is densely armed
with strong spines, but has no special tufts of bristles, as other
specimens of the genus.
Caudal appendages are present; they have six segments
and are richly armed with hairs in their outer parts. The penis
is, on the other hand, almost destitute of hairs. —
Only one smaller specimen was observed of Mitella mitella (Fig.
20b); although the skeleton is fairly well developed we can see
lykke
260
that in this species the first scales of the peduncle develop very
early, even before the all but single row of smaller latera com-
mence to appear. The primordial plates are a little larger than in
the preceding species; this seems to indicate that the pupa of Mi-
tella mitella must be a little larger than that of Mitella polymerus.
Mitella sertus (Darwin).
Hen and Chicken Islands, Hauraki Gulf, New Zealand. On the coast
below the rocks 30/X1. 14. Numerous specimens.
The numerous specimens give a rather good idea of the vari-
ations of this species; partly the number of lower latera is found
Fig. 21. Mitella sertus from Hen and Chicken Island, N. Z. a and b Capitulums of
two adult specimens showing variation of the carina; c mandible, d maxilla.
[a—b X 1,5, c—d X 15).
to be very different, partly the shape, and arrangement of the
capitulum plates also differ in different individuals (Fig. 21). The
variations of the carina are especially obvious; in some specimens
the carina is almost quite straight, with prominent apical part, in
others it may be evenly curved with the apex between the hind
margins of the terga. These extreme variants are linked together
by a complete series of intermediate stages, and they cannot even
be distinguished as different , varieties", being merely accidental
variants. — The variations of the present material tell us that
Gruvel's characteristic of the species (1905) ,la caréne qui est
droite, å apex saillant en arriére des terga" does not always hold
good. This variability also justifies the doubts already uttered
by Gruvel on the same occasion, whether Mitella Darwini (Hut-
261
ton) is in reality specifically distinet, and corroborates the state-
ments of Jennings (1915) that Pollicipes Darwini is synonymous
with Mitella sertus. Jennings moreover considers the latter name
as a synonym of Mitella spinosa (QQuoy et Gaimard); my material
does not allow me to follow up this question; my specimens quite
agree with Mitella sertus, and differ from Mitella spinosa, accord-
ing to the dates given by Gruvel and Darwin.
Characteristic of the species are the small latera, which in fact
only look like rather well developed peduncle spines. Only the
rostrum is very strongly developed, its distal half or more pro-
jecting like a horn. — The mouth feet are very characteristic and
agree with Darwin's descriptions (Fig. 21c, d). The mandible
has three principal teeth, the second standing below the middle of
the cutting edge; between this and the first principal tooth two
secondary, smaller teeth are inserted, and a very small accessory
tooth may also be indicated between the second and third main
teeth. The lower angle is strongly pectinate; the entire mandible
is almost perfectly destitute of finer hairs. The maxilla has a
straight cutting edge without excavations or notches; the upper spine
is only little larger than the
crowded spines of the edge;
just above the lower angle
one tuft of bristles is evident.
Only very few finer hairs are
seen near the cutting edge.
Two quite small specimens
were present in the material
(Fist 22) KOMME Fprimordial
valves scutum has evidently
already a characteristic shape;
it is typically triangular with
a broad, almost straight base,
and differs strikingly from the
trapezoid scuta of the other
species with their strongly
å Fig. 22. Mitella sertus from Hen and Chicken
curved basal margins. In Island, N. Z. a subcarina only just indic-
both specimens the difference ated, complete animal; b also subrostrum
i well developed (peduncle only partly drawn,
between the primary plates of the same length us the capitulum). [X 23).
262
and the 'rostrum, and the lower latera is far less than in the
adult.
The smallest specimen might very well be taken to be a young
Calantica with its well developed latera — upper, carinal, and
rostral latera are very conspicuous. — Already the next stage is
more distant from Calantica; the lower latera are here separated
by greater intervals and in growth already far behind the primary
plates and the rostrum.
A most interesting feature is observed in these two young
specimens, viz. the irregular arrangement of the scales of the ped-
uncle. In the smallest individual an arrangement in oblique series,
somewhat recalling the small Mizella polymerus, is still to be faintly
distinguished; but already in the other specimen no regularity can
be detected in the arrangement of the peduncle scales, and judging
from their size, we moreover must suppose that new scales in Mi-
tella sertus are secondarily formed almost all over the peduncle.
— In the smallest specimen the peduncle has a length of about
one third of the capitulum; in the next specimen the peduncle is
much narrower, but of the same length as the capitulum.
Genus Ibla.
Ibla quadrivalvis (Cuvier) Gray.
Port Jackson; coastal rocks. 20/X 14. One specimen of 14 mm total
length with a furry coat of hairlike spines all over the ped-
uncle.
Ibla pygmæa n. sp.
38" 127 S., 149? 40” E., 100—160 fathoms. ,,Endeavour" 16/1X 14. Num-
erous specimens attached to the naked axis of a gorgonarian
of the family Isiidae; together with Heteralepas morula, Oxy-
naspis celata, Pachylasma scutistriata, and Balanus auricoma.
Small animals with triangular terga and scuta; apex of the
terga beaklike pointing forward. Peduncle with low, almost spine-
like warts all over; some scattered hairs are especially found dors-
ally, and a fringe of hairs adorns the peduncle along the margins
of the capitulum plates; generally the triangular area between the
scuta below the terga on the dorsal side is also somewhat furry.
263
The capitulum (Fig. 23) is rather distinctly limited from the
peduncle owing to the hair fringe. The carinal area is occupied
by the peduncle, which extends like a tongue upwards between
the scuta to the base of the terga.
On account of the entire absence
of calcareous substance, and the
thinness of the valves, the capi-
tulum is rather pellucid, allowing ==
the outlines of the animal to
shine through the plates; it is
then easily observed that the
animal, when withdrawn, also in
this small species occupies the
same reverse position as in the
Fig. 23. Ibla pygmæa from 38? 12” S.,
$ 149940” E. a hermaphrodite in side view,
other species of the genus. b mandible, c maxilla. [1X17, b—c X 215).
The tergum is triangular,
its upper (carinal) margin convex, the scutal margin straight; the
occludent margin is excavated, and more strongly arched in its
upper part so that the apex points forward in a curious beak-like
manner. The lines of growth are very difficult to observe.
Also in the scuta lines of growth are all but invisible. The
scutum is triangular with straight occludent and tergal margins
which meet in a pointed apical umbo. The basal margin, on the
other hand, is strongly arched, thus lending the species an aber-
rant aspect, as compared with related species.
No trace of a carina could be detected in the adult.
The peduncle is short, except in the posterior (carinal) side,
where it protrudes tongue-like upwards between the scuta to the
base of the terga. The surface is covered with warts; these may
be more spine-like, although low. Here and there longer hairs
occur; in the tongue-like area between the scuta the hairs are
more numerous, and they here often appear rather crowded passing
into the peculiar single-rowed fringe of long hairs which adorns
the limit towards the capitulum. The hairs are rather stout.
This peculiar Ibla attains only a small size; the entire length
of the greater specimens does not quite reach 3 mm, that of the
capitulum seldom exceeding 2 mm. The peduncle (including the
dorsal tongue-like area) is about 1,5 mm.
264
In cøntracted specimens the position of the body agrees with
that of the other /bla-species. A rather broad interval is found
between cirrus I and the following cirri.
Cirrus I has very unequal rami, the anterior ramus being a
little more than half as long as the posterior one. Only in the
outer half of the rami a distinct limitation of the segments is ob-
served, fading away in the basal half. Cirrus II to VI are of al-
most equal length, slender, and with numerous segments; the rami
are all but equal in each cirru3s.
The caudal appendages are a little longer than the proto-
podite of cirrus VI, slender, and consisting of 10 segments; they
are adorned with long, delicate hairs which form a tuft at the dis-
tal end of the appendage.
The penis is about as long as cirrus VI.
The labrum is not very bullate; its finer structure could not
be made out with certainty in the specimens dissected.
The mandible has three almost equidistant teeth; at the base
of the inferior one a denticle is present at the lower side. The
lower angle of the mandible has three pointed denticles represent-
ing the pectination of other species. ::
The maxilla is curiously slender, with two large upper spines
occupying most of the cutting edge; below these spines three fine
and short bristles are present. Both the maxilla and the mandible
are only sparsely hairy.
Ovigerous specimens have about 16 rather large ova at a time
in the mantle cavity, and here also two or three complemental
males are present. Their development is arrested in the cypris-
stage (Fig. 24) with an entire length of only 0,55 mm, and only
by a more thorough study I became sure of their nature. The
enormous development of their eyes is most peculiar; they appear
as two large, dark brownish pigmented spots, which are observed
already externally in the ovigerous hermaphrodite. The elements
of these composite eyes are seen as small luminating spots, and
the eyes strongly recall the eye of a Daphnia. — The antennae
are seen originating just below the eye; they have a large basal
segment, and two smaller distal ones, but do not seem to have
any prehensile function. The cirri keep the shape of the cirri of
265
other cirriped pupae. Behind the cirri a short penis is seen term-
inating in two long setae.
In the material also some few younger ones were found. The
smallest specimen (Fig. 25) has already passed the cypris stage,
but only its primordial valves are developed; these are of a porous
structure as in other genera; the scuta are broadly triangular, the
terga have a strongly arched carinal margin and attain the shape
of a phrygian cap, owing to the projecting apex. The greater upper
part of the valves is covered with smali hairs, and a similar, hairy
Fig. 24. a. Fig 25800
Figs. 24 and 25. Ibla pygmæa from 38? 12” S., 149? 40 E.
Fig. 24. Two complemental males. [X 52]. — Fig. 25. a young specimen with only
primordial, porous valves, b somewhat older specimen. [X 52).
coat covers the area where a carinal plate might be expected. The
peduncle is punctuated, and makes an observation of a rudiment-
ary carina almost impossible; in certain oblique light projections
sometimes a special area seems to indicate the presence of a rud-
imentary carinal valve, but it could not be made out with absolute
certainty. The same holds good in some other, a little larger spec-
imens; but it may also be due to an optical illusion.
In a somewhat older specimen the embryonic hairs are only
kept on top of the terga, and have disappeared in the carinal
area; on the other hand, the stouter peduncular hairs commence
to appear, and the capitulum plates here show the transition to the
adult shape.
The primordial terga generally are not traceable in the adult,
whereas the primordial scutum always covers the apical umbo like
a somewhat broad nail.
266
Genus Lepas.
Lepas anatifera Linné.
Aburatsubo, Misaki, attached to a well. 29/VI 14. Two specimens.
These two specimens afford great interest; the well had only
been in the water one month, so that this is the highest age pos-
sible in the specimens. Our knowledge of the growth of the cirri-
peds is so scanty, that every example is welcome here. The di-
mensions of the specimens in mm were as follows:
Capitulum Peduncle
== == == femme SEES
length greatest width length width
I 11,5 7 6 1,5
II 14 10 6 3,5
For comparison we may add that Hoek (1907) under Lepas
anserifera reports of some specimens attached to the keel of ,Si-
boga" that they had attained a capitulum size of 21 mm 40 days
after the ship had been docked in Surabaja. —
The lines of growth are very distinct in the specimens, and
were counted in scutum, and tergum of the same side. In the
specimen I tergum had 9, scutum 12 zones of growth, in the spec-
imen II the numbers were 15, and 17. This result again confirms
the observations on other cirripeds that the lines of growth cannot
here correspond to outer circumstances, and afford no base what-
ever for a judgment of age or growth of the animal.
Lepas pectinata Spengler.
36? 00” S., 150? 20? E., surface. 29/IX 14. ,,Endeavour£. A great many
specimens, partly attached to an Os sepia, partly to shells of
Janthina.
3790578; 1502705 E.:50"fathoms; sand "and mud” 30/ RENE
eavour". One small specimen.
Taboga, Panama; surface. December 1915. A cluster of adult specimens
on a piece of drift wood.
Annandale (1909) has given a report of his difficulties in
distinguishing between the present species and Lepas anserifera
Linné. While the specimens from Taboga entirely agree with
both Darwin's (1852) and Gruvel's (1905) descriptions of Lepas
pectinata, the other specimens caused some hesitation, because
267
their external characters much more agree with the'characters em-
phasized by Gruvel (1. c.) for Lepas anserifera. Especially the oc-
cludent margin in most cases is broadly curved, and separated by
a rather broad area from the umbo-apical line. Many of the spec-
imens agree in characters with Lepas denticulata Gruvel; this
species is evidently based on young specimens apparently very closely
related to the forma squamosa of Lepas pectinata, and cannot be
kept up as a separate species, according to the dates hitherto known.
To settle the identity I investigated the animals somewhat
closer. Now, informations in detail concerning the mouth feet could
not be obtained. On the other hand, statements about the number
of filamentary appendages could be found; they are, indeed, not
exhilarant: Darwin (1852) records, that the animal has none or
one filament on each side of the prosoma, Gruvel (1905), on the
other hand, speaks of none to one pair on each side, and Annan-
dale (1909) is inclined to believe that Darwin is right! My spec-
imens indicate that Gruvel nevertheless is right; the number of
filamentary appendages on each side of the prosoma varies from
none to one pair. Lepas anserifera, on the other hand, has five
or six appendages on each side, although the posterior one of them
may be rather rudimentary as Darwin, and Annandale have found.
According to the filamentary appendages, the specimens from
the ,Endeavour" must also be referred to Lepas pectinata. Their
mouth feet are interesting (Fig. 26): The mandible has five teeth
of which the upper (first) is much larger than the others, owing to
the deep excavation between the first and second tooth; the upper
edge of each tooth is finely pectinate, the lower is shorter, straight,
and smooth. The lower angle of the mandible is rounded, and
strongly pectinate. The maxilla has the characteristic, terraced ap-
pearance of the genus; the upper spines are only little prominent ;
there are three excavations, and indications of a fourth near the
inferior angle; the angle is rounded. The maxilla is rather scantily
furnished with smaller hairs, and these latter are mostly situated
near the cutting edge.
In the material from the ,,Endeavour" complete series were
present of the stages from the only just fixed pupa with no trace
of skeletonal plates whatever to the outgrown barnacle.
268
At the time of fixation the pupa is rather slender (Fig. 27a)
with stout and strong prehensile antennae; the animal is now dark
brownish pigmented, with a lighter area in the eye region. Very
soon a curious metamorphosis of the pupa is observed: the animal
(Fig. 27b) attains a quite different shape with a straight occludent
margin, a spine at the posterior (upper) end of each pupa-valve,
Fig. 27.
Fig. 26.
Figs. 26 and 27. Lepas pectinata from -36? 00” S., 150? 20” E.
Fig. 26. a mandible, b maxilla. [X 44]. — Fig. 27. a pupa just attached; b older
pupa about to develop the primordial valves; c the same in the dorsal aspect. [X 22].
and a highly arched dorsal line. Round the prehensile antennae
the pupa-cover bulges out so that the antennae are invisible in side
view. In dorsal aspect the pupa is now broad, and the bulgings
at the antennae are seen as well-defined, almost mamillate pro-
minences standing out from the sides of the animal near its ante-
rior end. The curious dorsal double row of cellular formations
inside the pupa cover, only seen in the large pupa, probably is
in some connection with the coming moulting. Unfortunately the
material could not solve the question as to the deeper meaning of
these structures; it shall be an interesting task for a student at a
biological station of the Tropical seas to solve the physiological
questions concerning the floating barnacles, and especially their
metamorphoses.
Within the singular, large pupa described the last metamor-
269
phosis into the typical Lepas now takes place. The primordial
plates are developed, and exhibit a peculiar shape, very different
from that of the capitulum plates of the outgrown Lepas. The
carina is boat-shaped, and long; tergum is quadrangular with a
short occludent margin, a long, feebly concave scutal margin, and
strongly excavated carinal and free dorsal margins of almost equal
lengths. The scuta are triangular with almost straight occludent
margin, convex tergo-carinal margin, and concave basal margin, so
that the posterior basal angle is
rather pointed.
Generally also the incipient
calcification can be observed in
the small cirriped within the
pupa cover. The cover then splits
along the dorsal line, commenc-
ing at its upper (posterior) end;
the small Lepas now extends its
peduncle till it attains almost
the same length as the capitulum.
The pupa cover yet often for a
while adheres to the peduncle,
Fig. 28. Lepas pectinata from 36? 00” S.,
150? 207” E. a specimen with primordial
to be thrown off when the calci- valves developed, left half of the pupa
- ga. cover partly flared off; b young spec-
fication of the capitulum plates imen with primordial valves yet pre-
is more obvious, and the form- served on the umbones of the calcified
ation of growth lines has com- PD ES LS EGEDE eee
menced.
During growth the peduncle and the capitulum add to their
dimensions after a proportionate scale. The calcification of the plates
gives evidence that in Lepas, in contradistinetion to Scalpellum,
and Pollicipes, the greater capacity of lime secretion is localized
to the central areas of the capitulum sides, and the umbones of
the plates, as indicated by the primordial valves, are situated cor-
respondingly, the umbo of the terga apically, that of the carina,
and scuta basally (Fig. 28). —
In the material of young stages from the os sepium the forma
squamosa Fischer with its spiny plates prevails; some of the
specimens. apparently little by little lose their spiny appearance.
Among. the still more numerous specimens of the /anthina shells
270
not a single specimen of the forma squamosa occurs. It must
remain open to future investigations, which factors determine the
development into the forma squamosa, or into the forma zypica.
Another feature of great biological interest is the fact that the
pupas of the species settle down in crowded assemblies, evidently
not determined by the characters of the substratum. In Janthina
f. inst. no special part of the shell is preferred; but where the
pupas fix themselves, they do so in great numbers, and closely
crowded. The youngest stages therefore are curiously homogeneous,
as to the development of the individuals.
Very soon the aspect of a group changes. Some of the animals
develop at a great speed, whereas others seem to be checked in
their development at one stage or other, or even to be outnumb-
ered, and the larger the best developed specimens of a group be-
come, the fewer animals the group contains. This may of course be
due to cannibalism, although this factor, especially in younger spec-
imens, hardly can be of any cansequence, and I am inclined to
believe that other circumstances play a prominent part in the fate
of the individuals. This question cannot of course be definitly sett-
led by preserved specimens.
Genus Poecilasma Darwin.
Poecilasma Kaempferi Darwin.
37? 457” S, 150? 10” E., 150—260' fathoms. ,,Endeavourf 14/1X 14 0ne
specimen (together with Heteralepas Dannevigi).
The specimen belongs to the subsp. litum Pilsbry. It has a
capitulum length of 9, width 6 mm, a peduncle length of 2,5 mm.
Genus Megalasma (Hoek) Pilsbry.
Megalasma striatum Hoek.
3 miles S. W. of Tucuran, 300 fathoms. 10/III 14. Several specimens
on the spines of a Cidaris.
21 miles W. "2 S. of Bonomisaki, 220 fathoms. ,,Hyaton Maruf 13/V 14.
One large specimen.
The specimens in some cases differ from Hoek's description
(1883) in having an externally visible, short peduncle (Fig. 29).
271
This character, which has even been uncritically inserted among
the generic features, cannot serve as specifically distinguishing
criterion, because of the contractions and extensions of the ped-
uncle, easily observed in living barnacles. I also present a draw-
ing of the internal aspects of carina and scutum to show the dif-
ferences from the following species.
a b c Fig.£30.
Fig. 29.
Figs. 29 and 30. Megalasma striatum, S. W. of Tucuran.
Fig. 29. a adult specimen in side view, b internal aspect of the carina, c of the left
scutum. [X 5,3). — Fig. 30. a pupa just attached, b pupa with primordial valves de-
veloped, c young specimen showing the transformation of the basal part of the scutum
by calcification. [X 22).
An interesting feature of the animal seems to have escaped
the attention of previous investigators. One pair of dorsal fila-
mentarv appendages are placed close together, almost in the
dorsal line of the animal above the first pair of cirri; their length
is about one third of cirrus I.
Specimens of all stages from the pupa stage onwards were found
on the Cidaris-spines. The pupa (Fig. 30a) is large, much larger
than the pupas of the Scalpellidae, and corresponds in size
with the Lepas-pupa. Whether this is a constant feature disting-
uishing the families, future investigations must disclose. — The
pupa is slender; with a shallow, dorsal excavation corresponding to
the furrow of the body between the larval regions which later on
constitute the capitulum and peduncle. The ventral (occludent)
272
margin is straight but for its foremost part which is a little con-
vex in the region of the large prehensile antennae; the anterior
part of the pupa has an evenly rounded outline. The pigmentation
is feeble, and irregular. The nauplius-eye is very conspicuous,
evidently with its typical three elements. Soon after the settling
down of the pupa the eye becomes smaller, more concentrated,
and its pigment quite black.
Now the pupa becomes a little broader and attains somewhat
rounded outlines, and the primordial valves appear. Their shape
and size are characteristically different from other genera known:
tergum is by far the smallest of the plates, and somewhat ap-
proaches the outlines of a parallelogram, but for the rounded
anterior part. Scutum is more than twice as large as tergum,
approaching a trapezoid in shape, with a square basal margin just
above (behind) the eye of the animal; the occludent margin is
long and almost straight, the tergal, and carinal margins more
rounded, thus somewhat concealing the trapezoidical shape of the
entire plate. The carina is by far the longest plate of the capi-
tulum; it covers more than two thirds of the dorsal side and ex-
tends down to the foremost edge of the peduncular part of the
body; the carina is also extraordinarily broad in comparison with
other genera investigated. One more feature seems to be of inter-
est, viz. the small intervals between the plates, which are more
in accordance with Lepas, and strikingly differing from Mitella.
The growth is to begin with characterized by an increase in
the length of the peduncle, which also in young Megalasmae is
comparatively well developed, and only later on again almost con-
cealed by the progressive calcification of the plates (Fig. 30c). —
During the first time of growth the primary valves are very ob-
vious, but comparatively soon they seem somehow to disappear in
this species.
The main growth of the plates, and the main power of lime
secretion in this species are bound to the zones of the capitulum
between the primordial plates. The umbo of the tergum is almost
quite apical, more pronounced in the older specimens than in the
youngest stages. The carina has a basal umbo. The greatest in-
terest is attached to the development of the scutum. In the prim-
ordial valve a decidedly basal margin was evident; this latter is
273
already somewhat obscured by the first layer of carbonate of lime,
although also here a basal margin is clearly seen. But now the
plate develops a ,spurf" from the carinal margin and downwards
along the carina at the side of the peduncle; also now the original
basal margin is indicated by a notch. The latter is during the fol-
lowing apposition of calcareous substance soon filled up, and the
occludent margin secondarily prolonged to meet the carinal margin
directly at the side of the peduncle. Thus the scutum attains its
triangular shape with its aberrant, long, occludent margin, and loses
its basal margin.
At the same time the incipient ridges are already observed,
especially the median ridge towards the juncture of carina and
tergum, as a radial, prominent stripe. A little later the lower crista
of the scutum, and the carinal crista also appear. The lower crista
of the scutum rather often may be somewhat feebly developed even
in adult specimens which are therefore on external examination
sometimes only with difficulty distinguished from the following
species.
Megalasma minus Annandale.
Syn.: Megalasma bellum Pilsbry 1907.
2 Megalasma lineatum Hoek 1907.
7 miles S. of Olutanga, about 300 fathoms 8/1III 14. Four specimens on
the spine of a sea urchin.
7? 25? N., 123? 14” E.; 250 fathoms. 9/III 14. Two specimens on spines
of a sea urchin.
Menado Bay, 1? 31 N., 124? 47” E.; 250 fathoms. Captain Christiansen
12/III 13. Three specimens on the cirri of a crinoid, together
with Scalpellum balanoides.
There is some variation in the species regarding the basal part
(Fig. 30a, c); in some specimens the basal margin of the carina
forms a direct continuation of the feebly arched occludent margin
of the scuta, in other specimens the basal margin of the carina is
almost perpendicular to the occludent margin of the scuta. In the
latter case the lower part of the occludent scutal margin may be
bowed so as to form an incipient basal margin. The specimens
thus link the preceding species to the subgenus Glyptelasma of
Pilsbry (1907), and the present species indeed so to say stands
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 73. 18
274
with one foot in each of Pilsbry's subgenera, thus clearly illus-
trating their invalidity.
The internal structure of the lower part of the scutum (Fig.
31e) affords good specific characters, in contradistinction to the
preceding species.
In addition to previous descriptions we may add that the penis
is stout, and only about half as long as the cirrus VI; it is almost
Fig. 31. Megalasma minus from Menado Bay (Celebes). a large specimen with a
small specimen attached to its scutum, side view, b the same specimen, carinal
aspect, c medium sized specimen in lateral aspect, d carina of the latter, obliquely
viewed from inside, e interior side of the left scutum. [all figures X 41.
entirely destitute of hairs except at its distal end, where a strong
tuft of fine hairs are present.
As in the preceding species we also find in Megalasma minus
a pair of filamentary appendages seated close together al-
most in the dorsal sagittal line of the animal above the first pair
of cirri; the appendages are half as long as cirrus I.
Genus Oxynaspis Darwin.
In his classic monograph Darwin (1852, p. 133) in mention-
ing this genus says: ,As far as the valves are concerned, it is
more nearly related to Lepas than to Poecilasma; but taking the
entire animal, its relation is much closer to the latter genus than
to Lepas; it differs from both these genera in the manner of growth
275
of the scuta, which is both upwards and downwards, the primor-
dial valve being situated in nearly the middle of the occludent
margin. In this respect, and in the shape of the carina and terga,
there is an almost absolute identity with Scalpellum; I may, how-
ever, remark that in Scalpellum, the scuta first grow downwards,
and afterwards in most of the species upwards, whereas here from
the beginning, the growth is both upwards and downwards".— My
observations have shown that the primordial valve indicating the
umbo of the scutum, is in Scalpellum without exception apical.
The material does not contain quite small specimens of Oxynaspis;
but the entire structure of the scutum indicates that the growth
here somewhat resembles that of Megalasma, and that the prim-
ordial valve (and the umbo) is secondarily removed by later growth
from its basal position. Probably the young will show that the
growth downwards commences later than the growth upwards; the
umbo of the scuta is in the present specimens evidently a little
more basally situated than in Darwin's material.
As regards the carina, its shape is exactly the reverse of that
of a Scalpellum in which the umbo has been secondarily removed
from the apex by growth, and it is easily seen in Oxynaspis that
the basal part below the umbo in the carina is a secondary form-
ation, and that the original situation of the primordial valve also
here is basal.
Oxynaspis celata Darwin.
33% 47? N., 128? 50? E., 75 fathoms. ,,Hyaton Maru" 17/V 14. 6 spec-
imens of the forma japonica on Anthipathes.
Nagasaki (no further dates). 6 specimens of the forma japonica.
S8 SET 2- EST" 749? 40 E., -100— 160' fathoms: SEndeavours" 16/7 14
Several specimens of the forma nova-zelandica on anthipath-
arians, with Ibla pygmæa.
Annandale (1909) states that the spiny bark, which covers
the animal, belongs to the barnacle, and not to the antipatharian,
as maintained by Darwin (1852). It is impossible to follow the
statements of Annandale; his remarks about the spineless axis
of the Anthipatharian to which his specimens were attached, and
his reasoning about the colours are far from convincing. Though
the main axis of the antipatharians is black, the horny substance
18«
276
in thinner layers as is seen f. inst. in its smaller twigs, is darker
or lighter brownish, often with a tinge of reddish. A variation in
size of the spines is also often to be observed, and in some cases
I have furthermore observed an increase of size in the spines
when the axis expands over a sofnewhat flat substratum.
A theoretical reasoning thus decidedly speaks in favour of Dar-
win's opinion, and a glance at the present specimens (Fig. 32 a)
strengthens it at once. All the present specimens are not only
covered by the horny, and spiny bark mentioned by previous authors;
but also the soft parts of the antipatharian spread over the barn-
acle and, moreover, generally carry well developed polyps in rather
great numbers. This is in itself satisfactory evidence of the cor-
rectness of Darwin's statement, the soft parts of an antipatharian
not exceeding the horny skeletonal parts of the coral; the occur-
rence of coenosark with polyps thus necessarily demands an under-
lying layer of coral axis substance. To this may be added that
the horny bark covering the cirriped without any demonstrable
boarder passes into the horny axis of the antipatharian, as is seen
in sections. |
Annandale has observed calcareous spines of the scales fit-
ting into the thorns of the bark; no such spines could be traced
in the present specimens. On the other hand, a peculiarly regular
arrangement of the spines is obvious: a study of the plates of the
barnacle reveals rings of growth, more whitish zones alternating
with darker, or rather more pellucid narrower zones; in analogy
with other animals, we may conclude that the latter zones only
contain little organic matter and represent a period of slow growth
in the scale, whereas the more whitish, opaque areas contain much
organic substance and exhibit a rapid growth. Now the spines of
the horny bark always gather along the pellucid (inorganic) zones
and almost entirely fail in the opaque areas, thus accentuating the
zonar structure of the plates.
The specimens from Japan stand near the subspecies indica
Annandale (1909) and their external aspect exactly corresponds
with this subspecies. As far as it is possible to discern, there
are nevertheless differences present in the animal which cause us
to regard them as representatives of a forma japonica nov. Ås
BTØT
there are no detailed descriptions given of the animal I shall be-
gin by giving a description of it before I discuss the differences
from subsp. indica.
The cirri in their armature show two different types. Cirrus
I and II have somewhat swollen segments armed with transverse
rows of large spines, and are thus of the same type as the cirri
of Lepas. In the rami of cirrus III to VI on the other hand, the
Fig. 32. Fig. 33.
Figs. 32 and 33. Oæzynaspis celata f. japonica from Nagasaki.
Fig. 32. a specimen showing antipatharian polyps all over its surface; b external side
of left scutum, at £ umbo. [a X 4, b x 5]. — Fig. 33. a—b mandible and maxilla of
a specimen frøm Nagasaki, c—d mandible and maxilla of a specimen from 33941” N.,
1280 507 E. [X 44).
segments are cylindrical with an anterior row of paired spines;
of these pairs the four are well developed, the basal fifth pair is
generally very feebly developed; the larger spines are those dis-
tally seated on the segment.
The rami are always a little unequal in length on the cirrus,
and also differ in number of segments. In cirrus I the anterior
ramus has 10, the posterior 14 segments; in cirrus II the corres-
ponding numbers are 13 and 15. Also in cirrus III to VI the
numbers of segments of the rami in the same way differ by two
in the cirrus; the number of segments in the anterior ramus in-
creases from 18 in cirrus III to 21 in cirrus VI. — The interval
between cirrus I and II is only little larger than the other intervals.
Filamentary appendages are absent. Also real caudal
278
appendages fail; but their place is indicated by three long hairs
in a tuft on each side.
The penis is about half as long or almost as long as cirrus
VI, slender, and pointed, without any trace of annulations or ridges.
Some few scattered hairs are seen, and a tuft of hairs at the dis-
tal end of the penis.
The labrum is very characteristic. Annandale mentions its
curiously prolonged and pointed shape; in the Japanese specimens
a deep and broad median furrow extends from between the palpi
"to its extreme tip and makes the projecting (anterior) end of the
labrum appear a little cleft.
The mandible (Fig. 33) is somewhat variable with three to
five teeth, the second tooth being situated at the middle of the
cutting edge. The lower angle is square cut and often, although
not always, armed with some few, coarse denticles representing the
pectination of other barnacles.
Also the maxilla is variating in shape; generally there is a
deep excavation or cleft, almost in the middle of the cutting edge;
in this case there are twice as many spines above the excavation
as in susp. indica. In extreme cases, on the other hand, the cut-
ting edge may be quite straight with only an indication of a notch.
A comparison between Annandale's dates and the present
specimens results in the following differences between subspecies
indica and forma japonica: In subsp. indica the penis is annulated
and ridged in its outer part, the mandible has four (five) teeth,
and the maxilla three spines above the excavation. In forma j;a-
ponica the labrum has a deep, longitudinal, ventral furrow, and its
distal end is a little bilobed, the penis is without annulations and
ridges, the mandible has two to five teeth, and the maxilla has 5
or 6 spines above the excavation. —
The specimens from the ,,Endeavour" again come near the
subspecies indica, but differ in some respects so that I prefer, at any
rate provisionally, to single them out as representatives of a forma
nova-zelandica nov. They come near to subspecies indica in having
a labrum without any longitudinal furrow, and their maxilla has
only three spines above the excavation; the excavation on the other
hand is very broad, occupying almost half the cutting edge, and
in the middle of the broad excavation a group of three short thorn-
279
like spines is situated. To this must be added that the mandible
has only three teeth, and a pointed lower angle, and that the penis
is again without rings or ridges.
Oxynaspis celata is evidently a highly variating species, and
the range of the species, and its local subspecies and races or
forms ought to be subject to a thorough study on large material from
different localities.
Genus QOctolasmis (Gray) Pilsbry.
[Dichelaspis Darwin].
Octolasmis orthogonia (Darwin).
Cebu, at low tide on muddy beach. 21/II 14. Four specimens attached
to the naked upper part of the axis of a Virgularia.
The specimens entirely agree with the descriptions given by
Darwin (1852), and Hoek (1907), but their size far surpasses
that of previously known specimens, and also gives an evidence
of the variating length of the peduncle owing to different states
of contraction. The following table gives the measures in milli-
meters:
I II III IV
å length 13 10 10 9
FEE ah 7 6 6 4
Peduncle length 6 6,5 + 3
Genus Heteralepas Pilsbry.
In instituting the genus Pilsbry (1907) at once calls our at-
tention to the fact that the genus contains two very different groups
of species, and he accordingly divides the genus into two sub-
genera Paralepas, and Heteralepas s. str.')) Indeed as he states,
much speaks in favour of raising the two subgenera to generic rank.
7”) It is indeed unpractical to use the same name for two different cathe-
gories as is done here for a genus and one of its subgenera, or groups
of species, a course often followed by Pilsbry. We had better follow
the use of the botanists who give the prefix Eu- to the central group of
the genus, thus avoiding confusion. In the present case the subgenus
ought to have had the name Euheteralepas instead of Heteralepas s. str,
I shall nevertheless not now make any change in the nomenclature in-
stituted by Pilsbry for the above-named genus.
280
Nevertheless a step like that is not justifiable for the present.
A study of the many specific descriptions of the literature, and
the curious fact that also in the present material several ,,nova
species", and only two previously described ones could be pointed
out, are apt to awake. suspicion as to the base of the specific
systematic of the genus. No doubt several of the species shall
have to disappear, on account of deficient description; I shall here
f. inst. point to Al/epas tubulosa Quoy et Gaimard of the in-
vestigated waters; it cannot be reidentified, and the name should
be dropped. It is rather possible that the named species might be
identicai with some of the species described as new below; but
only a reexamination of the type specimen will enable us to settle
the identity, the external shape being of no use whatever in this
case.
On the other hand, a thorough revision of each character used
as specific distinction in this genus, based on the previously de-
scribed animals as well as on an extensive new material, is greatly
desirable, and we must await such a revision before we can hope
to get a solution to many questions concerning this intricate genus.
Among the characters not mentioned by Pilsbry (1907) nor
by Annandale (1909) I wish to call the attention to some, which
seem to be of interest. In the Heteralepas-group, as far as can be
seen from the literature, the filamentary appendage at the base of
cirrus I is small, whereas in Paralepas on the contrary it is well
developed and obvious. Even more interesting are the maxillae.
Owing to their conservatism in general among the cirripeds,
we must ascribe to the mouth feet a great phylogenetic interest.
Now, in Heteralepas s. str. a great excavation, generally comprising
almost one half of the cutting edge, below the upper spine, seems
to be found in every species. In Paralepas this excavation is re-
duced to å small, many times even rudimentary notch, and the
cutting edge is here often all but entire. On the other hand, Para-
lepas tends to develop two main spines at the middle thirds of the
cutting edge, and these spines often attain the same size as the
upper spine, and strongly dominate in the row of bristles. This
character is not found in Heteralepas s. str. We can moreover see,
that the maxillae of the genus are of the same construction as in
Poecilasma-Octolasmis, and totally differ from those of Conchoderma-
281
Lepas, thus giving good base for a judgement of the affinities of
the genus as a whole.
Heteralepas (Paralepas) morula (Hoek).
38? 12” S., 149? 40” E., 100—160 fathoms. ,,Endeavourf 16/I1X 14. One
specimen attached to the naked axis of an antipatharian to-
gether with Oxynaspis and Balanus.
The specimen is much greater than those described by Hoek
(1907). It has a capitulum of 13, a peduncle of 7 mm, and is
thus almost exactly twice as large as the largest specimen from
the ,Siboga”", which had a capitulum of 6,5, and a peduncle of
4 mm.
Heteralepas (Paralepas) intermedia (Hoek).
39? 10” S., 149? 55” E., 200—250 fathoms. ,,Endeavourf 15/IX 14.
Several specimens on spines of a Histocidaris.
Owing to contractions the external shape of the animals is ex-
ceedingly variable. The largest specimen has a capitulum of 13 mm
in length; its greater sagittal axis is 10 mm, the transversal 8
mm; the peduncle is only 3 mm long with a width of 6 mm and
is strongly contracted and sharply defined from the capitulum. There
is a pronounced carinal keel on the capitulum; the aperture is
tightly closed and 4 mm long. The smallest of the specimens has
only a capitulum length of 1,5, mm with a peduncle of 1 mm in
length. Also in the smaller specimens the carinal keel is seen,
and often rather pronounced. In intermediate specimens this char-
acter with strong contraction almost entirely fades away, and some-
times the peduncle is contracted to such a degree that the entire
animal is all but globular. This bids us use
characters as length of the peduncle, and
greater or lesser prominence of a carinal
keel in preserved animals with the utmost
cautiousness.
The animal itself on the whole agrees
very well with the ,,Sibogaf specimens, al-
though some minute differences could be
detected in the mouth feet (Fig. 34). There Fig. 34. Heteralepas inter-
is a little difference between the description media from 39? 10” S., 1497
E - å 557 E. a mandible, b max-
and drawing of the mandible in Hoek's illa. [X 331.
282
paper (1907); his description entirely agrees with the drawing given
here. The maxilla shows a small, although distinet notch which is
not mentioned by Hoek.
Heteralepas (Paralepas) Dannevigi n. sp.
38? 10? S., 149? 557 E., 190—240 fathoms. ,,Endeavourf 11/1IX 14. One
specimen. i
38? 05?” S., 150? E., 200—260 fathoms. ,,Endeavourf 12/IX 14. One
specimen (type).
37? 457 S., 150? 10? E, 150—260 fathoms. ,,Endeavourf 14/1X 14. One
specimen attached to a gastropode shell.
Capitulum ovoid, laterally somewhat compressed and sharply
defined from the rather thin, and cylindric peduncle, with a pro-
nounced carinal keel, gradually disappearing towards the base of
the capitulum. The orifice comprises about one third of the ventral
side of the capitulum; its margins are little prominent. Small chit-
inous scuta are present.
The animal is brownish-yellow in alcohol. Its surface is quite
smooth with neither wrinkles nor tubercles. The scuta appear as
somewhat darker brownish, triangular spots just below the orifice.
Owing to contraction the peduncle exhibits tranverse constrictions.
The body of the animal is furnished with one rather large
digitiform appendage on each side, at the base of cirrus I.
In the cirri the rami are always well developed and of al-
most equal size in each cirrus, although always differing in the
number of segments. The numbers of segments counted were:
Cirrns kl II HI IV V VI
Inner ramus 9 20 19 15 18 21
Omtereee 8 18 18 18 21 16
To this tåble we must add the following remark that the
basal segment of the rami judging from the armature with spines
always consists of two or three coalesced segments. The basal
segment of the inner rami consists of three, that of the outer
rami of two fused segments; nevertheless the basal segment never
exhibits more than twice the length of the following segments. —
In the cirri Il to VI the posterior thorns as in other Paralepas-
species have developed into large, rather clawlike spines and cur-
283
iously contrast with the fine bristles of the anterior side. The post-
erior spines are as long as or generally even longer than the fol-
lowing segment.
The caudal appendages are slender, and long, about twice
as long as the protopodite of cirrus VI, with 12 segments. They
have only few hairs.
The penis is stout and short, only about half as long as cir-
rus VI; it is annulated and carries some few long hairs; at the
Fig. 35. Heteralepas Dannevigi from 38? 05” S., 150? 00 E. a type specimen, lateral
aspect; b mandible, c maxilla. [a X 4, b—e X 33).
distal end a tuft of hairs is found. The penis is rapidly tapering
towards the distal end.
The labrum has a row of broad, and low, tuberculate dent-
icles along its interior side. It is not bullate nor very prominent.
The mandible (Fig. 35) has four strong teeth, the fourth at
its lower angle. Only the third tooth is armed with small denticles
at its lower side. The second tooth occupies the middle of the
cutting edge. A dense growth of finer hairs covers the lower part
of the mandible from the excavation between the first and the sec-
ond tooth downwards.
The maxilla has a strong spine at its upper edge; between
this and a slightly pronounced notch a smaller spine is present.
Below the notch the cutting edge is densely armed with spines,
284
two intermediate ones reaching almost the same size as the upper
spine. The sides of the maxilla close by the edge are covered with
dense, long hairs.
The size of the specimens in millimeters is as follows (the
number of the specimens answers to the succession in the table
of localities): I I IU
É length 13 9 ræ:
Gai lkkt ) width 12 7, 6,5
Peduncle, length 6 4,5) S
+) lower end mutilated.
The species somewhat recalls Heteralepas intermedia (Hoeck),
and Heteralepas percarinata Pilsbry, but differs from both of
these in the presence of scuta. It also to some degree recalls the
enigmatic Alepas tubulosa Quoy et Gaimard; but the identific-
ation of the latter species is at present impossible, as mentioned
above.
I have named the species after the late Captain Dannevig,
during many years leader of the investigations with the ,,Endeav-
our" till he went down with the ship on its disastrous voyage to
the Macquarie islands at New Year 1915.
Heteralepas (Paralepas) scutiger nov. sp.
Sagami Bay, 400 fathoms. 1—7/VI 14. One specimen.
The capitulum is ovoid, or almost globular, without crista along
the carinal side, somewhat compressed distally in the part near the
orifice. Scuta present as small, chitinous, triangular rudiments. The
peduncle is distinctly limited against the capitulum.
The capitulum is all but globular, only in the upper part a
little compressed laterally, but without any trace of a carinal crista.
The opening occupies about ”/5 of the ventral side of the capitu-
lum. The surface is smooth with neither wrinkles nor tubercles.
The scuta are small, triangular, and chitinous without calcareous
deposits. The peduncle is round, cylindrical with indistinet trans-
verse wrinkles.
The unique specimen has a capitulum length of 8 mm with a
width of 7 mm; the geduncle is 7 mm long.
VLR
285
The body of the animal carries on each side a well developed
digitiform filamentary appendage at the base of cirrus I.
The latter is situated beside the mouth opening, and separated from
the next cirri by a distinct interspace.
The cirri are of the common Paralepas-type with five claw-
like spines at the posterior side of the segments in cirrus II to
VI. The numbers of segments in the rami of the cirri are:
I II III IV V VI
Inner ramus 7 15 13 15 15 16
Outer ke 7 14 14 IØDBRNS 15
=) distal end damaged.
The basal segment of all the rami is very long, almost as long
as the protopodite; it evidently consists of several coalesced seg-
ments. According to the armature the numbers of coalesced seg-
ments"are:
Cirrus I II JU AV V VI
Basal segment of inner ramus 2 4 4 J 6 6
outer” ts 3 6 d 5 >] I)
b2l b2 %”
The caudal appendages are as long as the protopodite of
cirrus VI and have 8 segments; only few hairs are present on the
appendage.
The penis is stout, tapering, and annulated all over, with few,
rather short hairs elsewhere, and a tuft of hairs at the distal end.
It is as long as cirrus VI.
Of the mouth parts the labrum is furnished at its inner side
with a single row of rounded denticles. It is
not bullate.
heh mandible"(Figs 36) has”fotur”teeth;
the fourth at the lower angle. The second tooth /
is placed only very little above the middle of /»
the cutting edge. The second and the third
tooth have lateral denticles and denticles at their ;
lower edge; at the lower side of the fourth 7 :
tooth two denticles are present, representing CE» NX
the pectination of the lower angle. The outer
and lower part of the mandible is densely. pig. 36.… Heteralepas scu-
hairy. tiger from Sagami Bay.
É É SN a mandible, b maxilla.
The maxilla has a little distinct notch be- [X 331.
286
low the' three upper spines, the first (uppermost) of which is very
prominent and peculiarly straight. Below the notch the cutting
edge is densely armed with spines, two of which are much stouter
than the others, and almost reach the size of the upper spine. The
lower and outer part of the maxilla is densely furnished with hairs.
The external shape of this species recalls Heteralepas (Para-
lepas) pedunculata (Hoek), and Heteralepas (Paralepas) percarinata
Pilsbry; but the presence of scuta separates it from both of
these forms. It is also nearsy related to Heteralepas (Paralepas)
Dannevigi, with which species it has the scuta in common; but the
entire lack of a carinal crista in Heteralepas scutiger separates it
from the named species, and moreover the structure of the basal
segments' of the rami of the cirri and the numbers of segments in
the cirri, and the caudal appendages besides differ so much that
the species must be kept apart.')
Heteralepas (Paralepas) nodulosa n. sp.
3 miles S. W. of Tucuran; 300 fathoms. 10/III 14. One specimen on a
spine of Cidaris sp., together with Megalasma striatum, and
Verruca Krugeri.
The capitulum is globular without carinal crista; the orifice is
situated at the upper side of the capitulum and directed obliquely
upwards, with feebly lobed margins. Scuta are indicated as triang-
ular rudiments. The peduncle is sharply limited against the broader
capitulum. The surface of the animal is finely transversally striped,
and set with small, well defined, scanty, almost thornlike warts.
The species (Fig. 37) is at once characterized by its small spines
or warts, which are especially found on the capitulum, although
they also occur on the peduncle. The animal is in alcohol of a
dark brown colour, the peduncle a little lighter in hue. The thick
outer layer is more transparent. The cuticle is transversally feebly
wrinkled or striated, somewhat more prominently in the peduncle;
this may be due to contraction. The peduncle is by an abrupt nar-
rowing distinctly separated from the capitulum.
Scuta are present as small chitinous triangular rudiments just
below the orifice. They are only with difficulty traced.
(1921).
287
The capitulum has a length of 6 mm, and its width is also
6 mm; the length of the orifice is 2,5 mm. The peduncle only
measures 3 mm.
The filamentary appendages are rather large, digitiform,
with a somewhat narrower, almost broadly spinelike distal part oc-
cupying the distal fifth of the free filament. It is situated at the
base of cirrus I beside the mouth; there is a distinct space of the
breadth of one cirrus between cirrus I and Il.
The cirri are of the usual Paralepas-type, the claw-like spines
at the posterior side of cirrus II—VI reaching the length of the
following segments. The numbers of segments are:
I II III IV V VI
Inner ramus 9 14 15 14 15 10)
Omen ile IST 13 TT NS SENG
£) distal part damaged.
To this must be added that the basal segments of the rami,
although not especially long, consist of coalesced segments; judg-
ing by the armature of the named segment, it consists of the fol-
lowing numbers: GENE HAVET TA SY
Inner ramus 2 4 Sj 3 2 PA
One 3 3 4 4 3 +
If we add these numbers to those given above, the numbers
of segments in this species agree rather well with Heteralepas per-
carinata Pilsbry.
The caudal appendages have 11 segments, and are one and a
half time as long as the protopodite of cirrus VI. They are slender
and almost without hairs.
Penis is short, only half as long as cirrus VI. It is annul-
ated, stout, and tapers rapidly towards the distai end; the latter is
furnished with a tuft of hairs; elsewhere only few and scattered
hairs are present.
The labrum was damaged in the specimen.
The mandible has four teeth, the fourth forming the lower
angle; the second tooth is situated a little above the middle of
the cutting edge. The second and the third tooth have denticles
along their lower edge; also the inferior margin of the fourth tooth
has indistinct denticles, and this tooth moreover carries some small
288
denticles on its sides, a little above the lower edge. The outer and
lower part of the mandible is densely hairy.
The maxilla has one strong spine at the upper angle, and
at each side of it one smaller spine; between these three spines
and a rudimentary notch
a fourth, unpaired, rather
long spine is present. Be-
low the notch the cutting
edge is densely spiny;
among these spines two
larger ones are rather pro-
minent and only slightly
smaller than the upper
spine. The outer part of
Fig. 37. Heteralepas nodulosa, S.W. of Tucuran. the maxilla is covered by
a type specimen, lateral view; b mandible, c
maxilla. [a X 4, b—c X 33).
numerous, rather long hairs.
Although the specimen
in the features of its cirri and mouth parts is very like Hetera-
lepas (Paralepas) percarinata (Pilsbry), it must at all events pro-
visionally be regarded as representing another species, owing to
the occurrence of rudimentary scuta, granules on the cuticle, and
absence of a carinal crista.
Heteralepas (Heteralepas) dubia n. sp.
Disaster Bay, New Zealand, 30—40 fathoms, sand and mud. ,,Endeavourf
1/X 14. Two specimens.
The capitulum almost insensibly passes into the peduncle. No
traces of scuta are found, but the insertion of the adduetor muscle
is externally visible as a somewhat lighter figure below the aper-
ture. The latter is about half as long as the capitulum. No car-
inal crista is indicated, but at the juncture of capitulum and ped-
uncle a low and broad, wartlike protuberance of the cuticle is
present at the carinal side.
The mantle of the animals is thick, semipellucid, and of a
vivid, reddish-brown colour, the internal tissues dark brown in alco-
hol. The peduncle shows transverse feeble- wrinkles, probably due
to contractions.
289
In the larger specimen the capitulum measures 15 mm with
a width of 12 mm; the peduncle is 10 mm long. The smaller spec-
imen has a capitulum length of 8 mm, and a width.of 6 mm,
whereas its peduncle is 5 mm; the latter is not quite intact.
A dissection of the smal-
ler specimen gave the fol-
lowing results. væ
The, filamentary ap- É
pendage is short and =
stout, situated at the base
offcirraos MA There: is "only
a narrow interspace be- ff"
tween cirrus I and Il. HE
The cirri show the typ-
ical Heteralepas. In cirrus
I the inner ramus has 1 ' Fig: 38. Heteralepas KOL: the smaller SPecimen
from Disaster Bay, N.Z. a animal in lateral view,
fhemkouter 117 segments, b mandible, c maxilla. [a X 4, b—c X 33).
the basal segments evid-
ently representing 2, respectively 3 coalesced but not very long
segments. The inner ramus is a little shorter than the outer one,
but is of the same width; the segments are bullate in both rami.
— In cirrus V the rami are very unequal: the stout outer ramus
has 42 segments of which the basai long one evidently consists of
8 coalesced segments; the very slender inner ramus has only 11
segments and is only in the outer segments armed with few hairs.
In the same way cirrus VI has an outer ramus of 38 segments,
the long basal segment evidently again consisting of 8 coalesced
segments; the more threadlike inner ramus consists of only 10
segments.
The caudal appendages are very short, only as long as
the basal segment of the protopodite in cirrus VI; they have 7
and 5 segments.
Penis is short and stout, only half as long as cirrus VI, an-
nulated throughout; it has few and scattered hairs, and a tuft of
hairs at the distal end.
The labrum is not bullate; it is armed with a single row of
rounded denticles along the oral margin.
The mandible (Fig. 38b) has four teeth, the lower constitut-
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 73. 19
290
ing the inferior angle. The excavation between the first and the
second tooth comprises about -”/5 of the entire cutting edge. The
second and the third tooth are armed with denticles on the basal
parts of their edges, the fourth only at its upper margin. The outer
parts of the mandible are richly furnished with finer hairs.
The maxilla has a broad and deep excavation comprising al-
most half the cutting edge. The upper side runs out into a very
strong, and long spine, and on the edge of the excavation next to
this spine three large bristles are present, the third, and smallest of
them near the bottom of the excavation. Below the excavation the
cutting edge is almost straight, and armed with a crowded double
row of strong spines. The outer parts of the maxilla are richly
covered with fine and long hairs.
In spite of the great series of Heteralepas-species hitherto de-
scribed we must at all events at present consider the specimens
here recorded as representatives of a new species, first because of
the carinal warty protuberance at: the transition from the capitulum
to the peduncle, secondly because the numbers of segments in the
cirri and the caudal appendages, as well as different smaller feat-
ures of the mouth parts, differ from all other species previously
known.
Family Verrucidae.
Genus Verruca Schumacher.
Verruca albatrossiana Pilsbry.
25 miles S. of Zamboanga, 250 fathoms. 4/III 14. Numerous specimens
on spines of a Cidaris sp.
21 miles W. "/> S. of Bonomisaki, 220 fathoms. ,,Hyaton Maruf 13/V
14. One specimen together with Megalasma striatum.
The species has only been provisionally described by Pilsbry
(1912) from the sea near Luzon; but as yet no drawing of the
species has been published, so that the identification may turn out
to be incorrect. , The unusual length of the rostrum and fixed
tergum characterize the species" and are also seen in the present
specimens (Fig. 40). The base of the carina is very long, so that
the characteristic given by Pilsbry again holds good: ,The carina
occupies much more of the carino-rostral wall than the rostrum,
291
which is higher and shorter, the apices of both being marginal.”
Nevertheless the entire size of the rostrum is larger than the
carina, on account of its greater height.
The specimen from Bonomisaki was preserved in alcohol and
gave opportunity for a dissection, whereas all the specimens from
Zamboanga were dried.
Of the mouth parts the mandible is especially character-
istic (Fig. 39). The upper part of the cutting edge is furnished with
two rather adjacent strong teeth; the lower half
of the edge is strongly pectinate, and in this
pectinate part there are two more teeth, al-
though not very strongly indicated by pro-
minences of the margin. The lower angle of
the mandible is slender and pointed.
The maxilla has a very strong upper
spine, and below this a small spine at the be-
ginning of the deep excavation which occupies
one half of the cutting edge. Below the ex- Fig. 39. Verruca alba-
7 Ek å trossiana, 21 miles W.
cavation the edge is armed with two longer 1%, s. of Bonomisaki.
and four short, strong spines. The greater part (km. Be maxilla.
of the blade is covered with rather long hairs. re
het cirrikarelcomparatiyely "short In Fcirrus tt lRandellethe
rami are very unequal. In cirrus I the shorter ramus with its 13
segments is half as long as the longer one which has 22 segments;
in cirrus II the shorter ramus has only 9 segments, but it is never-
theless also here half as long as the other ramus which counts
23 segments. The other cirri have subequal rami, and their seg-
ments are armed with three pairs of spines on their anterior side.
The caudal appendages are slender and extraordinarily
long, measuring about %/5 of the length of cirrus VI; they have 31
segments.
Penis is-short, about ”/3 the length of cirrus. VI, sparsely
hairy except at the distal end, where it has a tuft of rather long
hairs.
The large amount of specimens from Zamboanga furnish a good
base for a study of the external features of the' species, and its
variations. In the majority of the specimens the right tergum and
scutum are fixed, the left ones movable; this seems to be the
19%
292
case in two out of three instances: in 50 specimens taken at hap-
hazard 32 had their left scutum and tergum movable, in the other
18 specimens the left scutum and tergum were fixed, the right
tergum and scutum being movable.
Also the sculpturation of the plates exhibits great variations.
In most specimens radiating ribs are rather prominent in the mov-
able scutum and tergum as also in the rostrum; in some spec-
Fig. 40. Verruca albatrossiana, 25 miles E. of Zamboanga. a specimen showing no
radiating ribs in tergum and scutum, half from above, b common, strongly sculptured
specimen, half from above, c the same specimen in side view, rostrum left, d the
same facing the fixed tergum and seutum, tergum left, c outlines of the same spec-
imen, carinal view (c carina, r rostrum, ft fixed tergum, s and t movable scutum
and tergum), f interior side of right scutum and tergum. [All figures X 4).
imens the radiating ribs have entirely faded away with exception
of the diagonal rib, and the articular ribs, and only the transverse
ridges of growth are prominent as in the other plates. Between
these two extremities every transition is present.
Generally four articular ridges are present in the tergum; some-
times the marginal ridge exhibits a median longitudinal furrow in
the lower part thus giving origin to a fifth articular ridge. — The
vertical ridges of the parietal areas of the wall vary greatly in
numbers.
The size of the greater specimens coincides with the dimens-
ions quoted by Pilsbry (1912).
Verruca cristallina Gruvel.
25 miles E. of Zamboanga, 250 fathoms. 4/III 14. Four specimens of
forma laevis nov. on large spicules of a siliceous sponge.
293
Of the four specimens three have their left tergum and scutum
fixed, whereas the fourth (Fig. 41) has the right scutum and tergum
fixed, the left plates movable.
Carina and rostrum interlock by three ribs; the carina is a
little pointed, whereas the rostrum has a rounded and little pro-
minent apex. The movable tergum has only a strongly pro-
nounced diagonal rib; two other ridges, which interlock with the
Fig. 41. Verruca cristallina f. laevis; 25 miles E. of Zamboanga. a specimen from the
side of the movable scutum and tergum, b the same from the side of the fixed scu-
tum and tergum, c movable tergum and scutum, d inside of movable tergum.
[All figures X 8).
scutum, are only little pronounced. The movable scutum has
four strong ribs articulating with the rostrum; only one rib inter-
locking with the tergum, viz. that next to the diagonal rib, is
more prominent. The fixed tergum and scutum have only
rather feeble lines of growth; in the tergum a broad ala is devel-
oped, whereas in the scutum a narrower radius is present, both
with distinect lines of growth.
The internal side of the <movable plates is almost sculptureless.
No ridge or myophore is seen in the fixed plates.
The mouth feet are very characteristic (Fig. 42). In the man-
dible a fourth tooth is indicated just above the pectinate lower
angle; the upper base of this fourth tooth is denticulated. The
maxilla has one short and thick upper spine and at its lower
side a longer but somewhat more slender spine. In the broad ex-
cavation, which occupies about one half of the entire cutting edge,
two minute thorns are seen in the middle; below the excavation
two larger and some smaller spines are present. The sides of the
outer part of the blade are adorned with short hairs which are
placed in groups of two or three.
294
Cirrus I has on its inner ramus 12, on its outer 13 seg-
ments; the basal segment of the outer ramus evidently consists of
two coalesced segments. In cirrus II the rami have 11 and 13
segments. In both cirri the
outer ramus is longer than
the inner ramus by two
segments and a half. Cirrus
III is damaged in the spec-
imen examined.
The caudal append-
ages are short, only little
longer than the protopod-
ite of cirrus VI; they con-
sist of 12 segments.
It is not without hesit-
Fig. 42. Verruca cristallina f. laevis, 25 miles E of ation that I refer the pres-
sA
Lamboanea; a Mmandible, b madu (& Sol two ent specimens to Verruca
segments of the injured cirrus III showing mode
of regeneration. [X 87). cristallina.. According to
Gruvel (1917) the spec-
imens from the Andaman Islands have a more heavily sculptured
fixed tergum and scutum, each of which moreover is adorned with
an interlocking rib. On the other hand, the ribs of the movable
scutum are more prominent in the present specimens, and also
the small scutal ribs of the rostrum are more numerous. These
characters may nevertheless fairly well come within the range of
variation in a species.
Also the features of the animal's body seem to differ in some
points. Gruvel found in his specimens caudal appendages half as
long as cirrus VI with 25 segments, whereas the caudal append-
ages of the present specimens are only little longer than the prot-
opodite of cirrus VI, and consist of only 12 segments. Also in
the mouth feet differences seem to be present, although they can-
not be made out with certainty because of the rather schematic
drawings of Gruvel.
We are not at present able to judge of the systematic value
of the said characters, and I have, therefore, preferred to designate
the present specimens as belonging to Verruca cristallina, although
representing a special forma /laevis. Later investigations on larger
295
material shall have to settle the systematic position and value of
the group.
The inner ramus of cirrus III on the left side of the animal
dissected shows an interesting phase of regeneration (Fig. 42c). The
wound is closed by a chitinal layer, and within the last, undam-
aged segment the formation of four new, small segments are seen,
building the coming outer end of the ramus on exuviation. This
lends support to the statements of Darwin (1854, p. 158) as to
the reparation of wounds and losses in cirripeds, and points to a
pronounced power of regeneration in the cirri.
Verruca Krugeri n. sp.
3 miles S. W. of Tucuran, 300 fathoms. 10/III 14. Several specimens on
spines of a Cidaris, together with Megalasma striatum and He-
teralepas nodulosa. ;
Rostrum prominent, rather hornlike, interlocking with the carina
by one large upper, and two smaller inferior ribs. Three or four
articular ribs on the movable tergum and scutum. Movable tergum
with a pronounced diagonal rib and, interlocking with the carina,
two lower median and a stronger marginal rib. Fixed scutum and
tergum almost without ribs or sculpture, the other plates strongly
sculptured.
In the present species (Fig. 43) rostrum is by far the largest
of the plates; its umbo is situated almost in the centre of the
plate, with numerous ridges radiating in all directions. The stronger
ridge, or rather Crista, runs in the direction of the carinal umbo,
and interlocks with the carina in a very deep sinus of the latter
plate. Several ridges (7 or 8) run towards the margin and join the
scuta, four of them interlocking with ridges of the movable scutum.
The carina interlocks with the movable tergum by two nar-
row ribs; a broad third rib has its upper edge in the sinus adjoin-
ing the diagonal scutal crista, its lower edge adjacent to the strong
crista of the rostrum. On the lower side the carina is less strongly
sculpturated.
The fixed tergum and scutum are almost devoid of ridges,
but the lines of growth are easily distinguished.
The movable tergum has a strong diagonal rib or crista
296
pointing from its apex to the juncture of rostrum and carina. Along
the margin adjacent to the fixed tergum an almost equally prom-
inent ridge is developed, and between this ridge and the diagonal
crista two narrower ridges are found; the four ridges mentioned
interlock with ridges of the carina. Above the diagonal crista three
or four ridges interlock with as many ridges of the scutum. The
a ' b c d e
Fig. 43. Verruca Kriigeri, 3 miles S. W. of Tucuran. a specimen seen half from above
(rostrum pointing downwards), b side view, somewhat from below, rostrum (left)
and carina, c side aspect of the fixed tergum and scutum, d inside of the movable
scutum and tergum, e inside of movable tergum. [All figures X 5,3).
interior side of the plate is somewhat excavated, but otherwise
without sculpturation like the movable scutum.
The movable scutum interlocks with the tergum by three
or four ridges, and with the rostrum by four regularly developed
strong ridges.
The line between the apices of carina and rostrum in the larger
specimens measures 4,5 mm, the line from the rostral apex to that
of the fixed tergum 5 mm; height of the carina 2 mm.
Of the mouth parts the mandible (Fig. 44) has three teeth,
the second placed in the middle of the cutting edge. The lower
angle is pointed, its anterior side armed with about six long and
slender denticles. The lower half of the mandible is covered with
small, fine hairs.
The maxilla has a strong upper spine and below this two
more slender and somewhat shorter spines above the great excav-
ation which occupies about half the cutting edge. No shorter spines
or thorns are present in the excavation. Below the latter the cut-
ting edge is armed with five or six slender spines. The outer part
of the maxilla is hairy.
In cirrus I and II the anterior ramus is much shorter than
rare
297
the posterior. In cirrus I it is half as long, the numbers of seg-
ments being 11 and 15; in cirrus II the anterior ramus measures
about %/5 of the posterior; the numbers of segments are 10 and
16. In cirrus III the rami are subequal with 16 and 21 segments.
The caudal appendages are slender and about half as long
as cirrus VI with 19 segments.
The species comes near to Verruca Koehleri Gruvel (1907),
and Verruca intexta Pilsbry (1912).
From the first named species the
sculpture differs very much, although
the number of articular ridges of
the tergum and scutum generally
coincide. The prominent ridges of
the movable fergum between the Fig. 44. Verruca Kriigeri, 3 miles S.W.
diagonal crista and the carinal margin, of Tucuran. a mandible, b maxilla.
and the rather prominent apex of SE RAd
the tergum are especially characteristic of the present species,
whereas they are lacking in Verruca Koehleri. Also the rostrum is
much larger in Verruca Kriigeri.
The sculpture of the tergum in Verruca intexta seems to coin-
cide with Verruca Koehleri, although the ribs are even less num-
erous. Moreover the words of Pilsbry (1912): ,Carina and
rostrum interlocking with numerous teethf", and ,beak of carina
somewhat produced" do not agree with the features of Verruca
Kriigeri. In its number of articular ribs this species holds an
intermediate position between Verruca intexta and Verruca Koehleri
although in most cases it agrees with the latter.
The specimens from Tucuran must, therefore, be taken as re-
presentatives of a new species. I have named it after the cirriped
investigator Paul Kriger, who has greatly contributed to our know-
ledge of the group.
OQwing to its prominent rostrum, which emancipates itself horn-
like from the other plates of the wall, the present species together
with Verruca nexa Darwin, Verruca Koehleri Gruvel, and Verruca
intexta Pilsbry according to Pilsbry (1916) belong to the group
of Verruca nexa under his section Verruca. I should prefer to se-
parate the mexa-group of this section as a section of its own, and
298
propose'to name it sectio Rostrato-verruca, owing to its prominent
rostrum. Indeed, this character seems to be more important, and
lends the species a more aberrant feature than any other of the
characters used by Pilsbry as means of distinction between his
sections of the genus Verruca.
Family Chtamalidae.
Genus Catopnragmus Sowerby.
Catophragmus Pilsbryi n. sp.
Taboga, Panama, on coastal rocks in the tidal zone. 12/XII 15. Several
specimens.
Fig. 45. Catophragmus Pilsbryi from Taboga, Panama. a type specimen in natural
size, b carina of another specimen, outside, c the same, inside,
d the same, top view. [b—d X 2).
The eight principal plates of the wall indistinet; supplementary
compartments very numerous, irregular, imbricating over the sut-
ures. The chitinal layer nøt reaching the basal edge of the com-
partments; all plates of the wall with several longitudinal ridges,
with crenulated margins; summits corroded. Caudal appendages
present, almost as long as the protopodite of cirrus VI, with 6
segments. Basis unknown. (Subgenus Catophragmus Pilsbry).
The shell is broad and low (Fig. 45). The inner whorl of plates
is little distinct, generally even less distinctly pronounced than in
the specimen figured; especially the rostral latera may be difficult
to trace in many cases. Although the outer compartments gener-
ally decrease in size towards the periphery of the wall, this is not
without exceptions, and the animal thus often attains a rather ir-
regular aspect. From below the appearance is more regular, although
299
irregularities here also often may be obvious. — The largest plates
of the wall are carina and rostrum.
The thick chitinal cuticie is dark chocolate-brownish, but worn
off on top of the compartments, which are of dirty whitish colour.
— The compartments are symmetrically shaped, their greater
part hidden below the outer plates.
The lower part is longitudinally regu-
larly ridged in the same way as the
carinal(Fig"45'b); thefridges are not ——
seen internally. The basal margin is (X
crenulated, or rather finely denticul-
ated. In the present specimens the
prominent part of the compartments
is strongly corroded all over and al-
most flat. Probably the plates in young
specimens will turn out to be almost
conical with convergent outer ridges.
The opercular plates externally ex-
hibit very deep ridges of growth, but
i Fig.46. Catophragmus Piålsbryi from
their upper parts are strongly corrod- Taboga, Panama. a tergum, ex-
ed; the plates are astonishingly thick, !ernal side, b scutum, external
ki i side, c tergum, inside, d scutum,
The scutum (Fig. 46) has a straight ind DXB
occludent margin; no sulcus is present.
The articular ridge is very prominent, with a very deep articular
furrow below, and a somewhat shallower one above. The internal
surface is deeply excavated, with a pit for the adductor, but no
crests.
Tergum has a very prominent articular ridge, and a deep art-
icular furrow, but no spur. The inside is deeply excavated with
several crests for the depressor.
None of the specimens are intact; in all of them the basal part
is wanting, and it must thus remain unsettled whether the basis
is calcareous as in Catophragmus imbricatus Sowerb. or mem-
braneous as in Catophragmus polymerus Darwin. The largest spec-
imen has a greater diameter of 55 mm, but the position of the
opening seems to indicate that the width of the entire animal must
have been about 70 mm or even more. It is thus by far the
largest Catophragmus hitherto known.
300
The investigation of the animal gave the following results as
to the body:
The labrum is bullate, but has no furrow nor notch; neither
are hairs or denticles present. The palpae are short and trunc-
ated (Fig. 47). The mandible has three large, almost equidis-
Fig. 47. Catophragmus Pilsbryi from Taboga, Panama. a labrum with palpae, from
above, b mandible, c maxilla, d caudal appendage. [X 221.
tantly placed teeth; the lower angle is pointed, and strongly pec-
tinate. The surface is all but destitute of finer hairs.
The maxilla has two large upper spines, below these latter
one pair of smaller spines, and then a small, but distinct notch.
The lower part of the cutting edge is straight, and armed with
several strong spines; the lower angle is a little protruded, and
armed with a brush of bristles. A crest is seen at the upper margin
in the posterior part of the blade. Only some few hairs are present
at the upper and lower margins.
Cirrus I and II are short, the posterior cirri longer and of al-
most equal size; all the cirri are stout. The numbers of segments
are:
Cirrus I II III IV V VI
Cirri of the inner ramus 8 9 19 C28) PR 22
right side | outer 11 iD! 18 21 22 23
Cirri of the Innere 9 9 21 22 21 21
leftEside me Routers 12 10 20 23 23 23
301
The caudal appendages are only a little shorter than the
protopodite of cirrus VI; in the right appendage of one specimen
ieremwerekostinkthenleftkFonehsksesmentsEbu sinker lattertthe
basal segment is twice as long as in the right appendage, thus
certainly representing two segments.
The penis is twice as long as cirrus VI, annulated, and only
with a tuft of hairs at its distal end.
The branchiae are rather large with plicated surface.
The present species in many respects holds an intermediate
position between Caztophragmus imbricatus and Catophragmus poly-
merus. With the latter it shares the great number of compartments,
and the ridged plates, although the arrangement of the ridges is
asymmetrical in Catophragmus polymerus, but symmetrical in the
present species. With Catophragmus imbricatus it has the caudal
appendages in common, but they are more fully developed in the
present species, which also has a greater number of compartments.
It must, therefore, be regarded as a separate species, and I have
allowed myself to name it Catophragmus Pilsbryi after the eminent
cirriped investigator Henry A. Pilsbry.
The species seems to be strictly litoral, judging by its finding
place; it thus would seem to be possible to get material for a
study of its development, a tempting task on account of the sup-
posed primitive position of the genus among the sessile barnacles.
Genus Pachylasma Darwin.
Pachylasma scutistriata n. sp.
38? 25? S., 148? 287” E., 70—80 fathoms. ,,Endeavourf 8/IX 14. Two
specimens.
38" 15? S., 148"? 437” E., 70—120 fathoms. ,,Endeavourf 9/IX 14. Sev-
eral specimens, mostly attached to crinoid stalks, some (without
substratum) overgrown with sponges.
38? 12? S., 149? 40”? E., 100—160 fathoms. ,,Endeavourf 16/IX 14. Sev-
eral specimens on the stem of an antipatharian, together with
Oxynaspis celata, Heteralepas morula, Ibla pygmæa, and Ba-
lanus auricoma.
Compartments pink with whitish alae; radii absent. The alae
are very broad, and distinctly striped perpendicularly to their upper
302
margin. Carina almost keeled, forming an acute angle seen from
above. Scuta large, with distinct ridges of growth and radially ar-
ranged groves; terga all but invisible in closed specimens. Rostral
compartment consisting of three coalesced, but distinctly evident
plates.
The six compartments are easily distinguishable owing to the
well developed, triangular alae (Fig. 48) which are developed along
the carina, the carinal latus, and the median latus. The compart-
Fig. 48. Pachylasma scutistriata from 38? 12” S., 1499 40” E. Type specimen in side
view, and from above. [X 1,5).
ments are vividly pinkish, not seldom with vertical darker, and
lighter stripes radiating from the apex of the compartment; the
alae, on the other hand, are only feebly coloured or almost quite
white and thus very conspicuous as against the compartments. The
lines of growth are often almost invisible, and very irregular in
the compartments, but sometimes they may be somewhat accent-
uated by their colour and more regularly arranged. In the alae
the lines of growth are regular and distinct, parallel with the margin.
The sheath has very regular, and well developed lines of growth;
the basal part of the compartments has an inner all but porcel-
laneous surface. No pores are present.
in young specimens the basis is membraneous. In larger spec-
imens, on the other hand, the outer parts of the basis are cal-
cified, whereas the central part remains membraneous. The calcifi-
cation is rather intense, and the calcified parts of the basis in old
specimens attain a fairly conspicuous thickness.
The carina is not very broad, and has a pointed apex; the
broad alae form a pointed angle with each other, and the plate is
therefore narrowly V-shaped in transverse section, especially in its
upper part.
2 VER
303
The rostrum is broad with a rounded apex. In young spec-
imens two external longitudinal stripes very often are seen indic-
ating that the plate, as already pointed out by Darwin (1853) in
other species, and more especially emphasized by Pilsbry (1916),
is in fact composed of the rostrum and two rostral latera. In old
specimens the external sutural lines fade away because of both the
Fig. 49. Pachylasma scutistriata from 389 12” S., 1499 40” E. a rostrum —- rostral
latera, external aspect, b the same plate in inside view, c external view of tergum,
and d of scutum, e and f inside view of scutum and tergum. [All figures X 4).
irregular structure and the corrosion of the surface; but an ex-
amination of the interior surface (Fig. 49b) also now clearly reveals
the boarders of the components: the rostral latera at first sight
may indeed be taken as radii of the rostrum. In transverse sect-
ions the sutures are rather easily traced all through the plate, al-
though the connection is so strong that the suture does not gener-
ally form the line of fracture, when the plate is broken to pieces.
Probably the plates will turn out to be quite separate in smaller
specimens than I had at hand, in the same way as Darwin has
observed it in other species of the genus.
The scutum is triangular with distinet lines of growth (Fig.
48d). The growth zones are groved, and the groves are arranged
in lines radiating from the apex, so that the scutum at first sight
seems to be regularly radially striped. The interior surface is al-
304
most quite even, only with a faint pit for the adductor. The artic-
ular ridge is rather long, but little prominent.
Tergum has an almost invisible indication of a spur. Extern-
ally there is a feeble, longitudinal depression, and the lines of
growth are very faint. Internally fine crests are present for the
adductor; the short articular ridge is very pro-
minent and strongly projects beyond the scutal
margin.
The size of the specimens varies greatly ;
the smaller specimen basally has a rostro-car-
inal length of 7,5 with a carinal height of 3 mm,
the largest specimen in the same way has a
length of 20 mm and a carinal height of 15 mm.
In its internal features the mouth parts
Fig. 50. Pachylasma Of the animal show the typical Chtamalid.
scutistriata from 38"12" The labrum has no teeth nor hairs; it is not
S., 1499 40” E. a mand- 2 ,
ible, b maxilla. [<22. bullate, and has neither notch nor median grove.
The mandible (Fig. 50a) has three teeth,
the second situated at the middle of the cutting edge. The upper
edges of the second and the third tooth are basally finely pectinate.
The lower angle of the mandible is armed with rather long bristles
which take the place of the usual pectination. Only few finer hairs
are present in the lower part of the blade.
The maxilla has a very strong upper spine; between this
and a sharply defined notch three or four shorter spines are situ-
ated. Below the notch the median third of the cutting edge is
armed with four or five pairs of strong spines, and below these
spines the edge again carries shorter spines, among which one
stouter and more prominent. The sides of the blade are covered
with fine hairs near the cutting edge.
The armature of the cirri displays two types. In cirrus I and
II the segments are bullate, and armed with numerous spines in
transverse belts. In cirrus IV to VI the segments have three pairs
of long and strong spines, and basally some few fine hairs on their
anterior side; distally 5—6 long hairs are present on the posterior
side of the segments.
In cirrus III the basal segments of the rami are armed in the
same way as in cirrus I and II; the greater majority of the seg-
305
ments on the other hand, show the same arrangement of spines
as the three posterior cirri,
The caudal appendages are a little longer than the proto-
prodite of cirrus VI, and have 15 to 18 segments; only the distal
segments have some few and well developed hairs.
The penis is only little longer than the protopodite of cirrus
VI, stout, and annulated all over. Some few and small hairs are
scattered on its surface, and at the distal end it has two lateral
tufts of long and strong hairs.
The species at hand comes near to Pachylasma Darwinianum
Pilsbry (1912); the latter has an entirely membraneous basis, and
the present species thus bridges the gap between Pachylasma Dar-
winianum and the typical Pachylasma-species with their more com-
pletely calcified bases in adult specimens. The species with mem-
braneous bases moreover link Hexelasma to Pachylasma, and leave
a sound base for a separation of these genera. The other character,
which consists in the presence, resp. absence of caudal append-
ages, also fails. According to Pilsbry (1916) the caudal append-
ages in Pachylasma Darwinianum consist of ,,only one extremely
minute joint", i. e. they are quite rudimentary. In Pachylasma scu-
tistriatum the appendages are, on the other hand, among the best
developed in the genus counting up to 18 segments, and thus al-
most reaching the same number as in Darwin's (1853) spec-
imens of Pachylasma giganteum (Philippi) which had 19 segments.
Between these extremes the other species hold intermediate pos-
itions.
Pachylasma scutistriatum also comes near to Pachylasma crinoi-
dophilum Pilsbry (1911), but differs in the width of the carino-
lateral compartment; this is in the latter species half as wide as
the lateral (mediolateral) compartment, in Pachylasma scutistriatum,
on the other hand, of the same width as the lateral compartment:
Genus Chtamalus Ranzani.
Chtamalus antennatus Darwin.
Port Hacking, N.S. W., on the beach. 10/X 14. Several large specimens
together with Tetraclita squamosa.
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd 73. 20
306
In his monograph on the American barnacles Pilsbry (1916)
points to systematic characters in Chtamalus, which possibly may
be of value as regards an arranging of the species in larger groups
within the genus. First he divides the species into two main groups
according to the structure of the mandibles: in the stellatus-group
the lower part of the mandible is comblike with a trispinose lower
angle, whereas the Hembeli-group has the usual pectinate lower
Fig. 51. Chtamalus antennatus from Port Hacking. a mandible, b maxilla,
c distal segment of cirrus Il. [X 68).
angle with no comblike part above it. Pilsbry with a question-
mark places Chtamalus antennatus in the Hembeli-group, not having
had access to material of the species. The mandible (Fig. 51a)
nevertheless at once indicates that Chztamalus antennatus beiongs to:
the stellatus-group; the fourth tooth is small, and double, or we might
speak of a fourth and fifth tooth; below these latter a comblike,
although much ”shorter part than in Chztamalus stellatus, is devel-
oped. The lower angle is armed with three rather large spines and
a small fourth one, thus rather distinctly differing from Chzamalus
stellatus. — In the maxilla the notch is more pronounced than
in Chtamalus stellatus, but the difference is not very conspicuous.
Cirrus I has 9 and 6 segments in the rami, cirrus II 6 seg-
ments in both rami. In cirrus II the terminal segment of both
rami has 4 or 5 pectinate spines without larger teeth below the
pectinate part, whereas Pilsbry in Chtamalus stellatus only in the
longer ramus found one serrate spine; moreover the rami of cir-
rus II are of equal length and width in Chtamalus antennatus. —
In the cirri III—VI the segments carry three pairs of spines on
the anterior side, only in the two posterior cirri a very small fourth
proximal pair may also be found. The numbers of spines are thus
lower than in the nearly related Chtamalus stellatus.
307
Chtamalus moro Pilsbry.
Zamboanga, from stones on the beach. 25/II 14. Numerous specimens
together with Tetraclita squamosa, and Tetraclita vitiata.
The present specimens differ in colour from Pilsbry's de-
scription (1916), most of them being lighter or darker brown with
paler ribs; only some few of them are almost white. — Pilsbry
only disposed of dried specimens, and I shall, therefore, here give
some details as to the body of the animal.
Fig. 52. Chtamalus moro from Zamboanga. a mandible, b maxilla. [X 60).
The labrum has an almost straight edge with a single row
of small spines occupying the middle half; 35 to 40 spines were
counted in the row.
The mandible (Fig. 52c) is of the szellatus-type: the fourth
tooth is small, although double, the comblike part extraordinarily
short, with only five or six bristles; the three terminal spines are
all but eaual, the median one tending to be the longer one.
The maxilla has a very little conspicuous notch below the
upper group of spines; on the other hand a small, but distinct
notch is again visible between the stronger spines of the middle
part of the cutting edge and the lower group of more hairlike
bristles.
The ”anterior cirri are short. In cirrus I the shorter ramus
measures about ”/4 of the longer one, the numbers of ihe segments
bens 7land"8— In cirrus II the rami'are "all but of equal-size
with 6 and 7 segments. Pectinate spines are present in great
numbers in the two distal segments of both rami of cirrus II, but
no large-toothed spines are present. In cirrus III—VI the segments
have three pairs of spines on the anterior side.
Chtamalus moro is thus characterized by an unusually short
comblike part of the mandible, and by the numerous pectinate
99"
308
spines which are present in both distal segments of the rami of
cirrus II, not only in the last segment, as in other species of the
stellatus-group hitherto known.
Chtamalus fissus Darwin.
La Jolla, Calif. On the coastal rocks. 21/VIII 15. Numerous corroded
specimens on Tetraclita squamosa, and Balanus glandula.
La Jolla, Calif. The coast. 25/VIII 15. Numerous small specimens to-
gether with Tetraclita squamosa.
San Pedro, Calif. The coast. 27/IX 15. Numerous specimens together
with Balanus tintinnabulum, and Tetraclita squamosa.
Genus Chamæsipho Darwin.
Chamæsipho columna (Spengler) Darwin.
Mahia Peninsula, N. Z. On the coast. 18/XII 14. Severai specimens on
Elminius plicatus.
In his description Darwin (1853) especially calls the attention
to the peculiar development of cirrus II and III of the present
species; in cirrus II the anterior ramus is generally very much
shorter than the posterior ramus, the segments of the first named
moreover being bullate, and thickly clothed with spines. In eirrus
III the anterior ramus exhibits a composite nature: the basal seg-
ments are bullate, and thick-
ly set with spines, whereas
thedistalsegmentsareslend-
er, more cylindrical, with
four or five pairs of spines
along the anterior median
lines nthetpresentespess
imens (Fig.53c) this struct-
ure is strongly pronounced ;
in the cirrus the posterior
ramus is very long, anten-
niform, and only sparsely
furnished with hairs.
Fig. 53... Chamæsipho columna from Mahia Pen- The mouth feet in
insula. a mandible, b maxilla, c cirrus III.
a—b X 150, c X 481. structure very much ap-
309
proach Chtamalus. The mandible has four short and broad teeth
and a pectinate lower angle. The maxilla has two large upper
spines, and below them a distinct and rather broad notch; the
middle part of the cutting edge is occupied by a group of four or
five strong spines, whereas the lower part of it is armed with
much more delicate bristles in great numbers.
Family Balanidae.
Genus Balanus da Costa.
Although the arrangement of the species in subgenera put forth
by Pilsbry (1916) is far from satisfactory, and probably goes a
little too far, it is nevertheless a step forward towards a natural
dismembering of the genus in lower categories, and is in better
agreement with our recent knowledge than earlier groupings. I
therefore follow Pilsbry in my arrangement of the species.
As to the nomenclature introduced by Pilsbry, there are sev-
eral drawbacks in spite of his attempt to defend it by the nomen-
clatory rules. It is thus inadequate to keep up a name as Bala-
nus for one group, or subgenus of Balanus; this is not only apt
to bring forth confusion, but it may also be a question, whether
it is not in fact in strict opposition to the nomenclatory rules ac-
cepted by most other scientists, and it would be far better to ac-
cept the course of the botanists here and put an Eu- before the
name of the central group, as long as it is emphasized as a sub-
genus.
Similar objections may be made regarding the subdivision of
species which has become an extreme faculty of Pilsbry, owing
to his highly developed systematic abilities; here moreover, another
objection may be raised, not to the subdivision, but to the term-
inology. Without a closer definition of the terms Pilsbry substit-
utes ,subspecies" for Darwin's ,variety" and again divides sub-
species into ,formae”". What does a subspecies mean? If we study
the results, it ever becomes møre evident that the subspecies, as
emphasized by Pilsbry, are sharply limited, geographical varieties,
i. e. groups of variants evidently determined by narrow biophys-
ical limits; this exactly corresponds to the term ,,formaf as used
310
already for a long time in botany, in biometrical terminology, and
for years also by several zoologists. If, on the other hand, a group
of special variants is found with no affinity to biophysical factors,
and thus not directly geographically bound, this is among the same
scientists accepted as a ,Ssubspecies", or rather ,elementary spec-
ies"”. This is the reason why I cannot follow Pilsbry in his
nomenclatorial course in his dividing up of the species, although I
fully agree with him in his realities. Indeed, his treatment of the
finer systematics especially of the Balani is masterly and ought to
be followed by every systematist.
Subgenus Megabalanus Hoek.
Balanus tintinnabulum Linné.
Forma coccopoma Darwin.
Taboga, Panama. On a buoy. 7/XII 15. One cluster consisting of four
large specimens.
Forma californica Pilsbry.
Off Redondo, Calif. 30 fathoms. 25/IX 15. Several specimens on dead
shells of gastropodes, and lamellibranchiates.
San Pedro, Calif. On the coast. 27/IX 15. One small, but typical spec-
imen together with Tetraclita squamosa, and Chtamalus fissus.
Balanus campbelli Filhol.
Perseverance Harbour, Campbell Island; under stones at low tide. 9/XII
14. One specimen.
The original description of Filhol (1885), cited in extenso by
Gruvel (1905), is rather deficient; nevertheless no doubt can
arise as to the identity of the present specimen, which, moreover,
is from the very same locality as Filhol's originals. The incom-
pleteness of earlier descriptions, and the deficiencies of Gruvel's
too small figures make renewed investigations of the species desir
able. The basal parts, I am sorry to. say, are wanting in the one
specimen at hand; it therefore shall be the task of a future student
to give the details as to these parts of the barnacle.
The compartments are greyish or dirty brownish-white with
prominent, radiating ribs; the upper margin of the radii is parallel
311
with the basis, and the species exhibits a confusing external sim-
ilarity with: Balanus balanus (Lin.); it may indeed be a question,
whether the statements as to the Antarctic occurrence of the last-
snamed, Boreal and Arctic species are not due to erroneous ident-
ifications of Balanus campbelli. — The carina has a more keel-
like median ridge; a similar, although less pronounced ridge is
Fig. 54. Balanus campbelli from Perseverance Harbour. a diagrammatic transverse
section of the lateral compartment near the base, b—c external view of tergum and
scutum, d—e internal side of scutum and tergum. 'b—d X 5,3).
also observed in the rostrum. The carinal latus is narrow,
only one third as broad as the lateral compartment, and about
half as wide as the rostral compartment. — The compartments are
porous, and the pores are, at any rate until shortly above the
basis, covered by a transverse inner septum. In the carinal, and
rostral compartments the walls between the pores stand forth as
longitudinally striped ribs or fans of the interior lamina; in the
lateral, and partly also in the carinolateral compartments these fans
are pointing in the direction of the rostral side so that they cover
the inner lamina in the basal part of the compartment (Fig. 54a).
— The sheath seems to be about half as long as the compart-
ments; it is white.
NIheFradiikarer porous, but mot very broad with tanupper
margin parallel with the basis. The upper margin of the alae is
oblique and somewhat convexely arched.
32
The tergum has a beaklike but not »very long apex; the spur
fasciole is broad, and distinct, although not very deep; the ridges
of growth are clean cut, but there are no longitudinal striæ pres-
ent. The spur is broad, about one third of the basal margin, andø
separated from the basiscutal angle by an oblique part of the
margin almost as long as the width of the spur. The articular
ridge is well developed, but the interior side otherwise only feebly
sculpturated; no crests are present for the depressor muscle.
The scutum has no radial stripes nor grooves, but only prom-
inent ridges of growth. It makes a sharp bend along a radial line
so that the tergal third stands almost perpendicularly to the rest
of the plate. There is a great, and rather deep pit for the adductor
muscle ; the adductor ridge is short, but prominent, and in its in-
ferior part separated from the very prominent articular ridge by
a deep excavation; this excavation upwards passes into a narrow
and not very deep furrow running to the apex. The articular fur-
row is very shallow. There is no pit for the depressor muscle.
The greater diameter of the present specimen is 17 mm between
the lateral plates, the rostro-carinal diameter 16 mm, and the height
of the carina 10 mm. It ought to be remembered that these dim-
ensions have been somewhat larger in the intact specimen, as the
basal part is now wanting.
An examination of the animal showed that the labrum (Fig.55)
has a deep notch; close by the notch the margin has on each
side three low transversal ridges, each with a rudimentary dent-
iclefattitsktop!
The mandible has two large upper teeth; near the lower
angle two other teeth are indicated; the lower angle has evidently
had numerous small, spinelike or hairlike denticles, now worn off.
Near the cutting edge, and almost parallel with it runs a narrow
belt of rather long hairs.
The maxilla is rather characteristic and aberrant. There are
two large upper spines, the lower situated a little obliquely at the
lower side of the marginal main spine. Below these two spines
three or four pairs of somewhat shorter spines follow and then,
along an oblique median part of the cutting edge two or three
more slender, but longer single spines. The lower half of the cut-
ting edge is somewhat protruded and armed with four large spines
313
in a single row; these spines are as large as, or even larger than
the upper spines; the lower angle carries some few, more hair-
like bristles. On the sides of the blade a single row of somewhat
thicker hairs runs parallel with the edge along the part, carrying
the paired spines; the outer part of the blade below this row is
furnished with finer hairs.
The cirri exhibit the same type as in Balanus tintinnabulum
Lin., and Balanus algicola Pilsbry; cirrus II, and III are short,
Fig. 55. Balanus campbelli from Perseverance Harbour. a labrum, b mandible,
c maxilla, d seventeenth segment of cirrus IV.
[All figures X 221.
the latter shorter than the other cirri but with a comparatively long
pedicel.
In cirrus I the rami have 12 and 1$ segments, the shorter
ramus being only half as long as the other one. Cirrus II has
subequal rami with 12 and 13 segments; the somewhat shorter
rami of cirrus III have 13 and 14 segments and are only slightly
different in length.
The segments of the three posterior cirri have four pairs of
long spines at their anterior side. In cirrus IV the segments how-
ever are a little swollen; the segments at their anterior and distal
side are armed with a single, arched row of denticles. In the basal
segments of the rami the row is doubled, or the denticles even
may be found irregularly crowded beside the base of the upper
spines.
The penis is annulated and short, not reaching half the length
of cirrus VI; it has some 5—6 scattered small hairs on its distal
third, but no tuft of hairs at its distal end.
314
Balanus campbelli is nearly related to Balanus decorus Darwin;
but the structural differences in the opercular plates and the pari-
eties are so great that they seem to be distinctly separated. As to
the body a comparison is not yet possible, as details of Balanus
decorus are missing.
Subgenus Eubalanus n. nom.
[= Subgenus Balanus (Da Costa) Pilsbry].
Balanus amphitrite Darwin.
Forma communis Darwin. .
Off Cavite, Manila Bay; ab. 5 fathoms. 13/II 14. Four quite small spec-
imens on a small plate of muscovite.
Cebu; muddy beach at low tide. 21/II 14. Several small specimens on
gastropode shell inhabited by a hermit crab.
Off Jolo; ab. 20 fathoms, Lithothamnion. 17/1II 14. Some small spec-
imens on a gastropode shell.
Off Jolo; ab. 25 fathoms, sand and coral. 20/III 14. One specimen on a
gastropode shell.
Off Jolo; 20—30 fathoms, sand and corals. 20/III 14. Several specimens
together with Balanus minutus, Balanus amaryllis, and Acasta
conica.
Some of the latter specimens in colour approach the forma
cirrata Darwin, but the opercular plates, the mouth parts, and the
cirri agree with the typical forma communis; there are three dent-
icles on each side of the notch in the labrum.
Forma hawaliensis nov.
Kaladis Point, Mindanao; on the mole. 11/III 14. Two specimens.
Pearl Harbour, Honolulu; on the coast. 5/V 15. Several specimens on
broken china.
This form of Balanus amphitrite somewhat recalls the forma
albicostata, and inexpectata of Pilsbry (1916).
The shape of the barnacles is rather regular, the rostrum all
but straight or with its apical part a little outwards bent, so that
the profile is somewhat concave; the other compartments, and
especially the carina are rather convex. The parieties are white with
dark violet or greyish-blue radiating stripes, sharply defined. Gen-
erally a broader white zone runs along the median line of the com-
315
partment, and sometimes also a similar white area is present along
the radii.. Radii and alae are greyish or almost quite white. The
sheath is dark brownish or violet with narrow whitish stripes.
The compartments only exceptionally show a tendency to dev-
elop ribs along the white lines; generally the surface is quite
smooth. The pores of the parieties are large, at the base with small
septae along the cuter lamina; these
septae disappear further upwards
and do not bifurcate. The basis is
almost quite smooth within.
In its opercular plates the pres-
ent form comes near to the forma
inexpecta. The tergum is flat with
a broad spur fasciole outlined by
= Fig. 56. Balanus amphitrite f. hawatii-
SKODVES; the Spur IS MOTEOVET VETY ensis from Honolulu. Inside view of
broad, it is rounded or more square. the opercular plates. [X 5,3].
The articular furrow is broad and
deep; the crests for the depressor muscles are small and hardly
projecting below the margin.
The scuta have only little prominent growth ridges and no
longitudinal scratches whatever. The colour is here as in the terga
a greyish white. The internal structure in every detail coincides
with forma inexpecta; also the deep oblong pit is present below
the adductor ridge.. The greatest difference is found in the shape
of the plate: this is in the present form rather narrow; the tergal
and basal margins are of all but equal length, and meet in an
obtuse angle.
In its anatomical features the present form exhibits so great
peculiarities that we cannot deny the possibility that it really re-
presents a species of its own. Especially the armature of the cirri
is peculiar. Cirrus I and H are of the common type. In cirrus
III, on the other hand, the bullate segments of the rami on their
anterior side carry several short and strong, beaklike spines, beside
the long bristles which already tend to an arrangement in pairs
along the anterior median line. On the posterior side the basal
six segments of the rami carry one, the following segments two
upwards curved, short and strong spines beside three or four hairs.
In cirrus IV the transition to the shape of the posterior cirri
316
has proceeded one step further; the bristles are decidely arranged
in pairs, generally four or five; but also here the anterior surface
is covered with small wharts or denticles, although of a minute
size. The posterior short spines are also present here, and are kept
in cirrus V and VI, here even increased in numbers to three on
each segment.
In its mouth-parts the present form more approaches the
forma albicostata. The crest of the labrum is armed with num-
Fig. 57. Balanus amphitrite f. hawaiiensis from Honolulu. a labrum, b mandible,
c seventh segment of cirus III, d sixth segment of cirrus IV, e tifteenth
segment of cirrus VI. [a—b X 44, c—e X 67).
erous denticles at the notch, the sides of the latter carrying very
short fine hairs. While the maxilla corresponds with the forma
albicostata, the mandible (Fig. 56b) differs; the drawing is from
å specimen about moulting, and the internal contour gives a fairly
good idea of some details of the pectinate lower part, which are
all but worn off in the old cuticle: below the small fourth tooth
the edge is finely denticled, tending to a comblike structure, with
one larger denticle placed in the middle of the pectination. This
denticle and the small ,fourth tooth" are of the same size.
We might feel inclined to think that these characters are so
important that the specimens ought to be taken as the type of a
separate species. If on the other hand we take into consideration
Sk
the great variability of the Balani, and the agreement in most
characters with the two forms several times alluded to, very much
speaks against our following that course. To settle the question
it is moreover necessary to have access to a far larger material
also of other forms of Balanus amphitrite than that which stands
at my disposal.
I have with some doubt referred two specimens from Kaladis
Point, Mindanao, to the same form. The calcareous parts entirely
agree with the Honolulu-specimens. But in other respects some
differences have to be noted: In the labrum there are only three
or four a little larger denticles present on each side of the notch;
inkcirrusklllthet spines "of the fanteriorf side area little more
numerous, and the posterior spines smaller, in cirrus IV the dent-
iculation of the anterior side is absent, and the posterior spines
both here and in cirrus V and VI rudimentary. In spite of these
differences, which point to a transition to the more common types
of Balanus amphitrite, I have preferred not to establish a new form
for the Mindanao-specimens which are evidently closely related to
the Honolulu-specimens.
Balanus minutus Hoek.
Off Jolo; ab. 25 fathoms. 17/III 14. Several specimens attached to gor-
gonarians etc.
OF Jolo; 20- 30 fathoms. 20'III 14. Several small specimens together
with Balanus amaryllis and Balanus amphitrite, some of them
placed on Telesto sp.
Of Jolo; ab. 15 fathoms; taken by a diver 21/III 14. Three fine, small
specimens on a flat stone, and two small specimens on a bry-
OZzoan.
Although much speaks in favour of the opinion uttered by
Pilsbry (1916) that Balanus minutus should only be regarded as
a form of Balanus amphitrite, I have provisionally followed the
course of Hoek (1913), and treated it as a separate species.
The colours are rather richly varied from almost quite white
with only light reddish lines or freckles to dark bluish-red with
lighter stripes and spots. — The opercular plates (Fig. 58) indeed
differ rather strongly from the common type of Balanus amphitrite.
In the scuta there is no trace whatever of an adductor ridge, and
in smaller specimens every trace of a pit for the adductor muscle
318
is also often wanting, so that the internal surface of the scutum
may be even less sculpturated than in Hoek's drawing. The shape,
and sculpturation of the tergum come next to Balanus amphitrite
forma nivea Darwin. — In the mouth parts Hoek found three
teeth on each side of the labrum, whereas the present specimens
have four; also in the mandibles some small differences from
Hoek's drawings may be observed, the inferior part being less
protruded in the present specimens. Yet another small difference
has to be noted, viz. the constant occurrence of three small spines
Fig. 58. Balanus minutus from 25 fathoms, off Jolo. Opercular plates. [X 15].
instead of one or two in the median segments of the rami of
Cinrusallk
As to the three specimens from Jolo 21/1 14, seated on a flat
stone, I was at first in doubt, whether they should be referred to
EBalanus minutus. They exhibit a most extraordinary colour: the
compartments have radiating, dark bluish red, strong lines altern-
ating with whitish or bluish lines, and crossed by fine lines of a
somewhat lighter hue than the radiating dark lines. The radii are
darker bluish red, especially at their summits, whereas the alae
are white. «In one specimen the carinal latera are white all over
with a few, radiating stripes of a darker shade, the specimen thus
getting a broad white belt at the carinal third. The scuta have two
dark red lines along their occludent margin, and a third red line
near the tergal margin. The specimens are the more fascinatirig,
as on account of the even support they are beautifully regularly
conical with a regularly ovate basal circumference.
An examination of the opercular plates (Fig. 59) displays the
nearest relationship with Balanus minutus, although the plates in
the present specimens are somewhat broader. Besides this, the
319
articular criståa and furrow in the scutum are extraordinarily strongly
developed; we might indeed presume that a concrescence of art-
icular and adductor ridges had taken place. In correspondance with
this the articular furrow of the tergum is exceedingly deep and
broad, and the apical part extraordinarily compact.
Fig. 60.
Figs. 59 and 60. Balanus minutus from 15 fathoms, off Jolo.
Fig. 59. a and b external view of tergum and scutlum, c and d inside view
of scutum and tergum. [X 25).
Fig. 60. a labrum, b mandible, c maxilla. [<x 100).
Among the features of the animal the mouth parts (Fig. 60) of
the specimens so entirely agree with the other specimens of Ba-
lanus minutus that a separation, if reasonable, must be based upon
the opercular plates, and upon the fact that the intermediate seg-
ments of cirrus III carry four small spines on their anterior side
instead of two or three. It is indeed not justifiable to look on the
specimens as representatives of another species, and I do not even
320
find it reasonable to consider them as anything but individual
variants which cannot claim the rank of a special form. In reality
they point in the direction that Balanus minutus is only a Malayis-
ian form of Balanus amphitrite.
Balanus trigonus Darwin.
Misaki; on the coast. 30/IV 14. Two clusters of large specimens.
Aburatsubo, Misaki; ab. 3 fathøms. 2/V 14. Three rather large specimens
on a rotten wooden twig.
Misaki; ab. 20 fathoms. 25/V 14. Several great and small specimens,
partly on dead fragments of mollusk shells.
Misaki, off the station; 25 fathøms 9/VI 14. Several small specimens
on a gastropode shell inhabited by a hermit crab.
Off Misaki; 80—120 fathoms, sandy bottom. 10/VI 14. One medium
sized specimen.
Misaki; on the coast; June 14. Fine clusters on shell fragments of dead
mollusks.
North Channel, Kawaii Island, Hauraki Gulf, N. Z. 29/XII 14. Two
medium sized specimens on a dead gastropøde shell.
Honolulu; coral reef. 1/V 15. Several specimens on shells of living and
dead lamellibranchiates
Balanus rostratus Hoek.
Forma eurostratus n. nom.
— Balanus rostratus, Pilsbry 1916).
Departure Bay, Nanaimo; ,, the brachiopode-cave", on coastal rocks 10/VI
15. Several specimens up to 25 mm in diameter, together with
Balanus crenatus.
The specimens from Departure Bay quite agree with the Jap-
anese variants which Pilsbry (1916) takes to be the typical
Balanus rostratus i. e. the forma eurostratus; the only difference
which may be stated, is the somewhat less sunken radii, but this
gives no base for a separation between the present specimens and
the forma eurostralus.
Forma heteropus Pilsbry.
Northumberland Channel, Nanaimo; ab. 25 fatnoms. 23/VII 15. Three spec-
imens of ab. 20 mm diameter on a shell fragment of a Pecten sp.
321
Balanus crenatus Bruguiére.
Dodds Narrows, Vancouver Island; on the coast at low water 28/V 15.
In great numbers covering small stones.
Departure Bay, Nanaimo; ,the brachiopode-cavef, on coastal rocks 10/VI
15. Several specimens attached to gastropode shells and cal-
careous worm tubes; together with Balanus rostratus.
Balanus glandula Darwin.
Departure Bay, Nanaimo; on the beach at low tide 3/VI 15. Several
specimens on small stones; basis extremely thin, all but mem-
braneous.
La Jolla, Calif.; on coastal rocks 21/VIII 15. Some strongly eroded spec-
imens together with Tetraclita squamosa, and Chtamalus fissus.
"Subgenus Hesperibalanus Pilsbry.
Balanus hesperius Pilsbry.
Nanoose Bay, Nanaimo; ab. 10 fathoms 11/VI 15. Several specimens on
gastropode shells, and on calcareous worm tubes.
Pylades channel, Nanaimo; ab. 20 fathoms 6/VII 15. One small spec-
imen.
Some of the specimens from Nanoose Bay are placed on the
very apex of snails houses and exhibit an almost globular shape
with a small, narrow base.
Subgenus Chirona (Gray) Pilsbry.
Balanus amaryllis Darwin.
Forma euamaryllis nov.
Taba Bay, Mindanao; on the coral reefs 12/III 14. Four fine specimens
on the naked axis of a gorgonarian.
Off Jolo; 20—30 fathoms 20/III 14. Several specimens together with
Balanus minutus, and Balanus amphitrite.
The variant group which by Darwin (1853) is considered typ-
ical is here named forma euamaryllis. — The specimens show some
variation in as much as the segments of cirrus VI may sometimes
have three or four pairs of anterior spines instead of the two pairs
mentioned by Darwin; in some specimens the tufts of small
hairs between the spines are also absent.
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 73. 21
322
Forma nivea Gruvel.
Off Jolo; ab. 20 fathoms, Lithothamnion, 17/11 14. Two specimens on
a half corroded, dead gastropode shell.
I was at first inclined to refer the present specimens to Bala-
nus Kriigeri Pilsbry owing to the feeble sculpturation of the internal
side of the scuta; but the crenulation of the edge of the radii
agrees with Balanus amaryllis. The external sculpture of the oper-
cular plates is very delicate and the spur fasciole shallow, although
distinct. The labrum has three denticles at each side of the notch,
and the mandible has the typical shape of Balanus amaryllis, thus
,distinctly differing from Balanus Kriigeri. Moreover the cirri cor-
respond with Balanus amaryllis in the want of anterior smaller
spines in cirrus III and IV. On the other hand, the posterior sides
of the basal segments in the rami of cirrus III and IV are finely
pectinate, and the pectination may also be traced in cirrus V. The
short and rapidly tapering penis has a strongly developed basi-
dorsal protuberance.
Subgenus Austrobalanus Pilsbry.
Balanus vestitus Darwin.
? Masked Island, Carnley Harbour, Auckland Island; below stønes at low
tide 3/XII 14. The opercular plates being absent the identific-
ation is not quite sure here.
Queen Charlotte Sound, N.Z.; 3—10 fathoms, hard bottom intermingled
with softer spots, 19—20/I 15. A group of three specimens to-
gether with Calantica villosa.
Darwin (1853) gives the details of this interesting species al-
though without drawings of the body details. I therefore here give
the outlines of the mandible and maxilla (Fig. 61). In the invest-
igated specimen the labrum has only one very small denticle at
each side of the deep notch.
Among the cirri of the specimen dissected cirrus I has a
shorter ramus of only one third the length of the longer ramus
which latter is rather slender; the numbers of segments are 11 and
25. The rami of cirrus II are of equal length with 10 and 11
segments. In cirrus III the rami are subequal with 23 and 26
segments; only the basal segments are broader and bullate; the
323
outer half of the rami consists of slender segments. The spines
are especially developed on the outer 5—6 segments of the inner
half of the rami (Fig. 61c). In cirrus IV and V the rami are of
Fig. 61. Balanus vestitus from Queen Charlotte Sound. a mandible, b maxilla,
c cirrus III. [a—b x 44, c X 13).
equal length, but in cirrus VI there is a shorter ramus measuring
”/, of the longer one; the numbers of segments are 26 and 32.
The segments of cirrus IV to VI carry four pairs of anterior spines;
the distal pair is far larger than the other spines.
Subgenus Solidobalanus Hoek.
Balanus auricoma Hoek.
38? 12” S., 149? 40” E., 100—160 fathoms. ,,Endeavourf 16/IX 14. One
specimen on the axis of an antipatharian, together with Oxy-
naspis celata, Ibla pygmæa, Heteralepas morula, and Pachy-
lasma scutistriata.
The specimen from the ,,Endeavourf is considerably larger
than Hoek's specimens from the ,Sibogaf (1913). He does not
give details in the text as to the size; but according to the draw-
ings his ,largerf specimen has a greater basal diameter of a little
less than 2,5 mm, whereas in a ,smallf specimen figured at the
same plate the diameter is between 2,2 and 2,3 mm. The ,End-
eavour"-specimen has a greater (rostro-carinal) diameter of 13 mm.
The exterior of the specimen (Fig. 62) comes next to the smal-
ler specimen of Hoek (comp. his fig. 7, pl. XIX, 1913). It is white
with irregular fainter or brighter, brownish red, radial lines crossed
21
324
by transverse stripes of the same colour, lending the specimen a
deceiving similarity with common types of Balanus amphitrite, and
an examination of the opercular plates also reveals a great like-
ness in structure with Balanus minutus. One difference must be
emphasized as at once obvious: the yellowish epidermal hairs shin-
ing as gold, mentioned by Hoek, are still more developed in the
Fig. 62. Balanus auricoma from 38? 12” S…, 1499 40” E. a entire animal in side
view, b and c external view of tergum and scutum, d and e inside
view of tergum and scutum. [a X 2, b—d X 6).
large specimen, forming here a furry coating along the oceludent
margins of the opercular plates. — The interior side of the oper-
cular plates (Fig. 62d, e) is remarkably flat; in the scutum a tri-
angular pit for the adductor is feebly indicated, and in the tergum
shørt crests for the depressor are well developed.
In the maxilla Hoek speaks of ,a broad notch behind the
upper pair of spinesf; this notch is absent in the specimen at
hand, and moreover, the smaller bristles at the lower angle are
here constituting a brush. The labrum is evidently injured, the
lower part of it a little swollen, possibly owing to regeneration ;
only two very small denticles are seen at one side of the notch.
Other differences from Hoek's descriptions are not present, and
the identity thus seems to be absolutely certain, in spite of the
great differences in size.
Subgenus Armatobalanus Hoek.
325
Balanus allium Darwin.
Off Jolo; ab. 20 fathoms, 17/III 14. Several small specimens on a caryo-
phyllid, some few placed on a madreporarian together with
Pyrgoma sp.
Subgenus Conopea (Say) Pilsbry.
Hoek (1913) seems to think that the development of coral
polyps in the coenosark covering the barnacle is an exception as
is evident from the following remark under Balanus investitus:
»This remarkable species presents us with an interesting case of
commensalism. The cup-formed basis is attached to a part of the
bifurcating stem of an Acanthogorgia, which is covered by a sub-
stance composed of. a tissue interwoven with calcareous spiculae
and developing here and there into little calyces, from the surface
of which numerous spiculae stand off. The shell of the Balanus is
covered by the same substance which here also develops into
numerous such calycesf. Indeed this remark suits any Conopea
inhabiting octocorals as far as I have had an occasion to study
them. The symbiosis of cirripeds and corals is far more common
than one might believe from the statements in the special memoirs,
as I have pointed out in a previous paper (1916), and especially
do the conopea-species seem to be common in octocorals of the
Indo-pacific regions. Nevertheless they may appear to be scarce,
owing to their imbedding which causes them to be overlooked or
not payed heed to by coral-investigators in common. Their fixed
orientation as to the coral colony, their elasticity in shape accord-
ing to the coral species, and the specific diversities of skeletonal
development and armature of the cirri announce fields of biolog-
ieal study for investigators who are able to study the living an-
imals. We are indeed to-day as ignorant of this symbiosis as we
were in the days of Darwin.
? Balanus calceolus Darwin.
Off Jolo; ab. 12 fathoms, 17/III 14. Five specimens imbedded in a gor-
gonarian.
The specimens agree with Darwin's descriptions and drawing,
also in having a porous basis. Nevertheless their identity cannot
be stated with absolute certainty, as the animals have evidently
326
been dead for a long time, so that every trace of their bodies,
and the opercular plates has disappeared.
Balanus proripiens Hoek.
6 miles N.N. E. of Sacol, Mindanao; ab. 35 fathoms, 6/1II 14. One small
specimen on a threadlike gorgonarian (probably Scirpearella sp.).
Off Jolo; ab. 25 fathoms, 17/III 14. Numerous specimens in a stouter
gorgonarian (a red Mopsellid), together with Smilium acutum.
While the Sacol-specimen has the same low and stretched shape
aS Hoek's specimen, the specimens from Jolo are comparatively
much shorter and higher (Fig. 63).
This evidently depends upon the
gorgonarian which in each case
serves as participant of the symb-
iose: a slender gorgonarian with
thin coenosarcal layers makes the
cirriped develop into a slender and
long specimen, whereas the same
? species in fleshy gorgonarians at-
tains a broader and higher shape.
Fig. 63. Balanus proripiens, off Jolo. The Jolo-specimens are purely
The coenosark of the gorgonarian al-
most entirely prepared om |x ag White withitaffratherkelossy surface
when the covering tissues of the
coral are removed, whereas the Sacol-specimen has the reddish
colour-tinges mentioned by Hoek in the , Sibogaf -specimen
(1913). —- An examination of the interior parts of the shell re-
veals the same features as found in Balanus cymbiformis by Dar-
win (1853): ,The parietis are strongly ribbed internally, and are
not permeated by pores. The basal cup is not porose, but its inner
surface is ribbed in lines radiating from the centre.” Hoek points
to the near relationship between Balanus proripiens and Balanus
cymbiformis, and it may indeed be a question, whether they are
specifically separable; a reexamination of Darwin's type spec-
imens will have to settle this question.
Balanus dentifer n. sp.
32? 15” N., 1289 12” E., 90 fathoms:",,Hyatori Maru' 15/V-1437Several
specimens in octocorals of the families Isiidae, and Muri-
cæidae.
327
Base and walls not porose; basis cupformed, oval, attached to
the gorgonarian axis. Neither carina nor rostrum basally elong-
ated. Carina generally with an exterior digitiform tooth at the apex.
Carinolateral compartment at the base ”/6 to 7/5 of the lateral com-
partment, narrowing upwards. Radii and alae with somewhat oblique
margins so that the opening is deeply sinuose. Scutum with radial
striae formed by grooves in the ridges of growth.
The specimens are white or sometimes show a faint reddish
hue when the coral tissues have been removed. The basis is
boat-shaped, although only in the rostral part showing a tendency
to elongation; its periphery is
therefore almost quite regularly
oval. The gorgonarian axis is
embedded in a not very deep
rostrocarinal furrow, from which
radiating, broad,.and shallow fur- & Ps SE
rows lead to the base of the
carino-lateral compartments; sim-
Fig. 64. Balanus dentifer from 32? 15” N.,
1280 12” E. a side view, b from above.
ilar furrows are also indicated The coenosark of the gorgonarian pre-
pared off. [X 5,3].
at the junction of the rostral and
lateral compartments; these furrows thus coincide with the radiat-
ing furrows of the basis found in some Acasta-species. The basis
is poreless; the external surface exhibits indications of radiating
striae whereas the internal surface is entirely smooth.
On their inner surface the compartments have low, but dis-
tinct longitudinal ridges below the sheath; the latter extends half-
way down the compartment. The external surface exhibits indistinct
" indications of radial stripes. The compartments are poreless.
The carina is rather broad, tapering upwards; at the apex
a prominent tooth is situated externally just below the apex with
its summit projecting a little above the margin, and pointing up-
wards and outwards. In two of the specimens this tooth was not
observed, but it seems most likely that it has been broken. off,
when the dried coenosarkal parts of the corals were prepared off.
In two other specimens a similar tooth was again observed near
the apex of one of the lateral compartments (Fig. 64).
The carino-lateral compartment is narrow, about "/5 or "/6
328
of the lateral compartment, and a little tapering upwards. The
lateral compartment is broadly triangular with arched sides; also
rostrum is triangular with pointed apex. i
The radii and alae are moderately wide with oblique and
smooth margins; the opening of the shell is therefore irregularly
star-shaped with 6 points. The radii and alae have no stripes on
their external surface.
The opening of the shell is oblique to the basis; the carina
and carinolateral compartments are longer than the lateral and
rostral compartments. Like other
Conopeda's also Balanus dentifer
is situated with its carina up-
most as compared with the coral
colony, and has its opening fac-
ing obliquely downwards, point-
ing towards the base of the coral
colony.
At first sight the scutum
| seems to be longitudinally striate;
| this is due to small, radially ar-
| ranged groves in the rather pro-
minent ridges of growth (Fig. 65).
The occludent margin has pro-
minent teeth, but these teeth do
not correspond with the growth ridges. The plate is a little con-
cave; the tergal third forms an almost right angle with the rest
of the plate. The inner side has a feebly developed articular crista,
but no ridge whatever for the adductor; on the other hand the
pit for the adductor is rather deep although not distinctly limited.
The tergum-has feeble although distinct lines of growth. The
spur is distinct, twice as broad as long below the margin; the
spur fasciole is rather deep. The internal surface exhibits almost
no sculpturation; crests for the depressor are only faintly indicated
and not distinctly limited. — The opercular plates, and especially
the terga are very thin and brittle; this is the more curious as
the walls are rather coarsely built and not fragile at all.
The greater specimens have a rostro-carinal basal diameter of
4,5 mm with a carinal height of 4 mm.
Fig. 65. Balanus dentifer from 32915” N.,
1289 12” E. Opercular valves. [X 171.
329
In its internal structure the species very much approaches Acasta,
and is indeed only to be distinguished from this genus by its fixed
basis.
The labrum has three denticles at each side of the deep notch.
The mandible has three main teeth, and at the lower angle three
small teeth. The blade has a narrow belt of rather long hairs along
the cutting edge.
The maxilla has at its upper margin two large spines, and
below these an indication of a notch; the following five spines of
the cutting edge are a little
smaller than the upper two,
and below the five spines
there is one long spine, as
long as, or even a little
longer than the upper two;
below this long spine a
somewhat smaller one, and
at the lower angle two
quite small and delicate Fig. 66. Balanus dentifer from 329 15” N., 128?
spines are placed. The blade 12” E. a labrum, b mandible, c maxilla, d
å fourth segment of cirrus IV. [a—c X 44,
hasonly longerdelicate hairs d X 661.
just inside the cutting edge.
Among the cirri only the shorter ramus of cirrus IV has
small spinelike denticles on the anterior side of the basal and
median segments; there are three or seldom four denticles present
in the segment. Neither denticles nor hooks are found in cirrus III.
Cirrus I has rami with 5 and 11 segments; the shørter ramus
is half, as long as the longer one. In cirrus II the shorter ramus
measures ”/3 of the longer one; the numbers of segments are 5
and 7. Cirrus III has subequal rami with 7 and 8 segments.
Also in cirrus IV the rami are subequal, and have 14 and 17
segments; only in the shorter ramus the basal and median segments
are armed with small denticles besides the long spines. The post-
erior cirri have three or exceptionally four pairs of anterior spines
on the segments.
The penis is extraordinarily long, more than twice as long as
the entire body of the animal including the cirri. It is annulated
all over, its distal part furnished with scattered, long hairs.
330
The most nearly related species is evidently Balanus navicula;
but the deeply incised marginal edge of the opening, and the ex-
ternal, digitiform tooth of the carina distinguish it from all other
species of the group.
Genus ACcasta Leach.
Acasta cyathus Darwin.
Off Jolo; ab. 12 fathoms, 17/III 14. Several small specimens together
with Acasta Dofleini.
The specimens are small, the larger ones with a greater basal
diameter of only 4,2 mm and a carinal height of 4,2 mm. There
is no longitudinal striation in the scuta, but in all other details
the specimens agree with Darwin's (1853) and Pilsbry's (1916)
descriptions; the armature of the cirri agrees with Pilsbry's spec-
imens.
AÅcasta japonica Pilsbry.
Sagami Sea; 400 fathoms. 1—7/V 14. Two small, partly broken spec-
imens in a small fragment of a sponge.
Acasta pectinipes Pilsbry
(== Acasta nitida Hoek 1916).
Off Jolo; ab. 25 fathoms, sand and coral. 20/III 14. One specimen.
AÅcasta conica Hoek.
Off Jolo; 20—30 fathoms, sand and coral. 20/III 14. One specimen to-
gether with Balanus amphitrite, Balanus minutus, and Balanus
amaryllis.
The rostro-carinal basal diameter is only 4 mm. The plates all
over their surface show distinct striae of growth, in the basis par-
allel with the periphery, in the compartments parallel with the
basal margins. The radii are densely vertically striped without
the feeble horizontal stripes mentioned by Hoek (1913); this is
the only difference from Hoek's specimens which could be found
in the specimen at hand.
Acasta Dofleini Kriger.
Off Jolo; ab. 12 fathoms, hard bottom. 17/III 14. Three small specimens
together with Acasta cyathus.
331
Off Jolo; ab. 20 fathoms, Lithothamnion. 17/11I 14. One specimen in a
siliceous sponge; together with Balanus amphitrite.
Off Jolo; ab. 15 fathoms. 21/III 14. One small specimen together with
Balanus minutus, taken by a diver.
At first sight the greater specimen from 20 fathoms rather dif-
fers from Kriger's description (1911), the outlines being much
more rounded (Fig. 67) than in Kriger's drawing, the rostrum
higher, and the aperture almost regularly triangular. Kriger also
Fig. 67. Acasta Dofleini, off Jolo. a entire animal in side view, b carino-lateral com-
partment, c and d scutum and tergum, external aspect, e and f inside view of
tergum and scutum. [a X 2, b—f Xx 14).
speaks of perforations (,,Poren") in the parities, except in the carino-
lateral one; in the present specimens the cuticle of the compart-
ments develops long and strong hairs, or rather flexible spines,
which are embedded in the sponge tissues and evidently serve to
fix the cirriped. A closer study reveals that each of these cuti-
cular spines is placed on a perforation of the compartments so that
in numbers and arrangement they correspond with the pores men-
fionedkby"Kruger.
As cited above, Kriger found that the carino-lateral has no
perforations; this is easily explained by a study of the plate: there
is in fact no compartment present, but only the ala and radius of
the plate, the compartment of which is obliterated (Fig. 67b); the
radius, on the other hand, reaches down to the basis. The latter
332
has in my specimens a more evenly rounded periphery than in
Kruserskfgure!
While the tergum in my specimens agrees with Kriger's
description, the scutum shows some differences; the plate is
strongly bent with a concave outer side adorned with regular
ridges of growth; the interior side is only feebly sculptured with
a low adductor ridge
that does not reach the
apex, but makes a bend
towards the occludent
margin somewhat below
it: The pit forhen
eral depressor is distinct,
and basally situated at
the commencement of
the adductor ridge. The
articular ridge is little
prominent, but a narrow,
although deep articular
furrow is developed; the
latter seems to be en-
tirely absentinKriger's
drawing.
In spite ofthese small
Fig. 68. Acasta Dofleini, off Jolo. a labrum, b man- differences it seems ob-
dible, c maxilla, d basipodite of cirrus IV, e seg- ; En,
ment $ and 9 of cirrus IV, f segment 29 and 30 of vious that the SBECIDI
cirrus VI. [All figures x 33). ens belong to the same
species. As Kriger had
only access to empty shells, I shall give some details as to the
body of the animal.
The labrum (Fig. 68a) is narrow and furnished with one dent-
icle at the side of the deep notch; the crest is here armed with
small hairs.
The mandible has three almost equidistant main teeth, the
lower two double. The lower angle is pectinate, but the pectination
is worn off in older specimens about moulting.
The maxilla is broad; the upper spine is hardly longer than
the other ones; a feeble notch is indicated below the upper two
333
spines. The blade carries here as in the mandible delicate hairs
near the cutting edge.
In the cirri the spines are remarkably few in numbers. The
rami of cirrus I are very unequal; the shorter ramus has 8 seg-
ments and measures only one third of the longer ramus, which
has 36 segments. The armature of cirrus IV is very characteristic:
the basal and median segments of the anterior ramus have two
adjacent, clawlike hooks on their distal half, the lower pointing
downwards almost parallel with the axis of the ramus; one long
bristle is seated at the distal side of the spines. In the basipodite
several clawlike spines are arranged in a single median row, de-
creasing in size towards the middle of the segment, the basal part
of which is devoid of spines.
The segments of cirrus V and VI have only two or three pairs
of anterior bristles; the distal pair is very long, the next very
small, and the third consisting of only two very short hairs if at
all present.
The penis is almost twice as long as cirrus VI, annulated and
all but destitute of hairs.
Acasta madreporicola n. sp.
Off Jolo; ab. 25 fathoms. 25/III 14. One specimen embedded in a madre-
porarian Coral.
Compartments feebly granulated with little prominent, radiating
ridges externally. Carino-lateral plate only consisting of radius and
ala, reaching to the basis; no opening between the basal parts
of the coarsely built plates. Radii broad, with a little oblique, cre-
nulated margins; margin of the alae oblique, and smooth. Basis
bowlshaped with radiating shallow ridges externally. Shell white.
Opercular plates thin; scuta with transversely striated ridges of
growth, with prominent long articular ridge and deep pit for the
adductor. Tergum with a broad spur confluent with the basi-scutal
angle, and with all but invisible crests for the depressor.
The species (Fig. 69) is rather globose with a strongly arched
large rostral compartment; the carina is shorter and nearly
straight, and the opening of the shell almost parallel with the basis.
The lateral compartment is broadly triangular and strongly arched.
334
These compartments are externally feebly granulated and ribbed,
the ribs radiating from the apex. The carino-lateral compartment
is obliterated, only leaving behind the broad radius and ala in the
same way as in Acasta Dofleini. There are no perforations nor
pores in the compartments or in the bowlshaped basis. The shell
is quite white, and of a strong and rather solid structure, devoid
of pores between the basal parts of the compartments. The attach-
ment of the compartments to the basis is very strong. — The
radii are delicately transversely striped; the upper margin is
Fig. 69. Acasta madreporicola, off Jolo. a entire animal (side view), the coral
prepared off above the basis of the cirriped; b and c external view of
tergum and scutum, d and e inside view of scutum and tergum.
[a X 4, b—e X 6).
crenulated, and oblique in the same way as that of the alae. All
radii reach to the basis.
The scuta have strong ridges of growth ornated with very
feeble transverse striae, which nevertheless do not lend the plate
a radially striped appearance. The articular ridge is very promi-
nent, and almost as long as the entire tergal margin; the articular
furrow on the other hand is shallow. There is a deep pit for the
lateral depressor. An adductor ridge is only just indicated, whereas
the pit for the adductor is very deep although narrow.
The terg'a are extremely brittle. The spur is about half as
wide as the basal margin, or even a little wider; its margin is
confluent with the basi-scutal point of the plate. The spur fasciole
is almost invisible, and the ridges of growth very feeble. The art-
icular area is very broad and shallow, and ridges for the depres-
335
sor only faintly indicated. Near the occludent margin the ridges
of growth are accentuated by small hairs of the cuticle.
The basal rostro-carinal diameter is 7,5 mm, the height of the
carina 5 mm.
The labrum (Fig. 70) is prominent but not bullate, with a
deep notch and two or three minute denticles on the crest at the
sides of the notch.
Fig. 70. Acasta madreporicola, off Jolo. a labrum, b mandible, c maxilla
d fifth segment of cirrus III, e fifih segment of the anterior
ramus of cirrus IV, f median segment of cirrus VI.
[a—c X 44, d—f X 88).
The mandible has three main teeth and three indistinct warts
at the lower angle; delicate long hairs constitute a furry belt along
the blade just inside the cutting edge.
In the maxilla a notch is faintly indicated below the two stout
upper spines; below this notch the cutting edge is armed with a
single row of six somewhat shorter spines, and near the lower
angle follow two more prominent spines, which are even longer
than the two upper spines. Å tuft of short bristles is indicated at
the lower angle. The sides of the blade carry long, delicate hairs
near the cutting edge.
In the cirri segments of cirrus III are armed with hooks.
The two basal segments as well as the two distal ones of the
rami in cirrus III are devoid of hooks; the other segments have
an anterior median row of 7 or 8 hooks turning their points to-
336
wards the base of the cirrus, and at the distal end of the row a
transverse line of smaller hooks pointing upwards. In the anterior
ramus of cirrus IV the median segments are provided with two or
three hooks along the anterior median line pointing downwards.
— The segments of the posterior cirri carry on their distal half
two pairs of anterior spines; the distal pair is far longer than the
lower; in many segments also a rudimentary third pair is indic-
ated in the middle of the segment.
The rami of cirrus I are very unequal; the shorter ramus has
8 segments, and is half as long as the other ramus, which has
16 segments. In cirrus II the shorter ramus measures ”/4 of the
longer one; the numbers of segments are 6 and 8. In cirrus Ill
the rami are subequal, although both” of them have 11 segments.
All cirri of the animal are comparatively short.
The penis is annulated, slender, and one and a half time as
long as cirrus VI.
Among the Acasta-species the most nearly related seems to be
Acasta Dofleini, in which the carino-lateral compartment has the
same rudimentary character as in the present species; but with
this character the agreement seems to come to an end. Far nearer
the relationship with Balanus arcuatus Hoek (1913) seems to be,
and ,I should indeed have hesitated in regarding them as anything
else and more than varieties, had not the present species been a
distinct Acasta with its cupshaped basis. Special interest is afforded
by the armature of the cirri, the hooks of which in cirrus III and
IV seem to agree in every detail in the two species. This throws
an interesting light on the affinities of the Acasta-groups.
The present species is the more interesting because it also
adds to the list of Acasta-species which are not inhabiting sponges.
Of such species Acasta purpurata Darwin and -Acasta hirsuta Broch
are hitherto known from gorgonarians, Acasta antipathidis Broch
from antipatharians, and now also the present species inhabiting
madreporarians, Acasta madreporicola. In all these species the coral
entirely surrounds the cirriped but for the aperture; whether the
growth of the surrounding coral tissues puts a limit to the lifetime
of the cirriped is at present an open question.
An interesting phenomenon in the present species is afforded
by the calcareous concrements which occur in great abundance in
337
the interior soft tissues of the cirri and the penis; we are not at
present able to give any satisfactory explanation of this remark-
able occurrence.,
Genus Tetraclita Schumacher.
Tetraclita squamosa (Bruguiétre) Schumacher.
(= Tetraclisa porosa (Gmelin) Darwin.)
Forma viridis Darwin.
Zamboanga; on stones af the beach. 25/II 14. Several small and medium
sized, delicately built specimens together with Chfamalus moro,
Port Hacking, N.S. W.; on the beach. 10/X 14. Some few young spec-
imens.
Taboga, Panama Bay; on coastal rocks. 21/XI 15. Severai great specimens.
Pilsbry (1916) names this form ,, subsp. sgquamosa(Bruguiére)" ;
although the nomenclatory rules are not quite clear on this point,
it cannot in this case any more than in other cases be in accord-
ance with their meaning that the same name can be used without
special suffixes for different systematic categories; it is, therefore,
misleading to use Bruguiére's name for the subspecies as long
as it is also used for the species, and I here prefer to maintain
the variety-name viridis of Darwin which is used for the main
form in all other papers on cirripeds.
Forma rubescens Darwin.
La Jolla, Calif.; on the coastal rocks. 21/VIII 15. Two great specimens
together with Balanus glandula.
La Jolla, Calif.; on the coastal rocks. 25/VIII 15. Several smaller and
larger specimens together with Chtamalus fissus.
San Pedro, Calif.; on the beach. 27/IX 15. Three small specimens prob-
ably belong to this subspecies ; they occur together with Chza-
malus fissus and Balanus tintinnabulum.
Tetraclita purpurascens (Wood) Darwin.
Forma breviscutum nov.
Port Ross, Auckland Island; under stones at low tide. 26/XI 14. Several
corroded specimens.
The identification of these specimens caused much trouble;
their surface is verv much worn off, and the corroded compart-
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 73. 22
338
ments are often very difficult to distinguish. In some of the spec-
imens the alae are rather well developed, but the radii are always
The aperture is not large, although irregular owing
to corrosion. The colour (in alcohol) is greyish-white.
The apparition corresponds to the figures given by Darwin
(1853) of corroded specimens of Tetraclita purpurascens, and the spec-
imens on the whole so nearly
agree with Darwin's description
of this species that they must
be referred to it. Nevertheless
they also exhibit so marked dif-
ferences that they must be taken
as representatives of a special
form.
One of the characters em-
phasized by Darwin was the
unusually long scutum of the
species.
ens (Fig. 71) the scuta are much
shorter, their basal margin being
of the same length as the tergal
rudimentary.
In the present specim- |
Fig. 71. Tetraclita purpurasceus f. brevi-
scutum from Port Ross. a and b external
view of tergum and scutum, c and d in-
ternal side of scutum and tergum. [X 4).
margin; hence the name brevi-
scutum. In other respects the
opercular plates fairly well agree
with Darwin's description when
heed is paid to the corrosion of the apical parts, especially of the
tergum.
Dealing with the mouth parts Darwin says that ,the lab-
rum is deeply notched and apparently destitute of teeth on the
crest". The notch is in the present specimens rather shallow, and
on the oral side the labrum is armed with a single row of small,
rounded denticles at the notch; the denticles are very small, and
only with difficulty observed.
The rudimentary fourth tooth of the mandible is emphasized
by Darwin as a distinguishing feature of the species; the char-
acter is alo observed in the present specimens (Fig. 72), and separ-
ates them from Tetraclita squamosa, with which Tetraclita purpura-
scens is closely related. Characteristic of Tetraclita purpurascens is
339
moreover the equidistant position of the three prominent teeth of
the mandible as also the broad pectinate part of the lower angle.
In the maxilla a very distinct notch separates the upper two
large spines from the lower densely spined part of the cutting edge.
One more difference
must be noted as contra-
dictory to Darwin's de-
scription. He found that
both cirrus II and III are
remarkably short, and count-
edes/ÆRsssments in both
Fig. 72. Tetraclita purpurascens f. breviscutum
rami of Cirrus II. The from Port Ross. a labrum, b mandible, c max-
illant >ee25
specimen dissected of forma
breviscutum has on the whole more segments in the cirri as shown
in the following table.
Cirrus I II III IV V VI
Numbers of inner ramus 10 10 21 20 24 23
segments | outer 5; 17 i 22 21 25 28
It will be seen here that cirrus III in numbers of segments
joins the posterior three cirri, but its size almost equals that of
cirrus II. In cirrus III the larger spines of the median segments
of both rami are moreover pectinate, a character not mentioned
in this species by Darwin, although he has observed the same
feature in Tetraclita squamosa (= porosd).
The penis is annulated all over, and almost destitute of hairs
except at its distal end, where two small tufts are found at the
sides of the somewhat bilabiate tip. The penis is a little longer
than cirrus VI.
Tetraclita vitiata Darwin.
Zamboanga; on stones on the beach. 25/II 14. Some young specimens
together with Tetraclita squamosa, and Chtamalus moro.
The skeletonal features exactly agree with Darwin's description
(1853); the specimens seem to be somewhat smaller than Dar-
win's specimens, but this may be due to the fact that the basal
part is wanting in the present specimens, the sheath in all of them
almost reaching the lower margin of the pariety. The only differ-
228
340
ence to be noted is that the sheath is white, and not ,clouded
with chocolate-red" as in Darwin's specimens.
The specimens of Darwin being badly preserved, he could
only make out that the labrum has some strong teeth, the mand-
ible five teeth, and the segments of the posterior cirri four pairs
of spines. The Zamboanga specimens are in an excellent state of
preservation, and furnish a good idea of the characters of the
animal.
The labrum is very characteristic, owing to the strong teeth
at both sides of the shallow notch (Fig. 73). The mandible has
Fig. 73. Tetraclita vitiata from Zamboanga. a labrum, b mandible,
c maxilla. [X 65).
five teeth, and below the lower of them a short and straight, pect-
inate and comblike part terminating in a strongly projecting spine
at the very lower angle. The second and the third main tooth are
double. The outer and lower part of the blade is densely hairy,
and on the inferior margin some longer and stouter hairs are situ-
ated.
The maxilla has a strong, upper spine; between this and a
distinct notch there is a pair of somewhat shorter and slenderer
spines. Below the notch the cutting edge carries two pairs and
four stronger single spines; at the lower angle some short and
straight bristles constitute a brush. Below the notch the sides of
the blade carry finer hairs near the cutting edge.
The anterior three pairs of cirri have somewhat bullate seg-
ments with numerous spines. In cirrus I the shorter ramus with
7 segments is half as long as the other, which has 17 segments.
In cirrus Il the rami are almost equal with 10 and 11 segments.
341
Cirrus III again has very unequal rami with 11 and 25 segments,
the shorter ramus being half as long as the other one; in the
longer ramus the segments of the basal half are bullate, whereas
those of the outer half are extended, and armed with only few
spines. The segments of the posterior cirri are rather short, and
armed with four pairs of anterior spines. — The penis is annul-
ated troughout, and all but destitute of hairs; it attains twice the
length of cirrus VI.
Genus Elminius Leach.
Elminius plicatus Gray.
Carnley Harbour, Auckland Island; on the beach. 29/XI 14. Some few
depressed and corroded specimens.
Mahia Peninsula, N.Z.; under stones at low tide. 18/XII 14. Several
specimens together with Chamæsipho columna.
Hen & Chicken Island, Hauraki Gulf, N. Z.; 30/XII 14. Some few spec-
imens on the capitulum plates of Mitella sertus.
Darwin (1853) has given an elaborate description of the
rugged appearance of this species. He also mentions the peculiar,
pectinate spines, which occur in such numbers on all segments of
the rami of cirrus II as not noticed in any other Balanide.
Also the mouth parts exhibit some peculiarities. The labrum
(Fig. 74) has a shallow notch, which has a row of short hairs on
its upper crest; the oral side of the notch
is adorned with a V-shaped row of 18—
20 denticles.
The mandible has four teeth, the
median two, being double. There is a
short, pectinate part at the lower angle,
not extending below the latter. — The
maxilla has two large main spines at
the upper edge, and below these spines
a small notch; the lower part of the cut-
ting edge is armed with a double row
of heavy spines, and at the lower angle
four or five finer, short bristles indicate
a brush. The outer part of the blade is
Fig. 74. Elminius plicatus from
Mahia Peninsula. a labrum,
rather hairy. ; b mandible, c maxilla. [X 33).
342
Elminius simplex Darwin.
Port Western; Victoria; 3—4 fathoms, hard bottom. 5/IX 14. Two small
specimens.
The specimens are only slightly ribbed longitudinally, but in
other respects they agree very well with Darwin's description
(1853). Nevertheless some differences are found in the structure
of the animal, both in the mouth parts and .in the cirri.
The labrum (Fig. 75) has somewhat protruded side parts,
whereas in the preceding species it has a more evenly rounded
outline; the notch is fairly well de-
. veloped; its crest is destitute of
hairs, but adorned with some few,
very minute denticles.
In the mandible the interval
between the two upper spines is
large, almost occupying half the cut-
ting edge; on the other hand, the
Fig. 75. Elminius simplex from Port fourth tooth is rather prominent, and
NWesternsøkasla br 50, Eb kran db IE renen atonkattheRloverkanele
c maxilla. [X 44). D ;: i;
results in comparatively long spines.
The maxilla has a broad notch below the two upper spines,
and the brush at the lower angle is as long as the shorter spines
of the edge above it, and thus far better developed than in the
preceding species.
Darwin has already pointed to the characteristic features of
the cirri: in cirrus III the rami are of equal length, and pect-
inate spines are wanting in all cirri. The segments of the posterior
cirri have only three pairs of spines, and the hair tuft between
the spines is only very feebly developed.
Elminius sinuatus Hutton.
Paterson Inlet, Stewart Island, N. Z. 18/XI 14. In great numbers on lit-
toral mollusk shells.
This characteristic small form has never been figured. When
symmetrically developed it is easily recognisable owing to the two
prominent cristae of each compartment (Fig. 76); on the other hand,
when the species occurs in crowded assemblies the cristae are not
343
always distinctly developed. In this case the opercular plates will
be of aid, although according to Hutton (1879) they shall be al-
most identical with those of E/minius modestus Darwin. Accord-
ing to the specimens from Paterson Inlet obvious differences are
nevertheless present in the opercular plates: only two or three
small crests are developed for the depressor of the tergum, and
the spur is confluent with the scutal margin; in the scutum an
Fig. 76. Elminius sinuatus frøm Paterson Inlet. a two specimens seen from above,
b and c inside view of scutum and tergum, d and e external view of tergum
and scutum, f mandible, g maxilla. [a X 5,3; b—d X 8; f—g X 240).
adductor ridge is feebly developed and indistinctly limited; the in-
terior side of the scutum is on the whole very feebly sculptured.
The mandible (Fig. 76f) has five teeth, the lower one being
very small and almost confluent with the pectination of the lower
angle. The maxilla has rather few spines and a short cutting
edge; there is a small notch below the upper two spines, and be-
low the notch about 8 spines are present. The maxilla is rather
slender and small in comparison with the mandible.
In cirrus I the rami are very unequal, the shorter one only
half as long as the other ramus; the numbers of segments are 6
and 13. In cirrus II the rami have 6 and 7 segments and only
differ in the length of the distal segment. ;
Cirrus III has again somewhat more unequal rami with 7 and
10 segments; in shape it holds an intermediate position between
the anterior two cirri with their haircovered bullate segments, and
the posterior three cirri with their slender and rather long seg-
344
ments, which carry four or generally five pairs of anterior spines
strongly increasing in size towards the distal end of the segment.
Jennings (1918) considers E/minius Sinuatus as a variety of
Elminius modestus Darwin; the present specimens nevertheless
so closely agree with Hutton's description and so distinctly differ
from Darwin's rather scarce dates of E/minius modestus that it is
at present the most correct to keep the two species apart. Neither
have I had any access to indisputable E/minius modestus for com-
parison.
Genus Pyrgoma Leach.
Pyrgoma sp.
Off Jolo; 12—25 fathoms, 17/1II 14. One small specimen on a madre-
porarian coral together with Balanus allium.
The specimen seems to be most nearly related to Pyrgoma con-
jugatum Darwin; but a sure identification of the dried specimen
is hardly possible.
APPENDIX.
Scalpellum aff. imbricatum Hoek.
East of North Island, New Zealand (Cape Kidnappers, 76—82 fathoms,
or Cape Runaway, 105 fathoms), The New Zealand Government
Trawling Expedition. [No date]. One specimen on a spine of an
Ogmocidaris Benhami Mrtsn.
The specimen was sent to me by Dr. Mortensen after the
closure of the special examination of his collections. It is very
interesting owing to the variations in the lower whorl of plates
(Fig. 77), although these variations put obstacles in the way of a
safe identification. The inframedian plate of the left side is high,
rectangular, and slender, that of the right side triangular, short,
and with a comparatively broad basal margin. The carinal latus
of the left side is broader and lower than the corresponding plate
of the right side, and the rostral latus of the left side smaller
than that of the right side. A rostrum is present, and corresponds
345
with the same plate as figured by Pils-
ba (VOTE INS FS TOD) in Sedl
pellum sanctipetrense, and by Hoek
KO OT ÆDI SVIE SS TS'a) in Sealpel-
lum imbricatum.
The present specimen no doubt be-
longs to Pilsbry's group of Scalpel-
lum portoricanum, as indicated by the
shape of the rostral latus, and with
this group the American Scalpellum
sanctipetrense seems to be nearly rel-
ated. The portoricanum-group com-
prises several commonly distributed
Tropic-Subtropical small forms. The
Fig. 77. Scalpellum aff. imbricatum
from the New Zealand Government
trawling expedition. a left side of
the animal, b lower latera of the
right side. [a X 4, b X 5,3].
present specimen is closely related to Scalpellum imbricatum from
the Malay Archipelago, but the different length, and the shape of
the carina seem to deny an identity with this species.
Some geographical remarks.
The localities from where Dr. Th. Mortensen gathered cirri-
peds naturally arrange themselves in some larger regional groups,
viz. the Philippine Archipelago, the Japanese waters, the waters
round New Zealand down to Campbell Island, Hawaii, and the
Pacific American coast from Nanaimo to the Bay of Panama. It is
most convenient to treat each of these ,regions" separately.
From the Philippine Archipelago the localities, and species
are arranged in the following table:
mm ——————————
Date Locality Depth Species
13/II 14|! Off Cavite, Manila Bay ..... ab. 5 fthms. ..| Balanus amphitrite f. communis.
BILL TEL er oe Seere beach se Octolasmis orthogonica ; Balanus am-
| phitrite f. communis.
PSA Zamboanga sis: beaches | Chtamalus moro; Tetraclita squamosa
: ; f. viridis ; Tetraclita vitiata.
346
Date Locality Depth Species
3/III 14/25 miles E. to S. of Zambo- |
AN FAREN SEE ere rele rede 160—200 fthms.' Calantica affinis ; Scalpellum indicum ;
"… Scalpellum balanoides.
4/III 14125 miles E. of Zamboanga ..| 250 fthms.. . .…| Verruca albatrossiana ; Verruca cristal- |
6/14 6 miles NINE of-Sacol, lina, f. lævis.
Mindanaoe serene erne ab. 35 fthms. Å Balanus proripiens.
7/1II 14) S. of Vitalis Point, Mindanao | beach ... .. HJ Mitella mitella.
SUDITSTÆ me SES KOM Ol utang arr 300 fthms. ...| Megalasma minus.
SUUENET TD DSI SE DS EVEN DE eer 250 fthms. ...| Megalasma minus.
10/III 1413 miles S. W. of Tucuran .../ 300 fthms. ...| Megalasma striatum ; Heteralepas no-
dulosa; Verruca Kriigeri.
11/III 14! Kaladis Point, Mindanao ....|beach........ ' Balanus amphitrite f. hawaiiensis.
12/IMI 14 | Taba Bay, Mindanao ....... coral reefs ...| Balanus amaryllis f. euamaryllis.
UNE KORS Polo EN SE REE |12—25 fthms..| Balanus amphitrite f. communis; Bala-
nus minutus; Balanus amaryllis f.
nivea ; Balanus allium ; Balanus cal-
ceolus (2) ; Balanus proripiens ; Acasta
cyathus ; Acasta Dofleini: Pyrgoma sp.
IONA IN eWwE] ol OSSE SES 20—30 fthms.. | Scalpellopsis striatociliata.
2 IE TRE D K OY reed Ko) Co SER KRLEN SPEER ERE SES EEN ab. 25 fthms. .| Balanus amphitrite f. communis; Ba-
| "… lanus amaryllis f. euamaryllis; Acasta
pectinipes.
PA DT SKØN Re] Kol re SENERE ESS SEE DEER '20—30 fthms..| Balanus amphitrite, f. communis; Ba-
| " lanus minutus ; Acasta conica.
PALTEDNESÆ KOR Folosss re es 15 fthms. ....| Balanus minutus ; Acasta Dofleini.
SOUL TÆ KO FE oo Re SE SE ERR ab. 25 fthms. .! Acasta madreporicola.
27/11I 14] 15 miles W. ”/z S. of Jolo...|250 fthms. ...! Scalpellum Stearnsii; Scalpellum aff.
(12/III 13) 19 317 N., 1249 47 E. [Menado salartiæ.
j Bay; Gelebes| SEERE 250 fthms. ...; Scalpellum indicum, Scalpellum bala=
noides, Megalasma minus.
It is obvious that the Balanus-species here as elsewhere are
dominant in the tidal zone, and a little below it; in 20—30 fath-
oms the subgenus Conopea and the Acasta-species seem to play a
greater part in the assembly. Observations are evidently lacking in
depths between 35 and 150 fathoms; with the last depth the Ba-
lanus- and Acasta-species have disappeared, and here Scalpellum is
the dominant genus, seconded by Megalasma and Verruca.!)
) Kriger (1911) geographivally characterises Verruca as »Alle Meere;
litoralf, Hoek (1883,
1913) has nevertheless shown that almost the
majority of Verruca-species live below 500 m, some of them even de:
scending as far as to 3000 m or more, whereas only very few species
are found in shallow wate
TS.
347
Many previously undescribed species have been found in this
region, viz. Calantica affinis, Scalpellopsis striatociliata, Heteralepas
nodulosa, Verruca Ccristalina f. lævis, and Acasta madreporicola; each
of these species only being recorded from one locality, it would
be premature to try to give their biogeographic characters. On the
other hand, a species as f. inst. Scalpellum balanoides having pre-
viously only once been caught, viz. near the Kei Islands (Hoek,
1883), and which is now found both near Zamboanga, and in
the Menado Bay, may be designated as a species characteristic
of the Malay Archipelago, this might seem even more justifiable
in a species as Megalasma striatum; Hoek (1883) described the
species after a specimen from thé Philippines, and has later (1913)
found the species again in the ,,Sibogaf-collections off Luzon,
south of Taam Island, south of Kur Island, and east of Kei Islands;
in the present material it again turns up south-west of Tucuran.
Nevertheless the species also protrudes into Japanese waters, a
single specimen occurring in material from the neighbourhood of
Bono. On the whole, most of the species which have their geo-
graphical centre in, and are characteristic of the Malay Archipel-
ago, have their Northern limits in Japanese waters. To the same
biogeographic category as Megalasma striatum, Scalpellum indicum,
Acasta Dofleini, and probably also Verruca albatrossiana belong. The
following species are evidently more strictly limited to the Malay
Archipelago: Octolasmis orthogonica, Chtamalus moro, Balanus mi-
nutus, Balanus proripiens, Acasta pectinipes. Acasta conica, and Te-
traclita vitiata. On the other hand, a species such as Balanus allium
links the Malay region with the Australian region; we shall on a
later occasion return to this affinity, and to that with the Hawaiian
Islands.
An interesting biogeographic character of the Malay Archipelago
also pointed to by previous authors, is afforded by the abundance
of Conopea- and Acasta-species; they are flourishing here more
than in any other place as far as hitherto known, and evidently
have their centre of origin in these waters, where also Scalpellop-
sis, the youngest twig of the Scalpellid branch has branched off. In
most genera the proliferation of species and varieties also now
seems to be more lively in the Malay Archipelago than in most
other regions. —
348
We shall then turn to the material which has been collected
napaneserwaktersE
—————————————« 3535
Date Locality Depth Species
SONNE MT SR EEN SE beach vsere Balanus trigonus.
2/V 14 | Aburatsubo, Misaki ......... Sets eee Balanus trigonus.
13/V 14 |21miles W.//2S. ofBonomisaki | 220 fihms. ...| Scalpellum indicum ; Megalasma stria-
tum ; Verruca albatrossiana.
IAA SØE PEN SE ØS EPE ERE TOKE ms SealpellumEsie drIus te
ISETTAEN TPE ØE NOD FA MS SIS min aen tumRbalanuskdennjer
IU NVATA TSS FA PANT 28 750 EL. SUSE ft ms Or ynaspisicelata ting apr
BSA AS ENG SEE eN SER 20 fthms. ....| Balanus trigonus.
LEAVES HS as anni kB aner ere RENE SER 400 fthms. ...| Heteralepas scutiger ; Acasta japonica,
GAVE Sa samba se eee 80—400 fthms. | ScalpellumStearnsii;Scalpellum rubrurn.
SVANE NNE ES ENES EDER ne 25 fthms. ....! Balanus trigonus.
MOVAVIST KO FENG S ERE 80—120 fthms. | Balanus trigonus.
26) VI14 KO kinose, Sagami Sea .:....- 100 fthms. ...! Scalpellum rubrum.
29/VI 14! Aburatsubo, Misaki......... surface mere Lepas anatifera.
pe Nadas aks s eeRE P Hanheeeeee Oxynaspis celata f. japonica.
The collections are here far less extensive than those from the
Philippines; the Japanese waters are obviously less rich in cirri-
peds, a fact also easily deduced from the literature. Nevertheless,
the region is of great interest, and a thorough study especially of
the northern parts of the Japanese waters will no doubt yield inter-
esting biographical results.
The southern part of the Japanese region is related to the Ma-
lay region, and gives refuge to the foreposts of the Malayisian fauna
proper as above mentioned. Sometimes it may be difficult to tell,
whether a species has its proper home in Japanese or Malayisian
waters, as f. inst. Scalpellum Stearnsii: in Dr. Mortensen's collec-
tions this species is represented from Japanese waters (Sagami),
and from the Philippines (off Jolo); Pilsbry (1907) had at his
disposal only Japanese specimens, and Kriger (1911) tells us
that the species occurs in abundance in the Sagami Bay; Hoek
(1907) on the other hand in the ,Sibogaf'-report mentions it from the
Kei Islands, Madura Sea, and west of Makassar. Scalpellum rubrum
seems to be more abundant in Japanese waters: it was first re-
ported by Hoek (1883) off Luzon, and has later on only been
observed by Pilsbry (1911) off Kagoshima; it now again turns
up near Sagami. Acasta japonica seemingly is a Japanese species,
349
but has only been found in two places, viz. near Kagoshima (Pils-
bry 1911, 1916), and now in the Sagami Bay.
Most of the species brought home from Japan have a very
wide distribution; the abundant Balanus trigonus might be thought
to be characteristic of the region, and seems to be far more com-
mon here than in other regions; it is nevertheless recorded from
all Tropical and Subtropical coasts, and is also in Dr. Mortensen's
collections represented both from Hawaii and from New Zealand.
A similar worldwide occurrence is recorded for Smilium acutum,
Lepas anatifera, and Oxynaspis celata, but the latter species has
developed a special forma japonica in the region. — On the other
hand the geographical range of the species Heteralepas japonica,
Verruca albatrossiana, and Balanus dentifer cannot be given at present.
The find of a Japanese Verruca is most interesting, especially
when we recall Pilsbry's words (1916): ,,Southward along the
Asiatic coasts we encounter the genus first in the Philippine Ar-
chipelago. The whole North Pacific is therefore without species".
The Northern limit is now removed from the Philippines to Mi-
saki. —
Turning now to the New Zealand waters, we see that by far
the richest collections have been made here; it is put down in the
following table:
Date Locality Depth Species
SIDSE HPork Western Victoria 3—4 fthms....! Elminius simplex.
87IX 14|389 25” S., 148? 28” E.....!70—80 fthms..| Pachylasma scutistriatum.
9/IX 141389 15” S., 148% 43” E.…..!70—120 fthms | Pachylasma scutistriatum.
11/IX 14|389% 10? S., 14992 55” E.....|190-240ftnms.| Heteralepas Dannevigi.
12/IX 14138? 05” S., 150? 00” E.....|200—260 fthms | Heteralepas Dannevigi.
14/IX 14/37? 45? S., 1502 10” E.....|150—260fthms.| Poecilasma Kaempferi; Heteralepas
Dannevigi.
15/IX 14/39? 10? S., 1492 557? E.....|200—250fthms.| Heteralepas intermedia.
16/1X 141389 12? S., 1499 407 E...../100—160fthms.| I/bla pygmæa ; Oxynaspis celata f. nova-
zelandica ; Heteralepas morula; Pa-
chylasma scutistriata ; Balanus auri-
coma.
ED IDXSSIÆ ES OR OOS TET SOS FPO FEE surface. Lepas pectinata.
SOMDETA 1370705? S 750955 E...... 150 fthms. ...."Lepgs pectinata.
NSA HDisaster "Bays iN Zee reve 30—40 fthms..| Heteralepas dubia.
OX 4 HPort "Hacking, NES: W. 52: Beach sserEse Chtamalus antennatus ; Tetraclita squa-
; mosa f. viridis.
Date Locality Depth Species
POSE RB on] aks on ER EG beach ere Ibla quadrivalvis.
18/XI 14 | Paterson Inlet, Stewart Island
NE Ed beach rer Elminius sinuatus.
19/XI 14 | Halfmoon Bay, Stewart Island,
IND ER BASE ES ES beaches dk Calantica villosa.
26/X114 | Port Ross, Auckland Island .|beach..... .…! Tetraclita purpurasceus f. breviscutum.
29/XI 14 | Carnley Harbour, Auckland Is-
MENE EDER FEE RD ES SD ERE Deac mere Elminius plicatus.
3/XII 14 | Masked Island, Carnley Har-
bour, Auckland Island ..... beach re Balanus vestitus (?).
9/XII 14 | Perseverance Harbour, Camp
bens land saae et se "beaches te Balanus Campbelli.
IPS Mania Peninsula eNS ZEN beaches Chamæsipho columna; Elminius plicatus.
P2OSSINTA FSlippertlsland EN SER EERE FJ ibeae here Protomitella paradoxa.
29/XII 14! North Channel, Kawaii Island,
HET a tra KN G EEN ERE PDS SEERE NE ES Balanus trigonus.
30/XII 14 | Hen and Chicken Island, Hau-
TAKE UKEN Ære beaches Mitella sertus ; Elminius plicatus.
5/I 15|N. W. of Cape Maria v. Die-
Mern UNE NESS ER 50 fthms. ....! Calantica Mortenseni.
ISIS EBlimmert ons NÆRER Beachnsssegr Protomitella paradoxa.
19-20/I 15| Queen Charlotte Sound, N. Z.|3—10 fthms...| Calantica villosa, Balanus vestitus.
Among the species hitherto unknown Heteralepas Dannevigi and
Pachylasma scutistriatum seem to be comparatively common in depths
of more than 70 fathoms in the region investigated by the ,,End-
eavour" in september 1914. These regions moreover exhibit a
faunistic relation to the Malayisian region, as is demonstrated by
the occurrence of Heteralepas morula, Heteralepas intermedia, and
Balanus auricoma, which species previously only have been re-
corded by Hoek (1907, 1913) from the ,,Sibogaf'-expeditions.
Oxynaspis celata has again developed a local forma nmova-zelandica
in these regions. The assemblage brought home from this voyage
by the ,,Endeavour" seems to be very characteristic and exclusive,
and is almost without intermixture of other ,foreign" species than
those mentioned, and a casual Lepas pectinata, which was, mira-
bile dictu, seated on a bottom particle from 50 fathoms”' depth.
The littoral fauna of New Zealand is very characteristic as to
the cirripeds. Not considering the Balanus Campbelli from the re-
mote Campbell Island we find the same characteristic faunistic
LÆ
mee
rr
351
features as mentioned by Darwin, and that the New Zealand
waters evidently exhibit very aberrant features in comparison with
other areas. Primitive and ancient species like Calantica villosa,
Calantica Mortenseni, and Protomitella paradoxa seemingly character-
ize the region as the cradle of most recent cirripeds; but on the
other hand, also highly specialized genera like E/minius have here
developed into more species than elsewhere, and the peculiar ge-
nus Chamæsipho in no other place flourishes to an equal degree,
although only in a single species. Of the species previously known
the following seem to be restricted to the shores of New Zealand:
Calantica villosa,”) Mitella sertus, Elminius plicatus, and Elminius
sinuatus. Other species are common at Australia such as Chamæ-
sipho columna, Balanus vestitus, and Tetraclita purpurascens, and
only comparatively few have like Ibla quadrivalvis, Balanus trigonus,
and Tetraclita squamosa f. viridis a more cosmopolitical, Tropic-
Subtropical distribution.
A very interesting although negative feature of the New Zea-
land waters is afforded by the astonishing scarcity of Scalpellum-
species. Indeed, the Scalpellum aff. imbricatum mentioned in the
appendix to the preceding chapter seems to be the first true Scal-
pellum observed in the coastal waters of New Zealand. —
Dr. Mortensen quite occasionally also gathered two shallow-
water Balanus species at Hawaii, viz. Balanus trigonus, and Ba-
lanus amphitrite forma hawaiiensis. Both species have a world-
wide habitat; but the latter is represented by an aberrant variety,
that nevertheless again turns up in the Philippines, and thus seems
to indicate a closer relationship with the Malay region than with
American waters.
We shall then turn to the last greater region investigated by
Dr. Mortensen, viz. the Pacific coast of North and Cen-
tral America. The localities and species are shown in the fol-
lowing table:
)) Darwin (1851) in a footnote says that the mussel, to which his spec-
imens were attached, lives in the waters round India, Timor, and New
Holland. Footing on this note Hoek (1907) mentiens the species as in-
habitant of the Malay Archipelago. Hutton (1879) is the first who gives
New Zealand as certain living place, and Jennings (!918) gives the
following New Zealand localities: Stewart Island; Port Robinson; God-
Date Locality Depth Species
28/V 15! Dodds Narrows, Vancouver Is-
ande SS beachsssise Balanus crenatus.
3/VI 15 | Departure Bay, Nanaimo....!beach.......- Balanus glandula.
8/VI 15| Departure Bay, Nanaimo....|20 fthms. ....| Scalpellum gruvelianum.
10/VI 15! Departure Bay, Nanaimo....!beach........ Balanus rostratus f. eurostratus; Bala-
nus crenatus.
11/VI 15! Nanoose Bay, Nanaimo..... ab. 10 fthms. .| Balanus hesperius.
UGAVIREIS Strait tolrkGeorgia ERR: 40—50 fthms..| Scalpellum gruvelianum.
23'VI 15| Northumberland Channel, Na-
MALONE een ab. 25 fthms. .| Balanus rostratus f. heteropus.
6/VII 15! Pylados Channel, Nanaimo ../ ab. 20 fthms. .| Balanus hesperius.
PLN METIS DEERE San se SS eo beaches: Mitella polymerus f. typica.
PJAVUNDIS KE af olae ah Free beaches .| Chtamalus fissus; Balanus glandula ;
Tetraclita squamosa f. rubescens.
SSIVINDIS Ea] old alfa ERE RER beach reerersr Chtamalus fissus; Tetraclita squamosa
f. rubescens.
27/V11115 | Bird Rock, La Jolla, Calif. ..| on sea-weeds .| Mitella polymerus f. echinata.
PSKISEISIKOFIRedondom ea rer 30 Hfthriserer Scalpellum californicum; Balanus tin-
tinnabulum f. californica.
PAUSE] SIESan PBe drone alene beer Mitella polymerus f. echinata ; Chiama-
lus fissus; Balanus tintinnabulum f.
californica ; Tetraclita squamosa. f.
rubescens.
PJUXIRISI MT abosae Bay or Panama rer beach Tetraclita squamosa f. viridis.
TUSKTISYSS KRabogamBaydortbanamakrerre on a buoy ...| Balanus tintinnabulum f. coccopoma.
12/XII 15 |"Tabogå, Bay of-Panama..... beachærrrree Catophragmus Pilsbryi.
Decbr s baron ammer sunface mere Lepas pectinata.
The list is astonishingly different from those from the other side
of the Pacific Ocean.
Only Lepas pectinata, and Tetraclita squa-
mosa forma viridis also occur in the other lists, these two being
common all over the Tropic-Subtropical seas, and sometimes even
penetrating into more temperate regions.
Also Balanus tintinna-
bulum, it is true, belongs to the same category, and Balanus ro-
stratus (forma eurostratus) occurs on both sides of the Pacific; but
the specimens of the American side mostly represent local variant
groups, and are thus characteristic of American waters.
ley Head; Cheltenham Beach; Auckland; Oamaru. — No further evid-
ence as yet given, we can certainly put other regions out of record till
new proofs are provided of the occurrence outside of the New Zealand
waters.
353
In the region of Nanaimo, of course, the boreal element is pre-
dominant, represented by Scalpellum gruvelianum, Balanus glandula,
Balanus hesperius, and Balanus crenatus. As to the latter I accept
Pilsbry's hesitation (1916) in acknowledging the statements from
the Tropics and more Southern localities, given by previous authors.)
Balanus glandula is more eurytherm, going down to Southern Ca-
lifornia.
In the Californian region we again encounter other character-
istic species, viz. Scalpellum californicum, Mitella polymerus, Chta-
malus fissus, Balanus tintinnabulum forma californica, and Tetraclita
squamosa forma rubescens; these seem to be restricted to this re-
gion, neither were they met with in the Bay of Panama, where
Balanus tintinnabulum is instead represented by the beautiful forma
coccopoma.
In the Panamic region the interesting large Catophragmus Pils-
bryi was met with for the first time; this species has a close re-
lative in the Antillean region, and seems to contribute to the evid-
ences of the past connection across Central America. —
In papers dealing with the cirripeds it has frequently been
stated that this group is of small biogeographical interest, as most
of the species only occur in small numbers, and the others mostly
have a worldwide distribution. Evidently most students of this group
have overlooked the fact, recently so illustriously evinced by Pils-
bry (1916), that the widely distributed species tend to an obvious split-
ting up in local races, when they do not directly live an epibiotic
planktonic life like most Lepas- and Conchoderma-species; and even
here sometimes local races may be demonstrated. On the other
hand, such forms as several E/minius-species, Chamæsipho columna,
Mitella polymerus, and Mitella sertus play a predominent part in
the faunistic features, owing to their abundant occurrence in their
special regions, and are thus well apt to serve as biogeographic
character-animals.
Ås to the more scantily occurring species, it is true that they
play no predominant part in the biogeographical communities; never-
1) Darwin (1853) mentions Balanus crenatus from the Mediterranean,
Algoa Bay (South Africa), and Jamaica, Gruvel (1905) from Ile King
(in the Bass Strait), Peru, and Wasin in British East Africa.
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 73. 23
354
theless they very well accentuate the biogeographical characters of
the regions, as is evident from the above remarks.
It is interesting to see how the occurrence, when taken to-
gether with the phylogenetic relations, seems to indicate that the
cirriped centre evidently is situated in the Indomalayisian-Eastaustral-
ian waters; here it seems, as if also to-day the proliferation of
new species and genera is most lively, and in these regions the
most ancient forms moreover have endured up till our day. Thorough
studies regarding the geography of cirripeds should therefore not
be omitted; in this respect Dr. Mortensen's collections have given
us a more than usually good proof.
During the printing of the present paper an important treatise
,»Cirripeden-Studien. Zur Kenntnis der Biologie, Anatomie und
Systematik dieser Gruppe" by C.A. Nilsson-Cantell was is-
sued in Zoologiska Bidrag från Uppsala, Bd. VII. From a quite dif-
ferent basis Nilsson-Cantell, starting with the” mouth parts,
arrives at results concerning the relations of the different cirripeds,
which remarkably well agree with the present results, although he
on this base tends to a splitting up of the groups in small ,fam-
ilies". - He thus f. inst. maintains the Iblidae, and splits up Le-
padidae of the present paper in Lepadidae emend. (Lepas,
Conchoderma, Alepas), Oxynaspidae (Oxynaspis), Poecilasma-
tidae (Poecilasma, Megalasma, Octolasmis), and Heteralepadi-
dae (Heteralepas); although these groups fairly well coincide with
the diverging phylogenetic branches arrived at in the present study
(comp. fig. 1, pag. 2—), I do not think the differences of an im-
portance justifying the groups as families, but in most cases at
best as subfamilies. On the other hand, his merging together
Calantica, Smilium, and Scalpellum into the one genus Scalpellum,
although he maintains them as subgeneric groups, tends to obscure
the results arrived at in later papers, especially of Pilsbry, and
remarkably contrasts with his tendency to establish families on
355
characters, which are in some cases only to be regarded as of
generic value. The paper of Nilsson-Cantell is nevertheless
of great importance, contributing more to our understanding of
the cirripeds than most papers of later years.
Literature cited.
Annandale, N., 1906. Report on the Cirripedia collected by Professor
Herdman at Ceylon 1902, in: Rep. Pearl Oyster Fisheries of
the Gulf øf Manaar. Part V. London.
— ; 1909. An Account of the Indian Cirripedia Pedunculata. Part I.
— Family Lepadidae (sensu stricto) in Mem. Indian Mus. Vol. Il.
Calcutta.
— , 1911. Some Barnacles of the Genus Scalpellum from Irish
Seas in: Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 8, Vol. VII. London.
Aurivillius, C. W. S., 1894. Studien iber Cirripedien, in: Kungl. Svenska
Vetenskaps-Akad. Handlingar, Bd. 26. Stockholm.
Broch, Hj.,.1912. Die Plattenentwickelung bei Scalpellum Stråmii M. Sars,
in: Kgl. norske Vidensk. Selsk. Skrifter 1912. Trondhjem.
—= , 1916. Results of Dr. E. Mjobergs Swedish Scientific Expedi-
tions to Australia 1910—13, VIII. Cirripedien, in Kungl. Svenska
Vetenskaps-Akad. Handlingar, Bd. 52. Stockholm.
= , 1921. The development of the calcareous skeleton in Mitella
(Pollicipes), and the origin of the Cirripeds, in: Vidensk. Medd.
fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 72. København.
Darwin, Ch., 1851—1853. A Monograph of the Cirripedia. Ray Society.
London.
Filhol, H., 1885. Mission de IIle Campbell, in: Recueil de mémoires, Pas-
sage Venus, Vol. 3. Zool. Paris.
Gruvel, A., 1901. Étude d'une espæce nouvelle de Lépadides, in: Trans.
Linn. Soc. Ser. 2. Vol. VIII. London.
== , 1905. Monographie des Cirrhipédes ou Thécostracés. Paris.
== , 1907. Cirrhipedes opercules de PIndian Museum de Calcutta,
in Mem. of the Asiat. Soc. of Bengal. Voll. il. Calcutta.
== , 1909. Die Cirripedien, in: Deutsche Sutidpolar-Exped. 1901—
1903. Bd. XI, Zool. III. Berlin.
== , 1912. Mission Gruvel sur la cåte occidentale d”Afrique (1909
—1910). Les Cirrhipédes, in: Bull. Mus. d”Hist. nat. 1912. Paris.
= , 1920. Cirrhipédes provenant des campagnes scientifiques de
S. A.S. le Prince de Monaco, in: Res. Camp. Scient. Albert
ler, Fasc. LIII. Monaco.
23%
356
Hoek, P. P. C., 1883. Report on the Cirripedia collected by H. M. S. Chal-
lenger 1873—1876, in: Rep. scient. Res. Challenger, Zoology. Vol.
VIII. London.
— , 1907. The Cirripedia of the Siboga-Expedition. A. Cirripedia
pedunculata, in: Siboga-Expeditie, Mongr. XXXIa. Leiden.
— , 1913. The Cirripedia of the Siboga Expedition. B. Cirripedia
sessilia, in: Siboga-Expeditie, Monogr. XXXI b. Leiden.
Hutton, F. W., 1879. List of the New Zealand Cirripedia in the Otago Mu-
seum, in: Trans. N. Z. Inst. Vol. 11. Wellington, N. Z.
Jennings, L. S., 1915. Pedunculate Cirripedia of New Zealand and Neigh-
bouring Islands,in: Trans. N. Z. Inst. Vol. XLVII. Wellington. N.Z.
— , 1918. Revision of the Cirripedia of New Zealand, in: Trans.
N. Z. Inst. Vol. L. Wellington, N. Z.
Kriger, P.,,1911. Beitråge zur Cirripedienfauna Ostasiens, in: Abhandl.
math.-naturwiss. Kl. der k. Akad. der Wissenschaften. II. Suppl.-
Bd. Minchen.
— , 1914. Cirripedia, in: Die Fauna Sidwest-Australiens, Bd. IV.
Jena.
— , 1920. Studien an Cirripedien, in: Zeitschr. indukt. Abstam-
mungs- und Vererbungslenre. Bd. XXIV. Berlin.
Nussbaum, M., 1890. Anatomische Studien an Californischen Cirripedien.
Bonn.
Pilsbry, H. A., 1890. Description of a new Japonese Scalpellum, in: Pro-
ceed. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 1890. Philadelphia.
— , 1907. The Barnacles (Cirripedia) contained in the collections
of the U.S. National Museum, in: Bull. 60, Smithson Inst.,
Washington.
— , 1907. Hawaiian Cirripedia. — Cirripedia from the Pacific Coast
of North America, in: Bull. Bureau of Fisheries, Vol. XXVI.
Washington.
— , 1908. On the classification of Scalpelliform Barnacles. Pro-
ceed. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia. Vol. 60. Philadelphia.
— , 1911. Barnacles of Japan and Bering Sea, in: Bull. Bureau
of Fisheries. Vol. XXIX. Washington.
— , 1912. Diagnoses of New Barnacles from the Philippine AÅr-
chipelago and China Sea, in: Proceed. U.S. National Museum,
Vol. 42. Washington.
—- , 1916. The sessile Barnacles (Cirripedia) contained in the col-
lections of the U.S. National Museum; including a monograph
of the American species, in: Bull. 93, Smithson. Inst. Washington.
Weltner, W., 1899. Ergebnisse einer Reise nach dem Pacific (Schauins-
land 1896—1897). Cirripedien, in: Zool. Jahrb. Abt. Systematik.
Bd. 12. Jena.
Introduction
Lepadomorpha Pilsbry, their phylo-
senvkandesystemn ses et
Systematic account of the collections:
Family Scalpellidae
Genus Calantica
Calantica villosa (Gray)....
Mortenseni n. sp.
affinis nsSp-
Genus Smilium
Smilium acutum (Hoek)
Genus Scalpellum
Scalpellum Stearnsii Pilsbry
indicum Hoek ..
rubrum Hoek...
gruvelianum Pils-
bry
sjælene ekelerere ole
BryrEr ss skee
vel
balancides Hoek
Genus Scalpellopsis
Scalpellopsis striatociliata n.
skam pære. elere) VE
Protomitella paradoxa n. sp.
Genus Mitella
Mitella polymerus (Sowerby)
mitella (Linné)
sertus (Darwin)
Genus Ibla
Ibla quadrivalvis (Cuvier) ..
FEE VETTS SDN.
Bamilvelepadidae sr
Genus Lepas
Lepas anatifera Linné
pectinata Spengler...
Genus Poecilasma
Poecilasma Kaempferi Darwin
Genus Megalasmdse
Megalasma striatum Hoek .
Index
Page Page
215 Megalasma minus Annan-
daler SEE Re AG.
216 GenuskOryndSpIS KR ANSET: 274
227 Oxynaspis celata Darwin... 275
PAPA] | Genus Ociolasmis eks 279
227 Octolasmis orthogonia Dar-
227 Win: SEN eee EET 279
228 GenusiFHereralepa stress 279
232 Heteralepas (Paralepas) mo-
234 ruila- (Herr ER 281
234 Heteralepas (Paralepas) in-
235 termedias(HOER) SS FEEDS 281
235 Heteralepas (Paralepas) Dan-
237 MEvIgp NS PEERS EGE Er 282
237 Heteralepas (Paralepas) scu-
tigersnds peer rer 284
238 Heteralepas (Paralepas) no-
dulosansspræeee ns 286
240 Heteralepas (Heteralepas) du-
blæse Speer see 288
241 Family Verrucidae …........….. - 290
242 Genus Ferrier 290
243 Verruca albatrossiana Pils-
bey ss ae 290
243 Verruca cristallina Gruvel.. 292
246 —" Kriger nysp 295
247 Family Chtamalidae-.......... - 298
251 Genus Catophragmus .......- 298
252 Catophragmus Pilsbry n. sp. 298
258 Genus" Pachylasma iv 301
260 Pachylasma scutistriata n. sp. 301
262 Genus Chtamalis NSSS SSSEE 305
262 Chtamalus antennatus Dar-
262 Wii AN SETS ES NS serene 305
266 Chtamalus moro Pilsbry ... 307
266 = fissus Darwin ... 308
266 Genus Chamæsipho ........- 308
266 Chamæsipho columna (Speng-
270 Ler) SAS ERE RES ESSEN 308
270 Family Balanidae SNS SES SES: 309
270 Genus "Palanis Ness ASSER 309
270 Subgen. Megabalanus ...... 310
358
Page
Balanus tintinnabulum Linné 310
— Campbelli Filhol... 310
Subgen. Eubalanus. 314
— amphitrite Darwin . 314
—… minutus Hoek..... 317
— trigonus Darwin ... 320
— rostratus Hoek .... 320
— crenatus Bruguiére. 321
— glandula Darwin .. 321
Subgen. Hesperiba-
VANDS ESERERSNEERRENE sål
— hesperius Pilsbry .. 321
Subgen. Chirona... 321
—… amaryllis Darwin.. 321
Subg. Austrobalanus 322
— vestitus Darwin.... 322
Subgen. Solidobala-
RUSSERE RER 323
— … auricoma Hoek.... 323
Subgen.Armatobala-
BUSAN: AEK ESER SAN 324
allin Darwins SØD
Subg. Conopea .... 325
— calceolus Darwin (?) 325
ER proripren stoerre S20
Page
Balanus dentifer n. sp. ..... 326
Genus Acasta sis ANER 330
Acasta cyathus Darwin .... 330
— japonica Pilsbry.... 330
— pectinipes Pilsbry ..330
—« conica"Hoek er 330
HED ol ein Kruger 330
— … madreporicola n. sp. 333
Genus: Tetraclitat See 337
Tetraclita squamosa (Bru-
pure) 17 Sas JE ERSREER 337
Tetraclita purpurascens Dar-
Win usus SISSE SERGE RE 337
Tetraclita vitiata Darwin... 339
GenusFElminis ESS ERREER 341
Elminius plicatus Gray .... 341
— simplex Darwin... 342
— sinuatus Hutton... 342
Genus Pyrcomassesee Er 344
Pyrgomassp: SEERE 344
Appendix:
Scalpellum aff. imbricatum
HoGK: SS Fee Sene ES 344
Some geographical remarks ....... 345
EiteratureTcite de seeeree reen 345
JT SE922:
Papers from Dr. Th. Mortensen's Pacific Expedition
1914—16.
XI.
Ascidiae Ptychobranchiae und Diktyobranchiae von
Neuseeland und den Chatham-Inseln.
Von
W. Michaelsen, Hamburg.
(Mit 35 Textfiguren).
Unsere Kenntnisse von den Ptychobranchen und Diktyobranchen
Ascidien des Neuseeland - Gebietes gehen zurick bis auf die Ver-
offentlicnung iiber die Astrolabe-Ausbeute im Jahre 1834. Sie
wurden im Laufe der Zeit durch Angaben iber einzelne Arten und
zumal durch Sluiter's Bearbeitung der Ausbeute Prof. Scha u-
insland's erweitert. Eine kritiklose Zusammenstellung der bis-
herigen Angaben iiber das Neuseeland - Gebiet einschliesslich der
Chatham-Inseln wiirde die stattliche Zahl von 24 Arten Ptychobran-
cher und Diktyobrancher Ascidien ergeben. Diese Zahl verringerte
sich aber durch eine kritische Sichtung, soweit es anging unter
Nachprifung der Originale und Belegsticke "), auf 15. Durch die
reiche Ausbeute Dr. Th. Mortensen's von seiner Pacific-Expe-
dition 1914—16, der ich noch einige Stiicke der Museen zu Bremen
und Berlin beifigen konnte (darunter auch eine sonst nicht
vertretene Art), steigt die Zahl der gut charakterisierten Arten
dieses Gebietes auf 29. Es ist wohl kaum anzunehmen, dass hier-
mit dieser Zweig der Neuseeland-Fauna annåhernd erschåpft sei;
doch sind wir jetzt in der Lage, ein ziemlich sicheres Urteil iber
1) Zu besonderem Danke bin ich ausser Herrn Dr. Th. Mortensen den
Herren Prof. Schauinsland und Hartmeyer verpflichtet, die mir
die in Frage kommenden Typen des "Bremer und Berliner Museums,
zumal die Belegstiicke der Sluiter'schen Arbeit iiber die Tunicaten der
Sammlung Schauinsland, freundlichst zur Verfigung stellten.
360
den Charakter dieser Fauna und ihre geographischen Beziehungen
zu fållen.
Diese geographische Betrachtung wird sehr gefårdert durch die
jungst veråffentlichte Arbeit Bovien's iber Dr. Mortensen's
Ausbeute von den Auckland- und Campbell-Inseln, von denen bis-
her nur eine einzige Art bekannt war (jetzt 7 Arten nachgewiesen.)
Ich schliesse diese kleine Sonderfauna in die folgende Tabelle und
sich daran ankniipfende Erårterung der Ptychobranchen und Diktyo-
branchen Ascidien des Neuseeland-Gebietesin weiterem Sinne mit ein.
In der Tabelle stelle ich in erster Spalte alle gut charakteri-
sierten Årten zusammen. Die zweite Spalte bringt nåhere Angaben
iiber die Fundorte, und zwar bedeutet N — Nordinsel von Neu-
seeland (Auckland), S — Siidinsel von Neuseeland, Chath. — Chatham-
Inseln, Stw — Stewart-Insel, Auckl. — Auckland-Inseln, Campb. —
Campbell-Insel. 3 K. — Three Kings-Insel, w. —Westseite, no. —
Nordostseite bezw. Nordostende, so. — Siidostseite. Die dritte
Spalte giebt Auskunft iber die weitere Verbreitung der betreffenden
Arten oder verwandter Arten (,,V.') bezw. der ganzen Gattung
(,,G.")... Varietåten-Sonderung bericksichtige ich in dieser Tabelle
und der folgenden Erårterung nicht.
Betrachten wir zunåchst die Verteilung dieser Arteniiber
das engere Gebiet. Nach den damals vorliegenden Angaben
kam Hartmeyer 1909 ”) zu dem Schluss, dass die Ascidienfauna
der Westseite Neuseelands wesentlich von der der Ostseite ver-
schieden sei — war doch damals keine beiden Seiten gemeinsame
Årt bekannt —, und fihrte das darauf zuriick, dass auf der West-
seite eine warme, auf der Ostseite eine kalte Stråmung verlaufe.
Hartmeyer rechnet hierbei die dicht bei einander an der Cook-
Strasse gelegenen Fundorte ,,French-Passage'' und ,,d”Urville-Insel'
der Westseite zu. Ob das angångig ist, lasse ich dahingestellt, und
bezeichne diese Fundorte meinerseits als am Nordost-Ende der
Sudinsel gelegen. An eine Vergleichung der West- und Ostfauna
kånnen wir wohl nur in Hinsicht auf die Nordinsel denken; denn
von der eigentlichen West- bezw. Westnordwestseite der Siidinsel,
zu der die obengenannten Fundorte kaum gerechnet werden kån-
nen, ist uberhaupt keine Ascidie bekannt. Fir die Nordinsel (auch
nicht fir die Sidinsel, wenn wir die von mir als Nordost-Ende be-
') R. Hartmeyer, 1909, Tunic.; in — Bronn, Kl. Ordn., Tierr. p- 1671 u. f.
Tabelle der Ptychobranchen und Diktyobranchen Ascidien
des Neuseeland-Gebietes
(einschliesslich der Chatham-, Auckland-, Campbell- und Three Kings-Inseln).”
Ctenicella mortenseni n. sp. | N.w., no.; Stew. | V.: Australien.
Ct. novaeselandiae (Mich.) S. so | V.: Australien.
Ct. amokurae (Bov.) | Auckl.-I. | PV.: Australien
Ct. sluiteri n. sp. | Chath.; Stew. |
Paramolgula filholi (Piz.) | S. no; Stew. | V.: Sid-Chile; Magalhaens. Geb.
Pyura pulla (Sluit.) || N.w.so.; S.no. so.; Stew.|
P. pachydermatina (Herdm.) | N.s0.;S.so.:Chath.:Stew.| Sudost-Austral.;V.: Sid u.Siidost- Austral.
P. trita (Sluit.) | N.w,, no; Chath., Stew. ;|
Auckl.-I. |
P. subuculata (Sluit.). | N.n0.;S.no.,so ;Stew.
Microcosmus hirsutus Sluit. | Chath. | V.: Madagaskar, Senegal, Mittelmeer.
Cnemidocarpa cerea (Sluit.) | S.n0; Stew.; Auckl.-L| V.? od. Synon.?:Tasmanien,V.: Juan Fer-
| nandez,Sudwest- u.Sid-Afrika. ?? Ma-
layischer Archipel.
Cn. novaeseelandiae (Mich.) NEnogISE Se || verwandt der vorigen.
Cn. nisiotis (Sluit.). | S. no. |
Cn. madagascariensis Hartm. | 3 K. || Madagaskar.
Cn. stewartensis n. sp. | Stew. | :
Cn. bicornuta (Sluit.). | S. no.; Chath.; Stew. | ? Malayischer Archipel.
Cn. coerulea (Qu. & Gaim.). IN. no. ||
Polycarpa pegasis n. sp. | Stew. | V.: ? Australien u. Malayischer Arch.
Amphicarpa schauinslandi n. sp. Chath. | G: Sild Å HStrelr Ed, MA SS ISERSA DE BESSE
|| væ en.
Metandrocarpa thilenii n. sp. | N. w., no. | G.: Kaliformien, verw. der folgenden G.
M. protostigmatica n. sp. N. no || ebenso.
Alloeocarpa affinis Bov. Campb. | V.: Kapland ; G.: Kerguelen, Siid-Geor-
| … gien, Magalhaens. Geb., Malay. Arch.
Theodorella arenosa n. sp. | Stew. | G.: endemisch im Neuseeland-Geb.
Th. torus n. sp. ENEwSEno: || G.: ebenso.
Th. stewartensis mn. sp Stew. | G.: ebenso.
Polyzoa reticulata (Herdm.) | Campb. | Kerguelen, Siid-Georgien, Falkland-Ins. ;
|| | G.: Kapland, Magalh. Geb.
Botryllus leachi Sav. IN no; $. no.; Stew.;| Nordwest- u. Nord-Europa;V.: Australien,
i | Auckl.-I | Ost- u.Sud-Afrika, Golf v. Mexiko, Ber-
|| | mudas.
B. magnicoecus (Hartmr.) IN. no. || Sudost-Austral., Sud-Afrika, Mittelmeer.
B. schlosseri Sav. IN. Europa, Ostkuste Nordamerikas.
Corella eumyota Traust. N. w., 10.,S0.,sw.;$.n0.;| Chile, Magalhaens. Geb., Brasilien, Sid-
Chath., Stew. ;Auckl -I | Afrika,St.Paul,Tasmanien,Antarkt.Geb.
Ascidia lagena n. sp. | Stew. | V.: Norwegen.
Perophora boltenina n sp. | Stew. | V.od. Syn.: Siidost-Australien.
1) Der Vollståndigkeit halber ist hier noch die species inquir. Bozryllus racemosus Qu.&Gaim.
vom Hauraki-Golf (River Thames) anzufihren. Das von Heller (1878, Beitr. Kenntn. Tunic.,
p. 83) gemeldete Vorkommen der Cynthia [Pyura] dura in Neuseeland-Gewåssern halte ich
fir der Beståtigung bedirftig. Nach Hartmeyer (1909, Tunic ; in Bronn. Kl. Ordn.
+. Tierr., p. 1671) soll Heller in derselben Schrift auch fir Pandocia [Polycarpa] elata und
nebulosa ,,Neuseeland”" als Fundort angegeben haben. Ich finde diese Fundortsangabe, deren
Richtigkeit von Hartmeyer angezweifelt wird, in der angegebenen Schrift nicht, wenig-
stens nicht unter der Beschreibung jener Arten.
361
zeichnete Strecke mit Hartmeyer der Westseite zurechnen
wtrden) ist nach unseren erweiterten Kenntnissen ein Unterschied
der West- und Ostfauna nicht deutlich ausgeprågt. Von den 13
Arten mit genauerer Fundangabe von der Nordinsel finden sich 6
sowohl an der West- wie an der Ostseite, 7 nur an der Ostseite,
von diesen 7 aber 3 zugleich auch an der Stewart-Insel, die kaum
einer der beiden Seiten besonders angegliedert werden kann. Dass
manche Formen tatsåchlich nur an der Ostseite gefunden wurden,
wåhrend keine einzige lediglich an der Westkiiste der Nordinsel
bekannt geworden ist, beruht meines Erachtens darauf, dass an der
Ostseite intensiver gesammelt worden ist, als an der an Håfen und
also an leicht zugånglichen Sammelstellen årmeren Westseite. Das
Bild åndert sich kaum, wenn man die Ascidien der Nord- und
Siidinsel zusammenstellt und dabei die Cook-Strasse der Westseite
zurechnet. Von den 16 in Betracht kommenden Arten gehåren
dann 8 beiden Seiten an, 6 lediglich der Ostseite (davon 1 zu-
gleich der Stewart-Insel und den Chatham-Inseln) und nur 4
lediglich der Westseite, von diesen aber 2 zugleich der Stewart-
Insel und 1 zugleich der Stewart-Insel und den Chatham-Inseln.
Diese letzteren 3 Arten kånnen also nicht als spezifische Westseiten-
formen angesehen werden. Dazu kommt noch, dass von den
wenigen Arten, die Neuseeland mit Australien gemein hat (2 wenn
nicht 3), die eine, Pyura pachydermatina, gerade auf die åstliche Seite
Neuseelands (und die Stewart- und Chatham-Inseln) beschrånkt ist.
Der Unterschied in der Temperatur des Oberflåchenwassers an der
westlichen und der dåstlichen Seite Neuseelands kann auch nicht
so gross sein. Auf einer mir vorliegenden Karte der Meeresstromun-
gen ”) wird die Stråmung der dstlichen Seite, eine um das Sud-
ende Neuseelands herumbiegende Fortsetzung der ,,Sud-Austral-
Stråmung"', als kihl, und die Stromung der Westseite, eine vor
dem Siidende Neuseelands nordostwårts zuriicklaufende Fortsetzung
der ,,Ost-Austral-Stromung"', als lau bezeichnet; also nicht ,,kalt
und warm", wie Hartmeyer damals angab, sondern ,,kuthlund lauf.
Eine gewisse Charakterverschiedenheit ist andererseits deutlich
zu erkennen, wenn man das engere Neuseeland-Gebiet
einschliesslich der Chatham-Inseln mit dem sidlich sich daran an-
schliessenden Gebiet der subantarktischen Inseln Neu-
1 Justus Perthes, 1914, Seeatlas, 10. Aufl., Nr. 5, unteres Blatt.
362
seelands, der Auckland- und Campbell-Inseln, vergleicht. Nur
2 von den 7 bekannten Arten dieses Siidgebietes, nåmlich Czeni-
cella amokurae und Pyura trita, zeigen reine Beziehungen zum
engeren Neuseeland-Gebiet. Diesen steht eine andere Art, Polyzoa
reticulata, gegeniiber, die rein subantarktisch, und in dieser Breite
iber die Kerguelen bis in das Magalhaensische Gebiet verbreitet
ist. Die iibrigen 4 Arten zeigen in ihrer Verbreitung bezw. in
ihren Verwandtschaftsverhåltnissen eine Kombination der Beziehun-
gen zum engeren Neuseeland-Gebiet und zur west-dstlichen Rich-
tung. Es mag demnach berechtigt sein, diese subantarktischen
Inseln nur bedingungsweise dem Neuseeland-Gebiet zuzurechnen.
Sie stellen einen nach Neuseeland hinneigenden Teil des zirkum-
polaren Gebietes der Subantarktis dar und bilden damit den sid-
lichen Teil eines Neuseeland-Gebietes in weiterem Sinne.
Eine Ablåsung der Chatham-Inseln vom engeren Neusee-
land-Gebiet halte ich andererseits nicht fiir gerechtfertigt. Von den
7 an den Chatham-Inseln gefundenen Arten kommen 5 zugleieh
an den Kisten Neuseelands vor, und die Beziehungen der beiden
iibrigen, anscheinend hier endemischen Arten (fir Amphicarpa schau-
inslandi: Sud-Australien, Malayischer Archipel, Golf von Aden; fir
Microcosmus hirsutus: Madagaskar, Senegal, Mittelmeer) bilden keinen
Gegensatz zum Charakter der engeren Neuseeland-Fauna.
Von wenigstens anscheinend endemischen Gattungen,
deren Arten nach unserer jetzigen Kenntnis ganz auf das (engere)
Neuseeland-Gebiet beschrånkt sind, kennen wir nur die neue Stye-
liden-Gattung Theodorella, die in 3 Arten bei Neuseeland und
der Stewart-Insel vorkommt.
Die auswårtigen Beziehungen der Neuseeland-Ascidien-
fauna bewegen sich hauptsåchlich in zwei Richtungen, einer west-
Ostlichen iber die Inseln und kontinentalen Sidspitzen der notia-
len und sidlich gemåssigten Regionen und eine siid-nårdliche nach
Ost-Australien und dem Malayischen Archipel, bezw. nach Kali-
fornien.
Die west-åstliche Beziehung wird am klarsten ersichtlich
durch die Verbreitung der Corella eumyota. Diese ist zirkumpolar
von Neuseeland iiber das siidliche Siidamerika, von der Siidspitze
einerseits bis Mittelchile (Valparaiso), andererseits bis Brasilien
(Bahia) nordwårts gehend, und weiter iiber Siidafrika (Lideritz-
363
bucht, Kapland) bis zur Insel St. Paul im siidlichen Indischen
Ozean verbreitet und findet durch den Fund von Tasmanien den
Anschluss an das neuseelåndische Ende seiner Verbreitung; sie
geht sidwårts zugleich bis in die Regionen des Siidpolarmeeres.
Eine åhnliche, aber in der Nord—Siid-Erstreckung anscheinend
engere Verbreitung zeigt die Cmemidocarpa cerea-Gruppe [Neusee-
land und Auckland-Inseln: Cn. cerea, Juan Fernandez vor Mittel-
chile: Cn. robinsoni (Hartmr.), Sidafrika von Liideritzbucht bis
zur Siidkisste: Cn. asymmetra (Hartmr.), Tasmanien: Cn. gregaria
(ES EN CmNcerea?D)]'
Die Verbreitung anderer Formen stellt nur Teilstrecken dieser
west-dstlichen Zirkumpolarlinie dar, und zwar einesteils die von
Neuseeland ostwårts gehende Strecke [Paramolgula filholi; nåchste
Verwandte P. chilensis Hartmr. von Mittelchile, iibrige Arten der
Gattung auf das Magalhaensische Gebiet beschrånkt), andernteils
die westliche Strecke [Cnemidocarpa madagascariensis: Three Kings-
Inseln, Madagaskar; Polyzoa reticulata von der Campbell-Insel:
Kerguelen, Siid-Georgien, Magalhaensisches Gebiet|]. Die Verbrei-
tung wieder anderer Formengruppen hålt sich eine Strecke auf
dieser Zirkumpolarlinie, um dann an einem Ende, die warmen
Meeresgebiete durchbrechend, nordwårts abzuschweifen. Das finden
wir z. B. bei der Gruppe des Microcosmus hirsutus von den Chat-
ham-Inseln, dessen Verwandte bei Madagaskar und Senegal sowie
im Mittelmeer gefunden werden; ebenso bei der Verbreitung des
Botryllus magnicoecus [Neuseeland, Australien, Mogcambique, Kap-
land, Deutsch-Siidwestafrika, Mittelmeer]. Auch die Gruppe der
nahe miteinander verwandten Gattungen Al/oeocarpa und Metandro-
carpa gehårt wohl hierher. A//oeocarpa kommt in mehreren Arten
im Magalhaensischen Gebiete vor und verbreitet sich ostwårts uber
Siid-Georgien, das Kapland und die Kerguelen bis zur Campbell-
1) Nach Sluiter soll Cn. cerea allerdings auch im Malayischen Archipel
bei der Insel Jedan gefunden worden sein. Bei der ausgesprochen
west-åstlichen Verbreitung der Cn. cerea-Gruppe sidlich vom Tropen-
gurtel halte ich eine so weit nårdlich gehende Åbzweignng der Ver-
breitung dieser Art fiir unwahrscheinlich und die Bestimmung Sluiter's
fur der Beståtigung bedirftig. Wie das von mir nachgeprifte Beleg.
material fir andere Arten zeigt, hat Sluiter manchmal Ascidien ledig-
lich nach der åusseren Tracht, ohne von der inneren Organisation Kennt-
nis zu nehmen, bestimmt. Solche Bestimmungen sind aber unsicher.
364
Insel, nordwårts bis in den Malayischen Archipel gehend. Im
engeren Neuseeland-Gebiet wird sie durch zwei Arten der ihr
nahestehenden Gattung Metandrocarpa vertreten, deren extreme,
von Alloeocarpa weiter entfernte Glieder (3 nahe miteinander ver-
wandte Arten) an der Ostkiste Nordamerikas bei Kalifornien und
Britisch-Kolumbien vorkommen. Welcher Art die geographische Ver-
bindung zwischen dem nach All/oeocarpa hiniiberneigenden neu-
seelåndischen Zweig und dem extremen kalifornischen Zweig der
Gattung Metandrocarpa ist, entzieht sich unserer Beurteilung.
Sid—nérdliche Beziehungen werden mehr oder weniger
sicher durch verschiedene Gattungen dargeboten, am sichersten
wohl durch die Gattung Amphicarpa, die bei den Chatham-Inseln
und Siid-Australien, im Malayischen Archipel und im Golf von
Aden durch je eine ihrer 4 Arten vertreten ist. Auch die Pero-
phora boltenina wird durch eine mindestens nahe verwandte Form
im Australischen Gebiet (New South Wales) vertreten. Åhnliche
Beziehungen zu australischen Formen (zu Ctenicella martensi Traust.)
weisen Ct. mortenseni und Ct. novaeselandiae von Neuseeland,
wahrscheinlich auch Cz. amokurae Bovien von den Auckland-
Inseln auf; ferner Pyura pachydermatina, die zugleich im sidost-
australischen Gebiet, hier in Gesellschaft ihrer nåchsten Verwandten,
der P. gibbosa (Heller) vorkommt. Ich mutmasse, dass auch
die ibrigen Pyura-Årten åhnliche Beziehungen vertreten. Håchst
wahrscheinlich aber ist dies fir Polycarpa pegasis von der Stewart-
Insel, der einzigen neuseelåndischen Art ihrer im australischen
Gebiet so iippig entfalteten Gattung.
Eine ganz eigene, kaum anders als bipolar zu bezeichnende
Verbreitung zeigen die Botrylliden und die einzige Ascidiide, Asci-
dia lagena, dieses Gebietes. Die nåchste Verwandte dieser letzteren,
von der Stewart-Insel stammenden Art, 4. longisiphonica Kiær,
stammt von der Umgegend Bergen's in West-Norwegen, ist also
nahezu ihre Antipode. Die Gebiete der Botrylliden Botryllus schlos-
seri Sav. und B. leachi Sav., einerseits Neuseeland, andererseits
ganz Europa und fir B. schlosseri auch die Ostkiiste Nordame-
rikas, sind nicht ganz soweit von einander getrennt, und eine der-
selben, B. leachi, ist in dem Zwischengebiet durch den ihr sehr
nahe stehenden B. niger (Herdm.) vertreten. Mutmasslich stellen
diese beiden einander sehr åhnlichen Formen nur die: Warmwasser-
und die Kaltwasserform einer einzigen Art dar. Vielleicht ist eine
365
geographische Parallelitåt auch in der Verbreitung des B. magni-
coecus zu sehen, dessen Siidgebiet (Neuseeland, Mocambique, Kap-
land, Deutsch-Sudwestafrika) durch keinerlei Zwischenstationen mit
dem Nordgebiet (Mittelmeer) verknipft ist.
Betrachten wir die Neuseeland-Fauna Ptychobrancher und Dik-
tyobrancher Ascidien von anderer Seite, so erscheint sie auch
durch einige negative Eigenheiten charakterisiert, durch
das Fehlen oder die auffallend geringe Entfaltung gewisser Gattungen.
Es dirfen hierbei nattrlich nur solche Gattungen in Betracht ge-
zogen werden, die eine weltweite Verbreitung haben und an den
anderen kontinentalen Sidspitzen eine betråchtliche Entfaltung auf-
weisen. Dass die an den australischen Kisten so iippig entfalteten
Gattungen Microcosmus und Polycarpa in unserem Gebiet so schwach,
durch nur je 1 Art, vertreten sind, beruht wohl darauf, dass sie
die wårmeren Gewåsser bevorzugen, ohne durchaus auf sie ange-
wiesen zu sein. Auffallend aber ist das anscheinend vollståndige
Fehlen der Molguliden-Gattungen Molgula (s. s.), Molgulina und
Eugyra (s. 1.), die doch in den Sidgebieten Sidamerikas und Siid-
afrikas sehr gut vertreten sind. Recht auffallend ist auch die un-
gemein schwache Vertretung, die die Ordnung der Diktyobranchier
in unserem Gebiet findet: nur je eine Art der 3 Familien Corelli-
dae, Ascidiidae und Perophoridae. Eine åhnlich schwache Vertretung
zeigen die Diktyobranchier allerdings auch an der Siidspitze Siid-
amerikas, wåhrend wenigstens die Ascidiiden im sidafrikanischen
Gebiet iippiger entfaltet sind.
Prychobranchia:
Fam. Molgulidae.
Gen. Ctenicella Lac. Duth., Hartmr.
Ctenicella mortenseni n. sp.
Fundangaben: Neuseeland, Nordinsel, North Channel bei
der Kawaii-Insel im Hauraki-Golf, 10 Fd.; 29. Dez. 1914;7)
Tokuma-Bucht, unter Steinen an der Kiste; 23. Dez. 1914; vor
NewvæPblymouths"8s"Ed; 12. Jan, 1915:
Sfewart-Insel 20 Fd., 16. Nov. 1914.
1) Alle Fundangaben ohne besondere Erwåhnung des Sammlers beziehen
sich auf das von Dr. Th. Mortensen auf der Pacific-Expedition
1914—16 erbeutete Material.
366
Beschreibung: Korpergestalt unregelmåssig dick-eifårmig, der
Kugelform genåhert. Åussere Siphonen warzenformig, etwas
kiirzer als am Grunde breit, ziemlich dicht bei einander an einer
Långsseite der kurzen, dicken Eiform stehend; Entfernung zwischen
ihren Kuppen ungefåhr gleich "/s des Profilumrisses des Kårpers.
Mit einem grossen Teil der Ventralseite angewachsen. Eine dorsal-
mediane Einfaltung ist nicht vorhanden und auch in der inneren
Organisation nicht angedeutet. Branchial&ffnung undeutlich
6-wulstig. Atrialoåffnung undeutlich 4-wulstig.
Grøossenverhåltnisse: Gråsstes vorliegendes Stick 15 mm
lang, 12 mm hoch und 9 mm breit.
Oberflåche selten zum gråsseren Teil nackt und rein, meist
ganz, auch dorsalmedian, mit feinem oder grobem Sand, Kies,
Molluskenschalentriummern und åhnlichem inkrustiert oder mit
Bryozoen und anderen Fremdorganismen bewachsen. Ein Stick
bis auf einen kleinen Teil der Dorsalseite mit den Siphonen ganz
zwischen Muschelschalen, grossen Schalentrimmern und Kieskår-
nern eingewachsen. Nackte Oberflåchenteile durch ein måssig
weitlåufiges Furchennetz gefeldert. Felder sehr verschieden gross,
die gråssten mehr als 1 mm breit, eben, nicht oder kaum merklich
vorgewdlbt. Haftfåden konnten nicht nachgewiesen werden.
Fårbung der nackten Teile gelblichgrau bis bråunlichgrau.
Zellulosemantel dinn, sehr fest lederartig, biegsam, im
Schnitt gelblich bis blåulichgrau, an der Innnenflåche glatt, gelb-
lich bis dunkel blåulichgrau, perlmutterglånzend.
Weichkårper (Textfig. 2 a u. b) nur an den Kårperåffnungen
fest am Zellulosemantel haftend, kurz- und dick-eiformig, mit diver-
gierenden, kegelfårmigen inneren Siphonen, die etwas gråsser
als die åusseren Siphonen sind. Branchialsipho in 6, Atrialsipho
in 4 gleich breite Lappen auslaufend.
Innenauskleidung der Siphonen ohne Innendorne und
ohne Siphonalpapillen, mit Långsfalten, die an Zahl und Lage den
Siphonenlappen entsprechen.
Leibeswand im allgemeinen zart, rechts oben und dorsal,
zumal an den Siphonen, stårker, an den Siphonen mit kråftiger
Ringmuskulatur; von den Siphonen ferner je ein Strahlenkranz
kråftiger Radiårmuskeln ausgehend, die linkerseits sich sehr bald
in ein Netzwerk feiner Muskeln auflåsen, rechterseits betråchtlich
367
weiter reichen, bis ungefåhr zur Mitte der Seitenwand. Endo-
carpe sind nicht vorhanden. An der Basis des Atrialsiphos ein
schmales, stark muskulåses Atrialvelum. Atrialtentakel
sind nicht erkannt worden. i
Branchialtentakel ca. 20, meist sehr gross oder mittelgross,
ohne erkennbare Regel der Anordnung, dazwischen ganz verein-
zelt einige wenige kleine. Gråsste Tentakel mit Fiederung 3.
Ordnung an den Fiedern 2. Ordnung. Hauptståmme und Fieder-
ståmme bis vorletzter Ordnung breit såbelformig, mit einwårts ge-
richteter dickerer Leistenkante. Fiedern letzter Ordnung stummel-
bis fadenfårmig, distal knopfartig angeschwollen, im allgemeinen
ungefåhr 25 — 50 u lang und 10 w dick, an den
Enden der Tentakel bezw. der gråsseren Fiedern stark
verlångert und etwas verdickt, bis etwa 90 u lang und
14 w dick. Zusammen bilden die Branchialtentakel
einen dicken, dichten wolligen Kranz.
Flimmerorgan (Textfig. 1) ein vorn verbreitertes
Polster; Flimmergrubenspalt von der Gestalt eines nicht
ganz glatten, etwas verkriimmten liegenden ,,S".
Kiemensack symmetrisch gestaltet, dorsal stark så Se FSR
verkirzt, mit jederseits 7 wohl ausgebildeten, uberhån- rin. sp. Flim-
genden, beiderseits scharf abgesetzten Falten. Falten EEN
I, VI und zumal VII kleiner als die ibrigen, aber
keinesfalls rudimentår. Innere Långsgefåsse nur auf den beiden
Seiten und der First der Falten, auf den Faltenzwischenråumen
ganz fehlend, nicht einmal unmittelbar an der Basis der Falten,
sondern ein geringes oder ein betråchtliches oberhalb der Basal-
kante beginnend. Zahl der inneren Långsgefåsse in einer aus-
gezåhlten rechten Kiemensack-Hålfte:
BRORSON EO (TORTOR TI FOR SSO HF OTE:
Die Långsgefåsse verlaufen nicht bis an das Hinterende
. der Falten. Dies Hinterende ist glattwandig, scharfkantig, und
trågt an seiner First eine verschieden grosse Zahl — 2 bis 7 —
kurze oder lange und schlanke, zungenfårmige oder dreiseitig,
wenn nicht unregelmåssig zugeschnittene Lappen. Ein Zusammen-
hang zwischen diesen Lappen und den wenigstens anscheinend eine
betråchtliche Strecke vor ihnen endenden inneren Långsgefåssen
war nicht zu erkennen. Die Quergefåsse verlaufen radiår in
368
der Richtung von der kurzen Dorsalkante zur sehr langen Ventral-
kante des Kiemensackes, aber nur einige wenige dickere fast
durch die ganze Breite des Kiemensackes, viele schmålere nur
uber eine Falte und den ventral von ihr gelegenen Faltenzwischen-
raum, wenn nicht nur iber einen Teil desselben. In der Weite
dieser Erstreckung zeigen sie viele Unregelmåssigkeiten. Die Quer-
gefåsse tragen einen in das Lumen des Kiemensackes hineinragen-
den scharfkantigen Saum, dessen Breite ungefåhr der Dicke des
Quergefåsses proportional ist. Nur sehr wenige Quergefåsse
erreichen den Endostyl, nachdem sie sich verflacht haben und ihr
Saum sich unter allmåhlicher Verschmålerung verloren hat. Hinzu
kommen noch viele unregelmåssiger verlaufende feinste Querge-
fåsse, die gråsstenteils parastigmatisch sind. Die Kiemenspal-
ten sind meist måssig lang gestreckt und parallelrandig, meist
nicht oder nur schwach gebogen. Eine typische Molgula-Art zeigen
die Kiemenspalten nur in den Råumen jederseits zwischen Endostyl
und Falte VII. Hier sind sie meist stark gekrimmt und zu Flå-
chenspiralen zusammen gestellt. Diese Flåchenspiralen sind teils
einfach, teils doppelt, wobei die zentralen Enden der beiden Spi-
ralen in einander gehakelt sind. In den Faltenzwischenråumen
treten solche Flåchenspiralen nur ganz hinten auf, zwischen den
undurchbrochenen, Långsgefåss-losen Hinterenden der Falten. Im
ibrigen zeigen die Kiemenspalten auf den Faltenzwischenråumen
und auf den Falten typischen Czenicella-Charakter. Sie sind ganz
gerade oder fast gerade gestreckt, parallel dem Faltenverlauf, und
erstrecken sich als Zonen von Parallelspalten von den Faltenzwi-
schenråumen auf die Falten hinauf. Nur an den breiteren Quer-
gefåssen sind die Kiemenspalten mehr oder weniger dorsalwårts
abgebogen, auf diese Weise die bogenfårmigen, basalen ventralen
Teile von Faltentrichtern markierend. Diese Faltentrichter gabeln
sich zweimal, sodass einem basal einfachen Trichter 4 Kuppen mit
je einem zentralen Spiralende entsprechen. Die Faltentrichter sind
gemåss der Plattheit der Falten plattgedriickt, und dementsprechend
ibre Kiemenspalten gestreckt, jedoch nicht so sehr, dass das Bild
des Spiralverlaufs ganz zerstårt wiirde. Beim Aufblick gerade auf
die First einer Falte erkennt man an den kleinen Kuppen der
Trichter deutlich die Spiralanordnung der Kiemenspalten, die hier,
entsprechend der Verengung der Spirale, verkirzt und stårker ge-
369
bogen sind als an den fast platten Flanken der Faltentrichter. In
dem kleinen Raum jederseits zwischen Dorsalfalte und Falte I sind
die Kiemenspalten sehr kurz und unregeimåssig gestaltet, lochfår-
mig, und ganz unregelmåssig gestellt. Der Kiemensack trågt iiber-
all an seiner Innenseite in den Flachteilen, auf den feinsten Långs-
und Quergefåssen sowie stellenweise auch auf den etwas breiteren
Quergefåssen, ferner an den basalen Flanken des Endostyls war-
zenfårmige bis gerundet stummelfårmige Papillen. Vielfach fin-
det man je eine solche Papille mitten iber einer Kiemenspalte an
einem parastigmatischen Quergefåss oder auf den Kreuzungspunk-
ten der parastigmatischen Quergefåsse mit den feinsten Långsge-
fåssen. Am dichtesten stehen diese Papillen in der Nachbarschaft
der Osophagus-Miindung; hier sind sie auch am gråssten, bis etwa
26 u dick und 35 w lang. Nach vorne hin und ventralwårts
nehmen sie an Gråsse ab und werden auch spårlicher, letzteres
allerdings nur relativ, da hier die Kiemenspalten im allgemeinen
srossertsindik Der Em dostylist”glatt: Er gehtlhintentineine
Retropharyngealrinne iber. Wenn ich die Verhåltnisse an
einem etwas verzerrten Pråparat richtig erkannt habe, so biegt sich
die Retropharyngealrinne zunåchst nach vorne hin zurick, schweift
rechtsseitig dicht an der Osophagus-Miindung entlang und biegt sich
vor derselben dorsalwårts und zurick, um, die Osophagus-Miindung
vorn umfassend. vorn-links von ihr schråg nach hinten auf der
rechten Flanke der Dorsalfalte zu enden. Die Dorsalfalte
ist ein kurzer, breiter, nach rechts hin eingerollter glatter Saum.
Sie schien ganz glattrandig zu sein, ist es wenigstens im gråssten
Teil ihres Verlaufs, aber durch Kontraktionsfåltelung stark wellig.
Das Hinterende der Dorsalfalte neben der Osophagus-Mindung ist
nicht ganz deutlich erkannt worden.
Der Darm (Textfig. 2 b) bildet an der linken Seite des Kie-
mensackes eine måssig stark gebogene, im gråssten Teil ihrer
Långe eng geschlossene, nur am Wendepol klaffende Schleife, die
ungefåhr der ventralen Medianlinie parallel verlåuft, und deren
Wendepol-Ende wohl etwas aufwårts gebogen, aber bei weitem
nicht iibergebogen ist. Magen schwach spindelfårmig erweitert,
nicht scharf von Osophagus und Mitteldarm abgesetzt, an der Kie-
mensack-Seite sowie an der Konvexitåt seiner Kriimmung mit
einem dicken, nach hinten polsterartig vorragenden und durch eine
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 73. 24
370
starke Einkerbung etwas gelappten Leberbelag. Oberflåchlich
ist die Leber in regellos gestellte, långlich ovale, polsterfårmige
Leberfåltchen geteilt. Mittel- und Enddarm sind nicht von
einander gesondert. Das Rektum ist mit dem Kiemensack
zusammen gewachsen. Der
Afterrand ist ganz glatt,
nicht eingekerbt und nicht
zuruckgeschlagen, schwach
wulstig verdickt.
Die Niere (Textfig. 2 a)
ist parallelrandig, ungefåhr 5
mal so lang wie breit, unge-
fåhr zu einem Viertelkreise
gebogen, vorn und hinten
gleichmåssig gerundet ; sie liegt
parallel der ventralen Median-
linie in ziemlich betråchtlicher
Entfernung von derselben; ihre
Konvexitåt ist ventralwårts
gerichtet.
Jederseits ein zwittriges
Geschlechtsorgan (Text-
fig Pa und") Freehterselts
dicht oberhalb der Niere, an
deren Oberkante angelehnt
und sie an den Enden et-
was iiberragend, linkerseits
dicht oberhalb der Darm-
Fig. 2. Ctenicella mortenseni n. sp.
Weichkårper, a von der rechtien Seite, Niere schleife, in ganzer Breite an
und rechter Geschlechtsapparat durchschim- ; ; ; .
mernd ; b vou der linken Seite, Darm und die Mittelpartie des ricklau-
linker Geschlechtsapparat durchschimmernd; fenden Darmschleifen - Astes
at. = ÅAtrialsipho, br. = Branchialsipho; 4/1. angeschmiegt und die Darm-
schleifen-Bucht fast ganz ausfullend. Das ganze Organ ist platten-
formig.. Das Ovarium ist eine mit der Långsrichtung der
Rickenlinie annåhernd parallele, an den Ecken gerundete, långlich
rechteckige Platte, an deren hinterer, oberer Ecke ein kuppelfår-
miger Eileiter vorragt. Die ausgewachsenen Eizellen sind
ungefåhr 0,12 mm dick. Die Hode umfasst als unregelmåssige
371
breite Verbråmung den unteren und vorderen (distalen) Rand des
Ovariums und iberdeckt auch etwas diese Randpartien. Es ist
nur dieser månnliche Teil des Geschlechtsapparats, der an die
Niere bezw. an den Darm angrenzt. Die Hode ist aus zahl!reichen
kurzen oder, an den Randpartien, långeren, einmal oder zweimal
gegabelten oder gelappten Hodenschlåuchen von ungefåhr 0,17 mm
Breite zusammengesetzt. Den Samenleiter und seine Aus-
miindung konnte ich nicht sicher feststellen. An einem Pråparat
glaubte ich das Ausmiindungsende dicht neben dem des Eileiters,
und mit diesem verwachsen, zu erkennen; doch war das Bild
dieser Organisation sehr unklar. Es wiirde auch nicht dem typi-
schen Verhalten bei der Gattung Ctenicella entsprechen, bei der
die Samenleiter-Mindung weiter hinten auf dem Ovarium liegt.
Erorterung. Es besteht kein Zweifel, dass diese Art in die
von Hartmeyer ") in modernem Sinne charakterisierte Gattung
Ctenicella gehårt, wenngleich sie in gewisser Hinsicht sich nicht
ganz in deren Umschreibung einschmiegt. So entbehrt C. morten-
seni durchaus intermediårer innerer Långsgefåsse auf den Falten-
zwischenråumen des Kiemensackes, wie sie fir Ctenicella
charakteristiseh sein sollen, und nåhert sich hiermit der Gattung
Moleulmakkttartmeyer (1"c1914 p78). TT FSieF stutzt hrerdureh
meine friher ”) geåusserte Ansicht, dass die Gattung Czenicella
nicht scharf von den verwandten Molguliden-Gruppen zu trennen
und wohl besser als Artengruppe, denn als Gattung, aufzufassen sei.
Im ibrigen spricht nichts gegen eine Zuordnung der neuen
Art zu Ctenicella. Eine glattrandige Dorsalfalte, wenn auch
ungewohnlich in dieser Gruppe, tritt auch bei einigen anderen
ihrer Arten auf. Das Flimmerorgan ist typisch gebildet. Die
Geschlechtsorgane weichen in ihrem Bau vielleicht etwas
vom Typus ab, falls es sich nåmlich beståtigt, dass der Samen-
leiter dicht an der Eileiterodffnung ausmindet. Die Verbreiterung
des in dieser Gruppe gewohnlich schmal balkenfårmigen Ovariums
stellt nur eine graduelle Abweichung von der typischen Bildung dar.
Von den iibrigen Ctenicella-Arten dieses Gebietes und benach-
barter Regionen ist zunåchst Cz. novaeselandiae (Mich.) (siehe
unten!) in Vergleich zu ziehen. Sie unterscheidet sich von Cz.
)) R. Hartmeyer, 1914. Diagn. Molgulid. Berlin. Mus., p. 17.
”) W. Michaelsen, 1915, Tunic.; Meeresfauna Westafrikas, p. 368.
24"
372
mortenseni durch die Gestaltung der Darmschleife und der
Niere, verschiedene Charaktere des Kiemensackes, der
Geschlechtsorgane und anderer Organe, teilt aber mit ihr den
Charakter des Fehlens intermediårer innerer Långsgefåsse im
Klemensack:
Noch ferner steht der Cz. mortenseni die Ct. mortoni Kest.?”)
von Tasmanien, bei der unter anderem die fir Czenicella gewohn-
lichen intermediåren inneren Långsgefåsse am Kiemensack auf-
treten. Diese tasmanische Art soll sich von allen anderen Arten
ihrer Gattung, ja von allen anderen Molguliden dadurch unter-
scheiden, dass der linksseitige Geschlechtsapparat in zwei
getrennte Teile gespalten ist, einen in der Darmschleifenbucht,
einen anderen hinter dem Magen (l. c. 1900, Taf. XXVI Fig. 11,
Gon.). Ich kann nicht glauben, dass diese Art wirklich in solch
eigenartiger Weise von allen Verwandten abweiche, und nehme an,
dass hier ein Beobachtungsfehler vorliegt. Schon die konturlose,
offene Figur der Abbildung des hinter dem Magen liegenden Teiles
des angeblichen Geschlechtsorganes låsst vermuten, dass wir es
hier mit einem durch Zerreissung bei der Pråparation entstandenen
Zustande zu tun haben. Ich bin iberzeugt, dass jene dicht hinter
dem Magen an der Leibeswand haftenden Bruchsticke nichts anderes
sind als einige an der Leibeswand haften gebliebene, von dem in
der Regel dick polsterformigen Leberbelag der hinteren Magenwand
abgerissene Leberlåppchen.
Eine nahe Verwandte der C+. mortenseni scheint auch die Mol-
gula amokurae Bovien ”) von den Auckland-Inseln, sicher eine
Ctenicella, zu sein. Sie åhnelt ihr zumal in der gedrångteren,
breiteren Form der Gonaden, unterscheidet sich aber durch die
etwas gråssere Zahl der inneren Långsgefåsse des Kiemensackes,
" durch die starke Kriimmung der Darmschleife und die Gestalt
der Niere, deren oberer Rand eine fast gerade Linie bildet.
Leider gibt Bovien nicht av, ob die Dorsalfalte glattrandig
oder gezåhnt ist.
Von der im australischen Gebiet weit verbreiteten Cz. martensi
(Traust.)?) unterscheidet sich Cz. mortenseni unter anderem durch
) H. L. Kesteven, 1900, Stud. Tunic., p. 289 (als Molgula mortoni).
”) P. Bovien, 1921, Tun. Auckland Campbell Isl., p. 34, Textfig. 1.
”) R. Hartmeyer, 1914, Diagn. Molgulid., Berlin. Mus., p. 13.
373
das Fehlen intermediårer innerer Långsgefåsse im Kiemensack,
von der unten beschriebenen Cfz. sluiteri, die diesen letzteren
Charakter mit ihr gemein hat, durch die Glattrandigkeit der Dor-
salfalte, die abweichende Gestalt der Niere, der Gonaden
und anderer Organe.
Ctenicella novaeselandiae (Mich.).
1911, Caesira (Molgula) novaeselandiae, Michaelsen, Tethyid. Naturh.
Mus. Hamburg, p. 166, Textfig. 18, 19.
1914, Molgula novaeselandiae, Hartmeyer, Diagn.Molgulid., Berlin. Mus/ p.7.
Alte Fundangabe; Neuseeland, Sidinsel, Lyttleton (nach
Michaelsen).
Im Gegensatz zu Hartmeyer, der diese Art zu Molgula (s.
S.) stellt, glaube ich sie der Gattung (oder Gruppe) Ctenicella zu-
ordnen zu sollen. Sie bildet zusammen mit anderen neuseelåndi-
schen Arten (siehe die Erårterung unter Cz. mortenseni, oben p. 371)
einen Ubergang zwischen diesen beiden Gattungen, die ich, wie
oben auseinander gesetzt, lieber als unscharf begrenzte Artgruppen
betrachten måchte. Die meisten Charaktere entsprechen Czenicella.
Das Fehlen intermediårer innerer Långsgefåsse im Kiemensack,
das diese Art mit Cz. mortenseni (siehe oben!) und mit Cfé. sluiteri
n. sp. (siehe unten!) gemein hat, kann allein nicht als Grund fir
die Abtrennung von Ctenicella und Zuordnung zu Molgula gewertet
werden, wenngleich es eine Hinneigung zu Molgula bezeichnet.
Ctenicella sluiteri n. sp.
1900, Molgula martensi (err., non M. Martensii Traust.), Sluiter, Tunic.,
Stillen Ocean, p. 32.
Fundangabe: Neuseeland, sidlich von der Sidinsel,
Foveaux-Strasse, an Stacheln von Cidaris umbraculum Mu ll.
Alte Fundangabe: Chatham-Inseln, Red Bluff (nach Sluiter).
Ich konnte das Sluiter'sche Belegstick fir seine Molgula
martensi von den Chatham-Inseln nachuntersuchen und feststellen,
dass es der Traustedt'schen Art nicht zugeordnet werden durfte,
abgesehen von anderen bedeutsamen Abweichungen schon deshalb
nicht, weil die Dorsalfalte in charakteristischer Weise gezåhnt ist.
Der unten gegebenen Beschreibung liegt hauptsåchiich dieses aus-
gewachsene Sluiter'sche Stiick als Typus der Czenicella sluiteri
zu Grunde. In der Ausbeute der Pacific-Expedition finden sich
374
einige winzige Exemplare einer Ctenicella von der Foveaux-
Strasse, die als Kotypen dieser Art zuzuordnen sind. Das gråsste
dieser Exemplare misst nur 7 : 5 : 3 mm (sein Weichkårper
5 : 37/8 : 2 mm) und zeigt nur die erste Anlage der Geschlechts-
organe.
Beschreibung. Gestalt seitlich abgeplattet, breit eifårmig, mit
kleinem, nach hinten geneigtem Branchialsipho und ziemlich dicht
dahinter stehendem, ebenfalls etwas nach hinten geneigtem gråsseren
Atrialsipho, der ungefåhr um die Hålfte långer als dick ist.
Bodenståndigkeit: Das ausgewachsene Tier (der Typus)
hat anscheinend frei in grobem Sand gesessen. Eine Anwachsstelle
ist nicht erkennbar. Die jungen Sticke von der Foveaux-Strasse
sind mit Teilen der Ventralflåche an Cidaridenstacheln angewachsen.
Oberflåche im gråberen eben, durch vollståndige Inkrustie-
rung mit måssig feinem Sand rauh gemacht.
Fårbung die des Inkrustationsmateriales. Eigenfårbung fehlt.
Gråssenverhåltnisse des ausgewachsenen Stiickes: Långe
parallel der Riickenlinie 9 mm, dorsoventrale Håhe 11 mm, Breite
7 mm, Åtrialsipho 3 mm lang, 2 mm dick; Branchialsipho etwa
17/2mm lang.
Kårperåffnungen am Typus nicht mehr feststellbar; an
einem kleinen Stick scheinen die Lappen der Korperåffnungen
zart gezåhnt zu sein.
Zellulosemantel dinn, zåh lederartig, durch vollståndige
Inkrustation mit Sand etwas versteift, an der Innenflåche infolge
der Inkrustation rauh, schwach perlmutterglånzend.
Weichkårper (Textfig. 3) leicht aus dem Zellulosemantel
herauszulåsen, mit scharf abgesetzten inneren Siphonen; der innere
Branchialsipho ist etwas gråsser als der åussere.
Leibeswand sehr zart, mit geringer, beiderseits gleich aus-
gebildeter Muskulatur. Långsmuskeln, in je etwa 24 gesonder-
ten Bindeln von der Basis der Siphonen ausstrahlend, kaum die
Mitte der Kårperlånge erreichend. Ringmuskulatur auf die Siphonen
beschrånkt. Endocarpen nicht vorhanden.
Branchialtentakel 32, abwechselnd mehr oder weniger
verschieden gross, stellenweise die benachbarten nur sehr wenig
verschieden. Gråssere Tentakel mit Fiederung 2. Ordnung an
den gråsseren Fiedern 1. Ordnung. Die Tentakelståmme und die
375
groåsseren, in 2. Ordnung wieder befiederten Fiedern 1. Ordnung
sind breit såbelfårmig, die Anhånge letzter Ordnung sind plump
stummelfårmig. Die Anordnung der Fiedern ist aussergewåhnlich;
die 1. Ordnung bilden nicht, wie es das Gewohnliche ist, jeder-
seits am Tentakelstamm eine einfache, regelmåssige Zeile, sondern,
nicht ganz regelmåssig alternierend, 2 Zeilen jederseits, die distal
K
af.
Fig. 4.
Fig. 3.
Fig. 3. Cftenicella sluiteri n. sp. (Typus). Weichkårper, a von der linken Seite, Darm
und linker Geschlechtsapparat durchschimmernd, b von der rechten Seite, Niere und
rechter Geschlechtsapparat durchschimmernd; at. — ÅAtrialsipho,
br. = Branchialsipho; 4/1.
Fig. 4. Cftenicella sluiteri n. sp., Flimmerorgan; 27/1.
verschmelzen. Jeder Tentakel besitzt also an der Basis und in
den mittleren Teilen 4 Fiederzeilen. Die Fiedern der dem Innen-
rande des Tentakels nåher gelegenen Zeile sind im allgemeinen
kleiner als die der Aussenzeile und nur selten wieder in 2. Ord-
nung gefiedert, meist nur stummelfårmige Anhånge letzter Ord-
nung. Eine gewisse Unregelmåssigkeit kommt auch dadurch
zustande, dass die Gråsse der Fiedern nicht regelmåssig gegen
die Spitze des Tentakels abnimmt. Die gråssten Fiedern stehen
nicht an der Basis des Tentakels, sondern mehr in seiner mittle-
ren Strecke, und sind vielfach mit betråchtlich kleineren bezw.
stummelfårmigen nachbarlich vergesellschaftet.
Flimmerorgan (Textfig. 4) mit fragezeichenfårmigem bezw.
spiegelbildlich S-formigem Flimmergrubenspalt.
Kiemensack annåhernd symmetrisch gestaltet, dorsal sehr stark
verkiirzt, jederseits mit 7 stark vorspringenden, basal etwas vereng-
ten, zum Teil fast råhrenartigen Falten. Zahl der inneren
Långsgefåsse an den Falten gering. Intermediåre innere Långs-
gefåsse auf den Faltenzwischenråumen fehlen gånzlich. Die Falten
Sm6
und VII neben Dorsalfalte und Endostyl sind etwas kleiner, VII
zumal in ihren hinteren und mittleren Teilen, I zumal an beiden
Enden. Die Långsgefåsse sitzen meist an der nach aussen
gekehrten ventralen Oberseite der Falten, nur das zu åusserst
dorsal gestellte ist etwas iiber die First der Falte hinaus auf deren
dorsale Unterseite geriickt; dieses am weitesten dorsal gelegene
Långsgefåss ist auch etwas schmåler als die ubrigen. Ich fand
an der rechten Kiemensack-Seite des Originalstiickes folgende
Anordnung der inneren Långsgefåsse auf den Falten:
D. 0 (2—3) 0 (3—4) 0 (4) 0 (4) 0 (4) 0 (4) 0 (2—3) E.
Die hinteren Enden der Falten bilden nackte, scharfkantige
Faltenstiele, deren Kante sehr wenige, håchstens 2, stumpfwinklige
oder seltener spitzwinklige Vorspringe zeigt. Ein Zusammenhang
dieser Vorspringe mit den Hinterenden der verschwindenden
Långsgefåsse war nicht deutlich erkennbar.
Quergefåsse im allgemeinen abwechselnd verschieden gross,
mehr oder weniger regelmåssig nach dem Schemn 1, 4, 3, 4, 2,
4, 3, 4, 1 angeordnet, stellenweise Ordnungen 3 und 4 gleich
stark,;” sodass' "das Schema”sich" in ISIS ES NEMESIS NES REE Dan
dert. Die Quergefåsse 4. bezw. 3. Ordnung werden stellenweise
parastigmatisch. Quergefåsse 1. und 2. Ordnung innen gesåumt,
in der Regel streng radiår (quer) verlaufend. Kiemenspalten
typisch Czenicella-artig, meist lang, wenig gebogen und parallel
den Falten gestellt, zu windungsreichen Spiralen zusammen gestellt.
Die breiten Grundteile der Spirale bilden je eine Bogenreihe in
den Faltenzwischenråumen, wåhrend ihre zweigeteilten Kuppen
dorsalwårts in die Faltenhohlråume hineinragen. Einmal nahm der
Grundteil eines Kiemenspalten - Trichters die doppelte normale
Långe ein, wie wenn er aus zwei verschmolzenen Trichtern be-
stånde; dieser abnorm grosse Trichter war 2 mal geteilt, wies also
4 Kuppen auf. Zwischen den Endostyl und die in und ventral
von Falte VII gelegene Trichterreihe schiebt sich noch eine Wan-
dungspartie ein, deren Kiemenspalten eine unregelmåssige Anord-
nung in Flåchenspiralen, also eine molguloide Anordnung, aufweisen.
Dorsalfalte (Textfig. 5) glatt, diinn, mit regelmåssig zuge-
schnittenem Rande, der mehrere, iiber die mittleren und hinteren
Teile ungleichmåssig verteilte Vorspringe bezw. Lappen aufweist.
Diese Vorspringe stellen schråg nach hinten ragende schlanke,
ig
377
am freien Ende gerundete, aus breiter konvexer Basis hervor-
gehende Zipfel dar. Ich zåhlte 6 derartige Vorspringe; doch war
das hintere Ende der Dorsalfalte nicht ganz intakt und der vordere
Teil so stark seitlich geschlångelt und dazu nach rechts hin. auf-
gerollt, dass sich nicht sicher feststellen liess, ob an diesen Teilen
Fig. 5. Ctenicella sluiteri n. sp. Umriss des hinteren Teils der Dorsalfalte; %/1,
noch weitere Vorspriinge vorkommen. Das nåher untersuchte
junge Tier zeigte annåhernd die gleiche Zahl und Anordnung der
inneren Långsgefåsse auf den Falten des Kiemensackes; doch ist
bei ihm die Zahl der Kiemenspalten viel geringer. Die Anordnung
der Kiemenspalten ist bei ihm wie bei dem Typus der Art die
charakteristische Cztenicella-Anordnung. An einem bei der schwie-
rigen freihåndigen Pråparation zur Ansicht gelangten Stiick der
Dorsalfalte zeigte diese die typische Zåhnelung der Cé. sluiteri.
Darm (Textfig- 3 a) eine fast halbkreisfåormig gebogene, fast
in ganzer Långe eng geschlossene, nur am Wendepol etwas klaf-
fende Schleife bildend, deren Wendepol-Ende nicht deutlich
ibergebogen ist. Magen nicht deutlich erweitert und abgesetzt,
an der Konvexitåt der Schleifenkriimmung mit dick polsterfårmigem,
nach unten iiberhångendem Leberbelag. Gestaltung des Afters
nicht mehr erkennbar.
Niere (Textfig. 3 5) an der rechten Kårperseite in måssig
weiter Entfernung von der ventralen Medianlinie, fast rechteckig
mit etwas abgerundeten Ecken, ungefåhr doppelt so lang wie breit,
an der Ventralseite sehr schwach konvex, an der Dorsalseite fast
geradlinig, kaum merklich konkav. Bei dem jungen Stiick ebenso
gestaltet. 2
Geschlechtsorgane (Textfig. 3 a u. b) jederseits ein Zwit-
terapparat. Ovarium wurstfårmig, etwas unregelmåssig gekrummt,
mit zarthåutigem, kurz-stummelfårmigem freien Eileiter am dista-
len Ende. Hode bestehend aus mehrfach- und locker-verzweigten
Hodenschlåuchen mit End-Åsten, die wenig långer als breit sind;
sie umgibt das åusserste distale Ende des Ovariums wie ein un-
378
regelmåssiger, breiter traubiger Besatz. Der Verlauf des Samen-
leiters liess sich nicht feststellen. Der rechtsseitige Geschlechts-
apparat liegt so, dass die proximale Kante des Hodenbesatzes an
die Dorsalseite der Niere ståsst, wåhrend das Ovarium sich in
kniefårmiger Biegung nach vorn und unten erstreckt. Der links-
seitige Geschlechtsapparat liegt so, dass sich die Hode in die distale
Hilfte der Darmschleifen-Bucht einschmiegt, wåhrend das Ovarium
sich in S-formiger Krimmung nach vorn hin erstreckt, am Wende-
pol der Darmschleife dicht entlang streichend.
Erorterung: Cz. sluiteri schliesst sich in Hinsicht des Fehlens
intermediårer innerer Långsgefåsse des Kiemensackes an die neu-
seelåndische Gruppe der CZ. mortenseni (siehe die Erorterung dieser,
oben, p. 373!) an, weicht aber durch den Besitz einer gezåhnten
Dorsalfalte von diesen sowie von der australischen Cz. martensi
Traustsab:
Gen. Paramolgula Traust.
Paramolgula filholi (Piz.)
1898 a, Molgula filholi nom. nud., Pizon, Rev. Tun. Mus. (Molgulid),
pr212:
1898 b, Molgula filholi Pizon, Ét. Molgulid. Mus. Paris, p. 347, Taf.
XII Fig: 15; Taf XV Fig 475:
1900, Molgula inversa Sluiter, Tunic. Stillen Ozean, p. 32.
1909, Caesira filholi + C. inversa, Hartmeyer, Tunic.; in Bronn,
KINOrdnstierrsk pl s2S:
1914, Molgula inversa, Hartmeyer, Diagn. Molgulid. Berlin. Mus., p.
IeTertis FÅS:
Fundangaben: Neuseeland, Sid-Insel, Queen Char-
lotte-Sund, 3—10 Fd.; 19.—20. Jan. 1915.
Stewart-Insel Port Pegasus, "car 25EFds:H20SNovsN os
Halfmoon-Bucht, an der Kiisste; 19. Nov. 1914.
Aite Angaben: Neuseeland, Sid-Insel, French Passage
(nach Sluiter); Stewart=-Insel (nach PiZon):.
Von 3 verschiedenen Fundstellen stammen einige Molguliden,
die zweifellos der Molgula filholi Pizon zugeordnet werden miissen.
Es liegen 2 dieser Fundstellen, wie die der Originale Pizon's,
an der kleinen Stewart-Insel. Die Stiicke dieser Fundstellen kån-
nen figlich als Lokaltypen angesprochen werden. Ich stelle zu-
nåchst fest, dass wir es hier mit einer Art der Gattung Paramol-
gula zu tun haben. Dem stellt sich auch nichts in der Beschrei-
379
bung Pizon's ernstlich entgegen. Pizon sagt zwar an einer
Stelle bei der Schilderung des Kiemensackes (l. c. 1898 b, p.
SAG) mm Eridiens 2 coupés par cinq cåtes longitudinales",.
Dass deren Zahl an anderer Stelle (in der Diagnose, p. 344) als
»Six" angegeben wird, ist ein weiterer Schreib- oder Druckfehler.
Keinenfalls kann Pizon hiermit innere Långsgefåsse, die ja nicht
die Falten schneiden, gemeint haben, die er ja als ,lamesf zu
bezeichnen pflegt (z. B. p. 389, Erklårung zu Fig. 3 der Taf. XIII:
Slamesmparalleles: LIE? LSE);
Als Synonym von P. filholi ist Molgula inversa Sluit. aufzu-
fuhren, deren Originalstick mir von Prof. Schauinsland zur
Untersuchung anvertraut wurde, und dessen Fundort, French Pas-
sage, dem einen Fundort der Paramolgula filholi, Queen Charlotte-
Sund, nahe liegt. Molgula inversa, deren Original auch von Hart-
meyer nachuntersucht worden ist, soll nach den Angaben Sluiter's
wie Hartmeyer's einen Charakter besitzen, der, falls tatsåchlich
vorhanden, sie aus der Gattung Paramolgula ausschliessen wirde;
sie soll nåmlich je 2 innere Långsgefåsse auf den Falten des
Kiemensackes tragen, zu denen nach Hartmeyer gelegent-
lich noch ein drittes hinzutrete. Eine sichere Entscheidung iber
die Verhåltnisse der inneren Långsgefåsse am Kiemensack ist
wegen der Eigenart dieser Organe bei der in Rede stehenden
Form nur nach Untersuchung an Querschnitten durch den Kiemen-
sack zu treffen. Bei der Bedeutsamkeit der Frage setzte ich mich
deshalb iiber museale Bedenken hinweg und zerlegte einen Teil
des Kiemensackes vom Original der Molgula inversa in Quer-
schnitte, was Sluiter und Hartmeyer zur måglichsten Erhaltung
des Originalstiickes glaubten unterlassen zu sollen. Es ergab sich,
dass M. inversa auch in diesem Punkte durchaus mit Paramolgula
filholi ubereinstimmt (Eingehende Schilderung siehe unten !).
Als nåchste Verwandte der P. filholi ist P. chilensis Hartmr.”)
von Calbuco in Sid-Chile anzusprechen und im folgenden vielfach
zum Vergleich heranzuziehen. Sie unterscheidet sich von P. filholi
anscheinend nur durch die Stellung des Flimmergruben-
spaltes und die Form des Afterrandes, vielleicht auch durch
die Gestalt der Niere.
1) R. Haårtmeyer, 1914, Diagn. Molgulid. Berlin. Mus., p. 18, Textfig. 7, 8.
380
Im folgenden gebe ich eine die friiheren Beschreibungen
ergånzende Schilderung der P. filholi nach meinem reicheren Mate-
rial, dabei vor allem auch auf manche Variabilitåtsverhåltnisse hin-
weisend.
Beschreibung: Gestalt lang- oder kurz-eifårmig bis fast kugelig.
Åussere Siphonen verhåltnismåssig dicht bei einander.
Entfernung zwischen ihnen etwas variabel, z. B. bei einem Stiick
von Halfmoon-Bucht ungefåhr so klein, wie sie Hartmeyer fir
P:" chilensis <abbildet (LC I1914 Text 7 Hund SYN bel kanderen
zumal kleineren Sticken, z. B. von Queen Charlotte-Sund, etwas
grosser; etwa so, wie Pizon (17318983 TAX V Fjot ES)Este
fir MSfilholi, Hartmeyer (Fe O EET ER ÆRES NES TE RENEE
M. inversa abbildet. Die åusseren Siphonen sind offenbar etwas
hervorstreckbar. Manchmal sind sie kaum erhaben, manchmal
deutlich vorragend, allerdings bei meinem Material in keinem Falle
so stark wie bei dem von Pizon abgebildeten Original. Bei
einem meiner Stiicke sind die beiden Siphonen von einer tiefen
biskuitformigen Furche umfasst, gewissermassen in eine gemein-
same biskuitformige Einsenkung gebettet. Bei anderen Sticken
ist eine solche Einsenkungsfurche undeutlicher oder nur strecken-
weise erkennbar, wenn nicht ganz fehlend. Es handelt sich hier
offenbar um Kontraktionsverschiedenheiten. Dieser Einsenkungs-
furche entsprechen gewisse Muskelsysteme der Leibeswand, die
die inneren Siphonen basal umkreisen.
Korperåffnungen von 6 bezw. 4 mehr oder weniger deut-
lichen, manchmal kaum erkennbaren, manchmal stark erhabenen
Polstern umstellt.
Kårperoberflåche manchmal in ganzer Ausdehnung, selbst
auf den Siphonalpolstern, mit Sand bedeckt oder mit Muschelschalen
und deren Fragmenten, sowie mit åhnlichen Fremdkårpern besetzt,
die, wie es Pizon schildert, meist durch zarte Haftfåden festge-
halten werden. Nur selten ist die Oberflåche in kleineren oder
gråsseren Strecken nackt und rein und von blåulich weisser,
milchiger Fårbung.
Keines meiner Stiicke erreicht an Långe die von Pizon an-
gegebene Maximalgråsse (5 cm); das gråsste ist nur etwa 32 mm
lang. Deutlich ausgebildete Geschlechtsorgane fanden sich schon
bei dem kleinsten der mir vorliegenden Stiicke, dessen Gråssen-
381
verhåltnisse nur 9:7:6 mm betragen. Das Original. der Molgula
inversa ist ein ziemlich junges Stick dieser Art.
Zellulosemantel weich- und zåh-knorpelig, im Schnitt
milchig blåulich weiss, an der Innenflåche schwach perlmutter-
glånzend, im allgemeinen diinn, dorsal måssig dick. Sluiter
bezeichnet den Zellulosemantel des Originals von Molgula inversa
als ,gallertartig”. Das beruht auf einer irrtimlichen Auffassung
des deutschen Wortes (wie in anderen Fållen, z. B. dem der
Pyura pulla, siehke unten!). In der Tat muss es stattdessen heissen:
»Wweich-knorpelig".
Weichkorper nur an den Korperåffnungen fest am Zellulose-
mantel haftend. Innere Siphonen etwas gråsser, schlanker und
deutlicher als die åusseren.
Leibeswand måssig dick, mit zwei von den Siphonen aus-
gehenden Strahlensystemen von ziemlich dicken Långsmuskelbun-
deln, die sowohl rechts wie links bis zur halben Kårperhéhe
hinab zu verfolgen, aber dorsal zwischen den Siphonen unter-
brochen sind, und je einem die Siphonen basal umkreisenden
System kråftiger Ringmuskeln.
Branchialtentakel einen dicken, wolligen Kranz um die
Branchialoffnung bildend, mit wohl ausgebildeter, reicher Fiederung
3 Ordnung, wie bei P. chilensis.
Flimmerorgan bei 2 nåher untersuchten Sticken genau
der Schilderung Hartmeyer's entsprechend: Flimmergrubenspalt
herzformig mit eingebogenen Hårnern; Offnung zwischen den
Hørnern schråg nach hinten und etwas nach links gewandt. Diese
recht ungewohnliche Stellung des Flimmergrubenspaltes mit nach
hinten gerichteter Offnung der Figur bildet einen der hauptsåch-
lichen Unterschiede von P. chilensis, bei der diese Offnung schråg
nach vorn und etwas nach rechts gewandt ist.
Kiemensack typisch Paramolgula-artig, mit jederseits 7 kråf-
tigen, je einer Kiemensack-Falte entsprechenden inneren Långs-
gefåssen. Da diese Bildung an Durchsichtsflåchenpråparaten nicht
deutlich zu erkennen war, so habe ich sowohl vom Kiemensack
eines lokaltypischen Stiickes von der Stewart-Insel sowie auch
von dem des Originals von Molgula inversa Querschnitte (Textfig.
6) angefertigt und an beiden gleicherweise folgendes Verhalten
nachgewiesen: Es wird tatsåchlich eine Falte durch ein einziges,
382
kråftiges inneres Långsgefåss markiert. Dieses Långsgefåss sitzt
mit sehr schmaler Basis auf der First der selbst im Håchstfalle
nur måssig stark erhabenen Kiemensack-Falte. Dicht oberhalb
der schmalen Basis verbreitert sich das Långsgefåss einerseits
gegen die Ventralseite, hier einen
e mehr oder weniger schmalen, ven-
O tralwårts uberragenden Wall bildend
'Textfig. 6 bei "); andererseits zieht
Ø es sich dorsalwårts in eine breit-
bandformige Hauptmasse aus, deren
ae? Rand in ganzer Långe nach innen
(gegen die Wanderung des Kiemen-
sackes) eingerollt ist, so wie nach
& HartmeyerbeiPEchlensisseRn=
NO folge von Schrumpfung entstehen
(D) an der konvexen Seite des breiten
K Å Bandes fast stets einzelne mehr
O) oder weniger scharf ausgeprågte
Långsfurchen. Bei der Betrachtung
me 5 Piramelsule flkoi Pin) eines durchsichtigen Flchenpråpa-
mensackes des Originalstuckes von rats macht es ganZz den Eindruck,
eee als rage von der schmalen Basis
trale Vorwålbung des Långsgefåsses, einerseits ein schmåleres Långsge-
GER Eee zweites — fiiss ventralwårts (jener ventralwårts
gerichtete Verbreiterungswall), wåh-
rend andererseits ein breiteres Långsgefåss dorsalwårts iiberhånge.
Der durchschimmernde, der dorsalen Basalkante nahe kommende
Innenrand der Einrollung verstårkt noch die Tåuschungsmåglichkeit,
insofern er den Aussenrand einer gesonderten Basis des anschei-
nend dorsalen Långsgefåsses vorspiegelt. Auch einzelne Schrump-
fungslångsfurchen an der Konvexseite des Långsgefåsses machen an
solchem durchsichtigen Flåchenpråparat leicht den Eindruck von
Grenzen besonderer Långsgefåsse. Im wåbrigen entspricht der Bau
des Kiemensackes der ausfihrlichen Schilderung Pizon's; doch ist
bei meinem Untersuchungsobjekt die Zahl der kleinen intermedi-
åren Spiralen nicht so gross, wie Pizon meldet und abbildet, eine
Abweichung, die sich ungezwungen durch die geringere Gråsse
383
meines Untersuchungsobjektes erklårt. Es nåhert sich mehr den
Angaben Sluiter's und Hartmeyer's iiber Molgula inversa.
Beståtigen kann ich Pizon's Angabe, dass die Kiemenspalten der
Trichter teils zu einfachen, teils zu doppelten Spiralen mit zwei
in einander gehakelten Kiemenspalten im Zentrum zusammengestellt
sind. Zu erwåhnen ist noch, dass der Rand zwischen zwei Haupt-
trichtern auf der Mitte der Faltenzwischenråume nicht immer durch
intermediåre kleine Spiralen besetzt ist, sondern vielfach einfache
lange, gerade gestreckte Kiemenspalten aufweist, die in Molgulina-
artiger Anordnung zusammen gestellt sind. (Auf keiner der Figuren
Pizon's ist ein solcher Ubergangsraum zur Darstellung gelangt).
Darm den Darstellungen und Abbildungen Pizon's und den
ausfuhrlicheren Hartmeyer's von M. inversa entsprechend. Der
Afterrand ist bei einem nåher untersuchten Stiick in 5 Lappen
zerschlitzt, von denen 4 verhåltnismåssig schmal und gerundet
sind, wåhrend der finfte ungefåhr doppelt so breit und mehr ge-
rade gerandet ist. Dieser breitere Lappen entspricht der glattran-
digen Lippe der Hartmeyer'schen Darstellung, wåhrend die 4
schmåleren zusammen die in eine Anzahl rundlicher Låppchen
aufgelåsste Lippe bilden. P. chilensis unterscheidet sich durch
einen glattrandigen After von P. filholi. Die Leber ist ein dick-
polsterformiger Belag, der nicht nur die Hinterseite des Magens
bedeckt, sondern auch seine rechte Flanke, und, abwårts ragend,
sogar den an den Magen eng angeschmiegten Enddarm etwas
mit iiberdeckt. Die Oberflåche des Leberpolsters zeigt viele den-
dritische gråbere und netzfårmige feinere Furchen. Die Maschen
des feineren Furchennetzes werden von den Leberlåppchen ausge-
fullt, die stark polsterformig erhaben, zum Teil sogar basal etwas
verengt sind. Ihre Gestalt ist dick kolbenfårmig bis bohnenfårmig,
im Durchschnitt etwa 0,3 mm lang und 0,2 mm dick. Der Leber-
belag ist verhåltnismåssig kurz und scheint besser der Abbildung
Hartmeyer's von M. inversa (1. c., Textfig. 4) als der Pizon's
von M. filholi zu entsprechen.
Die Niere entspricht im wesentlichen der Angabe und Ab-
bildung Hartmeyer's von der Niere der M. inversa. Auch bei mei-
nen Untersuchungsobjekten (2 Stiicke darauf hin untersucht!) ist
das ventrale Ende schmåler als das dorsale, wenn auch nicht ge-
384
rade zugespitzt, wie bei dem Hartmeyer'schen Objekt. Ob in
dieser Gestaltung ein wesentlicher Unterschied gegen P. chilensis
liegt, lasse ich dahingestellt.
Die Geschlechtsorgane sind in gewissen Hinsichten etwas
variabel, zunåchst in ihrer Lage. Bei manchen meiner Objekte
stossen sie rechterseits fast an die Niere, linkerseits ganz an die
Darmschleife, wie es den Angaben und Abbildungen Pizon's
von M. filholi, sowie denen Hartmeyer's von P. chilensis ent-
snricht; bei anderen sind sie von der Niere bezw. der Darmschleife
durch einen mehr oder weniger breiten, manchmal recht betråcht-
lichen Zwischenraum getrennt, wie es Hartmeyer's Angaben und
Abbildungen von M. inversa entspricht. Hier liegt mutmasslich
eine Wachstumserscheinung, wenn nicht eine echte Variabilitåt, vor.
In der inneren Struktur variieren sie insofern, als die Hode eine
verschieden starke Ausbildung zeigt. Bei manchen Sticken iiber-
deckt sie fast das ganze Ovarium an der in den Peribranchialraum
hineinragenden Seite, nur ihr distales Ende frei lassend, bei anderen
(seltener) bedeckt sie kaum mehr als den proximalen Pol des Ova-
riums und angrenzende Teile seiner Flanken. Die ausgewachsenen
Eizellen sind durchschnittlich etwa 0,12 mm dick. Das Ova-
rium enthålt eine undeutliche, anscheinend unregelmåssig spaltfår-
migeOvarialhéhle, die sich vor dem distalen Ende aus der Achsen-
partie gegen die Basis hinzieht und distal durch einen kegelformi-
gen Eileiter, der auf dem distalen Pol des Ovariums sitzt, aus-
mindet. Die Hode besteht aus ein- oder zweimal dichotomisch
gegabelten, etwa 0,12 mm dicken Hodenschliåuchen, deren Blind-
pole die Oberflåche der Hode bilden, wåhrend sie andererseits
radial gegen das Ovarium gestelit sind. Ihre Sonderausfuhrgånge
vereinen sich zu einem verhåltnismåssig umfangreichen, diinnhåu-
tigen Samenleiter, der zunåchst zwischen Hode und Ovarium
distalwårts verlåuft, vorn unter der Hode hervortritt und nun ober-
flåchlich am Ovarium, aber umhiillt von dem gemeinsamen Håut-
chen des Geschlechtsorganes, entlang zieht, um schliesslich dicht
hinter dem Eileiter durch ein schmal-papillenformiges Endstiick
auszuminden. Der Samenleiter verlåuft nicht genau kulminal auf
dem Ovarium, sondern etwas zur Seite geriickt, fast auf deren
Flanke.
Geographische Beziehungen: Die Gattung Paramolgula erschien
385
bisher ganz auf den magalhaensisch-chilenischen Bezirk
(Sudliches Ostpatagonien, Falkland-Inseln, Feuerland, Magalhaens-
Strasse und Siid-Chile bei Calbuco, ungefåhr 42? siidl. Br.) be-
schrånkt, in dem sie durch eine Anzahl verschiedener Arten ver-
treten ist. Durch die Zuordnung von P. filholi erweitert sich ihr
Gebiet quer iiber den sidlichen Pazifischen Ozean bis nach Neu-
seeland. Die offenbar nahe Verwandtschaft zwischen der neu-
seelåndisehen P. filholi und der chilenischen P. chilensis spricht
fir eine unmittelbare geographische Beziehung iiber den kleineren
pazifischen Kreisbogen zwischen Neuseeland und Sidamerika, ver-
mittelt durch den kråftigen Meeresstrom der Westwind-Trift. Da
die Gattung in dem gråsseren atlantisch-indisch-australischen Kreis-
bogen, der gråsstenteils (z. B. Kerguelen) sehr gut durchforscht
ist, anscheinend ganz fehlt, so miissen wir Neuseeland als das ur-
springlichere Gebiet dieser Gattung ansprechen, von dem aus sie
sich ostwårts verbreitete, um sich dann im chilenisch-magalhaensi-
schen Gebiet ippiger zu entfalten. Dieser Auffassung entsprechen
auch die anscheinend ursprunglicheren, in gewissen Hinsichten
noch an Molgulina erinnernden Strukturverhåltnisse (Einfachheit
und Zartheit des Kiemensackes, Kiemenspalten - Anordnung
zwischen zwei Faltentrichtern einer Zone).
Fam. Pyuridae.
Gen. Pyura Mol.
Pyura pulla (Sluit.)
1900, Cynthia pulla Sluiter, Tunic. Stillen Ocean, p. 28, Taf. V Fig.
1909, ke RE Hartmeyer, Tunic.; in : Bronn, Kl. Ordn. Tierr.,
p. 1341.
Fundangaben: Neuseeland, Nordinsel, vor New Ply-
mouth, 8 Fd.; 12. Jan. 1915; Wellington, Hafen, ca. 5—10
Ed IGEEFebr LOTS:
Neuseeland, Sid-Insel, Queen Charlotte-Sund, 3—10
Fd.; 19.—20. Jan. 1915.
Skewarfelnsel 20 Ed: ; 16: "Noto:
Alte Angabe: Neuseeland, Sid-Insel, Selwyn Cty.,
Sumner (nach Sluiter).
Vidensk. Meddel. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 73 25
386
Mir liegen mehrere Stiicke einer Pyura mit der geringen Zahl
von 5 Falten jederseits am Kiemensack zur Untersuchung vor,
die in der åusseren Tracht eine grosse Verschiedenheit zeigen.
Trotz dieser Verschiedenheit, die wohl weniger als echte Variabi-
litåt, denn als eine durch åussere Einfliisse hervorgerufene Stand-
orts-Verschiedenheit aufzufassen ist, miissen all diese Stiicke einer
und derselben Art zugeordnet werden, und zwar der Pyura pulla
(Sluit.). Dank der Liebenswiirdigkeit Prof. Schauinsland's
kennte ich mein Material mit den Bruchsticken eines Sluiter-
schen Originals vergleichen und will hier vorweg bemerken, dass
Sluiter's Angabe iber den Zellulosemantel einer irrtiimlichen
Auffassung unseres Wortes ,gallertig” entspringt. Zutreffend wåre
die Bezeichnung ,Wweich-knorpelig".
Die Kårpergestalt ist bei freier Ausbildung hoch- und breit-
kahnformig, dorsal abgeflacht, ventral gewålbt, manchmal aber
auch mehr eiférmig oder viel unregelmåssiger gestaltet, zumal bei
zusammen gewachsenen oder eingeklemmten Stiicken. Åussere
Siphonen sind kaum ausgebildet, beeinflussen jedenfalls nicht
merklichtdie åussere nt Gestalt Die KO berflåeheRistese hver
schiedenartig gebildet, manchmal durch Inkrustation mit Sand und
anderen Fremdkårpern ganz verschleiert, manchmal fast nackt und
rein, dann von gelblich brauner bis schwarzer Fårbung. Die
Oberflåche ist vielfach, zumal dorsal, aber auch vorn, hinten und
an den Flanken, mit mehr oder weniger grossen Hervorragungen
besetzt, die besonders bei nicht inkrustierten Sticken stark, bei
inkrustierten Tieren kaum ausgebildet sind oder wenigstens in dem
dichten Sandbelag nicht so hervortreten. Besonders stark ausge-
bildet waren diese Hervorragungen bei einigen ziemlich grossen
nackten Stiicken von etwa 40 mm Långe. Bei diesen zeigen sie
sich als schlank zwiebelformige oder hornfårmige Aufsåtze, die
eine Långe von 7 mm bei einer basalen Dicke von 4 mm erreichen.
Bei dem gråssten mir vorliegenden nackten Stiick von 50 mm Långe
waren diese Hervorragungen viel kleiner, spårlicher und unregel-
måssiger gestellt. Bei den noch kleineren mit Sand inkrustierten
Sticken sind sie ganz unscheinbar. Bei dem gråssten Stiick
kommt dagegen noch ein sehr unregelmåssiger gerundet platten-
formiger Zellulosemantel-Auswuchs an der Ventralseite hinzu, der
nicht wohl als Stiel angesprochen werden kann.
387
Die Kårperåffnungen stehen måssig weit von einander
entfernt. Die Entfernung zwischen ihnen betrågt etwas weniger
als die Hålfte der Kårperlånge. Sie sind meist ganz unscheinbar,
åusserlich kaum auffindbar; manchmal erkennt man sie an 4 pol-
sterformigen Interradiallappen.
Zellulosemantel hart lederartig, zumal bei nackten Stiicken,
bis knorpelig, zumal bei inkrustierten Sticken, so auch bei dem
mir vorliegenden Originalstuick. Bei diesem ist er åusserlich ziem-
lich hartknorpelig, jedoch nicht eigentlich gallertig. Im Schnitt ist
er grau, an der Innenflåche hell- bis dunkel-grau, bei weichknor-
peliger Konsistenz kaum, bei hårterer Konsistenz stårker perlmut-
terglånzend. i
Der Weichkorper (Textfig. 7) haftet an den Kårperåffnungen
sehr fest, im ubrigen måssig fest am Zellulosemantel. Er besitzt
deutliche, wenn auch nur kurze, stummelfårmige innere Sipho-
nen, die verhåltnismåssig etwas weiter von einander entfernt zu
stehen scheinen als die åusseren Korperéffnungen.
Die Zellulosemantel-Innenauskleidung der Siphonen
zeigt zahlreiche Långsfurchen und in den distalen Teilen einen
dichten Besatz ziemlich grosser, spiessiger Innendorne. Diese
sind im ganzen etwa 75 w lang, wovon etwa 35 w auf den freien
Dorn, etwa 40 uw auf die Basalplatte entfallen. Der freie Dorn ist
schlank, spitzig, ein wenig gebogen, in der basalen Hålfte hohl.
Die Basalplatte ist distal in ziemlich scharfem Absatz stark ver-
breitert. Das ganze Gebilde sieht aus wie ein vorn verbreiterter
gerundeter Spatel, aus dessen Konvexitåt am vorderen Pol ein
schlanker Dorn herauswåchst. Die Innendorne des Branchialsiphos
und des Atrialsiphos sind ganz gleich gebildet.
Leibeswand ziemlich dick, mit besonders dorsal kråftiger
Muskulatur versehen, die beiderseits ungefåhr gleich stark aus-
gebildet ist.
Branchialtentakel nicht ganz regelmåssig nach dem Schema
INSEPÆSE IN oder stellenweise 2 2 verschieden gross,
die gråssten mit wohl ausgebildeter Fiederung 3. Ordnung. An-
hånge letzter Ordnung fingerfårmig, die der Tentakel-Enden deut-
lich vergråssert. Ich zåhlte an einem mittelgrossen Stick 20
Branchialtentakel (Sluiter bei einem mutmasslich gråsseren Stiick 30).
Flimmerorgan bei 2 nåher untersuchten Stiicken der Slui-
25
388
ter'schen Schilderung entsprechend, ebenso der Kiemensack. Ein
nåher untersuchtes Stick zeigte folgende Anordnung der inneren
Långsgefåsse :
ET 6 (18) 3123) 3 (27) PR (27) MOS) IED EOS SK ED) ESKER)
3 (MO) ÆRES) GRER
Bemerkenswert ist, dass die inneren Långsgefåsse frei abra-
gend iiber das Hinterende der Falten hinausgehen und unver-
schmålert gerundet-abgestutzt enden. Die Hinterenden der Kiemen-
sack-Falten sehen infolgedessen bårtig aus.
Darm (Textfig. 7) der"Sluiter'schen'Sehilderunst(I epo
Taf. V Fig. 8) entsprechend, eine schwach gebogene, etwas klaf-
Fig. 7. Pyura pulla (Sluit.) Weichkårper, durch einen ventralmedianen Långs-
schnitt gedffnet und auseinander gebreitet; Kiemensack abpråpariert ; Mundtentakel,
Flimmerorgan, Darm und Geschlechtsapparate freigelegt ; 3/2.
fende, fast bis ans Vorderende nach vorn ragende Schleife bil-
dend. Die Leber ist sehr umfangreich, geht fast bis zur Mitte
der Darmschleife nach vorn und iberdeckt auch grosse Teile des
linksseitigen Geschlechtsapparates und des zuricklaufenden Darm-
schleifen-Astes. Sie besteht, was aus der Sluiter'schen Abbil-
dung nicht ersichtlich ist, aus zwei strukturell verschiedenen Tei-
len. Am cardialen Teil sind die kleinsten, etwa 15 u dicken
Leberzotten zu kleinen Paketen zusammengestellt, die ihrerseits
traubig zusammen hången und so einen ziemlich lockeren Besatz
am Vorderteil des Magens bilden; am pylorischen Teil bilden die
kleinsten Leberzotten einen mehr massigen Besatz, der nur durch
389
wenige Furchen in einige wenige Pakete gesondert ist. Der After-
rand ist kragenfårmig zurickgeschlagen, im allgemeinen glattran-
dig, vielleicht etwas gefaltet, jedenfalls nicht regelmåssig einge-
schnitten und gezåhnt.
Die Geschlechtsorgane (Textfig. 7) bestehen aus unregel-
måssig klumpigen, teils fast kugeligen, teils mehr birnfårmigen
oder plump ovalen zwittrigen Gonadensåckchen, die einem
basal-achsialen Ausfihrstrang eng und ungestielt angewachsen
sind. Am gråsseren rechtsseitigen Geschlechtsapparat, dessen
Achsenstrang måssig stark gebogen ist, stehen zweizeilig nicht
ganz regelmåssig alternierend etwa 17 solcher Gonadensåckchen,
die dem Ausfihrstrang so eng aufgewachsen sind, dass er in ihrem
Bereich ganz verdeckt ist. Auch mit einander sind diese Gona-
densåckchen mehr oder weniger innig verwachsen, gewissermassen
einen Zickzackbalken mit stark angeschwollenen Kniebeugen bil-
dend. Am distalen Ende tritt der strangfårmige (doppelråhrenfår-
mige?) Ausfihrapparat frei hervor, sich stark nach vorn-oben gegen
die Atrialoffnung hinbiegend. Der linksseitige Geschlechtsapparat
ist ganz in die Darmschleife eingebettet. In Anpassung an diesen
schmalen Raum køånnen die zwittrigen Geschlechtssåckchen hier nur
einzeilig liegen. Sie stehen gerade auf dem basalen Ausfihrstrang.
Ihre Anzahl ist weit geringer als die des rechtsseitigen Geschlechts-
apparats. Die Gonadensåckchen werden nicht ganz von den Gonaden
ausgefillit; sie tragen an ihrer freien Oberseite eine Endocarp-artige
Sichutzkappe:
Pyura pachydermatina (Herdm.)
1842 (?), Boltenia pedunculata (err., non Brugiére), Deshayes
[Cuvier], Réægne anim., Mollusques, Atlas, Taf. 124 Fig. 1,
2, 2 a und Tafelerkl.
1873, Boltenia pedunculata, Hutton, Cat. marine Mollusc. New Zea-
land, p. 105.
1878, Boltenia pachydermatina Herdman, Prel. Rep. Tun. Challenger
HEp:81.
1882, Boltenia pachydermatina (part.?, excl. Material angeblich von
Grånland, falls dessen Fundangabe richtig war), Herdman,
Rep. Tunic. Challenger I, p. 89, Taf. VII Fig. 6— 8.
P 1884, Boltenia pachydermatina, v. Drasche, Ub. aussereurop. ein-
facheFAsceidssp: 370; Taf." NET SER af RIE te SPISE 2:
1885, Boltenia pachydermatina (part., excl. Syns våDrasche) Bra
stedt, Ascid. simpl. stille Ocean, p. 25.
390
1892, Boltenia pachydermatina, W att, Struct. Bolt. pachyd., p. 355, Taf.
XXXI—XXXIV.
1899, Boltenia pachydermatina, Herdman, Descr. Cat. Tun. Austral.
Musøiptl0 Tartcynrs Er S:
1905, Boltenia pachydermatina, Michaelsen, Rev. Heller's Ascid.-
Typ., Mus. Godeffr., p. 97.
1908, Boltenia pachydermatina, Michaelsen, Pyurid. (Halocythiid |]
Nat. Mus. Hamburg, p. 233, Taf. II Fig. 26.
1909, Cynthia lutea Sluiter, Tunic. Stillen Ocean, p. 26, Taf. IV Fig.
SAENE Me IESSY
1909, Pyura lutea + P. pachydermatina, Hartmeyer, Tunic.; in:
Bronn, Kl. Ordn. Tierr., p. 1340.
1913, Boltenia pachydermatina, Herdman u.Ridell, Tunic. ,,Thetisf
Exp., p. 875.
Fundaångaben: Neuseeland, Nordinsel, CapeKidnappers
an den Strand geschwemmt; 31. Jan. 1915 (var. spinosissima n. var,).
Neuseelandttsudinsetersum ner ins kyme
Suter leg. (Mus. Hamburg); (ausgewachsene Tiere).
Stewart-Insel, 20 Fd.; 16. Nov. 1914 (ausgewachsenes Tier).
Alte Angaben: Neuseeland, Sidinsel, Canterbury (nach
Herdman):; Chatham-Inseln; Red CHF (acts ker)
Weitere Verbreitung: Sidost-Australien, New South
Wales (nach Herdman); Tasmanien (nach Herdman).
Erorterung: Bevor ich auf die Synonymie dieser Art eingehe,
muss ich auf ihre Beziehung zu einer nahe verwandten Art und
auf eine gewisse Parellelitåt in der Ausbildung der åusseren Gestalt
dieser beiden Arten hinweisen. Ich habe in meinen friheren
Erårterungen.. derselben (1. c. 1905, p. 233) die der Pzpachyder-
matina verwandte Art als Boltenia spinifera (Qu. u. Guim.) (1)
c. 1908: B. spinosa Lapsus fir B. spinifera) bezeichnet und ihr
B. gibbosa Heller sowie B. tuberculata Herdm. als Synonyme
zugeordnet; zugleich stellte ich nach einem Objekt von der Back-
Sstairs Passage eine neue Varietåt dieser Art auf, die ich var. in-
termedia benannte (l. c. 1908, p. 231). Ich bin mittlerweile zu
der Erkenntnis gekommen, dass der Besitz von dicken Stacheln
und Tuberkeln an der Kårperoberflåche nicht ein ausschlaggeben-
der Charakter dieser Art ist, dass demnach die Zuordnung der B.
gibbosa und der B. tuberculata zu der Ascidia spinifera Qu. u.
Gaim., die im wesentlichen auf Grund der Ausstattung mit sol-
chen Zellulosemantel-Stacheln geschah, unsicher ist. Ich halte es
De Gl
391
daher fir ratsam, bei den Erårterungen iber diese Art die eindeu-
tige Art-Bezeichnung ,gibbosa Heller" zu gebrauchen und ihr
die åltere, aber unsichere Art-Bezeichnung ,Ascidia spinifera" Qu.
u. Gaim. als fragliches Synonym zuzuordnen. Pyura gibbosa
(Heller) unterscheidet sich von P. pachydermatina (Herdm.) haupt-
såchlich durch die Gestaltung des Flimmerorganes. Bei P.
gibbosa bildet dasselbe stets zwei seitliche Erhabenheiten oder di-
vergierende Kegel, auf denen der Flimmergrubenspalt in je einer ent-
sprechend dem Alter des Tieres mehr oder weniger windungs-
reichen Spirale verlåuft. Bei P. pachydermatina ist dagegen das
Flimmerorgan ein kreisrundes oder ovales Polster, auf dem der
Flimmergrubenspalt anfangs eine einheitliche, anscheinend geschlos-
sene Figur bildet, die im Laufe des Wachstums sich durch Schlei-
fenbildung zunåchst unregelmåssig sternfårmig und dann durch
spåteres Abspalten der Schleifen kompliziert mehrteilig wird, um
schliesslich ein fast spongidses Aussehen zu gewinnen. Die beiden
grundverschiedenen Formen des Flimmerorganes gestatten eine
scharfe Sonderung dieser beiden Formen als Arten, und auch die
geographische Verbreitung ist fir diese Artsonderung
charakteristisch. Im neuseelåndischen Gebiet sind unter den vielen
Untersuchungsobjekten bisher nur solche mit P. pachydermatina-
Flimmerorgan beobachtet worden. Das P. gibbosa-Flimmerorgan
wurde andererseits nur bei australischen Objekten nachgewiesen.
Im Gebiet von New South Wales — sicher nachgewiesen ledig-
lich in diesem — kommen beide Formen neben einander vor.
Ob auch das siidaustralische Gebiet beide Formen neben einander
beherbergt, wie ich friiher annahm, als ich Ascidia spinifera Qu.
u. Gaim. der Pyura gibbosa zuordunete, ist fraglich. Sicher nach-
gewiesen ist in ihm nur P. gibbosa.
P. gibbosa kommt in zwei der åusseren Gestaltung nach sehr
verschiedenen Formen vor. Die eine, f. typica, ist durch Besitz
von Håckern und gerundet kegelfårmigen bis fast dick-hornartigen
Erhabenheiten auf der Oberflåche des Kopfes — so bezeichne ich
der Kirze halber den eigentlichen Kårper im Gegensatz zum Stiel
— ausgezeichnet. Bei der anderen Form, var. intermedia Michbz
hat der Kopf eine nur durch wenige, jederseits 2. oder 3, Långs-
wiilste bezw. Långsfurchen mehr oder weniger uneben gemachte
Oberfliche. Selbst kleine und junge Personen, die dem Original-
392
objekt, einer grossen langgestielten Person (mutmasslich dem Mut-
tertier) stiellos aufgewachsen sind, zeigen keine Spur von tuber-
kulosen Erhabenheiten. Eine åhnliche Verschiedenheit zeigt P.
pachydermatina. Auch bei dieser Art finden sich Stiicke mit glatter,
nur durch einige wenige Långsfurchen bezw. Långswilste uneben
gemachter Kopfoberflåche und solche mit stacheliger Kopfober-
flåche (Textfig. 8). Nach Watt (1. c. 1892) soll diese Verschie-
denheit lediglich auf verschie-
denen Altersstufen beruhen,
insofern die Bestachelung des
Kopfes junger Personen mit
dem Alter und Gråssenwachs-
tum sich allmåhlich ausebnet
und schliesslich ganz verliert.
So einfach ist die Sache nun
aber nach meinen Befunden
an einem reichen und, was
bedeutsamer ist, von verschie-
denen Fundorten stammenden
Material sicherlich nicht.
Leider sagt Watt nichts uber
den Fundort und den Charak-
ter des Standorts seines Mate-
rials. Besonders lehrreich ist
Fig. 8. Pyura pachydermatina (Herdm.)var. eine Vergleichung zweier mir
spinosissima, n. var. von Cape Kidnappers. 2 z
Kopfe. a einer von der rechten Seite, b einer vorliegender Sammlungsnum-
von der Rickenseite; at. = Atrialåffnung, mern von verschiedenen
br. = Branchialåffnung : 1/1.
Fundorten. Die eine Num-
mer besteht, abgesehen von einigen einzelnen Tieren, aus zwei
Aggregationen, deren eine aus ungefåhr 100 Personen besteht,
wåhrend die andere aus etwa 30 Personen zusammengesetzt ist,
beide bei Cape Kidnappers von Th. Mortensen am Strande an-
geschwemmt gefunden. Die Personen dieser Aggregationen sind
von recht verschiedener Gråsse; die Långe der Kåpfe schwankt
von 10 bis 60 mm. Die Kåopfe (Textfig. 8) såmtlicher Personen,
die der kleinsten sowie die der gråssten, sind stark- und. dicht-
bestachelt. An einem mittelgrossen Stiick zåhlte bezw. schåtzte
ich die Zahl dieser meist schlank kegelfårmigen, zum Teil an der
393
Basis etwas miteinander verwachsenen Stacheln als weit iber
100, etwa 130. Die Zahl der Stacheln ist also betråchtlich gråsser
als bei dem von Watt abgebildeten stark bestachelten Stick (l.
c. 1892, Tafel XXXI Fig. 3), an dem man an der einen, sichtbaren
Seite einschliesslich der Profilkante deren 33 zihlt, das also mut-
masslich weniger als 66 Stacheln besass. Eine Abnahme der Be-
stachelung ist selbst bei der gråssten Person dieser Aggregation
von Cape Kidnappers nicht zu erkennen. Diesen Aggregationen
stehen einige andere mit zusammen 20 Personen von einem an-
deren Fundort (genauere Angabe ausser ,,Neuseeland" fehlt) gegen-
uber. Auch die Gråsse dieser Personen schwankt betråchtlich ;
ihre Kåpfe messen in Långe 10 bis 20 mm und zeigen såmtlich
ungefåhr die bekannte typische Gestalt der ausgewachsenen P.
pachydermatina-Kopfe, die gleiche Ausbildung der charakteristischen
Långsfurchen bezw. -wiilste bei sonst fast glatter Oberflåche. Nur
einige wenige, im Håchstfalle etwa 10, kleine, auf der First ge-
wisser Långswiilste stehende warzenformige Erhabenheiten mit
rauherer Kuppe erinnern an die Bestachelung der anderen Form.
Hieraus geht hervor, dass die Bestachelung des Kopfes nicht ein
allgemeiner Charakter der zu dieser Art gerechneten jiingeren Per-
sonen ist, und dass die Personen gleichen Standorts in recht weiten
Wachstumsgrenzen (10—60 bezw. 10—20 mm Kopflånge) gleich-
artig gebildet sind, stark bestachelt oder stachellos (die wenigen
Wårzchen kånnen kaum als Stacheln angesprochen werden). Dieser
Feststellung entsprechen auch die Beobachtungen an anderen Ob-
jekten, so an einer Aggregation der f. typica, die aus 2 Riesen-
sticken und 2 ebenso glattkåpfigen ganz kleinen Personen besteht.
Die gleichen Verhåltnisse — d. i. Gleichartigkeit der Oberflåchen-
gestaltung des Kopfes bei ausgewachsenen Riesenstucken und den
ihnen aggregierten kleinen Sticken — finden wir bei dem Origi-
nalmaterial der P. gibbosa (He1l1,) var. intermedia Mich. sowie
bei der von v. Drasche abgebildeten Aggregation seiner P.
pachydermatina (= P. gibbosa?) (1. c. 1884, Taf. I Fig. 1). Die
Frage, ob die stachellosen grossen Formen zum Teil aus bestachel-
ten Jugendformen hervorgegangen seien, muss ich im Gegensatz
zu Watt nach dem mir vorliegenden Material verneinen. In keinem
der mir vorliegenden vielen Sammlungsnummern sowie der erwåhn-
ten Literaturquellen ist ein glattkåpfiges Stick so mit einer be-
394
stachelten Form verwachsen oder vergesellschaftet, dass man ihre
Zusammengehårigkeit aus der Standortsgemeinschaft vermuten kånnte.
Låge nicht die gegenteilige Aussage Watts vor, so wirde ich
ohne weiteres annehmen, dass die glattkåpfigen ausgewachsenen
Personen aus ebenso oder fast ebenso glattkåpfigen jugendlichen
hervorgegangen seien, und dass die bestachelte Form wahrscheinlich
iiberhaupt nicht weit iber 60 mm Kopflånge hinauswichse, also
nicht in nåherer Beziehung zu glattkåpfigen grossen Personen
stinde. Da Watt nichts iiber die nåheren Fundorte und Stand-
ortsverhåltnisse seiner Untersuchungsobjekte angibt, sø muss ich
seine Aussage iiber das Verhåltnis der beiden Formen zu einander
als unbegrindet und gegeniber meinen positiven Feststellungen
nicht stichhaltig bezeichnen. Das systematische Verhåltnis dieser
beiden Formen zu einander ist noch zu klåren. Ich bezeichne
einstweilen die glattkåpfige Form als P. pachydermatina f. typica,
die bestachelte als P. pachydermatina var. Spinosissima, n. var.
Stellen wir die beiden in Vergleich gezogenen Arten des neu-
seelåndisch-australischen Gebietes in Parallele, so entspricht P.
pachydermatina f. typica der P. gibbosa var. intermedia, hingegen
P. pachydermatina var. spinosissima der P. gibbosa f. typica.
Zur Synonymie der P. pachydermatina ist zunåchst zu bemerken,
dass das von v. Drasche dieser Art zugeordnete Stiick vielleicht
der nahe verwandten P. gibbosa (Heller) zugeordnet werden muss.
Betrachtet man in der Abbildung (l. c. 1884, Taf. II Fig 2) das
Flimmerorgan mit der Lupe, so sieht man, dass es aus zwei
nach den Seiten hinragenden, sich im Profil darstellenden quer
gestreiften Kegeln besteht, deren Querstreifung als Seitenansicht
der die Kegel umkreisenden Spiralen des Flimmergrubenspaltes
gedeutet werden kånnte. Nun aber sind gerade bei diesem v.
Drasche'schen Stick zuerst die eigenartigen hantelfårmigen
Kalkkårper im Zellulosemantel nachgewiesen worden, die spåter
bei allen P. pachydermatina wiedergefunden wurden, wåhrend ich
sie bei var. intermedia der P. gibbosa (in meiner Erårterung irr-
tumlich als ,,spinosa" bezeichnet) vergebens suchte (1. c. 1908, p. 233).
Die Zuordnung der v. Drasche'schen Form ist also noch fraglich.
Ein sicheres Synonym der P. pachydermatina, und zwar der f.
typica derselben, ist Sluiter's Cynthia lutea von den Chatham-
Inseln (1. c. 1900, p. 26). Ich habe die 5 Stiicke des Original-
395
materials dank dem Entgegenkommen des Herrn Prof. Schau-
insland nachuntersuchen kånnen und stelle folgendes fest: Die
anscheinend geringe Långe des Stieles (nach Sluiter 10 mm bei
dem 72 mm langen Stiick) beruht darauf, dass såmtliche 5 Stiicke
nur die anscheinend mit einem scharfen Messer abgeschnittenen Kåpfe
darstellen!), die an einem mutmasslich normal langen P. pachyder-
matina-Stiel gesessen haben. Der Stiel entspringt aber nicht
hinten, wie Sluiter angibt, sondern vorn am Kårper. Sluiter
hat nåmlich Branchialsipho und Atrialsipho verwechselt.
Der långere, angeblich nach hinten (tatsåchlich nach vorn) gebogene
Sipho mit 2 tiefen Långsfurchen ist der Branchialsipho. Der kurze
dorsalwårtsgeneigte Sipho, an dem die die ganze" Kårperlånge
durchziehenden Långsfurchen ihr Ende nehmen, ist der Atrialsipho.
In der Gestaltung der Kårperoberflåche sind die 5 Originalstucke
etwas verschieden. 4 kleine Stiicke, deren Kopflånge håchstens
26 mm betrågt, sind ohne weiteres der f. typica zuzuweisen. Sie
zeigen keine Spur von Stacheln, sondern nur in scharfer Ausprå-
gung die typischen Långswilste bezw. -furchen der P. pachyder-
matina f. typica. Das finfte Stick ist das von Sluiter abgebil-
dete grosse Stiick von 72 mm Långe, wovon 60 mm auf den
Kopf entfallen (1. c. 1900, Taf. IV Fig. 3. — Diese Abbildung
stellt das Stick um !/12 vergråssert dar). Es besitzt deutliche, wenn
auch gerundete und ziemlich unregelmåssige Håcker, wie auch
aus der Abbildung zu ersehen. Die Zahl dieser Håcker ist ziem-
lich gering, sodass dieses Stiick kaum dem Typus der var. spino-
sissima von Cape Kidnappers an die Seite gestellt werden kann ;
es steht der f. typica nåher. Das Material von den Chatham-Inseln
(Cynthia lutea Sluiter) ist demnach als Pyura pachydermatina E
typica mit gelegentlicher geringer Hinneigung zu var. spinosissima
(grosses Stiick) zu bezeichnen. Gewisse Verhåltnisse der inneren
Organisation des Originals der Cynthia lutea werden unten bei
der Beschreibung der var. spinosissima mit erårtert werden.
Als eine der P. pachydermatina mutmasslich nahe stehende
Form ist schliesslich noch Ascidia australis Qu. u. Gaim. von
1) Auf briefliche Anfrage teilt mir Prof. Schauinsland mit, dass die
Kåpfe tatsåchlich aus Grinnden der Konservierungsmåglichkeit abgeschnit-
ten worden sind.
?) Quoy u. Gaimard, 1835, Voy. Astrolabe, Zool. III, p.616, Taf. XCII Fig. 2/3:
396
Port Roy George und Port Western zu erårtern. In einer ålteren
Arbeit sprach ich die Vermutung aus, dass diese Art ein Jugend-
stadium der Boltenia pachydermatina darstellen måge (1. c. 1905,
p. 77, 78). Diese Vermutung griindete sich auf der wahrschein-
lich irrtiimlichen Meinung, dass v. Drasche's B. pachydermatina
richtig bestimmt sei. Nachdem sich herausgestellt hat, dass sie
wahrscheinlich aber der Pyura gibbosa Heller angehårt (siehe
oben!), muss auch Ascidia australis letzterer Art als fragliches Syno-
nym angegliedert werden. A. australis nåhert sich mit ihrem durch
schlanke Zingelchen gleichmåssig gefranzten Afterrand tatsåch-
lich mehr der Pyura gibbosa, bei der ich am Afterrande mittelgros-
ser Personen wenigstens ,vereinzelte unregelmåssig gestellte,
wenig tiefe Einkerbungenf gefunden habe (1. c. 1905, p. 76),
wåhrend das wahrscheinlich dieser Art angehårende v. Drasche'
sche Stiick in der Abbildung (1. c. 1884, Taf. II Fig. 2) sogar einen
deutlich-, wenn auch unregelmåssig-gefranzten Afterrand zeigt. Bei
P. pachydermatina ist der Afterrand auch bei åhnlich grossen
Stiicken durchaus glatt. Ich habe dies an Stiicken der f. typica
sowie der var. spinosissima, die ungefåhr 25 mm Kopflånge auf-
wiesen, gefunden. Leider ist die ausschlaggebende Gestalt des
Flimmerorgans aus der Abbildung der inneren Organisation von
Ascidia australis nicht zu ersehen. Ich ordne diese Art als etwas
fragliches Synonym der Pyura gibbosa (Hell.) zu, und zwar der
var. intermedia (Mich.). denn es handelt sich um ein jugendliches
Stick mit einer ebenen, håckerlosen Kopfoberflåche.
Zur Organisation der P. pachydermatina var. spinosissima
ist noch folgendes zu bemerken.
Die Gestalt gleicht der der typischen Form, wenn man von
der Oberflåchenbildung am Kopfe absieht. Das gråsste Stiick zeigt
folgende Gråssenverhåltnisse: Långe (parallel der Ricken-
linie) 200 mm, wovon 150 mm auf den Stiel, 60 mm auf den
Kopf entfallen, Dicke des Stiels 4—5 mm, Håhe des Kopfes (dor-
soventral) 30 mm, Breite des Kopfes 25 mm.
Oberflåche des Kopfes mit zahlreichen, im der Regel
viel mehr als 100 gerundeten oder spitzen Tuberkeln mehr oder
weniger dicht besetzt. Diese Tuberkeln stehen meist in Långs-
reihen, entsprechend den Wiilsten der f. typica.. Branchialsipho
deutlich, mit 2 scharfen Långsfurchen, stark nach vorn gegen den
397
Stiel hin gebogen, seine Kuppe ungefåhr !/s der Kopflånge vom
Stielursprung entfernt. Atrialsipho nicht deutlich ausgeprågt. Atrial-
offnung ungefåhr %/5 der Kårperlånge von der Branchialoffnung
einerseits und vom Hinterende des Tieres andererseits entfernt,
nicht immer genau in der Rickenlinie, sondern meist ein wenig
nach rechts hin verschoben.
Zellulosemantel im allgemeinen, d. h. zwischen den der
Oberflåche aufgesetzten Tuberkeln und Stacheln, viel dinner als
bei der typischen Form, nur etwa //3 bis '/2 mm dick, jedoch durch
den Tuberkel- und Stachelaufsatz verstårkt, weich knorpelig, im
Schnitt hellgrau mit råtlichem Schimmer, an der Innenseite mit Perl-
mutterglanz. Der Zellulosemantel enthålt zahlreiche grosse, in der
Aufsicht fast kreisrunde Pigmentballen, sowie sehr charakte-
ristisch vesjaltefetkKalkkorperstDieselFølerchendenerme dier
Drasche bei seiner Boltenia pachydermatina (< P. gibbosa ?) ge-
funden hat (1. c. 1884, Taf. II Fig. 2). Sie sind hantelfårmig, mit
der Besonderheit, dass die Hantelkåpfe durch je 4 radiår .gestellte
knopfartige Vorspringe vertreten sind. Ihre Långe betrågt unge-
fåhr 40 u. Die gleichen Gebilde, sowohl die Pigmentballen wie
die hantelfoørmigen Kalkkårper, fanden sich auch bei allen andern
Stiicken dieser Art, den grossen sowie den kleinen, bei der f.
typica wie bei var. spinosissima, auch bei dem Original der Cynthia
lutea Sluit.
Die Gestalt des Weichkårpers gleicht durchaus der bei der
f. typica, ebenso die Struktur der Leibeswand mit ihrer kråftigen
Muskulatur.
Eine betråchtliche Verschiedenheit zeigen die Innendorne an
der Innenauskleidung der Siphonen. An einem Riesenexem-
plar der f. typica fand ich vor Jahren niedrige
Ancylus-formige Innendorne (1. c. 1908, p. 233,
Taf. II Fig. 26), die noch niedriger waren, als
die im iibrigen åhnlichen, aber schon deutlich
dornfårmigen Innendørne eines grossen Exemplares RESEN
der P. gibbosa f. intermedia (1. c., p. 233, Taf. II chydermatina
Fig. 25). Jetzt finde ich bei einem anderen gros- go Ree ng
sen Exemplar der P. pachydermatina f. typica (Th. Meyer s.).
(Neuseeland, Th. Meyer s.) ebensolche håhere = Innendorn, nicht
Å ganz genau von der
dornartige Innendorne (Textfig. 9), die genau denen Seite: 400/1.
398
der grossen P. gibbosa intermedia gleichen, 16 uw hoch und 32 u
lang. Diese Organe sind also bei P. pachydermatina f. typica ver-
schieden gebildet; doch ist es mir nicht klar, ob wir es hier mit
einer Variabilitåt oder mit einer Altersverschiedenheit (die beiden
Stiicke mågen verschieden alt sein) zu tun haben. Ich glaube das
letztere annehmen zu miissen; denn bei einem jugendlichen Exem-
plar der f. zypica fand ich wieder andere Innendorne, nåmlich
schwach gebogene, schlanke Dorne, deren frei abragender Teil
etwa 28 uw lang und an der Basis im Profil 7 w breit ist, die also
den schlank spiessigen Innendornen nahe kommen. Das Original-
material der var. spinosissima, (mutmasslich junge, wenn auch schon
geschlechtsreife Stiicke) zeigt nun genau die gleiche, fast spiessige
Form der Innendorne, wie jenes ungefåhr gleich grosse, junge
Stick der f. zypica. Ob sich die Gestaltung der Innendorne mit
der Zunahme der Gråsse bei var. spinosissima åndert, wie an-
scheinend bei f. zypica, miisste noch festgestellt werden. Bisher
sind keine sicher der var. spinosissima angehårige Riesenexemplare
bekannt geworden.
Branchialtentakel an den Originalstuicken der var. spinosis-
sima von Cape Kidnappers 12, regelmåssig abwechselnd verschie-
den gross, sehr reich gefiedert, an den gråsseren Tentakeln eine
Fiederung bis 5. Ordnung vollståndig durchgefuthrt. Eine viel
spårlichere Fiederung zeigen die gråssten Branchialtentakel der un-
gefåhr gleich grossen (also ziemlich kleinen) Stiicke der f. Zypica
von Neuseeland (ohne weitere Fundortsangabe), nåmlich nur eine
Fiederung bis 3. Ordnung. Eine reiche Fiederung bis 5. Ordnung
zeigte dagegen wieder ein Riesenexemplar mit ebener Kopfober-
flåcehe (Neuseeland, Meyer s.).
Das Flimmerorgan der var. spinosissima gleicht anscheinend
vollkommen dem des gleich grossen Stiickes von f. typica. Es ist ein
kreisrundes Polster mit einfacher geschlossener Figur des Flimmer-
grubenspaltes, eine durch verschieden starke, meist sehr starke
und basal verengte Ausbuchtungen wellig gemachte Kreislinie.
Kiemensack anscheinend wie bei f. typica: 6 Falten jeder-
seits. Ein mittelgrosses Stiick der var. spinosissima zeigte folgende
Anordnung der inneren Långsgefåsse:
rechts DS OLAS)ESK AP) S KAP) ESKOAP) EEN (O)ESKIS) ORE
lnks EDEL S(IS) MELSE ETS) EK (IP) EPP) PRS )EESEER
399
Die Dorsalfalte ist durch eine einfache geschlossene Reihe
schlank pfriemfårmiger, Dorsalfalten-Ziingelchen repråsentiert.
Darm anscheinend genau wie bei f. typica, eine wenig gebo-
gene, in ganzer Långe schwach klaffende, bis an das Vorderende
gerade nach vorn gehende Schleife mit aufwårts und zuriick ge-
bogenen End-Åsten bildend. Magen kaum erweitert, undeutlich.
Der Leberbesatz besteht aus einer Anzahl gesonderter und zum
Teil durch deutliche Zwischenråume von einander getrennter,
strauchartig veråstelter, fast Blumenkohl-artig aussehender Wuche-
rungen. Mitteldarm im Bereich des zuriicklaufenden Darm-
schleifen-Astes am oberen Rande mit einer Anzahbl! rundlicher,
durch Kerbschnitte von einander gesonderter Endocarp-artiger
Wucherungen: Schutzpolster (,Problematical Organs" nachW att,
INCL S92M pp 3417 Fig. 13). After. wie bei f.-zypica "einfach und
ganz glattrandig, hinten etwas vorgezogen.
Geschlechtsorgane wie bei f. typica: Jederseits an einem
der Leibeswand fest angelegten Ausfihrstrang einzeilig dicht
gedrångt eine Anzahl unregelmåssig sackformiger zwittriger Ge-
schlechtssåckchen, links bei einem nåher untersuchten Stiick
deren 14, innerhalb der Darmschleife, deren Verlauf angeschmiegt,
rechts deren 12 in entsprechender Lage.
Pyura trita (Sluit.)
1900, Cynthia trita Sluiter, Tunic. Stillen Ocean, p. 29, Taf. VI Fig. 1, 2.
1900, Microcosmus hirsutus (part.: jungere Tiere) Sluiter, ebend, p. 30.
1909, Pyura trita, Hartmeyer, Tunic.; in : Bronn, Kl. Ordn. Tierr.,
p. 1341.
1921, Halocynthia carnleyensis Bovien, Tunic. Auckland Campbell
ISENS OSKAR Fie NS AN SR exti eg 2
Fundangaben: Neuseeland, Nordinsel, North Cape, an
der Kiiste unter Steinen; 3. Jan, 1915; Little Barrier Island,
30 Fd.; 29. Dez. 1914 (f. crinita); Rangitoto, an der Kiste
unter Steinen; 27. Dez. 1914; Colville Channel, 35. Fd.;
PAS DEZE] OT vor New: Plymouth, "8"Edsy 12Jan 1915:
Stewart-Insel, 20 Fd.; 16. Nov. 1914 (f. crinita neben f.
typica).
Alte Angaben: Chatham-Inseln, Te One, Red Bluff (nach
Sluiter: jiingere Stiicke vom Originalmaterial des Microcosmus
hirsutus Sluiter).
400
Weitere Verbreitung: Auckland-Inseln (nach Bovien).
Ich habe die von Dr. Mortensen gesammelten Stiicke mit
einem der beiden Originalsticke Sluiter's vergleichen kånnen und
bin nun in der Lage, die nicht ganz vollståndigen Originalbeschrei-
bungen Sluiter's zu ergånzen.
Als Synonym der P. ftrita ist Halocynthia carnleyensis Bovien
anzusehen. Bovien konnte allerdings die Identitåt seiner Form
mit dieser Sluiter'schen Art nicht vermuten, denn er fand 7 oder
8- Falten jederseits am Kiemensack, was auch dem tatsåchlichen
Verhalten entspricht, wåhrend Sluiter nur 6 zåhlte. Sluiter
hat zweifellos die siebten Falten, die ich wenigstens an einem
seiner Originale durch Nachpriifung feststellen konnte, iibersehen.
Bei der Nachuntersuchung eines der jingeren Originalstiicke
des Microcosmus hirsutus Sluiter von den Chatham-Inseln stellte
es sich heraus, dass hier kein Microcosmus vorliege, sondern ein
Stick der Pyura trita. Also auch diese Art ist als teilweises Sy-
nonym zu P. trita zu stellen.
Beschreibung. Die åussere Tracht der P. trita ist sehr ver-
schieden, doch mag das mehr auf åusseren Umstånden des Stand-
orts als auf echter Variabilitåt beruhen. Immerhin halte ich es
fir richtiger, eine besonders scharf ausgeprågte Sonderbildung als
f. crinita von der typischen Form abzusondern.
Gestalt mehr oder weniger regelmåssig eifårmig bis fast
kugelig, manchmal verzerrt. Åussere Siphonen sind meist
gar nicht erkennbar. Bei einigen (nicht' bei allen) Stiicken von
Rangitoto und North Cape treten sie dagegen deutlich hervor, der
Branchialsipho nicht ganz so lang wie breit und etwa halb so breit
wie der Kårper, als breit-warzenformiger Aufsatz dicht hinter dem
vorderen Pol, der Atrialsipho, meist fast so breit wie der Kårper,
aber nur etwa ”/3 so lang wie breit, als dickliches, breites, zentral
vertieftes Kreispolster eine kurze Strecke hinter dem Branchial-
sipho. Die åusseren Siphonen sind offenbar einziehbar, was auch
schon aus ihrer inneren Gestaltung (siehe unten!) hervorgeht.
Kårperåffnungen åiusserlich meist kaum erkennbar, deutlich
nur bei Stiicken mit ausgestreckten Siphonen. Es sind Kreuz-
schlitze mit breiten, wenig erhabenen Polstern in den Winkel-
råumen. Sie liegen ungefåhr "/6 des Profil-Umrisses des Kårpers
von einander entfernt.
401
Bodenståndigkeit: Die Tiere der f. typica sind mit einem
mehr oder weniger grossen Teil der Ventralseite am Untergrunde
angewachsen, die der f. crinita haben anscheinend frei im Sand-
oder Kiesgrund gesessen.
Gråssenverhåltnisse: Das gråsste mir vorliegende Stiick
der f. typica misst 24 : 20 : 10 mm in Långe, Håhe und Breite,
ist also etwas gråsser als das gråssere Originalstiick. Noch gråsser
werden anscheinend die Tiere der f. crinita, nåmlich bis etwa
30 : 20 : 10 mm lang, hoch und breit; doch sind diese Masse
nicht denen der f. typica gleich zu erachten, beruht ihre Gråsse
doch im wesentlichen auf der Eigenart des Zellulosemantels, wåh-
rend die Weichkårper nicht gråsser werden als die der typischen
Form. Die Stiicke Bovien's erreichen einen Durchmesser von 50 mm.
Die Kårperoberflåche ist bei f. typica entweder ganz
mit Fremdkårpern, Sand, Bruchsticken von Muschelschalen und
dergleichen inkrustiert, wie bei den Originalen, oder der Fremd-
kårperbesatz ist spårlich, so dass gråssere Teile der Oberflåche
nackt und rein erscheinen, wenn nicht fast die ganze Oberflåche
nackt ist, wie bei den Stiicken von Rangitoto und North. Cape.
Die Fremdkårper werden durch kiirzere, dickere, fiisschenfårmige
Auswiichse des Zellulosemantels, zum Teil vielleicht auch durch
diinne Haftfåden, festgehalten. Die nackte Oberflåche ist runzelig
oder netzfurchig, wobei der Runzel- bezw. Furchenverlauf sich
vorwiegend parallel zur Rickenlinie hålt. Bei der f. crinita ist
die Oberflåche des Kårpers dicht mit feinen, veråstelten Haftfåden
besetzt, an und zwischen denen sich ein dicker Schlamm- und
Sandbesatz gebildet hat. Dieser Besatz haftet ziemlich fest und
lisst den Zellulosemantel auffallend dick erscheinen, bei dem Stiick
von der Bay of Islands 5—8 mm, wovon nur ein sehr geringer
Bruchteil auf den eigentlichen Zellulosemantel, der bei weitem
gråssere Teil auf den mit Schlamm und Sand durchsetzten Haar-
filz entfållt.
Fårbung der nackten Oberflåche bei f. typica råtlich grau-
braun oder gelbbraun, nach Bovien braun. Die inkrustierten
Stiicke beider Formen lassen keine Eigenfårbung erkennen.
Zellulosemantel der f. typica fest knorpelig, im Schnitt
hellgrau oder mit råtlichem Schimmer, an der Innenflåche etwas
perlmutterglånzend, bei mittelgrossen Stiicken im allgemeinen etwa
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturhist. For. Bd. 73. 26
402
1/0—1 mm dick, an den verdickten Stellen, so am Anwachsrand
und an den Haftfiisschen, zum Teil betråchtlich dicker. Bei der
f. crinita ist der Zellulosemantel weicher, weichknorpelig, abge-
sehen von den Haftfåden mit ihrem Schlammbesatz, etwa 0,4 mm
dick, im iibrigen wie bei f. ztypica.
Der Weichkorper (Textfig. 10) ist råtlich, so bei den Stiicken
von North Cape und Rangitoto wie auch bei Bovien's Stiicken,
oder gelblich, so bei den meisten ibrigen Stiicken, oder bråunlich
gelb, mutmasslich durch die Konservierungsart modifiziert. Er
Fig. 10. Pyura trita (Sluit.) f. typica von North Cape. Weichkårper, durch einen
ventral-medianen Långsschnitt gedffønet und ausgebreitet; Kiemensack abpråpariert ;
Mundtentakel, Flimmerorgan, Darm und Geschlechtsapparate sichtbar; 3/1.
haftet nur an den Koårperåffnungen fest am Zellulosemantel und
låsst sich leicht herauslåsen. Er ist ziemlich regelmåssig eifårmig
Die inneren Siphonen sind meist sehr kurz, abgerundet kegel-
formig, manchmal aber auch betråchtlich lang, so bei einigen Stiicken
von Rangitoto und North Cape. Ihre Kuppen sind ungefåhr ”/5 des
Profil-Umrisses des Weichkårpers von einander entfernt.
Die Innenauskleidung der Siphonen ist sehr charakte-
ristisch gestaltet. Es ist eine ziemlich dicke, zåhe, lederartige,
weissliche Zellulosemantel-Haut, die meist eine breite, kurze, vorn
und hinten durch Verengung begrenzte Kammer bildet. Mutmasslich
wird diese breite, kurze Kammer bei der Ausstreckung der Siphonen
403
rohrenfårmig. Sie ist durch Fåltelung von zahlreichen Långsfurchen
durchzogen, von denen 4 den Lappen der Kårperåffnungen ent-
sprechen. Im distalen Teil ist sie mit sehr charakteristischen, bei den
Stiicken beider Formen und aller Fundorte ganz gleich gestalteten
Innendornen dicht besetzt. Diese Innendorne (Textfig. 11) sind
ungemein klein und zart, wasserhell, breit erkerfår-
mig, ungefåhr so hoch wie vorn an der Basis breit, FAN U
und ihre Basalflåche ist so lang wie vorn breit. Im a b
optischen Långsschnitt, bei dem die zarthåutigen 2, 44. pyura trita
seitlichen Teile nicht zur Aussicht kommen, sehen /Sluit.) f.typica 1n-
sie aus wie kurze, basal sehr breite Dorne, deren Br ORE orle:
scharfes Spitzende stark nach vorn hin gebogen ist. Seite, b von oben;
Ihre Hohe, gråsste Breite und basale Långe betrågt onde:
nur etwa 14 u, wåhrend ihre gebogene Riickenmittellinie etwa
20 w lang ist. Siphonalpapillen sind nicht gefunden.
Die Leibeswand ist ziemlich dick. Ihre Muskulatur ist
kråftig, besteht aber aus verhåltnismåssig dinnen Muskelbindeln,
die dafiir sehr eng aneinander gelagert sind und eine fast geschlos-
sene Schicht bilden. Die Ringmuskulatur ist an den Siphonen
und in ihrem Umkreis sehr kråftig. Die von den Siphonen aus-
strahlenden Långsmuskeln sind an beiden Kårperseiten gleich aus-
gebildet und iberziehen die ganzen Seitenwånde bis fast zur ven-
tralen Medianlinie.
Die Branchialtentakel, deren Zahl nach Bovien 20—23,
nach Sluiter nur 12 betrågt, sind stets (mindestens 1 Stiick von
jedem Fundort untersucht!) sehr einfach, wie es auch der Angabe
und der Abbildung Bovien's (1. c. 1921, p. 36, Taf. IV Fig. 4)
entspricht. Sie weisen selbst bei den gråssten Stiicken nur eine
Fiederung 2. Ordnung. auf; bei dem kleinsten, noch unreifen
Stiick von Colville Channel ist die Fiederung 2. Ordnung an den
grossten Tentakeln kaum angedeutet. Am distalen Ende der Ten-
takel sind die Anhånge deutlich vergråssert.
Das Flimmerorgan ist ein Polster mit ziemlich einfach ver-
laufendem Flimmergrubenspalt. Bei einem Stiick von North Cape
zeigt der letztere genau die leierfårmige Gestalt (Textfig. 10), wie
sie Sluiter abbildet (1. c. 1900, Taf. IV Fig. 1), und wie sie
auch Bovien von einem Teil seiner Stiicke meldet. Bei dem
von mir untersuchten zweiten Sluiter'schen Stiick (Kotype!) von
26"
404
den Chatham-Inseln sowie bei anderen Stiicken sind die Hårner
des Flimmergrubenspaltes beide oder zum Teil einwårts gebogen.
F. crinita zeigt die gleiche Variabilitåt.
Kiemensack dorsal ein wenig verkirzt, jederseits mit 7 Falten,
von denen die untersten, Falten VII, nur sehr schwach ausgeprågt
sind, oder noch dazu dem Rudiment bezw. der ersten unvollkom-
menen Anlage einer Falte VIII am Vorderende des Kiemensackes
neben dem Endostyl. Bovien fand eine solche kleine achte
Falte bei einem Teil seines Materials von den Auckland-Inseln
(f. typica). Ich fand sie bei allen nåher untersuchten Stiicken der
f. crinita von der Stewart-Insel (Anordnung: D. 2 (17) 2 (17) 2
(19) 3 (17)ES (13) 2 (12) 2 (8) TES) FOTE) EsowieR beregn
Hinsicht der Falten sonst nicht ganz normal ausgebildeten Stick
der f. typica ebenfalls von der Stewart-Insel. Diese gråssere Zahl
der Falten ist nicht etwa eine Wachstumserscheinung, sondern
eine echte Variation; denn ich fand sie auch an einem sehr
kleinen, nur 13 mm langen Stick, bei dem sie allerdings nur
durch 3 Långsgefåsse markiert war und sich noch friiher verlor
als bei den ausgewachsenen Sticken, bei denen sie fast die Mitte
der Kiemensack-Långe erreicht. Nach Sluiter soll das von
ihm untersuchte Original nur 6 nicht sehr breite Falten jederseits
am Kiemensack tragen. Ich vermute, dass Sluiter die kleinen
und nicht immer ohne weiteres sichtbaren, håufig unter den brei-
teren Falten VI versteckten Falten VII iibersehen hat; måglich
aber auch, dass die nachgewiesene Variabilitåt in der Richtung
der Verminderung der Faltenzahl gelegentlich weiter geht als bei
Bovien's und meinem Material einschliesslich der zweiten Type
Sluiter's. Die inneren Långsgefåsse iberragen zum Teil,
nicht såmtlich, das Hinterende der Falten als kurze, gerundet drei-
seitige oder långere, platt-tentakelformige, aufwårts gebogene
Zungelchen. Die Quergefåsse sind im allgemeinen nicht nach
innen erhaben. In nicht ganz regelmåssiger Anordnung erscheint
jedes vierte oder achte Quergefåss stark verbreitert. An vielen
Stellen kommen dazu noch sehr feine parastigmatische Quergefåsse.
In den Råumen neben der Dorsalfalte sind die Quergefåsse gegen
das Innere des Kiemensackés rippenformig erhaben, besonders
hoch rechtsseitig, linksseitig weniger hoch. Kiemenspalten
finden sich im allgemeinen bis 8, selten bis 9 in den breitesten
405
Maschen an der Ventralseite des Kiemensackes, in geringerer Zahl
in den mehr dorsal gelegenen Faltenzwischenraum-Maschen. Sie
sind bei der Kotype von den Chatham-Inseln wie bei dem Origi-
nal auffallend kurz und breit, besonders kurz diejenigen, die in
den Maschen ohne parastigmatisches Quergefåss liegen. Bei den
ubrigen Sticken haben sie ein mehr normales Aussehen, wenn-
gleich sie meist auch noch verhåltnismåssig kurz sind. Bei den
gråsseren Stiicken erscheinen sie normal lang und schmal. Die
Dorsalfalte wird durch eine einfache, dichte, fast geschlossene
Reihe schlanker, tentakelformiger Dorsalfalten-Zungelchen, je eines
auf einer Quergefåss-Rippe, dargestellt.
Der Darm (Textfig. 10) bildet eine sehr weit offene und in
ganzer Långe sehr weit klaffende, gerade von hinten nach vorn
bis fast an das Vorderende des Kårpers verlaufende Schleife,
deren End-Åste nach oben hin abgebogen sind. Der Magen ist
nicht scharf abgesetzt, nur schwach erweitert. Er trågt eine
måssig grosse Leber, die aus mehreren baumfårmigen Teilen be-
steht. Die Ståmme der Leberbåume sind kurz und dick, kurz-
und reich-veråstelt. Die End-Åste, kolbige Leberzotten von etwa
10 u Dicke, sind zu unregelmåssigen Paketen zusammen geordnet,
die wie ein dichtes Laubwerk aussehen. Die ganzen Leberbåume
erinnern an gewisse Weichkorallen der Gattung Dendronephthya.
Der Enddarm ist mit der Leibeswand verwachsen, von der je-
doch sein åusserstes rektales Ende frei aufragt. Der After
besass, wenigstens bei einem Stick (Textfig. 10), einen umgeschla-
genen, in mehrere Lappen zerschlitzten Rand; bei den meisten an-
deren untersuchten Stiicken war er fast oder ganz geschlossen,
der Afterrand eng zusammen gezogen, sodass seine Gestaltung,
ob glattrandig oder zerschlitzt, nicht festgestellt werden konnte.
(Nach Bovien ist er glattrandig.)
Die Geschlechtsorgane (Textfig. 10) bilden jederseits einen
Zwitterapparat, bestehend aus einer grossen Zahl zwittriger, un-
regelmåssig klumpenfårmiger Gonadensåckchen, die kurz-, wenn
nicht ungestielt, åhrenfårmig an einem zumal distal stark geboge-
nen, strangfårmigen Ausfiihrapparat sitzen. Bei der Kotype von
den Chatham-Inseln zåhlte ich rechts 30, links 18 Gonadensåck-
chen. Dieselben .stehen stellenweise, zumal in den distalen Par-
tien, zweizeilig seitlich am Ausfihrapparat, stellenweise, zumal
406
proximal, viel dichter und unregelmåssiger und den Ausfihrappa-
rat verdeckend. Bei manchen Sticken war die Anordnung der
Gonadensåckchen viel unregelmåssiger, auch wohl liickenhaft. Die
Gonadensåckchen tragen meist eine endorcarpartige Schutzkappe.
Der achsiale Ausfihrstrang ragt am distalen Ende des Geschlechts-
apparats als Doppelråhre — zwei fast bis an das distale Ende eng mit
einander verwachsene, etwas verschieden dicke Rohren, Samen-
leiter und Eileiter — frei hervor und ist gegen die Atrialdffnung
hin gebogen. Der linksseitige Geschlechtsapparat liegt ganz inner-
halb der Darmschleife, deren Weite reichlichen Platz fur die Ent-
faltung des hier meist zweizeiligen Apparates darbietet.
Pyura subuculata (Sluit.)
1900, Cynthia subuculata Sluiter, Tunic. Stillen Ozean, p. 27, Taf. V
Fig. 4—7.
1908, Pyura [Halocynthia] subuculata var. suteri Michaelsen, Pyurid. .
(Halocynthiid.] Naturh. Mus. Hamburg, p. 259, Taf. II Fig. 22—24.
Fundangaben: Neuseeland, Nordinsel, Cape Brett, Coral-
linen-Grund; 31. Dez. 1914.
Stewart-Inselmss2or Ed TEN ovMtol EP ore askese
25 Fd:: 21. Nov: 1914 Halfmoon=bBuchttFankdertkiste ke
Nov. 1914.
Alte Angaben: Neuseeland, Sidinsel, French Passage;
Sumner inSelvynety (nach Slutter HEyttletont(nach
Michaelsen).
Erorterung: Pyura subuculata ist eine in manchen Hinsichten
sehr variable Art. Es hat meiner jetzigen Ansicht nach keinen
Zweck, die extreme Ausbildung dieser Variabilitåtenreihe als Varie-
tåt abzusondern. Ich ziehe deshalb die var. suteri Mich. ein.
Die Variabilitåt beruht hauptsåchlich auf zwei verschiedenen
Organisationsverhåltnissen, zunåchst der verschiedenen Ausprågung
der åusseren Siphonen. Nur eines meiner Objekte zeigt
eine solch scharfe Ausprågung derselben, wie das Sluiter'sche
Originalmaterial, von dem mir Hartmeyer freundlichst ein Stiick
zur Vergleichung der åusseren Charaktere zur Verfiigung stellte.
Es finden sich aber Zwischenstufen zwischen den Extremen; auch
ist die Långe der åusseren Siphonen an dem typischen Stiick nicht
so betråchtlich, wie nach der Schilderung angenommen werden
407
kønnte. Der Atrialsipho ist kaum långer als dick, und das, was
Sluiter als Branchialsipho angesprochen hat, der besonders lang
und schmal sein soll, ist wohl besser als gestrecktes Vorderende
zu bezeichnen. Ich mutmasse aus den Ringelfalten an den sehr
kurzen, warzenfårmigen Siphonen vieler meiner Stiicke, zum Teil
in Gesellschaft des mit grossen Siphonen ausgestatteten Stiickes
gefunden, dass diese Organe nur durch Einziehung verkiirzt sind.
Auch der verschiedene Standort mag etwas auf eine verschiedene
Ausbildung der -åusseren Siphonen einwirken.
Innendorne fanden sich an einem in Hinsicht des Kiemen-
sackes nåher der typischen Form als dem suzteri-Extrem stehenden
Stiick in gleicher Art, wie ich sie von var. suteri geschildert habe.
Auch ein Atrialvelum fand sich, dessen Rand in dreiseitige,
sehr verschieden grosse und unregelmåssige Zungen auszulaufen
schien, doch haben diese Zungen nicht eigentlich das Aussehen
von ÅAtrialtentakeln; sie sind dinn flåchenhaft.
Eigentliche Atrialtentakel sind nicht gefunden worden.
Auch eigentliche Endocarpe fehlen. Statt ihrer finden sich
Endocarp-artige Wucherungen am Mitteldarm und an den Kuppen
der Gonadensåckchen.
Der Flimmergrubenspalt bildet stets eine vorn offene
U-Form mit verschiedenartig gebogenen, manchmal ziemlich langen
Hårnern,
Eine grosse Variabilitåt zeigt der Kiemensack. Die bei var.
suteri geschilderte Form (jederseits 7 Falten, Falte VII neben
dem Endostyl rudimentår) bildet das untere Extrem, wåhrend das
obere Extrem weit iiber die von Sluiter gefundene Form (jeder-
seits 7 breite Falten) hinausgeht. Bei einigen Stuicken fand ich
jederseits oder einseitig neben einer wohl ausgebildeten, wenn
auch etwas schmåleren Falte VII dicht am Vorderende des Endo-
styls eine kurze, schmale und niedrige Falte VIII. Bei einem
Stiick, das die von mir beobachtete Håchstentfaltung des Kiemen-
sackes darstellt, waren die Faiten VIII wie die Falten VII wohl
ausgebildet, wenn auch etwas schmåler; zwischen ihnen und dem
Vorderende des Endostyls fand sich dann aber jederseits noch das
kurze und schmale Rudiment einer Falte IX. In der Diagnose
von P. subuculata muss also die Angabe iber den Kiemensack
lauten: Jederseits 7 bis 9 Falten, die untersten neben dem Endo-
408
styl meist kleiner bis rudimentår. Die Auszåhlung der inneren
Långsgefåsse an einem Stiick mit 8 Falten ergab folgendes Beispiel:
vorn DESPEC ElS) 2 (ca: 12) 3. (Ca 14) FAR (Cable) Ædle)
4 (IPY EPE) 2 FEST mitten; DS 2 (Ca 2) ME (CaRUS)ESA(crR
IRENE SYES (ca. 12) "3 (Ca. HUS) SHS) EPS) FORE SE hh intEnE
DSI (CaAST3) 2 (ca: 14).4(ca. 13). 4 (Cal) FSH (Ca EU) TE (er
IÆJFST 6) ME Die Zahl an: der Unterseite "der ”Faltentkonnte
wegen der Ungunst des Pråparats meist nur annåhernd festgestellt
werden. Die Hinterenden der inneren Långsgefåsse laufen
zum Teil (nicht såmtlich) in schlanke, aufwårts und etwas zurick-
gebogene såbelfårmige Tentakel aus, die das Hinterende des Kie-
mensackes,innen bårtig erscheinen lassen. Die Gestalt der Kie-
menspalten entspricht bei einigen Sticken (so bei einem klei-
nen der als var. suteri geschilderten wie auch bei einem gråsseren
mit rudimentåren Falten VIII) ganz der Sluiter'schen Angabe.
Sie sind hier auffallend kurz, oval, oder zum Teil kreisfårmig,
wenn nicht gar kiirzer als breit, quer oval. Dabei sind sie selten
verlångert und durch parastigmatische Quergefåsse iberbriickt, bei
dem gråsseren Stiick zu 5—8 in einer der breiteren Maschen, bis
zu 11 in den Maschen neben dem Endostyl. Einen ganz anderen
Charakter scheinen die Kiemenspalten bei anderen Sticken zu
haben, so bei einem Stiick mit rudimentåren Falten VIII wie auch
bei dem mit rudimentåren Falten IX. Hier zeigen die Kiemen-
spalten die normale långliche, parallelrandige Form, und die
Maschen samt den Kiemenspalten sind fast ausnahmslos mit para-
stigmatischen Quergefåssen iiberspannt. Nur nach langem Suchen
fand ich an einzelnen kleinen Stellen einige kirzere, ovale Kie-
menspalten. Da ich sonst keine bedeutsamen Unterschiede zwischen
den Stiicken mit verschiedenem Kiemenspalten-Charakter auffinden
konnte, und da der betreffende Charakter bei keinem der Stiicke
dieser oder jener Form ganz rein ausgeprågt war, so glaube ich
von einer systematischen Sonderung absehen zu sollen.
Der Darm ist durch die Weite seiner Schleife charakteri-
siert, wie auch aus der Sluiter'schen Abbildung, in der der
Darm schwach durchschimmernd zu erkennen ist, hervorgeht. Er
beschreibt ein der Kreisform genåhertes unregelmåssiges Fiinfeck
mit abgerundeten Ecken, dessen eine sehr schmale Seite zwischen
After und Osophagusmiindung durch Zuriickbiegung des Osophagus
409
gedffnet ist. Die unregelmåssig biischelig angeordneten, kurzen
und dicken End-Åste der Leberverzweigungen, die Leberzotten,
sind ungefåhr 90 u dick, plump gerundet, nur wenig långer als
dickFSie sind vielfach zu wenigen, etwa zu 3,4 oder 5, in
Reihen gestellt, als Kammreihen kleiner, sehr unregelmåssiger
Leberfåltchen.
DieGeschlechtsorgane tragen in ausgewachsenem Zustande
je ca. 24 dick eiformige oder unregelmåssiger gestaltete Geschlechts-
såckchen, die ungestielt mit verengter Basis oder sehr kurz
gestielt zweizeilig oder unregelmåssiger an dem diinn-strangférmi-
gen Ausfuihrapparat sitzen. Die Hauptmasse der Geschlechts-
såckchen wird vom Ovarium eingenommen, nåmlich die basalen,
medialen und inneren Partien. Die ausgewachsenen Eizellen
haben eine Dicke von ungefåhr 0,17 mm. SEinige wenige grosse
Hodenblasen sind lateral und kulminal dem Ovarium aufgelagert.
Die Hodenblasen sind sehr unregelmåssig geformt, nur zum klei-
nen Teil einfach und unregelmåssig birnfårmig, meist komplizierter
gestaltet, gegabelt oder unregelmåssig drei- oder gar mehr-lappig.
Eine kompaktere Hodenblase mass im Durchmesser ”/3 mm. Die
aus den Hodenblasen hervorgehenden Ausfihrgånge sind zart,
ungefåhr 28 w dick. Der basal-mediane Ausfihrstrang, in den
die Ausfiihrgånge der Ovarien und Hoden einmiinden, ist im
Querschnitt dreiseitig, kulminal scharfkantig. Seine breitere Basal-
partie wird von einem dinnwandigen Eileiter mit unregelmåssig
gelapptem Querschnitt (etwas kollabiert?) eingenommen. = Ueber
diesem Eileiter, in der schmåleren Kulminalpartie, verlåuft ein
åhnlich gestalteter, aber viel engerer Samenleiter. Im freien
distalen Ende verlaufen Eileiter und Samenleiter andauernd in
enger Verwachsung. Nur ihre sehr wenig erweiterten Ausmin-
dungen sind durch einen Kerbschnitt von einander gesondert. Die
Art der Ausmiindung, wie ich sie fir var. suteri festgestellt habe
(I. c. 1908, p. 262, Taf. II Fig. 24), ist als eine abnorme Bildung
anzusehen.
Gen. Microcosmus Hell.
Microcosmus hirsutus Sluit.
1900, Microcosmus hirsutus (part., excl. jingere Tiere) Sluiter, Tunic.
Stillen Ocean, p. 30, Taf. IV Fig. 5, Taf. VI Fig. 3.
410
1913, Microcosmus hirsutus (part., excl. Syn. M. hemisphaerium..),
Sluiter, Ascid. Aru-Ins., p. 70.
Alte Fundangabe: Chatham-Inseln, Te One, Red Bluff
(nach Sluiter).
Der Beschreibung von M. hirsutus liegen 2 verschiedene Arten
zu Grunde. Nur das eine grosse Stick, dessen innere Organisa-
tion untersucht und den Abbildungen vorlag, ist als Typus der
Art anzusehen. Die von Sluiter nicht nåher untersuchten jin-
geren Tiere sind mutmasslich såmtlich, sicher zum Teil iiberhaupt
keine Microcosmus, sondern gehåren der Pyura trita (Sluit.) f.
typica an, wie ich nach Offnung und Untersuchung eines derselben
feststellen kann. Die diesen angeblich jingeren Stiicken entnom-
menen Charaktere der Sluiter'schen Beschreibung — es handelt
sich natirlich nur um åussere Charaktere — sind demnach aus
der Diagnose des Microcosmus hirsutus zu eliminieren, nåmlich die
Angaben iber die Fårbung der nackten Korperoberflåche, Gestal-
tung der (bei M. hirsutus kaum sichtbaren) Kårperåffnungen
und wohl auch die Entfernung zwischen denselben.
Dass M. hirsutus nicht mit M. hemisphaerium Sluit. (synonym
M. exasperatus Hell.) vom Malayischen Archipel vereint werden
kånne, habe ich schon an anderer Stelle dargelegt!).
Innere Organisation (nach Untersuchung des Typus): Die Innen-
auskleidung des Branchialsiphos ist eine weissliche Zellu-
losemantel-Haut von weich-lederiger Beschaffenheit mit unregel-
måssig und eng geschlångelten Långsfalten. Ein Branchialvelum
und Siphonalklappen sind nicht vorhanden, doch trågt die
Innnenauskleidung weitlåufig zerstreut dickliche, keulenfårmige
Siphonalpapillen von etwa 0,1 mm Långe und 45 w Dicke.
Der distale Teil der branchialen Innenauskleidung ist dicht und
anscheinend unregelmåssig mit grossen, spiessigen Innendornen
(Textfig. 12) besetzt. Ihre Gesamtlinge betrågt ungefåhr 120 w,
wovon ungefåhr 75 w auf den frei abragenden distalen Teil ent-
fallen. Dieser frei abragende Teil
mr ES ist ein sehr schlanker, måssig stark
gebogener, scharfspitziger Dorn mit
Fig. 12: Microcosmus hirsutus Sluit. zarthåutigen, gegen die Konkavitåt
Innendorn, nicht ganz genau von der S
Seite: 400/1. der Krimmung abgebogenen Flan-
') W. Michaelsen, 1919, Ascid. Ptychobr. Diktobr. Rot. Meeres, p. 63.
411
kensåumen. Der Basalteil ist wenig verbreitert, deutlich kirzer
alstdertfreie Dorn. Die Innenausklerdung"des Aftrialsi-
phos ist nicht mehr erkennbar.
Die Branchialtentakel sollen nach Sluiter ,reichlich
veråsteltf sein. Ich wurde sie als spårlich veråstelt bezeichnen,
weisen doch nur wenige basale Fiedern 2. Ordnung der gråssten
Tentakel eine sehr spårliche Fiederung 3. Ordnung auf. Der Ten-
takelstamm und die Fiedern mit Ausnahme derjenigen letzter Ord
nung sind breit såbelformig gebogen. Die Fiedern letzter Ordnung
sind ziemlich plump stummelfårmig, an den Enden der Ståmme und
Fiedern etwas verlångert; sie ziehen sich in ununterbrochener
Reihe, wenn auch meist sehr weitlåufig gestellt, an den Fiedern
niedriger Ordnungen und zwischen denselben auch an dem Stamm
hin.
Kiemensack wohl der Schilderung Sluiter's entsprechend
(seine linksseitige Hålfte nicht mehr klar erkennbar). Es ist zu
bemerken, dass rechtsseitig, wie auch aus der Abbildung Sluiter's
(1. c. 1900, Taf. VI Fig 3) zu ersehen, lediglich 7 grosse Falten
ausgebildet sind, die von Sluiter erwåhnte iberzåhlige , kleine,
unvollståndige neben dem Endostylf kann nur der nicht mehr
erkennbaren rechtsseitigen Hålfte des Kiemensackes angehårt haben.
Ich zåhlte an einer der mittleren Falten 17 innere Långsgefåsse.
Papillen kommen an den Gefåssen des Kiemensackes nicht vor.
Der Darm, nur noch streckenweise erkennbar, scheint der
Originalschilderung zu entsprechen. Die End-Anhånge des flocki-
gen Leberbesatzes, die Leberzotten (Textfig. 13), sind unregel-
måssig gestellt und ziemlich unregelmåssig gestaltet, verhåltnis-
måssig plump. Sie sind schlank- und gerundet-kegelfårmig, oder
stummel- bis fingerfår-
mig, meist mit einem
mehr oder weniger deut-
lich abgeschnurten ova-
len Apikalteil, durch-
schnittlich 0,24 mm lang
und 75 w dick. Es sieht
so aus, als pflege sich
der Apikalteil ganz ab-
Fig- 13. Microcosmus hirsutus Sluit. Umriss von
zulåsen. Leberzotten ; 75/1.
412
Die Geschlechtsapparate entsprechen der Originalschil-
derung. Der von Sluiter nicht freigelegte der rechten Seite be-
steht aus einem fast kreisrunden, oberflåchlich knotigen und
blumenkohlartig håckerigen Gonadenpolster, aus dessen oberen
Rand ein stummelfårmiger Ausfihrstrang hervorgeht. Dies
Gonadenpolster der linken Seite scheint die obere Kantenpartie des
rucklaufenden Darmschleifen-Astes zu iberdecken.
Endocarpe sind anscheinend nur spårlich vorhanden. Ich
erkannte rechts je eines vor und hinter dem Geschlechtsapparat,
links nur einige wenige (2?) aus dem fast geschlossenen Darm-
schleifenraum hervorragen; doch waren die Verhåltnisse der linken
Seite nicht mehr klar erkennbar.
Erorterung. M. hirsutus scheint der Gruppe M. sulcatus Cloq.
anzugehåren. Wåhrend aber die Zahl der Kiemensack-Falten
bei anderen Arten dieser Gruppe, so bei M. sulcatus Cloq., M.
madagascariensis Mich. und zumal bei M. senegalensis Mich.,
durch Verkleinerung der untersten Falten ein Herabsinken von der
vollen 7-Zahl bemerken lassen”), scheint M. hirsutus durch Hinzu-
fiugung einer unvollståndigen Falte VIII rechterseits ein Aufsteigen
der Faltenzahl uber 7 hinaus anzudeuten.
Fam. Styelidae.
Die endgiiltige Aufteilung der Fam. Styelidae in natiurliche
Gattungen ist eine Aufgabe, die der Zukunft vorbehalten bleiben
muss. Den an und fir sich lobenswerten Versuch Huntsman's!),
der auf der Bericksichtigung einer viel zu geringen Zahl von Arten,
und dazu von Arten eines sehr beschrånkten Gebietes, beruht,
muss ich init Hartmeyer als verfehlt betrachten. Ich kann jedoch
zur Zeit nichts besseres an seine Stelle setzen. Hoffentlich fihrt
die von Hartmeyer in Angriff genommene Revision der austra-
lischen Ascidienfauna, die fir die Styeliden sehr bedeutsam zu
sein scheint, zum Ziel. Die Schwierigkeit betrifft einenteils eine
reinliche Scheidung der Gattung Cnrnemidocarpa von Styela und
Polycarpa, anderenteils die Begrenzung der Gattungen stockbildender
") Vergleiche die Erårterung iber M. senegalensis, W. Michaelsen,
1915, Tunic.; in: Meeresfauna Westafrikas, p. 377 u. f.
”) A. G. Huntsman, 1913, The Classif. Styelid.. -p. 132.
413
Styeliden, die friher als Unterfam. Polyzoinae von den Einzelformen,
der Unterfam. Styelinae, gesondert wurden. Mein Versuch einer
Sonderung in natiurliche Gattungen!), der auf der geringen Zahl
der damals bekannten Formen beruhte, machte nicht den Anspruch,
als etwas Endgiltiges angesehen zu werden. Abgesehen von einigen
besonders markanten Gruppen, die sich ohne weiteres als natiir-
liche Gattungen darstellten, wie z. B. Polyzoa, sind jene Gattungen,
zum Teil auf einer einzigen Art beruhend, als Surrogat-Gattungen
anzusehen. Es fehlt ihrer Diagnose die richtige Grundlage, konnte
sie doch nicht ,,eine Auslese der gemeinsamen Charaktere einer nach
Morphologie und geographischer Verbreitung als Verwandtschafts-
gruppe erkannter Gruppe von Arten” sein, sondern nur eine willkiur-
liche Auslese mutmasslich generischer Charaktere. Eine Erweite-
rung unserer Kenntnis, die Entdeckung neuer Arten, muss natur-
gemåss das Urteil iber diese mutmasslichen Gattungscharaktere be-
einflussen und wird vielfach zu einer Ånderung der Gattungsdiagnose
fihren; ist doch nicht zu erwarten, dass bei diesen Surrogat-Gat-
tungen in jedem Falle gleich das Richtige getroffen wurde. Ein
wirklich naturliches System kann nur allmåhlich und erst auf
reicherer Material-Grundlage zur Reife gelangen.
Sluiter sagt in seiner Erårterung iiber Stolonica conglutinata”):
»Man kann doch schwerlich bei jedem anderen Verhåltnisse dieser
Polycarpen eine neue Gattung dafir schaffen." Naturlich nicht!
Das war auch nicht meine Meinung bei der Abfassung jener Gat-
tungsdiagnosen. Ich kann aber Sluiter nicht zustimmen, wenn
er nun die ganze Grundlage jener Gattungssonderung aufheben
måchte, wie es in seiner Frage, ,0b wirklich der Anordnung und
dem Zustand der Polycarpen ein so grosser Wert als Gattungs-
merkmal beigelegt werden kann, als Michaelsen es meint,” zum
Ausdruck kommt. Ein vollkommener Verzicht auf diese in der
Familie der S:yeliden nachweislich fir die Gattungssonderung sehr
bedeutsame Kategorie von Merkmalen wirde diese Familie in einen
Chaotischen Zustand zurickversetzen. Es kann sich meiner An-
sicht nach nur darum handeln, nach Massgabe der neu hinzugekom-
menen Arten eine andere, bezw. eine bessere — dass will ich
Sluiter gern zugestehen — Zusammenfassung vorzunehmen, eine
1) W. Michaelsen, 1924, Rev. compos. Styelid. Polyzoin., p. 28.
?) C. Ph. Sluiter, Einige Ascid. West-Kiste Afrika's, p. 46.
414
Verschiebung der von mir nur vorlåufig durch Surrogat-Gattungen
festgestellten Gattungsgrenzen. Die geographische Verbreitung, stets
der beste Priifstein fir die Natiurlichkeit einer Verwandtschafts-
sonderung, mag dann zeigen, ob wir auf dem rechten Wege sind.
Die Einordnung der Stolonica conglutinata Sluit. in die Gat-
tung Stolonica ist verhåltnismåssig leicht zu bewerkstelligen, wenn
man in die von mir (1. c. 1904, p. 68) vorlåufig aufgestellte Diagnose
einige Zusåtze aufnimmt, entsprechend der etwas anderen Kolo-
nie-Form und des geringfigig abweichenden, Geschlechts-
apparats der neuen Art. Es mag dann auch die bei beiden
Arten gemeinsame Gestaltung der månnlichen Polycarpe in
die Diagnose aufgenommen werden. Diese, deren Typus Sf.
socialis Hartmr. ist, wirde dann lauten:
Stolonica (emend.): Kolonie bestehend aus ,,;mehr oder wenigerf voll-
ståndig von einander gesonderten Personen, die durch echte Stolonen ,,0der
durch eine Basalmembranf mit einander verbunden sind.
Kiemensack mit Falten und zahlreichen inneren Långsgefåssen.
Polycarpe in 2 Reihen, linksseitig såmtlich eingeschlechtlich-månn-
lich, rechtsseitig vorn eingeschlechtlich-månnlich, hinten zwitterig ,,0der je
ein weibliches Polycarp medial dicht neben einem månnlichenf. ,,Månnliche
Polycarpe mit mehreren, rosettenfårmig verbundenen Hodenblasen".
Die geographische Verbreitung dieser Gatt. Stolonica
emend. ist auf die dstlichen Distrikte des nårdlich subtropischen
bis gemåssigten Atlantischen Ozeans beschrånkt, also sehr charak-
teristisch.
Die von Sluiter vordem in die Gattung Sftolonica gestellten
Arten St. prolifera vom Golf von Aden!) und St. dupliplicata von
den Aru-Inseln”) haben in der so definierten Gattung Stolonica
keinen Platz. Sie bilden zusammen mit Heterocarpa zietzi Mich.
von Siud-Australien?) und einer unten beschriebenen neuen Art von
den Chatham-Inseln (,schausinslandi") eine engere Verwandtschaft-
gruppe, die sich von Sftolonica sowie von Distoma (sens. strict.,
siehe unten!) dadurch unterscheidet, dass sowohl rechts wie links
') C. Ph. Sluiter, 1905, Tunic. Tadjourah; in: Bull. Mus. Paris, p. 12,
Taf. II Fig. 5—5c.
;) C. Ph. Sluiter, 1913, Ascid. Aru-Ins., p.: 67,. Taf. 1 Fiona
Fig. 5—10.
) W. Michaelsen, 1911, Tethyid. (Styelid.] Nat. Mus. Hamburg, p. 160,
Textfig. 17.
415
månnliche und weibliche Polycarpe vorkommen, die nur gele-
gentlich und anscheinend unter Verkiimmerung des weiblichen
Teils zu Zwitterpolycarpen aneinander wachsen. Ich nenne diese
neue Gattung, als deren Typus Sfolonica prolifera Sluit. zu be-
trachten ist: Amphicarpa.
Amphicarpa,n.gen.: Kolonie bestehend aus gesonderten, durch Sto-
lonen mit einander verbundenen, oder mit einander verwachsenen und auf
gemeinsamer Basalmembran stehenden Personen.
Kiemensack mit Falten und zahlreichen inneren Långsgefåssen.
Jederseits unregelmåssig zerstreute månnliche und weibliche Polycarpe,
nur ausnahmsweise je ein månnliches und ein weibliches (unter Verkimme-
rung des weiblichen Teils?) zu Zwitterorganen verwachsen. Månnliche Poly-
carpe mit einfacher Hodenblase.
Die geographische Verbreitung ist ganz auf die tropisch-
subtropische. Indopazifische Region, vom westlichen Indischen Ozeari
uber den Malayischen Archipel und Siid-Australien bis zu den
Chatham-Inseln, beschrånkt.
Die Bearbeitung des vorliegenden Materials bedarf noch der
Klårung einer anderen Gattungsgruppe, bei der der Kiemensack
im Gegensatz zu der oben besprochenen Gruppe faltenlos ist. Ich
habe die Anschauung, dass der Besitz bezw. das Fehlen von Falten
am Kiemensack von gattungssondernder Bedeutsamkeit sei, durch-
brochen, als ich in der Gattung Alloeocarpa (1. c. 1904, p. 72) For-
men mit und ohne Kiemensack-Falten vereinte. Auf Anregung
Hartmeyer's låse ich diese Vereinigung wieder auf, und die fir
beide dadurch enger begrenzten Gattungen herauskommende geo-
graphische Verbreitung zeigt, dass hiermit das Richtige getroffen
ist. Die engere Gattung mit Kiemensack-Falten, deren Typus die
åltest bekannte komposite Styelide, Distomus variolosus Gaertner,
ist, wurde folgende Diagnose erhalten:
Distomus (emend.): Kolonie bestehend aus gesonderten, durch Stolonen
mit einander verbundenen, oder aus enger mit einander verwachsenen, auf
gemeinsamer Basalmembran stehenden Personen.
Kiemensack mit Falten und zahlreichen inneren Långsgefåssen.
Polycarpe såmtlich eingeschlechtlich, links nur månnliche, rechts nur
weibliche.
Die geographische Verbreitung ist auf die nordwest-
europåische und die nordwestafrikanische Region sowie auf das
Mittelmeer beschrånkt.
416
Die der Gattung Distomus entsprechende Gattung ohne Kiemen-
sack-Falten muss den von mir geschaffenen Namen Alloeocarpa mit
dem Typus 4. incrustans (Herdm.) fihren. Ihre Diagnose lautet:
Alloeocarpa (emend.): Kolonie bestehend aus mehr oder weniger eng
mit einander verwachsenen oder getrennten Personen, die auf einer gemein-
samen Basalmembran stehen oder die einfache Aussenschicht an einer ge-
meinsamen Zellulosemantel-Masse bilden.
Kiemensack ohne Falten, mit einer geringen oder måssig grossen
unbestimmten Zahl (etwa 5—16 jederseits) innerer Långsgefåsse.
Polycarpe såmtlich eingeschlechtlich, links nur månnliche, rechts nur
weibliche.
Die geographische Verbreitung ist sehr charakteristisch,
subantarktisch und sidlich gemåssigt, vom Magalhaensischen Gebiet
uber die Falkland-Inseln, Sid-Georgien, Kapland und Kerguelen
der Westwind-Trift folgend bis zur Campbell-Insel siidlich von
Neuseeland, ausserdem Malayischer Archipel. In das engere
Neuseeland-Gebiet scheint sie nicht hineinzugehen. Sie wird hier
durch 2 Arten vertreten, die eine nahe verwandte Gruppe dar-
stellen und mehr den kalifornischen kompositen Styeliden der Gat-
tung Metandrocarpa zuneigen, ohne jedoch in diese Gattung, wie
ich sie umgrenzte (1. c. 1904, p. 69), hineinzupassen. Diese Diagnose
ist das typische Beispiel einer Surrogatdiagnose. Nach der einzigen
damals bekannten Art, Goodsiria dura Ritter, liess sich nicht beur-
teilen, in welchen Punkten die generische Bedeutsamkeit liege. Die
Gegeniiberstellung mit den sich an Metandrocarpa anschliessenden
neuen Årten zeigt, dass die Bedeutsamkelt nicht in der besonderen
Anordnung der Polycarpe verschiedenen Geschlechts (vorn weib-
liche, hinten månnliche) lag, sondern darin, dass beiderseits månn-
liche und weibliche liegen. Die zur Aufnahme der neuen Arten
erweiterte Diagnose der Gattung Metandrocarpa mit dem Typus
M. dura (Ritt.) lautet demgemåss:
Metandrocarpa (emend.): Kolonie bestehend aus getrennten oder mehr
oder weniger eng mit einander verwachsenen, auf einer gemeinsamen Basal-
membran stehenden oder durch Stolonen mit einander verbundenen Personen.
Kiemensack ohne Falten, mit einer ziemlich geringen, unbestimmten
Zahl (etwa 5—10 jederseits) innerer Långsgefåsse.
Polycarpe meist såmtlich eingeschlechtlich, jederseits månnliche und
weibliche, selten gelegentlich zwei Polycarpe verschiedenen Geschlechts mehr
oder weniger innig zu einem Zwitterorgan verwachsen.
417
Die geographische Verbreitung ist ganz auf den Pazi-
fischen Ozean beschrånkt, erstreckt sich allerdings in schråger,
sidwest-nordåstlicher Richtung iber dessen ganze Breite, von Neu-
seeland bis nach Kalifornien und Britisch-Kolumbien.
Es kommen im Neuseelåndischen Gebiet noch 3 weitere kom-
posite Styeliden mit faltenlosem Kiemensack vor, die in keine der
bisher aufgestellten Gattungen hineinpassen. Unter den Gattungen
mit faltigem Kiemensack entsprechen sie der Gattung Stolonica
vom dstlichen Teil des nordhemisphårischen Atlantischen Ozeans.
Ich bezeichne die fir diese Arten aufzustellende Gattung als Theo-
dorella mit dem Typus Th. arenosa n. sp. Ihre Diagnose lautet:
Theodorella n.gen.: Kolonie bestehend aus innig mit einander ver-
bundenen, auf einer gemeinsamer Basalmembran stehenden, oder gesonderten,
durch Stolonen mit einander verbundenen Personen.
Kiemensack ohne Falten, mit einer ziemlich geringen, unbestimmten
Zahl (etwa 7 oder 8 jederseits) innerer Långsgefåsse.
Polycarpe links såmtlich eingeschlechtlich månnlich, rechts teils
zwittrig, teils eingeschlechtlich månnlich. Månnliche Polycarpe mit einfacher
Hodenblase.
Geographische Verbreitung der fir 3 neue Arten auf-
gestellten Gattung anscheinend auf das engere Neuseeland-Gebiet
beschrånkt.
Die Erårterung der ibrigen, in keiner besondern Beziehung zu
dem hier behandelten Material stehenden Gattungen kompositer
Styeliden muss ich fir eine spåtere Zeit und eine andere Gelegen-
heit zurickstellen, falls nicht von anderer Seite die nåtige Revision
derselben durchgefihrt wird.
Gen. Cnemidocarpa Huntsm.
Cnemidocarpa cerea (Sluit.)
? 1878, Styela humilis Heller, Beitr. Kenntn. Tunic., p. 108.
1900, Styela cerea Sluiter, Tunic. Stillen Ozean, p. 24, Taf. III
Hoyte
??1904, Styela cerea Sluiter, Tunic. Siboga-Exp. I, p. 61.
P? 1909, Dendrodoa gregaria Kesteven, Stud. Tunic. I, p. 291, Taf. XXV
Fig. 1—3, Taf. XXVI Fig. 7, Taf. XXXVIII Fig. 1—5.
1909, Tethyum cereum + 2 T. humile + ? Pandocia gregaria, H art-
meyer, Tunic.;in:Bronn, Kl. Ordn. Tierr., p. 1358, 1359, 1484.
1916, /Cnemidocarpa] cerea + ? [Cn.] humilis + 2? [Cn.] gregaria,
Hartmeyer, Neue und alte Styelid. Berlin. Mus., p. 229.
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturhist. Foren. Bd. 73. 27
418
1921, Cnemidocarpa aucklandica Bovien, Ascid. Auckland Campbell Isl.,
p36/lexthi 2.134:
Fundangaben: Neuseeland, Sidinsel, Queen Charlotte-
Sund, 5—10 Fd.; 19.—20. Jan. 1915.
Stewart-Insel, Port Pegasus, an einer Serpuliden-Råhre;
21. Nov. 1914; Halfmoon-Bucht, an der Kiste; 19. Nov. 1914.
Alte Angabe: Neuseeland, Sidinsel, d'Urville-Insel
(machiSlaitern):
Weitere Verbreitung: Auckland-Inseln (nach Bovien:
Cnemidocarpa aucklandica); ? Tasmanien (nach Kesteven:
Dendrodoa gregaria); ?? Malayischer Archipel, Insel Jedan
(nach Sluiter).
Der Styela cerea ordne ich einige Stiicke zu, obgleich sie in der
Gestaltung der Geschlechtsorgane betråchtlich von Sluiter's
Beschreibung abweichen. Wie mir Hartmeyer, der den Typus
dieser Art nachpriifen konnte, brieflich mitteilt, ist die Sluiter'sche
Beschreibung dieser Organe nicht richtig. Die Geschlechtsorgane
seien (und so fand ich es bei meinen Stiicken) ganz nach dem
Cnemidocarpa asymmetra-Typus gebaut. Auch Bovien konnte
die Identitåt seiner Cn. aucklandica mit der Sluiter'schen Art
nach der vorliegenden lickenhaften und nicht in jeder Hinsicht
richtigen Originalbeschreibung nicht erkennen.
Als Synonyme der Cn. cerea sind wahrscheinlich auch Den-
drodoa gregaria Kest. und Styela humilis Hell. zu betrachten,
von denen Hartmeyer typische Stiicke untersuchen konnte, und
die nach seiner Mitteilung (!. c. 1916, p. 229) mindestens zur engeren
Gruppe der Cnemidocarpa asymmetra (Hartmr.) zu rechnen sind.
Nach Sluiter soll Cn. cerea auch im Malayischen Gebiet,
bei der Insel Jedan, vorkommen. Ich kann nicht glauben, dass
eine Art dieser Gruppe, die ganz auf das sidliche Kaltwassergebiet
beschrånkt zu sein scheint, in dieser Linie so weit nårdlich in
das Warmwassergebiet vordringe, scheint sie, die an der Sidinsel
von Neuseeland so håufig gefunden wurde und bis zu den Auckland-
Inseln siidwårts geht, doch schon an der Nordinsel Neuseelands
nicht mehr vorzukommen. Ich glaube annehmen zu miissen, dass
Sluiter sich in der Bestimmung irrte.
Als nåchste Verwandte der Cn. cerea, und mit ihr eine enge
Verwandtschaftsgruppe bildend, sind Cn. novaezelandiae Mich. von
419
Neuseeland (siehe unten!), Cn. asymmetra (Hartmr.)!) von Siid-
und Siudwest-Afrika und Cn. robinsoni Hartmr.”) von Juan Fer-
nandez vor Mittel-Chile anzusehen, wie schon Hartmeyer an-
gibt, und wie auch von Bovien in der Erårterung .seiner Cn.
aucklandica beståtigt wird.': Zur unmittelbaren Vergleichung habe
ich mein Material der Cm. asymmetra von Liideritzbucht einer Nach-
untersuchung unterzogen und fige die Ergebnisse derselben in die
folgende zusammenfassende Beschreibung der Cn. cerea ein.
Beschreibung. Gestalt bei freiem Wachstum nahezu kugelig
oder seitlich etwas abgeplattet eifåormig. Ein zwischen den beiden
am Schloss noch zusammen haftenden Schalen einer Muschel fest
eingeklemmtes Stiick ist seitlich stark abgeplattet. Åussere Siphonen
nur wenig erhaben, breit warzenfåormig, etwa !/4 des Profil-Um-
fanges des Kårpers von einander entfernt.
Gråssenverhåltnisse: Das gråsste mir vorliegende Stiick
misst basoapikal 45 mm, dorsoventral 35 mm, in der Breite 20 mm.
Oberflåche unregelmåssig runzelig, manchmal fast rein,
manchmal durch Fremdkårper-Anwuchs mehr oder weniger be-
schmutzt, im feineren dorsal und im Umkreis der Korperdffnungen
etwas duff, mit mikroskopisch kleinen Dornen besetzt. Diese
Aussendorne sind erkerfårmig, ungefåhr 16 uw hoch. Sie gehen
iber den Rand der Siphone ohne scharfen Absatz in die åhnlich
gestalteten Innendorne (siehe unten!) uber. In weiterer Entfernung
von der Riickenseite scheinen die Aussendorne zu schwinden.
Fårbung weiss oder hellgrau, an den Siphonen manchmal
hell gelblich braun (nach Bovien ,slightly yellowishf).
Kårperåffnungen: Kreuzschlitze mit je einem Polster in
den Winkelråumen.
Zellulosemantel diinn, weich lederartig, zåh, im Schnitt
weisslich.
Zellulosemantel-Auskleidung der Siphonen durch
zahlreiche Zickzackfurchen uneben gemacht. In den inneren Zonen
1) R. Hartmeyer, 1912, Ascid. Deutsch. Tiefsee-Exp., p. 253, Taf. XXXVII
Fre Gar -XEN Fig: 5—7.
W. Michaelsen, 1915, Tunic.; in: Meeresf.-Westafrikas, p. 394, Taf.
XVIII Fig. 28—30.
?) R. Hartmeyer, 1916, Neue und alte Styelid. Berlin. Mus., p. 224,
Textfig. 10—13.
27?
PA
420
verlaufen diese Furchen ziemlich regelmåssig in der Långsrichtung,
weiter aussen bezw. vorn sind sie ganz unregelmåssig. In den
åusseren Teilen kommen zarte Innendorne von wasserhellem
Aussehen vor, die den Aussendornen åhneln, aber zarter und etwas
gråsser sind. Sie sind erkerfårmig, ca. 20 uw hoch, etwas weniger
breit als hoch und etwas långer als hoch (nach Bovien ,pointed,
but short and with a broad base"). In Hinsicht der Aussen- und
Innendorne stimmt Cn. asymmefra ganz mit meinen Befunden an
Cn. cerea iuberein. Eigentliche Siphonalpapillen sind nicht
gefunden worden; doch lau-
fen die unregelmåssigen Vor-
springe der Zickzackwiilste
manchmal in papillenformige
gerundete Spitzen aus.
Leibeswand zart, mit
auffallend weitlåufig ange-
ordneter Muskulatur, die
der Hauptsache nach von
den Basen der inneren Si-
phonen ausstrahlt, rechter-
seits bis an den Endostyl
reicht, linkerseits aber viel
friher aufgelåst erscheint.
Das vom Branchialsipho aus-
Fig. 14. Cnemidocarpa cerea (Sluit,) Weich-
kårper, durch einen ventralmedianen Långs-
schnitt gedffnet u. ausgebreitet; Kiemensack bis gehende Strahlensystem låsst
auf den Vorderrand abpripariert; Mundtentakel, ; :
infolge schnellen Auseinan-
Flimmerorgan, Atrialtentakel, Darm, Geschlechts- 8 ch
. apparate u. Endocarpe sichtbar; &/1. derbiegens der beiden me-
dialen Muskelbindel den dor-
salen Raum zwischen den beiden Siphonen frei. Das Strahlensystem
des Atrialsiphos ist vorn nicht geschlossen, insofern sich an die
seitlich und hinten radiåren Muskelbiindel dieses Systems nach
vorn hin quere, die Riickenlinie kreuzende Muskelbiindel anschliessen.
Endocarpa (Textfig. 14) sackformig bis kantig-schildformig,
in sehr charakteristischer Anordnung, nur zum Darm, nicht zu den
Geschlechtsorganen in Beziehung stehend, und dementsprechend an
der rechten Kårperseite ganz fehlend. An der linken Seite bei
zwei nåher untersuchten Stick 10 oder 11 ziemlich grosse Endo-
carpe, davon 3 im Innern der Darmschleife, 1 zwischen Osophagus
421
und Vorderende des Magens einerseits und dem Enddarm anderer-
seits, 4 oder 5 dicht am ricklaufenden und 2 dicht am vorlaufenden
Darmschleifen-Ast, zwischen diesem und dem Endostyl. In der
Anordnung der Endocarpe zeigt Cn. asymmetra eine grosse Åhnlich-
keit mit Cm. cerea, doch scheint ihre Zahl bei jener afrikanischen
Årt etwas gråsser zu sein, nåmlich nach den nåher untersuchten
Stuckenki2toder 13 (gegen 10”oder 11 ber Cnieered) Das berukt
auf der deutlich gråsseren Zahl der Endocarpe am Aussenrande
des riicklaufenden Darmschleifen-Astes bei Cn. asymmetra (6 oder 7,
gegen 4 oder 5 bei Cn. cerea). Dagegen fehlen bei allen von mir
untersuchten Cm. asymmetra die beiden bei Cn. cerea anscheinend
konstant auftretenden Endocarpe zwischen dem vorlaufenden Darm-
schleifen-Ast und dem Endostyl. Dieser Unterschied ist vielleicht
bedeutsamer, als er auf den ersten Blick erscheint, hångt er doch
mutmasslich mit der verschiedenen Lage des rechtsseitigen Ge-
schlechtsapparates zusammen, dessen rechtsseitiger Teil bei Cn. asym-
metra geradezu unter dem Endostyl liegt und dabei betråchtlich auf
die linke Kårperseite hiniber ragt, den Platz der bei Cn. cerea
links neben dem Endostyl sitzenden Endocarpe fir sich bean-
spruchend. Bei Cn. cerea scheint der rechtsseitige Geschlechts-
apparat nicht oder nicht betråchtlich auf die linke Seite hiniber-
zuragen.
Branchialtentakel schlank såbelfårmig, unregelmåssig ab-
wechselnd verschieden lang, ca. 60 (nach Bovien ca. 50).
Ein ziemlich schmales Atrialvelum trågt eine einfache, ziem-
lich eng geschlossene Reihe von zahlreichen Atrialtentakeln
(Textfig. 15). Diese haben eine charakteristische Ge-
stalt. Auf einer sehr dicken, gerundet kegelfårmigen
bis halbkugeligen Basis entspringt in ziemlich scharfem
Absatz der fadenfårmige Mittelteil des Atrialtentakels.
Apikal zeigen die Atrialtentakel ohne Regel der Anord-
nung zwei verschiedene Formen. Die meisten sind
apikal schnell verjiingt und schliesslich in ein kurzes
haarformiges Ende ausgezogen. Zwischen diesen stehen Fig, 15. Cne-
andere, die etwas kiirzer und apikal keulenfårmig an- midocarpa ce-
z ; ; rea (Sluit.)
geschwollen sind. In der Anschwellung liegtleinmehr se mere,
zelliges graues Sinneskårperchen. Die Atrial- gestaltete
& ; ; Atrialten-
tentakel sind etwa 0,5 bezw. 0,48 mm lang, in der Mitte — nej. 4,
422
etwa 40 uw, an der Basis etwa 90—100 w dick. Bei Cn. asymmetra
zeigen die Atrialtentakel die gleiche sehr charakteristische Gestalt.
Das Flimmerorgan (Textfig. 14) ist ein rundliches Polster
mit einfachem Flimmergrubenspalt. Beim gråssten Exemplar sind
beide Håørner der vorn offenen Spaltlinie einwårts gebogen bezw.
eingerollt. Bei dem kleineren Exemplar sind beide Hårner nach
rechts hin eingebogen, so dass eine Figur entsteht spiegelbildlich
zu der von Sluiter abgebildeten.
Kiemensack im allgemeinen symmetrisch gestaltet, dorsal
verkirzt, mit 4 Falten jederseits. Anordnung der inneren Långs-
gefåsse auf den Falten und Faltenzwischenråumen links am klei-
nerenf Exemplar: DEO (UO)FSEEDES KO) RER S)KSEE
Quergefåsse nach "dem" Schema "1832 ES EP ES EP ES MERE
schieden dick. Parastigmatische Quergefåsse vereinzelt ganze Ma-
schen iiberspannend, nicht als Enden vorzeitig aufhårender Quer-
gefåsse 3. Ordnung auftretend. Maschen in den Faltenzwischen-
råumen breiter als lang, vereinzeli bis 17 Kiemenspalten enthaltend,
meist weniger, etwa 7 oder 8. Maschen neben dem Endostyl
breiter, im Håchstfalle 24 Kiemenspalten, die neben der Dorsal-
falte noch breiter, bis 36 Kiemenspalten enthaltend. Papillen sind
am Kiemensack nicht ausgebildet. Dorsalfalte ziemlich breit,
glatt und glattrandig, stellenweise etwas fåltelig (Kontraktions-
erscheinung?).
Darm (Textfig. 14) eine etwas gebogene, anfangs schwach
klaffende, am Wendepol etwas stårker klaffende Schleife bildend,
deren Wendepol sehr wenig iber die Mitte des Kårpers nach vorn
hin ragt. Øsophagus sehr diinn, kantig, S-fårmig gebogen.
Magen dick spindelfårmig, ziemlich genau dorsoventral gestellt,
åusserlich glatt, mit durchscheinender Långsstreifung, im Innern
mit ca. 20 regelmåssigen, ziemlich weit in das Lumen einragenden
Långsfalten und einer breiten, verschieden hohen Typhlosolis. Ein
Blindsack konnte nicht nachgewiesen werden (nach Bovien
nicht vorhanden). Mittel- und Enddarm nicht von einander
gesondert. After glattrandig.
Geschlechtsorgane nach dem Cn. asymmetra-Typus gebaut.
Es sind abgeplattet-balkenfårmige, lange oder kurze, gerade oder
gebogene, in verschiedener Art mit einander verwachsene Strånge.
An der linken Kårperseite eine U-fårmige Gonade dicht vor dem
423
Wendepol der Darmschleife (gråsstes Stick) oder an gleicher Stelle
neben einer V-fårmigen Gonade noch ein kurzer einfacher Strang
(kleineres Stuck), selten komplizierter gebaut, aber stets ganz auf
den verhåltnismåssig geringen Raum vor dem Wendepol der Darm-
schleife beschrånkt. Auch die rechtsseitigen Gonaden sind bei
den nåher untersuchten Stucken sehr verschieden. Bei dem gråss-
ten findet sich vorn ein unregelmåssiges Netzwerk von Strången,
dessen Maschen zum Teil durch enge Zusammenschnurung ge-
schwunden erscheinen, sodass plattenformige Bildungen entstehen.
Aus diesem Netzwerk ziehen sich 2 lange, nur schwach gebogene
Strånge ziemlich dicht neben einander nach hinten. Der obere
dieser beiden langen Strånge ist noch wieder geteilt. Sie erinnern
an die langen Strånge der von Sluiter abgebildeten rechtsseitigen
Gonade (l. c. 1900, Taf. III Fig. 9), doch sind sie hinten nicht
miteinander verwachsen. Bei dem oben erwåhnten kleineren
Stick (Fig. 14) fehlen solche ausgesprochenen Långsstrånge im
hinteren Teil des rechten Geschlechtsorgans. Statt ihrer finden
sich hier 8 kiirzere, teils gerade, teils etwas gebogene Strånge,
die unregelmåssig strahlig in einem Punkte zusammen laufen. Ob
je 2 und 2 dieser Strånge zusammen gehåren, ob hier also nur
4 und dafir doppelt solange Strånge vorliegen, liess sich nicht
nachweisen. Neben dem vordersten Strahl dieses Systems liegt
noch ein anscheinend isolierter kurzer Strang, und ausserdem
schliesst sich nach vorn hin noch ein kleines System von kurzen
Strången und einer Platte (Netzwerk mit zusammen gezogenen
Maschen) an. Das ganze Geschlechtsorgan reicht nicht so weit
nach vorn, wie bei dem gråsseren Stuck. Der innere Bau der
Geschlechtsorgane ist sehr eigentimlich. Die Strånge werden
hauptsåchlich durch die Ovarien gebildet, deren ausgewachsene
Eizellen eine Dicke von etwa 160 w er-
reichen. Die Hoden (Textfig. 16) be-
stehen aus verhåltnismåssig grossen, Ca.
240 u dicken Hodenblasen, die teils ein-
fach, abgeplattet eifårmig, långlich bis
brotlaibfårmig, teils komplizierter gestaltet
sind, y- oder v-formig oder aus der Ver- Fig. 16. Cnemidocarpa cerea
wachsung von 3 platten Balken entstan- (Sluit) Umriss SETE REDEN
£ dem Ovarium liegenden
den. Aus den Hodenblasen gehen ziem- Heden blee 35
424
lich derbe, ca. 32 u dicke Ausfihrgånge hervor. Die Anordnung
der Hoden erscheint sehr unregelmåssig. An manchen Stellen
fehlen sie ganz. Stellenweise liegen Hodenblasen ganz im Innern
der Ovarialstrånge oder seitlich eng an diese angeschmiegt. Zum Teil
liegen sie aber auch in betråchtlicher Entfernung von den Ovarial-
strången, an der Innenseite der Leibeswand einen schleierhaften,
kleinen Netziiberzug bildend und nur durch ihre langen Ausfihr-
gånge mit den Ovarialstrången in Verbindung gesetzt. Sowohl
die Gestalt der Hodenblasen wie ihre Lagebeziehung zu den Ovarial-
strången erinnert sehr an manche typische Styela-Arten, z. B. St.
marquesana Mich.”), Jeder Geschlechtsapparat ist mit zahlreichen
schornsteinfårmigen freien Ausfihrapparaten versehen, bestehend
aus einem dick stummelfårmigen Eileiter und dicht neben ihm,
mehr oder weniger weit mit ihm verwachsen, einem etwas schlan-
keren Samenleiter. Diese Ausfihrapparate stehen meist am Ende
der Geschlechtsstrånge, zum Teil aber auch anscheinend ganz un-
regelmåssig, nicht an oder nahe an den Enden der Strånge, son-
dern mitten auf den Strången. Bei zwei neuerdings untersuchten
Stiicken von Cn. asymmetra fand ich den rechtsseitigen Geschlechts-
apparat im Gegensatz zu dem gewohnlichen Befund in dieser
Gruppe und auch bei den friiher untersuchten Sticken der Art
sehr stark entwickelt. Er stellte ein kompliziertes Netzwerk dar,
nahm fast den ganzen Raum der linken Leibeswand vor dem
Wendepol der Darmschleife ein und schien auch mit der linksseiti-
gen (medianen) Gonade in Verbindung getreten zu sein. Der
Bau des Geschlechtsapparats ist bei Cm. asymmetra kompakter als
bei Cn. cerea. Die Gonadenstrånge von Cn. asymmetra stellen
ein inniges Konglomerat von Hodenpartien und Ovarialpartien dar.
Die Hodenpartien liegen mehr basal, ragen aber stellenweise
bis dicht unter die kulminale Oberflåche nach oben, am Rande
und am proximalen Ende manchmal bis ganz an diese Oberflåche.
Die Ovarien nehmen die kulminalen Oberflåchenpartien meist
bis zur Mitte ein, ragen aber stellenweise bis an die Grundflåche
nach unten. Die Hode setzt sich aus unregelmåssig birnfårmigen
bis walzenfårmigen, durchschnittlich etwa 0,5 mm dicken Hoden-
blasen zusammen. Gegabelte oder sonstwie komplizierter gestal-
") W. Michelsen, Ptychobr. Diktyobr. Ascid. westl. Ind. Oz., p. 32, Textfig. 5.
425
tete Hodenblasen konnte ich nicht auffinden. Die Ausfihrgånge
der Hodenblasen sind zartwandig und diinn, etwa 20 w dick, also
viel zarter als bei Cm. cerea. Die ausgewachsenen Eizellen des
Ovariums von Cn. asymmetra sind etwa 0,175 mm dick.
Cnemidocarpa novaezelandiae (Mich.)
1911, Pyuropsis novaezelandiae Michaelsen, Tethyid. (Styelid.) Nat.
Mus. Hamburg, p. 113, Textfig. 1, 2.
Fundangabe: Neuseeland, Nordinsel, Bucht von Tau-
cansal(lhileniuss.):
Alte Angabe: Neuseeland, Sidinsel, Lyttleton (nach
Michaelsen).
Ich habe ausser dem Original dieser Art ein kleines, nur 6 mm
langes, unreifes Tier von der Bucht von Tauranga untersuchen
køénnen und bin zu der Erkenntnis gekommen, dass diese Art zu
Unrecht mit dem Typus der Gattung Pyuropsis generisch vereint
wurde. Die angebliche Fiederung der Branchialtentakel beruht
meiner jetzigen Ansicht nach nicht auf eigentlichen Fiederanhån-
gen, wie bei Pyuropsis stubenrauchi (Mich.), sondern auf ganz
unregelmåssigen Ausbeulungen und Auswiichsen der Tentakel, die
jenen echten, tentakelartigen Fiedern nicht gleich gestellt werden
køånnen. Ich kann mich sogar nicht ganz des Verdachtes erwehren,
dass wir es hier mit einer Krankheitserscheinung zu tun haben;
doch spricht das ziemlich gleichmåssige Vorkommen dieser Bildung
an allen Tentakeln von einer gewissen Gråsse an gegen eine solche
Deutung. Jedenfalls ist diese Art aus der Gattung Pyuropsis her-
auszunehmen und in die Gattung Cnemidocarpa zu stellen. Sie
gehårt zu dem Verwandtschaftskreis der Cn. asymmetra und steht
besonders der Cn. cerea nahe. Eine Zeit lang, vor Beendigung
der genaueren Untersuchung, glaubte ich sogar, dass sie mit Cn.
cerea identisch sei. Darauf beruhte wohl hauptsåchlich der Ver-
dacht, dass jene absonderliche Tentakelbildung nur krankhaft sei;
denn nur bei solcher Deutung liess sich jene Art mit angeblich
gefiederten Tentakeln der Cn. cerea zuordnen. Es fanden sich
jedoch schliesslich gewisse Gestaltungsverhåltnisse, die mich von
meiner vorgefassten Meinung zurickbrachten und mich veranlass-
ten, die Art als Cn. novaezelandia aufrecht zu erhalten. Im fol-
426
genden ergånze ich meine Originalbeschreibung und stelle gewisse
Verhåltnisse in Vergleich mit denen von Cn. cerea.
Fårbung mit deutlichem Perlmutterglanz, vielleicht etwas
glånzender als bei Cn. cerea.
Aussen- und Innendorne åhnlich denen der verwandten
Art, aber schlanker und etwas gråsser, Aussendorne (auf der
Rickenseite und die nåhere und weitere Umgebung der Kårper-
offnungen beschrånkt?) schmal- und lang-erkerfårmig,”fast furchen-
zahnfårmig, ca. 20 u lang und 6 w breit, derber als die Innen-
dorne, die noch mehr furchenzahnførmig (sehr schmal erkerfårmig)
sind, etwa 25 w lang bei einer Breite von etwa 6 vw.
In der Gestaltung der Atrialtentakel weicht Cm. movaeze-
landiae bedeutsam von Cn. cerea ab. Ihre Atrialtentakel sind, wie
angegeben, schlank fadenfårmig. und zwar ungefåhr 0,4 mm lang
und distal 16 u dick. Wohl sind sie basal stark verbreitert, aber
nur allmåhlich; eine solche kuppel- oder abgerundet kegelfårmige,
ziemlich scharf abgesetzte Basalpartie, wie sie fir Cn. cerea (und
Cn. asymmetra) charakteristisch ist, fehlt ihnen.
Der Flimmergrubenspalt ist bei dem neuerdings unter-
suchten jungen Stiick etwas mehr in die Breite gezogen, und sein
linkes Horn ist am Ende nach auswårts gebogen.
Der Kiemensack bietet einen bedeutsamen Unterschied
zwischen Cn. novaezelandiae und ihren Verwandten dar, insofern
die Zahl derinneren Långsgefåsse auf den Falten verhålt-
nismåssig klein ist, zumal die der Falten IV neben dem Endostyl.
Bei dem neuen jugendlichen Stiick sind diese Falten IV geradezu
als rudimentår zu bezeichnen, durch Aneinanderrickung dreier
innerer Långsgefåsse auf ganz flachem Grunde markiert.
In Hinsicht der Endocarpe schliesst sich Cm. novaezelandiae
offenbar der Cn. asymmetra-Gruppe an; wenngleich ich eine
genauere Feststelluug dariber nicht machen kann. An der rechten
Seite fehlen Endocarpe, falls sie nicht etwa såmtlich bei den Prå-
paraten vernichtet wurden, was kaum anzunehmen ist. Links
fand ich am Original noch 2 in der Darmschleife und 3 am riick-
laufenden Darmschleifen-Ast in der Darmschleifen-Bucht; weitere
mågen zerstårt worden sein.
Die Gonaden scheinen einfacher und kompakter als bei
irgend einer anderen Art dieser Verwandschaftsgruppe zu sein,
427
doch entspricht ihre Anordnung der fiir die Gruppe typischen.
Es finden sich links eine einzige dicht vor dem Wendepol der
Darmschleife, rechts 2 neben dem Endostyl. Das Auftreten von
zwei gesonderten Gonaden rechis erinnert an Cn. robinsoni Hartmr.
(1 c1916, p. 224, Textfig. 10—13).
Cnemidocarpa nisiotis (Sluit.)
1900, Styela nisiotis Sluiter, Tunic. Stillen Ocean, p. 21, Taf. III Fig.
2—5)
1909, Tethyum nisiotis, Hartmeyer, in : Bronn, Kl. Ord. Tierr.,
p. 1359.
Fundangabe: Neuseeland, Sidinsel, Queen Charlotte-
Sund, an Gruppen von Serpuliden-Réhren, 3—10 Fd.; 19.—20.
Jans klo tSs:
Alte Angabe: Neuseeland, Sidinsel, French Passage
(nach Sluiter).
Die Sluiter'sche Beschreibung ist in folgenden Punkten zu
ergånzen :
Die Fårbung der mir vorliegenden Sticke weicht etwas von
dem Originalmaterial ab, insofern sie dunkler, dunkel graubraun
oder fast schwarz ist.
Djemellalosemantel-Ausklerdung der siphonen
zeigt zahlreiche Långswiilste mit zickzackformigem Verlauf und
unregelmåssig vorspringender First. Siphonalpapillen sind
nicht ausgebildet; auch Innendorne sind nicht gefunden worden.
Der Weichkorper haftet ziemlich fest am Zellulosemantel
und entspricht der åusseren Kårpergestalt, doch sind die inneren
Siphonen etwas deutlicher ausgeprågt, als die åusseren. Seine
Muskulatur ist kråftig, doch meist nicht unmittelbar erkennbar,
in der gallertig dicken Leibeswand verborgen. Nur an den mitt-
leren Seitenwånden sieht man dicke Muskelbiindel von der Atrial-
offnung zum Endostyl hinstrahlen.
Branchialtentakel sehr unregelmåssig angeordnet. Im
allgemeinen wechseln långere und kirzere: stellenweise findet
sich auch das Schema 1, 3, 2,3, 1 auf kleiner Strecke. Ihre Zahl
ist bei dem von mir untersuchten Stiick etwas gråsser — es
mågen etwa 65 sein — als Sluiter angibt. An einzelnen Stel-
len -— bei weitem nicht am ganzen Umfang — findet man un-
428
gemein winzige, fast papillenformige Tentakel mit den gråsseren
unregelmåssig abwechselnd. Diese sind nur bei Betrachtung unter
dem Mikroskop erkennbar und schon deshalb leicht zu ibersehen.
Die Atrialoffnung ist von einem regelmåssigen, eng geschlos-
senen Kranz kleiner Atrialtentakel (Textfig. 19) umgeben. Ich
schåtze ihre Zahl auf weit uber 100. Sie sind schlank
fadenformig mit keulenfårmig angeschwollenem freien
Ende, das ein grauss Sinneskårperchen enthålt;
ihre Basis ist ohne Absatz kegelfårmig erweitert. Sie
sind an einem mittelgrossen Stick ungefåhr 0,8 mm
lang, an der Basis 60 u, in der Mitte 30 w und am
angeschwollenen freien Ende etwa 45 mu dick.
Das Flimmerorgan ist ein rundliches, gewolb-
tes Polster. Der Flimmergrubenspalt bildet keine ein-
fache Figur; sein Verlauf ist variabel und nicht ganz
deutlich erkannt. Falls ich nicht irre, gehen von einer
unregelmåssig U-formigen Hauptlinie, die nach vorn
hin offen ist und einen medianen Wulst zwischen sich
Fig. 17. 6 . g z. 5 Ds
Cnemido- … fasst, einige kurz-spiralige oder schnårkelige Linien ab,
carpa nisi- die ungefåhr 6 Sonderpolster umfassen. Diese Sonder-
otis (Sluit.) - E=
Atrialtenta- — Polster treten nach aussen als blasige Aufwolbungen
kel; 60/1. vor und verleihen dem Flimmerorgan ein charakteri-
stisches Aussehen. Der mediane Wall ist manchmal (immer?)
noch durch einen von vorn her einschneidenden Flimmergruben-
Spalt bis fast zur Mitte halbiert. Einen Zusammenhang zwischen
diesem Spalt und dem U-fårmigen Hauptspalt konnte ich nicht
erkennen.
Der Kiemensack entspricht im allgemeinen den Angaben
Sluiter's. Ich fand an einem Kiemensack rechterseits folgende
Anordnung der inneren Långsgefåsse auf den Falten und Falten-
zwischenråumen: D. 2—13 (15) 3 (52) 5 (18) 6 (13) 6 E. Die
Maschen sind in den Faltenzwischenråumen breiter als lang
und enthalten bis 8 Kiemenspalten. In den Maschen neben
dem Endostyl zåhlte ich dagegen bis 13. Die Maschen neben der
Dorsalfalte sind sehr verschieden —ausgebildet. Stellenweise
erscheinen sie als schmale lange Tåler zwischen den hier allge-
mein gleich breiten, unregelmåssig verzweigten Quergefåssen und
nicht durch innere Långsgefåsse geteilt; sie enthalten zum Teil
429
mehr als 30 Kiemenspalten. Stellenweise sind die inneren Långs-
gefåsse hier gerade sehr zahlreich und dicht gestellt, so dass die
Maschen nur eine sehr geringe Zahl von Kiemenspalten enthalten.
Dorsalfalte sehr breit, glattwandig und glattrandig, høchstens
stellenweise etwas fåltelig oder wellig. Osophagus-Offnung
ziemlich weit hinten gelegen.
Der Darm bildet eine in ganzer Långe klaffende, vor dem
Wendepol sogar ziemlich weit klaffende, stark gebogene Schleife,
die betråchtlich uber die Mitte des Kårpers nach vorn ragt. Der
Magen ist åusserlich glatt, durchscheinend långsstreifig. Im Quer-
schnitt zeigt er ausser einer breiten, wulstigen Typhlosolis etwa
32 weit in das Lumen einragende regelmåssige Långsfalten.
Einen Magenblindsack konnte ich nicht erkennen. Der After-
rand ist etwas geschweift, aber nicht gelappt oder gezåhnt.
Die Geschlechtsorgane fanden sich bei meinem Material
stets jederseits zu 3. Dass Sluiter manchmal rechterseits nur
2 fand, also ganz abnormerweise weniger als linkerseits, beruht
vielleicht auf teiilweiser Kastration durch Parasiten. Die Geschlechts-
organe sind långliche, annåhernd halbzylindrische, mit ganzer
Breitseite der Leibeswand fest aufsitzende Kårper mit im allgemei-
nen glatter Oberflåche. Stellenweise erkennt man seitlich schwache
Einkerbungen und Vorwålbungen. Sie sind viel glatter, als Slui-
ter sie von seinem Material abbildet (1. c. 1900, Taf. III Fig. 2)
und kånnen keinenfalls als lappig bezeichnet werden. Mutmass-
lich stellt die Sluiter'sche Form dieser Organe ein Verfall-
stadium (Entleerungsstadium?) dar. Die Geschlechtsorgane sind
zwittrig.…. Am Querschnitt erkennt man, dass die ganze basale
Breitseite von Hodenblasen eingenommen wird, die hellglån-
zend, unregelmåssig birnformig und durchschnittlich etwa 0,5 mm
dick sind. Die iibrigen Partien werden hauptsåchlich von den
Ovarien eingenommen, doch finden sich auch zwischen diesen
im Innern des Organs kleine Gruppen von Hodenblasen einge-
streut. Nur die gewålbte Aussenflåche wird ganz von den Ova-
rien eingenommen. Die Ovarien zeigen eine graue Fårbung. Die
in ihnen enthaltenen ausgewachsenen Eizellen sind ungefåhr
0,2 mm dick. Eine Ovarialhåhle durchzieht das Innere des
Geschlechisorganes in ganzer Långe. Sie ist ziemlich unregel-
måssig gestaltet; stellenweise erscheint sie als einfacher Spaltraum,
430
stellenweise zeigt ihr Querschnitt die Gestalt eines unregelmåssi-
gen Dreistrahles. Die månnlichen Ausfihrkanåle konnte
ich nicht genau erkennen. Die åusseren Eileiter und Samen-
leiter stehen als je ein winziger stummelfårmiger Vorsprung in
geringer Entfernung von einander am distalen Ende des Geschlechts-
organes. Ihre Offnungen scheinen einfach loch- oder spaltfårmig
zu sein. Der åussere Eileiter ist etwas dicker und derbhåutiger
als der åussere Samenleiter.
Endocarpe in sehr charakteristischer Gestalt und Anordnung.
An der rechten Kårperseite (in der Sluiter'schen Abbildung nicht
freigelegt) fehlen sie ganz; an der linken Kårperseite entsprechen
sie im allgemeinen. der Sluiter'schen Figur, insofern sie ganz
auf den Bereich des Darmes beschrånkt sind und keine Beziehun-
gen zu den Geschlechtsorganen aufweisen. Ich fand bei einem
nåher untersuchten Stuck 7 Endocarpe innerhalb der Darmschleife,
hier eine geschlossene Reihe bildend; das Endocarp innerhalb
des Wendepols ist am gråssten. 10 Endocarpe standen dicht an
der Aussenseite des vorlaufenden, 8 an der des ricklaufenden
Darmschleifen-Astes. Ausserdem fanden sich noch 3 vor dieser
letzteren Gruppe, ein Geringes von der Kante der Darmschleife
entfernt.
Erorterung: In der eigenartigen Anordnung der Endocarpe,
die lediglich in Beziehung zum Darm, und nicht zu den Geschlechts-
organen stehen, und demgemåss an der rechten Seite ganz fehlen,
kommt diese Art der Cn. asymmetra-Gruppe (siehen oben, p. 420)
nahe, von der sie aber durch die regelmåssig- und einfach-balken-
formige Gestalt der Geschlechtsstrånge abweicht.
Cnemidocarpa madagascariensis Hartmr. var. regalis n. var.
Literatur der Art:
1916, Cnemidocarpa madagascariensis Hartmeyer, Neue und alte
Styelid. Berlin. Mus., p. 222, Textflg. 8, 9.
Fundangabe: Three Kings-Inseln, 65 Fd.; 5. Jan. 1915.
Weitere Verbreitung der Art: Sidwest-Madagaskar (nach
Hartmeyer).
Beschreibung. Gestalt abgesehen von etwaigen Auswiichsen
an der Ansatzstelle oval-nierenfårmig, mit schwacher dorsaler Ein-
senkung hinter der Atrialåffnung. Ansatzstelle an der Ventralseite
431
mehr hinten oder vorn, aber stets die Mitte mit einnehmend, mit
måssig grossen, unregelmåssigen Auswiichsen oder mit grøsserem
breitem, fast fussartigem Auswuchs, der jedoch viel weniger lang
als breit ist. Åussere Siphonen nur schwach vortretend, haupt-
såchlich markiert durch das Vorragen der 4 sehr dicken Polster,
die die Winkelråume der Korperåffnungs-Kreuzschlitze einnehmen.
Branchialåffnung am Vorderende, einmal etwas nach links
verschoben. Atrialåffnung ungefåhr '/6 des medianen Kårper-
umrisses, %/9 der gråssten Kårperachse dorsal hinter der Branchial-
offnung gelegen.
Oberflåche sehr uneben, durch ein Netz unregelmåssiger
tiefer Furchen mit polsterformigen Erhabenheiten in den Maschen
ausgezeichnet, stellenweise nackt und ziemlich rein, stellenweise
mit Aufwuchs von krustenfårmigen Didemniden, von Hydroidpolypen
und åhnlichem bedeckt, im feineren auch an nackten Stellen ziem-
lich rauh, jedoch ohne Dornen.
Fårbung hell rotbraun.
Grøåssenverhåltnisse des gråssten Stiickes: Långe 45 mm,
Håhe 35 mm, Breite 20 mm, Entfernung der Kårperåffnungen von
einander 20 mm.
Zellulosemantel ziemlich diinn, abgesehen von den Ver-
dickungen an der Ansatzstelle und den dicken Kårperåffnungs-Pol-
stern etwa //2— 3/4 mm dick, weich knorpelig, fast lederartig, bieg-
sam, an dinneren Stellen etwas durchscheinend, im Schnitt hell-
grau, an der Innenflåche hellgrau mit sehr schwachem Perlmutter-
glanz.
Weichkorper ziemlich leicht vom Zellulosemantel abzulåsen,
annåhernd der åusseren Kårpergestalt entsprechend, doch innere
Siphonen etwas deutlicher ausgeprågt als die åusseren, kegel-
formig; auch scheint die Annåherung aneinander bei den inneren
Siphonen noch enger als bei den åusseren.
Zellulosemantel- Auskleidung der Siphonen mit
Pigmentierung, die apikalwårts dichter wird: Teils zerstreute
Sprenkel, teils Linien (zusammengerickte Sprenkel), die sich zu
einem unregelmåssigen Netz zusammenschliessen. Siphonal-
papillen und Innendorne konnten nicht aufgefunden werden.
Die Oberfliche der Auskleidung ist durch ein unregelmåssiges
Furchennetz mit polsterformig erhabenen Maschen uneben gemacht.
432
Apikal herrscht die Långsrichtung der Furchen bezw. der Polster-
reihen vor.
Leibeswand zart, mit verhåltnismåssig schwacher Musku-
latur.
Branchialtentakel schlank såbelférmig, die kleineren der
Fadenform genåhert, ca. 20 abwechselnd verschieden grosse, jedoch
die einer Ordnung unter sich, anscheinend ohne scharfe Regel,
verschieden gross.
Atrialtentakel (Textfig. 28) einen ziemlich weitlåufigen,
aber einfachen und regelmåssigen Kranz bildend, ungemein zart,
schlank fadenfårmig, an der Basis nicht merklich erweitert; apikal-
wårts langsam und gleichmåssig dinner werdend, schliesslich in
ein haarformiges Ende auslaufend, etwa 0,7 mm lang und basal
10 w dick, an Zahl nach sehr unsicherer Schåtzung etwa 120.
Endocarpe klein und zart, uuregelmåssig sackfårmig mit
stielartig verengter Basis, an beiden Kårperseiten zwischen den
Gonaden und im weiteren Umkreise derselben zerstreut, linker-
seits auch eine etwas gråssere innerhalb der Darmschleife; rechts
wenigstens einige, mutmasslich viel mehr als 12 (sie sind sehr
hinfållig, manche bei der Abpråparierung des Kiemensackes abge-
rissen), links etwa 26, wenn nicht einige wenige mebhr.
Flimmerorgan eine rundliche Papille. Flimmergrubenspalt
eine einfache U-fårmige bis fast kreisfårmige, vorn offene Figur
bildend. Die beiden Hørner bleiben getrennt oder stos-
sen vorn an eimander, wobei das rechte kaum merklich
eingebogen wird.
Kiemensack annåhernd bilateral symmetrisch, dor-
sal stark verkirzt, mit 4 hohen Falten jederseits. An-
ordnung der finnerent LångsserasseRsÆæbssÆædse
( (23) 7 (26) 7 (27) 8 (20) STE MIE ESTES)ESRED)
4 (24) 9 D. Quergefåsse unregelmåssig nach dem
Fig. 18. Schema 1, 4, 3,4, 2,4,3,4, 1 verschieden dick, die 4. Ord-
re del nung meist parastigmatisch. Breitere Maschen in
dagasca- … den Faltenzwischenråumen, abgesehen von der Teilung
ARK durch parastigmatische Quergefåsse (und manchmal pri-
var. rega-…… Mår gewordener Quergefåsse 4. Ordnung) annåhernd qua-
lis, n. var.
ALE dratisch, bis 8 lange, schmale, parallelrandige Kiemen-
takel; 60/1. Spalten fassend. Einzelne Maschen in den Råumen
433
neben dem Endostyl etwas verbreitert, bis 11 Kiemenspalten ent-
haltend. Dorsalfalte ziemlich breit, fein, glatt und glattrandig,
stellenweise breit fåltelig, mutmasslich infolge von Kontraktion.
Darm eine in ganzer Långe etwas klaffende, am Wendepol
etwas weiter klaffende, gebogene Schleife bildend, die kaum
iber die Mitte des Kårpers nach vorn reicht, und deren zurick-
laufender Ast fast einen Halbkreis mit etwas zuriickgebogenen
Enden beschreibt. Osophagus ziemlich kurz, eng. Magen
beidenends ziemlich scharf abgesetzt, sehr gross, annåhernd zylin-
derisch mit gewolbten Enden, etwas gebogen, åusserlich glatt,
mit deutlich durchschimmernden Långsstreifen (Falten), den gråsse-
ren Teil des vorlaufenden Darmschleifen-Astes einnehmend. Im
Querschnitt zeigt der Magen ausser einer måssig breiten, wenig
vorragenden Typhlosolis etwa 23 måssig weit in das Lumen hin-
einragende, ziemlich regelmåssige, selten gegabelte Långsfalten.
Ein Blindsack ist nicht ausgebildet. Mittel- und Enddarm
nicht scharf von einander gesondert, einen kleinen Teil des vor-
laufenden Darmschleifen-Astes und den ganzen riicklaufenden bil-
dend, einfach. Afterrand (Textfig. 19) sehr regelmåssig und
scharf in 6 weit vorspringende, gerundete, kurz zungenformige
Lappen zerschlitzt, an der eine Seite 2 sehr breite, an der anderen,
durch mediane Ausbuchtung verbreiterten Seite 2 åussere breite
und 2 mittlere schmålere.
Geschlechtsorgane gelblich, jederseits in geringer Mehr-
zahl, unregelmåssig verbogen lang-zylinderisch, mit seichten Halb-
ringel-Kerben, fast mastdarmfårmig, mit abgerundetem proximalen
und zu einem kurzen, diinnhåutigen freien Ausfuihrgang zuge-
spitzten distalen Ende, meist einfach, zum kleineren Teil einmal
oder zweimal gegabelt, ziemlich locker an der Leibeswand befestigt,
unregelmåssig strahlig angeordnet, die distalen FENG
Enden dorsalwårts bezw. schråg dorsalwårts un- BADE,
gefåhr nach der Atrialåffnung hinweisend, ziem- | |
lich gleichmåssig iiber den gråsseren mittleren | |
Teil der seitlichen Leibeswand verteilt, jedoch |
links den vom Darm eingenommenen Raum frei- sea sake
lassend. Bei dem gråsseren Stiick finden sich — carpa madagasca-
rechts 6 Gonadenstrånge, davon 2 einmal gega- er SER eER
belt (also 8 proximale Enden), links 4, davon 1 Afterrand; 9/1.
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturhist. Foren. Bd. 73. 28
434
einmal gegabelt (also 5 proximale Enden); bei dem kleineren Stick
rechts 4, davon 1 einmal, I zweimal gegabelt (also 7 proximale Enden).
Gonadenstrånge zwittrig. Ein enger, annåhernd medianer Spalt-
raum, eine Ovarialh6 hle, die basalwårts bis an die Umhillung, api-
kalwårts bis zu etwa ”/3 der Håhe reicht, durchzieht das Organ in gan-
zer Långe und geht mutmasslich distal in den kurzen, schornsteinfor-
migen, die distale Spitze des Organs bildenden freien Eileiter
iber. Die grau aussehenden Ovarien bilden die Hauptmasse
des Organs, zumal die seitlichen und oberen Partien bis weit ins
Innere hinein, die apikale Partie der Ovarialhåhle zwischen sich
fassend. Die gråssten Eizellen sind ungefåhr 0,15 mm dick.
Basal, an der der Leibeswand zugekehrten Seite, liegt jederseits
dicht an dem medianen Spaltraum der Ovarialhåhle eine geschlos-
sene Reihe grosser hellglånzender Hodenblasen, und iber
diesen, ungefåhr neben der idealen Achse des Geschlechtsstranges,
also ganz im Innern des Organs, liegen noch weitere Hodenblasen.
Die Hodenblasen sind ungefåhr 0,4 mm dick, unregelmåssig birn-
formig bis kurz wurstformig, am proximalen Ende gerundet. Distal
gehen sie unter kurz-kegelformiger, manchmal etwas schief ange-
setzter Verengung in einen feinen, zarthåutigen, ca. 20 w dicken
Ausfihrgang iber. Bei den Hodenblasen der beiden basalen
Reihen sind die distalen Enden basalwårts gerichtet, und die aus
ihnen entspringenden Ausfihrgånge gehen, sich sofort lateralwårts
umbiegend, unter der Aussenhaut des Organs zur Seite und nach
oben, um schliesslich in einen dicht unter der Mittellinie der Api-
kalseite durch die ganze Långe des Organs verlaufenden Samen-
leiter einzuminden. Die Ausfiihrgånge der im Innern des Geschlechts-
stranges liegenden Hodenblasen gehen sofort, die seitlichen Ovarial-
partien durchbrechend, seitwårts zur Aussenhaut hin, um sich
dann wie die der anderen Høodenblasen unter der Aussenhaut nach
dem Samenleiter hinzuziehen. Der Samenleiter, bei dem Un-
tersuchungsobjekt zu einem ungefåhr 0,3 mm breiten, engen, band-
formigen horizontalen Spaltraum kollabiert, ist sehr zarthåutig.
Seine distale Ausmindung liess sich nicht sicher feststellen, da
das Organ hier wohl vollståndig kollabiert war. Mutmasslich ist
sein åusseres Mundungs-Ende eng an den freien Eileiter am distalen
Ende des Geschlechtsstranges angeschmiegt.
Bemerkung: Die oben beschriebene Varietåt unterscheidet sich
435
von der typischen Form hauptsåchlich durch die Annåherung der
Kårperåffnungen aneinander. Bei der typischen Form sollen
sie um %/3 der Kårperlånge von einander entfernt stehen, wåhrend
ihr Abstand voneinander bei var. regalis geringer als die halbe
" Kåørperlånge ist. Zu beachten ist hierbei jedoch, dass das Mate-
rial der var. regalis viel gråsser ist als das Originalmaterial der
typischen Form, sind die Dimensionen des letzteren doch nicht
einmal halb so gross wie die des ersteren. Es erscheint mir nicht
ausgeschlossen, dass sich die Stellung der Kårperåffnungen zu ein-
ander mit dem Wachstum åndere.
Cnemidocarpa stewartensis n. sp.
Fundangaben : Stewart-Insel, Port Pegasus, 25 Fd.; 21.
Novo Paterson Inlet 75-15 Fd17. Nov OA
Beschreibung. Gestalt halb-eifårmig, mit der grossen Flach-
seite (dem Medianschnitt der Eiform entsprechend) angewachsen,
oder håher, eifårmig bis fast kugelig, mit kleinerer Flåche ange-
wachsen. Anwachsflåche manchmal durch einen schmalen, un-
regelmåssigen Anwachssaum vergråssert, manchmal, anscheinend
bei kiesigem Untergrund, durch einen Besatz ziemlich dickståm-
miger, veråstelter und in lange, feine Zweige auslaufender Haft-
fåden ausgezeichnet. Diese Haftfåden bilden eine nach oben
scharf begrenzte wollige Kappe an der Ventralseite der Person,
die fast 2 mm dick ist und durch anhaftenden feinen Sand und
Schlamm ziemlich kompakt erscheint. Die Stiicke dieser Form
åhneln einer eichelartigen Frucht mit Cupula-artiger Basalhille.
Åussere Siphonen fehlen gånzlich oder sind wenigstens
nicht deutlich ausgeprågt. Kårperåffnungen manchmal ganz
unscheinbar, einfache Kreuzschlitze auf flachem Grunde, nicht
einmal durch Verdickungen der Winkelraum-Lappen hervor-
gehoben, manchmal auch auf schwach buckelartigen Erhabenheiten,
die durch eine ebenso schwache Firstwålbung mit einander ver-
bunden sind. Beide Korperåffnungen an der Oberseite des Kår-
pers gegeniiber der Anwachsflåche, ungefåhr 1/8 der gråssten
Kørperdimension von einander entfernt, also einander ziemlich
stark genåhert. Atrialoffnung manchmal etwas nach rechts ver-
schoben.
436
Gråssenverhåltnisse: Gråsstes, fast kugeliges Stiick 25
mm lang (parallel der Rickenlinie), 20 mm hoch, (dorsalventral)
und 22 mm breit; kleineres halb-eifårmiges Stick 22 mm lang,
9 mm hoch und basal 17 mm oreit. ;
Oberflåche im gråberen ziemlich eben, bei gråsseren Stiicken
måssig zart runzelig, bei kleineren Stiicken sehr zart runzelig, zu-
mal in weiterer Entfernung von den Korperåffnungen; Runzeln
hauptsåchlicn konzentrisch zu den Kårperåffnungen verlaufend,
unregelmåssig zackig. Oberflåche im feineren duff, dicht mit kleinen
etwa 40—50 w dicken, basal verengten, fast kugeligen Papillen
besetzt. Diese Papillen lassen eine scharf begrenzte, stark licht-
brechende ,Aussenwand und ein zart granuliertes Innere erkennen.
Sie sind besonders an den Flanken deutlich ausgebildet; an der
Riickenseite scheinen sie niedriger, mehr polsterartig zu sein. Fremd-
kårper-Aufwuchs spårlich oder betråchtlicher, ausser einem feinen
Besatz mit feinem Schlamm nur stellenweise kleine makroskopi-
sche Fremdkårper.
Fårbung an nackten Partien gelblich- bis bråunlich-grau,
durch Schlammbesatz manchmal dunkelgrau iberschleiert.
Zellulosemantel hart knorpelig, fast holzig, undurchsichtig,
an Schnittflåchen und an der Innenseite hell gelblich, im allgemeinen
sehr diinn, bei gråsseren Stiicken etwa !/2 mm dick, nur am
Rande der Anwachsflåche etwas dicker, weiter innen an der An-
satzflåche aber sehr viel dinner.
Weichkorper iberall sehr fest am Zellulosemantel haftend,
der åusseren Kårpergestalt entsprechend.
Zellulosemantel-Auskleidung der Siphonen durch
Furchen ziemlich regelmåssig gefeldert; Innendorne sind nicht
gefunden worden.
Leibeswand zart, mit zarter Muskulatur. Zahlreiche
kleine, basal verengte sackformige Endocarpe iberall an der
Leibeswand zerstreut, nach vorn bis dicht an die Flimmerbogen,
nach oben bis dicht an das Atrialvelum heran gehend. Bran-
chiale Siphonalpapillen nicht vorhanden; sehr charakterisch
dagegen atriale Siphonalpapillen: Es sind lang- und dinn-
fadenfårmige, apikalwårts langsam und gleichmåssig an Dicke ab-
nehmende Organe, die in einer breiten unteren Region der atria-
len Siphonalwandung unmittelbar innerhalb des Kranzes der Atrial-
437
tentakel zerstreut stehen und auf diesem Teil der Leibeswand einen
wolligen Besatz bilden. Sie sind ungefåhr 1,2 mm lang und an
der Basis etwa 26 u, in der Mitte ungefåhr 16 w dick. Atri-
velum schmal, zart. Atrialtentakel anscheinend einen ein-
fachen Kranz bildend, von der Gestalt der atrialen Siphonalpapillen
und anscheinend nicht scharf von diesen gesondert.
Branchialtentakel im allgemeinen schlank såbelføérmig, an
den apikalen Enden fadenfårmig, die kleineren in ganzer Långe
mehr fadenformig, die kleinsten sehr kurz, papillen- bis warzen-
formig. Die Zahl der Tentakel — es mågen etwa 40 sein —
war nicht genau festzustellen, da die kleinsten nicht durchweg
erkennbar waren. Es sind, abgesehen von den papillenformigen,
die die Bezeichnung ,Tentakelf kaum verdienen, etwa 30 faden-
formige Tentackel vorhanden.
Flimmerorgan ein rundliches Polster mit unregelmåssig
U-formiger oder herzfårmiger, vorn oder links offener Figur des
Flimmergrubenspaltes, dessen Hårner beide nach rechts hin oder
beide nach innen eingebogen sind.
Kiemensack bilateral symmetrisch, dorsal stark verkurzt,
jederseits mit 4 hohen Falten. Anordnung der inneren Långs-
Sets SER, EB DS 2 (22). "2 (20)' 5. (22) FSK (IT) ME NR O Er
gefåsse im allgemeinen nach dem Schema 1, p, 2, p, 2, p, 2,
peep? pp 29,2, pp, 1 verschieden dick,” wobei' gps parastig-
matische Quergefåsse markiert; jedoch die Quergefåsse einer Ord-
nung unter sich nicht immer ganz gleich dick; auch andere Un-
regelmåssigkeiten treten auf. Parastigmatische Quergefåsse sehr
regelmåssig auftretend. Maschen, von der Halbierung durch
parastigmatische Quergefåsse abgesehen, auf den Faltenzwischen-
råumen meist weniger breit als lang, meist mit 3, manchmal auch
mit 4, selten, und anscheinend nur infolge von Unregelmåssig-
keiten, mit 5 oder gar 6 Kiemenspalten. Maschen in den Råumen
neben dem Endostyl etwas verbreitert, bis quadratisch, meist mit
6 Kiemenspalten. Maschen in den Råumen neben der Dorsalfalte
stårker verbreitert, bis 10 Kiemenspalten enthaltend. Dorsal-
falte ziemlich kurz und missig breit, ein glatter und glattrandi-
ger diinner Saum.
Darm (Textfig. 20) an der linken Seite des Kiemensackes
gelegen, eine sehr komplizierte Schleife bildend. Osophagus
438
ziemlich kurz, sehr eng, einen fast halbkreisformigen Bogen be-
schreibend. Magen sehr gross, gurkenfårmig, am Cardia-Ende
dicker als in der Mitte und am Pylorus-Ende, am Cardia-Ende
halbkugelig gewålbt, sehr scharf vom dinnen Osophagus abge-
setzt, vom Mitteldarm måssig scharf abgesetzt, åusserlich glatt,
aber mit deutlich durchschimmern-
den, eine unregelmåssige Långs-
streifung — darstellenden inneren
Långsfalten, die vielfach aus der
Långsrichtung herausgebogen sind
und håufige Gabelungen bilden.
Ein Querschnitt durch die Mitte
des Magens zeigt ausser einer
schmalen, sniedrigen Typhlosolis
ungefåhr 24 in das Lumen ein-
ragende" "Falten: Der Magens
schwach gebogen und bildet, an-
nåhernd parallel der Rickenlinie
verlaufend, fast den ganzen vor-
laufenden Darmschleifen-Ast. Mit-
Fig. 20. OLD HS UGE DET SHE SIRIDNSES 10 teldarm ungefåhr halb so dick
sp. Darm, an der linken Seite des im
Umriss gezeichneten Kiemensackes wie der Magen an seiner dicksten
SIGEDGESGÅL Stelle, bei einigen Tieren sofort
nach seinem Ursprung aus dem Magen nach oben hin abgebogen,
im ganzen eine breit S-formige Schleife bildend, deren erste Buch-
tung mit dem Wendepol der eigentlichen Darmschleife dorsalwårts
gerichtet ist, wåhrend die zweite Buchtung, die Darmschleifen-
Bucht in sich fassend, mit dem Wendepol der Darmschleifen-Bucht
wieder ventralwårts geht und sich mit ihrem unteren Teil eng
an die linke Seite des Magens anschmiegt. Der Wendepol der
Darmschleifen-Bucht iberragt den unteren Rand des Magens sogar
noch etwas. Das hakenfårmig nach hinten abgebogene rektale
Ende des Mitteldarms kommt bei diesem Schleifenverlauf dem Wen-
depol der Darmschleife wieder ziemlich nahe, sødass der Eingang
in die tiefe Darmschleifen-Bucht ziemlich eng ist. Bei anderen
Tieren ist der Verlauf der Darmschleife betråchtlich anders. Die
Schleife des Mitteldarms ist nicht so scharf aus der Richtung des
Magens herausgebogen, sondern liegt fast in der Verlångerung der
439
Magens. Der Mitteldarm geht schliesslich in scharfem Absatz in
einen kleinen, wieder nach vorn hin abgebogenen, trompetenfår-
migen Enddarm iber. After erweitert, in ungefåhr 8 verschie-
den breite, fast blasig verdickte, weit vorspringende, gerundete
Lappen zerschlitzt.
Geschlechtsorgane: An jeder Seite 2 oder 3 einfach strang-
formige oder lang gegabelte Geschlechtsorgane, im Maximum von
dreien der rechten Seite das vorderste und das hinterste dicht
hinter dem distalen Ende gegabelt (also 5 proximale Enden), von
zweien der linken Seite das hintere gegabelt (also 3 proximale
Enden); im Minimum jederseits 2 einfache Geschlechtsstrånge.
Die Geschlechtsstrånge sind locker an die Leibeswand angeheftet,
lang- und dinn-walzenformig, unregelmåssig geschlångelt und ver-
bogen, im ganzen schråg von vorn-unten nach hinten-oben in der
Richtung auf die Atrialdffnung konvergierend und in ziemlich weiter
Entfernung von derselben, jedenfalls noch etwas vor dem Atrial-
velum, ausmiindend. Bei einem kleineren Stiick: Långe der Ge-
schlechtsstrånge etwa 10 mm, Dicke 0,;—0,6 mm. Die Geschlechts-
strånge (Textfig. 21) sind zwittrig, in ganzer Långe von einem
fast ihre ganze Breite einnehmenden horizontalen Spaltraum, einer
Ovarialhohle, durchzogen. Diese Ovarialhåhle ist culminal
gewdlbt, basal unregel-
måssig verbeult. Pro-
ximal geht sie mutmass-
lich unmittelbar in den
Eilejter kuber: … Der
culminale Raum ober-
halb der Ovarialhohle
wird fast ganz vom
Ovarium eingenom-
men, das im Quer-
schnitt einen viertel-
mondfårmigen Umriss
mit schwacher culmina-
ler Ausbuchtung (fir
den Samenleiter) auf-
weist. Die ausgewach-
g Fig. 21... Cnemidocarpa stewartensis mn. sp. Quer-
senen "Eizellen im schnitt durch ein Geschlechtsorgan; 112/1.
440
Ovarium sind bis etwa 150 u dick. Der basale Raum unterhalb
der Ovarialhohle wird von der Hode eingenommen. Diese be-
steht aus grossen, ungefåhr 350 w langen und 200 w dicken, un-
regelmåssig birnfårmigen Hodenblasen, die in 2 nicht ganz regel-
måssigen Långszeilen angeordnet sind. Vielfach liegen Hoden-
blasen zwischen den beiden Hauptzeilen, anscheinend einer un-
vollståndigen dritten Långszeile angehårig; vielleicht aber handelt
es sich hierbei nur um Hodenblasen, die aus einer der beiden
Hauptzeilen herausgedrångt sind. Die Vorwålbung der einzelnen
Hodenblasen nach oben verursacht die oben erwåhnten Ausbeu-
tungen an der Unterseite der Ovarialhåhle. Die Spitzpole der
Hodenblasen sind zur Seite gewendet und gehen in dinne Aus-
fihrgånge iber, die sich jederseits dicht unterhalb der åusseren
Haut des Geschlechtsstranges nach oben hinziehen, um hier in
einen medianen Samenleiter einzuminden. Der Samenleiter
ist eine bei dem nåher untersuchten Stiick etwas abgeplattete,
ungefåhr 50 w breite Råhre, die sich median culminal vom Ova-
rium durch die ganze Långe des Organs hinzieht und mut-
masslich unmittelbar in den freien Samenleiter ibergeht. Der
Samenleiter ist etwas in das Ovarium eingesenkt und verursacht
dadurch die oben erwåhnte mediane Långsfurche am Ovarium.
Die freien Ausmindungssticke der Ausfihrkanåle, der
etwasbreitere"freje"Eilertertund"dertetwaskschmålere kreere
Samenleiter, sind fast in ganzer Långe mit einander verwach-
sen und bilden einen kleinen schornsteinférmigen Ansatz am dista-
len Ende der Geschlechtsstrånge. Die Offnungen dieser freien
Ausfihrkanåle scheinen ganz einfach zu sein. Der Offnungsrand
des Samenleiters ist etwas wulstig verdickt.
Cnemidocarpa bicornuta (Sluit.)
? 1834, Ascidia erythrostoma Quoy u. Gaimard, Voy. Astrolabe, Zool.
MEST EESOSE TEE DEI Joe sd Ey
? 1873, Ascidium erythrostoma, Hutton, Cat. Mar. Mollusc. N.Zeal., p. 104.
1900, Styela bicornuta Sluiter, Tunic. Stillen Ocean, p. 52, Tafel III
Fig 6-S marv 2:
1900, Styela argillacea Sluiter, ebend., p. 25.
? 1904, Styela bicornuta Sluiter, Tunic. Siboga-Exped. I, p. 62.
1909, Tethyum argillaceum + T. bicornutum —+ ? spec. inquir. Pyura
(?) erythrostoma, Hartmeyer, Tunic.; in: Bronn, Kl. Ordn.
Dierrspitiss oss ET S42:
441
1915, Cnemidocarpa argillacea, Hartmeyer, Neue u. alte Styelid,.
Berlin. Mus., p. 230.
Fundangaben: Neuseeland, Sidinsel, Queen Charlotte-
Sund, 3—10 Fd.; 19.—20. Jan. 1915.
Skewart-ldseltPaterson Inlet 5=ÆEdSMI/SNov OT
Alte Angaben: Neuseeland, Siidinsel, French Passage
(nach Sluiter). Chatham-Inseln, Maunganui (nach S luiter).
seNieuseeland,; Firth of Thames, Hauraki-Golf [Riviére
Tamise bezw. baie de Chouraki|] (nach Quoy u. Gaimard).
Weitere Verbreitung: ? Malayischer Archipel, Ambon und
sitdlkehkvon der Insel Salayer (nach 'Sluiter):
Ich konnte das neue Material dieser Art mit einem typischen
Stiek der Styela bicornuta Sluit. von French Passage sowie mit
dem Original der Styela argillacea Sluiter von den Chatham-
Inseln vergleichen und stelle hier zunåchst fest, dass St. bicornuta
und Sf. argillacea einer und derselben Art angehåren. Schon
Hartmeyer (I. c. 1915, p. 230), der das Originalstick von St.
argillacea ebenfalls untersuchen konnte, sprach sich dahin aus, dass
diese Art wohl eine Cnemidocarpa, aber nicht nåher mit Cn. [Styela]
cerea Sluit. verwandt sei, was Sluiter behauptet hatte. Tat-
såchlich hat diese Chatham-Insel-Form von der typischen Gestalt
der Cnemidocarpa cornuta, der Gestalt eines Schiffchens, an dem
die Siphonen Rostrum und Maststummel darstellen, mit Cm. cerea
nichts zu tun, hat sie doch auch rechterseits Endocarpe, viel
massigere Geschlechtsorgane, und ist auch in anderen Organsystemen
weit von Cn. cerea abstehend. Der von Sluiter als Stiel ange-
sprochene, ganz unregelmåssig-plattenformige Auswuchs des Zellu-
losemantels, iibrigens, wie auch Sluiter erwåhnt, nicht der ein-
zige Auswuchs an dem Stiick, ist dem typischen Stiel anderer
Arten, wie etwa Pyura pachydermatina (Her dm.), nicht gleich zu
stellen. Es ist nur ein etwas stårker ausgebildeter Auswuchs,
wie sie auch bei anderen Stiicken der Cn. bicornuta auftreten,
besonders gross, vielleicht weil sich das junge Tier in einer Fels-
spalte oder zwischen zwei Steinen festgesetzt hatte und nun das
Bediirrfnis verspirte, aus dieser eingeklemmten Lage heraus zu
wachsen. Auch hatte eines der Stiicke von der Stewart-Insel
einen nicht nur relativ, sondern auch absolut noch gråsseren Aus-
wuchs am Zellulosemantel, ohne dass es artlich von seinen Fund-
442
ortsgenossen getrennt werden kånnte. Ubrigens ist der Branchial-
sipho bezw. das Vorderende nicht immer so weit zuriickgebogen,
wie bei dem von Sluiter abgebildeten Stuck (1. c. 1900, Taf.
IVAErsS2) so :7 BF auchenmicht bende sm vorliegenden Original-
stick von Cx. bicornuta.
Auch die allerdings fir diese Art ungewå&hnlich bleiche Får-
bung, mag sie nun auf Ausbleichung beruhen oder ein echter
Charakter des Stiickes sein, ist belanglos, gleicht das Stiick von
den Chatham-Inseln hierin doch dem mir vorliegenden Originalstick
der Cn. bicornuta von French Passage.
Innere Organisation. Die Zellulosemantel-Auskleidung
der Siphonen ist bei vielen meiner Stiicke von Cn. bicornuta
intensiv violett, wie Sluiter angibt, bei anderen Stiicken farblos,
bleich, so auch bei dem mir vorliegenden Original von French
Passage — mutmasslich ausgebleicht. Ich vermute, dass diese
violette Fårbung der von Quoy und Gaimard bei den lebenden
Stiicken ihrer Ascidia erythrostoma beobachteten Fårbung entspricht.
Da die wenigen Angaben wie auch die Abbildung von dieser
Art sehr wohl der Cn. bicornuta entsprechen, so habe ich Asci-
dia erythrostoma als etwas fragliches Synonym der Cnemidocarpa
bicornuta zugeordnet. Die Innenauskleidung der Siphone zeigt bei
Cn. bicornuta viele Långsfurchen, deren unregelmåssige und un-
ebene Zwischenwålle durch ziemlich dichte Querfurchen in klei-
nere hohe Polster zerschnitten sind. Siphonalpapillen und
Innendorne sind nicht gefunden worden.
Es ist ein regelmåssiger, eng geschlossener
Kranz von Atrialtentakeln (Textfig. 22) vor-
handen. Ich schåtze die Zahl dieser Organe auf
etwa 150. Sie sind schlank pfriemfårmig, an
der Basis kaum merklich erweitert. Ihr feines
Ende ist in eine kurze haarformige Spitze ausge-
zogen oder, seltener, keulenfårmig verdickt. Die
Atrialtentakel sind mit Ausnahme einzelner abnorm
kleiner annåhernd gleich lang, bei dem gråssten
SEE Exemplar ca. 0,75 mm lang und in der Mitte ca.
carpa bicornuta 40 w dick. Die keulenfårmigen sind ein wenig
BERN menig kurzer. Im Inneren der keulenfårmigen Erwei-
dener Form; 60/1. terungen glaube ich ein verhåltnismåssig grosses
443
graues Sinneskårperchen erkannt zu haben. An einem Ten-
takel fand ich eine abnorme Zwischenbildung, eine Sinneskårper-
Verdickung, aus der distal etwas schief ein Spitzende von der Art
der Tentakel håufigerer Form hervorging.
Kleine, unregelmåssig sackformige Endocarpe kommen an
beiden Koårperseiten vor, rechts etwa 9—11, links etwa 6 oder 7
im Bereich der Gonaden, dazu noch 1 oder 2 innerhalb der Darm-
schleife. Das einzige oder das vordere Darmschleifen-Endocarp
ist manchmal ein geringes gråsser als die iibrigen. Die Zahl und
Stellung der Endocarpe scheint etwas zu variieren.
Flimmerorgan meist mit ziemlich einfachem Verlauf des
" Flimmergruben-Spaltes, dessen Hårner meist einfach eingerollt sind,
beide nach innen oder beide nach einer Seite; manchmal, so -bei
einigen Stiicken von der Stewart-Insel, ist der Verlauf etwas ver-
wickelter, insofern die Enden der Hårner wieder in anderem Sinne
abgebogen sind; auch wird der Verlauf des Flimmergruben-Spaltes
hierbei durch mehr oder weniger starkes Vorquellen der Zwischen-
partien etwas verschleiert.
Der Kiemensack zeigt bei ziemlich starker Erhabenheit der
Falten verhåltnismåssig sehr breite Faltenzwischenråume, die
jedoch sehr schwer zu begrenzen sind, sodass es sehr vom sub-
jektiven Ermessen abhångt, ob man gewisse innere Långsgefåsse
noch der Falte oder dem benachbarten Faltenzwischenraum zuord-
nen soll. Ich fand bei einem Stick vom Queen Charlotte-Sund
folgendes Schema der Anordnung der inneren Långsgefåsse: D. 0
(23) 6 (22) 6 (20) 10 (12) 9 E. Es finden sich im allgemeinen
bis 8 Kiemenspalten in den breiten Maschen, bis 16 in den
breiteren Maschen neben dem Endostyl und sogar bis 36 in einigen
besonders in die Breite gezogenen Maschen neben der Dorsalfalte.
Die Breite der Dorsalfalte ist håufig durch Einroliung ver-
schleiert.
Darm: Der Magen ist åusserlich glatt, durchscheinend långs-
streifig.. Im Querschnitt zeigt er ausser einer måssig breiten
wulstigen Typhlosolis etwa 18 weit in das Lumen einragende
regelmåssige Långsfalten. Ein Blindsack war am Magen nicht
erkennbar. Der Afterrand ist etwas geschweift, nicht gelappt
oder gezåhnt.
Die Geschlechtsorgane meines Materials entsprechen
444
denen der Sluiter'schen Type, doch nicht ganz der Sluiter'schen
Beschreibung, wenigstens nicht, wenn man den Ausdruck ,gelappt"
auf die åussere Form der Organe bezieht. Es finden sich in der
Regel jederseits 2 einfache Geschlechtsorgane. Bei einem Stick
von der Stewart-Insel fand sich jedoch rechterseits nur eines. Bei
einem anderen Stiick der gleichen Herkunft zeigte das ventrale
der beiden Geschlechtsorgane jeder Seite eine unregelmåssige kleine
Gabelung am proximalen Ende, oder, vielleicht besser ausgedriickt,
eine Abspaltung. Die Geschlechtsorgane sind nahezu halb zylin-
drische Strånge, die mit ganzer Breitseite fest an der Innenseite
der Leibeswand sitzen und polsterformig in die Peribranchialråume
hineinragen. Ihre freie Oberseite ist im allgemeinen ganz eben
und glatt, nicht gelappt, auch nicht die der Sluiter'schen Type.
Sie zeigen håchstens, und zwar besonders am proximalen Ende,
schwache seitliche Einkerbungen und dazwischen liegende schwache
Vorwålbungen, die aber nicht wohl als Lappen bezeichnet werden
dirften. Die Geschlechtsorgane verlaufen im allgemeinen parallel
zu einander, fast gerade von vorn nach hinten, nur wenig schråg
nach hinten ansteigend und der Åtrialåffnung entgegen gebogen.
Ihr proximales Ende ist håufig nach oben und hinten zurickge-
bogen. Die Geschlechtsorgane sind zwittrig. Am Querschnitt
erkennt man in ihrem Innern einen hohen, meist schmalen und
medianen Spaltraum, der aber auch eine etwas unregelmåssigere
Gestalt annehmen kann. Dieser Spaltraum ist eine Ovarial-
håhle, die das Organ in ganzer Långe. durchzieht, nach unten
bis an die Basalmembran reicht und infolgedessen an dem abge-
hobenen Organ als etwas dunklerer medianer Långsstreifen durch
scheint. In der Ebene dieser Ovarialhåhle zerreisst das ganze Organ
leicht in zwei seitliche Hålften, die in der kompakteren Aussen-
schicht noch zusammen halten. An der Oberseite erkennt man
stellenweise durchscheinend einen feineren hellen medianen Långs-
streifen, von dem fiederfårmig feinere weisse Streifen schråg nach
hinten und aussen abgehen, zweifellos die månnlichen Aus-
fihrorgane. Die månnlichen Gonaden, unregelmåssig
birnformige hellglånzende Hodenblasen von verschiedener Gråsse,
im Håchstfalle etwa 0,9 mm dick, nehmen die Basalpartie sowie
die Seitenpartien des Geschlechtsorgans ein und ziehen sich an
der Wand des medianen Spaltraums in die Hohe bis tief ins Innere
445
des Organs hinein. Die weiblichen Gonaden nehmen den
ubrigen Raum des Geschlechtsorganes ein, also die Aussenflåche
und die seitlichen inneren Partien, umfassen jedoch auch die obere
Kante des als Ovarialhåhle angesprochenen medianen Spaltraumes.
Die Ausfihrorgane treten am distalen Ende des Geschlechtsor-
sanesildichtønebentfelnander” frerthervor Der frerehErlerter
ist kaum långer als dick, ziemlich derbhåutig, zylindrisch mit
mehrlappigem bezw. mehrkerbigem Rande. Der freie Samen-
leiter ist ebenso lang, aber viel dinner, weisslich, mit unschein-
barer, anscheinend einfacher Offnung.
Cnemidocarpa coerulea (Qu. u. Gaim.)
1834, Ascidia ianthinoctoma (laps. pro ianthinostoma) Quoy u. Gai-
mard, Voy. Astrolabe, p. 610, Tafel XCI Fig. 6, 7.
1834, Ascidia coerulea Quoy u. Gaimard, ebend. p. 611, Taf. XCI
Fig. 8, 9.
1873, Ascidium ianthinoctoma + Å. coerulea Hutton, Cat. Mar. Mol-
lusc. N. Zealand, p. 105.
1909 Pyura coerule + P. (2) ianthinoctoma, species inquirenda, Hart-
meyer, Tunic.; in : Bronn, Kl. Ordn. Tierr., p. 1342.
1913, Styela coerulea,Cottrell, Tunic., Styela coerulea, p. 168, Textf. 1—4
Fundangaben: Neuseeland, Nordinsel, North Cape, an
der Kiiste unter Steinen; 3. Jan. 1915; Bay of Islands, 2
EEK EOS ES Ii p per Is Tand T20:DEZSELOIEE
Alte Angaben: Neuseeland, Nordinsel, Firth ofThames
und Bay of Islands (nach Quoy u. Gaimard); Waitemata
Harbour, Hauraki-Golf, Great Barrier Island (nach
Corrs):
Ich kann die friiheren Beschreibungen durch folgende Angaben
ergånzen.
Gestalt: Am lebenden Tier liegt der Atrialsipho nach den
Quoy u. Gaimard'schen Abbildungen (1. c. Tak eXCER Es t GÆS
u. ? 4) verhåltnismåssig viel weiter hinten als am konservierten
Material, zweifellos infolge weiter Streckung des Vorderendes mit
dem Branchialsipho, das am konservierten Tier stark zusammenge-
zogen erscheint.
Gråssenverhåltnisse des gråssten vorliegenden Stiickes:
Långe von der Branchialåffnung bis zur hinteren ventralen Aus-
446
bauchung (gråsste Erstreckung) 48 mm, Håhe von der Atrialdff-
nung bis zur Mitte der Ventralkante 25 mm, gråsste Breite 15 mm.
Es ist also noch etwas gråsser als das gråsste Cottrell'sche Stick.
Oberflåche mancher konservierter Sticke stark runzelig und
mit Wiilsten bedeckt, die vielfach in den Mittelpartien ein deut-
liches Uberwiegen der Långserstreckung aufweisen, manchmal
aber auch in querem Verlauf das Vorderende des Tieres ringfår-
mig umfassen. Ventralseite meist weniger stark gerunzelt. In
dem Material von North Cape finden sich einige Stiicke, deren
Oberfliche fast ganz glatt ist, wie es nach Quoy u. Gaimard
und Cottrell den lebenden Tieren entspricht. Eine solche zarte
und regelmåssige Ringelung, wie sie in den Abbildungen nach
lebenden Tieren auftritt, ist auch an diesen scheinbar postmortal
nur wenig kontrahierten Stiicken nicht erkennbar. = Oberflåche
im feineren glatt, im allgemeinen nicht mit Dornen oder Aus-
wiichsen besetzt. In einem Falle war ein zungenférmiger Aus-
wuchs zur Vergråsserung der Ansatzstelle gebildet. Die Stiicke
von North Cape zeigen im Gegensatz zu den fast reinen Stiicken
von Slipper Island meist einen dichten Besatz von flach anlie-
genden Muschelschalen.
Fårbung der in Formalin konservierten, jetzt eine ziemlich
lange Zeit in Alkohol aufbewahrten Tiere nur ausnahmsweise
durchweg gelblich grau, meist mit einer leuchtend veilchenblauen
oder dunkelblauen Fårbung nur an den Korperoåffnungen oder
sich von diesen aus mehr oder weniger weit uber den Ricken
und die Flanken des Tieres hinziehend, im Åusserstfalle nur die
Ventralseite und das bauchige Hinterende frei lassend. Die vor-
liegenden Stiucke stellen alle måglichen Fårbungsstufen von der
Ascidia ianthinostoma bis zur A. coerulea dar. Die Zusammenge-
hårigkeit dieser beiden Formen ist demnach festgestellt. Die scharfe,
dunkelblaue, kreuzfårmige Linienzeichnung an den Korperåffnungen
der lebenden Tiere ist an dem konservierten Material nicht er-
kennbar.
Kåørperoffnungen scharfe, regelmåssige schråge Kreuzschlitze,
deren 4 Winkelråume durch je ein dickes Zellulosemantelpolster
ausgefuillt werden.
Zellulosemantel ziemlich dinn, abgesehen von den gerin-
gen Verdickungen an der Ansatzstelle und an den Polstern der
447
Kårperåffnungen, etwa "/3—"/2 mm dick, zåh lederartig, biegsam
bis fast lappig, undurchsichtig, im Schnitt und an der Innenseite
gelblich grau, soweit nicht die violettblaue Fårbung, die den gan-
zen Zellulosemantel durchsetzt, vorherrscht. Innenseite etwas
perlmutterglånzend.
Siphonen durch 4 Långsfalten verengt, ohne Innendorne
und ohne Siphonalpapillen, mit stark gefurchter, aber im
feineren glatter Innenflåche.
Atrialtentakel (Textfig. 23) in weitem, dichtem, einfachem
und regelmåssigem Kranze die Atrialåffnung umfassend, sehr zahl-
reich, nach ungefåhrer Schåtzung etwa 150, fein fadenfårmig mit
etwas verbreiterter Basis und keulenfårmig angeschwollenem Kopf,
der ein in der Durchsicht dunkles Sinneskårperchen enthålt.
Die Atrialtentakel sind annåhernd gleich gross, jedenfalls nicht in
regelmåssiger Anordnung verschieden gross, durchschnittlich etwa
3/, mm lang und 35 vw dick.
Weichkårper ziemlich leicht vom Zellulosemantel ablåsbar,
seiner Form nach der åusseren Kørpergestalt entsprechend, håch-
stens mit etwas långerem inneren Atrialsipho. Am Flimmer-
organ fand ich bei einem nåher untersuchten Stiick beide Hor-
ner des Spaltes einwårts gebogen.
Leibeswand ziemlich derb, mit kråftiger, von den
Korperåffnungen ausstrahlender Långsmuskulatur, deren g
Bindel schon in geringer Entfernung von den Kårperoff-
nungen nicht mehr eine ganz geschlossene Lage bilden.
Das Strahlensystem der Långsmuskeln der Atrialdffnung
ist nur hinten und an den Seiten als solches ausgebildet;
nach vorn geht es in ein System von den Riicken uber-
ziehenden Quermuskeln iiber. In geringem Gebiet kreu-
zen sich die Systeme der Branchialdffnung und der
Atrialodffnung. Gegen die Bauchseite verlieren sich die
dicken Muskelbiindel dieser beiden Systeme.
Måssig grosse, sackformige Endocarpe (Textfig. Elg
24), jederseits etwa 18, sitzen an den mittleren Teilen — Cnemido-
der Seitenwiåinde des Kårpers im Bereich der Gonaden SEERE
und linkerseits 3 innerhalb der Darmschleife. Diese (Qu. u.
Darmschleifen-Endocarpe weisen keine besondere Gestalt BEER
auf; doch ist das vorderste etwas gråsser als alle ibrigen takel; 60/1.
Endocarpe.
448
Kiemensack symmetrisch gebaut, dick spindelformig, gerade
bis in das tauchige Hinterende des Kørpers reichend. Råume
neben der Dorsalfalte ohne innere Långsgefåsse: D. 0 (12) 4
(10) 3 (8) 3 (8) 4 E. Quergefåsse ziemlich regelmåssig nach
dem Schema 1, 3, 2, 3, 1 verschieden dick, innen kaum erhaben.
Parastigmatische secundåre Quergefåsse fehlen ganz. Selbst da, wo
ein dinnes Quergefåss 3. Ordnung unregelmåssig im Bereich einer
Masche endet, wird dieses Quergefåss-Ende nicht parastigmatisch.
Maschen verhåltnismåssig breit, in den Faltenzwischenråumen
viel breiter als lang, im allgemeinen bis 10, vereinzelt (Unregel-
måssigkeiten!) bis 16 Kiemenspalten enthaltend. Papillen sind
am Kiemensack nicht ausgebildet. Offnung des Osophagus
ganz am Hinterende des Kiemensackes.
Darm (Textfig. 24) an der linken Seite des Kiemensackes
gelegen, eine am Anfang weit klaffende, innen schwach klaffende,
mit dem Wendepol etwas iber die Korpermitte hinaus nach vorn
hin ragende Schleife bildend. Øsophagus kurz, eng, kantig,
in geschweifter Linie schråg nach unten und hinten verlaufend.
Magen sehr lang, zylindrisch, ungefåhr 3 mal so dick wie der Oso-
phagus, doppelt so dick
wie der Mitteldarm, pa-
rallel derVentrallinie des
Weichkøårpers schwach
gebogen, den gråssten
Teil des vorlaufenden
Darmschleifen-Astes bil-
dend, åusserlich fast
eben, mit mehr oder
weniger deutlichen, aber
nicht erhabenen oder
eingesenkten Långs-
streifen; nach Offnung
zeigt der Magen eine
breite Leitrinne und 16
regelmåssige, weit in
Fig. 24. Cnemidocarpa coerulea (Q u. u. Gai m ) Weich-
kåørper, durch einen ventralmedianen Låiogsschnitt ge- das Lumen hineinra-
offnet u ausgebreitet; Kiemensack abpriipariert; Mund- gende Långsfalten Ein
tentakel, Flimmerorgan, Atrialtentakel, Darm,
Geschlechtsorgane u. Endocarpe sichtbar; 2/1. Blindsack konnte
449
nicht aufgefunden werden. Mittel- und Enddarm nicht von
einander gesondert, den Wendepol und den etwas kiirzeren riick-
laufenden Darmschleifen-Ast sowie den etwa halb so langen,
schråg nach vorn-oben abgebogenen rektalen End-Ast bildend, mit
dicklicher Typhlosolis, deren hinteres Ende manchmal etwas aus
dem After hervorragt. After etwas verengt, mit etwas geschweif-
tem, ventral eingeschnittenem, nicht zuriickgeschlagenem Rande.
Geschlechtsorgane (Textfig. 24): Rechterseits etwa 10,
linkerseits etwa 8 zwittrige Gonaden. Die Zahl der Gonaden ist
zweifellos schwankend, jedenfalls nicht immer mit voller Sicher-
heit anzugeben; denn es ist nicht stets erkennbar, ob man es mit
einer einzigen grossen oder mit zwei zusammengewachsenen klei-
neren zu tun habe. Die Anordnung der Gonaden erscheint ganz
unregelmåssig. Sie lassen eine breite dorsalmediane und eine
schmale ventralmediane Partie, linkerseits auch die ganze vom
Darm eingenommene Partie der Leibeswand frei, erstrecken sich
demnach, etwas hinter dem Tentakelkranz beginnend, in der mitt-
leren Håhe der Flanken rechterseits fast durch die ganze Långe,
linkerseits bis etwas iiber die Mitte nach hinten. Gonaden dick
und unregelmåssig paketformig, mit verengter Basis ziemlich fest
an der Innenseite der Leibeswand sitzend, im ibrigen frei in die
Peribranchialråume hineinragend, die kleinsten ungefåhr so breit
wie hoch, die gråsseren bei gleicher Håhe entsprechend breiter.
Sie sind unregelmåssig umrandet, zumal die gråsseren mit Ein-
kerbungen und Vorwålbungen am Rande, in keinem Falle eine
deutliche Långenerstreckung zeigend. Jedes Gonadenpaket ist ein
Konglomerat von månnlichen und weiblichen Gonaden, die inner-
halb des Paketes wohl von einander gesondert, aber anscheinend
nicht durch eine eigene Umhiillung von einander getrennt sind.
Die månnlichen Gonaden, aus zahlreichen dick birnfårmigen,
ca. 0,3, mm dicken, glånzend weissen Hodenblasen bestehend,
nehmen den Grund und die Randpartien der Gonadenpakete ein;
stellenweise dringen sie aber auch weiter in das Innere, nahe dem
Rande auch wohl bis an die Aussenflåche vor. Die weiblichen
Gonaden haben ein graues AÅussehen; die ausgewachsenen
Eizellen haben eine Dicke von ca. 0,15 mm. Sie nehmen die
oberen und inneren Partien der Gonadenpakete ein, lassen aber
die Randpartien fast ganz frei und bilden auch in den mittleren
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 73. 29
450
Partien Ausbuchtungen, in denen die Gruppen der månnlichen
Gonaden håher vordringen kånnen. Freie Ausfihrgånge sehr
unscheinbar, bei åusserlicher Betrachtung kaum erkennbar. Es
sind winzige vulkanfårmige, diinnhåutige Hervorragungen mit ein-
facher Durchbohrung, an der Oberseite der Gonadenpakete gelegen.
Ich erkannte an einer Schnittserie durch etwa den Drittteil eines
Gonadenpaketes 3 derartige Ausfiihrorgane. Sie scheinen demnach
in einer måssig grossen Vielzahl an einem Gonadenpaket vorzu-
kommen. Ich konnte nicht erkennen, ob es sich bei jenen win-
zigen Organen um Samenleiter oder Eileiter oder um kom-
binierte Zwitterorgane handle.
Erorterung. Es mag fraglich sein, ob diese Art der Gattung
Polycarpa oder der Gattung Cnemidocarpa zuzuordnen sei. Die
Geschlechtsorgane sind nicht deutlich strangfårmig, wie in der
Regel bei Cnemidocarpa. aber auch nicht von so gleichmåssiger,
abgerundeter Gestalt, wie sie sich in der Regel bei Polycarpa finden.
Das Beispiel von Cnemidocarpa hemprichi Hartmr. zeigt aber,
wie innerhalb der Grenzen einer Art die lang schlauchførmigen,
parallel in Reihen angeordneten Polycarpe in kleinere, unregelmåssiger
gestaltete und unregelmåssig angsordnete ibergehen kønnen”.
Gen. Polycarpa Hell.
Polycarpa pegasis n. sp.
Fundangabe: Stewart-iInsel, Port Pegasus, 25 Fd.,
19.—20. Jan. 1915 (1 Stick).
Beschreibung. Gestalt (Textfig. 25) seitlich abgeplattet zungen-
formig, hinten ventral in ein Konvolut von anfangs dicken, schliess-
lich nach reicher Veråstelung ziemlich diinnen Fåden ibergehend,
die wie ein verwirrter Schopf am Saum des Hinterendes sitzen,
und mit denen das Tier mutmasslich im Kiesgrunde verankert
war. Åussere Siphonen nicht ausgeprågt. Korperåffnun-
gen sehr unscheinbar, am schmalen Vorderende, kaum 3 der
Långe des eigentlichen Kårpers (ausschliesslich des Haftschopfes)
von einander entfernt, nicht vorragend, undeutlich vierlappig.
) Vergl.: W. Michaelsen, 1919, Ascid. Ptychobr. Diktyobr. Roten Mee-
res, p: 82,…Textfig, 12 =14:
451
Gråssenverhåltnisse: Långe (von der Branchialoffnung
bis zum dorsalen Hinterwinckel) 21 mm, Håhe (senkrecht zur
Långe, dorsalventral) 12 mm, gråsste Breite 6 mm.
Oberflåche eben, vom Inkrustationsmaterial sandig.
Fårbung die des Inkrustationsmaterials, dunkel sandgrau.
Zelluloøsemantel zåh knor-
pelig, elastisch biegsam, im allge-
meinen ca. ”/4 mm dick, am Hin-
terende verdickt, in den åusseren
Partien ziemlich dicht mit feinem
Sand durchsetzt, der auch die Ober-
flåche bedeckt, in den inneren Par-
tien dagegen spårlich wird, jedoch
die Innenflåche des Zellulosemantels
noch etwas kørnelig erscheinen
låsst; im Schnitt erscheinen die
sandårmeren Partien des Zellulose-
mantels hell gelblich.
Weichkårper uiberall sehr
fest am Zellulosemantel haftend.
Auskletdomeskdertoneren
Siphonen mit flach blasigen Ver-
dickungen, distal im Branchialsipho
Fig. 25... Polycarpa pegasis n. sp. (auch im Atrialsipho?, nicht unter-
Linke Kårperhålfte E: i Me- ) ;
Bek orperhalfte: durch" een Me chtt) mit sehr zartentsehlanken
dianschnitt frei gelegt; Kiemensack
bis auf den Vorderrand abpråpariert; — spitzigen, wasserhellen Innendor-
Mundtentakel, Atrialtentakel, Darm . i
und Geschlechtsorgane der linken DEU; SE Unge dl 16 E lang und
Seite sichtbar ; 5/2. 7 w breit sind und der Oberflåche
ziemlich dicht angedrickt erscheinen. Siphonalpapillen sind
nicht gefunden.
Branchialtentakel schlank fadenfårmig, unregelmåssig ab-
wechselnd verschieden lang, nach ziemlich unsicherer Zåhlung
bezw. Schåtzung etwa 50.
Leibeswand sehr zart, mit sehr schwacher Muskulatur.
Endocarpe scheinen ganz zu fehlen. Atrialvelum schmal.
Ein einfacher måssig dichter Kranz von Atrialtentakeln vor-
handen. Die Atrialtentakel (Textfig. 26) sind nicht ganz gleich
gross, schlank fadenfårmig, durchschnittlich etwa 0,3 mm lang und
29%
452
an der Basis 36 uw dick, apikalwårts schwach verjingt. = Jeder
Atrialtentakel steht auf der Kuppe eines kreisfårmigen, ziemlich
schwach erhabenen Polsters, åhnlich den Polstern der Siphonen-
Auskleidung.
Flimmerorgan ein stark erhabenes, rundliches, vorn etwas
eingeschnittenes Polster mit einfachem Flimmergrubenspalt, der
eine hufeisenformige, vorn offene Figur mit etwas
zusammengebogenen, am Ende kaum merklich wieder
etwas auswårts gebogenen Høårnern beschreibt.
Kiemensack annåhernd symmetrisch gestaltet,
mit nur wenig verkirzter Riuckenlinie, jederseits mit
4 deutlichen, aber nicht iuberhångenden Långs-
Fig. 26. " falten. Anordnung der inneren Långsgefåsse
RRS auf den Falten und den Faltenzwischenråumen z. B.
Atrialtentakel DONG) SETS) SEA) OMI O)ES TES Omen me kasse
HE Eger links såmtlich ziemlich diinn, dagegen rechts dorsal
heit; 60/1. zum Teil dicker, im allgemeinen nach dem Schema
1, p, 2, p, |! angeordnet, wobei p die ziemlich regelmåssig auf-
tretenden parastigmatischen, sekundåren Quergefåsse markiert;
Anordnung durch vielfache Unregelmåssigkeiten gestårt. Ma-
schen auch auf den Faltenzwischenråumen in der Regel långer
als breit, mit 3 oder 4 Kiemenspalten, selten (abnorme Maschen-
verbreiterung!) 5 oder 6 Kiemenspalten in einer dieser Maschen.
Maschen im Raume rechts neben der Dorsalfalte stark verbreitert,
bis etwa 16 Kiemenspalten enthaltend. Dorsalfalte sehr lang,
ziemlich schmal, zart, glatt und glattrandig, nach rechts hin ein-
gerollt.
Darm (Textfig. 25) an der linken Seite des Kiemensackes,
verhåltnismåssig klein, keine eigentliche Schleife, sondern nur
einen unregelmåssigen, weit offenen Bogen beschreibend. Oso-
phagus kurz, stark gebogen. Magen beidenends scharf abge-
setzt, dick und kurz, nur etwa um 4 långer als an seiner dick-
sten Stelle dick, gegen die Cardia deutlich verjiingt, so dass seine
grosste Dicke dem Pylorus genåhert ist. An der der Leibeswand
zugewendeten Seite zeigt der Magen eine deutliche Magennaht,
der mutmasslich eine Typhlosolis in seinem Innern entspricht.
Ausserdem erkennt man åusserlich etwa 17 scharfe Långsfurchen,
denen zweifellos ebenso viele in sein Lumen einragende Långsfalten
453
bezw. Långswulste entsprechen. Jederseits neben der Magennaht
liegen einige (2 bezw. 4) stufenweise stårker verkiirzte Långswilste,
die wohl ganz oder nahezu bis an den Hinterrand, nicht aber bis
an den Vorderrand des Magens reichen. Einen Blindsack konnte
ich nicht erkennen. Mititel- und Enddarm nicht von einander
gesondert. After mit sehr schmal zuriickgeschlagenem, zweiker-
bigem aber sonst glattem Rande. Der Darm miindet ziemlich fern
von der Atrialoffnung aus.
Geschlechtsorgane (Textfig.25): Jederseits eine grosse Zahl,
bei dem vorliegenden Stiick links 32, rechts 38, zwittrige Ge-
schlechtssåcke, die in ungefåhr zweifacher dichter Reihe jeder-
seits ein langes schmales Band unmittelbar neben dem Endostyl
besetzen. Die ausgewachsenen Geschlechtssåcke sind etwas ver-
schieden gross, im Håchstfalle etwa 1,5 mm lang und 0.8 mm breit
und dick, unregelmåssig eiformig mit sehr kleinem, fast knopffår-
migem Ausfihrapparat an oder nahe einem der beiden Pole;
sie sind sehr locker an der Leibeswand befestigt und ragen frei in
die Peribranchialråume hinein. Die Hauptmassen eines Geschlechts-
såckchens, die ganzen oberen, inneren und lateralen Partien, wer-
den von dem Ovarium eingenommen. SDie ausgewachsenen
Eizellen im Ovarium sind ungefåhr ”/4 mm dick. Eine Ova-
rialhåhle ist nicht sicher erkannt worden. Mutmasslich stellen
gewisse anscheinend unregelmåssige Spaltråume eine Ovarialhåhle
dar. Die Hode nimmt einen mehr oder weniger grossen Teil
der Basalpartie des Geschlechtssåckchens ein. Sie setzt sich aus
einer geringen Zahl, 1, 2 oder 3 Paar Hodenblasen zusammen.
Die Hodenblasen sind bohnenførmig, ungefåhr 0,22 mm lang und
0,1 mm breit. Sie liegen flach und quer an der Basalseite des
Geschlechtssåckchens; ihr proximales Ende ist der Mediane bezw.
dem Paarpartner zugewendet, wåhrend ihr distales Ende lateral-
wårts in einen zarten Ausfiihrgang ibergeht, der sich an der Sei-
tenwand des Organs nach vorn-oben hinzieht. Die verschiedenen
Ausfihrgånge vereinen sich schliesslich zu einem zarten,
median und kulminal verlaufenden Samenleiter. Das freie Aus-
fihrorgan stellt eine kurze, stummelfårmige Doppelråhre dar,
entstanden aus der innigen Aneinanderlagerung und Verwachsung
der distalen Enden von Samenleiter und Eileiter.
454
Gen. Amphicarpa n. gen.
Erorterung sowie Diagnose siehe oben, p. 415.
Amphicarpa schauinslandi n. sp.
Fundangabe: Chatham-Inseln, Maunganui, an Ascidien
[Pyura trita (Sluit.)]; Schauinsland leg.
Beschreibung. Koloniebildung: Personen durch schlanke
långliche oder plumpe kurze St>lonen mit einander verbunden
und am Untergrunde befestigt, Teil der Kolonie traubenfårmig.
Die Stolonen entspringen, soweit festgestellt, vorn ventral aus
den im iibrigen ganz freien Personen.
Gestalt der Personen dick-eiformig, fast kugelig, bis ge-
rundet walzenformig, fast doppelt so lang wie dick. Åussere
Siphonen meist nicht deutlich erkennbar, manchmal als winzige
Warzen ausgebildet, ungefåhr 7/5 des Profilumrisses des Kårpers
von einander entfernt, bei den wenigen genauer untersuchten Per-
sonen der Branchialsipho ungefåhr in der Mitte zwischem dem
Atrialsipho und dem Stolo-Ansatz (Boltenia-artig).
Oberflåche der Personen eben, ganz mit Sand dicht in-
krustiert, ebenso wie die ganze Oberflåche der Stolonen.
Grøåssenverhåltnisse=” "Die" "”grossten Bersonentmessen
4!/; : 21/2 : 2 mm und 3 : 2'/2 mm; der gråsste und schlankste
Stolo ist 4 mm lang und ca. ”/2 mm dick.
Korperåffnungen nach Massgabe der inneren Organisation
in der Form von Kreuzschlitzen (åusserlich nicht deutlich erkannt).
Zellulosemantel ziemlich fest-lederartig, ca. ”/6 mm dick,
in der åussersten Schicht dicht mit feinem Sand inkrustiert und
bedeckt, in den inneren Schichten, die sich vielfach als diunne
zarte Håute ablåsen und am Weichkårper haften bleiben, rein,
im Schnitt und an der Innenflåche hellgrau bis weisslich, sehr
schwach perlmutterglånzend.
Weichkørper ziemlich fest am Zellulosemantel haftend,
dessen innerste Schickt sich leichter von den folgenden Schichten
des Zellulosemantels als vom Weichkårper ablåsen låsst. Innere
Siphonen deutlich ausgeprågt, klein-warzenfårmig. Der Weich-
kårper ist stark braun gefårbt. Die Fårbung beruht bauptsåch-
lich auf bråunlichen rundlichen Pigmentzellen in den verschie-
denen Organen, so in der Leibeswand, den Endocarpen, dem Kie-
455
mensack, den Branchialtentakeln u. a. Dazu kommt noch eine
dichte schwarze Pigmentierung an den freien Kanten der inneren
Långsgefåsse des Kiemensackes sowie an den freien Kanten der
Endostylblåtter, wodurch der Endostyl als schwarze Doppellinie
auffallend hervorleuchtet.
Die Zellulosemantel-Innenauskleidung der Siphonen
trågt viele radiåre Långsfurchen, besonders zahlreich in den peri-
pheren Teilen. Diese Långsfurchen reichen verschieden weit zen-
tralwårts, und zwar in ziemlich regelmåssiger Anordnung nach dem
Schema 1, 4, 3, 4, 2, 4, 3, 4, 1. Ein Teil besonders langer
Långsfurchen schliessen sich zentralwårts zu vier spitzwinkligen
keilformigen Gruppen zusammen, die den 4 Lappen der Kårper-
offnung entsprechen. Innendorne und Siphonalpapillen
sind nicht gefunden.
Atrialtentakel sind ganz vereinzelt erkannt, mutmasslich
meist abgescheuert. Sie sind schlank fadenfårmig, ungefåhr 0,1, mm
lang und $ uw dick.
Leibeswand ziemlich dick, mit kråftiger, wenngleich zart-
faseriger Muskulatur. Zahlreiche kurz- und unregelmåssig sack-
formige Endocarpe iberall, wo Platz ist, an der Innenseite der
Leibeswand zerstreut.
Branchialtentakel schlank, fadenformig, gegen das distale
Ende allmåhlich dinner werdend, etwa 16, nicht ganz regelmåssig
nach dem Schema 1, 2, 1, 2, 1 etwas verschieden gross.
Flimmerorgan ein dickes, långliches Polster mit einfacher,
ziemiich langer långsschlitzformiger Offnung.
Kiemensack unsymmetrisch, schråg dorsoventral zusammen
gedriickt, jederseits mit zwei stark erhabenen und zwei mehr oder
weniger schwachen, stellenweise undeutlichen und scheinbar ganz
ausgeglåtteten Falten. Die beiden stark ausgeprågten Falten sind
jederseits die Falten I und III. An einem Querschnitt durch eine
Person glaube ich folgende Anordnung der inneren Långsge-
fisse auf den Falten zu erkennen (nicht ganz sicher, vielleicht
insenam EDT) (GB) (6) 2) E (3) GESGIFO)ID:
Darm (Textfig. 27) an der linken Seite des Kiemensackes.
Er bildet mit dem mittleren Teil eine sehr kurze, eng geschlossene
Schleife, die an die Hinterseite des Magens angedrickt ist, und
deren riicklaufender Ast, sich verlångernd, dicht am Magen
456
entlang gegen die Atrialdffnung hin verlåuft. Im ganzen macht
der Darm den Eindruck, als sei er zu einem Knåuel zusammen-
gedrickt. Osophagus kurz und måssig dick, kantig, S-fårmig
gebogen. Magen verhåltnismåssig sehr breit und kurz, kaum
halb so lang wie dick, wie eine in der Långsrichtung zusammen-
a &
Fig. 27. Amphicarpa schauinslandi n.sp. Darm, a u. b von verschiedenen Seiten; 27/1.
gedriickte Orange, mit ca. 18 scharf ausgeprågten Driisenwilsten,
von denen jederseits 2 oder 3 mehr oder weniger verkirzt sind
und vorn nicht am Cardialrand des Magens sondern an der Magen-
naht enden. Am Hinterende der Magennaht entspringt ein måssig
grosser, ganz freier, zur Seite gebogener dick-keulenfårmiger
Pylorusblindsack. Mittel- und Enddarm nicht von ein-
ander gesondert. After mit glattem, an einem Pol schårfer ein-
geschnittenem zweilappigem Rande.
Geschlechtsorgane: Rechts etwa 30, links etwa 15 un-
regelmåssig zerstreute Polycarpe. Dieselben sind meist einge-
schlechtlich, und zwar jederseits sowohl månnlich wie weiblich.
Dazwischen liegen jedoch einige wenige zwittrige Polycarpe mit
anscheinend schwåcher ausgebildetem weiblichen Teil. Die Ver-
wachsung des månnlichen und weiblichen Teils bei den Zwitter-
Polycarpen ist mehr oder weniger innig, manchmal nur locker,
manchmal aber auch so innig, dass ein kompaktes Zwitterorgan
entsteht, in dem das Ovarium am basalen Pol der Hode sitzt.
Die eingeschlechtlich månnlichen Polycarpe bestehen aus einer
einfachen, eifårmigen, mit einer Breitseite oder mit dem proxima-
len Pol an die Leibeswand angehefteten Hodenblase von durch-
schnittlich etwa 0,8 mm Långe und 0,15 mm Breite, die distal
in einen scharf abgesetzten, kurz-fadenformigen, etwa 0,06 mm lan-
gen und 0,02 mm dicken Samenleiter iibergeht. Die eingeschlecht-
lich weiblichen Polycarpe sind in nicht ganz reifen Zustande
457
unregelmåssig erbsenfårmig. Beim Wachsen werden sie mutmass-
lich durch Vorwålbung der gråsseren Eizellen eine mehr Globige-
rina-artige Gestalt annehmen. In den Zwitterorganen erscheint
die Gestaltung der Gonadensåckchen durch ihre Aneinanderschmie-
gung entsprechend beeinflusst.
Erorterung: A. schauinslandi unterscheidet sich von der eben-
falls inkrustierten, ihr nahe stehenden A. zietzi (Mich.) ”) durch
die geringere Zahl der inneren Långsgefåsse des Kiemen-
sackes, die Kirze und Breite des Magens und die geringere
Zahluder Polycarpe.
Nachtrag zu gen. Amphicarpa: Als fuinfte Art kommt noch
A. diptycha (Hartmr.) %) von Nordwest-Australien hinzu.
Gen. Metandrocarpa Mich.
Eroårterung sowie verbesserte bezw. erweiterte Diagnose siehe oben, p.416.
Metandrocarpa thilenii mn. sp,
Fundangabe: Neuseeland, Nordinsel, Bucht von Tau-
ranga; Thilenius leg. (Mus, Berlin); Vor New Plymouth,
SREd==16% Nov. 1914.
Beschreibung. Koloniebildung: Personen meist bis zur Basis
frei, dicht neben einander stehend, durch eine dinne Basalmembran
oder durch. kurze, ziemlich dicke Stolonen mit einander verbunden.
Personen sackfårmig, die kleineren fast kugelig, die ausge-
wachsenen etwas långer (basoapikal) als hoch (dorsoventral) und etwas
håher als breit. Åussere Siphonen kaum ausgeprågt, håchstens
als schwach warzenformige Erhabenheiten am Vorderende. Kårper-
offnungen einander genåhert, nur ungefåhr "/6 der gråssten Korper-
långe von einander entfernt. Branchialdfføfnnng ein deutlicher feiner
Kreuzschlitz, Atrialoffnung ein undeutlicherer Kreuzschlitz.
Gråssenverhåltnisse: Gråsstes vorliegendes Stick 10 mm
lang, 5//> mm hoch und 3!/>» mm breit; Entfernung der Korper-
åffnungen von einander ungefåhr 1%/3 mm.
Oberflåche eben, ganz mit feinem Sand bedeckt, nur die
Kårperåffnungen fast nackt, håchstens mit sehr feinen, mikrosko-
1) Heterocarpa zietzi W. Michaelsen, 1911, Tethyid. [Styelid.] Nat. Mus.
Hamburg, p. 160, Textfig. 17.
?) Distomus diptychos R. Hartmeyer, Åscid.; in: Res. Swed. Exp., Austral.
1903— 13, XXV, p. 87.
458
pischen Fremdkårpern besetzt. Auch die Basalmembran sowie
die Stolonen sind sandig.
Fårbung die des Inkrustationsmaterials, hell gelblich, sand-
grau oder dunkelgrau.
Zellulosemantel sehr dinn, zåh, elastisch biegsam, durch
und durch mit feinem Sande inkrustiert, im Schnitt hell gelblich,
an der Innenflåche perlmutterglånzend, aber durch die Inkrustierung
fleckig und rauh.
Weichkårper iberall fest am Zellulosemantel haftend.
Leibeswand zart, mit sehr feiner Muskulatur, die nicht
deutlich in gesonderte dickere Biindel zusammen gefasst ist. Jeder-
seits einige wenige, etwa 5, kleine unregelmåssig verschrumpft-
sackformige Endocarpe, anscheinend ganz unregelmåssig gestellt.
Innenauskleidung des Branchialsiphos mit 12 regelmåssigen
diinn - saumfårmigen, an den Enden verschmålerten Långsfalten ;
Innenauskleidung des Atrialsiphos unregelmåssig fåltelig. Sipho-
nalpapillen fehlen sowohl im Branchialsipho wie im Atrialsipho:;
auch Innendorne scheinen zu fehlen. Atrialvelum måssig
kråftig, schmal. Ca. 90 feine Atrialtentakel bilden einen ziem-
lich regelmåssigen Kranz. Sie sind zart fadenfårmig, etwa 0,1 mm
lang und etwa 6 uw dick, manchmal distal etwas verdickt, aber
nicht ausgesprochen keulenfårmig.
Branchialtentakel ca. 40, warzenformig bis schlank pfriem-
formig,” nicht ”ganz: regelmåssig ”nachdemSchemat lse æsel
oder, wo die warzenfårmigen 3. Ordnung fehlen, nach dem Schema
IØ PÆanseordnet
Flimmerorgan ein kreisrundes dickes Polster mit einfacher
aber unregelmåssig umrandeter Durchbohrung; Offnung bei dem
nåher untersuchten Objekt in der Aufsicht unregelmåssig- und
gerundet-vierkantig.
Kiemensack bis an das Hinterende reichend, dorsal verkiirzt,
anscheinend nicht ganz genau bilateral-symmetriseh, ohne Falten.
Linkerseits 9 (bei einem Stiick sicher, bei einem zweiten Stiick
nicht ganz sicher festgestellt), rechterseits 10 innere Långsgefåsse
(bei dem zweiten Stiick sicher. bei dem ersten Stiick nicht ganz
sicher festgestellt). Die inneren Låingsgefåsse stehen dorsal
etwa dichter als ventral; jedoch ist der Raum zwischen dem 1.
Långsgefåss und der Dorsalfalte etwas verbreitert.. Wåhrend dieser
459
Raum etwa 4 Kiemenspalten in einer Zone enthålt, tragen die
schmalen Maschen zwischen den ersten Långsgefåssen durch-
schnittlich 2 Kiemenspalten. Die Maschen der Mittelpartien mit
etwa 6 oder 7 Kiemenspalten sind annåhernd quadratisch, die
neben dem Endostyl etwas verbreitert, bis 9 Kiemenspalten fassend.
PD NA
Fig. 28. Metandrocarpa thilenii n. sp. Weichkårper durch einen dorsalmedianen
Långsschnitt geåffnet und ausgebreitet; Kiemensack abpråpariert; Mundtentakel,
Endostyl, Darm u. Geschlechtsorgane sichtbar ; 8/1.
Es sind ungefåhr 14 Kiemenspalten-Zonen vorhanden (nicht
ganz sicher!). Primåre Quergefåsse annåhernd gleich breit,
ziemlich dinn. Die Maschen sind fast ausnahmslos durch unge-
mein feine parastigmatische Quergefåsse geteilt. Diese zeigen viele
Unregelmåssigkeiten. Vielfach findet man 2 oder 3 parastigmati-
sche Quergefåsse auf einer Masche.
Dorsalfalte ein glatter, glattrandiger Saum.
Der Darm (Textfig. 28) bildet eine schwach klaffende, gerade
nach hinten gehende Schleife, deren riicklaufender Ast ungefåhr
doppelt so lang ist wie der vorlaufende, sodass der After weit vor
dem Schlundeingang, nåmlich im vorderen Teil des Kårpers, zu
liegen kommt,.entsprechend der Lage der am Vorderende befind-
460
lichen Atrialoffnung. Der Darm liegt wenigstens der Hauptsache
nach an der linken Seite des Kiemensackes, schien jedoch zum
Teil in die Rickenpartie hinein, wenn nicht gar auf die rechte
Seite hiniber zu ragen. Da das Untersuchungsobjekt bei der
Pråparation eine ziemlich starke Zerrung aushalten musste, so
wåre es måglich, dass hierbei eine abnorme Lageverånderung des
Darmes eingetreten sei. Der Osophagus ist kurz und diinn,
stark gekriimmt. Der den gråssten Teil des hinlaufenden Darm-
-schleifen-Astes einnehmende Magen ist viel långer als dick, fast
doppelt so lang wie dick, olivenfårmig, hinten etwas verdickt.
Ausser einem schmalen, gerade von vorn nach hinten gehenden
Nahtwulst zeigt die Wandung des Magens 21 scharf ausgeprågte
Drisenwiilste, die zum gråssten Teil parallel dem Nahtwulst von
der Cardia bis zum Pylorus verlaufen, wåhrend jederseits etwa
3, stufenweise stårker verkirzt, die Cardia nicht erreichen und im
spitzen Winkel gegen den Nahtwulst stossen. Der Nahtwulst
geht hinten in einen måssig grossen, retortenfårmigen, das Pylorus-
Ende des Magens nach hinten iberragenden freien Blindsack
uber. Mittel- und Enddarm sind nicht voneinander gesondert,
dinn. After glattrandig, zweilippig.
Geschlechtsorgane (Textfig. 28): Die Personen sind zwitt-
rig, die Polycarpe såmtlich eingeschlechtlich. Die månn-
lichen Polycarpe sind einfache, birn- bis wurstformige Hoden-
blasen, die distal durch einen engen, kurzen Samenleiter aus-
munden. Sie haften in ganzer Långe ziemlich fest an der Leibes-
wand. Die gråssten Hodenblasen sind ungefåhr 1,2 mm lang und
0,3 mm dick. Die weiblichen Polycarpe sind unregelmåssige,
ein Ovarium enthaltende, durch die gråsseren Eizellen unregel-
måssig aufgewådlbte Såcke, meist etwas långer als dick, etwa 0,09 mm
lang, und distal durch einen undeutlichen, meist nicht abgesetzten
Eileiter ausmindend. Sie haften sehr locker an der Leibes-
wand. Die Anordnung der Geschlechtsorgane ist sehr
eigenartig. Allen Personen gemeinsam ist eine regelmåssige, rech-
terseits in zunåchst geringer Entfernung vom Endostyl vom Hin-
terende nach vorn hin verlaufende Reihe mehr oder weniger genau
quer gestellter Hodenblasen, deren distales Ende aufwårts gerichtet,
vom Endostyl abgewendet ist. Weiter vorn nåhert sich diese
Reihe dem Endostyl uud tritt dann unter dem von der Leibeswand
461
abgehobenen Endostyl weg etwas auf die linke Kårperseite iiber.
Ganz vorn liegen noch einige wenige, z. B. 2, Hodenblasen rechts
vom Endostyl. Ich zåhlte 15 Hodenblasen in dieser Gruppe.
Bei einem Stiick fand sich noch eine zweite Reihe von Hoden-
blasen, und zwar linkerseits etwas vor der Kårpermitte die ganze
Breite des Kårpers iberquerend. Die Enden dieser linksseitigen
Reihe sind nach vorn hin abgebogen und zeichnen sich zugleich
durch Unregelmåssigkeit der Reihenanordnung aus. Die Zahl der
Hodenblasen dieser linksseitigen Gruppe kommt der der anderen
nahe. Bei zwei anderen Personen war eine solche linksseitige
Reihe nicht ausgebildet; bei diesen finden sich mitten an der
linksseitigen Kårperwand nur einige wenige, anscheinend ganz un-
regelmåssig gestellte, zerstreute Hodenblasen. Die weiblichen
Polycarpe bilden links vom Endostyl eine åhnliche Reihe, wie die
månnlichen rechtsseitig, doch ist ihre Reihenanordnung nicht so
regelmåssig, mutmasslich infolge ihrer weit loseren Befestigung
-an der Leibeswand. Sie scheinen durch gegenseitiges Drången
aus der geraden Reihe herausgeschoben zu sein; doch ist ihre
Anlage mutmasslich eine gerade Reihe. Vorn sind einige wenige
weibliche Polycarpe, etwa 2, auf die rechte Kårperseite hiniiber
geruckt.
Erorterung: M. thilenii steht mitsamt der ebenfalls neuseelån-
dischen M. protostigmatica der kalifornischen M. dura (Ritter)
gegenilber, insofern die Polycarpe nicht wie bei dieser die regel-
måssige Anordnung nach Geschlechtern in 2 Reihen ,vorn weib-
liche, hinten månnliche", aufweisen. Von M. protostigmatica n. sp.
(siehe unten!) unterscheidet sich M. zthilenii scharf schon durch
dietånss'ere Tracht.
Metandrocarpa protostigmatica n. sp.
Fundangabe: Neuseeland, Nordinsel, Hauraki-Golf,
Nord-Kanal, Insel Kawaii, an der Innen- und Aussenseite
einer Mactra-Schale; 29. Dez. 1914.
Beschreibung. Personen mehr oder weniger regelmåssige
breit-ovale bis kreisrunde, flach kuppelfårmige Polster, die unge-
1) Goodsiria dura W.C. Ritter, Budd. comp. Ascid., p. 150, Taf. XII
Fig 1—4:
462
fåhr 7/3 so hoch wie breit sind, und deren Gestalt durch åussere
Siphonen nicht oder nur kaum merklich beeinflusst wird.
Kolonie-Bildung (Textfig. 29): Die Personen einer Ko-
lonie sitzen mit ganzer Ventralseite einer Mactra-Schale fest auf,
nahe bei einander oder bis etwa 2 mm von einander entfernt, auch
bei Annåherung bis zu gegenseitiger Beriihrung sich in der Aus-
bildung ihrer charakteristischen Kårpergestalt nicht stårend. Vom
Rande jeder Person zieht sich ein sehr dinner Anwachssaum
Fig. 29. Metandrocarpa protostigmatica n. sp. Vorgetriebener Lappen einer Kolonie;
eine Mutterperson (links) mit 2 noch daran sitzenden Knospen und i schon abge-
trennten Tochterperson, diese mit 3 noch daran sitzenden Knospen und 1 schon ab-
getrennten Enkelperson ; 12/1.
als feste Kruste iiber den Untergrund hin. Die Umrandung dieses
Anwachssaumes, dessen Breite stellenweise die halbe Breite der
Person ibertrifft, ist sehr unregelmåssig. Dort wo die Anwachs-
såume benachbarter Personen aneinander stossen, verschmelzen
sie, und bilden so eine gemeinsame Basalmembran. Von der
Unterseite der Personen strahlen zahlreiche Mantelgefåsse in
die Basalmembran hinein. Die angeschwollenen, und gegen den
Rand der Basalmembran bezw. des Anwuchssaumes meist etwas
abgestutzten Blind-Enden der Mantelgefåsse bilden einen dichten
aber unregelmåssigen und vielfach unterbrochenen Kranz um die
Person, der allerdings nur bei den ziemlich frei stehenden oder
den randståndigen Personen deutlich zur Ausbildung gelangt. Viel-
fach tritt dieser Kranz durch dunkel-olivbraune Pigmentierung der
Blind-Enden noch deutlicher hervor; stellenweise aber fehlt eine
463
solche Pigmentierung, die an Blutkårperchen gebunden zu sein
scheint, und wohl von der Fiilllung der Mantelgefåsse abhångig ist.
Wåhrend diese die Personen umkrånzenden Mantelgefåsse kurz
und einfach sind, finden sich in der Basalmembran auch långere
nnd verzweigte, die distal håufig in eine Reihe kurz-kolbenfårmiger
oder birnfårmiger Blind-Enden auslaufen. Schliesslich sieht man
noch zwischen der Mutterperson und ihren Tochterpersonen je eine
kleine Zahl (bis 6?) paralleler Mantelgefåsse verlaufen, besonders
deutlich dort, wo sich Tochter- und Mutterperson weit voneinander
getrennt haben, also im vorliegenden Håchstfalle etwa 2 mm lange.
Bei geringer Vergråsserung sehen diese Gruppen der die Personen
verbindenden Mantelgefåsse aus wie ein schmales, långsstreifiges
Band, das sich in gerader Linie zwischen 2 benachbarten Personen
erstreckt und sich durch geringen Farbunterschied von der gemein-
samen Basalmembran, in die es eingebattet erscheint, abhebt. Die
vorliegende Kolonie zeigt alle måglichen Stadien pallialer Knos-
pung (Textfig. 29). Die ersten Stadien erscheinen als schmale
lappenfårmige Vortreibung des Personenrandes in die Basalmembran
hinein. Bei weiterem Wachstum verbreitert sich der Knospen-
lappen distal, wåhrend er sich proximal verschmålert. Weiterhin
entfernt sich die gråsser werdende Knospe von der Mutterperson.
Wåhrend sie allmåhlich eine kreisrunde Form annimmt, wird die
Verbindung zwischen ihr und der Mutter långer und schmåler,
Stolo-artig. Schliesslich schwindet disser Stolo, und die Tochter-
person wird selbståndig, mit den iubrigen Personen der Kolonie
nur noch durch die gemeinsame Basalmembran, mit der Mutter-
person im besonderen noch durch die oben erwåhnte Gruppe von
parallelen Mantelgefåssen verbunden. Das Wachstum der Kolonie
geschieht offenbar etwas anders, als bei Alloeocarpa affinis, von
der Bovien es geschildert und abgebildet hat”). Bei 4. affinis
kann kaum von einer gemeinsamen Basalmembran geredet wer-
den, die bei dieser Art ganz… auf schmale Anwachssåume im
nåchsten Umkreis der Personen und der Knospen-Stolonen be-
schrånkt ist, wåhrend sie bei Metandrocarpa protostigmatica die
Zwischenråume zwischen den Persønen vollståndig einnimmt. Es
ist zu beachten, dass Textfig. 29 einen besonders schmalen, weil
1) P, Bovien, 1921, Tunic. Auckland Campbell Isl., p. 43, Taf. IV Fig. 1.
464
besonders weit vorgetriebenen Lappen der Randpartie der Kolonie
darstellt, an dem sich die Basalmembran nur als Saum darstellt,
nicht so deutlich als verbindende Membran, wie in den mittleren
Teilen der Kolonie.
Oberflåche der Kolonie ganz rein, ohne Fremdkårper- Auf-
wuchs, an den Personen sehr zart gekårnelt. Bei mikroskopischer
Betrachtung erkennt man, dass diese Kornelung auf ungemein feinen
dicht stehenden, kurz-kolbenfårmigen Hervorragungen der åusser-
sten Zellulosemantel-Schicht beruht.
Fårbung der Personen blåulich grau, schieferfarben mit Atlas-
glanz; Korperåffnungen mehr oder weniger deutlich von einem
Kranz hellerer, unscharfer, tiipfeliger Strahlen umgeben. Fårbung
der Basalmembran weisslich, mit mehr oder weniger ausgesprochen
olivbraunen, die Personen umkrånzenden Binden, die von den
Blind-Enden der Mantelgefåsse herruihren.
Åussere Siphonen nicht oder, bei stark kontrahierten Per-
sonen, als schwach erhabene kreisrunde Warzen ausgebildet.
Korperåffnungen auf flachem Grunde oder in dem Mittel-
punkt von Warzen gelegen, auf der Oberseite der Personen unge-
fåhr in gleicher Eutfernung vom Rande, etwas zur rechten Seite
verschoben. Die Entfernung zwischen ihnen kommt ungefåhr einem
Drittel der Kårperlånge gleich. Im geschlossenen Zustande sind
es einfache Querschlitze oder, selten, undeutliche Kreuzschlitze.
Im mehr oder weniger gedffneten Zustande sind es querspindel-
formige bis gerundet quadratische Låcher, wobei die Diagonalen
des Quadrats in die Långs- und die Querrichtung fallen.
Gråssenverhåltnisse: Gråsste vorliegende Person 3,6 mm
lang und breit, 1 mm hoch; Entfernung zwischen den Kårperåff-
nungen ungefåhr 1,1 mm.
Zellulosemantel hart und fest lederartig, elastisch biegsam,
an der Oberseite der Personen ungefåhr 50 4 dick, im unmittelbaren
Umkreis der Kårperåffnungen etwas, am Anwachsrande stårker ver-
dickt, an der Grundflåche etwas diinner. Im Schnitt gelblich, an der
Innenflåche blåulich grau, stark perlmutterglånzend. Der Zellulose-
mantel zeigt bei mikroskopischer Betrachtung diinner Schnitte eine
zarte Horizontalfaserung und an der Oberseite der Personen eine
sehr diinne, manchmal etwas abblåtternde Oberhaut, deren Aussen-
seite die charakteristische Kårnelung aufweist.
465
Innenauskleidung der Siphonen mit zarter rundlich-blasiger
Felderung, ohne Innendorne und Siphonalpapillen.
Weichkoårper iberall ziemlich fest am Zellulosemantel haf-
tend, ohne deutliche innere Siphonen.
Branchialtentakel etwa 20 (Zåhlung nicht ganz sicher!),
stummel- bis schlank pfriemfårmig, sehr verschieden gross, nicht
ganz regelmåssig nach dem Schema 1, 3, 2, 3, 1 oder stellenweise
sehembartlte2 TI 2 Tangeordnet:
Flimmerorgan ein långs-ovales Polster mit einfacher långs-
schlitzformiger Offnung.
Leibeswand måssig dick, mit zarter Muskulatur. Einige
wenige Endocarpe an der Oberseite, zumal in den marginalen
Winkelraum eingebettet. Atrialtentakel anscheinend in måssig
grosser Zahl in einfachem Kreise die Atrialdffnung umgebend (nur
in einem kleinen Teil des Kreises zur Beobachtung gelangt), zart-
und kurz-fadenfårmig, etwa 7 w dick.
Kiemensack (Textfig. 30) dorsal verkirzt, sehr unsymmetrisch
gestaltet, schråg dorsoventral abgeplattet, so zwar, dass Dorsalfalte
und Endostyl auf je einer Breitseite nahe deren Rande zu liegen
kommen, der Endostyl von der ventralen Mittellinie etwas nach
rechts, die Dorsalfalte von der dorsalen Mittellinie etwas nach links
geriickt. Kiemensack ohne Falten, mit jederseits 7 oder 8 schmal
bandformigen inneren Långsgefåssen, die jederseits am Endo-
styl einen breiteren, in der Quere 15—8 Kiemenspalten fassenden
Raum frei lassen, wåhrend die ibrigen Felder, zumal die dorsalen,
betråchtlich schmåler sind und nur 2—4 Kiemenspalten ent-
halten. Rechte Seite des Kiemensackes, abgesehen von gewissen
Unregelmåssigkeiten in der Form und der Stellung der Kiemen-
spalten in den hintersten Zonen, normal gestaltet. Linke Seite
des Kiemensackes im hinteren Teil abnorm ausgebildet (bei allen
3 nåher untersuchten Personen in gleicher Weise, also anscheinend
konstant). In den normal ausgebildeten Teilen des Kiemensackes
sind die primåren Quergefåsse annåhernd gleich breit und
wechseln regelmåssig mit feinen parastigmatischen Quergefåssen ab.
Die Kiemenspalten sind hier parallel den inneren Långsgefåssen
lang gestreckt, schmal und parallelrandig. Rechtsseitig finden sich
ungefåhr 11 normale Kiemenspalten-Zonen. An der linken
Seite sind ungefåhr im hinteren Viertel (Textfig. 30) die Kiemen-
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 73. 30
466
spalten-Zonen durch schmale, die ganze Breite des Kiemensackes
iiberquerende und, abgesehen von den Enden, nur durch die inneren
Långsgefåsse gestiitzte Spalten vertreten. Diese queren Spalten
zeigen genau die Struktur von Kiemenspalten. Sie sind parallel-
randig, etwas breiter als die zwischen ihnen liegenden Wandungs-
vol
|
Fig. 30. Metandrocarpa protostigmatica n. sp. Hinterer Teil der linken Seite des
Kiemensackes ; 33/1.
teille und weisen auch an den Enden die charakteristische Kiemen-
spaltenstruktur auf. Wir haben hier offenbar Protostigmen vor
uns, also eine fir die Art anscheinend konstante atavistische Bil-
dung. Der Uebergang dieser Protostigmen-Region in die Region
der normalen Kiemenspalten-Zonen ist nicht ganz scharf und låsst
die Art, wie die Kiemenspalten-Zonen sich aus Protostigmen gebil-
det haben, deutlich erkennen. Diese Umbildung weicht bei M.
protostigmatica etwas von der bei Dendrodoa [Styelopsis] grossularia
(Ben.), wie sie Julin eingehend schildert”), ab: Bei "demfnåher
untersuchten Stiick von Metandrocarpa protostigmatica (Textfig. 30)
finden wir folgende Anordnung: Die letzten 3 Protostigmen nehmen
)) Ch. Julin, 1904, Rech. phylog. Tunic. Dével. appar. branch., p. 572
RE SENE arter TE SL,
467
schnell an Långe ab. Das hinterste ist kurz-oval. Im ganzen
zåhle ich 12 vollståndige, die ganze Breite des Kiemensackes ein-
nehmende Protostigmen. Auf das zwélfte (von hinten gezåhlt)
Protostigma folgt nach vorn hin eine Ubergangszone, die in der
Mitte schmal ist und hier von einer langen, genau quer gestellten
Kiemenspalte eingenommen wird, wåhrend sie sich gegen Dorsal-
falte und Endostyl verbreitert und hier 5 bezw. 3 mehr oder weniger
schråg gestellte, gegen die Enden der langen, mittleren queren
Kiemenspalte geneigte und dachziegelartig iiber einander gescho-
bene kirzere Kiemenspalten aufweist. Wir haben in der mittleren,
langen queren Kiemenspalte offenbar den in der Lage unverånder-
ten Uberrest eines Protostigmas und in den sich beiderseits an-
schliessenden, durch mehr und mehr gesteigerte Schrågstellung
aus der geraden Verlångerung jenes Protostigma-Restes herausge-
schobene eigentliche Kiemenspalten vor uns. Die Kiemenspalten
bildeten sich bei M. protostigmatica also anscheinend durch Abschnii-
rung von den Enden eines Protostigmas, wåhrend sie nach Julin
bei Dendrodoa grossularia durch wiederholte Zweiteilung eines Pro-
tostigmas entstanden sind. Die an meinem Pråparat von M. proio-
stigmatica nåchst folgende Kiemenspalten-Zone ist noch nicht ganz
normal. Auch in ihr ist noch der Uberrest des Protostigmas an
der genau queren Lage und der dachziegelformigen Anreihung der
abgeschnirten Kiemenspalten deutlich zu erkennen, doch ist es
schon bis zur gewohnlichen Långe der Kiemenspalten verkurzt.
Es liegt nicht in gerader Linie vor dem Uberrest des Protostig-
mas der folgende Zone, sondern viel weiter dorsalwårts. Die Ab-
spaltung der Kiemenspalten vom Protostigma geht also anscheinend
sehr unregelmåssig vor sich. Die nåchst vorhergehende Kiemen-
spalten-Zone ist schon fast normal ausgebildet, jedoch, wie auch
ihre Kiemenspalten, noch viel kirzer als die der vorderen Kiemen-
sack-Hålfte.. Auch ist in ihr das parastigmatische Quergefåss noch
unvollkommen, kaum zwei Maschenbreiten iberspannend. Erst die
vierte Kiemenspalten-Zone vor dem vordersten ungeteilten Proto-
stigma ist ganz normal. Schon aus diesem unscharfen Ubergang
von der Protostigmen-Region in die normale Region der Kiemen-
spalten ist zu vermuten, dass die Erstreckung der Protostigmen-
Region variabel sei. Sicher nachweisen kann ich dies allerdings
nicht, da es mir nicht glickte, die Kiemensåcke der ubrigen bei-
30"
468
den untersuchten Personen vollståndig heraus zu pråparieren. Das
Bild dieser Protostigmen-Region erinnert sehr an das des Kiemen-
sackes meines Bathyoncus enderbyanus!), fir den Seeliger?) die
Gattung Bathystyeloides aufstellte. Die Åhnlichkeit ist so sprechend,
dass man an der bei M. protostigmatica unabweislichen Protostigma-
Natur auch der Querspalten bei Bathystyeloides enderbyanus nicht
zweifeln kann. Die Seeliger'sche Ansicht, dass diese Querspal-
ten echte Kiemenspalten seien, ist schon von Hartmeyer?) zuriick-
gewiesen worden. Auf eine nåhere Verwandtschaft ist aus dieser
Åhnlichkeit der Kiemensack-Bildung fir Bathystyeloides und Metan-
drocarpa protostigmatica nicht zu schliessen. Es handelt sich bier
zweifellos nur um eine Rickschlagskonvergenz, nicht um systema-
tisch bedeutsame Neubildung.
Darm an der linken Seite des Kiemensackes an der Grund-
flåche des Weichkørpers gelegen, eine einfache, plumpe, vorn nicht
ganz geschlossene, vor dem Wendepol weit klaffende kurze
Schleife mit lingerem riicklaufenden Ast bildend. Øsophagus
stark gebogen. Magen fast orangenfårmig, wenig långer als dick,
etwas hinter der Mitte am dicksten, vom Osophagus und Mittel-
darm scharf abgesetzt, mit einem schmalen Nahtwulst und unge-
fåhr 16 breiten, scharf ausgeprågten Driisenwiilsten. Es sind jeder-
seits ungefåhr 5 Driisenwiilste stufenweise stårker verkiirzt, sodass
sie das Cardia-Ende nicht erreichen, sondern, schråg gegen den
Nahtwulst stossend, an diesem enden. Der Nahtwulst geht hinten
in einen ziemlich grossen, birnfårmigen, gegen den Mitteldarm
hingebogenen Pylorus-Blindsack iiber. Mittel- und End-
darm nicht von einander gesondert, einfach, sehr dick, nur etwa
um ”/4 dunner als der Magen. After zweilippig, glattrandig.
Geschlechtsorgane: Jederseits eine grosse Zahl anschei-
nend ganz unregelmåssig zerstreuter, meist eingeschlechtlicher,
månnlicher und weiblicher, zum geringen Teil auch zwittriger Poly-
carpe. Bei einem an einer Schnittserie genau untersuchten Stiick
zåhlte ich rechts 3 zwittrige, 2 månnliche, 7 weibliche und links
”) W. Michaelsen, 1904, D. Stolidobr. Ascid. deutsch. Tiefsee-Exp., p.
227, Taf. XIII Fig: "48;
) OSeeliger, 1907, Tunic: in Bronn KON nerne pe 0:
) R. Hartmeyer, 19109%Tunic: in" Bronn KILO rdn Tierrepel ses:
Fussnote.
469
1 zwittriges, 17 månnliche und 7 weibliche Polycarpe, falls nicht
ein linksseitiges und ein rechtsseitiges anscheinendes Zwitterorgan
als je 1 månnliches und 1 weibliches gezåhlt werden muss. Der
Zusammenhang zwischen dem månnlichen und dem weiblichen
Teil der Zwitterorgane scheint nåmlich nicht immer gleich innig
zu sein. Als echte Zwitterorgane mit innig verwachsenem Hoden
und Ovarium konnte ich nur 2 Polycarpe der rechten Seite an-
sprechen. Die månnlichen Polycarpe bestehen aus einer
einfachen sackformigen Hodenblase, die an einem Pol in einen
sehr kurzen, stummelfårmigen Samenleiter iibergeht. Die weib-
lichen Polycarpe bestehen bei voller Ausbildung aus einem
unregelmåssigen Klumpen verschieden grosser Eizellen, die von
einer zarten, durch die Eizellen aufgebeulten Haut umhillt sind.
Erorterung : Diese von den meisten iibrigen Metandrocarpa-Arten
schon durch die åussere Tracht deutlich unterschiedene Art
ist vor allem ausgezeichnet durch die Struktur des Kiemensackes,
der in einem Teil, nåmlich links hinten, auf dem Protostigma-Stande
stehen geblieben ist. Auch durch das Vorkommen zwittriger
Polycarpe unterscheidet sie sich von allen anderen bekannten
Gattungsgenossen und geht dadurch iber den engeren Rahmen
der Gattung hinaus. Ich messe dieser Besonderheit jedoch in
diesem Falle keine grosse Bedeutung bei. Es handelt sich hier
wohl nur um eine gelegentliche Verwachsung zweier dicht neben
einander stehender Gonaden verschiedenen Geschlechtes, wie aus
der verschiedenen Innigkeit der Verwachsung zu schliessen ist.
Gen. Theodorella n. gen.
Erårterung und Diagnose siehe oben, p. 417.
Theodorella arenosa n. sp.
Fundangabe: Stewart-Insel, 20 Fd.; an anderen Ascidien;
16. Nov. 1914.
Beschreibung. Koloniebildung: Personen meist vollstån-
dig von einander gesondert und nur durch kirzere oder långere
Stolonen mit einander verbunden, nur die kleineren anscheinend
bei undeutlicher Ausbildung von Stolonen unmittelbar aneinander
gewachsen. Die grosse vorliegende Kolonie bildet einen dichten
Besatz am Stiel einer Pyura pachydermatina sowie an siner diesem
470
Pyura-Stiel anhaftenden Cnemidocarpa cerea. Losgelåste Teile der
Kolonie haben die Gestalt einer unregelmåssigen Traube.
Personen im ausgewachsenen Zustande breit sackformig oder
eifåormig, wenig långer als dick, jiingere Personen annåhernd kuge-
lig. Åussere Siphonen nicht ausgeprågt. Korperåffnun-
gen unscheinbar, ungefåhr "/3 der gråssten Kårperlånge von ein-
ander entfernt, die Branchialoffnung am Vorderende, die Atrialoff-
nung am Riicken etwas vor der Mitte.
Oberflåche der Personen wie der Stolonen dicht mit måssig
feinem Sande bedeckt, eben.
Fårbung die des Inkrustationsmateriales, sandgrau.
Groåssenverhåltnisse: Gråsste Person 8 : 5 : 4/8 mm
messend.
Zellulosemantel knorpelig, zåh, biegsam, im allgemeinen
måssig dick, an der Basis ziemlich dick, oberflåchlich stark mit
Sand inkrustiert, in den inneren Schichten rein, an der Innenflåche
glatt, im Schnitt und an der Innenflåche milchig weiss. Beim Åb-
ziehen des Zellulosemantels låsst sich die innerste Schicht leicht
von der mittleren Schicht ab und bleibt als dinne Haut am Weich-
kårper haften, zumal an dessen Dorsalseite.
Weichkorper ziemlich fest am Zellulosemantel haftend, zu-
mal dorsal. Immerhin gelingt es ohne grosse Schwierigkeit, den
Weichkørper heil herauszulåsen. Weichkårper regelmåssig und
glatt eiformig, mit kleinen, aber deutlich abgesetzten, abgestutzt
kegelformigen inneren Siphonen.
Leibeswand ziemlich dinn, mit zarter Muskulatur, die
sich nicht deutlich zu dickeren Biindeln zusammenschliesst. Bei-
derseits einige wenige, etwa 6, verschrumpft sackfårmige kleine
Endocarpe, anscheinend unregelmåssig zerstreut.
Innenauskleidung der Siphonen mit schmalen, unregel-
måssigen, saumformigen Falten, die des Branchialsiphos ziemlich
regelmåssig radiår gestellt, aber nicht såmtlich gleich breit, die des
Atrialsiphos weniger regelmåssig, aber immerhin noch vorwiegend
radiår verlaufend, zum Teil unregelmåssig, gebogen oder verkriimmt.
Siphonalpapillen und Innendorne sind nicht gefunden.
Atrialvelum schmal. Atrialtentakel (Textfig. 31) zahl-
reich, einen måssig dichten einfachen Kranz bildend, zart faden-
formig, etwa 0,1 mm lang und 5 w dick.
471
Branchialtentakel (Textfig. 31) ca. 18, verhåltnismåssig
gross, schlank pfriemfårmig, die meisten annåhernd gleich gross,
zwischen diesen einige wenige kleinere. Bei dem nåher unter-
suchten Stick bildeten sie, eng aneinander gestellt, einen geschlos-
senen Kranz.
(LA
Fig. 31. Theodorella arenosa n. sp. Weichkårper durch einen ventralmedianen Långs-
schnitt gedffnet u. ausgebreitet; Kiemensack bis auf den Vorderrand abpripariert ;
Mundtentakel, Flimmerorgan, Atrialtentakel, Darm und Geschlechtsorgane sichtbar;
a, ein abgelåstes Geschlechtsorgan von der Seite gesehen ; 18/1.
Flimmerorgan (Textfig. 31) anscheinend kurz pantoffelfårmig,
jedenfalls nicht kreisrund, mit einfach långssehlitzformigem Flimmer-
grubenspalt.
Kiemensack dorsal verkiirzt, ohne Falten; jederseits 7 saum-
formige innere Långsgefåsse (bei zwei Personen gefunden).
Långsgefåsse dorsal etwas nåher aneineinder gerickt, jedoch jeder-
seits noch einen betråchtlichen Raum neben der Dorsalfalte frei-
lassend, ebenso wie jederseits neben dem Endøstyl. Primåre
Quergefisse, etwa 9, annåhernd gleich stark, regelmåssig mit
parastigmatischen abwechseind. Maschen zwischen den mehr
472
ventral gelegenen Långsgefåssen annåhernd quadratisch, bis etwa 9
lang gestreckte Kiemenspalten enthaltend, die schmåleren dorsalen
Maschen mit 4 oder 5 Kiemenspalten. Maschen rechts neben dem
Endostyl besonders breit, bis 14 Kiemenspalten fassend. Dorsal-
falte ein glatter, glattrandigen Saum.
Darm (Textfig. 31) an der linken Seite des Kiemensackes,
plump, eine kurze, in ganzer Långe, etwas klaffende Schleife
bildend, deren Wendepol ventra!wårts gerichtet ist. Riicklaufender
Ast viel långer als der hinlaufende, seine distale Hålfte in sanfter
Krimmung nach vorn hin abgebogen.
Osophagus kurz, måssig eng, stark gebogen. Magen den
gråssten Teil des vorlaufenden Darmschleifen-Astes hildend, gross,
kurz-orangenfårmig, mit einem schmalen Nahtwulst, der hinten in
einen måssig grossen, retortenformigen freien Blindsack iber-
geht, und etwa 17 Drisenwiilsten. Die Driisenwilste verlaufen
grosstenteils in stark S-formiger bezw. spiraliger Kriimmung und
reichen nicht såmtlich bis an das Cardia-Ende des Magens; einige
wenige jederseits neben der Magennaht sind stufenweise stårker
verkirzt; wåhrend sie distalwårts bis an das Pylorus-Ende des
Magens gehen, lehnt sich ihr proximales Ende mehr oder weniger
weit vorn an die Magennaht an. Mittel- und Enddarm nicht
von einander gesondert, plump. After zweilippig. glattrandig.
Geschlechtsorgane (Textfig. 51) jederseits dicht neben dem
Endostyl etwa zu 15 eine enge Kette bildend, die linksseitige
Kette etwas kiirzer, am Bereich des Darms endend, die rechts-
seitige bis an das Hinterende reichend; ausnahmsweise ein Ge-
schlechtsorgan aus seiner Reihe etwas herausgeriickt. Gesechlechts-
organe der linken Seite såmtlich eingeschlechtlich månnlich. Ge-
schlechtsorgane der rechten Seite fast såmtlich zwittrig. Bei einer
Person erwies sich das hinterste der rechtseitigen Geschlechtsor-
gane als eingeschlechtlich månnlich. Eingeschlechtlich månn-
liche Geschlechtsorgane sowie månnlicher Teil der Zwitter-
organe von einer einzigen einfachen, etwa 0,6 mm langen und ca.
halb so breiten, abgeplattet sackformigen Hodenblase gebildet.
die mit dem proximalen Ende annåhernd senkrecht gegen den
Endostyl gestellt ist und am distalen Ende durch einen kleinen,
etwa 0,2 mm langen und 30 w dicken, scharf abgesetzten Samen-
leiter ausmiindet. Diese Hodenblasen sitzen mit einer Flach-
473
seite in ganzer Långe fest an der Leibeswand. Bei den zwitt-
rigen Geschlechtsorganen der rechten Seite ist einer solchen
Hodenblase ein weiblicher Geschlechtsapparat aufgelagert,
der je nach der Entwicklungsstufe der in ihm enthaltenen Eizellen
kleiner oder gråsser als die Hodenblase ist. Dieser weibliche
Gesechlechtsapparat besteht aus einem Sack, der proximal durch
die Vorwålbung der einzelnen Eizelien des Ovariums unregel-
måssig aufgebeult erscheint und sich distal zu einem sehr kurzen,
nicht immer scharf abgesetzten, etwa 0,11 mm breiten Eileiter mit
kerbschittigem Offnungsrande verengt. Samenleiter- und Eileiter-
Mindung liegen ziemlich dicht bei einander, meist schråg neben
bezw. iiber einander.
Theodorella torus n. sp.
Fundangaben: Neuseeland, Nordinsel, Bay of Islands,
PREdSHan kt Braunalgen: Jans 19155 Vor "New ePlymoutn
an anderen AÅscidien, 8 Fd.; 16. Nov. 1914.
Beschreibung. Kolonie bestehend aus ziemlich innig mit ein-
ander verwachsenen Personen, die auf einer gemeinsamen Basal-
membran stehen und einen krustenartigen Uberzug iber ihrem
Untergrunde bilden. Stolonen sind anscheinend nicht gebildet.
Personen annåhernd kugelig, ihre Gestalt durch gegenseitige
Pressung beeinflusst. Åussere Siphonen nicht ausgeprågt.
Korperåffnungen unscheinbar, ungefåhr "/3 der Kårperlånge
von einander entfernt.
Oberfliåche eben, durch Besatz von Schlamm und feinstem
Sand verschleiert.
Grøåssenverhåltnisse: Ausgewachsene Personen im Håchst-
falle 4//2: 3!/2:3 mm messend.
Zellulosemantel måssig dick, fest und sehr zåh lederartig,
im Schnitt hellgrau, an der Innenseite etwas perlmutterglånzend.
Weichkørper ziemlich fest am Zellulosemantel haftend, an-
nåhernd kugelig, mit stummelfårmigen inneren Siphonen.
Leibeswand ziemlich zart, mit unregelmåssig zerstreuten,
verzerrt sackformigen Endocarpen.
Branchialtentakel ca. 32, ziemlich regelmåssig sehr grosse,
schlank såbelfårmige mit sehr kleinen, fadenfårmigen abwechselnd.
Flimmerorgan ein etwas schråg stehendes långliches Pot-
474
ster mit verhåltnismåssig langem, schlitztformigem Flimmergruben-
spalt.
Kiemensack ohne Falten, mit 100 Kiemenspaltene
Zonen, rechts mit 7, links mit 6 inneren Långsgefåssen
(bei je einem Stiick der beiden Fundorte genau festgestellt). Pri-
måre Quergefåsse annåhernd gleich breit, regelmåssig mit para-
stigmatischen abwechselnd, neben der Dorsalfalte mit Innensåumen.
Maschen neben Dorsalfalte und Endostyl ziemlich' stark ver-
breitert, sonst ventral etwas breiter als dorsal. Ein nåher unter-
suchtes Stick von New Plymouth zeigte folgende Verteilung der
Kiemenspalten zwischen den inneren Långsgefåssen :
E.7; 4,4,1.3, 3,434 2, 7. D 5 VO FÆRRE ÆAASE SNO RSEES
Dorsalfalte ein glatter und glattrandiger Saum, hinten etwas
gefåltelt.
Darm an der linken Seite des Kiemensackes, eine sehr kurze,
etwas klaffende Schleife bildend. Maagen orangenfårmig, mit ca.
18 Drisenwiilsten (nicht genau ausgezåhlt); an einer iibersehbaren
Hålfte gegeniber dem Nahtwulst mit einigen verkurzten Drisen-
wiilsten waren 8 Driisenwiilste sichtbar. After zweilippig, glattrandig.
Geschlechtsorgane: Jederseits neben dem Endostyl eine
Reihe von Polycarpen. An einer Schittserie durch eine Person
fand ich links eine Reihe von 14 eingeschlechtlich månnlichen
Polycarpen, rechts eine Reihe von 8 Polycarpen, von denen die
beiden vordersten zwittrig sind, wåhrend die 6 iubrigen sich als
eingeschlechtlich månnlich erwiesen. Die meisten månnlichen
Polycarpe und månnlichen Teile der Zwitterpolycarpe bestehen
aus einer einfach sackformigen Hodenblase, die distal durch
einen kurz-fadenformigen Samenleiter ausmiindet; bei einigen
der eingeschlechtlich månnlichen Polycarpe war jedoch die Hoden-
blase unregelmåssig gestaltet, mit einigen wenigen breiten Aus-
wuchsen versehen. Bei den Zwitterorganen sind die Ovarial-
såcke der basalen Hodenblase kulminal aufgelagert.
Erorterung. Th. torus steht der Th. arenosa von der Stewart-
Insel sehr nahe. Sie unterscheidet sich von dieser durch die im
allgemeinen etwas geringere Gråsse und den sehr viel engeren
Zusammenschluss der Personen, eine etwas verschiedene Kolonie-
gestaltung und mutmasslich durch eine etwas geringere Zahl
der inneren Långsgefåsse an der linken Seite des Kiemensackes.
475
Theodorella stewartensis n. sp.
Fundangabe: Stewart-Insel, Port Pegasus, 25 Fd., an
Cnemidocarpa stewartensis; 19.—20. Jan. 1915.
Beschreibung. Koloniegestaltung: Die mit ihrer Ventralseite
dem Untergrunde in ganzer Flåche angewachsenen Personen bil-
den, eng aneinander gestellt und basal mit einander verwachsen,
an der Ascidie Cnemidocarpa stewartensis n. sp. eine geschlosse
Kruste, deren Oberflåche durch die stark hervorgewålbten dorsalen
Seiten der Personen sehr uneben gemacht ist.
Personen halb-eiformig bis halbkugelig, im Maximum etwa
6 mm lang, 4 mm hoch und 3 mm breit. ÅussereSiphonen
sind nicht ausgebildet, Koårperåffnungen unscheinbar, ganz
flach gelegen, ungefåhr ”/10 des Profilumrisses oder ”/4 der gråssten
Kårperlånge von einander entfernt an der hochgewdlbten Rucken-
seite.
Oberflåche etwas rauh, ganz mit feinstem Sand und Schlamm
besetzt, der der ganzen Kolonie eine dunkel sandgraue Fårbung
verleiht.
Zellulosemantel måssig dick, zåh lederartig, weich und
biegsam.
Weichkårper nur an den Kårperåffnungen fest am Zellu-
losemantel haftend, leicht herauslåsbar, dorsoventral stark abge-
plattet, im Horizontalumriss oval bis kreisfårmig, kuchenfårmig, mit
winzigen, warzenformigen inneren Siphonen an der Ricken-
flåche.
Innenauskleidung der Siphonen mit ca. 9 (der Regel
nach 8?) scharfen Radiårfurchen, zwischen denen blasig aufgetrie-
bene Zwischenråume liegen. Die blasige Auftreibung ist besonders
in der Peripherie sehr stark und bei der nåher untersuchten Per-
son im hinteren Medialraum des Atrialsiphos durch ein Paar bla-
sige Auftreibungen ersetzt (normale und konstante Bildung?).
Siphonalpapillen sind nicht gefunden worden.
Leibeswand måssig dick, mit zarter, aber dicht geschlossener
Muskulatur. Unregelmåssig sackformige Endocarpe anschei-
nend unregelmåssig zerstreut, zumal in dem ovalen oder kreisfår-
migen Winkelraum zwischen Ventral- und Dorsalseite.
Atrialtentakel winzig, diinn fadenfårmig, einen anscheinend
nicht ganz gleichmåssig dichten Kranz bildend.
476
Branchialtentakel bei einer nåher untersuchten Person 26,
im allgemeinen regelmåssig abwechselnd gross-pfriemfårmig und
sehr klein stummelfårmig. An einigen Stellen ist die Regelmåssig-
keit der Anordnung gestårt.
Flimmerorgan nicht genau erkannt, anscheinend ein Polster
mit einfachem, schrågem Långsschlitz.
Kiemensack fast symmetrisch gebaut, dorsal verkirzt, an-
fangs nahezu zylindrisch, dorsoventral gestellt, dann unter Ver-
långerung der Ventralseite nach hinten abgebogen, dorsoventral
abgeplattet. Dorsalfalte in der Rickenmittellinie, Endostyl, abge-
sehen von einigen Schlångelbågen, in der Bauchmittellinie ver-
laufend. «Falten sind nicht ausgebildet. jJederseits eine verhålt-
nismåssig grosse Zahl saumfårmiger innerer Långsgefåsse,
bei dem nåher untersuchten Stiick jederseits 14, die jedoch nicht
såmtlich die ganze Långe des Kiemensackes zu durchmessen schei-
nen, sondern zum Teil anscheinend vorzeitig enden. Primåre
Quergefåsse annåhernd gleich breit, wenigstens stellenweise
(uberall?) mit sehr feinen parastigmatischen Quergefåssen abwech-
selnd. Maschen im allgemeinen sehr viel långer als breit, mit
etwal 2 koder 3 Kr em enspaltensENurkimvorderenmleledes
Kiemensackes kommen unmittelbar neben dem hier einige wenige
breite Schlångelungen bildenden Endostyl in diesen Schlångelbuch-
ten einige verbreiterte Maschen vor, die bis 9 Kiemenspalten fassen.
Dorsalfalte ein ziemlich breiter, glatter und glattrandiger, nach
rechts iibergebogener Saum.
Darm (Textfig. 32) an der ventralen Hålfte der linken Seite
des Kiemensackes, d. i. iiber der linken Hålfte der Anwachsflåche,
gelegen. Er bildet eine fast geschlossene, vom hinteren Rand der
Anwachsflåche gerade nach vorn hingehende, jedoch den. vorderen
Rand nicht erreichende Schleife, deren End-Ast in ziemlich
scharfer Knickung schråg nach oben und medialwårts abgebogen
ist. Vom Wendepol der Darmschleife gehen 3 ziemlich kråftige
Strånge etwas divergierend nach der Leibeswand am vorderen
Rand der Anwachsflåche hin. Osophagus ziemlich lang, eng,
stark gebogen. Magen etwas mehr als die Hålfte des hinlaufen-
den Darmschleifen-Astes bildend, dorsoventral (d. i. senkrecht zu
seiner Långsrichtung) stark abgeplattet, in dorsoventraler Ansicht ge-
rundet rechteckig, fast doppelt so lang wie breit, mit 14 (konstant?)
477
ziemlich regelmåssig in der Långsrichtung vom Cardia-Ende bis
zum Pylorus-Ende verlaufenden Driisenwiilsten, die durch einen
medianen Drisenstreifen der Långe nach zweigeteilt erscheinen.
Am Pylorus-Ende entspringt aus der lateral gelegenen Magennaht
ein måssig grosser Blindsack. Derselbe ist keulenførmig, mit
Fig. 32. Theodorella stewartensis n. sp. Darm, a u. b von verscbiedenen Seiten; 22/1.
kniefårmig gebogenem Stiel; sein angeschwollenes Blind-Ende ragt
uber das Pylorus-Ende des Magens hinaus. Mitteldarm und
Enddarm nicht von einander gesondert. Der Mitteldarm ist
durch eine innere Querfurche, die aber nur ungefåhr die Hålfte
des Darmumfanges durchmisst, vom Magen abgesetzt und in gros-
sen Strecken seines Anfangsteiles, soweit er den hinlaufenden
Darmschleifen-Ast bildet, mit schmalen inneren Fåltelungen ver-
sehen, die hauptsåchlich parallel und in der Långsrichtung ver-
laufen, zum Teil aber auch schråg und gebogen sind. Der End-
darm ist distalwårts verjingt, um sich schliesslich trompetenfårmig
zum Afterstiick zu erweitern. Der Afterrand bildet zwei
breite, etwas wulstige, glattrandige, fast halbkreisfårmig vorsprin-
sendetEippene
478
Geschlechtsapparat (Textfig. 33) bei zwei nåher unter-
suchten Stiicken, abgesehen von einem geringen Unterschied in
der Zahl der rechtsseitigen Polycarpe, ganz gleich und sehr charak-
teristisch gebildet. Rechtsseitig dicht neben der ventralen Median-
linie im Bereich der Anwachsflåche eine der Anlage nach gerade
(durch gegenseitige Pressung der ausgewachsenen Polycarpe etwas
Fig. 33. Theodorella stewartensis n. sp. Einziges Geschlechtsorgan der rechten Seite
u. die 3 hintersten Geschlechtsorgane der linken Seite: 35/1.
unregelmåssig verzerrte) Reihe von 10 bezw. 13 zwittrigen
Polycarpen. Linksseitig neben dem hintersten Zwitterpolycarp
der rechten Seite, und von diesem nur durch das mediale Endo-
styl-Leibeswand-Septum getrennt, ein einziges eingeschlecht-
lich-månnliches Polycarp. Das månnliche Polycarp und
die månnlichen Teile der Zwitterpolycarpe bestehen aus einer
einzigen, einfachen, ovalen oder unregelmåssig sackfårmigen, mit
einer Breitseite quer und flach an die Leibeswand angehefteten
Hodenblase, die lateral in einen auffallend langen, fein faden-
formigen, am distalen Ende etwas knopffårmig angeschwollenen
Samenleiter iibergeht. Der Samenleiter ist etwa 2 bis 3 mal
so lang wie die Hødenblase, unregelmåssig verbogen und gekriimmt,
bei einer Dicke von etwa 30 w ungefåhr 1 mm lang. Die Ovarien
der Zwitterpolycarpe sind unregelmåssige, meist gerundete Ballen,
die gerade oder schråg auf der Hodenblase liegen. Ihre Gråsse
ist sehr verschieden, je nachdem die gråsste Eizelle weit entwickelt
oder noch unentwickelt ist. Ein Eileiter ist nicht deutlich aus-
gebildet.
Erorterung: Diese Art steht den beiden anderen hier beschrie-
benen Arten, die nåher miteinander verwandt sind, ziemlich fern.
479
Sie unterscheidet sich von ihnen vor allem durch die gråssere
Zahl der inneren Långsgefåsse des Kiemensackes, durch die
långlich rechteckige Profilgestalt des Magens und durch die auf-
fallende Långe der Samenleiter.
Fam. Botryllidae.
Gen. Botryllus Gårtn.
Botryllus leachi Sav.
Synonymie und Literatur siehe unter:
1921, Botryllus leachi, Michaelsen, D. Botryllid. Didemnid. Nordsee,
p: 101. —-Dazu:
1900, Botrylloides perspicuum, Sluiter, Tunic., Stillen Ocean, p. 21.
1917, Botryllus sp., Bovien, Tunic. Auckland, Campbell Isl. (Holos. f.),
pe 44 Textilg: "5.
Fundangaben: Neuseeland, Nordinsel, Hauraki-Golf,
Suter'leg. (Mus. Berlin); Tauranga Bucht; Thilenius læg.
(Mus. Berlin).
Stewart-Insel, Patterson Inlet, 15 Fd.; 17. Nov. 1914.
Alte Angabe: Neuseeland, Sidinsel, French Passage
(nach Skaiter).
Weitere Verbreitung: Auckland-Inseln (nach Bovien);
Nordwest-Irland, Blacksod Bay; Nord Frankreich, Ros-
coff;Nordsee, Skagerrak und Kattegat (nach Michaelsen).
Erorterung: Ich hahe die Frage, ob Botrylloides perspicuum
Herdm. dem Bofryllus niger (Herdm.) oder dem B. leachi Sav.
zuzuordnen sei, bisher unbeantwortet lassen miissen. Nachdem
ich auf Grund mehrerer Funde von Neuseeland, der Stewart-Insel
und den Auckland-Inseln das håufige Vorkommen von B. leachi
im neuseelåndischen Gebiet feststellen konnte — ich habe von jedem
der betreffenden Fundorte einige Personen untersucht —, ist es
zweiffellos, dass das Botrylloides perspicuum Sluiter's von Neu-
seeland dieser Art angehåre und nicht dem Bofryllus niger, der in
meinem reichen Material aus diesem Gebiet nicht enthalten ist
und auch von anderer Seite nicht aus diesem Gebiet gemeldet
wurde. Es ist geographisch bedeutsam, dass die anscheinende
Warmwasserform B. niger wie im nårdlichen Gebiet so auch in
diesem siidlichen durch die nahe verwandte B. leachi, anscheinend
eine Form der kiihleren Gebiete, vertreten wird.
480
Botryllus magnicoecus (Hartmr.).
? 1891, Sarcobotrylloides anceps Herdman, A. Rev. Classific. Tunic.,
p. 609.
1891, — purpureum Herdman, ebend., p. 609.
? 1899, == anceps, Herdman, Desecr. Cat. Tunic. Austral.
Mus;"p: 1033 Takt Bo MINE ROESTS:
1988, —= purpureum, Herdman, ebend., p. 104, Taf.
Bot III EreR 6510)
1912, Botrylloides nigrum magnicoecum Hartmeyer, Ascid. Deutsch.
Tiefsee-Exp-"p. ZL Ta EXE
1913, = — == » Hartmeyer, AsciduDeurseh?
Sudpolar-Exp%"p7135;
1915, Botryllus magnicoecus, Michaelsen, Tunic ; Meeresfauna West-
i afrikas, p. 419.
1919, = = Michaelsen, Ascid. Ptychobr. Diktyobr.
Roten i Meeressipre NERE e R2 0]
1921, — — Michaelsen. Ascid. Westl. Indisch. Oz.
Reichsmus. Stockholm, p. 6, Taf. I Fig. 1—4.
1921, = —= Michaelsen, D. Botryllid. Didemnid.
Nøordsee, p. 100.
Fundangabe: Neuseeland, Nordinsel, Tauranga-Bucht;
Tiileniusiless(Mus'eB erlin)
Weitere Verbreitung: New South Wales (nach Herdman);
Mocambique (nach Michaelsen); Kapland (nach Hartmeyer);
Deutsch-Sidwestafrika (nach Michaelsen); Mittelmeer,
Neapel (nach Michaelsen: Neuer Fundort).
Erorterung: Zu B. magnicoecus stelle ich als Synonym Sarcobotryl-
loides purpureum Herdm. von Port Jackson in New South Wales.
Da jedoch die Artbezeichnung ,purpureus" schon vor 1891 fir 2
andere Botryllus-Arten gebraucht worden ist, so muss der Name
» magnicoecus" der hier in Rede stehenden Art erhalten bleiben.
Fraglich ist, ob auch Sarcobotrylloides anceps Herdm. mit Bo-
tryllus magnicoecus zu vereinen ist. Die fast kugelige Gestalt des
Magens und der grosse Pylorus-Blindsack entsprechen an-
nåhernd dem Botryllus magnicoecus, wenn nicht der Pylorus-Blind-
sack bei der Herdman'schen Art døch noch etwas kiirzer ist
als bei B. magnicoecus. Nun soll aber bei Sarcobotrylloides anceps
noch ein vorderen Blindsack hinzukommen, fiir den ich bei
B. magnicoecus kein Homologon finde. Es erscheint mir allerdings
fraglich, ob man jene vordere, nur buckelfårmige Hervorwålbung,
aus der die Darm-umspinnende Driise entspringen soll, als eigent-
481
lichen Blindsack ansehen kann. Vielleicht handelt es sich nur
um eine etwa gelegentliche stårkere Vorwålbung des Nahtwulstes.
Botryllus schlosseri (Pall.)
Synonymie und Literatur siehe unter:
1921, Botryllus schlosseri, Michaelsen, D. Botryllid. Didemniden
Nordsee, p. 108.
Fundangabe: Neuseeland, Nordinsel (ohne nåhere Bestim-
mug) SHS Suter leg (Mus. Berlin).
Weitere Verbreitung: Ostkiste Nordamerikas, ganz Eu-
ropa (nach Michaelsen).
Bemerkung: Eine gleichmåssig bleiche, hell wachsgraue Kolonie.
Kiemenspalten-Zonen verhåltnismåssig zahlreich, bei einer
nåher untersuchten Person 10 (das Håchstmass bei dieser Art),
von denen allerdings die hinterste rudimentår ist und nur aus
einigen wenigen verkurzten Kiemenspalten besteht. Zahl der
Driisenwiilste des Magens 8, von denen nur 7 je einen Cardia-
Blindsack bilden, wåhrend der 8. dicht hinter dem Beginn des
schmalen Nahtwulstes beginnt. Månnliche Geschlechtsor-
gane fåcherfårmig, jedoch nicht ganz einfach; Samenleiter war-
zenfårmig, dicht am dorsalen Rande des Organs sitzend. Ge-
schwånzte Larven in den Peribranchialråumen.
Diktyobranchia.
Fam. Rhodosomidae.
Gen. Corella Ald. & Hanc.
Corella eumyota Traust.
Synonymie und Literatur siehe unter:
1918, Corella eumyota, Michaelsen, Ptychobr. Diktyobr. Ascid. westl.
Indisch. Oz., p. 50. — Ausserdem:
1900, Corella japonica (err.!, non Herdm.), Sluiter, Tunic. Stillen
Ocean, p. 20.
Fundangaben: Neuseeland, Nordinsel, Kaipara-Hafen,
an der Kiiste; 8. Jan. 1915; Wellington, Hafen; ca. 5—10 Ed:
Febr. 1914: North Channel bei Kawaii im Hauraki-Golf,
10 Fd.; 29. Dez. 1814; Moko-Hinan-Inseln im Hauraki-
Goss REds SOM DE 1914; Slipper-Island, Kiste bei Ebbe;
20. Dez. 1914: Mahia-Halbinsel, Kiste; 18. Dez. 1914.
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 73. 31
482
Neuseeland, Sidinsel, Queen Charlotte-Sund, 3
bis "10”Fd.; 19:—20. Jan. 1915.
Stewart-Insel, Paterson-Inlet, Kiste; 18. Nov. 1914;
Halfmoon Bay, Kiste; 19. Nov. 1914.
Alte Angaben: Neuseeland, Nordinsel, Tauranga (nach
Elkrtmeven)'
Neuseeland, Siidinsel, dUrville-Insel (nach Sluiter),
Lyttleton (nach Michaelsen).
Chatham en)
Weitere Verbreitung: Chile, Valparaiso (nach Traustedt
und Michaelsen); Sid-Feuerland und Ost-Patagonien
(nach Michaelsen); Brasilien, Bahia (nach Traustedt);
Deutsch-Sidwestafrika, Liideritzbucht (nach Michael-
sen): Kapland (nach Sluiter); SidlicherIndischerorean
St "Paul (nach 'v: Drasche):Tåsmanrentlobarg(nachekes
steven); Aueckland-Inseln (nach Herdman und Bovien).
Antarktisches Meer, Nassau-Insel (nach van Beneden
& Selys-Longchamps), Gauss-Station (nach Hartmeyer),
Inselt Booth wWandel macht slurt er Dred eV ER
2. franzås. antarkt. Exp. 1908—1910 (nach Sluiter).
Diese in sidlich gemåssigten bis antarktischen Breiten zirkum-
mundane Art ist die einzige im neuseelåndischen Gebiet håufige
diktyobranche Ascidie, zugleich iiberhaupt die håufigste Ascidie
dieses Gebietes.
Sluiter's C. japonica von den Chatham-Inseln, und zweifel-
los auch seine dieser Art zugeordneten Stiicke von Neuseeland,
gehåren zu C. eumyota. Ich habe 3 Stiicke von den Chatham-
Inseln, von Sluiter als C. japonica bezeichnet, nachuntersuchen
kånnen. Es sind typische C. eumyota. Sluiter hat sich bei der
Beurteilung dieser Stiicke offenbar nur an die nachweislich vari-
ablen Charaktere der inneren Organisation gehalten, in denen nach
Ritter's]). wie mach meinen (IL c 1918 pA )BEefundeneine
Trennung zwischen den beiden sehr nahe miteinander verwandten
Arten nicht måglich ist. Auf den nach meiner Ansicht einzig be-
deutsamen Unterschied, die Ausstattung der C. japonica mit zahl-
reichen Haftfåden am Zellulosemantel, die bei C. eurmyota
ganz fehlen oder wenigstens nicht deutlich ausgebildet sind, hat
) W. C. Ritter, 1913, Simple Ascid. northeast. Pacif., p. 488.
483
Sluiter anscheinend kein Gewicht gelegt. Seine Stiicke entbehren
der Haftfaden vollståndig und zeigen am Zellulosemantel, der im
allgemeinen ganz nackt ist, nur einige unregelmåssige Auswiichse,
wie sie auch bei anderen Stiicken der C. eumyota beobachtet wer-
den. In meiner Erårterung iber die Verbreitung der C. japonica
(I. c. 1918, p. 47) gab ich dem Verdachte Ausdruck, dass die
Fundangabe ,Sansibar" auf einem irrtum beruhen måge. Ich
glaubte jedoch diesem lediglich auf Wahrscheinlichkeitsverhåltnissen
beruhenden Verdacht kein gråsseres Gewicht beimessen zu diirfen,
weil die Sluiter'sche Fundangabe ,,Chatham-Inselnf fir eine
weitere Verbreitung dieser Art språche. Der Nachweis, dass diese
letztere Fundangabe irrtuimlich ist, gibt meinem damals geåusserten
Verdacht wieder Raum. Ich halte es demnach fir richtig, die
Fundangabe ,Sansibar"f fur C. japonica als ,håchst wahrscheinlich
unrichtig" zu eliminieren.
Fam. Ascidiidae.
Gen. Ascidia L.
Ascidia lagena n. sp.
Fundangabe: Stewart-Insel, Paterson Inlet, 5—15 Fd.,
an breitblåttrigen Algen (Caulerpa); 17. Nov. 1914.
Beschreibung: Gestalt langhalsig flaschenformig, im bauchigen
Teil etwas seitlich abgeplattet. Der schlanke, distal annåhernd
zylindrische Branchialsipho bildet das gerade aufragende Vor-
derende. Der Atrialsipho ist kurz håckerfårmig und sitzt weit
unten an der Riickenkante am bauchigen Teil, nur ungefåhr "/6
.der ganzen Kårperlånge vom Hinterende entfernt.
Gråssenverhåltnisse: Das Tier ist ungefåhr 53 mm lang
und (dorsoventral) im Maximum 14 mm hoch, dabei im bauchigen
Teil ungefåhr 6 mm breit.
Aussehen ziner fast wasserhellen, schwach milchig getriibten
Gallerte, durch die der gelblich braune Weichkårper hindurch-
scheint.
Oberflåche mit verschieden starken Furchen, die sich zu
einem unregelmåssigen Netz zusammenschliessen. Woålbungen der
Maschenråume schwach erhaben, glatt, fast schliprrig. Åussere
Siphonen mutmasslich gekantet (8- bezw. 6-kantig? Infolge der
Zerfetzung des Zellulosemantels nicht deutlich erkennbar).
31"
484
Zellulosemantel sehr weich, aber ziemlich zåh, besonders
in der Oberflåchenschicht, fast wasserhell, von locker veråstelten
und verzweigten Mantelgefåssen mit schlank keulenfårmigen,
im Maximum etwa 40 uw dicken Blind-Enden durchzogen. Blasen-
zellen scheinen zu fehlen. Zahlreiche feine Spindelzellen,
DØ
Fig. 34. Ascidia lagena n. sp. Weichkårper, a von der linken Seite, Darm durch-
schimmernd; b von der rechten Seite, mit starkem Muskelbelag an der Leibeswand; 3/2.
deren beide Enden in feine Fåden auslaufen, vorhanden. Die letzten
Enden der Mantelgefåsse, zumal die Blind-Enden, sind durch Pig-:
mentkårper schwarz gefårbt.
Weichkårper (Textfig. 34) stark geschrumpft und ganz vom
Zellulosemante! losgelåst, langhalsig flaschenfårmig mit stark seit-
lich abgeplattetem bauchigen Teil, 42 mm lang, im Maximum 9 mm
hoch und (wohl infolge starker Kollabierung) nur etwa 3 mm breit.
Er zeigt die charakteristische flaschenfårmige Gestalt noch schårfer
ausgeprågt, da der Flaschenhals, das in den Branchialsipho aus-
laufende Vorderende, noch schlanker ist als der entsprechende Teil
der åusseren Gestalt, nåmlich nur etwa 2!/3 mm dick. Derinnere
Branchialsipho ist annåhernd drehrund, distal abgestutzt, und
trågt im Zentrum der Abstutzungsflåche die Branchialoffnung.
485
Diese ist von 8 kurz-kegelfårmigen Lappen umstellt, (Textfig. 34 b).
Die Kerbschnitte zwischen diesen Lappen setzen sich als parallele
Långsfurchen eine betråchtliche Strecke am Branchialsipho hin fort.
Der innere Atrialsipho ist kurz-zylindrisch, kaum !/3 so lang
wie breit. Die Atrialoffnung ist von 6 kurz-kegelfårmigen
Lappen umstellt (Textfig. 34 a).
Die Leibeswand ist an den inneren Siphonen måssig dick,
an der linken Seite des bauchigen Kårperteils ungemein zart und
durchsichtig, so dass der Darm im ganzen Verlauf deutlich hin-
durchschimmert, an der rechten Seite des bauchigen Teils sehr
dick, stark muskulås. Diese Muskulatur (Textfig. 34 b) enthålt
trotz ihrer Dicke verhåltnismåssig wenige und weit isolierte kråf-
tige Muskelbindel, die teils von der Atrialdffnung ausstrahlen, teils
von der Hinterkante rechtsseitig nach vorn verlaufen. Die ibrige
Muskulatur ist zartfaserig, bildet aber eine dicke, geschlossene,
etwas oberhalb der ventralen Medianlinie scharf begrenzte Lage.
Der Verlauf der Muskelbiindel ist am ventralen Rande vorwiegend
dorsoventral, senkrecht gegen den Rand gerichtet.
Die Innenwand des Branchialsiphos zeigt 8 fast bis
an den Tentakeltråger abwårts gehende gerade Långsfurchen, die
den Lappen an der Branchialdffnung bezw. den Långswållen zwischen
den åusseren Långsfurchen am inneren Branchialsipho entsprechen.
Branchialtentakel eng aneinander gestellt, schlank faden-
formig, meist sehr lang, dazwischen anscheinend ohne Regel der
Anordnung einige kiirzere. Der Tentakeltråger ist ein måssig
breiter, ziemlich dicker Ringsaum.
Das Flimmerorgan ist ein kleines långliches Polster; Fli m-
mergrubenspalt in Form eines vorn offenen HUySEMmitletwas
verbogenen, aber nicht eingerollten, im allgemeinen gerade nach
vorn gerichteten Hårnern.
Die Flimmerbågen schliessen sich dorsal in måssig spitzem
Winkel aneinander und setzen sich in eine ziemlich kurze, kaum
1 mm lange Dorsalrinne nach hinten fort. Gehirn und Neu-
raldrise ungefåhr 1 mm hinter dem Flimmerorgan gelegen.
Kiemensack annåhernd symmetrisch gebaut, bis an das Hin-
terende des Weichkørpers gehend, faltenlos, mit jederseits unge-
fåbr 60 inneren Långsgefåssen und weit uber 100 (nach
unsicherer Zåhlung bezw. Schåtzung etwa 280) Kiemenspal-
486
ten-Zonen. Die Quergefåsse sind abwechselnd 'etwas" ver=
schieden dick, doch ist diese Verschiedenheit im allgemeinen sehr
gering, stellenweise kaum erkennbar. In manchen Strecken nimmt
die Verschiedenheit ihrer Stårke deutlich zu und steigert sich an
einzelnen Stellen so sehr, dass die Quergefåsse der niederen Ord-
nung sehr zart und zum Teil parastigmatisch werden. An den
Kreuzungspunkten mit den Långsgefåssen tragen die inneren Quer-
gefåsse dick keulenfårmige, meist etwas ibergebogene Papillen.
Intermediåre Papillen fehlen im allgemeinen. Zwar sind an den
deutlich schmåleren Quergefåssen, zumal an den parastigmatischen,
auch die Papillen etwas kleiner, doch kaum als intermediåre an-
zusprechen. Manchmal sind die Papillen an den parastigmatischen
Quergefåssen ganz geschwunden. Die Maschen sind meist etwas
vertieft, jedenfalls aber nicht abwechselnd vertieft und erhaben, wie
es bei manchen Ascidia-Arten vorkommt, eine besondere wellige
Struktur des Kiemensackes hervorrufend. Die Maschen enthalten
2 oder 3 schmale, meist parallelrandige Kiemenspalten. Die
Dorsalfalte ist ein ziemlich breiter, dinner Saum mit etwas
schråg ansteigenden Rippen, die den freien Rand als schlanke Ziun-
gelchen tiberragen. Zwischen diesen Rippenzingelchen steht meist
noch je ein kleineres Zwischenzingelchen; selten finden sich deren
2. Die Dorsalfalte ist nur wenig kirzer als der Endostyl und
geht an der linken Seite bei der sehr weit hinten gelegenen Oso-
phagus-Offnung vorbei. Der Endostyl ist måssig breit und
endet gerade am hinteren Pol des Kiemensackes, bezw. geht hier
in eine feine Retropharyngealrinne iber, die in unregelmås-
sigen engen Schlångelungen eine kurze Strecke nach vorn hin geht,
anscheinend (nicht genau erkannt) bis an das Hinterende der Dor-
salfalte.
Der Darm (Textfig. 344) liegt an der linken Seite des Kie-
mensackes und bildet eine am Magen geschlossene, weiter vorn
etwas klaffende Schleife, die vom Hinterende des Kårpers ge-
rade nach vorn hin ragt, ein Geringes iiber die Mitte des Kårpers
(einschliesslich des Branchialsiphos) hinaus. Der Osophagus
ist sehr kurz, S-fåormig gebøogen. Der Magen ist kurz und sehr
dick, fast kugelig. Er ist vom Øsophagus scharf abgesetzt, wåh-
rend er andererseits ohne scharfen Absatz, aber ziemlich schnell
in den engeren Mitteldarm iubergeht. Wåhrend sich der Magen,
487
fast dorsoventral liegend, in den hinteren Polraum des Weich-
kårpers einschmiegt, bildet der Mitteldarm die nach vorn hin
gehende Darmschleife. Der Enddarm ist nicht deutlich vom Mittel-
darm gesondert. Er ist in gleichmåssiger Rundung schråg nach vorn-
oben gegen die Atrialåffnung hin abgebogen. Der After ist etwas
verengt, mit einfachem, glattem, wenn auch etwas welligem Rande.
Geschlechtsorgane das ganze Darmschleifen-Lumen aus-
fillend. Die Hode, aus zahlreichen gelappten Hodenschlåuchen
mit zungenfårmigen Blind-Enden bestehend, scheint mehr flach der
Leibeswand anzuliegen, wåhrend das Ovarium in kleinen Blumen-
kohl-artigen Wucherungen in den Peribranchialraum vorragt und
auch die inneren Randpartien des Mitteldarms etwas iuberdeckt.
Die aus den Gonadenhaufen hervorgehenden Ausfihrgånge,
ein måssig weiter Eileiter und 2in etwas dunnerer Samenleiter,
gehen anscheinend in ganzer Långe eng an einander geschmiegt
nach dem hinteren Ausgang der Darmschleife und, eng an den
Enddarm angelehnt, bis an den After, dessen Rand sie noch ein
geringes uberragen. Die Ausmiindungen dieser Ausfihrwege schei-
nen ganz einfach, etwas verengt, zu sein.
Erorterung. Der Hauptcharakter dieser Art ist in der auffallen-
den Långe des Branchialsiphos und der Lage des ungemein
weit nach hinten gerickten Atrialsiphos, sowie in der haupt-
såchlich hierdurch verursachten Gestaltung der Darmschleife
zu sehen. A. lagena stimmt in dieser Hinsicht sowie in den meisten
iibrigen Organisationsverhåltnissen fast genau mit der nordischen
A. longisiphonata Kiær!) iberein. Man kånnte beinahe versucht
sein, sie als Varietåt derselben zuzuordnen. Die Gegensåtzlichkeit
in der geographischen Verbreitung beider Arten — sie sind
ja nahezu Antipoden — wiirde mir fir eine solche Vereinigung
keine Bedenken erregen, sehen wir doch auch in anderen Tier-
gruppen eine Bipolaritåt der Verbreitung deutlich ausgesprochen,
besonders deutlich z. B. bei den Gephyreen. Es finden sich aber
immerhin noch gewisse Unterschiede in der Organisation, die eine
Trennung beider Arten ratsam erscheinen lassen: Bei 4. longisipho-
nata ist die Darmschleife deutlich kurzer als bei A. lagena, reicht
sie bei jener doch nur wenig uber das hintere Drittel, bei dieser
1) J. Kiær, 1893, Overs. Norge Ascid. simplst pr 024 Far EEr SE 65540:
488
deutlich iiber die Mitte des ganzen Kårpers (einschliesslich des Bran-
chialsiphos) nach vorne. (Genauer verhalten sich die Abstånde des
Wendepols der Darmschleife vom Hinterende zu den Korperlången
wie ?/25 und 73/95)... Der Afterrand ist bei A. longisiphonata
»finely lipped", bei 4. lagena glatt, wenn auch etwas wellig, mut-
masslich infolge von Kontraktion. Die Dorsalrinne ist bei 4. longi-
siphonata sehr lang, das Gehirn liegt bei ihr 2 mm hinter dem Flim-
merorgan, trotzdem sie nach Massgabe der Originalsticke nur etwa
halb so lang wie A. Jlagena ist, bei der die Dorsalrinne kurz ist und
diese Entfernung kaum 1 mm betrågt. Der Branchialsipho soll
bei A. Zongisiphonata ,10 red ocells" aufweisen, also doch wohl nach
der 10-Zahl gebaut sein, wåhrend er bei 4. lagena regelmåssig 8-lap-
pig bezw. -kantig ist. Die systematische Wertigkeit der Charaktere,
auf denen diese Unterschiede beruhen, ist wenigstens zum Teil
etwas fraglich. Jedenfalls stehen sich beide Arten sehr nahe.
Fam. Perophoridae.
Gen. Perophora Wiegm.
Perophora boltenina n. sp.
? 1859, Perophora hutchisoni Macdonald, Anat. char. Austral. Pero-
phora, p. 377, Taf. LXV Fig; "13:
? 1890, Perophora hutchinsoni, Herdman, Ecteinasc. Clavelin., p. 161.
-
? 1909, Perophora hutchinsoni, hutchisoni, Hartmeyer, Tunic., in:
BronnSKMOrdnsTiers pl OSTE
Fundaugabe: Stewart-Insel, ca. 35 Fd.; 20. Nov. 1914.
Weitere Verbreitung: ? New SouthWales (nach Macdonald).
Eine Perophora von der Stewart-Insel stimmt in manchen Hin-
sichten, zunåchst im Aussehen der Kolonie, so sehr mit P. hut-
chisoni Macdon. iberein, dass an eine Zuordnung zu dieser ge-
dacht werden konnte. Eine nåhere Untersuchung ergab jedoch
einige anscheinend bedeutsame Unterschiede, vorausgesetzt, dass
die Abbildungen von P. hutchisoni korrekt sind, woran zu zweifeln
kein Grund vorliegt. Da die Beschreibung dieser Art von New
South Wales sehr liickenhaft ist, so mågen sich die Unterschiede
bei weiterer Kenntnisnahme von P. hutchisoni noch vermehren. Ich
halte es deshalb fir das richtigste, die mindestens in einigen Punk-
ten abweichende Form von der Stewart-Insel vorlåufig als selbstån-
489
dige Art zu behandeln. Ich weise in der folgenden Beschreibung
von P. boltenina auf die Abweichungen von P. hutchisoni hin.
Beschreibung. Die Kolonie ist genau wie bei P. hutchisoni ge-
staltet. Sie baut sich auf einem System kriechender, verzweigter
und anscheinend stellenweise anastomosierender råhrenfårmiger
Stolonen von chitinigem Aussehen auf; Stolonen durchschmittlich
etwa '/3 mm dick und mit weitlåufig abwechselnd gestellten rund-
lichen oder spitzlichen Håckern und Auswiichsen versehen. Ausser-
dem entspringen von den Stolonen stellenweise in ziemlich regel-
måssigen Abstånden die Personenstiele. Diese sind ungefåhr
0,2, mm dick und verschieden lang, im Håchstfalle 0,8 mm lang,
zum Teil viel kiirzer, bis etwa nur 0,3 mm lang. Auch diese Per-
sonenstiele sind réhrenfårmig und von chitinigem Aussehen, durch
eine oder zwei schmal-ringformige Verdickungen der Wandung in
2 oder 3 kaum merklich abgeschirte Glieder geteilt. Der Weich-
kårper innerhalb der Stolonen und der Personenstiele scheint nicht
uberall einfach råhrenfårmig zu sein. Stellenweise glaube ich in ihnen
eine durch eine Långsscheidewand gebildete Doppelråhre erkannt zu
haben; doch liess der Erhaltungszustand des Materials eine genauere
Fesstellung nicht zu. An dem Personenstiele sitzt frei aufragend
die vollståndig isolierte Person.
Personen stark seitlich abgeplattet, ziemlich breit- aber
nicht genau symmetrisch-blattformig, basal mehr oder weniger
stark verengt, durchschnittlich in einen Winkel von etwa 60” aus-
laufend, vom Stiel scharf abgesetzt. Ich vermute, dass die Per-
sonen bei schwåcherer Kontraktion, zumal auch im lebenden Zu-
stand, weniger seitlich abgeplattet, mehr birnfårmig sind. Åussere
Siphonen sind nicht zur Ausbildung gelangt; die Korperåoff-
nungen liegen auf ganz flachem Grunde, die Atrialdffnung der
basalen Ansatzstelle ziemlich genau gegeniber, also annåhernd ter-
minal, die Branchialåffnung ungefåhr 1/s des Kårperprofilumrisses
von der Atrialdffnung entfernt, also nur wenig vor der Mitte des
Kårpers. Bei P. boltenina kommt die Stellung der Kårperåffnungen
dem Schema der Gattung Boltenia also noch nåher als bei P. hutchisont,
die Macdonald mit Boltenia vergleicht, und bei der er die Bran-
chialdffnung als subterminal bezeichnet, was fir P. 5oltenina nicht
angångig ist. Falls die Abbildungen von der Person der P. hutchi-
soni korrekt ist, miissen wir die Entfernung zwischen den beiden
490
Kårperåffnungen bei dieser Art ungefåhr "/7 des Kårperprofilumrisses
gleich setzen. Die Personen sind im Håchstfalle etwa 8 mm lang,
(basoapikal), 5 mm hoch (von der Branchialdffnung bis zur Retro-
pharyngealrinne) und 1!'/8 mm breit. Die Branchialoffnung
ist bei 2 nåher untersuchten Personen von 9 regelmåssigen, halb-
kreisformigen bis umgekehrt herzformigen Lappen umstellt.. Auch
an der Atrialoffnung stehen einige Lappen, doch scheinen die-
selben ihrer Breite und Form nach sehr unregelmåssig, meist sehr
kurz, zum Teil aber auch fast umgekehrt herzfårmig zu sein. Auch
ihre Zahl schien mir geringer (6?). Wåhrend die Stolonen und die
- Personenstiele ganz nackt sind, ist der Kårper der Personen mit
einem dichten, ziemlich fest haftenden Sandbesatz ausgestattet.
Fårbung der Personen die des Sandbesatzes, sandgelb bis
dunkel sandgrau, Fårbung der Stolonen und Personenstiele horn-
gelb bezw. an den dickeren Stellen, zumal den Gliederungsringen
der Personenstiele, dunkel graubraun.
Zellulosemantel sehr dinn und zart, wasserhell mit ober-
flåchlicher Sand-Inkrustierung.
Weichkorper (Textfig. 35) manchmal ziemlich leicht, manch-
mal schwer aus dem Zellulosemantel herauszulåsen, mit kaum merk-
lich vorspringenden inneren Siphonen, basal, d. h. gegenuber
der Atrialbffnung, gerundet spitzwinklig abgeschlossen. Der in die
Personenstiele eintretende Ektodermfortsatz scheint nicht genau an
diesem basalen Ende des Weichkårpers zu entspringen.
Branchialtentakel (Textfig. 35) zum Teil gross, schlank
pfriemfårmig, zum Teil kleiner, kurz fadenfårmig bis warzenfårmig,
sehr unregelmåssig nach dem Schema 1, 2, 1, 2, 1 oder stellen-
weise IS PMS MEE se ordnet unge farer Rana
Leibeswand zart, mit sehr zarter Muskulatur. Die Mus-
keln schliessen sich nicht deutlich zu dickeren Bindeln zusammen,
sondern bilden sehr lockere und nirgends weitreichende Systeme,
die ziemlich grosse Teile der seitlichen und apikalen Leibeswand
anscheinend ganz frei lassen.
Flimmerorgan polsterfårmig, anscheinend mit einfacher
Durchbohrung. (nicht genau gesehen!).
Kiemensack (Textfig. 35) von den Flimmerbågen fast bis
an die gegeniiberliegende Leibeswand heranreichend, ausser einem
ziemlich umfangreichen Atrialraum nur enge Peribranchialråume
491
frei lassend, im Profil gerundet trapezfårmig, mit 5 Kiemensp al-
ten-Zonen und ca. 30 bis 34 langen, schmalen, parallelrandigen
Kiemenspalten in einer Halbzone [P. hutchisoni soll »aåabout 5
transverse bars", also ungefåhr 6 Kiemenspalten-Zonen besitzen.
In der Abbildung (1. c. 1859, Taf. LXVII Fig. 3) finde ich nur
Raum fir 5 Kiemenspalten-Zonen, falls man nåmlicn die in der
Zeichnung nicht ausgefiihrten hinteren Zonen ebenso breit annimmt
wie die gezeichneten vorderen. Die
Zahl der Kiemenspalten in einer der
gezeichneten vorderenHalbzonen be-
trågt etwa 12 oder 13, ist also, falls
die Zeichnung korrekt ist, soviel
kleiner als bei P. boltenina, dass sie
allein zur Trennung der Arten be-
rechtigtel!. Quergefåsse annåhernd
gleich breit. Jedes Quergefåss
trågt eine grosse Anzahl papillenfår-
miger Långsgefåss-Tråger. Die
Zahl auf einem Quergefåss, einer
Halbzone entsprechend, mag unge-
fåhr 15 betragen, so dass durch-
schnittlich etwa 2 Kiemenspalten
auf einen Maschenraum enffal-
Fig. 35. Perophora boltenina n. sp. len, Viele Långsgefåss-Tråger tasen
WeichEdrper von der rechten Seite, je 2 kurze, dunn-fadenfårmige Långs-
menes amme Dan gefåss-Rudimente, wie an einem
mernd; 27/1. Pråparat sicher nachgewiesen wer-
den konnte. Ein Teil der Långsgefåss-Tråger scheint dieser Rudimente
zu entbehren, und andererseits scheinen an anderen Stellen sich
dinn-fadenfoårmige Långsgefåsse von einem Tråger zu dem im
Meridian hinter ihm stehenden hinutber zu ziehen; doch liessen
sich diese Verhåltnisse nicht ganz sicher nachweisen. Auf den
Quergefåssen steht dorsal, jedoch anscheinend nicht ganz genau in
der dorsalen Medianlinie, je ein ziemlich plump-papillenfårmiges
Dorsalfalten-Zingelchen (also deren 4 vorhanden), das kaum
1/8 so lang wie eine Kiemenspalten-Zone ist. Endostyl schmal,
glatt, im allgemeinen nur sehr wenig gebogen, am Hinterende
etwas stårker gebogen. Der Endostyl reicht fast bis in den apika-
492
len Winkel des Personenkårpers, ist jedoch vor demselben etwas
dorsalwårts abgebogen. Er geht am Hinterende unter scharfem
Absatz in eine schmålere, lange, die Hinterflåche des Kiemensackes
abschliessende Retropharyngealrinne iber.
Darm (Textfig. 35) an der linken Seite des Kiemensackes im
Bereich der beiden hintersten Kiemenspalten-Zonen, eine in ganzer
Långe klaffende, dorsoventralwårts verlaufende Schleife bildend,
deren zuriicklaufender Ast betråchtlich långer als der vorlaufende
ist. Osophagus trompetenfårmig, måssig lang, etwas gebogen,
nach hinten verengt. Magen in der Mitte des vorlaufenden Darm-
schleifen-Astes, vorn und hinten scharf abgesetzt, långlich ellipso-
idisch, fast doppelt so lang wie dick [P. hutchisoni: ,subglobular"],
åusserlich glatt, ohne Falten, aber mit einer nach Aufhellung deut-
lich durchscheinenden, seine ganze Långe einnehmenden, gerade ge-
streckten Leitrinne im Innern. Mitteldarm durch Einschnirungen
scharf vom Magen und vom Enddarm abgesetzt, schlank kiirbis-
kernfårmig, viel diinner als der Magen und der Enddarm. Eine
Teilung des Mitteldarmes in Nachmagen und Driisenmagen, wie
sie bei anderen Perophora- Arten vorkommt, ist bei P. boltenina
wenigstens nicht deutlich, anscheinend iuberhaupt nicht ausgebildet.
Enddarm einfach, dick, mindestens doppelt so dick wie der Mit-
teldarm. After glattrandig, anscheinend zweilippig.
Geschlechtsorgsanefnur ber 2Personenkundtzvarkinkene
entwickeltem Zustande, gefunden (Textfig. 35). Es zeigte sich bei
diesen Personen eine glatt abgeschlossene platte Zellgruppe an der
Innenseite der Leibeswand innerhalb der Darmschleife.
Literaturverzeichnis.
Arbeiten. die sich mit Ascidien aus dem Neuseeland-Gebiet (im weiteren
Sinne) beschåftigen, sind mit 1 Sternchen +), solche, in denen Arten aus
diesem Gebiete beschrieben werden, mit 2 Sternchen %%) ausgezeichnet.
"£ Bovien, P., 1921, Ascidiae from the Auckland and Campbell Islands,
(Holosomatous forms); in: Vid. Medd. Naturh. For. 73.
"£ Cottrell, A. J., 1913, On the Tunicate Styela coerulea (Quoy and Gai-
Mmard);Fin ri kProcN eds VE
Cuvier,
493
SZFsiehenD'e's h'ayes:
£ Deshayes, M. G. P. [Cuvier. G.]. 1843, Le Régne animal etc.; Les Mol-
lusques, mit Atlas; Paris.
Drasche, R. v., 1884, Uber einige neue und weniger gekannte ausser-
europåische Ascidien; in: Denkschr. Akad. Wiss., math.-nat. Cl.
SEVIIRWien:
Gaimard, siehe Quoy et Gaimard.
£ Hartmeyer, R., 1968, Tunicata (Manteltiere); Forts.; in: Bronn, H.G.,
seller
Klassen und Ordnungen des Tier-Reichs etc., III, Suppl.
, 1912, Die Ascidien der Deutschen Tiefsee-Expedition; in: Deut-
sche Tiefsee-Exp. 1898—99, XVI.
, 1913, Die Ascidien der Deutschen Siidpolar-Expedition; 1901
—1903; in: Deutsche Siidpolar-Exped. 1901—1903, XII, Zool. IV.
, 1914, Diagnosen einiger neuer Molguliden aus der Sammlung
des Berliner Museums nebst Bemerkungen uber die Systematik
und Nomenklatur dieser Familie; in: Sb. Ges. nat. Fr., Berlin,
Jg. 1914.
, 1916, Neue und alte Styeliden aus der Sammlung des Berliner
Museums: in: Mt. Zool. Mus. Berlin, XIII
C., 1878, Beitråge zur nåheren Kenntnis der Tunicaten; in: Sb.
Akad. Wiss., math.-nat. Cl., LXXVII; Wien.
ӣ Herdmann, W. A., 1881, Preliminary Report on the Tunicata of the
Ed
»Challengerf Expedition, III; in: Proc. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh,
1880—81.
, 1882, Report on the Tunicata collected during the Voyage of
H. M. S. Challenger during the years 1873—76; in: Rep. Voy.
Challenger kzoorÆve
, 1891, On the Genus Ecteinascidia, and its Relations, with
Descriptions of Two New Species, and a Classification of the
Family Clavelinidae; in: Trans. Biol. Soc. Liverpool, V.
, 1891, A Revised Classification of the Tunicata, with Defini-
tions of the Orders, Suborders, Families, Subfamilies, and Ge-
nera, and Analvtical Keys to the Species; in: Journ. Linn. Soc.
London, Zool. XXIII.
, 1899. Descriptive Catalogue of the Tunicata in the Australian
Museum; in: Austral. Mus., Sydney; Cat. XVIL.
Herdman, W. A., and Riddell, Wm., 1913, The Tunicata of the ,,The-
tisf Expedition; in: Sc. Res Exp. »Thetisf"; in: Austral. Mus.
Sydney, Mem. IV.
Huntsman, A. G., 1913, The Classification of the Styelidae; in: Zool.
AnzeXET
xx Hutton, F. W., 1813, Catalogue of the Marine Mollusca of New Zea-
land, with Diagnoses of the Species; Wellington.
Julin, Ch., 1901, Recherches sur la phylogenése des Tuniciers. Déve-
loppement de Vappareil branchial; in Zeitschr. wiss.Zool., LXXVII.
FA
EL 4
bg
bol
xx
Lobo
494
Kesteven, H. L., 1909, Studies on Tunicata 1;"in PP Linn soc NSSS:
Wales, XXXIV.
Kiær, I., 1893, Oversigt over Norges Ascidiae simplices; in: Vet.-Selsk.
Forh., 1893, Christiania.
Macdonald, I. D, 1859, On the anatomical characters of an Australian
species of Perophora; in: Trans. Linn. Soc. London, XXII.
Michaelsen, W., 1904, Die stolidobranchiaten Ascidien der deutschen
Tiefsee-Expedition; in: Deutsche Tiefsee-Exp. 1898—99, VII.
— , 1904, Revision der compositen Styeliden oder Polyzoinen; in:
Mt. Mus. Hamburg, XXI.
— , 1905, Revision von Heller's Ascidien-Typen aus dem Mus.
Godeffroy; in: Zool. Jahrb., Suppl. VIII
- , 1908, Die Pyuriden [Halocynthiiden] des Naturhistorischen
, Museums zu Hamburg; in: Mt. Mus. Hamburg, XXV.
— , 1911, Die Tethyiden (Styeliden] des Naturhistorischen Muse-
ums zu Hamburg; in: Mt. Mus. Hamburg. XXVIIL.
— , 1915, Tunicata; in: Meeresf. Westafrikas, I.
= , 1918, Die Ptychobranchen und Diktyobranchen Ascidien des
westlichen Indischen Ozeans; in: Mt. Mus. Hamburg, XXXV.
= , 1919, Ascidiae Ptychobranchiae und Diktyobranchiae des Roten
Meeres; in: Zool. Erg. Exp. ,,Polaf Rote Meer; in: Denksehr.
Akad. Wiss., math.-nat. Kl., VC; Wien.
== , Ascidien vom westlichen Indischen Ozean aus dem Reichs-
museum zu Stockholm; in: Ark. Zool., XIII.
Pizon, A, 1899 a, Révision des Tuniciers du Muséum (Famille des Mol-
gulidées): in: Bull. Mus. Paris, IV.
—= . 1899 b, Étude anatomique et systématique des Molgulidées
appartenant aux collections du muséum de Paris; in: Ann. sc.
nat (8) AVIT i
Quoy et Gaimard, 1834, Animaux Mollusques; in: Voy. de PAstro-
labe, Zool. III.
Riddell, Wm., siehe Herdman and Riddell.
Ritter, W. E., 1897, Budding in Compound Ascidians, based on Studies
on Goodsiria and Perophora; in: Journ. Morphol., XII.
— , 1913, The simple Ascidians from the northeastern Pacific in
the collections of the United States National Museum; in: Proc.
UNSSÆNA Mus SAVE
Seliger, O., 1907, Tunicata (Manteltiere); in: Bronn, H. G., Klassen
und Ordnungen des Tier-Reichs etc., III. Suppl.
Sluiter, C. Ph., 1900, Tunicaten aus dem Stillen Ocean. Ergebnisse
einer Reise nach dem Pacific. (Schauinsland 1896—1897); in:
Zool. Jahrb, Syst., XIIE
— , 1904, Die Tunicaten der Siboga-Expedition I. Abt. Die soci-
alen und holosomen Ascidien; in: Siboga-Exped., LVIa.
— , 1905, Tuniciers recueillis en 1904 par M. Ch. Gravier dans
495
le golfe de Tadjourah (Somalie francaise); in: Mém. Soc. zool.
Er BeVNE
— » 1913, Ascidien von den Aru-Inseln; in: Abh. Senckenb. Ges.,
XXXV.
— Einige neue Ascidien von der Westkiiste Afrika's; in: Tijdschr.
Ned ierkRverens H(2YBXIVE
Traustedt, M. P. A., 1885, Ascidiae simplices fra det Stille Ocean; in
Vid. Medd. Nat. Foren., 1884; København.
?£ Watt, J., 1892, On the structure of Boltenia pachydermatina; in: Tr. N.
Zeal. Inst., XXIV.
Verzeichnis der im beschreibenden Teil
angefuhrten Arten.
Mitteilungen iber neuz2 Organisationsbefunde, so auch Beschreibung
neuer oder ungeniugend bekannter alter Arten, sind durch Fettdruck der be-
treffenden Seitenzahlen hervorgehoben, Synonyme und fragliche Arten
durch eckige Einklammerung.
Seite Seite
AjfiniSKEAlOoOeOCAT PÅ mer: 463. [Ascidium iactinoctoma]....... 445
Allogeoearpd affinis son. 463. asymmetra, Cnemidocarpa. 418,
— BLERUSTANS ER. ER 416 419, 425, 430
AMPA pA Alpha se; ASHE au stralssEÅserdra ere 395
= duploplicata ...... 414. [aucklandica, Cnemidocarpa] .. 418
— proljeraeere: 414. [Bathyoncus] enderbyanus..... 468
== schauinslandi .... 454 Bathystyeloides enderbyanus .. 468
== FANDEN SEEREN 414, 457 bicornuta,Cnemidocarpa,(Styela] 440
amokurae, Ctenicella [Molgula]. 372. [Boltenia] gibbosa ............ 389
[anceps, Sarcobotrylloides] .... 480: [ — | pachydermatina . 389, 390
arenosa, Theodorella. 417, 469, 474 [ — pedunedlara eee 389
[argillacea, um, Cnemidocarpa, [| — splllferd|feR er 390
Szyelanetethynm] 22... AAORAA (NE — |intermedia.. 391
VASeldiatansrdlis] 0. 305 HE RES ORE SSSSSO
I == on or MR AASE [RAE fn ber eu lat FRRERSE 389
b = erythrostoma].... 440, 442 boltenina, Perophorå.......... 488
[== ianthinoctoma) ......- 445. [Botrylloides] magnicoecus .... 480
[ — ianthinostoma]…. 445, 446. [ — bnrer ure rr 480
== OSTE EK OR DR 483 [ = — …… magnicoe-
== longisiphonata. 0... 487 cum|f2480
LL == Sad ner 390 391 [Botrylloides perspicuum] ..... 479
PAserdinm federe de... AA SEEREN -—- purpureum] ...... 480
[ — erythrostoma)...... 440 Botryllus leachi............…- 479
Seite
Botryllus magnicoecus ........ 480
—= UP T ESE REEE Er DlG 480
= SOMLOSSERL SEE ERE 481
[carnleyensis, Halocynthia)] 399, 400
caeruleas [AS cidium] SER 445
[Caesira] novaeselandiae...... 373
AI RO IN ENES SEER 878
[| — INVEr SA] ERE KR seler 378
cerea, [um], Cnemidocarpa,
… [Styela, Tethyum].. 417, 425, 441
chilensis, Paramolgula 2 379
Cnemidocarpa [argillacea]..... 441
== asymmetra.. 418,
419, 425,
— [aucklandica] ...
== bicormita skeer
— cerea im 417 4225!
= coerdleat Es
— [cornuta, laps.,
< bicornuta] ... 441
— (gregaria]. . . 417
— hemprichi 450
— [humilis] 417
— madagascariensis
430, 435
= — regalis 430
— NIsLotis 427
— novaezelandiae .
418, 425
= TObDINSONIE Eee
— stewartensis .... 435
coerulea,Cnemidocarpa, [Ascidia,
PyurdAS hjeld ES SEEES SEE 445
conglutinata, Stolonica ... 413, 414
Corellatenmyotarks sten seen 481
HE Naboerne 481
[cornuta, laps., < bicornutal,
Cremidocarpatkerer nen 441
crunitas key are Eee 401
Ctenicellatamokuraert eee 32
— MAGISTER ER 37211378
== mortenseni..... 365, 378
— MmMOorfonieeeeeReEree 372
— novaeselandiae. 371, 373
— såivteri seere 373
[(Cynthratlcte BEER 389,
[. s=" Jpulla SS NERE
[ — I Ssubnculata tikker
[4 ==" Jari BEES TRE ne
[Dendrodoa] gregaria .......….
= prossularid ass
diptycha, [os], Amphicarpa, [Di-
stomus 5.2, LS ESEE REE CELER
[Distomus] "diptyehos tere
Distomus-varvolosus eee aser
dupliplicata, Amphicarpa [Sto-
lonied] Våss rer SEEREN
dura, Metandrocarpa, (Good-
SIM NES ERE SENER 416,
enderbyanus, Bathystyloides,
[Bathyoncus] See
[erythrostoma, Ascidia,Ascidium,
Pyurdi ss ESS SSR 440,
enmy oa Gt orellarkeee ere
exasperatus, Microcosmus .....
filholi, Paramolgula, [Caesira,
Molgula] 33 SKEER
gibbosa, Pyura, (Boltenia].....
[Goodsirra] fdira eee 416,
gregaria, Cnemidocarpa, [Den-
drodoanLPandoera rer
grossularia, Dendrodoa [Styelo-
BSN RR 5
haemisphaerium, Microcosmus .
(Halocynthia carnleyensis|. 399,
hemprichi, Cnemidocarpa......
[Heterocarpal slet teee 414,
hirsutus, Microcosmus .... 399,
[humilis, e, Cnemidocarpa, Sty-
ela,sTethyum| REESE
[hutchinsoni], Perophora.......
hutschisonmitPeropho re
(anthinoctoma, Ascidia, Ascidi-
um, ”PYKA|( SSSEESERER SEES
[ianthinostoma, Ascidia)].. 445,
incrustans, Alloeocarpa .......
intermedia, Pyura gibbosa, |Bol-
tenia spinosa, spinifera!. 391,
[inversa, Caesira, Molgula] 378,
(japonica, Corella]
Seite
394
385
457
415
414
461
468
442
481
410
378
389
461
417
. 463
410
400
450
457
409
417
488
488
445
446
416
Seite
ISEN ÆRA SCIdIA 5 ass adr de. 483
keder BEBoiryllas ss see : 479
longisiphonata, Ascidia .....….. 487
[/utea, Cynthia, Pyura]... 389, 394
madagascariensis, Cnemido-
BÆRDEREE NE Ene Ras 430, 435
madagascariensis, Microcosmus 412
magnicoecus, [um], Botryllus,
kBokyllordes |: 2. SR res 480
mariense Cienicella … Sg2Æ3TS
Metandrocarpa dura...... 416, 461
— protostigmatica 461
—= then ke 457
Microcosmus exasperatus ....…. 410
== haemisphaerium .. 410
== BirSUtUS 3. 399, 409
== madagascariensis. 412
= senegalensis se 412
== SølCaUsS ss. sc: 412
[Molgula] amokurae .......…. Se
IL ==. 770 ORE RER 378
[ — mBersd]| 2... 378, 379
[- 7 rod ON EEN ERR EEE 32.
[| — |] novaeselandiae...... SS
mortenseni, Ctenicella .... 365, 378
mortoni, Ctenicella [Molgula].. 372
niger, [grum] Botryllus [Botryllo-
BILEN 2 EEN 480
nisiotis, Cnemidocarpa [Styela] 427
novaeselandiae, Ctenicella,[Cae-
Sad MOl2ELA]: 57. Sme
novaezelandiae, Cnemidocarpa,
373
FPy ra SÅS ss 418, 425
pachydermatina, Pyura, (Bolte-
ED nere Fo GE ED EET RER 389, 441
lcandocia| Foreslå 2. 417
Paramolgula chilensis........- 379
=— HIoGIE. SEEREN 378
[pedunculata, Boltenia)........ 389
mesasis EP olYCaTpd sr. 450
Perophora boltenina .......... 488
— (hutchinsonl 2... 488
= AtS CRIS OTTE 2 488
[oerspicuum, Botrylloides] ....- 479
450
BPolycarpa pegdsis 22.222...
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren.
prolifera, Amphicarpa,Stolonica]
414,
protostigmatica, Metandrocarpa
pulls Pyard(Cyridid] MESSER
[purpureum, Botrylloides)...…..…...
fPyrracoerileaseeeeeeeee
(.— veryzhrostoma|
— SU bDØSA SSR NAS EE 391,
— — intermedia. . 391,
[nx rantkinoctomal ERR
== ate ere
— pachydermatina ... 389,
== = Spinosis-
sima .. 394,
== PIM SEDLER SER RE
SDU CU LG AEPS
— — fsuterilmeeer
EET TESTE SST EE oe
—= era Er
[Pyuropsis] novaezelandiae..….
= SELDenLKTLEN DERE
regalis, Cnemidocarpa madagas-
CaMensisE ENE
robinsoni, Cnemidocarpa
[Sarcobotrylloides anceps] .....
schauinslandi, Amphicarpa ....
schlosseri, Botryllus
senegalensis, Microcosmus ....
slutter Ctenicella FREE
socialis:.Stolonieessake eee
[spinifera, Ascidia, Boltenia] ..
IspmosakBoltenid ERE
spinosissima, Pyura pachyder-
matina 394,
stewartensis, Cnemidocarpa....
stewartensis, Theodorella......
Stolonica conglutinata ....
Fr Fanpliphealr SEER
[== Foro era see
= socialis
stubenrauchi, Pyaropsis.......
[Stiyelararsllaced] ES REREREER
Ilbreomunig se
Picerea FE SNS SESSERE
1 eoeralea SER ES SEES
Bd. 73. 32
be
[
Seite
415
461
385
480
445
440
396
397
445
389
441
396
385
406
406
399
401
425
425
430
419
480
454
481
412
373
414
390
390
Seite
KSyeld Hams KEE RSS 417
= TUUSVOBESIRE srt feer SKS IS TERRE 427
[Slyelopsis] grossularia ....... 463
subuculata, Pyura, (Cynthia,
EHaloEvnihd eee erne 406
suleamsemMickocosmusee see 412
[Tethyum argillaceum)j ........ 440
(KER seeren 417
[jk KLUS] ER ne ner 417
ik EUSTON ER ar REDE 427
Seite
Theodorella arenosa.. 417, 469, 474
— stewartensis ...... 475
— toruss-r—r EN 473
thilenit, Metandrocarpa ....... 457
torus i Theodorelasnesterreee 473
trita, Pyura, [Cynthia]... 399, 410
[tuberculata, Boltenia).....….. 389
variolosus:eDIstomusseekeeeer 415
Zietzi, Amphicarpa,(Heterocarpa]
414, 457
Papers from Dr. Th. Mortensen's Pacific Expedition
IO al
XII.
Zur Kenntnis der Entwicklung von Stomolophus
meleagris L. Agassiz.
Von
Dr. Gustav Stiasny, Leiden.
(Mit 8 Textfiguren).
Stomolophus meleagris L. Ag. juv.
10 Exemplare: Dr. Th. Mortensen, Taboguilla, Panama, Oberflåche,
STEN 6: N I 26:
1 Exemplar: Dr. Th. Mortensen, Taboguilla, Panama, Oberflåche,
TORSK SSI SENE E2S!
In der schånen Scyphomedusen-Sammlung des Zoologischen
Museums der Universitåt in Kopenhagen, die zum gråssten Teile
von Dr. Th. Mortensen gesammelt ist und iber welche ich in einer
anderen Mitteilung (6) berichte, fanden sich auch einige sehr inter-
essante Entwicklungsstadien von Stomolophus meleagris L. Agassiz
vor, die ich hier gesondert kurz beschreiben will. Diese Entwick-
lungsstadien verdienen deshalb ganz besonderes Interesse, weil uber
die Entwicklung des aberranten Genus Stomolophus nur sehr wenig
bekannt ist und hier eine Serie aufeinanderfolgender Stadien vor-
liegt, an welchen sich die Bildung einzelner Organsysteme oder
Organe (Gefåssystem, Mundarme, Schulterkrausen, Schirmrand)
Schritt fir Schritt beobachten låsst.
Das einzige bisher bekannt gewordene Entwicklungsstadium von
Stomolophus meleagris ist durch A. G. Mayer in seiner grossen År-
beit ,Medusae of the world" (3) p. 710/711 beschrieben worden.
»Young medusa. I have captured an immature medusa of this species
»in which the bell was 3 mm in diameter and the entire animal 5S mm
»in length (fig. 3, Pl. 75). The bell was flatter than a hemisphere and
»the surface of the exumbrella was covered with wart-like clusters of
»nematocysts, among there were. numerous, brown colored pigment cells.
»There were 8 marginal sense organs and 48 marginal lappets (fig. 1, Pl. 76).
»The lappets flanking the sense organs were about twice as long as the
»others. The ocular lappets were however simple, while the others were
»bifurcated and evidently in -process of division. The central mouth was
32r
500
»Situated at the extremity of a long 4-cornered proboscis which processed
,4 bifurcated lips. The free edges of these lips were lined by a row of
»short, slender, knobbed tentacles which maintained a constant motion.
»In addition to the principal or terminal mouth there were 8 small tube
»like, lateral mouths. arranged in 4 pairs, the beginnings of the scapulets.
»These mouths arose from the sides of the manubrium near its base and
swere interradial in a position (i. e. 90” from the radii of the 4 principal
»lips), and in addition to these lateral mouths there were 4 pairs of hernia-
»like projections upon the surface of the manubrium. These projections
»alternated in position with the alr-ady functional lateral mouths, and would
»no doubt soon have broken through and formed another set of such
»mouths (fig. 1, pl. 76). The functional mouths were each surrounded
»by 8 tentacles which were similar in structure to the tentacles lining
»the free edges of the principal mouth. The medusa was quite transparent
»except for a trace of brown pigment in the ectoderme of the exumbrella
»and the dark red pigment of the sense-organs. I found it in Charleston
»Harbour, South Carolina, on September 9. 1898. The resemblance be-
»tween this young rhizostomous medusa and the adult condition in Se-
»maeostomeae is very striking.”
Aus dieser Beschreibung, in welcher leider das Gastrovascular-
system nicht nåher geschildert wird, ergeben sich zwei wichtige
Tatsachen:
1) Die Scapuletten entstehen als selbståndige Gebilde unabhångig
von den Unterarmen, genau so wie von Claus (1, p. 46—48) bei
Rhizostoma angegeben. Vergl. auch meine Ausfihrungen beziglich
der Scapuletten-Theorien von Haeckel und Maas (4, p. 17/18).
2) Die Mundarme werden dichotom angelegt.
Die vorliegenden 11 Jugendstadien gestatten mir, diese An-
gaben in einigen wesentlichen Punkten zu ergånzen, insbesondere
in Bezug auf das Gastrovascularsystem des Schirmes.
Jungstes Stadium von ca.6 mm Schirmdurchm'es'ser
(Fig. 1—2). Ephyra-åhn-
lich, Schirm flach, wenig
gewolbt, mehr scheiben-
formig, grobgranuliert.
(Fig. 1). Ocularlåppchen
schmal und spitz, viel
>) fj | schmåler als die je zwei
; | .
GØ nunne breiten abgerundeten Ve-
/
larlåppchen pro Oktant.
Fig. 1. »Lychnorhiza«-Stadium von ca. 6 mm PP P
Schirmdurchmesser. Habitusbild. Seitenansicht. 16 Scapuletten, pinsel-
pF AN
501
formig oder am freien Ende leicht dichotomisch. Acht Mundarme,
noch fast gar nicht verwachsen, mit weit offenen Rinnen, deutlich
dichotomisch, sehr åhnlich wie bei dem in Fig. 4 dargestellten
ålteren Stadium. Mundåffnung
weit klaffend. Subgenitalostien
verhåltnissmåssig gross (Fig. 2),
trichterformig. Muskulatur ring-
formig, ununterbrochen. Das
Gefåssystem (Fig. 2) zeigt einen
Ringcanal und 16 Radiårcanåle.
Das extracirculåre Netz besteht
nur aus einer einzigen Reihe
Fig. 2. «Lychnorhiza«-Stadium.
liegender Maschen; intracirculår Gefåssystem in Subumbrellaransicht.
findet sich in jedem Sektor ein
blinder kurzer Centripetalcanal. Die Rhopalarcanåle sind in der
Nåhe des Ringcanals leicht kolbenfårmig angeschwollen.
Ein Vergleich dieses Stadiums mit dem jingeren von Mayer
beschriebenen von 3 mm Schirmdurchmesser und 5 mm Långe zeigt
einige Verschiedenheiten. Vor allem im Habitus. Vergl. dazu Mayers
Fig. 3, Pl. 75. Das Mayer'sche Stadium hat einen stark gewålbten
Schirm, der am Apex eine leichte Delle zeigt; es ist nicht Ephyra-
åhnlich, der Schirm ist viel håher als bei dem mir vorliegenden Sta-
dium. (Fig. 1). Der Schirmrand ist in der Mayer'schen Figur ganz
unregelmåssig gelappt, das Manubrium ist auffallend lang und besitzt
4 dichotome Mundarme, wåhrend bei meinem jingsten Stadium die
acht dichotomen Mundarme noch fast gar nicht verwachsen sind. Sehr
wichtig wåren genaue Angaben iber das Gefåssystem gewesen, weil
vermutlich in diesem Stadium der Ringcanal noch nicht angelegt ist.
Es scheint mir, dass Mayer das Manubrium in seiner Fig. 3, PI. 75 zu
lang gezeichnet hat. Die von ihm angegebenen Masse stimmen nicht
mit den Gråssenverhåltnissen in dieser Zeichnung. Auch sind seine
beiden Abbildungen Fig. 3, Pl. 75 und Fig. 1, Pl. 76 nur schwer
aufeinander beziehbar, obwohl sie dasselbe Stadium ,in side view"
and ,0ral view" darstellen. Letztere Abbildung wurde mehr auf
ein Ephyra-åhnliches Stadium mit flachem Schirm schliessen lassen,
wihrend die erstere Abbildung hochgewdlbte .Glocke zeigt, auch
stimmt der Schirmrand in beiden Abbildungen nicht. Dass bei einem
502
so jungen Stadium bereits 48 Randlåppchen vorhanden sind,
wenig wahrscheinlich!)! Das mir vorliegende Stadium von 6 mm
Schirmbreite zeigt nur 2 Randlåppchen pro Oktant. Diese Ver-
schiedenheiten legen die Annahme nahe, dass hier måglicherweise
doch zwei verschiedene Species von Stomolophus vorliegen kånnten
— vorausgesetzt natirlich, dass die Darstellung Mayers den tat-
såchlichen Verhåltnissen entspricht.
fr EilnYStadium von ca. 8 mm Schirmdurchmesser zeigt
Sfoichfalls noch einen flachen, wenig gewdlbten ziemlich stark gra-
Din N RR
n
PÅ OG 1 ))) ANS DN Å NUR
577 , ' ll
SO RD MUD US OLEDA
Fig. 3. Stadium von ca.10 mm Schirmdurchmesser.
Habitusbild. Seitenansicht.
nulierten Schirm, Ephyra-åhnlich, mit je 2 Randlåppchen pro Oktant,
die sich manchmal teilen. Schulterkrausen deutlich dichotom. Mund-
6ffnung klaffend. Mundarme wenig verwachsen mit offenen Mund-
rinnen. Gefåssystem etwa wie in Fig. 5 dargestellt. Ziemlich breites
aus mehreren Maschenreihen bestehendes extracirculåres Anastomo-
sennetz. Ringcanal kaum mebhr unterscheidbar. Intracirculår zeigen
") Vergleiche das entsprechende Entwicklungsstadium von Rhizostoma nach
Claus (Taf. XII, Fig. 88), das gleichfalls nur zwei Velarlåppchen pro Oktan ”
zeigt.
1 EDESEREE
503
die Radialcanåle kleine kolbenformige Anschwellungen. Die Rhø-
palarcanåle treten stellenweise mit den centripetalen Blindsåcken
des Ringcanals in Verbindung. Die Muskulatur ist ein breiter un-
unterbrochener Ring.
EinfStadiunsvon ca/ommschirmdørehmessertist
noch immer Ephyra-åhnlich, mit noch ziemlich flachem Schirme,
Fig. 4. Stadium von ca. 10 mm Schirm-
durchmesser. Subumbrellaransicht.
mit 4 Randlåppchen pro Oktant. Manubrium bereits deutlich aus-
gebildet, indem die dichotomen Mundarme sich an den Oberarmen
mit den Seitenflåchen aneinanderlegen und verwachsen. Mundof-
nung weit offen. Das Gefåssystem des Schirmes in einem Zustande,
der sich etwa zwischen den in Fig. 5 und 6 dargestellten Verhålt-
nissen befindet: Beginnende Verschmelzung der centripetalen Aus-
sackungen des Ringcanals mit den kolbenfårmigen Anschwellungen
der Radialcanåle.
Stadium von 10 mm Schirmdurchmesser (aus Praep.
Nr. 25). (Fig. 3—5). Prachtvolles ganZ glashell durchsichtiges Exem-
plar. -Schirm (Fig. 3) stark gewålbt, gekårnelt. Håhe ca. 6 mm;
das Manubrium ragt mehr als 3 mm iiber den Schirmrand hinaus.
504
Schirmrand mit 4 breiten abgerundeten Randlåppchen pro Oktant,
spitze, långliche Ocularlåppchen mit gezåhneltem Rand. Mundéff-
nung klaffend. Mundarme deutlich dichotom mit offenen Rinnen
und relativ wenigen grossen
Tentakelchen (Fig. 4). Scapulet-
ten deutlich zweigegabelt. Das
Gefåssystem (Fig. 3 und 5) ist
gegeniber den 8 und 9 mm
breiten Stadien in der Entwick-
lung etwas zurutckgeblieben.
Vom Ringcanal, der nur durch
Fig. 5. Gefåssystem desselben. s i K
Subumbrellaransicht. seine Lage, nicht durch grossere
Breite als die iibrigen Quer-
anastomosen als solcher erkennbar ist, gehen in jedem Sektor kurze,
leicht gebogene blindendigende Centripetalcanåle aus, die sich seit-
lichen Fortsåtzen der Rhopalarcanåle nåhern. Auch die Interrhopalar-
canåle zeigen in der Nåhe des Ringcanals intracirculår kleine kolben-
formige Anschwellungen. Extracirculår zweireihiges Anastomosen-
netz mit wenigen breiten Maschen, in welche kleine blindsackartige
Ausstiilpungen hineinragen. Muskulatur ein ununterbrochener brei-
ter Ring.
Stadium von 11 mm Schirmbreite mit 4, manchmal
auch 6 Randlåppchen pro Oktant. Mundarme und Schulterkrausen
deutlich dichotom. Gefåssystemausbildung etwas weiter vorgeschrit-
ten als in Fig. 5 dargestellt, etwa
wie in Fig. 6: die Verschmelzung
der Centripetalcanåle mit den
seitlichen Ausstiilpungen der Rho-
palarcanåle ist in der meisten
Oktanten bereits vollzogen.
Ein stark gewålbtes Sta-
dium von ca. 16 mm Schirm-
breite (Fig. 7) besitzt acht Rand- Fig. 6. Stadium von ca. 11 mm Schirm-
låppchen pro Oktant. Die Schulter- SEERE EET
krausen sind bereits distalwårts
abgebogen, aber noch stets ist ihre Dichotomie erkennbar. Das
Manubrium, durch die seitlich stark verwachsenen Mundarme ge-
bildet, ragt weit aus der Schirmhåhle. Es besitzt eine Långe von
505
6 mm (von der Insertionsstelle der Scapuletten bis zum freien Ende
gemessen). Die Mundarme sind bereits so stark verwachsen und
modificiert, dass ihr - dichotomer Bau fast nicht mehr, wenn iber-
haupt, nur durch Vergleich mit den friiheren Stadien erkennbar ist.
Die zusammengehårenden Mundarmpaare sind durch etwas tiefere
rundliche Einschnitte gegeniiber den benachbarten Paaren abge-
grenzt. Der Zustand des Gefåssystems ist aus Fig. 7 ersichtlich.
Der Ringcanal tritt kaum mehr hervor, ist aber durch seine Lage
erkennbar. Extracirculår ein aus mehreren Reihen breiter Netz-
maschen bestehendes Anastomosennetz, das etwas (nicht viel) fein-
Fig. 7. »Acromitus«-Stadium von ca. 16 mm Schirm-
durchmesser. Gefåssystem in Subumbrellaransicht.
maschiger ist als die intracirculåren Netzmaschen, mit kleinen
secundåren Blindsåckchen besetzt ist und bis in die Randlåppchen
reicht. Intracirculår sehen wir ein oder zwei Reihen grosser, breiter
Maschen, die mit den benachbarten Rhopalarcanålen wohl, nicht
aber mit den Interrhopalarcanålen in Verbindung stehen. Eine
breite Queranastomose jederseits des Rhopalarcanals verlåuft fast
ganz parallel zum friheren Ringcanal und gibt ein fir dieses Ent-
wicklungsstadium sehr charakteristisches Bild. Die Muskulatur ist
långs der Rhopalarcanåle bereits etwas schwåcher ausgebildet, das
bisher gleichmissig breite ringformige Muskelband zeigt an diesen
Stellen peripheriewårts gerichtete Einkerbungen.
Ein weiteres stark gewålbtes Stadium von ca. 18
mm Schirmdurchmesser (Fig. 8) hat 8—12 Randlåppchen pro
Oktant, die manchmal einfach, manchmal gespalten sind. Scapu-
506
letten stark distal abgebogen. Armbusch stark verwachsen, Mund-
offnung weitklaffend. Die Mundarme sind an diesem Exemplare
besonders deutlich als dichotom erkennbar, weil ihre åussersten di-
stalen Zipfel als knorpelharte abgerundete Spitzen ein Stick weit
hervorragen.
Dieses Exemplar erinnert im Habitus stark an Mayers Fig. 2,
Pl. 75. Das Gefåssystem ist in Fig. 8 dargestellt. Es beginnt
die Ausbildung der Netzarkade. Der Ringcanal ist bereits ganz
verwischt. Die Netzarkade wird nicht vom Ringcanal aus gebildet,
sondern durch Ausstilpung weiterer Fortsåtze und Netzmaschen von
Fig. 8. »Catostylus«-Stadium von ca. 18 mm Schirm-
durchmesser. Gefåssystem in Subumbrellaransicht.
den innersten, dem Magen zunåchst liegenden Maschen des Ana-
stomosennetzes selbst. Die Muskulatur zeigt långs der Rhopalar-
canåle etwas schwåcher ausgebildete Stellen.
Einetwas ålteres -Entwicklumssstadiumkkvonmern
20 mm Schirmdurcechmesser und lomme oh eRistenue
wenig weiter vorgeschritten als das zuletzt besprochene: es zeigt
einige Netzmaschen der spåteren Netzarkade mehr.
Das letzte Entwicklungsstadium, das ich noch erwåhnen
måchte, misst ca. 25 mm Schirmbreite bei car 1 2mm
Hohe. Es hat ein stark verwachsenes Manubrium mit scharfen
Kanten, mit kaum noch als dichotom erkennbaren Mundarmen und
offener Mundåffnung. Die Gefåssnetzarkade ist noch etwas mehr
ausgebildet. Ringcanal vållig verwischt, extracirculåres Netz recht
breit.
507
Die Beschaffenheit des Subgenitalporticus konnte ich an
den Entwicklungsstadien von 6—11 mm Schirmbreite nicht fest-
stellen. Man misste sie schneiden; was bei diesen Unica nicht
angeht. Die ålteren Stadien zeigen 4 getrennte Subgenitalhåhlen.
Betrachten wir die Entwicklung des Gastrovascular-
system des Schirmes etwas genauer. Das jingste Sta-
dium (Fig. 2) zeigt uns bereits einen Ringcanal. Von demselben
gehen extracircularwårts vorspringende Bågen aus, die durch die
Fortsetzungen der Interrhopalarcanåle in 2 Teile geteilt werden.
Meist finden wir beiderseits der letzteren nur eine breite Masche,
gelegentlich hat sich jedoch bereits eine zweite abgeschniirt oder
ist durch Verschmelzung der blindsackartigen Vorspringe im Be-
griffe dies zu tun. Diese extracirculåren Bogensticke, die bis in
die Randlåppchen reichen, stehen beiderseits nicht mit den Rho-
palarcanålen, wohl aber mit den Interrhopalarcanålen in direkter
Verbindung. Innerhalb des Ringcanals finden wir in jedem Sektor
einen centripetalen kurzen Blindsack, der vom Ringcanal ausgeht;
die Rhopalarcanåle zeigen keulenfårmige Verdickungen in der Nåhe
des Ringcanals, die Interrhopalarcanåle jedoch nicht. Im ganzen
ein Bild, ungemein åhnlich demjenigen, das Claus (1, Fig. 92,
Taf. XIII) bei Rhizostoma pulmo angegeben, mit dem Unter-
schiede, dass in der Claus'schen Figur die Centripetalcanåle
nur durch ganz kleine Zacken des Ringcanals angedeutet sind. —
Figur 5 zeigt uns eine weitere Stufe in der Entwicklung des
Gefåssystems. Das extracirculåre Netz gliedert sich 'bereits in
mehrere Reihen. Jedem Låppchen entspricht eine åussere Netz-
masche. Die Rhopalarcanåle senden von einer verdickten Stelle
beiderseits Blindsåcke aus, die sich mit jenen vom Ringcanal aus-
gehenden Centripetalcanålen zu vereinigen trachten — ein Stadium,
das etwa dem in Fig. 94, Taf. XIII von Claus dargestellten Ent-
wicklungsstadium von Rhizostoma entspricht. Fig. 6 zeigt uns die
Verschmelzung der seitlichen Ausstilpungen der Rhopalarcanåle
mit den centripetalen Blindsåcken des Ringcanals bereits vollzogen
oder noch nicht ganz durchgefihrt. Fig. 7. Das Netz ist nun schon
viel complicierter geworden. Der Ringcanal tritt als solcher kaum
mehr hervor, ist fast ganz verwischt. Das extracirculåre Netz be-
steht aus zahlreichen mit Blindsåcken ausgestatteten Maschenreihen.
508
Innerhalb des (friheren) Ringcanals finden wir bereits ein oder zwei
Reihen von Netzmaschen beiderseits der Rhopalarcanåle, die etwas
gråsser, håher, als die peripheren sind. Dieselben sind durch eine
mit der Magencontour und dem friiheren Ringcanal ziemlich parallel-
laufende Queranastomose mit einander und mit den Rhopalarcanålen
in direkter Verbindung, welche als Tråger der intracirculåren Netzes
erscheinen. Diese Queranastomose zeigt durch seitliche Ausstilp-
ungen die Tendenz, mit den Inferrhopalarcanålen in Verbindung zu
treten, die auch stellenweise unregelmåssige Verdickungen aufweisen.
In Fig. 8 ist diese Verbindung bereits erfolgt. Das intracircu-
låre Anastomosennetz steht mit den beiderseitigen Radialcanålen in
direkter V.erbindung. Gleichzeitig beobachten wir die Ausbildung
weiterer Zacken und Netzmaschen von den innersten Netzmaschen
des ÅAnastomosennetzes centralwårts ausgehend, die bei den folgenden
nicht mehr abgebildeten Stadien zur Bildung der Netzarkade fihren.
In Fig. 2 sehen wir ein Stadium des Gefåssystems von Stomo-
lovhus vor uns, das sich durch blindsackåhnliche nicht anastomo-
sierende Centripetalcanåle kennzeichnen låsst, die nur mit dem
Ringcanal in Verbindung stehen. Im Anschlusse an meine Aus-
fuhrungen in einer friheren Mitteilung (5) iber ein analoges Ent-
wicklungsstadium bei Catostylus måchte ich dieses Stadium, das
den zeitlebens vom Genus Lychnorhiza Haeckel beibehaltenen Gefåss-
typus aufweist, das , Lychnorhiza'-Stadium von Stomolophus nennen.
Fig. 7 weist uns dagegen einen Typus des Gefåssystems auf,
wie wir ihn bei den adulten Exemplaren des Genus Acromitus an-
treffen, charakterisiert durch die direkte Verbindung des intracircu-
låren Anastomosennetzes mit den Rhopalarcanålen und dem Ring-
canal. (Vergl. meine Genusdiagnose von Acromitus, sowie die Ab-
bildungen in 4, p. 130, Taf. 2, Fig. 10 und Textfig. 9). Es wåre
also als das ,,Acromitus"-Stadium von Stomolophus zu bezeichnen.
Fig. 8 zeigt uns endlich eine Entwicklungsstufe des Gefåssystems,
die dem Gefåsstypus des Genus Catostylus entsprechen wiirde, gekenn-
zeichnet durch die direkte Verbindung des intracirculåren Anasto-
mosennetzes mit den beiderseitigen Radialcanålen (allerdings mit
dem Unterschiede, dass bei Stomolophus der Ringcanal bereits ver-
wischt ist). (Vergl. meine Genusdiagnose von Catzostylus in 4, p. 138.
509
sowie die Abbildung, Taf. II, Fig. 12). Es wåre dies also das
» Catostylus"-Stadium vor Stomolophus. " Wir ersehen dar-
aus, dass das Gefåssystem von Stomolophus ontogenetisch
einige Entwicklungsstufen durchlåuft, die uns bei
einen anderen Genera erhalten gebliebensimd:
Da mir der Nachweis eines analogen Lychnorhiza-Stadiums ausser
bei Catostylus (5) auch bei Acromitus (6) gelungen ist, glaube ich
nicht sehr fehl zu gehen, wenn ich das Vorhandensein eines solchen
auch in der Entwickiung aller jener Genera der Dactyliophorae
annehme, bei welchen es bisher nicht bekannt ist. Ich erblicke
inden einfachen unveråstelten Centripetalcanålen
daskernfachste |primitivste'Verhalten destintracirceu-
låren Netzes bei den Dactyliophorae. Aus der Tatsache, dass
aus dem Lychnorhiza-Stadium das Acromitus-Stadium, endlich das
Catostylus-Stadium sich entwickelt, erhalten wir auch einen wert-
vollen Hinweis auf die Verwandschaft dieser. drei Genera.
Infolge des Nachweises eines Ringcanales in den Jugendstadien,
der frihzeitig verwischt wird, muss meine Diagnose des Genus Sf0-
molophus eine entsprechende Ånderung erfahren (4, p. 170). Leider
zeigt das jingste mir vorliegende Entwicklungsstadium von Sfomo-
lophus den Ringcanal bereits vollkommen ausgebildet, so wie dies
auch bei den oben erwåhnten von Claus beschriebenen Entwick-
lungsstadien von Rhizostoma der Fall ist. Uber die Entstehung des
Ringcanals låsst ich daher vorlåufig mit Sicherheit nichts aussagen.
Finden sich analoge Entwicklungsstadien wie bei
Stomolophus auch bei den anderen Genera der Scapulatae ?
Zur Zeit ist die Entwicklung keines einzigen Genus derselben hin-
långlich erforscht, um diese Frage beantworten zu kånnen.
Von Rhopilema ist iiber die Entwicklung uberhaupt nichts bekannt.
Auch von Rhizostoma ist keine geschlossene Entwicklungsreihe, son-
dern nur einzelne Entwicklungsstadien bekannt. In Fig. 86, Taf. XII,
bildet Claus (1) ein Entwicklungsstadium von Rhizostoma von 3—4
mm Schirmbreite ab, dessen Gefåssystem auf das Ringgefåss und
die 16 Radialcanåle beschrånkt ist. Die Stellen, von wo aus spåter
die Aussackungen des Ringgefåsses entstehen und das Anastomosen-
netz seinen Anfang nimmt, sind nur angedeutet, hier sind die Inter-
rhopalarcanåle keulenfårmig verdickt. Es ist ein etwas jiingeres
Stadium als das mir vorliegende jiingste von Stomolophus (Fig. 2).
510
»In wesentlichen wiederholt das vorliegende Stadium des Gefåss-
apparates die Gestalt des Canalsystems der Flosculiden (Floscula
und Floresca), welches diese Entwicklungsstufe zeitlebens bewahrt
und von E. Haeckel mit Recht als einfachster Formzustand betrachtet
wurde (USED SÆS):
Sehr wahrscheinlich geht auch bei Stomolophus dem
» Lychnorhiza"-Stadium ein x,Floscula'"- oder ,,Florescaf-Sta-
dium voraus.
In Fig. 95, Taf. XIII finden wir ein dem , Lychnorhizaf'-Stadium
von Stomolophus entsprechendes Entwicklungsstadium von Rhizostoma
mit ein oder zwei blinden Centripetalcanålen abgebildet.
Die ålteren von Claus beschriebenen Stadien von Rhizostoma
zeigen uns bereits såmmtlich die Netzarkade. Die Zwischen-
stadien fehlen; Claus hat sie nicht beschriebenøFEn
»ÅAcromitus"- und ,Catostylus"-Stadium wåre also in der Entwick-
lung von Rhizostoma noch nachzuweisen.
"Erweist sich also intBezugstankidaseGeRas system
das Genus Stomolophus valsteintstarktabøelertereseese
liegt die Sache beziglich der Mundarme anders. Die Entwicklungs-
geschichte lehrt uns, dass dieselben dichotom angelegt und erst
durch spåtere Verwachsung (nicht immer) stark modificiert werden,
so dass sie als dichotom nicht mehr ohneweiteres erkennbar sind.
In Bezug auf die Mundarme ist also Stomolophus primi-
tiv, die complicierte Gestalt derselben in spåteren Entwicklungs-
stadien etwas secundåres und durch die starke Ausbildung des Manu-
briumst bedingt Ursprunglichet VvVerhåltnisselkzersenkanet
die Mundrinnen, die sehr lange, die Mundoffnung, die zeit-
lebens offen steht, åhnlich wie wir dies bei den Semaeostomeen vor-
finden. Auch der Subgenitalporticus mit 4 getrennten Sub-
genitalhåhlen, das Manubrium, das einer complicierten Gefåss-
versorgung entbehrt, zeigen urspringlichere Verhåltnisse.
Das Genus Stomolophus weist eben primitive und abge-
leitete Ziige neben einander auf, wie das bei aberranten Formen
ofter zu finden ist.
Bei Anfertigung der Abbildungen Fig. 1,3 und 4 hatte ich mich der
Mitarbeit des Herrn Universitåtszeichners Adolf Kasper unsWienkzurer=
freuen, wofir ich ihm auch an dieser Stelle meinen besten Dank sage.
1) 1883.
2) 1879.
3) 1910.
4) 1921.
STOP NE
6) 1922.
511
Litteraturverzeichnis.
Claus C., Untersuchungen iiber die Organisation und Entwicklung
der Medusen,
Prag und Leipzig.
Haeckel E., Das System der Medusen. Mit Atlas. Jena.
Mayer A. G., Medusae of the world. III. The Scyphomedusae. Car-
negie Inst., Washington.
Stiasmy" GS
Studien uber Rhizostomeen mit besonderer Beriick-
sichtigung der Fauna des malayischen Archipels nebst
einer Revision des Systems. Capita Zoologica I. Afl. 2.
”s Gravenhage.
Mitteilungen uber Scyphomedusen. I. Ein Jugend-
stadium von Catostylus townsendi Mayer. Zoolog.
Mededeel. Rijks-Mus. Nat. Hist. Deel VI, Afl. 2,
Leiden.
Die Scyphomedusen-Sammlung von Dr. Th. Mortensen
nebst anderen Medusen aus dem Zoolog. Museum der
Universitåt Kopenhagen. Vid. Medd. Dansk Naturh.
Foren. Bd. 73. Kopenhagen.
Leiden, Rijksmuseum van Nat. Historie, August 1921.
10 551922:
Papers from Dr. Th. Mortensen's Pacific Expedition
1914—16.
XIII.
Die Scyphomedusen-Sammlung von Dr. Th. Mortensen
nebst anderen Medusen aus dem zoologischen Museum
der Universitåt in Kopenhagen.
Von
Dr. Gustav Stiasny, Leiden.
(Mit 14 Textfiguren).
Nacn Abschluss meiner Studien iber die malayischen Rhizo-
stomeen (25, 26), war es fir den weiteren Ausbau meines neuen
Systems von grosser Wichtigkeit, dasselbe auch an umfangreichem
Material aus anderen Faunengebieten zu erproben. Mit Freude
habe ich daher das Anerbieten Dr. Mortensens angenommen,
die Scyphomedusensammlung, die er auf seinen Reisen an. den
Kisten des Pacific in den Jahren 1914—16 gesammelt hat, nebst
den iibrigen in Zoologischen Museum der Universitåt in Kopen-
hagen vorhandenen Scyphomedusen zu bearbeiten.
Die Kopenhagener Sammlung, die zum gråssten Teile aus den
von Mortensen gesammelten Medusen besteht, ist zwar nicht sehr
zahlreich an Exemplaren, jedoch ungemein reichhaltig nach der
Zusammensetzung. ;
Die Charybdeiden (Cubomedusen) sind darin durch einige schåne
Exemplare vertreten. Von Coronatae finden sich einige gute Exem-
plare von Atolla bairdii aus den japanischen Gewåssern, wo diese
Form bisher noch nicht nachgewiesen wurde. Unter den Semae-
ostomeen sind namentlich die Exemplare der seltenen Kuragea de-
pressa Kish. erwåhnenswert, die bisher nur von Kishinouye
beschrieben worden sind. Der gråsste Teil der Sammlung wird
von Rhizostomae gebildet. Besondere Erwåhnung verdient hier
das reichhaltige Material von Mastigias ocellata Haeckel, das auch
Zzahlreiche Entwicklungsstadien enthålt, ferner ein prachtvolles Exem-
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 73. 33
514
plar von Versura anadyomene (Maas), von welcher Form bisher nur
ein einziges Exemplar bekannt war (aus dem Siboga-Materiale).
Sehr interessant ist ferner die Auffindung von Catostylus (Cram-
bessa) tagi Haeckel an der Kiiste von Panama, weil diese Form
bisher nur aus dem Atlantic und z. von den Kiistengewåssern bei
Lissabon und aus dem Tajo bekannt war,. ferner eines Entwicklungs-
stadiums von Acromitus flagellatus (Haeckel), iber dessen Entwick-
lung bisher nichts bekannt war. Am bedeutungsvollsten sind endlich
die zahlreichen schånen Exemplare und Entwicklungsstadien von
Stomolophus meleagris Agassiz, deren Anatomie und Entwicklung
nunmehr genauer untersucht werden konnte. Von dieser Form
war bisher nur ein einziges Entwicklungsstadium (nicht genau) be-
kannt. Es war måglich, die Entwicklung der Mundarme, der Sca-
puletten, des Schirmrandes, des Gastrovascularsystems Schritt fir
Schritt zu verfolgen, was sich als bedeutungsvoll fir die Erkenntnis
der Phylogenie des Genus Stomolophus iiberhaupt erwies. Uber
diese Ergebnisse wird in einer gesonderten Mitteilung berichtet (29).
Endlich enthålt die Kopenhagener Sammlung auch noch einige
Typen-Exemplare Haeckels und z. Chiropsalmus quadrigatus,
Versura palmata, Polyrhiza vesiculosa und Stomolophus agaricus.
Dass die Uberpriifung und Nachuntersuchung der Haeckelschen
Typen auf Grund der neueren Untersuchungsergebnisse mit der ver-
besserten Injectionsmethode nicht iberflissig ist, erhellt daraus, dass
sich , Versura palmataf Haeckel als identisch mit Mastigias ocellata
Haeckel, ,,Polyrhiza vesiculosa" Haeckel als identisch mit Netrostoma
coerulescens Maas, Stomolophus agaricus Haeckel als identisch mit
Stomolophus meleagris Agassiz erwies.
Der Erhaltungszustand, insbesondere der Mortensen'schen
Sammlung ist ein vorziiglicher (Formolconservierung).
Die Sammlung des Kopenhagener Zoologischen Museums der
Universitåt umfasst ca. 100 Exemplare, die, systematisch geordnet,
folgenden Genera und Species angehåren:
1) Charybdeidae.
Charybdea rastonii Haacke.
Charybdea spec.
Chiropsalmus quadrigatus Haeckel.
2) Stauromedusae.
Vacat.
515
3) Coronatae.
Atolla bairdii Fewkes.
4) Semaeostomeae.
Pelagia spec.
Chrysaora spec.
Kuragea depressa Kishinouye.
Cyanea muellerianthe Haacke.
Aurelia spec.
Aurelia limbata Brandt.
Aurelia aurita (Linné) Lamarck.
5) Rhizostomae.
Cassiopeia andromeda Eschsch.
Netrostoma coerulescens Maas.
Polyrhiza vesiculosa Haeckel.
Mastigias papua (Lesson) L. Agassiz.
Mastigias ocellata (Modeer) Haeckel.
Versura palmata Haeckel.
Versura anadyomene (Maas).
Catostylus tagi (Haeckel).
ÅAÅcromitus flagellatus (Haeckel).
Stomolophus meleagris L. Agassiz.
Stomolophus agaricus Haeckel.
Fir die Uberlassung dieser schånen, iiberaus interessanten Samm-
lung zur Bearbeitung spreche ich Herrn Dr. Th. Mortensen mei-
nen herzlichsten Dank aus.
Ordo Charybdeidae Gegenbaur 1856.
(Cubomedusae Haeckel 1879.)
Fam. Charybdeidae.
Gen. Charybdea Peér. u. Les. 1809.
Charybdea rastonii Haacke.
2 Exemplare: Th. Mortensen, 7? 25? n. Br., FS RÆ SES car 300" m wires
LOS: VEN 28:
1 Exemplar: Th. Mortensen, La Jolla, 5—10 F., 3. IX. 15. Nr. 22.
DW
Das schåne schwårzlich verfårbte Exemplar Nr. 22 von ca. 22 mm
Håhe und Breite zeigt die 4 båumchenfårmig veråstelten Velarcanåle
und Augenverteilung auf den Sinneskolben sehr åhnlich wie von
Maas bei seiner Ch. arborifera von Honolulu (19, Taf. XIV., Fig. 10
und 8) dargestellt, die ja nach Maas selbst (22, p. 48) synonym ist
mit Ch. rastonil.
33
516
Die beiden Exemplare in Nr. 28, Jugendstadien von ca. 10 mm
Håhe, zeigen dagegen die unveråstelten keilfårmigen Velarcanåle,
wie sie Bigelow (2, pl. 10, Fig. 1 und 3) dargestellt hat, nur sind
hier nicht immer 4, sondern in manchen Quadranten auch 6 solcher
Velarcanåle sichtbar. Die Augenverteilung auf den Sinneskolben,
die Form des Phacelliums, ist nicht mit Sicherheit feststellbar, trotz-
dem glaube ich diese Entwicklungsstadien auf Ch. rastonii beziehen
zu kånnen. Bemerkenswert ist bei diesen Exemplaren die Provenienz
aus verhåltnismåssig grosser Tiete, wåhrend das Exemplar in Nr. 22
aus der Kiistenregion stammt. (Vergl. dazu meine Ausf. 25, S. 52 ff.)
Diese håufigste Charybdeide der Pacific wurde bereits wieder-
holt, zuletzt von Mayer (24, S. 187/188), in den philippinischen
Gewissern nachgewiesen.
Charybdea spec.
(Fig. 1).
1 Exemplar: Th. Mortensen, Der Sund Koh Chang, 6.1.1900. Nr. 36.
Obwohl dieses Exemplar gleichfalls vier Canålchen in jedem
Quadranten des Velariums zeigt, kann ich mich nicht entschliessen,
dasselbe gemeinsam mit den vorigen als Ch. rastonii zu bezeichnen,
da es sich mehrfach von ihnen unterscheidet (Fig. 1).
Der Schirm ist prismatisch mit scharfen Kanten, oben flach
gewdlbt mit seichter Einsenkung in der Mitte; die Gallerte ist nicht
schlapp, sondern dick und knorpelhart.
Auf der Exumbrella sind zahlreiche rund-
liche Håufchen von Nesselzellen verstreut.
Von den oben erwåhnten etwa gleich gros-
sen Exemplaren von rastonii unterscheidet
sich dieses Exemplar vor allem dadurch,
dass es geschlechtsreif ist und in den fast
bis an den Schirmrand reichenden Dop-
pelblåttern der Gonaden die Eizellen deut-
lich erkennbar sind. Magenrohr kurz, Pha-
cellen in jedem Interradius ein dichtes
Bischel bildend. Das Velarium ist breit;
in jedem Quadranten 4 ganz schwach ver-
Fig.1. Charybdea spec. — åstelte kleine Canålchen. Die Pedalien
Habitusbild. - Sinnesnische M 4 k:
fast geschlossen. sind ziemlich breit mit scharfer Kante nach
517
aussen. Die Tentakel sind dick und kurz, dicht mit Nesselzellen
besetzt. Ein auffallendes Merkmal ist die Form der Sinnesnische.
Dieselbe ist hier bis auf einen schmalen långlichen oder biskuit-
formig eingeschnirten Spalt geschlossen. (Vergl. diesbez. meine
Ausf25—S% 51.)
Wegen der eigenartigen Form der Sinnesnische, ferner, weil
dieses Exemplar schon bei der geringen Gråsse von 10 mm bereits
geschlechtsreif ist, méchte ich dasselbe nicht fir ein Entwicklungs-
stadium einer anderen Species betrachten. Da nur ein einziges
Exemplar vorliegt, konnte die Form des Phacelliums und die An-
ordnung der Augen auf den Sinneskolben, nicht nåher untersucht
werden. Aus dem Golfe von Siam ist bisher keine Charybdeide
bekannt.
Gen. Chiropsalmus L. Agassiz 1862.
Chiropsalmus quadrigatus Haeckel.
1 Exemplar: Marius Jensen, Johore Str. Septbr. 1901, %s 1902. Nr. 5.
Stark beschådigtes Exemplar von ca. 55 mm Hohe und Breite;
ohne Velarium, Pedalien, Magen etc., daher nicht mit Sicherheit,
wohl aber mit grosser Wahrscheinlichheit, als diese in den philip-
pinischen Gewåssern sehr håufige Form zu bezeichnen.
1 Exemplar: Chiropsalmus quadrigatus Haeckel Type. 10 miles off Rangoon.
Hv. Thalby 12/11163: 7166 Nr 752"
Dieses Original-Exemplar war schon zur Zeit, als dasselbe von
Haeckel untersucht wurde (14, p. 447), in so schlechtem Zustande
(Fehlen aller inneren Organe), dass eine genaue Diagnose auf Grund
desselben nicht gegeben werden konnte. Seither ist diese Form
so oft wiedergefunden worden, dass sie als eine der bestbekannten
Charybdeiden betrachtet werden kann und jedenfalls zu deren ver-
breitetsten und håufigsten Vertretern gehårt.. Am Type-Exemplar,
das etwas deformiert und ganz durchscheinend, gelblich, knorpel-
hart ist, sind die handfårmigen verdrehten mit 4 Gallertfingern be-
setzten Pedalien noch halbwegs deutlich zu erkennen.
518
Ordo Coronatae Vanhåffen 1892.
Fam. Atollidaåae Bigelow 1913.
(Fam Collaspidae Haeckel.)
Gen. Atolla Haeckel 1879.
Atolla bairdii Fewkes.
1 Exemplar: Th. Mortensen, 8 miles w. f. Misaki, 600 m, ”/z 1914. Nr. 18.
2 Exemplare: Th. Mortensen, ebenda, ca. 500 m. Nr. 17.
Das Exemplar Nr. 18 ist prachtvoll erhalten. Schirmbreite ca.
42 mm, Schirmhéhe ca. 15 mm, Centralscheibe 27 mm Durch-
messer, am Rande leicht gekerbt, mit Radiårfurchen, mit 24 weissen
Tentakeln, Magen dunkelbraunrot, periphere Teile des Gastrovas-
cularsystems lichter braun.
Von den beiden Exemplaren in Nr. 17 ist das eine, gråssere,
von ca. 20 mm Schirmbreite schlecht erhalten, das zweite ein gut-
erhaltenes Jugendstadium von ca. 7 mm Durchmesser von dunkel-
braungrinlicher Fårbung.
Im Anschlusse an die Ausfihrungen Mayers (24, S. 195/198),
der die Species bhairdii und wyvillei vereinigt, habe ich die vor-
liegenden Exemplare als bairdii bestimmt. Das Exemplar Nr. 18
kånnte wegen der Radiårfurchen und Einkerbungen auf der Cen-
tralscheibe eventuell als Azolla bairdii var. wyvillei Mayer bezeichnet
werden. Diese Species ist aus den japanischen Gewåssern bisher
noch nicht bekannt, in den Gewåssern der philippinischen Archipels
jedoch håufig nachgewiesen worden.
Ordo Semaeostomeae L. Agassiz 1862.
Fam. Pelagidae Gegenbaur 1856.
Gen. Pelagia Péron und Lesueur 1809.
Pelagia spec.
1 Exemplar: Hartmann, Kiste von New Irland, ?/2 1880. Nr. 9.
Schlecht erhaltenes Exemplar von ca. 18 mm Schirmdurchmesser,
nicht nåher bestimmbar.
Gen. Chrysaora Péron und Lesueur 1809.
Chrysaora spec.
1'Exemplar: Hartmann 5" 0N SBI SSO MES GESTEN RER
Schlecht erhaltenes, stark geschrumpftes, nicht nåher bestimm-
bares Exemplar von ca. 16 mm Schirmbreite.
519
Gen. Kuragea Kishinouye 1902.
Kuragea depressa Kishinouye.
Fig. 2.)
1 Exemplar: Th. Mortensen, MEE Japan; —/411914%0a 73 Få Nr 15:
1 Exemplar: Th. Mortensen, ebenda, 7/4 1914. Nr. 14.
6 Exemplare. Th. Mortensen, ebenda, Oberflåche, 25. IV. 14. Nr. 13.
Nr. 14. Schirmbreite 35 mm, Schirmhåéhe 15 mm. Schirm
flachgewålbt, am Apex leicht vertieft. Contour ein Polygon mit
16 abgerundeten Ecken. Entsprechend diesen vorspringenden rund-
lichen Ecken zeigt die Exumbrella 16 keilfårmige Gallertverdickungen,
Fig. 2. Kuragea depressa Kish.
Struktur der Exumbrella und Schirmrand.
die am Schirmrand am håchsten sind, gegen den Apex zu allmåhlig
an Héhe obnehmen und sich in der apikalen Vertiefung verlieren.
Es sind also auf der Exumbrella 16 rundliche Långsricken von Keil-
form, dazwischen 16 långliche Tåler (Fig. 2). Die Sternzeichnung
auf der Exumbrella, die stark verblasst ist, ist nun so angeordnet,
dass die Pigmentstreifen gerade iiber die Långsricken und die
Streifen mit dem stårksten Pigment gerade an den Råndern der
Gallertkeile verlaufen, die Långsrinnen (Tåler) pigmentfrei, durch-
sichtig, sind.
Schirmrand: Die Rhopalarlåppchen sind am gråssten und
breitesten, dazwischen liegen je 4 Randlåppchen, wovon die beiden
mittleren breiter sind, als die den Rhopalarlåppchen benach-
barten. [(4 X 8) + 16 = 48]. Es scheinen jedoch noch weitere
520
Randlåppchen neben den Rhopalarlåppchen in Ausbildung zu sein.
In jedes Randlåppchen geht eine Lappentasche mit ausgefransten
Enden. Zwischen je 2 Rhopalien inserieren am Schirmrand 5 Ten-
takel von der Långe ca. des Schirmradius; der mittelste ist etwas
dicker als die seitlichen und inseriert etwas håher.
Gastrovascularsystem. Die Rhopalartaschen sind an den
distalen Enden halb so breit als die Tentakeltaschen. Sie enden
in zwei lange, spitze Lappentaschnen, wåhrend die Tentakeltaschen
in. 4 kiirzeren, spitzeren Lappentaschen enden. In jedem Rhopalar-
låppchen findet sich ausser der spitzen Lappentasche der Rhopalar-
tasche selbst, noch je ein kleines Lappentåschchen, das von der Ten-
takeltasche .seitlich ausgestiilpt ist.
Die Mundarme sind gut ausgebildet, ca. 2 r lang.
Die Gonade entwickelt, stark gewulstet.
Die Fårbung weisslich rosa, Gonaden tiefrosa, Sternzeichnung
auf der Exumbrella weisslich.
Nr. 15.:50"mm Schirmbreite, 20Fmm FF hochfeingrandliere
Sculptur der Exumbrella wie oben beschrieben.
Schirmrand "(Fig "2): "6 Velarlippehenik pro okfant lse
(6 X 8) —+ 16 =— 64 Randlåppchen im ganzen. Rhopalarlåppchen
am gråssten und breitesten. Von den Velarlåppchen sind in jedem
Oktanten die den Rhopalarlåppchen benachbarten am kleinsten, dann
folgen gegen die Mitte zu je 2 zungenformige gråssere, die beiden
mittleren sind am gråssten. Es scheint jedoch, als ob neben den
Rhopalarlåppchen beiderseits noch je ein weiteres Randlåppchen in
Bildung ist. Die Tentakel, von denen der mittelste am dicksten
ist und etwas håher als die anderen inseriert, sind ca. so lang wie
der Schirmradius. Die Mundarme — 2 r. Gonade gut entwickelt,
stark gewulstet, wie ein griechisches Omega.
Die Tentakeltaschen sind distal ca. 1!/> mal so breit wie die
Rhopalartaschen.
Fårbung weisslich rosa, Gonaden tiefrosa.
Nr. 13. 6 Exemplare von 30—60 mm Durchmesser, stark
beschådigt am Schirmrand, Mundgardinen grossenteils abgerissen.
Brauner Stern auf der Exumbrella stårker oder schwåcher aus-
gebildet.
Ich habe diese Exemplare etwas genauer beschrieben, weil diese
Form bisher nur ein einziges Mal, von Kishinouye (16), gleich-
521
falls von Misaki, Japan, stammend, beschrieben wurde. Das Exem-
plar Nr. 14 befindet sich im Dactylometra-Stadium mit 48 Rand-
låppchen und 40 Tentakeln. Das Exemplar Nr. 15 zeigt die fir
das Genus Kuragea tvpischen Verhåltnisse.
Wahrscheinlich ist die von Kishinouye als ,Dactylometra
longicirrha" beschriebene Meduse von Owari Bay, nicht anders auf-
zufassen als ein Entwicklungsstadium von Kuragea depressa, was
auch, im Anschlusse an die Ausfiihrungen Mayers (23, p. 588/89),
fir Dactylometra ferruginaster Kish., Dactylometra pacifica var. fer-
ruginaster Maas, und Dactylometra quinquecirrha var. pacifica Goette
gelten dirfte.
Fam. Cyaneidae L. Agassiz 1862.
Gen. Cyanea Péron und Lesueur 1809.
Cyanea muellerianthe Haacke.
1 Exemplar: Th, Mortensen, 38? 05” S., 149? 45” E.
(i. e. zwischen Sidney und Melbourne), Ringtrawl, Oberflåche, ""/, 14. Nr. 29.
Die Beschreibung dieser Species vom St. Vincent-Golf durch
Haacke entspricht sehr gut. Das Exemplar ist 30 mm breit. Der
Schirmrand ist nach oben umgestiilpt, so dass die Umbrella urnen-
formig ist. Die Exumbrella zeigt am Apex zahlreiche kleine zapfen-
formige Gallertwucherungen, die gegen den Schirmrand zu an Gråsse
abnehmen und dort zu rundlichen flachen Nesselwarzen werden. Die
Randlåppchen selbst sind glatt. Die Beschreibung des Gastrovas-
cularsystems, insbesondere die geschwungene Form der Bursalsepten
mit zahlreichen unregelmåssigen Zacken (12, Taf. XXXVI, Fig. 2)
stimmt iiberein. Fårbung weisslich hyalin. Mayer (23, p. 602) hålt
die Cyanea muellerianthe Haackes vom St. Vincent-Golf fir ,a de-
licately pink colored variety” von Cyanea annaskala v. Lendenfeld
und nimmt sie unter die Synonyma derselben auf. Wie ich glaube
mit Unrecht. Wie ich bereits an anderen Orte (27) ausgefuihrt habe,
halte ich beide Formen nicht fir identisch, in welcher Meinung ich
auf Grund der Untersuchung des vorliegenden Exemplars von C.
muellerianthe nur bestårkt werde. Ich halte also die Haacke'sche
Species C. muellerianthe gegeniber Mayer aufrecht.
522
Fam. Åureliidae L. Agassiz 1862.)
Gen. Aurelia Péron und Lesueur 1809.
Aurelia spec.
1 Exemplar: Th. Mortensen, 7? 257 N., 123" 14” E., Oberflåche.
OIL SILÆENT PB
Stark beschådigtes Exemplar mit 5 Mundarmen und 5 Gonaden,
mit sehr dicker Schirmgallerte, weisslich-gelblich gefårbt. Das Canal-
system erinnert an Aurelia colpota Brandt mit unregelmåssigen Ana-
Sromosen. Schirmbreite 45 mm, Schirmhéhe 25 mm. Fundort in
der Nåhe der Sulu-Inseln.
Aurelia aurita (Linnaeus) Lamarck.
1 Exemplar: Th. Mortensen, Hokianga [New-Zealand], Oberflåche,
GG TÆLSSENr 20"
Måssig erhaltenes Exemplar von ca. 85 mm Schirmbreite, mit 6
Gonaden und 6 Mundarmen. Lichtrosa gefårbt, Gonaden dunkelrosa.
4 Exemplare: Th. Mortensen, Aburatsubo, Misaki, Oberflåche,
BSV |ASENTÆNG:
Gut erhaltene Exemplare von 40—80 mm Schirmdurchmesser.
Aurelia limbata Brandt.
5 rostbraungefårbte”) Exemplare von 25—45 mm Schirmdurchmesser:
Th. Mortensen, Nanaimo [Vancouver], Oberflåche, VI. 1915. Nr. 21.
Alle 9 Aurelia-Exemplare in den Praeparaten Nr. 16 und 21
weisen 16 Einkerbungen am Schirmrande auf. Trotzdem habe
ich die ersteren als aurita, die letzteren als limbata bezeichnet
wegen der verschiedenen Beschaffenheit des Gastrovascularsystems.
Die Exemplare in Nr. 16 weisen 3, die Exemplare in Nr. 21 5—9
Canaiwurzeln in jedem Genitalsinus auf. Auch ist die Anastomosen-
bildung in beiden Fållen verschieden, ebenso die Breite der Canåle.
Bigelow (3) und Verfasser (25) haben bereits friiher den Wert des
Merkmals der 16 Einkerbungen am Schirmrande sehr skeptisch beur-
teilt und dasselbe auf eine Contractionserscheinung zuriickgefihrt.
Das vorliegende Material, das auf Grund des abweichenden Baus
des Gefåssystems sicher zwei verschiedenen Aurelia-Species oder
") Die Fam. Ulmaridae Haeckel ist nach Bigelow (3, p. 94) unhaltbar.
?”) Bem. auf der Etikette: , The brown color is due to iron.”
523
Varietåten angehårt, jedoch in fast allen Exemplaren 16 Randlåppchen
zeigt, erweist mit Evidenz, dass dieses Merkmal nicht långer ver-
wertbar ist.
Nach Bigelow (3) steht es zur Zeit mit der Systematik des
Genus Aurelia so, dass neben der Species aurita Lamarck und lim-
bata Brandt, vielleicht noch zwei weitere Species als gute auzu-
erkennen sind: solida Browne und maldivensis Bigelow. Was zu-
nåchst die beiden letzteren Species betrifft, scheinen sie mir nicht
genug fundiert und dringend einer Nachuntersuchung zu bediirfen.
Fur solida wird als Hauptmerkmal die eigenartige Stellung der Rho-
palien — zweimal von demselben Autor, sonst von niemand beob-
achtet — angegeben, sonst besteht weitgehende Ubereinstimmung
mit aurita. The ,shape of the subgenital cavities" and the ,firm
and solid appearance" (5, p. 960) kann ich als Unterscheidungs-
merkmale nicht anerkennen; sie sind zu variabel und gelegentlich
auch bei Exemplaren von aurita zu beobachten. Die Species mal-
divensis ist durch besonders starke Entwicklung der Mundarme
charakterisiert, welche an jene von Cyanea erinnern sollen. Wenn
man jedoch die iiberaus grosse Variabilitåt, der Långe der Mund-
arme in Erwågung zieht, kann man diesem Merkmal kaum einen
so hoøhen Wert zuschreiben, dass auf Grund desselben allein
eine neue Species aufgestellt wird. Aus der Beschreibung (1, p. 261)
und Abbildung 22 Taf. 6 geht wohl hervor, dass bei dieser Form
5 Canalwurzeln in jedem Genitalsinus vorhanden sind, also åhnlich
wie bei AÅ. colpota.
Dass Mayer (28, S. 628) die Species l/abiata Cham. und Eys.
und /imbata Brandt fir synonym erklårt, ist ein Irrtum, auf den
bereitsVanhåffen (33, S. 430) aufmerksam gemacht hat;") /abiata,
fir welche hauptsåchlich die hervortretende Lippenpyramide charak-
teristich ist, ist zweifellos mit aurita zu vereinigen. Limbata da-
gegen ist sowohl durch das Pigment an den Radiårecanålen und am
Schirmrande, als auch durch die dichte Canalverzweigung und die
grøssere Zahl der Canalwurzeln (7—9) immerhin genigend cha-
rakterisiert; die geringe Gråsse der Subgenitalostia, ferner die velum-
1 In seiner Synopsis (23, p. 622) fihrt Mayer beide Species noch geson-
dert an; auf S. 628 erscheint limbata unter den Synonyma von labiata.
524
artige Subumbrellarmembran kommen jedoch nach Bigelow wegen
der grossen Variabilitåt der Maasse als Merkmale kaum in Betracht.
Ob limbata dann tatsåchlich als eine gute Art noch aufrechtzuerhalten
ist, scheint mir nicht so ausgemacht, als wie von Maas behauptet
(21, p. 507/8), da diese Form nicht nur auf die arktischen Gebiete
beschrånkt ist, sondern von Kishinouye auch in den japanischen
Gewåssern (Poromushiri, Saghalin) nachgewiesen wurde (17, p. 22).
Was die grosse Species aurita betrifft, so sind die meisten Au-
toren gegenwårtig geneigt, innerhalb derselben mehrere Varietåten
anzuerkennen, doch ist infolge des Versagens der meisten Merkmale
diesbeziglich noch keine Einigung erzielt. Auf Grund der bei den
Rhizostomeen gewonnenen Erfahrungen (25, 26) scheint es mir,
dass die Anzahl der Canalwurzeln in jedem Genital-
sinus in hoherem Maasse als"bisherffuridiensysite=
matik heranzuziehen ist. Allerdings ist auch dieses Merkmal
nicht constant, ja sogar individuell variabel, veråndert sich auch
mit der fortschreitenden Entwicklung. Jugendstadien, die zumeist
3 Canalwurzeln aufweisen, werden sich in den meisten Fållen kaum
anders als allgemein als ,aurita" bestimmen lassen. Trotzdem
wird man bei adulten, geschlechtsreifen Individuen in den meistzn
Fållen kaum im Zweifel sein, welche Zahl von Canalwurzeln fir
das betreffende Aurelia-Exemplar als typisch anzunehmen ist,
wenn man die Zahlen in allen Sektoren beriicksichtigt (trotz der
Schwankungen der Zahl der Canalwurzeln in den verschiedenen
Sektoren und obwohl die Eradialcanåle bald aus einem gemein-
samen Stamme, bald selbståndig aus der Magenperipherie entsprin-
gen). Dabei wird genau auf Entwicklungsstadien zu achten sein,
denn es macht den Eindruck, als wenn die Formen mit zahlreichen
(5, 7, 9) Canalwurzeln regelmåssig Entwicklungsstufen mit einer
stets håheren Zahl derselben durchlaufen, so dass z. B. 4. flavidula
mit 7 Canalwurzeln ein ,aurita-Stadium" mit 3, ein ,colpota-Sta-
dium" mit 5 Canalwurzeln durchlaufen wiirde, wozu bei /imbata
(mit 9 Canalwurzeln) noch ein ,flavidula-Stadium" mit 7 Canal-
wurzeln kåme. (Vergl. diesbez. die Ausf. Kramps, 18, p. 282/83).
Aller dieser Schwierigkeiten wohl bewusst, glaube ich doch inner-
halb der ,grossen" Species aurita vier wohlunterscheidbare Gruppen,
nicht Varietåten, auf Grund der verschiedenen Anzahl der Canal-
wurzeln feststellen zu kånnen.
525
Aurelia aurita:
Gruppe der aurita mihi colpota flavidula limbata
Zahl der 3 Fi TE" Sa
Canalwurzeln is T| 9
Geographische Re. | atlantisehe D | arktise=
: cosmopolitisch | indo-pacifisch ES AASEES
NESbLE DE p Pp amerikanisch pacifisch
Eine Aufteilung der verschiedenen Species auf diese 4 Gruppen
scheint mir vorlåufig schon aus dem Grunde kaum durchfihrbar,
weil beziiglich der Identitåt der einzelnen Formen unter den Autoren
die gråssten Meinungsverschiedenheiten bestehen und eine end-
gultige Revision der Species aurita eine Nachuntersuchung såmmt-
licher Typen-Exemplare zur Voraussetzung hat. Uberdies muss ich
es mir auch aus Raummangel versagen, in eine ausfihrliche Dis-
cussion jeder einzelnen der iiber 50 verschiedenen in Betracht kom-
menden Species einzugehen. Ich nenne daher die 4 Unterabteilun-
gen der species aurita, welche jede durch einen leicht feststellbaren
Canalsystem-Typus erkennbar ist, vorlåufig nicnt Varietåten, sondern
»Gruppen". Schliesslich scheint es mir nicht ausgeschlossen, dass
auch die geographische Verbreitung bei der Bestimmung der Zu-
gehårigkeit einzelner Exemplare zu den Gruppen eines Anhaltspunkt
liefern kånnte, wie ich es in der obigen Tabelle durchzufihren ver-
sucht habe.
Nicht ohne Bedenken habe ich dabei die Species /imbata mit
unter Aurelia aurita einbezogen. Da jedoch nach Bigelow die
Hauptmerkmale von /imbata wegen ihrer grossen Variabilitåt kaum
in Betracht kommen (s. oben S. 523), Mayer (24, p. 206) ein sehr
schånes Ubergangsstadium zwischen seiner ,/abiata" und aurita
nachgewiesen hat, scheint mir kein ernstes Hindernis dagegen vor-
zuliegen, die /imbata gleichfalls zu aurita zu ziehen, da z. B. col-
pota und flavidula sich ebenso gut unterscheiden lassen. Die /abiata
Cham. und Eys. wåre dann in die Gruppe der aurita mihi einzureihen.
Ob die Species solida in die aurita mihi-Gruppe, die Species
maldivensis in die colpota-Gruppe zu stellen ist, dartiber måchte
ich vorlåufig ein abschliessendes Urteil nicht fållen.
Ich bin mir wohl bewusst, dass mit diesem Versuche die
Discussion iiber dieses vielerårterte Thema noch keineswegs ab-
geschløssen ist.
526
Ordo Rhizostomae Cuvier 1799.7)
I. "Subordo Kolpophorae.
1) Stamm. Kampylomyariae.
Fam. Cassiopeidae.
Gen. Cassiopeia Pér. u. Les. 1809.
Cassiopeia andromeda Eschscholtz.
2 Exemplare: Marius Jensen, Johore Str. Sept. 1901, ”/s 1902. Nr. 5.
zusammen mit Mastigias ocellata Haeck. und Chiropsalmus quadrigatus.
1 Exemplar: O. Hagerup, Point Tello, %/3 1917. Nr. 7.
Nr. 5: Zwei måssig erhaltene ganz farblose Exemplare von 50
und 60 mm Durchmesser. Armscheibe und Mundarme stark ab-
gerieben, ohne grosse Kolbenblasen. Das kleinere Exemplar mit
an einer Wundstelle stark unregelmåssig verlaufenden, mit einander
verschmelzenden Radiårcanålen.
Nr. 7: Geschrumpftes Exemplar von 35 mm Schirmdurchmesser,
mit kleinen Kolbenblasen an den Mundarmen und einer grossen
Kolbenblase im Centrum der Armscheibe. Fårbung: graugrin mit
keilformigen relativ grossen weisslichen Flecken am Rande der
Exumbrella.
2) Stamm. Actinomyariae.
Fam. Cepheidae.
Gen. Netrostoma Schultze 1908.
Netrostoma coerulescens Maas.
3 Exemplare: Th. Mortensen, Jolo, Oberflåche. 18. III. 1914. Nr. 19.
Von 50, 65 und 70 mm Schirmdurchmesser.
Prachtvolle, sehr gut erhaltene Exemplare. Schirmrand. flach
oder aufgekråmpelt. Exumbrella mit grossen oder kleineren rund-
lichen Nesselwarzen bedeckt. Manche Mundarme mit sehr deut-
licher Dichotomie. Die 8 Rhopalarcanåle, von etwas breiterem Ka-
liber als die dazwischenliegenden, die typische , Dreier-Gruppe"
(26, p. 86) bildenden Interrhopalarcanåle, treten sehr deutlich her-
vor, sind nicht immer keulenfårmig verdickt. Fårbung: milchweiss.
Auf der Exumbrella und Armscheibe (zu beiden Seiten der ganz
kleinen Subgenitalostien) zahlreiche gråbere oder feinere bråunliche
") Beziglich des hier angewendeten Systems der Rhizostomae vergl. meine
AÅrb. 26 und 26 a.
527
Tupfen (brennrotes Zickzackband (20, p. 37) nicht zu sehen). Go-
naden gelblichweiss.
»Polyrhiza vesiculosa L. Agassiz".
Etiquette mit Aufschrift: Polyrhiza vesiculosa (Ehrenberg) Haeckel.
Rotes Meer (Suez). ?”/s 72. Koch. H. Nr. 30.
Uber diese Form, von der in der Sammlung des Kopenhagener
Museums das Originalexemplar vorliegt, das Haeckel in
seiner Monographie (14, p. 577) beschreibt, schrieb ich in meinen
Studien (26, p. 73): ,,Die Species P. vesiculosa aus dem roten Meer
beruht auf einer unsicheren Diagnose Ehrenbergs, die von Haeckel
auf Grund spåterer Funde ergånzt wurde, wobei infolge der un-
genauen Urdiagnose es zweifelhaft bleibt, ob die Form die Ehren-
berg vorlag, tatsåchlich identisch ist, mit jener von Haeckel nach-
tråglich so bezeichneten. Auf Grund der Angaben iber das Canal-
system des Schirms (24 kurze Interrhopalarcanåle) kånnte man sie
fur eine Netrostoma halten."
Die genaue Untersuchung des Haeckel'schen Originalpraepa-
rates ergab, dass es tatsåchlich eine Netrostoma und z.
håchstwahrscheinlich N. coerulescens Maas ist. Es lassen
sich alle charakteristischen Merkmale, wie ich sie in meiner
Discussion (26, p. 72/76) fir dieses Genus aufgestellt habe,
wiederfinden: die eigenartige Beschaffenheit der Exumbrella, die
starren Anhånge an den Mundarmen, die Gruppen der 3 Inter-
rhopalarcanåle, ja sogar die grosse blinde rhombische Netzmasche
in jedem Randlåppchen. Abweichungen bestehen nur in der Får-
bung: ,Schirm rosenrot, Knåpfe der Saugkrausen schwarzbraun,
Peitschen glashellf (14, p. 577). Das Exemplar Haeckels ist grau-
griin durchscheinend. Haeckel erwåhnt sehr zahlreiche und lange
Peitschenfilamente (långer als der Schirmdurchmesser) in Centrum
der Armscheibe. Solche sind an dem Originalexemplar nicht zu
finden, wohl aber ganz åhnliche Bildungen, wie sie von Maas im
Sibogawerk beschrieben und auf Taf. V, Fig. 45 abgebildet wurden.
Der centrale Teil des Schirmes, nach Haeckel ,dick, flach, im
Centrum tief nabelfårmig eingezogen, mit 32 dichotomen Radial-
furchen” ist ein ganz åhnliches Gebilde, wie von Agassiz und Mayer
bei Cephea dumokuroa [wahrscheinlich auch eine Netrostoma s. 26,
p. 75/76] und von mir (26, p. 77) bei Netrostoma coerulescens be-
528
schrieben, mit dem Unterschiede, dass hier diese an einen ein-
gedriickten Gummiball erinnernde Bildung im Centrum tatsåchlich
etwas ,nabelformig" eingezogen ist. Dies, sowie die 32 (?) Radial-
furchen, deren Zahl mit Sicherheit nicht festzustellen ist, scheinen
mir lediglich eine Schrumpfungserscheinung darzustellen, keinesfalls
als generisches Merkmal (14, p. 577 oben) fir das Genus Polyrhiza
verwertbar zu sein. In der tiefen Kranzfurche liegen, besonders
auf einer Seite, zahlreiche kleine Håcker; der Schirmrand ist nicht
»mit Wårzchen bestreut", sondern fast glatt und ganz peripher mit
seichten Gallertfurchen versehen. Die Mundarme zeigen die Dicho-
tomie nur sehr undeutlich.
Das Verbreitungsgebiet von N. coerulescens erfåhrt durch den
Nachweis dieser Form im roten Meer eine Erweiterung; es erstreckt
sich nun mehr von den Philippinen und dem malayischen Archipel
bis nach Suez.
Von dieser als Netrostoma erkannten Meduse von Suez behauptet
nun Haeckel (1.c.), dass sie ,sehr gut passt" zu einer vonEhrenberg
bei Tur gesammelten und als ,Cephea vesiculosa" ganz kurz be-
schriebenen Form, so dass er beide unter dem Namen , Polyrhiza
vesiculosa" vereinigt. Nach meiner Ansicht haben beide Quallen
jedoch ausser der Nåhe des Fundortes nur die Fårbung gemeinsam.
Da in der kurzen lateinischen Diagnose Ehrenbergs (8, p. 260) jede
Angabe iber das Gefåssystem des Schirmes fehlt, ist eine Identi-
fizierung von ,Cephea vesiculosa" kaum måglich, doch glaube ich
aus der glatten Exumbrella, die der Håcker und Warzen entbehrt,
dem Schirmrand, den zahlreichen Blåschen an den Mundarmen etc.
auf eine Cotylorhiza schliessen zu diirfen, indem ich auf meine
Differentialdiagnosen der Genera Cephea, Cotylorhiza, Netrostoma
(26,p.75/77) verweise. Ich måchte daher stark bezweifeln,
dass die Koch'sche von Suez, und die Ehrenberg'sche
von Tur stammenden, von Haeckel unter dem Namen
»Polyrhiza vesiculosa" L.Ag. vereinigten Medusen, identisch
sind. Die Netrostoma coerulescens Maas behålt ihren Namen bei,
weil Polyrhiza vesiculosa Agass. nicht identisch mit Polyrhiza vesi-
culosa Haeckel ist.
529
3) Stamm. Krikomyariae.
Fam. Mastigiadidae.
Gen. Mastigias L. Agassiz. 1862.
Mastigias papua (Lesson) L. Agassiz.
(Fig. 3.)
9 Exemplare: Th. Mortensen, der Sund bei Koh Chang, ”/e 1900. Nr. 36.
Von 15—60 mm Schirmdurchmesser.
2 Exemplare: Th. Mortensen, Taba bay, Mindanao, Oberflåche,
12. III. 14. Nr. 12. Von 45 und 50 mm Schirmdurchmesser.
9 Exemplare: Th. Mortensen, Koh-Chang, ”/1 1906. Nr. 1, måssig erhalten,
(zusammen mit Acromitus flagellatus (Haeck.)
von 10—20 mm Schirmdurchmesser.
1 Exemplar: H. Koch, Ostasien, ”/s 72. H. 191. Nr. 8. (ganz zerfetzt).
Haeckel determ. Mastigias papua 191.
1 Exemplar: Th. Mortensen, Olutanga, Mindanao, Oberflåche, 8. III. 1914.
Von ca. 15 mm Durchmesser, zusammen mit Mastigias ocellata Haeck. Nr. 10.
1 Exemplar: ,,Rhizostomid.f 192. Indischer Ozean, 4? s. B., 106? 0. L.
Gr. Strandgaard. Stark geschrumpft. (Haeckel 192.) Nr. 3.
Im ganzen liegen 23 Exemplare verschiedener Gråsse dieser im
Indik, den chinesisch-japanischen Gewåssern, im malayischen Ar-
chipel und Pacifik sehr verbreiteten Form vor. Die Beschreibung
des Gastrovascularsystems, die Kishinouye (15, p. 87) fir die
synonyme M. physophora (Plate XIII, Fig. 2) und Maas fur die
var. sibogae (20, p. 68, Taf. VII, Fig. 58) gibt, stimmt recht gut.
Fast stets, auch bei den jingsten Stadien sind 7, håchstens 8 Ca-
nalwurzeln zu zåhlen. Wenn ich hier das Gefåssystem des Schirms
nach einen Injections-
praeparat nochmals dar-
stelle (Textfig. 3), so
geschieht dies wegen
des hier ganz besonders
deutlich zu beobachten-
den radiåren Verlaufes
der Zwischencanåle, die
in den Interradien fast
ganz parallel zu den
Rhopalarcanålen verlau-
fen. Dort stehen auch
Fig. 3. Mastigias. papua (Lesson). Gefåssystem
die gestreckten Canal- des Schirmes nach einem Injectionspraeparat.
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 73. 34
530
wurzeln etwas weiter auseinander als in den Perradien, wo sie
weniger gestreckt sind und kirzer werden. Gelegentlich steht das
intracirculåre Anastomosennetz mit den Rhopalarcanålen entweder
gar nicht, oder nur ganz vereinzelt, oder nur interradial in direkter
Verbindung. Der Ringcanal wird manchmal recht undeutlich und
ist schwach ausgebildet. Im extracirculåren Netz ist von der Radiår-
tendenz der Canåle nicht mehr viel wahrnehmbar. Die Rhopalar-
canåle treten jedoch auch in dieser Zone durch ihre bedeutendere
Rreite (und auch durch die Fårbung) deutlich hervor. Das extra-
circulåre Netzwerk reicht bis in die Randlåppchen und sieht man
hier tiefere oder seichtere Einbuchtungen entsprechend den Ein-
kerbungen ,der Randlåppchen.
Såmmtliche Exemplare entbehren der sonst so charakteristischen
Nesselwarzen und Farbflecke auf der Exumbrella. Die gut erhaltenen
Stiicke sind gelblich weisslich. Die beiden schånen Exemplare Nr. 12
zeigen die Endanhånge der Mundarme an der Basis lichtviolett ge-
fårbt, ebenso die Rhopalarcanåle (vergl. Maas” Angaben bei der var.
sibogae (20, p. 68). Bei den meisten Exemplaren sind die Endanhånge
vorhanden. Bei Nr. 12 sind sie lang (35—40 mm), ebenso bei den
Jugendstadien (Nr. 1), wo sie långer als der Schirmradius sind. Die
Exumbrella ist feingekårnelt.
Mastigias ocellata (Modeer).
(Fig. 4, 5, 6.)
1 Exemplar: Th. Mortensen, Koh Chang, "/s 1900,
von ca. 100 mm Schirmbreite. Nr. 37.
1 Exemplar: Th. Mortensen, Olutanga, Mindanao, Oberflåche, 8. III. 14,
von 20 mm Schirmdurchmesser. Nr. 10.
1 Exemplar: Hj. Jensen, Java, 7/2 08. Nr. 6. 22: mm breit:
1 Exemplar: Marius Jensen, Johore Str., Sept. 1901. Nr. 5.
Ca. 35 mm Schirmdurchmesser.
1 Exemplar: ,,Rhizostomaf, 5? 30? N., 106” 0. L. Jan. 1884. Gerstenberg 84.
Nr. 2. Ca. 45 mm Schirmbreite.
1 Exemplar: ,,Cotylorhizaf ?(Stylorhiza?), indischer Ocean, 1? N. Br., 104 0. L.
Strandgaard. II. 194. Nr. 31.
Mastigias ocellata, welche mit M. papua so ziemlich das Verbrei-
tungsgebiet gemeinsam hat, unterscheidet sich von dieser in erster
Linie durch die viel gråssere Zahl anastomosierender Canalwurzeln
zwischen je zwei Rhopalarcanålen, in zweiter durch die Form der
531
h F/
2
=
'udmneed
ne
U
Fig. 4. Mastigias ocellata (Modeer). Gefiissystem des Schirmes
nach einem Injectionspraeparat.
Mastigias ocellata (Modeer).. Mundarm mit
Ansicht von aussen.
Fig. 5. Mastigias ocellata Fig. 6.
(Modeer). Mundarm mit injiciertem Gefåssystem.
injiciertem Gefåssystem.
Seitenansicht. 349
532
Mundarme, die nicht so schlank pyramidal, schmal, sondern viel
breiter, gedrungener als bei M. papua sind und bereits stark an
die breit-blattformigen Mundarme der Versuriden (auch durch die
Selbståndigkeit der Låppchen) erinnern. Als weitere Unterschiede
sind dann noch die — bei jiingeren Exemplaren sehr undeutlichen
— rundlichen Augenflecke der Exumbrella und die gråssere Zahl
der Randlåppchen zu erwåhnen. Die beste Beschreibung von M. ocel-
lata hatVanhoffen (30, p. 33/34) gegeben. Auf Grund der Unter-
suchung des schånen Exemplars Nr. 37 låsst sich dieselbe in einigen
Punkten ergånzen.
Es fållt schon durch seine bedeutende Gråsse (ca. 100 mm
Schirmdurchmesser) auf, da das gråsste bisher bekannte Exemplar
dieser Species 60 mm nicht iberschreitet. Die Exumbrella
zeigt polygonale weissliche Felderung. Innerhalb der ziemlich grossen,
meist 6 seitigen Polygone sind flache, wenig gewålbte, breite, runde,
farblose Nesselwarzen zu sehen, die am Apex am gråssten und
håchsten, gegen den Schirmrand immer flacher und kleiner werden.
Der Schirmrand ist unregelmåssig gelappt (Textfig. 4), die Rho-
palarlåppchen sind kleiner als die Velarlåppchen,.die, 10—12 an
Zahl, grøsser oder kleiner, zwischen zwei Randkårpern ziemlich
unregelmåssig abwechseln.
Der Oberarm der Mundarme (Textfig. 5, 6) ist nicht
»ungefåhr ebenso lang als der Unterarmf" (c. I. p. 34) sondern viel
kiirzer, ca. 7/3 desselben. Die Unterarme sind sehr breit, in der
Seitenansicht ein fast gleichseitiges Dreieck bildend (bei M. papua
ein gleichschenkliges) mit sehr selbståndigen Seitenlåppchen, die im
distalen Teile stark auf die Seitenflåchen iubergreifen. Die Mem-
branen der Mundarme zeigen vielfach långliche Fenster, also ein
åhnliches Verhalten wie bei V. anadyomene uud den Lobonemidae
nachgewiesen. Die Bildung von Fenstern ist also kaum als Merk-
mal zu verwenden, sondern steht offenbar mit der Ausbildung der
breiten Seitenflåchen der Mundarme in ursåchlichem Zusammen-
hang. Das Canalsystem der Mundarme ist auch am nicht in-
jicierten" Objekt" "deutlich 'sichtbar FE sr enstidretty pisser
Verhåltnisse der tripteren Mundarme: den schwachen
Stammcanal in der Mitte des Unterarms, einen starken, sich frih-
zeitig vom Oberarmcanal abzweigenden ventralen Ast und zwei
starke die abaxialen Saugkrausen versorgenden Åste, die an der
533
Årmspitze anastomosieren. Von der Vereinigungsstelle geht ein
schwacher Canal in den Endanhang, der ein compliciertes Canal-
system mit zahlreichen Anastomosen besitzt. Die die abaxialen
Saugkrausen versorgenden Canåle liegen hier mehr dem Stamm-
canal genåhert als sonst, etwas weiter entfernt vom abaxialen Rande,
und entsenden in die Seitenåstchen, die mit Saugkrausen besetzt
sind, ziemlich starke Canålchen, die wieder mit einander anasto-
mosieren, bevor sie ihre Endåstchen in die Saugkrausen entsenden.
Die obersten, proximalen Saugkrausen werden durch besonders gross-
kalibrige Canåle versorgt. Die Unterarme sind ca. 35 mm breit
und ebenso lang, die Endanhånge messen ca. 30 mm. Dieselben
sind platt, dreikantig oder dreifluigelig und am Ende dicht mit weiss-
lichen Nesselbatterien besetzt. In der Mitte sind sie meist etwas
eingeschnirt. Zwischen den Saugkrausen der Mundarme sehr zahl-
reiche sitzende, kurz- oder ziemlich langgestielte Saugkålbchen.
Die Armscheibe trågt zaklreiche Peitschenfilamente, wovon
ein centrales und vier periphere besonders lang sind.
Fir das Canalsystem des Schirmes (Textfig. 4) sind
15—20 (meist 18) Canalwurzeln charakteristisch, ferner, dass die
flaschenformigen Perradialcanåle nur wenig oder gar nicht, die Inter-
radialcanåle jedoch an zahlreichen Stellen und beiderseits mit dem
intracirculåren Anastomosennetz in Verbindung stehen. Dieses Ver-
halten stimmt auch mit der Fig. 6 Taf. V. Vanhåffens (in welcher
jedoch zu wenig Canalwurzeln eingezeichnet sind), wåhrend nach
seiner Beschreibung (Il. c. p. 33/34) alle 8 ocularen Radialcanåle
flaschenfårmig sind und ,das dichtmaschige Netzwerk der Anasto-
mosen mit den breiten ocularen Canålen nur durch den Ringcanal
in Verbindung steht”. Die Magenkreuzschenkel sind breit, kurz
und bilden mit einander einen spitzen Winkel. Die Subgenitalostien
sind mehr als doppelt so breit als die Armpfeiler. Trotz seiner
auffallenden Gråsse ist das Exemplar anscheinend nicht geschlechts-
reif. Aus der grossen Zahl von Peitschenfilamenten auf der Årm-
scheibe glaube ich auf ein weibliches Exemplar schliessen zu durfen.
Fårbung: weisslich-gelblich. Bei den jiingeren Exemplaren von
20 und 22 mm Breite ist die Exumbrella gleichmåssig fein gekår-
nelt, bei den etwas gråsseren von 35 und 45 mm treten zwischen
den Kørnern bereits mehr oder minder zahlreich die typischen
rundlichen flachen Nesselwarzen auf. Die jiingsten Exemplare zeigen
534
8 rundliche Randlåppchen pro Oktant. Mit Ausnahme der Exem-
plars Nr. 5 mit pyramidalen, schmalen Mundarmen, die auch an
den Seitenflåchen dicht mit Saugkrausen besetzt sind, zeigen alle
Jugendexemplare bereits die breiten Mundarme von der Form eines
gleichseitigen Dreiecks in Seitenansicht. Die 4 langen Peitschen-
filamente zwischen den Armbasen und ein centrales klåppelartiges
Filament sind regelmåssig zu beobachten. Das Canalsystem des
Schirmes weist bei Nr. 10, 5 und 2 zwolf bis vierzehn Canalwurzeln,
bei Nr. 6 fiinfzehn, bei 31 sechzehn bis achtzehn Canalwurzeln auf,
also eine allmåhlige Vermehrung der Zahl der Canalwurzeln mit
zunehmendem Wachstum, wobei jedoch bereits die jungsten Stadien
mehr als 10,Canalwurzeln haben. Die Perradialcanåle sind gestreckt,
anastomosieren nur selten oder gar nicht mit dem intracirculåren
Netze. — Nr. 6 zeigt eine Anomalie in der Ausbildung des Canal-
systems an einer Wundstelle, die an andern Orte besprochen werden
wird. Dort befinden sich auch am Schirmrande 3 Rhopalien un-
mittelbar neben einander. Fårbung gelblich-weisslich oder gelblich-
grunlich. Von Farbflecken auf der Exumbrella keine Spur.
Fam. Versuridae.
Gen. Versura Stiasny 1921.
Versura anadyomene (Maas).
Fig. 7.)
1 Exemplar: Th. Mortensen, der Sund bei Koh-Chang, Y; 1900
ca. 11 cm Schirmbreite. Nr. 35.
Von dieser Species liegen mir nunmehr die beiden einzigen be-
kannten Exemplare vor.) Das Mortensen'sche Exemplar befindet
sich in einem besseren Erhaltungszustande als das von Maas (2)
und mir (26) beschriebene, von der Siboga Expedition erbeutete,
so dass sich manche Verhåltnisse z. B. Struktur der Exumbrella,
Schirmrand, Muskulatur etc. besser erkennen lassen.
Die Oberflåche der Exumbrella ist von zahlreichen långlichen
ovalen oder polygonalen rundlich vorgewålbten Nesselwarzen be-
deckt, die stellenweise in Reihen angeordnet sind und deren gråsste
håchste sich in der Umgebung des Apex befinden, wåhrend sie
”) Goettes (9) Crossostoma ,,a" von Anjer ist zwar von Maas als identisch
mit C. anadyomene erkannt (20, p. 56), jedoch nicht nåher beschrieben.
535
gegen den Schirmrand zu immer flacher werden und schliesslich
fast gånzlich schwinden. Die zwischen den papillåsen Nessel-
warzen liegenden Furchen sind ziemlich tief und erzeugen auf der
Oberflåche der Exumbrella eine Art System anastomosierender
Rinnen, die stellenweise eine deutliche ,radiåre Verlaufstendenz"
zeigen (20, p, 56). Der Schirm ist nicht so schlapp wie bei dem
Siboga-Exemplar, doch ist auch hier der Schirmrand sehr viel
dinner als die centralen Teile der Umbrella und als es bei dem
im Habitus sonst sehr åhnlichen Exemplar Nr. 37 von Mastigias
ocellata der Fall ist. — Der Schirmrand ist nicht ganz so regel-
måssig gelappt als von Maas (20) in Fig. 65 Taf. VII dargestellt,
doch lassen sich auch hier die abwechselnden grossen rund-
lichen, stark vorspringenden, und dazwischen die kleinen zun-
genfårmigen Låppchen beobachten, die durch ziemlich tiefe Gallert-
furchen am Schirmrand geschieden sind. Es sind ca. 7—10 grås-
sere Låppchen pro Oktant zu zåhlen, gelegentlich sind sie auch
gespalten. Die Rhopalarlåppchen sind stets viel kleiner, das exum-
brale Sinnesgribchen ist schwach entwickelt und faltenlos.
Von der Form der Mundarme gibt Maas (20) eine gute Be-
schreibung, die von mir (26) in einigen Punkten ergånzt wurde.
— Gegeniber Mastigias ocellata sind die Oberarme långer, die
Unterarmfliigel breiter, die Seitenflåchen weniger dicht mit den hier
noch selbståndigeren tief eingeschnittenen Seitenlåppchen besetzt,
— wodurch eine Fiederung vorgetåuscht wird — auch fehlen hier
die vielen Kolbenanhånge und die langen Endkolben. Der Haupt-
unterschied liegt jedoch in der Gefåssversorgung. Es
findet sich hier abermals das von mir ausfuihrlich beschriebene
und abgebildete (26, Taf. III, Fig. 27 u. 28) System doppelter
parallellaufender schmaler Canåle, wåhrend die Mundarme
von Mastigias ocellata viel dickere einfache Canåle aufweisen.
Auch sind die Anhånge an den Mundarmen anders be-
schaffen. Es gibt deren zahlreiche, dicke, kurzstielige, keulen-
formige mit complicierten Canalsystem zwischen den Saugkrausen
regellos verteilt, ohne dass eine besondere Bevorzugung der Årm-
spitze wahrzunehmen wåre (an 2 Armen sind die auf der distalen
Armspitze sitzenden allerdings gråsser als die iibrigen), dazwischen,
besonders zwischen den axialen Saugkrausen viel långere walzen-
formige Anhånge von 10—15 mm Långe, dicht mit Nesselzellen
536
besetzt und von einem einfachen Kanal der Långe nach durchzogen,
die anders aussehen als die noch viel långeren dinnen fadenfår-
migen Nesselpeitschen an den Oberarmen und der Armscheibe. Sie
sind manchmal stark verdickt, gleichen bei grøésserer Långe doch
den gedrungenen kurzstieligen Anhången, ohne dass ich sie mit
denselben, wegen der abweichenden Kanalversorgung, gleichwertig
halten måchte, auch nicht mit den Nesselpeitschen wie Maas (20,
p. 53). Im Zentrum der Armscheibe sitzen einige isolierte Saug-
krausenstiicke. Sie bilden jedoch keine ausgesprochene Zottenro-
Fig. 7. Versura anadyomene (Maas). Gefåssystem des Schirmes
nach einem Injectionspraeparat.
sette. Im Mittelpunkt der Armscheibe inseriert ein ca. 60 mm langer
Nesselfaden, der am basalen Teile ziemlich dick ist und sich faden-
artig verdiinnt. Mehr peripher, bereits zwischen den Basen der
Mundarme entspringen 8 etwas schwåchere Nesselpeitschen, dazwi-
schen jedoch auch zahlreiche noch diinnere und kiirzere.
Die Magenkreuzschenkel sind hier auffallend gestreckt (Textfig.
7) vom Zentrum gemessen ca. 40 mm lang, peripheriewårts etwas
breiter als central, an der breitesten Stelle ca. 15, an der schmal-
sten ca. 10 mm breit, wåhrend bei dem etwa gleich grossen Masti-
gias-exemplar die Magenkreuzschenkel ca. 30 mm lang und ungleich-
537
måssig bis ca. 70 mm breit sind, also viel plumper, gedrungener er-
scheinen; die Magenkreuzschenkel bilden hier mit einander fast einen
rechten Winkel, bei Mastigias ocellata einen spitzen Winkel. [Ver-
gleiche Figuren 4 und 7).
Das Kanalsystems des Schirmes stimmt mit dem des
Siboga-exemplares iber ein. Vor allem ist auch hier wieder ein
deutlicher Ringkanal festzustellen (Vergl. Fig. 7 mit 26, Taf. I, Fig.
7). Die perradialen Canåle sind kurz und dick, zeigen jedoch nicht
immer die regelmåssig flaschenformige Gestalt, sondern einen mehr
unregelmåssigen Umriss. Die interradialen Rhopalarcanåle heben
sich auch hier wieder erst eine betråchtliche Strecke vom Magen-
grunde entfernt aus dem Anastomosennetz heraus, obwohl ihr Ur-
sprung in der Ecke der Magenkreuzschenkel deutlich wahrzunehmen
ist. Die Netzmaschen des Anastomosennetzes sind perradial meist
mehr gestreckt als interradial, sie sind im ganzen aber långlicher,
von dinneren Anastomosen gebildet als bei Mastigias. Das intracir-
culåre Anastomosennetz steht an vielen Stellen mit den Interradial-
canålen, mit den Perradialcanålen jedoch nur ganz vereinzelt oder
nur durch den Ringkanal in Verbindung. Die den Interrialcanålen
sowie dem Ringcanal anliegenden Netzmaschen sind meist durch
besondere Gråsse ausgezeichnet. Die Zahl der Canalwurzeln ist
etwas grøsser als bei dem Siboga-exemplar.
Ein Quadrant zeigt eine abnorme Ausbildung eines Interradialca-
nals und des benachbarten Anastomosennetzes.
Die Muskulatur der Subumbrella zeigt deutlich 8 Knotenpunkte
in den Ocularradien, ganz åhnlich wie bei dem Siboga-Exemplar
[trotz gegenteiliger Bemerkung von Maas (20, p. 59)], ganz iber-
einstimmend wie bei , Versura palmata" Haeckels und Mastigias
ocellata.. Die concentrischen Ringfalten convergieren gegen jene
8 Knoten hin mit deutlicher Krimmung nach aussen und innen.
In der Gegend des Ringcanals ist die Gallerte und Muskulatur
stark verdickt. Diese verdickte ringfårmige Zone fållt ziemlich
steil gegen den viel diinneren Schirmrand ab, wodurch eine Art
Stufe gebildet wird, in deren Knie sich eben der Ringcanal und
die Muskelfalte vorfindet. Die weiten Subgenitalostien, die viel
schmåleren Pfeiler, der Mangel an Papillen, der einheitliche Sub-
genitalsaal sind beiden Exemplaren gemeinsam. —
538
»Versura palmata Haeckel«.
1 Exemplar: ,,Versura palmata« Haeckel, Cheribon (Java), Andrea H. 186.
Type Nr. 33.
Beziiglich dieser Form schrieb ich in meinen Studien (25, p. 104/5),
dass die Beschreibung derselben durch Haeckel (14, p. 606/7)
trotz der schånen Abbildungen (l. c. Taf. XXXX Fig. 9—12) in
mehrfacher Hinsicht mangelhaft ist, dass die Mundarme trotz der
unklaren, zu Missdeutung Anlass gebenden Darstellung (,,handfår-
mig, flach ausgebreitet, doppelt gefiedert, mit 6—7 Paar Fieder-
åsten") doch wohl als tripter zu betrachten sind, dass das Canal-
system und die Fårbung nicht nåher beschrieben wurden, dass es
sich somit im ganzen um eine sehr unsichere Type-Species (Mayer,
23, p. 68) handelt.
Da mir' hier das Original-ExemplarHale'ckelrskuor=
liegt, kann ich seine Beschreibung in mancher Hinsicht ergånzen
und berichtigen.
Das Objekt ist nicht schlecht erhalten (Alkohol-Conservierung);
ca. 60 mm Schirmdurchmesser, doch macht es den Eindruck ganz
abgeplattet, gepresst zu sein. Schirm und Mundarme sind wie
plattgedruckt, die letzteren liegen åhnlich wie bei Cassiopeia der
Subumbrella dicht an, was auch mit Haeckels Fig. 9, Taf. XXXX
stimmt. Auf der Armscheibe, in dem Subgenitalraum, zwischen
Saugkrausen Spuren von rot-gelben Minium (?) was vielleicht auf
einen Injektionsversuch Haeckels zuriickzufihren ist.
Die zahlreichen rundlichen Nesselwarzen auf der Exumbrella,
die Haeckel nicht erwåhnt, der fast ganzrandige Saum des Schir-
mes, die nicht gefiederten, sondern tripteren Mundarme
mit zahlreichen Saugkålbchen zwischen den Saugkrausen uud etwas
grosseren Endkolben am Armende, die perradialen, breiten, nicht
gestreckten Magenkreuzschenkel, liessen schon bei Beginn der
Untersuchung dieses Exemplars starke Zweifel gegen die Bestim-
mung desselben durch Haeckel aufkommen. Die sodann durch-
gefuthrte Injektion des Schirmes und der Mundarme mit Delaf. Hae-
matoxylin ergab, dass hier ein Exemplar von Mastigias vor-
liegt und z. håchstwahrscheinlich die Species ocellata (Mo-
deer) nach der weitgehenden Uebereinstimmung im Gastrovascularsy-
stem, (vergl. die Abb. Textfig. 4 von Mastigias ocellata), wåhrend gegen-
uber der einzigen gut bekannten Versura (Crossostoma) anadyomene
539
grosse Unterschiede bestehen (Verhalten der interradialen Rhopa-
larcanåle, einfache Canåle in den Mundarmen, Magenkreuzschenkel
usw.). Hamann's Angaben (12 a, p. 254), dass in den Mundarmen
nur ein Hauptcanal unterschieden werden kann, der in die Fieder-
åste Gefåsse abgibt, dass also das Gefåssystem der Mundarme sich
eng an das von Haplorhiza und Cannorhiza anschliesst, sind un-
richtig; vielmehr finden wir hier die fir die tripteren Mundarme
typische Canalversorgung. Als ein wesentlicher Unterschied gegen-
uber Mastigias wurde von der Haeckel'schen Beschreibung schliess-
lich nur die eigenartige Anordnung der Muskulatur in Knotenpunk-
ten ubrig bleiben. Da ich nun aber das ganz analoge Verhalten
bei Mastigias ocellata nachgewiesen habe, entfållt auch dieser Un-
terschied. — Ållerdings sind bei dem Haeckel'schen Exemplar
keine sehr grossen Endkolben, aber doch immerhin deutlich sicht-
bar, auch von Haeckel beobachtete gråssere Kolben an den Årm-
enden vorhanden, somit ist auch dieser Unterschied ohne Belang.
Auch der Fundort (Cheribon) spricht nicht dagegen. Von einer Zotten-
rosette im Zentrum der Armscheibe ist tatsåchlich keine Spur vor-
handen. Die ,Versura palmata" Haeckel ist somit als Masti-
gias ocellata Haeckel erkannt, die species palmata von Ver-
surateinzuziehen. —
Wahrscheinlich ist Goettes Exemplar b von ,, Crossostoma nov.
spec.” mit langen Endkolben an den Armen auch mit Maszigias
ocellata identisch (9, p. 837, vergl. auch meine Ausf. 26, p. 106).
Dass die ,Versura palmata" Goettes eine Mastigias und keine , Ver-
sura" ist, wurde von Vanhåffen und Maas (20, p. 69) nachge-
wiesen. —
Was die beiden anderen Versura-Species Haeckels, V. pinnata
und vesicata betrifft (auf Grund der sehr unvolkommenen Beschrei-
bungen Haeckels von Mayer (23) und mir (26) wohl als identisch
mit Versura påalmata gehalten), so ist deren Stellung im System
G,jedenfalls zwar sehr unsichere Species, die kaum aufrecht zu er-
halten sind", 26, p. 105), durch den Nachweis, dass ,, Versura palmata"
identisch mit Mastigias ocellata ist, womåglich noch unsicherer ge-
worden. Es wird sich dabei wohl auch nur um Mastigias-exem-
plare handeln. V. vesicata hat sogar auch den langen Endkolben
an den Mundarmen (14, p. 646).
Kritik der Genus Versura. Da hier das Type-Exemplar von Ver-
sura palmata Haeckel und ein zweites Exemplar von Versura ana-
540
dyomene (Maas) vorliegt, låsst sich meine Discussion iiber das
Genus Versura in einigen Punkten ergånzen, die Diagnose berich-
tigen (26, p. 103). Versura palmata Haeckel scheidet hier vollstån-
dig aus, da diese Forin zum Genus Mastigias gehårt. Es bleibt
daher vom Genus Versura nur V. anadyomene als einzige sichere
Art ibrig. Da die beiden Exemplare dieser species sehr gut iber-
einstimmen, kånnen einige Merkmale, (Canalsystem des Schirms, der
Mundarme etc.), die ich friher, als måglicherweise von individueller
Natur, fir belanglos gehalten habe, in die Genus-Diagnose aufgenom-
men, andre weggelassen werden (Muskulatur).
In meiner Genusdiagnose (26, p. 103) habe ich das Canalsystem
des Schirms als iibereinstimmend mit dem Canaltypus Mastigias
angegeben, wobei ich allerdings auf pag. 38 auf die sich spåter-
hin måglicherweise ergebende Notwendigkeit einer diesbeziglichen
Abånderung hingewiesen habe. Es ergibt sich nun, dass fir das
Genus Versura ein eigener Canaltypus aufzustellen ist, der zwar
dem Typus Mastigias åhnlich, aber doch in mancher Hinsicht davon
abweichend ist. Fur Versura ist charakteristisch: 1.) die interradialen
Rhopalarcanåle entspringen scharf radial vom Magen selbst, sind schon
von ihrer Ursprungstelle an deutlich erkennbar. Allerdings sind
sie dort ziemlich schmal, nicht breiter als die benachbarten Canal-
wurzeln und schwellen allmåhlig, in einer betråchtlichen Entfernung
vom Magengrunde gegen den Ringcanal zu an, wo sie ihre gråsste
Breite erlangen. Ihr Verlauf beginnt also nicht erst in
der Mitte (20;p. 759), "auch 'entstehlenksrerni eh term
the fusionofanumberofanastomosing vessels, which
arise from the interradialsidestortherstommcehnenes
p. 685). 2.) Die Netzmaschen des intracirculåren Anastomosen-
netzes sind besonders in den perradialen Teilen gestreckter und
werden von diinneren Canålchen gebildet als bei Mastigias. 3).
Die Perradialcanåle stehen mit dem intracirculåren Anastomosen-
netz nur durch den Ringcanal, sonst fast nicht, in direkter Ver-
bindung. 4.) die gestreckten Magenkreuzschenkel. Als weitere
Merkmale des Genus Versura kommen dann noch hinzu: das
System von Doppelcanålenin den Mundarmen, die lång-
lichen papillåsen durch radiåre Rinnen getrennte Nesselwarzen der
Exumbrella, die an Gråsse etwa den Netzmaschen des Anastomo-
Sennetzes entsprechen. Dagegen entfållt die Muskulatur als Merk-
541
mal. Die Diagnose des Genus Versura hat also nunmehr
folgendermassen zu lauten:
Rhizostome mit breiten, dreifligeligen Mundarmen, die secun-
dåre tief eingeschnittene auch auf den Seiten inserierende Låpp-
chen zeigen, an denen die Saugkrausen sitzen. Mit keulenfårmigen
oder walzenfårmigen Blasen, besonders an den beiden abaxialen
Fligeln und Peitschenfilamenten am axialen Fligel und im Centrum
der Armscheibe. Canalsystem: Ringcanal vorhanden. 8 Rhopalar-
canåle bis zum Schirmrand reichend. Perradialcanåle flaschenformig,
Interradialcanåle an der Ursprungsstelle dinn, gegen den Ringcanal
allmåhlig stårker anschwellend. Extracirkulåres feinmaschiges bis
in die Randlåppchen reichendes, intracirculåres weitmaschiges ge-
strecktes Anastomosennetz, das mit dem Magen, dem Ringcanal
und den Interradialcanålen in direkter Verbindung steht. Mund-
arme mit Canalpaaren. Subgenitalporticus einheitlich, geråumig.
Subgenitalostien breit. Keine Subgenitalpapillen. Zirkulår-Musku-
latur. Magenkreuzschenkel lang und schmal. Armscheibe quadra-
tisch mit 4 Hauptkanålen. 8 Rhopalien. Exumbrales Sinnesgrib-
chen ohne Falten. Exumbrella mit polygonalen unregelmåssigen
grossen Nesselwarzen.
Fam. Leptobrachidae.
Vacat.
II. Subordo Dactyliophorae.
4) Stamm. Inscapulatae.
Fam. Lychnorhizidaåe.
Vacat.
Fam. Catostylidae.
Gen. Catostylus. L. Agassiz. 18362.
Catostylus tagi (Haeckel).
k (Fig. 8.)
2 Exemplare: Th. Mortensen, Taboga, Panama, Oberflåche 10. XI 15. (zusam-
men mit Stomolophus meleagris).
1. Exemplar: Th. Mortensen, Taboguilla, Panama, Tiefe: ca. 5 m, Sand
und Schalen 16. XI. 15. Nr. 24.
Von dieser gut bekannten Form (14, 11) ist vorallemder
Fundort, bei Panama, von hohem Interesse.
542
Haeckel (14) sowie Grenacher und Noll (11) fanden sie
im Tajo, bei Lissabon. Greeff (10) fand sie dann auch an der
portugiesischen Kiste bei Setubal und Arrabida (1. c. p. 566).
Greeff will diese Meduse dann weiters an der Kiiste von Senegam-
bien, in der Miindung des Rio Geba wiedergesehen haben; auf
Grund von Beobachtungen vom fahrenden Schiffe aus.
»Obgleich es mir nicht gelang, eines Exemplares habhaft zu wer-
den, so kann ich doch meinerseits nicht den allergeringsten Zwei-
fel an der Art-Identitåt der westafrikanischen Meduse mit der
Crambessa tagi der portugiesischen Kiste hegen — zuweilen tauch-
ten wahrhaft riesige Exemplare auf, wie ich sie in Portugal nicht
sah, fast alle zeigten eine lebhaft goldgelbe oder bråunliche Får-
bung, der einzige mir erkennbare Unterschied gegen die portugie-
sischen Crambessen, die nur zum geringeren Teile durch eine
gelblich oder bråunliche Fårbung auffallen.f Eine Identifizierung
vom fahrenden Schiffe aus, ohne genauere Untersuchung eines Exem-
plars, scheint mir bei der schwierigen Bestimmung dieser Medusen —
es sind ja immerhin doch Unterschiede (Gråsse, Fårbung) zu beob-
achten gewesen — doch sehr gewagt und kann ich deshalb die Fund-
ortsangabe Greeffs (Senegambien, Rio Geba) nicht fir vollståndig
gesichert halten. Noch geringere Zuverlåssigkeit hat Greeffs Nach-
weis von Crambessa tagi an der Kiiste von Sierra Leone auf Grund
lediglich von Mitteilungen ,von gut beobachtenden und zuverlåssigen
Reisenden", ganz zweifelhaft ist die Angabe iiber die Medusen aus
der Niger-Miindung, ,von deren Unterseite lange Fåden ausgingen,
die beim Schwimmen in riesiger Ausdehnung im Wasser nach-
gezogen wurden" (p. 568, Fussnote). Hier handelt, es sich håchst-
wahrscheinlich um Semaeostomeen! Mayer (23, p. 668) gibt als Ver-
breitungsgebiet von C. tagi an: Senegambia, Africa to France. Ich
halte jedech vorlåufig nur den Fundort , Tajo-Mindung" fir gesichert.
Hier liegen nun von ganz anderen, sehr entfernten Fundorten
3 Exemplare vor und zwar Taboga, Panama und Taboguilla, Pa-
nama, die einen an der Oberflåche, die anderen mit der Dredge
in 5 m Tiefe gefischt. Ein gråsserer Fluss ist nicht in der Nåhe.
Da an der Identitåt der Exemplare von Panama mit jenen vom
Tajo auf Grund der weitgehenden Uebereinstimmung in anato-
mischer Hinsicht trotz kleiner Unterschiede kaum zu zweifeln ist,
ist dieser Nachweis an 2 so entfernten Fundorten sehr auffallend;
vorlåufig, meines Wissens, ohne Analogon bei den Rhizostomeen.
543
Das Exemplar Nr. 24 von Taboguilla ist plattgedrickt und nur
måssig erhalten. Von den 2 Exemplaren von Taboga misst das
eine 55 m Schirmbreite und 27 mm Hohe, das andere hat 33 mm
Durchmesser bei 13 mm Hohe. Die Form des Exumbrella ist die
eines abgestutzten Kegels. Die Exumbrella ist am flachen Apex
mit unregelmåssig angeordneten långlichen, ziemlich stark vorsprin-
genden Nesselwarzen bedeckt, die gegen den Schirmrand an Gråsse
abnehmen. Von ,den dendritischen Radialfurchen auf der Exum-
Fig. 8. Catostylus tagi (Haeckel). Gefåssystem des Schirmes nach einem
Injektionspraeparat.
brellaf Haeckeis ist nichts zu sehen. Am Schirmrande selbst sind
ziemlich tiefe Gallertfurchen und zwar sind die 4 Paar gleich-
schenkligdreieckigen Velarlåppchen durch tiefere und långere Gal-
lertfurchen von einander getrennt. — Die Rhopalarlåppchen sind
kiirzer und kleiner (Textfig. 8.) Die Mundarme beider Exemplare
sind zum Teile stark verletzt, die unbeschådigten typisch tripter
— auch in Bezug auf die Canalversorgung — und ohne An-
hånge. Die von Haeckel (13, p. 523) beschriebene und in
Fig. 2 Taf. XXXVIII abgebildete, in dem Winkel zwischen zwei
benachbarten Magenkreuzschenkeln centripetal vorspringende Sub-
genitalklappe von der Form einer dreiseitigen Pyramide konnte
544
ich an den Exemplaren von Panama nicht finden, wohl aber die
von Grenacher und Noll beschriebenen (11, p. 136) und in
Fig. VIII Taf. V abgebildeten måchtigen Gallertlamellen, die tat-
såchlich an Klappen erinnern. (Textfig. 8).
Canalsystem des Schirmes. Fiir das intracirculåre Netz
stimmt mehr die Abbildung (13, Taf. XXXVIII Fig. 2) Haeckels,
als jene von Grenacher und Noll (11, Taf. IV Fig. XII). Es ist
ein auffallend breites Netz von breiten Anastomosen, das fast bis
an die Armpfeiler heranreicht und zwischen je 2 aufeinanderfol-
genden Radiårcanålen schwach bogenfårmig vorspringt. Die Insel-
chen, Verlétungsstellen, in dem intracirculåren Anastomosennetz
sind sehr klein, auch sind sie relativ wenig zahlreich, wåhrend das
Anastomosennetz in der Abbildung von Grenacher und Noll
viel lockerer und weitmaschiger ist. Die interradialen Rhopalar-
canåle zeigen auch hier die von Haeckel nicht erwåhnten, von
Grenacher und Noll aber genau beschriebenen kurzen oder långe-
ren Auslåufer bald nach ihrem Ursprung, wåhrend solche blind-
endigende Ausbuchtungen an den perradialen und adradialen (inter-
rhopalaren) Canålen nicht zu finden sind. Beziglich des extracir-
culåren Netzes liegen Angaben von Haeckel und Greeff vor.
Haeckel beschreibt in den extracirculåren Gefåssfeldern zwischen
den verlångerten Radiårcanålen je 3 radiale kurze Canåle zwischen
den Anastomosen, die an beiden Enden gabelspaltig sind. Greeff
»kann diese Beobachtung beståtigen”, (10. p. 569). An den mir vor-
liegenden Exemplaren sind so gestaltete Canålchen nicht zu sehen,
sondern aus dem Ringcanal treten, entsprechend den Einschnitten
zwischen den Randlåppchen, zahlreiche Canålchen heraus, die eine
Strecke weit noch deutlich sich durch ihr stårkeres Kaliber zwischen
dem feinen Maschenwerk herausheben, aber dann sich allmåhlich
verlieren.
Die Fårbung beider Exemplare ist bråunlich-gelblich.
Zum Vergleiche bilde ich hier das Gefåssystem des Schirms
mit den Subgenitalpapillen bei der nahverwandten Form Catoszy-
lus townsendi Mayer aus dem malayischen Archipel ab. (Textfig. 9)
Auch hier steht des intracirculåre Netz, wie ja fir das Genus
Catostylus obligat (Vergl. 26, p. 138), in jedem Sector mit dem Ringca-
nal und beiderseits mit den Radialcanålen in direkter Verbindung;
545
doch sind die Netzmaschen viel weiter und die Inseln gråsser und
geringer an Zahl, der ganze Habitus des Netzes entspricht mehr
der Fig. VIII Taf. IV von Grenacher und Noll. Die interradi-
alen Rhopalarcanåle zeigen hier weniger Auslåufer, dagegen sprin-
gen vom intracirculåren Netz zahlreiche zipfelformige Aussackun-
gen gegen die Armscheibe zu vor. Im extracirculåren Netz finden
wir ganz åhnliche Verhåltnisse in beiden Fållen; auch bei C. towns-
endi sind in der Nåhe des Ringcanals zahlreiche radiale Canål-
Fig. 9. Catostylus townsendi Mayer. Gefåssystem
des Schirmes nach einem Injectionspraeparat.
chen zu sehen, die eine Strecke weit zwischen den feinen Netz-
maschen des Anastomosenwerks sich deutlich herausheben.
Dem interradialen Rhopalarcanal aufgelagert findet sich hier
tatsåchlich jene von Haeckel als ,Subgenitalklappef von mir als
»Subgenitalpapillef bezeichnete an Form sehr variable Gallertwuche-
rung, auch die ,Genitalklappenf Grenacher's und Noll's sind
zu beobachten, doch in anderer Form. Die letzteren erscheinen hier
dreilappig, ein distales mehr herzfårmiges Gebilde im Winkel
zwischen den Magenkreuzschenkeln und zwei muschelartige Bil-
dungen, die in ihrer Wålbung die Gonaden einschliessen und aus
den Subgenitalostien hinausragen, Doch sind diese Gallertgebilde
iiberaus variabel in Form und Gråsse (Textfig. 9).
Vidensk. Medd. fra Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd: 73: 35
546
Gen. Acromitus Light. 1914.
Acromitus flagellatus (Haeckel).
(Textfig. 10, 11, 12.)
1 Exemplar: Th. Mortensen, Klong Prao, 9/3, 1900 Nr. 38.
11 Exemplare: Th. Mortensen, Koh Chang, 7/1, 1900 Nr. 1.
5 Exemplare: Th. Mortensen, Der Sund bei Koh Chang 6/1 1900. Nr. 36, zu-
sammen mit Masrigias papua (Lesson)
1 Exemplar: Marius Jensen, Johore Str., Septbr. 1901.
ngl
PA i
ande pg 1//
"/
FADE Hi DEDE gå
KRO ik2
BG QW MW o i
Fig. 10. Acromitus flagellatus (Haeckel). Gefåssystem des Schirmes nach einem
Injektionspraeparat.
Nr. 38 ist ein prachtvolles, sehr gut erhaltenes Exemplar von
ca. 100 mm Schirmdurchmesser, von milchweisser-gelblicher Farbe.
Die fingerfårmigen, ,,wolligenf Mundarme, sind vom Centrum der
AÅrmscheibe bis zur Armspitze gemessen (ohne Endfaden) ca. 95—
100 mm lang. Dieses Exemplar ist in Bezug auf die Ausbildung
des Canalsystems des Schirmes von Interesse. In Fig. 10 bilde
ich zum Vergleiche das normal ausgebildete Gefåssysstem eines
etwa gleich grossen Exemplares aus dem Material des Rijksmuseums
van Natuurlijke Historie in Leiden åb und verweise auf meine Ab-
bildung 26, Taf. II Fig. 10. Wir sehen hier in beiden Fållen
547
zahlreiche kleine Inseln in 2 oder 3 Reihen im 'intracirculåren
Anastomosenetz; dasselbe ist ziemlich breit, reicht fast bis an die
Armpfeiler heran, der Ringcanal ist zwar wohl ausgebildet, aber
gleichmåssig und nirgends auffallend verdickt.
Bei dem Exemplar Nr. 38, dessen Gefåssystem in Fig. 11 dar-
gestellt ist, finden wir dagegen das intracirculåre Anastomosennetz
auf eine primitivere Weise ausgebildet. Nicht nur, dass nur wenige
sehr grosse Inseln und sehr breite Anamostosen sich vorfinden;
es sind auch selbståndige vom Ringcanal ausgehende långere oder
Fig. 11. Acromitus flagellalus (Haeckel). Gefåssystem des Schirmes, nach einem
Injektionspraeparat.
kiirzere centripetale Aussackungen vorhanden, die mit dem ibrigen
Anastomosennetz noch nicht in direkter Verbindung stehen. Dieses
selbst steht auch nur an einer Stelle mit dem perradialen Rhopa-
larcanal in Verbindung. Der Ringcanal ist hier auffallend breit und
zeigt in den Adradien eigentiimliche bogenfårmig abgegrenzte Ver-
breiterungen oder Sinus gegen das extracirculåre Netz zu. Die
adrialen Canåle sind sehr kurz und dfters teiderseits angeschwol-
len. — Die Netzmaschen des extracirculåren Netzes sind recht gross
und gestreckter als sonst, die Anastomosen dazwischen kråftiger.
Dieses Verhalten des intracircularen Netzes, mit seinen vereinzelten
selbståndig gebliebenen centripetalen Aussackungen vom Ringcanal
aus gewinnt an Bedeutung, wenn wir es mit dem dem viel juingeren
Stadium vergleichen, das in Textfig. 12 abgebildet ist. (Aus Praep.
Nr. 1 stammend).
548
Nr. 1 enthålt 11 Exemplare von 6—30 mm Schirmdurchmesser,
nicht in bestem Erhaltungszustande befindlich. Die Mehrzahl dieser
jugendlichen Exemplare, dieschon
alle die typisch ausgebildeten
fingerformigen, wolligen Mund-
arme mit langen Endfåden be-
sitzen, zeigen jenes vereinfachte
Entwicklungsstadium des Canal-
systems mit einer einfachen Reihe
grosser Inseln und 2—4 Långs-
anastomosen, die durch eine
N Å|
v ” are
VD na SA TA
Fig. 12. Acromitus flagcllatus (Haeckel). Queranastomose mit einander
Gefå issystem des Schirmes eines jugend- . 5
lichen Exemplares nach einem und mit dem Rhopalarcanal in
t. . j 2
TD SORG PS DES DAER Verbindung stehen, wie von mir
(26, p. 134) beschrieben und dort in Textfig. 9 dargestellt.
Das jiingste vorliegende Stadium von 6 mm Schirmdurchmesser
zeigt noch primitivere Verhåltnisse des Gefåssystems. (Textfig. 12).
Zwischen je zwei aufeinanderfolgenden Radialcanålen gehen hier
nåmlich vom Ringcanal centripetal 1 oder 2 blindsackåhnliche
Ausstilpungen oder Canåle aus, die noch nirgends anastomosieren
ein ganz åhnlichesvermaltenkalsonvwviekwinkeskrenE
lebens beiden"AngehorigentdestGenustlrychnornkaan
treffen und wie es in ganz iibereinstimmender Weise von mir
bei Jugendstadien des Genus Catostylus (Vergl. die Beschreibuug
und Abbildung von Catostylus townsendi juv., 28, Textfig. 1) nach-
gewiesen wurde. Dieses von mir als ,,Lychnorhiza-stadiumf"
von Catostylus bezeichnete Entwicklungsstadium des Ge-
fåssystems finden wir also auch hier: Auch dasiG'enus
Acromitus durchlåuft in Bezug auf die Entwickelung sei-
nes Gefåssystems ein ,Lychnorhiza'-Stadium. Ich fiige noch
hinzu dass das extracirculåre Netz, wie aus Fig. 12 hervorgeht, mit
ziemlich breiten Netzmaschen bis in die Randlåppchen reicht und
dass hier zwischen je 2 Rhopalien 4 breite abgerundete Velarlåppchen
zu finden sind. Die Mundarme sind noch nicht so wollig, noch
nicht so dicht mit Saugkrausen besetzt und etwas flacher als bei
den ålteren Entwickelungsstadien, weisen jedoch bereits den langen
an der Basis verdickten Endfaden auf, der fir Acromitus flagellatus
so charakterisch ist.
BESS OR
549
Vergleichen wir nun die beiden Textfig. 11 und 12 mit einan-
der, so sehen wir, dass das Exemplar Nr. 38 trotz seiner Gråsse
von 100 mm Schirmdurchmesser noch primitive Verhåltnisse in
seinem Gefåssystem aufweist, indem wir hier neben einigen bereits
anastomosierenden Centripetalcanålchen auch einige selbståndig
gebliebene vorfinden. Daraus und aus dem jiingerem Stadium (Fig.
12) ergibt sich, dass dasintracirculåreAnastomosennetz
bei Acromitus in ganz uibereinstimmender Weise gebil-
det wird wie bei Catostylus, nåmlich durch Ausstilpung
centeipetaler Canileaus'demRingcanalldie'erstspå-
termik spåater mit elnandert manden itdeneR ho pa Fa'r=
Gamalenkin direkte Verbindungtrtretent (Vers Fl damit
meine Ausfihr. 28, p. 111). Dies ist nicht ohne Bedeutung fir
die Erkenntnis der Phylogenie und der Verwandtschaft der ver-
schiedenen Genera der Dactyliophorae unter einander. —
Nr. 36 enthålt 5 gut erhaltene Exemplare von 15—45 mm
Schirmbreite, eines davon mit beschådigten Mundarmen und Ano-
malie des Canalsystems. Schliesslich liegt noch 1 Exemplar von
40 mm Schirmdurchmesser von Johore Street vor.
Vorkommen. Das Verbreitungsgebiet dieser fruher als so
selten betrachteten Form erfåhrt durch den Fundort Klong Prao
und Koh Chang!) eine neuerliche Erweiterung (Vergl. die Ausf.
26, p. 135). Acromitus flagellatus wurde von Mayer (24) von Bor-
neo und den philippinischen Gewåssern (allerdings als ,Lychnorhiza
bornensis" beschrieben, doch von mir (1. c.) als identisch mit 4. f.
erkannt), von Maas (als ,Himantostoma flagellatumf) und mir (26, p.
135) in den Gewåssern des malayischen Archipels nachgewiesen.
Haeckel hat dieselbe als Himantostoma flagellata, 14, S. 629),
bei den Sandwich-Inseln nachgewiesen. Es kommt nun noch der
EFundort von Mortensen von der siamesischen Kiste hinzu, so
dass sich fir Acromitus flagellatus ein Verbreitungsgebiet ergibt,
das sich vom malayischen Archipel långs der asiatischen Kiste
bis nach den Sandwich-Inseln zu erstreckt.
+) Laut Mitteilung Dr. Th. Mortensens »liegt Koh Chang an der Ostseite
des Siam-Golfes und Klong Prao ist eine Lokalitåt — kleiner Fiuss mit
Mangrove an der Miindung — auf der Insel Koh Chang."
550
5) Stamm. Scapulatae.
Fam. Rhizostomidae.
vacat.
Fam. Stomolophidae.
Gen. Stomolophus Agassiz.
Stomolophus meleagris L. Agassiz.
(Textfig. 13, 14).
10 Exemplare: Th. Mortensen, Taboguilla, Panama, Oberflåche 3. I. 16.
Nr. 26.
5 Exemplare: Th. Mortensen, Taboga, Panama, Oberflåche 10. XII. 15.
Nr. 25.
2 Exemplare: Th. Mortensen, San Diego Bay, Cal., 7. IX. 15. Nr. 23.
Die in Praep. Nr. 26 enthaltenen Exemplare sind sehr interes-
sante Jugendstadien, iber welche an anderem Orte ausfihrlich be-
richtet wird (29), ebenso iber ein in Praep. 25 enthaltenes ganz
glashell durchsichtiges Entwicklungsstadium von ca. 10 mm Schirm-
breite. Die iibrigen Exemplare in Praep. 25 sind rostbraun ver-
fårbt.. Das gråsste ist fast kugelig, von Kindskopfgråsse, misst ca.
80 mm Durchmesser. Der Armbusch ragt gerade mit den Årm-
spitzen aus der Schirmhåhle, das Mundrohr ist fast ganz verwachsen.
Exumbrella feingranuliert. Zahl der Randlåppchen nicht mit Sicher-
heit feststellbar, weil nur wenig eingekerbt, zahlreiche ziemlich
tiefe und weitreichende Gallertfurchen. Viele schwarzviolette grosse
und kleine Punkte und Flecken in einer breiten Zone gegen den
Schirmrand zu, Apex und Seitenflåchen ganz frei davon. Die beiden
ubrigen Exemplare von 60 und 30 mm Schirmbreite, 30 und 15 mm
Schirmhåhe, ferner die Exemplare in Nr. 23 von 65 und 70 mm
Schirmbreite und 40 und 42 mm Hohe zeigen meist 16 rundliche
wenig eirigekerbte Randlåppchen pro Oktant und nur wenige ziem-
lich grosse oder viele ganz kleine lichtviolette Punkte gegen den
Schirmrand zu.
Auf Grund des vorliegenden Materiales, das z. T. prachtvoll
erhalten ist, konnten nunmehr die Mundarme genauer untersucht
werden. Wie in meinen Studien 26, S. 171/172 erårtert, ist trotz der
vielen Abbildungen und Beschreibungen noch immer nicht einwand-
frei festgestellt, ob die Mundarme von Stomolophus tripter oder
dichotom gebaut sind. Dort habe ich jedoch die Vermutung aus-
gesprochen, ,dass die Verzweigung der Mundarme bei diesem Genus
BRO TREN
551
wahrscheinlich als eine durch weitgehende Verwachsung des Manu-
briums modificierte dichotomische zu betrachten ist",
Tatsåchlich ist diese Frage an dem åltesten Exemplare von 80
mm Durchmesser in Praep. 25 kaum zu entscheiden. Die in ihrer
ganzen Långe verwachsenen Mundarme sind an ihren freien Enden
so compliciert gestaltet und dicht mit Saugkrausen besetzt, dass
sich ein Urteil dariiber kaum fållen låsst. Wohl aber ist dies måg-
lich an den jingeren vortrefflich erhaltenen Exemplaren von Praep.
23. Hier sehen die Mundarme anders aus als von Mayer (23,
SOS Taf... 76 Fig"2) sund mir. (26, 'S: 172; Taf IV Fig: -S7:a)
beschrieben und dargestellt. Am besten entsprieht noch die Abbil-
Fig. 13. Stomolophus meleagris L. Agassiz. Seitenansicht der Armbusches, zwei
Mundarme herausgeschnitten (in Textfig. 14 dargestellt), Schnittflåche schraffiert,
etwas schematisch.
dung Vanhåffens (30, Taf. III, Fig IV), doch ist seine Beschrei-
bung ganz unzureichend.
Auf Grund der Untersuchung des Materiales des Rijksmuseums
in Leiden schrieb ich (26, S. 171), dass ,zu jedem Mundarme
zwei abaxiale starke knorpelige mit selbståndigen Saugkrausen tra-
genden Seitenåstchen besetzte Åste oder Fligel und zwei axiale (ven-
trale) kleinere spitzigere mit kleinen Saugkrausen besetzte Åstchen
gehåren." Durch diese ventralen Åstchen wird eine Art Oesophagus
gebildet, der in der erwåhnten Figur etwas ubertrieben gross dar-
gestellt ist. Ein åhnliches Bild gibt auch Mayer (l. c.). Bei den
Mortensen'-schen Exemplaren sind keine besonders grossen axialen
Seitenåstchen zu sehen. (Textfig. 13). Dadurch entsteht hier eine
kreisrunde Offnung zwischen den Mundarmen, die in eine trichter-
oder kegelfårmige Vertiefung fiihrt, welche so gross ist, dass man fast
552
den kleinen Finger hineinstecken kann. Die Lamellen, welche die
Saugkrausen tragen, schliessen hier keinen abgekammerten, mehr
oder minder rundlichen Hohlraum ein, sondern reichen, wie in
Vanhåffens Fig, 4 Taf. III dargestellt, viel weiter hinauf gegen
die Subumbrella. Die Mundarme sind eben bei diesen jingeren
Exemplaren noch nicht so stark verwachsen und noch nicht so
compliciert gestaltet als bei den offenbar ålteren von Mayer und
mir untersuchten Exemplaren. Uebrigens verhalten sich die ver-
schiedenen Exemplare in dieser Hinsicht sehr abweichend. In
Uebereinstimmung mit Mayer's Befunden (23, S. 711, Pl. 76 Fig.
1) konnte ich an Jugend-Exemplaren mit Sicherheit nachweisen,
Fig. 14. Stomolophus meleagris L. Agassiz. Mundarme von der Abaxial-Seite gesehen
mit injiciertem Gefåssystem.
dass die Mundarme dichotomisch angelegt werden (29). Auch an den
viel ålteren Exemplaren von 60 und 70 mm Schirmbreite ist der
dichotome Bau der Mundarme deutlich zu erkennen, besonders dann,
wenn die Unterarme seitlich nicht der ganzen Långe nach ver-
wachsen sind. Fig. 14 stellt zwei Mundarme mit injiciertem Gefåss-
system von der Abaxialseite dar, demselben Exemplar angehårend
als in Fig. 13 dargestellt. Hier ist schon åusserlich die Dichotomie
zu erkennen. Noch deutlicher tritt sie in Erscheinung, wenn das
Gefåssystem in den Mundarmen mittels Injection mit Delaf. Hae-
matoxylin sichtbar gemacht wird. Das jeden Mundarm versorgende
Hauptgefåss geht ungeteilt bis zur Gabelstelle, (entsendet jedoch in
manchen Fållen Seitencanålchen in die Seitenåstchen), wo es sich
scharf dichotom teilt und in jeden Gabelast einen Seitenzweig ent-
sendet, der sich an der zweiten Gabelstelle nochmals dichotom
9553
teilt und in alle Saugkrausen tragende Seitenåstchen Seitencanål-
chen abgibt.
Die Gefåsse sind hier tatsåchlich noch offene Rinnen, wie Ha-
mann bereits angab. (12a, S. 252). Bei den ålteren Museumsexem-
plaren sind sie jedoch bereits geschlossene Råhren. (26, S. 272).
Die Mundarme von Stomolophus sind also dichotom ge-
Fbaut.… (Vergl. Haeckels Fig. 5 Taf. XXXV und Vanhåffens
Abb. Taf. III Fig. 5). In dieser letzteren Figur tritt die Dichotomie
besonders deutlich hervor, da die knorpeligen Endzipfel hier auf-
fallend lang sind. In manchen Fållen erhålt man Bilder, die sehr
stark an die Verhåltnisse der Mundarme bei Netrostoma erinnern.
(Vergil. 20, Taf. 5 Fig. 46). Die Mundarme zeigen Tendenz zur
Fiederung und werden erst gegen das distale Ende zu deutlich
dichotomisch. Auch sind die Saugkrausen tragenden Seitenåstchen
nur auf der Axialseite zu finden, die Saugkrausen oft stark biischel-
formig ausgebildet, die Mundarme gegen die Subumbrella
zu umgebogen. Der Subgenitalraum zeigt vier getrennte
Subgenitalhåhlen. Papillen vor denSubgenitalostien (von
Mayer beobachtet) konnten nicht nachgewiesen werden. —
Stomolophus agaricus Haeckel.
1 Exemplar: Punt Årenas, Ørsted, 1849.
Ty pes Nes (199)
Das vorliegende Original-Exemplar Haeckels ist, wie bereits
Haekel 1879 (14) schrieb, ,unvollkommen conserviert", so dass
er seine Species-Diagnose nur ,mit Hilfe einer Farbenskizze aus
dem Museum in Kopenhagen” entwerfen konnte (S, 599/600). Es
ist se;ther noch weiter geschrumpft, denn Haeckel gibt fir die
Schirmbreite 170 mm, fir die Schirmhéhe 70 mm an, wåhrend
ich 80 resp. 50 messe! Die genaueren Verhåltnisse des Schirm-
randes sind nicht mehr zu erkennen. Nach Haeckel ist fir die
Species agaricus neben dem flachen Schirm und der Zahl der Velar-
låppchen besonders der ,,måchtige Armbusch kennzeichnend, der
fast ganz ausserhalb der flachen Schirmhåhle liegt”. Tatsåchlich
zeigt das Haeckel'sche Exemplar ein langes Manubrium. Dies kann
jedoch kaum ein Speciesmerkmal bilden, da die Exemplare von
Stomolophus meleagris in Bezug auf die Långe des Manubriums
ziemlich stark variiren und bei den meisten Exemplaren des Arm-
554
busch ausserhalb der Schirmhåhle liegt. Die ,flache Schirmhåhlef
ist wohl nur auf Deformierung zuriuickzufuihren. Die Scapuletten
sind lang und schmal. Dass sie, was Haeckel behauptet, ganz
ausserhalb der Schirmhåhle liegen, was ein sehr gutes Merkmal
gegeniiber St. meleagris wåre, kann ich nicht beståtigen. Auf der
einen nicht deformierten Seite der Umbrella erreicht der untere
Rand der Schulterkrausen”gerade den Schirmrand, sie liegen also,
wie sonst auch, innerhalb der Séhirmhåhle. —
Wahrscheinlich nat man es hier mit einem stark geschrumpf-
ten und entstellten Exemplar von Stomolophus meleagris Agass. zu
tun. Auch der Fundort (Punt Arenas, Costarica) spricht dafir.
Auf Grund. der Haeckel'schen Beschreibung kann die Species
agaricus nicht långer aufrecht erhalten werden und ziehe ich die-
selbe ein. — (Vergl. auch 23, S. 710 und 26, S. 170.).
Nachtrag. In dem Material des Kopenhagener Zoologischen
Museums befinden sich noch 2 Exemplare von Scyphomedusen,
die mir wegen ihrer ziemlich bedeutenden Gråsse nicht zugesendet
werden konnten. Auf Grund von Beschreibungen und Skiz-
zen, die ich Herrn Mag. sc. P. Kramp verdanke, glaube ich die-
selben wie folgt bestimmen zu kånnen:
Catostylus mosaicus L. Agassiz.
1 Exemplar: Th. Mortensen, Port Hacking, N.S. Wales, 10. III. 1915.
Schirmdurchmesser ca. 140 mm. Långe der Mundarme ca. 85
mm. Farblos, ohne Flecken auf der Exumbrella; auf der letzteren
netzformige Struktur. " 16—20 schmale Velarlåppchen pro Oktant.
Alle 16 Radialcanåle stehen durch Anastomosen mit dem intracircu-
låren Anastomosennetz in direkter Verbindung. (Gefåssystem des
Schirmes zeigt auf Grund der auf mein Ersuchen durch Herrn
Kramp vorgenommenen Injection mit Delaf. Haematoxylin die fir
das Genus Catostylus typischen Verhåltnisse.) Mit Gallertwuche-
rungen auf der Subumbrella. -—
In den australischen Gewåssern sehr verbreitete Form.
555
Chirodropus spec. nov.?
i Exemplar: Th. Mortensen, Margosatubig, Dumanguilasbay [Mindanao,
Philippinen], Kiste, 10. III, 1914.
Schirmhåhe ca. 120 mm, perradialer Durchmesser ca. 110 mm,
interradialer Durchmesser ca. 125 mm; 7 Tentakel auf jedem Pe-
dalium, biserial angeordnet. Form der Rhopalargruben ein liegen-
des Biskuit. Mesenterien ganz schmale Leisten. Gastralfilamente
scheinbar in vertikalen Reihen. Exumbrella glatt. Taschenarme
haben eine andere Form als bei Chirodropus gorilla Haeckel (nicht
gefiedert), Canalsystem im Velarium wie bei dieser Form.
Hier liegt måglicherweise eine neue Species dieses bisher nur
ein einzigesmal aufgefundenen Genus vor. Der Fundort (Philip-
pinen) ist bemerkenswert, da die nåchst verwandten Species im
atlantischen Ocean (St. Helena, Nieder Guinea), nachgewiesen wur-
den. Sehr wertvolles Objekt, da das Genus Chirodropus bisher von
keinem anderen Forscher als Haeckel gesehen wurde (23, p. 518).
Es ist jedoch nicht ausgeschlossen, dass das Exemplar sich bei
nåherer Untersuchung als eine Chiropsalmus-AÅrt erweist.
Leiden, Rijksmuseum van Natuurl. Historie, August 1921.
på
ED 4
2)
3)
S
(e7)
70)
12)
12a) 1882.
556
Litteratur-Verzeichnis.
1901—1904. Bigelow, Henry B., Medusae from the Maledive Islands.
1909.
1913:
1838.
1905.
) 1909.
1837.
1886.
1881.
) 1876.
1887.
Bull. Mus. Comp. Zoolog. Harvard Coll. Vol.
XXXIX, Cambridge.
== Reports on the scientific res. of the exp. to the
eastern tropical pacific. XVI. The Medusae.
Mem. Mus. Comp. Zoolog. Harvard Coll. Vol.
XXXVII, Cambridge.
— Medusae and Siphonophorae collected by the
U. S. fish. steamer ,,Albatross” in the north-
western pacific, 1906. Proceed. U. S. National
Mus. Vol. 14. Washington.
Brandt, J. F., Ausfuhrliche Beschreibung der von C. H. Mertens
auf seiner Weltumsegelung beobachteten Schirm-
quallen. Mem. Acad. St. Pétersbourg. ser. 6.
Vol. 4. St. Pétersbourg.
Browne, E. T., Scyphomedusae. Fauna and Geography of the
Maldive and Laccadive Archipelagoes. Vol. II.
Suppl. I., Cambridge.
= The Medusae of the Scottish National Antarctic
Expedition. Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh. Vol. XVI.,
Edinburgh.
Chamisso, A.de et Eysenhardt, C. G., De animalibus qui-
busdam e classe vermium Linneana. fasc. 2.
Acad. Caes. Leop., Nova Acta. Vol. 10. Bonn.
Ehrenberg, H., Uber die Akalephen des rothen Meeres und
den Organismus der Medusen der Ostsee. Abh.
Kon. Akad. Wiss. Berlin 1835. Berlin.
Goette, Å., Verzeichnis der Medusen. welche von Dr. Sander,
Stabsarzt of S. M.S. Adalbert, gesammelt wurden.
Sitzber. Preuss. Akad. Wiss. Berlin. II. Halbbd.
Berlin.
Greeff, Richard, Uber Crambessa tagi E. Haeckel. 2Zool. Anz.
IV. Jahrg. Leipzig.
Grenacher, H. und Noll, F. C. Beitråge zur Anatomie und
Systematik der Rhizostomeen. Abh. Sencken-
bergischen Naturf. Ges. Frankfurt. 10. Bd. Frank-
furt a/M.
Haacke, Wilhelm, Die Scyphomedusen des St. Vincent-Golfes.
Jenaische Zeitschr. f. Naturw. 20. Bd. Neue F.
13 BAM ena
Hamann, Otto, Die Mundarme der Rhizostomeen und ihre
Anhangsorgane. Jenaische Zeitschr. f. Naturw.
ISTBIÆENE USE SSB denna
13) 1869. Haeckel, Ernst,
14) 1879. =
SOM
Uber die Crambessiden, eine neue Medusen-
Familie aus der Rhizostomeen-Gruppe. Zeitschr.
f. wiss. Zool. Bd. 19. Leipzig.
Das System der Medusen. Mit Atlas. Jena.
15) 1895. Kishinouye, K., Decription of a new Rhizostoma, Mastigias
16) 1902, =—
BI 909 TI
ISS Kram p, Pauls ES
19) 1897—99. Maas, Otto,
20) 1910. =
21) 1906. =
22) 1909. ==
physophora, nov. spec. Zoolog. Mag. Vol. II,
Nr. 78, Tokyo.
Some new Scyphomedusae of Japan. Journ.
Coll. Science. J. Univ. Tokyo. Vol. XVII. Art. 7.
Tokyo.
Some Medusae of Japanese Waters. Journ.
Coll. Science. J. Univ. Tokyo. Vol. XXVII. Art. 9.
Tokyo.
Medusae collected by the ,, Tjalfe" Expedition.
Vidensk. Meddel. Dansk naturh. Foren. Bd. 65.
Kopenhagen.
Die Medusen. Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard
College. Vol. XXII. Nr. 1. Cambridge.
Die. Scyphomedusen der Siboga-Expedition.
Uitk. op. zool., bot., oceanogr. en geol. Gebied.
Siboga Exped. Monogr. 11. Leiden.
Die arktischen Medusen. Fauna Arctica. Bd. IV.
Eiertsmejena:
Japanische Medusen. Beitr. zur Naturgeschichte
Ostasiens, herausg. von Dr. F. Doflein. Abh.
K. bayr. Akad. Wiss. 1. Suppl. Bd. Miinchen.
23) 1910. Mayer, Alfred Goldsb., Medusae of the world. Vol. III. The Scy-
24) 1917. ==
phomedusae. Carnegie Inst., Washington.
Report upon the Scyphomedusae collected by
the United States bureau of fisheries steamer
»Albatross" in the Philippine-Islands and Malay
Archipelago. National Museum Bull. 100. Vol. 1.
Part 3. Washington.
25) 1920—21. Stiasny, Gustav, Die Scyphomedusensammlung des Natur-
26) 1921. =
26 a) 1921. =
2) —= FEE
historischen Reichsmuseums in Leiden. I, II, HI,
Zoolog. Mededeel. Rijksmus. Leiden. Deel Ve
Leiden.
Studien iiber Rhizostomeen mit besonderer Be-
riicksichtigung der Fauna des Malayischen Archi-
pels nebst einer Revision des Systems. Capita
Zoologica. I. Afl. 2. ”s Gravenhage.
Das System der Rhizostomae. Tijdschr. d. Ned.
Dierk. Vereen. (2) Dl. XVIII. Afl. 2. Leiden.
Scyphomedusae. Results of Dr. E. Mjobergs
Swedish scient. Exp. to Australia 1910—1913.
K. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handl. Bd.65. Stockholm.
28) 1921.
29) 1922.
30) 1888.
317 1903.
32) 1906.
33) 1913:
558
Stiasny, Gustav, Mitteilungen iber Scyphomedusen. 1) Ein
Vanhoffen,
25—5— 1922:
Jugendstadium von Catostylus townsendi Mayer.
Zoolog. Mededeel. Rijks Mus. Natuurl. Historie,
Deel VI. Leiden.
Zur Kenntnis der Entwicklung von Stomolophus
meleagris L. Agass. Vidensk. Meddel. Dansk
naturh. Foren. Bd. 73. Kopenhagen.
Ernst, Untersuchungen uber semaeostome und
rhizostome Medusen. Bibl. Zoologica. Heft. 3.
Cassel.
Die acraspeden Medusen der deutschen Tiefsee-
Expedition 1898—1899. Wiss. Erg. der deutschen
Tiefseeexp. Vol. 3. Jena.
Acraspedae. Nordisches Plankton. Lief. 5.
Teil 11. Kiel und Leipzig.
Uber westindische Medusen. Zoolog. Jahrb.
Suppl. 11. 3. Heft… Jena.
559
Correction to
Papers from Dr. Th. Mortensen's Pacific Expedition
1914—16. X. Hjalmar Broch: Studies
on Pacific Cirripeds.
Ibla segmentata (Studer).
Syn.: Chaetolepas segmentata Studer 1889 — Ibla pygmæa, Broch, p. 262.
During a visit in Berlin in May this year I had the opportunity
of examining the only two existing specimens of the enigmatic
Chaetolepas segmentata described by Studer from the ,Gazelle"'-
expedition. To my great surprise the specimens in detail corres-
pond with the species described by me as Ibla pygmæa, in spite
of the fact that neither the drawing nor the description given by
Studer show any likeness with this animal. I have not dissected
the ,Gazellef-specimens, but in external characters no difference
whatever could be observed, and the identity is moreover strength-
ened by the geographical dates, Studer's specimens being also
dredged near the Auckland Island (35? 21” S., 1759 40” E.); the
depth here, 1092,5 metres, far surpasses that of the ,,Endeavour"
locality (comp. p. 262), although the two finding places are situ-
ated near each other.
Å study of microtome sections of Ibla segmentata gives as result
that the males mentioned on pag. 264 are no males at all, the
specimens containing no spermatozoa. The small specimens figured
in Fig. 24 are in fact the pupa of Ibla segmentata; the larvae thus
remain in the mantle cavity of the mother animal till they have
reached the pupa stage. The large eyes seem to be rather char-
acteristic of the pupa as against other species hitherto known.
I wish to tend my hearty thanks to the Director of the Zoo-
logical Museum in Berlin Professor Dr. W. Kiikenthal and to his
assistant Dr. Schellenberg who helped me so kindly during my
investigations in Berlin.
p. t. Copenhagen, 27. V. 22.
H;. BrROCH.
VI
14
36
70
71
137
170
176
184
185
1203
234
235
237
257
270
275
290
305
348
354
358
501
502
513
515
519
523
537
538
548
549
Sker;
oo mm GR Orm 0 UT SA UT GK 00 00
—O0O00 de
CEN
FN ET ON NEON KOR
—
Trykfejl. Errata.
fra oven til venstre og Lin. 3 fra oven til højre ,,adaptionsf
— — ,n" læs ,inf [læs ,,adaptations”
— — over ,Halocynthia carnleyensis" læs ,,Pyuridæf
— neden ,,Aucland" læs ,,Aucklandf
— — ,resemblentf læs ,ressemblentf
— — ,Naturk.f læs ,,Natuurk.f
— — K,aåambularcalf læs ,,ambulacralf
—— mm nf læs må
i andet Afsnit ,,succededf læs ,,succeededf"
under Fig. 19 ,,bucalf læs ,,buccalf
fra oven ,,1919f læs ,,1909f
— neden ,,Hyaton Maruf læs ,,Hyatori Maruf
— — K,Hyaton Maruf læs ,,Hyatori Maruf
— oven og 16 fra neden ,,Hyaton Maruf læs ,,Hyatori Maruf
— neden , spring" læs- ,,spinyf
— — K,Hyaton Maruf læs ,,Hyatori Maruf
— — K»Hyaton Maruf læs ,,Hyatori Maru"
— — K»,Hyaton Maruf læs ,,Hyatori Maruf
— oven ,aåa sound base" læs ,,n0o sound base"
— neden i andet Afsnit ,,biographicalf læs ,,biogeographicalf
— — »pkpåg. 2—" læs ,,pag. 226"
345 SE læste 5 SE
— — K,Masse" læs ,,Maassef
En Okfansiæs oktan
SEE bairdus læse bande
—" oven ,bairduf Tæs ”bairdiis
— neden ,,0bnehmenf læs ,,abnehmenf
FE Oven aug læes an zu
— — ,Kanalsystemsf læs ,,Kanalsystemf
neden sunde fest unds
— oven ,beflndlich" læs ,befindlichf
— — K»mit spåterf skal udgaa
ds72
BNF: VSM
Autor. del,
FA
KUE Flad
Dansk Repr. An
md au
ik of
UA AG Re
f
184 vs
i
'
£
bt
(
rn
y al
i
CJ
Må
FE ru
y
&
E
El
u
=
£
5
<=
Wu
ES ; i. re” Br
Dansk Repr. Anst.
i
|
DINSEEVIMSBd: 738
Autår del,
Pl. Ul
ord É. FS! Pi.
SERENE, SE gx ONS 78
SSB RENERD ANER
"orkæg
sne Eg
Dansk Repr. Anst.
BEN?E-V; MBD: 73. PL. IV.
J. LIEBERKIND DEL.
( ” PA
i i»
> å N
Le
BY
e
.
É«
N
LG
øn
”
rr UD
fu
hal
e
D
m
=
S
"im
z
a
ichhausen del,
Erica v., Bri
Dansk Repr. Anst.
g
ke
ao
=
5
ed
3
z
D.N, F.V, M, Bd, 73,
AAN AMNAMamav
sas VU
pp ASE år 5
jø”
"242
Th. Mørtensen del.
AU
Ed: 73:
F.V.M
D.N.
(an
=—
Se Ene d«
En
Ba Hr 2 (LNG
pg" gy
FEET ES PEPE STEEN
Th. Mørtensen del.
[.
("i
at
31 her
LELSEN FU SAs
Bys
by
Hk
[RENNES
HSG
Kn
(3
Mænd ie
HE
Bare lig
Meryl
' SÅN
h| "| LOTS
LUR OGS
(0
SVOR
HPA
SERADEN
(SETT
HEN
KMS UR SN ANKE DAG
DLT OEM
i KU HON U
Ari tr nn
LÆRT 7
KRUT
Fa
HSA,
FHV VLR
OVA,
SGH
sær
ert
ta
ik ber
Bind
f
i
i
030 i
AR TAREHES
NY lig JN
rent hl
H
HLN
AM 12:
jp
W
MJ TRE
NNU
J |
BAK
rod
i
MW 143 Fede
ABEN finn y
AR (|
AKER
br
AV NREN NEN
DSA [OK
Cy
Ka
[E"
ENN
tet
HLN
|
i i
Al
in
N Å
i
br At "
É AE
by Es eg
FADER AURORA RRHR
MO)
Ø Wkd
Hal n
NEN
MENE
HAUNK
at
LN
Nis
4